MH Specs

MILLHAVEN INSTITUTION MAXIMUM SECURITY CELL UNIT
Project No. Date: Issued: R45116.001 June 10, 2011 for Bid
VOLUME 1 of 3
Bid Set No.
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001
SPECIFICATION TITLE SHEET
Section 00 00 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
Project Title
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Bath, Ontario Issued for Bid
Project Number
R.45116.001
Project Date
2011-06-10
END
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit
List of Contents
Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001
Section 00 01 11 Page 1 2011-06-10
Section
Title
Pages
Division 00 - Procurement and Contracting Requirements 00 00 00 SPECIFICATION TITLE SHEET LIST OF DRAWINGS 00 01 15
1 5
Division 01 - General Requirements 01 11 00 SUMMARY OF WORK 01 14 00 WORK RESTRICTIONS PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY 01 29 83 SERVICES PROJECT MEETINGS 01 31 19 01 32 16.07 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULE - BAR (GANTT) CHART 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR HALOCARBONS 01 35 15 HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 01 35 29.06 HEALTH AND SAFETY FOR CONTAMINATED SITES 01 35 29.14 FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOFING 01 35 36 ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES 01 35 43 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER 01 35 55 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER 01 35 56 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 01 41 00 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS 01 42 13 QUALITY CONTROL 01 45 00 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01 51 00 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES 01 52 00 TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES 01 56 00 COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 61 00 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION 01 71 00 EXECUTION 01 73 00 CLEANING 01 74 11 CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND 01 74 20 DISPOSAL CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 78 00 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 01 79 00 COMMISSIONING - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01 91 00 PROJECT COMMISSIONING 01 91 20
3 3 2 3 4 7 18 7 12 5 6 9 14 3 11 5 4 6 3 7 3 3 4 2 9 3 5 9
Division 02 - Existing Conditions 02 41 23 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Division 03 - Concrete 03 10 00 CONCRETE FORMING AND ACCESSORIES 03 20 00 CONCRETE REINFORCING CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 30 00 PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE 03 45 00
6 6 23 10
Division 04 - Masonry 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY
11
List of Contents

Division 05 - Metals 05 12 23 STRUCTURAL STEEL FOR BUILDINGS STEEL JOIST FRAMING 05 21 00 STEEL DECKING 05 31 00 05 41 00 LOAD BEARING STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING METAL FABRICATIONS 05 50 01 METAL STAIRS 05 51 29
Section 00 01 11 Page 2 2011-06-10
7 7 5 5 16 6
Division 06 - Wood, Plastics, and Composites CARPENTRY 06 10 12 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 01
3 10
Division 07 - Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 20 00 INSULATION 07 21 29.03 SPRAYED INSULATION - POLYURETHANE FOAM MODIFIED BITUMEN (SBS) AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER 07 25 00 UNDER SLAB VAPOUR RETARDERS 07 26 50 PREFORMED STEEL SIDING 07 46 19 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 52 00 SHEET METAL ROOFING 07 61 00 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 62 00 ROOF ANCHORS AND SAFETY RESTRAINTS 07 72 69 APPLIED FIREPROOFING 07 81 00 FIRE STOPPING 07 84 00 JOINT SEALING 07 90 00
4 5 4 3 6 13 10 5 6 6 6 9
Division 08 - Openings 08 11 13 STEEL HOLLOW METAL DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS 08 51 13 ALUMINUM WINDOWS SPECIAL FUNCTION HARDWARE 08 70 05 FINISH HARDWARE - GENERAL 08 71 11 GLAZING 08 80 00 LOUVRES AND VENTS 08 90 00
4 17 5 17 9 4
Division 09 - Finishes 09 21 16 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09 51 13 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS RESILIENT FLOORING 09 65 00 ACOUSTIC TREATMENT 09 80 00 PAINTING 09 91 00 SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING 09 96 00 INTUMESCENT PAINTING 09 96 46
16 8 8 4 17 9 5
Division 10 - Specialties 10 28 00 MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 10
5 10
Division 11 - Equipment 11 19 20 DETENTION HARDWARE - SECURITY HARDWARE GROUPS - RETHERM UNIT ENCLOSURE, TYPICAL HARDWARE PACKAGE DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES 11 19 30
51 4 1 29
List of Contents

Section 00 01 11 Page 3 2011-06-10
11 11 11 11
19 19 19 19
40 50 60 70
DETENTION GRILLE DOORS AND BARRIERS DETENTION CHAIN LINK GATES DETENTION EXTERIOR WINDOWS STEEL UNIT MASONRY
10 6 13 11
Division 13 - Special Construction 13 26 01 PREFABRICATED SECURITY COMPONENTS 9
Division 21 - Fire Suppression 21 05 01 COMMON WORK RESULTS - MECHANICAL 6 21 05 02 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 16 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION - MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS 4 21 05 03 ACCESS DOORS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 2 21 05 04 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION 5 21 05 05 STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY 7 21 12 01 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS 8 21 13 13 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 3 21 21 00
Division 22 - Plumbing 22 05 00 GENERAL WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 22 07 00 PIPING - PIPING INSULATION 22 10 10 PLUMBING PUMPS 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING CAST IRON AND 22 13 17 COPPER DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS 22 30 05 COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 42 00 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES AND ACCESSORIES 22 42 01 COMMERCIAL WASHROOM FIXTURES 22 42 03 COMMERCIAL SHOWERS AND BATHTUBS 22 42 20 DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS 22 47 00
5 8 4 7 3 3 5 10 8 4 5
Division 23 - Heating, Ventilating and Air-Conditioning (HVAC) 23 03 01 USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS DURING CONSTRUCTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS - MECHANICAL 23 05 02 INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK 23 05 13 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT 23 05 19.01 THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE GAUGES - PIPING SYSTEMS VALVES - BRONZE 23 05 23.01 VALVES - CAST IRON 23 05 23.02 BUTTERFLY VALVES 23 05 23.05 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 29 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 05 53.01 MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 05 94 PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING 23 07 13 23 07 19 THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING 23 08 02 CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS 23 11 23 FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING 23 21 13.01 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: COPPER
1 7 5 4 3 5 4 4 7 5 7 6 3 6 6 3 3 5
List of Contents

23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23
Section 00 01 11 Page 4 2011-06-10 5 5 5 7 3 2 4 6 4 2 2 4 3 3 5 2 3 3 4 3 6 3 10 7 5 3
21 21 21 21 23 25 25 31 33 33 33 33 33 33 34 36 37 37 41 51 52 72 73 81 83 84
13.02 14 23 25 00 00 13 13.01 00 14 15 16 46 53 00 00 13 20 00 00 00 00 11 23 00 13
HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: STEEL HYDRONIC SPECIALTIES HYDRONIC PUMPS HVAC - FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTIONS COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS HVAC START-UP OF HYDRONIC SYSTEMS METAL DUCTS - LOW PRESSURE TO 500 PA AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES DAMPERS - BALANCING DAMPERS - OPERATING DAMPERS - FIRE AND SMOKE FLEXIBLE DUCTS ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING HVAC FANS AIR TERMINAL UNITS DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES LOUVRES, INTAKES AND VENTS PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS HEATING BOILERS AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT AIR HANDLING UNITS - PACKAGED COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING RADIANT HEATING UNITS HUMIDIFIERS
Division 25 - Integrated Automation 25 01 11 EMCS - START-UP, VERIFICATION AND COMMISSIONING 25 01 12 EMCS - TRAINING EMCS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 25 05 01 EMCS - SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS 25 05 02 EMCS - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 25 05 03 EMCS - IDENTIFICATION 25 05 54 EMCS - WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE 25 08 20 EMCS - EQUIPMENT/PRODUCTS 25 10 00 EMCS - LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN) 25 10 01 EMCS - FIELD CONTROL DEVICE 25 30 02 EMCS - CONTROL SEQUENCES 25 90 01
6 3 7 3 4 3 4 21 3 10 13
Division 26 - Electrical 26 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS - FOR ELECTRICAL WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0-1000 V 26 05 20 WIRES AND CABLES (0-1000 V) 26 05 21 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS 26 05 22 GROUNDING - SECONDARY 26 05 28 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 29 SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS 26 05 31 OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS 26 05 32 CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS 26 05 34 CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 05 36
11 2 4 2 3 2 2 3 5 2
List of Contents
Section 00 01 11 Page 5 2011-06-10
26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26
05 05 05 09 09 12 24 24 24 27 28 28 28 29 29 29 33 43 50 50 53
43.01 80 81 23.01 24 16.01 05 16.01 19 26 13.01 16.02 23 01 23 10 53 13 00 01 00
INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND IN DUCTS FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS MOTORS: 0.746 TO 149 KW METERING AND SWITCHBOARD INSTRUMENTS LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT - LOW VOLTAGE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY SPRINKLER PROOF EQUIPMENT PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES FOR ELECTRICAL WIRING DEVICES FUSES - LOW VOLTAGE MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS DISCONNECT SWITCHES - FUSED AND NON-FUSED CONTACTORS ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM STATIC TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS LIGHTING LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE EXIT LIGHTS
4 2 6 2 9 3 1 4 6 4 2 2 2 2 9 5 19 7 7 4 2
Division 27 - Communications 27 00 00 COMMUNICATION SERVICES 4 GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS 2 27 05 26 27 05 28 PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 2 STRUCTURED CABLING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS 7 27 10 05 27 11 20 TERMINALS AND CONNECTORS FOR COMMUNICATIONS CONDUCTORS - ENTRANCE 3 2 27 13 13 FIBER OPTIC CABLE 27 41 16 TELEVISION SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM S 2 27 51 23 INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS 15
Division 28 - Electronic Safety and Security 28 13 27 SECURITY DOOR SUPERVISION 28 13 29 EMERGENCY INMATE CELL CALL 28 16 02 PORTABLE PERSONAL ALARM SYSTEM 28 23 00 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM 28 31 00
26 18 21 20 20
Division 31 - Earthwork 31 05 10 CORRECTED MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY FOR FILL 31 05 17 AGGREGATE MATERIALS SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING 31 14 13 ROUGH GRADING 31 22 13 EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING 31 23 33.01 31 32 21 GEOTEXTILES
2 4 3 3 13 2
List of Contents
Section 00 01 11 Page 6 2011-06-10
Division 32 - Exterior Improvements 32 11 20 GRANULAR BASE 32 11 24 GRANULAR SUB-BASE ASPHALT TACK COATS 32 12 15 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE PAVING 32 12 17 CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES 32 31 13 TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING 32 91 19.13 HYDRAULIC SEEDING 32 92 19.16
2 2 2 4 9 5 7
Division 33 - Utilities 33 05 14 MAINTENANCE HOLES AND CATCH BASINS 33 11 18 WATER MAINS 33 31 13 PUBLIC SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING 33 44 01 STORM SEWERS CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS AND MAINTENANCE 33 65 73
HOLES
4 6 10 5 8
Appendices Geotechnical Investigation prepared by Inspec Sol Inc (May 4, 2011) Geotechnical Investigation - Environmental Soil Analysis prepared by Inspec Sol (May 4, 2011) CSC References - Electronic Engineering Specification: Conduit, Space and Power Requirements for Security Systems for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions - Electronics Engineering Specification: Limited Call Intercom System for Use In Federal Correctional Institutions - Electronics Engineering Specification: Inmate Cell Call System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions - Electronics Engineering Specification: Personal Portable Alarm Systems for Federal Correctional Institutions - Electronics Engineering Specification: Fixed Point Security Alarm for Federal Correctional Institutions - Electronics Engineering Specification: Portable Alarm Location Systems for Federal Correctional Institutions - Electronics Engineering Specification: Door/Barrier/Gate Control System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions - Electronics Engineering Standards: Fixed/Zoom Lens Closed Circuit Television - Electronics Engineering Standards: High Security Enclosure Closed Circuit Television - Electronics Engineering Standards: Fixed Network Colour Closed Circuit Television Camera - Electronics Engineering Standards: Indoor Network Colour Dome Camera (With Pan/Tilt/Zoom) Closed Circuit Television - Electronics Engineering Standards: LCD Colour Computer Monitor Closed Circuit Television - Electronics Engineering Standards: Network Video User Station Closed Circuit Television - Electronics Engineering Standards: Network Video Recorder Closed Circuit Television
46 14
32 17 19 16 16 14 15 3 4 6 6 5 7 6
List of Contents
Section 00 01 11 Page 7 2011-06-10
- Electronics Engineering Standards: NTSC-IP Video Converter Closed Circuit Television - Electronics Engineering Standards: IP-NTSC Video Converter Closed Circuit Television - Electronics Engineering Standards: Video Display Unit Electronic Systems - Electronics Engineering Statement of Work: Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems - Electronics Engineering Statement of Work: Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems
6 5 11 29 33
END
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Section 00 01 15 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - LIST OF DRAWINGS
1.1
ARCHITECTURE
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
A0 - Index Sheet A1.2 - Site Plan A1.3 - Site Grade Plan and Details A1.4 - Site Details A2.0 - Preliminary Building Code Review A2.1 - Main Floor Fire Separation Plan and Perimeter Drainage Layout A2.2 - Gallery Floor Fire Separation Plan A2.3 - Main Floor Plan A2.4 - Gallery Floor Plan A2.5 - Main Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan A2.6 - Gallery Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan A2.7 - Roof Plan A2.8 - Main Floor Furniture Plan, Millwork Plan A2.9 - Main Floor Finishes Plan A2.10 - Gallery Floor Finishes Plan A2.11 - Partial Main Floor Plan, Open Staff Station Floor Details A2.12 - Typical Plans and Elevations (Inmate Cell) A2.13 - Washroom and Shower Plans and Elevations A2.14 - Washroom and Shower Plans and Elevations A2.15 - Plan Details A3.1 - Exterior Elevations
.7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13
.14 .15 .16
.17
.18
.19
.20 .21
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Section 00 01 15 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.1 ARCHITECTURE (Cont'd)
.22
A3.2 - Interior Elevations, Telephone Screen, Dining Area Sink/Counter A4.1 - Building Sections, Gallery Sections A4.2 - Wall Sections, Parapet Details A4.3 - Stair #1 Plans, Sections and Details, Unit Control Stair Details A4.4 - Stair #2 Plans, Sections and Details, Gallery Stair Details A4.5 - Stair #3, 4, 5 and 6 Plans, Sections and Details A4.6 - Stair #7 and Penthouse Plans, Sections and Details, Typical Exterior Stair Plan, Section and Details A5.1 - Window Details Type 1, 1A and 2 A5.2 - Window Details Type 3 and 4 A5.3 - Door Schedule
.23 .24 .25
.26
.27
.28
.29 .30 .31
.32 .33 .34 .35
A5.4 - Door Schedule A5.5 - Door and Frame Types A5.6 - Door and Frame Types A5.7 - Door Details, Deal Tray Details, Gunport Details A5.8 - Door, Glazing and Frame Details A5.9 - Door, Glazing and Frame Details A5.10 - Door, Glazing and Frame Details A5.11 - Gallery Observation Ports; Door, Frame and Grille Details A5.12 - Door/Frame Details - 9700 Series Pneumatic Lock - 9400 Series Pneumatic Lock A6.1 - Finish Schedule A6.2 - Finish Schedule
.36 .37 .38 .39
.40
.41 .42
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Section 00 01 15 Page 3 2011-06-10
.43 (Cont'd) .44
A7.1 - Contractor Supplied Contractor Installed Furniture A7.2 - Contractor Supplied Contractor Installed Millwork A7.3 - Contractor Supplied Contractor Installed Millwork A7.4 - Contractor Supplied Contractor Installed Unit Control Millwork, Appliance Security Details A7.5 - Retherm Unit Enclosure Details
.45
.46
.47
1.2
STRUCTURAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
S2.1 - Foundation Plan S2.2 - Main Floor Plan S2.3 - Gallery Floor Plan S2.4 - Roof Framing Plan S3.1 - Plan of Cell Block Area S3.2 - Plan of Unit Control Area; Partial Gallery Floor Plan; Partial Roof Plan S7.1 - Sections & Details S7.2 - Sections & Details S7.3 - Sections & Details
.7 .8 .9
1.3
CIVIL
.1 .2
C1.1 - Site Grading Plan C1.2 - Site Servicing Plan
1.4
MECHANICAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
M2.1 - Plumbing - Main Floor Plan M2.2 - Plumbing - Gallery Floor Plan M2.3 - Heating - Main Floor Plan M2.4 - Heating - Gallery Floor Plan
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Section 00 01 15 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.4 MECHANICAL (Cont'd)
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11
M2.5 - Ventilation - Main Floor Plan M2.6 - Ventilation - Gallery Floor Plan M2.7 - Fire Protection - Main Floor M2.8 - Fire Protection - Gallery Floor M3.1 - Details I M3.2 - Details II M8.1 - Schedules
1.5
ELECTRICAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
E0.1 - Site Plan - Electrical E0.2 - Site Plan - Electrical Details E1.1 - Main Floor Plan - Lighting E1.2 - Main Floor Plan - Power, Voice and Data E1.3 - Main Floor Plan - Systems, Raceways, BSCS & Cell Call, CCTV & PPA, Intercom/Paging, Power, Voice and Data E1.4 - Main Floor Plan - Fire Alarm, Audio/Visual E2.1 - Second Floor Plan - Lighting E2.2 - Second Floor Plan - Power, Voice and Data E2.3 - Second Floor Plan - System Raceways E2.4 - Second Floor Plan - Fire Alarm, Audio/Visual E3.1 - Building MHU - Electrical Distribution E7.1 - Electrical Single Line Diagram and Details
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9 .10
.11 .12
LIST OF DRAWINGS
Section 00 01 15 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.6 BUILDING SECURITY & COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
.1 .2 .3
SE1.1 - Main Floor Plan Security Layout SE1.2 - Gallery Floor Plan Security Layout SE2.1 - Riser and Details
END
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01 11 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Title and description of Work. Contract Method. Work sequence. Contractor use of premises. Partial Owner occupancy.
1.2
PRECEDENCE
.1
For Federal Government projects, Division 01 Sections take precedence over technical specification sections in other Divisions of this Project Manual.
1.3 RELATED SECTIONS
.1
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
.1
Work of this Contract comprises the construction of a New 96 Bed Maximum Security Living Unit in the Millhaven Institution, located in Kingston, Ontario.
1.5
CONTRACT METHOD .1
Construct Work under a single, stipulated price contract.
1.6
COST BREAKDOWN
.1
Within 48 hours of notification of acceptance of bid furnish a cost breakdown by Section aggregating contract price. Within 48 hours of acceptance of bid submit a list of subcontractors.
.2
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01 11 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.7
WORK SEQUENCE
.1
Construct Work in stages to accommodate Owner's continued intermittent use of premises during construction. Coordinate Progress Schedule and coordinate with Owner Occupancy during construction.
.2
1.8 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES
.1
Contractor has use of site until Substantial Performance. Coordinate use of premises under direction of Departmental Representative. Obtain and pay for use of additional storage or work areas needed for operations under this Contract. Site area for Contractor's use: .1 Provide security fencing (speed fencing, etc.). All vehicles to be removed from construction site at the end of each day. Vehicles are not to be left unattended on the construction site. If equipment is left on the construction site, the equipment must be decommissioned prior to the end of each working day.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.9 PARTIAL OWNER OCCUPANCY
.1
Schedule and substantially complete designated portions of Work for Owner's occupancy prior to Certificate of Substantial Performance of entire Work.
.2
Owner will occupy designated areas for purpose of installation of equipment. Execute Partial Certificate of Substantial Performance for each designated portion of Work prior to Owner occupancy. Contractor shall allow: .1 Access for Owner personnel. .2 Use of parking facilities. .3 Operation of HVAC and electrical systems.
.3
SUMMARY OF WORK
Section 01 11 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Section 01 14 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Connecting to existing services. Special scheduling requirements.
.1
Section 01 32 16.07 - Project Time Management, Planning, Monitoring and Control System - Bar (GANTT) Chart Method. Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.
.2
1.3 ACCESS AND EGRESS
.1
Design, construct and maintain temporary "access to" and "egress from" work areas, including stairs, runways, ramps or ladders and scaffolding, independent of finished surfaces and in accordance with relevant municipal, provincial and other regulations.
1.4 USE OF SITE AND FACILITIES
.1
Execute work with least possible interference or disturbance to normal use of premises. Make arrangements with Departmental Representative to facilitate work as stated. Maintain existing services to building and provide for personnel and vehicle access. Departmental Representative will assign sanitary facilities for use by Contractor's personnel. Keep facilities clean.
.2
.3
1.5 EXISTING SERVICES
.1
Notify, Departmental Representative and utility companies of intended interruption of services and obtain required permission. Where Work involves breaking into or connecting to existing services, give Departmental Representative 48 hours of notice for necessary interruption of mechanical or electrical service throughout course of work. Keep duration of interruptions minimum. Carry
.2
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Section 01 14 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5 EXISTING SERVICES (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) out interruptions after normal working hours of occupants, preferably on weekends. Provide for personnel and vehicular traffic. Construct barriers in accordance with Section 01 56 00.
.3 .4
1.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Unless otherwise indicated by the Departmental Representative, carry out noise generating Work Monday to Friday from 07:00 to 17:00 hours and on Saturdays, Sundays, and statutory holidays. Submit schedule in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07 - Construction Progress Schedule Bar (GANTT) Chart. Ensure Contractor's personnel employed on site become familiar with and obey regulations including safety, fire, traffic and security regulations. Keep within limits of work and avenues of ingress and egress. Deliver materials during regular work hours: Normal work hours are 07:00 to 17:00, 7 days per week. Hours outside of this to be by agreement with the Institution. Existing security fencing and parameters: .1 A full construction security fence with cameras, lights and fence detection has already been constructed and is in place around all the medium and maximum security living unit construction areas to provide the same level of delay as the perimeter fence. The resulting secure construction compound is considered outside of the institution perimeter but is subject to all the rules of the penitentiary reserve. .2 The fence detection system on this fence will have the capacity to remain on 24hrs even when there are no workers on site.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
WORK RESTRICTIONS
Section 01 14 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.7 SECURITY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Refer of Sections 01 35 55 and 01 35 56 for security requirements inside and outisde the perimeter of the facility.
1.8 BUILDING SMOKING ENVIRONMENT
.1 .2
Comply with smoking restrictions. Designated smoking area for construction staff without line of site from exterior. .1 Smoking area must not be in view of inmates. .2 Smoking paraphenalia must not be accessible to inmates. .3 No smoking waste to be left out of lock up after hours. No smoking on construction site, within site of detention centre.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
Section 01 29 83 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Inspecting and testing by inspecting firms or testing laboratories designated by Departmental Representative.
1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE
.1
Particular requirements for inspection and testing to be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative are specified under various sections.
1.3 APPOINTMENT AND PAYMENT
.1
Departmental Representative will appoint and pay for services of testing laboratory except follows: .1 Inspection and testing required by laws, ordinances, rules, regulations or orders of public authorities. .2 Inspection and testing performed exclusively for Contractor's convenience. .3 Testing, adjustment and balancing of conveying systems, mechanical and electrical equipment and systems. .4 Mill tests and certificates of compliance. .5 Tests specified to be carried out by Contractor under the supervision of Departmental Representative. .6 Additional tests specified in the following paragraph. Where tests or inspections by designated testing laboratory reveal Work not in accordance with contract requirements, pay costs for additional tests or inspections as required by Departmental Representative to verify acceptability of corrected work.
.2
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
.1
Provide labour, equipment and facilities to: .1 Provide access to Work to be inspected and tested. .2 Facilitate inspections and tests. .3 Make good Work disturbed by inspection and test.
PAYMENT PROCEDURES: TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES
Section 01 29 83 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .4 Provide storage on site for laboratory's exclusive use to store equipment and cure test samples. Notify the Departmental Representative sufficiently in advance of operations to allow for assignment of laboratory personnel and scheduling of test. Where materials are specified to be tested, deliver representative samples in required quantity to testing laboratory. Pay costs for uncovering and making good Work that is covered before required inspection or testing is completed and approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01 31 19 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ADMINISTRATIVE
.1
Schedule and administer project meetings throughout the progress of the work at the call of Departmental Representative. Prepare agenda for meetings. Distribute written notice of each meeting four days in advance of meeting date to the Departmental Representative. Provide physical space and make arrangements for meetings. Preside at meetings. Record the meeting minutes. Include significant proceedings and decisions. Identify actions by parties. Reproduce and distribute copies of minutes within three days after meetings and transmit to meeting participants and, affected parties not in attendance Departmental Representative. Representative of Contractor, Subcontractor and suppliers attending meetings will be qualified and authorized to act on behalf of party each represents.
.2 .3
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION .1 MEETING
Within 15 days after award of Contract, request a meeting of parties in contract to discuss and resolve administrative procedures and responsibilities. Departmental Representative, Contractor, major Subcontractors, field inspectors and supervisors will be in attendance. Establish time and location of meeting and notify parties concerned minimum 5 days before meeting. Incorporate mutually agreed variations to Contract Documents into Agreement, prior to signing.
.2
.3
.4
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01 31 19 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.2 PRECONSTRUCTION .5 MEETING (Cont'd)
Agenda to include: .1 Appointment of official representative of participants in the Work. .2 Schedule of Work: in accordance with Section 01 32 16. .3 Schedule of submission of shop drawings, samples, colour chips. Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .4 Requirements for temporary facilities, site sign, offices, storage sheds, utilities, fences in accordance with Section 01 52 00. .5 Delivery schedule of specified equipment in accordance with Section 01 32 16.07. .6 Site security in accordance with Section 01 56 00. .7 Proposed changes, change orders, procedures, approvals required, mark-up percentages permitted, time extensions, overtime, administrative requirements. .8 Owner provided products. .9 Record drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .10 Maintenance manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .11 Take-over procedures, acceptance, warranties in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .12 Monthly progress claims, administrative procedures, photographs, hold backs. .13 Appointment of inspection and testing agencies or firms. .14 Insurances, transcript of policies.
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS
.1
During course of Work and two (2) weeks prior to project completion, schedule progress meetings bi-weekly. Contractor, major Subcontractors involved in Work and Departmental Representative are to be in attendance. Notify parties minimum seven (7) days prior to meetings. Record minutes of meetings and circulate to attending parties and affected parties not in attendance within 5 days after meeting.
.2
.3
.4
PROJECT MEETINGS
Section 01 31 19 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.3 PROGRESS MEETINGS (Cont'd)
.5
Agenda to include the following: .1 Review, approval of minutes of previous meeting. .2 Review of Work progress since previous meeting. .3 Field observations, problems, conflicts. .4 Problems which impede construction schedule. .5 Review of off-site fabrication delivery schedules. .6 Corrective measures and procedures to regain projected schedule. .7 Revision to construction schedule. .8 Progress schedule, during succeeding work period. .9 Review submittal schedules: expedite as required. .10 Maintenance of quality standards. .11 Review proposed changes for affect on construction schedule and on completion date. .12 Other business.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
96 Bed Maximum LivingUnit Millhaven Institution CHART Project No. R45116.001
CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS Section 01 32 16.07 SCHEDULE-BAR(GANTT) Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
.1
Activity: element of Work performed during course of Project. Activity normally has expected duration, and expected cost and expected resource requirements. Activities can be subdivided into tasks. Bar Chart (GANTT Chart): graphic display of schedule-related information. In typical bar chart, activities or other Project elements are listed down left side of chart, dates are shown across top, and activity durations are shown as date-placed horizontal bars. Generally Bar Chart should be derived from commercially available computerized project management system. Baseline: original approved plan (for project, work package, or activity), plus or minus approved scope changes. Construction Work Week: Monday to Friday, inclusive, will provide five day work week and define schedule calendar working days as part of Bar (GANTT) Chart submission. Duration: number of work periods (not including holidays or other nonworking periods) required to complete activity or other project element. Usually expressed as workdays or workweeks. Master Plan: summary-level schedule that identifies major activities and key milestones. Milestone: significant event in project, usually completion of major deliverable. Project Schedule: planned dates for performing activities and the planned dates for meeting milestones. Dynamic, detailed record of tasks or activities that must be accomplished to satisfy Project objectives. Monitoring and control process involves using Project Schedule in executing and controlling activities and is used as basis for decision making throughout project life cycle.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
1.1 DEFINITIONS (Cont'd)
.9
Project Planning, Monitoring and Control System: overall system operated by Departmental Representative to enable monitoring of project work in relation to established milestones.
1.2
REQUIREMENTS
.1
Ensure Master Plan and Detail Schedules are practical and remain within specified Contract duration. Plan to complete Work in accordance with prescribed milestones and time frame. Limit activity durations to maximum of approximately 10 working days, to allow for progress reporting. Ensure that it is understood that Award of Contract or time of beginning, rate of progress, Certificate of Substantial Performance and Certificate of Completion as defined times of completion are of essence of this contract.
.2
.3
.4
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit to Departmental Representative within 10 working days of Award of Contract Bar (GANTT) Chart as Master Plan for planning, monitoring and reporting of project progress. Submit Project Schedule to Departmental Representative within 5 working days of receipt of acceptance of Master Plan.
.2
.3
1.4
MASTER PLAN
.1
Structure schedule to allow orderly planning, organizing and execution of Work as Bar Chart (GANTT). Departmental Representative will review and return revised schedules within 5 working days. Revise impractical schedule and resubmit within 5 working days.
.2
.3
1.4 MASTER PLAN (Cont'd)
.4
Accepted revised schedule will become Master Plan and be used as baseline for updates.
1.5 PROJECT SCHEDULE
.1
Develop detailed Project Schedule derived from Master Plan. Ensure detailed Project Schedule includes as minimum milestone and activity types as follows: .1 Award. .2 Shop Drawings, Samples. .3 Permits. .4 Mobilization. .5 Excavation. .6 Backfill. .7 Building footings. .8 Slab on grade. .9 Structural Steel. .10 Siding and Roofing. .11 Interior Architecture (Walls, Floors and Ceiling). .12 Plumbing. .13 Lighting. .14 Electrical. .15 Piping. .16 Controls. .17 Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning. .18 Millwork. .19 Fire Systems. .20 Testing and Commissioning.
.2
1.6 PROJECT SCHEDULE REPORTING
.1
Update Project Schedule on weekly basis reflecting activity changes and completions, as well as activities in progress. Include as part of Project Schedule, narrative report identifying Work status to date, comparing current progress to baseline, presenting current forecasts, defining problem areas, anticipated delays and impact with possible mitigation.
.2
1.7 PROJECT MEETINGS
.1
Discuss Project Schedule at regular site meetings, identify activities that are behind schedule and provide measures to regain slippage. Activities considered behind schedule are those with projected start or completion dates later than current approved dates shown on baseline schedule. Weather related delays with their remedial measures will be discussed and negotiated.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 33 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
ADMINISTRATIVE
.1
Submit to Departmental Representative submittals listed for review. Submit promptly and in orderly sequence to not cause delay in Work. Failure to submit in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. Do not proceed with Work affected by submittal until review is complete. Present shop drawings, product data, samples and mock-ups in SI Metric units. Where items or information is not produced in SI Metric units converted values are acceptable. Review submittals prior to submission to Departmental Representative. This review represents that necessary requirements have been determined and verified, or will be, and that each submittal has been checked and co-ordinated with requirements of Work and Contract Documents. Submittals not stamped, signed, dated and identified as to specific project will be returned without being examined and considered rejected. Notify Departmental Representative, in writing at time of submission, identifying deviations from requirements of Contract Documents stating reasons for deviations. Verify field measurements and affected adjacent Work are co-ordinated. Contractor's responsibility for errors and omissions in submission is not relieved by Departmental Representative's review of submittals. Contractor's responsibility for deviations in submission from requirements of Contract Documents is not relieved by Departmental Representative review.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Section 01 33 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.1 ADMINISTRATIVE (Cont'd)
.10
Keep one reviewed copy of each submission on site. Submit number of hard copies specified for each type and format of submittal and in also submit in electronic format as pdf files. Forward pdf files on CD or through email.
.11
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
The term "shop drawings" means drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules, performance charts, brochures and other data which are to be provided by Contractor to illustrate details of a portion of Work. Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario of Canada. Indicate materials, methods of construction and attachment or anchorage, erection diagrams, connections, explanatory notes and other information necessary for completion of Work. Where articles or equipment attach or connect to other articles or equipment, indicate that such items have been co-ordinated, regardless of Section under which adjacent items will be supplied and installed. Indicate cross references to design drawings and specifications. Allow fifteen (15) days for Departmental representative's review of each submission. Adjustments made on shop drawings by Departmental representative are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Departmental representative prior to proceeding with Work. Make changes in shop drawings as Departmental representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents. When resubmitting, notify Departmental representative writing of revisions other than those requested. Accompany submissions with transmittal letter, in duplicate, containing: .1 Date. .2 Project title and number.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 01 33 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA (Cont'd)
.7
(Cont'd) .3 Contractor's name and address. .4 Identification and quantity of each shop drawing, product data and sample. .5 Other pertinent data. Submissions shall include: .1 Date and revision dates. .2 Project title and number. .3 Name and address of: .1 Subcontractor. .2 Supplier. .3 Manufacturer. .4 Contractor's stamp, signed by Contractor's authorized representative certifying approval of submissions, verification of field measurements and compliance with Contract Documents. .5 Details of appropriate portions of Work as applicable: .1 Fabrication. .2 Layout, showing dimensions, including identified field dimensions, and clearances. .3 Setting or erection details. .4 Capacities. .5 Performance characteristics. .6 Standards. .7 Operating weight. .8 Wiring diagrams. .9 Single line and schematic diagrams. .10 Relationship to adjacent work. After Departmental representative's review, distribute copies. Submit one transparency on plastic film three hard copies and one electronic copy of shop drawings for each requirement requested in specification Sections and as Departmental representative may reasonably request. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of product data sheets or brochures for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental representative where shop drawings will not be prepared due to standardized manufacture of product. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of test reports for requirements
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
Section 01 33 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.12
(Cont'd) requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental representative . .1 Report signed by authorized official of testing laboratory that material, product or system identical to material, product or system to be provided has been tested in accord with specified requirements. .2 Testing must have been within 3 years of date of contract award for project. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of certificates for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental representative. .1 Statements printed on manufacturer's letterhead and signed by responsible officials of manufacturer of product, system or material attesting that product, system or material meets specification requirements. .2 Certificates must be dated after award of project contract complete with project name. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of manufacturers instructions for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental representative. .1 Pre-printed material describing installation of product, system or material, including special notices and Material Safety Data Sheets concerning impedances, hazards and safety precautions. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of Manufacturer's Field Reports for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental representative. Documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer's representative to confirm compliance with manufacturer's standards or instructions. Submit three hard copies and one electronic copy of Operation and Maintenance Data for requirements requested in specification Sections and as requested by Departmental representative.
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
Section 01 33 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.18
Supplement standard information to provide details applicable to project. If upon review by Departmental representative, no errors or omissions are discovered or if only minor corrections are made, transparency copies will be returned and fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. If shop drawings are rejected, noted copy will be returned and resubmission of corrected shop drawings, through same procedure indicated above, must be performed before fabrication and installation of Work may proceed. The review of shop drawings by Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC) is for sole purpose of ascertaining conformance with general concept. .1 This review shall not mean that PWGSC approves detail design inherent in shop drawings, responsibility for which shall remain with Contractor submitting same, and such review shall not relieve Contractor of responsibility for errors or omissions in shop drawings or of responsibility for meeting requirements of construction and Contract Documents. .2 Without restricting generality of foregoing, Contractor is responsible for dimensions to be confirmed and correlated at job site, for information that pertains solely to fabrication processes or to techniques of construction and installation and for co-ordination of Work of sub-trades.
.19
.20
1.3
SAMPLES
.1
Submit for review samples in duplicate as requested in respective specification Sections. Label samples with origin and intended use. Deliver samples prepaid to Departmental representative's business address. Notify Departmental representative in writing, at time of submission of deviations in samples from requirements of Contract Documents.
.2
.3
Section 01 33 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.3 SAMPLES (Cont'd)
.4
Where colour, pattern or texture is criterion, submit full range of samples. Adjustments made on samples by Departmental representative are not intended to change Contract Price. If adjustments affect value of Work, state such in writing to Departmental Representative prior to proceeding with Work. Make changes in samples which Departmental representative may require, consistent with Contract Documents. Reviewed and accepted samples will become standard of workmanship and material against which installed Work will be verified.
.5
.6
.7
1.4
MOCK-UPS
.1
Erect mock-ups in accordance with 01 45 00.
1.5 PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION
.1
Submit electronic and hard copy of colour digital photography in jpeg format, fine resolution monthly with progress statement and as directed by Departmental representative. Project identification: name and number of project and date of exposure indicated. Number of viewpoints: 8 locations. .1 Viewpoints and their location as determined by Departmental Representative. Frequency of photographic documentation: weekly and as directed by Departmental Representative. .1 Upon completion of: excavation, foundation, framing and services before concealment, of Work, and as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
1.6 FEES, PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES
.1
Provide authorities having jurisdiction with information requested. Pay fees and obtain certificates and permits required. Furnish certificates and permits.
.2
.3
Section 01 33 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.6 FEES, PERMITS AND CERTIFICATES (Cont'd)
.4
Submit acceptable certificate stating that suspended ceiling systems provide adequate support for electrical fixtures, as required by current bulletin of Electrical Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES FOR HALOCARBONS
Section 01 35 15 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 51-GP-51M-81, Polyethylene Sheet for Use in Building Construction. Transportation and Dangerous Goods Act (1999). Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment (CCME) Documentation.
.2
.3
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit, prior to start of work, plan detailing management of hazardous wastes. Submit written documentation of weekly hazardous waste inspections monthly basis. Submittals for Progress Meetings: make submittals at least 24 hours prior to scheduled progress meetings as follows: .1 Updated progress schedule detailing activities. Include review of progress with respect to previously established dates for starting and stopping various stages of Work, major problems and action taken, injury reports, equipment breakdown, and material removal. .2 Copies of air sampling results. .3 Copies of transport manifests, trip tickets, and disposal receipts for waste materials removed from work area. .4 Weekly copies of site entry and work area logbooks with information on worker and visitor access. .5 Weekly logs documenting filter changes on HEPA vacuums, and other engineering controls. .6 Weekly results of collected air sampling data, including compliance air monitoring results. .7 Other information required by Departmental Representative or relevant to agenda for upcoming progress meeting.
.2
.3
Section 01 35 15 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.2 SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)
.4
Site Layout: within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed and prior to mobilization to site, submit site layout drawings showing existing conditions and facilities, construction facilities and temporary controls provided by Contractor including following: .1 Drum sampling and staging areas. .2 Equipment and personnel decontamination areas. .3 Means of ingress, egress and temporary traffic control facilities. Refer to Section 01 56 00 for traffic control. .4 Equipment and material staging areas. .5 Demolition debris stockpile areas. .6 Exclusion Zones, Contaminant Reduction Zones, and other zones specified in Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan. .7 Grading, including contours, required to construct temporary facilities. Submit documentation verifying that hazardous materials employees have been trained, tested, and certified to safely and effectively carry out their assigned duties in accordance with Section 01 35 29.14.
.5
1.3 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Provide erosion and sediment control in accordance with applicable regulations. Comply with federal, provincial, and local anti-pollution laws, ordinances, codes, and regulations when disposing of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Work to meet or exceed minimum requirements established by federal, provincial, and local laws and regulations which are applicable. .1 Contractor: responsible for complying with amendments as they become effective. In event that compliance exceeds scope of work or conflicts with specific requirements of contract notify Departmental Representative immediately.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 15 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.4 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING
.1
Do not commence Work involving contact with potentially contaminated materials until decontamination facilities are operational and approved by Departmental Representative.
1.5 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION FACILITY
.1
Prior to commencing work involving equipment contact with potentially contaminated materials, construct equipment decontamination pad to accommodate largest piece of on-site potentially contaminated equipment. Provide, operate, and maintain suitable portable, high-pressure, low-volume decontamination wash units equipped with self-contained water storage tank and pressurizing system and capable of heating and maintaining wash waters to 80 degrees C and providing nozzle pressure of 1,035 kpa. Provide, operate, and maintain necessary equipment, pumps, and piping required to collect and contain equipment decontamination wastewater and sediment and transfer materials to approved storage facilities.
.2
.3
1.6 PAD
DRUM STAGING
.1
Provide, maintain, and operate drum staging pad as required. Construct drum staging pad of collecting leachate and polyethylene sheeting such contours over top of berm, runoff from staging pad is sump on staging pad. with sump capable rain runoff. Place that sheeting and leachate and directed solely to
.2
1.7 SOIL STOCKPILING FACILITIES
.1
Provide, maintain, and operate storage/stockpiling facilities as required. Install liner below proposed stockpile locations to prevent contact between stockpile material and ground. Equip facility with tarps capable of covering stockpiled material until Departmental Representative advises Contractor to dispose of material off site.
.2
Section 01 35 15 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.8 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
.1
Water Treatment Facility: .1 Design and Operating Criteria: design water filtering plant capable of filtering water generated from dewatering excavations and work areas to meet discharge requirements of authority having jurisdiction, capable of removing oil, suspended solids, particulates, and asbestos fibers, and filter water through 5-micron particulate filter prior to discharge. .2 Ensure that discharges from site are in compliance with applicable permit requirements and limitations. .3 Provide piping to transfer liquid/solid mixtures generated by dewatering operations which require water filtering to water filtering plant. .4 Design water filtering operations capable of receiving liquid/solid mixtures and not causing delay to dewatering operations. Piping: suitable material type, of sufficient diameter and structural thickness for purpose intended; satisfactorily tested for leaks with potable water in presence of Departmental Representative before handling wastewater. Installation: .1 Provide labour, materials, and equipment and do work required for setup and construction of water filtering plant. .2 Cut vegetation to ground level. .3 Install component systems in accordance with installation procedures and as indicated. .4 Following installation of system, implement initial operation test in accordance with procedures developed by Contractor and submitted to Departmental Representative for review. .5 Install piping in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and test for leakage using potable water prior to commencing dewatering and filtering operations. Initial Testing: performance of water filtering plant provided by Contractor will initially be determined by Departmental Representative as follows:
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 15 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.8 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.5
Operation: .1 On basis of analytical results obtained by Departmental Representative, make system modifications required for effluent to satisfy effluent criteria, or continue with normal dewatering operations as directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Operate water filtering plant by experienced, qualified personnel in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and procedures submitted by Contractor and approved by Departmental Representative. Decommissioning/Dismantling: .1 Decontaminate and remove salvageable components of water filtering plant including water filtering system, pumps, piping, and electrical equipment. .2 Dispose of non-salvageable equipment and materials at approved off-site disposal facility. Decontaminate salvageable equipment within facility area as required prior to removal from site.
.6
1.9 WASTEWATER STORAGE TANK
.1
Provide, operate, and maintain wastewater storage tanks to store wastewaters. Wastewater includes handbasin, shower, wastewaters from Personnel Hygiene/Decontamination Facility; water collected from dewatering operations; and water collected from Equipment Decontamination Facility. Store wastewaters from dewatering operations and Equipment Decontamination Facility in separate tank from wastewater from Personnel Hygiene/Decontamination Facility. If toilet facilities are provided in Personnel Hygiene/Decontamination Facility, store wastewater from these toilets with wastewater from handbasins, showers, for ultimate disposal off site. Discharges: comply with applicable discharge limitations and requirements; do not discharge wastewaters to site sewer systems that do not conform to or are in violation of such limitations or requirements; and obtain
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 01 35 15 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.9 WASTEWATER STORAGE TANK (Cont'd)
.5
Discharges:(Cont'd) Departmental Representative's approval prior to discharge of wastewater. Provide pumps and piping to convey collected wastewaters to designated wastewater storage tanks; provide wastewater storage tanks with minimum total live capacity such that effluent quality can be analyzed and approved prior to discharge to sanitary sewer system. Install wastewater storage tanks in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Support tanks on temporary aboveground foundations. Connect pumps, piping, valves, miscellaneous items, and necessary utilities as required for operation of facilities; and protect tanks, valves, pumps, piping, and miscellaneous items from freezing. Do not operate wastewater storage tanks until inspected and approved by Departmental Representative. Notify Departmental Representative 72 hours minimum in advance of when wastewater storage tank is anticipated to be full. .1 Do not discharge additional liquids to filled tank following sampling by Departmental Representative. .2 Departmental Representative will determine appropriate disposition of wastewaters based on sample analysis. Transport and dispose of wastewaters at off-site disposal facility as identified by Contractor and approved by Departmental Representative. Payment for transporting and disposing of wastewater to off-site disposal facility will be by Contractor.
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
1.10
DRUMS
.1
Storage of Liquid Waste: 200 L steel drums meeting Transportation and Dangerous Goods Act, closable lids, complete with labels for marking contents and date filled.
Section 01 35 15 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.10 DRUMS (Cont'd)
.2
Storage of Solid Waste: 200 L steel drums meeting Transportation and Dangerous Goods Act, closable lids, complete with labels for marking contents and date filled.
1.11 VEHICULAR ACCESS AND PARKING
.1
Maintenance and Use: .1 Prevent contamination of access roads. Immediately scrape up debris or material on access roads which is suspected to be contaminated as determined by Departmental Representative. Clean access roads at least once per shift. .2 Departmental Representative may collect soil samples for chemical analyses from traveling surfaces of constructed and existing access routes prior to, during, and upon completion of Work. Excavate and dispose of clean soil contaminated by Contractor's activities at no additional cost to Departmental Representative.
1.12 DUST AND PARTICULATE CONTROL
.1
Execute Work by methods to minimize raising dust from construction operations. Implement and maintain dust and particulate control measures immediately during construction and in accordance with Province of Ontario regulations. Provide positive means to prevent airborne dust from dispersing into atmosphere. Use water misting system for dust and particulate control. Use chemical means for water misting system for dust and particulate control only with Departmental Representative's prior written approval. As minimum, use appropriate covers on trucks hauling fine or dusty material. Use watertight vehicles to haul wet materials. Prevent dust from spreading to adjacent property sites. Departmental Representative will stop work at any time when Contractor's control of dusts
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 01 35 15 Page 8 2011-06-10
1.12 DUST AND PARTICULATE CONTROL (Cont'd)
.7
(Cont'd) and particulates is inadequate for wind conditions present at site, or when air quality monitoring indicates that release of fugitive dusts and particulates into atmosphere equals or exceeds specified levels. If Contractor's dust and particulate control is not sufficient for controlling dusts and particulates into atmosphere, stop work. Contractor must discuss procedures that Contractor proposes to resolve problem. Make necessary changes to operations prior to resuming excavation, handling, processing, or other work that may cause release of dusts or particulates.
.8
1.13 POLLUTION CONTROL
.1
Provide methods, means, and facilities to prevent contamination of soil, water, and atmosphere from discharge of noxious toxic substances and pollutants produced by construction operations. Be prepared to intercept, clean up, and dispose of spills or releases that may occur whether on land or water. Maintain materials and equipment required for cleanup of spills or releases readily accessible on site. Promptly report spills and releases potentially causing damage to environment to: .1 Authority having jurisdiction or interest in spill or release including conservation authority, water supply authorities, drainage authority, road authority, and fire department. .2 Owner of pollutant, if known. .3 Person having control over pollutant, if known. .4 Departmental Representative. Contact manufacturer of pollutant if known and ascertain hazards involved, precautions required, and measures used in cleanup or mitigating action. Take immediate action using available resources to contain and mitigate effects on environment and persons from spill or release.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 01 35 15 Page 9 2011-06-10
1.13 POLLUTION CONTROL (Cont'd)
.6
Provide spill response materials including, containers, adsorbent, shovels, and personal protective equipment. Make spill response materials available at all times in which hazardous materials or wastes are being handled or transported. Spill response materials: compatible with type of material being handled. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC) Control: .1 Monitor air quality for volatile organics at perimeter security as approved by Departmental Representative, every hour during contaminated materials excavation and management activities, and maintain log of air quality readings. .2 If air quality monitoring indicates that release of volatile organics in air at site boundary exceeds Level C of Personnel Protective Equipment threshold for air quality, implement corrective actions to control volatile organics. .3 If actions are not sufficient to control release of volatile organics within 1/2 hour of identification of air quality problem, suspend work resulting in excessive volatile organic emissions. Departmental Representative and Contractor to discuss additional methods that Contractor proposes to control release of volatile organics. .4 Make necessary changes at no additional cost to Departmental Representative prior to resuming Work. .5 In addition, if Departmental Representative's monitoring of ambient air at site perimeter indicates unacceptable concentrations of contaminants in air, modify operations to minimize such off-site impacts.
.7
1.14 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION
.1
Commence Work involving equipment contact with potentially contaminated material only after Equipment Decontamination Facility is operational.
.2
Decontaminate equipment after working in potentially contaminated work areas and prior to subsequent work or travel on clean areas.
Section 01 35 15 Page 10 2011-06-10
1.14 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION (Cont'd)
.3
Perform equipment decontamination on Contractor-constructed equipment decontamination pad. At minimum, perform following steps during equipment decontamination: mechanically remove packed dirt, grit, and debris by scraping and brushing without using steam or high-pressure water to reduce amount of water needed and to reduce amount of contaminated rinsate generated. Use high-pressure, low-volume, hot water or steam supplemented by detergents or solvents as appropriate and as approved by Departmental Representative. Pay particular attention to tire treads, equipment tracks, springs, joints, sprockets, and undercarriages. Scrub surfaces with long handle scrub brushes and cleaning agent. Rinse off and collect cleaning agent. Air dry equipment in Clean Zone before removing from site or travelling on clean areas. Perform assessment as directed by Departmental Representative to determine effectiveness of decontamination. Maintain inspection record on site which includes: equipment descriptions with identification numbers; time and date entering decontamination facility; time and date exiting decontamination facility; and name of inspector with comment stating that decontamination was performed and completed. Each piece of equipment will be inspected by Departmental Representative after decontamination and prior to removal from site and/or travel on clean areas. Departmental Representative will have right to require additional decontamination to be completed if deemed necessary. Take appropriate measures necessary to minimize drift of mist and spray during decontamination including provision of wind screens. Collect decontamination wastewaters and sediments which accumulate on equipment decontamination pad. Transfer wastewaters to designated wastewater storage tank or drums.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 01 35 15 Page 11 2011-06-10
1.14 EQUIPMENT DECONTAMINATION (Cont'd)
.9
Transfer sediments to soil staging area or drums. Furnish and equip personnel engaged in equipment decontamination with protective equipment including suitable disposable clothing, respiratory protection, and face shields. Have on hand sufficient pumping equipment, of adequate pumping capacity and associated machinery and piping in good working condition for ordinary emergencies, including power outage, and competent workers for operation of pumping equipment. Maintain piping and connections in good condition and leak-free.
.10
.11
1.15
WATER CONTROL
.1 .2
Maintain excavations free of water. Protect site from puddling or running water. Grade site to drain. Provide water barriers as necessary to protect site from soil erosion. Prevent surface water runoff from leaving work areas. Do not discharge decontaminated water, or surface water runoff, or groundwater which may have come in contact with potentially contaminated material, off site or to municipal sewers. Prevent precipitation from infiltrating or from directly running off stockpiled waste materials. Cover stockpiled waste materials with an impermeable liner during periods of work stoppage including at end of each working day and as directed by Departmental Representative. Direct surface waters that have not contacted potentially contaminated materials to existing surface drainage systems. Control surface drainage including ensuring that gutters are kept open, water is not directed across or over pavements or sidewalks except through approved pipes or properly constructed troughs, and runoff from
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 01 35 15 Page 12 2011-06-10
1.15 WATER CONTROL (Cont'd)
.7
(Cont'd) unstabilized areas is intercepted and diverted to suitable outlet. Dispose of water in manner not injurious to public health or safety, to property, or to any part of Work completed or under construction. Provide, operate, and maintain necessary equipment appropriately sized to keep excavations, staging pads, and other work areas free from water. Contain water from stockpiled waste materials. Transfer potentially contaminated surface waters to wastewater storage tanks separate from wastewater from Personnel Hygiene/Decontamination Facility. Have on hand sufficient pumping equipment, machinery, and tankage in good working condition for ordinary emergencies, including power outage, and competent workers for operation of pumping equipment. Contain and collect wastewaters and transfer such collected wastewaters to Contractor -supplied drums or wastewater storage tanks.
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
1.16
DEWATERING
.1
Dewater various parts of Work including, without limitation, excavations, structures, foundations, and work areas. Employ construction methods, plant procedures, and precautions that ensure Work, including excavations, are stable, free from disturbance, and dry. Dewatering Methods: includes sheeting and shoring; groundwater control systems; surface or free water control systems employing ditches, diversions, drains, pipes and/or pumps; and other measures necessary to enable Work to be carried out in dry conditions. Provide sufficient and appropriate labour, plant, and equipment necessary to keep Work free of water including standby equipment
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 15 Page 13 2011-06-10
1.16 DEWATERING (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) necessary to ensure continuous operation of dewatering system. Take precautions necessary to prevent uplift of structure or pipeline and to protect excavations from flooding and damage due to surface runoff. Test and analyze water generated from dewatering activities and treat to meet required discharge or disposal criteria.
.5
.6
1.17 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL
.1
Plan and execute construction by methods to control surface drainage from cuts and fills, from borrow and waste disposal areas, from stockpiles, staging areas, and other work areas. Prevent erosion and sedimentation. Minimize amount of bare soil exposed at one time. Stabilize disturbed soils as quickly as practical. Strip vegetation, regrade, or otherwise develop to minimize erosion. Remove accumulated sediment resulting from construction activity from adjoining surfaces, drainage systems, and water courses, and repair damage caused by soil erosion and sedimentation as directed by Departmental Representative. Provide and maintain temporary measures which may include, silt fences, hay or straw bales, ditches, geotextiles, drains, berms, terracing, riprap, temporary drainage piping, sedimentation basins, vegetative cover, dikes, and other construction required to prevent erosion and migration of silt, mud, sediment, and other debris off site or to other areas of site where damage might result, or that might otherwise be required by Laws and Regulations. Make sediment control measures available during construction. Hay or Straw Bale: wire bound or string tied; securely anchored by at least 2 stakes or rebars driven through bale 300 mm to 450 mm into ground; chinked (filled by wedging) with hay or straw to prevent water from escaping between bales; and entrenched minimum of 100 mm into ground.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 15 Page 14 2011-06-10
1.17 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL (Cont'd)
.5
Silt Fence: assembled, ready to install unit consisting of geotextile attached to driveable posts. Geotextile: uniform in texture and appearance, having no defects, flaws, or tears that would affect its physical properties; and contain sufficient ultraviolet ray inhibitor and stabilizers to provide minimum 2-year service life from outdoor exposure. Net Backing: industrial polypropylene mesh joined to geotextile at both top and bottom with double stitching of heavy-duty cord, with minimum width of 750 mm. Posts: sharpened wood, approximately 50 mm square, protruding below bottom of geotextile to allow minimum 450 mm embedment; post spacing 2.4 m maximum. Securely fasten each post to geotextile and net backing using suitable staples. Plan construction procedures to avoid damage to work or equipment encroachment onto water bodies or drainage ditch banks. In event of damage, promptly take action to mitigate effects. Restore affected bank or water body to existing condition. Installation: .1 Construct temporary erosion control items as indicated. Actual alignment and/or location of various items as directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Do not construct bale barriers and silt fence in flowing streams or in swales. .3 Check erosion and sediment control measures weekly after each rainfall; during prolonged rainfall check daily. .4 Bales and/or silt fence may be removed at beginning of work day, replace at end of work day. .5 Whenever sedimentation is caused by stripping vegetation, regrading, or other development, remove it from adjoining surfaces, drainage systems, and watercourses, and repair damage as quickly as possible. .6 Prior to or during construction, Departmental Representative may require installation or construction of improvements to prevent or correct temporary conditions on site. Improvements may include berms, mulching, sediment traps, detention and
.6
.7
.8
.9
Section 01 35 15 Page 15 2011-06-10
1.17 EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL (Cont'd)
.9
Installation:(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) retention basins, grading, planting, retaining walls, culverts, pipes, guardrails, temporary roads, and other measures appropriate to specific condition. Temporary improvements must remain in place and in operation as necessary or until otherwise directed by Departmental Representative. .7 Repair damaged bales, end runs, and undercutting beneath bales. .8 Unless Departmental Representative, remove temporary erosion and sediment control devices upon completion of Work. Spread accumulated sediments to form a suitable surface for seeding or dispose of, and shape area to permit natural drainage to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Materials once removed become property of Contractor. Construct fill and waste areas by selective placement to avoid erosive surface silts or clays. Do not disturb existing embankments or embankment protection. Periodically inspect earthwork to detect evidence of erosion and sedimentation; promptly apply corrective measures. If soil and debris from site accumulate in low areas, storm sewers, roadways, gutters, ditches, or other areas where in Departmental Representative's determination it is undesirable, remove accumulation and restore area to original condition.
.10
.11
.12
.13
1.18 PROGRESS CLEANING
.1
Maintain cleanliness of Work and surrounding site to comply with federal, provincial, and local fire and safety laws, ordinances, codes, and regulations. Co-ordinate cleaning operations with disposal operations to prevent accumulation of dust, dirt, debris, rubbish, and waste materials.
.2
Section 01 35 15 Page 16 2011-06-10
1.19 FINAL DECONTAMINATION
.1
Perform final decontamination of construction facilities, equipment, and materials which may have come in contact with potentially contaminated materials prior to removal from site. Perform decontamination as specified to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative will direct Contractor to perform additional decontamination if required.
.2
1.20 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL
.1
Remove surplus materials and temporary facilities from site. Dispose of non-contaminated waste materials, litter, debris, and rubbish off site. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on site. Do not dispose of volatile or hazardous wastes such as mineral spirits, oil, or paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. Do not discharge wastes into streams or waterways. Dispose of following materials at appropriate off-site facility identified by Contractor and approved by Departmental Representative: .1 Debris including excess construction material. .2 Non-contaminated litter and rubbish. .3 Disposable PPE worn during final cleaning. .4 Wastewater removed from wastewater storage tank. .5 Wastewater generated from final decontamination operations including wastewater storage tank cleaning. .6 Lumber from decontamination pads. Dispose of materials as directed by Departmental Representative. Wastewater sample and analysis: Departmental Representative will perform sampling and analysis of stored wastewater for disposal purposes prior to removal from site. Results
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 01 35 15 Page 17 2011-06-10
1.20 REMOVAL AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)
.8
Wastewater sample and analysis:(Cont'd) of analyses will determine appropriate methods of disposal. Upon receipt of analytical results, transfer tank contents without spills or release, as directed by Departmental Representative, to off-site disposal facility. Following completion of tank emptying, decontaminate tank interior with steam or high-pressure water wash supplemented by detergent. Dispose of tank decontamination water with tank contents. Minimize generation of hazardous waste to maximum extent practicable. Take necessary precautions to avoid mixing clean and contaminated wastes. Identify and evaluate recycling and reclamation options as alternatives to land disposal, such as: .1 Hazardous wastes recycled in manner constituting disposal; .2 Hazardous waste burned for energy recovery; .3 Lead-acid battery recycling; .4 Hazardous wastes with economically recoverable precious metals.
.9
.10
1.21
RECORD KEEPING .1
Maintain adequate records to support information provided to Departmental Representative regarding exception reports, annual reports, and biennial reports. Maintain asbestos waste shipment records for minimum of 3 years from date of shipment or longer period required by applicable law or regulation. Maintain bills of ladings for minimum of 375 days from date of shipment or longer period required by applicable law or regulation.
.2
.3
Section 01 35 15 Page 18 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
96 Bed Maximum LivingUnit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001
HEALTH AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA): Canada .1 CSA-S350-M1980(R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures. National Building Code 2005 (NBC). National Fire Code 2010 (NFC). Province of Ontario: .1 Occupational Health and Safety Act Revised Statutes of Ontario 1990, Chapter O.1 as amended, and Regulations for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91 as amended. .2 Workplace Safety and Insurance Act, 1997. .3 Municipal statutes and authorities. Fire Commissioner of Canada (FCC): .1 FC-301 Standard for Construction Operations, June 1982. .2 FC-302 Standard for Welding and Cutting, June 1982. Labour Program Fire Protection Engineering Services 4900 Yonge Street 8th Floor Willowdale, Ontario M2N 6A8 and copies may be obtained from: Human Resources and Social Development Canada Labour Program Fire Protection Engineering Services Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0J2
.2 .3 .4
.5
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan: Within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed and prior to commencement of Work. Health and Safety Plan must include: .1 Results of site specific safety hazard assessment.
.2
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Results of safety and health risk or hazard analysis for site tasks and operations found in work plan. .3 Provide a Fire Safety Plan, specific to the work location, in accordance with NBC, prior to commencement of work. The plan shall be coordinated with, and integrated into, the existing Emergency Procedures and Evacuation Plan in place at the site. Departmental Representative will provide Emergency Procedures and Evacuation Plan. Deliver two copies of the Fire Safety Plan to the Departmental Representative not later than 14 days before commencing work. .4 Contractor's and Sub-contractors' Safety Communication Plan. .5 Contingency and Emergency Response Plan addressing standard operating procedures specific to the project site to be implemented during emergency situations. Coordinate plan with existing Emergency Response requirements and procedures provided by Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan and provide comments to Contractor within 10 days after receipt of plan. Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Departmental Representative within 5 days after receipt of comments from Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative's review of Contractor's final Health and Safety plan should not be construed as approval and does not reduce the Contractor's overall responsibility for construction Health and Safety. Submit names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health. Submit records of Contractor's Health and Safety meetings when requested. Submit 2 copies of Contractor's authorized representative's work site health and safety inspection reports to Departmental Representative, weekly.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 3 2011-06-10
.8
Submit copies of orders, directions or reports issued by health and safety inspectors of the authorities having jurisdiction. Submit copies of incident and accident reports. Submit Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit Workplace Safety and Insurance Board (WSIB)- Experience Rating Report.
.9
.10
.11
1.3 FILING OF NOTICE
.1
File Notice of Project with Provincial authorities prior to commencement of Work.
1.4
WORK PERMIT
.1
Obtain Hot Work Permit from Departmental Representative.
1.5 SAFETY ASSESSMENT
.1
Perform site specific safety hazard assessment related to project.
1.6
MEETINGS
.1
Schedule and administer Health and Safety meeting with Departmental Representative prior to commencement of Work.
.1
Comply with the Acts and regulations of the Province of Ontario. Comply with specified standards and regulations to ensure safe operations at site.
.2
1.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan based on hazard assessment prior to beginning site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications.
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.2
Departmental Representative may respond in writing, where deficiencies or concerns are noted and may request re-submission with correction of deficiencies or concerns either accepting or requesting improvements. Relief from or substitution for any portion or provision of minimum Health and Safety standards specified herein or reviewed site-specific Health and Safety Plan shall be submitted to Departmental Representative in writing.
.3
1.9 COMPLIANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with Ontario Occupational Health and Safety Act, R.S.O. 1990 Chapter 0.1, as amended.
1.10
RESPONSIBILITY .1
Be responsible for health and safety of persons on site, safety of property on site and for protection of persons adjacent to site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work. Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, territorial and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan. Where applicable the Contractor shall be designated "Constructor", as defined by Occupational Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario.
.2
.3
1.11 UNFORSEEN HAZARDS
.1
Should any unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become evident during performance of Work, immediately stop work and advise Departmental Representative verbally and in writing. Follow procedures in place for Employees Right to Refuse Work as specified in the Occupational Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario.
.2
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.12 HEALTH AND SAFETY CO-ORDINATOR
.1
Employ and assign to Work, competent and authorized representative as Health and Safety Co-ordinator. Health and Safety Co-ordinator must: .1 Have working knowledge of occupational safety and health regulations. .2 Be responsible for completing Contractor's Health and Safety Training Sessions and ensuring that personnel not successfully completing required training are not permitted to enter site to perform Work. .3 Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific Contractor's Health and Safety Plan. .4 Be on site during execution of Work and report directly to and be under direction of site supervisor.
1.13 POSTING OF DOCUMENTS
.1
Ensure applicable items, articles, notices and orders are posted in conspicuous location on site in accordance with Acts and Regulations of Province of Ontario, and in consultation with Departmental Representative. .1 Contractor's Safety Policy. .2 Constructor's Name. .3 Notice of Project. .4 Name, trade, and employer of Health and Safety Representative or Joint Health and Safety Committee members (if applicable). .5 Ministry of Labour Orders and reports. .6 Occupational Health and Safety Act and Regulations for Construction Projects for Province of Ontario. .7 Address and phone number of nearest Ministry of Labour office. .8 Material Safety Data Sheets. .9 Written emeregency Response Plan. .10 Site Specific Safety Plan. .11 Valid certificate of first aider on duty. .12 WSIB "In Case of Injury At Work" poster. .13 Location of toilet and cleanup facilities.
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.14 CORRECTION OF NON-COMPLIANCE
.1
Immediately address health and safety non-compliance issues identified by authority having jurisdiction or by Departmental Representative. Provide Departmental Representative with written report of action taken to correct non-compliance of health and safety issues identified. Departmental Representative may stop Work if non-compliance of health and safety regulations is not corrected.
.2
.3
1.15
BLASTING
.1
Blasting or other use of explosives is not permitted.
1.16 POWDER ACTUATED DEVICES
.1
Use powder actuated devices only after receipt of written permission from Departmental Representative.
1.17
WORK STOPPAGE
.1
Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work. Assign responsibility and obligation to Health and Safety Coordinator to stop or start Work when, at Health and Safety Coordinator's discretion, it is necessary or advisable for reasons of health or safety. Departmental Representative may also stop Work for health and safety considerations.
.2
Section 01 35 29.06 Page 7 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
96 Bed Maximum LivingUnit Millhaven Institutio Project No. R45116.001
HEALTH AND SAFETY FOR CONTAMINATED SITES
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA): Canada .1 CSA-S350-M1980(R2003), Code of Practice for Safety in Demolition of Structures. National Building Code 2005 (NBC). National Fire Code 2010 (NFC). Province of Ontario: .1 Occupational Health and Safety Act Revised Statutes of Ontario 1990, Chapter O.1 as amended, and Regulations for Construction Projects, O. Reg. 213/91 as amended. .2 Workplace Safety and Insurance Act, 1997. .3 Municipal statutes and authorities. Fire Commissioner of Canada (FCC): .1 FC-301 Standard for Construction Operations. .2 FC-302 Standard for Welding and Cutting, June 1982. Labour Program Fire Protection Engineering Services 4900 Yonge Street 8th Floor Willowdale, Ontario M2N 6A8 and copies may be obtained from: Human Resources and Social Development Canada Labour Program Fire Protection Engineering Services Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0J2
.2 .3 .4
.5
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit site-specific Health and Safety Plan, within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed and prior to mobilization to site. Address following items:
.2
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 2 2011-06-10
.3
Safety and health risk or hazard analysis for each site task and operation found in work plan. Develop checklist for items to be inspected on a daily basis. Document actions taken. Personnel training requirements including: .1 Names of personnel and alternates responsible for site safety and health, hazards present on site, and use of personal protective equipment. .2 Work practices by which personnel can minimize risks from hazards, safe use of engineering controls and equipment on site, medical surveillance requirements, including recognition of symptoms and signs which might indicate overexposure to hazards, and elements of site-specific Health and Safety Plan. Personal protective equipment (PPE) program addressing: .1 Donning and doffing procedures. .2 PPE selection based upon site hazards. .3 PPE use and limitations of equipment. .4 Work mission duration, PPE maintenance and storage. .5 PPE decontamination and disposal. .6 PPE inspection procedures prior to, during, and after use. .7 Evaluation of effectiveness of PPE program, and limitations during temperature extremes, and other appropriate medical considerations. .8 Medical surveillance requirements for personnel assigned to work at site. .9 Frequency and types of air monitoring, personnel monitoring, and environmental sampling techniques and instrumentation to be used, including methods of maintenance and calibration of monitoring and sampling equipment. .10 Site control measures employed at site including site map, site work zones, use of 'buddy system', site communications including site security, alerting means for emergencies, standard operating procedures or safe work practices, and identification of nearest medical assistance. .11 Decontamination procedures for both personnel and equipment.
.4
.5
.6
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 3 2011-06-10
.6
(Cont'd) .12 Emergency response requirements addressing: pre-emergency planning, personnel roles, lines of authority and communication, emergency recognition and prevention, safe distances and places of refuge, site security and control, evacuation routes and procedures, decontamination procedures not covered under decontamination section, emergency medical treatment and first aid, emergency alerting and response procedures, critique of response and follow-up, PPE and emergency equipment, site topography, layout, prevailing weather conditions, and procedures for reporting incidents to local, provincial, or federal agencies. .13 Written respiratory protection program for project activities. .14 Procedures dealing with heat and/or cold stress. .15 Spill containment program if drummed waste material is generated, excavated, stored, or managed on site. Departmental Representative will review Contractor's site-specific Health and Safety Plan and provide comments to Contractor within 7 days after receipt of plan. Revise plan as appropriate and resubmit plan to Departmental Representative within 7 days after receipt of comments from Departmental Representative. Medical Surveillance: submit certification of medical surveillance for site personnel, within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed and prior to mobilization to site. Submit additional certifications as personnel are sent to site. Respirator Fit Testing: submit proof of respirator fit testing for site personnel, within 7 days after date of Notice to Proceed and prior to mobilization to site. On-site Contingency and Emergency Response Plan: address standard operating procedures to be implemented during emergency situations.
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 4 2011-06-10
.11
Off-site Contingency and Emergency Response Plan: .1 Prior to commencing Work involving handling of hazardous materials, develop off-site Contingency and Emergency Response Plan. .2 Plan must provide immediate response to serious site occurrence such as explosion, fire, or migration of significant quantities of toxic or hazardous material from site.
.1
Comply with Acts and regulations of the Province of Ontario. Comply with specified standards and regulations to ensure safe operations at site. In event of conflict between any provisions of specified standards and regulations, the most stringent provision governs.
.2
.3
1.4
SITE CONDITIONS .1
Work at site will involve contact with: .1 Soils contaminated (primarily) with lead and zinc or other designated substances. .2 Asbestos containing materials and soils.
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Develop written site-specific Health and Safety Plan prior to commencing site Work and continue to implement, maintain, and enforce plan until final demobilization from site. Health and Safety Plan must address project specifications. Ensure Health and Safety guidelines provide for safe and minimal risk working environment for site personnel and minimize impact of activities involving contact with hazardous materials or hazardous wastes on general public and surrounding environment. Relief from or substitution for portion or provision of minimum Health and Safety Guidelines specified or reviewed site-specific Health and Safety Plan must submitted to Departmental Representative in writing.
.2
.3
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) Departmental Representative will respond in writing, either accepting or requesting improvements.
1.6
RESPONSIBILITY
.1
Be responsible for safety of persons and property on site and for protection of persons off site and environment to extent that they may be affected by conduct of Work. Comply with and enforce compliance by employees with safety requirements of Contract Documents, applicable federal, provincial, and local statutes, regulations, and ordinances, and with site-specific Health and Safety Plan. Where applicable the Contractor shall be designated "Constructor", as defined by Ontario Act.
.2
.3
1.7 HAZARD COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Comply with Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Regulation, R.R.O. Comply with Canada Labour Code, Canada Occupational Safety and Health Regulations, Part X - Hazardous Substances. Provide Departmental Representative with Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) and documentation on any "hazardous" chemical that Contractor or Contractor Representatives plan to bring onto site.
.2
.3
1.8
WORK STOPPAGE
.1
Give precedence to safety and health of public and site personnel and protection of environment over cost and schedule considerations for Work. Assign responsibility and obligation to Health and Safety Officer where required to stop or start Work when, at Health and Safety Officer's discretion, it is necessary or advisable for reasons of health or safety. Departmental Representative may also stop Work for health and safety considerations.
.2
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.9 UNFORESEEN HAZARDS
.1
Should unforeseen or peculiar safety-related factor, hazard, or condition become evident during performance of Work, stop work and immediately advise Departmental Representative verbally and in writing. Follow procedures in place for Employees Right to Refuse Work as specified in the Act for the Province of Ontario.
.2
1.10 HEALTH AND SAFETY OFFICER AND REGISTERED OCCUPATIONAL HYGIENIST / CERTIFIED INDUSTRIAL HYGIENIST
.1
Employ and assign to Work competent and authorized representative as Health and Safety Adviser. Health and Safety Adviser must: .1 Have minimum 2 years' site-related working experience specific to contaminated site work of a similar nature. .2 Have basic working knowledge of specified occupational safety and health regulations. .3 Be responsible for completing Health and Safety Training Session and ensuring that personnel not successfully completing the required training are not permitted to enter site to perform Work in Exclusion Zone or Contaminant Reduction Zone. .4 Be responsible for implementing, enforcing daily and monitoring site-specific Health and Safety Plan. .5 Be on site during execution of Work.
1.11 PERSONNEL HEALTH, SAFETY, AND HYGIENE
.1
Medical Surveillance: .1 Conduct medical surveillance of personnel as required by specified regulations. Training: ensure personnel entering site are trained in accordance with specified personnel training requirements. Training session must be completed by Health and Safety Officer. Levels of Protection: establish levels of protection for each Work area based on planned activity and location of activity. Minimum PPE required for each level of protection as follows:
.2
.3
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.11 PERSONNEL HEALTH, SAFETY, AND HYGIENE (Cont'd)
.4
Level B: .1 Respiratory: airline with escape bottle. .2 Head, Eye, Ear Protection: hard hat, safety glasses with sideshields, ear muffs or plugs. .3 Hand Protection: gloves, [Type [______] undergloves], Type [______] overgloves. .4 Foot Protection: [safety shoes]. .5 Clothing: chemically resistant coverall. Level C/Modified Level C: .1 Respiratory: [full-face respirator, Cartridge - MSA GME-H (GME-P100)] [halfmask, Cartridge - MSA GME-H (GME-P100)] [escape, Type [______]]. .2 Head, Eye, Ear Protection: [hard hat] [goggles] [safety glasses with sideshields] [face shield] [chemical goggles] [ear muffs or plugs]. .3 Hand Protection: gloves, [Type [______] undergloves] [______], Type [______] overgloves. .4 Foot Protection: safety shoes. .5 Clothing: chemically resistant coverall. Level D: .1 Head, Eye, Ear Protection: hard hat, safety glasses with sideshields and ear muffs or plugs. .2 Clothing: standard work uniform. Anticipated levels of personal protection based on work activity are as follows: Work Activity [______] Anticipated Level of Personal Protection Level [______]
.5
.6
.7
.8
Personal Protective Equipment: .1 Furnish site personnel with appropriate PPE as specified above. Ensure that safety equipment and protective clothing is kept clean and maintained. Develop protective equipment usage procedures and ensure that procedures are strictly followed by site personnel; include following procedures as minimum: .1 Ensure prescription eyeglasses worn are safety glasses and do not permit contact lenses on site within work zones.
.9
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 8 2011-06-10
.9
(Cont'd) .2 Ensure footwear is steel-toed safety shoes or boots and is covered by rubber overshoes when entering or working in potentially contaminated work areas. .3 Dispose of or decontaminate PPE worn on site at end of each workday. .4 Decontaminate reusable PPE before reissuing. .5 Ensure site personnel have passed respirator fit test prior to entering potentially contaminated work areas. .6 Ensure facial hair does not interfere with proper respirator fit. Respiratory Protection: .1 Provide site personnel with extensive training in usage and limitations of, and qualitative fit testing for, air purifying and supplied-air respirators in accordance with specified regulations. .2 Develop, implement, and maintain respirator program. .3 Monitor, evaluate, and provide respiratory protection for site personnel. .4 Ensure levels of protection as listed have been chosen consistent with site-specific potential airborne hazards associated with major contaminants identified on site. .5 In absence of additional air monitoring information or substance identification, minimum levels of respiratory protection will be required as follows: .1 Table: Sustained Total Organic Vapour Concentration Above Background (ppm) [______] Level of Respirator Protection Required
.10
[______]
[______]
Half-facepiece air-purifying respirator, Level C Full-facepiece air-purifying respirator, Level C Shut down activities, evaluate the need for Level B or higher respiratory protection
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 9 2011-06-10
.10
Respiratory Protection:(Cont'd) .6 Immediately notify Departmental Representative when level of respiratory protection required increases. .7 Ensure appropriate respiratory protection during work activities. As minimum requirement, ensure that persons entering potentially contaminated work areas are supplied with and use appropriate respiratory protection. .8 Assess ability for site personnel to wear respiratory protection. .9 Ensure site personnel are able to pass respirator fit test prior to entering potentially contaminated work areas. Heat Stress/Cold Stress: implement heat stress and/or cold stress monitoring program as applicable and include in site-specific Health and Safety Plan. Personnel Hygiene and Personnel Decontamination Procedures. Provide minimum as follows: .1 Suitable containers for storage and disposal of used disposable PPE. .2 Potable water and suitable sanitation facility. Emergency and First-Aid Equipment: .1 Locate and maintain emergency and first-aid equipment in appropriate location on site including first-aid kit to accommodate number of site personnel; portable emergency eye wash; two 9 kg ABC type dry chemical fire extinguishers. .2 As minimum, provide 1 certified first-aid technician on site at all times when work activities are in progress. Site Communications: .1 Post emergency numbers near site telephones. .2 Ensure personnel use of "buddy" system and develop hand signal system appropriate for site activities. .3 Provide employee alarm system to notify employees of site emergency situations or to stop Work activities if necessary. .4 Furnish selected personnel with 2-way radios.
.11
.12
.13
.14
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 10 2011-06-10
.14
Site Communications:(Cont'd) .5 Safety Meetings: conduct mandatory daily safety meetings for personnel, and additionally as required by special or work-related conditions; include refresher training for existing equipment and protocols, review ongoing safety issues and protocols, and examine new site conditions as encountered. Hold additional safety meetings on as-needed basis. Custodian: employ and assign to Work Custodian to report directly to Health and Safety Officer and who is responsible for keeping safety equipment and facilities clean, properly equipped, and maintained. Custodian may perform other duties for Contractor but Custodian's first priority is maintenance of protective equipment and personnel decontamination area.
.15
1.12
AIR MONITORING .1
Air Monitoring Program: .1 Develop air monitoring program meeting specified requirements. .2 During progress of work activities, monitor air quality in and around work zones. Conduct monitoring on regular periodic basis, and additionally as required by special or work-related conditions. Report departures from general background to Departmental Representative who will, in conjunction with Health and Safety Officer, determine when operations should be shut down and restarted. .3 Provide minimum required instruments for air monitoring as follows: .1 [______]. .4 Operate air monitoring equipment with personnel trained in equipment provided and under control of Health and Safety Officer. .5 Conduct air monitoring on routine basis around active work locations. Perform hourly monitoring minimum and additionally as dictated by site activities. .6 Furnish wind speed and direction indicator capable of providing permanent record, at unobstructed location on site located above elevation of work area with unobstructed view to affected workers.
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 11 2011-06-10
1.12 AIR MONITORING .2 (Cont'd)
Air Monitoring Reporting: report air monitoring results daily to Departmental Representative on separate form.
1.13 CONTINGENCY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE
.1 .2
Meet specified requirements. Arrange and attend co-ordination meeting held with appropriate authorities including City, Fire, Hospital, Provincial and City Police, Ministry of Transportation, Ministry of Health, and Community Emergency Co-ordinator; meeting will identify off-site Emergency Response Co-ordinator through whom information and co-ordination will occur in event of incident.
1.14
SITE CONTROL
.1 .2
Meet specified requirements. Prior to commencing work involving handling of drums and other containers, submit procedures for safe handling of drums and other containers. Implement and enforce drum handling program during activities involving drummed waste characterization including but not limited to handling, opening, sampling, staging, and consolidating.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Section 01 35 29.14 Page 12 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
FIRE SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ROOFING
Section 01 35 36 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
GENERAL
.1
This section specifies general requirements and procedures for fire safety. Additional requirements may be specified in individual sections elsewhere in specifications.
1.2
REPORTING FIRES .1
The Departmental Representative will co-ordinate arrangements for the Contractor to be briefed at the pre-construction meeting concerning Building's fire safety protocol. Building Manager will supply a copy of "Fire Safety Emergency Evacuation Plan" in effect for this building. Contractor shall comply with outlined fire safety requirements. Know location of nearest fire alarm box and telephone, including emergency phone number. Report immediately all fire incidents to Fire Department as follows: .1 activate nearest fire alarm box; or .2 telephone. Person activating fire alarm box will remain at box to direct Fire Department to scene of fire. When reporting fire by telephone, give location of fire, name or number of building and be prepared to verify the location.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.3
FIRE WATCH
.1
Appoint a Fire Watch at locations where welding and soldering, torching or roofing is to take place. A dedicated Fire Watch is not required. A competent person from the workforce on site may be assigned as Fire Watch for duration of work. Assign a person who is knowledgeable in the correct use of fire extinguishers on the project.
.2
.3
Section 01 35 36 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 FIRE WATCH (Cont'd)
.4
Have work inspected by the Fire Watch up to 1.5 hours after work stoppage for each work period.
1.4 INTERIOR AND EXTERIOR FIRE PROTECTION AND ALARM SYSTEMS
.1
Fire protection and alarm system will not be: .1 obstructed; .2 shut-off; or .3 left inactive at end of working day or shift. Fire hydrants, standpipes and hose systems will not be used for other than fire-fighting purposes unless authorized by Departmental Representative. Provide and maintain free access to fire extinguishing equipment. Maintain exit facilities. Keep means of egress free from materials, equipment and obstructing.
.2
.3
1.5 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
.1
Supply fire extinguishers, as necessary to protect work in progress and contractor's physical plant on site.
1.6 BLOCKAGE OF ROADWAYS
.1
Advise the Departmental Representative of any work that would impede fire apparatus response. This includes violation of minimum required overhead clearance.
1.7 RUBBISH AND WASTE MATERIALS
.1
Rubbish and waste materials are to be kept to a minimum. Burning of rubbish is prohibited. Remove all rubbish from work site at end of work day or shift or as directed. Storage: .1 Store oily waste in approved receptacles to ensure maximum cleanliness and safety. .2 Deposit greasy or oily rags and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in approved receptacles and remove from site daily or at the end of each shift.
.2 .3
.4
Section 01 35 36 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.8 FLAMMABLE AND COMBUSTIBLE LIQUIDS
.1
Handling, storage and use of flammable and combustible liquids are to be governed by the current National Fire Code of Canada. Flammable and combustible liquids such as gasoline, kerosene and naphtha will be kept for ready use in quantities not exceeding 45 litres provided they are stored in approved safety cans bearing Underwriters' Laboratory of Canada or Factory Mutual seal of approval. Storage of quantities of flammable and combustible liquids exceeding 45 litres for work purposes requires permission of local Building Manager. Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids is prohibited within buildings or jetties. Transfer of flammable and combustible liquids will not be carried out in vicinity of open flames or any type of heat-producing devices. Flammable liquids having a flash point below 38C such as naphtha or gasoline will not be used as solvents or cleaning agents. Flammable and combustible waste liquids, for disposal, will be stored in approved containers located in a safe ventilated area. Quantities are to be kept to a minimum and Fire Department is to be notified when disposal is required.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.9 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES
.1
Work entailing use of toxic or hazardous materials, chemicals and/or explosives, or otherwise creating hazard to life, safety or health, will be in accordance with National Fire Code of Canada. Obtain from local Building Manager a "Hot Work" permit for work involving welding, burning or use of blow torches and salamanders, in buildings or facilities. When Work is carried out in dangerous or hazardous areas involving use of heat, provide fire watchers equipped with sufficient fire extinguishers. Determination of dangerous or hazardous areas along with level of protection necessary for Fire Watch is at discretion of
.2
.3
Section 01 35 36 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.9 HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) the local Building Manager. Contractors are responsible for providing fire watch service for work on a scale established and in conjunction with Building Manager at pre-construction meeting. Where flammable liquids, such as lacquers or urethanes are to be used, proper ventilation will be assured and all sources of ignition are to be eliminated. Building Manager is to be informed prior to and at cessation of such work.
.4
1.10 WELDING, BURNING AND CUTTING
.1
Contractor performing work of this section must notify the Departmental Representative in advance of commencing work. Use non-combustible shields for electric and gas welding or cutting executed within 3 m of combustible material or in occupied spaces. Place cylinders supplying gases as close to work as possible. Secure cylinders in upright position, free from exposure to sun or high temperature. Locate fire extinguishing equipment near all welding, cutting and soldering operations. Contractor's mechanics shall be properly equipped with required protective clothing, including goggles or welding hood or face mask, gloves, etc. Contractor is responsible for the protection of his work and the Owner's property. Provide Fire Watch on standby with approved fire extinguisher while burning or welding is in progress.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.11 QUESTIONS AND/OR CLARIFICATIONS
.1
Direct any questions or clarification on Fire Safety in addition to above requirements to local Building Manager.
Section 01 35 36 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.12 FIRE INSPECTION
.1
Site inspections by Building Manager will be coordinated through Departmental Representative. Allow local Building Manager unrestricted access to work site. Co-operate with Building Manager during routine fire safety inspection of work site. Immediately remedy all unsafe fire situations observed by Building Manager.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
ENVIRONMENTAL PROCEDURES
Section 01 35 43 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
DEFINITIONS
.1
Environmental Pollution and Damage: presence of chemical, physical, biological elements or agents which adversely affect human health and welfare; unfavourably alter ecological balances of importance to human life; affect other species of importance to humankind; or degrade environment aesthetically, culturally and/or historically. Environmental Protection: prevention/control of pollution and habitat or environment disruption during construction. Control of environmental pollution and damage requires consideration of land, water, and air; biological and cultural resources; and includes management of visual aesthetics; noise; solid, chemical, gaseous, and liquid waste; radiant energy and radioactive material as well as other pollutants.
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Prior to commencing construction activities or delivery of materials to site, submit Environmental Protection Plan for review and approval by Departmental Representative. Environmental Protection Plan is to present comprehensive overview of known or potential environmental issues which must be addressed during construction. Address topics at level of detail commensurate with environmental issue and required construction tasks. Environmental protection plan: include: .1 Names of persons responsible for ensuring adherence to Environmental Protection Plan. .2 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for manifesting hazardous waste to be removed from site. .3 Names and qualifications of persons responsible for training site personnel.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 43 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Environmental protection plan:(Cont'd) .4 Descriptions of environmental protection personnel training program. .5 Erosion and sediment control plan which identifies type and location of erosion and sediment controls to be provided including monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that control measures are in compliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations. .6 Drawings showing locations of proposed temporary excavations or embankments for haul roads, stream crossings, material storage areas, structures, sanitary facilities, and stockpiles of excess or spoil materials including methods to control runoff and to contain materials on site. .7 Traffic control plans including measures to reduce erosion of temporary roadbeds by construction traffic, especially during wet weather. Plans include measures to minimize amount of mud transported onto paved public roads by vehicles or runoff. .8 Work area plan showing proposed activity in each portion of area and identifying areas of limited use or non-use. Plan to include measures for marking limits of use areas including methods for protection of features to be preserved within authorized work areas. .9 Spill Control Plan: including procedures, instructions, and reports to be used in event of unforeseen spill of regulated substance. .10 Non-Hazardous solid waste disposal plan identifying methods and locations for solid waste disposal including clearing debris. .11 Air pollution control plan detailing provisions to assure that dust, debris, materials, and trash, do not become air borne and travel off project site. .12 Contaminant prevention plan that: identifies potentially hazardous substances to be used on job site; identifies intended actions to prevent introduction of such materials into air, water, or ground; and details provisions for compliance with Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations for storage and handling of these materials. .13 Waste water management plan that identifies methods and procedures for
Section 01 35 43 Page 3 2011-06-10
.4
Environmental protection plan:(Cont'd) .13 (Cont'd) management and/or discharge of waste waters which are directly derived from construction activities, such as concrete curing water, clean-up water, dewatering of ground water, disinfection water, hydrostatic test water, and water used in flushing of lines. .14 Historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands. .15 Pesticide treatment plan: to be included and updated, as required. .16 Halocarbon Control Plan: submit documentation specified in PWGSC Ontario Region Halocarbon Information Sheet dated March 2010 including a signed, completed copy of the information sheet.
1.3
FIRES
.1
Fires and burning of rubbish on site not permitted.
1.4 DISPOSAL OF WASTES
.1
Do not bury rubbish and waste materials on site. Do not dispose of waste or volatile materials, such as mineral spirits, oil or paint thinner into waterways, storm or sanitary sewers.
.2
1.5
DRAINAGE
.1
Provide erosion and sediment control plan that identifies type and location of erosion and sediment controls to be provided. Plan: include monitoring and reporting requirements to assure that control measures are in compliance with erosion and sediment control plan, Federal, Provincial, and Municipal laws and regulations. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) to be substituted for erosion and sedimentations control plan.
.2
Section 01 35 43 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.5 DRAINAGE (Cont'd)
.3
Provide temporary drainage and pumping as necessary to keep excavations and site free from water. Do not pump water containing suspended materials into waterways, sewer or drainage systems. Control disposal or runoff of water containing suspended materials or other harmful substances in accordance with local authority requirements.
.4
.5
1.6 POLLUTION CONTROL
.1
Maintain temporary erosion and pollution control features installed under this contract. Control emissions from equipment and plant to local authorities' emission requirements. Prevent sandblasting and other extraneous materials from contaminating air and waterways beyond application area, by providing temporary enclosures. Cover or wet down dry materials and rubbish to prevent blowing dust and debris. Provide dust control for temporary roads. Spills of deleterious substances: .1 Immediately contain, limit spread and clean up in accordance with provincial regulatory requirements. .2 Report immediately to Ontario Spills Action Centre: 1-800-268-6060. .3 Further information on dangerous goods emergency cleanup and precautions including a list of companies performing this work can be obtained from the Transport Canada 24-hour number (613) 996-6666 collect.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.7
HALOCARBONS
.1
Comply with Federal Halocarbon Regulations 2003 under the Canadian Environmental Protection Act 1999, EPAM and PWGSC Ontario Region Halocarbon Information Sheet dated March 2010.
Section 01 35 43 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.8 HISTORICAL/ ARCHAEOLOGICAL CONTROL
.1
Provide historical, archaeological, cultural resources biological resources and wetlands plan that defines procedures for identifying and protecting historical, archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands known to be on project site: and/or identifies procedures to be followed if historical archaeological, cultural resources, biological resources and wetlands not previously known to be on site or in area are discovered during construction. Plan: include methods to assure protection of known or discovered resources and identify lines of communication between Contractor personnel and Departmental representative .
.2
1.9
NOTIFICATION
.1
Departmental representative will notify Contractor in writing of observed noncompliance with Federal, Provincial or Municipal environmental laws or regulations, permits, and other elements of Contractor's Environmental Protection plan. Contractor: after receipt of such notice, inform Departmental Representative of proposed corrective action and take such action for approval by Departmental Representative. Departmental representative will issue stop order of work until satisfactory corrective action has been taken. No time extensions granted or equitable adjustments allowed to Contractor for such suspensions.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 43 Page 6 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
SECURITY REQUIREMENTS OUTSIDE THE PERIMETER
Section 01 35 55 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PURPOSE
.1
To ensure that both the construction project and institutional operations may proceed without undue disruption or hindrance and that the security of the Institution is maintained at all times.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1
"Contraband" means: .1 an intoxicant, .2 a weapon or a component thereof, ammunition for a weapon, and anything that is designed to kill, injure or disable a person or that is altered so as to be capable of killing, injuring or disabling a person, when possessed without prior authorization, .3 an explosive or a bomb or a component thereof, .4 currency over any applicable prescribed limit, when possessed by an inmate without prior authorization, and .5 any item not described in above paragraphs (.1) and (.4) that could jeopardize the security of a Penetentiary or the safety of persons, when that item is possessed without prior authorization. "Commercial Vehicle" means any motor vehicle used for the shipment of material, equipment and tools required for the construction project. "CSC" means Correctional Service Canada. "Director" means Director, Warden of the Institution. "Construction employees" means persons working for the General Contractor, the Subcontractors, equipment operators, material suppliers, testing and inspection companies and regulatory agencies. "Perimeter" means the fenced or walled area of the institution that restrains the movement of inmates.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
Section 01 35 55 Page 2 2011-06-10
.7
"Construction limits" means the areas as shown on the Contract Drawings that the Contractor will be allowed to work. This area may or may not be isolated from the security area of the institution. "CD" means Commissioner's Directive. "CPIC" means RCMP Canadian Police Information Centre. "Commissionaire" - Designated representative of the Director to monitor construction related activities including surveillance of inmate labour.
.8 .9
.10
1.3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Cooperate with institutional personnel in ensuring that security requirements are observed by all construction employees. Inside of the Institution proper all normal rules will apply.
.2
1.4 CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMITTANCE
.1
Submit to the Director a signed security clearance request form for each construction employee seeking admission to the Millhaven Institution. Allow two (2) weeks for processing of security clearances (CPIC's). Employees will not be admitted to the Institution without a valid security clearance (CPIC) in place and a recent picture identification such as a provincial driver's license. Security clearances obtained from other CSC institutions are not valid at this institution. The Director requires that these photographs (ID Cards) be displayed prominently on the construction employee's clothing while they are on the Site. Entry to Institutional Property will be refused to any person there may be a reason to believe may be a security risk.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 55 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.4 CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMITTANCE (Cont'd)
.5
Any person employed on the construction site will be subject to immediate removal from Institutional Property if they: .1 appear to be under the influence of alcohol, drugs or narcotics. .2 behave in an unusual or disorderly manner. .3 are in possession of contraband. CPIC's will be done for all construction workers but are not essential for access to the secure construction compound. The Warden retains the right to refuse access to the penitentiary reserve to anyone. However, work within the Main Institution will require a valid CPIC.
.6
1.5
SITE ACCESS
.1
Access to the construction site is controlled by Commissionaires. Commissionaires will verify that workers and material are a valid part of the construction but will not do vehicle searches. Commissionaires will verify the ID of all who access site. Access to the site will be controlled by the Contractor and during the normal course of business Institutional staff will not be permitted on to the site due to Health and Safety Regulations.
.2
1.6
VEHICLES
.1
All unattended vehicles on CSC property shall have windows closed; doors and trunks shall be locked and keys removed. The keys shall be securely in the possession of the Owner or an employee of the company that owns the vehicle. Failure to comply with the above will result in an immediate shutdown of the jobsite and a stoppage of the Work for an indefinite period of time at the General Contractor's expense. The Director may limit at any time the number and type of vehicles allowed with the Institution. If the Director permits trailers to be left inside the secure perimeter of the Institution, or within the fenced primary construction site compound, these trailer
.2
.3
Section 01 35 55 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.6 VEHICLES (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) doors and windows will be locked at the close of business daily. All windows will be securely locked when left unoccupied.
1.7
PARKING
.1
Construction employees shall park in the "Contractor Parking Lot" designated. Parking in other locations is prohibited and vehicles may be subject to removal.
1.8
SHIPMENTS
.1
All shipments of project material, equipment and tools shall be addressed in the Contractor's name to avoid confusion with the Institution's own shipments. The Contractor must have his own employees on site to receive and verify any deliveries or shipments. CSC staff will not accept receipt of deliveries or shipments of any materials or tools.
1.9
WORK HOURS
.1
Normal work hours are 07:00 to 17:00, 7 days per week. Hours outside of this to be by agreement with the Institution. Work will not be permitted during weekends and statutory holidays without the permission of the Director. A minimum of two days (48 hours) advance notice will be required to obtain the required permission.
.2
1.10
OVERTIME WORK
.1
No overtime work will be allowed without the permission of the Director. If overtime work is required because of an emergency such as the completion of a concrete pour or work to make construction safe and secure, the Contractor will advise the Director as soon as this condition is known.
1.11 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
.1
Particular attention is to be placed on the physical location of power driven tools, files, saw blades, rod saws, wire, rope, ladders and any sort of jacking device, to
Section 01 35 55 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.11 TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) ensure they are not accessible to inmates on the outer reaches of the fenced enclosure. Note: Ram sets (Hilti guns) and other cartridge driven tools are not permitted for Work at this Institution.
.2
The Contractor is to ensure that, at the close of each business day, all tools and equipment are locked in a secure room or in secure lockable tool boxes. All missing or lost tools or equipment shall be reported immediately to the Director. When not in use all tools will be secured as indicated in this Section. Lay down areas will be inside the construction site unless alternative arrangements are made and materials and equipment in areas outside the fence will be secured by the Contractor.
.3
.4
1.12
HARDWARE
.1
Security Hardware/Keys - Existing: .1 Turn over all removed security hardware to the Director of the Institution for disposal or for safekeeping until required for reinstallation. Security Hardware/Keys - New: .1 The Contractor shall arrange with the security hardware supplier to have the cylinders/keys for the security hardware to be delivered from the manufacturer directly to the Institution, specifically the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO). .2 The SMO will provide a receipt to the Contractor for security hardware keys. .3 The Contractor will provide a copy of the above-mentioned receipt to the Departmental Representative. Construction Hardware/Keys: .1 The Contractor will use standard construction cylinders for locks for his use during the construction period. .2 The Contractor will issue instructions to his employees and subtrades, as necessary, to ensure safe custody of the construction set of keys.
.2
.3
Section 01 35 55 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.12 HARDWARE (Cont'd)
.3
Construction Hardware/Keys:(Cont'd) .3 Upon completion of each phase of the construction, the CSC representative will, in conjunction with the lock manufacturer: .1 accept the operational keys and lock manufacturer. .2 CSC will arrange for removal and return of the construction cores and install the operational core in all locks. Upon putting operational security hardware/keys into use, the CSC Commissionaire shall obtain these keys as they are required by the Contractor. The contractor shall issue instructions to his employees advising them that all security keys shall always remain with the CSC Commissionaire.
.4
1.13 PRESCRIPTION DRUGS
.1
Employees of the Contractor who are required to take prescription drugs during the work day shall obtain approval of the Director to bring a one day supply only to the Institution.
1.14
CONTRABAND
.1
Weapons, ammunition, explosives, alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics are prohibited on Institutional Property. The discovery of contraband on the construction site and the identification of the person(s) responsible for the contraband shall be reported immediately to the Director. Contractors should be vigilant with both their staff and the staff of their subcontractors and suppliers that the discovery of contraband may result in cancellation of the security clearance of the affected employee. Serious infractions may result in the removal of the company from the Institution for the duration of the construction. Presence of arms and ammunition in vehicles of Contractors, Subcontractors and suppliers of employees of these will result in the immediate cancellation of security clearances for the driver of the vehicle.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 55 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.15
SEARCHES
.1
All vehicles and persons entering Institutional Property may be subject to search. When the Director suspects, on reasonable grounds, that an employee of the Contractor is in possession of contraband, he may order order that person to be searched.
.2
1.16 ACCESS TO AND REMOVAL FROM INSTITUTIONAL PROPERTY
.1
Construction personnel and commercial vehicles will not be admitted to the fenced primary construction site of institution after normal working hours, unless approved by the Director.
1.17 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES
.1
Vehicles shall be refused access to Institutional Property if, in the opinion of the Director, they contain any article which may jeopardize the security of the institution. Private vehicles of construction employees will not be allowed within the security wall of fence of medium or maximum security institutions without the permission of the Director. When equipment is to remain on the construction site overnight or over the weekend, this equipment must be securely locked and disabled.
.2
.3
1.18 SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION
.1
Construction activities and all related movement of personnel and vehicles may be subject to surveillance and inspection by CSC security staff members to ensure that established security requirements are met.
1.19 WORK
STOPPAGE OF
.1
The Director may request at any time that the Contractor, his employees, Subcontractors and their employees not enter or leave the Work site immediately due to a security situation occurring within the Institution. The Contractor's site supervisor shall note the
Section 01 35 55 Page 8 2011-06-10
1.19 STOPPAGE OF WORK (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) name of the staff member making the request and the time of the request and obey the order as quickly as possible. The Contractor shall advise the Departmental Representative of this delay to the progress of the Work.
.2
1.20
LOCKDOWN
.1
In the event of a lockdown in the Institution the construction site will not be affected unless a count is short or there is a real threat to the site by riot. If an escape is suspected the gates to the site may be closed and Institutional staff will verify persons leaving the site.
1.21 CONTACT WITH INMATES
.1
Unless specifically authorized, and in the course of Work related activity, it is forbidden to come into contact with inmates, to them with them, to receive objects from them or to give them objects. Any Contractor doing any of the above may be removed from the Site and may have his security clearance revoked. It is forbidden to take pictures of inmates, of CSC staff members or of any part of the Institution other than those required as part of this Contract.
.2
1.22 COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION PROJECT
.1
Upon completion of the construction project or, when applicable, the takeover of a facility, the Contractor shall remove all remaining construction material, tools and equipment that are not specified to remain in the Institution as part of the construction Contract.
Section 01 35 55 Page 9 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
SECURITY REQUIREMENTS INSIDE THE PERIMETER
Section 01 35 56 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
PURPOSE
.1
To ensure that both the construction project and institutional operations may proceed without undue disruption or hindrance and that the security of the Institution is maintained at all times.
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1
"Contraband" means: .1 an intoxicant, .2 a weapon or a component thereof, ammunition for a weapon, and anything that is designed to kill, injure or disable a person or that is altered so as to be capable of killing, injuring or disabling a person, when possessed without prior authorization, .3 an explosive or a bomb or a component thereof, .4 currency over any applicable prescribed limit, when possessed by an inmate without prior authorization, and .5 any item not described in above paragraphs (.1) and (.4) that could jeopardize the security of a Penetentiary or the safety of persons, when that item is possessed without prior authorization. "Commercial Vehicle" means any motor vehicle used for the shipment of material, equipment and tools required for the construction project. "CSC" means Correctional Service Canada. "Director" means Director, Warden of the Institution. "Construction employees" means persons working for the General Contractor, the Subcontractors, equipment operators, material suppliers, testing and inspection companies and regulatory agencies. "Perimeter" means the fenced or walled area of the institution that restrains the movement of inmates.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
Section 01 35 56 Page 2 2011-06-10
.7
"Construction limits" means the areas as shown on the Contract Drawings that the Contractor will be allowed to work. This area may or may not be isolated from the security area of the institution. "CD" means Commissioner's Directive. "CPIC" means RCMP Canadian Police Information Centre. "Commissionaire" - Designated representative of the Director to monitor construction related activities including surveillance of inmate labour.
.8 .9
.10
1.3 GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Prior to the commencement of the Work, the Contractor will meet with the Director or designated representative to: .1 Discuss the nature and extent of all activities involved in the Project. The Contractor will: .1 Ensure that all construction employees are aware of the security requirements. .2 Ensure that a copy of the security requirements is always prominently on display at the job site. .3 Cooperate with Institutional personnel in ensuring that security requirements are observed by all construction employees. Subcontractors shall provide their Contractor with a list of contact names and "after hours" telephone numbers in case the Contractor needs to contact them after hours on behalf of the Institution. This information will be considered confidential and the Contractor is responsible for its secure storage. The Contractor shall also provide the Director or designated representative of the Institution a list of Contractor company contact names and after hours telephone numbers in case of emergency. Inside of the Institution proper all normal rules will apply.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 56 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.4 CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES REQUIREMENTS FOR ADMITTANCE
.1
Submit to the Director a signed security clearance request form for each construction employee seeking admission to the Millhaven Institution. Allow two (2) weeks for processing of security clearances (CPIC's). Employees will not be admitted to the Institution without a valid security clearance (CPIC) in place and a recent picture identification such as a provincial driver's license. Security clearances obtained from other CSC institutions are not valid at this institution. The Director shall require that facial photographs be taken of construction employees and these photographs may be displayed at appropriate locations in the institution or in an electronic database for identification purposes. The Director may require that these photographs be displayed prominently on the construction employees clothing while employees are in the Institution. Photograph ID's issued to construction employees by the Institution must be added to tool lists and returned to the Institution must be added to tool lists and returned to the Institution at the completion of their work activity at the Site. Entry to Institutional Property will be refused to any person there may be a reason to believe may be a security risk. Any person employed on the construction site will be subject to immediate removal from Institutional Property if they: .1 appear to be under the influence of alcohol, drugs or narcotics. .2 behave in an unusual or disorderly manner. .3 are in possession of contraband. CPIC's will be done for all construction workers but are not essential for access to the secure construction compound. The Warden retains the right to refuse access to the penitentiary reserve to anyone. However, work within the Main Institution will require a valid CPIC.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.4
Section 01 35 56 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.5
SITE ACCESS
.1
Access to the construction site is controlled by Commissionaires. Commissionaires will verify that workers and material are a valid part of the construction but will not do vehicle searches. Commissionaires will verify the ID of all who access site. Access to the site will be controlled by the Contractor and during the normal course of business Institutional staff will not be permitted on to the site due to Health and Safety Regulations.
.2
1.6
VEHICLES
.1
All unattended vehicles on CSC property shall have windows closed; doors and trunks shall be locked and keys removed. The keys shall be securely in the possession of the Owner or an employee of the company that owns the vehicle. Failure to comply with the above will result in an immediate shutdown of the job site and a stoppage of the Work for an indefinite period of time at the General Contractor's expense. The Director may limit at any time the number and type of vehicles allowed with the Institution. Drivers of delivery vehicles for material required by the Project may require (Exceptions are Bonded Couriers) security clearances (CPIC check) and must remain with their vehicle the entire time that the vehicle is in the Institution. The Director shall require that these vehicles be escorted by Institutional staff or Commissionaires while in the Institution. If the Director permits trailers to be left inside the secure perimeter of the Institution, these trailer doors will be locked at all times. All windows will be securely locked when left unoccupied. Subcontractors will be responsible for providing locks and keys for their trailers and to supply an extra key to the Contractor in case access is required after hours.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 35 56 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.7
PARKING
.1
Construction employees shall park in the "Contractor Parking Lot". Parking in other locations is prohibited and vehicles may be subject to removal. All Contractor's vehicles brought inside the Institution will have to be removed at the end of the day.
1.8
SHIPMENTS
.1
All shipments of project material, equipment and tools shall be addressed in the Contractor's name to avoid confusion with the Institution's own shipments. The Contractor must have his own employees on site to receive and verify any deliveries or shipments. CSC staff will not accept receipt of deliveries or shipments of any materials or tools.
1.9
TELEPHONES
.1
The installation of telephones, facsimile machines and computers requires the prior approval of the Director and must be included on the tool lists. Internet Connections are not permitted. Telephones (land lines), computers, facsimile machines and digital telephones are not permitted within the Institution unless approved by the Director. If approved, the Contractor is responsible to ensure they are not accessible by inmates and that they have password protection (as applicable). this equipment must be listed on tool lists and secured at all times. No office equipment is to be operated by inmates under any circumstances. Cellular phones are not permitted within the perimeter. The Director may approve but limit the use of two way radios.
.2
.3
1.10
WORK HOURS
.1
Normal work hours are 07:00 to 17:00, 7 days per week. Hours outside of this to be by agreement with the Institution. Work will not be permitted during weekends and statutory holidays without the permission of the Director. A minimum of two days (48
.2
Section 01 35 56 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.10 WORK HOURS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) hours) advance notice will be required to obtain the required permission.
1.11
OVERTIME WORK
.1
No overtime work will be allowed without the permission of the Director. If overtime work is required because of an emergency such as the completion of a concrete pour or work to make construction safe and secure, the Contractor will advise the Director as soon as this condition is known and follow the directions given by the Director. When overtime work, weekend statutory holiday work is required and approved by the Director, extra staff members may be posted by the Director of his designate, to maintain security surveillance. The Departmental Representative may post extra staff for inspection of construction activities.
.2
.1
General Contractor and his Subcontractors are to maintain a complete list of all tools and equipment on site and make this inventory available for inspection when required. Tool lists are to be prepared by the Contractor in consultation with the Commissionaire at the Principal Entrance upon arrival. The tool list will then be vetted by institutional security and, once approved, the Contractor and tools will be permitted access. Through the construction project the Contractor and Subcontractors shall maintain an up-to-date list of tools and equipment specified above. On a daily basis the Contractor and Subcontractors shall utilize a sign-out system for any tools issued. At a minimum, the sign-out system shall include a notation of the tool, to whom it was issued and confirmation that it was returned. All tools, not issued, shall be secured at all times.
.2
.3
Particular attention is to be placed in the distribution and physical location of power driven tools, files, saw blades, rod saws,
Section 01 35 56 Page 7 2011-06-10
.3
(Cont'd) wire, rope, ladders and any sort of jacking device. Note: Ram sets (Hilti guns) and other cartridge driven tools are not permitted for Work at this Institution.
.4
Store all tools and equipment in a secure room on in secure lockable tool boxes. Location of room and location and type of tool boxes are subject to the approval of the Director. Tool boxes or room are to remain locked unless placing or removing tools. Keys to remain in the possession of the employees of the Contractor. Subcontractors shall provide their General Contractor with a copy of keys to tool boxes in the event access is required after hours. All missing or lost tools or equipment shall be reported immediately to the Director. The Director will ensure that the Commissionaires carry out verifications of the Contractor's tools and equipment against the list provided by the Contractor. These checks shall be carried out at the following intervals: .1 At the beginning and conclusion of every construction project. .2 Weekly, when the construction project extends longer than a one week period. This physical inspection is to be done by the Commissionaires with the assistance of the applicable Contractor or Subcontractor and may take about one and one half (1 1/2) hours to complete. During this procedure, every tool listed by the Contractor will be located and accounted for. Also, at the end of each work day the Contractor and all his Subcontractors are required to ensure all tools are accounted for before leaving the site for the day. Once tools have been verified by each Contractor, they shall proceed to the Commissionaire's on-site office (immediately prior to departure) to make a verbal and a written
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 01 35 56 Page 8 2011-06-10
.8
(Cont'd) declaration amounts to the person signing a logbook utilized to record this activity. Certain tools/equipment such as hacksaw blades, drill bits, etc., considered consumable items, are to be counted (in bulk) and listed on the tool lists (i.e. 15 hacksaw blades) and are highly controlled items. The Contractor is responsible to retrieve and securely store any broken bits and blades during the work week until the weekly tool inspection is conducted with the Commissionaires. The Commissionaire and Contractor will then amend the tool list accordingly and the Contractor is responsible to remove the broken items from the Institution. Note: To avoid excessive buildup, quantities of these types of items on the job site shall be limited to what can normally be used in a one week period. If a Contractor needs to remove tools from the Site, he shall be responsible to notify the Commissionaire on duty, who shall record this information, noting Contractor, tool, date and initial the entry. Tool lists are to be modified accordingly. If the Contractor needs to bring additional tools or return previously removed tools to the work site, the Contractor is responsible to alert the Commissionaire, at the Principal Entrance. Tool lists are to be modified accordingly. When not in use all tools will be secured as indicated in this Section. Lay down areas will be inside the construction site unless alternative arrangements are made and materials and equipment in areas outside the fence will be secured by the Contractor.
.9
.10
.11
1.13
HARDWARE
.1
Security Hardware/Keys - Existing: .1 Turn over all removed security hardware to the Director of the Institution for disposal or for safekeeping until required for reinstallation. Security Hardware/Keys - New: .1 The Contractor shall arrange with the security hardware supplier to have the
.2
Section 01 35 56 Page 9 2011-06-10
1.13 HARDWARE (Cont'd)
.2
Security Hardware/Keys - New:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) cylinders/keys for the security hardware to be delivered from the manufacturer directly to the Institution, specifically the Security Maintenance Officer (SMO). .2 The SMO will provide a receipt to the Contractor for security hardware keys. .3 The Contractor will provide a copy of the above-mentioned receipt to the Departmental Representative. Construction Hardware/Keys: .1 The Contractor will use standard construction cylinders for locks for his use during the construction period. .2 The Contractor will issue instructions to his employees and subtrades, as necessary, to ensure safe custody of the construction set of keys. .3 Upon completion of each phase of the construction, the CSC representative will, in conjunction with the lock manufacturer: .1 accept the operational keys and lock manufacturer. .2 CSC will arrange for removal and return of the construction cores and install the operational core in all locks. Upon putting operational security hardware/keys into use, the CSC Commissionaire shall obtain these keys as they are required from the SMO and open doors as required by the Contractor. The Contractor shall issue instructions to his employees advising them that all security keys shall always remain with the CSC Commissionaire.
.3
.4
1.14 PRESCRIPTION DRUGS
.1
Employees of the Contractor who are required to take prescription drugs during the work day shall obtain approval of the Director to bring a one day supply only to the Institution.
1.15
CONTRABAND
.1
Weapons, ammunition, explosives, alcoholic beverages, drugs and narcotics are prohibited on Institutional Property.
Section 01 35 56 Page 10 2011-06-10
1.15 CONTRABAND (Cont'd)
.2
The discovery of contraband on the construction site and the identification of the person(s) responsible for the contraband shall be reported immediately to the Director. Contractors should be vigilant with both their staff and the staff of their subcontractors and suppliers that the discovery of contraband may result in cancellation of the security clearance of the affected employee. Serious infractions may result in the removal of the company from the Institution for the duration of the construction. Presence of arms and ammunition in vehicles of Contractors, Subcontractors and suppliers of employees of these will result in the immediate cancellation of security clearances for the driver of the vehicle.
.3
.4
1.16
SEARCHES
.1
All vehicles and persons entering Institutional Property may be subject to search. When the Director suspects, on reasonable grounds, that an employee of the Contractor is in possession of contraband, he may order order that person to be searched. All employees entering the Institution may be subject to screening of personal effects for traces of contraband drug residue.
.2
.3
1.17 ACCESS TO AND REMOVAL FROM INSTITUTIONAL PROPERTY
.1
Construction personnel and commercial vehicles will not be admitted to the Institution after normal working hours, unless approved by the Director.
1.18 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES
.1
Escorted commercial vehicles will be allowed to enter or leave the Institution through the vehicle access gate during the following hours: Regular working hours indicated. The Contractor shall advise the Director twenty four (24) hours in advance to the
.2
Section 01 35 56 Page 11 2011-06-10
1.18 MOVEMENT OF VEHICLES (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) arrival on the Site of heavy equipment such as concrete, trucks, cranes, etc. Vehicles being loaded with soil or other debris, or any vehicle considered impossible to search, must be under continuous supervision by CSC staff or Commissionaires working under the authority of the Director. Commercial vehicles will only be allowed access to Institutional Property when their contents are certified by the Contractor or his representative as being strictly necessary to the execution of the construction project. Vehicles shall be refused access to Institutional Property if, in the opinion of the Director, they contain any article which may jeopardize the security of the institution. Private vehicles of construction employees will not be allowed within the security wall of fence of maximum security institutions without the permission of the Director. With the approval of the Director, certain equipment may be permitted to remain on the construction site overnight or over the weekend. This equipment must be securely locked and disabled, with the power source removed (ie.e battery or propane tank) and taken outside the Institution or locked in a secure location, at the discretion of the Director. The Director may also require that equipment be secured with a chain and padlock to another solid object.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.19 MOVEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES ON INSTITUTIONAL PROPERTY
.1
Subject to the requirements of good security, the Director will permit the Contractor and his employees as much freedom of action and movement as is possible. However, notwithstanding paragraph above, the Director may: .1 Prohibit or restrict access to any part of the Institution. .2 Require that in certain areas of the Institution , either during the entire
.2
Section 01 35 56 Page 12 2011-06-10
1.19 MOVEMENT OF CONSTRUCTION EMPLOYEES ON INSTITUTIONAL PROPERTY (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) construction project or at certain intervals, construction employees only be allowed access when accompanied by a member of the CSC security staff. During the lunch and coffee breaks, all Contractors' Constructions Employees will remain within the construction site. Contractors' Construction Employees are not permitted to eat in the officer's lounge and dining room.
.3
1.20 SURVEILLANCE AND INSPECTION
.1
Construction activities and all related movement of personnel and vehicles may be subject to surveillance and inspection by CSC security staff members to ensure that established security requirements are met. CSC staff members will ensure that an understanding of the need to carry out surveillance and inspections, as specified above, is established among construction employees and maintained throughout the construction project.
.2
1.21 WORK
STOPPAGE OF
.1
The Director may request at any time that the Contractor, his employees, Subcontractors and their employees not enter or leave the Work site immediately due to a security situation occurring within the Institution. The Contractor's site supervisor shall note the name of the staff member making the request and the time of the request and obey the order as quickly as possible. The Contractor shall advise the Departmental Representative of this delay to the progress of the Work.
.2
1.22
LOCKDOWN
.1
In the event of a lockdown in the Institution the construction site will not be affected unless a count is short or there is a real threat to the site by riot. If an escape is suspected the gates to the site may be closed
Section 01 35 56 Page 13 2011-06-10
1.22 LOCKDOWN (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) and Institutional staff will verify persons leaving the site.
1.23 CONTACT WITH INMATES
.1
Unless specifically authorized, and in the course of Work related activity, it is forbidden to come into contact with inmates, to them with them, to receive objects from them or to give them objects. Any Contractor doing any of the above may be removed from the Site and may have his security clearance revoked. It is forbidden to take pictures of inmates, of CSC staff members or of any part of the Institution other than those required as part of this Contract.
.2
1.24 COMPLETION OF CONSTRUCTION PROJECT
.1
Upon completion of the construction project or, when applicable, the takeover of a facility, the Contractor shall remove all remaining construction material, tools and equipment that are not specified to remain in the Institution as part of the construction Contract.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 41 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES AND CODES
.1
Perform Work in accordance with National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2005, National Fire Code of Canada (NFC) 2010 and Ontario Building Code (OBC) 2006, including all amendments up to bid closing date and other codes of provincial or local application provided that in case of conflict or discrepancy, more stringent requirements apply. Meet or exceed requirements of: .1 Contract documents. .2 Specified standards, codes and referenced documents.
.2
1.2 HAZARDOUS MATERIAL DISCOVERY
.1
Stop work immediately and notify Departmental Representative if materials which may contain designated substances or PCB's.
1.3 IAQ - INDOOR AIR QUALITY
.1
Comply with CSA-Z204-94(R1999), Guideline for Managing Indoor Air Quality in Office Buildings.
1.4 ACCESSIBLE DESIGN
.1
Comply with CAN/CSA-B651-04, Accessible Design for the Built Environment, unless specified otherwise. In any case of conflict or discrepancy between the building codes and CAN/CSA-B651, the requirements of CAN/CSA-B651 shall apply.
1.5 STATISTICAL INFORMATION
.1
Provide statistical information to Departmental Representative: .1 Within ten working days after March 31 and September 30 occurring between commencement of work and final completion .2 Within ten working days after final completion.
Section 01 41 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5 STATISTICAL INFORMATION (Cont'd)
.2
Include in statistical information: .1 Statement of total person days of labour used on site in performance of contract, including labour provided under sub-contracts. .2 Estimate of total value in dollars of material delivered to site and installed, including material provided and installed under sub-contracts. This information is required by Government of Canada solely to provide statistics that will aid in assessing socio-economic benefits of this project.
.3
1.6
TAXES
.1
Pay applicable Federal, Provincial and Municipal taxes.
1.7
EXAMINATION
.1
Examine existing conditions and determine conditions affecting work. Conduct concrete floor moisture testing using Calcium Chloride moisture tests. .1 Submit test results to Departmental Representative for approval prior to installing any flooring. Conduct one test per 100 m2 of area being covered.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Section 01 41 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
Section 01 42 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS
.1
The abbreviations and acronyms are commonly found in the Project Manual and represent the associated organizations or terms.
1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS
.1
A: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15
AC: acoustic. AC PAN: acoustic panel. ACU: acoustic unit ceiling. AFF: above finished floor. AC PLAS: acoustic plaster. ACT: acoustic tile. ACR CU LVR: acrylic cube louvre. ADH: adhesive. ADJ: adjustable. A/C: air conditioner. AL: aluminum. AB: anchor bolt. ANOD: anodized. ARCH: architecture. ARCH BLK: architectural block.
.2
B: .1 B: base. .2 BEAST: benthic assessment of sediment. .3 BH: bore hole. .4 BL: bottom layer. .5 BLK: block. .6 BLKD: bulkhead. .7 BM: beam. .8 BOT: bottom. .9 BMP: best management practice. .10 B PL: base plate. .11 BRG: bearing. .12 BRK: brick. .13 BSMT: basement. .14 BTEX: benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene, and xylenes. .15 BUR: built-up roof. C: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
.3
CAL: caliper. CANTIL: cantilever. CB: catch basin. CC: centre to centre. CCN: contemplated change notice. CDF: controlled density fill.
Section 01 42 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.2 MATERIALS, EQUIPMENT AND METHODS (Cont'd)
.3
C:(Cont'd) .7 CEC: Canadian electical code. .8 CF: chair fabric. .9 CHAN: channel. .10 CHS: Canadian hydrographic service. .11 CJ: construction joint. .12 CL: centreline. .13 CK: cork. .14 CLG: ceiling. .15 CLR: clear. .16 COL: column. .17 CONC: concrete. .18 CONC BLK: concrete block. .19 CONC BRK: concrete brick. .20 CONT: continuous. .21 CONT J: control joint. .22 COMPL: complete. .23 CM: centimetre. (Nursery stock). .24 CPL: cement plaster. .25 CPM: critical path method. .26 CPT: carpet. .27 CPTT: carpet tile. .28 CT: ceramic tile. .29 CVT: conductive vinyl tile. .30 C/W: complete with. D: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 E: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11
.4
D: deep. DD: dutch door. DEG: degree. DF: drinking fountain. DIA: diameter. DIM: dimension. DL: dead load. DMNT: demountable. DP: dampproofing. DR: door. DRP: drapery. DWL: dowel.
.5
EA: each. ECF: engineered containment facility. EE: each end. EF: each face. EL: elevation. ELEC: electric. ELEV: elevator. EM: expanded metal. ENCL: enclosure. EQ: equal. EXH: exhaust.
Section 01 42 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
.5
E:(Cont'd) .12 EXIST: existing. .13 EXPJ: expansion joint. .14 EXP STRUCT: exposed structure. .15 EXT: exterior. .16 EW: each way. F: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 G: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 H: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15
.6
FC: fuel contributed. FD: floor drain. FDN: foundation. FEAT W: feature wall. FEXT: fire extinguisher. FH: fire hose. FHC: fire hose cabinet. FHR: fire hose rack. FIN: finish. FIP: federal identity program. FL: floor. FLD: field. FLUOR: fluorescent. FR: frame. FRR: fire resistance rating. FTG: footing.
.7
GALV: galvanized steel. GBD: gypsum board. GC: General Conditions. GF: ground floor. GFCI: ground fault circuit interrupter. GL: glass or glazing. GL BLK: glass block. GPC: gypsum plaster ceiling. GPW: gypsum plaster wall.
.8
HB: hose bib. HC: hollow core. HCWD: hollow core wood door. HDW: hardware. HDWD: hardwood. HM: hollow metal. HOR: horizontal. HOR EF: horizontal each face. HP: hydro pole. HPA: Hamilton Port Authority. HRV: heat recovery ventilator. HT: height. HTR: heater. HWT: hot water tank. HYD: hydrant.
Section 01 42 13 Page 4 2011-06-10
.9
I: .1 .2 .3 .4 J: .1 K: .1 L: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 M: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 N: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 O: .1 .2
ICF: insulated concrete formwork. ID: inside diameter. INS: insulation. INTLK: interlock.
.10
JT: joint.
.11
KPL: kick plate.
.12
LAV: lavatory. LDG: landing. LG: long. LINO: linoleum. LL: live load.
.13
MAS: masonry. MAS FL: masonry flashing. MAX: maximum. MCL: metal cube louvre. MECH: mechanical. MET: metal. MET DK: metal deck. MET FL: metal flashing. MET GRID CLG: metal grid ceiling. MET GRTG: metal grating. MET LIN CLG: metal linear ceiling. MET T PTN: metal toilet partition. MH: maintenance hole. MIN: minimum. MLP: metal lath and plaster. MO: masonry opening. MR: marble. MT: metal threshold. MWP: membrane waterproofing.
.14
NBC: national building code. NF: near face. NFC: national fire code. NIC: not in contract. NRC: noise reduction coefficient. NRP: non removable pin. NTS: not to scale.
.15
OBC: Ontario building code. OC: on centre.
Section 01 42 13 Page 5 2011-06-10
.15
O:(Cont'd) .3 OD: outside diameter. .4 OPNG: opening. .5 OPR: operator. .6 OVHD: overhead. .7 OWSJ: open web steel joist. P: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 Q: .1 .2 .3 R: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18
.16
P: prefinished. PAH: polynuclear aromatic hydrocarbons. PARG: parging. PCC: precast concrete. PCT: porcelain ceramic tile. PED ACS FLG: pedestal access flooring. PF: panel fabric. PL: plate. PLAM: plastic laminate. PLAS: plaster. PLYWD: plywood. PR: pair. PREFAB: prefabricated. PRFL: profile. PT: paint. PTN: partition. PVC: polyvinyl cholide.
.17
QTB: quarry tile base. QTF: quarry tile floor. QTR: quarry tile roof.
.18
R: radius. RA: return air. RB: resilient base. RC: reinforced concrete. RCPT: receptacle. RD: roof drain. REINF: reinforced/reinforcing. REQD: required. REQT: requirement. RFT: rubber floor tile. RM: room. RO: rough opening. RP: radiant panel. RRS: recycled rubber sheet. RRT: recycled rubber tile. RSD: rolling steel door. RSF: rubber sheet flooring. RWL: rain water leader.
Section 01 42 13 Page 6 2011-06-10
.19
S: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23 .24 T: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 U: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 V: .1 .2 .3
SAN SEW: sanitary sewer. SCHED: schedule. SC: solic core. SCRN: screen. SCWD: solid core wood door. SD: smoke developed. SDT: static dissipative tile. SECT: section. SL: sliding. SLR: sealer. SPEC: specification. SS: stainless steel. STD: standard. STL: steel. STL BM: steel beam. STC: sound tranmission class. STL FL DK: steel floor deck. STL PL: steel plate. STN: stone. STR: structure or structural. ST SEW: storm sewer. S&U: stain and urethane. S&V: stain and varnish. SVT: solid vinyl tile.
.20
T: top. T&B: top and bottom. TCB: turbidity control plan. TEL: telephone. TER: terrazzo. TERT: terrazzo tile. THKNS: thickness. THR: threshold. TMPD: tempered. TOPG: topping. TRANSV: transverse. TYP: typical.
.21
U: urethane. UCUT: undercut. UGRD: underground. UOS: unless otherwise specified. U/S: underside. UR: urinal.
.22
VCF: vinyl coated fabric. VCT: vinyl compositition tile. VERT: vertical.
Section 01 42 13 Page 7 2011-06-10
.22
V:(Cont'd) .4 VERT B: vertical blinds. .5 VERT EF: vertical each face. .6 VSF: vinyl sheet flooring. .7 VT: vinyl tile. .8 VWC: vinyl wall covering. W: .1 WC: water closet. .2 W-C: wall connectors. .3 WD: wood. .4 WDV: wood veneer. .5 WH: wall hydrant. .6 WHMIS: workplace hazardous materials information system. .7 WP: waterproofing. .8 WR: washroom. .9 WSIB: workplace safety and insurnace board. .10 WT: weight. .11 WTP: water treatment plant.
.23
1.3 STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS
.1
Standards writing organizations: .1 AA - Aluminum Association. .2 ACPA - American Concrete Pipe Association. .3 ANSI - American National Standards Institute. .4 ASHRAE - American Society of Heating and Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers. .5 ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials. .6 AWI/AWMAC - Architectural Woodwork Institute/Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada. .7 AWPA - American Wood Preservers' Association. .8 AWWA - American Water Works Association. .9 BHMA - Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. .10 CCDC - Canadian Construction Documents Committee. .11 CCMPA - Canadian Concrete Masonry Producers Association. .12 CGSB - Canadian General Standards Board. .13 CNTA - Canadian Nursery Trades Association. .14 CPCA - Canadian Painting Contractors Association.
Section 01 42 13 Page 8 2011-06-10
1.3 STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .15 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. .16 CSA - Canadian Standards Association. .17 CSC - Construction Specifications Canada. .18 CSDMA - Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association. .19 CSI - Construction Specifications Institute. .20 CSSBI - Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute. .21 CRCA - Canadian Roofing Contractors Association. .22 DHI - Door and Hardware Insitute. .23 EEMAC - Electrical and Electronic Manufacturer's Association of Canada. .24 ESA - Electrical Safety Authority. .25 FCC - Fire Commissioner of Canada. .26 FSC - Forest Stewardship Council. .27 GANA - Glass Association of North America. .28 HMMA - Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association. .29 IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc. .30 ISO - International Organization for Standardization. .31 IWFA - International Window Film Association. .32 LEED - LEED Canada, Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design. .33 MPI - Master Painters Insitute. .34 NAAMM - National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. .35 NCPI - National Clay Pipe Institute. .36 NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association. .37 NFPA - National Fire Protection Association. .38 OPSD - Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings. .39 OPSS - Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications. .40 PPI - Plasctics Pipe Institute. .41 SDI - Steel Door Intitute. .42 SCAQMD - South Coast Air Quality Management District. .43 TIA - Telecommunications Industry Association. .44 TIAC - Thermal Insulation Association of Canada.
Section 01 42 13 Page 9 2011-06-10
1.3 STANDARDS ORGANIZATIONS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .45 TTMAC - Terrazzo Tile and Marble Association of Canada. .46 UL - Underwriters Laboratories. .47 ULC - Underwriters Laboratories of Canada. .48 US EPA - United States Environmental Protection Agency. .49 WH - Warnock Hersey.
1.4 FEDERAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENGIES
.1
Departments, agencies and crown corporations. .1 CEAA - Canadian Environmental Assessment Agency. .2 CSC - Correctional Service Canada. .3 CRA - Canada Revenue Agency. .4 DND - Department of National Defence. .5 EC - Environment Canada. .6 FHBRO - Federal Heritage Buildings Review Office. .7 HC - Health Canada. .8 HCD - Heritage Conservation Directorate. .9 LC - Labour Canada. .10 PC - Parks Canada. .11 PWGSC - Public Works and Government Services Canada. .12 RCMP - Royal Canadian Mounted Police. .13 TBS - Treasury Board Secretariat. .14 TC - Transport Canada.
1.5 PROVINCIAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENGIES
.1
MOEE - Ontario Ministry of Environment and Energy. MOL - Ontario Ministry of Labour. MTO and MOT - Ontario Ministry of Transportation. TSSA - Technical Standards and Safety Authority.
.2 .3
.4
Section 01 42 13 Page 10 2011-06-10
1.6 INTERNATIONAL GOVERNMENT DEPARTMENTS AND AGENCIES
.1
DOHMH - New York City Department of Health and Mental Hygiene, USA. GSA - Government Services Administration, USA.
.2
1.7 UNITS OF MEASURE METRIC
.1
The following abbreviations of units of measure are commonly found in the Project Manual: .1 C: Celsius. .2 cm: centimetre. .3 kg: kilogram. .4 kg/m3: kilogram per cubic metre. .5 kN: kilonewton. .6 kPa: kilopascals. .7 kw: kilowatts. .8 l/s: litre per second. .9 m: metre. .10 m3: cubic metre. .11 mg/kg: milligrams per kilogram. .12 mg/L: milligrams per litre. .13 mm: millimetres. .14 MPa: megapascal. .15 NTU: nephelometric turbidity unit. .16 ppm: parts per million. .17 ug/L: micrograms per litre. .18 ug/m3: micrograms per cubic metre.
1.8 UNITS OF MEASURE IMPERIAL
.1
The following abbreviations of units of measure are commonly found in the Project Manual: .1 F: Fahrenheit. .2 ft: foot/feet. .3 ga: guage. .4 gpm: gallons per minute. .5 in: inches. .6 lbs: pounds. .7 NTU: nephelometric turbidity unit. .8 psi: pounds-force per square inch. .9 ppm: parts per million.
Section 01 42 13 Page 11 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Inspection and testing, administrative and enforcement requirements. Tests and mix designs. Mock-ups. Mill tests. Equipment and system adjust and balance.
.2 .3 .4 .5
.1
Section 01 91 20 - Project Commissioning.
1.3
INSPECTION
.1
Allow Departmental Representative access to Work. If part of Work is in preparation at locations other than Place of Work, allow access to such Work whenever it is in progress. Give timely notice requesting inspection if Work is designated for special tests, inspections or approvals by Departmental Representative instructions, or law of Place of Work. If Contractor covers or permits to be covered Work that has been designated for special tests, inspections or approvals before such is made, uncover such Work, have inspections or tests satisfactorily completed and make good such Work. Departmental representative may order any part of Work to be examined if Work is suspected to be not in accordance with Contract Documents. If, upon examination such work is found not in accordance with Contract Documents, correct such Work and pay cost of examination and correction. If such Work is found in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental Representative shall pay cost of examination and replacement.
.2
.3
.4
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4 INDEPENDENT INSPECTION AGENCIES
.1
Independent Inspection/Testing Agencies will be engaged by Departmental Representative for purpose of inspecting and/or testing portions of Work. Allocated costs: to Section 01 21 00. Provide equipment required for executing inspection and testing by appointed agencies. Employment of inspection/testing agencies does not relax responsibility to perform Work in accordance with Contract Documents. If defects are revealed during inspection and/or testing, appointed agency will request additional inspection and/or testing to ascertain full degree of defect. Correct defect and irregularities as advised by Departmental Representative at no cost to Departmental Representative. Pay costs for retesting and reinspection.
.2 .3
.4
.5
1.5
ACCESS TO WORK
.1
Allow inspection/testing agencies access to Work, off site manufacturing and fabrication plants. Co-operate to provide reasonable facilities for such access.
.2
1.6
PROCEDURES
.1
Notify appropriate agency and Departmental Representative in advance of requirement for tests, in order that attendance arrangements can be made. Submit samples and/or materials required for testing, as specifically requested in specifications. Submit with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence so as not to cause delay in Work. Provide labour and facilities to obtain and handle samples and materials on site. Provide sufficient space to store and cure test samples.
.2
.3
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.7
REJECTED WORK
.1
Remove defective Work, whether result of poor workmanship, use of defective products or damage and whether incorporated in Work or not, which has been rejected by Departmental Representative as failing to conform to Contract Documents. Replace or re-execute in accordance with Contract Documents. Make good other Contractor's work damaged by such removals or replacements promptly. If in opinion of Departmental Representative it is not expedient to correct defective Work or Work not performed in accordance with Contract Documents, Departmental Representative may deduct from Contract Price difference in value between Work performed and that called for by Contract Documents, amount of which shall be determined by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
1.8
REPORTS
.1
Submit 4 copies of inspection and test reports to Departmental Representative. Provide copies to Subcontractor of work being inspected or tested, and manufacturer or fabricator of material being inspected or tested.
.2
1.9 TESTS AND MIX DESIGNS
.1
Furnish test results and mix designs as may be requested. The cost of tests and mix designs beyond those called for in Contract Documents or beyond those required by law of Place of Work shall be appraised by Departmental Representative and may be authorized as recoverable.
.2
1.10
MOCK-UPS
.1
Prepare mock-ups for Work specifically requested in specifications. Include for Work of all Sections required to provide mock-ups. Construct in all locations acceptable to Departmental Representative.
.2
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.10 MOCK-UPS (Cont'd)
.3
Prepare mock-ups for Departmental Representative 's review with reasonable promptness and in an orderly sequence, so as not to cause any delay in Work. Failure to prepare mock-ups in ample time is not considered sufficient reason for an extension of Contract Time and no claim for extension by reason of such default will be allowed. If requested, Departmental Representative will assist in preparing a schedule fixing dates for preparation.
.4
.5
1.11
MILL TESTS
.1
Submit mill test certificates as required of specification Sections.
1.12 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Submit testing, adjusting and balancing reports for mechanical, electrical and building equipment systems. Submit Commissioning Documentation in accordance with Section 01 91 00. Refer to Section 01 91 20 for definitive requirements.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
QUALITY CONTROL
Section 01 45 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Temporary utilities.
.1 .2
Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities. Section 01 56 00 - Temporary Barriers and Enclosures.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL
.1
Provide temporary utilities controls in order to execute work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.
.2
1.5
DEWATERING
.1
Provide temporary drainage and pumping facilities to keep excavations and site free from standing water.
1.6
WATER SUPPLY
.1
Provide continuous supply of potable water for construction use. Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company and pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal.
.2
1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION
.1
Provide temporary heating required during construction period, including attendance, maintenance and fuel. Construction heaters used inside building must be vented to outside or be non-flameless type. Solid fuel salamanders are not permitted.
.2
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION (Cont'd)
.3
Provide temporary heat and ventilation in enclosed areas as required to: .1 Facilitate progress of Work. .2 Protect Work and products against dampness and cold. .3 Prevent moisture condensation on surfaces. .4 Provide ambient temperatures and humidity levels for storage, installation and curing of materials. .5 Provide adequate ventilation to meet health regulations for safe working environment. Maintain temperatures of minimum 10C in areas where construction is in progress. Ventilating: .1 Prevent accumulations of dust, fumes, mists, vapours or gases in areas occupied during construction. .2 Provide local exhaust ventilation to prevent harmful accumulation of hazardous substances into atmosphere of occupied areas. .3 Dispose of exhaust materials in manner that will not result in harmful exposure to persons. .4 Ventilate storage spaces containing hazardous or volatile materials. .5 Ventilate temporary sanitary facilities. .6 Continue operation of ventilation and exhaust system for time after cessation of work process to assure removal of harmful contaminants. Permanent heating system of building, may not be used when available. Be responsible for damage to heating system if use is permitted. On completion of Work for which permanent heating system is used, restore to "new" condition. Pay costs for maintaining temporary heat, when using permanent heating system. Maintain strict supervision of operation of temporary heating and ventilating equipment to: .1 Conform with applicable codes and standards. .2 Enforce safe practices.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.7 TEMPORARY HEATING AND VENTILATION (Cont'd)
.9
(Cont'd) .3 Prevent abuse of services. .4 Prevent damage to finishes. .5 Vent direct-fired combustion units to outside. Be responsible for damage to Work due to failure in providing adequate heat and protection during construction.
.10
1.8 TEMPORARY POWER AND LIGHT
.1
Provide and pay for temporary power during construction for temporary lighting and operating of power tools. Arrange for connection with appropriate utility company. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal. Temporary power for electric cranes and other equipment requiring in excess of above is responsibility of Contractor. Provide and maintain temporary lighting throughout project. Ensure level of illumination on all floors and stairs is not less than 162 lx. Electrical power and lighting systems installed under this Contract may be used for construction requirements only with prior approval of Departmental Representative provided that guarantees are not affected. Make good damage to electrical system caused by use under this Contract. Replace lamps which have been used for more than 3 months.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.9 TEMPORARY COMMUNICATION FACILITIES
.1
Provide and pay for temporary telephone, fax and data hook up, lines and equipment necessary for own use and use of Departmental Representative.
1.10 FIRE PROTECTION
.1
Provide and maintain temporary fire protection equipment during performance of Work required by insurance companies having jurisdiction and governing codes, regulations and bylaws.
TEMPORARY UTILITIES
Section 01 51 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.10 FIRE PROTECTION (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.2
Burning rubbish and construction waste materials is not permitted on site.
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 TEMPORARY EROSION AND SEDIMENTATION CONTROL
.1
Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established.
.2
.3
Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
END
CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES
Section 01 52 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
Construction aids. Office, sheds and trailers. Parking. Project identification.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB 1.189-2000, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood. .2 CGSB 1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test and Standard Practices for Concrete. .2 CSA-0121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .3 CAN/CSA-S269.2-M87(R2003), Access Scaffolding for Construction Purposes. .4 CAN/CSA-Z321-96(R2006), Signs and Symbols for the Occupational Environment.
.2
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
.1
Prepare site plan indicating proposed location and dimensions of area to be fenced and used by Contractor, number of trailers to be used, avenues of ingress/egress to fenced area and details of fence installation. Identify areas which have to be gravelled to prevent tracking of mud. Indicate use of supplemental or other staging area.
.2
.3
Section 01 52 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4 INSTALLATION AND REMOVAL (Cont'd)
.4
Provide construction facilities in order to execute work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.
.5
1.5
SCAFFOLDING
.1
Scaffolding in accordance with CAN/CSA-S269.2. Provide and maintain scaffolding, ramps, ladders, swing staging, platforms and temporary stairs as required for the Work.
.2
1.6
HOISTING
.1
Provide, operate and maintain hoists/cranes required for moving of workers, materials and equipment. Make financial arrangements with Subcontractors for use thereof. Hoists/cranes shall be operated by qualified operator.
.2
1.7 SITE STORAGE/LOADING
.1
Confine work and operations of employees to areas defined by Contract Documents. Do not unreasonably encumber premises with products. Do not load or permit to load any part of Work with a weight or force that will endanger the Work.
.2
1.8 CONSTRUCTION PARKING
.1
Parking will not be permitted on site during regular work hours. Parking may be permitted on site after hours in a location as designated by the Departmental Representative provided it does not disrupt performance of Work. Coordinate with Sections 01 35 55 and 01 35 56. Provide and maintain adequate access to project site. Build and maintain temporary roads where indicated or directed by Departmental representative and provide snow removal during period of Work.
.2
.3
Section 01 52 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.8 CONSTRUCTION PARKING (Cont'd)
.4
If authorized to use existing roads for access to project site, maintain such roads for duration of Contract and make good damage resulting from Contractors' use of roads.
1.9
SECURITY
.1
Pay for responsible security personnel to guard site and contents of site after working hours and during holidays. Coordinate with Sections 01 35 55 and 01 35 56.
.2
1.10
OFFICES
.1
Provide office heated to 22C, lighted 750 lx and ventilated, of sufficient size to accommodate site meetings and furnished with drawing laydown table. Provide a clearly marked and fully stocked first-aid case in a readily available location. Subcontractors may provide their own offices as necessary. Direct location of these offices.
.2
.3
1.11
TRAILER
.1
Provide trailer for Clerk of Works to electric heating, air conditioning and lighting; washroom and water closet with hot and cold running water and supplies; and labour for daily cleaning of the washrooms and trailer. Equip trailer with a lockable desk and two swivel chairs. Provide and pay for telephone services consisting of one facsimile machine on a separate line and two business lines (plus intercom) on five key sets for local calls and a dedicated separate line for a facsimile machine.
.2
.3
Section 01 52 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.12 EQUIPMENT, TOOL AND MATERIALS STORAGE
.1
Provide and maintain, in a clean and orderly condition, lockable weatherproof sheds for storage of tools, equipment and materials. Locate materials not required to be stored in weatherproof sheds on site in a manner to cause least interference with work activities.
.2
1.13 SANITARY FACILITIES
.1
Provide sanitary facilities for work force in accordance with governing regulations and ordinances. Post notices and take such precautions as required by local health authorities. Keep area and premises in sanitary condition.
.2
1.14 CONSTRUCTION SIGNAGE
.1
No other signs or advertisements, other than warning signs, are permitted on site. Signs and notices for safety and instruction shall be in both official languages Graphic symbols shall conform to CAN/CSA-Z321. Maintain approved signs and notices in good condition for duration of project, and dispose of off site on completion of project or earlier if directed by Departmental representative.
.2
.3
1.15 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC
.1
Provide access and temporary relocated roads as necessary to maintain traffic. Maintain and protect traffic on affected roads during construction period except as otherwise specifically directed by Departmental representative. Provide measures for protection and diversion of traffic, including provision of watch-persons and flag-persons, erection of barricades, placing of lights around and in front of equipment and work, and erection and maintenance of adequate warning, danger, and direction signs
.2
.3
Section 01 52 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.15 PROTECTION AND MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC (Cont'd)
.4
Protect travelling public from damage to person and property. Contractor's traffic on roads selected for hauling material to and from site to interfere as little as possible with public traffic. Verify adequacy of existing roads and allowable load limit on these roads. Contractor: responsible for repair of damage to roads caused by construction operations. Construct access and haul roads necessary. Provide necessary lighting, signs, barricades, and distinctive markings for safe movement of traffic. Dust control: adequate to ensure safe operation at all times. Location, grade, width, and alignment of construction and hauling roads: subject to approval by Departmental representative. Lighting: to assure full and clear visibility for full width of haul road and work areas during night work operations. Provide snow removal during period of Work. Remove, upon completion of work, haul roads designated by Departmental representative.
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9
.10
.11
.12 .13
1.16
CLEAN-UP
.1
Remove construction debris, waste materials, packaging material from work site daily. Clean dirt or mud tracked onto paved or surfaced roadways. Store materials resulting from demolition activities that are salvageable. Stack stored new or salvaged material.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 52 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
.2
.3
END
TEMPORARY BARRIERS AND ENCLOSURES
Section 01 56 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4
Barriers. Environmental Controls. Traffic Controls. Fire Routes.
.1 .2
Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities. Section 01 52 00 - Construction Facilities.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.189-2000, Exterior Alkyd Primer for Wood. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.59-97, Alkyd Exterior Gloss Enamel. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA-O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood.
.2
.1
Provide temporary controls in order to execute Work expeditiously. Remove from site all such work after use.
.2
1.5
HOARDING
.1
Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain. Protect from damage by equipment and construction procedures. Temporary fencing: .1 Erect temporary site enclosure using modular freestanding fencing: galvanized, minimum 1.8 m high, chain link or welded steel mesh, pipe rail. .2 Wire fabric shall be pulled taut before fixing in place. Tautness, when fixed in place, is to be established by pull tests. The application of a 12 kg perpendicular pull at the mid point of the mesh panel (mid point of
.2
Section 01 56 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5 HOARDING (Cont'd)
.2
Temporary fencing:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) posts/rails) shall show a displacement of no more than 30 mm from the vertical plane. .3 Provide one lockable truck entrance gate and at least one pedestrian door as directed and conforming to applicable traffic restrictions on adjacent streets. .4 Equip gates with locks and keys. .5 Maintain fence in good repair.
1.6 GUARD RAILS AND BARRICADES
.1
Provide secure, rigid guard rails and barricades around deep excavations, open shafts, open stair wells, open edges of floors and roofs. Provide as required by governing authorities.
.2
1.7 WEATHER ENCLOSURES
.1
Provide weather tight closures to unfinished door and window openings, tops of shafts and other openings in floors and roofs. Close off floor areas where walls are not finished; seal off other openings; enclose building interior work for temporary heat. Design enclosures to withstand wind pressure and snow loading.
.2
.3
1.8 DUST TIGHT SCREENS
.1
Provide dust tight screens or insulated partitions to localize dust generating activities, and for protection of workers, finished areas of Work and public. Maintain and relocate protection until such work is complete.
.2
1.9
ACCESS TO SITE
.1
Provide and maintain access roads, sidewalk crossings, ramps and construction runways as may be required for access to Work.
Section 01 56 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.10 PROTECTION FOR OFF-SITE AND PUBLIC PROPERTY
.1
Protect surrounding private and public property from damage during performance of Work. Be responsible for damage incurred.
.2
1.11 PROTECTION OF BUILDING FINISHES
.1
Provide protection for finished and partially finished building finishes and equipment during performance of Work. Provide necessary screens, covers, and hoardings. Confirm with Department representative locations and installation schedule 3 days prior to installation. Be responsible for damage incurred due to lack of or improper protection.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
COMMON PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 61 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Product quality, availability, storage, handling, protection, and transportation. Manufacturer's instructions. Quality of Work, coordination and fastenings. Existing facilities.
.2 .3 .4
.1
Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Within text of specifications, reference may be made to reference standards. Conform to these standards, in whole or in part as specifically requested in specifications. If there is question as to whether any product or system is in conformance with applicable standards, Departmental Representative reserves right to have such products or systems tested to prove or disprove conformance. The cost for such testing will be born by Owner in event of conformance with Contract Documents or by Contractor in event of non-conformance. Conform to latest date of issue of referenced standards in effect on date of submission of Bids, except where specific date or issue is specifically noted. OPSS Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications and OPSD Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings quoted in these specifications are available online at http://www.raqsa.mto.gov.on.ca/ techpubs/ops.nsf/OPSHomepage.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 01 61 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4
QUALITY
.1
Products, materials, equipment and articles (referred to as products throughout specifications) incorporated in Work shall be new, not damaged or defective, and of best quality (compatible with specifications) for purpose intended. If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of Products provided. Defective products, whenever identified prior to completion of Work, will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Inspection does not relieve responsibility, but is precaution against oversight or error. Remove and replace defective products at own expense and be responsible for delays and expenses caused by rejection. Should any dispute arise as to quality or fitness of products, decision rests strictly with Departmental Representative based upon requirements of Contract Documents. Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, maintain uniformity of manufacture for any particular or like item throughout building. Permanent labels, trademarks and nameplates on products are not acceptable in prominent locations, except where required for operating instructions, or when located in mechanical or electrical rooms.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.5
AVAILABILITY
.1
Immediately upon signing Contract, review product delivery requirements and anticipate foreseeable supply delays for any items. If delays in supply of products are foreseeable, notify Departmental representative of such, in order that substitutions or other remedial action may be authorized in ample time to prevent delay in performance of Work. In event of failure to notify Departmental representative at commencement of Work and should it subsequently appear that Work may be delayed for such reason, Departmental representative reserves right to substitute more readily available products of similar character, at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.
.2
Section 01 61 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.6 METRIC SIZED MATERIALS
.1
SI metric units of measurement are used exclusively on the drawings and in the specifications for this project. The Contractor is required to provide metric products in the sizes called for in the Contract Documents except where a valid claim can be made that a particular product is not available on the Canadian market. Claims for exemptions from use of metric sized products shall be in writing and fully substantiated with supportive documentation. Promptly submit application to Departmental Representative for consideration and ruling. Non-metric sized products may not be used unless Contractor's application has been approved in writing by the Departmental Representative. Difficulties caused by the Contractor's lack of planning and effort to obtain modular metric sized products which are available on the Canadian market will not be considered sufficient reasons for claiming that they cannot be provided. Claims for additional costs due to provision of specified modular metric sized products will not be considered.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.7 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
.1
Handle and store products in manner to prevent damage, adulteration, deterioration and soiling and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions when applicable. Store packaged or bundled products in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Do not remove from packaging or bundling until required in Work. Store products subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures. Store cementitious products clear of earth or concrete floors, and away from walls. Keep sand, when used for grout or mortar materials, clean and dry. Store sand on wooden
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 01 61 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.7 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION (Cont'd)
.5
(Cont'd) platforms and cover with waterproof tarpaulins during inclement weather. Store sheet materials, and lumber on flat, solid supports and keep clear of ground. Slope to shed moisture. Store and mix paints in heated and ventilated room. Remove oily rags and other combustible debris from site daily. Take every precaution necessary to prevent spontaneous combustion. Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Departmental representative. Touch-up damaged factory finished surfaces to Departmental representative's satisfaction. Use touch-up materials to match original. Do not paint over name plates.
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.8
TRANSPORTATION
.1
Pay costs of transportation of products required in performance of Work.
1.9 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Unless otherwise indicated in specifications, install or erect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not rely on labels or enclosures provided with products. Obtain written instructions directly from manufacturers. Notify Departmental representative in writing, of conflicts between specifications and manufacturer's instructions, so that Departmental representative may establish course of action. Improper installation or erection of products, due to failure in complying with these requirements, authorizes Departmental representative to require removal and re-installation at no increase in Contract Price or Contract Time.
.2
.3
Section 01 61 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.10
QUALITY OF WORK.1
Ensure Quality of Work is of highest standard, executed by workers experienced and skilled in respective duties for which they are employed. Immediately notify Departmental representative if required Work is such as to make it impractical to produce required results. Do not employ anyone unskilled in their required duties. Departmental representative reserves right to require dismissal from site, workers deemed incompetent or careless. Decisions as to standard or fitness of Quality of Work in cases of dispute rest solely with Departmental representative, whose decision is final.
.2
.3
1.11
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Ensure cooperation of workers in laying out Work. Maintain efficient and continuous supervision. Be responsible for coordination and placement of openings, sleeves and accessories.
.2
1.12
CONCEALMENT
.1
In finished areas, conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floors, walls and ceilings, except where indicated otherwise. Before installation, inform Departmental representative if there is interference. Install as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
1.13
REMEDIAL WORK
.1
Perform remedial work required to repair or replace parts or portions of Work identified as defective or unacceptable. Coordinate adjacent affected Work as required. Perform remedial work by specialists familiar with materials affected. Perform in a manner to neither damage nor put at risk any portion of Work.
.2
Section 01 61 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.14 LOCATION OF FIXTURES
.1
Consider location of fixtures, outlets, and mechanical and electrical items indicated as approximate. Inform Departmental Representative of conflicting installation. Install as directed.
.2
1.15
FASTENINGS
.1
Provide metal fastenings and accessories in same texture, colour and finish as adjacent materials, unless indicated otherwise. Prevent electrolytic action between dissimilar metals and materials. Use non-corrosive hot dip galvanized steel fasteners and anchors for securing exterior work, unless stainless steel or other material is specifically requested in affected specification Section. Space anchors within individual load limit or shear capacity and ensure they provide positive permanent anchorage. Wood, or any other organic material plugs are not acceptable. Keep exposed fastenings to a minimum, space evenly and install neatly. Fastenings which cause spalling or cracking of material to which anchorage is made are not acceptable.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.16 FASTENINGS EQUIPMENT
.1
Use fastenings of standard commercial sizes and patterns with material and finish suitable for service. Use heavy hexagon heads, semi-finished unless otherwise specified. Use No.304 stainless steel for exterior areas. Bolts may not project more than one diameter beyond nuts. Use plain type washers on equipment, sheet metal and soft gasket lock type washers where vibrations occur. Use resilient washers with stainless steel.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 61 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.17 PROTECTION OF WORK IN PROGRESS
.1
Prevent overloading of any part of building. Do not cut, drill or sleeve any load bearing structural member, unless specifically indicated without written approval of Departmental Representative.
1.18 EXISTING UTILITIES
.1
When breaking into or connecting to existing services or utilities, execute Work at times directed by local governing authorities, with minimum of disturbance to Work. Protect, relocate or maintain existing active services. When services are encountered, cap off in manner approved by authority having jurisdiction. Stake and record location of capped service.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION
Section 01 71 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Field engineering survey services to measure and stake site. Survey services to establish and confirm inverts for Work. Recording of subsurface conditions found.
.2
.3
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Owner's identification of existing survey control points and property limits.
1.3 QUALIFICATIONS OF SURVEYOR
.1
Qualified registered land surveyor, licensed to practise in Place of Work, acceptable to Departmental representative.
1.4 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS
.1
Existing base horizontal and vertical control points are designated on drawings. Locate, confirm and protect control points prior to starting site work. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. Make no changes or relocations without prior written notice to. Departmental representative. Report to Departmental representative when reference point is lost or destroyed, or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations. Require surveyor to replace control points in accordance with original survey control.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.5 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS
.1
Establish two permanent bench marks on site, referenced to established bench marks by survey control points. Record locations, with horizontal and vertical data in Project Record Documents.
Section 01 71 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5 SURVEY REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.2
Establish lines and levels, locate and lay out, by instrumentation. Stake for grading, fill and topsoil placement and landscaping features. Stake slopes and berms. Establish pipe invert elevations. Stake batter boards for foundations. Establish foundation column locations and floor elevations. Establish lines and levels for mechanical and electrical work.
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7
.8
1.6 EXISTING SERVICES
.1
Before commencing work, establish location and extent of service lines in area of Work and notify Departmental representative of findings. Remove abandoned service lines within 2 m of structures. Cap or otherwise seal lines at cut-off points as directed by. Departmental representative.
.2
1.7 LOCATION OF EQUIPMENT AND FIXTURES
.1
Location of equipment, fixtures and outlets indicated or specified are to be considered as approximate. Locate equipment, fixtures and distribution systems to provide minimum interference and maximum usable space and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for safety, access and maintenance. Inform Departmental Representative of impending installation and obtain approval for actual location. Submit field drawings to indicate relative position of various services and equipment when required by Departmental representative.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 71 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.8
RECORDS
.1
Maintain a complete, accurate log of control and survey work as it progresses. Record locations of maintained, re-routed and abandoned service lines.
.2
1.9
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit name and address of Surveyor to Departmental Representative. On request of Departmental Representative, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field engineering work. Submit certificate signed by surveyor certifying and noting those elevations and locations of completed Work that conform and do not conform with Contract Documents.
.2
.3
1.10 SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS
.1
After prompt investigation, should Departmental representative determine that conditions do differ materially, instructions will be issued for changes in Work as provided in Changes and Change Orders.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
EXECUTION
Section 01 73 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit written request in advance of cutting or alteration which affects: .1 Structural integrity of elements of project. .2 Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements. .3 Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of operational elements. .4 Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements. .5 Work of Owner or separate contractor. Include in request: .1 Identification of project. .2 Location and description of affected Work. .3 Statement on necessity for cutting or alteration. .4 Description of proposed Work, and products to be used. .5 Alternatives to cutting and patching. .6 Effect on Work of Owner or separate contractor. .7 Written permission of affected separate contractor. .8 Date and time work will be executed.
.2
.3
1.2
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Required for original installation. Change in Materials: Submit request for substitution in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.3
PREPARATION
.1
Inspect existing conditions, including elements subject to damage or movement during cutting and patching. After uncovering, inspect conditions affecting performance of Work.
.2
EXECUTION
Section 01 73 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 PREPARATION (Cont'd)
.3
Beginning of cutting or patching means acceptance of existing conditions. Provide supports to assure structural integrity of surroundings; provide devices and methods to protect other portions of project from damage. Provide protection from elements for areas which are to be exposed by uncovering work; maintain excavations free of water.
.4
.5
1.4
EXECUTION
.1
Execute cutting, fitting, and patching to complete Work. Fit several parts together, to integrate with other Work. Uncover Work to install ill-timed Work. Remove and replace defective and non-conforming Work. Provide openings in non-structural elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work. Execute Work by methods to avoid damage to other Work, and which will provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. Employ original installer to perform cutting and patching for weather-exposed and moisture-resistant elements, and sight-exposed surfaces. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. Pneumatic or impact tools not allowed on masonry work without prior approval. Restore work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes: Refinish continuous surfaces to nearest intersection. Refinish assemblies by refinishing entire unit.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
EXECUTION
Section 01 73 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.4 EXECUTION (Cont'd)
.11
Fit Work airtight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. At penetration of fire rated wall, ceiling, or floor construction, completely seal voids with firestopping material in accordance with Section 07 84 00, full thickness of the construction element. Conceal pipes, ducts and wiring in floor, wall and ceiling construction of finished areas except where indicated otherwise.
.12
.13
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Progressive cleaning. Final cleaning.
1.2 PROJECT CLEANLINESS
.1
Maintain Work in tidy condition, free from accumulation of waste products and debris, other than that caused by Owner or other Contractors. Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Departmental representative. Do not burn waste materials on site. Clear snow and ice from access to building, bank/pile snow in designated areas only. Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris. Provide on-site containers for collection of waste materials and debris. Provide and use clearly marked separate bins for recycling. Refer to Section 01 74 20. Remove waste material and debris from site at end of each working day. Dispose of waste materials and debris off site. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, and maintain areas free of dust and other contaminants during finishing operations. Store volatile waste in covered metal containers, and remove from premises at end of each working day. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances. Use of building ventilation systems is not permitted for this purpose.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.2 PROJECT CLEANLINESS (Cont'd)
.12
Use only cleaning materials recommended by manufacturer of surface to be cleaned, and as recommended by cleaning material manufacturer. Schedule cleaning operations so that resulting dust, debris and other contaminants will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces nor contaminate building systems.
.13
1.3
FINAL CLEANING
.1
When Work is Substantially Performed, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment not required for performance of remaining Work. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by others, and leave Work clean and suitable for occupancy. Prior to final review, remove surplus products, tools, construction machinery and equipment. Remove waste products and debris other than that caused by Owner or other Contractors. Remove waste materials from site at regularly scheduled times or dispose of as directed by Departmental representative. Do not burn waste materials on site. Make arrangements with and obtain permits from authorities having jurisdiction for disposal of waste and debris. Clean and polish glass, mirrors, hardware, wall tile, stainless steel, chrome, porcelain enamel, baked enamel, plastic laminate, and mechanical and electrical fixtures. Replace broken, scratched or disfigured glass. Remove stains, spots, marks and dirt from decorative work, electrical and mechanical fixtures, furniture fitments, walls, floors and ceilings. Clean lighting reflectors, lenses, and other lighting surfaces.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.3 FINAL CLEANING (Cont'd)
.10
HEPA vacuum clean and dust building interiors, behind grilles, louvres and screens. Wax, seal, shampoo or prepare floor finishes, as recommended by manufacturer. Inspect finishes, fitments and equipment and ensure specified workmanship and operation. Broom clean and wash exterior walks, steps and surfaces; rake clean other surfaces of grounds. Remove dirt and other disfiguration from exterior surfaces. Clean and sweep roofs, gutters, areaways, and sunken wells. Sweep and wash clean paved areas. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition; clean or replace filters of mechanical equipment. Clean roofs, downspouts, and drainage systems. Remove debris and surplus materials from crawl areas and other accessible concealed spaces. Remove snow and ice from access to building.
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16 .17
.18
.19
.20
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
CLEANING
Section 01 74 11 Page 4 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Section 01 74 20 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 CONSTRUCTION & DEMOLITION WASTE
.1
Carefully deconstruct and source separate materials/equipment and divert, from D&C waste destined for landfill to maximum extent possible. Target for this project is [50] [60] [75] [95]% diversion from landfill. Reuse, recycle, compost, anaerobic digest or sell material for reuse except where indicated otherwise. On site sales are not permitted. Source separate waste and maintain waste audits in accordance with the Environmental Protection Act, Ontario Regulation 102/94 and Ontario Regulation 103/94. .1 Provide facilities for collection, handling and storage of source separated wastes. .2 Source separate the following waste: .1 Brick and portland cement concrete. .2 Corrugated cardboard. .3 Wood, not including painted or treated wood or laminated wood. .4 Gypsum board, unpainted. .5 Steel. .6 Items indicated in Section 02 42 93, Deconstruction and Waste Products Workplan Summary. Submit a waste reduction workplan indicating the materials and quantities of material that will be recycled and diverted from landfill. .1 Indicate how material being removed from the site will be reused, recycled, composted or anaerobically digested using Section 02 42 93, Deconstruction and Waste Products Workplan Summary. Submit proof that all waste is being disposed of at a licensed land fill site or waste transfer site. A copy of the disposal/waste transfer site's license and a letter verifying that said landfill site will accept the waste must be supplied to Departmental Representative prior to removal of waste from the demolition site.
.2
.3
.4
CONSTRUCTION/DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
Section 01 74 20 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.2 WASTE PROCESSING SITES
.1
Province of: Ontario. .1 Ministry of Environment and Energy, 135 St. Clair Avenue West, Toronto, ON, M4V 1P5. .2 Telephone: 800-565-4923 or 416-323-4321. .3 Fax: 416-323-4682. Recycling Council of Ontario: 215 Spadina Avenue, #225, Toronto, ON, M5T 2C7. .1 Telephone: 416-657-2797 .2 Fax: 416-960-8053 .3 Email: rco@rco.on.ca. .4 Internet: http://www.rco.on.ca/.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CANADIAN GOVERNMENTAL DEPARTMENTS CHIEF RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE ENVIRONMENT
.1
Government Chief Responsibility for the Environment. Province Ontario Address General Inquiries Ministry of (416) Environment 323-4321 and Energy (800) 135 St Clair 565-4923 Avenue West Toronto, ON M4V 1P5 Environment (416) Canada 734-4494 Toronto, ON Fax (416) 323-4682
END
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
As-built, samples, and specifications. Equipment and systems. Product data, materials and finishes, and related information. Operation and maintenance data. Spare parts, special tools and maintenance materials. Warranties and bonds. Final site survey.
.4 .5
.6 .7
.1
Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning - General Requirements. Section 01 91 20 - Project Commissioning. Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
.2 .3
1.3
SUBMISSION
.1
Prepare instructions and data using personnel experienced in maintenance and operation of described products. Copy will be returned after final inspection, with Departmental Representative's comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. Two weeks prior to Substantial Performance of the Work, submit to the Departmental Representative, four final copies of maintenance manuals and commissioning documentation in English. Ensure spare parts, maintenance materials and special tools provided are new, undamaged or defective, and of same quality and manufacture as products provided in Work.
.2
.3
.4
.5
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 SUBMISSION (Cont'd)
.6
If requested, furnish evidence as to type, source and quality of products provided. Defective products will be rejected, regardless of previous inspections. Replace products at own expense. Pay costs of transportation.
.7
.8
1.4
FORMAT
.1
Organize data in the form of an instructional manual. Binders: vinyl, hard covered, 3 'D' ring, loose leaf 219 x 279 mm with spine and face pockets. When multiple binders are used, correlate data into related consistent groupings. Identify contents of each binder on spine. Cover: Identify each binder with type or printed title 'Project Record Documents'; list title of project and identify subject matter of contents. Arrange content by systems, under Section numbers and sequence of Table of Contents. Provide tabbed fly leaf for each separate product and system, with typed description of product and major component parts of equipment. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or typewritten data. Drawings: provide with reinforced punched binder tab. Bind in with text; fold larger drawings to size of text pages. Provide 1:1 scaled CAD files in dwg format on CD.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
1.5 CONTENTS EACH VOLUME
.1
Table of Contents: provide title of project; .1 date of submission; names, .2 addresses, and telephone numbers of Contractor with name of responsible parties;
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.5 CONTENTS EACH VOLUME (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .3 schedule of products and systems, indexed to content of volume. For each product or system: .1 list names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors and suppliers, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. Product Data: mark each sheet to clearly identify specific products and component parts, and data applicable to installation; delete inapplicable information. Drawings: supplement product data to illustrate relations of component parts of equipment and systems, to show control and flow diagrams. Typewritten Text: as required to supplement product data. Provide logical sequence of instructions for each procedure, incorporating manufacturer's instructions specified in Section 01 45 00. Training: Refer to Section 01 79 00.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.6 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES
.1
In addition to requirements in General Conditions, maintain at the site for Departmental Representative one record copy of: .1 Contract Drawings. .2 Specifications. .3 Amendments. .4 Change Orders and other modifications to the Contract. .5 Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. .6 Field test records. .7 Inspection certificates. .8 Manufacturer's certificates. Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files, racks, and secure storage. Label record documents and file in accordance with Section number listings in List of
.2
.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.6 AS-BUILTS AND SAMPLES (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) Contents of this Project Manual. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat, large, printed letters. Maintain record documents in clean, dry and legible condition. Do not use record documents for construction purposes. Keep record documents and samples available for inspection by Departmental Representative. Turn one set, paper copy and electronic copy, of AS-BUILT drawings and specifications over to Departmental Representative on completion of work. If project is completed without significant deviations from Contract drawings and specifications submit to Departmental Representative one set of drawings and specifications marked "AS-BUILT".
.4
.5
.6
.7
1.7 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Record information on set of black line opaque drawings, and in copy of Project Manual, provided by Departmental Representative. Provide felt tip marking pens, maintaining separate colours for each major system, for recording information. Record information concurrently with construction progress. Do not conceal Work until required information is recorded. Contract Drawings and shop drawings: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Measured depths of elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor datum. .2 Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. .3 Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances, referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. .4 Field changes of dimension and detail.
.2
.3
.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.7 RECORDING ACTUAL SITE CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
.4
Contract Drawings and shop drawings:(Cont'd) .5 Changes made by change orders. .6 Details not on original Contract Drawings. .7 References to related shop drawings and modifications. Specifications: legibly mark each item to record actual construction, including: .1 Manufacturer, trade name, and catalogue number of each product actually installed, particularly optional items and substitute items. .2 Changes made by Amendments and change orders. Other Documents: maintain manufacturer's certifications, inspection certifications, field test records, required by individual specifications sections.
.5
.6
1.8
FINAL SURVEY
.1
Submit final site survey certificate in accordance with Section 01 71 00, certifying that elevations and locations of completed Work are in conformance, or non-conformance with Contract Documents.
1.9 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS
.1
Each Item of Equipment and Each System: include description of unit or system, and component parts. Give function, normal operation characteristics, and limiting conditions. Include performance curves, with engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial number of replaceable parts. Panel board circuit directories: provide electrical service characteristics, controls, and communications. Include installed colour coded wiring diagrams. Operating Procedures: include start-up, break-in, and routine normal operating instructions and sequences. Include regulation, control, stopping, shut-down, and emergency instructions. Include summer,
.2
.3
.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.9 EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.4
Operating Procedures:(Cont'd) winter, and any special operating instructions. Maintenance Requirements: include routine procedures and guide for trouble-shooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly instructions; and alignment, adjusting, balancing, and checking instructions. Provide servicing and lubrication schedule, and list of lubricants required. Include manufacturer's printed operation and maintenance instructions. Include sequence of operation by controls manufacturer. Provide original manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and diagrams required for maintenance. Provide installed control diagrams by controls manufacturer. Provide Contractor's coordination drawings, with installed colour coded piping diagrams. Provide charts of valve tag numbers, with location and function of each valve, keyed to flow and control diagrams. Provide list of original manufacturer's spare parts, current prices, and recommended quantities to be maintained in storage. Include test and balancing reports as specified in Section 01 45 00 and 01 91 00. Additional requirements: As specified in individual specification sections.
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
1.10 MATERIALS AND FINISHES
.1
Building Products, Applied Materials, and Finishes: include product data, with catalogue number, size, composition, and colour and texture designations. Provide information for re-ordering custom manufactured products.
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.10 MATERIALS AND FINISHES (Cont'd)
.2
Instructions for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. Moisture-protection and Weather-exposed Products: include manufacturer's recommendations for cleaning agents and methods, precautions against detrimental agents and methods, and recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. Additional Requirements: as specified in individual specifications sections.
.3
.4
1.11
SPARE PARTS
.1
Provide spare parts, in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual. Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance and extra materials, in quantities specified in individual specification sections. Provide items of same manufacture and quality as items in Work. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
.2
.3
.4
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
1.12 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS (Cont'd)
.5
Obtain receipt for delivered products and submit prior to final payment.
1.13
SPECIAL TOOLS
.1
Provide special tools, in quantities specified in individual specification section. Provide items with tags identifying their associated function and equipment. Deliver to location as directed; place and store. Receive and catalogue all items. Submit inventory listing to Departmental Representative. Include approved listings in Maintenance Manual.
.2
.3
.4
1.14 STORAGE, HANDLING AND PROTECTION
.1
Store spare parts, maintenance materials, and special tools in manner to prevent damage or deterioration. Store in original and undamaged condition with manufacturer's seal and labels intact. Store components subject to damage from weather in weatherproof enclosures. Store paints and freezable materials in a heated and ventilated room. Remove and replace damaged products at own expense and to satisfaction of Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.15 WARRANTIES AND BONDS
.1
Separate each warranty or bond with index tab sheets keyed to Table of Contents listing. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal. Obtain warranties and bonds, executed in duplicate by subcontractors, suppliers, and
.2
.3
CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
Section 01 78 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
1.15 WARRANTIES AND BONDS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) manufacturers, within ten days after completion of the applicable item of work. Except for items put into use with Owner's permission, leave date of beginning of time of warranty until the Date of Certificate of Substantial Performance is determined. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized. Co-execute submittals when required. Retain warranties and bonds until time specified for submittal.
.4
.5
.6 .7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
Section 01 79 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Procedures for demonstration and instruction of equipment and systems to Owner's O&M personnel. O&M personnel includes property facility manager, building operators, maintenenace staff, security staff and technical specialists, as applicable.
.2
1.2
DESCRIPTION
.1
Demonstrate scheduled operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Departmental Representative's personnel two weeks prior to date of substantial performance. Departmental Representative will provide list of personnel to receive instructions, and will coordinate their attendance at agreed-upon times.
.2
1.3
QUALITY CONTROL .1
When specified in individual Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to demonstrate operation of equipment and systems, instruct Owner's personnel, and provide written report that demonstration and instructions have been completed. Submit training schedule of time and date for demonstration and training of each item of equipment and each system in accordance with the training plan four weeks prior to designated dates, for Departmental Representative's approval. Submit reports within one week after completion of demonstration, that demonstration and instructions have been satisfactorily completed. Report shall give time and date of each demonstration and training, with list of persons present.
.2
.3
.4
Section 01 79 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4 CONDITIONS FOR DEMONSTRATIONS
.1
Equipment has been inspected and put into operation in accordance with Sections [______]. Testing, adjusting, and balancing has been performed in accordance with Section 01 91 00 and equipment and systems are fully operational. Provide copies of completed operation and maintenance manuals for use in demonstrations and instructions.
.2
.3
1.5
PREPARATION
.1
Verify that conditions for demonstration and instructions comply with requirements. Verify that designated O&M personnel are present.
.2
1.6 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Demonstrate adjustment, maintenance agreed upon
start-up, operation, control, trouble-shooting, servicing, and of each item of equipment at times and locations.
.2
Instruct personnel in all phases of operation and maintenance using operation and maintenance manuals as the basis of instruction. Review contents of manual in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when the need for additional data becomes apparent during instructions.
.3
.4
1.7 TIME ALLOCATED FOR INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Ensure amount of time required for instruction of each item of equipment or system as follows: .1 [...].
Section 01 79 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
COMMISSIONING GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section 01 91 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Includes general requirements for commissioning facilities and facility systems.
.1
Section 01 79 00 - Demonstration and Training.
.2
Section 01 91 20 - Project Commissioning.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Provide System Commissioning Administrator for the work of this Contract. Comply with applicable procedures and standards of the certification sponsoring association. Perform services under direction of supervisor qualified under certification requirements of sponsoring association.
.2
.3
1.4
REFERENCES
.1
Associated Air Balance National Standards For Instrumentation, Total Distribution-Hydronics
Council (AABC): Field Measurements and Systems Balance, Air Systems, 2002.
.2
ASHRAE Guideline 1-2007, HVAC&R Technical Requirements for the Commissioning Process. ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building System. NEBB Procedural Standards for Whole Building Systems Commissioning of New Construction(2009). ANSI/NETA ATS Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (2009).
.3
.4
.5
Section 01 91 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit documentation to confirm System Commissioning Administrator compliance with quality assurance provision. Submit 3 preliminary specimen copies of each type of startup checklist, product information and performance verification report forms proposed for use. Submit completed report forms within 3 days after completion of each testing to Departmental representative for review and verification. Fifteen days prior to Substantial Performance, submit 3 copies of final reports on applicable forms for functional performance verification. Submit post-commissioning reports of testing, adjusting, and balancing postponed due to seasonal, climatic, occupancy, or other reasons beyond Contractor's control, promptly after execution of those services. Submit all other commissioning documentation in accordance with Section 01 91 20.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.6
REPORT FORMS
.1
System Commissioning Administrator shall make reports. Report forms shall include: .1 Startup Checklists. .2 Product Information (PI) Report forms. .3 Performance Verification (PV) Report forms. Ensure each form bears signature of recorder, and that of supervisor of reporting organization. Submit signed form to Departmental representative for review and approval. After approval, immediately submit form bearing Departmental representative's signature to Departmental Representative. Submit signed form to Departmental Representative for review, approval and signature.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 01 91 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.7 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES
.1
Prepare each system for testing and balancing. Cooperate with testing organization and provide access to equipment and systems. Provide personnel and operate systems at designated times, and under conditions required for proper testing, adjusting, and balancing. Notify testing organization and Departmental Representative 7 days prior to time project will be ready for testing, adjusting, and balancing. Accurately record data for each step. Report to Departmental Representative any deficiencies or defects noted during performance of services. Correct deficiencies identified in accordance with Departmental Representative's written instructions.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INVOLVEMENT
.1
Factory testing: manufacturer to: .1 Coordinate time and location of testing. .2 Provide testing documentation for approval by Departmental Representative. .3 Arrange for Departmental Representative to witness tests. .4 Obtain written approval of test results and documentation from Departmental Representative before delivery to site. Obtain manufacturers installation, start-up and operations instructions prior to start-up of components, equipment and systems and review with Departmental Representative. .1 Compare completed installation with manufacturer's published data, record discrepancies, and review with manufacturer. .2 Modify procedures detrimental to equipment performance and review same with manufacturer before start-up. Integrity of warranties: .1 Use manufacturer's trained start-up personnel where specified elsewhere in other
.2
.3
Section 01 91 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.8 MANUFACTURER'S INVOLVEMENT (Cont'd)
.3
Integrity of warranties:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) divisions or required to maintain integrity of warranty. .2 Verify with manufacturer that testing as specified will not void warranties. Qualifications of manufacturer's personnel: .1 Experienced in design, installation and operation of equipment and systems. .2 Ability to interpret test results accurately. .3 To report results in clear, concise, logical manner.
.4
.5
Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system as per Sections: .1 Section 11 19 20 for detention hardware. .2 Section 11 19 30 for detention doors and frames. .3 Section 11 19 40 for detention grille doors and barriers. .4 Section 11 19 50 for detention chain link gates. .5 Section 11 19 60 for detention exterior windows. .6 Section 11 19 70 for steel unit masonry. .7 Section 13 26 01 for prefabricated security components. .8 Section 32 31 13 for chain link fences and gates.
1.9 DEMONSTRATION AND TESTING
.1
Refer to Section 01 79 00 for requirements for demonstration and training required for Work of this Project.
Section 01 91 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
END
PROJECT COMMISSIONING
Section 01 91 20 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SPECIAL WARNING
.1
This project requires a special enhanced commissioning. The General Contractor must read and fully understand the special requirements specified in this Section prior to bidding this project. One of the commissioning requirements is that the General Contractor must engage a qualified independent System Commissioning Administrator (SCA) to coordinate and organize all Pre-Commissioning Testing, Commissioning Testing, and O&M Training. The SCA must complete the Contractor's Commissioning Documentation as specified in this Section. A total of 4% of the construction price will be held back by PWGSC for unfinished commissioning work.
.2
.3
.1
Section 01 91 00: Commissioning - General Requirements.
1.3
GENERAL
.1
The "Commissioning" for this project is defined as a planned program of activities which enhance quality management and information transfer that extends throughout all stages of project delivery. The commissioning activities shall include the standard activities and the enhanced activities which are traditionally not provided by the design and construction industry and which are defined in this document.
.2
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
The most stringent requirements of the following commissioning standards and guidelines shall apply: .1 Associated Air Balance Council (AABC): National Standards for Field Measurements and Instrumentation, Total Systems Balance, Air Distribution - Hydronics Systems, 2002.
Section 01 91 20 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 ASHRAE Guideline 1.1-2007, the HVAC Commissioning Process. .3 ASHRAE Guideline 4-2008, Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building System. .4 NEBB Procedural Standards for Building Systems Commissioning (1999). .5 NETA Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems 2009.
1.5 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES
.1
The key members of the commissioning team include the Contractor and the Departmental Representative. .1 It is the Contractor's responsibility to engage a qualified independent System Commissioning Administrator (SCA) to represent the Contractor including the Sub-Contractors. The SCA shall be responsible for carrying out the Contractor's commissioning activities under the direction of the Departmental Representative. .2 The Departmental Representative is the Commissioning Authority for this project. The Contractor is responsible for the following standard commissioning activities and enhanced commissioning activities during project construction, commissioning and operation phases. .1 Construction Phase: .1 Engage a qualified independent System Commissioning Administrator as single point of contact for all matters relating to commissioning (enhanced activity). .2 Conduct separate commissioning meetings and prepare minutes of meeting. .3 Submit shop drawings (standard activity). .4 Conduct equipment installation and startup tests, and submit test reports (standard activity). .5 Perform TAB and submit TAB report (standard activity). .6 Conduct System Startup Verification Testing and complete Startup Checklists and PI Report forms (enhanced activity).
.2
Section 01 91 20 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.5 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Commissioning Phase: .1 Conduct separate commissioning meetings and prepare minutes of meeting. .2 Conduct Functional Performance Testing and complete PV Report forms (enhanced activity). .3 Prepare Startup Checklists, PI and PV Report Forms and Functional Performance Test Forms (enhanced activity). .4 Demonstrate system operation (standard activity). .5 Submit Maintenance Manuals (formerly called O&M Manuals) (standard activity). .6 Submit "As-Built" drawings (standard activity). .7 Conduct O&M training (standard activity). .8 Update Standard Operating Procedures (SOP) Manual (enhanced activity). .9 Prepare and update commissioning report (enhanced activity). .3 Operation Phase: .1 Conduct separate commissioning meetings and prepare minutes of meeting. .2 Conduct deferred Functional Performance Testing and complete PV Report forms (enhanced activity). .3 Provide fine-tuning (standard activity). .4 Provide specified inspection and maintenance services during warranty period (standard activity). The Departmental Representative will carry out the following commissioning activities related to the Contractor: .1 Review and approve the qualifications of the System Commissioning Administrator (SCA) submitted by the Contractor. .2 Review and approve Startup Checklists, PI and PV Report Forms. .3 Review and approve shop drawings (standard activity). .4 Review and inspect installation, and prepare construction deficiencies report (standard activity). .5 Review and approve TAB report (standard activity).
.3
Section 01 91 20 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.5 ROLES AND RESPONSIBILITIES (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) .6 Witness System Startup Verification Testing (enhanced activity)and review test reports. .7 Witness Functional Performance Testing (enhanced activity) and review test reports. .8 Review and approve Maintenance Manuals (standard activity). .9 Review and approve "As-Built" drawings (standard activity). .10 Review O&M training (standard activity). .11 Witness post-acceptance commissioning testing (enhanced activity). .12 Witness the post-acceptance commissioning testing conducted by the Contractor and review test reports. .13 Review commissioning documentation submitted by the Contractor. .14 Review and approved commissioning report. .15 Review and approve updated commissioning report.
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS OF SYSTEM COMMISSIONING ADMINISTRATOR (SCA)
.1
The System Commissioning Administrator: a qualified independent System Commissioning Administrator (SCA) for scheduling, coordination and supervision of Contractor's commissioning activities during construction, acceptance, and post-acceptance stages. The System Commissioning Administrator shall provide Contractor's Commissioning Documentation. Unless approved by the Departmental Representative, the System Commissioning Administrator shall be a NEBB qualified SCA in building systems commissioning. The Contractor shall hire and submit the name of SCA with documentation confirming qualifications within 15 working days of award of contract.
.2
1.7
SCHEDULING
.1
Within 15 working days of contract award, the Contractor shall submit bar chart commissioning schedules indicating anticipated date of start, duration, and date of completion for the following key activities: .1 Commissioning meetings. .2 Shop drawings.
Section 01 91 20 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.7 SCHEDULING (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .3 Pre-startup installation inspections and tests. .4 System and Equipment Startup and Verification. .5 TAB. .6 Functional Performance Test. .7 Maintenance Manuals. .8 "As-Built" drawings. .9 O&M Training. .10 O&M Training report. Bar chart commissioning schedule shall be prepared for each component, equipment, sub-system, system and integrated system to be commissioned. The Commissioning shall be carried out to meet the approved project schedule.
.2
.3
1.8 CONTRACTOR'S COMMISSIONING DOCUMENTATION
.1
The Contractor's Commissioning Documentation shall include the following: .1 Commissioning Schedule. .2 Minutes of Commissioning meetings. .3 Shop drawings and product data. .4 Installation inspection and test reports. .5 TAB reports. .6 Startup Checklists. .7 Product Information (PI) Report forms. .8 Performance Verification (PV) Report forms. .9 "As-Built" drawings. .10 Maintenance Manuals. .11 O&M Training Schedule .12 O&M Training Report.
1.9 PRECOMMISSIONING TESTING - STARTUPS
.1
Requirements of Pre-commissioning Verification: a full range of checks and tests to determine that all components, equipment, systems, and interfaces between systems (eg., emergency, fire, and life safety) operate in accordance with contact documents. This includes all operating modes, interlocks, control responses, and specific responses to abnormal or emergency conditions. Verification of the proper operation of the control system also includes verifying the interface of the
Section 01 91 20 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.9 PRECOMMISSIONING TESTING - STARTUPS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) control system with the TAB criteria and the response of EMCS controllers and sensors. Also, the Departmental Representative shall select, at random, 10 percent of the reported TAB and EMCS data for verification, and a failure of selected items shall result in the rejection of the final TAB report or the report of system startup and testing. The Startup Checklists and PI Report forms shall be completed by the Contractor and verified by the Departmental Representative.
.2
1.10 COMMISSIONING TESTING
.1
Commissioning Testing shall include System Operation Demonstration and Functional Performance Testing of all systems to be commissioned. Test each system independently and then in unison with integrated systems. Requirements of Functional Performance Testing (FPT): FPT shall determine if the systems are providing the required services in accordance with the finalized design intent. If FPT cannot be completed due to seasonal reasons, lack of occupancy, deficiencies beyond the scope of the mechanical work, or any other reason, this shall be noted along with an indication of when tests will be rescheduled. If any identified performance deficiencies need to be corrected, the tests shall be repeated after corrective work is carried out, and this process shall continue until acceptable performance is achieved. The PV Report forms shall be completed by the Contractor and verified by the Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
1.11 EXTENT OF COMMISSIONING
.1
Systems to be commissioned with the comprehensive commissioning to include: .1 Fire Protection. .2 Plumbing and Drainage. .3 HVAC, inclusive of all hydronic systems air supply systems and exhaust systems. .4 Building Automation/EMCS. .5 Power systems - normal and emergency. .6 Communications.
Section 01 91 20 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.11 EXTENT OF COMMISSIONING (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .7 Lighting Control. .8 Fire Alarm. .9 Security and CCTV.
1.12
O&M TRAINING
.1
The Contractor shall provide qualified training instructors to conduct O&M training. Four weeks prior to commencement of O&M training, the Contractor shall submit training schedule with course outline, agenda and a copy of training manual in accordance with the training plan for review by the Departmental Representative. Training shall include familiarization sessions, hands-on instruction, and classroom sessions. Classroom training shall include: review of Maintenance Manuals, System Operational Procedures for all modes of operation, acceptable tolerances for system adjustments and procedures for dealing with abnormal and emergency situations.
.2
.3
.4
1.13 UNFINISHED COMMISSIONING WORK
.1
Prior to the "Interim Certificate of Completion" a total of 4% of the construction price will be held back by the Departmental Representative until the acceptable Functional Performance Testing, O&M Training, and commissioning documentation have been completed.
1.14 COMMISSIONING REPORT AND POST-ACCEPTANCE COMMISSIONING
.1
When the acceptable Functional Performance Testing, O&M Training, and commissioning documentation have been completed, the Departmental Representative shall prepare a commissioning report. The report will identify the completed functional performance tests, the deferred functional performance tests, construction deficiencies, design deficiencies, user's changes of requirement, and outstanding commissioning issues. The report will provide review comments on test results, O&M training and commissioning
Section 01 91 20 Page 8 2011-06-10
1.14 COMMISSIONING REPORT AND POST-ACCEPTANCE COMMISSIONING (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) documentation, and will recommend follow-up actions to be taken during post-acceptance commissioning. The Departmental Representative will not issue the "Interim Certificate of Completion" until the commissioning report with a recommendation of acceptance is submitted.
.2
1.15 ADDITIONAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS
.1
Refer to other specifications sections for additional commissioning requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Not used.
END
SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION
Section 02 41 23 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS). .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Transport Canada (TC). .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA), c. 34.
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Shop drawings: .1 Submit for approval drawings, diagrams or details showing sequence of demolition work and supporting structures where required by authorities having jurisdiction. .2 Submit drawings stamped and signed by qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
.2
.1
Regulatory Requirements: ensure Work is performed in compliance with CEPA, CEAA, TDGA, and applicable Provincial/Territorial regulations.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
.1 .2
Do Work in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal. .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Divert excess materials from landfill to site approved by Departmental Representative. .3 Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers. .4 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. .5 Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. .6 Label location of salvaged material's storage areas and provide barriers and security devices.
Section 02 41 23 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .7 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely.
1.5
SITE CONDITIONS .1
Site Environmental Requirements. .1 Perform work in accordance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
1.6
SCHEDULING
.1
Employ necessary means to meet project time lines without compromising specified minimum rates of material diversion. .1 Notify Departmental Representative in writing when unforeseen delays occur.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
EQUIPMENT
.1
Leave machinery running only while in use, except where extreme temperatures prohibit shutting machinery down. Demonstrate that tools are being used in manner which allows for salvage of materials in best condition possible.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Inspect site with Departmental Representative and verify extent and location of items designated for removal, disposal, alternative disposal, recycling, salvage and items to remain. Locate and protect utilities. Preserve active utilities traversing site in operating condition. Notify and obtain approval of utility companies before starting demolition.
.2
.3
Section 02 41 23 Page 3 2011-06-10
.4
Disconnect and Cap Designated Mechanical Services. .1 Propane Supply Lines: remove in accordance with propane company requirements. .2 Sewer and Water Lines: remove in accordance with authority having jurisdiction and securely plug to form watertight seal. .3 Other Underground Services: remove and dispose of as directed by Departmental Representative.
3.2 REMOVAL OPERATIONS
.1 .2
Remove items as indicated. Do not disturb items designated to remain in place.
.3
Salvage: .1 Items to be salvaged include but are not limited to the following: .1 Fencing. .2 Additional items as indicated on drawings and by the Departmental Representative. .2 Dismantle items containing materials for salvage and stockpile salvaged materials at locations as indicated. Disposal of Material. .1 Dispose of materials not designated for salvage or reuse on site at authorized facilities approved in Waste Reduction Workplan.
.4
3.3
STOCKPILING
.1
Label stockpiles, indicating material type and quantity. Designate appropriate security resources/measures to prevent vandalism, damage and theft. Locate stockpiled materials convenient for use in new construction to eliminate double handling wherever possible. Stockpile materials designated for alternate disposal in location which facilitates removal
.2
.3
.4
Section 02 41 23 Page 4 2011-06-10
3.3 STOCKPILING (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) from site and examination by potential end markets, and which does not impede disassembly, processing, or hauling procedures.
3.4 REMOVAL FROM SITE
.1
Remove stockpiled material as directed by Departmental Representative, when it interferes with operations of project. Remove stockpiles of like materials by alternate disposal option once collection of materials is complete.
.2
3.5
RESTORATION
.1
Restore areas and existing works outside areas of demolition to conditions that existed prior to beginning of Work. Use soil treatments and procedures which are not harmful to health, are not injurious to plants, and do not endanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.
.2
3.6
CLEANING
.1
Remove debris, trim surfaces and leave work site clean, upon completion of Work Use cleaning solutions and procedures which are not harmful to health, are not injurious to plants, and do not endanger wildlife, adjacent water courses or ground water.
.2
END
PRECAST ARCHITECTURAL CONCRETE
Section 03 45 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for both load bearing and non load-bearing, plant precast architectural concrete. Items for this project include Exposed Aggregate Precast Concrete Panels (see exterior elevations) and Precast Window Surrounds (at Detention Window hollow metal frames).
.1 .2
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 07 90 00 - For caulking around precast elements. Section 11 19 60 - For precast surrounds at detention windows.
.3
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A775/A775M-07b, Standard Specification for Epoxy-Coated Reinforcing Steel Bars. .3 ASTM C260/C260M-10a, Standard Specification for Air-Entraining Admixtures for Concrete. .4 ASTM C494/C494M-10a, Standard Specification for Chemical Admixtures for Concrete. .5 ASTM D412-06ae2, Standard Test Methods for Vulcanized Rubber and Thermoplastic Rubbers and Thermoplastic Elastomers Tension. .6 ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
.2
Section 03 45 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 REFERENCES (Cont'd)
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Test Methods and Standard Ppractices for Concrete. .2 CSA-A23.3-04(2007), Design of Concrete Structures. .3 CSA-A23.4-09, Precast Concrete-Materials and Construction. .4 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004, A3005). .5 CSA-G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .6 CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-04, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .7 CSA G279-M1984(R1998), Steel for Prestressed Concrete Tendons (Metric Version). .8 CAN/CSA-S6.1-06, Canadian Highway Bridge Design Code. .9 CSA W48-06, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding. .10 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) (Metric Version). .11 CSA W186-M1990(R2007), Welding of Reinforcing Bars in Reinforced Concrete Construction. National Building Code (NBC), 2005.
.4
.1
Design precast elements to CSA-A23.3, CSA-A23.4 and to resist handling, stockpiling, shipping and erection stresses. Design precast elements to carry loads specified by Departmental Reresentative or as indicated, in accordance with NBC and applicable codes. Design shall include resistance to creep, shrinkage and temperature effects, as well as wind and earthquake loads. Design connections/attachments of precast elements to load/forces specified by Departmental Reresentative. Submit copies of detailed calculations and design drawings for typical precast elements
.2
.3
.4
Section 03 45 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.4
(Cont'd) and connections for Departmental Representative for review two (2) weeks prior to manufacture.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Tolerance of precast elements to CSA-A23.4.
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit shop drawings to CSA-A23.4 and CSA-A23.3. Include the following items: .1 Design calculations for items designated by manufacturer. .2 Tables and bending diagrams of reinforcing steel. .3 Camber. .4 Finishing schedules. .5 Methods of handling and erection. .6 Openings, sleeves, inserts and related reinforcement. Including embedded handling hardware. Each drawing submitted shall bear stamp and signature of qualified Professional Engineer registered or licensed in province of Ontario, Canada. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Produce, deliver and erect where directed by Departmental Reresentative on project site, full size precast concrete unit incorporating required details and showing specified colour, finish and quality for Departmental Reresentative approval prior to beginning full production.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.7
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Precast concrete elements to be fabricated and erected by manufacturing plant certified by Canadian Standards Association in appropriate category according to CSA A23.4.
Section 03 45 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.7 QUALIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
.2
Precast concrete manufacturer to be certified in accordance with CSA's certification procedures for precast concrete plants prior to submitting bid and to specifically verify as part of bid that plant is currently certified in appropriate category, Architectural. Only precast elements fabricated in such certified plants to be acceptable to Owner, and plant certification to be maintained for duration of fabrication, erection until warranty expires.
.3
1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Reresentative. Unused paints, sealers, plasticizers, water-reducing agents and air-entraining agents must be disposed of at an official hazardous material collections site as approved by Departmental Reresentative. Unused paints, sealers, plasticizers, water-reducing agents and air-entraining agents must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 03 45 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
1.9
WARRANTY
.1
The Contractor hereby warrants that the precast elements will not spall or show visible evidence of cracking, except for normal hairline shrinkage cracks, in accordance with the 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC3.13 of General Conditions but for the 12 months warranty period, which is extended to five years. Units showing such defects will be replaced and made good together with all work of other trades damaged during removal of defective precast at no expense to the Departmental Representative.
.2
Confirm that the manufacturer of the sealant has carried out accelerated and normal weathering tests of the sealant in conjunction with the precast units for a period of five months and that there is no evidence of the sealant staining the precast units. Include with the guarantee on the precast units, a copy of the sealant manufacturer's letter to this effect as well as a guarantee of the precast subcontractor's material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Cement, colouring material, aggregates, water, admixtures: to CSA-A23.4 and CSA-A23.1/A23.2. Exposed aggregate: To match existing type. Provide sample for the approval of the Departmental Representative. Use same brands and source of cement and aggregate for entire project to ensure uniformity of colouration and other mix characteristics. Reinforcing steel: epoxy coated. Prestressing steel: to CAN/CSA-S6 and CSA G279. Forms: to CAN/CSA-A23.4.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.6
Section 03 45 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd)
.7
Hardware and miscellaneous materials: to CSA-A23.1/A23.2. Anchors and supports: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/ G40.21, Type 350 W, galvanized after fabrication. Welding materials: to CSA W48. Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with minimum zinc coating of 610 g/m2 to ASTM A123/A123M. Steel primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Epoxy coating: to ASTM A775/A775M. Air entrainment admixtures: to ASTM C260. Bearing pads: neoprene, 60 durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, and 17 MPa minimum tensile strength to ASTM D412, moulded to size or cut from moulded sheet. Shims: plastic. Zinc-rich primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Weephole tubes: purpose made plastic. Curing compound: not permitted without prior approval of Departmental Reresentative. Sealers: Type as recommended by the precast concrete fabricator and approved by the Departmental Representative.
.8
.9 .10
.11 .12 .13 .14
.15 .16 .17 .18
.19
2.2
CONCRETE MIXES
.1
Proportion normal density concrete in accordance with CSA-A23.1/A23.2 to give following properties: .1 Exposed aggregate precast concrete panels (exterior elevations): .1 Cement: Type 1A, Portland cement. .2 Compressive strength: Minimum compressive strength of 35 MPa at 28 days. .3 Class of Exposure: F-1. .4 Air Content: 4% to 6%.
Section 03 45 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
2.2 CONCRETE MIXES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 Precast concrete surrounds(Detention window hollow metal frames): .1 Cement: Type 1, Portland cement. .2 Compressive strength: CSA-A23.1, Table 1. .3 Class of Exposure: N. .4 Air Content: CSA-A23.1, Table 1. Maximum water/cement ratio to CSA A23.1, Table 1. Colouring agent: if used, not exceeding 10% of cement weight and be inorganic. Do not use calcium chloride or products containing calcium chloride. Maintain mix proportions, especially water content, as constant as possible.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.3
GROUT MIXES
.1
Cement grout: 1 part type GU Portland Cement, 2-1/2 parts sand, sufficient water for placement and hydration. Non-shrink grout: Pre-mixed, flowable, non-shrink grout without aggregate fillers.
.2
2.4
FABRICATION
.1
Manufacture units in accordance with CSAA23.4. Mark each precast unit to correspond to identification mark on shop drawings for location with date cast on part of unit which will not be exposed. Profiles to be as detailed on the drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Design and attach anchors and inserts to precast concrete elements to carry design loads. Galvanize anchors and steel embedments after fabrication and touch up with zinc-rich primer after welding.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 03 45 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
2.4 FABRICATION (Cont'd)
.6
Coordinate with Section 11 19 60 as required for the sizing of precast concrete surrounds.
2.5
FINISHES
.1
Finish and colour of precast units to match Departmental Representative approved sample. Precast Concrete Surrounds - Interior (smooth finish): .1 Smooth finish; as cast using smooth steel form liners. Precast Concrete Surrounds - Exterior (rubbed finish): .1 Rubbed finish to precast surround to Detention Exterior Windows. .2 Rub exposed face surface of precast concrete panels with carborundum bricks and water until hollows, lines, form marks, and surplus materials have been removed. .3 Leave surface finish uniformly smooth. .4 Do not use mortar or grout in rubbing, other than cement paste drawn from green concrete by rubbing process. .5 Clean panels. .6 Sandblast in order to expose aggregate face, sandblast surface to conform with approved sample which can be viewed at Departmental Representative's office.
.2
.3
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Provide Departmental Reresentative with certified copies of quality control tests related to this project as specified in CSA-A23.4. Provide records from in-house quality control programme based upon plant certification requirements to Departmental Representative for inspection and review. Upon request, provide Departmental Reresentative with certified copy of mill test report of reinforcing steel supplied, showing physical and chemical analysis. Precast plants should keep complete records of supply source of concrete material, steel reinforcement, prestressing steel and provide
.2
.3
.4
Section 03 45 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
2.6 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.4
(Cont'd) to Departmental Reresentative for review upon request.
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Do precast concrete work in accordance with CSA-A23.4 and CSA-A23.3.
3.2
ERECTION
.1
Erect precast elements within allowable tolerances as specified. Non-cumulative erection tolerances in accordance with CSA-A23.4. Set elevations and alignment between units to within allowable tolerances before connecting units. Bed units in mortar in accordance with Section 04 20 00. Grout underside of unit bearing plates with shrinkage compensating grout. Fasten precast panels in place as indicated on reviewed shop drawings. Do not weld or secure bearing plates at sliding joints. Set units dry, without mortar, attaining specified joint dimension with plastic shims. Clean field welds with wire brush and touch-up galvanized finish with zinc-rich primer. Remove shims and spacers from joints of non-load bearing panels after fastening but before sealant is applied.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 03 45 00 Page 10 2011-06-10
3.3 ERECTION/ EXPOSED AGGREGATE PRECAST PANELS
.1
Secure bolts with lockwashers or tack weld nut to bolt. Uniformly tighten bolted connections with torque indicated.
.2
.3
Apply sealers to precast panels to manufacturer's recommendations unless specified otherwise.
3.4
WELDING
.1
Do welding to CSA W59 for welding to steel structures and to CSA W186 for welding of reinforcement.
3.5
CLEANING
.1
Obtain approval of cleaning methods from Departmental Reresentative before cleaning soiled precast concrete surfaces.
END
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 05 50 01: Lateral support angles for masonry partitions. Section 07 20 00: Cavity wall insulation. Section 07 62 00: Metal flashing. Section 07 90 00: Sealing of control joints. Section 11 19 70: For installation of steel masonry units.
.2 .3 .4 .5
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A82/A82M-07, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. .2 ASTM A167-99(2009), Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. .3 ASTM F593-02e2, Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs.
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-37.4-M89, Fibrated, Cutback Asphalt, Lap Cement for Asphalt Roofing. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)/CSA International .1 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium. .2 CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. .3 CAN/CSA-A165 Series-04(R2009) (CAN3-A165.1 Concrete Masonry Units) (CAN3-A165.2 Concrete Brick Units) (CAN3-A165.3 Prefaced Concrete Masonry Units Units). .4 CSA A179-04(R2009), Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry.
.3
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.3 (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) .5 CAN/CSA-A370-04(R2009), Connectors for Masonry. .6 CAN/CSA-A371-04(R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings. .7 CSA-G30.18-09, Carbon Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement. .8 CSA-S304.1-04, Design of Masonry Structures.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit product data sheet for each item. Indicate VOC's mortar, grout, parging, colour additives and admixtures. Submit shop drawings indicating wall sections and details, reinforcing and anchors, special detailing, patterning and locations of control joints. Submit the following samples: .1 Submit samples of each type and colour of masonry unit used prior to placing order. .2 Submit samples two 200 mm long samples of coloured mortar. .3 Submit samples of masonry anchors and ties.
.3
.4
.1
Provide plain and reinforced masonry in accordance with CSA A370, CSA A371, and CSA S304.1. Mock-ups: .1 Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00, supplemented as follows: .1 Construct one mock-up panel of unit masonry construction, 1200 mm wide x 1200 mm high in a location accepted by Departmental Representative. .2 Demonstrate use of reinforcement, ties, flashing, weep holes, jointing, coursing, coping and sills, mortar, bonding, control joints, and workmanship. .3 Mock-up may form part of Work if accepted bythe Departmental Representative. Mock-ups which do not form part of Work are to be removed from
.2
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE (Cont'd)
.2
Mock-ups:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .3 (Cont'd) Site during final cleanup, or when directed by theDepartmental Representative.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
.1
Deliver, store and handle masonry materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00, supplemented as follows: .1 Deliver prepackaged, dry-blended mortar mix to project site in labelled plastic-lined bags each bearing name and address of manufacturer, production codes or batch numbers, and colour or formula numbers. .2 Maintain mortar, grout and packaged materials clean, dry, and protected against dampness, freezing, traffic and contamination by foreign materials. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Architectural Block: .1 Integrally coloured, full split and smooth face, normalweight units, block sized at 100 mm x 200 mm x 100 mm, unless otherwise indicated, CSA A165 Series; H/15/A/M; S/15/A/M; Sc/15/A/M. .2 Profiled concrete block to have profile on face and on exposed ends where special shapes are required. .3 Provide samples for the Departmental Representative's approval. .4 Colour: As shown on Contract Drawings. .5 Acceptable material: .1 Split and Smooth Faced Architectural Block, manufactured by Permacon 1-888-PERMACON (1-888-73762266) www.permacon.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.2
Concrete block to CAN/CSA-A165.1: 140 mm, 190 mm, and 240 mm thickness as shown on Contract Drawings. .1 H/15/A/M, hollow, normal weight for partitions. .2 SF/15/A/M, full solid, normal weight for top course of load bearing walls. .3 Special shapes: provide bullnosed units for exposed corners. Provide purpose-made shapes for lintels and bond beams. Provide additional special shapes as indicated. Mortar: to CSA A179, Proportion specification. Select type from table below. .1 Exterior above grade: .1 Type S: loadbearing walls requiring high compressive strength. .2 Type N: loadbearing walls requiring low compressive strength. .3 Type N: Non-loadbearing walls, parapet walls. .2 Exterior at or below grade: .1 Type M: foundation walls. .3 Interior: .1 Type N: loadbearing walls and nonloadbearing partitions. .4 Fine grout to Table 3. .5 Parging: Mortar Types M, S, or N, are suitable for parging. Match mortar used for masonry, or use Type N if masonry mortar is weaker than aforementioned types, or if type is not known. .6 Mortar for grouted reinforced masonry: type S based on property specifications. Grout: 25 Mpa concrete in accordance with CAN/CSA A23.1/A23.2. Admixtures for mortar colour: metallic oxide pigment. Connectors: to CAN/CSA-A370, minimum Level 2 corrosion protection. Reinforcement: Conforming to CSA A370, CSA A371, and ASTM A82. .1 Type 1 (Single wythe): .1 Truss type, galvanized steel wire to ASTM A82/A82M for single wythe masonry walls.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.7
Reinforcement:(Cont'd) .1 Type 1 (Single wythe):(Cont'd) .2 Acceptable material: .1 Blok-Trus BL30, manufactured by Blok-Lok Ltd. 416-749-1010 www.blok-lok.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. .2 Type 2 (Cast-in-place back-up): .1 Adjustable type, anchors fabricated from minimum 2.65 mm plate with 4.76 mm wire. Supply dovetail slots for installation as part of concrete Work. .2 Provide Type 304 stainless steel ties and reinforcing in accordance with ASYM Afor masonry more than 13 m above grade. .3 Acceptable material: .1 Dovetail Anchors BLT8, manufactured by Blok-Lok Ltd. 416-749-1010 www.blok-lok.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. .3 Type 3 (Cavity wall block back-up): to CSA-A371, adjustable. .1 Truss type reinforcing with welded box ties at intersections approximately 400 mm oc, welded bar across box, 3.66 mm galvanized steel wire to ASTM A82/A82M, shop fabricated corners and intersections. .2 Hook type box ties, 4.76 mm galvanized steel wire. .3 Provide Type 304 stainless steel ties and reinforcing in accordance with ASYM Afor masonry more than 13 m above grade. .4 Acceptable material: .1 Adjustable Econo-Cavity Blok-Truss II BL37, manufactured by Blok-Lok Ltd. 416-749-1010 www.blok-lok.com. .2 DW 142, manufactured by Dur-O-Wal Ltd. 905- 670-4470 www.dur-o-wal.com. .3 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
.8
Insulation retaining wedges: pvc, U shape wedge, rib face locking system. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Wedge-Lok, manufactured by Blok-Lok Ltd. 416-749-1010 www.blok-lok.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Reinforcing bars: to CSA-G30.18, Grade 400, deformed. SS bolts, nuts and washers: stainless steel to ASTM F593. Cell vent weep-hole ventilator: flexible U.V. resistant polypropylene co-polymer, sized to match masonry units, colours selected from manufacturer's standard range. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Cell Vent Weep-Hole Ventilator, manufactured by Dur-O-Wal 905-670-4470 www.dur-o-wal.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Masonry flashing: 600 g/m2 copper laminated to fibre reinforced, asphalt impregnated paper. Masonry flashing adhesive: fibrated cutback asphalt to CAN/CGSB-37.4. Metal flashings: Flashings in accordance with Section 07 62 00, continuous strips with a 19 mm folded drip edge. Mortar dropping control device: 250 mm high x thickness to suit the cavity, recycled polyester or high density polyethylene, high density polyethylene woven mesh strips, corrugated cellular polypropylene curve, tabs and corrosion resistant screws. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Mortar Net, manufactured by Mortar Net 1-800-664-6638 www.mortarnet.com, distributed by JV Building Products 905-851-3744 or 416-746-8469. .2 Mortar Break, manufactured by Advanced Building Products 1-800-252-2306 www.advancedflashing.com, distributed by
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
.15
Mortar dropping control device:(Cont'd) .1 Acceptable material:(Cont'd) Blok-Lok Ltd. 416-749-1010 www.blok-lok.com. .3 D/A 1007 Mor-Control, manufactured by Dur-O-Wal 905-670-4470 www.dur-o-wal.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
.16
Concrete aggregate: to CAN/CSA-A23.1, 10 mm maximum size. Fibre firestopping: bearing ULC label, mineral fibre material capable of being compressed into space at top of masonry partitions. Precast concrete sills: .1 Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001, type GU. .2 Compressive strength: 30 MPa at 28 days. .3 Exposure class: F-1 to CSA-A23.1/A23.2. .4 Aggregate size: 10 mm maximum size to CSA-A23.1/A23.2. .5 Air content: 6%. .6 Water: potable. .7 Finish: acid washed. .8 Size: Size as shown in length to suit opening. .9 Slope sill in direction indicated .10 Provide drips. Dowel and hook anchors to be stainless steel. Air stops: Continuous 1.0 mm thick stainless steel Type 304. Cavity wall insulation: In accordance with Section 07 20 00. Steel masonry units: In accordance with Section 11 19 70.
.17
.18
.19
.20
.21
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MIXING AND APPROVAL
.1 .2
In accordance CSA A179. Add colouring agent to manufacturer's instructions for mortar. Do not commence masonry work until mortar is tested and approved by Departmental Representative. Concrete mix shall attain: .1 25 MPa compressive strength at 28 days. .2 100 mm slump at time of deposit.
.3
.4
3.2
PROTECTION
.1
Protect in accordance with CSA-A371, except following requirements supplement Clause 6.7.2: .1 Maintain temperature of mortar between 5C and 50C until used.
3.3 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP
.1
Perform masonry Work in accordance with CSA A371 and as indicated. Coordinate with Section 11 19 70 for the installation of steel masonry units. Joints of uniform thickness. Tolerances suggested in notes to Clause 7.1 of CSA-A371 apply. Align vertical joints. Lay maximum 1800 mm height of masonry per day. Cut masonry with power saw. Fill space between top of non-bearing partitions, underside of deck and underside of structural members with fibre firestopping compressed as recommended by Manufacturer and requirements of ULC tests. Neatly trim on each side of partitions. Obtain lateral support anglesfrom Section 05 50 01 and install at required spacing.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.6 .7
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.3 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP (Cont'd)
.8
Reinforce masonry walls with reinforcing steel as indicated on Drawings. Vertical reinforcing shall be fully grouted in masonry cores with grout. Install mineral fibre joint filler between: .1 Exterior masonry walls and columns. .2 Masonry and lintels. Do masonry mortar and grout work in accordance with CAN/CSA-A179 except where specified otherwise. Do masonry reinforcing, tying and connecting in accordance with CAN/CSA-A370 and CAN/CSA-A371. If there is conflict in the requirements of these two standards, the more stringent requirement shall apply. Install insulation retaining wedges as work progresses taking care that mortar joint has achieved initial set before tamping wedges into place. Lightly wet set masonry surfaces before laying abutting masonry. Remove surplus mortar and mortar droppings as work progresses. Lay blocks in stack bond except as indicated otherwise. Concave joints, strike joints flush in non-exposed areas or where shown on Contract Drawings. Build in items supplied by other sections. Fill built-in interior hollow metal frames with mortar. Control joints: .1 Provide continuous vertical control joints in block partitions in following locations: .1 Where new partitions abutt existing partitions. .2 In new partitions in indicated locations and not spaced farther than 7.5 m o.c. .3 On each side of column.
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17 .18
.19
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 10 2011-06-10
3.3 INSTALLATION AND WORKMANSHIP (Cont'd)
.19
Control joints:(Cont'd) .2 Stop masonry reinforcement each side of control joint. Keep joint free of mortar. Reinforced lintels: .1 Install reinforced block lintels at openings. .2 Provide minimum bearing of 200 mm at each side of opening. .3 Install reinforcing bars and fill with concrete. .4 Set block lintels in place using specified mortar. Install masonry flashing over foundation walls on which masonry units bear, over lintels built into masonry and above roof flashing where roof abutts masonry. Extend masonry flashing beyond exterior face and turn down 45 to form a drip, through outer wythe, up backing material minimum 200 mm and turn into joint at inner wythe. Lap joints 100 mm and apply adhesive. Place reinforcing bars in cavities. Cell vent weep-hole ventilator in every third vertical block joint at top of block panels where shown on drawings. Cell vent weep-hole ventilator in every third vertical block joint at bottom course and first course above lintels. Provide air stops in continuous lengths in locations indicated on drawings. Fasten air stops to masonry back-up at maximum 450 mm o.c. Air stops to extend from masonry back-up to middle of face masonry unit at control joints. Precast concrete shapes: .1 Install dampproofing or flashings continuous under full length of precast shapes. .2 Install precast shapes in full mortar bed and secure units to each other with stainless steel dowels and to masonry units with stainless steel hook anchors, fully grouted.
.20
.21
.22
.23 .24
.25
.26
.27
UNIT MASONRY
Section 04 20 00 Page 11 2011-06-10
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers. Remove droppings and splashings using clean sponge and water. Clean masonry with low pressure clean water and soft natural bristle brush. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
.4
END
LOAD BEARING STRUCTURAL METAL STUD FRAMING
Section 05 41 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 07 46 19: Installation of metal siding. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum board.
.2
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Spec for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian Standards Association (CSA)/CSA International .1 CSA G164-M92(R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .2 CSA S136-07, North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .3 CSA S136.1-07, Commentary on North American Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members. .4 CSA W47.1-03(R2008), Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .5 CSA W55.3-1965(R2003), Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings. .6 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) (Metric Version). Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute (CSSBI) .1 Canadian Sheet Steel Building Institute CSSBI 52M-91, Lightweight Steel Framing Binder. Ontario Building Code, OBC 2006. National Building Code of Canada, NBC 2005.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
Section 05 41 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 DESIGN OF STEEL STUD FRAMING SYSTEM
.1
Design in accordance with NBC 2005, OBC 2006, CSA S136, CSA S136.1 and to the following: .1 1.12 mm minimum. .2 305 mm o.c. max. .3 92.5 mm studs. Design load-bearing metal studs based on Limit States Design principles using factored loads and resistances. Loads and load factors to be in accordance with the National Building Code (NBC). Resistance factors to be determined in accordance with the NBC and CAN/CSA-S136-M. Design load-bearing metal studs to withstand live, dead, lateral, wind, seismic, handling, transportation, and erection loads. Design bridging to prevent member rotation and member translation perpendicular to the minor axis. Provide for secondary stress effects due to torsion between lines of bridging.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Design load-bearing metal studs without relying on sheathing or gypsum board to resist torsion and weak axis buckling.
1.4
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop details and erection drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Each drawing submission shall bear signature and stamp of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in province of Ontario. In erection drawings, indicate relevant details such as depth, spacing, bridging lines, bearing and anchorage details. In shop details, provide particulars relative to stud geometry, framed openings, splicing details, bearing and anchorage. Include member size, properties, specified and factored member loads, and stresses under various loadings, deflection and camber.
.2
.3
.4
Section 05 41 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS (Cont'd)
.5
Reproduction of contract drawings for use as erection drawings is not permitted unless approved in writing by Departmental Representative. Indicate welds by welding symbols as defined in CSA W59.
.6
.1
Retain a Professional Engineer, licensed in Province of Ontario, with experience in Work of comparable complexity and scope, to perform following services as part of Work of this Section: .1 Design of load-bearing metal studs. .2 Review, stamp, and sign shop drawings and design calculations. .3 Conduct shop and on-site inspections, prepare and submit written inspection reports verifying that this part of Work is in accordance with Contract Documents and reviewed shop drawings.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sheet steel: to ASTM A653/A653M, Grade A, 33 ksi (228 MPa) minimum yield, minimum 30% total recycled content. Sheet steel: to ASTM A653/A653M, Grade A, 33 ksi (228 MPa) minimum yield, minimum 30% total recycled content. Welding materials: to CSA W59 and certified by Canadian Welding Bureau.
.2
.3
Section 05 41 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
Screws: pan head, self-drilling, self-tapping sheet metal screws, corrosion protected to minimum requirements of CSSBI, length to suit application. Anchors: concrete expansion anchors or other suitable drilled type fasteners. Bolts, nuts, washers: hot dipped galvanized to CAN/CSA-G164, 600 g/m2 zinc coating. Touch up primer: zinc rich, to CAN/CGSB1.181.
.5
.6
.7
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate sheet steel studs, track and accessories in accordance with CSA S136, CSA S136.1 and reviewed shop drawings and galvanize to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONNECTION TO EXISTING WORK
.1
Verify dimensions and condition of existing work before commencing fabrication and report any discrepancy and potential problem areas to Departmental Representative and await instructions.
3.2
GENERAL
.1 .2
Do welding in accordance with CSA W59. Companies to be certified under Division 1 or 2.1 of CSA W47.1 for fusion welding of steel structures and/or CSA W55.3 for resistance welding of structural components.
.3
Do work in accordance with CSSBI 52M.
3.3
ERECTION
.1
Obtain written approval from Departmental Representative prior to field cutting or altering joists or bridging that are not shown on shop drawings.
Section 05 41 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
3.3 ERECTION (Cont'd)
.2
Provide and install Engineered steel stud framing system as shown on drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Perform work in accordance with CSSBI 52M. Perform welding in accordance with CSA W59. Frame openings in stud walls to adequately carry loads by use of additional framing members and bracing as detailed on shop drawings.
.3
.4
.5
Touch up welds with coat of zinc rich primer.
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
.1
Plumb: not to exceed 1/500th of member length. Camber: not to exceed 1/1000th of member length. Spacing: not more than 3.0 mm from design spacing. Gap between end of stud and track web: not more than 4.0 mm.
.2
.3
.4
3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1
Inspection and testing of materials and workmanship will be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. Departmental Representative will pay costs of tests as specified in Section 01 21 00.
.2
END
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM): .1 .1 ASTM A53/A53M-07, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .3 ASTM A627-03, Standard Test Methods for Tool-Resisting Steel Bars, Flats, and Shapes for Detention and Correctional Facilities. .4 ASTM A666-03, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar. .5 ASTM A786/A786M-05(2009), Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled Carbon, Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy, and Alloy Steel Floor Plates. .6 ASTM A1011/A1011M-09b, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength. .7 ASTM F593-02(2008), Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bolts, Hex Cap Screws, and Studs. .8 ASTM F1267-07, Standard Specification for Metal, Expanded, Steel. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CAN/CSA-B651-04, Accessible Design for the Built Environment. .2 CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .3 CAN/CSA-W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .4 CAN/CSA-G164-92(2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
.2
.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): .1 NAAMM, Metal Stairs Manual, 5th Edition (1992).
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data of each item specified in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. .1 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details and accessories. .2 Indicate each item's conformance with CAN/CSA-B651. .3 Each shop drawing submission shall bear signature and stamp of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in province of Ontario.
1.3
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Sections 01 33 00. Submit 150 x 150 mm steel sample demonstrating powder coating finish and colour for the approval of the Departmental Representative.
.2
.1
Test Reports: submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certifications: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: Store materials off ground and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.2
.3 .4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Stainless steel sheet, strip, plate and flat bar: to ASTM A666, type 304, AISI No. 4 finish, minimum 75% recycled content, minimum sheet steel thickness 2.0 mm, unless otherwise indicated. SS bolts, nuts and washers: stainless steel to ASTM F593, minimum 75% recycled content. Steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, minimum 30% recycled content. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): to CAN/CSAG40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W, Class H, minimum 30% recycled content. Tool resisting steel bars: to ASTM A627, minimum 25% recycled content. Welding materials: to CSA W59. Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, standard weight, schedule 40 seamless black. Security mesh grating: 6 mm thick, galvanized, expanded steel diamond grating conforming to ASTM F1267. Style as selected by
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6 .7
.8
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 4 2011-06-10
.8
Security mesh grating:(Cont'd) the Departmental Representative. For use at retherm unit enclosure. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Expanded Metal Grating, as manufactured by Amico Grating 1-800-663-4474 www.amico-grating.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Alkyd primer: oil type to CAN/CGSB-1.40, Ecologo certified. Galvanizing: hot dip, unpassivated, to ASTM A123/A123M, Coating Grade 85, minimum 600 g/m2. Powder coating: .1 Provide samples for each colour and finish for the Departmental Representative's approval. .2 Colours: To be selected by the Departmental Representative. .3 Finishes shall be fully cured and inert at fabricator's shop. .4 Acceptable material: .1 Powder Coatings, as manufactured by Tiger Drylac 1-800-243-8148 www.tiger-coatings.us. .2 Powder Coatings, Valspar Paint 1-800-845-9061 www.valsparpaint.com. .3 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Zinc rich primer for galvanized surfaces: zinc rich, readymix to CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ecologo certified. Grout: non-shrink, non-metallic, flowable, 24 h, 15 MPa, pullout strength 7.9 MPa. Fasteners (to stainless steel fabrications): to ASTM A666, type 304 stainless steel, of size and capacity as indicated on the reviewed shop drawings and as required to withstand all super imposed loading and to conform with all code requirements. Use Torx and pin fasteners where exposed.
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 5 2011-06-10
.15
Extruded aluminum step nosings with abrasive filler: .1 The base shall consist of heat treated extruded aluminum alloy 6063-T6. .2 The abrasive filler shall consist of a mixture of aluminum oxide and silicon carbide granules in an epoxy matrix locked into the extruded channels of the base. .3 The abrasive ribs shall project a minimum of 1.6 mm above the extruded channels of the base. .4 Five (5) abrasive bands with 75 mm deep are to be provided for each nosing strip. .5 Nosings shall terminate not more than 75 mm from ends of each step. Colour to contrast with adjacent floor surface and to be selected by the Departmental Representative from manufacturer's range. .6 Anchor type to be continuous extruded anchor; "arrow shape". Strips to stop 100mm short of each edge of stair tread. .7 Coordinate with Division 3 - Concrete as required for installation. Security fasteners: .1 Security Fasteners (to all secure, inmate detention areas): use either concealed fasteners or tamper resistant Torx with pin fasteners where exposed. .2 Provide security screws, security nuts, rivets, spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various items, ie torx pin head, socket pin head, phillips pin head, hex pin head or equivalent. .3 Spanner screws to have slots that require a special spanner tool to remove screws. .4 Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. .5 Standard screws not acceptable. Drilled adhesive anchors: injection adhesive anchor consisting of fast curing 2-part adhesive injected into drilled hole, followed by insertion of bolt, rod or reinforing bar.
.16
.17
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 6 2011-06-10
.18
Expansion anchors: stud type expansion anchor driven into drilled hole, expands when nut torqued. Minimum size 10 x 90 mm. Plywood: In accordance with Section 06 10 12. Security glazing: In accordance with Section 08 00 00. Coordinate with noted Section as required for glazing at telephone screens, stainless steel countertops and additional areas as required or indicated. Elbow catch: Heavy duty elbow catch with bright nickel finish. For use at drug dispensary unit. .1 EPC-1018-N, manufactured by Epco Hardware 1-810-767-2050 www.epcohardware.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Hinges: Heavy duty hinges to suit intended application and to meet the approval of the Departmental Representative.
.19 .20
.21
.22
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fit joints in true planes and securely fasten. Weld to CSA W59. File or grind welds smooth and flush with adjoining surface. Shop assemble work. Metal fabrications are to include but not be limited to the following: .1 Loose angle lintels. .2 Steel handrails and railings. .3 Lateral support angles for masonry partitions. .4 Stainless steel bench and supports. .5 Window support brackets. .6 Ladder. .7 Security bars. .8 Stainless steel countertops and steel framing. .9 Appliance cladding, enclosure and retainers. .10 Grab rail. .11 Retherm unit enclosure with mesh grating.
.2
.3 .4
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 7 2011-06-10
.4
(Cont'd) .12 Metal components for telephone screens. .13 Drug dispensary unit. .14 Secure access panel. .15 Computer work station. .16 Miscellaneous brackets, plates, angles and supports.
2.3 STAINLESS STEEL WORK
.1
Take all necessary precautions to safeguard against latent surface discolouration due to disturbance of the natural protective oxide coating of the material or to contamination from other sources. Workmanship shall be the best standard practice for this type of work. Execute stainless steel work in accordance with the applicable instructions set forth in Atlas Stainless Steels' "Technical Data" handbook on stainless steel. Do all stainless steel fabrication in clean shops, located away from areas where carbon steel is burnt, ground, or cut with abrasive wheels to ensure that carbon steel dust will not be embedded into the stainless steel, and as follows: .1 In fabrication of stainless steel do not use tools and dies which have been used on carbon steels. .2 Ensure tools and dies use for forming and cutting stainless steel are free of nicks and other damage. .3 Do not use carbon grits and grinding wheels which will imbed foreign particles into stainless steel surfaces. Use only stainless steel wool when wool polishing is required. .4 Stainless steel items, on which rust stains appear, shall be replaced with new fabricated material.
.2
.3
2.4
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with zinc coating 600 g/m2, Coating Grade 85, to ASTM A123/A123M.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 8 2011-06-10
2.4 FINISHES (Cont'd)
.2
Shop coat primer: in accordance with chemical component limits and restrictions requirements and VOC limits of CCD-047a. Powder coating: .1 Shop apply powder coating to items as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Clean assemblies as indicated free of rust and grease. Pretreat with zinc phosphate. Spray apply powder coating electrostatically to a dry film thickness of 3 to 4 mils. Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix in accordance with chemical component limits and restrictions requirements and VOC limits of CCD-047a.
.3
.4
2.5 SHOP PAINTING
.1 .2
Primer: VOC limit 250 g/L maximum to GS-11. Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized or concrete encased items. Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C. Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint.
.3
.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for metal fabrications installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative. .2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.1 EXAMINATION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections. Install work straight, plumb and level to a tolerance of 1:600. Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to Departmental Representative such as dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles. Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which they pass. Supply other sections with templates, instructions and built-in items. Make field connections with bolts to CSA S16 or Weld field connection. Deliver items over for casting into concrete and building into masonry together with setting templates to appropriate location and construction personnel. Touch-up burnt, scratched or chipped primer.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
3.3 LOOSE ANGLE LINTELS
.1
Supply masonry section with steel loose angle lintels of sizes required to suit masonry openings. Apply alkyd primer to interior lintels. Galvanize exterior lintels. Provide 150 mm bearing at ends. Weld or bolt together back-to-back angles.
.2
.3 .4
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 10 2011-06-10
3.4 STEEL HANDRAILS AND RAILINGS
.1
Supply and install steel handrails and railings and all associated components including but not limited to brackets and wall plates for use at stair and roof assemblies. Sizes as shown. Design railings to withstand minimum horizontal and vertical loads as required to meet requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. In no instance shall load design of railings be less than 2.2 kN/m horizontally and 1.5 kN/m vertically. Apply alkyd primer to interior handrails and railings. Galvanize exterior handrails and railings. Handrail bracket: Fabricate as shown. After fabrication, galvanized bracket in accordance with CAN/CSA G164-M. Secure brackets to wall. Set railing standards in concrete with grout, trowel surface smooth and flush with adjoining surface.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.5 LATERAL SUPPORT .1 ANGLES FOR MASONRY PARTITIONS .2
Supply masonry section with steel angles to provide lateral support of masonry partitions where they abutt the underside of deck. Apply alkyd primer.
3.6 STAINLESS STEEL .1 BENCH AND SUPPORTS
Provide stainless steel bench and angle and bracket supports as shown on Contract Drawings. Sizes as shown. Fabricate bench from 3 mm thick stainless steel sheet laminated onto plywood substrate. Weld all connections. Ensure sturdy construction.
.2
.3 .4
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 11 2011-06-10
3.7 WINDOW SUPPORT BRACKETS
.1 .2
Provide steel window support brackets. Weld required shapes and supply anchors.
.3
Galvanize after fabrication.
.4
Provide to Section 04 20 00 for building-in.
3.8
LADDER
.1 .2 .3 .4
Supply and install steel ladder. Stringers 400 mm apart. Rungs 300 mm centres. Wall brackets 1200 mm centres to maintain 200 mm wall clearance. Apply alkyd primer to interior ladders.
.5
.6
Provide safety cages around ladders where indicated on Drawings, in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.
3.9
SECURITY BARS
.1
Material and fabrication shall meet Correctional Service Canada Technical Criteria for 'Security Steel'.
.2
Fabricate security bar units in accordance with detailed drawings. Bars: tool resistant steel to ASTM A627, 25 mm dia. steel core, with spacer rings at 250 mm centres as indicated on drawings. Provide grid with weld-on angle frame.
.3
.4
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 12 2011-06-10
.5
Mitre all joints, fill completely with weld and grind smooth.
.6
Weld bars all around to the frame.
.7
Take care that welding operations do not impair rotation of internal round bar core. Secure unit with tamperproof anchors to Departmental Representative's approval. Provide entire grid with galvanized finish.
.8
.9
3.10 STAINLESS STEEL COUNTERTOPS AND STEEL FRAMING
.1
Coordinate with Section 06 40 01 for sizing and installation of plywood sub-assembly for countertops. Provide steel angle and door framing as required for countertop structure. Sizes as shown. Countertop to be complete with removable access door and tamperproof Torx fasteners.
.2
.3
Cut and form stainless steel sheet to fit. Minimum thickness of stainless steel sheet as indicated, 2 mm.
.4
Form lightly eased arrises and tight mitres.
.5
Weld and grind smooth plain finished stainless steel products.
.6
Adhere stainless steel surfacing to wood sub-assembly using epoxy adhesives.
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 13 2011-06-10
.7 .8
Apply protective covering to metal surfaces. Coordinate with Section 07 90 00 for installation of security sealant at countertops.
3.11 APPLIANCE CLADDING, ENCLOSURE AND RETAINERS
.1
Cladding: .1 Provide 6 mm thick stainless steel cladding at locations shown on drawings complete with fasteners as required for secure and complete installation. For use rough-in for future washer/dryer units. .2 Cladding to be flush will adjacent wall assembly. Enclosure and retainer bars: .1 Design 6 mm thick stainless steel enclosures to withstand live, dead, lateral, seismic, handling, transportation, and erection loads. .2 Provide bracing, miscellaneous reinforcing and structural framing members as required to complete the Work, where not indicated on Contract Drawings. .3 Ensure no vibration harmonics, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system occur. .4 Retainer bars: Provide stainless steel retainer bars for placement at bottom of appliances for additional securement measures. Coordinate with Section 10 28 00 as required for sizing and installation of enclosure and retainer bars for washers and dryers.
.2
.3
3.12
GRAB RAIL
.1
Provide custom stainless steel grab rail complete with stud anchor for shower location as shown on Contract Drawings. Grab bar to profile as shown. Coordinate with Section 04 20 00 as required for installation of grab rail at block partition wall.
.2 .3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 14 2011-06-10
3.13 RETHERM UNIT ENCLOSURE
.1
Provide 6 mm thick steel enclosure for retherm unit complete with security mesh grating. Sizes as shown. Design enclosure to withstand live, dead, lateral, seismic, handling, transportation, and erection loads. Provide miscellaneous reinforcing as required to complete the Work, where not indicated on Contract Drawings. Ensure no vibration harmonics, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system occur. Coordinate with applicable Sections as required for sizing and installation of steel enclosure unit.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.14 METAL COMPONENTS FOR TELEPHONE SCREENS
.1
Provide components as required for telephone screens including but not limited to steel angles, plates, spacer bars, Torx tamperproof fasteners, neoprene gaskets and security sealant. Coordinate with Sections 07 90 00 for installation of security sealant and Section 08 80 00 for installation of security glazing. Telephone screen to be installed rigid, level and to the approval of the Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
3.15 DRUG DISPENSARY UNIT
.1
Provide stainless steel drug dispensary unit as shown on Contract Drawings. Sizes as shown. Provide all components and accessories as required for complete and secure installation of dispensary unit including but not limited to elbow catch, latch, plate door, spacer and hinge. Welded joints to be ground smooth.
.2
.3
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 15 2011-06-10
.4
Adjust door for smooth operation.
3.16 SECURE ACCESS PANEL
.1
Secure access panel sized at 600 x 600 mm, fabricated from 6 mm thick stainless steel sheet complete with tamperproof Torx fasteners, angles, tabs, stud anchors and heavy duty hinges. Coordinate with mechanical and masonry and assemblies for installation.
.2
.3 .4
Welded joints to be ground smooth. Adjust door for smooth operation.
3.17 COMPUTER WORK STATION
.1
Fabricate computer work station as shown on Contract Drawings. Sizes as shown. Work station to include 6 mm thick bent stainless steel plate for keyboard counter, side gables and angles. Install components rigid, secure and level.
.2
.3
3.18 MISCELLANEOUS BRACKETS, SUPPORTS, ANGLES, AND PLATES
.1
Supply and install or supply for installation by trades responsible, all loose brackets, supports, angles, and plates where indicated, except where such brackets, supports, angles and plates are specified under work of other Sections. Drill for countersunk screws, expansion anchors and anchor bolts. Provide adhesive anchors where required. Unless otherwise specified, prime paint for interior installation; galvanized finish for exterior installation. Provide stainless steel miscellaneous components for items as shown such as but not limited to angles and bent plates.
.2
METAL FABRICATIONS
Section 05 50 01 Page 16 2011-06-10
3.19
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day. .2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
3.20
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by metal fabrications installation.
.2
END
METAL STAIRS
Section 05 51 29 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International .1 ASTM A123/A123M-09, Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products. .2 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .3 ASTM A325M-10, Standard Specification for Structural Bolts, Steel, Heat Treated, 830 MPa Minimum Tensile Strength Metric. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. CSA International .1 CSA G40.20-04(R2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CSA W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.2
.3
1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for stairs and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate construction details, sizes of steel sections and thickness of steel sheet.
.3
METAL STAIRS
Section 05 51 29 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Test Reports: submit certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certifications: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect stairs from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of packaging materials as specified in in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1 .2
Design Requirements: Design metal stair and construction and connections to NBC vertical and horizontal live load requirements. Detail and fabricate stairs to NAAMM Metal Stairs Manual.
.3
METAL STAIRS
Section 05 51 29 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.2
MATERIALS
.1
Steel sections: to CSA G40.20/G40.21 Grade 300 W. Steel plate: to CSA G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300 W. Welding materials: to CSA W59. Bolts: to ASTM A307. High strength bolts: to ASTM A325M.
.2
.3 .4 .5
2.3
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate in accordance with NAAMM, Metal Stair Manual. Weld connections where possible, otherwise bolt connections. Countersink exposed fastenings, cut off bolts flush with nuts. Make exposed connections of same material, colour and finish as base material on which they occur. Accurately form connections with exposed faces flush: .1 Make mitres and joints tight. .2 Make risers of equal height. Grind or file exposed welds and steel sections smooth. Shop fabricate stairs in sections as large and complete as practicable.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.4 STEEL PAN STAIRS
.1
Fabricate stairs with open riser steel construction. Form treads from 9.5 mm thick steel plate welded to L shaped angles in sizes as shown. Angles to be welded to stringers as shown on drawings. Form bent stringers as shown. Provide clip angles for fastening of furring channels, where applied finish is indicated for underside of stairs and landings.
.2
.3 .4
METAL STAIRS
Section 05 51 29 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.4 STEEL PAN STAIRS (Cont'd)
.5
Extend stringers around mid landings to form steel base. Close ends of stringers where exposed.
.6
2.5 PIPE/TUBING .1 AND MESH BALUSTRADES
In accordance with Section 05 50 01 - Metal Fabrications. Coordinate with noted Section as required for sizing and installation.
2.6
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: hot dipped galvanizing with zinc coating 600 g/m2, Coating Grade 85, to ASTM A123/A123M. Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Shop coat prime interior stairs.
.2 .3
.4
2.7
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Clean surfaces in accordance with Steel Structures Painting Council Manual Volume 2. Apply one coat of shop primer except interior surfaces of pans. Apply two coats of primer of different colours to parts inaccessible after final assembly. Use primer as prepared by manufacturer without thinning or adding admixtures. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease, do not paint when temperature is below 7 degrees C. Do not paint surfaces to be field welded.
.2
.3
.4
.5
METAL STAIRS
Section 05 51 29 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for metal stairs and ladders installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative. .2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. .3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF .1 STAIRS
Install in accordance with NAAMM, Metal Stair Manual.
.2
Install plumb and true in exact locations, using welded connections wherever possible to provide rigid structure. Provide anchor bolts, bolts and plates for connecting stairs to structure. Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates. Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. Touch up shop primer to bolts, welds, and burned or scratched surfaces at completion of erection.
.3
.4
.5
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
METAL STAIRS
Section 05 51 29 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.3 CLEANING (Cont'd)
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Perform cleaning as soon as possible after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.2
3.5
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by metal stairs installation.
.2
END
CARPENTRY
Section 06 10 12 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA O80 Series-08, Wood Preservation, Includes Update No. 1 (2008). .2 CAN/CSA-O86-09 Consolidation(R2006), Engineering Design in Wood (including O86S1-05, Supplement #1 to CAN/CSA-O86-01, Engineering Design in Wood and replacement pages issued January 2003 as Update #1 to CAN/CSA-086-01, Engineering Design in Wood incorporated into the original 2001 standard). .3 CSA O112 Series M1977(R2006), CSA Standards for Wood Adhesives. .4 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .5 CSA O151-09, Canadian Softwood Plywood. National Building Code of Canada, NBC 2005. South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD): .1 SCAQMD Rule 1168, Adhesive and Sealant Applications, Amended January 7, 2005.
.2 .3
.1
Lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board. Plywood in accordance with CSA and ANSI standards.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Wood: S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, December 1, 2005, S4S. .1 Studs: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), 121c. "STUD". .2 Blocking, furring, strapping, curbs, nailers, bracing, bridging, and cants: spruce, pine or fir (SPF), 121c. and pine, 113d.
CARPENTRY
Section 06 10 12 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2 .3
Fastenings: to CAN/CSA-086. Douglas fir plywood (DFP): to CSA O121, standard construction, urea formaldehyde free. Thickness as indicated on drawings. .1 Roof Underlay: SHG Sheathing Grade, unsanded surfaces to Tables E-1 and E-2. .2 Parapet sheathing: SHG Sheathing Grade, unsanded surfaces to Tables E-1 and E-2. Canadian softwood plywood (CSP): to CSA O151, standard construction, urea formaldehyde free. Thickness as indicated on drawings. Field applied wood preservative: copper napthenate to AWPA P8, green colour. Preservative treated plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA O121, G1S good one side, pressure treated with CCA to CSA O80.9, minimum retention 4.0 kg/m3 by assay. .1 Preservative: chromated copper arsenate (CCA) to AWPA P5 as amended by CAN/CSAO80-Series. Fire retardant treated plywood: Douglas Fir to CSA O121, G1S, fire retardant treated to CSA O80.27, maximum flame spread 25, maximum smoke developed 25. .1 Backboard: Thickness as indicated, sanded, to Table E-1. Construction adhesive: to CSA O112 Series, cartridge loaded. .1 Maximum allowable VOC limit 140 g/L. .2 SCAQMD Rule 1168, Adhesives and Sealants Applications.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
CARPENTRY
Section 06 10 12 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Apply wood preservative to wood in contact with roofing, concrete and masonry. Treat surfaces of pressure treated wood and plywood which are cut or bored after pressure treatment with field applied wood preservative. Set items in place plumb, straight and level to a tolerance of 1:600 and rigidly secure in place. Construct continuous members from pieces of longest practical length. Install subflooring with panel end-joints located on solid bearing, staggered at least 800 mm. In addition to mechanical fasteners, apply subflooring adhesive under panels installed on wood joists. Place continuous adhesive bead in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, single-bead on each joist and double-bead on joists where panel ends butt. When weather conditions are unsuitable for adhesive, use drywall screws for mechanical fasteners. Secure exterior work with galvanized or nonferrous fasteners. Install plywood backboards with countersunk screws.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
END
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
Section 06 40 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/National Particleboard Association/National Electrical Maufacturers Association (ANSI/NPA/NEMA): .1 ANSI/BHMA A156.9-2010, Cabinet Hardware. .2 ANSI/NEMA LD 3-2005, High-Pressure Decorative Laminates. ASTM International: .1 ASTM C919-08, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .2 ASTM C920-08, Elastomeric Joint Sealants.
.2
.3
Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada (AWMAC): .1 The Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS), 1st Edition, 2009. http://www.awscds.com/ Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89, Bituminous Solvent Type Paint. (Withdrawn). .2 CAN/CGSB-71.20-M88, Adhesive, Contact, Brushable. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA O112 Series M1977(R2006), CSA Standards for Wood Adhesives. .2 CSA O121-08, Douglas Fir Plywood. .3 CSA O132.2 Series-90 (R1998), Wood Flush Doors. .4 CSA O153-M1980(R2008), Poplar Plywood. .5 CSA Z204-94(R1999), Guideline for Managing Indoor Air Quality in Office Buildings.
.4
.5
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for architectural woodwork and include product
Section 06 40 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.2 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)
.2
Product Data:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS. Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate details of construction, profiles, jointing, fastening and other related details. .2 Indicate materials, thicknesses, finishes and hardware. .3 Indicate locations of service outlets in casework, typical and special installation conditions, and connections, attachments, anchorage and location of exposed fastenings. Samples: .1 Submit for review and acceptance of each unit. .2 Samples will be returned for inclusion into work. .3 Submit duplicate samples of hardwood: sample size 200 mm long. .4 Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic for colour selection. .5 Submit duplicate samples of laminated plastic joints, edging, cutouts and postformed profiles. .6 Submit 150 x 150 mm sample of louvre for Departmental Representative's approval of material, finish and perforation pattern.
.3
.4
.1
Lumber by grade stamp of an agency certified by Canadian Lumber Standards Accreditation Board. Plywood, particleboard, OSB and wood based composite panels to CSA and ANSI standards.
.2
1.4 IAQ - INDOOR AIR QUALITY
.1
Comply with CSA Z204, Guideline for Managing Indoor Air Quality in Office Buildings.
Section 06 40 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.5
ACCESSIBILITY
.1
Comply with CAN/CSA-B651, Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. .1 Protect millwork against dampness and damage during and after delivery. .2 Store millwork in ventilated areas, protected from extreme changes of temperature or humidity. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect architectural woodwork from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Exposed hardwood: Birch, unless otherwise indicated, to AWI/AWMAC-Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 100-T-4, Premium grade. Exposed softwood: S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, December 1, 2005, 202c. "C" CEDAR, INDUSTRIAL CLEAR.
.2
Section 06 40 01 Page 4 2011-06-10
.3
Concealed blocking and framing: S-DRY, graded and stamped to National Lumber Grades Authority, Standard Grading Rules for Canadian Lumber, December 1, 2005, SPF, 121c. "STUD" and 101d. "D" FINISH. Exposed plywood: birch hardwood plywood to AWI/AWMAC/WI AWS, Section 4 Sheet Products, Premium Grade. .1 Wood veneer slicing: Rotary Sliced, unless otherwise approved by the Departmental Representative. Concealed plywood: douglas fir to CSA 0121, Good One Side, urea formaldehyde free. Laminated plastic (PLAM): to NEMA LD-3 as follows: .1 Flatwork face sheet: 1.2 mm thick, heavy wear resistance. .2 Vertical interior face sheets: 0.8 mm thick. .3 Postformed face sheet: 0.8 mm thick. .4 Backing sheet: thickness to match face sheet, high pressure laminate, manufactured by same manufacturer as face sheet. .5 Colours and types: As shown on Contract Drawings. Laminated plastic core: poplar plywood to CSA 0153, Standard Construction, Interior Bond, BB Grade, urea formaldehyde free. Laminated plastic adhesive: contact adhesive to CAN/CGSB-71.20, Ecologo certified. Melamine panels-low pressure laminate: to AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated, Section 203.3. .1 Particleboard core to ANSI/NPA A208.1, industrial grade, 720 kg/m3, minimum 20% recycled content. .2 Finish edges with 0.508 mm thick matching edge banding laminate. Sealant: 1 component, silicone base, solvent curing to ASTM C919 and ASTM C920-08, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, SWRI validated, Ecologo certified, mould and mildew resistant.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 06 40 01 Page 5 2011-06-10
.11
Bituminous paint: acid and alkali resistant to CAN/CGSB-1.108, Type 2, Ecologo certified. Construction adhesive: to CSA O112 Series, cartridge loaded. .1 Maximum allowable VOC limit 140 g/L. .2 SCAQMD Rule 1168, Adhesives and Sealants Applications. PVC edge band: semi-rigid PVC, textured, bullnosed profile, 32 mm deep. Louvre (grille): .1 Provide metal louvres for millwork items as required. .2 Grilles shall be 20 ga. perforated stainless steel, rectangular perforations providing minimum 60% free area. .3 Provide samples for the Departmental Representative's approval. Metal fabrications: In accordance with Section 05 50 01 as required for miscellaneous supports and stainless steel sheet for countertops.
.12
.13
.14
.15
2.2
HARDWARE
.1
Refer to Section 08 70 05 for hardware items including but not limited to hinges, pulls, locks and drawer slides. Magnetic catch: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.9, type B13171, heavy duty. Adjustable shelf standard: to ANSI/BHMAA156.9, type B84061, surface application, open shelf rest type B84091. Draw bolts: type recommended by laminated plastic manufacturer.
.2
.3
.4
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL
.1
To AWI/AWMAC Architectural Woodwork Manufacturers Association of Canada, Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards. Shop assemble units in size to allow passage to installed location.
.2
Section 06 40 01 Page 6 2011-06-10
2.3 FABRICATION, GENERAL (Cont'd)
.3
Match grain and colour of adjoining exposed natural finished wood. Cover exposed faces and edges with laminated plastic where indicated. Shop apply laminated plastic with hairline joints, chamfer exposed edges. Apply bituminous paint to edge of cutouts in laminated plastic tops at sinks. Plywood shelves and shelf gables. Seal all surfaces for site finishing.
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8
2.4
CASEWORK
.1
Fabricate caseworks to AWI/AWMAC/WI Custom Grade quality standards. .1 Furring, blocking, nailing strips, grounds, rough bucks and slippers: .1 Board sizes: "Standard" or better grade. .2 Dimension sizes: "Standard" light framing or better grade. .2 Case bodies (ends, divisions and bottoms): .1 Construct generally of solid vertical members of hardwood veneered combination core plywood to exposed and semi exposed locations, with intermediate web frames, and with web frames of continuous stretchers at front and back under counter tops. Dado web frames and fix shelves into vertical members of the case body. Glue members together and sand smooth. .3 Face Frames: .1 Minimum 19 mm in thickness, with members mortised and tenoned or doweled and glued, all joints tight and true. Fully glue face frames and nail to case bodies, with allowance made for scribing where required. .4 Backs: .1 Hardwood veneered combination core plywood to exposed and semiexposed locations, as indicated on the drawings, rabbeted into exposed ends and securely attached to case bodies. Ensure joints in backs occur only at nailable divisions or
Section 06 40 01 Page 7 2011-06-10
2.4 CASEWORK (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .4 Backs:(Cont'd) exposed backs of partition. Fabricate island or peninsula cases of hardwood veneered combination core plywood as noted on the drawings, 19 mm minimum thickness. Construct counter or desk fronts similarly. Drawers and Door Fronts: .1 19 mm hardwood veneered faced combination core plywood as indicated on the drawings. Shelving: .1 Hardwood veneered combination core plywood. Provide shelves up to 914 mm in length of not less than 19 mm thickness. Provide shelves 914 mm to 1066 mm of not less than 25 mm thickness. No unsupported shelves over 1066 mm permitted. Drawers: .1 Dovetail or lock joint fronts and glued to sides, and dado backs into sides. Construct bottoms of at least 13 mm thick hardwood veneered combination core plywood, plowed into fronts and sides and securely attached to backs. (Ensure tight fit, use glue blocks if necessary). Fabricate drawer fronts as noted above; sides and backs of 13 mm minimum thickness hardwood veneered combination core plywood. Ensure all exposed edges of inside drawers have hardwood edging to hardwood veneered plywood doors. Install metal extension side guides in accordance with manufacturer's specifications and recommendations. Neatly fit for smooth operation.
.5
.6
.7
.2
Edge Banding: unless otherwise indicated, provide 6 mm thick hardwood edge banding on edges thicker than 12.7 mm, exposed in final assembly. .1 Where indicated apply PVC edge banding. Finishing: shop finish units in accordance with Section 09 91 00. Laminated plastic countertops:
.3
.4
Section 06 40 01 Page 8 2011-06-10
2.4 CASEWORK (Cont'd)
.4
Laminated plastic countertops:(Cont'd) .1 Core material: exterior grade hardwood plywood with a non-telegraphing grain, thickness as indicated, or particleboard. .2 Backsplashes: coved. Backsplash assembly method shall be manucfacturer's option. .3 Front edges: no-drip waterfall edge. Stainless Steel Countertops: stainless steel finish according to Section 05 50 01 and as indicated. Shop assemble units in size to allow passage to installed location. Shop apply laminated plastic with hairline joints, chamfer exposed edges. Apply bituminous paint to edge of cutouts in laminated plastic tops at sinks.
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.5
FABRICATION
.1
Set nails and countersink screws, apply stained wood filler to indentations, sand smooth and leave ready to receive finish. Shop install cabinet hardware for doors, shelves and drawers. Surface mount shelf standards unless noted otherwise. Shelving to cabinetwork to be adjustable unless otherwise noted. Shop assemble work for delivery to site in size easily handled and to ensure passage through building openings. Stainless steel countertops: Fabricate plywood sub-assembly for countertops to receive stainless steel finishes, as indicated. Coordinate with Section 05 50 01 for fitting and installation of stainless steel surfacing and steel framing.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.6
SHOP FINISHING
.1
Shop finish exposed hardwood with water based polyurethane to WDI/AWMAC/WI AWS Section 5, System 12.
Section 06 40 01 Page 9 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
.1
Swinging doors: .1 1 pair cabinet hinges. .2 1 cabinet pull. .3 1 magnetic catch. Drawers: .1 1 drawer slide set. .2 1 cabinet pull. .3 1 drawer lock(where indicated) Adjustable shelves: .1 4 shelf standards. .2 4 rests per shelf.
.2
.3
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Set items in place, plumb, straight and level to a tolerance of 1:400 and rigidly secure in place. Coordinate with applicable Sections as required for Work of this Section. Completely assemble units. Join abutting laminated plastic tops with draw bolts. Install casework and its components according to AWI/AWMAC/WI Architectural Woodwork Standards. Louvres: Prepare and install louvres in required millwork with tamperproof screws in approved manner. Apply sealant to junction of backsplash and adjacent wall finish. Adjust hardware after cabinets installed for smooth effortless operation. Install door and hardware to CAN/CSA-O132.2, Appendix A. Install cabinet door hardware in accordance with CAN/CSA-O132.2.4 Series 90. Adjust
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 06 40 01 Page 10 2011-06-10
3.2 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.10
(Cont'd) hardware after doors installed for smooth effortless operation. Stainless steel countertops: Coordinate with Section 05 50 01 for fitting and installation of stainless steel surfacing and steel framing as required.
.11
END
INSULATION
Section 07 20 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Environmental Choice Program (ECP): .1 ECP/PCE-35-91, Building Materials: Acoustical Products. .2 ECP/PCE-40-91, Building Materials: Thermal Insulation. .3 ECP/PCE-44-92, Adhesives. .4 ECP/PCE-45-92, Sealants and Caulking. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC): .1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. .2 CAN/ULC-S702-97, Standard for Thermal Insulation Mineral Fibre for Buildings.
.2
.1
Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry for insulation retaining wedges. Section 07 26 00: Modified bitumen (SBS) air/vapour barrier. Section 07 46 19: Insulation at preformed steel siding. Section 09 21 16: Acoustic insulation for gypsum board partitions.
.2
.3
.4
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data sheets for products in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. For adhesives, indicate VOC in g/L during application and curing. For insulation, indicate VOC in g/L and any other off gassing at time of installation.
.2
.3
1.4
CERTIFICATION
.1
Submit installer's certification verifying compliance with specification requirements.
INSULATION
Section 07 20 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM
.1
Provide insulation and adhesive sealant products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-40-91 for Building Materials: Thermal Insulation; ECP/PCE-35-91 for Building Materials: Acoustical Products; ECP/PCE-44-92 for Adhesives; ECP/PCE-45-92 for Sealants and Caulking Compounds; and ECP/PCE-69-94 Polyethylene Film Products.
.1
Qualifications: Execute Work of this Section by company specializing in thermal insulation Work with minimum of three years, recent, documented experience, on Work of comparable complexity and scope.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Rigid insulation (perimeter and under slab insulation): Extruded polystyrene to CAN/ULCS701, Type 4, ship-lapped edges, Ecologo certified. Thickness as indicated on drawings. Batt insulation: mineral fibre to CAN/ULCS702, Type 1, preformed without membrane, Ecologo certified. Cavity wall insulation (rigid): Extruded polystyrene to CAN/ULC- S701, Type 3, square edges, Ecologo certified. Thickness as indicated on drawings. Acoustic insulation: mineral fibre batt, 40 kg/m3, Ecologo certified. Insulation retainers: In accordance with Section 04 20 00 - Unit Masonry. Adhesive: type recommended by insulation manufacturer, Ecologo certified. Insulation clips: impale type, perforated 50 x 50 mm cold rolled carbon steel 0.8 mm thick, adhesive back, spindle of 2.5 mm diameter
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
INSULATION
Section 07 20 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.1 MATERIALS (Cont'd) PART 3 - EXECUTION
.7
Insulation clips:(Cont'd) annealed steel, length to suit insulation, 25 mm diameter washers of self locking type.
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Perimeter insulation: .1 Apply rigid insulation to interior and exterior face of foundation wall as indicated on drawings, extend boards from finish grade down to minimum 600 mm below finish grade. .2 Apply suitable mastic adhesive and clips for spot bonding insulation to walls. .3 Butt boards tight together. Under slab insulation: .1 Install insulation boards in locations shown in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 In drainage trenches, place insulation board to size and location as shown in Contract Drawings, with joints butted tight. Cavity wall insulation (rigid): .1 Apply 3 mm wet film thickness of adhesive to entire face of rigid insulation, butter edges. .2 Provide securement for cavity wall insulation with wedge type retainers in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with Section 04 20 00 as required for installation. .3 Apply rigid insulation to exterior face of inner wythe, ensure contact with adhesive. .4 Fit tight between masonry reinforcing with full board to board contact at butt joints. .5 Maintain space between insulation and outer wythe of masonry free of obstructions. .6 Metal siding: Install siding insulation neatly cut and fitted between Z girts and C channels. Adhere insulation with temporary adhesive. Between framing thermal insulation: .1 Apply batt insulation between framing members to friction fit. .2 Fit batt insulation tight to projections through insulation.
.2
.3
.4
INSULATION
Section 07 20 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.5
Between framing acoustic insulation: .1 Apply batt insulation between framing members tight to friction fit. .2 Fit batt insulation tight to projections through insulation and adjoining insulation.
END
SPRAYED INSULATION POLYURETHANE FOAM
Section 07 21 29.03 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Urethane Foam Contractors' Association Inc. (CUFCA). Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). South Coast Air Quality Management District (SCAQMD), California State .1 SCAQMD Rule 1113-06, Architectural Coatings. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S101-07, Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .2 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. .3 CAN/ULC-S705.1-01, Standard for Thermal Insulation - Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Material Specification. .4 CAN/ULC-S705.2-05, Standard for Thermal Insulation - Spray Applied Rigid Polyurethane Foam, Medium Density, Application.
.2
.3
.4
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Test reports: submit certified test reports for insulation from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
.3
Section 07 21 29.03 Page 2 2011-06-10
.3
Quality assurance submittals:(Cont'd) .2 Submit test reports in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics. .3 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures. .4 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to manufacturer's written reports within 3 days of review, verifying compliance of Work, as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
.1
Applicators to conform to CUFCA Quality Assurance Program. Qualifications: .1 Installer: person specializing in sprayed insulation installations with 5 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. .2 Manufacturer: company with minimum 5 years experience in producing of material used for work required for this project, with sufficient production capacity to produce and deliver required units without causing delay in work. Mock-up: .1 Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .2 Construct mock-up 1 m2 minimum, of sprayed insulation along underside of steel structure and top of walls. .3 Mock-up may be part of finished work. .4 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with sprayed insulation work. Health and Safety Requirements: worker protection: .1 Protect workers as recommended by CAN/ULC-S705.2 and manufacturer's recommendations: .2 Workers must wear gloves, eye protection and protective clothing when applying foam insulation. .3 Workers must not eat, drink or smoke while applying foam insulation.
.2
.3
.4
Section 07 21 29.03 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
1.5
SITE CONDITIONS .1
Ventilate area in accordance with Section 01 51 00. Ventilate area to receive insulation by introducing fresh air and exhausting air continuously during and 24 hour after application to maintain non-toxic, unpolluted, safe working conditions. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray and noxious vapours from contaminating air beyond application area. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of insulation materials. Apply insulation only when surfaces and ambient temperatures are within manufacturers' prescribed limits.
.2
.3
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Insulation: spray polyurethane to CAN/ULC-S705.1. Primers: in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for surface conditions. .1 Maximum VOC limit 100 g/l to SCAQMD Rule 1113.
.2
Section 07 21 29.03 Page 4 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section depends. Report defects to Departmental Representative. Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Verify substrate surfaces are solid, free from surface water, frozen matter, dust, oil, grease, scaling or laitance, projections and any other foreign matter detrimental to performance. Obtain manufacturer's approval of substrate in writing, submit copy to the Departmental Representative. Provide ventilation in area to receive sprayed foam insulation, introducing and exhausting fresh air continuously during and for 24 hours after application. Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air beyond application area, and damage from overspray and dusting on adjacent surfaces. Supply and install temporary protection to adjacent surfaces to prevent damage resulting from Work of this Section. If required, apply primer to substrate surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
3.4
APPLICATION
.1
Apply insulation to clean surfaces in accordance with CAN/ULC-S705.2 and manufacturer's printed instructions.
Section 07 21 29.03 Page 5 2011-06-10
3.4 APPLICATION (Cont'd)
.2 .3
Use primer where recommended by manufacturer. Apply sprayed foam insulation in thickness as indicated. Apply insulation to within 3 mm of thickness indicated on drawings. Provide one measuring pin for every 50 sq.m. Insulation thickness greater than 50 mm shall be completed in a minimum of 2 steps. Insulation to be continuous, level, plumb and uniform thickness throughout. Insulation shall be free of voids and imbedded foreign materials.
.4
.5
.6
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.6
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
END
MODIFIED BITUMEN (SBS) AIR/VAPOUR BARRIER
Section 07 25 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) .1 AAMA 501-05, Methods of Test for Exterior Walls. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): .1 ASTM E96/E96M-10, Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials. .2 ASTM E330-02 (2010), Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CGSB 37-GP-56M-1980, Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing. .2 CGSB 71-GP-24M-1977, Adhesive, Flexible, for Bonding Cellular Polystyrene Insulation. Environmental Choice Program (ECP): .1 ECP/PCE-45-92, Sealants and Caulking. .2 ECP/PCE-69-94, Adhesives.
.2
.3
.4
1.2 PRODUCT DATA SHEETS
.1
Submit product data sheets of air/vapour retarder in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. For adhesives, primers and sealants, indicate VOC in g/L during application and curing.
.2
.1
Provide adhesives, sealant and primer products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environ mental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-69-94 for Adhesives and ECP/PCE-45-92 for Sealants and Caulking Compounds. Submit two copies of the licensing criteria statements and the verification of compliance with Sections 3(a) and 3(b) of the ECP to the
.2
Section 07 25 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CHOICE PROGRAM (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) Departmental Representative in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Alternatively, material in original containers bearing the 'Ecologo' or products bearing the 'Ecologo' will satisfy this requirement.
1.4 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
.1 .2
Weather and surfaces dry. Imminent weather forecast, dry.
1.5
INSPECTION
.1
Air/vapour barriers installation must be inspected by Departmental Representative before work is covered. Notify Departmental Representative when complete installation is ready for inspection. Repair punctures, rips and tears to ensure continuity of air/vapour retarder. Where punctures and tears are extensive, replace entire damaged section.
.2
.3
1.6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
To manufacturer's instructions. Do not store material on roof. Under cover on elevated platform. In original package, labels intact. Remove and replace damaged, wet or broken material. Stand rolls on end, protect edges. Away from open flame or ignition sources.
.6 .7
Section 07 25 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
.1
Asphalt primer for self adhesive membrane: synthetic rubber, 40% solids by weight, 0.8 kg/l, recomended by membrane manufacturer. Air/vapour barrier membrane (self adhesive): Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) to CGSB 37-GP-56M, Type 2a, Class C, Grade 1, glass mat or polyester reinforcing, minimum 1.0mm thick, polypropylene or polyethylene film surfaces, and as follows: .1 Air permeance: no leakage up to 3000 Pa or <0.01 l/m2.s at 75 Pa pressure differential to AAMA 501. .2 Water vapour permeance: maximum 2.8 ng/Pa.s.m2 to ASTM E96/E96M, procedure B. .3 Peel adhesion: to ASTM E330. .1 0 delamination at 3000 Pa for 5 sec. .2 10.9 delamination at 1000 Pa for 1 hour. Adhesive: synthetic rubber, solvent type, trowel consistency to CGSB 71-GP-24M, compatible with air/vapour barrier membrane, Ecologo certified. Joint filler: extruded polyethylene, closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa, outsized 30 to 50%, CFC free. Fasteners: As specified herein or manufacturer's recommended fastener for attaching to Substrate.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 07 25 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Remove loose material and scrape surface smooth. Remove water and condensation from surfaces. Clean surfaces of foreign and bituminous substances. Roll on primer at 2 to 8 m2/l in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Allow 30 minutes drying to a tacky surface. Reprime areas not covered with membrane in 24 hours. Fill gaps and joints over 6 mm wide with joint filler. Reinforce with 305 mm wide strip of membrane.
.2 .3
.4
.5
3.2
APPLICATION
.1
Reinforce inside and outside corners with 305 mm membrane. Apply self adhesive membrane to cast-in place concrete walls, concrete masonry units, and exterior gypsum board sheathing in exterior wall assemblies and additional areas as indicated or required to maintain continuity of air/vapour barrier in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and details. Lap side and end joints minimum 50 mm, heat seal. Apply pressure to set heat sealed edges. Cut membrane around projections. Seal self adhesive membrane with adhesive to manufacturer's instructions. Mechanically attach membrane to window and door frames with pressure strips.
.2
.3
.4
.5
END
UNDER SLAB VAPOUR RETARDERS
Section 07 26 50 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Standards of Testing and Materials(ASTM) .1 ASTM E1643, Standard Practice for Selection, Design, Installation, and Inspection of Water Vapor Retarders Used in Contact with Earth or Granular Fill Under Concrete Slabs. .2 ASTM E1745, Standard Specification for Water Vapour Retarders used in contact with Soil or Granular Fill under Concrete Slabs.
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit proof of manufacturer's CCMC Listing and listing number to Departmental Representative. Submit proof of manufacturer's participation certificate for Environmental Choice Program to Departmental Representative.
.2
1.3
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit product data sheets for sheet vapour retarders. Include: .1 Product characteristics. .2 Performance criteria. .3 Limitations.
.2
.3
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan Collect, package and store polyethylene cut offs and waste material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.2
Section 07 26 50 Page 2 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET VAPOUR BARRIER
.1
Vapour retarder (under slab): ASTM E1745, Class A, 0.38 mm (15 mil) thick polyethylene film under slab vapour retarder; with an after conditioning permeance rating not exceeding 0.01 perms.
2.2
ACCESSORIES
.1
Joint sealing tape: High density polyethylene tape with pressure sensitive adhesive with minimum width 100 mm. Type recommended by sheet vapour retarder manufacturer. Pipe and conduit boots: Construct pipe and conduit boots from vapour retarder material and pressure sensitive tape as recommended by manufacturer.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 UNDER SLAB VAPOUR RETARDER INSTALLATION
.1
Ensure services are installed and inspected prior to installation of retarder. Install sheet vapour retarder under the floor slab prior to installation of floor slab, to form a continuous vapour retarder in accordance with ASTM E1643 and manufacturer's written instructions. Lap vapour barrier over footings and seal to foundation walls. Overlap joints 150 mm and seal with manufacturer approved sealing tape. Seal all penetrations (including conduits and pipes) with manufacturer's pipe boot.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Use sheets of largest practical size to minimize joints.
Section 07 26 50 Page 3 2011-06-10
3.1 UNDER SLAB VAPOUR RETARDER INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.7
Inspect for continuity. Repair punctures and tears with sealing tape before work is concealed.
END
PREFORMED STEEL SIDING
Section 07 46 19 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB 19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. CSA International .1 CAN/CSA S136-07, Specification for the Design of Cold Formed Steel Structural Members.
.2
.3
.1 .2
Section 05 50 01: Metal Fabrications. Section 07 25 00: Modified Bitumen (SBS) Air/Vapour Barrier. Section 07 00 00: Insulation. Section 07 90 00: Joint Sealing. Section 08 90 00: Louvres. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Board Assemblies for exterior gypsum sheathing board.
.3 .4 .5 .6
.1
Design metal siding system in accordance with CSA S136, S136.1, and to withstand live, dead, lateral, wind, seismic, handling, transportation, and erection loads. Design metal siding system in accordance with Climatic Design Data for the Place of Work contained in Ontario Building Code. Design metal siding system to limit deflection under design loads, to L/240.
.2
.3
Section 07 46 19 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Design metal siding system to prevent restriction of thermal induced movement which would induce deformation such as warping, buckling, and failure of joint seals and fasteners. Design metal siding system to prevent vibration when subject to the effects of wind. Design miscellaneous, additional structural framing members and sag rods, required to complete metal siding system, where not indicated on Contract Drawings.
.5
1.4
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data sheets in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 0 78 00. Indicate dimensions, profiles, attachment methods, schedule of wall elevations, trim and closure pieces, fascia, and related work.
.2
1.5
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 0 78 00. Submit shop drawings elevations, details, profiles, dimensions, thickness of materials, finishes, methods of joining, arrangement of sheets, joints, and seams, special shapes, methods of anchoring, anchor and clip details, types of sealants and gaskets, waterproof connections to adjoining work, details of other pertinent components of the work (i.e. windows, penetrations, membranes, etc), and compliance with design criteria and requirements of related work.
.2
1.6
SAMPLES
.1
Submit one 600 x 600 mm size samples of siding material, of colour and profile specified, in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
Section 07 46 19 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Retain a licensed Professional Engineer, registered in Province of Ontario, to perform following services for metal siding Work: .1 Design of metal siding Work. .2 Review, stamp, and sign shop drawings. .3 Conduct shop and field inspections and prepare and submit inspection reports. Mock-up: .1 Fabricate, deliver, and erect one full scale 1200 mm wide x 1800 mm high mock-up panel of metal siding construction, in location acceptable to the Departmental Representative. .2 Demonstrate finish, colours, and quality of workmanship. .3 Mock-up may form part of final Work, if acceptable to the Departmental Representative. Remove and dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work. Pre-installation meeting: Arrange with manufacturer's representative, Contractor, and Departmental Representative to inspect substrates, and to review installation procedures 48 hours in advance of installation.
.2
.3
1.8 DELIVERY, .1 STORAGE AND HANDLING
Stockpile panels tilted to provide water run-off, free from ground contact on firm, level, non-staining supports extending full width of sheet and spaced not more than 450 mm apart. Cover components with opaque polyethylene sheet. Vent to allow air movement.
1.9 EXTENDED WARRANTY
.1
Submit warranty for metal siding Work in accordance with General Conditions, except that warranty period is extended to 2 years. .1 Against warping, twisting, joint, finish failure and water penetration. .2 Coverage: Complete replacement including affected adjacent parts.
Section 07 46 19 Page 4 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Steel: minimum 30% total recycled content. Metal siding: .1 Prefinished, 0.76 mm thick galvanized steel to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 zinc coating designation, 38 mm deep. For use at stair enclosure. .2 Finish and colour: Silicone Modified Polyester (SMP) paint finish system. Colour: As shown on Contract Drawings. .3 Acceptable material: .1 CL7040, manufactured by Vicwest Industrial Metal Panels 905-825-2252 fax 905-825-2272 www.vicwest.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Steel liner: 0.70 mm thick galvanized steel with Z275 zinc coating designation, prefinished, colour as selected by Departmental Representative. Z-bars or sub-girts, drip closures: 1.26 mm thick galvanized steel to ASTM A653/A653M, Z275 zinc coating designation. Thermal clip: triangular, galvanized steel. Fascia, flashing and accessories: exposed trim, metal closures, cap pieces, etc. of same material and colour as siding. Fasteners: self tapping screws, zinc coated steel, prepainted head colour to match siding, neoprene washers. Sealant: one component, elastomeric, chemical curing, to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M, Ecologo certified, colour to match siding. Foam closers: PVC foam, 25 mm wide, shaped to match siding profile. Insulation: Rigid insulation in accordance with Section 07 20 00.
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 07 46 19 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section depends. Report defects to the Departmental Representative. Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install metal siding in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Attach sub-girts to structural supports as indicated. Install starter strips, inside corners, continuous outside corners, edgings, cap and sill flashings. Install siding and attachments sequentially from starter strips up, to manufacturer's instructions. Install fascia where indicated. Siding insulation: In accordance with Section 07 20 00. Install exterior corners, fillers and closure strips with individually formed and profiled work using concealed fasteners. Maintain joints in exterior sheets, true to line, tight fitting. Apply sealant where detailed, at junction with other materials, around door and window perimeters and at metal flashings. Wash down surfaces with mild detergent.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9
.10
3.3
TOUCH-UP
.1
Touch up marred surfaces with air dry formulation to match pre-finished siding if approved by the Departmental Representative, otherwise remove and replace damaged metal siding.
Section 07 46 19 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.3 TOUCH-UP (Cont'd)
.2
Clean and touch up marred galvanized surfaces after installation, with zinc rich primer.
END
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
Section 07 52 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM C1177/C1177M-08, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement. (Withdrawn) .2 CGSB 37-GP-9Ma-83, Primer, Asphalt, Unfilled, for Asphalt Roofing, Dampproofing and Waterproofing. .3 CGSB 37-GP-56M-80(1985), Membrane, Modified, Bituminous, Prefabricated, and Reinforced for Roofing. Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) .1 CRCA Roofing Specifications Manual (latest edition). Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A123.21-04, Standard Test Method for the Dynamic Wind Uplift Resistance of Mechanically Attached Membrane-Roofing Systems .2 CAN/CSA-A123.4-04, Asphalt for Constructing Built-Up Roof Coverings and Waterproofing Systems. .3 CSA A231.1-06/A231.2-06(R2010), Precast Concrete Paving Slabs. Factory Mutual (FM Global) .1 FM Approvals - Roofing Products. Health Canada / Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Underwriters Laboratories' of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S704-03, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polyurethane and Polyisocyanurate Boards, Faced. .2 CAN/ULC S706-09, Standard for Fibreboard Uses.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 07 52 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning waterproofing Work, with roofing contractor's representative and Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 31 19 to: .1 Verify project requirements. .2 Review installation and substrate conditions. .3 Co-ordination with other building subtrades. .4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide two copies of most recent technical roofing components data sheets describing materials' physical properties and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Provide two copies of WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section 01 35 43, and indicate VOC content for: .1 Primers. .2 Asphalt. .3 Sealers. Provide shop drawings: .1 Indicate flashing, control joints, tapered insulation details. .2 Provide layout for tapered insulation. Samples: Submit the following samples: .1 Substrate board and fasteners. .2 Insulation boards. .3 Tapered insulation. .4 Roofing membranes. .5 Roof accessories. .6 Two 22.2 kg containers of roofing aggregate. .7 Two samples of concrete pavers. Manufacturer's Certificate: certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 07 52 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.6
Test and Evaluation Reports: submit laboratory test reports certifying compliance of bitumens and membrane with specification requirements. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: indicate special precautions required for seaming the membrane. Manufacturer's field report: in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Reports: indicate procedures followed, ambient temperatures and wind velocity during application.
.7
.8
.9
.1
Installer qualifications: company or person specializing in application of modified bituminous roofing systems with 5 years documented experience and that is approved by manufacturer.
1.5
FIRE PROTECTION .1
Fire Extinguishers: .1 Maintain one cartridge operated type or stored pressure rechargeable type with hose and shut-off nozzle, .2 ULC labelled for A, B and C class protection. .3 Size as indicated by the Departmental Representative on roof. Maintain fire watch for 1 hour after each day's roofing operations cease.
.2
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Safety: comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling, storage, and disposal of asphalt, sealing compounds, primers and caulking materials. .2 Provide and maintain dry, off-ground weatherproof storage.
.2
Section 07 52 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING (Cont'd)
.2
Storage and Handling Requirements:(Cont'd) .3 Store rolls of felt and membrane in upright position. Store membrane rolls with salvage edge up. .4 Remove only in quantities required for same day use. .5 Place plywood runways over completed Work to enable movement of material and other traffic. .6 Store sealants at +5 degrees C minimum. .7 Store insulation protected from daylight, weather and deleterious materials. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .1 Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan. .2 Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.3
1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS
.1
Ambient Conditions .1 Do not install roofing when temperature remains below -18C for torch application, or to manufacturers' recommendations. .2 Minimum temperature for solvent-based adhesive is -5 degrees C. Install roofing on dry deck, free of snow and ice, use only dry materials and apply only during weather that will not introduce moisture into roofing system.
.2
1.8
WARRANTY
.1
For Work of this Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing, 12 months warranty period is extended to 60 months.
Section 07 52 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA
.1
Compatibility between components of roofing system is essential. Provide written declaration to Departmental Representative stating that materials and components, as assembled in system, meet this requirement. Roofing System: to CSA A123.21 for wind uplift resistance.
.2
2.2
DECK SHEATHING
.1
Gypsum board sheathing: to ASTM C1177/C1177M Standard, 12.7 mm thick.
2.3
PRIMER
.1
Asphalt primer: to CGSB 37-GP-9Ma; Asphalt modified bitumen with thermoplastic polymers.
2.4
VAPOUR RETARDER .1
0.8 mm thick self adhesive air/vapour barrier SBS modified bitumen membrane with adhesive bottom and tri-laminated woven polyethylene top with silicone release film.
2.5 POLYISOCYANURATE.1 INSULATION
Polyisocyanurate insulation: CAN/ULC S704, rigid, closed cell, polyisocyanurate foam insulation integrally laminated to perforated black glass reinforced felt facers, square edges, thickness as indicated on Contract Drawings, use maximum size board possible. Insulation thickness under 50 mm use single layer board. Insulation thickness over 50 mm use two equal thickness boards.
.2
2.6 TAPERED INSULATION
.1
Factory pre-engineered tapered insulation in thickness sufficient for slopes shown on Contract Drawing.
Section 07 52 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
2.7 FIBREBOARD INSULATION
.1
CAN/ULC S706, high density, Type 1 roof board, multi-ply, surface coated, thickness shown on Contract Drawings.
2.8
MEMBRANE
.1
Base sheet: to CGSB 37-GP-56M. Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene (SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, glass reinforcement, having nominal weight of 180 g/m2. .1 Type 1, fully adhered. .2 Class C - plain surfaced. .3 Grade 2 -heavy duty service. .4 Top and bottom surfaces: .1 sanded/sanded. .5 Base sheet membrane properties: to CGSB 37-GP-56M. .1 Strain energy (longitudinal/transversal): 9.0/7.0 kN/m. .2 Breaking strength (longitudinal/transversal): 17.0/18.0 N/5 cm. .3 Ultimate elongation (longitudinal/transversal): 60/70%. .4 Tear resistance: 85 N. .5 Cold bending at -30C : no cracking. .6 Softening point: = 110C. .7 Static puncture resistance: >400 .8 Dimensional Stability: -0.3/0.3%. .6 ULC certification: Class A. Cap sheet membrane: to CGSB 37-GP-56M. .1 Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene(SBS) elastomeric polymer, prefabricated sheet, glass reinforcement, having nominal weight of 250 g/m2. .2 Type 1, fully adhered. .3 Class A-granule surfaced. .1 Colour for granular surface: Colour to be selected by the Departmental Representative. .4 Grade 2-heavy duty service. .5 Bottom surface polyethylene. .6 Cap sheet membrane properties: to CGSB 37-GP-56M. .1 Strain energy (longitudinal/transversal): 13.0/10.0 kN/m.
.2
Section 07 52 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
2.8 MEMBRANE (Cont'd)
.2
Cap sheet membrane:(Cont'd) .6 Cap sheet membrane properties:(Cont'd) .2 Breaking strength (longitudinal/transversal): 25.0/16.0 kN/m. .3 Ultimate elongation (longitudinal/transversal): 63/73 %. .4 Tear resistance: 80 N. .5 Cold bending at -30C: No cracking. .6 Softening point: = 110C. .7 Static puncture resistance: >400. .8 Dimensional Stability: -0.2/0.2 %. .7 ULC certification: Class A.
2.9
BITUMEN
.1
Asphalt: to CAN/CSA-A123.4. .1 Type 2 for slopes up to 1:8. .2 Type 3 for slopes from 1:8 to 1:4.
2.10
SEALERS
.1
Plastic cement: black fibrous rubberized plastic cement composed of a cut back asphalt with selected fibres and mineral filler conforming to CAN/CGSB-37.5-M. Sealing compound: rubber asphalt type.
.2
2.11
CARPENTRY
.1
Refer to Section 06 10 12.
2.12
FASTENERS
.1
Covering to steel deck: No. 10 flat head, self tapping, Type A or AB, cadmium plated screws. Recommend FM Approved screw and plate assemblies. Insulation to deck: coated insulation fasteners and galvanized plates must meet FM Approval for wind uplift and corrosion resistance, as recommended by insulation manufacturer.
.2
Section 07 52 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
2.13
PAVERS
.1
Paving slabs: to CAN/CSA-A231.1, 610 x 610 x 38 mm thick, precast concrete paving slabs having non-slip finish with 51 mm plain margin around perimeter. Pedestals and levelling plates made of high density polyethylene with integral spacer ribs on upper surface.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
QUALITY OF WORK .1
Do examination, preparation and roofing Work in accordance with Roofing Manufacturer's Specification Manual and CRCA Roofing Specification Manual, particularly for fire safety precautions, and to FM requirements. Do priming in accordance with manufacturers written recommendations. The interface of the walls and roof assemblies will be fitted with durable rigid material sheet metal providing connection point for continuity of air barrier. Assembly, component and material connections will be made in consideration of appropriate design loads.
.2
.3
.4
3.2 EXAMINATION OF ROOF DECKS
.1
Verification of Conditions: .1 Inspect with Departmental Representative deck conditions including parapets, construction joints, roof drains, plumbing vents and ventilation outlets to determine readiness to proceed. Evaluation and Assessment: .1 Prior to beginning of work ensure: .1 Decks are firm, straight, smooth, dry, free of snow, ice or frost, and swept clean of dust and debris. Do not use calcium or salt for ice or snow removal. .2 Curbs have been built. .3 Roof drains have been installed at proper elevations relative to finished roof surface.
.2
Section 07 52 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.2 EXAMINATION OF ROOF DECKS (Cont'd)
.2
Evaluation and Assessment:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .4 Plywood and lumber nailer plates have been installed to deck, walls and parapets as indicated. Do not install roofing materials during rain or snowfall.
.3
3.3 PROTECTION OF IN-PLACE CONDITIONS
.1
Cover walls, walks and adjacent work where materials hoisted or used. Use warning signs and barriers. Maintain in good order until completion of Work. Clean off drips and smears of bituminous material immediately. Dispose of rain water off roof and away from face of building until roof drains or hoppers installed and connected. Protect roof from traffic and damage. Comply with precautions deemed necessary by Departmental Representative. At end of each day's work or when stoppage occurs due to inclement weather, provide protection for completed Work and materials out of storage. Metal connectors and decking will be treated with rust proofing or galvanization.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.4
DECK SHEATHING
.1
Mechanically fasten to steel deck Gypsum board sheathing with screws to steel deck's upper rib surfaces, spaced 400 mm on centre each way. Place with long axis of each sheet transverse to steel deck ribs, with end joints staggered and fully supported on ribs.
.2
Section 07 52 00 Page 10 2011-06-10
3.5
PRIMING
.1
Perform priming at manufacturer recommended coverage rate and to gypsum board roofing substrate in accordance with CGSB 37-GP-15M.
3.6 VAPOUR RETARDER .1 (GYPSUM SHEATHING) .2
Primer substrate to manufacturers recommendations. Install vapour retarder in accordance with manufacturers written instructions. Lap vapour retarder ends and edges 50 mm minimum. Roll vapour retarder and laps for continuous adhesion over entire substrate area; use manufacturer's recommended roller. Cut and fit vapour retarder as required for passage of protrusions, ensuring continuous adherence to substrate. At junction of deck to vertical surfaces and along perimeter of roof deck, extend vapour retarder, set in adhesive, beyond the point where insulation will terminate. Seal penetrations, end and side laps, and ends of vapour retarder to substrates and to wall system air/vapour retarder to maintain continuity of building air/vapour retarder system.
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.7 (EXPOSED) CONVENTIONAL MEMBRANE ROOFING (CMR) APPLICATION
.1
Insulation: mechanically fastened application: .1 Mechanically fasten insulation using screws and pressure distribution plates. .2 Fasten insulation as per manufacturer's written recommendations. .3 Number and pattern of screws per board to meet Factory Mutual requirements. .4 Place boards in parallel rows with ends staggered, and in firm contact with one another. .5 Cut end boards to suit. Install subsequent layers of insulation, in full moppings of asphalt, in straight parallel rows, with long dimension parallel to long dimensions of insulation.
.2
Section 07 52 00 Page 11 2011-06-10
3.7 (EXPOSED) CONVENTIONAL MEMBRANE ROOFING (CMR) APPLICATION (Cont'd)
.3
Tapered insulation application: .1 Mop insulation to top layer of insulation to bottom layer with hot asphalt at rate of 1 kg/m2. .2 Install tapered insulation in accordance with shop drawings. Stagger joints between layers 150 mm minimum. Overlay Board: mopped application: .1 Install overlay board in full moppings of asphalt. .2 Place boards in parallel rows with end joints staggered. Cap joints approximately 25 mm. .3 Cut ends to suit. Base sheet application: .1 Starting at low point of roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll base sheet, align and reroll from both ends. .2 Unroll and embed base sheet in uniform coating of asphalt applied at rate of 1.2 kg/m2, at 230 degrees C. .3 Lap sheets 75 mm minimum for side and 150 mm minimum for end laps. .4 Application to be free of blisters, wrinkles and fishmouths Cap sheet application: .1 Starting at low point on roof, perpendicular to slope, unroll cap sheet, align and reroll from both ends. .2 Unroll and embed cap sheet in uniform coating of asphalt applied at rate of 1.2 kg/m2, EVT at point of contact. .3 Lap sheets 75 mm minimum for side laps and 150 mm minimum for end laps. Offset joints in cap sheet 300 mm minimum from those in base sheet. .4 Application to be free of blisters, fishmouths and wrinkles. .5 Do membrane application in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Flashings: .1 Complete installation of flashing base sheet stripping prior to installing membrane cap sheet. .2 Mop base and cap sheet onto substrate in 1 metre wide strips. .3 Lap flashing base sheet to membrane base sheet minimum 100 mm and seal by mopping.
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 07 52 00 Page 12 2011-06-10
3.7
(EXPOSED)
.7
CONVENTIONAL MEMBRANE ROOFING (CMR) APPLICATION (Cont'd)
Flashings:(Cont'd) .4 Lap flashing cap sheet to membrane cap sheet 250 mm and mop in. .5 Provide 75 mm side lap and seal. .6 Properly secure flashings to their support, without sags, blisters, fishmouths or wrinkles. .7 Do Work in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Roof penetration: .1 Install roof drain pans, vent stack covers and other roof penetration flashings and seal to membrane in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and details.
.8
3.8
PAVERS
.1
Install paving slabs where indicated on paver levelling pads. .1 Allow slight space between slabs to permit drainage of surface water. .2 Shim up as required to obtain smooth surface transition from slab to slab.
.1
Inspections: .1 Field inspection and testing will be performed as required by the manufacturer. .2 Correct identified defects or irregularities. Remove roofing that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, reinstall roofing, and repair sheet flashings to a condition free of damage and deterioration at the time of Substantial completion and according to warranty requirements. .3 Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to the Departmental Representative. Notify the Departmental Representative 48 hours in advance of the date and time of inspection.
3.10
CLEANING
.1
Remove bituminous markings from finished surfaces.
Section 07 52 00 Page 13 2011-06-10
.2
In areas where finished surfaces are soiled caused by work of this section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and complying with their documented instructions. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this section. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .1 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. .2 Clearly label location of salvaged material's storage areas and provide barriers and security devices. .3 Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely. .4 Unused adhesive, sealant and asphalt materials must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. .5 Dispose of unused adhesive material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. .6 Dispose of unused sealant material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. .7 Dispose of unused asphalt material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. .8 Divert unused gypsum materials from landfill to recycling facility as reviewed by Departmental Representative.
.3
.4
END
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for sheet metal roofing.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM C1177/C1177M-08, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement.(Withdrawn) .2 CAN/CGSB-37.29-M89, Rubber-Asphalt Sealing Compound.(Withdrawn) Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS). .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
.3
.1
Design metal roofing elements in accordance with CAN/CSA S136-M, S136.1-M and to withstand live, dead, lateral, wind, seismic, handling, transportation and erection loads.
.2
Design metal roofing elements in accordance with Climatic Design Data contained in Ontario Building Code:
.3
Design metal roofing system to limit deflection under design loads to L/240. Design metal roofing system to prevent restriction of thermal induced movement which would induce deformation such as warping, buckling, and failure of joint seals and fasteners.
.4
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.5
Design metal roofing system to prevent the infiltration of water into the roof system and to prevent roofing system components from vibrating due to design wind loads.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product data: Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 indicating: .1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard, characteristics, limitations. .2 Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. WHMIS acceptable to Labour Canada. Shop drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Indicate arrangements of sheets and joints, types and locations of fasteners and special shapes and relationship of panels to structural frame. Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 of the following:. .1 Submit 300 x 300 mm samples of each sheet metal material and finish. .2 Waterproofing membrane. .3 Insulation. Reports: Submit written field inspection and test report results within 3 days after each inspection. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.1
Installers qualifications: Perform Work of this Section by a company that has a minimum of five years proven experience in the installation of metal roofing of a similar size and nature and that is approved by manufacturer. Submit to the Departmental Representative, applicator's current
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
(Cont'd) certificate of approval by the material manufacturer as proof of compliance. Retain a Professional Engineer, licensed in Province of Ontario, with experience in metal roofing Work of comparable complexity and scope to perform following services as part of Work of this Section: .1 Design of metal roofing. .2 Review, stamp, and sign shop drawings. .3 Conduct shop and on-Site inspections and prepare and submit inspection reports. Mock-up: .1 Fabricate 1200 x 1800 mm sample roofing panel using identical project materials and methods to include typical seam. .2 Mock-up will be used: To judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application. .3 Locate where directed by the Departmental Representative. .4 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with sheet metal flashing work. .5 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this Work. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished Work. Pre-installation meeting: Arrange with manufacturer's representative, Contractor, and the Departmental Representative to inspect substrates, and to review installation procedures 48 hours in advance of installation.
.2
.3
.4
Stockpile panels tilted to provide water run-off, free from ground contact on firm, level, non-staining supports extending full width of sheet and spaced not more than 450 mm apart. Cover components with opaque polyethylene sheet. Vent to allow air movement.
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.1
Submit a warranty for metal roofing Work In accordance with the General Conditions, except that the warranty is extended to 2 years. .1 Against panel warping, twisting, failure, jointing, finish failure, water penetration below waterproofing membrane and failure to drain water from rainscreen cavity. .2 Coverage: Complete replacement including affected adjacent parts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS
.1
Zinc coated steel sheet: to ASTM A653/A653M, commercial quality, with Z275 coating, prefinish as specified in 2.2.
2.2 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET
.1
Prefinished steel with factory applied silicone modified polyester (SMP) paint finish system.
2.3 METAL ROOFING COMPONENTS
.1
Metal roofing: .1 ASTM A653M; prefinished metal roofing, 0.8 mm (22 ga.) minimum base metal, Z275, galvanized steel. .2 Finish and colour: Silicone Modified Polyester (SMP) paint finish system. Colour: As shown on Contract Drawings. .3 Acceptable materials: .1 Tradition 150, manufactured by Vicwest Industrial Metal Panels 905-825-2252 fax 905-825-2272 www.vicwest.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Exterior gypsum underlay board: Conforming to ASTM C1177; 13 mm thick, glass fibre faced both sides, silicone treated gypsum core. 1200 mm wide sheets x maximum practical lengths to minimize end joints.
.2
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.3 METAL ROOFING COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
.3
Waterproof membrane (air/vapour retarder membrane): .1 Membrane: 1.0 mm thick composite sheet comprised of SBS modified bitumen with woven polyethylene reinforcement. .2 Primer: Primer recommended by membrane manufacturer. .3 Acceptable materials: .1 CCW 300 HT, manufactured by Carlisle Coatings and Waterproofing 905-267-3851 www.carlisle-ccw.com. .2 Lastobond Shield HT, manufactured by Soprema 905-265-8088 www.soprema.ca. .3 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Z girts and C channels: CAN/CSA S136-M; Minimum 1.2 mm, Z275 galvanized Z girts and C channels. Depth: As indicated on Contract Drawings. Seam clips: ASTM A653M; Z275 galvanized steel, thermal clip system. Insulation: CAN/ULC-S702; Semi-rigid glass fibre. Thickness as indicated on Contract Drawings. Temporary adhesive: Type as recommended by insulation manufacturer. .1 Acceptable materials: .1 RockBoard 40, manufactured by Roxul Inc. 1-800-265-6878 www.roxul.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Fascia, trim, closure, and flashings: Material, finish, colour, fasteners and thickness to match metal roofing material. Snap on batten: Provide 13 mm x 33 mm snap on batten full length of roof panel complete with concealed clip system. Do not fasten concealed clips to metal roof panels. Finish and colour to match roof system. Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Plastic cement: to CAN/CGSB-37.5.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
2.3 METAL ROOFING COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
.11
Sealant: Asbestos-free sealant, compatible with systems materials, recommended by system manufacturer. Rubber-asphalt sealing compound: to CAN/CGSB-37.29. Cleats: of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm wide. Thickness same as sheet metal being secured. Fasteners: ANSI B18.6.4, stainless steel Type 304. Exposed fasteners to be complete with coloured heads to match metal roofing. Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packings. Touch-up paint: as recommended by sheet metal roofing manufacturer.
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
2.4
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate metal roofing in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Form individual pieces in 2400 mm maximum lengths. Make allowances for expansion at joints. Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm, mitre and seal. Fabricate individual metal roofing panels in maximum lengths. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Apply minimum 0.2 mm dry film thickness coat of plastic cement to both faces of dissimilar metals in contact. Protect metals against oxidization by backpainting with isolation coating where indicated. Notch Z girts and C channels as required to allow for drainage of rainscreen cavity.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section depends. Report defects to the Departmental Representative. Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install metal roofing in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Use concealed fastenings except where approved by Departmental Representative before installation. Exterior gypsum underlay board: .1 Stagger underlay board joints at least 25% of full board length. Orient long side of boards perpendicular to metal deck flutes. Locate end joints over supporting ribs of metal deck. .2 Do not install imperfect, damaged or damp boards. Butt boards together with no spaces between boards. .3 Screw fasten underlay board to metal deck substrate at 600 mm o.c. and continuously around perimeter of each board at 300 mm o.c.. Maintain 15 mm minimum from edge of board to centre of screw. Waterproofing membrane (air/vapour retarder membrane): .1 Install primer and waterproof membrane continuously over underlay board, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Overlap waterproof membrane 50 mm along sidelaps and 75 mm on end laps and lap in direction of waterflow. .3 Coordinate airseal transition to adjacent parts of Work. Girts and channels: .1 Install Z girts, fastened through waterproof membrane and into structural framing beneath. Orient Z girts to drain water from rainscreen cavity.
.2
.3
.4
.5
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
.5
Girts and channels:(Cont'd) .2 Frame roofing system edges, with C channels and orient channel webs to face outwards. Metal roof insulation: .1 Prior to installation of insulation, examine waterproofing membrane and make good damage. .2 Install metal roof insulation in continuous contact with waterproof membrane and fitted between Z girts and C channels. Butt boards together with no spaces between boards. Areas of insulation system having voids will be rejected. .3 When cutting insulation board, cut completely though board thickness and trim to provide plain but joints. Do not break or tear insulation board to fit detail. Install sheet metal roof panels using cleats spaced at 400 mm on centre. Secure cleats with two fasteners each and cover with cleat tabs. Align transverse seams in adjacent panels. Flash roof penetrations with material matching roof panels, and make watertight. Form seams in direction of water-flow and make watertight.
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
.11
3.3 STANDING SEAM ROOFING
.1
Use prepainted steel sheets to make roofing with standing seams 600 mm on centre without straight run of standing seam exceeding 10 m.
.2
Fold lower end of each pan under 20 mm. .1 Slit fold 25 mm away from corner to form tab where pan turns up to make standing seam. .2 Fold upper end of each pan over 50 mm. .3 Hook 20 mm fold on lower end of upper pan into 50 mm fold on upper end of underlying pan.
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.3 STANDING SEAM ROOFING (Cont'd)
.3
Apply sheet metal roofing beginning at eaves. Loose lock pans to valley flashing and edge strips at eaves and gable rakes. Finish standing seams 25 mm high on flat surfaces. Bend up one side edge 40 mm and other 45 mm. .1 Make first fold 6 mm wide single fold and second fold 12 mm wide, providing locked portion of standing seam with 5 plies in thickness. .2 Fold lower ends of seams at eaves over at 45 degrees angle. .3 Terminate standing seams at ridge and hips by turning down in tapered fold. Form valleys of sheets not exceeding 3 m in length. Lap joints 150 mm in direction of flow. .1 Extend valley sheet minimum 150 mm under roofing sheets. .2 At valley line, double fold valley and roofing sheets and secure with cleats spaced 450 mm on centre.
.4
.5
3.4 BUILT-IN GUTTERS
.1
Form built-in box gutter lining with prefinished steel sheet conforming to profile of gutters. Use 1000 mm long sheets if section profile of gutter exceeds 1000 mm. Use 2.4 m or 3 m long sheets if sectional profile is less than 1000 mm. Longitudinal joints not acceptable. Secure gutter lining to substrate with screws, washers and expansion shields spaced maximum 1200 mm on centre along centre of lining. At roof edges extend gutter lining under metal roofing 150 mm minimum and terminate in 20 mm folded edge secured by cleats. Hook lower end of roofing into lock strip to form 20 mm wide loose-lock seam.
.2
.3 .4
.5
SHEET METAL ROOFING
Section 07 61 00 Page 10 2011-06-10
3.5 CLEANING AND TOUCH-UP
.1
Clean exposed finished surfaces of complete installation free of dirt, grease and smudges. Touch-up scratches with air dry formulation of coating system to match original factory finish.
.2
END
SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM
Section 07 62 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM C920-08, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .3 ASTM D523-08, Standard Test Method for Specular Gloss. .4 ASTM D822-01(2006), Standard Practice for Filtered Open-Flame Carbon-Arc Exposures of Paint and Related Coatings. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-37.5-M89, Cutback Asphalt Plastic Cement.(Withdrawn) Canadian Roofing Contractors Association (CRCA) .1 Roofing Specifications Manual (latest edition). Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A231.1-06/A231.2-06(R2010), Precast Concrete Paving Slabs. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature for sheet metal flashing systems materials, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 35 43.
.2
Section 07 62 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.3
Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate arrangements of sheets and joints, types and locations of fasteners and special shapes and relationship of panels to structural frame Samples: .1 Submit duplicate 50 x 50 mm samples of each type of sheet metal material, finishes and colours.
.4
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SHEET METAL
.1
Zinc coated steel sheet: 0.6 mm (24 ga.)thickness, commercial quality to ASTM A653/A653M, with Z275 designation zinc coating.
2.2 PREFINISHED STEEL SHEET
.1
Prefinished steel with factory applied polyvinylidene fluoride. .1 Class F1S. .2 Colour as selected by Departmental Representative from manufacturer's standard range. .3 Specular gloss: 30 units +/- in accordance with ASTM D523. .4 Coating thickness: not less than 22 micrometres. .5 Resistance to accelerated weathering for chalk rating of 8, colour fade 5 units or less and erosion rate less than 20% to ASTM D822 as follows: .6 Outdoor exposure period 2500 hours. .7 Humidity resistance exposure period 5000 hours.
Section 07 62 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.3
ACCESSORIES
.1
Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Plastic cement: to CAN/CGSB-37.5. Sealants: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25; High-performance, medium-modulus, one-part, neutral-cure silicone sealant.. Cleats: of same material, and temper as sheet metal, minimum 50 mm wide. Thickness 1.2 mm. Fasteners: Flat head roofing nails of length, type and thickness suitable for metal flashing application. Washers: of same material as sheet metal, 1 mm thick with rubber packings. Touch-up paint: as recommended by prefinished material manufacturer. Splash pad: to CSA A231.1/A231.2, minimum 87 kg/m2, maximum 107 kg/m2, 5% air-entrainment, 610 x 610 x 57 mm thick natural precast concrete with minimum 55MPa compressive strength and shotblast finish.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
2.4
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate metal flashings and other sheet metal work in accordance with CRCA and to details shown. Form pieces in 2400 mm maximum lengths. .1 Make allowance for expansion at joints. Hem exposed edges on underside 12 mm. .1 Mitre and seal corners with sealant. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance. Apply isolation coating to metal surfaces to be embedded in concrete or mortar.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 07 62 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.5
METAL FLASHINGS .1
Form flashings, copings and fascias to profiles indicated of 0.60 mm thick prefinished steel.
2.6 REGLETS AND CAP .1 FLASHINGS
Form recessed reglets and metal cap flashing of 0.60 mm thick sheet metal to be built-in concrete and masonry work for base flashings as detailed and in accordance with CRCA requirements. .1 Provide slotted fixing holes and steel/plastic washer fasteners. .2 Cover face and ends with plastic tape.
2.7
SCUPPERS
.1
Form scuppers from prefinished sheet metal in accordance with CRCA requirements. Sizes and profiles as indicated. Provide necessary fastenings.
.2 .3
2.8
DOWNPIPES
.1
Form downpipes from prefinished sheet metal in accordance with CRCA requirements. Sizes and profiles as indicated. Provide goosenecks, strainer baskets and necessary fastenings. Install one splash pad for each downpipe, angled away from building.
.2 .3
.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install sheet metal work in accordance with CRCA requirements and as detailed on Contract Drawings. Use concealed fastenings except where approved before installation.
.2
Section 07 62 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.3
Counterflash bituminous flashings at intersections of roof with vertical surfaces and curbs. .1 Flash joints using S-lock forming tight fit over hook strips, as detailed. Lock end joints and caulk with sealant. Turn top edge of flashing into recessed reglet or mortar joint minimum of 25 mm. Lead wedge flashing securely into joint. Caulk flashing at reglet and cap flashing with sealant.
.4 .5
.6
3.2
SCUPPERS
.1
Install scuppers as indicated and in accordance with CRCA requirements.
3.3
DOWNPIPES
.1
Install downpipes as indicated and in accordance with CRCA requirements. Install downpipes and provide goosenecks back to wall. .1 Secure downpipes to wall with straps at 1800 mm on centre; minimum two straps per downpipe.
.2
3.4
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Leave work areas clean, free from grease, finger marks and stains.
.3
END
ROOF ANCHORS AND SAFETY RESTRAINTS
Section 07 72 69 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Shop fabricated roof mounted anchors for safety restraints.
.1
Section 07 52 00 - Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing. Section 07 62 00 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim.
.2
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A500-03, Cold-Formed Welded and Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing in Rounds and Shapes. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA B51-09, Process Piping. .2 CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-04, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .3 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .4 CSA-W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel Structures. .5 CSA-W55.3-08, Resistance Welding Qualification Code for Fabricators of Structural Members Used in Buildings. Master Painters Institute (MPI). .1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual. The Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC). .1 SP -2, Hand-Tool Cleaning.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Personal Restraint Assembly: Posts, steel rope loops, and attachments to resist lateral forces of 3 kN at any point and in all directions, without damage or permanent set.
Section 07 72 69 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit control submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
1.6
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate component profiles, sizes, connection attachments, reinforcing, anchorage, size and type of fasteners, and accessories. Include erection drawings, elevations, and details where applicable. Indicate welded connections using standard welding symbols include net weld lengths.
.2
.3
.1
Submit design data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit Test Reports and substantiating engineering data and test results of previous tests by independent laboratory which purport to meet performance criteria, and other supportive data. Design structural support framing components and site inspect the installation under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed in the Province of Ontario. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Section 01 31 19. Co-ordinate the Work with installation of roofing assembly and sheet metal work.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 07 72 69 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.8 WELDERS' QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Welders Certificates: furnish welders' qualifications to Departmental Representative. Welding qualifications to be in accordance with CSA B51. Employ qualified and licensed welders possessing certificates for each procedure to be performed from authority having jurisdiction. Each welder to possess identification symbol issued by authority having jurisdiction. Certification of companies for fusion welding of steel structures to be in accordance with CSA-W47.1. Manufacturer Qualifications: company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.2
1.10 SITE CONDITIONS
.1
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Storage and manage hazardous materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
Section 07 72 69 Page 4 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Materials and resources as follows: .1 Steel Sections and Plates: CAN/CSAG40.20/G40.21. .2 Steel Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B. .3 Steel Rings: forged steel, ring thickness determined by imposed loads. .4 Steel Cable (between post travel restraints): diameter to suit intended application, spiral wound multi-strand stainless steel aircraft cable. .5 Bolts, Nuts, and Washers for Stainless Steel: stainless steel, matte finish. .6 Gaskets Under Anchors: neoprene pads, compatible with roof membrane, cut to size. Welding Materials: CSA-W47.1 for materials being welded. Shop Primer: Epoxy, anti-corrosive type, two coats.
.2
.3
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fit and shop assemble items in largest practical sections, for delivery to site. Fabricate items with joints tightly fitted and secured. Continuously seal joined members by intermittent welds and plastic filler. Grind exposed joints flush and smooth with adjacent finish surface. .1 Make exposed joints butt tight, flush, and hairline. .2 Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: screws or bolts; consistent with design of component. Furnish and install components required for anchorage of fabrications. Fabricate anchors and related components of same material and finish as fabrication, except where specifically noted otherwise.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 07 72 69 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.3 FABRICATION TOLERANCES
.1
Squareness: 3 mm maximum difference in diagonal measurements. Maximum Deviation From Plane: 1.5 mm from 1 m.
.2
2.4
FINISHES
.1
Prepare uncoated steel (restraint post) surfaces: SSPC-SP 2, no more than 4 hours before applying epoxy primer. Concealed steel anchors, clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease, and foreign matter prior to finishing. Do not prime surfaces in direct contact with concrete or where field welding is required. Concealed Structural Components and Anchors: galvanize after fabrication to CAN/CSA-G164 to minimum 600 g/sq m galvanized coating.
.2
.3
.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verify dimensions, tolerances, and method of attachment with other work.
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Supply and install steel items required to be attached to steel framing as clean uncoated metal, with setting templates to appropriate sections.
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install items plumb and level, accurately fitted, free from distortion or defects. Provide for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent attachments. Field weld components as indicated on shop drawings. Perform field welding.
.2
.3
Section 07 72 69 Page 6 2011-06-10
.4
Obtain approval from Departmental Representative prior to site cutting or making adjustments not scheduled. After erection, apply primer in accordance with MPI Painting Manual to: welds, abrasions, and surfaces not shop primed or galvanized, except surfaces to be in contact with concrete. Thread aircraft cable through eye-lets at top of post, to linear roof coverage of post restraints; pressure crimp cable ends.
.5
.6
3.4 ERECTION TOLERANCES
.1
Maximum Variation from Level: 6 mm.
3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
.1
Protect finished Work from damage.
END
APPLIED FIREPROOFING
Section 07 81 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S101-07, Standard Methods of Fire Endurance Tests of Building Construction and Materials. .2 CAN/ULC-S102-07, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.
.2
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Test Reports: .1 Submit product data including certified copies of test reports verifying fireproofing applied to substrate as constructed on project will meet or exceed requirements of Specification. .2 Submit test results in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics. .3 For assemblies not tested and rated, submit proposals based on related designs using accepted fireproofing design criteria. .2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
.3
Section 07 81 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.3
Quality assurance submittals:(Cont'd) .3 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures. .4 Manufacturer's Field Reports: submit to manufacturer's written reports within 3 days of review, verifying compliance of Work, as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
.1
Qualifications: .1 Installer: company specializing in sprayed-on fireproofing with 5 years documented experience and approved by manufacturer. Mock-ups: .1 Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .2 Apply fireproofing to approximately 1 m2 area of surface to be treated. .3 Mock-up will be used: .1 To judge workmanship, substrate preparation, operation of equipment and material application. .4 Locate where indicated. .5 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with fireproofing work. .6 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard of quality required for this work. Approved mock-up may remain as part of finished work. Site Meetings: as part of Manufacturer's Services described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL, schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed. .1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work is complete but before installation begins. .2 Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete. .3 Upon completion of Work, after cleaning is carried out.
.2
.3
Section 07 81 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Deliver packaged materials in original unopened containers, marked to indicate brand name, manufacturer, and ULC markings. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials in dry location. .2 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. .3 Damaged or opened containers will be rejected. .4 Packaging to indicate shelf-life and materials to be applied prior to expiration of shelf-life. .5 Provide temporary enclosures to prevent spray from contaminating air beyond application area. .6 Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray, fall-out, and dusting of fireproofing materials. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
1.5 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
At temperatures less than 5C, ensure that 5C air and substrate temperature is maintained during and for 24 hours after application. Ensure that natural ventilation to properly dry the fireproofing during and subsequent to its application is provided. In enclosed areas lacking openings for natural ventilation, ensure that interior air is circulated and exhausted to the outside. Maintain relative humidity within limits recommended fireproofing manufacturer. Ensure that natural ventilation to properly dry fireproofing during and subsequent to its application is provided.
.2
.3
Section 07 81 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.5 AMBIENT CONDITIONS (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.4
In enclosed areas lacking openings for natural ventilation, provide minimum of 4 air exchanges per hour by forced air circulation.
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sprayed fireproofing: ULC certified cementitious or asbestos-free mineral fibre fireproofing qualified for use in ULC Designs specified. Curing compound: type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, qualified for use in ULC Designs specified. Sealer: type recommended by fireproofing manufacturer, qualified for use in ULC Design specified. Fireproofing: minimum dry density and cohesion/adhesion properties as follows: .1 Fireproofing for structural components concealed above ceiling, or within wall, chase, or furred space: minimum applied dry density of 240 kg per cubic meter and cohesion/adhesion strength of 9.57 kPa. .2 Fireproofing for exposed structural components, except where otherwise specified or indicated: minimum applied dry density of 350 kg per cubic meter and cohesion/adhesion strength of 20.83 kPa. .3 Fireproofing for structural components located in mechanical rooms and storage areas: minimum applied dry density of 640 kg per cubic meter and cohesion/adhesion strength of 350 kPa. .4 Ensure spray-applied fireproofing: does not crack, spall or delaminate under downward deflection conditions over 3 m clear span. .5 Minimum compressive strength: 48 kPa. .6 Spray-Applied fireproofing material: not contribute to corrosion of test panels. .7 Dust removal: not exceed 0.25 gram per square meter.
.2
.3
.4
Section 07 81 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Substrate: free of material, which would impair bond. Verify that painted substrates are compatible and have suitable bonding characteristics to receive fireproofing. Remove incompatible materials. Ensure that items required to penetrate fireproofing are placed before installation of fireproofing. Ensure that ducts, piping, equipment, or other items which would interfere with application of fireproofing are not positioned until fireproofing work is completed.
.2
.3 .4
.5
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Apply bonding adhesive or primer to substrate if recommended by manufacturer. Apply fireproofing to correspond with tested assemblies, or acceptable calculation procedures to provide the required fire resistance ratings. Apply fireproofing over substrate, building up to required thickness to cover substrate with monolithic blanket of uniform density and texture. Tamp smooth, surfaces visible in finished work. Apply curing compound to surface of cementitious fireproofing as required by manufacturer.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 07 81 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
.6
Apply sealer to surface of mineral fibre fireproofing as required by manufacturer in ventilation plenums and as indicated.
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS. .2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE. Inspection and Site Tests: .1 Inspection and testing of fireproofing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by Departmental Representative.
.2
3.5
PATCHING
.1
Patch damage to fireproofing caused by testing or by other trades before fireproofing is concealed, or if exposed, before final inspection.
3.6
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Clean surfaces not indicated to receive fireproofing of sprayed material within 24 hours period after application. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
.3
END
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). NBC, National Building Code, 2005. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S101-07, Standard Method of Test for Fire Endurance of Building Materials and Assemblies. .2 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. .3 ULC-S115-05, Fire Tests of Firestop Systems.
.2 .3
1.2
DEFINITIONS
.1
Fire Stop Material: device intended to close off opening or penetration during fire or materials that fill openings in wall or floor assembly where penetration is by cables, cable trays, conduits, ducts and pipes and poke-through termination devices, including electrical outlet boxes along with their means of support through wall or floor openings. Single Component Fire Stop System: fire stop material that has Listed Systems Design and is used individually without use of high temperature insulation or other materials to create fire stop system. Multiple Component Fire Stop System: exact group of fire stop materials that are identified within Listed Systems Design to create on site fire stop system. Tightly Fitted; (in accordance with NBC 2005): penetrating items that are cast in place in buildings of noncombustible construction or have "0" annular space in buildings of combustible construction. .1 Words "tightly fitted" should ensure that integrity of fire separation is such that it prevents passage of smoke and hot gases to unexposed side of fire separation.
.2
.3
.4
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings to show location, proposed material, reinforcement, anchorage, fastenings and method of installation. .2 Construction details should accurately reflect actual job conditions. Samples: .1 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm samples showing actual fire stop material proposed for project. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Test reports: in accordance with CAN/ULC-S101 for fire endurance and CAN/ULC-S102 for surface burning characteristics. .1 Submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance of applied fire stopping with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Qualifications: .1 Installer: company specializing in fire stopping installations with 5 years documented experience and that is approved by manufacturer. Pre-Installation Meetings: convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to
.2
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.2
Pre-Installation Meetings:(Cont'd) beginning work of this Section, with contractor's representative and Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 31 19 to: .1 Verify project requirements. .2 Review installation and substrate conditions. .3 Co-ordination with other building subtrades.
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Deliver materials to the site in undamaged condition and in original unopened containers, marked to indicate brand name, manufacturer, and ULC markings. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Fire stopping and smoke seal systems: in accordance with CAN/ULC-S115. .1 Asbestos-free materials and systems capable of maintaining effective barrier against flame, smoke and gases in compliance with requirements of CAN/ULC-S115 and not to exceed opening sizes for which they are intended. .2 Fire stop system rating: F. Service penetration assemblies: systems tested to CAN/ULC-S115.
.2
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.3
Service penetration fire stop components: certified by test laboratory to CAN/ULC-S115. Fire-resistance rating of installed fire stopping assembly in accordance with NBC. Fire stopping and smoke seals at openings around penetrations for pipes, ductwork and other mechanical items requiring sound and vibration control: elastomeric seal. Primers: to manufacturer's recommendation for specific material, substrate, and end use. Water (if applicable): potable, clean and free from injurious amounts of deleterious substances. Damming and backup materials, supports and anchoring devices: to manufacturer's recommendations, and in accordance with tested assembly being installed as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Sealants for vertical joints: non-sagging.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Examine sizes and conditions of voids to be filled to establish correct thicknesses and installation of materials. .1 Ensure that substrates and surfaces are clean, dry and frost free. Prepare surfaces in contact with fire stopping materials and smoke seals to manufacturer's instructions. Maintain insulation around pipes and ducts penetrating fire separation without interruption to vapour barrier.
.2
.3
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.4
Mask where necessary to avoid spillage and over coating onto adjoining surfaces; remove stains on adjacent surfaces.
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install fire stopping and smoke seal material and components in accordance with manufacturer's certified tested system listing. Seal holes or voids made by through penetrations, poke-through termination devices, and unpenetrated openings or joints to ensure continuity and integrity of fire separation are maintained. Provide temporary forming as required and remove forming only after materials have gained sufficient strength and after initial curing. Tool or trowel exposed surfaces to neat finish. Remove excess compound promptly as work progresses and upon completion.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.4 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
.1
Proceed with installation only when submittals have been reviewed by Departmental Representative. Install floor fire stopping before interior partition erections. Metal deck bonding: fire stopping to precede spray applied fireproofing to ensure required bonding. Mechanical pipe insulation: certified fire stop system component. .1 Ensure pipe insulation installation precedes fire stopping.
.2
.3
.4
3.5
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials,
FIRE STOPPING
Section 07 84 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Remove temporary dams after initial set of fire stopping and smoke seal materials.
.3
3.6
SCHEDULE
.1
Fire stop and smoke seal at areas such as but not limited to the following: .1 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated masonry, concrete, and gypsum board partitions and walls. .2 Top of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions. .3 Intersection of fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions. .4 Control and sway joints in fire-resistance rated masonry and gypsum board partitions and walls. .5 Penetrations through fire-resistance rated floor slabs, ceilings and roofs. .6 Openings and sleeves installed for future use through fire separations. .7 Around mechanical and electrical assemblies penetrating fire separations. .8 Rigid ducts: greater than 129 cm2: fire stopping to consist of bead of fire stopping material between retaining angle and fire separation and between retaining angle and duct, on each side of fire separation.
END
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International: .1 ASTM C882/C882M-05e1, Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy-Resin Systems Used With Concrete By Slant Shear. .2 ASTM C919-08, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .3 ASTM C920-08, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .4 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CGSB 19-GP-5M, Sealing Compound, One Component, Acrylic Base, Solvent Curing (Incorporating Amendment No. 1). .2 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One Component, Elastomeric Chemical Curing. .3 CAN/CGSB-19.17-M90, One Component Acrylic Emulsion Base Sealing Compound. .4 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90, Multicomponent, Chemical-Curing Sealing Compound. Environmental Choice Program (ECP): .1 ECP/PCE-45-92, Sealants and Caulking.
.2
.3
.1
Provide sealant products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-45-92 for Sealants and Caulking Compounds, except maximum VOC 60 g/L during application and curing. For primers and sealants, indicate VOC in g/L during application and curing.
.2
1.3 DESIGN REQUIRMENTS
.1
Minimum sound transmission rating of installed partition, floor and ceiling to desired STC rating, tested to ASTM E90.
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4
PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit manufacturer's literature indicating recommended surface preparation, sealant selection and primer for each substrate in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
.1
Installers qualifications (security sealant): .1 Perform security caulking Work using parties recognized for ability in the trade, having at least five (5) years proven satisfactory experience, to carry out the Work and/or supervise skilled mechanics thoroughly trained and competent in the use of caulking and sealing materials using pressure operated equipment. .2 Perform Work in accordance with the sealant manufacturer's requirements for preparation of surfaces and materials installation instructions. Mock-up: .1 Construct one 1200 mm long mock-up of security sealant in location acceptable to the Departmental Representative. .2 Demonstrate joint preparation, sealant application, tooling and pick proof ability of sealant. .3 Arrange for the Departmental Representative's review and acceptance. .4 Mock-up may remain as part of Work if accepted by the Departmental Representative. Remove and dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work. .5 Upon acceptance, mock-up shall serve as a minimum standard of quality for the balance of the Work of this Section.
.2
1.6
SITE CONDITIONS .1
Do not install the Work of this Section outside of environmental ranges as recommended by manufacturer without the Departmental Representative's and Product manufacturer's written acceptance.
.2
Protect all work against damage and disfigurations and work of other trades against soiling and damage arising out of this
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS .2 (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) work. Upon completion, replace and repair all defective work. Examine substrate materials, joint voids, and note temperature/humidity conditions. Report unacceptable conditions to the Departmental Representative. Commencement of work implies acceptance of conditions.
.3
.4
Deliver all materials and store in original wrappings and containers with manufacturer's seals and labels intact, and as recommended by the manufacturer of the sealant. Maintain containers and labels in undamaged condition.
.2
.1
Submit a warranty for Security Sealant Work in accordance with General Conditions, except that warranty period is extended to five (5) years. Warrant against leakage, cracking, crumbling, melting, shrinkage, running, loss of adhesion, staining adjacent surfaces or failure to provide intended seal. Warranty shall be for defects and complete replacement including affected adjacent Work.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
SEALANTS
.1
Provide sealant products bearing Ecologo to ECP/PCE-45-92 with maximum VOC 60 g/L. Ensure that all materials used are compatible.
.2
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS
.1
Urethanes Two Part '2A'. .1 Self-Leveling to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M, Type 1, Class B. Urethanes Two Part '2B'. .1 Non-Sag to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M, Type 2, Class B. Urethanes One Part '2C'. .1 Self-Leveling to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M, Type 1. Urethanes One Part '2D'. .1 Non-Sag to CAN/CGSB-19.13-M, Type 2, MCG-2-25. Silicones One Part '3'. .1 To ASTM C919 and ASTM C920, primerless, Type, Grade NS, Class 25, SWRI validated. Acrylics One Part '4'. .1 To CGSB 19-GP-5M. Acrylic Latex One Part '5'. .1 To CAN/CGSB-19.17-M. Acoustical Sealant '6'. .1 One part silicone to ASTM C919 and ASTM C920, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, SWRI validated. Epoxy security sealant '9': interior. .1 Pick-proof gunned flexible epoxy joint filler: two component 100% solids, gun-grade epoxy joint filler with flexible, pick-proof properties for sloped areas. .1 Shore A hardness: 905. .2 Shore D hardness: 50. .3 Elongation: 50%. .4 Tensile Strength: 6.2 MPa 0.07 MPa (900 pounds per square inch 10 pounds per square inch. .5 Slant shear strength: 6.0 MPa (865 pounds per square inch) to ASTM C882/C882M. .6 Mixing ratio: 1 to 1 by volume. .7 Pot Life: 40 to 55 minutes at 24C (75F). .8 Cure time foot traffic: 4 hours. .9 Cure time vehicular traffic: 24 hours.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.2 SEALANT MATERIAL DESIGNATIONS (Cont'd)
.9
Epoxy security sealant '9':(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .10 Application temperature: minimum 13C (55F). .2 Acceptable material: .1 Epolith-G, manufactured by BASF 1-800-433-9517 www.buildingsystems.basf.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Preformed compressible and non-compressible back-up materials '10', CFC free. .1 Polyethylene, urethane, neoprene or vinyl foam. Extruded open cell foam backer rod. Size: oversize 30 to 50%. .2 Neoprene or butyl rubber. Round solid rod, Shore A hardness 70. .3 High density foam. Extruded closed cell polyvinyl chloride (PVC) or extruded polethylene, closed cell, Shore A hardness 20, tensile strength 140 to 200 kPa, extruded polyolefin foam, 32 kg/m3 density, or neoprene foam backer, size as recommended by manufacturer. .4 Bond breaker tape. Polyethylene bond breaker tape which will not bond to sealant.
.10
2.3 SEALANT SELECTION
.1
Perimeters of exterior openings where frames meet exterior facade of building (ie. block): Designations 2B, 2D, 3, 4. Control and expansion joints in exterior surfaces of unit masonry walls: Designations 2B, 2D, 3. Seal interior perimeters of exterior openings as detailed on drawings: Designations 2B, 2D, 3. Control and expansion joints on the interior of exterior surfaces of unit masonry walls: Designations 2B, 2D, 3. Interior control and expansion joints in floor surfaces: Designations 2A, 2C, 10. Perimeters of interior frames, as detailed and itemized: Designations 2B, 3.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
2.3 SEALANT SELECTION (Cont'd)
.7
Interior masonry vertical control joints (block-to-block, block-to-concrete, and intersecting masonry walls): Designations 2B, 2D, 3. Perimeter of bath fixtures (e.g. sinks, tubs, urinals, stools, waterclosets, basins, vanities): Designations 2B, 2D, 3, 5. Exposed interior control joints in drywall: Designations 2B, 2D, 5, 6. Epoxy security sealant: designation 9, provide security sealant where indicated on drawings including but not limited to the following locations: .1 Around all light fixtures where fixture meets wall and ceiling. .2 Along interior bottom of cell windows. .3 In all cell corners. .4 At metal fabrications, glazing and doors as shown.
.8
.9
.10
2.4
JOINT CLEANER
.1
Non-corrosive and non-staining type, compatible with joint forming materials and sealant recommended by sealant manufacturer. Primer: to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF JOINT SURFACES
.1
Examine joint sizes and conditions to establish correct depth to width relationship for installation of backup materials and sealants. Clean bonding joint surfaces of harmful matter substances including dust, rust, oil grease, and other matter which may impair work. Do not apply sealants to joint surfaces treated with sealer, curing compound, water repellent, or other coatings unless tests have been performed to ensure compatibility of materials. Remove coatings as required.
.2
.3
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
3.1 PREPARATION OF JOINT SURFACES (Cont'd)
.4 .5
Ensure joint surfaces are dry and frost free. Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
3.2
PRIMING
.1
Where necessary to prevent staining, mask adjacent surfaces prior to priming and caulking. Prime sides of joints in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions immediately prior to caulking.
.2
3.3
BACKUP MATERIAL .1
Apply bond breaker tape where required to manufacturer's instructions. Install joint filler to achieve correct joint depth and shape with approximately 30% compression.
.2
3.4
MIXING
.1
Mix materials in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions.
3.5
APPLICATION
.1
Ventilate interior spaces during application and curing of sealants to maintain VOCs less than 50 g/l. Coordinate with building manager to ensure existing ventilation system or temporary ventilation supllies sufficient outside air. Sealant. .1 Protect installed work of other trades from staining or contamination. .2 Apply sealant in accordance with manufacturer's application manual and written instructions. Maintain desired STC ratings of assemblies. .3 Mask edges of joint where irregular surface or sensitive joint border exists to provide neat joint. remove tape after sealant applied. .4 Apply sealant in continuous beads. .5 Apply sealant using gun with proper size nozzle.
.2
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .6 Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. .7 Form surface of sealant with full bead, smooth, free from ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets, embedded impurities. .8 Tool exposed surfaces before skinning begins to give slightly concave shape. Curing. .1 Cure sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. .2 Do not cover up sealants until proper curing has taken place. Security sealant: .1 Apply security sealant in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, using a pressure air gun with proper size nozzle. Use sufficient pressure to fill voids and joints solid. Superficial pointing with skin bead is not acceptable. .2 Apply security sealant to all interior joints between dissimilar materials and elsewhere as required or indicated on the Contract Drawings. .3 Joint Design: Fill all spaces that are deeper than width of joint, with approved backup material. Ensure that the backup material fills the joint out to a dimension that is equal to the width of the joint, but in no case less than half the width of the joint. .4 Sealant Application: Gun apply sealants through a nozzle opening of such shape and diameter that the full bead of sealant is gunned into the joint, filling the joint completely; to the approval of the Departmental Representative. .5 A superficial or skin bead in joints will not be acceptable. .6 Tool all beads immediately after application to ensure firm, full contact with the inner faces of the joint. Strike off excess material with tooling stick or knife. .7 Upon completion ensure caulking surfaces are smooth, even, free from ridges, wrinkles, air pockets, and embedded foreign matter. .8 Joint Finishes: Finish joints in flush surfaces; fill joints full in internal angles, except as otherwise detailed. Use wet tool as required. Avoid the use of face fillet (or
.3
.4
JOINT SEALING
Section 07 90 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
.4
Security sealant:(Cont'd) .8 Joint Finishes:(Cont'd) angle bead) joints. CONCAVE OR CONVEX JOINTS WILL BE REJECTED. .9 Where sharp, exact bead lines are desired, use masking tape. When taping, avoid touching cleaned and primed areas to which sealant is to be applied. Remove masking tape immediately after bead is placed and tooled, to avoid damage to developing surface skin. .10 Completely fill void with compound into which they are installed. Remove excess immediately following installation. .11 Do not provide security sealant to light switch plates, electrical plug plates and sprinkler heads. Cleanup. .1 Clean adjacent surfaces immediately in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and leave work neat and clean. .2 Remove excess and droppings, using recommended cleaners as work progresses. .3 Remove masking tape after initial set of sealant.
.5
END
STEEL HOLLOW METAL Section 08 11 13 DOORS, FRAMES AND SCREENS Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 04 20 00: Building-in and grouting frames in masonry. Section 07 90 00: Caulking of joints between frames and other building components. Section 08 71 11: Hardware. Section 08 80 00: Glazing.
.2
.3 .4
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI): .1 ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2008, Auxiliary Hardware. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A568/A568M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Carbon, Structural, and High-Strength, Low-Alloy, Hot-Rolled and Cold-Rolled, General Requirements for. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 41-GP-19Ma-84, Rigid Vinyl Extrusions for Windows and Doors (Reaffirmation of September 1978). .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association (CSDMA) www.csdma.org/english/publications.html .1 Recommended Dimensional Standards For Commercial Steel Doors and Frames 2000. .2 Recommended Selection and Usage Guide for Commercial Steel Door and Frame Products 2009. .3 Recommended Specifications for Sound Retardant Steel Doors and Frames 2006. .4 Fire Labelling Guide 2009.
.2
.3
.4
.5
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 80-2010, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. Underwriters Laboratories Canada (ULC) .1 CAN4-S104-10, Fire Tests of Door Assemblies .2 CAN/ULC-S702-09, Standard for Mineral Fibre Thermal Insulation for Buildings.
.6
.1
Submit product data sheets in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
1.4
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
The manufacturer of steel doors and frames supplied under this section will be a member of the CSDMA - Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association.
1.5 REQUIREMENTS OF .1 REGULATORY AGENCIES
Steel fire rated doors and frames: labelled and listed by an organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN4-S104 for ratings specified or indicated. Provide fire labelled frame products for those openings requiring fire protection ratings, as scheduled. Test products in strict conformance with CAN4-S104 and list by nationally recognized agency having factory inspection service and construct as detailed in Follow-Up Service Procedures/Factory Inspection Manuals issued by listing agency to individual manufacturers.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Metal: tension levelled sheet steel to ASTM A568/A568M, Class 1, with heavy duty ZF275 (G90)zinc coating on both sides designation to ASTM A653/A653M, minimum 30% total recycled content. Door cores: .1 Honeycomb: structural small cell (24.5 mm max) kraft paper 'honeycomb'. Weight: 36.3 kg/ream minimum, density 16.5 kg/m3. .2 Continuous interlocking steel ribs: 0.9 mm thick continuous interlocking steel stiffeners at 150 mm O.C., securely welded to each face sheet 150 mm O.C. maximum. .1 Voids between stiffeners Fibreglass: loose batt type, density: 24 kg/m3 minimum, to CAN/ULC-S702, Type 1, Ecologo certified. .3 Fire rated doors: Mineral fibre insulation to CAN/ULC S702, Type 1A; 24 kg/m3. Exterior top caps: PVC to CGSB 41-GP-19Ma. Frame thermal break: extruded, rigid polyvinyl chloride. Filler: polyester based. Primer: zinc rich, organic, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181, Ecologo certified. Door bumpers: to ANSI/BHMA-A156.16, type L03011.
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6
.7
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
To Canadian Steel Door Manufacturers Association (CSDMA), "Recommended Specifications for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames", "Recommended Dimensional Standards for Commercial Steel Doors and Frames" and CAN/ULC-S105 "Standard Specification for Fire Door Frames Meeting the Performance Required by CAN4-S104". Exterior doors: comply with requirements of CAN/CGSB-82.5, Insulated Steel Doors.
.2
.3
Doors: material thickness, opening classification and duty rating to CSDMA "Recommended Selection and Usage Guide For Commercial Steel Doors", hollow steel construction, filled with insulation, edges continuously welded or filled and sanded flush with no visible seams. Provide PVC top cap filled and ground flush on exterior doors. Close bottom edge of doors where indicated. .1 CSC exterior door: face sheets minimum 2.0 mm thick. Frames and screens: 1.6 mm steel, welded or knocked down type. Exterior frames with continuous thermal break. Anchors adjustable, type to suit each jamb condition. Glass mouldings: formed steel. Install 3 door bumpers on strike jamb of single doors and 2 bumpers at head of double doors.
.4
.5 .6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install frames, screens, doors and hardware plumb, square and level in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and templates. Install labelled steel fire rated doors and frames to NFPA 80. Provide even margins between doors and jambs and doors and flooring and thresholds as follows: .1 Hinge side: 1.0 mm. .2 Latch side and head: 1.5 mm. .3 Flooring and thresholds: 13 mm. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Fill in exterior frames with mineral fibre insulation. Touch-up with primer scratched or damaged zinc finish.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
END
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED SECTIONS.1
Section 08 80 00 - Glazing: Glass and glazing materials as required by this Section. Section 11 19 60 - Detention Exterior Windows: Coordinate with noted Section as required for sizing and installation.
.2
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) .1 AAMA 506-08, Voluntary Specifications for Impact and Cycle Testing of Fenestration Products. .2 AAMA CW-10-04, Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site. .3 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440-08, NAFS North American Fenestration Standard/ Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .4 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1-09, Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440-08, NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .5 CAN/CSA-A440.2-09/A440.3-09, Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems/User Guide to CSA A440.2-09, Energy Performance of Windows and Other Fenestration Systems. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM E330-02(2010), Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. .2 ASTM E1996-08e2, Standard Specification for Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, Doors and Impact Protective Systems by Windborne Debris in Hurricanes. .3 ASTM F588-07, Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact. .4 ASTM F1915-05, Standard Test Methods for Glazing for Detention Facilities. .5 ASTM F1592-05, Standard Test Methods for Detention Hollow Metal Vision Systems.
.2
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
.3
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.108-M89, Bituminous Solvent Type Paint. (Withdrawn) .2 CAN/CGSB-19.13-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component, Elastomeric, Chemical Curing. .3 CAN/CGSB-19.18-M87, Sealing Compound, One-Component,Silicone Base, Solvent Curing. .4 CAN/CGSB-19.24-M90,Multicomponent,. Chenical-Curing Sealing Compound. .5 CAN/CGSB-79.1-M91, Insect Screens.
.4
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) International .1 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .2 CAN/CSA-S157-05(R2010), Strength Design in Aluminum. .3 CAN/CSA-W59.2-M1991(R2008), Welded Aluminum Construction. Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units (Rev. 1992), by Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association of Canada (IGMAC). Underwriters Laboratories' of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S701-05, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.
.5
.6
1.3 PERFORMANCE/ DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA
.1
Windows shall have strength adequacy for post disaster, fail secure containment of inmates. Therefore windows shall meet 1.5 times the specified wind load without fracture of the product or excessive permanent deformation in accordance with CSA-A440S1. Windows shall meet Correctional Service Canada level 3 (D3) providing extended resistance to attack in the form of rodsaw resistant steels and tempered glass. .1 Tool resisting steel bars shall be spaced maximum 115 mm apart. The center two bars on each window shall be 115 mm apart. Pass ASTM F1915: .1 Table 1 Impact test criteria: large blunt and sharp impactors, Security Grade 1.
.2
.3
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.3 PERFORMANCE/ DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA (Cont'd)
.3
Pass ASTM F1915:(Cont'd) .2 Table 2 Impact test criteria: torch and small blunt impactor, Security Grade 1. Pass ASTM F1592: .1 Table 1 Impact Series for Frame and Glazing/Panel Impact Testing Multi Light Frame, Grade 1. Windows: fabricated for reglazing from exterior.
.4
.5
.1
Design and size components to withstand dead and live loads caused by pressure and suction of wind, acting normal to plane of system as calculated in accordance with NBC, as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. Design and size components to withstand seismic loads and sway displacement as calculated in accordance with NBC. Limit mullion deflection to flexure limit of glass L/175; with full recovery of glazing materials. Provide system to accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals: .1 Movement within system. .2 Movement between system and perimeter framing components. .3 Dynamic loading and release of loads. .4 Deflection of structural support framing. .5 Shortening of building concrete structural columns. .6 Creep of concrete structural members. .7 Aluminum Window system must not exceed air infiltration or exfiltration of more than 3.05 x 10 4 m3/s/m2 of Aluminum Window surface area at 300 Pa pressure difference. Fixed windows: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, Class CW-PG1680-FW, test size of 1500 x 1500 mm, to the following performance levels. .1 Air tightness level: A3, fixed with operable vent. .2 Specified design pressure (DP): 1680 Pa.
.2
.3
.4
.5
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.5
Fixed windows:(Cont'd) .3 Deflection at design pressure (DP): L/175. .4 Minimum structural pressure (STP): 2520 Pa. .5 Minimum water pressure: 260 Pa. .6 Air leakage resistance: 75 Pa; 1.5 L/s sq.m. .7 Forced entry resistance test: to ASTM F588. .8 Insulating glass units. Casement windows: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, Class CW-PG1440-C, test size of 800 x 1500 mm, to the following performance levels. .1 Air tightness level: A3, operable casement window, opening in. .2 Specified design pressure (DP): 1440 Pa. .3 Deflection at design pressure (DP): L/175. .4 Minimum structural pressure (STP): 2160 Pa. .5 Minimum water pressure: 220 Pa. .6 Air leakage resistance: 75 Pa; 1.5 L/s sq.m. .7 Forced entry resistance test: to ASTM F588. .8 Insulating glass units. Vapour seal with interior atmospheric pressure of 25 mm sp, 22 deg. C, 40% RH: No failure. Ensure that no water infiltrates into the building under 20% of design wind load up to a maximum pressure of 720 Pa for Aluminum Window. Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to the exterior by a weep drainage network. Maintain continuous air barrier and vapour retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glass and heel bead of glazing compound.
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 5 2011-06-10
.11
Ensure no vibration harmonics, wind whistles, noises caused by thermal movement, thermal movement transmitted to other building elements, loosening, weakening, or fracturing of attachments or components of system occur.
.12
Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics, calculations, dimensional limitations, special installation requirements.
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Shop drawings: .1 Indicate materials and details in full size scale for head, jamb and sill, profiles of components, interior and exterior trim, junction between combination units elevations of unit, anchorage details, location of isolation coating, description of related components and exposed finishes fasteners, and caulking. Indicate location of manufacturer's nameplates. Samples: .1 Submit one window, conforming to contract documents in all respects, to job site for review by Departmental Representative. .2 Fabricate remaining windows following review. .3 Remaining windows to match reviewed sample. .4 Sample window may be installed after review. .5 Two samples of 150 x 150 mm perforated plate for the Departmental Representative's approval of material and perforations. .6 Each type of window hardware item for the approval of the Departmental Representative. Certifications: .1 Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2
.3
.4
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 6 2011-06-10
.4
Certifications:(Cont'd) .2 Submit to the Departmental Representative, installer's current certificate of approval by the material manufacturer as proof of compliance. Submit proof of experience upon the Departmental Representative's request. Test reports: Submit test reports from approved independent testing laboratories, certifying compliance with specifications, for: .1 Windows classifications. .2 Anodized or Enamelled finish, weathering characteristics. .3 Air tightness level. .4 Specified DRWP. .5 Specified wind load-positive. .6 Specified snow load. .7 Design pressure-positive. .8 Design pressure-negative. .9 Specified wind load-negative. .10 Condensation resistance. .11 Insulating glass units. .12 Operating force.
.5
1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for windows for incorporation into manual.
.1
Manufacturer qualifications: Perform work of this Section by a company that has a minimum of five years proven experience in the manufacture of a similar size and nature.
.2
Installers qualifications: Perform Work of this Section by a company that has a minimum of five years proven experience in the installations of a similar size and nature and that is approved by manufacturer. Design structural support framing components to CAN/CSA S157 under direct supervision of a Professional Engineer experienced in design of
.3
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 7 2011-06-10
.3
(Cont'd) this Work and licensed in the Province of Work. All shop drawings to be signed and sealed by the Professional Engineer. Mock-up: .1 Construct one field sample mock-up of window in location acceptable to the Departmental Representative. .2 Demonstrate installation of anchoring devices and air/vapour retarder sealing and relation of window to surrounding construction. .3 Arrange for the Departmental Representative's review and acceptance. .4 Mock-up may remain as part of Work if accepted by the Departmental Representative. Remove and dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work. .5 Upon acceptance, mock-up shall serve as a minimum standard of quality for the balance of the work of this Section. Pre-installation meeting: Arrange with manufacturer's representative, Contractor, and the Departmental Representative to inspect substrates, and to review installation procedures 48 hours in advance of installation. Perform welding Work in accordance with CSA W59.2.
.4
.5
.6
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00, IGMA requirements and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect windows from nicks, scratches, and blemishes.
.2
.3
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 8 2011-06-10
.3
Storage and Handling Requirements:(Cont'd) .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. .4 Handle aluminum work in accordance with AAMA CW.10. Protect aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. Do not remove before final cleaning of building. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return by manufacturer of pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.4
.5
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.2
.3
.4
Unused or damaged glazing materials are not recyclable and must not be diverted to municipal recycling programs. Divert unused or damaged wood materials from landfill to facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.5
.6
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused caulking material from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Plastic caulking tubes are not recyclable and must not be diverted for recycling with other plastic materials.
.7
.8
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 9 2011-06-10
1.10
WARRANTY
.1
For the Work of this Section 08 51 13 the 12 month warranty period prescribed in General Conditions GC3.13 is extended to three years. For insulating glass units the 12 month warranty period prescribed in General Conditions GC3.13 is extended to five years.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
WINDOWS
.1
Aluminum Window: Thermally broken, flush glazed, 65 mm wide face, Aluminum Window section as detailed on the drawings, complete with 76 mm wide by 19 mm deep by 3 mm thick caps to window types W1, W1A, W2, W3 and W4 using manufacturer's standard components; matching stops and pressure plate of sufficient size and strength to provide adequate bite on glass; drainage holes, deflector plates and internal flashings to accommodate internal weep drainage system; internal mullion baffles to eliminate "stack effect" air movement within internal spaces. Window type W4 Operable Window to be thermally broken; operable (side-hinged open-in casement); cast white bronze cam locks; extruded aluminium butt hinge with stainless steel pins (2 per window), using manufacturer's standard components. Veneer system framing (applied to steel detention window frames): Curtain wall veneer system as detailed. Operable Vents: Aluminum operable window with operating mechanism to be coordinated with Section 11 19 60. Noted Section to provide and install custom made interior 3 mm thick brake formed 304 stainless steel perforated plate with No. 4 finish; complete with knurled knob to operate window. Rivet to Operable Vent with 3 mm diameter stainless steel rivets at 150 mm o.c. around the perimeter as detailed. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Kawneer 512 Ventrow, manufactured by Kawneer Company of Canada 416-755-7751 www.kawneer.com.
.2
.3
.4
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 10 2011-06-10
2.1 WINDOWS (Cont'd)
.4
Operable Vents:(Cont'd) .1 Acceptable material:(Cont'd) .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.2
MATERIALS
.1
Aluminum alloy and finish: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440S1, clear anodized, Class 1, minimum 50% recycled content. Thermal break: Low thermal conductivity inert polymerized material or soft PVC, of quality and size to meet design requirements, compressed to seal between main sections and pressure plates. Weatherstripping: to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1. Sealant: multi-component, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB-19.24-M, Type 2; one component, elastomeric, chemical curing to CAN/CGSB19.13-M; or one component, silicone base, solvent curing to CAN/CGSB-19.18-M87, Ecologo certified. .1 Colour selected by Departmental Representative. .2 Sealant primer: type recommended by sealant manufacturer. Joint filler: extruded, closed cell urethane, 20 Shore A hardness, 140 kPa, tensile strength, outsized 30 to 50%, CFC free. Glazing tape, seals, blocks and splines: to AAMA/WDMA/ CSA-101/I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440S1. .1 Glazing Seals (mechanically keyed in gasket): extruded black, closed cell or dense elastomer of durometer appropriate to function. Roll in gasket to apply correct pressure on glass. .2 Setting Blocks and Spacers: type recommended by the manufacturers of a durometer range of 80-90 on setting blocks and 40-50 on spacers.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 11 2011-06-10
.7
Aluminum Flashing: 2.1 mm thick minimum pre-finished aluminum flashing to match aluminum framing. Insulation: expanded polystyrene to CAN/ULCS701, Type 2, Ecologo certified. Bituminous paint: acid and alkali resistant to CAN/CSB-1.108-M, type II, Ecologo certified. Perforated plate: Stainless steel perforated plate for placement over ventilator of window. Provide samples for the Departmental Representative's approval of perforation, gauge and finish. Glazing: In accordance with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing. Anti Rotational Channels: aluminum channels, minimum 2.1 mm wall thickness, of size to suit glazing rabbet to Aluminum Window framing, one length piece per location. Air/vapour barrier: as specified in Section 07 25 00. Fasteners: .1 Provide aluminum or 300 series stainless steel or 400 series cadmium plated screws, rivets and fastenings. .2 Screws for securing aluminum members to structure: stainless steel, of a size and shape to withstand all stress and superimposed loads. Security fasteners: .1 Provide security screws, security nuts, rivets, spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various items, ie torx pin head, socket pin head, phillips pin head, hex pin head or equivalent. .2 Spanner screws to have slots that require a special spanner tool to remove screws. .3 Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. .4 Standard screws not acceptable.
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 12 2011-06-10
.16
Foam insulation: One component polyurethane foam-in-place moisture cured caulking sealant insulation, 16 kg per m3 to 32 kg per m3 density; injected from prepackaged pressurized containers for installation within closures and fillers; foam shall be CFC free.
2.3 .
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate aluminum windows in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate fabrication of windows of this section, with detention window frames specified in Section 11 19 60. Coordinate installation of curtain wall veneer attached to steel framing specified in Section 11 19 60. Face dimensions detailed are maximum permissible sizes. Fabricate system components with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Curtain wall type aluminum frames: curtain wall type aluminum extrusions to ASTM B221, mullion profile as indicated on drawings. .1 Fabricate frames with minimum clearances and shim spacing around perimeter of assembly, yet enabling installation and dynamic movement of perimeter seal. Accurately fit and secure joints and corners. Make joints flush, hairline, and weatherproof. Prepare components to receive anchor devices. Install anchors and fasteners. Arrange fasteners to ensure concealment from view. Units square and true with maximum tolerance of plus or minus 1.5 mm for units with a diagonal measurement of 1800 mm or less and plus or minus 3 mm for units with a diagonal measurement over 1800 mm.
.6
.7
.8
.9
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 13 2011-06-10
2.3 FABRICATION . (Cont'd)
.10
Prepare system components to receive operable vents. Reinforce framing members for external imposed loads. Form insulated aluminum panels to profiles indicated composed of 1.2 mm thick sheet aluminum faces laminated to 25 mm thick insulation. Extruded aluminum sills to profiles indicated. Form flashing to profiles indicated. Build in structural deflection allowance to prevent transfer of structural load to windows. Build thermal expansion allowance to withstand 85C temperature difference without stressing sealants.
.11
.12
.13
.14 .15
.16
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative. .2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. .3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with reviewed shop drawings, AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/ I.S.2/A440, AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1, CAN/CSA-A440.4 and manufacturer's written instructions.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 14 2011-06-10
.2
Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction tolerances and other irregularities. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to building structure. Clean weld surfaces; apply protective primer to field welds and adjacent surfaces. Align assembly plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances and align with adjacent work. Apply bituminous paint to aluminum in contact with concrete and masonry. Assess each component for appearance and colour and consider any variations when arranging components for assembly. Abrupt variations in appearance and colour will not be permitted. Do not bridge the thermal break between the interior and exterior sections of the frames with a metal which will destroy the thermal separation provided. Install aluminum curtain wall veneer framing to window type 2 attached to steel detention framing as detailed. Coordinate with Section 11 19 60. Securely anchor units in place with concealed fasteners. Around perimeter of windows, install a continuous anti rotational channel into rabbet to prevent rotation of pressure plate when tightened down, and to facilitate clamping in of air/vapour barrier membrane. Mechanically fasten in place at 300 mm o/c as indicated, after membrane has been installed and channel has been fitted into place. Coordinate with Section 07 25 00. Install all flashings and break shapes as detailed. Fix sills in place, level, with uniform wash to exterior. Install drip deflectors.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 15 2011-06-10
.13
Adjust opening sash and hardware to operate smoothly.
3.3
GLAZING
.1
Window: in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/ I.S.2/A440 and AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1 and Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units. Coordinate with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing as required.
.2
3.4
SITE TOLERANCES .1
Install Work to the following tolerances: .1 Do not exceed 3 mm in 3 metres of length deviation from true vertical and horizontal position in any member nor exceed 6 mm deviation in total run in any line. .2 Do not exceed 1.5 mm maximum offset from true alignment at joints between abutting members in line end to end. .3 Maximum sealant space between Aluminum Window and adjacent construction: 13 mm.
3.5
SEALING
.1 .2 .3
Clean and dry joints. Mask adjoining surfaces. Insert joint filler 9.5 mm below joint surface. Prime joints when recommended by sealant manufacturer. Apply sealant to manufacturer's instructions. Form smooth concave surface. Remove masking tape and sealant smears from adjacent surfaces.
.4
.5 .6 .7
3.6
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day.
ALUMINUM WINDOWS
Section 08 51 13 Page 16 2011-06-10
.2
Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at appropriate facility.
.3
3.7
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by window installation.
.2
END
SPECIAL FUNCTION HARDWARE
Section 08 70 05 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data: Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Hardware list: .1 Submit contract hardware list in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, finish and other pertinent information. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout submittals: Provide maintenance data, parts list, and manufacturer's instructions for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.2
Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.3
Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
Section 08 70 05 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Package items of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location. Storage and Protection: Store cabinet hardware in locked, clean and dry area.
.2
1.4 WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANAGEMENT
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of all corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic packaging material in appropriate on site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HARDWARE ITEMS
.1
Use one manufacturer's products only for all similar items.
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE
.1
Hinges: concealed, screw mounted, 110 degree opening. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Blum Clip and Inserta hinge, 75M355-180 and Mounting Plate 175H710-180, manufactured by Blum Canada Limited 905-670-7920 www.blum.com. .2 Hafele, 329.17.507 and Mounting Plate 329.66.602, manufactured by Hafele Canada Inc. 1-800-423-3531 www.hafele.com. .3 Salice C2P6A99 and Mounting Plate BAR3P09, manufactured by Salice America Inc. 1-800-222-9652 www.saliceamerica.com.
Section 08 70 05 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.2 CABINET HARDWARE (Cont'd)
.1
Hinges:(Cont'd) .1 Acceptable material:(Cont'd) .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Pulls: 100 mm, brushed chrome 'D' pulls. Locks (to all doors and drawers): cam locks, counter clockwise unlocking, 180 degree, 2 key pulls to be provided, 19 mm diameter. .1 Acceptable material: .1 High security cam locks, BEST cylinders, manufactured by Best Access Systems 289-290-7100 www.bestaccess.com. .2 No substitutions will be permitted. Hanging File Hardware: .1 Acceptable material: .1 Hafele 422.73.300 & 422.74.900, manufactured by Hafele Canada Inc. 1-800-423-3531 www.hafele.com. .2 Metafile AV1, manufactured by Richelieu 1-800-361-6000 www.richelieu.com. .3 Schenk 49101, 49000 & 49001, manufactured by Schenk Architectural Imports 1-403-279-7289 www.schenknet.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Drawer slides: side mounted, full extension, 400 mm long, 45 kg capacity per pair. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Accuride 3832A, manufactured by Accuride International 1-562-903-0200 www.accuride.com. .2 Repon 3032-16, manufactured by Repon www.repon.com. .3 KV 8405-16, manufactured by Knape and Vogt 1-800-253-1561 www.knapeandvogt.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Shelf Supports: recessed chrome full height standards complete with chrome clips.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
Section 08 70 05 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.3
FASTENINGS
.1
Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware.
.2
Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware.
.3
Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.
.4
Use security fasteners at all locations.
2.4
KEYING
.1
Padlocks and cabinet locks to be master keyed as directed. Submit keying schedule for approval.
.2
Provide keys in duplicate for every lock in this Contract.
.3
Provide three masterkeys for each MK or GMK group.
.4
Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders. Specified cylinders to be used. No substitutions are permitted.
.5
Section 08 70 05 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to project design requirements.
.2
Install key control cabinet and establish key control set-up.
3.3
ADJUSTING
.1
Adjust cabinet hardware for optimum, smooth operating condition.
.2
Lubricate hardware and other moving parts.
.3
Adjust cabinet door hardware to provide tight fit at contact points with frames.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt.
.2
Clean hardware with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner, and polish hardware in accordance with manufacture's instructions.
Section 08 70 05 Page 6 2011-06-10
.3
Remove protective material from hardware items where present.
.4
Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
END
FINISH HARDWARE - GENERAL
Section 08 71 11 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 08 11 13: Hollow metal door frames. Section 11 19 20: Detention hardware. Division 26 - Electrical: Electrical 120 VAC wiring for electric strikes, electric releases, electric locks and magnetic locks.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) / Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) .1 ANSI/BHMA A156.1-2006, American National Standard for Butts and Hinges. .2 ANSI/BHMA A156.2-2003, Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. .3 ANSI/BHMA A156.3-2008, Exit Devices. .4 ANSI/BHMA A156.4-2008, Door Controls Closers. .5 ANSI/BHMA A156.5-2001, Auxiliary Locks and Associated Products. .6 ANSI/BHMA A156.6-2010, Architectural Door Trim. .7 ANSI/BHMA A156.8-2005, Door Controls Overhead Stops and Holders. .8 ANSI/BHMA A156.15-2008, Release Devices - Closer Holder, Electromagnetic and Electromechanical. .9 ANSI/BHMA A156.16-2008, Auxiliary Hardware. .10 ANSI/BHMA A156.19-2007, Power Assist and Low Energy Power - Operated Doors. .11 ANSI/BHMA A156.21-2009, American National Standard for Thresholds. .12 ANSI/BHMA A156.22-05, American National Standard for Door Gasketing Systems. .13 ANSI/BHMA A156.31-2007, American National Standard for Electric Strikes and Frame Mounted Actuators. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): .1 ASM E283-04, Standard Test Method for Determining Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
.2
Section 08 71 11 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2
Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association (CSDFMA). .1 CSDFMA Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction): standard hardware location dimensions. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .2 NFPA 105-10, Standard for the Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies and Other Opening Protectives. .3 NFPA 252-08, Standard Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
.3
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number, brand name and number, finish and hardware package number. .3 After approval samples will be returned for incorporation in Work. Hardware List: .1 Submit contract hardware list prepared by Certified Architectural Hardware Consultant, and in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate specified hardware, including make, model, material, function, size, finish and other pertinent information. Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for door closers, locksets, door holders, electrified hardware and fire exit hardware for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. .2 Conduct briefing of maintenance staff regarding proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 08 71 11 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Regulatory Requirements: hardware for doors in fire separations and exit doors shall be certified by a Canadian Certification Organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada. Certificates: provide product manufacturer certificates certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements.
.2
.3
.1
For the Work of this Section 08 71 11, warranty periods shall be ten (10) years for door closers, and two (2) years for the remaining hardware.
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location. Storage and Protection: .1 Store finishing hardware in locked, clean and dry area.
.2
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse, recycling, composting and anaerobic digestion in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.2
.3
Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene plastic packaging material in appropriate
Section 08 71 11 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.7 WASTE DISPOSAL AND MANAGEMENT (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Supply two sets of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HARDWARE ITEMS
.1
Use one manufacturer's products only for all similar items.
2.2
DOOR HARDWARE
.1
Locks and latches: .1 Bored locks and latches: to ANSI A156.2. .2 All locks and latches to match Facility standards. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Best 93K Series, manufactured by Best Access Systems 289-290-7100 www.bestaccess.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. .3 All to be provided with 16D lever trim and rose. .4 Normal strikes: Box type. Lip projection not beyond jamb. .5 Cylinders: L/C core keyed into existing keying system as directed. .6 Finished to #626 (C26D). .7 Functions: .1 L1 = F01 Passage .2 L2 = F22 Privacy .3 L3 = F07 Storeroom .4 L4 = F04 Office .5 L5 = Classroom .6 L6 = F14 Storeroom, double cylinder .7 L7 = F18 Deadlock .8 L8 = F15 Hotel Bathroom .9 L9 = F13 Dormitory
Section 08 71 11 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.2 DOOR HARDWARE (Cont'd)
.2
Dual Axis Builders Hardware Key Cylinders BC: .1 Interchangeable, heavy security, six-pin tumbler mortise cylinder of dual axis design with independent secondary sidebar pin locking mechanism; meeting ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Security and UL 437 standard for drill and pick resistance. .2 Tumbler and sidebar assemblies: Stainless steel, hardened stainless steel or nickel silver alloy .3 Body: Brass alloy. .4 Cylinder size: Manufacturer's standard as required to accommodate installation. .5 Keys: Hardware manufacturer's standard, designed to fit dual-axis builders cylinders. .6 Acceptable materials: .1 BEST 1E72 + 1E74 , manufactured by Best Access Systems 289-290-7100 www.bestaccess.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. .7 Refer to Section 11 19 20 hardware groups for additional cylinder requirements. Electric Strikes: to ANSI/BHMA A156.31, Grade 1 standards with size, type, function and finishes to match those specified in the hardware groups. .1 All electric strikes to be UL, CUL rated for fire. All to be set as "Fail Secure". .2 Equip all strikes with dual monitoring wire in parallel format to report status of latchbolt and locking cam. .3 All strikes to be provided with Type 304 stainless steel housing faceplates. .4 Electric strike types: .1 ES1: E59311 Rim mounted strike for rim exit devices. .2 ES2: E59321 Mortise mounted strike for mortise locks or exit devices having no deadbolt. .3 ES3: E59381 Mortise mounted strike in inactive leaf of pair of doors for mortise locks or exit devices having no deadbolt. Butts and hinges: .1 Butts and hinges: to ANSI/BHMA A156.1, Grade 1, designated by letter A and numeral
.3
.4
Section 08 71 11 Page 6 2011-06-10
.4
Butts and hinges:(Cont'd) .1 Butts and hinges:(Cont'd) identifiers, followed by size and finish, listed in Hardware Schedule. .2 Provide all hinges with hospital tips, concealed bearings and non-removable stainless steel pins. .3 Hinges: .1 H1: A5112 Standard Weight .2 H2: A5111 Heavy Weight .3 H3: A8112 Standard Weight .4 H4: A8111 Heavy Weight Exit devices: to ANSI/BHMA A156.3, type and function as specified and scheduled, Grade 1, modern design, finished to 630. .1 Exit device types and accessories: .1 ED1: Type 1, Figure 4, Function 01, Rim Exit Only Alarm Device. .2 ED2: Type 3, Figure 4, Function 03, Mortise Night Latch Alarm Device, 24 VDC hardwired, c/w appropriate hardware power supply. .3 ED3: Type 3, Figure 6, Function 05, Mortise Locking Thumbpiece. .4 ED4: Type 3, Figure 6, Function 15, Mortise Non-Locking Thumbpiece. .5 ED5: Type 22, Locking removable mullion to suit locking devices. .6 ED6: Type 8, Figure 12, Function 12, Concealed V/R exit device with outside cylinder control. .7 ED7: Type 27, Self-latching auto flushbolts. .2 Provide delayed egress devices where scheduled, complete with power supplies PS to meet ULC and NBC requirements. .3 Provide labelled devices on rated openings. .4 Provide non-rated devices with cylinder dogging. .5 Provide keyed-function devices with cylinders to match other cylinders. Door Closers and Accessories: .1 Door controls (closers): to ANSI/BHMA A156.4, Grade 1, and UL10C and UBC for positive pressure fire tests. All closer bodies shall have adjustable spring power, for size ranges 1 through 6, designated by letter C and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule, finished to 652.
.5
.6
Section 08 71 11 Page 7 2011-06-10
.6
Door Closers and Accessories:(Cont'd) .2 All surface mounted closers fully reversible, non-handed. Bodies of heavy duty, one piece cast iron construction with full rack and pinion features. .3 All "IH" and "SH" series closers to be supplied with "Security Package" features including advanced backcheck, extra heavy duty arms/tracks and Torx-Plus (6 lobe) security fasteners. .4 Closer covers metal, finished to match arms as detailed in the hardware groups. .5 Refer to "BH" and "IH" hardware groups and Door Schedule remarks column for closer types, features and mounting instructions. .6 Closer types: .1 C1 = C02011 .2 C2 = C02021 .3 C3 = C02231 .4 C4 = C02211 .5 C5 = C02021 x PT4G .6 C6 = C02041 .7 C7 = C05031 (IH), concealed detention grade closers. .7 All door closers provided by one manufacturer. Door Controls: Overhead holders/stops to ANSI/BHMA A156.8, designated by letter C and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule, finished to 626 or 630. .1 Overhead holder types: .1 OH1: C01511, Overhead concealed holder, heavy duty. .2 OH2: C01541, Overhead concealed stop, heavy duty. .3 OH3: C02511, Overhead surface holder, heavy duty. .4 OH4: C02541, Overhead surface stop, heavy duty. Door Operators: .1 To ANSI/BHMA A156.19 standards with sizes, arms, functions and finishes to suit those specified in hardware group. .2 Operators to operate with 120 VAC power and be actuated at the door by means of push type wall or jamb switch as detailed. .3 Operator width from jamb to jamb of the frame. Finish in clear anodized aluminum, finish designation AA A31.
.7
.8
Section 08 71 11 Page 8 2011-06-10
.8
Door Operators:(Cont'd) .4 Wall actuator switches 152 mm diameter stainless steel units with Barrier Free symbol engraved. Exterior switches c/w gaskets. .5 Jamb actuator switches, where acceptable, sized to suit pressed steel and/or aluminum frame jambs with full contact moving plate, stainless steel with Barrier Free symbol engraved. .6 Provide units with an electronic interface package when used in conjunction with electronic locking products. .7 Door operator types: .1 AO1: Top jamb push side mounted. .2 AO2: Top jamb pull side mounted. Release Device: to ANSI/BHMA A156.15 standards with types, functions and finishes to suit those specified in hardware groups. .1 Provide with armature and magnet projection to suit. Integrate into Fire Alarm system. .2 Release types: .1 RD1: = C00011 (voltage as required). Architectural door trim: to ANSI/BHMA A156.6, designated by letter J and numeral identifiers as listed below, stainless steel Type 304. Where applied to labeled doors provide labeled products. .1 Door protection plates, KP: kick plate type J102, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel finished to 630. .2 Push plates, PP: type J301, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, B4E edges, size to suit door as scheduled, finished to 630. .3 Mop plates, MP: kick plate type J103, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, finished to 630. .4 Bumper plates, BP: kick plate type J101, 1.27 mm thick stainless steel, finished to 630. .5 Push/pull units: size, type and finishes to match those specified in hardware groups. Surface mounted, raised hand grasp design with drilled, countersunk holes in flanges for fasteners. .1 Material and finish: Cast bronze, satin chrome finish 626, or satin stainless steel 630.
.9
.10
Section 08 71 11 Page 9 2011-06-10
.10
Architectural door trim:(Cont'd) .5 Push/pull units:(Cont'd) .2 Exposed fastener heads shall be of finish matching hardware. .3 Door pulls and pushbars: .1 DP1: as specified in Section 11 19 20. .2 DP2: Type J401 x 610 mm long x 32 mm diameter, concealed mounting. .3 DP3: Type J407 x 305 mm long pull x 25 mm diameter. Backplate to be 394 mm high x 38 mm wide x 3 mm thick and drilled to accept pull bolts. .4 DP4: Type J501, horizontal push with concealed mounting bar, sized to suit door width x 32 mm diameter. Auxiliary hardware: to ANSI/BHMA A156.16, designated by letter L and numeral identifiers listed in Hardware Schedule and as listed below, finished as specified. .1 Door silencer, RS: push-in type to suit pressed steel frames with 3 mm thick contact pads of rubber or neoprene. .2 Head and Foot Bolt: .1 Manual operation only. Operate by special spanner type key. .2 Case to be malleable iron 137 mm high x 70 mm wide x 38 mm thick. .3 Coverplates 5 mm thick steel. .4 Bolt 25 mm diameter with standard 10 mm projection and 19 mm throw. .5 Fasteners, three 10 mm diameter flat head security screws. .6 Finish: steel primed for paint. .7 Bolt types: .1 HFB1: specified in Section 11 19 20. .2 HFB2: Flush bolts for BH and IH groups, Type L04251. .3 HFB3: Dustproof strike for BH and IH groups, Type L04021. .3 Door Stops: .1 Door stop types: .1 DS1: L52141, low dome floor stop. .2 DS2: L52161, high dome floor stop. .3 DS3: L52251, concealed mount, concave wall stop.
.11
Section 08 71 11 Page 10 2011-06-10
.11
Auxiliary hardware:(Cont'd) .3 Door Stops:(Cont'd) .4 DS4: L52011, wall mounted base stop. .4 Coat Hook: Security type with single pole hook that snaps down for safety if excessively loaded. Hook to be an integral part of backplate, approximately 100 x 100 x 20 mm, with hook projection of 30 mm. Attach to wall or door by means of Torx-Plus fasteners on face of coat hook.
.12
Thresholds: to ANSI/BHMA A156.21, 125 mm wide x full width of door opening x 6 mm high, minimum 3 mm thickness extruded aluminum mill finish, serrated surface. Furnish with stainless steel flathead Torx 6-lobe fasteners. .1 Threshold types: .1 TH1: J32190. .2 TH2: J32193. Weatherstripping: .1 Fire and Smoke performance: .1 Fire: Tested in accordance with UL 10B or NFPA 252; UL classified as gasketing material for use in fire doors. .2 Smoke: Meeting requirements of NFPA 105 when tested in accordance with UL 1784 or ASTM E283. .2 Head and jamb seal: to ANSI/BHMA A156.22 standards with size, type and finish to match those specified in hardware groups. .3 Self-adhering Gaskets: Pressure sensitive self-adhesive type silicone compression bulb gasketing; dark bronze or black colour. .4 Bulb Seal with Retainer: Silicone type seal insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for hardware mounting on top. .5 Brush Seal: Minimum 15 mm height nylon brush gasketing insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for mounting to door or frame. .6 Door bottom seal: Minimum 25 mm height nylon brush gasketing insert in extruded aluminum retainer housing designed for surface mounting to bottom edge face of door. .7 Finishes: clear anodized or mill finish.
.13
Section 08 71 11 Page 11 2011-06-10
.13
Weatherstripping:(Cont'd) .8 Weatherstrip and door sweep types: .1 WS1: R0Y154, smoke seal. .2 WS2: R3D165, head and jamb gasketing. .3 WS3: R3A435, door sweep with silicone bulb seal. .4 WS4: R3E326, concealed auto door bottom with silicone bulb seal.
2.3 MISCELLANEOUS HARDWARE
.1
Padlocks, PL: to ANSI/BHMA A156.5, Grade 1 Security and UL 437 standard for drill and pick resistance. Heavy duty, high security padlock with removable cylinder plug. .1 Body: Case hardened stainless steel. .2 Shackle: Minimum 11 mm diameter, rustproof, case hardened steel. .3 Cylinder plug: Removable six-pin tumbler type with independent secondary sidebar pin locking mechanism of same design as specified for dual-axis Builders Hardware cylinders. .4 Same manufacturer and keyway as supplied Builders Hardware cylinders.
2.4
NUMBER PLATE
.1
Provide each door with engraved lamacoid number plate 38 mm high x length to suit, engraved with door number shown on drawings. Letter height 25 mm. Secure number plate to access side of door, in top-most corner on latch side with Torx-Plus security screws, or as directed.
.2
2.4
FASTENINGS
.1
Use only fasteners provided by manufacturer. Failure to comply may void warranties and applicable licensed labels.
.2
Supply screws, bolts, expansion shields and other fastening devices required for satisfactory installation and operation of hardware.
Section 08 71 11 Page 12 2011-06-10
.3
Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware.
.4
Where pull is scheduled on one side of door and push plate on other side, supply fastening devices, and install so pull can be secured through door from reverse side. Install push plate to cover fasteners. Supply flush pulls with machine screws for attaching as specified above. Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass.
.5
2.6 KEYING SYSTEM
.1
Lay out keying system for the building in consultation with Departmental Representative. Keying system shall include keying alike, keying differently, keying in groups, master keying and grand-master keying locks as required. All non-mogul cylinders to be construction keyed for duration of project construction. Prepare and submit keying chart and related explanatory data to the Departmental Representative for approval. Do not commence lock work until written confirmation of keying arrangements is received from Departmental Representative. The Departmental Representative shall enter into a "Contract" with the dual-axis builders cylinder manufacturer. Said "Contract" shall be separate from the Contractor's scope of work. The "Contract" is for the sole purpose of establishing and maintaining the security of the keying system as it relates to this Facility for key and keyway control. It shall in no way involve or establish any monetary considerations for the Facility, Contractor or manufacturer. Supply following keys: .1 3 grand-master keys .2 3 master keys per group .3 2 change keys for each lock .4 10 construction keys
.4
.5
.6
Section 08 71 11 Page 13 2011-06-10
2.6 KEYING SYSTEM (Cont'd)
.7
Stamp keying code numbers on keys and cylinders. Provide construction cores. Provide all permanent cores and keys to Departmental Representative. Forward grand-master, master, change key and mogul cylinder key to Departmental Representative by registered mail or bonded courier with covering letter.
.8 .9
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
COORDINATION
.1
This Section supplier to install all hardware and doors for "BH" hardware groups specified herein. Co-ordinate installation with allied trades such as architectural woodwork, metal doors and frames, partition suppliers and installers. Supply cylinders for locks provided under other Sections.
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets. Furnish metal door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware. Furnish manufacturers' instructions for proper installation of each hardware component.
.2
.3
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Install hardware to standard hardware location dimensions in accordance with Canadian Metric Guide for Steel Doors and Frames (Modular Construction) prepared by Canadian Steel Door and Frame Manufacturers' Association.
Section 08 71 11 Page 14 2011-06-10
.2
Where door stop contacts door pulls, mount stop to strike bottom of pull. Install key control cabinet. Remove construction cores when directed by Departmental Representative; install permanent cores and check operation of locks.
.3 .4
3.4
ADJUSTING
.1
Provide services of competent mechanic to inspect installation of hardware furnished under this Section and to supervise all adjustments (by the trade responsible for fixing) which are necessary to leave hardware in perfect working order. Adjust door hardware, operators, closures and controls for optimum, smooth operating condition, safety and for weather tight closure. Lubricate hardware, operating equipment and other moving parts. Adjust door hardware to provide tight fit at contact points with frames.
.2
.3
.4
3.5
CLEANING
.1
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Clean hardware with damp rag and approved non-abrasive cleaner, and polish hardware in accordance with manufacture's instructions. Remove protective material from hardware items where present. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.2
.3
.4
3.6
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Keying System Setup and Cabinet: .1 Set up key control system with file key tags, duplicate key tags, numerical index,
Section 08 71 11 Page 15 2011-06-10
3.6 DEMONSTRATION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) alphabetical index and key change index, label shields, control book and key receipt cards. .2 Place file keys and duplicate keys in key cabinet on their respective hooks. .3 Lock key cabinet and turn over key to Departmental Representative. Maintenance Staff Briefing: .1 Brief maintenance staff regarding: .1 Proper care, cleaning, and general maintenance of projects complete hardware. .2 Description, use, handling, and storage of keys. .3 Use, application and storage of wrenches for door closers, locksets and fire exit hardware. Demonstrate operation, operating components, adjustment features, and lubrication requirements.
.2
.3
3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE GROUPS
.1
GROUP B1: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D .2 1 - lock set, L5 x C26D .3 1 - door stop, DS2 x C26D
.2
GROUP B2: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D .2 1 - lock set, L5 x C26D .3 1 - door stop, DS2 x C26D GROUP B3: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D .2 1 - lock set, L3 x C26D .3 1 - closer (concealed), C7, alum GROUP B4: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D .2 1 - lock set, L3 x C26D .3 1 - closer (concealed), C7, alum .3 1 - door stop, DS2 x C26D
.2
.2
Section 08 71 11 Page 16 2011-06-10
3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE GROUPS (Cont'd)
.2
GROUP B5: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x C26D .2 1 - privacy set, L2 x C26D .3 1 - door stop, DS4 x C26D GROUP B6: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D .2 1 - lock set, L3 x C26D .3 1 - closer (concealed), C7, alum .4 1- astragal, integral with door .5 2 - flush bolts L04251, top and bottom of door x C26D .3 1 - overhead door stop, OH3 x C26D GROUP B7: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x NRP x C26D .2 1 - lock set, L3 x C26D .3 1 - closer (concealed), C7, alum .3 1 - door stop, DS2 x C26D GROUP B8: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x C26D .2 1 - passage set, L1 x C26D .3 1 - closer (concealed), C7, alum .3 1 - door stop, DS2 x C26D GROUP B9: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x C26D .2 1 - passage set, L1 x C26D .3 1 - door stop, DS2 x C26D GROUP B10: .1 padlock, BE 21B 7 22 GROUP B11: .1 1 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x C26D .2 1 - passage set, L1 x C26D .3 1 - weatherstrip WS2 4 sides x C26D .3 1 - door stop, DS3 x C26D GROUP B12: .1 4 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x C26D .2 1 - passage set, L1 x C26D .3 2 - closer (surface), C1, alum .4 1 - astragal, 50 mm flat bar, 3250, alum .5 1 - coordinator .6 1 - constant latching flush bolt to engage when active door closes
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2
.2
Section 08 71 11 Page 17 2011-06-10
3.7 HARDWARE SCHEDULE GROUPS (Cont'd)
.2
GROUP B12:(Cont'd) .7 2 - magnetic hold open device, wall mounted (refer to Electrical Division 26 for hook up) GROUP B13: .1 1 -1/2 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x C26D .2 1 - passage set, L1 x C26D .3 1 - weatherstrip WS2, alum .4 1 - threshold, TH1 .5 1 - auto door bottom, WS4, alum .3 1 - door stop, DS3 x C26D GROUP B14: .1 1 pr - hinges, H3 114 x 101 x C26D .2 1 - passage set, L1 x C26D .3 1 - door stop, DS2 x C26D
.2
.2
END
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM C542-05, Standard Specification for Lock-Strip Gaskets. .2 ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber PropertyDurometer Hardness. .3 ASTM E330-02(2010), Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-12.1-M90, Tempered or Laminated Safety Glass. .2 CAN/CGSB-12.8-97, Insulating Glass Units. .3 CAN/CGSB-12.11-M90, Wired Safety Glass. Glass Association of North America (GANA). .1 GANA Glazing Manual (50th Anniversary Edition).
.2
.3
.1
Performance Requirements: .1 Provide continuity of building enclosure vapour and air barrier using glass and glazing materials as follow: .1 Utilize inner light of multiple light sealed units for continuity of air and vapour seal. .2 Size glass to withstand wind loads, dead loads and positive and negative live loads as measured in accordance with ASTM E330. .3 Limit glass deflection to 1/200 with full recovery of glazing materials.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets. Indicate VOC's: .1 For glazing materials during application and curing.
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2
Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm size samples of each type of glass and glass assembly, and sealant material. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Closeout submittals: Submit maintenance data for glazing materials to Departmental Representative in accordance with Sections 01 77 00 and 01 78 00.
.3
.4
.5
.1
Installers qualifications: Perform this Section by a company that has of five years proven experience in installation of glazing units of a size and nature.
Work of a minimum the similar
.2
Pre-installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Comply with Section 01 31 19.
1.5
SITE CONDITIONS .1
Environmental Requirements: .1 Install glazing when ambient temperature is 10C minimum. Maintain ventilated environment for 24 hours after application. .2 Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Divert uninstalled materials for reuse at nearest used building materials facility or similar type facility. Divert unused caulking and sealant materials from landfill through disposal at special wastes depot. Unused or damaged glazing materials are not recyclable and must not be diverted to municipal recycling programs. Remove form site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic, packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Safety glass (Glass Type A1): to CAN/CGSB-12.1, transparent or coloured as indicated for types specified, 6 mm thick, unless otherwise indicated. .1 Type 2-tempered. .2 Class B-float. .3 Category II. Safety glass (Glass Type A2): to CAN/CGSB 12.1, Tinted one-way mirrored, 6 mm thick. .1 Type 2-tempered. .2 Class B-float. .3 Category II. Wired glass (Glass Type B1): to CAN/CGSB-12.11, 6 mm thick. .1 Type 1-Polished both sides (transparent). .2 Wire mesh styles 3-Square. .3 Provide wired glass with security glass for door glazing as shown on Contract Drawings.
.2
.3
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
Security Glazing (Glass Type K1): 17.5 mm thick laminated unit, consisting of one lite of 3.16 mm chemically strengthened tempered glass, with 1.27 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite of 9.48 mm polycarbonate core, 1.27 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite 3.16 mm chemically strengthened tempered glass. Forced entry level 2, Ballistic Level A. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Product 2116, manufactured by Globe Amerada Architectural Glass 1-800-323-8776 www.globeamerada.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Security Glazing (Glass Type K2): 23.8 mm thick laminated unit, consisting of one lite of 3.16 mm chemically strengthened tempered glass, with 1.27 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite of 3.16 mm polycarbonate core, 0.64 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite of 6.4 mm polycarbonate core, 0.64 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite of 3.16 mm polycarbonate core, 1.27 mm polyurethane based interlayer, one lite 3.16 mm chemically strengthened tempered glass. Forced entry level 4, Ballistic Level A. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Product 2114, manufactured by Globe Amerada Architectural Glass 1-800-323-8776 www.globeamerada.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
.5
2.2 MATERIALS: SEALED INSULATING GLASS
.1
Insulating glass units: to CAN/CGSB-12.8, double unit, 25 mm overall thickness. .1 Glass: to CAN/CGSB-12.1. .2 Glass thickness: 6 mm each light, clear. .3 Inter-cavity space thickness: 13 mm, with low conductivity spacers. .4 Glass coating: surface number 2, low "E" magnetic sputtered vacuum deposition (MSVD) coating. .5 Inert gas fill: argon.
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.2 MATERIALS: SEALED INSULATING GLASS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .6 Performance characteristics: .1 Visible light transmission: 69%. .2 U-value winter: 0.29. .3 U-value summer: 0.29. .4 Solar heat gain: 0.37. .5 Shading coefficient: 0.44. .6 Outdoor visible light reflectance: 12%.
2.3
ACCESSORIES
.1
Setting blocks: neoprene, Shore "A" 80-90 durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, to suit glazing method, glass light weight and area, minimum 100 mm x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1.5 mm x height. Spacer shims: Neoprene, 50-60 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240, 75 mm long x one half height of glazing stop x thickness to suit application. Self adhesive on one face. Glazing tape: .1 Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device, 10-15 Shore A durometer hardness to ASTM D2240; coiled on release paper; black colour. .2 Closed cell polyvinyl chloride foam, coiled on release paper over adhesive on two sides, maximum water absorption by volume 2%, designed for compression of 25%, to effect an air and vapour seal. Glazing and rebate primers, sealants, sealers, and cleaners: Compatible with each other. Type as recommended by glass fabricator to suit intended application. Security sealant: In accordance with Section 07 90 00. Lock-strip gaskets: to ASTM C542, in accordance with Section 08 51 13.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.
3.2
EXAMINATION
.1
Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing.
.2
3.3
PREPARATION
.1
Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.
.2
.3
3.4 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR SECURITY DOORS
.1
Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. Use Security Sealant as specified in Section 07 90 00 complete with bond breaker to all interior glazing installations where sealant is exposed.
.2
.3
Cut glazing tape to length; install on glazing light. Seal corners by butting tape and sealing junctions with sealant. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners.
.4
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
3.4 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR SECURITY DOORS (Cont'd)
.5
Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against fixed stop with sufficient pressure to attain full contact. Apply continuous heal bead of sealant to maintain complete and continuous air barrier. Install removable stops without displacing glazing tape. Exert pressure for full continuous contact. Trim protruding tape edge.
.6
.7
.8
3.5 INSTALLATION: EXTERIOR ALUMINUM WINDOWS
.1
Perform work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. Lock strip gasket method: .1 Unpack and lay out gaskets on flat warm area to permit recovery of shape. .2 Install gaskets under compression from corners inward. Seal corner junctions between gaskets with sealant. .3 Drain infiltrated moisture to exterior through drain holes in sill. .4 Install locking strip and gasket assembly to manufacturer's instructions.
.2
3.6 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR -DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) TO HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS, DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES
.1
Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual and Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1.6 mm above sight line. Place setting blocks at 1/4 points, with edge block maximum 150 mm from corners. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of light or unit.
.2
.3
.4
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
3.6 INSTALLATION: INTERIOR -DRY METHOD (TAPE AND TAPE) TO HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND WINDOWS, DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES (Cont'd)
.5
Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. Knife trim protruding tape.
.6
.7
3.7 INSTALLATION; TELEPHONE SCREEN
.1
Coordinate with Section 05 50 01 for installation of security glazing at telephone screen. Edges of security glazing to form radius as shown on Contract Drawings.
.2
3.8
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day. .1 Remove traces of primer, caulking. .2 Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. .3 Remove labels. .4 Clean glass using approved non-abrasive cleaner in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11.
3.9 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. After installation, mark each light with an "X" by using removable plastic tape or paste. .1 Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by glazing installation.
.2
.3
GLAZING
Section 08 80 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
END
LOUVRES AND VENTS
Section 08 90 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) .1 AAMA 2605-05, Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels. Air Movement and Control Association International (AMCA) .1 AMCA 500-D-98, Laboratory Methods of Testing Dampers for Rating. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI H35.1/H35.1M-06, Alloy and Temper Designation Systems for Aluminum. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM B209-07, Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.213-2004, Etch Primer (Pretreatment Coating of Tie Coat) for Steel and Aluminum.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate fabrication and erection details, including anchorage, accessories, and finishes. Samples: .1 Submit duplicate samples of louvre and vent showing colour and finish.
.2
.3
.4
LOUVRES AND VENTS
Section 08 90 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Samples:(Cont'd) .2 Show frame detail, screening and finish. .3 Where colour is not indicated, submit manufacturer's standard colours to Departmental Representative for selection. Quality Assurance Submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
.5
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .3 Deliver materials to the site in undamaged condition. Storage and Protection: .1 Store materials off ground and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Protect louvres from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Weather resistant louvres, with bird screens, made to withstand a wind load of not less than 1.44 kilopascals. Ratings to indicate water penetration of 0.06 kilograms or less per square meter of free area at free velocity of 244 meters per minute.
.2
LOUVRES AND VENTS
Section 08 90 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.3
Aluminum sheet: to ASTM B209 andANSI H35.1/H35.1M, alloy 3003 with temper as required for forming, mill finish utility sheet. Aluminum extrusions: to ANSI H35.1/H35.1M, AA 6063-T5. Gaskets: vinyl. Fasteners: tamper resistant, same material as fabricated items. Primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.213 for aluminum surfaces. Screens: .1 Birdscreens: crimped aluminum wire cloth secured to 2 mm thick extruded aluminum frame mitered at corners and secured with corner locks. Mesh size: 13 mm at air exhaust, 19 mm at air intake. Extruded aluminum louvres: .1 Construct louvres from aluminum extrusions of minimum 3 mm thickness to sizes and shapes indicated. .2 Arrange blades, mullions and frame extrusions as indicated. .3 Install concealed vertical stiffeners spaced to meet required loads. .4 Complete louvre assembly to have 48 % free area.
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9
2.2
FINISHES
.1
Minimum 0.025 mm thick metallic polyvinylidene fluoride coating based on 70% fluoropolymer resin to AAMA 2605. Colour: To be selected by the Departmental Representative. Provide samples for the approval of the Departmental Representative.
LOUVRES AND VENTS
Section 08 90 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheets.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install louvres and vents where indicated. Set adjustable louvre blades for uniform alignment in open and closed positions. Adjust louvres so moving parts operate smoothly. Attach bird screen to inside face of louvre or vent. Repair damage to louvres and vents to match original finish.
.3
.4
.5
3.3
CLEANING
.1 .2
3.4
PROTECTION
.1
Where aluminum contacts metal other than zinc, paint dissimilar metal with primer and two coats of aluminum paint. Paint metal in contact with mortar, concrete, or other masonry materials with alkali-resistant coatings such as heavy-bodied bituminous paint.
.2
END
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
Section 09 21 16 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI A118.9-1992, Test Methods And Specification For Cementitious Backer Units. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvanealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM C473-10, Standard Test Methods for Physical Testing of Gypsum Panel Products. .3 ASTM C442/C442M-04e1, Specification for Gypsum Backing Board, Gypsum Coreboard, and Gypsum Shaftliner Board.(Withdrawn) .4 ASTM C475/C475M-02(2007), Standard Specification for Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. .5 ASTM C514-04(2009)e1, Standard Specification for Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. .6 ASTM C630/C630M-03e1, Specification for Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board.(Withdrawn). .7 ASTM C840-08, Standard Specification for Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. .8 ASTM C919-08, Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. .9 ASTM C920-08, Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants. .10 ASTM C1002-07, Standard Specification for Steel Self-Piercing Tapping Screws for the Application of Gypsum Panel Products or Metal Plaster Bases to Wood Studs or Steel Studs. .11 ASTM C1047-10, Standard Specification for Accessories for Gypsum Wallboard and Gypsum Veneer Base. .12 ASTM C1177/C1177M-08, Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing. .13 ASTM C1278-07a, Specification for Fiber-Reinforced Gypsum Panel. .14 ASTM C1288-99(2004)e1, Standard Specification for Discrete Non-Asbestos Fiber-Cement Interior Substrate Sheets. .15 ASTM C1325-08b, Standard Specification for Non-Asbestos Fiber-Mat Reinforced Cementitious Backer Units.
.2
Section 09 21 16 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .16 ASTM C1396/C1396M-09a, Standard Specification for Gypsum Board. .17 ASTM D2394-05e1, Standard Test Methods for Simulated Service Testing of Wood and Wood-Base Finish Flooring. .18 ASTM D3273-00(2005), Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold on the Surface of Interior Coatings in an Environmental Chamber. .19 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements. .20 ASTM F1267-07, Standard Specification for Metal, Expanded, Steel. Association of the Wall and Ceilings Industries International (AWEI) Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-71.25-M88, Adhesive, for Bonding Drywall to Wood Framing and Metal Studs. Environmental Choice Program (ECP): .1 ECP/PCE-50-93, Gypsum Wallboard.
.3
.4
.5
.1
Partition assembly to be non-combustible construction. Minimum sound transmission rating of installed panel partition to desired STC rating and tested to ASTM E90. Design ceiling suspension system in accordance with manufacturer's printed directions and ASTM C754. Design ceiling system for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the current bulletin of the Electrical Safety Authority. Design hanger anchor and entire suspension system static loading not to exceed 25% of their ultimate capacity including lighting fixture dead loads. Design suspension system to support weight of mechanical and electrical items such as air
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 09 21 16 Page 3 2011-06-10
.6
(Cont'd) handling boots and lighting fixtures, and with adequate support to allow rotation/relocation of light fixtures. Design subframing as necessary to accommodate, and to circumvent, conflicts and interferences where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers. Design of wall assemblies with a height greater than 3000 mm incorporating non-standard gypsum board assemblies including, but not limited to, assemblies incorporating abuse resistant gypsum board and cement board. Design penetration resistance security partitions using security resistance welded to heavier gauge stud to suit design requirements and as indicated on Drawings. Design metal stud reinforcements from hollow structural steel, stud, angle and steel plate sections, galvanized sheet steel minimum 1.2 mm where required to support of manufactured components without limitations items such as washroom accessories, expansion control covers and similar items. Design weld connections ensuring rigid and secure installation capable of offering resistance to minimum 227 kg (500 lbs) pull force. Consider galvanized items in moist areas. Do not design using wood blocking for this purpose.
.7
.8
.9
.10
1.3
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit 300 mm long samples of corner and casing beads.
.2
.1
Retain a Professional Engineer, licensed in Province of Ontario, with experience in Work of comparable complexity and scope, to perform following services as part of Work of this Section: .1 Design of wall systems with height greater than 3000 mm and at non-standard
Section 09 21 16 Page 4 2011-06-10
.1
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) gypsum board assemblies including, but not limited to, assemblies incorporating abuse resistant gypsum board and cement board. .2 Design of suspended gypsum board assemblies. .3 Review, stamp, and sign shop drawings and design calculations. .4 Conduct shop and on-site inspections, prepare and submit written inspection reports verifying that this part of Work is in accordance with Contract Documents and reviewed shop drawings. Applicator Qualifications: Provide work of this Section executed by competent installers with minimum of 5 years experience in application of Products, systems and assemblies specified.
.2
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store gypsum board assemblies materials level in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect gypsum board assemblies from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Protect from weather, elements and damage from construction operations. .4 Handle gypsum boards to prevent damage to edges, ends or surfaces. .5 Protect prefinished aluminum surfaces with strippable coating. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings which bond when exposed to sunlight or weather. .6 Replace defective or damaged materials with new.
.2
.3
Section 09 21 16 Page 5 2011-06-10
.4
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials as specified in in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
1.6 SITE ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Maintain temperature minimum 10C, maximum 21C for 48 hours prior to and during application of gypsum boards and joint treatment, and for at least 48 hours after completion of joint treatment. Apply board and joint treatment to dry, frost free surfaces. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces as required to remove excess moisture that would prevent drying of joint treatment material immediately after its application.
.2
.3
.1
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused gypsum from landfill to gypsum recycling facility for disposal approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused wood materials from landfill to recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused paint and caulking material from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused paint and caulking materials into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in other locations
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 09 21 16 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.7 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.7
(Cont'd) where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Standard board: to ASTM C1396/C1396M, regular, 15.9 mm thick and Type X, 15.9 mm thick, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length, ends square cut, edges squared. Glass-Mat Exterior Sheathing: .1 Conforming to ASTM C1177/ASTM C1177M, 15.9 mm thick, non-paper-faced gypsum sheathing panels. Long Edges: Square. .2 Mold resistance: Conforming to ASTM D3273, score of 10. .3 Sheathing screws: to ASTM C1002, Type S, corrosion resistant, 12.7 mm penetration into steel, complete with 38 mm diameter washers. Backing board and coreboard: to ASTM C442/C442M regular, 15.9 mm thick, squared edges. Water-resistant board: to ASTM C630/C630M regular, 15.9 mm thick, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length. Abuse-resistant fibre-reinforced gypsum wallboard: to ASTM C1278, 13 mm and 16 mm thick, 1220 x 2440 mm or 1220 x 3658 mm, edges tapered, CCMC 12525-R, fibreglass reinforcing mesh backing, bearing Ecologo to ECP/PCE-50. .1 Acceptablle materials: .1 Sheetrock Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Panels, manufactured by CGC Inc. 905-803-5600 www.cgcinc.com. .2 FiberBond VHI Wallboard, manufactured by Louisiana-Pacific Corporation 1-888-820-0325 fax 1-877-523-7192 www.lpcorp.com. .3 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Cement board: cementitious concrete core of expanded shale aggregate, water durable, board; surfaced with fiberglass reinforcing
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 09 21 16 Page 7 2011-06-10
.6
Cement board:(Cont'd) mesh on front and back; long edges wrapped; to ANSI A118.9, ASTM C1288 and ASTM C1325, 13 mm thick, edges tapered, 1200 mm wide x maximum practical length. Water absorption: Not greater than 8 percent when tested for 24 hours in accordance with ASTM C473. Steel framing: ASTM C754; ASTM A653/A653-M, Z275; cold rolled, galvanized steel sheet. Steel studs and track runners: ASTM C645; Galvanized steel studs and runners, 32 mm wide x depth as indicated on Contract Drawings. Formed from galvanized steel sheet, thicknesses as follows: .1 Less than 3000 mm: Minimum 0.53 mm (25 ga.). .2 Greater than 3000 mm and non-standard assemblies: Minimum 0.91 mm (20 ga.). .3 Provide heavier gauges where required due to height or maximum security walls and partitions. Heavy Duty Double Studs at Openings and Unrestrained Height in maximum security walls and partitions: ASTM C645, Galvanized sheet steel, minimum 1.519 mm (designation thickness 54mils/minimum base steel thickness 1.367 mm (12 ga) thickness, zinc coating Z275, screw able with crimped web and returned flange, of depth shown in maximum continuous lengths practicable. Provide heavier gauges where unrestrained height exceeds 3600 mm. For studs supporting Security Mesh Sheet: ASTM C645, Galvanized sheet steel, minimum 1.214 mm (designation thickness 43mils/minimum base steel thickness 1.087 mm (18 ga) thickness, zinc coating Z275, screw able with crimped web and returned flange, of depth shown in max. continuous lengths practicable. Provide heavier gauges where required due to height. Provide 1.214 mm (designation thickness 43mils/minimum base steel thickness 1.087 mm (18 ga) at partitions to receive security mesh for resistance against penetrations at partitions shown on Drawings. Concealed Sheet Steel Reinforcing: Commercial quality cold rolled galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A653M with zinc coating designation of
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
Section 09 21 16 Page 8 2011-06-10
.11
Concealed Sheet Steel Reinforcing:(Cont'd) ASTM A653M, Z275 in minimum thickness of 0.912 mm (designation thickness 33mils/minimum base steel thickness 0.836 mm (18 ga) ; or ASTM A666, Type 304 sheet stainless steel. Metal furring runners, hangers, tie wires, inserts, anchors: to ASTM C645. Drywall furring channels: 0.5 mm core thickness galvanized steel channels for screw attachment of gypsum board. Resilient clips: 0.5 mm base steel thickness galvanized steel for resilient attachment of gypsum board. Nails (at wood studs): to ASTM C514. Steel drill screws: to ASTM C1002. Stud adhesive: to CAN/CGSB-71.25. Laminating compound: as recommended by manufacturer, asbestos-free. Casing beads, corner beads, control joints and edge trim: to ASTM C1047, zinc-coated by hot-dip process, 0.5 mm base thickness, perforated flanges, one piece length per location. Sealants: in accordance with Section 07 90 00. Acoustical sealant: one part silicone to ASTM C919 and ASTM C920, primerless, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, SWRI validated, Ecologo certified, maximum VOC 60 g/L. Acoustic insulation: in accordance with Section 07 20 00. Polyethylene: to CAN/CGSB-51.34, Type 2. Insulating strip: rubberized, moisture resistant, 3 mm thick closed cell neoprene strip, 12 mm wide, with self sticking permanent adhesive on one face, lengths as required.
.12
.13
.14
.15 .16 .17 .18
.19
.20
.21
.22
.23 .24
Section 09 21 16 Page 9 2011-06-10
.25
Joint compound: to ASTM C475/C475M, asbestos-free. Primer: Where indicated by board manufacturer, provide primer as required to achieve finishes as defined in ASTM C840. Fasteners for cement board: galvanized or coated streaker type screw, 31.25 mm long. Latex Fortified Mortar for cement board: Of type recommended by cementitious board manufacturer to suit application. Joint reinforcing tape: .1 Standard gypsum board: ASTM C475; 50 mm wide x 0.25 mm thick, perforated paper, with chamfered edges. .2 Moisture resistant and tile backer boards: ASTM C475; fibreglass mat joint tape as recommended by board manufacturer to suit location. .3 Cement Board: Mesh reinforcing tape recommended by cement board manufacturer. Mesh: 3.25 mm thick (10 gauge), galvanized, flattened, expanded steel diamond mesh, diamond size 25 x 50 mm, to ASTM F1267. Non-removable, tamper resistant, pan head, screws. Steel: minimum 25% recycled content. Strap: 1.897 mm thick x 100 mm wide galvanized steel strap. Steel: minimum 25% recycled content.
.26
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
STC RATINGS
.1
STC rating as indicated. Ensure continuity of STC throughout assembly.
3.2
ERECTION
.1
Do application and finishing of gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise. Erect hangers and runner channels for suspended gypsum board ceilings in accordance
.2
Section 09 21 16 Page 10 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) with ASTM C840 except where specified otherwise. Support light fixtures by providing additional ceiling suspension hangers within 150 mm of each corner and at maximum 600 mm around perimeter of fixture. Install work level to tolerance of 1:1200. Frame with furring channels, perimeter of openings for access panels, light fixtures, diffusers, and grilles. Install 19 x 64 mm furring channels parallel to, and at exact locations of steel stud partition header track. Furr for gypsum board faced vertical bulkheads within and at termination of ceilings. Furr above suspended ceilings for gypsum board fire and sound stops and to form plenum areas as indicated. Install wall furring for gypsum board wall finishes in accordance with ASTM C840, except where specified otherwise. Furr openings and around built-in equipment, cabinets, access panels, on four sides. Extend furring into reveals. Check clearances with equipment suppliers. Furr duct shafts, beams, columns, pipes and exposed services where indicated. Erect drywall resilient furring transversely across studs, spaced maximum 600 mm on centre and not more than 150 mm from ceiling/wall juncture. Secure to each support with 25 mm drywall screw, unless otherwise indicated. Install 150 mm continuous strip of 12.7 mm gypsum board along base of partitions where resilient furring installed. Concealed Metal Stud Reinforcements in Partitions: Provide hollow structural steel, stud, angle and steel plate sections,
.3
.4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
Section 09 21 16 Page 11 2011-06-10
.14
(Cont'd) galvanized sheet steel minimum 1.214 mm (designation thichness 43mils/minimum base steel thickness 1.087 mm (18 ga) where required to support manufactured components. Weld connections. Ensure rigid and secure installation capable of offering resistance to minimum 227 kg (500 lbs) pull force. Galvanize stud reinforcements in moist areas. Do not use wood blocking for this purpose. Provide additional reinforcing framing studs or furring channels secured between studs for attachment and support without limitations following: .1 Washroom accessories. .2 Fire hose cabinets. .3 Access panels. .4 Architectural woodwork. .5 Miscellaneous specialties. .6 Fitments and fixtures. .7 Equipment. Concealed Sheet Steel Reinforcing in Partitions: Commercial quality cold rolled galvanized sheet steel to ASTM A653M with zinc coating designation of ASTM A653M, Z275 in minimum thickness of 0.912 mm (designation thickness 33mils/minimum base steel thickness 0.836 mm (20 ga). Must be specially treated by phosphate conversion process if steel is to be exposed and finish painted. Provide steel sheet panel for resistance to penetration in gypsum board partitions where scheduled on Drawings. Provide security mesh at penetration resistance partitions where indicated. Weld mesh to (designation thichness43mils/minimum base steel thickness 1.087 mm (18 ga) steel studs and tracks with 3 mm x 13 mm (1/8" x 1/2") weld at 200 mm (8") o.c. Edge welds shall be within 50 mm (2").
.15
.16
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Do not apply gypsum board until bucks, anchors, blocking, sound attenuation, electrical and mechanical work are approved.
Section 09 21 16 Page 12 2011-06-10
.2
Apply single layer gypsum board to metal furring or framing using screw fasteners. Where double layers of gypsum board are shown, and required for fire rating, screw first layer to studs and furring and laminate the second layer to the first using stud adhesive. Maximum spacing of screws 300 mm on centre. .1 Single-Layer Application: .1 Apply gypsum board on ceilings prior to application of walls in accordance with ASTM C840. .2 Apply gypsum board vertically or horizontally, providing sheet lengths that will minimize end joints. .2 Double-Layer Application: .1 Install gypsum board for base layer and exposed gypsum board for face layer. .2 Apply base layer to ceilings prior to base layer application on walls; apply face layers in same sequence. Offset joints between layers at least 250 mm. .3 Apply base layers at right angles to supports unless otherwise indicated. .4 Apply base layer on walls and face layers vertically with joints of base layer over supports and face layer joints offset at least 250 mm with base layer joints. Apply single layer gypsum board to concrete block surfaces, where indicated, using laminating adhesive. .1 Comply with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Brace or fasten gypsum board until fastening adhesive has set. .3 Mechanically fasten gypsum board at top and bottom of each sheet. Apply water-resistant gypsum board where wall tiles to be applied and adjacent to slop sinks in janitors closets. Apply water-resistant sealant to edges, ends, cut-outs which expose gypsum core and to fastener heads. Do not apply joint treatment on areas to receive tile finish. Apply 12 mm diameter bead of acoustic sealant continuously around periphery of each face of partitioning to seal gypsum board/structure junction where partitions abut fixed building components. Seal full perimeter of cut-outs
.3
.4
.5
Section 09 21 16 Page 13 2011-06-10
.5
(Cont'd) around electrical boxes, ducts, in partitions where perimeter sealed with acoustic sealant. Install ceiling boards in direction that will minimize number of end-butt joints. Stagger end joints at least 250 mm. Install gypsum board on walls vertically to avoid end-butt joints. At stairwells and similar high walls, install boards horizontally with end joints staggered over studs, except where local codes or fire-rated assemblies require vertical application. Install gypsum board with face side out. Do not install damaged or damp boards. Locate edge or end joints over supports. Stagger vertical joints over different studs on opposite sides of wall.
.6
.7
.8 .9 .10
3.4
INSTALLATION
.1
Erect accessories straight, plumb or level, rigid and at proper plane. Use full length pieces where practical. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Mitre and fit corners accurately, free from rough edges. Secure at 150 mm on centre. Install casing beads around perimeter of suspended ceilings. Install casing beads where gypsum board butts against surfaces having no trim concealing junction and where indicated. Seal joints with sealant. Install insulating strips continuously at edges of gypsum board and casing beads abutting metal window and exterior door frames, to provide thermal break. Construct control joints of two back-to-back casing beads set in gypsum board facing and supported independently on both sides of joint. Provide continuous polyethylene dust barrier behind and across control joints.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 09 21 16 Page 14 2011-06-10
.7
Locate control joints where indicated and at changes in substrate construction. Install control joints straight and true. Construct expansion joints as detailed, at building expansion and construction joints. Provide continuous dust barrier. Install expansion joint straight and true. Splice corners and intersections together and secure to each member with 3 screws. Install access doors to electrical and mechanical fixtures specified in respective sections. .1 Rigidly secure frames to furring or framing systems. Finish face panel joints and internal angles with joint system consisting of joint compound, joint tape and taping compound installed according to manufacturer's directions and feathered out onto panel faces. Gypsum Board Finish: finish gypsum board walls and ceilings to following levels in accordance with Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries (AWCI) International Recommended Specification on Levels of Gypsum Board Finish: .1 Levels of finish: .1 Level 0: No tapping, finishing or accessories required. for use at temporary construction. .2 Level 1: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound. Surfaces to be free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable. For use in plenum areas above ceilings, in attics or in areas where the assembly would generally be concealed. .3 Level 2: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply one separate coat of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces free of excess joint compound; tool marks and ridges are acceptable. For use at locations where water resistant gypsum backer board is used as a substrate for tile.
.8 .9
.10 .11
.12
.13
.14
Section 09 21 16 Page 15 2011-06-10
.14
Gypsum Board Finish:(Cont'd) .1 Levels of finish:(Cont'd) .4 Level 4: Embed tape for joints and interior angles in joint compound and apply three separate coats of joint compound over joints, angles, fastener heads and accessories; surfaces smooth and free of tool marks and ridges. Typical locations. Exterior gypsum sheathing board: .1 Install exterior gypsum sheathing materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Install sheathing with long dimension perpendicular to metal studs, offset joints and butt tight, centre edges of sheathing over metal studs, mechanically fasten with specified fasteners and washers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cement board: .1 Apply cementitious board to framing, with screw fasteners and taped joints in accordance with manufacturers instructions. .2 Pre-cut board to required sizes and make necessary cutouts. Fit ends and edges closely but not forced together. .3 Fasten board to steel framing with rust proof self-drilling, self-threading case hardened screws at 200 mm oc for walls and 150 mm oc for suspended applications. .4 Apply mesh tape centred over all joints and corners but not overlapped. .5 Apply 3 mm minimum thick skim coat of latex fortified mortar uniformly over entire cementitious board surfaces. Leave surface smooth and flat to receive subsequent finish.
.15
.16
.17
Finish corner beads, control joints and trim as required with two coats of joint compound and one coat of taping compound, feathered out onto panel faces. Fill screw head depressions with joint and taping compounds to bring flush with adjacent surface of gypsum board so as to be invisible after surface finish is completed.
.18
Section 09 21 16 Page 16 2011-06-10
.19
Sand lightly to remove burred edges and other imperfections. Avoid sanding adjacent surface of board. Completed installation to be smooth, level or plumb, free from waves and other defects and ready for surface finish. Mix joint compound slightly thinner than for joint taping. Apply thin coat to entire surface using trowel or drywall broadknife to fill surface texture differences, variations or tool marks. Remove ridges by light sanding or wiping with damp cloth. Provide protection that ensures gypsum drywall work will remain without damage or deterioration at time of substantial completion.
.20
.21
.22
.23
.24
END
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM C635-07, Specification for the Manufacture, Performance, and Testing of Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings. .2 ASTM C636-08, Standard Practice for Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-In Panels. .3 ASTM E1264-08e1, Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products.
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC): .1 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
.3
.1
Design ceiling suspension systems in accordance with ASTM C636 and manufacturer's printed directions. Design tile ceiling system for adequate support of electrical fixtures as required by the current bulletin of the Electrical Safety Authority. Acoustic panel system is not designed to carry the weight of electrical equipment. Design hanger anchor and entire suspension system static loading not to exceed 25% of their ultimate capacity including lighting fixture dead loads. Design tile suspension system to support weight of mechanical and electrical items such as air handling boots and lighting fixtures, and with adequate support to allow rotation/relocation of light fixtures. Acoustic panel system is not designed to carry
.2
.3
.4
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
(Cont'd) the weight of mechanical and electrical equipment. Design subframing as necessary to accommodate, to avoid conflicts and interferences where ducts or equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers.
.5
.1
Submit submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's instructions, printed product literature and data sheets for acoustical suspension and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Submit reflected ceiling plans for special grid patterns as indicated. .3 Indicate lay-out, insert and hanger spacing and fastening details, access door dimensions, and locations and acoustical unit support at ceiling fixture. Samples: .1 Submit for review and acceptance of each unit. .2 Samples will be returned for inclusion into work. .3 Submit one representative model of ceiling suspension system. .4 Ceiling system to show basic construction and assembly, treatment at walls, recessed fixtures, splicing, interlocking, finishes, acoustical unit installation. Certificates: Submit certificate stating that suspended ceiling systems provide adequate support for electrical fixtures, as required by current bulletin of Electrical Inspection Department of Ontario Hydro.
.2
.3
.4
.5
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
.6
Closeout submittals: .1 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .2 Operation and Maintenance Data: submit operation and maintenance data for acoustical suspension for incorporation into manual.
1.4
MOCK-UP
.1
Certifications: submit product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Mock-up: .1 Construct mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .2 Construct mock-up 4 m2 minimum of each type of acoustical tile ceiling including one inside corner and one outside corner. .3 Construct mock-up where directed. .4 Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with ceiling work. .5 When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. Mock-up may remain as part of the finished work.
.2
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials in dry location and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect acoustical ceiling tiles and tracks from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, padding and
.2
.3
.4
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
Packaging Waste Management:(Cont'd) packaging materials as specified in in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.2
.1
Permit wet work to dry before commencement of installation. Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15C and humidity of 20 - 40% before and during installation. Store materials in work area 48 hours prior to installation.
.2
.3
1.8
EXTRA MATERIALS .1
Provide extra materials of acoustic units in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide acoustical units amounting to 2% of gross ceiling area for each pattern and type required for project. Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials. Clearly identify each type of acoustic unit, including colour and texture. Deliver to Departmental Representative, upon completion of the work of this section. Store where directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1 .2
Heavy duty system to ASTM C635/C635M. Acoustic units (ACT1): to CAN/CGSB-92.1. .1 Pattern: non directional fissured. .2 Flame spread classification: 25 or less. .3 Size: 610 mm x 1220 mm. .4 Thickness: 16 mm. .5 Edges: square edges for regular T bar grid installation. .6 Colour: white. .7 NRC: 0.55. .8 Light Reflectance: 0.80 minimum. .9 CAC: 35. Suspension system: non-fire rated, two directional exposed tee bar grid, including wall moulding. Exposed tee bar grid components: cold rolled steel, zinc coated, shop painted, satin sheen, white, interlocking, main and cross tee of double web with rectangular bulb, depth governed by span, 25 mm exposed face. Hangers: 3.6 mm galvanized soft annealed steel wire. Accessories: splices, clips, wire ties, retainers and wall moulding, to complement suspension system components, as recommended by system manufacturer. Hold down clips: Purpose made clips to secure tile to suspension system for use with specified grid. Type as recommended by the manufacturer. Adhesive and fasteners: Types as recommended by acoustic panel manufacturer for adhering and fastening of panels to gypsum board susbtrate where required. Coordinate with Section 09 21 16 as required for installation.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 6 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify conditions of substrates previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for acoustical ceiling tile and track installation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .1 Visually inspect substrate in presence of Departmental Representative. .2 Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. .3 Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval to proceed from Departmental Representative.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets. Install in accordance with ASTM C636/C636M except where specified otherwise. Install suspension system to manufacturer's instructions and Certification Organizations tested design requirements. Ensure suspension system is co-ordinated with location of related components. Do not erect ceiling suspension system until work above ceiling has been inspected and approved by Departmental Representative. Support suspension system main runners at 1200 mm oc maximum with hangers from structure. Assembly shall support superimposed loads. Maximum permissible deflection, 1/360th of span to ASTM C635/C635M deflection test. Attach cross member to main runner to provide rigid assembly.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 7 2011-06-10
.8
Install acoustical tiles in ceiling suspension system. Cut acoustic units to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tight, terminate edges with moulding. Secure each panel into grid opening with concealed hold down clips. Coordinate with Section 09 21 16 as required for installation of acoustic panels onto gypsum board susbtrate. Install flush edge moulding at junction of acoustic unit ceiling and other materials around entire length of joint.
.9
.10
.11
.12
3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK
.1
Co-ordinate ceiling work to accommodate components of other sections, such as light fixtures, diffusers, speakers, sprinkler heads, to be built into acoustical ceiling components.
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day. Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Touch up scratches, abrasions, voids and other defects in painted surfaces. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at appropriate facility.
.2
.3
3.5
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by acoustical suspension installation.
.2
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
Section 09 51 13 Page 8 2011-06-10
END
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM F1066-04(2010)e1, Vinyl Composition Floor Tile. .2 ASTM F1516-08, Standard Practice for Sealing Seams of Resilient Floor Products by the Heat Weld Method. .3 ASTM F1861-08, Standard Specification for Resilient Wall Base. .4 ASTM F2034-08, Standard Specification for Sheet Linoleum Floor Covering.
.2
Environmental Choice Program (ECP): .1 ECP/PCE-44-92, Adhesives. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC): .1 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.
.3
1.2
WHMIS
.1
Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets acceptable to Labour Canada and Health Canada for primer, cement and adhesive. Indicate VOC content. Submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
.2
1.3 MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide maintenance data for resilient flooring for incorporation into operation and maintenance manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.4
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit submittals in accordance with 01 33 00. Submit copy of flooring manufacturer's installation procedures in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
.2
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.3
Samples: Submit duplicate 300 x 300 mm sample pieces of sheet material, 300 mm long base and treads. Submit copy of installer's certificate of competence granted by the linoleum manufacturer in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Submit letter stating that the moisture content of concrete slab and the ph of the surface is within manufacturer's written guidelines for proposed flooring system. Do not proceed with flooring installation if the concrete slab moisture content is over 3.0 lbs/1000 S.F for vinyl. Contact the manufacturer's representative and inform the Departmental Representative immediately.
.4
.5
.6
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.1
Maintain air temperature and structural base temperature at flooring installation area above 20 degrees C for 48 hours before, during and for 48 hours after installation.
.1
Provide extra 5% of each colour, pattern and type of flooring material and resilient base of matching colour for each profile in addition to the resilient base required to complete the present installation. Deliver to job site in boxes clearly marked with information on contents and include address and date of installation. Unload and store within building where directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Provide adhesive products bearing the 'Ecologo' of the Environmental Choice Program, Department of the Environment, Canadian Environmental Protection Act, Environmental Choice Product Guidelines ECP/PCE-44-92 for Adhesives. Submit one copy of the licensing criteria statements and the verification of compliance with Sections 3(a) and 3(b) of the ECP to the Departmental Representative.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Vinyl composition tile (VCT): to ASTM F1066, Class 2 through pattern tile, asbestos free, 305 x 305 x 3.0 mm. Colours: As shown on Contract Drawings. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Excelon Vinyl Composite Tile, manufactured by Armstrong World Industries Canada Ltd. 1-800-ARMSTRONG (1-800-276787664)www.armstrong.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Linoleum (L): 2.5 mm to ASTM F2034, Type 1. .1 Flame spread: 121 to CAN/ULC-S102. .2 Smoke developed: 40 to CAN/ULC-S102. .3 Wear resistance: loss of thickness less than 0.005 mm after 100 cycles with Taber Abraser using H22 wheels and a load of 1 kg. .4 Fading: when tested to DIN 53389 minimum lightfastness of 6 on the Blue Scale. .5 Rolling load: no damage loading 3 wheels with 30 kg per wheel at 25,000 cycles. .6 Impact sound reduction: when tested to ISO 717/2, improvement between 6-12 dB, depending on thickness. .7 Colour: As shown on Contract Drawings. .8 Acceptable material: .1 Marmoleum Real, manufactured by Forbo Flooring 416-661-2351 www.forbo-flooring.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
.2
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.3
Resilient stair tread and riser (RT): 5 mm thick rubber stair/riser with hammered surface. .1 Colour: As shown on Contract Drawings. .2 Acceptable material: .1 Stairtreads, manufactured by Nora Rubber Flooring 1-800-332-NORA (1-800-332-6672) www.nora.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Rubber flooring (RF): 3 mm thick, PVC and asbestos free, homogeneous rubber flooring with a smooth surface, fabricated from natural fillers and environmentally compatible colour pigments. .1 Colour: As shown on Contract Drawings. .2 Acceptable material: .1 Environcare, manufactured by Nora Rubber Flooring 1-800-332-NORA (1-800-332-6672) www.nora.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Resilient base (RCB1): .1 to ASTM F1861, Type I Rubber Base, continuous, top set, complete with premoulded end stops and external corners. .2 Style: straight and cove. .3 Thickness: 3 mm. .4 Height: 100 mm. .5 Lengths: cut lengths minimum 2400 mm. .6 Colour: As shown on Contract Drawings. .7 Acceptable material: .1 Traditional Wall Base, manufactured by Johnsonite Flooring 1-800-661-2162 www.johnsonite.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Welding rod: type recommended by flooring manufacturer to complement flooring. Primer, cement, and adhesive: type recommended by flooring and base manufacturer to suit substrate and installation, Ecologo certified.
.4
.5
.6
.7
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.8
Sub-floor filler: premixed latex modified cement mixed with water to produce cementitious paste. Wax and sealer: type recommended by flooring manufacturer. Metal edge strips: Aluminum extruded, smooth, mill finish stainless steel with lip to extend under floor finish, shoulder flush with top of adjacent floor finish. External corner protectors: stainless steel, type recommended by flooring manufacturer. Edging to floor penetrations: stainless steel, type recommended by flooring manufacturer.
.9
.10
.11
.12
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 SUB-FLOOR TREATMENT
.1 .2
Remove ridges and bumps. Apply sub-floor filler to low spots and cracks to achieve floor level to a tolerance of 1:500, allow to cure. Remove dust, old adhesive, paint, dirt, wax, sealer and foreign matter from existing surfaces.
.3
3.3 PREPARATION AND .1 INSTALLATION
Maintain room and material temperature at approximately 20C for 3 days before laying, and minimum 2 days after laying. Test subfloor for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer's
.2
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.3 PREPARATION AND .2 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) instructions using the Vaprecision vapour emission test. .1 Perform moisture condition test in each major area. A minimum of 1 test per 1000 sq. ft., prior to installation. Moisture condition shall not exceed 3 pounds per 1000 sq. ft. per 24 hour day in accordance with the Rubber Manufacturers Association Test Method. recommendations. Do not proceed with work until results of moisture condition tests are acceptable. Do not proceed with work until results of moisture condition tests are acceptable. Prepare floor and install flooring in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooring manufacturer's instructions. Do not spread more adhesive that can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place. Heat weld seams in resilient sheet flooring in accordance with ASTM F1516 and manufacturer's printed instructions. Lay flooring with joints straight and parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical tile pattern. Install equal size perimeter tile on each side. Roll surface with 45 kg roller. Remove adhesive seepage at seams or surface while adhesive is still wet, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Wrap around straight base at external corners. Rubber flooring: .1 Apply adhesive uniformly using recommended trowel in accordance with flooring manufacturers instructions. Do not spread more adhesive that can be covered by flooring before initial set takes place.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8 .9
.10
.11
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
3.3 PREPARATION AND .11 INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
Rubber flooring:(Cont'd) .2 Unroll flooring into freshly applied adhesive ensuring that all seams are in contact without compression. .3 Cut flooring neatly around fixed objects. .4 Terminate flooring at centreline of door in openings where adjacent floor finish or colour is dissimilar. .5 Roll flooring in both directions when complete. .6 Install reducing edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates or where there are two finishes of different thicknesses. Tread and riser installation: .1 Prepare adhesive and install materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. .2 Pre-cut and fit treads and risers prior to spreading adhesive. Fill back side of tread nose with a caulking bead; brush on adhesive on understeps and back of treads, as well as back of risers, and on receiving substrate. Allow to become tacky to touch before installing. Treads and risers shall be fully bonded to substrate, with tread nosing butted tight against stair tread nosing. Roll with hand roller after installation. .3 Remove adhesive seepage at seams or surface while adhesive is still wet, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Base installation: .1 Lay out base to keep number of joints at minimum. .2 Prior to installing base, fill cracks and irregularities with a filler recommended by base manufacturer. .3 Set base in adhesive using a 3 kg hand roller, against wall and floor surfaces. .4 Install straight and level to variation of 1:1000. .5 Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions. .6 Cope internal corners. Install metal edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges where flooring terminates.
.16
.17
.18
RESILIENT FLOORING
Section 09 65 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
3.4
CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without damage. Clean, seal and wax floor and base surface to flooring manufacturer's instructions.
.3
3.5
PROTECTION
.1
Protect new floors from time of final set of adhesive until final inspection. Prohibit traffic on floor for 48 hours after installation.
.2
END
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
Section 09 80 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Board Assemblies.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-92.1-M89, Sound Absorptive Prefabricated Acoustical Units.
1.3
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit duplicate full size sample of acoustical unit.
.2
1.4
MOCK-UPS
.1
Construct mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Construct one representative mock-up of acoustical treatment system. Construct mock-up 1 m2 minimum to indicate method of assembly, installation and fixing. Construct mock-up where directed. Allow 24 hours for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representative before proceeding with work. When accepted, mock-up will demonstrate minimum standard for this work. Mock-up may remain as part of the finished work.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.6
.1
Commence installation after building enclosed and dust generating activities are completed. Permit wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.
.2
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
Section 09 80 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.3
Maintain uniform minimum temperature of 15C and relative humidity of 20- 40% prior to, during and after installation.
1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Dispose of unused paint and adhesive material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.7
EXTRA MATERIALS .1
Provide extra materials of acoustic units and adhesive in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide acoustical units for maintenance use amounting to 2% of gross ceiling area for each pattern and type required for project. Provide sufficient adhesive to install extra material provided. Extra materials to be from same production run as installed materials. Clearly identify each package of acoustical units including colour and type, and each container of adhesive. Deliver to Departmental Representative, upon completion of the work of this section.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
Section 09 80 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS .7 (Cont'd) PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Store where directed by Departmental Representative.
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Acoustic units (AP1): to CAN/CGSB-92.1. .1 Core: Aspen wood fibre bonded with inorganic cement binder. .2 Size 600 x 600 x 25 mm thick. .3 Finish: Paint in colour to be selected by Departmental Representative. .4 Acceptable material: .1 Tectum Ceiling Panels, manufactured by Tectum Inc. 1-888-977-9691 www.tectum.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Fasteners: non-corrosive finish, type recommended by acoustic unit manufacturer.
.2
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate Work in accordance with Contract Drawings and reviewed shop drawings. Fabricate, fit and assemble Work in shop where possible. Where shop fabrication is not possible, make trial assembly in shop. Fabricate Work free from defects impairing function, appearance, strength and durability.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
Install acoustic panels in accordance with eviewed shop drawings and manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with Section 09 21 16 as required for installation of acoustic panels onto gypsum board substrate. Install acoustic units to clean, dry and firm substrate using manufacturer recommended adhesive and fasteners. Install acoustic units plumb and aligned.
.2
.3
.4
ACOUSTIC TREATMENT
Section 09 80 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.5
Scribe acoustic units to fit adjacent work. Butt joints tight, terminate edges with moulding.
3.2
CLEANING
.1
Keep acoustic installation and all components clean. Remove blemishes immediately.
3.3
PROTECTION
.1
Protect finished acoustical treatment from damage.
END
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) .1 Test Method for Measuring Total Volatile Organic Compound Content of Consumer Products, Method 24 (for Surface Coatings). Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). The Master Painters Institute (MPI) .1 Architectural Painting Specification Manual - February 2004. .2 Standard GPS-1-05, MPI Green Performance Standard for Painting and Coatings. National Fire Code of Canada. Society for Protective Coatings (SSPC) .1 Systems and Specifications, SSPC Painting Manual 2005.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.1
Qualifications: .1 Contractor: to have a minimum of five years proven satisfactory experience. When requested, provide list of last three comparable jobs including, job name and location, specifying authority, and project manager. .2 Qualified journeypersons as defined by local jurisdiction to be engaged in painting work .3 Apprentices: may be employed provided they work under direct supervision of qualified journeyperson in accordance with trade regulations. .4 Conform to latest MPI requirements for exterior painting work including preparation and priming. .5 Materials: in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual "Approved Product" listing and from a single manufacturer for each system used. .6 paint materials such as linseed oil, shellac, and turpentine to be highest quality product of an approved manufacturer listed in MPI Painting Specification Manual and to be
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Qualifications:(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) compatible with other coating materials as required. .7 Retain purchase orders, invoices and documents to prove conformance with noted MPI requirements when requested by Departmental Representative. .8 Standard of Acceptance: .1 Walls: No defects visible from a distance of 1000 mm at 90 degrees to surface. .2 Soffits: No defects visible from floor at 45 degrees to surface when viewed using final lighting source. .3 Final coat to exhibit uniformity of colour and uniformity of sheen across full surface area.
.1
Environmental Performance Requirements: .1 Green Performance in accordance with MPI Standard GPS-1.
1.4 INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS
.1
Interior painting and decorating work shall be inspected by a Paint Inspection Agency (inspector) acceptable to the specifying authority and local Painting Contractor's Association. Painting contractor shall notify Paint Inspection Agency a minimum of one week prior to commencement of work and provide a copy of project painting specification, plans and elevation drawings (including pertinent details) as well as a Finish Schedule. Interior surfaces requiring painting shall be inspected by Paint Inspection Agency who shall notify Departmental Representative and General Contractor in writing of defects or problems, prior to commencing painting work, or after prime coat shows defects in substrate. Where "special" painting, coating or decorating system applications (i.e. elastomeric coatings) or non-MPI listed products or systems are to be used, paint or coating manufacturer shall provide as part of this work, certification of surfaces and conditions for specific paint or coating
.2
.3
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.4 INSPECTION REQUIREMENTS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) system application as well as on site supervision, inspection and approval of their paint or coating system application as required at no additional cost to Owner.
1.5
SCHEDULING
.1
Submit work schedule for various stages of painting to Departmental Representative for approval. Submit schedule minimum of 48 hours in advance of proposed operations. Obtain written authorization from Departmental Representative for changes in work schedule. Schedule painting operations to prevent disruption of occupants in and about building.
.2
.3
1.6
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. Upon completion, submit records of products used. List products in relation to finish system and include the following: .1 Product name, type and use. .2 Manufacturer's product number. .3 Colour numbers. .4 MPI Environmentally Friendly classification system rating. .5 Manufacturer's Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). Provide samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit duplicate 200 x 300 mm sample panels of each paint finish with specified paint or coating in colours, gloss/sheen and textures required to MPI Painting
.2
.3
.4
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Specification Manual standards submitted on the following substrate materials: .1 3 mm plate steel for finishes over metal surfaces. .2 13 mm birch plywood for finishes over wood surfaces. .3 50 mm concrete block for finishes over concrete or concrete masonry surfaces. .4 13 mm gypsum board for finishes over gypsum board and other smooth surfaces. .2 When approved, samples shall become acceptable standard of quality for appropriate on-site surface with one of each sample retained on-site. .3 Submit full range of available colours where colour availability is restricted.
1.7
QUALITY CONTROL .1
Provide mock-up in accordance with Section 01 45 00. When requested by Departmental Representative or Paint Inspection Agency, prepare and paint designated surface, area, room or item to requirements specified herein, with specified paint or coating showing selected colours, number of coats, gloss/sheen, textures and workmanship to MPI Painting Specification Manual standards for review and approval. When approved, surface, area, room and/or items shall become acceptable standard of finish quality and workmanship for similar on-site work.
.2
1.8
MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials: .1 Submit maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Submit one, one litre can of each type and colour of stain and finish coating. Identify colour and paint type in relation to established colour schedule and finish system.
.2
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00, supplemented as follows: .1 Deliver and store materials in original containers, sealed, with labels intact. .2 Labels: to indicate: .1 Manufacturer's name and address. .2 Type of paint or coating. .3 Compliance with applicable standard. .4 Colour number in accordance with established colour schedule. .3 Remove damaged, opened and rejected materials from site. .4 Provide and maintain dry, temperature controlled, secure storage. .5 Observe manufacturer's recommendations for storage and handling. .6 Store materials and supplies away from heat generating devices. .7 Store materials and equipment in well ventilated area with temperature range 7 degrees C to 30 degrees C. .8 Store temperature sensitive products above minimum temperature as recommended by manufacturer. .9 Keep areas used for storage, cleaning and preparation, clean and orderly to approval of Departmental Representative . After completion of operations, return areas to clean condition to approval of Departmental Representative. .10 Remove paint materials from storage only in quantities required for same day use. .11 Comply with requirements of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) regarding use, handling storage, and disposal of hazardous materials. .12 Fire Safety Requirements: .1 Provide one 9 kg Type ABC dry chemical fire extinguisher adjacent to storage area. .2 Store oily rags, waste products, empty containers and materials subject to spontaneous combustion in ULC approved, sealed containers and remove from site on a daily basis. .3 Handle, store, use and dispose of flammable and combustible materials in accordance with the National Fire Code of Canada.
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
.2
Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Paint, stain and wood preservative finishes and related materials (thinners, solvents, etc.) are regarded as hazardous products and are subject to regulations for disposal. Information on these controls can be obtained from Provincial Ministries of Environment and Regional levels of Government. .3 Material which cannot be reused must be treated as hazardous waste and disposed of in an appropriate manner. .4 Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste, including used sealant and adhesive tubes and containers, in containers or areas designated for hazardous waste. .5 To reduce the amount of contaminants entering waterways, sanitary/storm drain systems or into the ground the following procedures shall be strictly adhered to: .1 Retain cleaning water for water-based materials to allow sediments to be filtered out. .2 Retain cleaners, thinners, solvents and excess paint and place in designated containers and ensure proper disposal. .3 Return solvent and oil soaked rags used during painting operations for contaminant recovery, proper disposal, or appropriate cleaning and laundering. .4 Dispose of contaminants in an approved legal manner in accordance with hazardous waste regulations. .5 Empty paint cans are to be dry prior to disposal or recycling (where available). .6 Where paint recycling is available, collect waste paint by type and provide for delivery to recycling or collection facility. .7 Set aside and protect surplus and uncontaminated finish materials: Deliver to or arrange collection by organizations for verifiable re-use or re-manufacturing. .8 Close and seal tightly partly used sealant and adhesive containers and store protected in well ventilated fire-safe area at moderate temperature.
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.10 AMBIENT CONDITIONS
.1
Heating, Ventilation and Lighting: .1 Ventilate enclosed spaces. .2 Do not perform painting work unless adequate and continuous ventilation and sufficient heating facilities are in place to maintain ambient air and substrate temperatures above 10 degrees C for 24 hours before, during and after paint application until paint has cured sufficiently. .3 Where required, provide continuous ventilation for seven days after completion of application of paint. .4 Co-ordinate use of existing ventilation system with Owner Departmental Representative and ensure its operation during and after application of paint as required. .5 Provide temporary ventilating and heating equipment where permanent facilities are not available or supplemental ventilating and heating equipment if ventilation and heating from existing system is inadequate to meet minimum requirements. .6 Perform no painting work unless a minimum lighting level of 323 Lux is provided on surfaces to be painted. Adequate lighting facilities to be provided by General Contractor. Temperature, Humidity and Substrate Moisture Content Levels: .1 Unless specifically pre-approved by specifying body, Paint Inspection Agency and, applied product manufacturer, perform no painting work when: .1 Ambient air and substrate temperatures are below 10 degrees C. .2 Substrate temperature is over 32 degrees C unless paint is specifically formulated for application at high temperatures. .3 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI or paint manufacturer's prescribed limits. .4 Relative humidity is above 85 % or when dew point is less than 3 degrees C variance between air/surface temperature. .5 Rain or snow are forecast to occur before paint has thoroughly cured or when it is foggy, misty, raining or snowing at site.
.2
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
1.10 AMBIENT CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Perform no painting work when maximum moisture content of substrate exceeds: .1 12% for concrete and masonry (clay and concrete brick/block). .2 15% for wood. .3 12% for plaster and gypsum board. .3 Conduct moisture tests using a properly calibrated electronic Moisture Meter, except test concrete floors for moisture using a simple "cover patch test". .4 Test concrete, masonry and plaster surfaces for alkalinity as required. Surface and Environmental Conditions: .1 Apply paint finish in areas where dust is no longer being generated by related construction operations or when wind or ventilation conditions are such that airborne particles will not affect quality of finished surface. .2 Apply paint to adequately prepared surfaces and to surfaces within moisture limits noted herein. .3 Apply paint when previous coat of paint is dry or adequately cured. .4 Apply paint finishes when conditions forecast for entire period of application fall within manufacturer's recommendations. .5 Do not apply paint when: .1 Temperature is expected to drop below 10 degrees C before paint has thoroughly cured. .2 Substrate and ambient air temperatures are expected to fall outside MPI or paint manufacturer's limits. .3 Surface to be painted is wet, damp or frosted. .6 Provide and maintain cover when paint must be applied in damp or cold weather. Heat substrates and surrounding air to comply with temperature and humidity conditions specified by manufacturer. Protect until paint is dry or until weather conditions are suitable. .7 Schedule painting operations such that surfaces exposed to direct, intense sunlight are scheduled for completion during early morning. .8 Remove paint from areas which have been exposed to freezing, excess humidity, rain, snow or condensation. Prepare surface again and repaint.
.3
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
1.10 AMBIENT CONDITIONS (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) .9 Paint occupied facilities in accordance with approved schedule only. Schedule operations to approval of Departmental Representative such that painted surfaces will have dried and cured sufficiently before occupants are affected.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Paint materials listed in latest edition of MPI Approved Products List (APL) are acceptable for use on this project. Paint materials for paint systems: to be products of single manufacturer. Paints, coatings, adhesives, solvents, cleaners, lubricants, and other fluids, to be as follows: .1 Be water-based. .2 Be non-flammable. .3 Be manufactured without compounds which contribute to ozone depletion in upper atmosphere. .4 Be manufactured without compounds which contribute to smog in the lower atmosphere. Water-borne surface coatings must be manufactured and transported in a manner that steps of processes, including disposal of waste products arising therefrom, will meet requirements of applicable governmental acts, by-laws and regulations including, for facilities located in Canada, Fisheries Act and Canadian Environmental Protection Act (CEPA). Water-borne surface coatings must not be formulated or manufactured with aromatic solvents, formaldehyde, halogenated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavelant chromium or their compounds. Water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must have flash point of 61.0 degrees C or greater.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 10 2011-06-10
.7
Both water-borne surface coatings and recycled water-borne surface coatings must be made by a process that does not release: .1 Matter in undiluted production plant effluent generating a 'Biochemical Oxygen Demand' (BOD) in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment. .2 Total Suspended Solids (TSS) in undiluted production plant effluent in excess of 15 mg/L to a natural watercourse or a sewage treatment facility lacking secondary treatment. Water-borne paints and stains, recycled water-borne surface coatings and water borne varnishes must meet a minimum "Environmentally Friendly" E2 rating.
.8
2.2
COLOURS
.1
Refer to Contract Drawings for selected colour references. Location of accent colours will be provided after award. Selection of colours will be from manufacturers full range of colours. Where specific products are available in restricted range of colours, selection will be based on limited range. Second coat in three coat system to be tinted slightly lighter colour than top coat to show visible difference between coats.
.2
.3
.4
2.3 MIXING AND TINTING
.1
Perform colour tinting operations prior to delivery of paint to site. On-site tinting of painting materials is allowed only with Departmental Representative's written permission. Mix paste, powder or catalyzed paint mixes in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Add thinner to paint manufacturer's recommendations. Do not use kerosene or organic solvents to thin water-based paints.
.2
.3
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 11 2011-06-10
2.3 MIXING AND TINTING (Cont'd)
.4
Thin paint for spraying according in accordance with paint manufacturer's instructions. If directions are not on container, obtain instructions in writing from manufacturer and provide copy of instructions to Departmental Representative. Re-mix paint in containers prior to and during application to ensure break-up of lumps, complete dispersion of settled pigment, and colour and gloss uniformity.
.5
2.4 GLOSS/SHEEN RATINGS
.1
Paint gloss: defined as sheen rating of applied paint, in accordance with following values: Gloss Level Category/ G1 - matte finish G2 - velvet finish G3 - eggshell finish G4 - satin finish G5 semi-gloss finish G6 - gloss finish G7 - high gloss finish Units @ 60 Degrees/ 0 to 5 0 to 10 10 to 25 20 to 35 35 to 70 Units @ 85 Degrees/ max. 10 10 to 35 10 to 35 min. 35
70 to 85 > 85
.2
Gloss level ratings of painted surfaces as selected by the Departmental Representative. The Departmental Representative will select choice of gloss after award of Contract. Conform to gloss reflectance definitions listed in MPI Specification Manual.
.3
.4
2.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS
.1
Concrete Horizontal Surfaces: floors .1 INT 3.2C Epoxy finish.
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 12 2011-06-10
2.5 INTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS (Cont'd)
.2
Concrete Masonry Units: smooth block .1 INT 4.2F Epoxy (tile-like) finish for dry environments. .2 INT 4.2G Epoxy (tile-like) finish for wet environments. Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: .1 INT 5.1R High performance architectural latex finish. Galvanized Metal: doors, frames, railings, misc. steel, pipes, overhead decking, ducts, etc. .1 INT 5.3A Latex finish. .2 INT 5.3B Waterborne light industrial coating. Gypsum Board: gypsum wallboard, drywall, .1 INT 9.2E Epoxy (tile-like) finish.
.3
.4
.5
2.6 EXTERIOR PAINTING SYSTEMS
.1
Structural Steel and Metal Fabrications: .1 EXT 5.1D - Alkyd finish. Galvanized Metal: not chromate passivated .1 EXT 5.3B - Alkyd finish.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GENERAL
.1
Perform preparation and operations for painting in accordance with MPI Painting Specifications Manual except where specified otherwise.
.1
3.3
PREPARATION
.1
Perform preparation and operations for exterior painting in accordance with MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual except where specified otherwise.
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 13 2011-06-10
.2
Apply paint materials in accordance with paint manufacturer's written application instructions. Clean and prepare surfaces in accordance with MPI Painting Specification Manual requirements. Refer to MPI Manual in regard to specific requirements and as follows: .1 Remove dust, dirt, and surface debris by wiping with dry, or clean cloths. .2 Wash surfaces with a biodegradable detergent and clean warm water using a stiff bristle brush to remove dirt, oil and other surface contaminants. .3 Rinse scrubbed surfaces with clean water until foreign matter is flushed from surface. .4 Allow surfaces to drain completely and allow to dry thoroughly. Allow sufficient drying time and test surfaces using electronic moisture meter before commencing work. .5 Use water-based cleaners in place of organic solvents where surfaces will be repainted using water based paints. .6 Many water-based paints cannot be removed with water once dried. Minimize use of kerosene or such organic solvents to clean up water-based paints. Prevent contamination of cleaned surfaces by salts, acids, alkalis, other corrosive chemicals, grease, oil and solvents before priming and between applications of remaining coats. Touch-up, spot prime, and apply primer, paint, or pretreatment as soon as possible after cleaning and before deterioration occurs. Do not apply paint until prepared surfaces have been accepted by Departmental Representative. Sand and dust between coats as required to provide adequate adhesion for next coat and to remove defects visible from a distance up to 1000 mm.
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.4
PROTECTION
.1
Protect existing building surfaces and adjacent structures from paint spatters, markings and other damage by suitable non-staining covers or masking. If damaged,
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 14 2011-06-10
3.4 PROTECTION (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) clean and restore such surfaces as directed by Departmental Representative. Protect items that are permanently attached such as Fire Labels on doors and frames. Protect factory finished products and equipment. Protect building occupants in and about building. Remove light fixtures, surface hardware on doors, and other surface mounted equipment, fittings and fastenings prior to undertaking painting operations.Store items and re-install after painting is completed. Move and cover furniture and portable equipment as necessary to carry out painting operations. Replace as painting operations progress. As painting operations progress, place "WET PAINT" signs in pedestrian and vehicle traffic areas to approval of Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.5
APPLICATION
.1
Method of application to be as approved by Departmental Representative. Apply paint by brush or roller. Conform to manufacturer's application instructions unless specified otherwise. Brush and Roller Application: .1 Apply paint in a uniform layer using brush and/or roller of types suitable for application. .2 Work paint into cracks, crevices and corners. .3 Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to brush using spray, daubers and/or sheepskins. Paint surfaces and corners not accessible to roller using brush, daubers or sheepskins. .4 Brush and/or roll out runs and sags, and over-lap marks. Rolled surfaces shall be free of roller tracking and heavy stipple unless approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 15 2011-06-10
.2
Brush and Roller Application:(Cont'd) .5 Remove runs, sags and brush marks from finished work and repaint. Use dipping, sheepskins or daubers when no other method is practical in places of difficult access and when specifically authorized by Departmental Representative. Apply coats of paint as continuous film of uniform thickness. Repaint thin spots or bare areas before next coat of paint is applied. Allow surfaces to dry and properly cure after cleaning and between subsequent coats for minimum time period as recommended by manufacturer. Sand and dust between coats to remove visible defects. Finish surfaces both above and below sight lines as specified for surrounding surfaces, including such surfaces as projecting ledges. Finish inside of cupboards and cabinets as specified for outside surfaces. Finish closets and alcoves as specified for adjoining rooms. Finish top, bottom, edges and cutouts of doors after fitting as specified for door surfaces.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
3.6 MECHANICAL/ELECTRIC AL EQUIPMENT
.1
Unless otherwise specified, paint exposed conduits, piping, hangers, duct work and other mechanical and electrical equipment with colour and finish to match adjacent surfaces, except as noted otherwise. Other unfinished areas: leave exposed conduits, piping, hangers, ductwork and other mechanical and electrical equipment in original finish and touch up scratches and marks. Touch up scratches and marks on factory painted finishes and equipment with paint as supplied by manufacturer of equipment.
.2
.3
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 16 2011-06-10
3.6 MECHANICAL/ELECTRIC AL EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
.4 .5 .6
Do not paint over nameplates. Keep sprinkler heads free of paint. Paint inside of ductwork where visible behind grilles, registers and diffusers with primer and one coat of matt black paint. Paint fire protection piping. Paint steel electrical light standards. Do not paint outdoor transformers and substation equipment.
.7 .8
.1
Inspection: .1 Field inspection of exterior painting operations to be carried out be independent inspection firm as designated by Departmental Representative. .2 Advise Departmental Representative when each surface and applied coating is ready for inspection. Do not proceed with subsequent coats until previous coat has been approved. .3 Co-operate with inspection firm and provide access to areas of work. Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
3.8
CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Remove paint where spilled, splashed, splattered or sprayed as work progresses using means and materials that are not detrimental to affected surfaces.
3.9
RESTORATION
.1
Clean and re-install hardware items removed before undertaken painting operations. Remove protective coverings and warning signs as soon as practical after operations cease.
.2
PAINTING
Section 09 91 00 Page 17 2011-06-10
3.9 RESTORATION (Cont'd)
.3
Remove paint splashings on exposed surfaces that were not painted. Remove smears and spatter immediately as operations progress, using compatible solvent. Protect freshly completed surfaces from paint droppings and dust to approval of Departmental Representative. Avoid scuffing newly applied paint. Restore areas used for storage, cleaning, mixing and handling of paint to clean condition as approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5
END
SEAMLESS FLOORING, WALL AND CEILING COATING
Section 09 96 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 04 20 00: Concrete block. Section 09 21 16: Gypsum Board.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM C307-03(2008), Standard Test Method for Tensile Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortar, Grouts, and Monolithic Surfacings. .2 ASTM C413-01(2006), Standard Test Method for Absorption of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. .3 ASTM C579-01(2006), Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. .4 ASTM C580-02(2008), Standard Test Method for Flexural Strength and Modulus of Elasticity of Chemical-Resistant Mortars, Grouts, Monolithic Surfacings, and Polymer Concretes. .5 ASTM D635-10, Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time of Burning of Plastics in a Horizontal Position. .6 ASTM D638-10, Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. .7 ASTM D2047-04, Standard Test Method for Static Coefficient of Friction of Polish-Coated Flooring Surfaces as Measured by the James Machine. .8 ASTM D2794-93(2010), Standard Test Method for Resistance of Organic Coatings to the Effects of Rapid Deformation (Impact). .9 ASTM D2240-05(2010), Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. .10 ASTM D4060-10, Standard Test Method for Abrasion Resistance of Organic Coatings by the Taber Abraser. .11 ASTM D4541-09e1, Standard Test Method for Pull-Off Strength of Coatings Using Postable Adhesion Testers. .12 ASTM E648-10e1, Standard Test Method for Critical Radiant Flux of Floor-Covering Systems Using a Radiant Heat Energy Source.
Section 09 96 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Submit product data sheets in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
1.4
WHMIS
.1
Submit two copies of MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets to Departmental Representative. Indicate VOC's during application and curing. Enforce use of personal protective equipment required by MSDS.
.2 .3
1.5
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Submit duplicate 400 x 200 mm samples of each colour and finish coating applied to porous concrete block and cement board.
.2
1.6
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Applied by applicator trained and licensed by epoxy material manufacturer for application of its products. Manufacturer's representative: .1 Inspect substrate prior to commencement of work, during application of materials and upon completion of work. .2 Provide technical assistance to the applicator and assist where required in correct installation of waterproof membrane, expansion joint filler, floor base coat mortar, quartz epoxy floor and wall top coat sealer.
.2
1.7
MOCK-UP
.1
Apply materials of each finish to approximately 2 m2 area of surface to be treated. Allow 24 h for inspection of mock-up by Departmental Representativebefore proceeding with coating work. Do not proceed until mock-up has been inspected and accepted by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
Section 09 96 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.7 MOCK-UP (Cont'd)
.4
Reviewed and accepted mock-up shall become part of installed work.
.1
Do not apply epoxy systems unless uniform minimum 16C air temperature at installation area for 24 hours prior to and after application. Provide adequate ventilation or isolation measures to protect against toxic fumes. .1 Ventilate area 24 hours per day, during installation and for 7 days after installation is completed with minimum 30% outside air. .2 Ventilate at a rate sufficient to produce a negative pressure in the work area.
.2
1.9 MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide maintenance data for coatings for incorporation into manual specified in Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Ensure compatibility for all epoxy materials including primers, resins, hardening agents, finish coats and sealer coats. All epoxy materials from same manufacturer. Aggregate: silica sand to coating manufacturer's requirements. Block filler: one component, high build, copolymer emulsion with inorganic pigments, stabilizers, extenders and fillers. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Stoncrest GS3, manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
.2 .3
.4
Section 09 96 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.5
Waterproof membrane: two component epoxy, liquid applied, 100% solids. .1 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307, 5.65 MPa. .2 Elongation: to ASTM C307, 100%. .3 Hardness: to ASTM D2240, Shore A Durometer 80. .4 Temperature limitations: 60C continuous exposure; 93C intermittent exposure. .5 Acceptable material: .1 Stonproof ME5, manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.2 EXPANSION AND CONTROL JOINT FILLER
.1
Joint filler: self leveling, two-component sealant based on a flexible epoxy resin and a blended polyamide curing agent. .1 Hardness: to ASTM D2240, Shore A Durometer 90. .2 Elongation: to ASTM D638, 40%. .3 Stain and colour change: to ASTM C510-05a, none. .4 Acceptable material: .1 StonFlex CJ4, manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.3 EPOXY MORTAR/ GROUT
.1
Mortar/Grout: 3 part epoxy grout, 100% solids, solvent free, trowelable. .1 Compressive strength: to ASTM C579, 52.40 MPa after 7 days. .2 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307, 12.41 MPa. .3 Flexural strength: to ASTM C580, 22.75 MPa. .4 Hardness: to ASTM D22405, shore D durometer 86-88. .5 Density: 2200 kg/m3. .6 Acceptable material: .1 Stonset TG5, manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com.
Section 09 96 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.3 EPOXY MORTAR/ GROUT (Cont'd)
.1
Mortar/Grout:(Cont'd) .6 Acceptable material:(Cont'd) .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.4 EPOXY FLOOR SYSTEM (TYPICAL)
.1
Floor system: .1 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer. .2 Body coat and aggregate: 3 component, troweled mortar base consisting of epoxy resin, curing agent and fine aggregate, minimum 5 mm thick. Colour: As shown on Contract Drawings. .1 Compressive strength: to ASTM C579, 68.94 MPa after 7 days. .2 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307, 13.79 MPa. .3 Flexural strength: to ASTM C580, 29.65 MPa. .4 Hardness: to ASTM D2240, shore D durometer 85-90. .5 Abrasion resistance: to ASTM D4060, CS-17 wheel, 0.06 gm maximum weight loss. .6 Coefficient of friction: to ASTM D2047, less than 1.0. .7 Flammability: to ASTM E648, Class 1. .8 Water absorption: to ASTM C413, 0.1%. .9 Acceptable material: .1 StoneShield (HRI System), manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. .3 Top coat: 2 component, high performance, UV resistant, clear epoxy sealer. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Stonshield Sealer, manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
Section 09 96 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
2.5 EPOXY FLOOR SYSTEM (SHOWER)
.1
Floor system: .1 Primer: as recommended by manufacturer. .2 Body coat: 3 part epoxy, 100% solids, minimum 6 mm thick, grey colour and texture selected by Departmental Representative. .1 Compressive strength: to ASTM C579, 68.94 MPa after 7 days. .2 Tensile strength: to ASTM C307, 12.06 MPa. .3 Flexural strength: to ASTM C580, 27.57 MPa. .4 Hardness: to ASTM D2240, shore D durometer 85-90. .5 Abrasion resistance: to ASTM D4060, CS-17 wheel, 0.1 g maximum weight loss. .6 Coefficient of friction: to ASTM D2047, 0.6. .7 Flammability: to ASTM D6356, self extinguishing, extent of burning maximum 6 mm. .8 Water absorption: to ASTM C413, 0.2%. .9 Acceptable material: .1 Stonclad GS, manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. .3 Top coat: 2 part epoxy, 100% solids, increased abrasion and chemical resistance, as shown on Contract Drawings to match floor body coat. .1 Flammability: to ASTM D635, self extinguishing, extent of burning maximum 6 mm. .2 Acceptable material: .1 Stonkote GS4, manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.6 WALL AND .1 CEILING SYSTEM EPOXY
Wall and ceiling coating: 2 part epoxy, 92% solids, colour as shown on Contract Drawings. Ceiling coating to be complete with fibre reinforcing. .1 Minimum dry film thickness: 0.381 mm.
Section 09 96 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
2.6 WALL AND .1 CEILING SYSTEM EPOXY (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) .2 Abrasion resistance: to ASTM D4060, CS-17 wheel, 1,000 g load, 1,000 cycles: 0.1 gm maximum weight loss. .3 Impact resistance: to ASTM D2794 (no cracking crazing or loss of adhesion): exceeds 24 in.-lbs. .4 Hardness: to ASTM D2240, 80-85 Shore D. .5 Temperature limitations: .1 Continuous exposure: 60C. .2 Intermittent exposure: 93C. .6 Acceptable material: .1 Stonglaze VSC, manufactured by StonCor Group 905-430-3333 www.stonhard.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.7
MIXES
.1
Mix crack isolation membrane, expansion joint filler, grout, floor base coat mortar and top coat sealer in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION OF SURFACES
.1
Prepare surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove oil, dirt and grease with industrial detergent, as recommended by epoxy manufacturers representative. Mask surrounding surfaces to provide neat, clean juncture lines. Protect adjacent surfaces and equipment from damage by overspray. Complete work penetrating substrate before installing coating.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 09 96 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
3.2 PREPARATION OF FLOORS
.1
Prepare floors in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Shot blast new concrete floor surfaces.
.2
3.3 PREPARATION OF WALLS
.1
Apply 2 coats of block filler to walls to provide smooth surface for finish coating.
3.4 EPOXY MORTAR/ GROUT APPLICATION
.1
Apply epoxy mortar/grout in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to provide 3 mm in 300 mm slope to floor drains and integral cove base. Form ramps to door thresholds. Co-ordinate with room finish schedule.
.2
3.5 FLOOR SYSTEM APPLICATION
.1
Mix in accordance with material manufacturer's instructions. Apply primer to porous surfaces and epoxy mortar in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Trowel apply body coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Minimum total dry thickness 6 mm. Top coat: .1 Number of coats as recommended by manufacturer to suit intended application. .2 Typical location: Apply top coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Minimum total dry film thickness 6 mils. .3 Shower location: Apply top coat in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Minimum total dry film thickness 4 mils. Slip resistant finish: .1 Broadcast sharp silica sand aggregate into first coat of top coat while it is still wet. .2 Remove excess aggregate. .3 Encapsulate aggregate with second coat of top coat.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 09 96 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.5 FLOOR SYSTEM APPLICATION (Cont'd)
.6
Co-ordinate with room finish schedule.
3.6 WALL SYSTEM APPLICATION
.1
Mix in accordance with material manufacturer's written instructions. Apply wall coating by spray or roller. Minimum dry film thickness 0.102 mm (4 mils). Co-ordinate with room finish schedule.
.2
.3
3.7 CEILING SYSTEM APPLICATION
.1
Mix in accordance with material manufacturer's written instructions. Apply ceiling coating by spray or roller. Minimum dry film thickness 0.102 mm (4 mils). Co-ordinate with room finish schedule.
.2
.3
3.8
TESTING
.1
Perform two pull-off strength adhesion tests in floor areas as selected by the Departmental Representative. Do pull-off strength adhesion tests in accordance with ASTM D4541. Patch floors where pull-off strength adhesion tests are performed. Patch shall not be visible when viewed 600 mm above finished floor.
.2
.3
END
INTUMESCENT PAINTING
Section 09 96 46 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM): .1 ASTM D2240, Standard Test Method for Rubber Property - Durometer Hardness. .2 ASTM E84, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. .3 ASTM E736, Standard test method for Cohesion/Adhesion of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members. .4 ASTM E761, Standard test method for Compressive Strength of Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials Applied to Structural Members. AWCI, Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industries - International. .1 AWCI Technical Manual 12-B, Standard Practice for the Testing and Inspection of Field Applied Thin-Film Intumescent Fire-Resistive Materials; an Annotated Guide. ULC, Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada.
.2
.3
1.2
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit submittals in accordance with Sections 01 33 00. Product data: Submit duplicate copies of manufacturer's Product data for each material used indicating: .1 Performance criteria, compliance with appropriate reference standard(s), characteristics, and limitations. .2 Product transportation, storage, handling and installation requirements. Samples: Submit two 150 x 300 mm samples of intumescent fireproofing applied to 3 mm steel plate cut back to show primer, basecoat, intumescent coating and topcoat demonstrating colour and finish for the Departmental Representative approval. Certificates: Submit ULC certification for designs of fire resistive coating application to substrate materials required and test reports showing compliance with specified
.2
.3
.4
Section 09 96 46 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Certificates:(Cont'd) physical performance characteristics and physical properties.
.1
Installers qualifications: .1 Perform Work of this Section by a company that has a minimum of five years proven experience in the installation of intumescent fireproof coatings on project of a similar size and nature and that is approved by manufacturer. Submit to the Departmental Representative, applicator's current certificate of approval by the material manufacturer as proof of compliance. Inspection and Testing: .1 An independent testing laboratory/company may be selected by the Departmental Representative to test random samples as applied, to verify thickness of thin-film intumescent fire-resistive coating in accordance with AWCI Technical Manual 12-B. Inspection shall be carried out prior to application of topcoat. .2 Correct deficiencies and have such corrected work approved by Inspection/Testing Company before work is continued.
.2
.1
Deliver materials in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact. Ship, store and deliver at temperatures not less than 10C; protect from freezing. Store materials protected from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
.2
1.5
SITE CONDITIONS .1
Do not install Work of this Section outside of environmental ranges as recommended by the intumescent coating manufacturer without the Departmental Representative's and Product manufacturer's written acceptance.
Section 09 96 46 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS .2 (Cont'd)
Supply and install temporary protection and facilities to maintain Product manufacturer's, and above specified environmental requirements for 24 hours before, during, and 24 hours after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Intumescent fireproof coating: .1 Provide intumescent fireproofing to provide a fire resistance rating of 60 minutes for all columns and items indicated on drawings. .2 Intumescent fireproofing system consisting of the following components: .1 Primer: Recommended by manufacturer for substrate being fireproofed. .2 Base coat: Type as recommended by the coating manufacturer. .3 Intumescent coating: Conforming to: .1 Hardness (Shore "D"): Durometer D72 in accordance with ASTM D2240. .2 Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame Spread: 0 -20, Smoke Development: 0-50, Class "A", in accordance with ASTM E84. .3 Density 1.42 g/cc. .4 Dry Weight: 1.87 kg/m2 at 1.1 mm dry. .5 Cohesion / Adhesion (Bond or Tensile): 862 kPa in accordance with ASTM 736. .6 Compressive strength: 5.2 MPa at 10 % deformation, in accordance with ASTM E761. .4 Top coat: Type as recommended by the coating manufacturer. Colour to be as selected by the Departmental Representative.
2.2
MIXES
.1
Mix intumescent fireproof coating components in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Section 09 96 46 Page 4 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verify condition and dimensions of previously installed Work upon which this Section depends. Verify that all clips, hangers, sleeves and similar devices have been attached. Report defects to the Departmental Representative. Commencement of Work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2
PREPARATION
.1
Protect work of other trades against overspray and make good at own expense any such damage. Provide adequate covering by drop cloths, masting or tarpaulins to surfaces, or on fitments in contact with, or adjacent to, surfaces to be fireproofed. Clean surfaces, to be fireproofed, free of dust, grease, oils, etc. in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure surfaces are free of any extraneous matter which could be detrimental to a satisfactory and acceptable finish. Verify substrate surfaces are solid, free from surface water, frozen matter, dust, oil, grease, scaling or laitance, projections and any other foreign matter detrimental to performance. Obtain manufacturer's approval of substrate in writing, submit copy to the Departmental Representative. Prime surfaces to be fireproofed with specified primer in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Inspect primed surfaces to be fireproofed for gouges, marks, pinholes, nibs, etc. Properly prepare same by patching, filling, smoothing or any other surface preparation necessary to ensure a satisfactory surface finish.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.3
APPLICATION
.1
Install intumescent fireproofing in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Section 09 96 46 Page 5 2011-06-10
.2
Install intumescent fireproofing at the proper consistency to ensure a satisfactory surface finish. Use-up materials within shelf life period recommended by manufacturer. Ensure finished work is uniform as to sheen, gloss, colour, and texture. Patching: Patch and repair any fire resistive coating that has been damaged in accordance with patching recommendations of material manufacturer. If coating becomes damaged, rebuild thickness by spray or brush. Fill small areas with trowel. When dry, smooth and finish to match adjacent surfaces.
.3
.4
.5
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Repair or replace damaged installed products. Clean installed products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Remove and legally dispose of construction debris. Work will not be considered complete until all spatters, drippings, smears and overspray have been cleaned and removed to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative.
.2
END
MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES
Section 10 28 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Labour, Products, equipment and services necessary for miscellaneous specialties Work as listed below in accordance with the Contract Documents. .1 Janitor's mop and broom holder. .2 Speaking port. .3 Appliances and equipment (washer and dryer). .4 Whiteboards. .5 Television supports.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A167-99(2009), Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM A1008/A1008M-10, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. .4 ASTM E84-10b, Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-44.40-92, Steel Clothing Locker. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC): .1 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
.2
.3
.4
Section 10 28 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Submit product data sheets of each item specified, in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIAL
.1
Stainless steel: to ASTM A167, type 304, AISI No. 4 finish. Steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, minimum 25% recycled content. Sheet steel: to ASTM A1008/A1008M, cold rolled sheet, not oiled, minimum 25% recycled content. Galvanized sheet steel: to ASTM A653/A653M, commercial grade CS type A, stretcher levelled, Z275 zinc coating designation, minimum 25% recycled content.
.2
.3
.4
2.2 JANITOR'S MOP AND BROOM HOLDER
.1
Surface Mounted Mop and Broom Holder (N13): mounting base constructed of 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 with satin finish. Mop and broom holders to be spring loaded rubber cams with plated steel retainers 914 mm long with 4 holders.
.2
2.3
SPEAKING PORT
.1
Construction of stainless steel 5 mm thick, bullet proof, size as indicated; shall meet Correctional Service Canada, Speaking Port Attack Level B specifications. Turn in the assembly to Section 08 80 00 for building-in.
2.4 APPLIANCES AND .1 EQUIPMENT
Front Load Washer: 120 volt, 60 cycle, 15 amps, separately fused; 3 wire, grounded circuit, 3/4 hp motor; permanently lubricated motor and transmission with built in thermal overload protection, self leveling rear feet, adjustable front feet, 2.84 ft2 stainless steel wash tub, choice of 6 wash/rinse cycles, complete with optional automatic supply
Section 10 28 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.4 APPLIANCES AND .1 EQUIPMENT (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) injection, 1000 rpm final spin, stop action lid, switch, size to be 683 mm wide x 752 mm deep x 1054 mm high; commercial quality washer, colour to be white. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Model FTZ90, manufactured by Huebsch 1-800-553-5120 www.huebsch.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Front Load Dryer: 120/240 volt, 60 cycle, 30 amp, 3 wire grounded circuit required separately fused. Four way exhaust venting, 1/3 hp permanently lubricated motor, 6 cycle settings, minimum 5350W output, secured metal mesh lint filter, full width door, size to be 683 mm wide x 752 mm deep x 1054 mm high; push to start button; commercial quality dryer, colour to be white. .1 Acceptable material: .1 Model FEZ17, manufactured by Huebsch 1-800-553-5120 www.huebsch.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Coordinate with Section 05 50 01 as required for sizing and installation of stainless steel enclosure unit and retainer bars.
.2
.3
2.5
WHITEBOARDS
.1
Whiteboard: .1 Porcelain enamel: to Porcelain Enamel Institute Standards PEI 501 regards durability, smoothness of texture, colour continuity. Gloss factor of 6 8 as measured by 45 degree glossmeter: .1 Surface finish for erasable markers and suitable for use as a projection screen: white colour. .2 Aluminum trim: perimeter trim or frame, bottom rail with integral chalk trough and end closures, of manufacturer's standard sections appropriate for installation conditions. Finish: Clear anodic finish.
Section 10 28 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.6 TELEVISION SUPPORTS
.1
Provide steel tilt and turn television mounting brackets complete with lift and hook design for flat screen television in dining room location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Verify substrate surfaces are solid, free from surface water, dust, oil, grease, projections and other foreign matter detrimental to performance. Items to be built-in: Provide information and templates required for installation of work of this Section, and assist or supervise, or both, the setting of anchorage devices, and construction of other work incorporated with products specified in this Section in order that they function as intended. Verify there is adequate supports and/or blocking in gypsum wall assemblies prior to installation of manufactured specialties.
.2
.3
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install miscellaneous specialties level and securely and rigidly anchored to substrate in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction, reviewed shop drawings, and manufacturer's written instructions. Coordinate with applicable Sections as required for Work of this Section. Supply templates, components and instructions for items built into work of other sections. Install items plumb, straight and level to a tolerance of 1:500. Securely fix items in place with concealed fasteners. Appliances: .1 Install appliances in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, plugged in and operational. Connect washers to plumbing as required.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 10 28 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.6
Appliances:(Cont'd) .2 Coordinate with Section 05 50 01 as required for installation of stainless steel enclosure unit and retainer bars. .3 Securely fasten/anchor appliances in place as directed by the Departmental Representative.
END
TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES
Section 10 28 10 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International .1 ASTM A167-99(2009), Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet, and Strip. .2 ASTM A653/A653M-09, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM B456-03(2009), Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Copper Plus Nickel Plus Chromium and Nickel Plus Chromium. CSA International .1 CAN/CSA-B651-04, Accessible Design for the Built Environment. .2 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
.2
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literatureand data sheets and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Indicate size and description of components, base material, surface finish inside and out, hardware and locks, attachment devices, description of rough-in-frame, building-in details of anchors for grab bars.
.2
.3
.1
Provide maintenance data for toilet and bath accessories for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
Section 10 28 10 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS
.1
Tools: .1 Provide special tools required for assembly, disassembly or removal for toilet and bath accessories in accordance with requirements specified in Section 01 78 00. .2 Deliver special tools to Departmental Representative.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name and address. Storage and Handling Requirements: .1 Store materials indoors and in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations in clean, dry, well-ventilated area. .2 Store and protect toilet and bathroom accessories from nicks, scratches, and blemishes. .3 Replace defective or damaged materials with new. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sheet steel: to ASTM A653/A653M with ZF001 designation zinc coating. Stainless steel sheet metal: to ASTM A167, Type 304, with No.4 finish. Stainless steel tubing: Type 304, commercial grade, seamless welded, 1.2 mm wall thickness. Chrome plating: to ASTM B456, polished finish.
.2
.3
.4
Section 10 28 10 Page 3 2011-06-10
.5
Fasteners: exposed fasteners to be tamper-resistant screws having deep hex 6-lobe recess with solid post formed in centre, Comcar/Division Textron Inc., Torx-Plus "Registered" Drive System.
2.2 SECURE COMPONENTS
.1
Secure Folding Shower Seat (S1): Compact Rectangular Phenolic Fold-up Shower Seat shall have all metal parts fabricated of 18-8 alloy type 304 stainless steel. Seat frame and support legs shall be 25mm dia. and 32mm square x 1.2mm gauge with 4.8mm thick mounting flanges and 1.5mm gauge guide bracket/arm support. All exposed surfaces shall have No 4 satin finish. Structural assembly shall be of welded construction and all exposed edges and corners shall be radiused and/or deburred. Seat shall be 8mm thick solid phenolic with ivory color top and bottom surfaces and shall have black edges. Support arm shall fold up when in retracted position to provide low profile against wall. No extra fittings shall be required to retain seat in storage position. Guide bracket shall control seat lowering into operating position. .1 Acceptable materials: .1 Model 8203, manufactured by American Specialties Inc. 1-914-476-9000 www.americanspecialties.com. .2 Model B-5191, manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company 1-877-423-6555 www.bobrick.com. .3 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Secure Vandal Resistant Mirror (S2): with rounded corners; front mounted. Formed with one piece formed alloy 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 No. 18 gauge with No. 8 polish. .1 Acceptable materials: .1 Penal-Ware Model 1817, manufactured by Acorn Engineering Company 1-800-488-8999 www.acorneng.com. .2 Model 107, manufactured by American Specialties Inc. 1-914-476-9000 www.americanspecialties.com. .3 Model B-942, manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company 1-877-423-6555 www.bobrick.com.
.2
Section 10 28 10 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.2 SECURE COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
.2
Secure Vandal Resistant Mirror (S2):(Cont'd) .1 Acceptable materials:(Cont'd) .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Recessed Toilet Paper Holder (S3): front-mounting, with square bezel, shall hold one standard roll and shall be fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 No. 14 gauge. Use security fasteners. .1 Acceptable materials: .1 Penal-Ware Model 1840-FA, manufactured by Acorn Engineering Company 1-800-488-8999 www.acorneng.com. .2 Model SA 12, manufactured by Bradley Corporation 1-800-272-3539 www.bradleycorp.com. .3 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Multiple Clothes Hook Panel (S4): four auto release clothes hooks panel; front mounted. .1 Acceptable materials: .1 Penal-Ware Model 1828, manufactured by Acorn Engineering Company 1-800-488-8999 www.acorneng.com. .2 Model 129, manufactured by American Specialties Inc. 1-914-476-9000 www.americanspecialties.com. .3 Model B-985, manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company 1-877-423-6555 www.bobrick.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Coat Hook (S5): Maximum Security Clothes hook with snap down feature for safety if excessively loaded: Type 304 stainless steel, secured from the front. .1 Acceptable materials: .1 Penal-Ware Model 1829, manufactured by Acorn Engineering Company 1-800-488-8999 www.acorneng.com. .2 Model 123, manufactured by American Specialties Inc. 1-914-476-9000 www.americanspecialties.com. .3 Model B-983, manufactured by Bobrick Washroom Equipment Company 1-877-423-6555 www.bobrick.com.
.3
.4
.5
Section 10 28 10 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.2 SECURE COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
.5
Coat Hook (S5):(Cont'd) .1 Acceptable materials:(Cont'd) .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Wall Cap and Vertical Rail (S6 & S7): custom fabricated from minimum 2 mm thick Type 304 stainless steel sheet, as detailed on the drawings. Refer to Section 05 50 01. Secure access Panel (S8): Refer to Section 05 50 01.
.6
.7
2.3 NON-SECURE COMPONENTS
.1
Semi-Recessed Paper Towel Dispenser and Waste Receptacle (N1): fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, type 304 No. 22 gauge. Towel dispenser shall have a capacity of 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. The waste receptacle shall have a capacity of 12 gal. and be equipped with interior hooks and a vinyl liner. Surface Mounted Waste Receptacle (N2): fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 No. 22 gauge. Back and bottom are one piece, 26 gauge. All welded construction. Equipped with interior hooks and a vinyl liner. Capacity of 6.4 gal. Surface Mounted Paper Towel Dispenser, Controlled (N3): .1 Only requiring you to touch your personal towel, thereby reducing the chance for cross-contamination from touching commonly used surfaces such as levers or buttons which makes it ideal for food preparation and healthcare environments .2 With each pull of the slightly exposed towel, the dispenser is to cut a pre-measured 280 mm towel for maximum usage control. .3 High capacity dispenser accommodating up to a 243 metre long roll with a 100 mm stub roll to optimize dispenser capacity. .4 Side-hinged door for ease when opening and loading the dispenser. .5 Surface-mounted.
.2
.3
Section 10 28 10 Page 6 2011-06-10
2.3 NON-SECURE COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
.4
Surface Mounted Soap Dispenser (N4): fabricated of alloy 18-8 stainless steel, type 304 and shall have a capacity of 1.18L. Mirror (N5): one piece channel frame, 13 mm x 13 mm x 13 mm, with bright polished finished and mitred corners; No. 1 quality 6 mm tempered glass mirror electrolytically copper plated, guaranteed against silver spoilage for 10 years. Mirror edges and back protected by shock absorbing material. Back to be galvanized steel. Secured by concealed wall hangers. 460 mm x 910 mm size. Tilt Mirror (N6): 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 with satin finish frame, tapers from 100 mm depth at top to 25 mm depth at bottom; galvanized steel back and inner liner stiffener frame is one piece welded construction; no. 1 quality 6 mm tempered glass mirror electrolytically copper plated, guaranteed against silver spoilage for 10 years. Mirror edges and back protected by shock absorbing material. Back to be galvanized steel. Secured by concealed wall hangers. Size to be 460 mm x 910 mm. Clothes Hook (N7): 18-8 stainless steel, Type 304 with satin finish all welded construction. Grab Bar (N8 & N9): 32 mm Diameter, stainless steel with peened gripping surface, concealed mounting. Lengths as shown on Drawings. Toilet Roll Holder (N10): Double roll model, surface mounted, bright polished chrome finish, heave duty brake springs for controlled delivery. Surface Mounted Sanitary Napkin Disposal (N11): 18-8 stainless steel, type 304 with satin finish, all welded construction having a capacity of 4.6L. Door shall be secure with full length piano hinge. Recessed Sanitary Napkin Disposal (N12): 18-8 stainless steel, type 304 with satin finish, all welded construction having a capacity of 4.6L. Door shall be secure with full length piano hinge.
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
Section 10 28 10 Page 7 2011-06-10
2.3 NON-SECURE COMPONENTS (Cont'd)
.12
Access Hatch (N14):18-8 stainless steel, type 304 18 gauge with satin finish; 25 mm stainless steel flange. Key operated cylinder lock (master keyed); 600 mm x 600 mm. Provide quantities and locate as required by mechanical services. Coordinate with mechanical, masonry and gypsum board assemblies.
2.4
FABRICATION
.1
Weld and grind joints of fabricated components flush and smooth. Use mechanical fasteners only where approved. Wherever possible form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints. Brake form sheet metal work with 1.5 mm radius bends. Form surfaces flat without distortion. Maintain flat surfaces without scratches or dents. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes to prevent electrolysis. Hot dip galvanize concealed ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices to CAN/CSA-G164. Shop assemble components and package complete with anchors and fittings. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to job site at appropriate time for building-in. Provide templates, details and instructions for building in anchors and inserts. Provide steel anchor plates and components for installation on studding and building framing.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
Section 10 28 10 Page 8 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Verification of Conditions: verify that conditions of substrates and surfaces to receive toilet and bathroom accessories previously installed under other Sections or Contracts are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions prior to toilet and bathroom accessories installation. Inform Departmental Representative of unacceptable conditions immediately upon discovery. Proceed with installation only after unacceptable conditions have been remedied and after receipt of written approval from Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
Install and secure accessories rigidly in place as follows: .1 Stud walls: install steel back-plate to stud prior to plaster or drywall finish. Provide plate with threaded studs or plugs. .2 Hollow masonry units, or drywall: use toggle bolts drilled into cell or wall cavity. .3 Solid masonry, marble, stone or concrete: use bolt with lead expansion sleeve set into drilled hole. Install washroom accessory fixtures, accessories, and items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and CAN/CSA B651-M. Provide exposed tamper-proof screws of stainless steel to match units. Install grab bars on built-in anchors provided by bar manufacturer. Use tamper proof screws/bolts for fasteners. Fill units with necessary supplies shortly before final acceptance of building. Install mirrors in accordance with Section 08 80 00.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.6
Section 10 28 10 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.3
ADJUSTING
.1
Adjust toilet and bathroom accessories components and systems for correct function and operation in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Lubricate moving parts to operate smoothly and fit accurately.
.2
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Progress Cleaning: clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Leave Work area clean at end of each day. Final Cleaning: upon completion remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling. .1 Remove recycling containers and bins from site and dispose of materials at appropriate facility.
.2
.3
3.5
PROTECTION
.1
Protect installed products and components from damage during construction. Repair damage to adjacent materials caused by toilet and bathroom accessories installation.
.2
3.6
SCHEDULE
.1
Locate accessories where indicated and as follows. Exact locations determined by Departmental Representative. Toilet tissue dispenser: one in each toilet compartment mounting heightas per manufacturer's written instructions. Paper towel dispenser: one in each washroom. Maximum height of dispenser and operable part from floor 1200 mm. Soap dispenser: one at each wash basin. Feminine napkin disposal bin: one in each female toilet compartment at manufacturer recommended mounting height.
.2
.3
.4 .5
Section 10 28 10 Page 10 2011-06-10
3.6 SCHEDULE (Cont'd)
.6
Shower rod and curtain: one at each shower compartment at manufacturer recommended mounting height. Shower seat: one at each shower at manufacturer recommended mounting height. Towel bar: one adjacent to shower unit at manufacturer recommended mounting height. Grab bar: two in each handicapped toilet compartment. Height of grab bar from floor 750 mm. Side grab bar: maximum distance from rear wall 300 mm, minimum distance passed front edge of toilet 450 mm. Robe hook: one at each washroom door. Waste receptacle: one for each towel dispensers, adjacent to wash basin area.
.7
.8
.9
.10 .11
END
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This Section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 30; 11 19 40; 11 19 50 and 11 19 60. Refer to Section 11 19 30, Article Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC). This Section describes the base building Detention Quality Hardware, Detention Equipment and related Finish Hardware. Limits and scope of work under these Sections shall be defined in these specifications and correspondingly shown on the drawings. Provide materials, labour, equipment and services necessary to furnish, deliver and install work of this section.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Furnish all labour and materials for the supply and installation of detention hardware capable of supporting operations to the parameters as defined herein. Be responsible for the complete supply and execution of all components including related commercial hardware specified within this Section.
.2
Include the supply, installation and termination of all cabling and pneumatic tubing within frame assemblies and from door devices to remote junction boxes, as may be applicable to form a complete operating pneumatic system for devices specified within this Section. Include the supply and installation of all Pneumatic Head End Equipment and terminations of all pneumatic lines at main and sub-manifolds, head end pneumatic equipment, pneumatic control valves and the Remote Manual Emergency Release System (RMERS).
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor) and pneumatic tubing (supplied by Section 11 19 20 DEC Contractor) in conduit and wire trays provided by Electrical Contractor (Division 26). Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted.
.5
Coordinate control cabling, low voltage wires and pneumatic tubing in conduit, raceways and cable trays with Section 11 19 20 DEC Contractor and Electrical Contractor (Division 26).
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
Reference standards: .1 ANSI American National Standards Institute. .2 ANSI/NAAMM/HMMA, Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM). .3 ASTM American Standards Testing Methods. .4 BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association. .5 CEC Canadian Electrical Code. .6 CSA, Canadian Standards Association. .7 NBC National Building Code, 2005. .8 National Fire Protection Association: .1 NFPA 80, Fire Doors and Windows. .2 NFPA 101, Life Safety Codes. .9 ULC, Underwriters Laboratories Canada. .10 All References to the latest edition.
1.4 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES
.1
Use only ULC or ULI listed and labeled hardware.
1.5
HARDWARE LIST
.1
Submit hardware schedule in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.5 HARDWARE LIST (Cont'd)
.2
Clearly indicate hardware proposed including make, model, material, function, finish and all other pertinent information. Headings shall include room designations, door numbers, door size and material, frame material, handing, fire resistance rating, degree of opening, and original hardware group. Each opening shall have its own item number and only door and hardware assemblies which are identical in every detail may be grouped together regardless of the original hardware group. Original hardware group provides the intent, but may not include all of the detailed items to complete the hardware assembly. It is the responsibility of this Section to ensure the hardware assembly complies with the intent of the original hardware group A schedule of mounting heights shall be included with shop drawings. Provide separate schedules for secure and non-secure (Builders Type) doors. Each opening shall have its own item number and only door and hardware assemblies which are identical in every detail may be grouped together. Product description shall be complete in every detail as recommended by the manufacturer under ordering procedures including sizes and fasteners. Shop drawings not submitted in accordance with contract documents will be rejected outright. Be responsible for any costs incurred due to delays as a result of Submittals not in accordance with contract documents.
.3
1.6 QUALITY .1 ASSURANCE DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR
A single Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC) having met all the requirements listed hereafter and having been approved by the owners representative will assume control and accountability for furnishing, installing and interfacing all Detention Hardware and Equipment as specified herein.
.2
The DEC shall have a minimum of ten (10) years documented experience furnishing detention hardware and shall be registered in the Province of Ontario with adequate equipment, maintenance and advisory facilities
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 4 2011-06-10
.2 (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) in the location of the project to fulfill contract obligations.
.3
The DEC shall have in there employ a full time Superintendent who will be directly responsible for the supervision and coordination of work in this section. The Superintendent shall have a minimum of ten (10) years of documented experience in the supervision of all phases of detention hardware installation.
.4
Superintendent shall have worked on at least two (2) detention facility projects of similar character and magnitude as required for the specified work. The DEC shall provide a written statement outlining superintendents experience and contact references, and if requested shall provide a demonstration of said qualifications to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative prior to commencing work. The DEC shall provide proof of factory certification from the detention hardware manufacturer for the appointed superintendent. Any changes to the approved superintendent shall require written approval of the Departmental Representative.
.5
Hardware shall be installed by qualified factory authorized and trained trades people regularly engaged in the installation of detention hardware. Installers shall have a minimum of ten (10) years documented experience in the installation of detention hardware of the type required for this project. The DEC shall provide a written statement outlining installers experience and contact references and, if requested shall provide a demonstration of said qualifications to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative prior to commencing work. Any changes to the approved installation crews shall require written approval of the Departmental Representative.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 5 2011-06-10
.6
Hardware shall comply with the current issue of codes and standards as listed in References.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE MANUFACTURERS
.1
The DEC must provide detention locks and equipment from manufacturing firms, who at present have products with not less than ten (10) successful years of field experience and shall now be actively engaged in the design and manufacture of detention locks and detention equipment of the type required for this project. The manufacturer shall provide a list of at least five (5) projects (two of which have been in operation for at least three years), for which similar products are in operation. For each facility list the name and location of the facility, the owner's representative and contact numbers.
.2
Submit lock manufacturers' certified test reports from a nationally recognized testing firm acceptable to the Departmental Representative, that indicates that all locks and sliding door devices have successfully passed the standard test methods defined in ASTM F1450-05, Security Grade 1, 2 & 3 and ASTM F1592-05, Security Grade 1, 2 & 3.
.3
Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system during the final commissioning process.
1.8 SAMPLES AND MODELS
.1
Submit one full size sample of each type hardware specified, in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.2
Identify each sample by label indicating applicable specification paragraph number and type, brand name and number, finish and building location installation.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 6 2011-06-10
.3
Submit one full scale working model of cell door locking device complete with cell door locking device complete with cell door and frame, to fully demonstrate every detail of its operation.
.4
Pay all costs relative to submitting and removing samples and models.
1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS, .1 PRODUCT DATA AND INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS .2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Clearly indicate all information required for proper preparation and application of hardware. Submit shop drawings for each type locking device to show fabrication, layout, setting and erection details. Submit wiring diagrams and service requirements for electrically and electro-pneumatically operated hardware and equipment device types and locations, wiring schematics, conduit requirement and layout, template information, and cable allocations from junction boxes to devices and door/frame assemblies and service requirements. Furnish door and frame manufacturers with complete instructions and templates for preparation of their work to receive hardware.
.3
.4
.5
1.10 MAINTENANCE DATA AND INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide maintenance data, parts list and manufacturer's instructions for each type of lock, door closer, electric deadbolt, and locking device for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Brief maintenance staff regarding proper care of hardware and locking devices, such as lubrication, adjustments, cleaning, and general instructions.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 7 2011-06-10
.1
Supply two spanner tools for each size spanner screw on job, both manual and power driven. Supply two sets of wrenches for each type of door closer.
.2
.1
Store all hardware and locking devices in locked, clean and dry area. Package each item of hardware including fastenings, separately or in like groups of hardware, label each package as to item definition and location. Maintain inventory list with hardware schedule.
.2
.3
1.13 ENGINEERING AND TECHNICAL SUPERVISION
.1
Provide qualified engineering and technical supervision commencing at date contract is awarded and continuing until Final Certificate of Completion is issued. Qualified supervisor will have been actively engaged in prison security hardware business for not less than five years. Upon completion of work, and prior to issuance of Final Certificate of Completion, the DEC shall ensure that a factory representative from the detention hardware manufacturer will be present through the final commissioning process and sign off the entire locking and pneumatic system to the satisfaction of the Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
1.14 SEQUENCING AND COORDINATION
.1
Confer with various sections of work and refer to detail drawings prior to ordering hardware to ensure that they will conform to and fit actual conditions on site. Refer to door schedule for correct sizing of hardware.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 8 2011-06-10
.2
Co-ordinate hardware components with all affected door and frame manufacturers to ensure correct door and frame preparation. Inform and coordinate with manufacturers where conduit may be required within their respective assemblies and provide all required templates and physical samples of each hardware item for door and frame preparation to Section 11 19 30, 11 19 40, and 11 19 50.
.3
Coordinate final conduit system design and electrical service allocations with Electrical Contractor (Division 26). Complete system riser diagrams indicating location of all conduit runs, wire trays, and electrical riser rooms for the door control system shall be prepared by Electrical Contractor (Division 26). These riser diagrams shall be reviewed by the Division 11 contractor for correctness with respect to layout, functionality and logistics. Based on these drawings the Division 11 DEC contractor will provide riser drawings all pneumatic supply lines, indicate locations of all pneumatic equipment and coordinate continuity of the entire electro-pneumatic supply system layout with The Electrical Contractor (Division 26); prior to commencement of work on site.
.4
Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor shall provide electrical schematic drawings clearly indicating all conductors, monitors, power circuits, field wiring diagrams and lock pigtail configuration schematics to the Division 11 DEC contractor for review; prior to commencement of work on site.
.5
No deviations, modifications or changes from the information contained in these drawings, wiring diagrams and pneumatic line and equipment layout drawings shall be allowed without prior written approval from the Departmental Representative. Immediately advise the Departmental Representative of any
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 9 2011-06-10
.5 (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) modifications required to ensure proper functionality of the pneumatic locks.
.6
Provide schematic documentation support as required and coordinate all electronic hardware with Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 door control system Contractor to ensure the correct interface between door devices and door control system(s).
.7
Review and confirm all locking functions and lock status monitoring requirements with the Departmental Representative prior to ordering hardware.
.8
Substantial corrosion resistant pull strings to be installed in all conduits by The Electrical Contractor (Division 26).
.9
The Division 11 DEC contractor is responsible for the complete coordination and layout of the pneumatic distribution system and equipment as it relates to Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Adherence to the approved shop drawings and equipment layout design by all related trades is the responsibility of this Section.
.10
Confirm all sill details and correct site specific threshold application.
1.15
WARRANTY
.1
For door closers of this Section, provide manufacturers 10 year warranty against defects in design, workmanship, materials and finishes.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 10 2011-06-10
1.16
COMMISSIONING
.1
Coordinate with Section 01 91 00 for general commissioning requirements.
.2
Commissioning and verification of Pneumatic Locking System: .1 The pneumatic locking system is to be commissioned and verified by an independent manufacturer's representative to ensure the system is installed and operating to the requirements of the specifications. .2 Submit a commissioning verification report completed by the lock manufacturer's representative upon completion of testing and verification. Commissioning and verification to include: .1 All head end equipment and systems in the Communications Room. .2 All pneumatic sliding door devices and all pneumatic swing doors. .3 The complete Remote Manual Emergency Release System. .3 Review and confirm that all detention doors and locking hardware have been installed within factory required tolerances. .4 Notify Departmental Representative of any and all discrepancies and concerns.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
HARDWARE ITEMS
.1
Use one manufacturer's products only for all similar items. Provide the following conventional hardware to detention areas: .1 Door Closer: Refer to Section 08 71 11. .2 Weatherstripping: Refer to 08 71 11. .3 Threshold: Refer to Section 08 71 11. .4 Automatic Door Bottoms: Refer to Section 08 71 11.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 11 2011-06-10
2.2 FASTENING DEVICES
.1
Provide security screws, security nuts, rivets, spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various hardware items. Use only rivets, security screws, or security nuts at locations where maximum security against removal is required. Use spanner screws only at locations where security against removal is not as important, and where it is necessary to remove and repair items from time to time. Security screws and nuts to have an extra head which twists off when screw or nut is fully secured, leaving main head without holes or slots for insertion of tool for removal. Spanner screws to be tamper resistant Torx with pin requiring special spanner tool to remove screws. Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. Standard screws not acceptable. Use fasteners compatible with material through which they pass. Exposed fastening devices to match finish of hardware.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8
.9
2.3
KEYING
.1
Prepare keying schedule in consultation with the Departmental Representative. Keying system to include keying alike in groups and in relationship to existing alike groups and keying differently. Submit schedule for approval prior to ordering hardware. Master keying not allowed. Construction key cores are permitted for construction purposes. Construction cores are to be replaced with permanent cores and keyed to match the Institution's key coding requirements.
.2 .3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 12 2011-06-10
2.3 KEYING (Cont'd)
.4 .5
Provide keys in triplicate for each key-code. Stamp key-code numbers on keys, prison lock cases, and institutional lock cylinders. Stamp year of issue on prison keys. Deliver keys via bonded courier or registered mail to person and place designated by Departmental Representative. Certify that lock manufacturer maintains a register listing all key-codes issued to this project to ensure that replacement keys may be ordered by key-code number only in future, and that locks added in future will not accidentally duplicate existing codes. Assign key-code numbers which identify the institution, plus the particular key-code within the institution. Key-code numbers which directly relate to the actual physical cuts on the keys, not allowed.
.6
.7
.8
.9
2.4
HINGES
.1
Type 1A2: .1 Style, full surface, three-knuckle type, with special steel wing on leaf for holding foodpass door at 90. .2 Size, 76 mm high x 102 mm minimum wide. .3 Hinge leaves, 10 mm thick malleable iron or steel. .4 Hinge pin, 11 mm minimum diameter knurled and hardened steel (non-removable). .5 Fasteners, four 10 mm diameter flat head security screws. .6 Finish, CP. .7 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 603FP, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 3FP, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 203FP, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 13 2011-06-10
2.4 HINGES (Cont'd)
.1
Type 1A2:(Cont'd) .7 Acceptable material:(Cont'd) .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Type 1A3: .1 Style, full surface, half surface or gap type, three-knuckle type. .2 Size, 127 mm high x 121 mm minimum wide (width may vary). .3 Hinge leaves, 10 mm minimum thickness drop forged mild steel. .4 Bearings, two needle thrust and two needle radial bearings or twelve 6 mm diameter balls per hinge. .5 Hinge pin, 11 mm minimum diameter knurled and hardened steel (non-removable). .6 Fasteners, six 11 mm minimum diameter flat head security screws. .7 Finish, CP or galvanized. .8 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 605, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 5, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 205, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Type 1B3: .1 Style, full mortise or half mortise, three-knuckle type (cast stainless steel). .2 Size, 114 mm high x 114 mm wide. .3 Hinge leaves, 5 mm minimum thickness investment-cast stainless steel with 12 mm diameter x 13 mm long studs on each leaf. .4 Ball bearings, 10 mm diameter stainless steel. .5 Ball races, hardened tool steel. .6 Hinge pin, stainless steel tubing (non-removable fully concealed with hospital tips and permanently lubricated).
.2
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 14 2011-06-10
2.4 HINGES (Cont'd)
.3
Type 1B3:(Cont'd) .7 Fasteners, eight No. 12 flat head stainless steel security screws. .8 Finish, 630. .9 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 640 FMCS, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 41/2 FM-1CS, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 604FMCS, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.5 KEY OPERATED LOCKS
.1
Following features are common to all locks Type 3A: .1 All have five lever tumblers of "spring temper" hard brass, each tumbler 3 mm thick and actuated by phosphor bronze spring. .2 All have key cylinders of polished alloy bronze having hardness and tensile strength equal to mild steel. Each cylinder grooved to match and guide similar grooves in key. .3 All operate by key type 14A1. Type 3A6 (combination spring and deadlock): .1 Case and cover malleable iron and steel, size 114 mm high x 210 mm wide x 38 mm thick. .2 Lockbolt solid steel 51 mm x 19 mm in size with two hardened steel inserts 6 mm diameter inserted into blind holes from inside of lock. .3 Bolt throw 19 mm. .4 Finish: bright zinc plated. .5 Keyed: one side (K1S) or two sides (K2S). .6 Fasteners, four 10 mm diameter flat head spanner security machine screws. .7 When door closes, bevel bolt latches only. It is retractable by half turn of key. Full turn of key in opposite direction securely deadlocks bevel bolt.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 15 2011-06-10
2.5 KEY OPERATED LOCKS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .8 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 5060, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 60, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 1060, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Type 3A9 (deadlock): .1 Case and cover: drop forged steel, size 95 mm x 140 mm wide x 38 mm thick. .2 Bolt throw 19 mm. .3 Finish: Galvanized. .4 Keyed: one side (K1S) or two sides (K2S). .5 Fasteners, four 10 mm diameter flat head spanner security machine screws. .6 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 5080, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 80, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 1080, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Following feature is common to all locks Type 3B: .1 Key cylinders "mogul" type with 51 mm barrel diameter containing six pin stainless steel engaging tumblers and key.
.3
.4
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 16 2011-06-10
.5
Type 3B6 (food pass spring latch): .1 Case and cover: high strength allow and steel, size 70 mm high x 102 mm wide x 32 mm thick. .2 Lock bolt: stainless steel with 11.1 mm throw. .3 Lock bolt size: 25.4 mm x 11.1 mm. .4 Finish: Bright Zinc Plated. .5 Keyed: one side only. .6 Fasteners: four 8 mm diameter flat head security machine screws (twist-off head type). .7 Mogul key cylinder. .8 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 5017M, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 17M, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 1017M, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Type 3B7 (Institutional Mortis Lock): designed for medium security applications where lever or knob operation required: .1 Function: Series 400 meeting ASTM F1577b. .2 Impact Test Level: Deadbolt and deadbolt latch bolt functions meeting Level 1 (600 impacts), ASTM F1577b. .3 Impact Test Level: Latch bolt functions only meeting Level 3 (200 impacts), ASTM F1577b. .4 Case and Cover: 2.5 mm heavy duty wrought steel, zinc dichromate plated. .5 ANSI Strike: universal stainless steel with C32D finish. .6 Faceplate: 1.6 mm stainless steel. .7 Latch bolt: stainless steel 19 mm one piece, anti-friction latch bolt. Meeting all dimensional keep tabs specifications of ANSI A156.13. .8 Deadbolt Actuation: stainless steel. .9 Lever Handle: solid stainless steel.
.6
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 17 2011-06-10
.6
(Cont'd) .10 Safety knob: solid stainless steel (inside room). .11 Key cylinder: Mogul. .12 Latch bolt throw: 19 mm. .13 Fasteners: security spanner machine screws. High security tapered cylinder collar. .14 High security rose. .15 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 90477 x L/SK, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 125-4-03, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 10577, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.6 STRIKES FOR KEY OPERATED PRISON LOCKS
.1
Type 4A1 (with dust box): .1 Material, 5 mm mild steel. .2 Fasteners, four 6 mm diameter flat head security screws. .3 Include steel box on reverse side to protect against mortar and dust. .4 Finish CP or galvanized. .5 Design to include round-edged lip when strike used in conjunction with springbolt lock. .6 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 690-4DB, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 4DB, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 6070C, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 18 2011-06-10
2.6 STRIKES FOR KEY OPERATED PRISON LOCKS (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .6 Acceptable material:(Cont'd) .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Type 4A2 (with micro-switch on dust box): .1 Materials, 5 mm mild steel. .2 Fasteners, four 6 mm diameter flat head security screws. .3 Finish CP or galvanized. .4 Design to include round-edged lip when strike used in conjunction with spring bolt lock. .5 Include one single pole double throw switch on each, positioned so as to be actuated by locking action of lockbolt. .6 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 690-4BL, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 4BL, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 6070CL, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Type 4A3 (for fence posts on chain link fences): .1 Material: 6 mm mild steel, formed into channel shape to suit fence post. .2 Fasteners, three 10 mm diameter hex head bolts and matching hex nuts for bolting through fence post. .3 Finish, galvanized. .4 Height, same as matching lock mounting box.
.2
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 19 2011-06-10
2.7 LOCK MOUNTINGS FOR KEY OPERATED PRISON LOCKS
.1
Type 5A1 (for flush mounting prison locks in detention doors) hollow metal: .1 Material, single 5 mm flat mild steel plate, size variable so suit lock. .2 Fasteners, eight 6 mm diameter flat head Tamper Resistant torx with pin security screws. .3 Include one type 11A1 escutcheon on each. .4 Finish CP. .5 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq HM, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. HM, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. HM, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. For exterior doors, lock mountings are to have same features as type 5A1 inclusive, plus the following: .1 Ferrous materials to be galvanized. .2 Include 1 type 11A2 cylinder shield on each instead of escutcheon, on exterior. .3 Type number in Hardware Schedule to be: .1 5A5 instead of 5A1.
.2
2.8 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS
.1
Following features are common to all type 7A electro-mechanical locks: .1 All have five lever tumblers of "spring temper" hard brass, each tumbler 3 mm thick and actuated by phospor bronze spring. .2 All have key cylinders of polished alloy bronze having hardness and tensile strength equal to mild steel. Each cylinder grooved to match and guide similar grooves in key. .3 All operate by key type 14B, when key operation desired. .4 All have steel cases 5 mm thick. .5 All operate on 24VDC (standard), 120VAC or 220 VAC (optional).
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 20 2011-06-10
2.8 ELECTROMECHANICAL LOCKS (Cont'd)
.2
Type 7A1 (for exterior swinging chain link fence gate requiring emergency egress function): .1 Lock case: not to exceed 254 mm high x 127 mm wide x 51 mm deep; all steel construction with galvanized finish. .2 Electric operation: electro-mechanical. .3 Unlock electrically: by push button at Unit Control. .4 Deadbolt retracts and remains retracted until door is closed. .5 Mogul key cylinder complete with cylinder extension to allow for manual mechanical unlocking of the lock by key at the opening, both sides for lock. .1 Acceptable material (lock): .1 Airteq 9724 Series, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .6 Alternative: Paracentric key to allow for manual mechanical unlocking of the lock by key at the opening, both sides. DEC contractor responsible to modify frame to allow lock pocket for keying both sides, extra width for door frame to accommodate wider lock and all engineering and consulting costs to revise rough opening dimensions for wider frame opening; for locks as noted below. .1 Acceptable material (alternative): .1 Folger Adam No. 50E Series, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .2 Southern Steel No. 1050E Series, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .7 Fail secure, unlocks when energized. .8 Security Level: ASTM F 1577 Grade 1. .9 Dead bolt: 50mm x 17mm precision machined alloy steel hardened to RC 60. .10 Corrosion-resistant working parts. .11 Indication Switch (A): A lock status switch monitors the deadbolt and its deadlock condition. .12 Motor 2 phase, bi-polar, brushless linear actuator: 36 watt max. at 24 VDC 1.5 Amps.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 21 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .13 Electrical Connector: Quick connect with colour coded wiring harness. .14 Junction Box: 100 mm high x 203 mm wide x 89 mm deep welded to bottom of lock case; 7 gauge steel construction with galvanized finish. .15 Lock cover plate: 405 mm high x 203 mm wide x 7 gauge steel construction with galvanized finish. Torx with Pin security fasteners as shown on drawings. .16 Finish: Galvanized. .17 Keyed: two sides (K2S). .18 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 9724, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 50E, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 1050E, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Acceptable Manufacturers: .1 Except as otherwise specified herein, the equipment and materials of this section shall be components fabricated by one single manufacturer. The following manufacturers are pre-qualified to supply the products specified under this Section .1 Airteq Systems (AT), Montgomery, AL. .2 Folger Adam Security Inc. (FA), Lamont, IL. .3 Southern Steel Company (SSCO), San Antonio, TX. .4 Note: Prequalification is not acceptance of manufacturers standard products. Prequalification is only approval to supply products meeting all specifications herein. .2 Following features are common to all Type 7 electro-mechanical locks for all
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 22 2011-06-10
.3
Acceptable Manufacturers:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) individual swinging gates, complete with integral electronic components. .1 Function: .1 Normal Operation: .1 When electrical power is applied to the stepper motor, the latch bolt shall retract. The bolt shall remain retracted as long as power is applied. .2 When power is removed, the latch bolt shall extend, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .2 Electronic Key Operation (KS): .1 Each lock shall be equipped with an electronic key switch. .2 Rotating the key one quarter turn shall automatically retract the lock bolt electro-mechanically. Removing the key shall extend the bolt, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .3 Manual Operation: .1 Each lock shall have a local manual key override lock / unlock feature. Keyed two sides (K2S). .2 Rotating the key shall mechanically retract the latch bolt. Removing the key shall extend the bolt, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .2 Components: .1 Mechanical: .1 Lock shall operate as a fail-secure slam-lock. Unlocks when energized. .2 Lock body shall be made of steel. .3 Lock shall be supplied with a security ring to protect the key cylinder. The security ring will be supplied unpainted for installation in the metal
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 23 2011-06-10
.3
Acceptable Manufacturers:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .2 Components:(Cont'd) frame by the frame manufacturer. .4 Cylinder extensions shall be provided for locks keyed 2 sides or keyed stop side. Electrical: .1 The motor shall be a 2 phase, bi-polar, brushless linear actuator. Power consumption - 36 watt, 24VDC, 1.5AMP. .2 Lock shall be provided with a lock status switch to provide interlocking capabilities. .3 Switches shall be of the snap acting mechanical type, UL recognized and rated at 5 amps. .4 Lock shall be factory wired to a Molex plug disconnect. .5 Lock status switch shall provide for deadlock indication.
.2
2.9 ELECTROPNEUMATIC LOCKS
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: .1 Except as otherwise specified herein, the equipment and materials of this section shall be components fabricated by one single manufacturer. The following manufacturers are pre-qualified to supply the products specified under this Section. .1 Airteq Systems (AT), Montgomery, AL. .2 Folger Adam Security Inc. (FA), Lamont, IL. .3 Southern Steel Company (SSCO), San Antonio, TX. .4 Note: Prequalification is not acceptance of manufacturers standard products. Prequalification is only approval to supply products meeting all specifications herein. Following features are common to all Type 7C electro-pneumatic locks for all individual
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 24 2011-06-10
2.9 ELECTROPNEUMATIC LOCKS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) swinging doors, complete with integral electronic and pneumatic components. .1 Function: .1 Normal Operation: .1 When electrical power is applied to the solenoid valve, the latch bolt shall retract. The bolt shall remain retracted as long as power is applied. .2 When power is removed, the latch bolt shall extend, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .2 Electronic Key Operation (KS): .1 Each lock shall be equipped with an electronic key switch. .2 Rotating the key one quarter turn shall automatically retract the lock bolt electro-pneumatically. Removing the key shall extend the bolt, locking the door closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .3 Manual Operation: .1 Each lock shall have a local manual key override lock/unlock feature. Keyed two sides (K2S), keyed one side (K1S). .2 Rotating the key shall mechanically retract the latch bolt. Removing the key shall extend the bolt, locking the door if closed, and allowing the door to be slam-locked if open. .2 Components: .1 Mechanical: .1 Lock shall operate when supplied with air between 40 PSIG minimum and 125 PSIG maximum. .2 Lock shall operate as a fail-secure slam-lock. Unlocks when energized. .3 Lock body shall be made of steel. .4 Lock shall be factory plumbed with a quick connect air fitting. .5 Lock shall be supplied with a security ring to protect the key cylinder. The security ring will be supplied unpainted for installation
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 25 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Components:(Cont'd) .1 Mechanical:(Cont'd) in the hollow metal frame by the hollow metal manufacturer. .6 Cylinder extensions shall be provided for locks keyed 2 sides or keyed stop side. .2 Electrical: .1 Solenoid valve shall be 1.5 watt, VDC, continuous rated by valve manufacturer. .2 Lock shall be provided with a lock status switch to provide interlocking capabilities. .3 Switches shall be of the snap acting mechanical type, UL recognized and rated at 5 amps. .4 Lock shall be factory wired to a Molex plug disconnect. .5 Lock status switch shall provide for deadlock indication. .3 Special Features: Where specified in the lock types, security hardware groups or door schedule, the following features shall be provided: .1 Remote Latch Holdback Feature (RLHB): Latch bolt is retracted by the push of a button at the control panel and remains electrically retracted until the button is pushed a second time. Latch bolt extends when power is removed, regardless of the door position. Note: This is an electronic control function and must be coordinated with the locking control system. NOT USED. .2 Key Operated Latch Holdback Feature (KLHB): Latch bolt is retracted locally by key and remains mechanically retracted until relocked with the key. NOT USED. .3 Emergency Latch Holdback Feature (ELHB): Latch bolt is retracted by remote electronic control and remains mechanically retracted until relocked locally by key. NOT USED. .4 UL10B: Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (US): electronically controlled single
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 26 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .2 Components:(Cont'd) .3 Special Features:(Cont'd) point lock for use on swing rated doors having a rating and including 3 hours. .5 Key Cylinder Extension Recommended for locks keyed side or keyed two sides. fire up to (KCE): on stop
.3
Type 7C1: Maximum security remote controlled pneumatic operated lock for individual swing doors that complies with the standard test methods defined in ASTM F1577, Security Grade (1,2). A 178mm frame mounted slam-lock with automatic dead locking. .1 The lock shall automatically deadlock when the door is slam-locked in the manual mode, even in the event of a total loss of air and / or electric power. .2 Latch bolt shall be 51mm x 19mm alloy steel cast hardened Rockwell C60 to depth of 0.8mm and shall have a 25mm throw and 60,000 pound shear strength. .3 Lock shall have a mechanical roller-bolt deadlock door actuator and shall automatically deadlock when it is closed. .4 Finish: Bright Zinc and stainless steel parts. .5 Mogul key cylinder complete with cylinder extension to allow for manual mechanical unlocking of the lock by key at the opening, both sides for lock. .1 Acceptable material (lock): .1 Airteq 9700 Series, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .6 Alternative: Paracentric key to allow for manual mechanical unlocking of the lock by key at the opening, both sides. DEC contractor responsible to modify frame to allow lock pocket for keying both sides, extra width for door frame to accommodate wider lock and all engineering and consulting costs to revise rough opening dimensions for wider frame opening; for Folger Adam 50P Series lock and Southern Steel 1051P Series lock.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 27 2011-06-10
.3
Type 7C1:(Cont'd) .6 Alternative:(Cont'd) .1 Acceptable material (alternative): .1 Folger Adam No. 50P Series, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .2 Southern Steel No. 1051P Series, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .7 Keyed: one side (K1S) or two sides (K2S). .8 Optional Features to be provided: KS, KC E for doors keyed both sides. .9 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 9700, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 50P, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No. 1051P, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Type 7C2: Medium security remote controlled pneumatic operated lock for individual swing doors that complies with the standard test methods defined in ASTM F1577, Security Grade (2). A 50mm frame mounted slam-lock with automatic dead locking. .1 The lock shall automatically deadlock when the door is slam-locked in the manual mode, even in the event of a total loss of air and / or electric power. .2 Latchbolt shall be 50mm x 19mm alloy steel cast hardened Rockwell C 60 to a depth of 0.8mm and shall have a 19mm throw and 20,000 pound shear strength. .3 Lock shall have a mechanical roller-bolt deadlock door actuator and shall automatically deadlock when it is closed.
.4
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 28 2011-06-10
.4
Type 7C2:(Cont'd) .4 Finish: Bright Zinc and stainless steel parts. .5 Lock shall be supplied with Cylinder(s) to match the Institution's existing cylinders. .6 Strike/Keeper: 3 mm case hardened 1018 cold rolled steel, nickel plated with spanner screws. .7 Keyed: one side (K1S) or two sides (K2S). .8 Optional Features to be provided: KS. .9 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 9400, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. NS400P, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No.10300P, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.10 DOOR POSITION INDICATOR SWITCHES
.1
Type 8B1 (mortised magnetic model): .1 Size 124 mm x 32 mm x 25 mm. .2 Switch unit to contain single pole double throw switch and mount flush in door frame. .3 Magnetic unit to mount flush in top channel of door. .4 Door position indicators shall be concealed flush mounted multi-biased switches mounted on an ANSI mounting plate. Switches shall have co-planar operation requiring the magnet pack to be in the same narrow read angle as the switch module and shall incorporate an integral normally open tamper switch. Switches shall have capability for remote electronic testing of each switch operation. .5 Door position indicators shall be furnished with female AMP or MOLEX type connector. Lead extension shall be furnished with matching male AMP or MOLEX
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 29 2011-06-10
2.10 DOOR POSITION INDICATOR SWITCHES (Cont'd)
.4
Type 7C2:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) type connector. Testing and replacement must be accomplished independently without removing lock assembly. Door position indication and bolt position indication from lock assembly shall run separately to the junction box. Both switches will provide separate outputs to the door control system. Lead extension to provide 450 mm of slack for each after reaching lock and/or junction box. .6 Door position indicator switches shall be flush mounted in frame header at 150 mm on center line in from lock jamb. Corresponding magnet shall be flush mounted in top of door to matching location of switch. Confirm that templating conflicts do not arise from other mortised hardware items such as concealed overhead stops. Ensure magnet capacity will provide constant and uninterrupted closing of the switch when activated. .7 Finish: C32D. .8 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq DPS 6200, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. ASSW-105A, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No.200MRS, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .9 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 30 2011-06-10
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS, CYLINDER SHIELDS, PULL HANDLES, FOOT BOLT RECEPTACLES
.1
Escutcheon type 11A1: .1 Material, 3 mm thick stainless steel, C32D finish. .2 Outside diameter 76 mm. .3 Fasteners: two 6 mm diameter oval Tamper Resistant Torx with pin. .4 Single wing. .5 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 601, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 1, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No.218, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Cylinder shield type 11A2: .1 Material, 3 mm thick stainless steel. .2 Outside diameter 76 mm. .3 Fasteners: two 6 mm diameter oval Tamper Resistant Torx with pin. .4 Double wing. .5 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 682 CS, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 2CS, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No.219, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Flush pull type 11A4: .1 Material, manganese bronze. .2 Dimensions, 107 mm x 102 mm x 3 mm. .3 Pocket setback 25 mm.
.2
.3
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 31 2011-06-10
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS, CYLINDER SHIELDS, PULL HANDLES, FOOT BOLT RECEPTACLES (Cont'd)
.3
Flush pull type 11A4:(Cont'd) .4 Fasteners: four 6 mm oval head Tamper Resistant Torx with pin screws. .5 Finish C26D. .6 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 614, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 4, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No.214, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Door pull type 11A5: .1 Material, manganese bronze. .2 Overall length 219 mm. .3 Hand hold 133 mm long. .4 Clearance between grip and door, 38 mm. .5 Fasteners: two 10 mm oval head Tamperp Resistant Torx with pin. .6 Finish C26D. .7 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 612, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 2, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No.212, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Door stop type 11A7: .1 Material: non-hazardous black silicone elastomer, 80 durometer. .2 Dimensions: 90 mm projection x 51 mm diameter.
.4
.5
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 32 2011-06-10
2.11 ESCUTCHEONS, CYLINDER SHIELDS, PULL HANDLES, FOOT BOLT RECEPTACLES (Cont'd)
.5
Door stop type 11A7:(Cont'd) .3 Fastener: threaded and grooved steel mounting shank 19 mm diameter and embedded at least half the length of the bumper. Mounting shank shall extend 65 mm beyond the bumper bottom for embedding into concrete filled masonry or concrete. Either wall or floor mounted. .4 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 650, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.12
KEYS
.1
Type 14A1: .1 Paracentric type not less than 114 mm in length. Blade to be 22 mm wide x 4 mm thick, with overlapping paracentric grooves to match similar grooves in lock cylinders. .2 Key bow to be rectangular or oval shape, to properly fit hand, 57 mm 35 mm in size, separated from blade by 13 mm x 38 mm shank to provide clearance for hand. .3 Material: alloy bronze having tensile strength not less than Brinnell 150. .4 Factory stamp assigned key-code number on each key. Type 14B1: .1 Mogul type not less than 80.3mm in length. Blade to be 14mm wide x 3mm thick with linear grooves to match keyway in mogul cylinder. .2 Key bow to be rectangular shape to properly fit hand, 25mm x 38mm. in size, separated from blade by 6.9mm x 22.37mm shoulder to provide clearance for hand. .3 Material: Investment cast silicone bronze alloy. .4 Factory stamp assigned key-code number on each key.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 33 2011-06-10
2.13 LOCKING DEVICES
.1
Type 16B1: .1 A maximum security remote operated, two point rear locking pneumatic locking device for sliding cell doors that complies with the standard test methods for detention sliding door locking device assembly defined in ASTM F1643, Security Grade (1,2). This mechanism to be installed on all sliding cell doors. .2 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 8220 Airglide, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. 2B.3P, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No.8050L, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. .3 Function: .1 Normal Operation: .1 When the door is locked closed, activation of the "open" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move to the fully open position and automatically deadlock. .2 When the door is locked open, activation of "closed" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move to the fully closed position and automatically deadlock. .3 Locking devices shall be capable of being controlled individually and in groups. .4 Operator shall be capable of opening or closing the door at a speed of 300 mm per second. Door speed shall be independently adjustable at each door. .5 Door shall decelerate as it reaches the full open or full closed position and not "bang" or bounce when reaching the full open or full close position.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 34 2011-06-10
2.13 LOCKING DEVICES (Cont'd)
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .3 Function:(Cont'd) .1 Normal Operation:(Cont'd) .6 Operating force shall be factory set at 40 pounds. However, this shall be adjustable from 20 to 40 pounds. The operating force shall be set independently adjustable at each door. .7 Device shall provide for sufficient resistance to prevent freewheeling of the door in the event of total loss of air supply/and or electric power. .8 If an obstruction is placed in the path of the door, the door shall resume movement in the selected direction. The operator must be capable of being stalled indefinitely without harming the device. .9 Operator shall be capable of "instantly" stopping the door or reversing the direction of the door travel at any point and immediately resuming the pre-set travel speed of the door. .10 Whenever a door is stopped in any intermediate position, it shall be possible to manually move the door to the full open or full closed position and the door will automatically deadlock. .11 Mechanisms that hold the lock bar in place with air, spring or gravity pressure will not be accepted. .2 Manual Operation: .1 In the event of a total loss of air supply and/or electric power, individual doors may be released manually at the door with a tool inserted through a security access in the housing cover. With the lock mechanism released, moving the door manually to the full open or full closed position shall cause the door to be automatically locked. .2 Manual operation of any door shall not interfere with the normal operation of other doors.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 35 2011-06-10
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .4 Components: .1 Mechanical: .1 Non-fire-rated doors shall be equipped with Delrin POM concave arcuate rollers and shall run on 25 mm diameter alloy steel track; engaging surface to provide for smooth quiet operation. Door rollers shall be self-lubricating, incorporating sealed lifetime lubricated bearings. .2 Fire-rated doors (if required) shall have steel concave arcuate rollers and shall run on 25 mm diameter alloy steel track; engaging surface to provide for smooth quiet operation. Door rollers shall be self-lubricating, incorporating sealed lifetime lubricated bearings. .3 Roller axels shall be constructed of 8620 alloy cold drawn steel with a hardness of 58-62 Rockwell C. Roller/axel assembly shall provide for up/down and in/out adjustment of door. .4 Roller track shall be constructed of a single solid piece of 25 mm diameter 1018 cold drawn steel. .5 Door shall lock at the top and bottom in both the open and closed positions. .6 The vertical lock bar shall be mechanically connected to the lock mechanism at all times. .7 The locking mechanism shall include an automatic mechanical deadlock feature. Mechanisms that hold the lock bar in place with air pressure, spring pressure or gravity pressure will not be accepted. .8 Vertical locking column to be formed out of 10 GA steel or equivalent tubing. .9 Top and bottom door guides must be designed to limit side motion of door to plus or minus. 76 mm or less to significantly reduce rattle induced noises.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 36 2011-06-10
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .4 Components:(Cont'd) .1 Mechanical:(Cont'd) .10 Bottom door guide shall have replaceable wear pads to provide for smooth silent operation. .2 Electrical: .1 All devices shall be factory wired to a multi pin connector located within the housing above the door. .2 All switches necessary for the function of the device and for door status indication shall be U.L. recognized. .3 All limit switches shall be rated 5 amps. .4 All solenoid valves shall be rated by the manufacturer for continuous operation. .5 Control of the door shall require no more than three wires from the controls. .6 Position indication of the lock and door shall require no more than three wires from the controls. .7 Device shall be supplied with status switches to provide indication and interlocking capabilities. .8 Status switches shall provide the following indications: .1 Deadlocked, closed. .2 Deadlocked, open. .3 Housing: .1 Housing covers to be constructed of 3.5 mm steel plate and shall be secured with security screws. .2 Housing cover to be of one piece construction, securely enclosing the top, front and bottom of the door operator. .3 The door hanger slot shall be securely baffled in both the door open and door closed positions. .4 To reduce the possibility of hidden contraband, there shall be no exposed flat surfaces on the housing or in the door hanger slot.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 37 2011-06-10
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .4 Components:(Cont'd) .3 Housing:(Cont'd) .5 The rear of the housing shall be constructed of 4.8 mm steel plate. .6 The housing shall protrude from the wall surface a maximum of 150 mm. The housing shall extend a maximum of 300 mm above the door opening. .7 In cases where device housings are not continuous, ends shall be neatly Closed and welded with 3.5 mm steel plate. .8 Hinged housing cover (HHC) feature provides for hinged covers on all individual devices; secured in place with security fasteners. .4 Features: .1 Where specified in the security hardware groups or door schedule the following features shall be provided. .2 Door skirt feature (DS) decreases standard 75 mm door undercut to 9 mm. .3 One hour ULC fire rating for sliding doors, where indicated in the Door Schedule. .4 Cell Door Skirt feature (CDS): to be constructed with 6 mm perforated steel plate with 6 mm diameter offset holes. .5 Cuffing Mode Operation (CMO): .1 When the door is locked closed, activation of the "CMO" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move 127 mm and automatically deadlock in the partial open position. With the door in this position the inmate will extend his arms through the opening at which time cuffs will be applied by the corrections officer. .2 Once the inmate is secure and with the door locked in the partial open position, activation of the "Open" switch shall cause the lock mechanism
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 38 2011-06-10
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .4 Components:(Cont'd) .4 Features:(Cont'd) to release and the door to move to the fully open position and automatically deadlock open. .3 When the door is locked open, activation of the "CMO" switch will cause the lock mechanism to release, and the door to return to the 127 mm partial open position and automatically deadlock. With the inmate inside the Cell and with the door in the this position the inmate will extend his arms through the opening at which time the cuffs will be removed by the corrections officer. .4 Once the inmate is secure inside the Cell and with the door deadlocked in the partial open position, activation of the "close" switch shall cause the lock mechanism to release and the door to move to the fully closed position and automatically deadlock. .5 The Door Control System shall be capable of activating this function at the discretion of the operator. The normal daily operation of the sliding cell door shall be as described. .6 The entire CMO sequencing is to be coordinated with Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Controls Contractor. The Controls Contractor must provide an individual adjustable time delay relay for each sliding cell door to ensure consistent and accurate operation for each stage of the CMO function. .5 Remote Manual Emergency Release (RMERS):
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 39 2011-06-10
.1
Type 16B1:(Cont'd) .4 Components:(Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) .1 Remote Manual Emergency Release System to be provided for all sliding cell doors. .2 Provide compressed air emergency release tank (s) and valve assembly to emergency unlock cell door, in defined groups (see control panel schedule), in the event of total loss of air and/or electrical power. .3 The emergency release tank(s) and valve assembly shall be installed in a lockable cabinet where directed by the Departmental Representative. The cabinet shall be clearly labeled "Emergency Release System." .4 The emergency release system shall be totally manual in operation. Once the system has been activated, the doors shall unlock and remain unlocked until the system is deactivated. Once unlocked, doors may then be manually moved to the open position. .5 Check valves shall be installed on the supply lines at each tank to prevent air from leaking out of the tank when not being supplied from the air compressor(s). .6 Air lines serving each group of devices from the emergency release system shall be run in the same raceway/conduit as the normal air lanes. .7 Air tubing for the emergency release system shall be a minimum of 6 mm outside diameter, and shall be properly labeled ("Emergency") at each device, and manifold. .8 Colour coded air tubing may be used in place of labeled tubing. Type 16B2: .1 A maximum security remote operated, two point rear locking pneumatic locking device for sliding Corridor doors and Barrier Grille Doors that complies with the standard test
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 40 2011-06-10
.2
Type 16B2:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) methods for detention sliding door locking device assembly defined in ASTM F1643, Security Grade (1,2). The mechanism to be installed on all sliding Corridor doors and sliding Barrier grille doors. .1 Function, Features, Components, and Remote Manual Emergency Release System to be the same as listed for Type 16B1. .2 Provide lock column with hip-high key release feature with a high security mogul key cylinder provides for local manual and/or electro-pneumatically activate all sliding corridor and sliding grille barrier doors. This operation shall duplicate the open/close functions of the security control panel. Key release shall be located approximately 1020 mm above finished floor. Keyed two sides (K2). Required at all corridor sliding doors. .3 Acceptable material: .1 Airteq 8250 Airglide, manufactured by Airteq Systems and distributed by Norment Security Group, Inc. 1-800-633-1968 www.normentsecurity.com. .2 Folger Adam No. D2B.3P, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .3 Southern Steel No.8065L, manufactured by Southern Folger Detention Equipment Company 1-210-533-1231 fax 1-210-533-2211 www.southernfolger.com. .4 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders.
2.14 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM, FOR PNEUMATIC LOCKS AND LOCKING DEVICES
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: Except as otherwise specified herein, the equipment and materials of this section shall be components fabricated by one single manufacturer. The following manufacturers are pre qualified to supply the products specified under this section. .1 Airteq Systems (AT), Montgomery, AL.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 41 2011-06-10
2.14 COMPRESSED AIR SYSTEM, FOR PNEUMATIC LOCKS AND LOCKING DEVICES (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 Folger Adam Security Inc. (FA), Lamont, IL. .3 Southern Steel Company (SSCO), San Antonio, TX. .4 Note: Prequalification is not acceptance of manufacturers standard products. Prequalification is only approval to supply products meeting all specifications herein. Compressed Air System and Components Specific system components shall be adequately sized by the supplier in accordance with manufacturers' specifications and the specifications contained herein. .1 Air Compressor: Compressor shall consist of, but not be limited to, compressors, motors, V-belt driven that are totally enclosed with an O.S.H.A. approved belt guard, and A.S.M.E. Coded and National Board approved air receiver(s). .1 Furnish complete two 220/208 VAC single phase electric motor-driven tank mounted air compressors. .2 Compressor shall be sized so that the system has the ability to meet all air requirements under normal operation and not exceed a maximum 40% duty cycle. Compressor shall be sized to provide sufficient air to provide at a minimum, the following number of operations: .1 Cells and Other (not listed) Devices: 20 operations per 24 hour period. .2 Medium Use Corridor Device: 150 operations per 24 hour period (90% of all Corridor doors shall be considered medium use); not applicable to this project. .3 High Use Corridor Device: 300 operations per 24 hour period. (At a minimum, all Corridor doors shall be considered high use.). .3 Compressor recovery time shall be no more than fifteen (15) minutes. .4 The air system shall have the ability to provide a minimum air pressure of 125 PSIG (+/- 10%). .5 For oil bath reciprocating compressors, the volume shall be based on a regulated line pressure of 125 PSIG.
.2
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 42 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .1 Air Compressor:(Cont'd) .6 System shall be provided with starters, solenoid unloaders and pressure switches. All associated wiring, conduit, disconnect switches, hangers, etc. shall be provided by the electrical connector. .7 Provide vibration isolators in accordance with compressor manufacturers specifications. .8 Exhaust silencers/mufflers shall be provided. .9 Provide a low pressure indicator with common, Normally Open and Normally Closed dry contacts for remote monitoring. .2 Alternating Compressor Controller: Provide an automatic lead-lag alternating compressor controller system for the entire facility. .1 Under normal conditions, the controller shall alternately operate compressors. If the lead compressor is out of service or fails to start, the standby compressor shall start. If the lead compressor starts but fails to satisfy demand, the controller shall operate both compressors simultaneously until demand is satisfied. .2 The alternating compressor controller shall consist of, but not be limited to, across the line starters, motor circuit protectors, timers, counters, relays, pressure sensing switches and transformers with all necessary interconnection wiring. .3 The controller shall be enclosed within a NEMA 1 enclosure of applicable size to meet the N.E.C. code requirements. The enclosure shall be wall mounted adjacent to the compressors. Mounting of the compressor controller on the compressor receivers shall not be permitted. .4 Disconnects for each compressor shall be placed prior to the alternating panel. .3 Compressed Air Dryer: .1 Provide a minimum of one air dryer. .2 Dryer shall be sized for normal institutional operation (see Section C1.b) as opposed to airflow associated
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 43 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .3 Compressed Air Dryer:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) with all swing locks and sliding door devices operating simultaneously. .3 Provide refrigerant type compressed air dryer. .4 Dryer shall be able to provide a maximum pressure dew point of 1.7 degrees C (35 degrees F). .5 Include all necessary mounting brackets and / or stand for dryer. .6 Provide valve bypass air lines around the dryer to allow for routine servicing without system shutdown. .4 Compressed Air Filtration: .1 Air supplied to the devices shall have been processed through filtering, cooling and drying equipment and as a minimum, shall meet the following: .1 Solid particulate matter shall be filtered to 5.0 micron or less. .2 Solid oil particles shall be filtered to 3.0 micron of less. .3 At a minimum 99.97% of oil and water aerosols shall be removed. .4 The air must be free of water vapour to a pressure dew point of 1.6 degrees C. .2 On the refrigerant dryer units, provide pre-filters, with water separators in line between air head end receivers and the refrigerant dryer that has a valved bypass and an equal pre-filter with water separator. .3 Provide a particulate filter, coalescing filter and regulator in-line between refrigerant dryer and air distribution lines. The filters and regulator shall have a valved bypass with equal filtration and regulation. .4 All water separating and coalescing filters shall be equipped with automatic drains. .5 Provide corrosion resisting fittings of aluminum, copper, brass, stainless steel and/or Teflon lined stainless steel hoses from the first filter through to the distribution manifold. Black pipe or cast iron fittings will NOT be acceptable.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 44 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .5 Compressed Air Receiver/Storage Tanks: .1 Receiver(s) and compressed air storage tank(s) shall be sized so that if the power fails at the beginning of the compressor input, the combined stored air will allow the locking devices to operate a minimum of one (1) cycle (secure Closed to secure Open) within fifteen (15) minutes of failure to a minimum allowed pressure of 60 PSIG door device to operate twice when no input from the compressor is available. .2 Provide high pressure relief valves on all receivers and storage tanks. .3 Provide air pressure gauges on all receivers and storage tanks. .4 Provide automatic drains on all receivers and storage tanks upstream the dryer. .5 Provide manual drains on all receivers and storage tanks down stream of the dryer. .6 Provide particle filters near the outlet ports of all storage tanks downstream from the air dryer. .7 In-line particle filters with water separators shall be provided between air receivers, storage tanks, and the refrigerant air dryer. .8 In-line particle filters with water separators and coalescing filters shall be provided between air compressor(s) and the air dryer. .9 All water separating and coalescing filters shall be equipped with automatic drains, and service bypass lines. .10 Pressure regulators shall be provided to reduce line pressure to a maximum of 100 PSIG. .11 Pipe all automatic drains to the nearest floor drain. .6 Compressed Air Distribution System: .1 Air piping shall be sized to permit normal operation of locking devices, including group release, without dropping below 60 PSIG line pressure at the locking device. Air tubing shall be sized to permit group release at Cell at the sliding door lock devices, without dropping below 40 PSIG line pressure device for more than five (5) seconds.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 45 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Air pressure to any individual component, beyond compressor/dryer/filtration system, shall not exceed 125 PSIG at 21 degrees C. .2 Air distribution piping shall be Nylon 11 tubing with a temperature range of -16 to 94 degrees C, and a working pressure of at least 200 ,PSIG at 24 degrees C. Working pressure shall be defined at 25% of burst pressure. .3 Nylon tubing for Section 11 19 20 shall be run with the low voltage device wires in conduit, raceways or cable trays. Low voltage wire and pneumatic tubing shall be pulled in the same conduit raceway by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Nylon tubing must be run continuously from pneumatic lock to manifold in BSCS Room, or other designated location where pneumatic manifolds will be installed. Splices or tees shall NOT be permitted. Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor is responsible for pulling the nylon tubing. .4 All conduit is to be run concealed in occupied spaces. Conceal conduit in all other spaces wherever possible. Where exposed, tubing is to be securely fastened at regular intervals and run in a neat workmanlike manner. .5 Tubing shall be tagged at all valves and manifolds. Tags shall indicate door number. Valves shall be tagged to correspond with the valve numbers indicated on the approved shop drawings and the normal operating positions shall be indicated. .6 The Electrical Contractor (Division 26) shall provide the DEC and Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractors with line drawings indicating layout of conduit runs for all low voltage Electro-pneumatic devices prior to pulling wire and tubing. All pull box locations and conduit size must be clearly indicated on the drawings. The Electrical Contractor (Division 26) line drawings must be approved by the
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 46 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) Departmental Representative and Division 11 Contractor prior to lines being pulled. .7 All conduit shall be sized to suit the number of conductors and the airline. Minimum conduit size for all dead end runs (i.e. from pull box to single device) shall be 19 mm diameter. Minimum conduit size for all home runs i.e. from BSCS room or designated location where manifolds are installed, to single device) shall be 19 mm in diameter. .8 Pull 90's or LB connectors (90 degree L fittings with Back Openings) shall NOT be permitted in conduit where pneumatic lines are run. Splices to Conduit will only be allowed on straight sections, angle connectors of any degree shall NOT be allowed in conduit where pneumatic lines are run. .9 The minimum bending radius in conduit must not be less than 6 times the diameter of pneumatic tube size. .10 The minimum pull box size for single device runs shall not be less than 150mm x 150 mm. Where multiple lines converge in a common pull box; the box must be sized to allow the air lines and conductor runs be pulled through the box without kinking, splicing, or damaging the airlines. .11 All distribution manifolds shall be aluminum, brass or stainless steel and must be supplied by the detention hardware manufacturer. Manifolds must be engineered to suit the pneumatic system and sized to correspond with the requirements of the pneumatic locking device. Manifolds must be equipped with a shut off valves at the intake port and at each individual distribution port. Manifolds must be housed in individual lockable steel cabinets as follows: One (1) Conversion Manifold, one (1) Distribution Manifold/Cabinet for all pneumatic sliding barrier doors, one (1) Distribution Manifold/Cabinet for all pneumatic sliding cell doors and one (1)
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 47 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .6 (Cont'd) .11 (Cont'd) Distribution Manifold/Cabinet for all pneumatic swing doors. .12 All air lines shall be purged before final connections are made to the end-of-line devices. .13 Provide quick connect air fittings at all pneumatic devices. Provide auto shut off quick connect to field pneumatic tubing at all pneumatic swing door locks to prevent air flow loss when device is disconnected. .7 Compressor shall be located in a well ventilated room; free of dust, moisture, and other air-borne contaminants. Maximum ambient temperature in which the compressor and motor must operate in is 40 degrees Celsius. .8 Compressors and Refrigerant Dryers must be mounted on concrete housekeeping pad; minimum100 mm above finished floor.
2.15 TERMINATION BOXES
.1
Termination boxes shall be supplied and installed by Section 11 19 30 to provide a termination point in the door frame which allows a clear demarcation point between the Door Control System contractor's and Detention Hardware contractor's respective scopes of work. Confirm location of termination boxes with Section 11 19 30. .1 Termination boxes for all large body locks (Type 7C1) is also the lock box and shall be located in the pressed steel frame. .2 Termination boxes for narrow jamb locks (7C2) shall be located in the 100 mm head at the top of the lock jamb.
2.16
WIRE AND CABLE .1
Cabling shall be supplied, installed and terminated from door devices. All wiring for systems to be PVC insulated, multi-conductor as required. All wiring for systems shall be installed in conduit or wire trays. Conduit from lock box to junction box a door position indicator switch box within the frame shall be supplied and installed by Section 11 19 30. Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor will terminate all field side
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 48 2011-06-10
2.16 WIRE AND CABLE .1 (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) wiring to field side of lock with pigtails supplied by lock manufacturer; allowing field side leads to extend 450 mm beyond termination or lock boxes.
.2
Wiring for lock power circuits shall be #14 AWG. Wiring for door position indicators and locked status indicators shall be #18 AWG.
.3
Selection of type of cable shall be at discretion of system installer but the system, when complete, must perform to the complete satisfaction of the Departmental Representative, and must be free from all interference from cross-talk, hum, switch and relay noise.
.4
All serviceable devices such as locks and door position indicators shall have connection terminated with AMP or MOLEX type connectors provided by the hardware supplier. All connections on the controls side of the lock pigtail shall be secure and shall be terminated by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Refer to Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 documents for specifications on wire connection details.
.5
The BSCS contractor shall terminate cabling, within swing door frames, from field wiring to all Molex pigtail connectors provided by the detention hardware manufacturer. The BSCS contractor shall terminate all field wiring, within the sliding door housings, to terminal strips provided by detention hardware manufacturer. The BSCS contractor shall terminate controls end of all cabling for lock control output and monitoring status inputs.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 49 2011-06-10
2.17 EXTRA DETENTION DOOR HARDWARE STOCK
.1
Provide the following extra stock: .1 Eight (8) Hinges Airteq 604 FMCS .2 Two (2) Locks Airteq 9700 x K2S x KS x LH .3 Two (2) Locks Airteq 9700 x K2S x KS x RH .4 Four (4) Locks Airteq 5017M K1S .5 Four (4) Cylinders Airteq Mogul (Food pass locks) .6 Four (4) Dr Pos Ind. Airteq 6200 Door Position Switch .7 One (1) Lock Tester Airteq ULV24 -24V Multi-Tester .8 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 82004601Assy. Door Cylinder Valve .9 Four (4) Parts Assembly Airteq 821016 Inside Guide Bracket .10 Four (4) Parts Assembly Airteq 821017 Outside Guide Bracket .11 One (1) Parts Assembly Airteq 820751 ASSY. Lock Cylinder Valve .12 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 820748XX Assy. Air Cylinder .13 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 82009801 Assy. Roller Guide .14 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 820107 Lock Bar Slide Bearing .15 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 10000401 Grommet .16 Ten (10) Parts Assembly Airteq 10003402 Screws 10-32 x " .17 Ten (10) Parts Assembly Airteq 10003401 Screws 3/8-16 x 1" .18 Six (6) Parts Assembly Airteq 10006402 Screws 10-24 x _" .19 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 10002501 Shoulder Screws 5/16 x 3/8" x -20 .20 Two (2) Parts Assembly Airteq 10002503 Shoulder Screws 3/8 x 1 1/2" x 5/16 -18 .21 Eight (8) Parts Assembly Airteq 820090 Speed Reducing Switch .22 Eight (8) Parts Assembly Airteq 82008803 Limit Switch .23 Eight (8) Parts Assembly Airteq 82008804 Limit Switch .24 Two (2) Locks Airteq 9400 LH .25 Two (2) Locks Airteq 9400 RH .26 Two (2) Locks Airteq 5066 LH .27 Two (2) Locks Airteq 5066 RH
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 50 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXECUTION
.1
Trade cooperation for execution will require this contractor to coordinate with electrical, door, hardware, detention door and frame suppliers, and any other trades who may have field devices operating to the demands of the system. System application and field device connection for this contract will be the responsibility of one contract to a commissioned sign off by the Owner.
3.2
INSPECTION
.1
Inspect surfaces and conditions on site prior to commencing work. Commencement of work assumes acceptance of site conditions.
.2
Verify that all conduit, back boxes, junction boxes, device boxes, and terminal panels have been installed where required prior to commencing work.
3.3 FIELD TEST FOR COMPRESSED AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
.1
To confirm the integrity of the pneumatic distribution system the DEC must perform detailed pneumatic line pressure tests for the entire pneumatic lock distribution system. Notify Departmental Representative a minimum of (5) days prior to when pressure tests are to be performed so a Representative can be present to confirm line pressures at the start and completion of the test.
.2
These tests are to be completed prior to the installation of any pneumatic hardware.
.3
All head end pneumatic equipment must be operational including compressors, dryers and filters.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 51 2011-06-10
.4
All pneumatic distribution equipment must be connected including the conversion manifold and all distribution manifolds.
.5
All pneumatic tubing must be connected to the appropriate manifolds and capped with compression fittings at the device end.
.6
Minimum duration for static load pressure test is 12 hours.
.7
Maximum allowable pressure loss is 5 pounds in 12 hour period.
.8
Re-pull any damaged lines and replace any defective or damaged connections the head end equipment and re-test as required to ensure line pressures are maintained as required.
.9
A complete set of documented test results is to be provided to the Departmental Representative upon completion of tests.
3.4
INSTALLATION
.1
Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor) and pneumatic tubing (supplied by Section 11 19 20 DEC Contractor) in conduit and wire trays provided by Electrical Contractor (Division 26). Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted.
.2
Coordinate control cabling, low voltage wires and pneumatic tubing in conduit, raceways and cable trays with Section 11 19 20 DEC
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 52 2011-06-10
.2 (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) Contractor and Electrical Contractor (Division 26).
.3
All serviceable devices such as locks and door position indicators shall have connection terminated with AMP or MOLEX type connectors provided by the hardware supplier. All connections on the controls side of the lock pigtail shall be secure and shall be terminated by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor.
.4
Install hardware in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturers installation instructions. All electrical at each door assembly shall be installed by this section and terminated to the junction box, where door control systems will be tied in by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00. Door position indicators and lock status indicators shall be terminated at the junction box.
.5
.6
All wiring for system from the junction boxes to the door devices shall be supplied, installed, and terminated by this Section. All wiring shall be installed in conduit.
.7
All wiring shall be terminated with Molex ends and neatly installed, laced tagged where required. Supply opposite Molex ends to Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor.
.8
All system related equipment shall be installed by factory authorized and trained personnel.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 53 2011-06-10
.9
Template and install O/H stops and holders to the required degree of opening to protect exposed trim from contacting other surfaces.
.10
If shimming is necessary, use only approved corrosive resistant metal shims. Organic materials are not acceptable.
.11
Install hardware to the following heights unless noted otherwise on the shop drawings or manufacturers installation instructions: .1 Push plate - 1150 mm bottom of frame to center line of push plate. .2 Door pull - 1070 mm bottom of frame to center line of door pull. .3 Door knob or lever - 1020 mm bottom of frame to center line of door knob / lever. .4 Deadlock - 1220 mm bottom of frame to center line of deadlock strike plate. .5 Electro-pneumatic locks - 1040 mm bottom of frame to center line of Key cylinder.
3.5 TESTING AND VERIFICATION
.1
Provide lock testing unit to installers for field testing of locks. Prior to final inspection, verify that all hardware has been installed according to the approved hardware schedule and manufacturer's instructions, and ensure correct operation.
.2
Test all electrical hardware and monitoring devices to ensure correct operation and outputs. Provide a list to the contractor that all devices have been tested and are operational.
.3
Remote Manual Emergency Release System (RMERS) to be included as part of the commissioning process to confirm status indication changes with BSCS system.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 54 2011-06-10
3.6 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
.1
Adjust all hardware as required to ensure correct operation. Make final adjustment to door closers after HVAC system has been balanced.
.2
Be responsible for protective treatment and other precautions required to ensure that hardware components will be without damage until completion of the project. Clean and polish all hardware and replace any item that is scratched, marred, or damaged. If paint is to be removed from an exposed finish, use only cleaning solutions that will not remove the protective coatings.
3.7 LEGEND OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE
.1 .2 .3 .4
C4 - satin brass C10 - satin bronze C15 - satin nickel C26D - satin chromium plated
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16
C28 - satin anodized aluminium C32D - satin stainless steel CP - prime painted Alum - aluminium lacquer Galv - galvanized BZP - Bright Zinc Plated K1S - keyed one side K2S - keyed two sides LS - lead shields SCS - security screws (with twist-off heads) SPS - Spanner screws (Torx with Pin) TB - through bolts
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 55 2011-06-10
3.7 LEGEND OF ABBREVIATIONS USED IN HARDWARE SCHEDULE (Cont'd)
.17 .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23
HHC - Hinged Housing Cover CMO - Cuffing Mode Operation DS - Door Skirt CDS - Cell Door Skirt KS - Key Switch KCE - Key Cylinder Extension RMERS - Remote Manual Emergency Release System HHKR - Hip-High Key Release
.24
3.8
KEY CABINET
.1
Key Cabinet System: (One) required, locate as directed by the Departmental Representative. Cabinet and components shall be manufactured by Telkee, Inc., or equal. Cabinet shall have a maximum security push button lock manufactured by Simplex, or equal. System shall include complete set-up instructions, with three way cross index system and dual tag system, and instructions to the Departmental Representative on proper use of the system. Cabinet to be sized to accommodate one complete set of keys provided by this Section and builders hardware keys supplied under Section 08 71 11.
.2
3.9 HARDWARE SCHEDULE
.1
All hardware for doors designated on Door and Frame Schedule as "Security" types and with Hardware Groups with "S" designations are the responsibility of this Section.
3.10 SECURITY HARDWARE GROUPS
.1
Refer to attached schedule of Security Hardware Groups.
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 56 2011-06-10
3.11 RETHERM UNIT ENCLOSURE - TYPICAL HARDWARE PACKAGE
.1
Refer to attached schedule for Retherm Unit Enclosure - Typical Hardware Package.
END
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 1 2011-05-27
SECURITY HARDWARE GROUPS GROUP: S1 (Exterior Swing Door Main Entrance) 2 pair 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 Hinges Electro-Pneum. Lock Cylinder Mogul Keys Cylinder Door Position Switch Pulls Door Closer (concealed) Protection Plate Type 1B3 Type 7C1 x KS x K2S Mogul Type 14B1 Extension Type 8B1 Type 11A5 LCN 2210 1.6 mm thick x 1200 high x DW (-40) K.N. Crowder W-32V K.N. Crowder CT-46 K.N. Crowder CT-54 Type 11A7 C32D BZF & C32D. C4 Bronz e C4 C32D C26D ALUM C32D
1 set 1 1 1
Weatherstrip Threshold Automatic Door Bottom Door Stop
ALUM ALUM ALUM Black
GROUP: S2 (Exterior Swing Door) 2 pair 1 1 3 1 1 2 1 1 set 1 1 1 Hinges Electro-Pneum. Lock Cylinder Mogul Keys Cylinder Door Position Switch Pulls Door Closer (concealed) Weatherstrip Threshold Automatic Door Bottom Door Stop Type 1B3 Type 7C1 x KS x K2S Mogul Type1 4B1 Extension Type 8B1 Type 11A5 LCN 2210 K.N. Crowder W-32V K.N. Crowder CT-46 K.N. Crowder CT-54 Type 11A7 C32D BZF & C32D. C4 Bronze C4 C32D C26D ALUM ALUM ALUM ALUM Black
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 2 2011-05-27
GROUP: S3 (Interior Swing Door Entry Sally Port) 2 pair 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 1 Hinges Electro-Pneu. Lock Cylinder Mogul Keys Cylinder Door Position Switch Pulls Door Closer (concealed) Protection Plate Door Stop Type 1B3 Type 7C1 x KS x K2S Mogul Type 14B1 Extension Type 8B1 Type 11A5 LCN 2210 C32D BZF & C32D. C4 Bronze C4 C32D C26D ALUM
1.6 mm thick x 1200 high x C32D DW (-40) Type 11A7 Black
GROUP: S4 (Interior Swing Door Entry Sally Port.) 2 pair 1 2 3 1 1 2 1 1 Hinges Electro-Pneumatic Locks Cylinder Mogul Keys Cylinder Door Position Switch Pulls Door Closer (Concealed) Door Stop Type 1B3 Type 7C1 x KS x K2S Mogul Type 14B1 Extension Type 8B1 Type 11A5 LCN 2210 Type 11A7 C32D BZF & C32D C4 Bronze C4 C32D C26D ALUM Black
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 3 2011-05-27
GROUP: S5 (Interior Swing Door - Janitor / Storage Rm.) 12 pr 1 3 1 2 2 1 1 Hinges Spring and Deadlock Para-centric Keys Lock Mounting Escutcheon Pulls Door Closer (Concealed) Door Stop Type 1B3 Type 3A6 x K2S Type 14A1 Type 5A1 Type 11A1-SW Type 11A5 LCN 2210 Type 11A7 C32D CP
CP C32D C26D ALUM Black
GROUP: S6 (Interior Swing Door Mech. Chase) 12 pr 1 3 1 1 1 1 1 Hinges Deadlock Para-centric Keys Lock Mounting Escutcheon Strike Flush Pull Door Stop Type Type Type Type Type Type Type Type 1B3 3A9 x K1S 14A1 5A1 11A1DW 4A1 11A4 11A7 C32D CP COP C32D CP C26D Black
GROUP: S7 (Interior Swing Door Inmate Washrooms) 12 pr 1 1 3 1 1 Hinges Mortise Lockset Cylinder Mogul Keys Strike Door Stop Type 1B3 Type 3B7 Mogul Type 14B1 Type 4A1 Type 11A7 C32D C32D C26DBron ze C26D Black
GROUP: S8 (Sliding Cell Door) 1 1 1 pair 1 1 3 Locking Device Flush Pull Hinges Spring Latch Cylinder Mogul Keys Type 16B1 x HHC x CDS x CMO x RMERS Type 11A4 Type 1A2 Type 3B6 Mogul Type 14B1 CP C26D CP BZP C4 Bronze
DETENTION HARDWARE
Section 11 19 20 Page 4 2011-05-27
GROUP: S9 (Sliding Corridor Doors) 1 1 2 3 Locking Device Door Pull Cylinders Mogul Keys Type 16B2 x HHC x DS x HHKR x K2S x RMERS Type 11A5 Mogul (in Lock Column) Type 14B1 CP C26D C4 Bronze
GROUP: S10 (Sliding Barrier Grille Doors) 1 1 2 3 Locking Device Door Pull Cylinders Mogul Keys Type 16B2 x HHC x HHKR x K2S x RMERS Type 11A5 Mogul (in Lock Column) Type 14B CP C26D C4 Bronze
GROUP: S11 (Swing Gate Sally Port Gate) 1 pair 1 3 2 1 Hinges Electro-Mech. Lock Mogul Keys Door Pulls Door Position Switch Type 1A3 Type 7A1 x A x K2S Type 14B1 Type 11A5 Type 8B1 Galv Galv Bronze C26D C32D
GROUP: S12 (Swing Gate in Hollow Metal Frame Shower Rooms 12 pr 1 1 3 1 2 1 1 Hinges Electro-Pneumatic Locks Builders Cylinder Builders Keys Door Position Switch Pulls Door Closer (Concealed) Door Stop Type 1B3 Type 7C2 x KS x K1S To match Institutions existing. To match existing Type 8B1 Type 11A5 LCN 2210 Type 11A7 C32D BZF & C32D C4
C32D C26D ALUM Black
END OF SCHEDULE
HEAD OFFI ICE 7100 WARDE AVENUE EN UNIT 1 MARKHAM ONTARIO M, L3R 8B5 PH: FAX:
5-940-8358 905 905 5-940-8362
Millh havenIns stitutionMaximum mSecurit tyCellUn nit
RethermUnitEnc R closure Ty ypicalHa ardwareP Package
ATypicalUnitenc closureconsistsof3pairsofd doors: 4mmSteelplate eDRxCIFR 2/902x1500x4
TotalHa ardwarep perunitenclosure:
6Contin nuousHingesC CH951x1500 0TORXxHT Secure C3 32D (forenclosuredoors) maximumdeg greeofswing) ) (mountform oneBolt(ActiveLeaf) 10380AA1x xPmounting g91RHSBX10105RSTRIK KEUS S26D 3Cremo 3Cremo oneBolt(Inac ctiveLeaf)1 10380AI1x Pmounting 92LHSBX10105RSTRIKE EUS S26D 3Contin nuousHingesC CH951x152 24+/TORX xHTSecure C3 32D (fortopservicehatchlid) ocks 3Deadlo 1010A1xPmounting (fortopservicehatchlid)
tinuoussteelangledoorst topandlocks strikebyencl losure Note:Customcont ertosuitlock k. manufacture US32D 9CylinderEscutcheo on2 2182 (forallparace entriccylinde rsondeadloc cksandcremonebolts)
DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES
Section 11 19 30 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 03 30 00: Concrete. Section 04 20 00: Unit Masonry. Section 07 90 00: Joint Sealing for security sealant. Section 08 11 13: Steel hollow metal doors, Frames, and Screens. Section 08 71 11: Finish Hardware. Section 08 80 00: Glazing. Section 09 91 00: Painting. Section 11 19 30: Detention Hardware. Section 11 19 40: Detention Grille Doors and Barriers. Section 26:Electrical Services.
.4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9
.10
1.2
EXPLANATION
.1
This Section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 20, 11 19 40, 11 19 50 and 11 19 60. Refer to Section 11 19 30 Sub-Section Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC). This Section describes detention quality steel doors and frames. Detention quality steel doors and frames are identified on the Door and Frame Schedule as "Detention Type". Details and Drawings provided by Departmental Representative indicate general overall intent and principals of design and function for project Detention Doors and Frames. This Section is responsible for final Design of Detention Doors and Frames that will meet testing, mock-up and warranty requirements within overall constraints of project. Indicate final design information on Shop Drawings for review by Departmental
.2
.3
.4
Section 11 19 30 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.2 EXPLANATION (Cont'd)
.4
(Cont'd) Representative. In particular detailing Detention Doors and Frames to adjacent construction to ensure compatibility with project conditions.
1.3
REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 863-04, Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (HMMA) Division of the National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers. ASTM International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM A924/A924M-10a, Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM A1008/A1008M-11, Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-Strength Low-Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved Formability, Solution Hardened, and Bake Hardenable. .4 ASTM F1450-05, Standard Test Methods for Hollow Metal Swinging Door Assemblies for Detention Facilities. .5 ASTM F1592-05, Standard Test Methods for Detention Hollow Metal Vision Systems. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. (NAAMM) Guide Specifications for Detention Security Hollow Metal Doors and Frames, January 2004.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 11 19 30 Page 3 2011-06-10
.6
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 80-2010, Standard for Fire Doors and Other Opening Protectives. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC): .1 CAN4 S104M 1980 (R1985): Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. .2 CAN/ULC-S702-97, Standard for Thermal Insulation Mineral Fibre for Buildings.
.7
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TEST REPORTS
.1
Fabricate detention doors and frames to meet following performance requirements, as established by ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 863 and ASTM F1450. .1 Static load test. .2 Rack test. .3 Impact load test. .4 Removable glazing stop test. Submit test reports from independent testing laboratory-certifying compliance with performance criteria of ANSI/NAAMM HMMA 863 and ASTM F1450 for static load, rack, impact load and removable glazing stop tests. The following outlines the testing procedures, but is not to be construed as complete in all respects to the performance criteria. .1 Static and Rack Tests: Two full flush doors 900 mm x 2100 mm x 50 mm with 125 mm x 635 mm vision panel with door face sheet core thickness according to grade stated in Table 1, prepared and tested as follows: Lock: Type 7C1, located at a height of 985 mm to centre lines of cylinder with door and frame preparation according to lock suppliers, templates or as noted on drawing and specifications, whichever is the most stringent. Hinges: As specified located on edge opposite to the lock and 127 mm from the top of the door to the top of the top hinge, 254 mm from the bottom of the door to the bottom hinge, with the middle two hinges equally spaced between. Two sample doors are required for Static Load Test as well as Rack Test. .1 Static Load Test: Door shall be placed in the horizontal position, and an increasing static load applied at quarter points. Door shall be uniformly supported over it's width and no more than 101 mm
.2
Section 11 19 30 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TEST REPORTS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .1 Static and Rack Tests:(Cont'd) .1 Static Load Test:(Cont'd) from each end, apply test load, as per Table 1 for grade of door, equally distributed between the quarter points. The maximum deflection at centre span under full load shall be recorded, and shall not exceed 14.73 mm. After release of load the deformation shall not exceed 2.55 mm. .2 Rack Test: Door shall be held in stationary cantilevered position not more than 150 mm from the top, support the lower corner on the hinge edge by a stand whose door contact surface is not more than 150 mm x 150 mm square. Apply test load, as per Table 1 for grade of door, in a downward direction to the unsupported corner. .1 The hydraulic ram shall exert test load on top of unsupported corner with it's center line 76 mm from bottom of the door and 76 mm from the lock edge. The maximum corner deflection at full load shall not exceed 90 mm and there shall be no failure of any welds, nor buckling of channel or stiffeners throughout the door structure. After removal of load, the permanent corner deflection shall be recorded and shall not exceed 36 mm. .2 Permanently mark and date both the test doors and retain at the manufacturer's plant for one year after date of project completion. .3 Impact Load Test: Construct door assembly including: wall, door, frame, wall anchors, lock, hinges and other hardware as specified for the doors. Rigidly mount in vertical position, so that the door and locking hardware are operable. .1 Construct a pendulum ram system capable of delivering consistent impacts of 271.2J so that impacts may be delivered to the lock, hinge and glazing panel assemblies. The striking nose of the ram shall be C1010 or C1020 low carbon steel and the striking
Section 11 19 30 Page 5 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .1 Static and Rack Tests:(Cont'd) .3 Impact Load Test:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) surface area shall be 25.8 cm2. Position the ram so that the door swings away from the ram, while hanging at rest, just touching the target area. .2 With the door closed and locked, conduct the tests at 271.2J of energy with each impact as per locations and number of impacts in accordance with ASTM F1450 Table 1 Security Grades and Test Load Requirements. .3 The door shall remain closed and locked throughout the testing procedure, and the assembly shall not be damaged to the extent that forcible egress can be obtained. After testing is completed the door shall be capable of being unlocked and operated to provide egress. .4 Impact Series for Frame and Glazing/Panel Impact Test for Multi-light Frame and Sidelight Frame shall be in accordance to ASTM F1592. Grade of Impact Test to conform to Grade of adjacent Doors unless stated otherwise in Door & Frame Schedule or Specifications. .5 Notify Departmental Representative sufficiently in advance of tests to allow for assignment of supervisory personnel. Fire rated doors and frames: labeled and listed by and organization accredited by Standards Council of Canada in conformance with CAN4-S104 for rating specified. Submit performance and fire resistance testing data prior to fabrication. Failure to provide required testing data or submission of misrepresented testing data would result in disqualification. In the event of disqualification substitute an acceptable alternate manufacturer/subcontractor, at no additional cost to Departmental Representative. The Departmental Representative reserves the right to appoint a technical advisor to
.3
.4
.5
Section 11 19 30 Page 6 2011-06-10
.5
(Cont'd) monitor all aspects of detention doors and frames.
1.5
SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit one 450 mm x 300 mm corner section of each type of door with hinge mortise and reinforcement showing internal construction. Include with glazing stops applied in one corner to show corner joint. Submit one full sized sample of frame showing welded construction, hinge mortise and reinforcement, mortar guard boxes for lock and door position switch, conduits junction box and sample of glazing stop applied in one corner to show corner joint.
.2
.3
1.6
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. Indicate each type of door, materials, steel core material thickness, mortises, reinforcements, locations of exposed fasteners, opening for glass, arrangement of hardware and fire ratings. Show fabrication and installation drawings where applicable. Reference doors and frames to Door and Frame Schedule provided by Departmental Representative. Indicate provisions to accommodate conduit and connection boxes with in frames.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Submit documentation for incorporation into maintenance manuals specified under Section 01 78 00.
Section 11 19 30 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.7 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS (Cont'd)
.2
Documentation to include: .1 Full identification of hardware including part numbers, manufacturer and source of supply. .2 Recommended spare parts lists that Owner should stock for maintenance purposes. .3 Complete operational, adjustment, maintenance and repair procedures. .4 Name, address and telephone number of Subcontractor installing work. Provide maintenance material in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide four (4) sets of drivers and other required tools for each size of security fastener installed, two (2) for hand drivers, and two (2) for drill mount. Include full identification, exploded diagrams and cross reference numbering for spares. Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system during the final commissioning process.
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE OF DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR
.1
Manufacture doors and frames using an established company experienced in design and production of custom detention security door and frame assemblies together with integration of security hardware and glazing preparations, as they impact upon the scope of work.
.2
Have lock manufacturer's representative visit door and frame fabricating facility, .1 to review lock and strike preparations and reinforcements, .2 to review lock and strike installation methods and .3 to provide technical assistance as required to ensure proper lock and strike installations.
Section 11 19 30 Page 8 2011-06-10
1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE OF DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR (Cont'd)
.3
Provide the following documentation prior to contract award to substantiate door and frame fabricator qualifications. Failure to provide required information or submission of misrepresented information will result in disqualification. .1 Evidence of ten (10) years prior experience with manufacture and installation of equipment similar to this project. .2 List of employees in supervisory capacity stating respective area of responsibility and experience. .3 List of five (5) jobs completed in size and construction similar to this project, built with in last five (5) years. Include job name, contact person with telephone number and contract amount. .4 List five (5) jobs comparable in size, which have been in operation for over five (5) years. Include job name, contact person with telephone number and contact amount. .5 Name of pneumatic lock supplier proposed for use on this project. Submit evidence that supplier is current manufacturer distributor where not dealing direct with manufacturer's plant. .6 Letter of intent to commission each security door installed in accordance with Field Quality Control.
1.9
MOCK-UPS
.1 .2
Prepare in accordance with Section 01 45 00. Supply and install a full size mock-up for the following doors: Three doors to be selected by Departmental Representative, complete with glazing and all operating hardware as applicable for Departmental Representative's review. Provide installed door, frame, hinges, lock, glazing, door position switch, etc. in masonry opening directed by Departmental Representative. Co-ordinate electrical hook-ups to miniature portable control panel as provided by Electrical Contractor (Division 26) and Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor. Coordinate pneumatic air line hook-ups to a portable compressed air source. Mock-up door and controls to be indicative of final installation in every aspect with all functions and indication signals operable for
Section 11 19 30 Page 9 2011-06-10
1.9 MOCK-UPS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) inspection prior to the manufacture of detention mock-up door and hardware will be subject to site testing as required by Owner. Notify Departmental Representative at least 7 calendar days in advance for review of mock-ups. Mock-ups will be reviewed by Departmental Representative to verify conformance with specified requirements, workmanship and appearance. Make changes to mock-ups that may be required by Departmental Representative. Mock-ups may be used as part of work provided it meets Departmental Representative's approval. Approved mock-up will establish a minimum acceptable standard for remaining work.
.3
.4
.5
.6
1.10 COORDINATION AND SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY OF DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR
.1
Co-ordinate work of this section with Work of Electrical Contractor (Division 26) and Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor for complete integration of electrical systems, door control systems, and authorities having jurisdiction. Perform work of this section under one Subcontractor who will be held responsible for supply and installation of all work of this section including installation of detention hardware specified under Section 11 19 20 and co-ordination of all other work specified under Related Sections as required for completion of work. .1 Include also under same Subcontractor fabrication and installation of Detention Sliding Grille Doors and Barriers in Section 11 19 40, and Detention Exterior Swing Gates in Section 11 19 50; with related detention hardware specified under Section 11 19 20. .2 Include all costs attributed to any change in lock supplier, which would involve changes in sizes of doors and frames at no additional charge to Owner. Be responsible for accurate building -in door frames in concrete block walls to tolerances
.2
.3
Section 11 19 30 Page 10 2011-06-10
1.10 COORDINATION AND SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY OF DETENTION EQUIPMENT CONTRACTOR (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) required to ensure correct fit of doors and proper operation of hardware.
1.11
DELIVERY
.1
Deliver hollow metal doors to site, sorted as to Building Wing in which they are to be installed. Label or identify doors as to their location of installation to avoid errors. Deliver removable glass stops, and security screws for glass stops, and turn over to Prime Contractor for installation. Sort glass stops as to Building Wing in which they are to be installed, and identify their location of installation.
.2
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper plastic polystyrene corrugated cardboard and packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.13
SCHEDULES
.1
Refer to drawings for Door and Frame Schedules indicating door numbers, types, sizes frame types, sheet core thickness, finishes, and label requirements for fire-rated doors and frames, where applicable.
Section 11 19 30 Page 11 2011-06-10
1.13 SCHEDULES (Cont'd)
.2
Doors listed in Schedules are nominal size only. Fabricator shall make necessary allowance for all clearances. All core thickness dimensions are nominal dimensions. Frames which, upon delivery exhibit rust, distortion or surface irregularities due to improper fabrication or handling will be rejected and shall be replaced at no increase in Contract Price.
.3
.4
1.14
WARRANTY
.1
Provide a warranty of 3 years for all labour and materials in this Section. Warrant in writing doors and frames against failure and defects in material, weld, fasteners, anchors and workmanship.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Face sheet steel: Commercial grade steel to ASTM A568/A568M, Class1, hot dipped galvanized to ASTM A653/A653M - commercial quality, coating designation to ASTM A924/A924M, ZF075, commercially known as "Colourbond", "Satincoat", or "Galvanneal". For doors in exterior walls, use coating designation Z275 (fully galvanized) finish. Steel plate, shapes and bars: Structural quality to CAN/CSA- G40.20/G40.21, type 230G or 260W; free of scale, pitting and other surface blemishes. Accessories: Floor anchors, channel spreaders, tee anchors, wall stud anchors, zinc coated to ASTM A1008M, coating designation ZF075 corrugate tee anchors for masonry bond, drill stud anchors to wire tie to studs, lag bolts, shields and bushing for existing or concrete openings.
.2
.3
Section 11 19 30 Page 12 2011-06-10
.4
Guard Boxes: ZF075 coating designation zinc finish, 1.6 mm core thickness steel unless noted otherwise. Door insulation: rock wool or rigid fiberglass for sound deadening and fire insulation to CAN/ULC-S702, minimum 24 kg/m density. Shop paint primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40-M. Zinc primer: Zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Filler: Polyester type automotive body spot filler compound. Door Bumpers: grey neoprene/rubber type; pop rivet to door frame with aluminum rivets. Mask bumpers for painting. Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Note: apply to all pressed steel frames in concrete block or concrete. Grout fill: to be 25 MPa Concrete by the Masonry Sections.
.5
.6 .7
.8
.9
.10
.11
2.2 FASTENING DEVICES
.1
Provide security screws, security nuts, rivets, spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various components. Use only rivets, security screws, or security nuts at locations where maximum security against removal is required. Use spanner screws only at locations where security against removal is not as important and where it is necessary to remove and repair items from time to time. Security screws and nuts to have an extra head which twists off when screw or nut is fully secured, leaving main head without holes or slots for insertion of tool for removal. Security Spanner screws to be torx with pin requiring a special spanner tool to remove screws.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 11 19 30 Page 13 2011-06-10
2.2 FASTENING DEVICES (Cont'd)
.6
Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. Standard screws not acceptable.
.7
2.3 FABRICATION OF DETENTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS
.1
Fabrication of Detention Hollow Metal Doors: .1 Fabrication of Detention Hollow Metal Doors to meet requirements of this Section. .2 Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with Underwriters requirements and as may be required by NFPA 80. Install label on butt edge of door. .3 Fabricate doors with flush faces and provisions for glass openings as indicated on Door and Frame Schedule. .4 Fabricate doors square and free of distortion and twists. Accurately form and fit components and sections, to close fitting tolerances. Form edge bends true, straight and of minimum radius for metal thickness of sheet steel used. .5 Install special pockets, brackets and back-up plates required for door mounted manual locks. Confirm requirements with hardware manufacturer. Detention side of doors are to be finished flush and have minimum 4.5 mm thick structural quality steel back-up plates to protect locks. Brackets are to firmly support lock cases on both faces, preventing them from moving in event of impact attack. Design pockets so that removal of locks are impossible when lock bolts are extended. .6 Use one full sheet of sheet steel per door face, formed accurately at longitudinal edges to wrap around each strike and hinge edge. Arrange sheets to overlap each other at strike and hinges edges. Continuous weld face sheets together along exposed lap edges, grind, fill sand smooth and flush to requirements stated under Finishing. Components for Detention Hollow Metal Doors: .1 Refer to drawings for Door and Frame Schedule indicating location of Detention Hollow Metal Doors. Detention doors are all security doors receiving door face sheets of 2.0 mm or 2.5 mm core thickness meeting ASTM
.2
Section 11 19 30 Page 14 2011-06-10
2.3 FABRICATION OF DETENTION HOLLOW METAL DOORS (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) F1450 Grade No. to locations noted in Door and Frame Schedule. .2 All doors shall be custom made, of the types and sizes shown on the approved shop drawings, and shall be prepared for hardware as per the final approved shop drawings, and shall be prepared for hardware as per the final approved hardware schedule. Door edge reinforcements and internal reinforcements: either commercial quality sheet steel or structural quality steel designed to meet requirements specified in Article Performance Requirements and Test Reports, but shall not be less than the following: .1 Door thickness shall be either 45 mm or 50 mm; to locations as noted in the Door and Frame Schedule. All doors shall be rigid, neat in appearance, and free from warpage or buckle. Edge bends shall be true and straight and of minimum radius for the thickness of metal used. .2 Face sheets shall be stiffened by continuous full height double hat channel design; spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These stiffeners shall be 1.6 mm minimum thickness. Flat at sheets are to be resistance spot welded at 75 mm. o.c. horizontally and 75 mm. o.c. vertically. .3 Alternatively face sheets shall be stiffened by continuous full height true truss design with triangular form, of shape which cannot be altered without changing the length of the sides; spanning the full thickness of the interior space between door faces. These stiffeners shall be 0.5 mm minimum thickness. Flat apexes to be resistance spot welded at 75 mm. o.c. horizontally and 75 mm. o.c. vertically. .4 Fill all voids between each flute of reinforcement with door insulation. .5 The vertical edges shall be reinforced by a continuous steel channel, not less than 3.5 mm, extending the full length of the door. The top and bottom edges shall be closed with a continuous channel, also not less than 3.5 mm, welded to both face sheets not less than 75 mm o.c. The 3.5 mm end channels shall
Section 11 19 30 Page 15 2011-06-10
.2
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .5 (Cont'd) be continuously welded to vertical reinforcing channel at all 4 corners producing a fully welded perimeter reinforcing channel. .6 The top end channel shall be fitted with a flush closing channel of not less than 1.6 mm. The flush closing channel shall be welded in place at the corners and at the centre. Installation of closer channel using screws, security or otherwise, shall be deemed unacceptable. The end channel and flush closer channel shall be installed such that they are permanent and non-removable. Provide weep holes in exterior door bottom channel. .7 Provide preparation for door position switch. .8 Bevel vertical door strike edges 3 mm in 50 mm, unless required otherwise by security or hardware design. .9 Lock bolt pockets: 9.5 mm steel plate recessed and fully welded to door edge, complete with holes for lock bolt and 1.2 mm steel bolt pocket fully welded to steel plate. Steel plate to have screw holes tapped ready to receive strike plate and security screws supplied by lock manufacturer. .10 Provide drilled and tapped holes for all hardware according to template furnished by hardware suppliers. Hardware Reinforcements: Doors shall be mortised, reinforced, drilled and tapped at the factory for all templated hardware in accordance with the final approved hardware schedule and templates provided by the hardware supplier. Indicate clearly on shop drawings exact location of internal hardware reinforcing within hollow metal door to ensure proper alignment of surface mounted hardware. Minimum core thickness for hardware reinforcements shall be as follows: .1 For mortised butts: minimum 5 mm thick plates of width to match door thickness and length to suit butts. Provide additional 5 mm thickness steel channel at top hinge welded to plate inside edge channel.
.3
Section 11 19 30 Page 16 2011-06-10
.3
Hardware Reinforcements:(Cont'd) .2 For recessed pulls: minimum 3.5 mm thick plates. .3 For surface mounted security pulls: minimum 10 mm thick plates. .4 For lock fronts, closures and stays: minimum 3 mm thick plates. .5 For all other surface applied hardware: 3 mm thick plates. .6 For glass openings: 3.5 mm channel with corners fully welded to form a continuous perimeter channel frame. Glass Moldings and stops: where specified, doors shall be provided with steel moldings to secure glazing by others in accordance with glass sizes and thickness specified in Section 08 80 00. .1 Fixed glass molding shall be no less than 3.5 mm, and shall be spot-welded to door face sheets at 100 mm o.c. minimum. .2 Removable glass stops shall be pressed steel angles not less then 3.5 mm. Stops shall be tight fitting at the corner joints, and secured with 6 mm 20 button-head, self-tapping spanner screws located 150 mm o.c. maximum. .3 Where glass thickness dictates, 3.5 mm, off set surface-mounted glass stop shall be used. The corners shall be tight fitting and the glass stop shall be secured to the face of the door using 6 mm 20 button-head, self-tapping spanner security screws spaced 150 mm maximum. With the fasteners located not more than 50 mm from each end of each stop. .4 Orient glass stops on secure side of doors. Confirm secure side with Departmental Representative. Verify glass thickness with Departmental Representative prior to fabrication.
.4
2.4 FABRICATION OF DETENTION PRESSED STEEL FRAMES
.1
Refer to drawings for Door and Frame Schedule indicating location of Detention Pressed Steel, for doors and glass. Frames brake-formed from commercial quality sheet steel of with 2.0 mm or 2.5 mm core thickness meeting ASTM F1592 Grade No. to locations noted in Door and Frame Schedule, and Window Schedule.
.2
Section 11 19 30 Page 17 2011-06-10
2.4 FABRICATION OF DETENTION PRESSED STEEL FRAMES (Cont'd)
.3 .4
Fabricate frames as welded units. Fabricate frames in accordance with details and approved shop drawings. Provide 100 mm wide head section to all door frames unless stated otherwise. Fabricate frames to underwriter's requirements and provide Underwriter's labels to frames noted in Door and Frame Schedule requiring ULC label.
.5
.6
Fabricate frames square and free of distortion and twists. Accurately form and fit components and sections, to close fitting tolerances. Form edge bends true, straight and of minimum radius for thickness of sheet steel used. Form frames with corner joints having all contact edges closed tight with faces mitred and stops either butted or mitred.
.7
.8
Continuous weld all corner joints. Use of gussets or splices at corner joints is not acceptable. Grind welded joints smooth, to a uniform finish, flush with adjacent surfaces. Fill, sand smooth and flush to requirement stated under Finishing. Form stops in door openings minimum 16 mm deep. Form stops in glass openings minimum 31 mm deep for all K series glass, 25 mm for all other glass types. Mortise, reinforce, drill and tap frames for template hardware, in accordance with templates provided by hardware supplier. Reinforce frames for surface mounted hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface mounted hardware will be performed by others on site.
.9
.10
.11
.12
Section 11 19 30 Page 18 2011-06-10
.13
Minimum steel metal thickness for hardware reinforcements. To top hinge, provide additional 35 x 40 x 5 angle x 250 mm long welded to plate reinforcement. Fully weld reinforcement steel to frame. .1 Mortise Hinges: 6.3 mm x full width of jamb x 250 mm in length. .2 Surface Hinges: 10 mm x 35 mm x 250 mm in length. .3 Strike reinforcements: 9 mm. .4 Closer reinforcements: 5 mm. .5 Flush bolt reinforcements: 5 mm. .6 Reinforcements for surface applied hardware 5 mm. Protect mortised cut-outs for frame mounted pneumatic door locks, intercoms, card readers and door position switches with leak proof steel guard boxes, and conduits with compression fittings which shall be grout tight. Form lock guard boxes using minimum 2.5 mm metal thickness sheet steel, welded in place. Form all other guard boxes using minimum 1.6 mm metal thickness sheet steel, welded in place. Provide steel mortar boxes enclosures for strike, latch and bolt cutouts on all frames. All frames with weather-stripping shall have continuous mortar guard at the point of installation. Screw holes to be field located by installer. Weld on to door frame security rings, or any items required and supplied by Detention Hardware manufacturer to provide a complete installation of their devices. When shipping limitations so dictate, frames for large openings shall be fabricated in sections designated for splicing in the field by others. Where splicing is necessary, angle splices shall be installed at the corners of the profile, and shall extend at least 100 mm on either side of the joint. Splicing angles shall be the same core thickness as frame.
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
Frames for multiple openings shall have mullion members which, after fabrication, are closed tubular shapes conforming to profile
Section 11 19 30 Page 19 2011-06-10
.18
(Cont'd) shown on drawings, and having no visible seams of joints. All joints between faces of abutted members shall be welded and finished smooth. All joints between stops of abutted members shall be welded along the depth of the stop and shall be left neat and uniform in appearance. Prepare doors and frames to receive hardware specified in Section 11 19 20. Include installation of fully enclosed back boxes suitable for EMT conduit termination welded to back of frames at all device locations. Provide fully enclosed termination back box in header, located at top of lock jamb. Back box shall be large enough to house door position switch and to allow for termination points for field wires and lock harness. Termination back box to be constructed with 1.6 mm core thickness formed sheet steel full width of frame, with 2.5 mm steel reinforcing strip around perimeter of access opening, drilled and taped for four (4) 8-32 CSFHMS spanner screws. Termination back box to be inset 13 mm in from frame returns. Termination back box to be fully welded all sides to frame. Termination back box will house the termination point for the VDC harness from the lock, door position switch and the field side wiring. All wiring in the termination box will be connected with multi-pin molex connectors. The pneumatic tube will pass through the termination box into the lock back box located directly below. Termination back box and lock back box to be connected with 19 mm conduit, installed by frame supplier. Frame supplier to provide an additional 19mm conduit raceway within frame throat connecting underside of termination back box to top of lock back box for exterior pneumatic locks, as power supply to lock heater, and status wiring and 24 VDC power line must be in separate conduit. Top of termination back box to have compression fittings for 19 mm conduit supplied by others.
.19
.20
Lock back box to be constructed with 2.5 mm core thickness formed sheet steel fully welded to frame, with 5.0 mm steel reinforcing around perimeter of access opening, drilled and taped
Section 11 19 30 Page 20 2011-06-10
.20
(Cont'd) to receive flat head spanner machine screws for lock cover plate, with 5 mm thick back-up plate for field attachment of lock. All device back boxes are to be sealed and made grout tight at the hollow metal manufacturing plant during frame fabrication. Electrical conduit supplied by others: Provide knockouts to top of termination back box and to bottom of lock back box for one 19 mm conduit. Protect tapings for hinges, surfaces mounted hardware, weatherstripping and fasteners for glass stops from grout/ mortar fill with strips of polystyrene type 2 filler pad. Adhere insulation strips in place using heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contact cement. Supply and install rigid polystyrene insulation strips to inside of exterior face of exterior hollow metal frames. Use insulation strips of minimum 50 mm thickness and secure in place in the factory using adhesive. Supply and install 6 mm thick steel plate welded to inside of frame at rabbet for glazing to allow drilling and taping for glass stop screws. Adhere 12 mm polystyrene strips to 6 mm steel plate with heat resistant, epoxy resin based, low viscosity, contact cement, in order to keep fasteners free of grout. Removable Glazing Stops: shall be pressed steel angles not less than 3.5 mm core thickness. Stops shall be tight fitting at the corner joints, and secured in place with 6 mm hardened tamperproof self-tapping button-head spanner machine screws spaced 150 mm o.c. maximum. Stops shall be installed on the most secure (non-prisoner) side of the frame. Confirm secure side with Departmental Representative prior to fabrication. The frame underneath the glazing stops and the inside of the glazing stop shall be treated for maximum paint adhesion and painted with a rust inhibitive primer prior to installation in the frame. Verify glass thickness before drilling and tapping for glass stops.
.21
.22
.23
.24
.25
Section 11 19 30 Page 21 2011-06-10
.26
Glass stops to be match drilled and held in place by two temporary Phillips head screws. Mortar guards will be provided at each hole. The screw holes in the removable stops will be 2 mm larger than the diameter of the screw to allow for adjustment. Screw head will be of sufficient size to conceal the hole in the removable stop. Form floor anchors using minimum 3.5 mm thick x 75 mm steel angle. Form anchors with 2 holes for fastening in place. Fasten anchors inside jambs with minimum 4 spot welds per anchor. Where required, provide adjustable floor anchors with no less than 50 mm height adjustment. Supply fasteners and concrete inserts. Jamb anchors: Frames for installation in masonry walls shall be provided with adjustable jamb anchors of the yoke and strap type made from the same gauge steel as frame. Straps shall be no less than 50 mm x 250 mm in size, corrugated and/or perforated. Provide number of anchors on each jamb as follows: .1 Borrowed light frames: 2 anchors plus 1 for each 400 mm or fraction thereof over 900 mm, spaced at 400 mm maximum between anchors. .2 Door frames: place frame anchors at 400 mm o.c. along each jamb for door openings up to and including 900 mm width. Place frame anchors at 200 mm o.c. along each jamb and head for door openings over 900 mm wide. Termination box, 130 mm x 65 mm Access Cover Plates, shall be flush mounted and shall be the same core thickness as the frame and fastened with a minimum of 4 no. 8-32 flat head spanner machine screws, but not to exceed 150 mm o.c. unless shown otherwise on drawings. Access Cover Plate to be centred horizontally in head of frame. Lock cover plates shall be surface mounted and shall have a core thickness no less than 3.0 mm with all edges and corners eased, and fastened with a minimum of four (4) 6 mm diameter hardened flat head spanner machine screws, but not to exceed 150 mm o.c. unless shown otherwise on drawings.
.27
.28
.29
.30
.31
Section 11 19 30 Page 22 2011-06-10
.32
Prepare each door opening for door bumpers, 3 for single door openings and 2 for double door openings. Provide mortar guards to all bumpers, or shop install door bumpers to prevent holes from filling with grout. Painting subcontractor is to ensure bumpers have been masked off prior to painting. Lock back box for Lock Type 7C2 to be constructed with 3.0 mm core thickness formed sheet steel fully welded to frame (in order to increase impact test at lock). Lock back box to be sealed and made grout tight at the hollow metal manufacturing plant during frame fabrication. Provide all boxes and conduits required to accommodate wiring in frames where electric limit switches are specified. Weld in 2 temporary jamb spreaders at bottom of each door frame opening, to maintain alignment during shipment. For each sliding door, provide continuous full height, at a minimum, 2.5 mm thick steel vertical receiving channel for door to close against. Provide adjustable rubber bumpers on each (unless the bumpers are provided as part of Type 16B1 and Type 16B2 Locking Device Package.)
.33
.34
.35
.36
.37
2.5 CLEARANCES AND TOLERANCES FOR DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES
.1
Maintain edge clearances as follows: .1 Between doors and frames, at head and jambs: 3 mm .2 At door sills where no threshold is used: 6 mm maximum above finished floor. .3 At door sills where threshold is used: 19 mm maximum above finished floor. Maintain fabrication tolerances within following limits: .1 Width, measured between rabbets at head: nominal opening width: +1.6mm, -0.8 mm. .2 Height (total length of jamb rabbet): nominal opening height +/- 1.2 mm.
.2
Section 11 19 30 Page 23 2011-06-10
2.5 CLEARANCES AND TOLERANCES FOR DETENTION DOORS AND FRAMES (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .3 Cross sectional profile dimensions: .1 Face: +/- 0.8mm. .2 Stop: +/- 0.8 mm. .3 Rabbet: +/- 0.4 mm. .4 Depth: +/- 0.8 mm. .5 Throat: +/-1.6 mm. .4 Hardware cutout dimensions: Template dimensions +0.4 mm, -0 mm. .5 Hardware location: +/-0.8 mm. Doors: .1 Width: +/- 1.2 mm. .2 Height: +/- 1.2 mm. .3 Thickness: +/- 1.6 mm. Hardware cutout dimensions: template dimensions +0.4 mm, -0 mm. .1 Hardware location: +/- 0.8 mm.
.3
.4
2.6
ACCESSORIES
.1
Provide accessory components for hollow metal detention doors and panels as detailed, including: food pass units and drug dispensary pass-thru as per Contract Drawings.
2.7 FINISHING OF DOORS AND FRAMES
.1
After fabrication, remove welding slag and splatter, grind smooth all sharp edges and welds, fill surface depressions with metallic paste filler and sand all tool marks and surface imperfections and dress to a uniform smooth finish so that all welded joints will not be invisible under painted gloss finish. Prime paint steel and ferrous metal with one coat shop coat primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Touch up welded, grinds and damaged galvanized and zinc-coated surfaces using zinc primer. Apply isolation coating to full interior surface of frames scheduled to receive grout fill.
.2
.3
.4
Section 11 19 30 Page 24 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
INSTALLATION
.1
DEC to protect all hardware devices from work of other trades for the entire duration of the project. Install fire labeled doors and frames in accordance with NFPA 80. Set frames plumb, square, level and at correct elevation. Set in place with maximum diagonal distortion of 1.6 mm and maximum 1.0 mm out of plumb measured on face of frame. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Secure base anchors at each jamb to slab with fasteners to maintain alignment while frames are built in. Brace frames rigidly in position while building in. Remove temporary steel shipping jamb spreaders. Install wood spreaders at third points of frame rebate height to maintain frame width. Provide vertical support at centre of head for opening exceeding 1200 mm in width. Remove wood spreaders after frames have been built-in. Make allowances for deflection to ensure structural loads are not transmitted to frames. Install doors, panels, accessory components and hardware in accordance with hardware templates and manufacturer's instructions. Install hardware to requirements specified in Section 08 71 11, and Section 11 19 20. Adjust operable parts for correct clearances and function. Shop install silencers to prevent holes from filling with grout. Painting subcontractor is to remove silencers prior to painting and hand over to installer for reinstallation after painting is completed. Co-ordinate grouting of frames, installation of anchors, installation of conduit and
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 11 19 30 Page 25 2011-06-10
.10
(Cont'd) services. Co-ordinate grouting of all frames solid to adjacent construction. .1 In masonry walls ensure that frames are grouted solid at head and full length of jambs. .2 In concrete walls, ensure that frames are grouted solid at head and jambs. Through-bolt frames to concrete with approved type expansion bolts placed in rotary-drilled holes through sleeved spacers behind stops. Provide on bolt, each 200 mm maximum, from top and bottom of jamb and additional bolts at 600 mm o.c., maximum, between top and bottom bolts, in each jamb. Countersink and fill bolt heads flush with face of stops. Setting and bracing of frames in masonry construction to be performed by this Section 11 19 30 to ensure accurate placement during building-in. Building -in and grouting of set/ braced frames to be done by masonry erector. Touch up hollow metal work with shop primer, where prime painted surfaces have become scratched or abraded during handling and installation and leave ready for Finish Painting. The Detention Door Manufacturer shall be employed as subcontractor to hang and adjust all doors equipped with type 16B locking devices including mechanical installation of the following type 16B locking device components: .1 Mechanism housings at each door complete. .2 Vertical locking columns complete. .3 Bottom door guide assemblies complete. .4 Mechanism housings connecting rows of cell doors to mechanical control cabinets. .5 Mechanical control cabinets. .6 Rubber bumpers in sliding door receiving channels.
.11
.12
.13
3.2 TOOLS FOR MAINTENANCE
.1
Two fastening tools for each type of fastener shall be delivered to the Owner at Substantial Performance.
Section 11 19 30 Page 26 2011-06-10
.1
Contractor's commissioning verification will be required for installation of doors, frames, hardware and associated detention equipment for each scheduled door. Co-operate with Departmental Representative's allowing access to work for proper review, inspections and verifications.
.2
.3
Fulfill following as scope of mandatory commissioning and documentation for each and every door and frame. .1 Check following on delivery to site. .1 Conformance to shop drawings, and specifications. .2 Metal thickness (gauge) of steel, warpage, welding and cutouts. .3 Material (submit applicable lab tests). .4 Construction of doors (sample door for testing as required). .5 Preparation for associated hardware/ detention equipment. .6 Size and location of reinforcements and anchors. .2 Check following when frame are built-in. .1 Alignment. .2 Dimensions of openings before and after grouting. .3 Check following after doors have been installed. .1 Alignment. .2 Tolerances. .3 Rough-in templates and alignment of all detention equipment. .4 Check following after hardware/ detention equipment had been installed. .1 Function. .2 Cylinder/lock assembly. .3 Peripherals (DPIS, etc.). .5 Submit three (3) copies of commissioning results to Departmental Representative upon completion of tests and prior to inspection of Substantial Performance of the Work. .6 Be present and provide required resources during verification and commissioning of door control system specified in Sections 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00.
Section 11 19 30 Page 27 2011-06-10
3.4
DEMONSTRATION
.1
Arrange for equipment suppliers and installers to be present to demonstrate, guide and instruct operators and maintenance personal on operation and maintenance of doors and of frames together with locking devices, indicators and over-ride features, in accordance with Division 01 Commissioning requirements; Sections 01 79 00, 01 91 00, and 01 91 20. Attend this demonstration.
.2
END
DETENTION GRILLE DOORS AND BARRIERS
Section 11 19 40 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 20; 11 19 30; 11 19 50 and 11 19 60. Refer to Section 11 19 30, Article Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor. Details and Drawings provided by Departmental Representative indicate general overall intent and principals of design and function for project Detention Grille Doors and Barriers. This Section is responsible for final Design of Detention Grille Doors and Barriers that will meet testing, mock-up and warranty requirements within overall constraints of project. Indicate final design information on Shop Drawings for review by Departmental Representative. In particular detailing, Detention Detention Grille Doors and Barriers to adjacent construction to ensure compatibility with project conditions.
.2
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .2 CSA W59-03(R2008),Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.2
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Indicate VOC's: .1 For finishes, coatings, primers and paints.
Section 11 19 40 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2
Shop drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories. .3 Clearly indicate each type of grille door, barrier and frame, material, reinforcements, location of anchors, exposed fastenings, finishes, and arrangement of hardware. .4 Include schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and in Door and Frame Schedule.
.1
Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system during the final commissioning process.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Storage and Protection: .1 Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site. .2 Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide
Section 11 19 40 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
(Cont'd) .2 Storage and Protection:(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) instructions for removal of protective covering.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard and packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative. This Section describes detention quality steel doors and frames. Detention quality steel doors and frames are identified on the Door and Frame Schedule as "Detention Type".
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Provide rivets, equally various
security screws, security nuts, security spanner screws or other secure approved devices for affixing components.
.2
Use only rivets, security screws, or security nuts at locations where maximum security against removal is required. Use spanner screws only at locations where security against removal is not as important and where it is necessary to remove and repair items from time to time. Security screws and nuts to have an extra head which twists off when screw or nut is fully secured, leavi ng main head without
.3
.4
Section 11 19 40 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
(Cont'd) holes or slots for insertion of tool fo r removal. Security spanner screws to be Torx with Pin requiring a special spanner tool for removal. Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. Standard screws not acceptable.
.5
.6
.7
2.2 PRESSED STEEL FRAMES
.1
To be provided under Section 11 19 30.
2.3 DETENTION GRILLE DOORS
.1
Fabricate steel detention fixed grille doors as detailed. Construct doors with a perimeter member of 51 x 51 x 6.4mm hollow structural section (HSS); mitre all corners, fully weld in accordance with CSA W59 using welders holding current certification under CSA W47.1. Continuous deep-penetration arc weld at all joints. Grind smooth all welds. Grid type grille to be installed inside HSS perimeter using 2.4 x 10 mm rectangular bars at 250 mm centre to centre in the vertical direction and 2.5 mm centre to centre in the horizontal direction, fully weld all intersections and grind smooth. Ensure maximum clearance at front edge between swing door when closed, and adjacent frame, does not exceed 5 mm. Grille doors greater than 2100 in height to receive an additional 51 x 51 x 6.4 mm HSS member fully welded to perimeter members at mid-height. Swing grille doors to be prepared to receive mortise hinges, door position magnet in top of grille door, recessed track for door closure, and recesse d strike plate for lock type 7C2. Sliding grille doors greater than 2100 in height to receive a 19 diameter x 19 mm deep
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 11 19 40 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.3 DETENTION GRILLE DOORS (Cont'd)
.6
(Cont'd) stud welded to front edge of grille door 150 mm above bottom of door. 22 mm rece iving hole to be provided in lock column to re ceive this stud. This assembly is provided to ensure greater lateral stability of large grille doors in the closed position. Provide all hardware preparations necessary to suit hardware groups designated for each grille door.
.7
2.4 FIXED GRILLE BARRIERS
.1
Fabricate steel detention fixed grille barriers as detailed. An individual section of fixed barrier must not exceed 1830 mm in width. Where grille barriers are required to be wider than this, weld two or more sections together. Welds to be 50 mm long, spaced 200 mm centre to centre and dressed. Where steel frames or imbeds are specified in walls, affix barriers by welding or bolting. Welding if used, to be deep-penetration arc welding, each weld 50 mm long, spaced 2.5 mm centre to centre. Bolts, if used, to be 10 mm diameter, flat head security type, spaced 200 mm centre to centre. Where steel frames or imbeds are not specified in walls, affix barriers by bolting, with bolts 10 mm diameter, flat head security type, spaced 200 mm centre to centre. Each bolt to be engaged with lead masonry expansion shield embedded in wall. Provide angle floor clip 76 x 76 x 10 mm at foot of each vertical perimeter or door framing bar. Affix clip to floor with 10 mm diameter flat head security bolt engaged with lead expansion shield embedded in floor. For each sliding door, provide continuous full height vertical receiving channel for door to close against. Minimum 2.5 mm thick formed steel. Provide two adjustable rubber bumpers on each (unless the bumpers are provided as part of Type 16B Locking Device package).
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 11 19 40 Page 6 2011-06-10
2.4 FIXED GRILLE BARRIERS (Cont'd)
.7
For each swinging door, provide a continuous full height stop bar for door to close against; if a hollow metal door frame is not provided. Minimum material 25 mm x 2.5 mm.
2.5
FINISHES
.1 .2
Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Apply one coat of paint primer to steel and ferrous metal with exception of stainless steel and those zinc-coated or galvanized. Clean, prepare surfaces and apply primer in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3
2.6
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized or concrete encased items. Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C. Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint.
.2
.3
2.7 ISOLATION COATING
.1
Isolate aluminum from following components, by means of bituminous paint: .1 Dissimilar metals except stainless steel, zinc, or white bronze of small area. .2 Concrete, mortar and masonry. .3 Wood.
Section 11 19 40 Page 7 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
.1
Do welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections. Secure anchorages and connections to adjacent construction. Brace frames rigidly in position while building-in. Install temporary horizontal and vertical wood spreaders as necessary to maintain frame alignment. Remove temporary steel and wood spreaders after frames are built-in. Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which they pass. Provide components for building by other sections in accordance with shop drawings and schedule. Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates. Touch-up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with primer. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer where burned by field welding.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
3.2 DOOR AND BARRIER INSTALLATION
.1
Install detention grille doors and barriers and hardware in accordance with templates and manufacturer's instructions. Adjust operable parts for correct function. Cooperate with engineering supervisor provided by Detention Hardware Supplier to ensure proper installation, adjustment, and operation of hardware.
.2 .3
Section 11 19 40 Page 8 2011-06-10
3.2 DOOR AND BARRIER INSTALLATION (Cont'd)
.4
The Detention Equipment Contractor shall be responsible to hang and adjust all doors equipped with Type 16B locking devices including mechanical installation of the following Type 16B locking device components: .1 Mechanism housing at each door complete. .2 Vertical locking columns complete. .3 Bottom door guide assemblies complete. .4 Remote manual emergency release system cabinet. .5 Rubber bumpers in sliding door receiving channels.
3.3
CLEANING
.1
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.2
END
DETENTION CHAIN LINK GATES
Section 11 19 50 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 20, 11 19 30, 11 19 40, and 11 19 60. Refer to Section 11 19 30, Article Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A90/A90M-01, Standard Test Method for Weight of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings. .2 ASTM C618-03, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use as a Mineral Admixture in Concrete. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-138.1-96, Fabric for Chain Link Fence. .2 CAN/CGSB-138.2-96, Steel Framework for Chain Link Fence. .3 CAN/CGSB-138.3-96, Installation of Chain Link Fence. .4 CAN/CGSB-138.4-96, Gates for Chain Link Fence. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete. .2 CAN/CSA-G40.20-04(2009)/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .3 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .4 CSA W47.1-09, Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .5 CSA W59-03(R2008),Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding).
.2
.3
Section 11 19 50 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 00. Drawings to indicate all pertinent dimensions, connections, details, materials, finishes and all other information required to completely describe the chain link fence installation to this project. Shop Drawings to indicate: .1 Each type of swing gate and sliding gate, reinforcements, anchor locations, exposed fasteners and finishes. .2 Preparations for hardware. .3 Preparations for alarm monitoring and for door control system. .4 Schedule identifying each unit, with door marks and numbers relating to numbering on drawings and in door schedule.
.2
.3
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
.1
Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements.
.2
Section 11 19 50 Page 3 2011-06-10
.3
Pre-installation Meetings: Conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and manufacturer's warranty requirements. Manufacturer's factory representative must be present to sign off and verify the detention door and hardware system during the final commissioning process.
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Concrete mixes and materials: in accordance with CSA-A23.1. .1 Nominal coarse aggregate size: 20-5. .2 Compressive strength: 20 MPa minimum at 28 days. .3 Additives: fly ash to ASTM C618. .4 20 Mpa, 50 to 80 mm slump, 6% air entrainment. Chain-link fence fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1. .1 Type 1, Class A, heavy style 50.8 mm diamond mesh, interwoven 4.8 mm (6 Gauge) wire diameter with twisted tight selvage at top and bottom. .2 Height of fabric: as indicated. Posts, braces and rails: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, galvanized steel pipe. Dimensions as indicated. Steel Sections: to CSA G40.21 of type W- weld able steel. Minimum yield strength of 350 Mpa for Hollow Structural Sections and 300 Mpa for Rolled Sections and Plates. Welding Materials: to CSA W59. Galvanize: hot dip galvanize to a minimum rate of 600 g/m2, to CAN/CSA-G164, after fabrication. Fasteners: stainless steel torx with pin security fasteners.
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
Section 11 19 50 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.2 STEEL DETENTION .1 SWING GATES
Fabricate as detailed and in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and CAN/CGSB 138.4 using limited fasteners. Weld all connections. Construct frame using steel hollow structural steel sections, steel shapes, steel plates, and bar material. Perimeter frame to be hollow structural steel sections of sizes detailed/indicated. Detention swing gates to be fabricated using a perimeter frame of hollow structural steel sections. Intermediate horizontal support of hollow structural steel section at mid height of door. Mesh Wire by Section 32 31 13. Mesh Wire to be mechanically fastened with spanner screws spaced 200 mm centre to centre to HSS mid-rail with a continuous 25 x 6 mm steel pressure bar. Continuous 20 x 6 mm tension bar to be provided around the perimeter of Mesh Wire and welded to the HSS members 20 x 6 mm steel bars welded to the tension bars and to the HSS members. Corners of frame and gate to be mitred and welded in accordance with CSA W59 using welders holding current certification under CSA W47.1. Continuous deep-penetration arc weld at all joints. Prepare for hardware. Provide all holes and reinforcements required for proper attachment and operation of hardware, in accordance with hardware manufacturers' recommendations. Prepare for alarm monitoring and for door control system. Provide all boxes and conduit required to accommodate wiring inside swing gates and frames. Exposed conduits and wiring will not be accepted. Limit clearance at front edge between swinging gate when closed and adjacent frame to 5 mm maximum. Remove welding slag and spatter. Grind smooth all edges and welds. Remove all rust, scale, oil and other foreign substances by wire brush, sand blasting or any
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Section 11 19 50 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.2 STEEL DETENTION .10 SWING GATES (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) other means which provides clean steel surfaces ready to receive galvanized finish.
.11
Galvanize after fabrication.
2.3
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: .1 For chain link fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1 Grade 2 610 g/m2 minimum. .2 For pipe: 550 g/m2 minimum to ASTM A90. .3 For other fittings: to CAN/CSA-G164.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GRADING
.1
Remove debris and correct ground undulations along fence line to obtain smooth uniform gradient between posts.
3.2
INSTALLATION
.1
The Detention Equipment Contractor shall be responsible for the building-in, bracing and welding of exterior swing gates to locations indicated on drawings. Below grade work and concrete base supplied and installed by others. Install detention swing gates in accordance with reviewed shop drawings and CAN/CGSB 138.3. Install swing gates plumb, level, square and true to line of building. Install hardware in accordance with templates and hardware manufacturers' directions. Co-operate with detention hardware engineering supervisor as required to ensure proper hardware installation, adjustment and hardware operation.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 11 19 50 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.3
TOUCH UP
.1
Touch up field welds with rust inhibiting zinc paint. Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush removing loose and cracked coatings. Pre-treat damaged surfaces according to manufacturers' instructions for zinc-rich paint.
.2
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Clean and trim areas disturbed by operations. Dispose of surplus material as directed by Departmental Representative.
END
DETENTION EXTERIOR WINDOWS
Section 11 19 60 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
EXPLANATION
.1
This Section is to be combined with Sections 11 19 20, 11 19 30, 11 19 40 and 11 19 50. Refer to Section 11 19 30 - Article Co-ordination and Single Source Responsibility of Detention Equipment Contractor (DEC).
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) .1 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440-08, NAFS North American Fenestration Standard/ Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. .2 AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/A440S1-09, Canadian Supplement to AAMA/WDMA/CSA-101/I.S.2/ A440-08, NAFS - North American Fenestration Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors and Skylights. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). .1 ASTM A627-03, Standard Test Methods for Tool-Resisting Steel Bars, Flats, and Shapes for Detention and Correctional Facilities. .2 ASTM A653/653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .3 ASTM A924/A924M-08a Standard Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM F1915-05, Standard Test Methods for Glazing for Detention Facilities. .5 ASTM F1592-05, Standard Test Methods for Detention Hollow Metal Vision Systems. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB 1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. .3 CAN/CGSB-85.10-99, Protective Coatings for Metals. .4 CGSB 85-GP-16M-79, Painting, Galvanized Steel.
.2
.3
Section 11 19 60 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA W47.1-03 (R2008), Certification of Companies for Fusion Welding of Steel. .2 CSA W55.3-08, Certification of Companies for Resistance Welding of Steel and Aluminum. .3 CSA W59-03 (R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .4 CAN/CSA-A440-00, Windows / Special Publication A440.1-00, User Selection Guide to CSA Standard CAN/CSA-A440-00, Windows. .5 CAN/CSA- G40.20-04/G40.21-04, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/ Structural Quality Steel. SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council, Standards. .1 SSPC SP10-00, Near-White Blast Cleaning. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC): .1 CAN/ULC-S701-11, Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.
.5
.6
1.3
DESCRIPTION
.1
The Detention Exterior Windows shall be a three part composite unit consisting of an interior detention grade component (Window Guard), an exterior commercial grade aluminum glazed component and a pre-cast concrete surround for those units placed into concrete block exterior walls. .1 Interior Detention Grade Component (Window Guard): shall consist of 2.0 mm pressed steel perimeter frame, hollow structural steel mullions and transoms, tungsten carbide resistant security inserts, perforated plate complete with detention grade vent actuator and anchors, as described here in and shall be supplied directly to the site. .2 Exterior Aluminum and Glazing Components: Refer to Sections 07 90 00, 08 51 13 and 08 80 00 specifications on all extruded curtain wall aluminum sections, glazing, gaskets, pressure plates, sealants, fasteners and thermal break materials. .3 Pre-cast Concrete Surrounds: Refer to Section 03 45 00 for specifications on pre-cast concrete surround for all Detention Exterior Windows placed into Concrete block exterior walls.
Section 11 19 60 Page 3 2011-06-10
1.4 PERFORMANCE/ DESIGN CRITERIA FOR CORRECTIONAL SERVICE CANADA
.1
Windows shall have strength adequacy for post disaster, fail secure containment of inmates. Therefore windows shall meet 1.5 times the specified wind load without fracture of the product or excessive permanent deformation in accordance with CSA-A440S1. Windows shall meet Correctional Service Canada level 3 (D3) providing extended resistance to attack in the form of rodsaw resistant steels and tempered glass. .1 Tool resisting steel bars shall be spaced maximum 115 mm apart. The center two bars on each window shall be 115 mm apart. Pass ASTM F1915: .1 Table 1 Impact test criteria: large blunt and sharp impactors, Security Grade 1. .2 Table 2 Impact test criteria: torch and small blunt impactor, Security Grade 1. Pass ASTM F1592: .1 Table 1 Impact Series for Frame and Glazing/Panel Impact Testing Multi Light Frame, Grade 1. Windows: fabricated for reglazing from exterior.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.5
QUALIFICATIONS
.1
The Work as set forth in these drawings and specifications shall be executed only by the manufacturer having proven satisfactory performance in the manufacture of detention type windows and possessing adequate equipment and skilled personnel to detail, fabricate and erect the work of theses Documents as specified and shown. Qualification of welders: .1 Welding of load supporting components shall be performed by companies certified by Canadian Welding Bureau in accordance with CSA W47.1 latest edition. Workmanship Standards: .1 Resistance welding: to CSA W55.2 latest edition. .2 Fusion Welding: to CSA W59 latest edition.
.2
.3
Section 11 19 60 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS (Cont'd)
.3
Workmanship Standards:(Cont'd) .2 Fusion Welding:(Cont'd)
.1
Weather Resistance: .1 Windows shall conform to the Load, Air Infiltration and Water resistance tests as set out in CAN/CSA-A440. .2 Work of this Section shall meet or exceed the requirements of CAN/CSA-A440 and current Building Code wherever applicable. Tamper Resistance: .1 The Interior Detention Grade Component described in shall resist cutting by tungsten carbide rod saw as per test criteria described in this Section.
.2
1.7
SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Clearly indicate, by large scale details, all perimeter conditions of construction, core metal thickness, mullion details, all components of the assembly, anchorage, sealing techniques, tolerances of openings, elevations, all materials as required to completely describe all conditions for detention exterior windows on this project. The contract documents do not purport to be shop drawings, but merely show the general window configuration, construction and shape of members and extrusion desired. Deviations from the details shown may only be permitted to meet manufacturing limitations and techniques and are subject to prior review and approval by the Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
Section 11 19 60 Page 5 2011-06-10
.1
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.9 SAMPLE AND TESTING
.1
Within 45 days upon award of the contract, submit a full size sample of window type W1. The sample shall be complete as if ready for installation, finish painted with all glazing installed. The sample shall be crated and shipped prepaid both ways by the contractor from the place of manufacture to the testing laboratory chosen by the Departmental Representative. .1 The Contractor is required to send a representative of the manufacturer / supplier to the Laboratories, prior to testing, to explain and demonstrate the unit, to representatives of the Departmental Representative. Testing will determine conformance to performance requirements stated above. The Departmental Representative will appoint and pay for services of testing agency, should this service be required. .2 Cutting test for tungsten resistant inserts to comply with ASTM A627 Test method. .1 Test Method. The testing laboratory shall be responsible for determining that all rod saws used for testing comply with the specifications for tungsten carbide rod saws, which areas follows: 2.1 mm diameter, standard grit, 304 mm approximate length. .2 The test shall be conducted on a 150 by 150 mm gravity - feed, power
Section 11 19 60 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.9 SAMPLE AND TESTING (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) hacksaw machine under the following conditions: .1 Rod saw tension: 1.9 N (200lbf). .2 Static gravity feed pressure(ctr. of stroke): 116N+/- 4n (26 lbf +/- 1 lbf). .3 Dynamic feed pressure: 93-165N (21-37lbs.). .4 Maximum lift on return stroke: 0 mm. .5 Speed: 60 Strokes/Min. .6 Length of stroke: 152mm. .7 Cutting fluid: None. .3 The cutting resistance of the specimen bar shall be determined by placing it firmly in a vice underneath the rod saw in a power hacksaw and causing 18000 cutting cycles of the rod saw to be made on the bar at one point. The point at which the cutting test is conducted shall be more than 51 mm from either end of the specimen bar and not closer than 12.7 mm to the midpoint of the specimen bar. The direction of the cut shall be perpendicular to the axis of the bar. .4 To assure uniform cutting action with no significant variations as a result of unusual rod saw wear in any of the 18000 cycles, a new rod saw shall be used for every 300 cutting cycles. .5 One cutting cycle of the power hacksaw shall be a complete forward motion and return motion of the saw to the position from which the cycle began. .6 Security Inserts must meet or exceed the following: .1 Appendix X1.2 Minimum Acceptable Performance Characteristics for Composite Tool Resisting Steel .1 Grade No.: 1. .2 Steel Type: Composite T.R. Steel. .3 Dimensions: 13 mm x 32 mm. .4 Rod Saws used: 72. .5 Cutting Time: 6 Hours.
Section 11 19 60 Page 7 2011-06-10
1.9 SAMPLE AND TESTING (Cont'd)
.1
(Cont'd) .2 (Cont'd) .7 No window frames are to be supplied to the project until the sample has been tested and approved by the Departmental Representative. .8 Within 30 days upon award of contract, provide testing documentation that complies with ASTM A627 in a format that is satisfactory to Departmental Representative.
1.10 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE
.1
Schedule delivery of components to pre-cast concrete plant and site to coincide with installation of this Work.
1.11 MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide the Departmental Representative with written maintenance instructions for the care, cleaning glazing, and servicing of windows.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Sheet steel: 2.0 mm, commercial quality steel cold rolled to ASTM A653/653M; zinc coated to ASTM A924/A924M, coating designation. Steel sections and plates: to CAN/CSA-G40.21, zinc coated to ASTM A924/A924M. Anchors: Nelson studs. Bar stock: 15 M 400 MPa. Zinc rich paint: to CAN/CGSB 1.181. Isolation coating: alkali resistant bituminous paint. Security bars inside steel tube transom and mullions shall be composite tool resisting steel that is a composite of tungsten carbide or other hard surfacing material for cutting resistance and 36 mm x 12.5 mm steel bar to CAN/CSA-G40.21. Tool resistant surfaces to be minimum 6 mm deposit thickness continuous
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6
.7
Section 11 19 60 Page 8 2011-06-10
.7
(Cont'd) along length of both edges on mullion sections and on inside surface on perimeter sections. Consistency of hard-surfacing materials shall be 30%x16 mesh minimum and 70%x8 mesh maximum. The overall consistency of the treated surface must be 80% hard-surfaced materials and 20% base welding materials. Hardness rating shall not be less than Carbide 70-74RC / 57RC Matrix. Security bars to extend a minimum of 25 mm past face of frame or connecting transom, and are to be welded in place. Welding materials CSA W59.1. Security Fastening Devices: button head or countersink flat-head, torx with pin stainless steel type 316 with cadmium coating (to locations where exposed to inmates). Metallic paste filler: Two component automotive body filler, applied non-sag to vertical surfaces. Rigid insulation blocks: extruded polystyrene, conforming to CAN/ULC-S701, Type 2. Fasteners: Stainless steel type 316 with cadmium coating, finished to match adjacent material (only to locations where not exposed to inmates).
.8 .9
.10
.11
.12
.13
Foam in place insulation.
2.2
PRIMER
.1
Touch-up prime CAN/CGSB-1.181.
2.3
PAINT
.1
Field in accordance with Section 09 91 00. Provided final finish shall be free of scratches or other blemishes.
Section 11 19 60 Page 9 2011-06-10
2.4 SURFACE PREPARATION OF HOLLOW STEEL SECTIONS
.1
Thoroughly clean and suitably treat steel prior to delivery. Grind smooth sharp projections. Remove loose mill scale, rust, oil grease, dirt and other foreign matter by sandblasting to SSPC-SP10.
.2 .3
2.5 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PRIMING
.1
Prepare zinc coated sheet steel for priming to CGSB 85-GP-16M. Prime paint all hollow metal surfaces other than back faces which are to be cast into pre-cast concrete or cast into reinforced concrete walls ready to receive enamel paint by others. Fill all surface depressions and butted joints with metallic paste filler and sand to uniform smooth finish. Re-prime where metallic paste filler and sanding occur. Provide isolation coating to all surfaces in contact with concrete or grout. Sandblast finish to precast exterior window sills: light sandblast finish in order to expose aggregate face.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.6 FABRICATION FOR .1 WINDOW TYPE W1, W1A AND W2
Fabricate all frames, using 2.0 mm sheet steel, in accordance with details and reviewed shop drawings, fully straight and square, free of twist, warp and distortion shall not exceed 0.1% of the distance of the straight plane from which measured. Fabricate all frames ready to receive aluminum sections for Window Type W1 and W1A and aluminum sections and ventilation component for Window Type W2 specified in Section 08 51 13, and as detailed on drawings. The window frames shall be so assembled as to ensure neat construction and secure well-fitted joints. Frame member corner joints shall be made by argon shielded arc welds,
.2
Section 11 19 60 Page 10 2011-06-10
2.6 FABRICATION FOR .2 WINDOW TYPE W1, W1A AND W2 (Cont'd)
(Cont'd) continuous across the joints. Corner joints of frame perimeter shall be mitered and continuously shop welded on frame side which will be concealed from view after frames are installed. Keep exposed welds to a minimum and where such welds are necessary they shall be ground flush with surface of frame. Upon completion of all welding work, remove all weld slag and spatter, grind flush all excess welds and fill remaining depressions with automotive resin body filler and grind smooth to result in smooth flush frame assembly, where exposed to view. Reinforce head, jamb and sill of all frame members, across throat side with 2.0 mm thick x 38 mm wide steel straps at 300 mm o.c., welded to frame returns. Furnish all frames complete with steel tube transoms and mullions. Extend steel tube transom and mullion minimum 10 mm into jamb frames either side and continuously weld full circumference of tube to inside of frames. Place security bar in steel tube transom tight to inside face of tube and weld to each end of steel tube. Shop prime all frames, loose stops and security bars after fabrication and prior to shipping. Main steel unexposed surfaces shall be painted with one coat to bituminous paint. Steel flat bars, brackets, angle etc., shall be shop or field painted (after welding) with two (2) coats of bituminous paint. Apply continuous rigid insulation strips to throat side of frames, in locations detailed to allow glazing screw penetration in concrete filled jamb and head sections. Apply insulation strips with continuous bed of waterproof permanent adhesive compatible with substrate and insulation material. Apply injectable foam into all mullion sections to prevent seepage of concrete into mullions during the cast in place process and to allow for glazing screw penetration.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 11 19 60 Page 11 2011-06-10
2.6 FABRICATION FOR .9 WINDOW TYPE W1, W1A AND W2 (Cont'd)
Window Type W1 & W1A - Operable Vents are to be supplied and installed on site by Section 08 51 13. Prior to site installation, Section 08 51 13 to supply operable unit to Section 11 19 60 contractor for sub-assembly. Section 11 19 60 contractor is responsible for the supply and installation of the stainless steel perforated plate to the operable units. Fabricate perforated plate from 3 mm thick # 304 stainless steel with No. 4 finish. Perforated plate to be brake formed to suit operable window dimensions and to accommodate actuator clearances. Perforated plate must be notched to accept the operable window retainer clips and punched to accept the actuator knob. Attach stainless steel plate to operable window with 5/32" dia. stainless steel rivets at 150 mm on center around the perimeter of the stainless steel plate as detailed. Refer to Section 08 51 13 for Operable Vent details. Section 11 19 60 contractor is responsible for the supply and installation of the detention grade aluminum knob and stainless steel actuator required to operate the window unit. Knob actuator to be solid aluminum, machined to suit the actuator and the stainless steel perforated plate. The actuator mechanism must be manufactured from high grade stainless steel to prevent rust. Actuator operation must be continuous turn, bi-directional and must rotate freely in a clockwise and counter clockwise direction without dead stop at any point in the travel. Rotating the knob 180 degrees in either direction must open or close the vent depending on the orientation of the vent at the beginning of the cycle. The knob and actuator must be securely mounted to the stainless steel perforated plate and must be geometrically located to allow free and continuous operation of the operable unit.
.10
.11
Section 11 19 60 Page 12 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
CO-ORDINATION
.1
Co-ordinate and co-operate with all forces doing work in connection with work of this Section to permit proper execution of the work, including the work described in Sections 03 45 00, 08 51 13 and 08 80 00. Provide instructions and information in writing outlining the requirements necessary for surfaces, materials or inserts prepared and/or supplied which affect this Work. Where anchors, inserts, reglets and accessories affect this work provide assistance and install such items where necessary.
.2
.3
3.2 SITE MEASUREMENTS
.1
Ensure that close liaison with pre-cast concrete manufacturer; cast in place concrete contractor, masonry contractor are maintained to ensure that close tolerances are adhered to between the window units and the window openings.
3.3 INSTALLATION .1 BY OTHERS (REFER TO SECTIONS 08 51 13 AND 08 80 00
Install detention exterior windows complete with all components, plumb square and true to line, free from warp, twist or superimposed loads, installed to achieve a weather tight installation, and to maintain air seals.
.2
Installation of aluminum window components by Section 08 51 13. Installation of glazing components by Section 08 80 00.
.3
Section 11 19 60 Page 13 2011-06-10
3.4
CLEANING
.1
Remove all excess and/or foreign matter from finished surfaces. Leave work in a first class new condition free from all contamination, scratches, stains, marks and excess caulking. The contractor is to receive from the window manufacturer printed instructions designating the proper methods and material to be used in cleaning the work of this Section.
END
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Manufacture, supply and coordination of steel unit masonry.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM A53/A53M-02, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A269-02, Specification for Seamless and Welded Austenitic Stainless Steel Tubing for General Service. .3 ASTM A307-02, Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anti-corrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-92, Ready-Mixed, Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA A179-04(R2009), Mortar and Grout for Unit Masonry. .2 CAN/CSA-A371-04(R2009), Masonry Construction for Buildings. .3 CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-98, General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel. .4 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R1998), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles. .5 CAN/CSA-S16.1-01, Limit States Design of Steel Structures. .6 CSA W48-01, Filler Metals and Allied Materials for Metal Arc Welding (Developed in co-operation with the Canadian Welding Bureau). .7 CSA W59-1989(R2001),Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding) (Imperial Version).
.2
.3
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit two copies of WHMIS MSDS Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate VOC's: .1 For finishes, coatings, primers and paints. Shop Drawings .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Indicate materials, core thicknesses, finishes, connections, joints, method of anchorage, number of anchors, supports, reinforcement, details, and accessories. Samples. .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit samples. .1 Two of each type of masonry unit specified. .2 Two of each type of masonry accessory specified. .3 One of each type of masonry reinforcement, tie and connector proposed for use. .4 A minimum of six for testing purposes. .3 Submit samples tested to laboratories employing technicians certified/trained in procedures for testing masonry units. Manufacturer's Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Test Reports: Certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: Product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-installation Meetings: .1 Conduct pre-installation meeting with masonry contractor to verify project
.2
.3
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 3 2011-06-10
.3
Pre-installation Meetings:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) requirements, manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. .2 Conduct pre-installation meeting to review installation methods and requirements for the steel unit masonry (Steel Block) to confirm embed requirements mounting device applications and locations. Confirm installation methods for all steel unit masonry with related trade contractors' representatives including electrical, controls, mechanical and detention equipment contractors. .3 Notify the individual trade contractor in advance of start-up meeting to confirm attendance by representative. .4 All steel unit masonry to be supplied by this section and installed by Section 04 20 00. .5 Product shall be manufactured by a firm experienced in the design, production and coordination of steel unit masonry (Steel Block) assemblies and the integration of security, electronic electrical or mechanical devices that impact on this scope of work. .6 Manufacturer of steel unit masonry products to have successfully completed a minimum of 3 previous projects similar in size and complexity to this project. Provide qualification documentation to the Departmental Representative when requested. Manufacturer's production welders shall be qualified to weld material types, thicknesses, and joint types typical for steel block units of the type specified. Qualifications shall be substantiated by a copy of of "Welders Certification" in accordance with CSA W47.1.
.4
.1
Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading: .1 Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Storage and Protection: .1 Cover exposed stainless steel surfaces with pressure sensitive heavy protection paper or apply strippable plastic coating, before shipping to job site.
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 4 2011-06-10
.1
(Cont'd) .2 Storage and Protection:(Cont'd) .2 Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building. Provide instructions for removal of protective covering.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
1.7
SITE CONDITIONS .1
Site Environmental Requirements. .1 Cold weather requirements. .1 Conform to CSA-A371 and following requirements. .1 Maintain temperature of mortar between 5 degrees C and 50 degrees C until batch is used or becomes stable. .2 Maintain ambient temperature between 5 degrees C and 50 degrees C and protect site from windchill. .2 Hot weather requirements. .1 Protect freshly laid masonry from drying too rapidly, by means of waterproof, non-staining coverings. .2 Keep masonry dry using waterproof, non-staining coverings that extend over walls and down sides sufficient to protect walls from wind driven rain, until masonry work is completed and protected by flashings or other permanent construction.
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 5 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Masonry materials are specified in Section 04 20 00.
.2
Steel sections and plates: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W. Welding materials: to CSA W59. Welding electrodes: to CSA W48 Series. Bolts and anchor bolts: to ASTM A307. Masonry Mortar and Grount: refer to Section 04 20 00. Masonry Anchorage and reinforcing: refer to Section 04 20 00. Masonry Accessories: must be from the same steel unit masonry manufacturer. All steel unit masonry (Steel Block) must be designed to suit the exact outside dimensions of metric masonry blocks. Horizontal Steel Embed Block: 6mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at both ends and center on full size blocks; dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Vertical Steel Embed Block: 6mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at both ends and center on full size blocks; dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Square End Embed Block: 6mm cold rolled steel face plates with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the faces plates at one end and center on full size blocks c/w 6mm end cap welded to face plates at opposite end; dimensions to suit full or half size blocks.
.3 .4 .5 .6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 6 2011-06-10
.13
Bull Nose Embed Block: 6mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at one end and center on full size blocks. Provide single or double bull nosed blocks to all visible openings exterior corners, wall ends and at 250 mm thick or greater, block wall door jambs and other openings. Outside corner blocks to have same finish on exposed ends and on outside face. Radius on bull nose Steel Block to be standard 50mm radius. Masonry block to suit radius on Steel block. Coordinate dimensions and sizes with masonry contractor; dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Secure recessed toilet paper Block: 6mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the face plate. Coordinate dimensions and sizes with masonry contractor. Secure recessed Soap Dish Block: 6mm stainless steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the face plate. Coordinate dimensions and sizes with masonry contractor. Single and Double-Sided Mechanical Device Block: 6mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the face plates at both ends and center on full size blocks. Provide blocks for single-gang, 2-gang and 3-gang boxes. Coordinate dimensions and sizes for mechanical items including wall mounted thermostats, washer taps and drains, etc. dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Sprinkler Head Blocks: 6mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the face plate. Provide pipe sleeve for sprinkler line securely welded to both faces of Steel Block. Coordinate diameter of pipe sleeve with mechanical contractor.
.14
.15
.16
.17
.18
Single and Double-Sided Electrical Outlet Block: 6mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 7 2011-06-10
.18
(Cont'd) welded to the face plates at both ends and center on full size blocks. Provide blocks for single-gang, 2-gang and 3-gang boxes. Coordinate dimensions and sizes for electrical items including plug-ins, light switches, data outlets, and fire alarm stations. CSA approved electrical boxes sized to suit the device must be securely welded to the inside face of the device blocks. Coordinate electrical box size and applications with electrical contractor to ensure compatibility with device. Steel Block dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Accurately laser cut openings in face plates to accept electrical boxes with minimal tolerances to prevent mortar seepage around boxes. Oversized cut outs must be caulked or sealed prior to installation. Single and Double-Sided Security Device Block: 6mm cold rolled steel plate with internal spacers or webs of 3.5mm steel sheet welded to the face plate s at both ends and center on full size blocks. Provide blocks for single-gang, 2-gang and 3-gang boxes. Coordinate dimensions and sizes for secure items including call stations, card readers, intercoms and key switches. CSA approved electrical boxes sized to suit the device must be securely welded to the inside face of the device blocks. Coordinate electrical box size and applications with BSCS contractor to ensure compatibility with device. Steel Block dimensions to suit full or half size blocks. Accurately laser cut openings in face plates to accept electrical boxes with minimal tolerances to prevent mortar seepage around boxes. Oversized cut outs must be caulked or sealed prior to installation.
.19
2.2
FABRICATION
.1
Perform welding work in accordance with CSA W59 unless specified otherwise. Assemble Steel Block units square, straight, and true to required sizes, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections. Fit and shop assemble work, ready for installation.
.2
.3
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 8 2011-06-10
.4
Ensure exposed welds are continuous for length of each joint. File or grind exposed welds smooth and flush. Provide completed Steel Block units for building in by Section 04 20 00 in accordance with shop drawings and schedules.
.5
2.3
FINISHES
.1 .2
Shop coat primer: to CAN/CGSB-1.40. Zinc primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181.
2.4
SHOP PAINTING
.1
Apply one shop coat of primer to metal items, with exception of galvanized or concrete encased items. Use primer unadulterated, as prepared by manufacturer. Paint on dry surfaces, free from rust, scale, grease. Do not paint when temperature is lower than 7 degrees C. Clean surfaces to be field welded; do not paint.
.2
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
.1
Provide completed Steel Block Units for building in by Section 04 20 00 in accordance with shop drawings and schedules. Erect metalwork square, plumb, straight, and true, accurately fitted, with tight joints and intersections. Provide suitable means of anchorage acceptable to Departmental Representative such as dowels, anchor clips, bar anchors, expansion bolts and shields, and toggles. Exposed fastening devices to match finish and be compatible with material through which they pass.
.2
.3
.4
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 9 2011-06-10
.5
Provide components for building by other sections in accordance with shop drawings and schedule. Hand items over for casting into concrete or building into masonry to appropriate trades together with setting templates. Touch-up rivets, field welds, bolts and burnt or scratched surfaces after completion of erection with primer. Touch-up galvanized surfaces with zinc rich primer where burned by field welding.
.6
.7
.8
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and data sheets.
3.3
INSTALLATION
.1
Installation of all; Steel Block units to be completed by Section 04 20 00. Install steel unit masonry (Steel Block) at each architectural, mechanical, electrical and secure device in concrete block masonry walls. Install steel unit masonry to mount steel items including: .1 steel furniture .2 miscellaneous steel items .3 telephone screen .4 deal tray .5 sliding door systems .6 fire hose cabinets .7 recessed toilet paper holders .8 clothes hook .9 sink counter .10 wall shelves .11 tv shelves and brackets .12 appliance cover .13 bench .14 secure access panels .15 detention grilles .16 computer workstations .17 Refer to drawings for further clarifications.
STEEL UNIT MASONRY
Section 11 19 70 Page 10 2011-06-10
.2
Do masonry work in accordance with CSA-A371 except where specified otherwise. Build masonry plumb, level, and true to line, with vertical joints in alignment. Layout coursing and bond to achieve correct coursing heights, and continuity of bond above and below openings, with minimum of cutting. Clean steel unit masonry of substances that may impair bond with mortar. Install steel block during the installation of adjacent masonry. Install with full mortar joints. Furrowing is not permitted. Remove excess mortar.
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.4
SITE TOLERANCES .1
Tolerances in accordance with CSA-A371 apply.
.1
Inspection and testing will be carried out by Testing Laboratory designated by Departmental Representative.
3.6
CLEANING
.1
Perform cleaning after installation to remove construction and accumulated environmental dirt. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
.2
END
PREFABRICATED SECURITY COMPONENTS
Section 13 26 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 07 90 00: Joint Sealing for security sealant.
.2 .3
Section 11 19 20: Detention Hardware. Section 11 19 70: Steel Unit Masonry.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM): .1 ASTM A666-03, Standard Specification for Annealed or Cold-Worked Austenitic Stainless Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bar.
.2
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB): .1 CAN/CGSB-1.40-97, Anticorrosive Structural Steel Alkyd Primer. .2 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Correctional Service Canada, Technical Criteria Document, Inmate Cells - Chapter A-11, 1986-04-29 and Control Posts - Chapter A-12, 1986-09-09. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21-04(R2009), General Requirements for Rolled or Welded Structural Quality Steel/Structural Quality Steel. .2 CAN/CSA-W59-03(R2008), Welded Steel Construction (Metal Arc Welding). .3 CAN/CSA-G164-92(2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
.3
.4
1.3 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
.1
Provide complete pre-fabricated, modular components for typical and accessible cells. Propose system of construction for approval by Departmental Representative. Make connection to building services.
.2
.3
Section 13 26 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.4
SECURITY LEVEL
.1
Provide continuous welding, ground and filled. Fill exposed joints and recesses in inmate areas with security caulking. Definitions: .1 Maximum: Equivalent to CSC Chapter A-11, Security Level S-7. .2 Level B: Equivalent to CSC Chapter A-12, Security Level "B".
.2
.3
1.5
SUBMITTALS
.1
Shop drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Sections 01 33 00 and 01 78 00. .2 Clearly indicate structural members and connection details, bearing and anchorage details, accessories, schedule of materials and finishes, fasteners and welds. .3 Clearly describe requirements of other systems of components related to this work but provided by others. Obtain necessary information required to detail this work including methods of integration and securing. .4 Supply erection drawings for review before construction. .5 Clearly indicate erection dimensions and methods. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Sections 01 33 00. .2 Submit 150 x 150 mm steel sample demonstrating powder coating finish and colour for the approval of the Departmental Representative. Cell and detention furniture: .1 Within 30 days of Contract award, submit preliminary details and description of planning, materials, equipment and methods for approval by the Departmental Representative including the following: .1 Proposed materials and fabrication methods. .2 Samples of proposed materials and finishes. .3 Preliminary shop drawings.
.2
.3
Section 13 26 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
.3
Cell and detention furniture:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) .4 Manufacturer's cut sheets and literature fully describing all manufactured products and materials. .5 Proposed methods of installation. .2 Following the Engineer's review of the preliminary submission, make adjustments to shop drawings and samples as required by the Departmental Representative for review. .3 Completely detail items indicating materials, dimensions, methods of fixing, field jointing, attachment, size, thickness, gauges of metals, fasteners and finishes. .4 Submit samples of metal finishes, hardware and fabrication details to the Departmental Representative for review. .5 Manufacturer's catalogue literature may be submitted in lieu of shop drawings for equipment and hardware, provided installation is of a typical nature not requiring special details and approval has been obtained from the Departmental Representative to do so. .6 Submit copies of detailed procedures covering the care, cleaning and maintenance of stainless steel and painted fabrications for incorporation into operating and maintenance manuals specified under Section 01 78 00.
.1
Manufacturer's Qualifications: Companies specializing in fabricating prefabricated security components specified under this Section with a minimum of 5 years experience for projects of similar size and complexity. Use fabricators capable of providing architectural quality work. Provide qualification documentation to the Departmental Representative when requested. Installer's qualifications: Skilled in the work assigned and having a minimum of 5 years proven experience in the installation of projects of a similar size and complexity. Mock-up: .1 Fabricate, deliver, and erect one full scale mock-up of each type of prefabricated security component in location acceptable to the Departmental Representative. .2 Demonstrate quality of workmanship.
.2
.3
Section 13 26 01 Page 4 2011-06-10
.3
Mock-up:(Cont'd) .3 Mock-up may form part of final Work, if acceptable to the Departmental Representative. Remove and dispose of mock-ups which do not form part of Work. Pre-installation meeting: Arrange with Contractor and Departmental Representatice to inspect substrates, and to review installation procedures 48 hours in advance of installation.
.4
1.7
WARRANTY
.1
For the work of this Section the 12 month warranty period prescribed in GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended three years. Inspect prefabricated components 30 days before expiry of warranty and repair defects within 15 days of inspection.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
General: .1 The selection of the appropriate metal and fabrication technique is left to the discretion of the fabricator to achieve the desired end result, subject to the review of the Departmental Representative. .2 Metals to be new and free from defects which may impair their strength, durability or appearance and be of the best commercial quality suitable for the intended use. Metals to possess structural properties to sustain safely the strains and stresses to wich they will be subjected. Metals to be free of excessive rust, mill scale, pitting, seam marks, roughness and discolouration. Metals to possess properties necessary to achieve the desired finish. .3 Confirm all dimensions with detention furniture contractor prior to weld plate fabrication and installation. .4 All beds and desks are to be continuously welded to weld plates at all joints to ensure all gaps are filled. .5 All welds are to be smooth.
Section 13 26 01 Page 5 2011-06-10
.1
General:(Cont'd) .6 Provide all components and accessories as required for complete and secure installation of prefabricated security components. Steel: to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 300W, minimum 25% recycled content. Hollow Structural Sections (HSS): to CAN/CSA-G40.20/G40.21, Grade 350W, Class H, minimum 25% recycled content. Stainless steel: to ASTM A666, type 302, No. 4 finish. Alkyd primer: oil type to CAN/CGSB- 1.40-M. Galvanizing: hot dip, unpassivated, to CAN/CSA-G164-M, minimum 600 g/m2. Galvanized primer: zinc rich, ready mix to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Powder coating: Powder coating for use at wall shelf, television shelf and any additional areas as indicated. .1 Provide samples for each colour and finish for the Departmental Representative's approval. .2 Colours: To be selected by the Departmental Representative. .3 Finishes shall be fully cured and inert at fabricator's shop. .4 Acceptable material: .1 Powder Coatings, as manufactured by Tiger Drylac 1-800-243-8148 www.tiger-coatings.us. .2 Powder Coatings, Valspar Paint 1-800-845-9061 www.valsparpaint.com. .3 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Welding: CSA W59. Security sealant: In accordance with Section 07 90 00. Security fasteners: .1 Security Fasteners (to all secure, inmate detention areas): use either concealed
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9 .10
.11
Section 13 26 01 Page 6 2011-06-10
.11
Security fasteners:(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) fasteners or tamper resistant Torx with pin fasteners where exposed. .2 Provide security screws, security nuts, rivets, spanner screws or other equally secure approved devices for affixing various items, ie torx pin head, socket pin head, phillips pin head, hex pin head or equivalent. .3 Spanner screws to have slots that require a special spanner tool to remove screws. .4 Round head screws not acceptable except at locations approved where material is not thick enough to permit counter-sinking. .5 Standard screws not acceptable.
2.2 CELL AND DETENTION FURNITURE
.1
Cell and detention furniture for accessible and typical cells to include the following: .1 Bed. .2 Desk. .3 TV shelf. .4 Wall shelf. .5 Dining table. .6 Provide all components as required for complete and secure installation of cell and detention furniture including but not limited to plates, angles, framing, stud anchors, fasteners, and pivoting tabs. Cell and detention furniture to sizes as shown. Fabricate cell and detention furniture as detailed on Contract Drawings. Weld sections together with continuous fillet welds as detailed. Weld using 63 Hardcro 3.2 mm electrodes. Use Torx with pin tamperproof fasteners wherever exposed fasteners occur.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.3 STEEL SECURITY BULKHEADS
.1
Fabricate steel bulkhead from 3 mm thick brakeshape galvanized steel as shown on Contract Drawings.
Section 13 26 01 Page 7 2011-06-10
2.3 STEEL SECURITY BULKHEADS (Cont'd)
.2
Steel bulkhead enclosure to be complete with expansion anchors, stainless steel pop rivets, strap and security sealant as shown. Bulkhead to be complete with predrilled holes as required to permit secure fixing of light fixtures. Weld steel strap to steel enclosure flush with bottom angle. Galvanize after fabrication. Coordinate with Section 07 90 00 as required for installation of security sealant.
.3
.4
.5
2.4
DEAL TRAY
.1
Provide deal tray fabricated from 6 mm thick stainless steel plate complete with door, angles and framing as shown on Contract Drawings. Sizes as shown. Provide all hardware as required for installation including but not limited to piano hinge, bolt mechanism and receiver. Welded joints to be ground smooth. Adjust door for smooth operation.
.2
.3 .4
2.5
GUN PORT
.1
Provide gun port as shown on Contract Drawings. Sizes as shown. Provide all components and accessories as required for complete and secure installation of gun port including but not limited to slide bars, bolts, tabs, handles, and hinges. Welded joints to be ground smooth.
.2
.3
.4
Adjust door for smooth operation.
Section 13 26 01 Page 8 2011-06-10
2.6 CELL DOOR PASS THRU
.1
Provide 6 mm thick steel plate cell door pass thru as shown on Contract Drawings complete with components as required for complete and secure installation such as but not limited to hinges, tamperproof Torx fasteners, and spacers. Sizes as shown. Coordinate with Section 11 19 30 for sizing and installation at detention door as required. Welded joints to be ground smooth. Adjust pass thru unit for smooth operation.
.2
.3 .4
2.7
FABRICATION
.1
Fabricate prefabricated security components in accordance with reviewed shop drawings. Accurately fit and rigidly frame together corners and mitres. Match components together carefully to produce perfect continuity of line and design. Location of visible joints to be subject to approval of Departmental Representative. Weld to CSA W59. File or grind welds smooth and flush with adjoining surface.
.2
2.8
POWDER COATING
.1
Shop apply powder coating to items as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Clean assemblies as indicated free of rust and grease. Pretreat with zinc phosphate. Spray apply powder coating electrostatically to a dry film thickness of 3 to 4 mils.
.2
Section 13 26 01 Page 9 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
ERECTION
.1
Erect prefabricated security components in accordance with regulations by-laws and codes applicable at place of building. Supply other sections with templates, instructions and built-in items. Install work straight, plumb and level to a tolerance of 1:600. Provide required reinforcing and anchorage. Touch-up burnt, scratched or chipped primer. Coordinate with Section 07 90 00 as required for installation of security sealant.
.2
.3
3.2
CLEANING
.1
Wash down metal surface using solution of mild domestic detergent in warm water, applied with soft wiping cloths. Remove excess sealant by moderate use of mineral spirits of other solvent acceptable by sealant manufacturer.
.2
END
EARTHWORK - SHORT FORM
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
WORK INCLUDED
.1
Excavation and backfilling for site services work is included in this Section. This work to be laid out and supervised by trade concerned. required for mechanical, electrical and site services.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-09, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .2 ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400ft-lbf/ft3) (600kN-m/m3). .3 ASTM D751-06, Standard Test Methods for Coated Fabrics. Canadian Green Building Council (CaGBC) .1 LEED Canada-NC Version 1.0-December 2004, LEED (Leadership in Energy and Environmental Design): Green Building Rating System for New Construction and Major Renovations. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. .2 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005). .1 CAN/CSA-A3001-08, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete. Department of Justice Canada .1 Explosives Act, R.S., c. E-15, s. 1 (updated September 27th, 2005). Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS)/Ontario Ministry of Transportation .1 OPSS 514 April 2008, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Construction
.2
.3
.4
.5
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 2 2011-06-10
.5
(Cont'd) .1 (Cont'd) Specification for Trenching, Backfilling, and Compacting. .2 OPSS 1004 November 2006, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Material Specification for Aggregates - Miscellaneous. .3 OPSS 1010 April 2004, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Material Specification for Aggregates - Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material.
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit to designated testing agency, 23 kg sample of backfill for fill material proposed for use, no later than one week before backfilling or filling work. Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Submit condition survey of existing conditions as described in EXISTING CONDITIONS article. .2 Submit testing results and report as described in PART 3 - FIELD QUALITY CONTROL.
.2
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE/REGULATOR Y REQUIREMENTS
.1
Perform blasting in accordance with Provincial and Municipal regulations: repair damage as directed by Departmental Representative. Do not blast within 3 m of building and where damage would result. Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.2
.3
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
1.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS
.1
Examine soil report is available appended to this Document. Buried services: .1 Before commencing work verify location of buried services on and adjacent to site. .2 Arrange with appropriate authority for relocation of buried services that interfere with execution of work: pay costs of relocating services. .3 Remove obsolete buried services within 2 m of foundations: cap cut-offs.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
Granular material: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1010 for: .1 Granular A, maximum size 19.0 mm. .2 Granular B, Type II, maximum size 150 mm. .3 Granular M, maximum size 19.0 mm. crushed rock, crushed gravel or crushed slag. Granular 'B' and 'M' is obtained from deposits of sand, gravel, talus rock quarries, disintegrated granite, mine waste, slag or other suitable granular materials. Sand: clean, washed, minimum 100% passing 4.75 mm sieve, maximum 5% passing 0.075 mm sieve to OPSS 1004.05.07, November 2006. Drainage material: 19 mm crushed stone or 19 to 63 mm clean gravel to OPSS 1004.05.02, November 2006. Unshrinkable provide: .1 Maximum at 28 days. .2 Maximum 3. kg/m .3 Minimum fill: proportioned and mixed to compressive strength of 0.4 MPa Portland cement content of 25 strength of 0.07 MPa at 24 h.
.2
.3
.4
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
Unshrinkable fill:(Cont'd) .4 Concrete aggregates: to CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2. .5 Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001, Type GU. .6 Slump: 160 to 200 mm. Filter fabric: .1 Synthetic fibre: rot-proof, unaffected by action of oil or salt water and not subject to attack by insects or rodents. .2 Fabric: woven construction supplied in rolls of minimum 3.8 m width, 130 m length, minimum thickness of 0.5 mm and minimum weight of 160 g/m2. .3 Seams: sewn or overlapped in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .4 Physical properties: .1 Breaking load and elongation: to ASTM D5034-09 Grab Test Method 25 mm square jaws, constant rate of travel 300 mm per minute. .2 Stronger principal direction, 800 N. .3 Elongation minimum 22 percent. .4 Bursting strength: To ASTM D751, using Diaphragm Bursting Tester 1500 N. .5 Permeability: 2.2 x 10.
.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Provide temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways, according to sediment and erosion control drawings. Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion and sedimentation control measures during construction until permanent vegetation has been established. Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during removal.
.2
.3
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 5 2011-06-10
3.2 PREPARATION/ PROTECTION
.1 .2
Protect excavations from freezing. Keep excavations clean, free of standing water, and loose soil. Where soil is subject to significant volume change due to change in moisture content, cover and protect to Departmental Representative approval. Protect natural and man-made features required to remain undisturbed. Unless otherwise indicated or located in an area to be occupied by new construction, protect existing trees from damage. Protect buried services that are required to remain undisturbed.
.3
.4
.5
3.3 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
.1
Remove trees, stumps, logs, brush, shrubs, bushes, vines, undergrowth, rotten wood, dead plant material, exposed boulders and debris within areas designated on drawings. Remove stumps and tree roots below footings, slabs, and paving, and to 600 mm below finished grade elsewhere. Dispose of cleared and grubbed material off site daily to disposal areas acceptable to authority having jurisdiction.
.2
.3
3.4
EXCAVATION
.1
Strip topsoil over areas to be covered by new construction, over areas where grade changes are required, and so that excavated material may be stockpiled without covering topsoil. .1 Stockpile topsoil on site for later use. Excavate as required to carry out work. .1 Do not disturb soil or rock below bearing surfaces. .2 Notify Departmental Representative when excavations are complete. .3 If bearings are unsatisfactory, additional excavation will be authorized in writing and paid for as additional work.
.2
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.4 EXCAVATION (Cont'd)
.2
(Cont'd) .4 Excavation taken below depths shown without Departmental Representative's written authorization to be filled with concrete of same strength as for footings at Contractor's expense. .5 Excavation, backfilling and compacting for installation of storm pipe sewers, pipe culverts and end sections, pipe subdrains and other underground utilities in accordance with OPSS 514. Excavate trenches to provide uniform continuous bearing and support for 150 mm thickness of pipe bedding material on solid and undisturbed ground. .1 Trench widths below point 150 mm above pipe not to exceed diameter of pipe plus 600 mm. Excavate for slabs and paving to subgrade levels. .1 In addition, remove all topsoil, organic matter, debris and other loose and harmful matter encountered at subgrade level.
.3
.4
3.5
BACKFILLING
.1
Inspection: do not commence backfilling until fill material and spaces to be filled have been inspected and approved by Departmental Representative. Remove snow, ice, construction debris, organic soil and standing water from spaces to be filled. Lateral support: maintain even levels of backfill around structures as work progresses, to equalize earth pressures. Compaction of subgrade: compact existing subgrade under walks, paving, and slabs on grade, to same compaction as specified for fill. .1 Fill excavated areas with selected subgrade material compacted as specified for fill. Placing:
.2
.3
.4
.5
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 7 2011-06-10
3.5 BACKFILLING (Cont'd)
.5
Placing:(Cont'd) .1 Place backfill, fill and basecourse material in 150 mm lifts: add water as required to achieve specified density. Backfill simultaneously each side of walls and other structures greater than 1.3 m deep to equalize soil pressures. Backfill against catch basin maintenance hole wood curb wall with excavated material. Place 150 mm compacted thickness of Granular A material below slab on grade catch basin maintenance holeperimeter insulation. Place 150 mm compacted thickness of Granular A material below walk. Place 150 mm compacted thickness of Granular material over perimeter insulation. Restore surface of excavation with material and finish to match existing adjoining surfaces. Compaction: compact each layer of material to following densities for material to ASTM D698: .1 To underside of basecourses: 95%. .2 Basecourses: 100%. .3 Elsewhere: 90%. In trenches: .1 Up to 300 mm above pipe or conduit: sand placed by hand. .2 Over 300 mm above pipe or conduit: native material approved by Departmental Representative. Under seeded and sodded areas: use site excavated material to bottom of topsoil except in trenches and within 600 mm of foundations. Blown rock material, not capable of fine grading, is not acceptable, imported material must be placed on this type of material Against foundations (except as applicable to trenches and under slabs and paving): excavated material or imported material with no stones larger than 200 mm diameter within 600 mm of structures.
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 8 2011-06-10
3.6
GRADING
.1
Grade so that water will drain away from buildings, walls and paved areas, to catch basins and other disposal areas approved by the Departmental Representative. .1 Grade to be gradual between finished spot elevations shown on drawings. Strip topsoil over areas to be covered by new construction, over areas where grade changes are required, and so that excavated material may be stockpiled without covering topsoil. Stockpile topsoil on site for later use. Fill and grade site to achieve elevations indicated. Place excavated material in 300 mm lifts. Compact to 80% Standard Proctor Density. Grade to a uniform slope with a tolerance of 1:120.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
.1
Testing of materials and compaction of backfill and fillwill be carried out by testing laboratory designated by Departmental Representative. Not later than one week before backfilling or filling, provide to designated testing agency, samples of backfill as described in PART 1 SUBMITTALS. Do not begin backfilling or filling operations until material has been approved for use by Departmental Representative. Not later than 48 hours before backfilling or filling with approved material, notify Departmental Representative so that compaction tests can be carried out by designated testing agency.
.2
.3
.4
3.8 SHORTAGE AND SURPLUS
.1
Supply necessary fill to meet backfilling and grading requirements and with minimum and maximum rough grade variance. Dispose of surplus material off site.
.2
Sect 31 00 00.01 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.9
CLEANING
.1 .2
3.10 PROCEDURE FOR REMOVING MATERIAL FROM THE INSTITUTION
.1
Co-ordinate trips and counts to maximize efficiency of removal operations and minimize impact on CSC operations. Trucks being loaded with soil will be supervised by CSC staff or Commissionaire. Truckss cannot be loaded without this supervision. The loading supervisor will accompany the truck to the Service Entrance and inform the officer-in-charge of the Service Entrance of his presence during loading. The truck will exit through the Service Entrance after being searched and processed. Then it will be escorted by vehicle patrol to an area on site outside the security perimeter where the load will be dumped. Contractor shall remove and dispose the material from the storage site at a later time.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
END
CHAIN LINK FENCES AND GATES
Section 32 31 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1
RELATED WORK
.1 .2
Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities. Section 11 19 50 - Detention Chain-Link Gates.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A 53/A 53M-10, Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A 90/A 90M-09, Standard Test Method for Weight Mass of Coating on Iron and Steel Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings. .3 A653/A653M-10, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. .4 ASTM C618-08a, Standard Specification for Coal Fly Ash and Raw or Calcined Natural Pozzolan for Use in Concrete. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-138.1-96, Fabric for Chain Link Fence. .2 CAN/CGSB-138.2-96, Steel Framework for Chain Link Fence. .3 CAN/CGSB-138.3-96, Installation of Chain Link Fence. .4 CAN/CGSB-138.4-96, Gates for Chain Link Fence. .5 CAN/CGSB-1.181-99, Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete. .2 CAN/CSA-G164-M92(R2003), Hot Dip Galvanizing of Irregularly Shaped Articles.
.2
.3
Section 32 31 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3
SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Drawings to indicate all pertinent dimensions, connections, details, materials, finishes and all other information required to completely describe the chain link fence installation to this project.
.2
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate on site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.4
Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal and Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.5
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
.6
.7
.8
Section 32 31 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
.9
Unused paint or coating material must be disposed of at an official hazardous material collections site as approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused paint material into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in any other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.10
.11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1
MATERIALS
.1
General: All welded in place connections to be touched-up with galvanizing touch-up paint. Concrete mixes and materials: in accordance with CSA A23.1. .1 Nominal coarse aggregate size: 20 5. .2 Compressive strength: 20 MPa minimum at 28 days. .3 Additives: fly ash to ASTM C618. .4 20 Mpa, 50 to 80 mm slump, 6% air entrainment. Chain-link fence fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1. .1 Salvaged fencing: Reuse existing salvaged fencing wherever possible. .1 Type 1, Class A, heavy style 50.8 mm diamond mesh, interwoven 4.8 mm (6 Gauge) wire diameter with twisted tight selvage at top and bottom. .2 Height of fabric: As indicated. Concertina: to CAN/CGSB 138.2, barbed type galvanized to CSC standards and the approval of the Departmental Representative. 20 x 0.5 mm clenched around a 2.5 mm diameter spring steel galvanized core wire to form a concertina coil with a nominal exterior coil diameter of 710 mm. The coil, when installed, shall have a minimum diameter of 635 mm. The barbed concertina shall have a 20 mm long blade type barbs measured from tip to tip of the blade, and barb clusters shall be spaced approximately 45 mm on centre. The concertina shall be formed by clipping adjacent loops of
.2
.3
.4
Section 32 31 13 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
Concertina:(Cont'd) single helical coils together at a minimum of three (3) points on the circumference. Clips shall be galvanized. The resulting coil, when stretched, shall form a cylindrical pattern. The loop spacing shall not exceed 230 mm. Barbed wire: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, for concertina coil support at fence top, two barbed wires stretched and fixed to post arms shall be provided. Barbed wire shall consist of two strands of 12 gauge wire with 4 point barbs at 130 mm spacings, all galvanized. Posts, braces and rails: to CAN/CGSB-138.2, galvanized steel pipe. .1 Line posts: 73mm o.d., continuous, weld schedule 40 tubular steel pipe, scale free, hot dipped galvanized, minimum 8.6 kg/m. .2 Terminal Posts: End, gate posts, corner and straining posts, 168 mm O.D. standard continuous weld schedule 40 pipe, galvanized, minimum 21.0 kg/m. .3 Bottom and Top Rail: 42.2 mm O.D. galvanized pipe, plain ends random lengths, standard continuous weld schedule 40 pipe. Minimum 3.4 kg/m. .4 Intermediate rails shall not be used. Bottom tension wire: to CAN/CGSB 138.1, Table 2, single strand, galvanized steel wire, 5 mm diameter. Tie wire fasteners: to CAN/CGSB 138.1, Table 2 (galvanized steel wire), single strand. Tie and tack weld each tie wire on the opposite side of the patient side. Tension bar: to ASTM A653/A653M, 5 x 20 mm minimum galvanized steel complete 3 x 20 mm tie bands with 6 mm diameter zinc coated nuts and bolts with nuts welded to bolts or threads damaged after install to prevent removal of nuts. Touch up with galvanizing touch-up paint. Tension bands: Tie bands to secure chain link fabric to bottom rail and top rail at 300 mm o/c. Galvanized steel arms with integral post top combination shall be provided on all posts
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
Section 32 31 13 Page 5 2011-06-10
.11
(Cont'd) where concertina is to be installed as detailed and in accordance with CSC standards. Post top arms to provide waterproof fit. Galvanized steel post top arms to be welded to posts and touched up with galvanizing touch-up paint. Gates and gate frames: .1 Gate frames: to ASTM A53/A53M, galvanized steel pipe, standard weight, 73 mm outside diameter pipe for outside frame, 43 mm outside diameter pipe for interior bracing. .2 Fabricate gates in accordance with CAN/CGSB-138.4 and as indicated with electrically welded joints, and hot-dip galvanized after welding. .3 Fasten fence fabric to gate with twisted selvage at top and bottom. .4 Furnish gates with galvanized malleable iron hinges, latch and latch catch with provision for padlock which can be attached and operated from either side of installed gate. .5 Gate hinges to be self closing. Fittings and hardware: to CAN/CGSB 138.2, cast aluminum alloy, galvanized steel or malleable or ductile cast iron. Turnbuckles to be drop forged.
.12
.13
.14
Grounding rod: 16 mm diameter copperwell rod, 3 m long.
.15
Galvanizing Touch-up Paint: Make good corrosive protection after welding where burnt by welding operations and where removed to facilitate welding operations, using 2 coats zinc touch-up primer conforming to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Top rails to be in lengths of 5500 mm, and shall be fitted with couplings or swedged for connecting the lengths into a continuous run. The couplings shall be not less than 152 mm long, with 2.0 mm minimum wall thickness, and shall allow for expansion and contraction of the rail.
.16
Section 32 31 13 Page 6 2011-06-10
.17
Sleeves for horizontal rails shall allow for expansion and contraction. Sleeves to be 2.0 mm minimum wall thickness. Sleeves to be securely fastened to posts.
.18
Privacy slats: 90% privacy factor, profile and colour from manufacturer standard offering.
2.2
FINISHES
.1
Galvanizing: .1 For chain link fabric: to CAN/CGSB-138.1 Grade 2, 610 g/m2 minimum. .2 For pipe: 550 g/m2 minimum to ASTM A 90. .3 For other fittings: to CAN/CSA-G164.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
GRADING
.1
Remove debris and correct ground undulations along fence line to obtain smooth uniform gradient between posts. Provide clearance between bottom of fence and ground surface to a maximum of 50 mm.
3.2 ERECTION OF FENCE
.1
Erect fence along lines as indicated and in accordance wth CAN/CGSB-138.3. Install line, straining and corner posts plumb, set in concrete footings as follows: .1 Line posts, straining, gate, corner & end posts: .1 Concrete depth: 1800 mm. .2 Diameter at Top: 400 mm. .2 Ensure top of concrete piles are concave sloping away from the fence post to the outer edges of the pile. .3 Ensure top edge of concrete pile is minimum 25mm above adjacent asphalt surface. Place concrete in post holes then embed posts into concrete to depths indicated. Extend concrete 50 mm above ground level and slope to drain away from posts. Brace to hold posts in plumb position and true to alignment and
.2
.3
Section 32 31 13 Page 7 2011-06-10
3.2 ERECTION OF FENCE (Cont'd)
.3
(Cont'd) elevation until concrete has set. Ensure posts are centred in post holes. Space line posts maximum 2.5 m apart, measured parallel to ground surface. Install additional straining posts at sharp changes in grade and where directed by Departmental Representative. Install corner post where change in alignment exceeds 10 degrees. Install end posts at end of fence and at buildings. Install gate posts on both sides of gate openings. Do not install fence fabric until concrete has cured minimum of 5 days. Install brace between end and gate posts and nearest line post, placed in centre of panel and parallel to ground surface. Install braces on both sides of corner and straining posts in similar manner.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
Install galvanized steel arms with integral post top combination. Weld in place and touch-up with galvanizing touch-up paint.
.11
Install top and bottom rail between posts. Secure top rail to posts through post top holes and bottom rail to post sleeves. Ensure expansion and contraction is provided for top and bottom rails.
.12
Lay out fence fabric. Stretch tightly to tension recommended by manufacturer and fasten to end, corner, gate and straining posts with tension bar secured to post with tension bar bands spaced at 300 mm intervals. Ensure distance between tension bar and posts does not exceed 13 mm. Tight twisted selvedge at top and bottom.
Section 32 31 13 Page 8 2011-06-10
.13
Secure fabric to line posts with tie wire at 300 o/c max. Twist and tack weld tie wire on non-patient side of fence.
.14
Secure fabric to top rails, line posts and bottom rails with tension bars and tension bar bands spaced at 300 mm intervals. Ensure distance between tension bar and posts does not exceed 13 mm.
.15
Install grounding rods as directed by the Departmental Representative.
.16
Install barbed wire and concertina as indicated on the Drawings, reviewed shop drawings and as directed by the Departmental Representative in accordance with CSC standards.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF .1 GATES .2
Install gates in locations as indicated. Level ground between gate posts and set gate bottom approximately 40 mm above ground surface. Determine position of centre gate rest for double gate. Cast gate rest in concrete as directed. Dome concrete above ground level to shed water. Install gate stops where indicated.
.3
.4
3.4 INSTALLATION OF .1 FABRICATION TO DETENTION EXTERIOR SWING GATES
Install chain link fabric to Detention Exterior Swing Gates specified in Section 11 19 50, complete with tension bars to all sides of fabric in each opening and securely fastened to gate frame with tension bar bands spaced no more than 300 o/c.
Section 32 31 13 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.5
TOUCH UP
.1
Clean damaged surfaces with wire brush removing loose and cracked coatings. Pre treat damaged surfaces according to manufacturers' instructions for zinc rich paint.
3.6
CLEANING
.1
Clean and trim areas disturbed by operations. Dispose of surplus material as directed by Departmental Representative.
END
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE
Sect 33 46 13.01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for foundation drainage.
1.2
REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft3 (600 kN-m/m3)). Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete Materials and Methods of Concrete Construction/Methods of Test for Concrete. .2 CSA B1800-02, Plastic Non-pressure Pipe Compendium - B1800 Series (Consists of B181.1, B181.2, B181.3, B181.5, B182.1, B182.2, B182.4, B182.6, B182.7, B182.8 and B182.11). .1 CSA B182.2-02, PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings (PSM Type). OPSS, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification.
.2
.3
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused aggregate materials from landfill to facility for reuse as approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
.4
.5
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE
Sect 33 46 13.01 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL (Cont'd)
.6
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility for disposal approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused geote from landfill to plastic recycling facility for disposal approved by Departmental Representative. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. Dispose of unused asbestos cement pipe in accordance with regulations governing the disposal of hazardous materials.
.7
.8
.9
.10
1.4
SITE CONDITIONS .1
Examine sub-surface investigation report which is bound to this Document as an Appendix.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIALS
.1
Coarse filter aggregate: to CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2, Group 1 20-5 mm. Flexible plastic tubing and fittings: CSA B1800; perforated nominal inside diameter 100 mm. Filter fabric: see Section 31 00 00.01. Prefabricated drainage board: Three-dimensional dimpled core and geotextile fabric complete with adhesive or fasteners as required for installation.
.2
.3 .4
2.2 BACKFILL MATERIAL
.1
Foundation drainage Pipe Fill: 19 mm clear stone in accordance with OPSS 1004. Excavated or graded material existing on site may be suitable to use if approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE
Sect 33 46 13.01 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
EXAMINATION
.1
Ensure improper slopes, unstable areas, areas requiring additional compaction or other unsatisfactory conditions are corrected to approval of Departmental Representative. Ensure foundation wall, waterproofing and rigid insulation have been installed and approved by Departmental Representativebefore placing bedding material.
.2
3.2 PIPE OR TUBING INSTALLATION
.1
Ensure pipe interior and coupling surfaces are clean before laying. Lay perforated pipe minimum to slope of 1:100. For pipe face perforations and coupling slots downward. Grade bedding to establish pipe slope. Install end plugs at ends of collector drains to protect pipe ends from damage and ingress of foreign material. Connect to manholes where indicated.
.2
.3 .4
.5
3.3 PIPE OR TUBING SURROUND MATERIAL
.1
Upon completion of pipe laying and after Departmental Representative has inspected Work in place, surround and cover pipe and install filter fabric as indicated. Hand place surround material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness, as indicated. Place layers uniformly and simultaneously on each side of pipe. Compact each layer from pipe invert to mid-height of pipe to at least 95% maximum density to ASTM D698. Compact each layer from mid-height of pipe to underside of backfill to at least 90% maximum density to ASTM D698.
.2
.3
.4
.5
FOUNDATION DRAINAGE
Sect 33 46 13.01 Page 4 2011-06-10
.1
Place backfill material above pipe surround in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades as indicated.
END

VOLUME 2 of 3
Bid Set No.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001
COMMON WORK RESULTS MECHANICAL
Section 21 05 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 EQUIPMENT LIST

.1
Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on this project and forming part of tender documents by adding manufacturers name, model number and details of materials, and submit for approval.
.2
Submit for approval within 10 days after award of contract.
1.2 TRIAL USAGE

.1
Owner may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.
.2
Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems: .1 HVAC Systems: .1 Airhandler units. .2 Air/air heat recovery units. .3 Smoke/heat exhaust systems. .4 Range air flow isolation. .2 Plumbing Systems: .1 Secure plumbing fixtures. .2 Range isolation valve system. .3 Backflow prevention. Fire protection Systems: .1 Secure fire hose systems. .2 Range isolation valve system. Plumbing Systems: .1 EMCS building HVAC control and monitoring system. .2 BSCS/EMCS interface.
.3
.4
1.3 PROTECTION OF OPENINGS
.1
Protect equipment and systems openings from dirt, dust, and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to system.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.4 PAINTING
.1 .2
Section 21 05 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
To section 09 91 23 Interior painting.

Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.
.3
Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged too extensively to be merely primed and touched up.
1.5 SPARE PARTS

.1 Furnish spare parts in accordance with Section [01 78 00] Closeout submittals as follows: .1 .2 .3 .4 One set of packing for each pump. One casing joint gasket for each size pump. One drive belt for each installed.
One filter cartridge or set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition to final operating set.
1.6 SPECIAL TOLLS
.1
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers and in accordance with section 01 78 00 Closeout submittals.
.2
Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease fittings.
1.7 DEMONTRATION AND OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.
.2
Where specified elsewhere in Mechanical Divisions, manufacturers to provide demonstrations and instructions. Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, audio visual aids, etc. as part of instruction materials.
Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections. Where deemed necessary, owner may record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.
.3
.4
.5
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTAL
.1
Section 21 05 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by and final copies deposited with, owner before final inspection.
.2
.3
Operation data to include:

.1 Control schematics for each system including environmental controls.
.2
.3
Description of each system and its controls.

Description of operation of each system at various loads together with reset schedules and seasonal variances. Operation instruction for each system and each component. Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure.
.4
.5
.6 .7 .4
Valves schedule and flow diagram. Colour coding chart.
Maintenance data shall include:

.1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment. Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.
.2
.5
Performance data to include:

.1 Equipment manufacturers performance data sheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete. Equipment performance verification test results. Special performance data as specified elsewhere.
.2
.3
.4
Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Sections 21 05 02, 21 05 03 and 25 05 93.

.6

Approvals: .1
Section 21 05 01 Page 4 2011-06-10
Submit 1 copy of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Engineer for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless so directed by engineer.
.2
Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Engineer.
.7
Additional Data:
.1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual when need for same becomes apparent during demonstrations and instructions specified above.
1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS AND .1 PRODUCT DATA

.2
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
Shop drawings and product data shall show: .1

.2
Mounting arrangements.
Operating and maintenance clearances, e.g. access door swing spaces.
.3
Shop drawings and product data shall be accompanied by: .1

Detailed drawings of bases, supports and anchor bolts.
.2 .3
.4
Acoustical sound power data, where applicable. Points of operation on performance curves.
Manufacturer to certify as to current model production. Certification of compliance to applicable codes.
.5
1.10 CLEANING
.1 Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork and air handling units.

1.11 AS BUILT DRAWINGS
Section 21 05 01 Page 5 2011-06-10
.1
Site records:
.1 Engineer will provide 1 set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each phase of the work. Mark there on all changes as work progresses and as changes occur. On a weekly basis, transfer information to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show all work as actually installed. Use different colour waterproof ink for each service. Make available for reference purposes and inspection at all times.
.2
.3
.4
.2
As-built drawings:
.1 Prior to start of testing, adjusting and balancing (TAB), finalize production of as-built drawings. Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters 12mm high as follows:-AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED(Signature of contractor)(Date).
.2
.3
Submit to Engineer for approval and make directions as directed. TAB to be performed using as-built drawings. Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
.4 .5
1.12 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
.2
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Engineer.
Do not dispose of unused material into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.3
.4
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
Section 21 05 01 Page 6 2011-06-10
.5 Dispose of corrugated cardboard and plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
1.13 MOCK-UP
.1 Provide mock-up (prior to installation commencing) of one cell utility chase (Y-chase). Actual chase to be mocked-up will be selected by Consultant from Gallery Floor level. Mock-up shall be full size representing actual dimensions of chase interior including actual size components representing duct, pipe, fixtures and other items located inside chase. Actual product need not be used but mock-up dimensions must represent true installed sizes including insulation of all components incorporated. Mock-up of chase walls may be done using standard 20mm plywood with external support as necessary. Coordinate with electrical division for incorporation of electrical components in mock-up. After completion of mock-up, consultants will review. Make revisions required by review. After acceptance by consultants, chase mock-up will be stored at site and used for reference during construction of actual installations.
.2
.3
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1

.1
NOT USED
NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1

.1
NOT USED
NOT USED
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING Section 21 05 02 OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 INTENT
.1 This section specifies commissioning requirements common to all Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25 equipment and systems starting and testing, Component Verification and Systems Performance Verification Testing. The Contractor shall expedite required revisions identified during the testing and verification in a cooperative manner to maintain the construction schedule.
General inspection and component verification of all mechanical equipment. Specific equipment and system performance testing as specified herein or in other sections of the specification.
.2
1.2 WORK INCLUDED

.1
.2
.3
Co-ordination with other trades and testing agencies including local authority having jurisdiction. Integrated systems testing. Instruction for the owners staff in the cleaning, maintenance and operation of the building systems, equipment and finishes.
.4 .5
1.3 OVERVIEW
.1
The commissioning process follows a logical sequence, from Contractor equipment startup and testing to Component Verification testing through to System Performance Verification Testing and finally Integrated System Testing. At completion of the commissioning process, all defined system components, each mode of systems operation, and each control sequence will have been started and tested in accordance with the manufacturers requirements and verified operational relative to design intent and operational requirements.
.2
.3
Equipment and System Starting and Testing: .1 Complete equipment starting and testing procedures as defined in the respective sections of this specification.
All starting, testing, adjusting, balancing
.2

and calibration activities are to be documented by the contractor.
.3
All contractor and manufacturer startups and testing procedures are to be completed and approved prior to conducting the system performance verification testing defined herein. The contractor will be responsible for identifying in the commissioning schedule, the required equipment starting and testing, including all manufacturers startup and field verifications. Perform and record pressure testing on all piping and ducting systems installed under this contract.
.4
.5
.4
Component verification sheets shall be developed by this contractor for each piece of equipment specified and installed. The contractor shall be responsible for completion of these sheets. System Performance Verification Testing: .1 The System Performance Verification Tests provide a functional demonstration of the system performance during the various modes of operation including, startup, operation, shut down and various disturbance situations such as power failure and fire alarm. The System Performance Verification Tests shall be provided by the contractor.
All contractor and manufacturers startup and proving tests are to be completed and approved prior to conducting the defined System Performance Verification Tests.
.5
.2
.3
.4
All Component Verifications and identified testing pre-requisites related to a given system, shall be completed and approved prior to conducting the defined System Performance Verification Testing. The contractor will be responsible for the scheduling and implementation of the System Performance Verification testing.
.5
.6
The commissioning process associated with the component and systems verification does not negate the need for normal contractor equipment and system startup and proving and the associated training requirements.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.4 RELATED REQUIRMENTS
.1

Equipment startup and testing procedures, including manufacturer startups, specified in this and other sections.
1.5 EQUIPMENT STARTING .1 AND TESTING

.2
.3
Prior to starting and testing, ensure all equipment is cleaned and free of dust.
After testing, protect equipment from dust.

Do not conceal or cover components or equipment until inspected, tested and approved by the commissioning contractor. Assume all liabilities associated with the starting and testing.
.4
.5
Assume all costs associated with the starting, testing, adjusting and balancing, including the supply of testing equipment.
1.6 WITNESSING OF EQUIPMENT STARTING AND.1 TESTING
Prior to starting and testing of equipment and systems, prepare a schedule for the required starting and testing.
1.7 MANUFACTURERS STARTING RECOMMENDATIONS
.1
Prior to starting components or systems, obtain and review manufacturers installation, operation and starting instructions. Read in conjunction with the procedures specified herein.
.2
Use manufacturers and suppliers starting personnel where required to maintain validity of manufacturers warranty. Confirm with manufacturer that all testing specified in these specifications will not void any warranties. Compare installation to manufacturers published data and record discrepancies. Modify procedures detrimental to components performance prior to starting equipment. Co-ordinate all sub-trades, other divisions, manufacturers, suppliers and other specialists as required to ensure all phases of work shall be properly organized prior to commencement of each particular startup, testing and commissioning procedure. Where any components or systems require testing prior to starting, ensure that such work has been completed and approved prior to starting of the components and systems.
.3
1.8 CO-ORDINATION
.1
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 2 PRODUCTS
.1
Provide all instruments, meters and equipment required to conduct tests during and at the conclusion of the project.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EQUIPMENT STARTING AND TESTING
.1
Schedule and complete the equipment startup, run-ins and testing as defined in the respective sections. Submit all startup and test reports, including manufacturers reports.
All startup and testing is to be done in accordance with approved manufacturers procedures.
.2
.3
3.2 COMPONENT VERIFICATIONS
.1
Complete Component Verifications in accordance with this section.

In addition to the starting and testing requirements identified for each piece of equipment, as defined in the respective sections, the Component Verifications sheets identified in this section are to be complete by the contractor.
.2
.3
The Component Verification sheets are used to track individual pieces of equipment and provide a Submittal Verification and a Field Verification of the equipment. The Submittal Verification includes verifying and confirming the specified requirements against the shop drawings submittal data and the Field Verification includes confirming that the installed parameters meet the specified requirements. The Component Verification sheets shall be completed as follows: .1 The Specified fields on the sheet shall be completed by the Engineer. .2 The Shop Drawing fields on the sheets shall be completed by the Contractor. The Installed fields on the sheets shall be completed by the Contractor.
.4
.3
.5
A Component Verification sheet is to be completed for each specified piece of equipment.
3.3 EQUIPMENT START-UP AND OPERATIONAL TESTING
.1
EMCS .1 General .1 Review documentation to ensure all system components and operation are recorded in detail. .2 Check installation for orderly component and conduit mounting with all portions secured to building structure. Ensure installations of EMCS do not impede access to building spaces or equipment. .3 Check installations in secure areas are hidden or covered and secured in an acceptable manner. .2 Air Handler/Heat Recovery Equipment .1 Check ECMS installations are secured to building or equipment and do not impede access. .2 Check stroke of all dampers. .3 Check installation of all devices to ensure correct location/orientation. .4 Check operation of all devices for limits and operating points. .5 Check manual overrides for operation. .6 Check alarm operation including acknowledge, automatic shutdown, remote reporting, history, and audible and visual condition. .7 Simulate component failure to check reaction of remaining components and systems. .8 Check EMCS function in all normal and emergency modes of operation. .3 Boilers/Circulation System .1 Check interface of EMCS system with boiler management system. .2 Check set point control of boiler management system. .3 Check receipt of errors and warnings from boiler management system. .4 Check alternation and failure modes of duplex pump installation. .5 Check operation of all devices for limits and operating points. .4 Terminal Heating Devices .1 Check function of all sensor and control valves on radiant panels and forceflow heaters. .2 Check manual overrides for operation.
.3 Check installation of all devices to ensure correct location/orientation. Check alarm operation including acknowledge, remote reporting, history and audible and visual condition.
.4
.5 Secure Area Heating Devices .1 Check for exposed operable fasteners. .2 Check for openings, cracks, crevices in installations or mounting. .6 Air Flow Control .1 Check function of BSCS connection for override from Unit Control touch screen systems. .2 Check function and operation of all controlled air valve installations. .3 Run system and check operating performance in each airflow condition as well as permutations of all possible conditions. Check safety and operating controls during all test conditions to ensure safe operation of systems and equipment. .4 Check return to normal condition after emergency function completion. .2 FIRE PROTECTION .1 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System .1 Perform regulatory as required by specifications, Codes and Authority having Jurisdiction. .2 Operate range and zone isolation valves. .3 Check for clearly visible and legible signage on range isolation. .4 Check sprinkler head mounting in secure areas. .5 Check all sprinkler head guards in place and firmly attached. .6 Assist in fire alarm verification. .2 Fire Extinguishers .1 Check all fire extinguishers according to drawings. .2 Check all fire extinguishers in place. .3 Check all fire extinguishers certification tag signed and
in place firmly mounted carry current dated.
.3 Fire Hose Standpipe Systems .1 Operate range automated isolation valves. .2 Check for clearly visible and legible signage on range isolation. .3 Check range of all hoses at full extent of reach. .4 Check all hoses in place, firmly attached and connected to system. .5 Co-ordinate with BSCS to check operation of systems from unit control touch screen system.

.3

PLUMBING SYSTEMS .1 Plumbing Fixtures .1 All .1 Check fixtures firmly attached to supporting surfaces. .2 Operate local water isolation valves, ensure full shut off of water flow. .3 Operate fixture, check hot/cold flows, general performance, measure water flow on representative quantity of each fixture type. .2 Secure Fixtures .1 Check for exposed operable fasteners. .2 Check for openings, cracks, crevices in fixture construction or mounting. .3 Operate metered valves, adjust flow duration.
.2 Water Heater System .1 Check temperature set point against actual measured temperature. .2 Operate safety controls. .3 Measure flow-rate of recirculation pumps (hot water system and water heater system). .3 Piping Systems .1 Perform regulatory testing as required by specifications, Codes and Authority having Jurisdiction. .2 Operate all range and zone isolation valves. .3 Check for clearly visible and legible signage on all range isolation. .4 Check flow settings at all circuit balance locations. .4 Miscellaneous Systems .1 Check operation of all trap seal primers. Ensure that all floor drain traps are connected. .2 Check operation of water tempering valves. Review and record temperatures at full flow. .4 HEATING SYSTEMS .1 Boilers .1 Perform regulatory testing as required by Specifications, Codes and Authority having Jurisdiction. .2 Check water pressure drop through boilers at maximum design flow. Check water temperature rise through boilers .3 at maximum fire and design flow. .4 Check operation of all safety and operating controls and relief valves. .2 Heating Terminal Devices .1 All Areas .1 Check fan operation of forceflows.

Adjust if housing interferes with wheel. .2 Check all radiant panels to ensure clean surfaces. .3 Adjust all circuit balance valves for rated flow .2 Secure Areas .1 Check for exposed operable fasteners. .2 Check for openings, cracks, crevices in radiant panel and forceflow mounting. .3 pumps .1 Review installations for conformance with manufacturers recommendations. .2 Monitor operation for abnormal vibration.
.5
VENTILATION SYSTEMS .1 Air Handler Units .1 Check fit of all doors and casing joints for leakage. .2 Check fit of all filter banks for bypass. .3 Check internal surfaces for debris and general cleanliness. .4 Verify fan rotation direction. .5 Monitor operation of fans for abnormal vibrations. .6 Check operation of all motorized dampers for extent of opening, shut off and smooth non-binding operation. .7 Ensure bearings are greased. .2 Heat Recovery Units .1 Check fit of all doors and casing joints for leakage. .2 Check fit of all filter banks for bypass. .3 Check internal surfaces for debris and general cleanliness. .4 Verify fan rotation direction. .5 Monitor operation of fans for abnormal vibrations. .6 Check operation of all motorized dampers for extent of opening, shut off and smooth non-binding operation. .7 Ensure bearings are greased. .8 Measure heat transfer temperatures at conditions within 10 C of design condition. .3 Range Exhaust .1 Verify fan rotation direction. .2 Monitor operation of fans for abnormal vibrations. .3 Check operation of all motorized dampers for extent of opening, shut off and smooth non-binding operation. .4 Co-ordinate with BSCS to check operation of systems from unit control touch screen systems.

.4 Duct Systems .1 Check duct sealing. .2 Check duct identification. .3 Check all manual balance dampers are secured and marked at balance point. .4 Check mounting of all grilles registers and diffusers. .5 Secure area ventilation grilles. .1 Check for exposed operable fasteners. .2 Check for openings, cracks, crevices in installations or mounting.
3.4 PRESSURE TESTING OF PIPING
.1
Test all piping prior to concealment and completion of system.

Record test results by section. Records to be included in Operation and Maintenance Manuals. Show section designation on As-Built record drawings. Test as per the following table. For systems not included in this table refer to appropriate specification section. Notify engineer where test requirement is not shown. Include for testing all piping to minimum of 690kPa hydrostatic for minimum 1 hour unless lower pressure is warranted.
.2
.3
System Plumbing - DCW, DHW, DHWR, DTW - Nat Gas (Note 3) - San Sewer/Vent (Note 4,5) - Storm sewer/RWL (Note 4) HVAC - HWS, HWR
Media (Note 1) Water Air Water Water
Pressure (Note 2) 690 340 3 m 3 m kPa kPa w.c. w.c.
Duration 4 hr 3 hr 30 min 30 min
Water
690 kPa
4 hr
Note 1: Note 2: Note 3: Note 4: Note 5:
Where possibility of freezing exists, compressed air may be substituted with written permission of the engineer. Pressure test to 1.5 times operating pressure of system. Protect or remove all components which may be damaged by test pressure. Test as required by: Gas Code. Test as required by: Plumbing Code. Test water closet installations with 25mm W.C. for 15 min after fixture has been set.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FORM AIR MOVEMENT EQUIPMENT Date: Equipment ID: Equipment Data Manufacturer: Model Number: Serial Number: Operation Specified Airflow Rate External Static pressure Volts/Amps/Phase Rotation Direction Supply Return Supply Return Supply Return Supply Return Shop Drawings Installed Verified by Location Data Building: Area: Floor: Room:
Inspection checklist Filters Size Quantity Baffles Clean Filter Belts Coils -
Size FPI Rows Fin Condition
Size Quantity Tensioned Alignment
Dampers Size Seals Operation: Close Open
Operating Controls Start/Stop from Test Clean External Clean Internal Not Damaged Service Space Lubricated Product

Comments
Sign off
Contractor
Engineer
Owner
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FORM BOILER VERIFICATION FORM Date: Equipment ID: Equipment Data Manufacturer: Model Number: Serial Number: Nameplate Data Specified Natural Gas Input Heat Output Volts/Amps/Phase Inspection Checklist Relief valve setting Relief valve test LWCO Test Fill Valve Setting Venting Checklist Size Length Grading Joint Sealing Operating Controls Temperature- Max Temperature- Min Support Documents Manufacturers Report Manufacturers Certificates Contractors Start-up Report Comments Shop Drawing Installed Verified By Location Data Building: Area: Floor: Room:
Clean Not Damaged Clearances Service Space
Termination Drain
Y/N/NA Y/N/NA Y/N/NA
Comments Comments Comments
Sign off Contractor Engineer Owner
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FORM PUMP VERIFICATION FORM
Date: Equipment ID: Equipment Data Manufacturer: Model Number: Serial Number: Location Data Building: Area: Floor: Room:
Operation Specified Shop Drawing Installed Verified By
Operating Controls Start/Stop from Test:
Comments
Sign off Contractor Engineer Owner
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FORM FAN VERIFICATION FORM Date: Equipment ID: Equipment Data Manufacturer: Model Number: Serial Number: Operation Specified Airflow Rate External Static pressure Volts/Amps/Phase Rotation Direction Supply Return Supply Return Supply Return Supply Return Shop Drawings Installed Verified by Location Data Building: Area: Floor: Room:
Inspection checklist Belts -
Size Quantity Tensioned Alignment
Clean Not Damaged Service Space Lubricated Product
Dampers Size Seals Operation- Open - Close Operating Controls Start/Stop from Test: Comments
Sign off
Contractor
Engineer
Owner
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FORM RANGE VENTILATION VERIFICATION FORM Date:
Location Building Area Floor Room Equipment Fan Disch Damper Intake Damper Operation Fan Discharge Damper Size Seals Opens Fully Recloses Intake Damper Size Seals Opens Fully Recloses Controls Test Interface With BMCS
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Note 1
Comments Note 1: Refer to individual verification form.
Sign off
Contractor
Engineer
Owner
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION FORM SECURE FIRE HOSE VERIFICATION FORM Date:
Location Building Area Floor Room Equipment Manufacturer Model -Hose -Reel -Nozzle -Valve -Solenoid Hose Diameter Length Material Reel Hose pulls to full length without disruption Nozzle Material Adjustable Valve Operate close/open Solenoid Test to Close Test to Reopen Control Test Interface with BMCS Comments
Sign off
Contractor
Engineer
Owner
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 REFERENCES
.1
PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION Section 21 05 03 MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS Page 1 2011-06-10
ASTM E202, Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols.
1.2 CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL.1 PIPING SYSTEMS 1.3 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS-PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV)
In accordance with Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems.
.1
Timing:
.1 After cleaning is completed and system is in full operation.
.2
When systems are operational, perform following tests:

.1 Conduct full scale tests at maximum design flow rates, temperatures and pressures for continuous consecutive period of 48 hours to demonstrate compliance with design criteria. Verify performance of hydronic system circulating pumps as specified in relevant technical sections, recording system pressures, temperatures, fluctuations by simulating maximum design conditions and varying.
.2
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Pump operation. Boiler operation. Maximum heating demand. Maximum cooling demand. Boiler failure. Outdoor reset. Re-check boiler output supply temperature at 100% and 50% reset, maximum water temperature.
1.4 HYDRONIC SYSTEM CAPACITY TEST
.1
Timing: After: .1
.2
TAB has been completed.

Verification of operating, limit, safety controls. Verification of primary and secondary pump flow rates. Verification of accuracy of temperature and pressure sensors and gauges.
.3
.4

.2 .3

Calculate system capacity at test conditions. Using manufacturers published data and calculated capacity at test conditions, extrapolate system capacity at design conditions.
.4
When capacity test is completed, return controls and equipment status to normal operating conditions.
Submit sample of system Water to approved testing agency to determine if chemical treatment is correct. Include cost.
.5
.6
Heating system capacity test: .1

Perform capacity test when ambient temperature is within 10% of design conditions. Simulate design conditions by: .1 Increasing OA flow rates through heating coils (in this case, monitor heating coil discharge temperatures at all times to ensure that coils are not subjected to freezing conditions), or
.2
Reducing space temperature by turning off heating system for sufficient period of time before starting tests.
.2
Test procedures: .1 Open fully the heating coils and radiation control valves.
With boilers on full firing and hot water heating supply temperature stabilized, record flow rates and supply and return temperatures simultaneously.
.2
1.5 HUMIDIFICATION SYSTEMS
.1
In addition to procedures specified above, perform the following: .1 Perform TAB as specified in Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB).
Set up and adjust drip feeders, timer controls, pump strokes as required to maintain required chemical feed rates.
.2
1.6 GLYCOL SYSTEMS
.1
Test to prove concentration will prevent freezing to minus 40 C, test inhibitor strength and include in procedural report. Refer to ASTM E202.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.7 GASEOUS FUEL SYSTEMS
.1
Operation tests: .1 Measure gas pressure at gas meter outlet and at burner manifold.
Verify details of temperature and pressure compensation at meter. Verify settings, operation, venting of high and low pressure cut-outs, alarms. Check terminals of vents for gas pressure regulators.
.2
.3
.4
1.8 POTABLE WATER SYSTEMS
.1
When cleaning is completed and system filled:

.1 Verify performance of equipment and systems as specified elsewhere in Mechanical Divisions.
.2
Check for proper operation of water hammer arrestors. Run one outlet for 10 seconds, then shut off water immediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water hammer arrestor or recharge air chambers. Repeat for each outlet and flush valve.
Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards, verifying that no residuals remain as a result of flushing and/or cleaning.
.3
1.9 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM, STANDPIPE AND .1 HOSE SYSTEMS

.2
Testing, start-up, performance verification of equipment, systems, components, and devices is specified elsewhere in Mechanical Divisions. Verification of controls, detection devices, alarm devices is specified in Division 26.
Demonstrate that fire hose will reach to most remote location regardless of partitions, obstructions, etc. Verify operation of interlocks between HVAC systems and fire alarm systems.
.3
.4
1.10 SANITARY AND STORM DRAIN SYSTEMS .1
Buried systems: Perform tests prior to back-filling. Perform hydraulic tests to verify grades and freedom from obstructions. Ensure that traps are fully and permanently primed.
.2

.3

Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system. Operate flush valves, tank and operate each fixture to verify drainage and no leakage.
.4
.5
Cleanouts: Refer to section 22 42 01 Plumbing Specialities and Accessories. Roof drains: .1 Refer to Section 22 42 01 Pluming Specialities and Accessories. Remove caps as required.
.6
.2
1.11 REPORTS
.1 In accordance with section 01 91 33 Commissioning Forms, supplemented as specified herein.
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1

.1
NOT USED
NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1

.1
NOT USED
NOT USED
END OF SECTION
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
ACCESS DOORS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Section 21 05 04 Page 1 2011-06-10
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.2
Submit catalogue details for each type of door illustrating profiles, dimensions and methods of assembly.
Provide maintenance data for cleaning and maintenance of stainless steel finishes for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout submittals. Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.
.1
1.3 Waste management and disposal
.1
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE .1 AND HANDLING

.2
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 Common Product Requirements.
Apply temporary protective coating to finished surfaces. Remove coating after erection. Do not use coatings that will become hard to remove or leave residue. Leave protective covering in place until final cleaning of building.
.3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCESS DOORS
.1
Supply and install as necessary to gain access to all concealed mechanical equipment for operating, inspecting, adjusting, servicing. Sizes: Except as indicated otherwise, to be minimum sizes as follows:
.2
.1 .2 .3
For body entry: 600 x 600 mm. For hand entry: 300 x 300 mm.
Non-secure area access doors:
.1
Construction: Rounded safety corners, concealed hinges, screwdriver latch, anchor straps, able to open 180 degrees.
.2
Materials
ACCESS DOORS FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
Section 21 05 04 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
.2 .4
Tiled surfaces and other special areas: Stainless steel with brushed satin or polished finish as directed by Engineer. All other areas: Prime coated steel.
Secure area access doors .1 Supply and install secure access doors where required for access to concealed mechanical components. Doors assemblies shall have 50x50x5 welded angle frame, 10 ga. thickness door, heavy duty butt hinges welded to door and frame. Doors shall be secured with detention type deadbolt lock with paracentric key. Maximum size of door shall be 200 x 200. .1 Acceptable product: Acudoor SD-6000 (customized as noted above). .2 Alternative materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.2 EXCLUSIONS
.1
Lay-in tile ceilings. In this instance, use unobtrusive identification locators.
PART 3 EXECUTION
.1 Installation: .1 Masonry surfaces: to Division 04. .2 Drywall surfaces: to Division 09.
3.1 INSTALLATION
3.2 LOCATION
.1 Location: Ensure that equipment is clearly within view and accessible for operating, inspecting, adjusting, servicing without the need for special tools.
Secure type door assemblies shall be used except the following areas where non-secure type may be used: S2-031, 084, 128, 130 to 144. Avoid using doors in secured areas. Relocate services if possible to areas noted in section 3.2.2.
.2
.3
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SUBMITTALS
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section 21 05 05 Page 1 2011-06-10
.1
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Shop drawings; submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Ontario, Canada. Submit complete plans to Authority of Jurisdiction for review and approval before commencement of work. Shop drawings to show: .1 .2 Mounting arrangements. Operating and maintenance clearances.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Shop drawings and product data accompanied by: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5

Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts. Acoustical sound power data, where applicable. Points of operation on performance curves. Manufacturer to certify current model production. Certification of compliance to applicable codes.
.6
Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with, Departmental Representative before final inspection. Operation data to include: .1 Control schematics for systems including. .2 Description of systems and their controls. .3 Description of operation of systems at levels. Operation instruction for systems .4 and component. .5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure. .6 Valves schedule and flow diagram. .7 Colour coding chart.
.2
.3
Section 21 05 05 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Maintenance data to include: .1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment. Data to include schedules of tasks, .2 frequency, tools required and task time. Performance data to include: .1 Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete. .2 Equipment performance verification test results. .3 Special performance data as specified. .4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. Approvals: .1 Submit 1 copy of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Departmental Representative for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Departmental Representative. Additional data: .1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and instructions. Site records: .1 Departmental Representative will provide 1 set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur. Include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring. .2 Transfer information daily to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show work as actually installed. .3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service.
Section 21 05 05 Page 3 2011-06-10
.9
.10
Make available for reference purposes and inspection. As-Built drawings: .1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, finalize production of as-built drawings. .2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date). .3 Submit to Departmental Representative for approval and make corrections as directed. .4 Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built drawings. .5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
.4
.1
Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.
.2
1.3 MAINTENANCE
.1
Furnish spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals as follows:
.1 .2 .3 .2
One set of packing for each pump. One casing joint gasket for each size pump. One glass for each gauge glass.
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers and in accordance with Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
Section 21 05 05 Page 4 2011-06-10

.1 Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
SECTION NOT USED
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PAINTING, REPAIRS AND RESTORATION
.1
Do painting in accordance with 23 - Interior Painting.
Section 09 91
.2
Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original. Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.
.3
3.2 CLEANING
.1 Clean all systems including heads and other equipment.
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
.1
Departmental Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.
Section 21 05 05 Page 5 2011-06-10
.2
Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems: .1 .2 Fire hose systems Fire extinguisher systems
.3
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance. Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio visual aids as part of instruction materials. Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.
.4
.5
3.4 PROTECTION
.1
STANDPIPE AND HOSE ASSEMBLY
Section 21 12 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1 National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 14-10, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems. Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) Fire Commissioner of Canada (FCC) .1 FC403-1994, Standard For Sprinkler Systems. .2 Fire Protection Standard For Design and Construction.
.2 .3
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. Samples: .1 Submit the following samples: .1 Firehose nozzles. .2 Section of hose.
.3
.1
Provide maintenance data for standpipe and hose system for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Storage and Protection: .1 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer.
.3

.4
Section 21 12 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, padding and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Design system to NFPA 14 and following parameters: .1 Stand alone: hydraulic.
2.2 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES
.1
Pipe: .1 Ferrous: to NFPA 14. .2 Copper tube: to NFPA 14. Fittings and joints to NFPA 14: .1 Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved. Grooved joints designed with two ductile .1 iron housing segments, pressure responsive gasket, and zinc-electroplated steel bolts and nuts. Cast with offsetting angle-pattern bolt pads for rigidity and visual pad-to-pad offset contact. .2 Copper tube: screwed, soldered, brazed. Valves: .1 ULC listed for fire protection service. .2 Up to NPS 2: bronze, screwed ends, grooved, OS&Y gate. .3 NPS 2 1/2 and over: cast iron, flanged, grooved ends, indicating butterfly valve. .4 Check valves: spring actuated swing type, composition disc or seal.
.2
.3
.4
Pipe hangers: .1 ULC listed for fire protection services. Drain valve: NPS 1, complete with hose end, cap and chain. Inspector's test connections: NPS 1 gate valve.
.5
.6
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.3 SECURE CABINETS WITH HOSE REEL
.1
Section 21 12 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
To NFPA 14 and ULC listed: recessed type 864mm x 864mm x 381mm deep as indicated, constructed of 4mm thick steel prime coated steel tub. Refer to Architectural drawings for separate door assembly. Tub to be one piece welded construction complete with mounting holes for attachment to wall. Ensure dimensions fit hose reel, fire extinguisher and fire department valve .1 Acceptable material: Similar to NFE Model CR-1340-INS less frame, hinges, door, latch assembly. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
Hose reel to be continuous flow, swing type designed for mounting in a recessed cabinet. Fabricated of mild steel with aluminum water way, brass valve and drip-proof glandless seal (rated to 2068 kPa) all coated in corrosion resistant red paint. Reels shall be sized to hold up to 36m of 25mm diameter hose and fit within previously specified cabinet. .1 Acceptable material: NFE Model HRS-038. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Hose to be multipurpose hard rubber, non-collapsible type with red nitrile cover and black thermo elastomer blend lining rated to 1379 kPa service test pressure. Hose shall be 30m long, 25mm diameter with factory attached ends. .1 Acceptable material: NFE Multi Purpose Hose. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
Nozzles to be 25mm brass combination fog type adjustable for fog, straight stream and shut off. .1 Acceptable material: NFE Model HRS-039. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
.4
.5
Fire department valve to be 65mm female x male fire department outlet angle valve. Valve shall be forged brass rated to 2068 kPa with hand wheel. Co-ordinate hose threads with local fire standard. .1 Acceptable material: NFE 65mm Model A75. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
Include spanner wrench to suit installation. Wrench constructed of aluminum. .1 Acceptable material: NFE Model C-21. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.6

.7
Section 21 12 01 Page 4 2011-06-10
Each cabinet shall include one (1) 9.5 litre capacity pressurized type water fire extinguisher. Extinguisher shall be of stainless steel construction, large handle and be designed for clog proof function. 2A rating with range of 13.7m to 15.2m. .1 Acceptable material: Badger WP-61-C. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.4 FIRE ISOLATION SOLENOID VALVE
.1
Provide and install at locations shown, solenoid isolation valve arrangement to shut off water flow to selected fire hose installation. Solenoid isolation valve arrangement shall be acceptable to FCC. Submit details of products and system to FCC for approval prior to ordering components.
Solenoid isolation valve arrangement operation shall be coordinated with BSCS contractor and EMCS contractor prior to selection to ensure compatibility with systems.
.2
.3
.4
Valve shall be single chamber, hydraulically operated globe valve of single seated construction with replaceable stainless steel seat ring and reversible, resilient inner valve disc with fully supported diaphragm operator. The main valve shall be N.O. (normally open), operated by a solenoid pilot valve rated fro 24 VAC to close main valve when solenoid is energized. Valve shall have manual override. .1 Acceptable material: Singer Model 106 SC. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.5 STANDARD FIRE HOSE CABINETS

.1
Provide and install fire hose cabinets where shown to be installed in non-inmate areas. Cabinets shall be recessed or surface mount style with 18 gauge baked enamel protected steel tubs. 14 Gauge baked enamel corrosion protected steel door and frame with full length, semi-concealed piano hinge and full panel of 6 mm polished wired glass. Cabinet shall be minimum 750 mm x 750 mm x 150 mm and have capacity for 30 m racked hose, hose valve and 10 lb. fire extinguisher. .1 Acceptable Product: NFE model CK-1002-6-G-W (recessed) or NFE model CS-800-G-W. (structure mount). .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2

.3
Section 21 12 01 Page 5 2011-06-10
Provide 30 m of U.L 38 mm synthetic polyester filament jacketed, polyurethane lined hose with hose ends, rack, water stop and angle valve with hydrovent mounted in cabinet.
.4
Provide 38 mm F.M Approved forged brass combination fog nozzle.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheet.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install and test to acceptance in accordance with NFPA 14 and FCC requirements. Install pipework in accordance with Section 23 05 05 Installation of Pipework, supplemented as specified herein.
.2
.3 .4
Run inspectors test connections to sight glass.

Install drain pipes and valves to drain parts of systems and so arranged that any one standpipe riser can be drained without shutting down any other parts of systems. Install pressure gauge in accordance with Section 23 05 19 - Thermometers and Pressure Gauges - Piping Systems at top of risers and in accordance with NFPA 14. Coordinate with Architectural trades to ensure mating of tub and door assembly.
.5
.6
3.3 SITE TEST

.1 General: .1 In accordance with NFPA 14, supplemented as specified herein. .2 In accordance with Section 01 91 00 General Commissioning Requirements, supplemented as specified herein.
Testing to be witnessed by Fire Commissioner of Canada and authority having jurisdiction.
.2

.3
Section 21 12 01 Page 6 2011-06-10
Timing: .1 Connect fire hoses when flushing out and pressure tests have been completed. .2 Charge system with water when there is no possibility of freeze up. Co ordination: .1 Co ordinate tests with performance verification of: .1 Wet pipe sprinkler systems specified Section 21 13 13. Procedures: .1 Verify that system is complete prior to start up and testing procedures. .2 Verify that ULC labels are visible. .3 Fill system with water for pressure. Record water supply pressure. .4 Pressure test piping system as required by authority having jurisdiction. .5 Verify valves in system are visible and monitored. .6 Flushing: Fill with water, let stand at operating pressure for 1 week. Drain risers separately, then drain main. .7 Flush buried mains and lead in connections before making connection to indoor sprinkler system. .8 Record incoming pressure to building for 10 days prior to activating system. Coverage Verification: .1 Open each cabinet and pull hose to extremes of coverage. Verify that all areas within coverage zone can be reached without undue stress on hose. Schedule testing to be performed with Federal Fire Commissioner. .2 Submit written verification report once complete.
.4
.5
.6
.7
Solenoid Operation Test: .1 Operate each fire hose isolation solenoid valve to verify its correct function. .2 Test shall be performed after solenoid is connected to final operation screen and shall be performed with full water pressure. Take appropriate measures to control discharge of water. Schedule testing to be performed with Federal Fire Commissioner. .3 Submit written verification report once complete.

.8
Section 21 12 01 Page 7 2011-06-10
Identification: .1 Verify devices are properly labelled, identifying area served, etc. Report: Refer to Section 01 91 33 Commissioning Forms .1 supplemented as specified herein. .2 In addition to reports required by NFPA 14, include the following: .1 Copy of schematic and valve schedule. Posted Instructions: .1 Prepare schematic, mount behind glare free glass and install where directed. .2 Prepare valve schedule, mount behind glare free glass and install where directed. Training: .1 Refer to Section 01 91 41 Training.
.9
.10
.11
Commissioning:
3.4 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Remove surplus materials, excess materials, .1 rubbish, tools and equipment.
Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 00.
.2
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
Section 21 13 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1 National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .2 ANSI/NFPA 14 - 2000, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
.2
Human Resources and Skills Development Canada HRSDC .1 FC 403, Standard for Sprinkler Systems, November 1994 Standards. .2 Treasury Board Standards, Chapter 3-6.
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2
.3
Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate: .1 Materials. .2 Finishes. .3 Method of anchorage .4 Number of anchors. .5 Supports. .6 Reinforcement. .7 Assembly details. .8 Accessories. Samples: .1 Submit samples of following: .1 Each type of sprinkler head. .2 Signs. Test reports: Submit certified test reports for wet pipe fire .1 protection sprinkler systems from approved independent
.4
.5
Section 21 13 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .6 Certificates: .1 Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. Field Quality Control Submittals: .1 Manufacturer's Field Reports: manufacturer's field reports specified.
.7
.8
1.3 ENGINEERING DESIGN .1 Design system in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, using following parameters: CRITERIA
.1 .2 Hazard: .1 To suit occupancy as indicated. Pipe size and layout: .1 Hydraulic design. .2 Sprinkler head layout: to ANSI/NFPA 13 and as directed by authorities having jurisdiction. Water supply: .1 Conduct flow and pressure test of water supply in vicinity of project to obtain criteria for bases of design in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13. Zoning: .1 System zoning as indicated.
.3
.4
.1
Provide operation, maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00] in accordance with NFPA 20. Manufacturer's Catalog Data, including specific model, type, and size for: .1 Pipe and fittings. .2 Alarm valves. .3 Valves, including gate, check, and globe. .4 Water motor alarms. .5 Sprinkler heads. .6 Pipe hangers and supports. .7 Pressure or flow switch. .8 Fire department connections. .9 Excess pressure pump. .10 Mechanical couplings.
.2

.3
Section 21 13 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
Drawings: .1 Sprinkler heads and piping system layout. .1 Prepare 760 mm by 1050 mm detail working drawings of system layout in accordance with NFPA 13, "Working Drawings (Plans)". .2 Show data essential for proper installation of each system. Show details, plan view, elevations, and .3 sections of systems supply and piping. .4 Show piping schematic of systems supply, devices, valves, pipe, and fittings. Show point to point electrical wiring diagrams. .2 Electrical wiring diagrams.
.4
Design Data: .1 Calculations of sprinkler system design. .2 Indicate type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for not less than 18 months. Field Test Reports: .1 Preliminary tests on piping system. Records: .1 As-built drawings of each system. .1 After completion, but before final acceptance, submit complete set of as-built drawings of each system for record purposes. .2 Submit 760 mm by 1050 mm drawings on reproducible Mylar film with title block similar to full size contract drawings. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: .1 Provide detailed hydraulic calculations including summary sheet, and Material and Test Certificate for aboveground or underground piping and other documentation for incorporation into manual in accordance with NFPA 13.
.5
.6
.7
.1
Qualifications: .1 Installer: company or person specializing in wet sprinkler systems with documented experience. Supply grooved joint couplings, fittings, valves, grooving tools and specialties from a single manufacturer. Use date stamped castings for coupling housings, fittings, valve bodies, for quality assurance and traceability.
.2
.1
Extra Materials: .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
Section 21 13 13 Page 4 2011-06-10
.2 Provide spare sprinklers and tools in accordance with NFPA 13.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: .1 Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Storage and Protection: .1 Store and protect materials from exposure to harmful weather conditions and at temperature and humidity conditions recommended by manufacturer. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.3
.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, FITTINGS AND VALVES
.1
Pipe: .1
Ferrous: to ANSI/NFPA 13 and 14. All pipe shall be Schedule 40 wall thickness.
.2
Fittings and joints to ANSI/NFPA 13and 14: .1 Ferrous: screwed, welded, flanged or roll grooved. Valves: .1 ULC listed for fire protection service. .2 Up to NPS 2: bronze, screwed ends, OS & Y; gate, or ball type as permitted. .3 NPS 2 1/2 and over: cast iron, flanged or roll grooved ends, indicating butterfly valve. .4 Swing check valves. .5 Ball drip. Pipe hangers: .1 ULC listed for fire protection services.
.3
.4
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.2 SPRINKLER HEADS
Section 21 13 13 Page 5 2011-06-10
.1
General: to ANSI/NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire services.
2.3 INSTITUTIONAL PENDENT HEAD
.1
Acceptable material: Pendant Sprinkler.
Tyco Raven Institutional
.2
Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.4 INSTITUTIONAL SIDEWALL - QUICK RESPONSE
.1
Acceptable material: sidewall sprinkler.
Tyco Raven Institutional
.2
2.5 STANDARD UPRIGHT
.1
Upright bronze, with or without guard as indicated.
2.6 STANDARD CONCEALED

.1 Concealed pendant with coverplate white.
2.7 ALARM CHECK VALVE
.1
Alarm check valve with retard chamber to ANSI/NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service.
2.8 SUPERVISORY SWITCHES
.1
General: to ANSI/NFPA 13 and ULC listed for fire service.
.2
Valves: Mechanically attached to valve body, with .1 normally open and normally closed
Section 21 13 13 Page 6 2011-06-10
contacts and supervisory capability. .3 Flow switch type: .1 With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability. Pressure alarm switch: .1 With normally open and normally closed contacts and supervisory capability.
.4
2.9 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION
.1
To ANSI/NFPA 13 siamese type, location as indicated. Thread specifications to be compatible with local fire department. Polished chrome plated recessed with identifying sign cast on plate. Threaded metal caps and chains.
.2
2.10 EXCESS PRESSURE PUMP
.1
Pumps: double acting displacement type, open cylinder design, direct drive, ULC listed, complete with relief valve. Motor: EEMAC Class B squirrel cage induction 1725 rpm, continuous duty, drip proof, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 50C, 0.25 kW, 120/1/60. Capacity: 7.6 L/min. Pump operation switch: to operate excess pressure pump with pressure differential of 103 kPa. Electrical wiring by Division 26. Shut-off valve and strainer on pump inlet. Relief valve, check valve and shut-off valve on discharge connections.
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6
2.11 PRESSURE GUAGES
.1
ULC listed and to Section 23 05 19 - Thermometers and Pressure Gauges - Piping Systems.
.2
Shall have maximum limit of not less than twice normal working pressure at point where installed.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.12 SIGNS
Section 21 13 13 Page 7 2011-06-10
.1
Signs for control drain and test valves: to ANSI/NFPA 13.
2.13 ANTIFREEZE
.1
Antifreeze loops to ANSI/NFPA 13, locations as indicated.
2.14 SPARE PARTS CABINET
.1
For storage of maintenance materials, spare sprinkler heads and special tools. Construct to sprinkler head manufacturers standard.
Turn over spare heads in excess of those stored in cabinet to Owner. Record turnover with transmittal.
.2
.3
2.15 PRE-ACTION SYSTEM

.1 Pre-action shall be ULC Listed, FM approved single interlock electric actuated with deluge valve. Coordinate installation requirements with electrical division for electric pre-action signal.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install, inspect and test to acceptance in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 13, 14, FC 403 and other applicable standards. Install excess pressure pump across alarm valve in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Testing to be witnessed by Fire Commissioner of Canada.
.2
.3

.4 .5
Section 21 13 13 Page 8 2011-06-10
Install water gong as indicated. Where institutional sidewall sprinkler heads are installed in masonry construction, coordinate installation with masonry trade. Sidewall heads shall be installed in steel block sections as specified in Section 04 29 13.
3.3 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS AND PRODUCT DATA
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Section 21 20 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20 Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal.
Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.2
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MULTI PURPOSE DRY CHEMICAL EXTINGUISHERS
.1
Stored pressure rechargeable type with hose and shut-off nozzle, ULC labelled for A, B and C class protection. Sizes as indicated. .1 .2 Acceptable product: National Fire Protection ABC-10G, Pyrene, Flag. Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.2 CARBON DIOXIDE EXTINGUISHERS
.1
Aluminum cylinder stored pressure rechargeable type with hose and shut-off nozzle. ULC labelled for B and C class protection. Sizes as indicated.
.1 .2
Acceptable product: National Fire Protection C02-10H, Pyrene, Flag. Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Section 21 20 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
2.3 PRESSURIZED WATER
.1
Stainless steel cylinder stored pressure rechargeable type with hose, gauge and shut off nozzle. ULC labelled for 2A protection. Extinguisher to store 9.5 litres of water at an operating pressure of 690 kPa .1 Acceptable product: Pyrene, Flag. Badger WP-61-C,
.2
2.4 EXTINGUISHER BRACETS
.1
Medium duty aviation bracket with strap and clamp.
2.5 CABINETS
.1
Flush surface or semi-recessed type as indicated, constructed of 1.6 mm thick steel, 180o opening door of 2.5 mm thick steel with latching device.
Cabinet door: with 6 mm full plexiglass panel. All metal door latch.
.2
.3
Finish: .1 .2 Tub: prime coated. Door and frame: primer finish ready for final finish.
.4
Acceptable product: National Fire Equipment CE-950-3, Pyrene, Flag. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.6 IDENTIFICATION
FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
Section 21 20 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Identify extinguishers in accordance with recommendations of ANSI/NFPA 10.

Attach tag or label to extinguishers, indicating month and year of installation. Provide space for service dates.
.2
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install or mount extinguishers in cabinets or on brackets as indicated.
.2
Provide initial inspection signature and date on inspection tag.
GENERAL WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
Section 22 05 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals: in accordance with Section [01 33 00].

Shop drawings; submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
.3
Shop drawings to show: .1 Mounting arrangements. .2 Operating and maintenance clearances. Shop drawings and product data accompanied by: .1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts. .2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable. .3 Points of operation on performance curves. .4 Manufacturer to certify current model production. .5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes. In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section [01 33 00]: use MCAC "Shop Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00]. .2 Operation and maintenance manual approved by, and final copies deposited with, Departmental Representative before final inspection. .3 Operation data to include: .1 Control schematics for systems including environmental controls. .2 Description of systems and their controls. .3 Description of operation of systems at various loads together with reset schedules and seasonal variances. .4 Operation instruction for systems and component. .5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure. .6 Valves schedule and flow diagram. .7 Colour coding chart. .4 Maintenance data to include: .1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment. .2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time.
.4
.5
.6

.5
Section 22 05 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.6
.7
.8
.9
Performance data to include: .1 Equipment manufacturer's performance datasheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete. .2 Equipment performance verification test results. .3 Special performance data as specified. .4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section [23 05 93]. Approvals: .1 Submit 2 copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Departmental Representative for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Departmental Representative. Additional data: .1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual additional data when need for it becomes apparent during specified demonstrations and instructions. Site records: .1 Departmental Representative will provide [1] set of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each phase of work. Mark changes as work progresses and as changes occur. .2 Transfer information weekly to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show work as actually installed. .3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service. .4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection. As-built drawings: .1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC, finalize production of as-built drawings. .2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (Date). .3 Submit to Departmental Representative for approval and make corrections as directed. .4 Perform testing, adjusting and balancing for HVAC using as-built drawings. .5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings with Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
.10 Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
.1
Section 22 05 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section [01 45 00]. Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section [01 35 29.06].
.2
1.3 MAINTENANCE
.1 Furnish spare parts in accordance with Section [01 78 00] as follows: .1 One set of packing for each pump. .2 One casing joint gasket for each size pump. .3 One glass for each gauge glass.
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers and in accordance with Section [01 78 00]. Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease and grease fittings.
.2
.3
.1
Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section [01 74 20].
1.5 HALOCARBONS
.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

.1 Section Not Used.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 3 - EXECUTION
Section 22 05 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
3.1 PAINTING REPAIRS AND RESTORATION
.1 .2
Do painting in accordance with Section [09 91 23].

Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original.
.3
Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged.
3.2 CLEANING
.1
Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork and air handling units.
.1
Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section [01 45 00] and submit report as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS.
.2
Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS. .2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
.1 Departmental Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing. Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems: .1 Water heating system. .2 Secure fixture operators.
.2

.3 .4 .5 .6 .3
Section 22 05 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
Electronic fixture supplies. Water tempering systems. Solenoid piping isolation. Secure water closet drain systems.
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.
.4
Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio visual aids as part of instruction materials.
Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.
.5
3.5 PROTECTION
.1
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 DEFINITIONS
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
Section 22 07 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
.1
For purposes of this section: .1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services in suspended ceilings, non-accessible chases, furred-in spaces and interstitial space above cell areas below roof at each range. .2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations.
.2
1.3 SAMPLES
.1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
Submit for approval: complete assembly type of insulation system, insulation, and adhesive proposed. Mount sample on plywood board. Affix typewritten label sample indicating service. of each coating, 12 mm beneath
.2
1.4 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Submit manufacturers' installation instructions in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Installation instructions to include procedures to be used, installation standards to be achieved.
.2
.1
1.5 QUALIFICATIONS
Installer to be specialist in performing work of this Section, and have at least 3 years successful experience in this size and type of project.

Section 22 07 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Protect from weather, construction traffic. Protect against damage from any source.
Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer.
.2 .3 .4
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section [01 74 20] Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic corrugated cardboard packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Place excess or unused insulation and insulation accessory materials in designated containers.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE AND SMOKE RATING
.1
In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102. .1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25. .2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
2.2 INSULATION
.1
Mineral fibre specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool.
Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335.
.2
.3
TIAC Code A-1: Rigid moulded mineral fiber without factory applied vapour retarder jacket (as scheduled in Part 3 of this section).
Section 22 07 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1 .2
Maximum k valve at 38C mean temperature of 0.035 (SI). White kraft paper bonded to glass fiber reinforced aluminum foil.
.4
TIAC Code A-3: Rigid moulded mineral fibre with factory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52M (as scheduled in Part 3 of this section). .1 Maximum k valve at 38C mean temperature of 0.035 (SI). .2 White kraft paper bonded to glass fiber reinforced aluminum foil. TIAC Code A-6: Flexible unicellular tubular elastomer. Acceptable Material: Knauf, Owens Corning, Johns Manville, Certain Teed, Armstrong. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with Instructions to Bidders
.5
.6
2.3 INSULATION SECUREMENT
.1
Tape: Self-adhesive, aluminum, plain reinforced, 50 mm wide minimum. Contact adhesive: Quick setting. Canvas adhesive: Washable. Tie wire: 1.5 mm diameter stainless steel. Bands: Stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick.
.2 .3 .4 .5
2.4 CEMENT
.1
Thermal insulating and finishing cement: .1 Hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTM C449/C449M.
2.5 VAPOUR RETARDER LAP ADHESIVE
.1
Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.
Section 22 07 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.6 INDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH
.1
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation.
2.7 OUTDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH
.1

Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m2.
.2
2.8 JACKETS
.1
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): .1 One-piece moulded type and sheet to CAN/CGSB-51.53 with pre-formed shapes as required. .2 Colour: white. .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 Minimum service temperatures: -20C. Maximum service temperature: 65C. Moisture vapour transmission: 0.02 perm. Thickness: 0.5 mm. Fastenings: .1 Use solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation to seal laps and joints. .2 Tacks.
.2
Canvas: .1 220 gm/m2 cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921. .2 Lagging adhesive: Compatible with insulation. Aluminum: .1 To ASTM B209. .2 Thickness: 0.50 mm sheet. .3 Finish: Stucco embossed. .4
Joining: Longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 50 mm laps.
.3
Section 22 07 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.5
Fittings: 0.5 mm thick die-shaped fitting covers with factory-attached protective liner.
Metal jacket banding and mechanical seals: stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick at 300 mm spacing.
.6
2.9 WEATHERPROOF CAULKING FOR JACKETS INSTALLED OUTDOORS
.1
Caulking to: Section 07 92 10 - Joint Sealers.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENT
.1
Pressure testing of piping systems and adjacent equipment to be complete, witnessed and certified.
.2
Surfaces to be clean, dry, free from foreign material.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and this specification. Use two layers with staggered joints when required nominal wall thickness exceeds 75 mm. Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes. .1 Hangers, supports to be outside vapour retarder jacket.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Supports, Hangers: .1 Apply high compressive strength insulation, suitable for service, at oversized saddles and shoes where insulation saddles have not been provided.
Section 22 07 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.3 INSTALLATION OF ELASTOMERIC INSULATION
.1
Insulation to remain dry at all times. Overlaps to manufacturers instructions. Ensure tight joints.
.2
Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer.
3.4 PIPING INSULATION SCHEDULES

.1 Includes valves, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges and fittings unless otherwise specified. TIAC Code: A-1. .1 Securements: SS Wire Bands Tape at 300 mm oc. .2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. .3 Installation: TIAC Code 1501-H. TIAC Code: A-3. .1 Securements: SS Wire at 300 mm oc. .2 Seals: VR lap seal adhesive, VR lagging adhesive. .3 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-C. TIAC Code: A-6. .1 Insulation securements: as listed by Manufacturer.. .2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. Thickness of insulation to be as listed in following table. .1 Run-outs to individual units and equipment not exceeding 4000 mm long. .2 Do not insulate exposed runouts to plumbing fixtures, chrome plated piping, valves, fittings.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 22 07 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
Application
Temp C
TIAC code
Domestic HWS and HWR (see Note 4) Domestic CWS (see Note 4) Domestic TW & TWR (see Note 4) RWL (See Note 1) Sanitary Sewer Vent (See Note 2) Natural Gas (See Note 3) Note 1
A-1
Pipe sizes (NPS) and insulation thickness (mm) 2 5 8 & Run to 1 out 1 1/4 1/2 to over to to 6 2 4 25 25 25 38 38 38
A-3
25
25
25
25
25
25
A-1
25
25
25
25
25
25
A-3 A-3
25
25
25
25 25
25 25
25
Note 2
Note 3
Note 4
Insulate interior rain water piping systems for a distance of 3 m along piping from each roof drain location. Insulation shall run along all connected pipe regardless of flow direction. Insulate roof drain body and all mounting hardware to full thickness coverage, seal to underside of roofdeck. Insulate sanitary sewer vent piping from cold air terminus continuously through cold interior building areas and to 2 m into warm building area. Coat all natural gas piping penetrating exterior wall or roof for 2 m into building with 2 heavy coats of brush on vapour retardent mastic. Permeance value less than 0.05, flame spread less than 20. Where piping serves shower fixtures and is located within adjacent block wall, revise insulation code to A-6 (unicellular elastomer) of same thickness specified.
.6
Finishes: .1 Exposed indoors: Canvas, Aluminum or PVC jacket except that piping located in cell area Y-chase shall be furnished with canvas or aluminum only. PVC jacket shall not be used. Extra coats of lagging coating shall be provided in these areas to provide a durable surface with no open weave exposed in canvas.
Section 22 07 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6
Exposed in mechanical rooms: Canvas, Aluminum or PVC jacket. Use vapour retarder jacket on TIAC code A-3 insulation compatible with insulation. Outdoors: Water-proof Aluminum jacket.
Finish attachments: SS bands, at 150 mm oc. Seals: wing.
Installation: To appropriate TIAC code CRF/1 through CPF/5.
PLUMBING PUMPS
Section 22 10 10 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section Includes: .1 Materials and installation for plumbing pumps. .2 Sustainable requirements for construction and verification. .2 Related Sections: .1 .2 Section [01 91 00 - Commissioning]. Section [02 61 33 - Hazardous Materials].
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00].
.2
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheet for fixtures and equipment. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS in accordance with Section [01 47 15] and Section [02 61 33]. Indicate VOC's for adhesive and solvents during application and curing. Shop Drawings. .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate: .1 Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries. Identify whether factory or field assembled. .2 Wiring and schematic diagrams. .3 Dimensions and recommended installation. .4 Pump performance and efficiency curves. Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties.
.3
.4

.5
PLUMBING PUMPS
Section 22 10 10 Page 2 2011-06-10
Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Manufacturers' Field Reports: manufacturers' field reports specified.
Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00], include: .1 Manufacturers name, type, model year, capacity and serial number. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list with names and addresses.
.6
.7
.1
Pre-Installation Meeting: .1 Convene pre-installation meeting one week prior to beginning work of this Section and on-site installations in accordance with [Section 01 32 19]. .1 Verify project requirements. .2 Review installation. .3 Co-ordination with other building subtrades. .4 Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements. Health and Safety: Do construction occupational health and safety .1 in accordance with Section [01 35 29.06].
.2
.1
Waste Management and Disposal:
.1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section [01 47 20]. .2 Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. .3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard and packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. .4 Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. .5 Unused sealant materials must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard. .6 Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
PLUMBING PUMPS
Section 22 10 10 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS
.1 .2
Capacity as indicated. Pump body shall be 100% lead-free bronze with ceramic shaft supported on carbon bearings. Motor shall be isolated in stainless steel casing. Motor to be 115 VAC and non-overloading at any point on pump curve.
Pump shall be designed for continuous operation at 107C with maximum working pressure of 1034 kPa.
.3
.4
.5
Equip each pump with circuit balance valve set as indicated on drawings.
Acceptable material: ITT Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Taco. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Make piping and electrical connections to pump and motor assembly and controls as indicated. Ensure pump and motor assembly do not support piping.
.2
.1
Site Tests/Inspection: .1 Check power supply. .2 Check starter protective devices. Start-up, check for proper and safe operation.
.2
PLUMBING PUMPS
Section 22 10 10 Page 4 2011-06-10
3.4 START-UP
.1
General: .1 In accordance with Section [01 91 00]: General Requirements, supplemented as specified herein. .2 Procedures: .1 Check power supply. .2 Start pumps, check impeller rotation. .3 Check for safe and proper operation. .4 Check settings, operation of operating, limit, safety controls, over-temperature, audible/visual alarms, other protective devices
3.5 REPORTS
.1
In accordance with Section [01 91 00]: reports, supplemented as specified. Include: .1 PV results on approved PV Report Forms. .2 Product Information report forms. .3 Pump performance curves (family of curves) with final point of actual performance.
.2
3.6 TRAINING
.1
In accordance with Section [01 91 00]: Training of O&M Personnel, supplemented as specified.
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Section 22 11 16 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers International (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B16.15-[06], Cast Copper Alloy Threaded Fittings: Classes 125 and 250. .2 ANSI B16.18-[01(R2005)], Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.22-[01(R2005)], Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .4 ANSI/ASME B16.24-2001(2006), Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 150, 300, 400, 600, 900, 1500 and 2500. ASTM International Inc. (ASTM) .1 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .2 ASTM B88M-[05], Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric). American Water Works Association (AWWA) .1 AWWA C111-07, Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings.
.2
.3
.4
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B242-[05], Groove and Shoulder Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings. Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999, c. 33 (CEPA). Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS).
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS). .1 MSS-SP-67-2002a, Butterfly Valves. .2 MSS-SP-70-2006, Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS-SP-71-2005, Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .4 MSS-SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
.5
.6
.7

.8
Section 22 11 16 Page 2 2011-06-10
National Research Council (NRC)/Institute for Research in Construction .1 NRCC 47668, National Plumbing Code of Canada (NPC) - [2005][2010]. Transport Canada (TC) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992, c. 34 (TDGA).
.9
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for insulation and adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit data for following: Valves.
.2
.3
Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00].
.1
Packaging Waste Management: .1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section [01 35 43].
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with waste management plan.
.2
.3
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations.
.4
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Section 22 11 16 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.1 PIPING
.1
Domestic hot, cold and recirculation systems, within building. .1 Above ground: copper tube, hard drawn, type K: to ASTM B88M.
2.2 FITTINGS
.1
Bronze pipe flanges and flanged fittings, Class 150 and 300: to ANSI/ASME B16.24. Cast bronze threaded fittings, Class 125 and[250: to ANSI/ASME B16.15. Cast copper, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.18. Wrought copper and copper alloy, solder type: to ANSI/ASME B16.22. NPS 2.5 and larger: roll grooved to CSA B242.
.2
.3 .4
.5
2.3 JOINTS
.1 .2 Rubber gaskets, 1.6 mm thick: to AWWA C111.
Bolts, nuts, hex head and washers: to ASTM A307, heavy series.
.3 .4 .5
Solder: 95/5 tin copper alloy. Teflon tape: for threaded joints.
Grooved couplings: designed with angle bolt pads to provide rigid joint, complete with EPDM flush seal gasket. .1 Acceptable material: Victaulic, Gruvlok, CCTF ShurJoint. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.6
Dielectric connections between dissimilar metals: dielectric fitting, complete with thermoplastic liner.
2.4 SWING CHECK VALVES
.1
NPS 2 and under, soldered: .1 Refer to Section [23 05 23.01] Valves Bronze. NPS 2 and under, screwed: .1 Refer to Section [23 05 23.01] Valves Bronze.
.2

.3
Section 22 11 16 Page 4 2011-06-10
NPS 2-1/2 and over, flanged: .1 Refer to Section [23 05 23.02] Valves Cast Iron.
2.5 BALL VALVES
.1
NPS 2 and under, screwed: .1 Refer to Section [23 05 23.01] Valves Bronze.
.2
NPS 2 and under, soldered: .1 Refer to Section [23 05 23.01] Valves Bronze.
2.6 BUTTERFLY VALVES
.1
NPS 2-1/2 and over, grooved ends .1 Refer to Section [23 05 23.03] Valves Butterfly.
2.7 CIRCUIT BALANCE VALVES
.1
Refer to Section [23 05 23.01] valves Bronze.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
Manufacturer's Instructions: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with NPC and local authority having jurisdiction. Install pipe work in accordance with Section [23 05 02], supplemented as specified herein.
Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.
.2
.3

.4
Section 22 11 16 Page 5 2011-06-10
Install CWS piping below and away from HWS and HWC and other hot piping so as to maintain temperature of cold water as low as possible.
Connect to fixtures and equipment in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions unless otherwise indicated.
.5
3.3 VALVES
.1
Isolate equipment, fixtures and branches with butterfly or ball valves. Balance recirculation system using lockshield globe valves. Mark settings and record on as-built drawings on completion.
.2
3.4 PRESSURE TESTS
.1 .2
Conform to requirements of Section [21 05 01]. Test pressure: greater of 1 times maximum system operating pressure or 860 kPa.
3.5 FLUSHING AND CLEANING
.1
Flush entire system for 8 h. Ensure outlets flushed for 2 h. Let stand for 24 h, then draw one sample off longest run. Submit to testing laboratory to verify that system is clean. Let system flush for additional 2 h, then draw off another sample for testing.
3.6 PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS
.1
Systems to be complete, prior to flushing, testing and start-up. Verify that system can be completely drained.
.2
.3
Ensure that air chambers, expansion compensators are installed properly.
3.7 DISINFECTION
.1
Flush out, disinfect and rinse system to requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
.2
Coordinate with Section [33 11 16.01] and Section [33 11 16]. Upon completion, provide laboratory test reports on water quality for Departmental Representative approval.
.3
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.8 START-UP
.1
Section 22 11 16 Page 6 2011-06-10
Timing: Start up after: .1 Pressure tests have been completed. .2 Disinfection procedures have been completed. .3 Certificate of static completion has been issued. .4 Water treatment systems operational. Provide continuous supervision during start-up. Start-up procedures: .1 Establish circulation and ensure that air is eliminated. .2 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer, flashing and/or cavitation. .3 Commission water conditioning specified Section [22 31 13]. .4 Bring HWS storage tank up to design temperature slowly. .5 Monitor piping HWS and HWC piping systems for freedom of movement, pipe expansion as designed. .6 Check control, limit, safety devices for normal and safe operation. Rectify start-up deficiencies.
.2 .3
.4
3.9 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
Scheduling: .1 Verify system performance after pressure and leakage tests and disinfection are completed, and Certificate of Completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction. Procedures: .1 Verify that flow rate and pressure meet Design Criteria. .2 TAB HWC in accordance with Section [23 05 93]. .3 Adjust pressure regulating valves while withdrawal is maximum and inlet pressure is minimum. .4 Verify performance of temperature controls. .5 Verify compliance with safety and health requirements. .6 Check for proper operation of water hammer arrestors. Run one or each outlet for 10 seconds, then shut of water immediately. If water hammer occurs, replace water hammer arrestor or re-charge air chambers. Repeat for outlets and flush valves. .7 Confirm water quality consistent with supply standards, and ensure no residuals remain as result of flushing or cleaning.
.2

.3
Section 22 11 16 Page 7 2011-06-10
Reports: .1 In accordance with Section [01 91 13]: Reports, using report forms as specified in Section [01 91 13]: Report Forms and Schematics. Include certificate of water flow and pressure .2 tests conducted on incoming water service, demonstrating adequacy of flow and pressure.
3.11 CLEANING
.1 .2
Clean in accordance with Section [01 74 11].

Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section [01 74 20].
DRAINAGE WASTE AND VENT PIPING- CAST IRON AND COPPER
Section 22 13 17 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
ASTM International Inc. ASTM B32-[08], Standard Specification for Solder .1 Metal. .2 ASTM B306-09, Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV). .3 ASTM C564-09a, Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA B67-[1972(R1996)], Lead Service Pipe, Waste Pipe, Traps, Bends and Accessories. .2 CAN/CSA-B70-[06], Cast Iron Soil Pipe, Fittings and Means of Joining. .3 CAN/CSA-B125.3-[05], Plumbing Fittings. Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES) .1 Standard GS-36-[00], Commercial Adhesives.
.2
.3
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section [01 11 01] [01 33 00]. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for adhesives, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section [01 11 01] [01 61 00]. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section [01 11 01] [01 74 20].
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 SUSTAINABLE MATERIAL

.1
Sustainable Requirements: materials and products in accordance with Section [01 47 15 Sustainable Requirements: Construction].
.2
Adhesives and Sealants: in accordance with Section [07 90 00] [07 92 00].
Section 22 13 17 Page 2 2011-06-10
2.2 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS
.1
Above ground sanitary and vent Type DWV to: ASTM B306. .1 Fittings. .1 Cast brass: to CAN/CSA-B125.3. .2 Wrought copper: to CAN/CSA-B125.3. .2 Solder: tin-lead, 50:50, to ASTM B 32.
2.3 CAST IRON PIPING AND FITTINGS
.1
Buried sanitary, storm and vent minimum NPS 2, to: CAN/CSA-B70, with one layer of protective coating. .1 Joints: .1 Mechanical joints: .1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets: to CAN/CSA-B70 or ASTM C564. .2 Stainless steel clamps. Above ground sanitary, storm and vent: to CAN/CSA-B70. .1 Joints: .2 Mechanical joints: .1 Neoprene or butyl rubber compression gaskets with stainless steel clamps.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
In accordance with Section [23 05 01]. Install in accordance with *Canadian Plumbing code* National Plumbing Code, and local authority having jurisdiction.
3.3 TESTING
.1 .2
Pressure test buried systems before backfilling. Hydraulically test to verify grades and freedom from obstructions.

.3
Section 22 13 17 Page 3 2011-06-10
Perform all testing as required by authority having jurisdiction.
.1
Cleanouts: .1 Ensure accessible and that access doors are correctly located. .2 Open, cover with linseed oil and re-seal. .3 Verify that cleanout rods can probe as far as the next cleanout, at least.
Test to ensure traps are fully and permanently primed.
.2 .3
Storm water drainage: .1 Verify domes are secure. .2 Ensure weirs are correctly sized and installed correctly. .3 Verify provisions for movement of roof system.
Ensure that fixtures are properly anchored, connected to system and effectively vented. Affix applicable label (storm, sanitary, vent, pump discharge etc.) c/w directional arrows every floor or 4.5 m (whichever is less).
.4
.5
3.5 VERIFICATION
.1
Verification requirements in accordance with Section [01 47 17], include: .1 Materials and resources. .2 Storage and collection of recyclables. .3 Construction waste management. .4 Resource reuse. .5 Local/regional materials. .6 Low-emitting materials.
3.6 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section [01 11 01] [01 74 11]. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section [01 11 01] [01 74 20] [01 35 21].
.2
DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
Section 22 30 05 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Gas Association (CGA) .1 CAN/CGA-B149.1, Natural Gas Installation Code.
.2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B51-[03(R2007)], Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code. .2 CAN/CSA-C309-[M90(R2003)], Performance Requirements for Glass-Lined Storage Tanks for Household Hot Water Service.
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00].
.2
Shop Drawings: .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate: .1 Equipment, including connections, fittings, control assemblies and ancillaries, identifying factory and field assembled.
.1
Provide maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00].
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section [01 61 00].
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section [01 74 20].
.3
Section 22 30 05 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5 WARRANTY
.1
For the Work of this Section 22 30 05 - Domestic Water Heaters, 12 months warranty period prescribed in subsection GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended to number of years specified for each product.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HIGH EFFICIENCY GAS
.1
Water tanks shall be seamless glass lined and fully insulated to levels exceeding ASHRAE 90.1.
.2
Combustion process shall be fully condensing with thermal efficiency in excess of 95%.
Power burner designed for turbulent flame inside submerged combustion chamber. Water heater shall be certified for horizontal, vertical and direct vent sealed construction through PVC pipe up to 24m in length. Electronic microprocessor controls for ignition and temperature setpoint. Digital display panel showing operating mode, user settings and error messages.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Acceptable material: A.O. Smith BTH as scheduled on drawings, Bradford White. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.2 TRIM AND INSTRUMENTAION
.1 .2
Drain valve: NPS with hose end.

Thermometer: Dial type with red pointer and thermowell filled with conductive paste to requirements of Section 23 05 19.
.3
ASME rated temperature and pressure relief valve sized for full capacity of heater, having discharge terminating over floor drain and visible to operators.
Magnesium anodes adequate for 20 years of operation and located for easy replacement
.4
Section 22 30 05 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.3 DOMESTIC HOT WATER STORAGE
1.
Storage tank shall be glass lined of capacity noted on drawings. Tank shall have threaded openings as shown on drawing. Provide minimum of two spare openings, plugged for future use. Interior of tank shall be glass-lined with alkaline borosilicate composition, fused to the steel inner tank by firing at 870C. Glass coating shall be continuous over the entire inner surface of the tank. Outer jacket shall have a baked enamel finish over a banderized undercoat. Unit shall be insulated to meet ASHRAE 90.1 requirements. Cathodic protection shall be provided. Tank shall have a working pressure of 1034 kPA. Tank shall have a five year warranty. Acceptable material: A.O. Smith, Bradford White. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum n accordance with Instructions to Bidders
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and authority having jurisdiction.

Install natural gas fired domestic water heaters in accordance with CAN/CSA-B149.1.
.2
3.3 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section [01 74 11]. .1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
.2
COMMERCIAL PLUMBING FIXTURES
Section 22 42 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 The supply and installation of Plumbing Fixtures and Trim. Sustainable requirements for construction and verification:
Products Installed but not Supplied Under this Section: .1 Install rough-in for equipment supplied by others, complete with valves on hot and cold water supplies, waste and vent. .2 Equipment installed by others. .1 Connect with unions. .3 Equipment not installed. .1 Capped for future connection by others.
.2
.3
.4
Related Sections: .1 Section [01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements].
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-B45 Series-02(R2008), Plumbing Fixtures. .2 CSA-B125.3-05, Plumbing Fittings. .3 CAN/CSA-B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Indicate, for all fixtures and trim: .1 Dimensions, construction details, roughing-in dimensions. Closeout Submittals: .1 Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .2 Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving
.3
Section 22 42 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts.
.1
Health and Safety: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
1.5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND DISPOSAL
.1
Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. .3 Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS
.1
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series. Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125. Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated.
Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern.
.2
.3 .4 .5
Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Service sinks:
.6 .7
.1 S-1: Secure type, floor mounted service sink.

.1 Sink: 16 gauge, type 316 stainless steel, welded seams polished smooth to satin finish. Radius covered bowl corners Undercoated to reduce condensation and resonance. Bowl: 546mm x 546mm x 254mm deep. Sink complete with 305mm high backsplash on two sides. 50mm waste fitting with grid strainer. .1 Acceptable material: Kindred Industries FSS222210316, American Standard, Architechtural Metal Industries.
Section 22 42 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.2 .2
Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Faucet: Two handles wall mount sink faucet, 203mm centers, heavy-duty cast brass with rough chrome plating and top braced rigid spout with body mounted angle vacuum breaker with hose thread outlet,70mm lever blade handles. .1 Acceptable material: Delta Commercial 28T8183, American Standard, Powers/Crane. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2 S-2: Standard type, floor mounted service sink. .1 Sink: Floor mounted, precast terrazzo with integral drain with strainer, 610mm x 610mm x 254mm deep with stainless steel cap on all sides. Cast brass drain with s.s. strainer, 75mm diamater outlet. .1 Acceptable material: Stern Williams SB-900, Fiat. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Faucet: Two handles wall mount sink faucet, 203mm centers, heavy-duty cast brass with polished chrome finish and top braced rigid spout with body mounted angle vacuum breaker with hose thread outlet,70mm lever blade handles. .1 Acceptable material: Cambridge brass #28T2383, American Standard, Powers/Crane. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
.3 S-3:Securetype, Single Compartment.

.1 Sink: Refer to architectural drawings for sink detail. Sink will be supplied with 38mm waste tail piece and secure grid strainer. This contractor shall connect to tail piece with drain. Coordinate details of faucet holes in fabricated sink.
.2 Faucet: Air controlled pushbutton tempered and cold valves using atmospheric pressure air for control, metering non-hold open faucet valves with timing adjustable from 5 to 60 seconds.
Section 22 42 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
Spout to be secure deckmount style. Air control valves and metering devices shall be located in secure compartment below sink. (Refer to architechtural drawings). Provide brackets as required to firmly mount components. .1 Acceptable material: Acorn DMS-04-M. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.4 S-4: Secure type, floor mounted service sink. Sink: 20 gauge, type 302, 18-8 stainless steel. Self rimming. Exposed surfaces satin finished. Underside fully sound dampened and undercoated. Bowl size 430mm(wide) x 300mm(front/back) x 200mm(deep). Sink complete with 89mm crumb cup strainer. .1 Acceptable material: Kindred Industries LBS2708-1. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Faucet: Two handles deck mount faucet, 203mm centers, chrome plated cast brass body, chrome plated stainless steel coverplate, brass spout and trim with vandal resistant screws. 203mm wallform swing spout, 8.4 1/min vandal resistant flow control aerator and 70mm lever blade handles. .1 Acceptable material: Cambridge Brass: #26T2133, American Standard, Powers/Crane. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .1
.2
.8
Fixture piping: 1. Water Supplies: .1 Secure Areas: Fully concealed, chrome plated copper rigid supply pipes each with screwdriver stops. Where supply is located in a Y-chase, use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Non-Secure Areas: Chrome plated flexible copper supply pipes with screw driver stops and chrome escutcheons. Where supply is located in a concealed area use quarter bronze ball valve.
Section 22 42 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.2
Waste: .1 Secure Areas: Fully concealed, brass p-trap with cleanout on each fixture not having integral trap or cleanout. .2 Non-Secure Areas: Chrome plated brass p-trap with cleanout with chrome escutcheon.
.9
Chair carriers: .1 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for all wall-mounted fixtures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights: Standard: to comply with manufacturer's .1 recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Wall-hung fixtures: as indicated, measured from finished floor. .3 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC and CAN/CSA-B651.
3.2 ADJUSTING
.1
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section.
.2
Adjustments: .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures. Checks: .1 Aerators: operation, cleanliness. .2 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions. .3 Wash fountains: operation of flow-actuating devices. Thermostatic controls: .1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
.3
.4
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL
PLUMBING SPECIALITIES AND ACCESSORIES
Section 22 42 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section Includes: .1 Materials and installation for plumbing specialties and accessories. .2 Sustainable requirements for construction and verification. .2 Related Sections: .1 .2 Section [01 91 00 - Commissioning]. Section [02 61 33 - Hazardous Materials].
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA-B64 Series-07, Backflow Preventers and Vacuum Breakers. .2 CSA-B79-08, Floor, Area and Shower Drains, and Cleanouts for Residential Construction. .3 CSA-B356-00(R2005), Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems.
.2
Plumbing and Drainage Institute (PDI). .1 PDI-WH201-[92], Water Hammer Arresters Standard.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet for fixtures and equipment. .2 Indicate dimensions, construction details and materials for specified items. .3 Submit WHMIS MSDS. Indicate VOC's for adhesive and solvents during application and curing. Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate materials, dimensions, construction and assembly details.
.3
.4
Closeout submittals: submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00], include: .1 Description of plumbing specialties and accessories, giving manufacturers name, type, model,
Section 22 42 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
year and capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list.
.1
Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section [01 74 20]. .2 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLOOR DRAINS
.1 .2
Floor Drains and Trench Drains: to CSA B79. Floor Drain Types:
.1
Type FD-1: secure duty; cast iron body round, adjustable head, heavy duty nickel bronze strainer with maximum 6mm square openings and secure type fasteners, integral seepage pan, clamping collar and plugged trap primer tapping. Fasteners to be stainless steel Torx with pin style. .1 Acceptable material: Zurn ZUSN-211-B5-VPT-P, Watts / Ancon, Mifab. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Type FD-2: general duty; cast iron body, heavy duty nickel bronze strainer, integral seepage pan, clamping collar and plugged trap primer tapping. .1 Acceptable material: Zurn ZXN-211-A, Watts / Ancon, Mifab. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Type FD-3: secure duty; cast iron body, angle strainer, bottom outlet body with heavy duty stainless steel strainer and secure type fasteners, integral seepage pan, clamping collar and plugged trap primer tapping. Fasteners to be stainless steel Torx with pin style. .1 Acceptable material: Mifab F1100-AS-3-6-NH, Zurn, Watts / Ancon.
.2
.3
Section 22 42 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
.2
.5
Type FFD-1: general duty funnel floor drain; cast iron body, nickel bronze adjustable strainer head and grate with 80 mm x 200 mm oval funnel. Body complete with plugged trap primer tapping. .1 Acceptable material: Zurn ZN-211-BF, Watts/Ancon, Mifab. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.2 ROOF DRAINS

.1 Type RD-1: standard roof drain with cast iron deep sump body, underdeck clamp, adjustable top deck extension flange, membrane clamp with galvanized metal dome secured with vandal proof fasteners. .1 Acceptable material: Mifab R1200-EU-6-12-U, Zurn, Watts / Ancon. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.3 CLEANOUTS
.1 Access covers: .1 Floor access: round cast iron body and frame with adjustable secured heavy duty nickel bronze top and: .1 Plugs: bolted bronze with neoprene gasket. .2 Cover for all floor types: nickel bronze heavy duty round 12mm thick scoriated cover, gasket, vandal-proof screws. Fasteners to be stainless steel Torx with pin style. .1 Acceptable material: Zurn ZXN-1612-VP, Watts / Ancon, Mifab. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
Section 22 42 01 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
.1
Stainless steel construction, bellows type: to PDI-WH201.
2.5 BACK FLOW PREVENTERS
.1
All backflow prevention device installations shall conform to the requirements of CANCSA-B61.10-94 Manual for the Selection, Installation, Maintenance, and Field Testing of Backflow Prevention Devices. Double Check Valve Assemble (DCVA) .1 DCVA shall consist of two internally loaded check valves, two ball type isolation valves and one y-strainer. .2 Unit shall be constructed with bronze body, stainless steel springs and fasteners with replaceable resilient rubber seats and top mounted test cocks. .3 Provide top access for maintenance and repair. .4 Maximum working pressure: 175 psig. .5 Temperature range: 33F 180F. .6 Acceptable material: Conbraco 40-11x-T2, Watts, Wilkins. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Reduced Pressure Principle (RP) .1 RP shall consist of two independently acting, internally loaded check valves separated by reduced pressure zone with differential perssure relief valve. Unit shall be complete with two ball type isolation valves and one y-strainer. .2 Unit shall be constructed with bronze body, stainless steel springs and fasteners with replaceable resilient rubber seats with test cocks in easily accessible locations. .3 Provide top access for maintenance and repair. .4 Maximum working pressure: 175 psig. .5 Temperature range: 33F 180F. Include accessory air gap drain funnel to .6 collect relief valve discharge. Complete with mounting hardware and fnpt drain outlet connection. .7 Acceptable material: Conbraco 40-21x-T2
.2
.3
Section 22 42 01 Page 5 2011-06-10
w/ 40-200-Xx air gap drain, Watts, Wilkins. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.6 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS
.1
Bronze construction complete with integral back flow preventer, hose thread spout, replaceable composition disc, and chrome plated in finished areas.
2.7 WATER METERS
.1
Provide and install in water lines meters sized and located as shown on drawings and noted herein.
.2
Meters 38mm and larger to be inline turbine style complete with strainer (integral where available), flanged ends, magnetic drive, E.C.R. register and touchpad (m3 at 10 m3), Material shall be bronze with thermoplastic rotor and stainless steel trim. Provide bronze meter flange set. Provide three-valve bypass around meter. Provide minimum 5 pipe diameters upstream of meter and minimum 2 pipe diameters downstream of meter of fitting-free straight pipe. Meters to comply with latest revision of ANSI/AWWA standard. Installation to meet all recommendations of manufacturer. Acceptable material: Sensus Tecnologies series W-DRS Turbo-Meter. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.8 TRAP SEAL PIMRERS
.1
Pressure drop activated brass trap seal primer. Complete with view holes and removable filter screen. Operating pressure range 138 kPa to 861 kPa. Primer to open to water flow on 20 kPa water pressure drop. Connect each primer with ball type isolation valve and air gap discharge fitting on outlet. .1 Acceptable material: Mifab M2-500 c/w MI-GAP fitting for up to 3 floor drains. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
Section 22 42 01 Page 6 2011-06-10
.2
Acceptable material: Mifab MR-500 c/w MI-GAP fitting for up to 4 floor drains. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.9 THERMAL EXPANSION TANK
.1
Steel pressure tank with baked on epoxy coating, butyl diaphragm. Pre-charged, adjustable in field. Approved for potable water service.
.2 .3 .4
Tank capacity:
13.21 gal. 8.82 gal.
Expansion capacity:
Acceptable Product: Conbraco 40-XT7-01, Watts, Wilkins .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.10 ROOF FLASHING
.1
Spun aluminum (single piece construction) with EPDM triple grommet seal to pipe at top and EPDM base seal at underside. Lined with urethane insulation pre-molded to inside surfaces. Sized for exact fit on penetrating pipe.
.2
2.11 THERMOSTATIC MIXING VALVES
.1
Thermostatic mixing valve shall be of bronze construction with stainless steel flow control components. Removable cartridge with strainer, stainless steel piston, liquid filled thermal motor with bellows mounted out of water complete with inlet check stops.
Mixing valve shall be provided as an assembly complete with volume control shut-off valve, bimetal mixed water temperature gauge with 75 mm diameter face, brass pipe, fittings, unions with wall mounting bracket, all factory assembled and tested.
.2
.3
Control range 29C to 49C, minimum temperature differential adjustable to within 5.6C of inlet temperature. Maximum working pressure of 860 kPa. Minimum flow rate of 1.9 litre/minute, maximum of 143.8 litres/minute with 69 kPa pressure drop.
Section 22 42 01 Page 7 2011-06-10
.4
Valve to fail safe on loss of flow to reduced water supply. Acceptable material: Symmons 5-500 A-ASB-W, Powers, Leonard. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and data sheet.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with National Plumbing Code of Canada and local authority having jurisdiction.
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as specified.
.2
3.3 CLEANOUTS
.1
Install cleanouts at base of soil and waste stacks, and rainwater leaders, at locations required code, and as indicated. Bring cleanouts to wall or finished floor unless serviceable from below floor. Building drain cleanout and stack base cleanouts: line size to maximum NPS4. Cleanouts installed in y-chases shall be set above flood level of adjacent water closets
.2
.3 .4
3.4 WATER HAMMER ARRESTORS
.1
Install on branch supplies to fixtures or group of fixtures where indicated.
Section 22 42 01 Page 8 2011-06-10
3.5 BACK FLOW PREVENTORS
.1
All backflow preventers shall be installed in readily accessible locations for testing and maintenance. BFPs shall be installed level and oriented along building lines. All BFPs shall be installed within 1.5m above floor except where noted on drawing.
BFPs sized 1.5dia. and larger shall be independently supported from structure to prevent strain on adjacent piping. Pipe air gap funnels to nearest floor drain without crossing floor.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Upon completion of installation, retain services of Registered Testing Contractor to perform initial testing as set out in CAN/CSA-B64.10-94. Provide written test results prior to Substantial Performance.
3.6 HOSE BIBBS AND SEDIMENT FAUCETS
.1
Install at bottom of risers, at low points to drain systems, and as indicated.
3.7 TRAP SEAL PRIMERS
.1 .2
Install for floor drains and elsewhere, as indicated. Install on cold water supply to nearest frequently used plumbing fixture, in concealed space, to approval of Engineer.
.3
Install soft copper tubing to floor drain.
3.8 WATER METERS
.1 .2
Install water meter provided by local water authority.
Install water meter as indicated.
3.9 THERMAL EXPANSION TANK
.1
.2
Install tanks in horizontal or vertical up position. Do not install in vertical down orientation. Support tank independently from structure
Section 22 42 01 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.10 START-UP
.1
General: .1 In accordance with Section [01 91 00]: General Requirements, supplemented as specified herein. Timing: start-up only after: .1 Pressure tests have been completed. .2 Disinfection procedures have been completed. Certificate of static completion has been issued. .3 .4 Water treatment systems operational. Provide continuous supervision during start-up.
.2
.3
3.11 TESTING AND ADJUSTING
.1
General: .1 In accordance with Section [01 91 00]: General Requirements, supplemented as specified. Timing: .1 After start-up deficiencies rectified. .2 After certificate of completion has been issued by authority having jurisdiction. Application tolerances: .1 Flow rate at fixtures: +/- 20%. Adjustments: Verify that flow rate and pressure meet design .1 criteria. .2 Make adjustments while flow rate or withdrawal is (1) maximum and (2) 25% of maximum and while pressure is (1) maximum and (2) minimum. Floor drains: .1 Verify operation of trap seal primer. .2 Prime, using trap primer. Adjust flow rate to suit site conditions. .3 Check operations of flushing features. .4 Check security, accessibility, removeability of strainer. .5 Clean out baskets. Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: .1 Test tightness, accessibility for O&M of cover and of valve. .2 Simulate reverse flow and back-pressure conditions to test operation of vacuum breakers, backflow preventers. .3 Verify visibility of discharge from open ports. Roof drains: .1 Check location at low points in roof. .2 Check security, removeability of dome. .3 Adjust weirs to suit actual roof slopes, meet requirements of design.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 22 42 01 Page 10 2011-06-10
.4 .5 .8
Clean out sumps. Verify provisions for movement of roof systems.
Cleanouts: .1 Verify covers are gas-tight, secure, yet readily removable. Water hammer arrestors: .1 Verify proper installation of correct type of water hammer arrester.
.9
.10
Commissioning Reports: .1 In accordance with Section [01 91 00]: Reports, supplemented as specified. Training: .1 In accordance with Section [01 91 00]: Training of O&M Personnel, supplemented as specified. .2 Demonstrate full compliance with Design Criteria.
.11
3.12 ROOF FLASHINGS
.1 .2 .3
Install as recommended by Manufacturer. Coordinate installation with roofing Contractor. Provide pre-manufactured flashings for all pipe penetrations through roof including (but not limited to) plumbing vents and refrigeration pipes. Install refrigeration piping inside pipe material specified for sewer service. Terminate with 90 elbow and 45 elbow (directed downward) to provide weatherproof installation. Seal inner surfaces to refrigerant pipe insulation with expanding urethane foam.
COMMERCIAL WASHROOM FIXTURES
Section 22 42 03 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-B45 Series-[02(R2008)], Plumbing Fixtures. .2 CAN/CSA-B125.3-[05], Plumbing Fittings. .3 CAN/CSA-B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment. Green Seal Environmental Standards (GSES) .1 Standard GS-36-[00], Commercial Adhesives.
.2
1.2 ACTION AND .1 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. Product Data:
.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for washroom fixtures, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .3 Indicate fixtures and trim: .1 Dimensions, construction details, roughing-in dimensions. .2 Factory-set water consumption per flush at recommended pressure. .3 (For water closets, urinals): minimum pressure required for flushing. Shop Drawings: .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
.4
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for washroom fixtures, for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 78 00]. Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
Section 22 42 03 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section [01 61 00]. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse [and return] [by manufacturer] of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section [[01 74 20].
.2
.3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
.1
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series. Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.3. Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated. Number, locations: as indicated. Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type.
.2
.3 .4 .5
.6
.7
1:
Water closets:
secure type, combination water closet and basin.
.1
457mm wide lavatory / water closet combination, suicide resistant with hemispherical cabinet fabricated from 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded and exposed surfaces shall be satin finished. D-shaped lavatory bowl. Fixture shall have air control pneumatically operated pushbutton valves requiring less than 5 pound to activate. Toilet bowl housing shaped to prohibit attachment of objects. Water closet shall be concealed blowout jet type with elongated bowl, self-draining flushing rim and integral contoured seat with high polish finish. Water closet trap shall pass a 54mm diameter ball
Section 22 42 03 Page 3 2011-06-10
and shall be fully enclosed. Cabinet interior shall be sound deadened with fire resistant material. Fixture shall withstand loading of 1360 kg. without permanent damage. Fixture shall be furnished with necessary fasteners for proper installation. Provide control for cold water and tempered hot water, metered water flow, paper holder, flush valve (3.5 gpf) and secure wall sleeve. .1 Acceptable material: Acorn 1440-2-AL/AR-BPH-4-M-PH-FV-SW. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
W-2: secure type, barrier free. .1 Blowout jet water closet 450 mm high fabricated from 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded with exposed surfaces satin finished except seat area which shall have high polish finish. Elongated bowl with self draining flush rim. Trap shall pass a 54mm diameter ball and be fully enclosed. Fixture shall withstand loading of 2260 kg without permanent damage. Flush valve (3.5 gpf) integral with unit. Fixture shall be furnished with necessary concealed fasteners for proper high security installation and secure wall sleeve. .1 Acceptable material: Acorn 1685-W-2-ADA-FV(3.5)-SW. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .3 W-3: standard type, floor mount. .1 Bowl: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, vitreous china, elongated rim, siphon jet whirlpool flush action. Fully glazed, 50mm ball pass internal trapway, 305mm x 254mm water surface, 13.25 lpf, 38mm top spud connection, colour matched bolt caps. .1 Acceptable material: Crane 3325 Whirlton, American Standard, Kohler.
Section 22 42 03 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .2 Flush valve: Exposed, polished chrome plated, vandal resistant cover screw, renewable seat, non hold open handle, vacuum breaker. 25mm water inlet, 28mm diameter tube cover. Water flush volume set for specified bowl requirements. .1 Acceptable material: Delta Commercial 81T201, Sloan, Crane. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .3 Seat: Elongated, heavy duty solid plastic open front less cover (white), with reinforced stainless steel check hinge, posts, washers and nuts. Seat sized to fit specified bowl. .1 Acceptable material: Centoco #500STSCC, Olsonite. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. W-4: standard type, barrier free, floor mount. .1 Bowl: Floor mounted, bottom outlet, vitreous china, elongated rim, siphon jet, 407mm high for barrier free use. Fully glazed, 50mm ball pass internal trapway, 229mm x 203mm water surface, 13.25 lpf, 38mm top spud connection, colour matched bolt caps. .1 Acceptable material: Crane 3816 Hymont Jr., American Standard, Kohler. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Flush valve: Exposed, polished chrome plated, vandal resistant cover screw, renewable seat, non hold open handle, vacuum
.2
.2
Section 22 42 03 Page 5 2011-06-10
.3
breaker. 25mm water inlet, 38mm diameter tube cover. ADA compliant. Centre cover bumper. Water flush volume set for specified bowl requirements. .1 Acceptable material: Delta Commercial 8IT201-5, Sloan, Crane. Alternative Materials: Approved .2 by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Seat: Elongated, heavy duty solid plastic open front with cover (white), with reinforced stainless steel check hinge, posts, washers and nuts. Seat sized to fit specified bowl. .1 Acceptable material: Centoco #820STS, Olsonite. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.8 .1 .1
Lavatory Basins: L-1: secure type, barrier free, wall-hung. .1 Basin: ADA compliant lavatory with oval bowl fabricated from 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel. Construction shall be seamless welded with all exposed surfaces polished to satin finish. Ledge to have self-draining soap dish with formed ridges for air circulation. Cabinet interior to be sound-deadened with fire-resistant material. Fixture shall be furnished with necessary concealed fasteners for proper high security installation. .1 Acceptable material: Acorn 1652-ADA-1-BP-4. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .2 Faucet: air control pneumatically operated ADA compliant pushbutton valve conforming to NSF61, Section 9 lead free requirements. Control shall be provided for cold water and tempered hot water. .2 L-1A: secure type, barrier free, wall-hung w/access. .1 As specified for L-1 except with front access panel attached
Section 22 42 03 Page 6 2011-06-10
with secure fasteners. .3 L-2: standard type, wall-hung. .1 Basin: White vitreous china, D-shaped bowl with front overflow, self-draining deck area with contoured back and side splash shields, wall hanger, faucet holes on 102mm centers. .1 Acceptable material: American Standard #0355 012, Crane, Kohler. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .2 Two handle centreset faucet to have 102mm centers chrome plated cast brass body, open grid strainer, vandal resistant 8.4 l/min flow control aerator, 70mm lever blade handles and 32mm chrome plated cast body adjustable p-trap w/ cleanout. .1 Acceptable material: Cambridge Brass #21T333 w/ #33T311 trap, American Standard, Powers/Crane. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .4 L-3: standard type, barrier free, wall-hung. .1 Basin: White vitreous china, D-shaped bowl with front overflow, self-draining deck area with contoured back and side splash shields, wall hanger, faucet holes on 102mm centers. .1 Acceptable material: American Standard #0355 012, Crane, Kohler. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .2
Two handle centreset faucet to have 102mm centers chrome plated cast brass
Section 22 42 03 Page 7 2011-06-10
body, offset open grid strainer, vandal resistant 8.4 l/min flow control aerator, 70mm lever blade handles and 32mm chrome plated cast body adjustable p-trap w/ cleanout. .1 Acceptable material: Cambridge Brass #21T433 w/ #33T311 trap, American Standard, Powers/Crane. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.9 Fixture piping: 1. Water Supplies: .1 Secure Areas: Fully concealed, chrome plated copper rigid supply pipes each with screwdriver stops. Where supply is located in a Y-chase, use quarter turn bronze ball valve. .2 Non-Secure Areas: Chrome plated flexible copper supply pipes with screw driver stops and chrome escutcheons. Where supply is located in a concealed area use quarter bronze ball valve.
.10
Chair carriers: .1 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for wall-mounted fixtures.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION .1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights: .1 Standard: as indicated measured from finished floor]. .2 Wall-hung fixtures: as indicated measured from finished floor. .3 Barrier free: to most stringent [NBCC] [CAN/CSA-B651].
3.3 ADJUSTING
.1
Conform to water conservation requirements specified
Section 22 42 03 Page 8 2011-06-10
this section. .2 Adjustments: .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures. .3 Adjust flush valves to suit actual site conditions. .4 Adjust urinal flush timing mechanisms. .5 Set controls of automatic flush valves for WCs and urinals to prevent unnecessary flush cycles. Checks: .1 Water closets, urinals: flushing action. .2 Aerators: operation, cleanliness. .3 Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation under all conditions. Thermostatic controls: .1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
.3
.4
3.4 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section [01 74 11]. Remove surplus materials, excess materials, .1 rubbish, tools and equipment.
.2
COMMERCIAL SHOWERS AND BATHTUBS
Section 22 42 20 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-B45 Series-[02(R2008)], Plumbing Fixtures. .2 CAN/CSA-B125.3-[05], Plumbing Fittings. .3 CAN/CSA-B651-04(R2010), Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fixtures, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2
.1
Provide maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals specified in Section [01 78 00]. Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts.
.2
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section [01 61 00]. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 Series. Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.3.
.2

.3 .4 .5
Section 22 42 20 Page 2 2011-06-10
Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated.

Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern.
Fixtures in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type. Trim in any one location to be product of one manufacturer and of same type.
.6
.10
Showers .1 SH-1:
secure type, front access, wall type. Fabricated from 14 gauge, type 304 .1 stainless steel with all welded seams, polished to satin finish. Trim to be chrome plated brass or stainless steel. Single shower valve shall be air controlled, metering, non-hold open type. Recessed soap dish. Mounting frame included with fasteners for high security installation. .1 Acceptable material: Acorn 1741-FA-3-RD. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2 SH-2: secure type, barrier free, front access, wall type. .1 ADA compliant, fabricated from 14 gauge type 304 stainless steel with all welded seams, polished to satin finish. Trim to be chrome plated brass or stainless steel. Fixture shall be furnished with fixed shower head, had shower with vacuum breaker, quick disconnect and recessed soap dish. Shower shall be provided with single ADA compliant valve, air controlled, metering, non-hold open type. Mounting frame included with fasteners for high security installation. .1 Acceptable material: Acorn 1741-ADA-FA-3. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.

.12
Section 22 42 20 Page 3 2011-06-10
Emergency Drench Shower .1 Emergency shower: 270 mm diameter stainless steel shower head with shroud operated through 25 mm diameter chrome plated brass stay open ball valve with stainless steel pull rod and triangular handle. Unit shall deliver 1.26 l/s flow at 206 kPa water supply pressure. .1 Acceptable material: Bradley S19-120A, Haws. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .2 Tempering valve: Factory assembled and tested emergency fixture thermostatic mixing valve constructed of bronze body and cap with replaceable corrosion resistant components, including stainless steel piston and liner and liquid filled thermostat. Provide dial thermometer, integral strainer / check stops, range adjustment, built-in cold water bypass and positive shutoff of hot supply when cold supply is lost. Fixture piping: .1 Water Supplies: .1
Fully concealed, chrome Secure Areas: plated copper rigid supply pipes each with screwdriver stops. Where supply is located in a Y-chase, use quarter turn bronze ball valve.
.12
.2
Non-Secure Areas: Chrome plated flexible copper supply pipes with screw driver stops and chrome escutcheons. Where supply is located in a concealed area use quarter bronze ball valve.
.2 Waste: .1
.2
Secure Areas: Fully concealed, brass p-trap with cleanout on each fixture not having integral trap or cleanout. Non-Secure Areas: Chrome plated brass p-trap with cleanout with chrome escutcheon.
Section 22 42 20 Page 4 2011-06-10
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Mounting heights: .1 Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CAN/CSA-B651.
3.3 ADJUSTING
.1
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this section.
.2
Adjustments: .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust pressure to fixtures to ensure no splashing at maximum pressures. Checks: .1 Aerators: operation, cleanliness. Vacuum breakers, backflow preventers: operation .2 under all conditions. Thermostatic controls: .1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
.3
.4
3.4 CLEANING
.1
.2
DRINKING FOUNTAINS AND WATER COOLERS
Section 22 47 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ARI) .1 ARI 1010-[02], Self-Contained, Mechanically Refrigerated Drinking-Water Coolers.
.2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-B45 Series-[02(R2008)], CSA Standards on Plumbing Fixtures. .2 CAN/CSA-B125.3-[05], Plumbing Fittings. .3 CAN/CSA-B651-[04], Accessible Design for the Built Environment.
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. Product Data:
.1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for fountains and coolers, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .3 Shop Drawings: .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate, for all fixtures: .1 Dimensions, construction details, roughing-in dimensions.
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data including monitoring requirements for incorporation into manuals specified in Section [01 78 00]. Include: .1 Description of fixtures and trim, giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year, capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing, maintenance. .3 List of recommended spare parts.
.2
Section 22 47 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section [01 61 00]. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURED .1 UNITS
Fixtures: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B45 series. Trim, fittings: manufacture in accordance with CAN/CSA-B125.3. Exposed plumbing brass to be chrome plated. Number, locations: architectural drawings to govern. Drinking Fountains .1 DF-1: secure type, wall mount, remote chiller. .1 Drinking fountain: ADA compliant fixture shall be fabricated from 14 gauge, type 304 stainless steel. Fixture shall be seamless welded with welds ground smooth and exposed surfaces polished to satin finish. Air control, single temperature valve, removable secure access door, penal bubbler and secure wall sleeve. Water ways shall meet requirements of NSF 61, Section 9-1997 lead free. .1 Acceptable material: Acorn # 1672FA-1-BP-03-SW. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .2 Remote chiller: Compressor shall be hermetically sealed operating with refrigerant R-134a. Unit to be fully insulated with stainless steel reservoir tank. Temperature adjustable. Unit shall deliver 5 litre per hour of 10C water at 32C ambient with 27C inlet water temperature. Electrical: 115V, 1.7FLA. .1 Acceptable material: Halsey
.2
.3 .4 .5
Section 22 47 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
Taylor SJ1-Q, Bradley, Haws. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .2 DF-2: standard type, wall mount, integral chiller. .1 Drinking fountain: ADA compliant fixture shall be fabricated from stainless steel with all welds ground smooth and exposed surfaces polished to satin finish. Unit shall have removable drain strainer, separate valve and stream regulator. Waterways shall meet requirements of NSF61. Compressor shall be hermetically sealed operating with refrigerant R-134a. Unit shall deliver 30 litres per hour of 10C water at 32C ambient with 27C inlet water temperature. Electrical: 115V, 4.0 FLA. .1 Acceptable material: Halsey Taylor WC8AFS-Q (all stainless steel option), Bradley, Haws. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. .2 Water filter: Cartridge style housing manufactured from FDA CFR-21 compliant material with clear housing built in shut-off valve to allow cartridge removal without water shut-off. Cartridge complete with 5 micron filter capable of 30 litres per minute flow at 57 kPa (clean) pressure drop. Provide five (5) spare filter cartridges. .1 Acceptable material: AMF Cuno AP101T with AP110 cartridge filters. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.6
Fixture piping: .1 Water Supplies: .1 Secure Areas: Fully concealed, chrome plated copper rigid supply pipes each with screwdriver stops. Where supply is located in a Y-chase, use quarter turn bronze ball valve.
Section 22 47 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.2 Non-Secure Areas: Chrome plated flexible copper supply pipes with screw driver stops and chrome escutcheons. Where supply is located in a concealed area use quarter bronze ball valve.
.7
Chair carriers: .1 Factory manufactured floor-mounted carrier systems for all wall-mounted fixtures.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION .1
Mounting heights: .1 Standard: to comply with manufacturer's recommendations unless otherwise indicated or specified. .2 Wall-hung fixtures: as indicated measured from finished floor. .3 Physically handicapped: to comply with most stringent of either NBCC or CAN/CSA B651. Drinking fountains: .1 In accordance with ARI 1010.
.2
3.3 ADJUSTING
.1
Conform to water conservation requirements specified this Section.
.2
Adjustments: .1 Adjust water flow rate to design flow rates. .2 Adjust water cooler, drinking fountain flow stream to ensure no spillage. Checks: .1 Refrigerated water coolers: operation, temperature settings. Thermostatic controls: .1 Verify temperature settings, operation of control, limit and safety controls.
.3
.4
Section 22 47 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
3.4 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section [01 74 11]. .1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section [01 74 20] [01 35 21].
.2
USE OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS Section 23 03 01 DURING CONSTRUCTION Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 01 51 00 - Temporary Utilities.
1.2 USE OF SYSTEMS
.1
Use of heating and ventilating systems for supplying temporary heat or ventilation is not permitted.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Section 23 05 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 09 91 00 Painting][09 91 23 - Interior Painting. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
.2
1.2 EQUIPMENT LIST

.1
Complete list of equipment and materials to be used on this project and forming part of bid documents by adding manufacturer's name, model number and details of materials, and submit for approval.
.2
Submit for approval within 48 h after award of contract.
1.3 TRIAL USAGE
.1
Departmental Representative may use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing. Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems:
.2
1.4 PROTECTION OF OPENINGS
.1
1.5 PAINTING
.1 To Section 09 91 00.
Section 23 05 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.6 SPARE PARTS
.1
Furnish spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00 as follows: .1 One set of packing for each pump. .2 One casing joint gasket for each size pump. .3 One head gasket set for each heat exchanger. .4 One glass for each gauge glass. .5 One filter cartridge or set of filter media for each filter or filter bank in addition to final operating set.
1.7 SPECIAL TOOLS
.1
Provide one set of special tools required to service equipment as recommended by manufacturers and in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.2
Furnish one commercial quality grease gun, grease and adapters to suit different types of grease and grease fittings.
1.8 DEMONSTRATION AND OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance.
.2
Where specified elsewhere in Mechanical Divisions, manufacturers to provide demonstrations and instructions. Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, audio visual aids, etc. as part of instruction materials.
Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.
.3
.4
.5
Where deemed necessary, Departmental Representative may record these demonstrations on video tape for future reference.
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section [01 11 01][01 78 00].
Operation and maintenance manual to be approved by, and final copies deposited with, Departmental Representative before final inspection.
.2

.3
Section 23 05 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
Operation data to include: .1 Control schematics for each system including environmental controls. .2 Description of each system and its controls. .3 Description of operation of each system at various loads together with reset schedules and seasonal variances. Operation instruction for each system and each .4 component. .5 Description of actions to be taken in event of equipment failure. .6 Valves schedule and flow diagram. .7 Colour coding chart. Maintenance data shall include: .1 Servicing, maintenance, operation and trouble-shooting instructions for each item of equipment. .2 Data to include schedules of tasks, frequency, tools required and task time. Performance data to include: .1 Equipment manufacturer's performance data sheets with point of operation as left after commissioning is complete. .2 Equipment performance verification test results. Special performance data as specified elsewhere. .3 .4 Testing, adjusting and balancing reports as specified in Section [23 05 93]. Approvals: .1 Submit [2] copies of draft Operation and Maintenance Manual to Departmental Representative for approval. Submission of individual data will not be accepted unless so directed by Departmental Representative. .2 Make changes as required and re-submit as directed by Departmental Representative. Additional data: .1 Prepare and insert into operation and maintenance manual when need for same becomes apparent during demonstrations and instructions specified above.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Shop drawings and product data shall show: .1 Mounting arrangements. Operating and maintenance clearances. eg. access .2 door swing spaces.
.2

.3
Section 23 05 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
Shop drawings and product data shall be accompanied by: .1 Detailed drawings of bases, supports, and anchor bolts. .2 Acoustical sound power data, where applicable. .3 Points of operation on performance curves. .4 Manufacturer to certify as to current model production. .5 Certification of compliance to applicable codes. In addition to transmittal letter referred to in Section [01 11 01][01 33 00]: use MCAC "Shop Drawing Submittal Title Sheet". Identify section and paragraph number.
.4
1.11 CLEANING
.1
Clean interior and exterior of all systems including strainers. Vacuum interior of ductwork and air handling units.
1.12 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
.1
Site records: Departmental Representative will provide [1] set .1 of reproducible mechanical drawings. Provide sets of white prints as required for each phase of the work. Mark there on all changes as work progresses and as changes occur. [This shall include changes to existing mechanical systems, control systems and low voltage control wiring.] .2 On a weekly basis, transfer information to reproducibles, revising reproducibles to show all work as actually installed. .3 Use different colour waterproof ink for each service. .4 Make available for reference purposes and inspection at all times.
.2
As-built drawings: .1 Prior to start of Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB), finalize production of as-built drawings. .2 Identify each drawing in lower right hand corner in letters at least 12 mm high as follows: - "AS BUILT DRAWINGS: THIS DRAWING HAS BEEN REVISED TO SHOW MECHANICAL SYSTEMS AS INSTALLED" (Signature of Contractor) (date). .3 Submit to Departmental Representative for approval and make corrections as directed. .4 TAB to be performed using as-built drawings. .5 Submit completed reproducible as-built drawings
Section 23 05 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
with Operating and Maintenance Manuals. .3 Submit copies of as-built drawings for inclusion in final TAB report.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
Dispose of unused paint material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused paint material into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.4
.5
.6
1.14 HALOCARBONS
.1
1.15 QUALITY ASSURANCE .1

.2
Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01-45-00 Quality Control.

Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.6 Health and Safety Requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
Section 23 05 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.1 PAINTING REPAIRS AND RESTORATION
.1
Do painting in accordance with Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting
.2
Prime and touch up marred finished paintwork to match original

Restore to new condition, finishes which have been damaged
.3
.1
Site Tests: conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control and submit report as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS. Manufacturer's Field Services: .1
Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS. Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.
.2
.2
.3
3.3 DEMONSTRATION
.1
Departmental Representative will use equipment and systems for test purposes prior to acceptance. Supply labour, material, and instruments required for testing.
Trial usage to apply to following equipment and systems:
.2 .1
.2 .3
Ventilation Systems: .1 HRV .2 Fan coil units .3 Emergency mode ventilation Cooling systems: .1 DX cooling systems Heating Systems:
Section 23 05 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
.1 .2 .3 .3
Boiler Pumps Radiant heating
Supply tools, equipment and personnel to demonstrate and instruct operating and maintenance personnel in operating, controlling, adjusting, trouble-shooting and servicing of all systems and equipment during regular work hours, prior to acceptance. Use operation and maintenance manual, as-built drawings, and audio visual aids as part of instruction materials. Instruction duration time requirements as specified in appropriate sections.
.4
.5
3.4 PROTECTION
.1
Protect equipment and system openings from dirt, dust and other foreign materials with materials appropriate to the system .
INSTALLATION OF PIPEWORK
Section 23 05 02 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.181-[99], Ready-Mixed Organic Zinc-Rich Coating.
.1
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section [01 74 20].
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
3.2 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT
.1
In accordance with manufacturer's instructions unless otherwise indicated.

Use valves and either unions or flanges for isolation and ease of maintenance and assembly.
.2

.3
Section 23 05 02 Page 2 2011-06-10
Use double swing joints when equipment mounted on vibration isolation and when piping subject to movement.
3.3 CLEARANCES
.1
Provide clearance around systems, equipment and components for observation of operation, inspection, servicing, maintenance and as recommended by manufacturer.
Provide space for disassembly, removal of equipment and components as recommended by manufacturer or as indicated (whichever is greater) without interrupting operation of other system, equipment, components.
.2
3.4 DRAINS
.1
Install piping with grade in direction of flow except as indicated. Install drain valve at low points in piping systems, at equipment and at section isolating valves. Pipe each drain valve discharge separately to above floor drain. Discharge to be visible.
.2
.3
.4
Drain valves: NPS 3/4 gate or globe valves unless indicated otherwise, with hose end male thread, cap and chain.
3.5 AIR VENTS
.1
Install manual air vents at high points in piping systems.

Install isolating valve at each automatic air valve. Install drain piping to approved location and terminate where discharge is visible.
.2 .3
3.6 DIELECTRIC COUPLINGS
.1
General: compatible with system, to suit pressure rating of system. Locations: where dissimilar metals are joined. NPS 2 and under: isolating unions or bronze valves. Over NPS 2: isolating flanges.
.2 .3 .4
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.7 PIPEWORK INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Section 23 05 02 Page 3 2011-06-10
Screwed fittings jointed with Teflon tape.

Protect openings against entry of foreign material. Install to isolate equipment and allow removal without interrupting operation of other equipment or systems. Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards. Saddle type branch fittings may be used on mains if branch line is no larger than half size of main. .1 Hole saw (or drill) and ream main to maintain full inside diameter of branch line prior to welding saddle.
.4
.5
.6
Install exposed piping, equipment, rectangular cleanouts and similar items parallel or perpendicular to building lines.
Install concealed pipework to minimize furring space, maximize headroom, conserve space. Slope piping, except where indicated, in direction of flow for positive drainage and venting. Install, except where indicated, to permit separate thermal insulation of each pipe.
.7
.8
.9
.10 .11
Group piping wherever possible and as indicated.

Ream pipes, remove scale and other foreign material before assembly.
.12
Use eccentric reducers at pipe size changes to ensure positive drainage and venting. Provide for thermal expansion as indicated. Valves: .1 Install in accessible locations. .2 Remove interior parts before soldering. .3 Install with stems above horizontal position unless otherwise indicated. .4 Valves accessible for maintenance without removing adjacent piping. .5 Install globe valves in bypass around control valves. .6 Use ball or butterfly valves at branch take-offs for isolating purposes except where otherwise specified. .7 Install butterfly valves between weld neck flanges to ensure full compression of liner. Check Valves: .1 Install swing check valves in horizontal lines on discharge of pumps and elsewhere as indicated.
.13 .14
.15
Section 23 05 02 Page 4 2011-06-10
3.8 SLEEVES
.1
General: install where pipes pass through masonry, concrete structures, fire rated assemblies, and elsewhere as indicated. Material: schedule 40 black steel pipe. Construction: foundation walls and where sleeves extend above finished floors to have annular fins continuously welded on at mid-point. Sizes: 6 mm minimum clearance between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation. Installation: .1 Concrete, masonry walls, concrete floors on grade: terminate flush with finished surface. .2 Other floors: terminate 25 mm above finished floor. .3 Before installation, paint exposed exterior surfaces with heavy application of zinc-rich paint to CAN/CGSB-1.181. Sealing: .1 Elsewhere: Provide space for firestopping. Maintain fire rating integrity. Sleeves installed for future use: fill with lime .2 plaster or other easily removable filler. .3 Ensure no contact between copper pipe or tube and sleeve.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
3.9 ESCUTCHEONS
.1
Install on pipes passing through walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings in finished areas. Construction: one piece type with set screws. Chrome or nickel plated brass or type 302 stainless steel.
.2
.3
Sizes: outside diameter to cover opening or sleeve. Inside diameter to fit around pipe or outside of insulation if so provided.
3.10 PREPARATION FOR FIRE STOPPING
.1
Material and installation within annular space between pipes, ducts, insulation and adjacent fire separation to Section [07 84 00]. Uninsulated unheated pipes not subject to movement: No special preparation.
.2
.3
Uninsulated heated pipes subject to movement: wrap with non-combustible smooth material to permit pipe movement without damaging fires topping material or installation.

.4
Section 23 05 02 Page 5 2011-06-10
Insulated pipes and ducts: ensure integrity of insulation and vapour barriers.
3.11 FLUSHING OUT OF PIPING SYSTEMS
.1 .2
Flush system in accordance with Section [23 08 02]. Before start-up, clean interior of piping systems in accordance with requirements of Section [01 11 01] [01 74 11] supplemented as specified in relevant mechanical sections of Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25. Preparatory to acceptance, clean and refurbish equipment and leave in operating condition, including replacement of filters in piping systems.
.3
3.12 PRESSURE TESTING OF EQUIPMENT AND PIPEWORK
.1
Advise Engineer 72 hours minimum prior to performance of pressure tests. Pipework: test as specified in relevant sections of Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25. Maintain specified test pressure without loss for 4 hours minimum unless specified for longer period of time in relevant mechanical sections of Divisions 21, 22, 23 and 25. Prior to tests, isolate equipment and other parts which are not designed to withstand test pressure or media.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Conduct tests in presence of Departmental Representative.

Pay costs for repairs or replacement, retesting, and making good. Departmental Representative to determine whether repair or replacement is appropriate.
.6
.7
Insulate or conceal work only after approval and certification of tests by Departmental Representative.
3.13 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
.2
COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS Section 23 05 13 FOR HVAC EQUIPMENT Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 90.1-2007, SI; Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers' Advisory Council (EEMAC)
.2
1.2 SECTIONS INCLUDES
.1
Electrical work to conform to Electrical Divisions including the following: .1 Supplier and installer responsibility is indicated in Motor, Control and Equipment Schedule on electrical drawings and related mechanical responsibility is indicated on Mechanical Equipment Schedule on mechanical drawings. .2 Control wiring and conduit is specified in Division 26 except for conduit, wiring and connections below 50 V which are related to control systems specified in Division 23. Refer to Division 26 for quality of materials and workmanship.
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
Provide maintenance data for motors, drives and guards for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 33 00.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3

.4

Dispose of corrugated cardboard and plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1
Motors to be high efficiency, in accordance with local Hydro company standards and the requirements of ASHRAE 90.1.
2.2 MOTORS
.1
Provide motors for mechanical equipment as specified.
.2
If delivery of specified motor will delay delivery or installation of equipment, install motor approved by Departmental Representative for temporary use. Final acceptance of equipment will not occur until specified motor is installed.
.3
Motors under 373 W [1/2 HP]: speed as indicated, continuous duty, built-in overload protection, resilient mount, single phase, [120] V, unless otherwise specified or indicated. Motors 373 W [1/2 HP] and larger: squirrel cage induction, speed as continuous duty, drip proof, ball temperature rise 40 C, 3 phase, otherwise specified or indicated. EEMAC Class B, indicated, bearing, maximum 575 V, unless
.4
.5
Motors designated for service with variable speed drive equipment shall be compatible with that service. Motors shall be inverter wound with service factor of 1.15. Motors shall be suitable for continuous duty in ambient temperatures from - 25C to +40C at altitude of installation. Nominal efficiency and minimum guaranteed efficiency to be stamped on nameplate of each motor.
.6
.7
.8
Bearings to provide L-10 life at 40,000 hours with external load per NEMA MG 1-14
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.3 TEMPORARY MOTORS
.1

If delivery of specified motor will delay completion or commissioning work, install motor approved by Departmental Representative for temporary use. Work will only be accepted when specified motor is installed.
2.4 BELT DRIVES
.1
Fit reinforced belts in sheave matched to drive. Multiple belts to be matched sets.
Use cast iron or steel sheaves secured to shafts with removable keys unless otherwise specified. For motors under 7.5 kW (10 HP): standard adjustable pitch drive sheaves, having plus or minus 10% range. Use mid-position of range for specified r/min. For motors 7.5 kW (10 HP) and over: sheave with split tapered bushing and keyway having fixed pitch unless specifically required for item concerned. Provide sheave of correct size to suit balancing.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Correct size of sheave to be determined during commissioning.

Minimum drive rating: 1.5 times nameplate rating on motor. Keep overhung loads within manufacturer's design requirements on prime mover shafts. Motor slide rail adjustment plates to allow for centre line adjustment.
.6
.7
.8
Supply one set of spare belts for each set installed.
2.5 DRIVE GUARDS
.1 .2
Provide guards for unprotected drives. Guards for belt drives; .1 Expanded metal screen welded to steel frame. .2 Minimum 1.2 mm thick sheet metal tops and bottoms. .3 38 mm dia holes on both shaft centres for insertion of tachometer. .4 Removable for servicing.
Provide means to permit lubrication and use of test instruments with guards in place. Install belt guards to allow movement of motors for adjusting belt tension.
.3
.4
.5
Guard for flexible coupling: .1 "U" shaped, minimum 1.6 mm thick galvanized mild steel. .2 Securely fasten in place. .3 Removable for servicing.

.6

Unprotected fan inlets or outlets: .1 Wire or expanded metal screen, galvanized, 19 mm mesh. .2 Net free area of guard: not less than 80% of fan openings. .3 Securely fasten in place. .4 Removable for servicing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Fasten securely in place.

Make removable for servicing, easily returned into, and positively in position.
THERMOMETERS AND PRESSURE Section 23 05 19.01 GUAGES PIPING SYSTEMS Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for thermometers and pressure gauges in piping systems.
.1
Section 23 05 53.01 - Mechanical Identification.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). .1 ASME B40.100-[05], Pressure Gauges and Gauge Attachments. .2 ASME B40.200-2008, Thermometers, Direct Reading and Remote Reading. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB). .1 CAN/CGSB-14.4-[M88], Thermometers, Liquid-in-Glass, Self Indicating, Commercial/Industrial Type. .2 CAN/CGSB-14.5-[M88], Thermometers, Bimetallic, Self-Indicating, Commercial/Industrial Type.
.2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. Submit shop drawings and product dat Submit manufacturer's product data for following items: .1 Thermometers. .2 Pressure gauges. .3 Stop cocks. .4 Syphons. .5 Wells. .6 Pressure snubbers.
1.5 HEALTH AND SAFETY
.1
Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section [01 35 29.06].
.1
.2
Collect, separate and place in designated containers for reuse and recycling paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging, Steel and Metal in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.3
.4
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed, labelled and stored safely for disposal away from children.
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1
Design operating point to be at mid-point of scale or range. Ranges: as indicated.
.2
2.2 DIRECT READING THERMOMETERS
.1
Industrial, bimetal, 75mm dial size, 1% accuracy, dual scale, stainless steel sealed case, bottom or back connected as required. .1 Acceptable material: Trerice, Marshalltown, Weksler. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.3 THERMOMETER WELLS
.1 .2
Copper pipe: copper or bronze. Steel pipe: brass.
2.4 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
114 mm, dial type: to [ASME B40.1, Grade 2A, brass bourdon tube having 1% accuracy full scale unless otherwise specified, dual scale, stainless steel base. .1 Acceptable material: Trerice, Marshalltown, Weksler. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.

.2
Provide: .1 Snubber for pulsating operation. .2 Bronze stop cock.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1
Install so they can be easily read from floor or platform. If this cannot be accomplished, install remote reading units.
Install between equipment and first fitting or valve.
.2
3.2 THERMOMETERS
.1
Install in wells on piping. Provide heat conductive material inside well. Install in locations as indicated and on inlet and outlet of: .1 Heat exchangers. .2 Water heating and cooling coils. .3 Water boilers. .4 DHW tanks.
Install wells as indicated only for balancing purposes.
.2
.3 .4
Use extensions where thermometers are installed through insulation.
3.3 PRESSURE GAUGES
.1
Install in following locations: Suction and discharge of pumps. .1 .2 Upstream and downstream of PRV's. .3 Upstream and downstream of control valves. .4 Outlet of boilers. .5 In other locations as indicated.
Install gauge cocks for balancing purposes, elsewhere as indicated.
.2
.3
Use extensions where pressure gauges are installed through insulation.
3.4 NAMEPLATES
.1
Install engraved lamicoid nameplates as specified in Section 23 05 53.01, identifying medium.
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ASME B1.20.1-[1983(R2006)], Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). ASTM International .1 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS) .1 MSS-SP-25-2008, Standard Marking System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions. .2 MSS-SP-80-[2008], Bronze Gate Globe, Angle and Check Valves.
.2
.3
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for equipment and systems and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets.
.2
.3
Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Submit data for valves specified in this Section.
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Extra Materials/Spare Parts: .1 Furnish following spare parts, where applicable: .1 Valve seats: one for every 10 valves each size, minimum 1. .2 Discs: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1. .3 Stem packing: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1. .4 Valve handles: 2 of each size. .5 Gaskets for flanges: one for every 10 flanged joints. .2 Tools: .1 Furnish special tools for maintenance of systems and equipment. .2 Include following: .1 Lubricant gun for expansion joints.
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in original factory .1 packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse [and return] [by manufacturer] of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Valves: .1 Except for specialty valves, to be single manufacturer. .2 Products to have CRN registration numbers. End Connections: .1 Connection into adjacent piping/tubing: .1 Steel pipe systems: screwed ends to ASME B1.20.1. .2 Copper tube systems: Solder ends Globe Valves .1
Requirements common to all globe valves, unless specified otherwise: .1 Standard specification: MSS SP-80.
.2
..3
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01 Page 3 2011-06-10
.2 .3 .4 .5
.6 .7
Bonnet: with hex. shoulders. Connections: with hex. shoulders. Pressure testing: to MSS SP-80. Tests to be hydrostatic. Stuffing box: threaded to bonnet with gland follower, packing nut, high grade non-asbestos packing. Handwheel: non-ferrous. Nut: bronze to ASTM B62. Acceptable manufacturers: Crane, Apollo, Toyo, MAS, Kitz. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
NPS 2 and under, composition disc, Class 150: .1 Body and bonnet: union bonnet. .2 WP = 1.03 MPa steam, 2.07 MPa WOG. .3 Disc and seat: renewable rotating PTFE disc in easily removable disc holder, regrindable bronze seat, loosely secured to bronze stem to ASTM B505. .4 Operator: Handwheel.
Angle Class .1 .2 .3 valve, NPS 2 and under, composition disc, 150: Body and bonnet: union bonnet. WP = 1.03 MPa steam, 2.07 MPa WOG. Disc and seat: renewable rotating PTFE disc in slip-on easily removable disc holder having integral guides, regrindable bronze seat, loosely secured to stem. Operator: Handwheel.
.3
.4 .4 .1
Check Valves
Requirements common to all check valves, unless specified otherwise: .1 Standard specification: MSS SP-80. .2 Connections: with hex. shoulders. .3 Acceptable manufacturers: Crane, Apollo, Toyo, MAS, Kitz. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. NPS 2 and under, swing type, bronze disc, Class 150: .1 Body: Y-pattern with integral seat at 45, screw-in cap with hex head.
.2
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01 Page 4 2011-06-10
.2 .3
Class 150, WP = 1.03 MPa steam, 2.07 MPa WOG. Disc and seat: renewable rotating disc, two-piece hinge disc construction; seat: regrindable.
.5 .4
Ball Valves NPS 2 and under: .1 Body and cap: cast brass to ASTM B283. .2 Pressure rating: Class150, 1034 kPa steam, WP = 600 WOG. .3 Connections: Screwed ends to ANSI B1.20.1 and with hex. shoulders solder ends to ANSI. .4 Stem: tamperproof ball drive. .5 Stem packing nut: external to body. .6 Ball and seat: replaceable chrome plated forged brass solid ball and teflon seats. .7 Stem seal: TFE with external packing nut. .8 Operator: removable lever handle. .9 Acceptable manufacturer: Crane, Apollo, Toyo, MAS, Kitz. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Circuit Balance Valves (CBV) .1 Supply and install where shown, calibrated testable, y-pattern circuit balance valves. Each valve shall be equipped with test ports for field connection of portable differential pressure test meter. Values shall have micrometer adjustable flow setting scale with positive position memory. Valves shall be capable of use for positive shut off. Provide TAB agency with flow meter setting conversion tables (or calculator wheel) if required. Valves shall be pipeline size (unless noted otherwise). Acceptable manufacturers: Victaulic Tour & Anderson, Armstrong, Macon. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.6
.2
.3
.4
.5
VALVES - BRONZE
Section 23 05 23.01 Page 5 2011-06-10
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem above horizontal.
.2
Remove internal parts before soldering.
3.2 CLEANING
.1
.2
VALVES CAST IRON
Section 23 05 23.02 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 Valves, gate, globe, and check. Sustainable requirements for construction and verification. Related Sections: .2 Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements. .3 Section 23 05 01 - Installation of Pipework.
.2
.3
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). .1 ANSI/ASME B16.1-2005, Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM). .1 ASTM A49-01[(2006)] , Specification for Heat-Treated Carbon Steel Joint Bars. .2 ASTM A126-[04], Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. .3 ASTM B61-[08], Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. .4 ASTM B62-09, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS). .1 MSS SP-70-[2006], Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .2 MSS SP-71-[2005], Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS SP-85-[2002], Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
.3
.4
American Petroleum Institute (API). .1 API 598-2009, Valve Inspection and Testing.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 62 00.01. .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit data for valves specified in this section.

.3
VALVES CAST IRON
Section 23 05 23.02 Page 2 2011-06-10
Closeout Submittals: .1 Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
.1 .2
Waste Management and Disposal: Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.3
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Furnish following spare parts: .1 Valve seats: one for every 10 valves each size, minimum 1. .2 Discs: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1. .3 Stem Packing: one for every 10 valves, each size. Minimum 1. .4 Gaskets for flanges: one for every 10 flanged joints.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
.1 Sustainable Requirements: .1 Cast iron: minimum 25% recycled content. Valves: .1 Except for specialty valves, to be of single manufacturer. Standard specifications: .1 Gate valves: MSS SP-70. .2 Globe valves: MSS SP-85. .3 Check valves: MSS SP-71. Requirements common to valves, unless specified otherwise: .1 Body, bonnet: cast iron to ASTM B209 Class B. .2 Connections: flanged ends plain face to ANSI B16.1. .3 Inspection and pressure testing: to MSS SP-82.
.2
.3
.4
VALVES CAST IRON
Section 23 05 23.02 Page 3 2011-06-10
.4 Bonnet gasket: non-asbestos. .5 Stem: to have precision-machined Acme or 60 degrees V threads, top screwed for handwheel nut. .6 Stuffing box: non-galling two-piece ball-jointed packing gland, gland bolts and nuts. .7 Gland packing: non-asbestos. .8 Handwheel: Die-cast aluminum alloy to ASTM B85 or malleable iron to ASTM A49. Nut of bronze to ASTM B62. .9 Identification tag: with catalogue number, size, other pertinent data. .5 All products to have CRN registration numbers.
2.2 GATE VALVES
.1
NPS 2 1/2 - 8, non rising stem, inside screw, [bronze] [iron] trim, solid wedge disc: .1 Body and multiple-bolted bonnet: with full length disc guides designed to ensure correct re-assembly. Class 125. .2 Disc: solid offset taper wedge, bronze to ASTM B62. .3 Seat rings: renewable bronze to ASTM B62, screwed into body. .4 Stem: steel. .5 Operator: Handwheel.
2.3 GLOBE VALVES
.1
NPS 2 1/2 - 10, OSY: Body: with multiple-bolted bonnet. .1 .2 WP: 860 kPa steam, 1.4 MPa CWP. .3 Bonnet-yoke gasket: non-asbestos. .4 Disc: bronze to ASTM B62, fully guided from bottom, securely yet freely connected to stem for swivel action and accurate engagement with disc. .5 Seat ring: renewable, regrindable, screwed into body. .6 Stem: bronze to ASTM B62. .7 Operator: Handwheel.
2.4 VALVE OPERATORS
.1
Install valve operators as follows: .1 Handwheel: on valves except as specified. .2 Handwheel with chain operators: on valves installed more than 2400 mm above floor in mechanical equipment rooms.
VALVES CAST IRON
Section 23 05 23.02 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.5 CHECK VALVES
.1
Swing check valves, Class 125: .1 Body and bolted cover: with tapped and plugged opening on each side for hinge pin. Flanged ends: plain faced with smooth finish. .1 Up to NPS 10: cast iron to ASTM A126 Class B. .2 Ratings: .1 NPS 2 1/2 - 12: 860 kPa steam; 1.4 MPa CWP. .3 Disc: rotating for extended life. .1 Up to NPS 6: bronze to ASTM B62. .2 NPS 8 and over: bronze-faced cast iron. .4 Seat rings: renewable bronze to ASTM B62 screwed into body. .5 Hinge pin, bushings: renewable bronze to ASTM B62.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem above horizontal.
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Section 23 05 23.05 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 Butterfly Valves. Sustainable requirements for construction and verification. Related Sections: .1 Section 01 47 15 - Sustainable Requirements: Construction. .2 Section 01 47 17 - Sustainable Requirements: Contractor's Verification. .3 Section 01 35 29.06 - Health and Safety Requirements.
.2
.3
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). .1 ANSI/ASME B1.20.1-[1983(R2001)], Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch). .2 ANSI/ASME B16.1-[2005], Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. .3 ANSI/ASME B16.5-2009, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
.2
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A126-[04], Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings. .2 ASTM B62-09, Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings.
Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc. (MSS). .1 MSS SP-67-[2002a], Butterfly Valves.
.3
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 02 62 00.01. .1 Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .3 Submit data for valves specified this section. Closeout Submittals: .1 Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.3
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Section 23 05 23.05 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
.1 .2
Waste Management and Disposal: Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BUTTERFLY VALVES - RESILIENT SEAT - 200 PSIG
.1
Except to specialty valves, to be of single manufacturer. To be suitable for dead-end service. CRN registration number required for products. Sizes: NPS 2 to 10. Pressure rating for tight shut-off at temperatures up to maximum for seat material. .1 NPS 2 - 10: 200 psig. Minimum seat temperature ratings to 120C. Application: on-off operation. Full lug body.
.2 .3 .4 .5
.6 .7 .8
.9
Operators: .1 NPS 2 - 6: Handles capable of locking in any of ten (10) positions - 0 degrees to 90 degrees. Handle and release trigger - ductile iron. Return spring and hinge pin: carbon steel. Latch plate and mounting hardware: cadmium plated carbon steel. Standard coating: black laquer. Designed to comply with MSS SP-67 and API 609.
.10 .11
Compatible with ANSI Class 125/Class 150 flanges.

.12
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Section 23 05 23.05 Page 3 2011-06-10
Construction: .1 Body: Ductile iron. .2 Disc: Ductile iron. .3 Seat: EPDM, Buna-N, Viton or EPT. .4 Shaft: 416 stainless steel. .5 Taper pin: 316 SS. .6 Key: carbon steel. .7 O-Ring: Buna-N. .8 Bushings: Teflon.
2.3 MOUNTING FLANGES
.1
Class 125 cast iron to ANSI B16.1 or Class 150 steel to B16.5 pipe flanges.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.1
Valve and mating flange preparation. .1 Inspect adjacent pipeline, remove rust, scale, welding slag, other foreign material. .2 Ensure that valve seats and pipe flange faces are free of dirt or surface irregularities which may disrupt flange seating and cause external leakage. .3 Install butterfly valves with disc in almost closed position. .4 Inspect valve disc seating surfaces and waterway and eliminate dirt or foreign material.
3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVES
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Do not use gaskets between pipe flanges and valves unless instructed otherwise by valve manufacturer. Verify suitability of valve for application by inspection of identification tag. Mount actuator on to valve prior to installation.
Handle valve with care so as to prevent damage to disc and seat faces. Valves in horizontal pipe lines should be installed with stem in horizontal position to minimize liner and seal wear.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.6

.7
BUTTERFLY VALVES
Section 23 05 23.05 Page 4 2011-06-10
Ensure that valves are centered between bolts before bolts are tightened and then opened and closed to ensure unobstructed disc movement. If interference occurs due, for example to pipe wall thickness, taper bore adjacent piping to remove interference.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 29 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ASME B31.1-[07], Power Piping. ASTM International .1 ASTM A125-[1996(2007)], Standard Specification for Steel Springs, Helical, Heat-Treated. .2 ASTM A307-10, Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength. .3 ASTM A563-[07a], Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. Factory Mutual (FM)
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valves and Fittings Industry (MSS) .1 MSS SP 58-2009, Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials, Design and Manufacture. .2 MSS SP 69-[2003], Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application. .3 MSS SP 89-[2003], Pipe Hangers and Supports Fabrication and Installation Practices.
.2
.3 .4
.5
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and data sheets for hangers and supports and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2
.3
Shop Drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Submit shop drawings for: .1 Bases, hangers and supports. Connections to equipment and structure. .2 .3 Structural assemblies.
Section 23 05 29 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Certificates: .1 Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Provide manufacturer's installation instructions. .1 Departmental Representative will make available [1] copy of systems supplier's installation instructions.
.5
.1
.1
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00 and with manufacturer's written instructions. Delivery and Acceptance Requirements: Deliver materials to site in original factory .1 packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, padding, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
.1
Design Requirements: .1 Construct pipe hanger and support to manufacturer's recommendations utilizing manufacturer's regular production components, parts and assemblies. .2 Base maximum load ratings on allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MSS SP 58. .3 Ensure that supports, guides, anchors do not transmit excessive quantities of heat to building structure. .4 Design hangers and supports to support systems under conditions of operation, allow free expansion and contraction, prevent excessive stresses from being introduced into pipework or connected equipment. .5 Provide for vertical adjustments after erection and during commissioning. Amount of adjustment in accordance with MSS SP 58.
Section 23 05 29 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.2 GENERAL
.1
Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with MSS SP 58 and ANSI B31.1.
Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection purposes.
.2
2.3 PIPE HANGERS

.1 Finishes: .1 Pipe hangers and supports: Black or galvanized or painted with zinc-rich paint after manufacture as noted. .2 Use electro-plating galvanizing process or hot dipped galvanizing process. .3 Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are copper plated. Upper attachment structural: suspension from lower flange of I-Beam: .1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: malleable iron C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew and locknut. .2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: malleable iron beam clamp, eye rod, jaws and extension with carbon steel retaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers. Upper attachment structural: suspension from upper flange of I-Beam: .1 Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip. .2 Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: malleable iron top-of-beam jaw-clamp with hooked rod, spring washer, plain washer and nut. Upper attachment to concrete: .1 Ceiling: carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate, clevis pin and cotters with weldless forged steel eye nut. Ensure eye 6 mm minimum greater than rod diameter. .2 Concrete inserts: wedge shaped body with knockout protector plate to MSS SP 69.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP 58: .1 Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only. Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement .2 of pipework is anticipated. Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP 58: .1 Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel black or galvanized as noted. .2 Attachments for copper piping: copper plated
.6
Section 23 05 29 Page 4 2011-06-10
black steel. .3 Use insulation shields for hot pipework. .7 Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP 69 clevis bolt with nipple spacer and vertical adjustment nuts above and below clevis.
Yoke style pipe roll: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with cast iron roll, to MSS SP 69.
.8
.9
U-bolts: carbon steel to MSS SP 69 with 2 nuts at each end to ASTM A563.
Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steel rod to MSS SP 69.
.10
2.4 RISER CLAMPS
.1
Steel or cast iron pipe: Galvanized or black carbon steel to MSS SP 58, type 42. Copper pipe: carbon steel copper plated to MSS SP 58, type 42. Bolts: to ASTM A307. Nuts: to ASTM A563.
.2
.3 .4
2.5 INSULATION PROTECTION SHIEDS
.1
Insulated cold piping: .1 64 kg/m density insulation plus insulation protection shield to: MSS SP 69, galvanized sheet carbon steel. Length designed for maximum 3 m span. Insulated hot piping: .1 Curved plate 300 mm long, with edges turned up, welded-in centre plate for pipe sizes NPS 12 and over, carbon steel to comply with MSS SP 69.
.2
2.6 EQUIPMENT ANCHOR BOLTS AND TEMPLATES
.1
Provide templates to ensure accurate location of anchor bolts.
2.7 HOUSE-KEEPING PADS
.1
Provide at least 100 mm high concrete housekeeping pads for base-mounted equipment; size pads 75 mm larger all round than equipment; chamfer pad edges. Concrete: to Section 03 30 00.
.2
Section 23 05 29 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.8 OTHER EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
.1
From structural grade steel meeting requirements of Section 05 12 23. Submit structural calculations with shop drawings.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with: Manufacturer's instructions and .1 recommendations. Clamps on riser piping: .1 Support independent of connected horizontal pipework using riser clamps and riser clamp lugs welded to riser. .2 Bolt-tightening torques to industry standards. .3 Steel pipes: install below coupling or shear lugs welded to pipe. .4 Cast iron pipes: install below joint. Clevis plates: .1 Attach to concrete with 4 minimum concrete inserts, one at each corner. Provide supplementary structural steelwork where structural bearings do not exist or where concrete inserts are not in correct locations.
.2
.3
.4
3.3 HANGER SPACING
.1
Plumbing piping: to Canadian Plumbing Code or authority having jurisdiction. Fire protection: to applicable fire code.
Gas and fuel oil piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.8 m.
.2 .3 .4 .5
Copper piping: up to NPS 1/2: every 1.5 m.

Flexible joint roll groove pipe: in accordance with table below for steel, but not less than one hanger at joints.

.6

Within 300 mm of each elbow. Maximum Spacing Steel 2.1 m 2.7 m 3.0 m 3.6 m 3.6 m 4.2 m 5.1 m 5.7 m 6.6 m 6.9 m
Section 23 05 29 Page 6 2011-06-10
Maximum Pipe Size : NPS up to 1-1/4 1-1/2 2 2-1/2 3 4 6 8 10 12 .7
Maximum Spacing Copper 1.8 m 2.4 m 2.7 m 3.0 m 3.0 m 3.6 m
Pipework greater than NPS 12: to MSS SP 69.
3.4 HANGER INSTALLATION
.1
Install hanger so that rod is vertical under operating conditions.
.2 .3
Adjust hangers to equalize load. Support from structural members. Where structural bearing does not exist or inserts are not in suitable locations, provide supplementary structural steel members.
3.5 HORIZONTAL MOVEMENT
.1
Angularity of rod hanger resulting from horizontal movement of pipework from cold to hot position not to exceed 4 degrees from vertical. Where horizontal pipe movement is less than 13 mm, offset pipe hanger and support so that rod hanger is vertical in the hot position.
.2
3.6 FINAL ADJUSTMENT
.1
Adjust hangers and supports: .1 Ensure that rod is vertical under operating conditions. .2 Equalize loads.
.2
Adjustable clevis: Tighten hanger load nut securely to ensure proper .1 hanger performance. .2 Tighten upper nut after adjustment.

.3
Section 23 05 29 Page 7 2011-06-10
C-clamps: .1 Follow manufacturer's recommended written instructions and torque values when tightening C-clamps to bottom flange of beam. Beam clamps: .1 Hammer jaw firmly against underside of beam.
.4
.1
Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS. .2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.
.2
Verification requirements in accordance with Section [01 47 17], include: .1 Materials and resources. .2 Storage and collection of recyclables. .3 Construction waste management. .4 Resource reuse. .5 Recycled content. .6 Local/regional materials. .7 Certified wood. .8 Low-emitting materials.
3.8 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section [01 74 11]. Remove surplus materials, excess materials, .1 rubbish, tools and equipment.
.2
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Section 23 05 48 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of HVAC.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 13-2009, Installation of Sprinkler Systems. National Building Code of Canada (NBC) 2005.
.2
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section [01 33 00].

Provide shop drawingS complete with performance and product data.
.2
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.

Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.4
Section 23 05 48 Page 2 2011-06-10
2.1 GENERAL
.1
Size and shape of bases type and performance of vibration isolation to be as indicated.
2.2 ELASTOMERIC PADS
.1
Type EP1 - neoprene waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 50 durometer; maximum loading 350 kPa. Type EP2 - rubber waffle or ribbed; 9 mm minimum thick; 30 durometer natural rubber; maximum loading 415 kPa. Type EP3 - neoprene-steel-neoprene; 9 mm minimum thick neoprene bonded to 1.71 mm steel plate; 50 durometer neoprene, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers; maximum loading 350 kPa. Type EP4 - rubber-steel-rubber; 9 mm minimum thick rubber bonded to 1.71 mm steel plate; 30 durometer natural rubber, waffle or ribbed; holes sleeved with isolation washers; maximum loading 415 kPa. Acceptable material: Vibro-Acoustics, Vibron, VAW. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
.3
.4
.5
2.3 ELASTOMERIC MOUNTS
.1
Type M1 - colour coded; neoprene in shear; maximum durometer of 60; threaded insert and two bolt-down holes; ribbed top and bottom surfaces. Acceptable material: Vibro-Acoustics, Vibron, VAW. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
2.4 SPRINGS
.1
Design stable springs so that ratio of lateral to axial stiffness is equal to or greater than 1.2 times the ratio of static deflection to working height. Select for 50% travel beyond rated load. Units to be complete with levelling devices. Ratio of height when loaded to diameter of spring to be between 0.8 to 1.0.
.2
.3 .4
Cadmium plate for all installations. Colour code springs.
Section 23 05 48 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.5 SPRING MOUNT
.1
Zinc or cadmium plated hardware; housings coated with rust resistant paint.
.2
Type M2 - stable open spring: support on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad. Type M3 - stable open spring: 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad, bonded under isolator and on isolator top plate; levelling bolt for rigidly mounting to equipment. Type M4 - restrained stable open spring: supported on bonded 6 mm minimum thick ribbed neoprene or rubber friction and acoustic pad; built-in resilient limit stops, removable spacer plates. Type M5 - enclosed spring mounts with snubbers for isolation up to 950 kg maximum. Acceptable material: Vibro-Acoustics, Vibron, VAW. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
.4
.5
.6
2.6 HANGERS
.1
Colour coded springs, rust resistant, painted box type hangers. Arrange to permit hanger box or rod to move through a 30 arc without metal to metal contact.
.2
Type H1 - neoprene - in-shear, moulded with rod isolation bushing which passes through hanger box. Type H2 - stable spring, elastomeric washer, cup with moulded isolation bushing which passes through hanger box. Type H3 - stable spring, elastomeric element, cup with moulded isolation bushing which passes through hanger box. Type H4 - stable spring, elastomeric element with precompression washer and nut. Acceptable material: Vibro-Acoustics, Vibron, VAW. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
.4
.5
.6
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.7 INERTIA BASE
.1
Section 23 05 48 Page 4 2011-06-10
Type B3 - Full depth perimeter structural or formed channels, frames: welded in place reinforcing rods running in both directions; spring mounted, carried by gussetted height-saving brackets welded to frame; and clear housekeeping pads by 50 mm minimum.
Pump bases: "T" shaped, where applicable, to provide support for elbows.
.2
.3
Concrete: to Section 03 30 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install vibration isolation equipment in accordance with manufacturers instructions and adjust mountings to level equipment. Ensure piping, ducting and electrical connections to isolated equipment do not reduce system flexibility and that piping, conduit and ducting passage through walls and floors do not transmit vibrations.
.2
.3
Unless indicated otherwise, support piping connected to isolated equipment with spring mounts or spring hangers with 25 mm minimum static deflection as follows: .1 Up to NPS4: first 3 points of support. NPS5 to NPS8: first 4 points of support. NPS10 and Over: first 6 points of support. .2 First point of support shall have a static deflection of twice deflection of isolated equipment, but not more than 50 mm. Where isolation is bolted to floor use vibration isolation rubber washers.
Block and shim level bases so that ductwork and piping connections can be made to a rigid system at the operating level, before isolator adjustment is made. Ensure that there is no physical contact between isolated equipment and building structure.
.4
.5
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.2 ISOLATION SCHEDULE
Section 23 05 48 Page 5 2011-06-10
Rotating equipment internal to the following equipment shall have isolation provided by the unit manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Applications Handbook (2003), Chapter 47, Table 42.
Unit Na
Description
Floor Span Length 6-9 m 6-9 m 6-9 m 6-9 m
AHU-1 AHU-2 AHU-2 HRV-1
Supply fan Supply fan Return fan Ventilation Supply fan Exhaust fan Ventilation Supply fan Exhaust fan
HRV-1 HRV-2
6-9 m 6-9 m
HRV-2
6-9 m
MECHANICAL IDENTIFICATION Section 23 05 53.01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) CAN/CSA-B149.1-[10], Natural Gas and Propane .1 Installation Code. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-1.60-[97], Interior Alkyd Gloss Enamel. .2 CAN/CGSB-24.3-[92], Identification of Piping Systems. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 13-2010, Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems. .2 NFPA 14-2010, Standard for the Installation of Standpipe and Hose Systems.
.2
.3
1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Product Data: Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product data to include paint colour chips, other products specified in this section. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Samples to include nameplates, labels, tags, lists of proposed legends.
.4
.1
Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Health and Safety: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.2
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

.2

Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 2. .2 Dispose of unused material at official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. .3 Do not dispose of unused material into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER'S EQUIPMENT NAMEPLATES
.1
Metal or plastic laminate nameplate mechanically fastened to each piece of equipment by manufacturer. Lettering and numbers raised or recessed. Information to include, as appropriate: .1 Equipment: manufacturer's name, model, size, serial number, capacity. Motor: voltage, Hz, phase, power factor, duty, .2 frame size.
.2 .3
2.2 SYSTEM NAMEPLATES
.1
Colours: .1 Hazardous: red letters, white background. .2 Elsewhere: black letters, white background (except where required otherwise by applicable codes). Construction: .1 3 mm thick laminated plastic, matte finish, with square corners, letters accurately aligned and machine engraved into core.
.2
.3
Sizes: .1 Conform to following table:

Sizes (mm) No. of Lines 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 2 1 Height of Letters (mm) 3 5 3 8 5 8 12 8 20
Size # mm
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 .2
10 13 13 20 20 20 25 25 35
x x x x x x x x x
50 75 75 100 100 200 125 125 200
Use maximum of 25 letters/numbers per line.
.4
Locations: .1 Terminal cabinets, control panels: use size #5. .2 Equipment in Mechanical Rooms: use size #9.
.5
Identification for PWGSC Preventive Maintenance Support System (PMSS): .1 Use arrangement of Main identifier, Source identifier, Destination identifier. .2 Equipment in Mechanical Room: .1 Main identifier: size #9. Source and Destination identifiers: size .2 #6. .3 Terminal cabinets, control panels: size #5. .3 Equipment elsewhere: sizes as appropriate.
2.3 PIPING SYSTEMS GOVERNED BY CODES
.1
Identification: .1 Natural gas: to CAN/CSA-B149.1. .3 Sprinklers: to NFPA 13. .4 Standpipe and hose systems: to NFPA 14.
2.4 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS
.1
Identify contents by background colour marking, legend; direction of flow by arrows. To CAN/CGSB-24.3 except where specified otherwise.
.2
Legend: Block capitals to sizes and colours listed in .1 CAN/CGSB-24.3. Arrows showing direction of flow: .1 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation less than 75 mm: 100 mm long x 50 mm high. .2 Outside diameter of pipe or insulation 75 mm and
.3

greater: 150 mm long x 50 mm high. .3 Use double-headed arrows where flow is reversible. .4 Extent of background colour marking: .1 To full circumference of pipe or insulation. .2 Length to accommodate pictogram, full length of legend and arrows. Materials for background colour marking, legend, arrows: .1 Pipes and tubing 20 mm and smaller: waterproof and heat-resistant pressure sensitive plastic marker tags. .2 Other pipes: pressure sensitive vinyl with protective overcoating, waterproof contact adhesive undercoating, suitable for ambient of 100% RH and continuous operating temperature of 150 degrees C and intermittent temperature of 200 degrees C. Colours and Legends: .1 Where not listed, obtain direction from Departmental Representative. .2 Colours for legends, arrows: to following table:
.5
.6
Background colour: Yellow Green Red
Legend, arrows: BLACK WHITE WHITE
.3 Background colour marking and legends for piping systems:
Contents Background colour marking ** Add design temperature ++ Add design temperature and pressure Hot water Yellow heating supply Hot water Yellow heating return Domestic Green hot water supply Dom. HWS Green recirculati on Domestic Green cold water supply Waste water Green
Legend
HEATING SUPPLY
HEATING RETURN
DOM. HW SUPPLY
DOM. HW CIRC
DOM. CWS
WASTE WATER

Green Green Green Yellow Yellow Yellow to Codes Red FIRE PROT. WTR STORM SAN SAN. VENT REF. SUCTION REF. LIQUID REF. HOT GAS
Storm water Sanitary Plumbing vent Refrigerati on suction Refrigerati on liquid Refrigerati on hot gas Natural gas Fire protection water Sprinklers Control air tubing Conduit for low voltage control wiring
Red To Section 25 05 54 To Section 25 05 54
SPRINKLER
2.5 IDENTIFICATION DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
.1
50 mm high stencilled letters and directional arrows 150 mm long x 50 mm high.
.2
Colours: back, or co-ordinated with base colour to ensure strong contrast.
2.6 VALVES, CONTROLLERS
.1
Brass tags with 12 mm stamped identification data filled with black paint. Include flow diagrams for each system, of approved size, showing charts and schedules with identification of each tagged item, valve type, service, function, normal position, location of tagged item.
.2
2.7 CONTROLS COMPONENTS IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify all systems, equipment, components, controls, sensors with system nameplates specified in this section. Inscriptions to include function and (where appropriate) fail-safe position.
.2
2.8 LANGUAGE
.1
Identification in English.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 TIMING
.1
Provide identification only after painting specified in Section 09 91 00 has been completed.
3.3 INSTALLATION
.1 Perform work in accordance with CAN/CGSB-24.3 except as specified otherwise.
3.4 NAMEPLATES
.1
Locations: In conspicuous location to facilitate easy .1 reading and identification from operating floor. Standoffs: .1 Provide for nameplates on hot and/or insulated surfaces. Protection: .1 Do not paint, insulate or cover.
.2
.3
3.5 LOCATION OF IDENTIFICATION ON PIPING AND DUCTWORK SYSTEMS
.1
On long straight runs in open areas in boiler rooms, equipment rooms, galleries, tunnels: at not more than 17 m intervals and more frequently if required to ensure that at least one is visible from any one viewpoint in operating areas and walking aisles.
.2 .3
Adjacent to each change in direction.

At least once in each small room through which piping or ductwork passes. On both sides of visual obstruction or where run is difficult to follow.
.4

.5

On both sides of separations such as walls, floors, partitions. Where system is installed in pipe chases, ceiling spaces, galleries, confined spaces, at entry and exit points, and at access openings.
At beginning and end points of each run and at each piece of equipment in run.
.6
.7
.8
At point immediately upstream of major manually operated or automatically controlled valves, and dampers. Where this is not possible, place identification as close as possible, preferably on upstream side. Identification easily and accurately readable from usual operating areas and from access points. .1 Position of identification approximately at right angles to most convenient line of sight, considering operating positions, lighting conditions, risk of physical damage or injury and reduced visibility over time due to dust and dirt.
.9
3.6 VALVES, CONTROLLERS
.1
Valves and operating controllers, except at plumbing fixtures, radiation, or where in plain sight of equipment they serve: Secure tags with non-ferrous chains or closed "S" hooks.
.2
Install one copy of flow diagrams, valve schedules mounted in frame behind non-glare glass where directed by Departmental Representative. Provide one copy (reduced in size if required) in each operating and maintenance manual. Number valves in each system consecutively.
.3
3.7 CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC
Section 23 05 93 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1 TAB means to test, adjust and balance to perform in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents and to do other work as specified in this section.
1.2 QUALIFICATIONS OF TAB PERSONNEL
.1
Names of personnel it is proposed to perform TAB to be submitted to and approved by Engineer within 90 days of award of contract.
.2
Provide documentation confirming qualifications, successful experience.
1.3 PURPOSE OF TAB

.1
Test to verify proper and safe operation, determine actual point of performance, evaluate qualitative and quantitative performance of equipment, systems and controls at design, average and low loads using actual or simulated loads
.2
Adjust and regulate equipment and systems so as to meet specified performance requirements and to achieve specified interaction with other related systems under normal and emergency loads and operating conditions. Balance systems and equipment to regulate flow rates to match load requirements over full operating ranges.
.3
1.4 EXCEPTIONS
.1
TAB of systems and equipment regulated by codes, standards to be to satisfaction of authority having jurisdiction.
1.5 CO-ORDINATION
.1
Schedule time required for TAB (including repairs, re-testing) into project construction and completion schedule so as to ensure completion before acceptance of project.
Do TAB of each system independently and subsequently, where interlocked with other systems, in unison with those systems.
.2
1.6 PRE-TAB REVIEW
.1
Review contract documents before project construction is started and confirm in writing to Engineer adequacy of provisions for TAB and other aspects of design and installation pertinent to success of TAB.

.2
Section 23 05 93 Page 2 2011-06-10
Review specified standards and report to Engineer in writing all proposed procedures which vary from standard.
.3
During construction, co-ordinate location and installation of TAB devices, equipment, accessories, measurement ports and fittings.
1.7 START-UP
.1
Follow start-up procedures as recommended by equipment manufacturer unless specified otherwise. Follow special start-up procedures specified elsewhere in Division 21, 22, 23 and 25.
.2
1.8 OPERATION OF SYSTEMS DURING TAB
.1
Operate systems for length of time required for TAB and as required by Engineer for verification of TAB reports.
1.9 START OF TAB
.1 .2
Notify Engineer 14 days prior to start of TAB. Start TAB when building is essentially completed, including: Installation of ceilings, doors, windows, other .1 construction affecting TAB. .2 Application of weatherstripping, sealing, caulking. .3 All pressure, leakage, other tests specified elsewhere in Division 23. .4 All provisions for TAB installed and operational. Start-up, verification for proper, normal and safe operation of mechanical and associated electrical and control systems affecting TAB including but not limited to: .1 Proper thermal overload protection in place for electrical equipment. .2 Air systems: .1 Filters in place, clean. .2 Duct systems clean. .3 Ducts, air shafts, ceiling plenums are airtight to within specified tolerances. .4 Correct fan rotation. .5 Fire, smoke, volume control dampers installed and open. .6 Coil fins combed, clean. .7 Access doors, installed, closed. Outlets installed, volume control dampers .8 open.
.3

.3
Section 23 05 93 Page 3 2011-06-10
Liquid systems: .1 Flushed, filled, vented. .2 Correct pump rotation. .3 Strainers in place, baskets clean. .4 Isolating and balancing valves installed, open. .5 Calibrated balancing valves installed, at factory settings. .6 Chemical treatment systems complete, operational.
1.10 APPLICATION TOLERANCES
.1
Do TAB to following tolerances of design values: .1 HVAC systems: plus 5 %, minus5 %. .2 Hydronic systems: plus or minus 10 %.
1.11 ACCURACY TOLERANCES
.1
Measured values to be accurate to within plus or minus 2 % of actual values.
1.12 INSTRUMENTS
.1
Prior to TAB, submit to Engineer list of instruments to be used together with serial numbers. Calibrate in accordance with requirements of most stringent of referenced standard for either applicable system or HVAC system. Calibrate within 3 months prior to commencement of TAB. Provide certificate of calibration to Engineer.
.2
.3
1.13 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit, prior to commencement of TAB: .1 Proposed methodology and procedures for performing TAB if different from referenced standard
1.14 PRELIMINARY TAB REPORT
.1
Submit for checking and approval of Engineer, prior to submission of formal TAB report, sample of rough TAB sheets. Include: .1 Details of instruments used. .2 Details of TAB procedures employed. .3 Calculations procedures. .4 Summaries.
1.15 TAB REPORT

.1 TAB report to show results in SI units and to include: .1 Project record drawings. .2 System schematics.

.2
Section 23 05 93 Page 4 2011-06-10
Submit 5 copies of TAB Report to Engineer for verification and approval, in English in D-ring binders, complete with index tabs.
1.16 VERIFICATION
.1 .2
Reported results subject to verification by Engineer. Provide manpower and instrumentation to verify up to 15 % of reported results. Number and location of verified results to be at discretion of Engineer. Bear costs to repeat TAB as required to satisfaction of Engineer.
.3
.4
1.17 SETTINGS
.1
After TAB is completed to satisfaction of Engineer, replace drive guards, close access doors, lock devices in set positions, ensure sensors are at required settings. Permanently mark settings to allow restoration at any time during life of facility. Markings not to be eradicated or covered in any way.
.2
1.18 COMPLETION OF TAB
.1
TAB to be considered complete when final TAB Report received and approved by Engineer.
1.19 AIR SYSTEMS
.1
Standard: TAB to be to most stringent of this section AABC or NEBB. Do TAB of systems, equipment, components, controls specified in Division 25. Qualifications: personnel performing TAB to be qualified to standards of AABC or NEBB.
Measurements: to include, but not limited to, following as appropriate for systems, equipment, components, controls: air velocity, static pressure, flow rate, pressure drop (or loss), temperatures (dry bulb, wet bulb, dewpoint), duct cross-sectional area, RPM, electrical power, voltage, noise, vibration. Locations of equipment measurements: To include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: .1 Inlet and outlet of dampers, filter, coil, humidifier, fan, other equipment causing changes in conditions. .2 At controllers, controlled device.
.2
.3
.4
.5

.6
Section 23 05 93 Page 5 2011-06-10
Locations of systems measurements to include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: Main ducts, main branch, sub-branch, run-out (or grille, register or diffuser).
1.20 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1
Definitions: for purposes of this section, to include low pressure hot water heating, chilled water, condenser water, glycol systems.
.2
Standard: TAB to be to most stringent of this section, AABC or NEBB. Do TAB of systems, equipment, components, controls specified in Division 25. Qualifications: personnel performing TAB to be qualified to standards of AABC or NEBB.
Measurements: to include, but not limited to, following as appropriate for systems, equipment, components, controls: Flow rate, static pressure, pressure drop (or loss), temperature, specific gravity, density, RPM, electrical power, voltage, noise, vibration.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Locations of equipment measurement: To include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: .1 Inlet and outlet of heat exchangers (primary and secondary sides), boiler, chiller, coil, humidifier, cooling tower, condenser, pump, PRV, control valve, other equipment causing changes in conditions. .2 At controllers, controlled device.
Locations of systems measurements to include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: Supply and return of primary and secondary loops (main, main branch, branch, sub-branch of all hydronic systems, inlet connection of make-up water.
.7
1.21 DOMESTIC HWC SYSTEMS
.1 .2
Meet requirements as specified for hydronic systems. Locations of equipment measurements: To include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: Inlet and outlet of heaters, tank, pump, circulator, at controllers, controlled device. Locations of systems measurements to include, but not be limited to, following as appropriate: main, main branch, branch, sub-branch.
.3
Section 23 05 93 Page 6 2011-06-10
1.22 OTHER TAB REQUIREMENTS
.1
General requirements applicable to work specified this paragraph: .1 Qualifications of TAB personnel: as for air systems specified this section. Quality assurance: as for air systems specified .2 this section.
.2
Living Unit Air Flow Control: .1 Test operation and record flow of all possible conditions for Living Unit airflow control including: .1 exhaust only from each area (6 total). .2 supply only to each area (6 total). .2 Record central system effect during each situation. .3 Record effect on other systems during each situation. Fire Damper Testing. .1 At each fire damper location, remove fusible link, allow shutter to close without intervention. Record results on TAB report. At completion of test, restore each shutter to open position and reinstall link. Report non-closing dampers to Mechanical Contractor and Engineer.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PRESSURE TESTING OF DUCTED AIR SYSTEMS
Section 23 05 94 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
.1
Ducts over 5 m in length, forming part of a supply, return or exhaust ductwork system directly or indirectly connected to air handling equipment to be pressure tested for leaks.
1.2 TIMING
.1
Ducts to be tested before installation of insulation or any other form of concealments.
.2 .3
Test after seals have cured. Test when ambient temperature will not affect effectiveness of seals, gaskets, etc.
1.3 EXCLUSIONS
.1
Flexible connections to VAV boxes.
1.4 REFERENCES
.1
SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, [1985].
1.5 TEST PROCEDURES
.1
Maximum lengths of ducts to be tested to be consistent with capacity of test equipment.
.2
Section of duct to be tested to include: .1 Fittings, branch ducts, tap-ins.

Repeat tests until specified pressures are attained. Bear costs for repairs and repetition to tests. Base partial system leakage calculations on Reference Standard. Seal leaks that can be heard or felt, regardless of their contribution to total leakage.
.3
.4
.5
1.6 TESTING AGENCY
.1
Installing Contractor.
1.7 VERIFICATION
.1
Engineer to witness tests and to verify reported results. To be certified by the same TAB agency approved by Engineer to undertake TAB on this project.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.8 TEST INSTRUMENTS
.1 .2
Section 23 05 94 Page 2 2011-06-10
Testing agency to provide instruments for tests. Test apparatus to include: .1 Fan capable of producing required static pressure. .2 Duct section with calibrated orifice plate mounted and accurately located pressure taps. Flow measuring instrument compatible with the .3 orifice plate. .4 Calibration curves for orifice plates used. .5 Flexible duct for connecting to ductwork under test. .6 Smoke bombs for visual inspections. Test apparatus to be accurate to within +/- 2 % of flow rate and pressure. Submit details of test instruments to be used to Engineer at least one month before anticipated start date.
Test instruments to be calibrated and certificate of calibration deposited with Engineer no more than 7 days before start of tests.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Instruments to be re-calibrated every six months thereafter.
1.9 SYSTEM LEAKAGE TOLERANCES
.1
System leakage tolerances specified herein are stated as a percentage of total flow rate handled by the system. Therefore, when testing sections of ductwork this acceptable leakage shall be pro-rated to entire system. Leakage for sections of duct systems shall not exceed the total allowable leakage.
.2
.3
Leakage tests on following systems not to exceed specified leakage rates. .1 Small duct systems up to 250 Pa: Leakage 2 %. .2 Large low pressure duct systems up to 500 Pa: Leakage 2 %. Evaluation of test results to use surface area of duct and pressure in duct as basic parameters.
1.10 REPORT FORMS
.1
Submit proposed report form and test report format to Engineer for approval at least one month before proposed date of first series of tests. Do not start tests until approval received in writing from Engineer.
1.11 PRESSURE TEST REPORTS
.1
Prepare report of results and submit to the Engineer within 48 hours of completion of tests. Include:
Section 23 05 94 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1 Schematic of entire system. .2 Schematic of section under test showing test site. .3 Required and achieved static pressures. .4 Orifice differential pressure at test sites. .5 Permissible and actual leakage flow rate (L/s) for test sites. .6 Witnessed certification of results. .2 Include test reports in final TAB report.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
THERMAL INSULATION FOR DUCTING
Section 23 07 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Definitions: .1 For purposes of this section: .1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services and equipment in suspended ceilings and non-accessible chases and furred-in spaces. .2 "EXPOSED" - means "not concealed" as previously defined. .3 Insulation systems - insulation material, fasteners, jackets, and other accessories. .2 TIAC Codes: .1 CRD: Code Round Ductwork, .2 CRF: Code Rectangular Finish. Reference Standards: .1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE/IES 90.1-2010, SI; Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings. ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM B209M-[07], Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate (Metric). .2 ASTM C335-10e1, Standard Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Pipe Insulation. .3 ASTM C411-[05], Standard Test Method for Hot-Surface Performance of High-Temperature Thermal Insulation. .4 ASTM C449-07, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber-Hydraulic- Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. .5 ASTM C921-10, Standard Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation.
.2
.2
.3
Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CGSB 51-GP-52Ma-[89], Vapour Barrier, Jacket and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation. Manufacturer's Trade Associations. Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S102-10, Standard Method of Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
.4
.5
Section 23 07 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
Materials and Assemblies. .2 CAN/ULC-S701-[05], Standard for Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering.
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for duct insulation, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .1 Description of equipment giving manufacturer's name, type, model, year and capacity. .2 Details of operation, servicing and maintenance. .3 Recommended spare parts list. Shop Drawings: .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. Samples: .1 Submit for approval: complete assembly of each type of insulation system, insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed. .2 Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board. .3 Affix typewritten label beneath sample indicating service. Manufacturers' Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Installation instructions to include procedures to be used, installation standards to be achieved.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.2
.1 Installer: specialist in performing work of this section, and have at least 3 years successful experience in this size and type of project.
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.

.2
Section 23 07 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Protect from weather and construction traffic. Protect against damage from any source. Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, paddling, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place packaging materials in designated containers. Place excess or unused insulation and insulation accessory materials in designated containers.
.3 .4 .5
.6
.7 .8
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE AND SMOKE.1 RATING
In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102: .1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25. .2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
2.2 INSULATION
.1 Mineral fibre: as specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool. Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335. TIAC Code C-1: Rigid mineral fibre board to ASTM C612, with factory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in PART 3 of this Section). TIAC Code C-2: Mineral fibre blanket to ASTM C553 faced with factory applied vapour retarder jacket to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma (as scheduled in PART 3 of this section). .1 Mineral fibre: to ASTM C553. .2 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma. .3 Maximum "k" factor: to ASTM C553.
Acceptable material: Knauf, Owens Corning, Johns Manville, Certain Teed. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 23 07 13 Page 4 2011-06-10
2.4 JACKETS
.1
Canvas: .1 220 gm/m cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921. Lagging adhesive: compatible with insulation.
.2
.3
Aluminum: .1 To ASTM B209 as scheduled in PART 3 of this section. .2 Thickness: 0.50 mm sheet. .3 Finish: Stucco embossed. .4 Jacket banding and mechanical seals: 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel. .1 Stainless steel: .5 Type: 304. .6 Thickness: 0.25 mm sheet. .7 Finish: Stucco embossed. .8 Jacket banding and mechanical seals: 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.
2.5 ACCESSORIES
.1
Vapour retarder lap adhesive: .1 Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation. Indoor Vapour Retarder Finish: .1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation. Insulating Cement: hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTM C449. ULC Listed Canvas Jacket: .1 220 gm/m cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921. Outdoor Vapour Retarder Mastic: .1 Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation. .2 Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m. Tape: self-adhesive, aluminum, reinforced, 50 mm wide minimum. Contact adhesive: quick-setting Canvas adhesive: washable. Tie wire: 1.5 mm stainless steel.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7 .8 .9

.10
Section 23 07 13 Page 5 2011-06-10
Banding: 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick stainless steel.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
.1 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .2
Pressure test ductwork systems complete, witness and certify. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, free from foreign material.
3.3 INSTALLATION .1
.2
Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as indicated. Use 2 layers with staggered joints when required nominal thickness exceeds 75 mm. Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes. .1 Ensure hangers, and supports are outside vapour retarder jacket. Hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29. .1 Apply high compressive strength insulation where insulation may be compressed by weight of ductwork.
Fasteners: install at 300 mm on centre in horizontal and vertical directions, minimum 2 rows each side.
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.4 DUCTWORK INSULATION SCHEDULE
.1
Insulation types and thicknesses: conform to following table:

Duct Configuration Rectangular concealed Rectangular exposed Round concealed Round exposed Rectangular concealed Rectangular exposed Round concealed TIAC Code C-2 C-1 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-1 C-2 Vapour Retarder Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Thickness (mm) 38 (see Note 1) 25 38 (see Note 1) 38 (see Note 1) 50 (see Note 1) 38 50 (see Note 1)
Application Supply Air (S/A) (See Note 2)
Exhaust Air (E/A) (See Note 3)

Outside Air (O/A)

Round exposed Rectangular concealed Rectangular exposed Round concealed Round exposed Rectangular concealed Rectangular exposed Round concealed Round exposed Rectangular concealed Rectangular exposed Round concealed Round exposed C-2 C-2 C-1 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-1 C-2 C-2 C-2 C-1 C-2 C-2 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
Section 23 07 13 Page 6 2011-06-10

50 (see Note 1) 75 (see Note 1) 50 75 (see Note 1) 75 (see Note 1) 50 (see Note 1) 38 50 (see Note 1) 50 (see Note 1) 50 (see Note 1) 38 50 (see Note 1) 50 (see Note 1)
Fresh air (F/A) (See Note 4)
Exhaust Discharge (E/D)
Notes: 1. Maximum installed thickness compression shall be 25% Supply air ducts exposed in the space being served do not require insulation cover. Exhaust air ducting shall be insulated continuously from the exhaust fan discharge or 1m upstream of final automatic isolation damper to the building terminus. Duct requires no insulation otherwise.
Insulate F/A duct as specified for S/A downstream from duct heating coil.
2.
3.
4.
3.5 CLEANING
.1
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. .1 Remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
.2
THERMAL INSULATION FOR PIPING
Section 23 07 19 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ASHRAE Standard 90.1 Energy Efficient Design of New Buildings Except Low Rise Residential Buildings.
.2
.3
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM B209M 01, Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum Alloy Sheet and Plate. .2 ASTM C335 95, Test Method for Steady State Heat Transfer Properties of Horizontal Pipe Insulation. .3 ASTM C411 97, Test Method for Hot Surface Performance of High Temperature Thermal Insulation. .4 ASTM C449/C449M 00, Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Hydraulic Setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing Cement. .5 ASTM C921 89(1996), Practice for Determining the Properties of Jacketing Materials for Thermal Insulation. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) CGSB 51 GP 52Ma 89, Vapour Barrier, Jacket .1 and Facing Material for Pipe, Duct and Equipment Thermal Insulation. .2 CAN/CGSB 51.53 95, Poly (Vinyl Chloride) Jacketting Sheet, for Insulated Pipes, Vessels and Round Ducts Manufacturer's Trade Associations .1 Thermal Insulation Association of Canada (TIAC): National Insulation Standards (Revised 1999). Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC S102 M88(R2000), Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies. .2 CAN/ULC S701 01, Thermal Insulation, Polystyrene, Boards and Pipe Covering. .3 CAN/ULC S702 1997, Thermal Insulation, Mineral Fibre, for Buildings.
.4
.5
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.2 DEFINITIONS
Section 23 07 19 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
For purposes of this section: .1 "CONCEALED" - insulated mechanical services in suspended ceilings, non-accessible chases, furred-in spaces and interstitial space above cell areas below roof at each range. .2 "EXPOSED" - will mean "not concealed" as defined herein.
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit for approval manufacturer's catalogue literature related to installation, fabrication for pipe, fittings, valves and jointing recommendations.
.2
.3
Samples: .1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Submit for approval: complete assembly of each type of insulation system, insulation, coating, and adhesive proposed. Mount sample on 12 mm plywood board. Affix typewritten label beneath sample indicating service.
.2
.5
Manufacturers' Instructions: .1
Submit manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.
.2
Installation instructions to include procedures to be used, installation standards to be achieved.
.1 Installer: specialist in performing work of this section, and have at least 3 years successful experience in this size and type of project.
Section 23 07 19 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Protect from weather and construction traffic. Protect against damage from any source. Store at temperatures and conditions required by manufacturer.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, paddling, and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3 .4 .5
.6
.7 .8
Place packaging materials in designated containers. Place excess or unused insulation and insulation accessory materials in designated containers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE AND SMOKE.1 RATING
In accordance with CAN/ULC-S102: .1 Maximum flame spread rating: 25. .2 Maximum smoke developed rating: 50.
2.2 INSULATION
.1 Mineral fibre specified includes glass fibre, rock wool, slag wool. Thermal conductivity ("k" factor) not to exceed specified values at 24C mean temperature when tested in accordance with ASTM C335. TIAC Code A-1: Rigid moulded mineral fibre without factory applied vapour retarder jacket. .1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702. .2 Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC-S702. TIAC Code A-3: Rigid moulded mineral fibre with factory applied vapour retarder jacket. .1 Mineral fibre: to CAN/ULC-S702. .2 .3 Jacket: to CGSB 51-GP-52Ma. Maximum "k" factor: to CAN/ULC-S702.
.2
.3
.4

.5
Section 23 07 19 Page 4 2011-06-10
TIAC Code A-6: Flexible unicellular tubular elastomer. .1 Insulation: to ASTM C534.. .2 .3 Maximum "k" factor: 0.27.
.6
To be certified by manufacturer to be free of potential stress corrosion cracking corrodants. Acceptable Material: Knauf, Owens Corning, Johns Manville, Certain Teed, Armstrong. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.3 INSULATION SECUREMENT
.1
Tape: Self-adhesive, aluminum, plain reinforced, 50 mm wide minimum. Contact adhesive: Quick setting. Canvas adhesive: Washable. Tie wire: 1.5 mm diameter stainless steel. Bands: Stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick.
.2 .3 .4 .5
2.4 CEMENT
.1 Thermal insulating and finishing cement: .1 Hydraulic setting on mineral wool, to ASTM C449/C449M.
2.5 VAPOUR RETARDER LAP ADHESIVE
.1
Water based, fire retardant type, compatible with insulation.
2.6 INDOOR VAROUR.1 RETARDER FINISH
2.7 OUTDOOR VAPOUR RETARDER FINISH
.1
Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation. Reinforcing fabric: Fibrous glass, untreated 305 g/m2.
.2
Section 23 07 19 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.8 JACKETS
.1 Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): .1 One-piece moulded type and sheet to CAN/CGSB-51.53 with pre-formed shapes as required. .2 Colour: white. .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 Minimum service temperatures: -20C. Maximum service temperature: 65C.
Moisture vapour transmission: 0.02 perm.
Thickness: 0.5 mm. Fastenings: .1 Use solvent weld adhesive compatible with insulation to seal laps and joints. .2 Tacks.
.2
Canvas: .1
220 gm/m cotton, plain weave, treated with dilute fire retardant lagging adhesive to ASTM C921.
.2
Lagging adhesive: Compatible with insulation.
.3
Aluminum: .1 .2 .3 .4
To ASTM B209. Thickness: 0.50 mm sheet. Finish: Stucco embossed. Joining: Longitudinal and circumferential slip joints with 50 mm laps. Fittings: 0.5 mm thick die-shaped fitting covers with factory-attached protective liner. Metal jacket banding and mechanical seals: stainless steel, 19 mm wide, 0.5 mm thick at 300 mm spacing.
.5
.6
2.9 WEATHERPROOF CAULKING FOR JACKETS INSTALLED OUTDOORS
.1
Caulking to: Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealing.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 3 EXECUTION
Section 23 07 19 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
.1 3.2 PRE-INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS .2
Pressure test of piping systems complete, witness and certify. Ensure surfaces are clean, dry, free from foreign material.
3.3 INSTALLATION .1
.2
Install in accordance with TIAC National Standards.
Apply materials in accordance with manufacturers instructions and this specification. Use 2 layers with staggered joints when required nominal thickness exceeds 75 mm. Maintain uninterrupted continuity and integrity of vapour retarder jacket and finishes. Ensure hangers, and supports are outside vapour .1 retarder jacket. Hangers and supports in accordance with Section 23 05 29. .1 Apply high compressive strength insulation where insulation may be compressed by weight of ductwork.
.3
.4
.5
3.4 INSTALLATION .1 OF ELASTOMERIC INSULATION

.2
Insulation to remain dry at all times. Overlaps to manufacturers instructions. Ensure tight joints. Provide vapour retarder as recommended by manufacturer.
3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION SCHEDULES
.1
Includes valves, valve bonnets, strainers, flanges and fittings unless otherwise specified.
.2
TIAC Code: A-1. .1 Securements: SS Wire Bands Tape at 300 mm oc. .2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive.
Section 23 07 19 Page 7 2011-06-10
.3 .3
Installation: TIAC Code 1501-H.
TIAC Code: A-3. .1 Securements: SS Wire at 300 mm oc. .2 Seals: VR lap seal adhesive, VR lagging adhesive. .3 Installation: TIAC Code: 1501-C. TIAC Code: A-6. .1 Insulation securements: as listed by Manufacturer.. .2 Seals: lap seal adhesive, lagging adhesive. Thickness of insulation to be as listed in following table. .1 Run-outs to individual units and equipment not exceeding 4000 mm long. .2 Do not insulate exposed runouts to plumbing fixtures, chrome plated piping, valves, fittings.
.4
.5
3.5 CLEANING
.1
.2
Applic ation
Temp C
TIAC code
Hot Water Heatin g Refrig erant liquid suctio n
60 94
A-1
Pipe sizes (NPS) and insulation thickness (mm) Run to 8 & 1 1/4 2 1/2 5 out 1 to 2 to 4 to over 6 25 38 38 38 38 38
belo w 4
A-6
25
25
38
38
38
38
Section 23 07 19 Page 8 2011-06-10
1.
Finishes: .1 Exposed indoors: Canvas, Aluminum or PVC jacket except that piping located in cell area Y-chases shall be finished with canvas or aluminum only. PVC jacket shall not be used. Extra coats of lagging coating shall be provided in these areas to provide a durable surface with no open weave exposed in canvas. .2 Exposed in mechanical rooms: Canvas, Aluminum or PVC jacket. .3 Use vapour retarder jacket on TIAC code A-3 insulation compatible with insulation. .4 Outdoors: Water-proof Aluminum jacket. .5 .6
Finish attachments: SS bands, at 150 mm oc. Seals: wing. Installation: To appropriate TIAC code CRF/1 through CPF/5.
CLEANING AND START-UP OF MECHANICAL PIPING SYSTEMS
Section 23 08 02 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal. Section 23 25 00 - HVAC Water Treatment Systems. Section 23 05 93 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.
.2 .3
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials ASTM E202-10, Standard Test Methods for Analysis .1 of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols.
.1

Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANING SOLUTIONS
.1
Low-foaming detergent: concentration as recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING HYDRONIC AND STEAM SYSTEMS
.1
Timing .1 Systems to be operational, hydrostatically tested and with safety devices functional, before cleaning is carried out. Cleaning Agency: .1 Retain qualified water treatment specialist to perform system cleaning.
.2

.3
Section 23 08 02 Page 2 2011-06-10
Install instrumentation such as flow meters, orifice plates, pitot tubes, flow metering valves only after cleaning is certified as complete by water treatment specialist. Cleaning procedures: .1 Provide detailed report outlining proposed cleaning procedures at least 4 weeks prior to proposed starting date. Report to include: .1 Cleaning procedures, flow rates, elapsed time. .2 Chemicals and concentrations to be used. .3 Inhibitors and concentrations. .4 Specific requirements for completion of work. .5 Special precautions for protecting piping system materials and components. .6 Complete analysis of water to be used to ensure water will not damage systems or equipment. Conditions at time of cleaning of systems .1 Systems to be free from construction debris, dirt and other foreign material. .2 Control valves to be operational, fully open to ensure that terminal units can be cleaned properly. .3 Strainers to be clean prior to initial fill. .4 Install temporary filters on pumps not equipped with permanent filters. .5 Install pressure gauges on strainers to detect plugging. Report on Completion of Cleaning .1 When cleaning is completed, submit report, complete with certificate of compliance with specifications of cleaning component supplier. Hydronic Systems: .1 Fill system with water, ensure air is vented from system. .2 Fill expansion tanks 1/3 to 1/2 full, charge system with compressed air to at least 35 kPa (does not apply to diaphragm type expansion tanks). .3 Use water metre to record volume of water in system to +/- 0.5%. .4 Add chemicals under direct supervision of chemical treatment supplier. .5 Closed loop systems: circulate system cleaner at 60 C for at least 36 h. Drain as quickly as possible. Refill with water and inhibitors. Test concentrations and adjust to recommended levels. .6 Flush velocity in system mains and branches so as to ensure removal of debris. System pumps may be used for circulating cleaning solution provided that velocities are adequate. .7 Add chemical solution to system.
.4
.5
.6
.7

.8
Section 23 08 02 Page 3 2011-06-10
Glycol Systems: .1 In addition to procedures specified above perform procedures specified herein. .2 Test to prove concentration will prevent freezing to minus 40 C Test inhibitor strength and include in procedural report. Refer to ASTM E202.
3.2 START-UP OF HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1
After cleaning is completed and system is filled: .1 Establish circulation and expansion tank level, set pressure controls. .2 Ensure air is removed. .3 Check pumps to be free from air, debris, possibility of cavitation when system is at design temperature. .4 Dismantle system pumps used for cleaning, inspect, replace worn parts, install new gaskets and new set of seals. .5 Clean out strainers repeatedly until system is clean. .6 Commission water treatment systems as specified in Section [23 25 00]. .7 Check water level in expansion tank with cold water with circulating pumps OFF and again with pumps ON. .8 Repeat with water at design temperature. Check pressurization to ensure proper operation .9 and to prevent water hammer, flashing, cavitation. Eliminate water hammer and other noises. .10 Bring system up to design temperature and pressure slowly over an 8 hour period. .11 Perform TAB as specified in Section [23 05 93]. .12 Adjust pipe supports, hangers, springs as necessary. .13 Monitor pipe movement, performance of expansion joints, loops, guides, anchors. .14 Re-tighten bolts, etc. using torque wrench, to compensate for heat-caused relaxation. Repeat several times during commissioning. .15 Check operation of drain valves. .16 Adjust valve stem packings as systems settle down. .17 Fully open all balancing valves (except those that are factory-set). .18 Check operation of over-temperature protection devices on circulating pumps. .19 Adjust alignment of piping at pumps to ensure flexibility, adequacy of pipe movement, absence of noise or vibration transmission.
FACILITY NATURAL GAS PIPING
Section 23 11 23 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-Up of Mechanical Piping Systems. Section 23 05 01 - Installation of Pipework. Section 23 08 01 - Performance Verification of Mechanical Piping Systems.
.3 .4
.5 .6
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A47/A47M-99(R2009), Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .2 ASTM A53/A53M-[07], Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-B149.1-[10], Natural Gas Installation Code.
.2
1.3 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature following: valves.
.2
.1
.1
.2

.3
Section 23 11 23 Page 2 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
.1
Steel pipe: to ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, seamless or ERW as follows: .1 NPS 1/2 to 2, screwed. .2 NPS2 1/2 and over, plain end.
.2
Copper tube: to ASTM B75M.
2.2 JOINTING MATERIAL
.1 .2
Screwed fittings: approved thread sealer compound. Welded fittings: to CSA W47.1.
2.3 FITTINGS
.1
Steel pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or welded: Malleable iron: screwed, banded, Class 150. .1 .2 Steel pipe flanges and flanged fittings: to ASME B16.5. .3 Welding: butt-welding fittings. .4 Unions: malleable iron, brass to iron, ground seat, to ASTM A47/A47M. .5 Bolts and nuts: to ASME B18.2.1. .6 Nipples: schedule 40, to ASTM A53/A53M.
Copper pipe fittings, screwed, flanged or soldered: .1 Cast copper fittings: to ASME B16.18. .2 Wrought copper fittings: to ASME B16.22.
.2
2.4 VALVES PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Provincial Code approved, lubricated ball type.
3.1 PIPING
.1
Install in accordance with Section 23 05 01, supplemented as specified herein. Install in accordance with applicable Provincial/Territorial Codes. Install in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1. Install drip points: .1 At low points in piping system. .2 At connections to equipment.
.2
.3 .4
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.2 VALVES
.1
Section 23 11 23 Page 3 2011-06-10
Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless otherwise approved by Engineer.
.2
Install valves at branch take-offs to isolate pieces of equipment, and as indicated.
.1
Test system in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 PURGING
.1
Purge after pressure test in accordance with CAN/CSA B149.1.
3.5 PRE-START-UP INSPECTIONS
.1
Check vents from regulators, control valves, terminate outside building in approved location, protected against blockage, damage. Check gas trains, entire installation is approved by authority having jurisdiction.
.2
3.6 CLEANING AND START-UP
.1
In accordance with requirements of CAN/CSA B149.1.
3.7 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (P.V.)
.1
Refer to Section 23 05 01 Performance Verification Mechanical Piping System.
HYDRONIC SYSTEMS: COPPER
Section 23 21 13.01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section Includes: .1 Copper piping valves and fittings for hydronic systems.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/American Welding Society (AWS) .1 ANSI/AWS A5.8/A5.8M-[04], Specification Filler Metals for Brazing and Bronze Welding.
.2
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME B16.4-[2006], Gray Iron Threaded Fittings. .2 ANSI/ASME B16.15-2006, Cast Bronze Threaded Fittings. .3 ANSI B16.18-2001(R2005), Cast Copper Alloy, Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. .4 ANSI/ASME B16.22-2001(R2005), Wrought Copper and Copper-Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings. American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM B32-[08], Standard Specification for Solder Metal. .2 ASTM B61-[08], Standard Specification for Steam or Valve Bronze Castings. .3 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. .4 ASTM B88M-[05], Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube [Metric]. .5 ASTM E202-09, Standard Test Methods for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) .1 MSS SP-67-[2002a], Butterfly Valves. .2 MSS SP-70-[2006], Gray Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS SP-71-[2005], Gray Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .4 MSS SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. .5 MSS SP-85-[2002], Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations.
.3
.4
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Section 23 21 13.01 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1 Submit two copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Shop drawings: submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate on manufacturers catalogue literature the following: VALVES. .3 Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
Health and Safety: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.0].
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard and plastic packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site management program.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBING
.1
Type L hard drawn copper tubing: to ASTM B88M.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.2 FITTINGS
.1 .2
Section 23 21 13.01 Page 3 2011-06-10
Cast bronze threaded fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.15.

Wrought copper and copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings: to ANSI/ASME B16.22.
.3
Cast copper alloy solder joint pressure fittings: to ANSI B16.18, minimum 64% recycled content.
2.3 FLANGES
.1
Brass or bronze: threaded.
2.4 JOINTS
.1 .2 .3
Solder, tin-antimony, 95:5: to ASTM B32, lead free. Silver solder BCUP: to ANSI/AWS A5.8. Brazing: as indicated.
2.5 VALVES
.1 Connections: .1 NPS 2 and smaller: threaded. .2 NPS 2 1/2 and larger. Balancing, for TAB: All sizes: circuit balancing valves, as specified .1 in Section [23 05 23.01]. Drain valves: ball, as specified in Section [23 05 23.01]. Swing check valves: .1 NPS 2 and under: .1 Class 125, swing, with composition disc, as specified in Section [23 05 23.01]. Ball valves: .1 NPS 2 and under: as specified Section [23 05 23.01].
.2
.3
.4
.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 PIPING INSTALLATION
.1
Connect to equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instruction unless otherwise indicated.
.2
Install concealed pipes close to building structure to keep furring space to minimum. Install to conserve
Section 23 21 13.01 Page 4 2011-06-10
headroom and space. Run exposed piping parallel to walls. Group piping where ever practical. .3 Slope piping in direction of drainage and for positive venting.
Use eccentric reducers at pipe size change installed to provide positive drainage or positive venting. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access for maintenance of equipment, valves and fittings.
.4
.5
.6
Assemble piping using fittings manufactured to ANSI standards.
3.3 VALVE INSTALLATION
.1
Install rising stem valves in upright position with stem above horizontal. Install ball valves at branch take-offs and to isolate each piece of equipment, and as indicated. Install swing check valves in horizontal lines on discharge of pumps and as indicated.
.2
.3
3.4 CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES
.1 .2
Install flow balancing valves as indicated. Set handwheel after installation and TAB is complete.
3.5 FLUSHING AND CLEANING
.1
Flush and clean in presence of Departmental Representative. Flush after pressure test for a minimum of 4h. Fill with solution of water and non-foaming, phosphate-free detergent 3% solution by weight. Circulate for minimum of 8h.
Refill system with clean water. Circulate for at least 4h. Clean out strainer screens/baskets regularly. Then drain.
.2 .3
.4
.5
Refill system with clean water. Circulate for at least 2h. Clean out strainer screens/baskets regularly. Then drain. Drainage to include drain valves, dirt pockets, strainers, low points in system.
.6

.7
Section 23 21 13.01 Page 5 2011-06-10
Re-install strainer screens/baskets only after obtaining Departmental Representative's approval.
3.6 FILLING OF SYSTEM
.1
Refill system with clean water premixed with water treatment and glycol as specified.
.1
Testing: .1 Test system in accordance with Section 21 05 02. .2 For glycol systems, retest glycol to ASTM E202, inhibited, for use in building system after cleaning. Repair leaking joints, fittings or valves.
.2
Balancing: .1 Balance water systems to within plus or minus 5% of design output. .2 Refer to Section 21 05 02 for applicable procedures. Glycol Charging: .1 Provide mixing tank and positive displacement pump for glycol charging. .2 Retest for concentration to ASTM E202 after cleaning. .3 Provide report to Engineer.
.3
3.8 CLEANING
.1 .2
HYDRONIC SYSTEMS STEEL
Section 23 21 13.02 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Materials and installation for steel piping, valves and fittings for hydronic systems. .2 Sustainable requirements for construction and verification.
.2
Related Sections. .1 Section 21 05 01 - Common Work Results for Mechanical. .2 Section 23 05 17 - Pipe Welding. .3 Section 23 08 02 - Cleaning and Start-up of Mechanical Piping Systems. .4 Section 23 05 01 - Installation of Pipework. .5 Section 23 05 23.01 - Valves - Bronze. .6 Section 23 05 23.02 - Valves - Cast Iron. .7 Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC. .8 Section 23 08 01 - Performance Verification of Mechanical Piping.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME). .1 ASME B16.1-[05] Gray Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. .2 ASME B16.3-2006, Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings. .3 ASME B16.5-2009, Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings. .4 ASME B16.9-2007, Factory-Made Wrought Buttwelding Fittings. .5 ASME B18.2.1-[1996(R2005)], Square and Hex Bolts and Screws (Inch Series). .6 ASME B18.2.2-[1987(R2005)], Square and Hex Nuts (Inch Series). American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A47/A47M-99(2009), Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .2 ASTM A53/A53M-[07], Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. .3 ASTM A536-84(2009), Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. .4 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. .5 ASTM E202-09, Standard Test Method for Analysis of Ethylene Glycols and Propylene Glycols.
.2

.3
Section 23 21 13.02 Page 2 2011-06-10
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA B242-[05], Groove and Shoulder Type Mechanical Pipe Couplings.
.4
Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry (MSS). .1 MSS-SP-67-[2002a], Butterfly Valves. .2 MSS-SP-70-[2006], Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends. .3 MSS-SP-71-[2005], Cast Iron Swing Check Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends. .4 MSS-SP-80-2008, Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves. .5 MSS-SP-85-[2002], Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Closeout Submittals. .1 Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.2
.1 Health and Safety. .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.1
Waste Management and Disposal. .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. .3 Fold up metal and plastic banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE
.1
Steel pipe: seamless or ERW to ASTM A53/A53M, Grade B, as follows: .1 NPS12, schedule 40.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.2 PIPE JOINTS
.1 .2
Section 23 21 13.02 Page 3 2011-06-10
NPS2 and under: screwed fittings with Teflon tape. NPS2-1/2 and over: welding fittings and flanges to CSA W47.1 and CSA W47.1S1 Roll grooved: rigid coupling to CSA B242. Flanges: plain or raised face, weld neck. Flange gaskets: to AWWA C111. Pipe thread: taper. Bolts and nuts: to ASME B18.2.1 and ASME B18.2.2]. Roll grooved coupling gaskets: type EPDM. .1 Acceptable material: Victaulic, Gruvlock, CCTF Shurjoint. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
2.3 FITTINGS
.1 Screwed fittings: malleable iron, to ASME B16.3, Class 150. Pipe flanges and flanged fittings: .1 Cast iron: to ASME B16.1, Class 125. .2 Steel: to ASME B16.5. Butt-welding fittings: steel, to ASME B16.9. Unions: malleable iron, to ASTM A47/A47M and ASME B16.3. Fittings for roll grooved piping: malleable iron to ASTM A47/A47M, ductile iron to ASTM A536. .1 Acceptable material: Victaulic, Gruvlock, CCTF Shurjoint. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
.3 .4
.5
2.4 VALVES
.1 Connections: .1 NPS2 and smaller: screwed ends. .2 NPS2.1/2 and larger: Flanged or grooved ends.
.2
Butterfly valves: .1 NPS2.1/2 and over: Grooved ends: as specified Section 23 05 17. .2 Acceptable material: Victaulic, Gruvlock, CCTF Shurjoint. .3 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.

.3
Section 23 21 13.02 Page 4 2011-06-10
Balancing, for TAB: .1 Sizes: Calibrated balancing valves, as specified in Section 23 05 23.01. Drain valves: Ball, as specified Section 23 05 23.01. Swing check valves: .1 NPS2 and under: .1 Class 125, swing, with composition disc, as specified Section 23 05 23.01. .2 NPS21/2 and over: .1 Flanged or Grooved ends: as specified Section 23 05 23.02. Ball valves: .1 NPS2 and under: as specified Section 23 05 23.01.
.4 .5
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Install pipework in accordance with Section 23 05 01.
3.2 CIRCUIT BALANCING VALVES
.1 .2
Install flow balancing valves as indicated. Set handwheel after installation and when TAB is complete.
3.3 CLEANING, FLUSHING AND START-UP
.1
In accordance with Section 23 08 02.
3.4 TESTING
.1
Test system in accordance with Section 21 05 02.
.2
For glycol systems, retest with propylene glycol to ASTM E202, inhibited, for use in building system after cleaning. Repair leaking joints, fittings or valves.
3.5 BALANCING
.1
Balance water systems to within plus or minus 5 % of design output. Refer to Section 23 05 93 for applicable procedures.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.6 GLYCOL CHARGING
.1
Section 23 21 13.02 Page 5 2011-06-10
Provide mixing tank and positive displacement pump for glycol charging.
.2
Retest for concentration to ASTM E202 after cleaning.
.1
In accordance with Section 23 05 03.
HYDRONIC SPECIALITIES
Section 23 21 14 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ASME-[04(2007)], Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM A47/A47M-99(2009), Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings. .2 ASTM A278/A278M-[01(2006)], Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure-Containing Parts for Temperatures up to 650 degrees F (350 degrees C). .3 ASTM A516/A516M-[06], Standard Specification for Pressure Vessel Plates, Carbon Steel, for Moderate - and Lower - Temperature Service. .4 ASTM A536-84(2009), Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings. .5 ASTM B62-09, Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal Castings. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B51-09, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code. .2 CSA B51-09, Boiler, Pressure Vessel, and Pressure Piping Code, Supplement #1.
.2
.3
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for expansion tanks, air vents, separators, valves, and strainers, and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations.
.2
.3
Shop Drawings: .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
.1
Submit maintenance and operation data in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.1
Section 23 21 14 Page 2 2011-06-10
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BLADDER TYPE EXPANSION TANK
.1
Vertical epoxy coated steel pressurized bladder type expansion tank. Capacity: as noted. Size: as indicated. Bladder sealed in elastomer suitable for glycol solution up to 115 degrees C operating temperature. Working pressure: 860 kPa with ASME stamp and certification. Air precharged to initial fill pressure of system. Base mount for vertical installation. Supports: provide supports with hold down bolts and installation templates. Replaceable bladder. Acceptable material: Expanflex, Amtrol, Bell and Gossett, Armstrong. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2 .3 .4
.5
.6 .7 .8
.9 .10
2.2 AUTOMATIC AIR VENT
.1
Standard float vent: brass body and NPS 1/8 connection and rated at 1034 kPa working pressure.
.2
High capacity vent: cast iron body and NPS 3/4 connection and rated at 1034 kPa working pressure. Float: solid material suitable for 115 degrees C working temperature.
.3
2.3 AIR SEPARATOR IN-LINE
.1
Tangential separator with offset inlet/outlet, ss air collector tube, baffle, bottom access and top air outlet.

.2 .3 .4
Section 23 21 14 Page 3 2011-06-10
Working pressure: 860 kPa. Size: as indicated. Acceptable material: Bell and Gossett, Armstrong, Taco. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.4 COMBINATION LOW PRESSURE RELIEF AND REDUCING VALVE
.1
Adjustable pressure setting: 206 kPa relief, 55 to 172 kPa reducing. Low inlet pressure check valve. Removable strainer.
.2 .3
2.5 PIPE LINE STRAINER
.1
NPS 1/2 to 2: bronze body to ASTM B62, screwed connections, Y pattern. NPS 2 1/2 to 12: cast iron body to ASTM A278/A278M, Class 30 flanged connections. Blowdown connection: NPS 3/4. Screen: stainless steel with 1.19 mm perforations. Working pressure: 860 kPa. Acceptable material: Sarco, Toyo, Streamflo. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
.3 .4 .5 .6
2.6 SUCTION DIFFUSER
.1 .2
Body: cast iron with flanged connections. Strainer: with built-in, disposable 1.19 mm mesh, low pressure drop screen and NPS 3/4 blowdown connection. Permanent magnet particle trap. Full length straightening vanes. Pressure gauge tappings. Adjustable support leg.
Acceptable material: Bell and Gossett, Armstrong, Taco. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3 .4 .5 .6
.7
Section 23 21 14 Page 4 2011-06-10
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
3.2 GENERAL
.1 Install as indicated and to manufactures recommendations. Run drain lines and blow off connections to terminate above glycol solution tank. Maintain adequate clearance to permit service and maintenance.
Should deviations beyond allowable clearances arise, request and follow Engineers directive. Check shop drawings for conformance of tappings for ancillaries and for equipment operating weights.
.2
.3
.4
.5
3.3 STRAINERS
.1 .2 .3 .4
Install in horizontal or down flow lines. Ensure clearance for removal of basket. Install ahead of each pump. Install ahead of each automatic control valve larger than NPS 1 except at radiation and as indicated.
3.4 AIR VENTS
.1 .2
Install at high points of systems. Install ball valve on automatic air vent inlet.
3.5 EXPANSION TANKS
.1
Adjust expansion tank pressure to suit design criteria.
3.6 PRESSURE SAFETY RELIEF VALVES
.1
Run discharge pipe to terminate above nearest drain.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.7 SUCTION DIFFUSERS 3.7 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION
.1
Section 23 21 14 Page 5 2011-06-10
Install on inlet to pumps having suction size greater than 50.
.1
In accordance with Section 21 05 03 Performance Verification of Mechanical Piping Systems, supplemented as specified herein.
3.8 CLEANING
.1
.2
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Electrical Equipment Manufacturers Advisory Council (EEMAC)
.1 .2
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature and datasheets for pump, circulator, and equipment, and include product characteristics, performance criteria; physical size, finish and limitations indicate point of operation, and final location in field assembly.
.3
Shop Drawings: .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. Submit manufacturer's detailed composite wiring diagrams for control systems showing factory installed wiring and equipment on packaged equipment or required for controlling devices or ancillaries, accessories and controllers.
.4
.1
Provide maintenance and operation data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.4 MAINTENANCE
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Supply spare parts as follows: One set of seals for each type and size pump installed.
.2
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address.
.2

.3
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 2 2011-06-10
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section [01 74 20].
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
.1 Size and select components to: CSA-B214.
2.2 IN-LINE CIRCULATORS
.1
Volute: cast iron radially split, with screwed or flanged design suction and discharge connections. Impeller: cast bronze.
Shaft: alloy steel with bronze sleeve bearing, integral thrust collar.
.2 .3
.4 .5 .6
Seal assembly: mechanical for service to 120C. Coupling: rigid self-aligning.

Motor: TEFC, ball bearing, 1750 r/min, of size noted on schedule. Motors shall be high efficiency and non-overloading at all points on pump curve.
.7 .8
.9
Capacity: as indicated. Design pressure: 860 kPa.

Acceptable material: ITT Bell and Gossett, Armstrong, Taco, Grundfos, Wilo. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.3 SINGLE SUCTION CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
.1
General: bronze fitted, cast iron pump complete with motor.
.2 .3
Base: common fabricated steel.

Volute: cast iron radially split, end suction, flanged suction and discharge, with drain plug and vent cock, suction and discharge pressure gauge tappings.
.4
Impeller: bronze, keyed drive with locking nut or screw.

.5
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 3 2011-06-10
Shaft: alloy steel with two point support, machined shoulders for ball bearing mounting wear rings at packing gland. Seal assembly: mechanical seal, grease lubricated. Coupling: flexible self-aligning.
Motor: EEMAC Class B, squirrel cage induction, 1,725 r/min., continuous duty, TEFC, ball bearing, maximum temperature rise 50C of size noted on schedule. Motors shall be high efficiency and non-overloading at all points on pump curve.
.6 .7 .8
.9 .10
.11
Capacity: as indicated. Design pressure: 1200 kPa.

Acceptable material: ITT Bell and Gossett, Armstrong, Taco. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
In line circulators: install as indicated by flow arrows. .1 Support at inlet and outlet flanges or unions. .2 Install with bearing lubrication points accessible. .3 Confirm mounting orientation and support with manufacturer prior to installation. Base mounted type: supply templates for anchor bolt placement. .1 Include anchor bolts with sleeves. Place level, shim unit and grout. .2 Align coupling in accordance with manufacturer's recommended tolerance. .3 Check oil level and lubricate. Ensure that pump body does not support piping or equipment. Provide stanchions or hangers for this purpose. .1 .2 Refer to manufacturer's installation instructions for details.
.2
.3

.4 .5 .6 .7
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 4 2011-06-10
Pipe drain tapping to floor drain.

Install volute venting pet cock in accessible location.
Check rotation prior to start-up. Install pressure gauge test cocks.
3.3 START-UP
.1
General: .1 In accordance with Section 01 91 00: General Requirements; supplemented as specified herein. .2 In accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Procedures: .1 Before starting pump, check that cooling water system over-temperature and other protective devices are installed and operative. .2 After starting pump, check for proper, safe operation. .3 Check installation, operation of mechanical seals, packing gland type seals. Adjust as necessary. .4 Check base for free-floating, no obstructions under base. .5 Run-in pumps for 12 continuous hours minimum. .6 Verify operation of over-temperature and other protective devices under low- and no-flow condition. .7 Eliminate air from scroll casing. .8 Adjust alignment of piping and conduit to ensure true flexibility. .9 Eliminate cavitation, flashing and air entrainment. .10 Adjust pump shaft seals, stuffing boxes, glands. .11 Measure pressure drop across strainer when clean and with flow rates as finally set. .12 Replace seals if pump used to degrease system or if pump used for temporary heat. .13 Verify lubricating oil levels.
.2
3.4 PERFORMANCE VERIFICATION (PV)
.1
General: .1 Verify performance in accordance with Section 01 91 00: General Requirements, supplemented as specified herein. .2 In accordance with manufacturers recommendations. This paragraph does not apply to small in-line circulators. Assumptions: These PV procedures assume that: .1 Manufacturer's performance curves are accurate. .2 Valves on pump suction and discharge provide tight shut-off.
.2
.3
HYDRONIC PUMPS
Section 23 21 23 Page 5 2011-06-10
.4
Net Positive Suction Head (NPSH): Application: measure NPSH for pumps which operate .1 on open systems and with water at elevated temperatures. .2 Measure using procedures prescribed in Section 01 91 00. .3 Where procedures do not exist, discontinue PV, report to Departmental Representative and await instructions.
Mark points of design and actual performance at design conditions as finally set upon completion of TAB.
.5
.6
Commissioning Reports: in accordance with Section 01 91 00 reports supplemented as specified herein. Reports to include: .1 Record of point(s) of actual performance at maximum and minimum conditions and for single and parallel operation as finally set at completion of commissioning on pump curves. .2 Use Report Forms specified in Section [01 91 13]: Report Forms and Schematics. .3 Pump performance curves (family of curves).
3.6 CLEANING
.1
.2
HVAC FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTIONS
Section 23 21 25 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A53/A53M, Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot Dipped, Zinc Coated Welded and Seamless. .2 ASTM A105/A105M, Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings, for Piping Applications.
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Indicate for items as applicable: .1 Manufacturer, model number, line contents, pressure and temperature rating. .2 Movement handled; lateral, angular and the amounts of each. .3 Nominal size and dimensions including details of construction and assembly.
.2
.1
Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FLEXIBLE CONNECTION .1

.2
Application: to suit motion. Minimum length in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to suit offset. Inner hose: stainless steel corrugated. Braided wire mesh stainless steel outer jacket. Diameter and type of end connection: as indicated.
.3 .4 .5
.6
Operating conditions:
HVAC FLEXIBLE PIPING CONNECTIONS

.1 .2
Section 23 21 25 Page 2 2011-06-10
Working pressure: 1034 kPa. To match system requirements.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install flexible connections in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 CLEANING AND START-UP
.1
In accordance with Section 23 08 02 Cleaning and Start up of Mechanical Piping Systems.
COPPER TUBING AND FITTINGS REFRIGERANT
Section 23 23 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 23 05 01 - Installation of Pipework.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ASME B16.22-2001(R2005), Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder - Joint Pressure Fittings. .2 ASME B16.26-2006, Cast Copper Alloy Fittings for Flared Copper Tubes. .3 ASME B31.5-2006, Refrigeration Piping. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM B280-[08], Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Field Service. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA B52-05 SMART, Mechanical Refrigeration Code. EPS 1/RA/1-[96], Environmental Code of Practice for the Reduction of Fluorocarbon Emissions from Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Systems.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TUBING
.1
Processed for refrigeration installations, deoxidized, dehydrated and sealed. .1 Hard copper: to ASTM B280, type ACR.
2.2 FITTINGS
.1
Service: design pressure 2070 kPa and temperature 121C. Brazed: .1 Fittings: wrought copper to ASME B16.22.
.2
Section 23 23 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2 Joints: silver solder, 45% Ag-15% Cu and non-corrosive flux. .3 Flared: .1 Bronze or brass, for refrigeration, to ASME B16.26.
2.3 PIPE SLEEVES
.1
Hard copper, sized to provide 6 mm clearance around between sleeve and uninsulated pipe or between sleeve and insulation.
2.4 VALVES
.1
22 mm and under: Class 500, 3.5 Mpa, globe or angle non-directional type, diaphragm, packless type, with forged brass body and bonnet, moistureproof seal for below freezing applications, brazed connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1
In accordance with Section [23 05 01], supplemented as specified herein

Install in accordance with CSA B52, EPS1/RA/1 and ASME B31.5.
.2
3.2 BRAZING PROCEDURES
.1 .2
Bleed inert gas into pipe during brazing. Remove valve internal parts, solenoid valve coils, sight glass. Do not apply heat near expansion valve and bulb.
.3
.1
General: .1 Hard drawn copper tubing: do not bend. Minimize use of fittings. Hot gas lines: .1 Pitch at least 1:240 down in direction of flow to prevent oil return to compressor during operation. .2 Provide trap at base of risers greater than 2400 mm high and at each 7600 mm thereafter. .3 Provide inverted deep trap at top of risers. .4 Provide double risers for compressors having capacity modulation. .1 Large riser: install traps as specified above. .2 Small riser: size for 5.1 m/s at minimum load. Connect upstream of traps on large riser.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.4 PRESSURE AND LEAK TESTING
.1
Section 23 23 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
Close valves on factory charged equipment and other equipment not designed for test pressures. Leak test to CSA B52 before evacuation to 2MPa and 1MPa on high and low sides respectively.
.2
.3
Test Procedure: Build pressure up to 35 kPa with refrigerant gas on high and low sides. Supplement with nitrogen to required test pressure. Test for leaks with electronic or halide detector. Repair leaks and repeat tests.
3.5 DEHYDRATION AND CHARGING
.1 .2
Close service valves on factory charged equipment.

Ambient temperatures to be at least 13C for at least 12 hours before and during dehydration. Use copper lines of largest practical size to reduce evacuation time.
.3
.4
Use two-stage vacuum pump with gas ballast on 2nd stage capable of pulling 5Pa absolute and filled with dehydrated oil. Measure system pressure with vacuum gauge. Take readings with valve between vacuum pump and system closed. Charging: .1 Charge system through filter-drier and charging valve on high side. Low side charging not permitted. .2 With compressors off, charge only amount necessary for proper operation of system. If system pressures equalize before system is fully charged, close charging valve and start up. With unit operating, add remainder of charge to system. .3 Re-purge charging line if refrigerant container is changed during charging process. Checks: .1 Make checks and measurements as per manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions. .2 Record and report measurements to Engineer.
.5
.6
.7
3.6 INSTRUCTIONS
.1 Post instructions in frame with glass cover in accordance with Section 01 78 00 and CSA B52.
HVAC WATER TREATMENT SYSTEMS
Section 23 25 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VII.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 0178 00 Closeout Submittals. Include following: .1 Log sheets as recommended by manufacturer.
.2
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20 Construction / Demolition Waste Management and Disposal. Do not dispose of unused water treatment chemicals into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard and plastic packaging material in appropriate on site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURER
.1
Equipment, chemicals, service by one supplier.
2.2 POT FEEDER
.1 Welded steel, pressure rating 1378 kPa. Temperature rating: 90C.
Section 23 25 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
2.3 SHIPPING/FEEDING CHEMICAL CONTAINERS
.1
High density moulded polyethylene, with liquid level graduations, cover.
Section 23 25 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.4 WATER TREATMENT FOR .1 HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

.2
Glycol water heating system: Pot feeder, 19 L. Sidestream filter for each pot feeder: .1 Capacity 2% of pump recirculating rate at operating pressure up to 0.6 Lps. .2 Provide spare filter cartridges, twenty (20) filter cartridges for each type, size of micron filter.
2.5 GLYCOL SOLUTION
.1
The following systems shall be charged with premixed propylene glycol mix at the noted concentration: .1 Heating system 50/50 glycol/water.
.2
Premixed propylene glycol shall be provided by a recognized supplier of that product. Glycol shall meet standards of ASTM D1384 for corrosion levels and shall be specifically prepared for use in building heating systems. Glycol shall not be provided from a recycled source. A complete fluid analysis shall be provided as an approval drawing prior to construction start. Certificate of Analysis shall provide as minimum: .1 Reserve alkalinity testing. .2 Fluid pH testing. .3 Freeze point testing. .4 Corrosion levels. .5 Glycol concentration. .6 Contaminants.
Water used shall be from deionized or demineralised source and shall meet the following minimum requirements: .1 Chloride content: less than 25 ppm. .2 Sulphate content: less than 25 ppm. .3 Hard water ions: less than 50 ppm. .4 Total hardness: less than 100 ppm.
.3
.4
.5
Acceptable solution providers: .1 Univar Canada Ltd. (using Dow Chemical Co. glycol), Brenntag. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.6 CHEMICALS
Section 23 25 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.1 .2
Provide 1 years supply.

Obtain chemicals from manufacturer with existing valid contract with CSC.
2.7 TEST EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide one set of test equipment for each system to verify performance. Complete with carrying case, reagents for chemicals, all specialized or supplementary equipment. Provide one (1) optical glycol strength tester calibrated for propylene glycol and automatically compensated for temperature.
.2
.3
2.8 GLYCOL SOLUTION MAKE-UP SYSTEM
.1
Provide packaged solution feeder manufactured for the specific purpose of glycol solution makeup, consisting of reservoir, pump, expansion tank and operating controls.
.2 .3
Feed pump shall be self priming, duplex diaphragm with pressure control operable with 115V standard power. Storage reservoir shall be polyethylene, 180 litre capacity with cover.
Expansion tank to be welded steel with precharged EPDM diaphragm, tested for 690 kPa. Operating controls consisting of adjustable pressure regulating valve, pressure gauge, y-strainer, bronze check valves, shut off valves with union and pressure switch control.
.4
.5
.6
Acceptable material: Axiom SF-100. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
.2
Install HVAC water treatment systems in accordance with ASME Boiler Code Section VII, and requirements and standards of authorities having jurisdiction, except where specified otherwise. Ensure adequate clearances to permit performance of servicing and maintenance of equipment.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.2 CLEANING AND OF MECHANICAL SYSTEMS
.1
Section 23 25 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
Provide copy of recommended cleaning procedures and chemicals for approval by Engineer. Thoroughly flush mechanical systems and equipment with approved cleaning chemicals designed to remove deposition from construction such as pipe dope, oils, loose mill scale and other extraneous materials. Chemicals to inhibit corrosion of various system materials and be safe to handle and use. During circulation of cleaning solution, periodically examine and clean filters and screens and monitor changes in pressure drop across equipment. Drain and flush systems until alkalinity of rinse water is equal to make up water. Refill with clean water treated to prevent scale and corrosion during system operation.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Disposal of cleaning solutions to be approved by authority having jurisdiction.
3.3 WATER TREATMENT SERVICES
.1
Provide water treatment monitoring and consulting services for period of one year after system start up. Service to include: .1 Initial water analysis and treatment recommendations. .2 System start up assistance. .3 Operating staff training. .4 Visit plant every 120 days during period of operation and as required until system stabilizes, and advise on treatment system performance. .5 Provide necessary recording charts and log sheets for one year operation. .6 Provide necessary laboratory and technical assistance. Instructions and advice to operating staff to .7 be clear, concise and in writing.
3.4 START-UP
.1
Start up water treatment systems in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
Section 23 25 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.5 COMMISSIONING
.1 .2
Commissioning Agency: To be water treatment supplier. Timing: .1 After start up deficiencies rectified. .2 After start up and before TAB of connected systems. Pre commissioning Inspections: .1 Verify: Presence of test equipment, reagents, .1 chemicals, details of specific tests to be performed, operating instructions. .2 Suitability of log book. .3 Currency and accuracy of initial water analysis. .4 Required quality of treated water. Commissioning procedures applicable to Water Treatment Systems: .1 Establish, adjust as necessary and record all automatic controls and chemical feed rates. .2 Monitor performance continuously during commissioning of connected systems and until acceptance of project. .3 Establish test intervals, regeneration intervals. Record on approved report forms commissioning .4 procedures, test procedures, dates, times, quantities of chemicals added, raw water analysis, treated water analysis, test results, instrument readings, adjustments made, results obtained. .5 Establish, monitor and adjust automatic controls and chemical feed rates as necessary. .6 Visit project at specified intervals after commissioning is satisfactorily completed to verify that performance remains as set during commissioning (more often as required until system stabilizes at required level of performance). .7 Advise Engineer in writing on matters regarding installed water treatment systems. Commissioning procedures Closed Circuit Hydronic Systems: .1 Analyse water in system. .2 Record types, quantities of chemicals applied. Training: .1 Commission systems, perform tests in presence of, and using assistance of, assigned O&M personnel. Certificates: .1 Upon completion, furnish certificates confirming satisfactory installation and performance.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Section 23 25 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
.8
Commissioning Reports: .1 To include system schematics, test results, test certificates, raw and treated water analyses, design criteria, other data required by Engineer. .9 Commissioning activities during Warranty Period: .1 Check out water treatment systems on regular basis and submit written report to Owner with copy to Engineer.
.10
Leave solution tank full with correct system glycol mixture.
HVAC STARTUP OF HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
Section 23 25 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
1.1 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND.1 DISPOSAL

.2
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.3
Dispose of corrugated cardboard plastic packaging material in appropriate on site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANING SOLUTIONS .1
Low foaming detergent: concentration as recommended by Manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING HYDRONIC SYSTEMS
.1
Timing .1 Systems to be operational, hydrostatically tested and with safety devices functional, before cleaning is carried out.
.2
Cleaning Agency: .1 Retain qualified water treatment specialist to monitor system cleaning.
.3
Install instrumentation such as flow meters, orifice plates, pitot tubes, flow metering valves only after cleaning is certified as complete by water treatment specialist.
Section 23 25 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Cleaning procedures: .1 Provide detailed report outlining proposed cleaning procedures at least 4 weeks prior to proposed starting date. Report to include: Cleaning procedures, flow rates, elapsed .1 time. .2 Chemicals and concentrations to be used. .3 Inhibitors and concentrations. .4 Specific requirements for completion of work. .5 Special precautions for protecting piping system materials and components. .6 Complete analysis of water to be used to ensure water will not damage systems or equipment.
.5
Conditions at time of cleaning of systems .1 Systems to be free from construction debris, dirt and other foreign material. .2 Control valves to be operational, fully open to ensure that terminal units can be cleaned properly. .3 Strainers to be clean prior to initial fill. .4 Install temporary filters on pumps not equipped with permanent filters. .5 Install pressure gauges on strainers to detect plugging.
.6
Report on Completion of Cleaning. .1 When cleaning is completed, submit report, complete with certificate of compliance with specifications of cleaning component supplier. Hydronic Systems: .1 Fill system with water, ensure air is vented from system. .2 Fill expansion tanks 1/3 to 1/2 full, charge system with compressed air to at least 35 kPa (does not apply to diaphragm type expansion tanks). .3 Use water meter to record volume of water in system to +/ 0.5%. .4 Add chemicals under direct supervision of chemical treatment supplier. .5 Closed loop systems: circulate cleaner at 60C for at least 36 hr. Drain as quickly as possible. Flush with clean water until water treatment specialist certifies flush water to be at proper condition. Drain and refill with proper treated solution. Test concentrations and adjust to recommended levels. .6 Flush velocity in system mains and branches so as to ensure removal of debris. System pumps may be used for circulating cleaning solution provided that velocities are adequate. .7 Add chemical solution to system.
.7

.8
Section 23 25 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
Glycol Systems: .1 In addition to procedures specified above perform procedures specified herein. .2 Test to prove concentration will prevent freezing to minus 25C Test inhibitor strength and include in procedural report. Refer to ASTM E202.
3.2 START-UP OF HYDRONIC .1 SYSTEMS
After cleaning is completed and system is filled: .1 Establish circulation and expansion tank level, set pressure controls. .2 Ensure air is removed.
.3 Check pumps to be free from air, debris, possibility of cavitation when system is at design temperature. .4 Dismantle system pumps used for cleaning, inspect, replace worn parts, install new gaskets and new set of seals. .5 Clean out strainers repeatedly until system is clean. .6 Commission water treatment systems as specified in Section 23 25 00 HVAC Water Treatment Systems. .7 Check water level in expansion tank with cold water with circulating pumps OFF and again with pumps ON. .8 Repeat with water at design temperature.
.9 Check pressurization to ensure proper operation and to prevent water hammer, flashing, cavitation. Eliminate water hammer and other noises. .10 Bring system up to design temperature and pressure slowly over a 8 hour period. .11 Perform TAB as specified in Section 23 05 93 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing (TAB). .12 Adjust pipe supports, hangers, springs as necessary.
Monitor pipe movement, performance of expansion .13 joints, loops, guides, anchors.
Section 23 25 13 Page 4 2011-06-10
.14 Re tighten bolts, etc. using torque wrench, to compensate for heat caused relaxation. Repeat several times during commissioning. .15 Check operation of drain valves.
.16 Adjust valve stem packings as systems settle down. .17 Fully open all balancing valves (except those that are factory set). .18 Check operation of over temperature protection devices on circulating pumps. .19 Adjust alignment of piping at pumps to ensure flexibility, adequacy of pipe movement, absence of noise or vibration transmission.
METAL DUCTS LOW PRESSURE TO 500 Pa
Section 23 31 13.01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 Materials and installation of low-pressure metallic ductwork, joints and accessories. .2 Sustainable requirements for construction and verification.
.2
Related Sections: .1 Section 02 62 00.01 - Hazardous Materials. .2 Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. .3 Section 23 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment. .4 Section 23 05 94 - Pressure Testing of Ducted Air Systems. .5 Section 23 41 00 - Particulate Air Filtration.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM A653/A653M-09a, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA). .1 NFPA 90A-09, Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA). .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, 3rd Edition [2005]. .2 SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, [1985], 1st Edition.
.2
.3
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00]. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets for the following: .1 Sealants. .2 Tape. .3 Proprietary Joint.
.2
.1
Protect on site stored or installed absorptive material from moisture damage.

.2
Section 23 31 13.01 Page 2 2011-06-10
Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. .2 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEAL CLASSIFICATION
.1
Classification as follows:
Maximum Pressure Pa 500 250 125 125 .2
SMACNA Seal Class C C C Unsealed
Seal classification: Class A: longitudinal seams, transverse joints, .1 duct wall penetrations and connections made airtight with sealant and tape. .2 Class B: longitudinal seams, transverse joints and connections made airtight with sealant, tape or combination thereof. .3 Class C: transverse joints and connections made air tight with gaskets, sealant or combination thereof. Longitudinal seams unsealed.
2.2 SEALANT
.1
Sealant: water based, polymer type flame resistant duct sealant. Temperature range of minus 30C to plus 93C. .1 Acceptable material: Foster 32-19, United, DuroDyne. .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.3 DUCT LEAKAGE
.1
In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.4 FITTINGS
.1 .2
Section 23 31 13.01 Page 3 2011-06-10
Fabrication: to SMACNA 500 Pa class. Radiused elbows. .1 Rectangular: Centreline radius: 1.5 times duct dimension in plane of rotation except where duct velocities are less than 4 m/s where radius may be reduced to 1 times. .2 Round: Centreline radius: 1.5 times duct dimension in plane of rotation except where duct velocities are less than 4 m/s where radius may be reduced to 1 times. Mitred elbows, rectangular: .1 To 400 mm: with single thickness turning vanes. .2 Over 400 mm: with double thickness turning vanes.
.3
.4
Branches: .1 Rectangular main and branch: with radius on branch 1.5 times width of duct 45 degrees entry on branch. .2 Round main and branch: enter main duct at 45 degrees with conical connection. .3 Provide volume control damper in branch duct near connection to main duct.
.5
Transitions: .1 Diverging: 20 degrees maximum included angle. .2 Converging: 30 degrees maximum included angle. Offsets: .1 Full short radiused elbows.
.6
2.5 FIRE STOPPING
.1
Retaining angles around duct, on both sides of fire separation in accordance with Section [07 84 00].
.2
Fire stopping material and installation must not distort duct.
2.6 GALVANIZED STEEL
.1
Lock forming quality: to ASTM A653/A653M, Z90 zinc coating.
.2
Thickness, fabrication and reinforcement: to SMACNA 500 Pa class.

.3
Section 23 31 13.01 Page 4 2011-06-10
Joints: to SMACNA or proprietary manufactured duct joint. [Proprietary manufactured flanged duct joint to be considered to be a class C seal. .1 Acceptable material: Ductmat .2 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.7 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
.1
Hangers and Supports: in accordance with Section [23 05 29]. .1 Strap hangers: of same material as duct but next sheet metal thickness heavier than duct. .2 Hanger configuration: to SMACNA.
.3 Hangers: black or galvanized steel angle with galvanized steel rods to SMACNA or following table (whichever is heavier construction): Duct Size (mm) up to 750 751 to 1050 1051 to 1500 1501 to 2100 2101 to 2400 Angle Size (mm) 25 x 25 x 3 40 x 40 x 3 40 x 40 x 3 50 x 50 x 3 50 x 50 x 5 Rod Size (mm) 6 6 10 10 10
.4
Upper hanger attachments: .1 For concrete: manufactured concrete inserts. .2 For steel joist:manufactured joist clamp. .3 For steel beams: manufactured beam clamps
2.8 INTERIOR LINED ROUND DUCTWORK
.1
Provide and install lined round ductwork where shown for individual cell exhaust systems. Outer duct shall be solid round spiral duct of gauges required by SMACNA. duct shall be factory lined with 25 mm thick insulation as specified for internal acoustic and shall be fully adhered with adhesive coat. Cover internal surfaces with 24 ga (min) galvanized steel perforated sheet. Fittings shall be factory lined in similar manner as duct.
.2
.3
Section 23 31 13.01 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.9 DRYER EXHAUST
.1
Dryer exhaust duct systems shall be fabricated from aluminum. Duct shall be one gauge heavier than specified for equivalent size galvanized steel duct. fittings shall be two gauges heavier than for galvanized steel.
.2 .3
Lap joints in direction of flow.

Connect joints with draw bands. are to penetrate ductwall. No fasteners
.4
Arrange to allow access to all sections for cleanout. Seal all joints except at draw bands and equipment. Connection at dryer to be made with aluminum flexible duct as specified elsewhere. Arrange flexible duct to be in vertical section maximum 750 mm in length. Flexible duct must be installed to be straight with no turns or offsets when in final installed position. Provide galvanized steel wallcap at discharge. Wallcap shall be complete with backdraft damper, less screen. Wallcap shall be acid etched ready for painting.
.5
.6
.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 .2
Do work in accordance with SMACNA.

Do not break continuity of insulation vapour barrier with hangers or rods. Insulate strap hangers 100 mm beyond insulated duct.
.3 .4
Support risers in accordance with SMACNA.

Install breakaway joints in ductwork on sides of fire separation.
.5
Install proprietary manufactured flanged duct joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
3.2 HANGERS
.1 .2
Strap hangers: install in accordance with SMACNA.

Angle hangers: complete with locking nuts and washers.

.3
Section 23 31 13.01 Page 6 2011-06-10
Hanger spacing: in accordance with SMACNA of following table (whichever is closer spacing).
Duct Size (mm) to 1500 1501 and over
Spacing (mm) 3000 2500
3.3 WATERTIGHT DUCT
.1
Provide watertight duct for: Minimum 3000 mm from duct mounted humidifier in .1 all directions. .2 As indicated. Form bottom of horizontal duct without longitudinal seams. .1 Solder joints of bottom and side sheets. .2 Seal other joints with duct sealer. Slope horizontal branch ductwork down towards lowpoint. .1 Slope header ducts down toward risers.
.2
.3
3.4 SEALING AND TAPING
.1
Apply sealant to outside of joint to manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Bed tape in sealant and recoat with minimum of one coat of sealant to manufacturers recommendations.
3.5 LEAKAGE TESTS
.1 .2
Refer to Section [23 05 94]. In accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual. Do leakage tests in sections.
Make trial leakage tests as instructed to demonstrate workmanship. Do not install additional ductwork until trial test has been passed.
.3 .4
.5
.6
Test section minimum of 10 m long with not less than two branch takeoffs and two 90 degrees elbows. Complete test before performance insulation or concealment Work.
.7
AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES
Section 23 33 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, [95].
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Flexible connections. .2 Duct access doors. .3 Turning vanes. .4 Instrument test ports.
.2
1.3 CERTIFICATION OF RATINGS
.1
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1
Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.2 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
.1
Section 23 33 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
Frame: galvanized sheet metal frame 24 gauge thick with fabric clenched by means of double locked seams.
.2
Material: .1 Fire resistant, self extinguishing, neoprene coated glass fabric, temperature rated at minus 40 C to plus 90 C, density of 1.0 kg/m.
2.3 ACCESS DOORS IN DUCTS
.1
Non-insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame. Insulated ducts: sandwich construction of same material as duct, one sheet metal thickness heavier, minimum 0.6 mm thick complete with sheet metal angle frame and 25 mm thick rigid glass fibre insulation. Gaskets: neoprene. Hardware: .1 Up to 300 x 300 mm: two sash locks. .2 301 to 450 mm: four sash locks. 451 to 1000 mm: piano hinge and minimum two sash .3 locks.
.2
.3 .4
2.4 TURNING VANES
.1
Factory or shop fabricated single thickness or double thickness to recommendations of SMACNA, and as indicated.
2.5 INSTRUMENT TEST
.1 .2
1.6 mm thick steel zinc plated after manufacture. Cam lock handles with neoprene expansion plug and handle chain. 28 mm minimum inside diameter. Length to suit insulation thickness. Neoprene mounting gasket. Acceptable material: DuroDyne IP-2, Cain.
.3
.4 .5
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.6 DUCT SECURITY GRIDS
Section 23 33 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1 Provide steel security grids in all ducts through security barriers where duct has a minimum dimension larger than 130mm and a total cross sectional area greater than 0.05m. Grids to be installed where noted on Drawings or as follows where ducts pass: .1 One major inmate area to another. .2 Inmate area to non-inmate area. .3 Inmate area to exterior. .4 Exterior to control post. .2 Construct security grids of mild steel bars not less than 12mm diameter on 140mm centers . Where opening is between inmate area and a security corridor the bars shall be of tool resistant homogenized steel. Maximum bar length without cross bar not to exceed 610mm. All bars shall be welded together where they intersect. Weld bars to a flat steel frame secured to structure with bolts set a minimum of 50mm into expansion type anchors. Maximum bolt spacing 400mm o/c. No less than 4 bolts per grille.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Flexible connections: .1 Install in following locations: .1 Inlets and outlets to supply air units and fans. .2 Inlets and outlets of exhaust and return air fans. .3 As indicated. .2 Length of flexible connection: 75 mm. .3 Minimum distance between metal parts when system in operation: 50 mm. .4 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA.
.5
When fan is running: .1 Ducting on sides of flexible connection to be in alignment. .2 Ensure slack material in flexible connection. .3 Do not install flexible connection direct to fan inlet. Provide minimum 1 fan diameter straight duct at inlet. panels: for servicing entry. for viewing. minimum size.
.2
Access doors and viewing .1 Size: .1 600 x 400 mm .2 450 x 250 mm .3 300 x 150 mm
Section 23 33 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.2
Locations: .1 Fire and smoke dampers. .2 Control dampers. .3 Devices requiring maintenance. .4 Required by code. .5 Reheat coils. .6 Elsewhere as indicated.
.3
Instrument test ports. .1 General: .1 Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .2 Locate to permit easy manipulation of instruments. .3 Install insulation port extensions as required. .4 Locations. .1 For traverse readings: .1 Ducted inlets to roof and wall exhausters. .2 Inlets and outlets of other fan systems. .3 Main and sub-main ducts. .4 And as indicated. .2 For temperature readings: .1 At outside air intakes. .2 In mixed air applications in locations as approved by Consultant. .3 At inlet and outlet of coils. .4 Downstream of junctions of two converging air streams of different temperatures. .5 And as indicated.
.4
Turning vanes: Install in accordance with recommendations of .1 SMACNA and as indicated. Duct security grids: .1 Locate grid in plane of security barrier. .2 Bolt grid into structure of wall at security barrier. .3 Coordinate security grid installation with installation of fire dampers. Security grid shall be mounted in plane of security barrier. Extend rating of separation so that fire damper installation does not interfere with security grid.
.5
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Section 23 33 14 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Association (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible- [1985].
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Indicate the following: Hardware, blade and frame construction.
.2
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.2
.3
Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1
Manufacture to SMACNA standards.
2.2 SINGLE BLADE DAMPERS
.1
Of same material as duct, but one sheet metal thickness heavier. V-groove stiffened. Size and configuration to recommendations of SMACNA, except maximum height 150 mm. Locking quadrant with shaft extension to accommodate insulation thickness.
.2
.3
.4 .5
Inside and outside nylon end bearings. Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.
DAMPERS - BALANCING
Section 23 33 14 Page 2 2011-06-10
2.3 MULTI-BLADED DAMPERS
.1 .2
Factory manufactured of material compatible with duct.
Opposed blade: configuration, metal thickness and construction to recommendations of SMACNA. Maximum blade height: 100 mm. Bearings: self-lubricating nylon. Linkage: shaft extension with locking quadrant. Channel frame of same material as adjacent duct, complete with angle stop.
.3 .4 .5 .6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install where indicated.

Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.3
For supply, return and exhaust systems, locate balancing dampers in each branch duct. Runouts to registers and diffusers: install single blade damper located as close as possible to main ducts. All dampers to be vibration free. Ensure damper operators are observable and accessible.
.4
.5 .6
DAMPERS - OPERATING
Section 23 33 15 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM A653/A653M-09, Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by Hot-Dip Process.
1.3 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Performance data (air pressure drop at flow and air leakage in closed position). .2 Construction details.
.2
.1
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.2
.3
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MULTI-LEAF DAMPERS
.1 .2
DAMPERS - OPERATING
Section 23 33 15 Page 2 2011-06-10
Opposed or Parallel blade type as indicated. Structurally formed steel, interlocking blades, complete with PVC seals, spring stainless steel side seals, structurally formed and welded galvanized steel frame. Pressure fit self-lubricated bronze bearings.
Linkage: plated steel tie rods, brass pivots and plated steel brackets, complete with plated steel control rod.
.3 .4
.5
Performance: .1 Leakage: in closed position to be less of rated air flow at 500 Pa differential across .2 Pressure drop: at full open position to than 11 Pa differential across damper at 300
than 1% damper. be less m/s.
.6
Insulated aluminum dampers: .1 Frames: insulated with extruded polystyrene foam with R factor of 2.0. .2 Blades: constructed from aluminum extrusions with internal hollows insulated with polyurethane or polystyrene foam, R factor of 2.3. .3 Dampers shall be designed for service temperature range from minus 40C to 100C.
2.2 BACK DRAFT DAMPERS
.1
Automatic gravity operated , multi leaf, extruded (1.8 mm thick) aluminum construction with synthetic bearings, set in 3.2 mm aluminum frame.
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 .2 Install where indicated.
Install in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA and manufacturer's instructions.
.3 .4
Seal multiple damper modules with silicon sealant. Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 23 33 00. Ensure dampers are observable and accessible. Dampers on ducts or openings connected directly to outside (o/a intake, exhaust, relief, etc.) shall be insulated aluminum style.
.5 .6
DAMOERS FIRE AND SMOKE
Section 23 33 16 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/National Fire Protection Association (ANSI/NFPA) .1 ANSI/NFPA 90A-[1989], Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
.2
Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN4-S112-[M82(R1987)], Fire Test of Fire Damper Assemblies. .2 CAN4-S112.2-[M84], Fire Test of Ceiling Firestop Flap Assemblies. .3 ULC-S505-[1974], Fusible Links for Fire Protection Service.
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Fire dampers. .2 Fire stop flaps. .3 Fusible links. .4 Design details of break-away joints.
.2
.1
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Provide following: .1 5 fusible links of each type
.2
.1
Catalogue or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.

.2
Section 23 33 16 Page 2 2011-06-10
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIRE DAMPERS
.1
Fire dampers: arrangement Type A, B or C, listed and bear label of ULC/UL, meet requirements of Fire Commissioner of Canada (FCC) and ANSI/NFPA 90A. Fire damper assemblies to be fire tested in accordance with CAN4-S112.
.2
Mild steel, factory fabricated for fire rating requirement to maintain integrity of fire wall and/or fire separation. Top hinged: multi-blade hinged sized to maintain full duct cross section.
Fusible link actuated, weighted to close and lock in closed position when released or having negator-spring-closing operator for multi-leaf type or roll door type in horizontal position with vertical air flow.
.3
.4
.5
Retaining angle iron frame as per damper assembly listing, on full perimeter of fire damper, on both sides of fire separation being pierced.
For ducts up to and including 300mm in height use Type B with blades completely out of air stream when in open position. Revise if noted on drawings.
.6
.7
For ducts over 300mm in height use Type A with blades in air stream when in open position. Revise if noted on drawing. For round and oval ducts use Type C fire dampers. Acceptable material: Controlled air, Ruskin, Greenheck. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.8 .9
Section 23 33 16 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.2 FIRE STOP FLAPS
.1
To be ULC listed and labelled and fire tested in accordance with CAN4-S112.2. Construct of minimum 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with 1.6 mm thick non-asbestos ULC listed insulation and corrosion-resistant pins and hinges.
Flaps to be held open with fusible link conforming to ULC-S505.
.2
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 90A and in accordance with conditions of ULC listing. Maintain integrity of fire separation. After completion and prior to concealment obtain approvals of complete installation from authority having jurisdiction. Install access door adjacent to each damper. See Section 23 33 00. Coordinate with installer of firestopping.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
Fire Damper .1 Installation of all fire dampers shall be performed according to Manufacturers listed installation instructions. Installation instructions to be submitted to Engineer with approval drawings. .2 All fire dampers shall adhere to all requirements including but not limited to: .3 sleeve including proper gauge thickness retention angels and securement damper to sleeve securement duct to sleeve breakaway connection clearance between opening and sleeve
- duct access door After installation is completed, remove fusible link, operate curtain, replace fusible link after curtain is returned to open position. Curtain shall operate freely to closed position without assistance or other intervention.
Section 23 33 16 Page 4 2011-06-10
.4
Installer shall certify each installation on completion of installation and curtain operation test. Certification shall be recorded in format of form appended to this section. Certification shall be turned over to Consultant prior to inspection of installation.
.7
Install break-away joints of approved design on each side of fire separation. Coordinate with work of Section 23 05 93. Repair or replace installations where required for completion of TAB contract.
.8
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 90A-[99], Installation of Air Conditioning .1 and Ventilating Systems. .2 NFPA 90B-[99], Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, [95] and Addendum No.1 [1997].
.2
.3
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S110-[M86(R2001)], Fire Tests for Air Ducts. .2 UL 181-[96], Factory Made Air Ducts and Connectors.
1.3 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Thermal properties. .2 Friction loss. .3 Acoustical loss. .4 Leakage. .5 Fire rating.
.2
.1
Catalogue or published ratings to be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
1.5 SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples with product data of different types of flexible duct being used in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 .2
Factory fabricated to CAN/ULC S110.

Pressure drop coefficients listed below are based on relative sheet metal duct pressure drop coefficient of 1.00. Flame spread rating not to exceed 25. Smoke developed rating not to exceed 50 for any portion of flexible duct including jacket.
.3
2.2 METALLIC UNINSULATED
.1 .2
Type 1: spiral wound flexible aluminum. Performance: .1 Factory tested to 3.0 kPa without leakage. Acceptable material: Flexmaster T/L, Thermaflex, UniFlex. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
2.3 METALLIC INSULATED
.1
Type 2: spiral wound flexible aluminum with factory applied, 25 mm thick flexible glass fibre thermal insulation with vapour barrier and vinyl jacket.
.2
Performance: .1 Factory tested to 3.0 kPa without leakage. Acceptable material: Flexmaster TL-VT, Thermaflex, UniFlex. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
FLEXIBLE DUCTS
Section 23 33 46 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install in accordance with: SMACNA. Do not allow turns tighter than 1.5 diameter radius. Do not allow accumulated turns greater than 90. Install duct elbows where greater turn angle is required. All flexible ductwork shall conform to Section 2.2 Metallic Uninsulated unless specifically noted otherwise. Where this duct requires insulation, it shall be provided to requirements of Section 23 07 13.
.4
ACOUSTIC DUCT LINING
Section 23 33 53 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM C177-04, Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded-Hot-Plate Apparatus. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 90A-[99], Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. .2 NFPA 90B-[99], Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor's National Association (SMACNA) .1 SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible-[95 (Addendum No.1, Nov. 97)].
.2
.3
.4
Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S102-07, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials and Assemblies.
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCT
2.1 DUCT LINER
.1
General: .1 Fibrous glass duct liner: air stream side faced with mat facing. .2 Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50 when tested in accordance with CAN/ULC-S102.

.2
Section 23 33 53 Page 2 2011-06-10
Rigid: .1 Use on flat surfaces. .2 25 mm thick, to CGSB 51-GP-10M, fibrous glass rigid board duct liner. .3 Density: 48 kg/m minimum. .4 Thermal resistance to be minimum 0.76 m.C/W for 25 mm thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM C177, at 24C mean temperature. Flexible: .1 Use on round or oval surfaces. .2 25 mm thick, to CGSB-51-GP-11M, fibrous glass blanket duct liner. .3 Density: 24 kg/m minimum. .4 Thermal resistance to be minimum 0.74 m.C/W for 25 mm thickness when tested in accordance with ASTM C177, at 24C mean temperature. Acceptable material: Knauf, Owens Corning, Johns Manville, Certain Teed. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
.4
2.2 ADHESIVE
.1 .2
Meet requirements of NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature range minus 29C to plus 93C.
2.3 FASTENERS
.1
Weld pins 2.0 mm diameter, length to suit thickness of insulation. Metal retaining clips, 32 mm square.
2.4 JOINT TAPE
.1
Poly-Vinyl treated open weave fiberglass membrane 50 mm wide.
2.5 SEALER
.1 .2
Meet requirements of NFPA 90A and NFPA 90B. Flame spread rating shall not exceed 25. Smoke development rating shall not exceed 50. Temperature range minus 68C to plus 93C.
Section 23 33 53 Page 3 2011-06-10
3.1 GENERAL
.1
Do work in accordance with recommendations of SMACNA duct liner standards as indicated in SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, Metal and Flexible, except as specified otherwise.
.2 .3
Line inside of ducts where indicated. Duct dimensions, as indicated, are clear inside duct lining.
3.2 DUCT LINER
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, and as follows: .1 Fasten to interior sheet metal surface with 100% coverage of adhesive. .2 In addition to adhesive, install weld pins not less than 2 rows per surface and not more than 425 mm on centres.
3.3 JOINTS
.1
Seal butt joints, exposed edges, weld pin and clip penetrations and damaged areas of liner with joint tape and sealer. Install joint tape in accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations, and as follows: .1 Bed tape in sealer. .2 Apply one coat of sealer over tape. Replace damaged areas of liner at discretion of Departmental Representative. Protect leading edges of duct sections with sheet metal nosing having 15 mm overlap and fastened to duct where air velocity in duct exceeds 7.6 m/s.
.2
.3
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 23 05 13 - Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment. Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories.
.2
.3
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 .2
AMCA 99-[1986], Standards Handbook. ANSI/AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. AMCA 300-08, Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans. AMCA 301-06, Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data. ANSI/ASHRAE 51-2007, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. CGSB 1-GP-181M-[77], Coating, Zinc Rich, Organic, Ready Mixed.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Provide : .1 Fan performance curves showing point of operation, BHP and efficiency. .2 Sound rating data at point of operation. Indicate: .1 Motors, sheaves, bearings, shaft details, electrical data and all other pertinent information. .2 Minimum performance achievable with variable speed controllers.
.2
.3
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
N N
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .1 Spare parts to include: .1 Matched sets of belts (one set for each set installed).
.2
Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual.
1.6 MANUFACTURED ITEMS
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FANS GENERAL
.1
Capacity: flow rate, static pressure, bhp, efficiency, revolutions per minute, power, model, size, sound power data and as indicated on schedule. Fans: statically and dynamically balanced, constructed in conformity with AMCA 99. Sound ratings: comply with AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300. Unit shall bear AMCA certified sound rating seal.
.2
.3
.4
Performance ratings: based on tests performed in accordance with ANSI/AMCA 210, and ANSI/ASHRAE 51. [Unit shall bear AMCA certified rating seal, except for propeller fans smaller than 300 mm diameter]. Motors: .1 In accordance with Section 23 05 13 supplemented as specified herein. .2 For use with variable speed controllers where noted. .3 Sizes as indicated. .4 Two speed with two windings as indicated.
.5

.6
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
Accessories and hardware: matched sets of V-belt drives, adjustable slide rail motor bases, belt guards, coupling guards fan inlet safety screens as indicated and as specified in Section 23 05 13. Factory primed before assembly in colour standard to manufacturer. Scroll casing drains: as indicated.
Bearing lubrication systems plus extension lubrication tubes where bearings are not easily accessible.
.7
.8 .9
.10 .11
Vibration isolation: to Section 23 05 48. Flexible connections: to Section 23 33 00.
2.2 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
.1
Fan wheels: .1 Welded steel construction. .2 Maximum operating speed of centrifugal fans not more than 50% of first critical speed. .3 Air foil, forward curved or backward inclined blades, as indicated. Bearings: heavy duty split pillow-block grease lubricated ball or roller self aligning type with oil retaining, dust excluding seals and a certified minimum rated life of 100,000 h. Housings: .1 Volute with inlet cones: fabricated steel for wheels 300 mm or greater, steel or aluminum, for smaller wheels, braced, and with welded supports. .2 For horizontally and vertically split housings provide flanges on each section for bolting together, with gaskets of non-oxidizing non-flammable material. .3 Provide bolted airtight access doors with handles. Acceptable material: Cook, Greenheck, Acme. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
.3
.4
2.3 CABINET FANS GENERAL PURPOSE
.1
Fan characteristics and construction: as centrifugal fans.
.2
Cabinet hung single or multiple wheel with DWDI centrifugal fans in factory fabricated casing complete with vibration isolators and seismic control measures, motor, inside or outside casing as noted.

.3
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
Fabricate casing of zinc coated or phosphate treated steel of reinforced and braced for rigidity. Provide removable panels for access to interior. Uncoated, steel parts shall be painted over with corrosion resistant paint to CGSB 1-GP-181M. Finish inside and out, over prime coat, with rust resistant enamel. Internally line cabinet with 25 mm thick rigid acoustic insulation, pinned and cemented.
.4
Acceptable material: Cook, Greenheck, Penn. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.4 UTILITY SETS
.1
Characteristics and construction: for centrifugal fans. Preassemble single width centrifugal fan with removable weatherproof protective hood with vents. Provide belt driven sets with adjustable motor bed plate. Acceptable material: Cook, Greenheck, Acme. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
.3
.4
2.5 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
.1
Characteristics and construction: as for centrifugal fan wheels, with axial flow construction and direct or belt drive as indicated. Provide AMCA arrangements 1 or 9 as indicated with stiffened flanges, smooth rounded inlets, and stationary guide vanes. Acceptable material: Cook, Greenheck, Acme. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2
.3
2.6 PROPELLER FANS

.1
.2
Wall mounted, belt driven, steel supply fan.

Fan to be constructed of bolted and welded components utilizing corrosion resistant fasteners. Motor, bearings and drives shall be mounted on a heavy duty welded tubular steel support frame.
.3
Propeller shall be high-efficiency fabricated steel design with blades securely fastened to a minimum 7 gauge hub. Hub to be keyed and locked to fan shaft with minimum two set screws.

.4
HVAC FANS
Section 23 34 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
Bearings shall be heavy duty regreasable ball type in cast iron pillow blocks selected for minimum L50 life in excess of 200,000 hours.
All steel fan components shall be electrostatically coated and baked with polyester powder coating. Paint must exceed 1,000 hour salt spray under ASTM B117 test method.
.5
.6
Acceptable material: Cook, Greenheck, Acme. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FAN INSTALLATION
.1
Install fans as indicated, complete with resilient mountings specified in Section [23 05 48], flexible electrical leads and flexible connections in accordance with Section [23 33 00]. Provide sheaves and belts required for final air balance.
Bearings and extension tubes to be easily accessible.
.2
.3 .4
Access doors and access panels to be easily accessible.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 51-2007/AMCA 210-07, Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating. .2 ANSI/NFPA 90A, Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems. Underwriter's Laboratories (UL) UL 181-[2005], Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
.2 .3
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Capacity. .2 Pressure drop. .3 Noise rating. .4 Leakage. .5 Recommended installation.
.2
.1
1.4 CERTIFICATION
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from certified ADC (Air Diffusion Council) testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
.1
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
AIR TERMINAL UNITS
Section 23 36 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Terminal units of the same type to be product of one manufacturer.
2.2 SINGLE DUCT TERMINAL UNITS
.1 Units shall be constructed of 22 gauge galvanized steel with primary air valve damper of heavy gauge steel with peripheral gasket and solid steel shaft pivoted in slf-lubricating bearings. Air leakage past the fully closed damper shall not exceed 2% of the nominal catalogue rating at 740 Pa. pressure when tested in accordance with ASHRAE 130. .2 Units shall be pressure independent and shall be adjustable to any airflow between zero and the maximum catalogued volume. .3 Air flow sensor shall be of a cross configuration located on the inlet of the unit. Sensor shall provide accuracy of within 5% with a duct elbow located directly on the inlet. .4 Unit shall include protective metal shroud for housing of site installed digital controller. Controller to be supplied and installed by EMCS contractor.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Support independently of ductwork.

Install with at least 1000 mm of flexible inlet ducting and minimum of four duct diameters of straight inlet duct, same size as inlet. Locate so that controls, dampers and access panels are easily accessible.
.2 .3
.4
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
Section 23 37 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Door grilles: Section 08 90 00 - Louvres and Vents.
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 Capacity. .2 Throw and terminal velocity. .3 Noise criteria. .4 Pressure drop. .5 Neck velocity. .6 Construction and finish. .7 Mounting details.
.2
1.3 SAMPLES
.1 .2
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Samples are required for following: .1 Secure area grilles.
1.4 CERTIFICATIONS
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by him from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
.1

Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic, packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.2
.3
Section 23 37 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1
To meet capacity, pressure drop, terminal velocity, throw, noise level, neck velocity.
.2
Frames: .1 Full perimeter gaskets. .2 Security sleeves where noted. .3 Concealed fasteners. Concealed manual volume control damper operators. Colour: standard as directed by Architect.
Acceptable material: Price, Titus, Krueger, Nailor. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3 .4 .5
.1
Grilles, registers and diffusers of same generic type to be product of one manufacturer.
2.3 SUPPLY GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1
Type A: Steel, square 4 cone ceiling supply diffuser, adjustable air pattern, for mounting in T-bar grid, white powder coat finish. Provide safety chain from back side of diffuser to structure independent of ductwork.
.2
Type B: Steel, square 3 cone ceiling supply diffuser, adjustable air pattern, for mounting in T-bar grid, white powder coat finish.
Type C: Steel, square 4 cone ceiling supply diffuser, adjustable air pattern, for surface mount application, white powder coat finish.
.3
.4
Type K: Steel, heavy duty, 0 deflection grille with 19mm blade spacing, for surface mount application, 32mm boarder, blades parallel to long dimension, white powder coat finish. Grille complete with steel balancing damper.
2.4 RETURN AND EXHAUST GRILLES AND REGISTERS
.1
Type D: Steel, square perforated face exhaust diffuser, for mounting in T-bar grid, white powder coat finish. Provide safety chain from back side of diffuser to structure independent of ductwork.

.2
Section 23 37 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
Type E: Steel, maximum security, risk resistant exhaust grille with non-vision core, all welded construction. 5mm hot rolled steel face plate, 25mm 45 deflection angle louvres on 6mm centres with 44mm x 12 gauge hot rolled steel mullions on 13mm centres. Integral 5mm thick sleeve of hot rolled steel with continuous welded seams. Sleeve length to suite wall thickness plus retainer angles plus duct connection. Provide 4 sided mounting frame of 25mm x 25mm x 5mm hot rolled steel angle shipped loose for field welding to sleeve. Finish to be white powder coating.
Type F: Steel frame with 13mm x 13mm x 13mm aluminum grid core eggcrate style return grille for surface mount installation, white powder coat finish. Type G: Steel frame with aluminum grid as listed for Type F except grille to be complete with steel damper for exhaust applications. Type H: Steel, medium security, all welded screen face grille with integral sleeve. 5mm hot rolled steel face plate, 10 gauge x 10mm clear opening steel mesh secured by angles behind face plate. Provide sleeve and mounting angels as listed for Type E grille. Finish to be white powder coating. Type J: As listed for Type K grille except without balancing damper.
.3
.4
.5
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions.
Install with flat head colour matched screws in countersunk holes where fastenings are visible.
Bolt grilles, registers and diffusers, in place, in gymnasium and similar game rooms.
.3
.4
Provide concealed safety chain on each grille, register and diffuser as specified.
Secure area grilles shall be mounted in place with angle frame welded to sleeve clamped tightly to wall. Welding may be stitch style provided 50% of overall length is welded. No un-welded length longer than 25mm will be accepted. Grille face to be pulled tight on cell side and adjusted so no gap exists prior to welding. Redo installation if grille is loose in wall or if gap exists upon completion.
.5
LOUVRES, INTAKES AND VENTS
Section 23 37 20 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section Includes: .1 Mechanical louvers; intakes; vents; and reinforcement and bracing for air vents, intakes and gooseneck hoods. .2 Sustainable requirements for construction and verification.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM E90-09, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association (SMACNA).
.2
.1
Performance Requirements: .1 Catalogued or published ratings for manufactured items: obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, and limitations. .2 Indicate following: .1 Pressure drop. .2 Face area. .3 Free area. .4 Materials of construction and construction methods.
.2
Test Reports: .1 Submit certified data from independent laboratory substantiating acoustic and aerodynamic performance to ASTM E90.
.1
Section 23 37 20 Page 2 2011-06-10
Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GRAVITY ROOF OUTSIDE AIR INTAKES AND RELIEF VENTS
.1
Constructed of galvanized steel sheet with formed, arched panels with interlocking seams. Base height (top of curb cap to underside of intake screen) shall be 300mm minimum. Hood support members shall be galvanized steel structure connected to hood with tamper resistant fasteners. Hood is not to be hinged or otherwise easily removable.
.2
Hoods shall be internally insulated with 25mm fibreglass as specified for acoustic duct insulation.
Birdscreen of 12mm galvanized steel mesh shall be mounted horizontally across intake of hood. Intake shall be factory painted with baked enamel finish over primer compatible with galvanized Finish. Colour selected by Architect. Acceptable material: Greenheck Fabra Hood, Cook, Penn. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
.4
.5
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Section 23 37 20 Page 3 2011-06-10
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
In accordance with manufacturer's and SMACNA recommendations. Reinforce and brace as indicated.
Anchor securely into opening. Seal with caulking to ensure weather tightness.
.2 .3
.4
Acceptable material: Greenheck Fabra Hood, Cook, Penn. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders. Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Upon completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
3.3 CLEANING
.1 .2
PARTICULATE AIR FILTRATION
Section 23 41 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ASHRAE 52.1-[1992], Gravimetric And Dust Spot for Testing Air-cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing Particulate Matter. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-115.10-[M90], Disposable Air Filters for the Removal of Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems. .2 CAN/CGSB-115.14-[M91], High Efficiency Cartridge Type Supported Air Filters for the Removal of Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems. .3 CAN/CGSB-115.15-[M91], High Efficiency Rigid Type Air Filters for Removal of Particulate Matter from Ventilating Systems. .4 CAN/CGSB-115.18-[M85], Filter, Air, Extended Area Panel Type, Medium Efficiency. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada .1 ULC-S111-07, "Standard Method of Fire Tests for Air Filter Units".
.2
.3
.1
Submit shop drawing and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.1
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.2
.3
Section 23 41 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1

Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as frames and filters, addresses of suppliers, list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing for inclusion in operating manual.
.2
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Spare filters: in addition to filters to be installed immediately prior to acceptance by Departmental Representative, supply 1 complete set of filters for each filter unit or filter bank in accordance with section 01 78 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1
Media: suitable for air at 100% RH and air temperatures between minus 40 and 50C.
.2
Number of units, size and thickness of panels, overall dimensions of filter bank, configuration and capacities: as indicated. Pressure drop when clean and dirty, sizes and thickness: as indicated on schedule.
.3
2.2 ACCESSORIES
.1
Holding frames: channel section construction of galvanized steel, 1.6 mm thick, except where specified otherwise. Seals: to ensure leakproof operation. Blank-off plates: as required, to fit all openings and of same material as holding frames. Access and servicing: through doors/panels on each side and/or from upstream face of filter bank where indicated.
.2 .3
.4
Section 23 41 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.3 RIGID, SUPPORTED PLEAT TYPE FILTERS, 25-30 % EFFICIENCY
.1
Media: disposable preformed cotton/polyester blend cartridge. Holding frame: high wet strength cardboard. Media support: welded wire grid. Performance: .1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency 25-30% to ASHRAE 52.1. .2 MERV 8 to ASHRAE 52.2. Fire rated: to ULC-S111. Acceptable material: Camfil FARR 30/30, AAF, Air Guard. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6
2.4 CARTRIDGE TYPE FILTERS, 80-85 % EFFICIENCY
.1
Media: deep pleated, disposable, high efficiency, to CAN/CGSB-115.14. Holding frame: galvanized steel with bracing. Media support: welded wire grid. Performance: .1 Average atmospheric dust spot efficiency 80-85% to ASHRAE 52.1. .2 MERV 13 to ASHRAE 52.2. Fire rated: to ULC-S111. Acceptable material: Camfil FARR riga-flo, AAF, Air Guard. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6
2.5 FILTER GAUGES - DIAL TYPE
.1
Diaphragm actuated, direct reading. Compatible with air from minus 6C to 48C. Scale calibrated to read full range of filter from clan installation through fully loaded at 50% pressure beyond changeout limit.
.2
Two phototransistor acutated DPDT relays included for low/high limit sensing. Electrically rated for 10A@28 VDC, 10A@120 VAC. Acceptable material: Dwyer Photohelic A3000. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.3
Section 23 41 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and with adequate space for access, maintenance and replacement.
3.2 REPLACEMENT MEDIA
.1 .2
Replace all media with new upon acceptance.

Provide one spare set of new, clean filter media for all installations at time of completion.
3.3 FILTER GAUGES
.1
Install type as indicated across each filter bank (pre-filter and final filter) in approved and easy readable location.
Mark each filter gauge with value of pressure drop for clean condition and manufacturer's recommended replacement (dirty) value.
.2
BREECHING, CHIMNEYS AND STACKS
Section 23 51 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA)
.2
Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
1.3 PRODUCT DATA
.1
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Clearly indicate following: .1 Methods of sealing sections. .2 Methods of expansion. .3 Details of thimbles. .4 Bases/Foundations. .5 Supports. .6 Termination details.
.2
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.6 CERTIFICATIONS
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by independent testing agency or manufacturer signifying adherence to codes and standards.
.1

.2
Section 23 51 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene, plastic, packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.3
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 TYPE AL29-4C GAS VENT
.1 ULC labelled, for exterior installation of natural gas-fired category III and IV appliances, boilers. .2 Sectional, prefabricated, double wall with 25mm air space AL29-4C. Stainless steel inner wall. Pre-finished aluminized steel outer wall. Mated fittings and couplings. .3 Include all required elbows, drain section, stack cap, roof flashing, storm collar, firestop, plate support, guy ring, appliance adapter, sealant. .4 Acceptable material: Metal-Fab, Security. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.2 PVC
.1 Venting shall be provided as listed by Manufacturer and acceptable to authority having jurisdiction. .2 Materal to be PVC, class 160, ASTM D02241, schedule 40, ASTM D-1785 and assembled using compatible primer and cement certified for use on this material.
PART 3 EXECUTION
.1 .2
Follow manufacturers installation recommendations. Support chimney at equipment connection, roof and intermediate levels as required. Install thimbles where penetrating roof. Install flashings on chimneys penetrating roofs.
.3 .4

.5
Section 23 51 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
Install vent terminations as recommended by manufacturers of equipment and chimney. Boiler equipment shall be vented using AL29-4C product only (no PVC).
.6
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 23 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI Z21.13-2004/CSA 4.9-2004, Gas-Fired Low-Pressure Steam and Hot Water Boilers. American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/ American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) .1 ANSI/ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IV, [2001]. Canadian Gas Association (CGA) .1 CAN1-3.1-77(R2006), Industrial and Commercial Gas-Fired Package Boilers. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-B149.1-[10], Natural Gas and Propane Installation Code.
.2
.3
.4
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate the following: .1 General arrangement showing terminal points, instrumentation test connections. .2 Clearances for operation, maintenance, servicing, tube cleaning, tube replacement. .3 Piping hook-ups. .4 Equipment electrical drawings. .5 Burners and controls. .6 All miscellaneous equipment. .7 Flame safety control system. .8 Breeching and stack configuration. Engineering data to include: .1 Performance data at 25%, 50%, 75%, 100% of design capacity.
.2
.3
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1
Submit operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
1.6 MAINTENANCE
.1
Provide maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Procedures.
.2
Maintenance materials to include: .1 Special tools for burners, manholes, handholes and Operation and Maintenance. .2 Spare parts for 1 year of operation. .3 Spare gaskets.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BOILERS
1. Furnish and install boilers as shown on plans with all applicable codes and authorities having local, provincial and federal jurisdiction. The boiler plant shall consist of two (2) hydronic boiler modules. Boiler shall be UL listed, CSD-1 approved with ASME coded and stamped. Boiler shall have an input of 586 kW with a gross output of 539 kW. Electrical service to each unit shall be 208V/3/60Hz 15 amp service. The boiler control panel shall be of a modular component design with the boiler flame safeguard control, temperature controller and annunciator board field replaceable. Boiler shall have a footprint of no more than 710 mm W, 1410 mm L, 2000 mm H with a UL listing for zero side wall clearance. The boiler installed weight shall not exceed 770 kg dry. The boiler shall have an ASME approved relief valve setting of 410 kPa. .2 Boiler modules shall be natural gas fired, condensing fire tube design with a modulating forced draft power burner and positive pressure vent discharge.
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
The boiler burner shall be capable of a 15 to 1 turndown ratio of the firing rate without loss of combustion efficiency or staging of gas valves. The burner shall be nozzle mix design, with spark ignition and flame rectification. The burner head shall be cast stainless steel. All burner material exposed to the combustion zone shall be of stainless steel construction. There shall be no moving parts within the burner itself. The air and natural gas input shall be metered by a modulating air / fuel valve. The modulating motor must be linked to both the gas valve body and air valve body with a single linkage. The linkage shall not require any field adjustment. The boiler shall be capable of handling return water temperatures down to 4.5C without any failure due to thermal shock or fireside condensation. The heat exchanger shall be ASME stamped for a working pressure not less than 1034 kPa. The pressure vessel shall have a maximum water volume of 114 L. The boiler water pressure drop shall not exceed 28 kPa at 11.3 L/S. The boiler water connections shall be 100 mm flanged 150 lb. ANSI rated. The pressure vessel is constructed of SA53 carbon steel, with a 6 mm thick wall and 13 mm thick upper head. Inspection openings in the pressure vessel shall be in accordance with ASME Section IV pressure vessel code. .3 The boiler control system shall be segregated into three components: Control Panel, Power Box, and Input / Output Connection Box. The entire system shall be Underwriters Laboratories Recognized.
The control panel shall consist of six (6) individual circuit boards utilizing state-of-the-art surface-mount technology, in a single enclosure. These circuit boards shall be defined as follows: display board incorporating LED display to read temperature, and a VFD display module for all message annunciation; CPU board which houses all control functions; electric low water cut-off board with test and manual reset functions; power supply board; ignition / stepper board incorporating flame safeguard control; and connector board. Each board shall be individually field replaceable. The combustion safeguard / flame monitoring system shall utilize spark ignition and a rectification type flame sensor. The control panel hardware shall support both RS-232 and RS-485 remote communications. The controls shall annunciate boiler and sensor status and include extensive self-diagnostic capabilities that incorporates a minimum of 8 separate status messages and 34 separate fault messages.
The control panel shall incorporate three self-governing features designed to enhance operation in modes where it receives an external control signal by eliminating nuisance faults due to over-temperature, improper external signal or loss of external signal. These features are called: Setpoint High Limit, Setpoint Low
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
Limit, and Failsafe Mode.
The boiler control system shall incorporate the following additional features for external system interface: system start temperature feature; pump delay timer; auxiliary start delay timer; auxiliary temperature sensor; mA output feature which allows for simple monitoring of either temperature setpoint, outlet temperature, or fire rate; remote interlock circuit; delayed interlock circuit; and fault relay for remote fault alarm. Each boiler shall utilize an electric single seated safety shut-off valve with proof of closure switch in its gas train and incorporate dual over-temperature protection with manual reset in accordance with ASME Section IV and CSD-1. Temperature Control Modes: The boiler shall operate in the control modes listed below: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 Internal Setpoint Indoor / Outdoor Reset 4 ma to 20 ma Temperature Setpoint 4 ma to 20 ma Direct Drive Boiler Management System (BMS) Combination Control System (CCP)
Open protocol interface shall be included with boiler for connection with building control system. Protocol shall be one of the following: BacNet I.P., BacNet MSTP, LonTalk or Modbus. .4 All aspects of installation of the boiler shall be in strict accordance with manufacturers instructions. The vent system must conform with all manufacturers recommendations and utilize UL listed stainless steel AL-29-4C Positive Pressure. The vent must be sized in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Boiler plant piping shall be field constructed of materials as specified. Boiler shall have individually isolating shut-off valves for service and maintenance. Boiler shall require a minimum gas pressure of 7 W.C. at 2,000 scfh (full load rated capacity). Boiler shall be provided with a supply gas regulator for proper gas regulation with a 2 NPT connection.
The pressure vessel / heat exchanger of the boiler shall .5 carry a 7 year prorated, limited warranty against failure due to condensate corrosion, thermal stress, mechanical defects or workmanship. A Warranty Certificate must be issued to the Owner from the manufacturer and a copy of
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
warranty must be submitted for Engineers approval. .6 Contractor shall provide the services of a local factory authorized representative to supervise all phases of equipment start-up. A letter of compliance with all factory recommendations and installation instructions shall be submitted to the Engineer with operation and maintenance instructions. .7 Acceptable material: Aerco Benchmark BMK2.0, Fulton, Hydro Therm. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 Install in accordance with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessels Code Section IV, regulations of Province having jurisdiction, except where specified otherwise, and manufacturers recommendations.
Make all required piping connections to all inlets and .2 outlets recommended by boiler manufacturer.
.3 Mount unit level on concrete housekeeping pad and maintain clearances as indicated or if not indicated, as recommended by manufacturer for operation, servicing and maintenance without disruption of operation of any other equipment/system. .4 Confirm adequate space surrounds installation for acceptable servicing prior to proposing equivalent boiler equipment.
3.2 MOUNTINGS AND ACCESSORIES
.1
Safety Valve and Relief Valve: .1 Pipe separate discharge from each valve and back to glycol make-up tank. Blowdown Valve: .1 Run discharge to terminate as indicated.
.2
3.3 COMMISSIONING
.1
Manufacturer to: .1 Certify installation. .2 Start up and commission installation. .3 Carry out on-site performance verification tests.
HEATING BOILERS
Section 23 52 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
.4 .2
Demonstrate operation and maintenance.
Provide consultant at least 24 h notice prior to inspections, tests, and demonstrations. Submit written report of inspections and test results.
AIR-TO-AIR ENERGY RECOVERY EQUIPMENT
Section 23 72 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 Materials, components and installation for heat reclaim devices. Sustainable requirements for construction and verification.
.2
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) .1 ANSI/ASHRAE 84-2008, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers (ANSI approved). Coordinate with Section 23 73 00 HVAC Air handling Units.
.2
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section .1 01 33 00. Indicate following: .1 Performance at conditions listed. .2 Constuction. .3 Electrical characteristics. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Certificates: Catalogued or published ratings: obtained from .1 tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force. .2 Provide confirmation of testing.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions and Section 01 61 00.
.2
Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
Section 23 72 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.5 MAINTENANCE
.1
Extra Materials: Furnish list of individual manufacturer's .1 recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 .2
Comply with ASHRAE 84. Coordinate with Section 23 73 00 HVAC Packaged Air Handling Units.
2.2 AIR TO AIR FIXED PLATE EXCHANGER
.1 .2
Casing: 0.8 mm thick galvanized steel. Heat transfer surfaces: 6 mil embossed aluminum, edge sealed and bonded to casing. Cross contamination: not permitted up to 10 wc pressure differential between air streams. Condensate drain: NPS2. Removable access panels. Performance characteristics: as indicated.
Plate heat exchanger shall be sectioned within the unit to allow for a section replacement without requiring any lifting devices. All sections to be joined together with a silicone gasket for airtight assembly.
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7
.8
Access to all four sides of the air/air plate exchanger shall be provided for cleaning and inspection.
An access section wit sloped drain pan shall be provided upstream and downstream of the air/air heat exchanger to allow for service, collection of condensate and cleaning of the plate exchanger without allowing standing water to be contained within the unit cabinet.
.9
.10
Acceptable material: Venmar, McQuay, Engineered Air. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
Section 23 72 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. Support independently of adjacent ductwork.
.2
3.3 CLEANING
.1 .2
AIR HANDLING UNITS PACKAGED
Section 23 73 11 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute/Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute (ANSI/ARI) .1 ANSI/ARI 430-[99(R2002)], Central-Station Air-Handling Units.
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
Indicate following: fan, fan curves showing point of operation, motor drive, bearings, filters, mixing box, dampers, coils plus all performance data.
.2
.3
.1
.1

Spare filters: in addition to filters to be installed immediately prior to acceptance by Engineer, supply 1 complete set of filters for each filter unit or filter bank in accordance with Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals. Spare drive belts: in addition to belts installed in equipment prior to acceptance by Engineer, supply 1 belt or matched belt set for each in accordance with Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals. Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment such as bearings and seals, and addresses of suppliers, together with list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for placement into operating manual
.2
.3
.4
.1
Section 23 73 11 Page 2 2011-06-10
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's name, address.
Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse and return of pallets, crates, paddling and packaging materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1
Air Handling Units shall be built to the level of quality as herein specified and to the description of the Air Handling Unit Schedule.
Substitution of any product other than that specified, must assure no deviation below the stated capacities, air flow rate, heat transfer rate, filtration efficiency and air mixing quality. Power requirements must not be exceeded, and where specifically defined, sound power levels must not be exceeded. Applications for equal or alternate must address these factors. Unless stated otherwise, air handling units are to be shipped to the job in one piece, factory assembled. Units shall be manufactured ready for field wiring. All internal wiring connection points shall be brought to junction boxes external to the unit. Conduit inside units shall be standard EMT except where connection is made to vibration isolated equipment where liquid-tite flex shall be used. Size conduit to requirements of Canadian Electric Code with at least 50% spare capacity. Minimum size motor connections shall be 25mm diameter. Separate low voltage control from line voltage power systems. Seal conduit penetrations of unit walls. External junction boxes shall be mounted along exterior connection side for interior units and to bottom side adjacent to duct connections for exterior units. Label all conduit runs at junction boxes. Wiring and connections to be provided in field by respective controls or electrical division. Provide conduit, fixtures and switches for interior lighting system wit lights located in each compartment equipped with access door. Fixtures shall be sealed waterproof marine style sized for use with compact fluorescent bulbs (bulbs included). Locate fixtures so as not to impede access to components. Provide one switch located on outside of unit adjacent to filter
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 23 73 11 Page 3 2011-06-10
access. Switch shall include pilot light to indicate circuit is on. Provide weatherproof assembly on external unit. Continue conduit to junction box located as noted in .4 (previous) for exterior unit. Wiring and connections to be provided in field by electrical division. .6 The air handling units and major components shall be products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such equipment and with a minimum of fifteen continuous years of proven production experience. Manufacturer shall have a fully implemented and auditable quality assurance program, equal to the ISO-9002 Quality Standard.
.7
2.2 UNIT CONSTRUCTION
.1 Unit casing shall be of minimum 16 (1.6 mm) gauge satin coat galvanized sheet metal. Surfaces shall be cleaned with a degreasing solvent to remove oil and metal oxides and primed with a two part acid based etching primer. Finish coat shall be an electrostatically applied enamel, to all exposed surfaces. All unprotected metal and welds shall be factory coated. .2 All walls, roofs and floors shall be of formed construction, with at least two breaks at each joint. Joints shall be secured by sheet metal screws or pop rivets. Wall and floor joints shall be broken in and, on all outdoor units roof joints broken out (exposed) for rigidity. All joints shall be caulked with a water resistant sealant. .3 The following components shall be provided with a 22 gauge (.85 mm) solid, or 24 gauge (.70 mm) (40% free area) perforated galvanized metal liner over insulated wall and roof areas: Solid Liner Perf. Liner - Fan Sections ---x - Coil Sections x ---- Filter Sections x ---- Mixing Sections x ---- Access Sections ---x - Heat Recovery SectionS x ---.4 Units shall be provided with access doors to the following components: fans and motors; filters; dampers and operators; access plenums and humidifiers/wet cells/ electrical control panels; burner compartments; compressor compartments. Access doors shall be large enough for easy access. Removal of screwed wall panels will not be acceptable.
Section 23 73 11 Page 4 2011-06-10
.5 Provide 18 gauge, double walled, hinged access doors, fully lined, with Leverlok handles, operable from both sides for all units. Provide hinged access doors in welded steel frames. Doors shall be sealed with closed cell bulb gasket. Whenever possible, hinged access doors to areas of negative pressure shall open out, and to areas of positive pressure shall open in. Where space constrictions require the use of outward opening doors to an area of positive pressure, a clear warning label must be affixed. Hinged access doors shall be provided with tie back clips. Hinges shall be heavy duty corrosion resistant aluminum that allow door to open 180. Continuous hinges are not acceptable. .6 Casings shall be supported on formed galvanized steel channel or structural channel supports, designed and welded for low deflections. Integral lifting lugs shall be provided for hoisting. .7 All units shall be internally insulated with 2 (50 mm) thick nominal 3 lb./cu.ft. (48 kg./cu.m.) density acoustic insulation (rigid polyurethane min. R13 acceptable). Nominal 3 lb/cu.ft. (48 kg/cu.m.) insulation is secured with steel angles. All longitudinal insulation joints and butt ends shall be covered by a sheet metal break to prevent erosion of exposed edges. Drain pans and all floor areas shall be insulated on the underside. Where polyurethane is used, all liners shall be solid. .8 Unit casing floors in walk in sections shall be fabricated with 14 ga. (2.0 mm) galvanized checker plate steel. Provide reinforcing channels under floor to minimize deflection. Floors shall be double walled with insulation to match other sections. .9 In air-to-air heat reclaim units, the exhaust section drain pans shall be an integral part of the floor paneling, a minimum of 2 (50 mm) deep, with welded corners. Drain pans shall extend over the full exhaust fan plenum and be connected with a 1-1/2 (38 mm) M.P.T. drain connection. All drain pans shall be stainless steel with fully welded seams. .10 Exterior units. .1 Units for exterior mounting shall be designed and manufactured for that purpose and shall not be interior constructed units weatherized for outside mounting. .2 Air handling units located outdoors shall be weatherproofed and equipped for installation outdoors. This shall include generally for the prevention of infiltration of rain and snow into the unit, louvers or hoods on air intakes and exhaust openings with 1 (25 mm) galvanized inlet screens; rain gutters or diverters over all access doors, all
Section 23 73 11 Page 5 2011-06-10
joints caulked with a water resistant sealant; roof joints turned up 2 (50 mm) with three break interlocking design; outer wall panels extend a minimum of inch (6 mm) below the floor panel; drain trap(s) connections for field supply & installation of drain traps. Units mounted on roof curbs incorporate welded floor to base construction. Floors are of three break upstanding design with welded corners and free of penetrations. Unit underside joints are caulked. Units shall be provided with optional channel flashing constructed of 22 gauge (.85 mm) galvanized steel, painted to match unit.
.3 All exterior access doors shall be equipped with heavy duty padlock hasps to allow securement in closed position. .4 Provide full perimeter roof mounting curb for outdoor units of heavy gauge sheet metal, minimum of 400 mm high, and complete with wood nailer, neoprene sealing strip, and fully welded Z bar with 1 (25 mm) upturn on inner perimeter, to provide a complete seal against the elements. Curb shall be double wall. insulated with 50mm rigid fiberglass. Structural wall to be minimum 18 gauge galvanized steel. Contractor shall provide 25mm x 20mm thick neoprene gasket between curb and unit.
2.3 FANS
.1 Centrifugal fans shall be rated in accordance with AMCA Standard Test Code, Bulletin 210. Fan manufacturer shall be a member of AMCA. All fans and fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced during factory test run. Fan shafts shall be provided with a rust inhibiting coating. .2 Fans shall be equipped with greaseable, self aligning ball or roller type pillow block bearings. Extend lubrication lines where required to provide access for greasing. .3 Drives shall be adjustable on fans with motors 5 HP (3.73 kw) or smaller. On fans with larger motors, fixed drives shall be provided. All drives shall be provided with a rust inhibiting coating. The air balancer shall provide for drive changes (if required) during the air balance procedure. .4 Provide full section return air fan(s) as scheduled. The use of power exhaust propeller or centrifugal fan arrangements will not be considered. .5 Motor, fan bearings and drive assembly shall be located inside the fan plenum to minimize bearing wear and to allow for internal vibration isolation of the fan-motor assembly,
Section 23 73 11 Page 6 2011-06-10
where required. Motor mounting shall be adjustable to allow for variations in belt tension. .6 Provide belt guards on all units with walk in sections over 1524 mm high.
.7 Fan-motor assemblies shall be provided with vibration isolators. Isolators shall be bolted to steel channel welded to unit floor which is welded to the structural frame of the unit. The isolators shall be neoprene-in-shear type of single 230 mm to 380 mm forward curved fans. All other fans shall incorporate vertical spring type isolators with leveling bolts, bridge bearing waffled pads with minimum 25 mm static deflection designed to achieve high isolation efficiency. Fans shall be attached to the discharge panel by a polyvinyl chloride coated polyester woven fabric, with a sealed double locking fabric to metal connection. Refer to Section 23 05 48 Vibration Isolation. .8 All single phase belt drive motor applications shall include rubber isolation for motors H.P. (.19 kw) through 1 H.P. (1.1 kw). Provide internal spring isolation for single phase motors over 1 H.P. (1.1 kw). .9 Provide single extended grease line from far side to access side bearing. .10 Fan motors shall be high efficiency TEFC. Refer to Section 23 05 13 Common Motor Requirements for HVAC Equipment.
2.4 COILS
.1 Coils shall be 5/8 O.D. constructed of Copper tube, aluminum fin, copper headers with schedule 40 steel pipe connectors. Fins constructed of aluminum or copper shall be rippled for maximum heat transfer and shall be mechanically bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion of the tubes. The coils shall have a galvanized steel casing. All coils shall be factory tested with air at 2070 kPa while immersed in an illuminated water tank. Headers with schedule 40 steel pipe connections utilize male N.P.T. up to 50 mm. For63 mm, 75 mm and 100 mm connections are standard grooved pipe connection. .2 Headers on indoor units shall be outside the air handling unit for maximum serviceability. The non-headered end of the coil shall be fully concealed. Provide an insulated header cover to conceal headers exposed to outside. .3 Coils shall be removable from the unit at the header end, unless shown otherwise on the drawings. All water coils shall be equipped with a capped vent tapping at the top of the return header, and a capped drain tapping at the bottom of the supply header. .4 Coils shall be cleanable type provided with brass fittings and removable plugs for each tube at the return end.
Section 23 73 11 Page 7 2011-06-10
.5 Water and glycol coils shall be circuited to provide adequate tube velocities to meet design requirements. Internal turbulators are not acceptable.
Multiple row coils shall be of staggered tube design .6 circuited to optimize capacity with minimum pressure drop.
.7 Outdoor units with glycol coils shall be provided with a fully insulated and weatherproofed piping vestibule, to allow for the entry of piping from the building into the air handling unit, and for connection to the coil(s). The piping vestibule shall be designed to accommodate piping, valves and controls as shown on the drawings. Access panels shall be large enough for easy access.
2.5 FILTERS
.1 Filter sections shall be provided with adequately sized access doors to allow easy removal of filters. Filter removal shall be from one side as noted on the drawings. .2 For units with filter banks up to 1825 mm high, the filter modules shall be designed to slide out of the unit. Side removal 50 mm filters shall slide into a formed metal track, sealing against metal spacers at each end of the track. Cartridge type filters shall slide into an extruded aluminum track against a gasketted sealer strip. Associated 50 mm prefilters shall slide into an integral track in the aluminum extrusion. .3 For units with filter banks 1854 mm high and larger, the filters shall be lift out, from an access plenum upstream of the filters. Lift out 50 mm filters shall fit into a horizontal track from which they are lifted up and out. Cartridge filters shall be inserted into a frame grid, from the upstream side of the filter section. Associated prefilters shall slip into the same frame structure, and all shall be secured with clips. Filter frame structure shall be reinforced to withstand a 1490 Pa. w.c. differential pressure. .4 Where filters are provided in air handling units for make-up air applications and where hoar frost may occur, only steel frame filters are acceptable. Where indicated, units shall have both summer (upstream of heating coil or gas heat exchanger) and winter (downstream of heating coil or gas heat exchanger) filter sections. Only one set of filters is installed depending on ambient conditions. .5 Refer to Section 23 44 00 HVAC Air System Filters.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.6 DAMPERS
Section 23 73 11 Page 8 2011-06-10
.1 Damper frames shall be u-shaped galvanized metal sections securely screwed or welded to the air handling unit chassis. Pivot rods of (13 mm) aluminum, shall turn in nylon or bronze bushings. Rods shall be secured to the blade by means of straps and set screws. .2 Blades shall be 18 gauge (1.3 mm) galvanized metal with two breaks on each edge and three breaks on centreline for rigidity. The pivot rod shall nest in the centreline break. Damper edges shall interlock. Maximum length of damper between supports shall be 42 inches (1070 mm). Damper linkage brackets shall be constructed of galvanized metal. .3 Dampers shall be: .1 Standard construction for all dampers include blade ends sealed with an adhesive backed foam polyurethane gasketting. Dampers are interlocked from the centre. .2 Dampers exposed to outdoor conditions shall be insulated, extruded aluminum as specified in Section 23 33 15 HVAC Dampers - Operating. .4 Mixing dampers shall be parallel blade type. .5 Two position inlet dampers shall be parallel blade type. .6 Face and bypass dampers shall be opposed blade type.
2.7 WEATHER HOODS
All air intakes and air discharge openings shall be .1 protected with weatherhoods. Hoods shall be constructed with birdscreens and rain gutters. Face velocity through the outside air intake or discharge dampers shall not exceed 500 fpm to prevent water or snow carryover.
2.8 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
.1
Exterior condensing units: .1 Cabinets shall be of heavy gauge galvanized steel with powder coat paint finish. Construction shall allow all access panels to be removed without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. Stamped louvre panels shall provide full protection of condenser coil surfaces. Unit shall sit on a galvanized steel base. .2 Compressor shall be scroll type, hermetically sealed with internal high temperature protection. Compressor shall be mounted on rubber supports to reduce vibration. Compressor shall have internal pressure relief. Compressors larger than 5 ton capacity shall have crankcase heater. .3 Condenser coils to be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tube surface. .4 Low ambient control shall allow operation down 0F (-18C). Units shall include low and high pressure control. .5 Condensing unit refrigerant circuits shall include service isolation valves.

.2
Section 23 73 11 Page 9 2011-06-10
Interior housed evaporator coils .1 Horizontal housed evaporator coils shall be mounted in galvanized steel duct casing with 12mm (1/2) fiberglass insulation coated on air side. Cabinet shall include drain pan piped to exterior of cabinet. Field pipe drain to nearest floor drain. .2 Evaporator coils shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes. Evaporator shall be matched to condenser capacity and efficiency. .3 Coils shall be equipped with expansion valves mounted at factory. Piping refer to Section 23 23 00
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 APPLICATION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Provide appropriate protection apparatus. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and as indicated. Ensure adequate clearance for servicing and maintenance.
.3
3.3 FANS
.1 .2
Install fan sheaves required for final air balance.
Install flexible connections at fan inlet and fan outlets. Install vibration isolators.
.3
3.4 DRIP PANS
.1
Install deep seal P traps on drip lines. Depth of water seal to be 1.5 times static pressure at this point. Pipe all drain pans to closest floor drain. Terminate directly over drain with air gap separation.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.5 SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
.1
Section 23 73 11 Page 10 2011-06-10
Install according to manufacturers instruction and as supplemented herein. Exterior condensing units shall be set on roof on top of precast concrete patio blocks. Provide sufficient quantity so that all portions of units are supported on blocks. Clean any debris from roof prior to setting blocks in place. Condensing units shall be mounted level. Seal and flash line sets at roof penetrations. Interior housed evaporator coils shall be supported independently from structure. Do not support from ducts. Do not support ducts from unit. Set level for proper drainage from condensate drip pan. Pipe pan to nearest floor drain. Piping material shall be as specified for sanitary sewer.
.2
.3
3.6 CLEANING
.1 .2
Clean in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Waste Management: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING
Section 23 81 23 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA B52-05 SMART, Consists of B52-05, Mechanical Refrigeration Code and B52HB-05, A Practical Handbook for Implementing CSA B52, Mechanical Refrigeration Code.
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
Include product data for: unit. condensing unit, evaporator
.2
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
.2
PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE

.1 The units shall be rated in accordance with Air-conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institutes (AHRI) Standard 210 and bear the ARI Certification label. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor section. The outdoor unit shall be pre-charged with R-410a refrigerant for 70 feet (20 metres) of refrigerant tubing. System efficiency shall meet or exceed minimum 14 SEER.
.2 .3 .4
.5
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.2 OUTDOOR UNIT
Section 23 81 23 Page 2 2011-06-10
.1 The outdoor unit shall be compatible with the indoor units as specified. The connected indoor unit shall be of the same capacity as the outdoor unit.
The outdoor unit shall be equipped with a control board .2 that interfaces with the indoor unit to perform all necessary operation functions.
.3 The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at -40C ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. Optional wind baffle shall be provided on air inlet and discharge. .4 The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 30 metres between indoor and outdoor units. .5 System shall operate up to a maximum refrigerant tubing length of 50 metres between indoor and outdoor units without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil. Unit shall be pre-charged for a maximum of 20 metres of refrigerant tubing. .6 The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory. .7 .8 Outdoor unit sound level shall not exceed: 48 dBa.
Cabinet .1 The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection. .2 Mounting feet shall be provided and shall be welded to the base of the cabinet and be of sufficient size to afford reliable equipment mount and stability. .3 Access shall be afforded to all serviceable parts by means of removable panel sections. .4 The fan grill shall be of ABS plastic. .5 Cabinet mounting and construction shall be sufficient to withstand 250 kph wind speed conditions. .9 motor. .2 Fan blade shall be or aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge .3 airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent external contact with moving parts. .10 Coil .1 L shaped condenser coil shall be of copper tubing Fan .1
Unit shall be furnished with a single AC fan
Section 23 81 23 Page 3 2011-06-10
with flat aluminum fins to reduce debris build up and allow maximum airflow. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. .2 Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of an electronic linear expansion valve (LEV) metering device. The LEV shall be controlled by a microprocessor controlled step motor. .3 All refrigerant lines between outdoor and indoor units shall be of annealed, refrigeration grade copper tubing, ACR Type, meeting ASTM B280 requirements, individually insulated in twin-tube, flexible, closed-cell, CFC-free (ozone depletion potential of zero), elastomeric material for the insulation of refrigerant pipes and tubes with thermal conductivity equal to or better than 0.27 BTU-inch/hour per Sq Ft / F, a water vapor transmission equal to or better than 0.08 Perm-inch and superior fire ratings such that insulation will not contribute significantly to fire and up to 1 thick insulation shall have a Flame-Spread Index of less than 25 and a Smoke-development Index of less than 50 as tested by ASTM E 84 and CAN / ULC S-102.
Compressor .1 The compressor shall be a DC twin-rotor rotary compressor with Variable Speed Inverter Drive Technology. .2 The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load. .3 To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be automatically, intermittently applied to the compressor motor windings to maintain sufficient heat to vaporize any refrigerant. .4 The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration. Electrical .1 The electrical power of the unit shall be 208volts or 230 volts, single phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. .2 Power for the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit. .3 The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit. The control signal between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. .4 The unit shall have Pulse Amplitude Modulation circuit to utilize 98% of input power supply. .12
.11

.13
Section 23 81 23 Page 4 2011-06-10
Operating Range Indoor Air Intake Temperature D.B. W.B. D.B. W.B. Outdoor Air Intake Temperature 95F (35C) D.B. 115F 71F (21.7C) (46C) 67F (19.4C) D.B. -40F 57F (13.9C) (-40C)*
Operating Range
Cooling
Maximum Minimum
2.3 INDOOR UNIT
.1
The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan motor. The unit, in conjunction with the wired, wall mounted controller shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen before shipment from the factory. Capacity of indoor unit shall match that of the outdoor unit. Unit Cabinet: The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with smooth finish, flat front panel design with access for filter. The unit shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied, pre-drilled, mounting plate. Fan: The indoor unit fan shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive fan with a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall consist of three (3) speeds: Low, Mid, and Hi and Auto. The fan shall have a selectable Auto fan setting that will adjust the fan speed based on the difference between controller set-point and space temperature. Vane: There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution. The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease downward air resistance for lower sound levels, and shall close the outlet port when operation is stopped. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement. Filter: Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter.
.2
.3
.4
.5

.6
Section 23 81 23 Page 5 2011-06-10
Coil: The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre-coated aluminum strake fins on copper tubing. All tube joints shall be brazed with silver alloy. Coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.
Electrical: The electrical power of the unit shall be 208 volts or 230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The power to the indoor unit shall be supplied from the outdoor unit. For A-Control, a three (3) conductor AWG-14 wire with ground shall provide power feed and bi-directional control transmission between the outdoor and indoor units. Performance: Each system shall perform in accordance to the ratings shown in the table below. Cooling performance shall be based on 80F DB, 67F WB (26.7C DB, 19.4C WB) for the indoor unit and 95F DB, 75F WB (35C DB, 29.3C WB) for the outdoor unit.
.7
.8
System Model Number PKA-A36KA(L)
Cooling Capacity Btu/h 12,000 34,200
TPW Coolin g 5,030
SEER 14.0
CFM (Hi/Dry) 920
.9
TPW = Total Power Watts System Control: The indoor unit shall be connected to a wall mounted wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. The wired controller shall have a large liquid crystal display (LCD). The controller shall consist of an On/Off button, Increase/Decrease Set Temperature buttons, a Heat/Cool/Auto/Dry mode selector, a Timer Menu button, a Timer On/Off button, Set Time buttons, a Fan Speed selector, a Ventilation button, a Test Run button, and a Check Mode button. The controller shall have a built-in temperature sensor. Temperature shall be displayed in either Fahrenheit (F) or Celsius (C). Temperature changes shall be by increments of 1F (1C) with a range of 67F to 87F (19C to 30C).
2.4 ACCEPTABLE PRODUCT

.1 Mitsubishi Mr. Slim PKA-36FA1 indoor evaporator unit complete with PUY-A36NHA high efficiency air cooled condensing unit with -40C low ambient control feature.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART3 EXECUTION
Section 23 81 23 Page 6 2011-06-10
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install unit in accordance with manufacturers instructions and as indicated. Ensure adequate clearance for servicing and maintenance.
Exterior condensing units shall be set on roof on top of precast concrete patio blocks. Provide sufficient quantity so that all portions of units are supported on blocks. Clean any debris from roof prior to setting blocks in place. Condensing units shall be mounted level. Seal and flash line sets at roof penetrations. Interior housed evaporator coils shall be supported independently from structure. Do not support from ducts. Do not support ducts from unit. Set level for proper drainage from condensate drip pan. Pipe pan to nearest floor drain. Piping material shall be as specified for sanitary sewer.
.2
.3
.4
Section 23 81 23 Page 7 2011-06-10
RADIANT HEATING UNITS
Section 23 83 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Section 01 74 20 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal. Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Section 23 11 23 - Facility Natural Gas Piping.
.3 .4
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate: .1 Equipment, capacity, piping, and connections. .2 Dimensions, internal and external construction details, recommended method of installation with proposed structural steel support, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes. .3 Special enclosures.
.2
.1
Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
1.4 SAMPLES
.1
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Submit 1200 mm length sample of each secure type panel showing method of securing to structure and connecting to adjacent length of enclosure. Include sample fasteners with submittal.
.2
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Dispose of packaging material in appropriate on-site bin for recycling in accordance with site waste management program.
.2
.3
Section 23 83 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
2.1 SECURE RADIANT PANELS-STEEL TYPE A
.1 Each panel shall consist of one piece flat face with side angle broken up to form secure panel/chase unit. Panel face material shall be 3.5 mm cold reduced rigid steel with no welded seams or joints. .2 Each panel shall be factory finished in white polyester powder coat. .3 Pipe coil shall be 16 mm O.D. continuous copper set at 150 mm on centre. .4 Piping shall sit firmly on an extruded aluminum heat transfer saddle which shall be uniform and one piece through longitudinal lengths of the piping. A non-hardening heat transfer paste shall be added between the saddle and pipe as well as between the saddle and panel. .5 Piping shall be firmly retained to the saddle with pre-sprung metal clips at 300 mm spacing.
Saddles shall be bolted to the back of panels by means .6 of steel studs which are to be welded to the back of the face plate.
.7 Panels shall be continuous across from wall to wall. No field joining will be accepted except as follows. Panels less than 2 m may be constructed with a removable section (maximum 300 mm wide) at one end to assist installation. Removable section shall bolt in to angle backing with same securement as panel. Panel heat output shall take into account this section. .8 Panels shall be provided with predrilled elongated mounting holes and shall be provided complete with continuous mounting angles drilled and tapped to match panel. Angles shall be minimum 50 mm x 50 mm x 7 mm. Provide security screws with bushings sized for panel mount holes. Security screws shall have tapered / pan head and Torx with pin operators. .9 .10 Panel performance shall be as scheduled on drawings. Acceptable material: Twa Panel Systems Inc., Airtex. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.2 SECURE RADIANT PANELS-ALUMINUM TYPE B
Section 23 83 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.1 Panels shall be constructed substantially as required for Type A Secure Steel Panels except that panel faces shall be of 4.8 mm thickness aluminum. Pipe saddles shall be welded to panel face rather than bolted. .2 Provide panel support system similar to that specified for Type A. Provide dieletric isolation gasket between carbon steel support angle and aluminum panel face. Gasket shall be Teflon or other such material which will provide resistance to heat but will not bind expansion / contraction of panel. .3 Acceptable material: Twa Panel Systems Inc., Airtex .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
2.3 LINEAR RADIANT CEILING PANELS-ALUMINUM TYPE C
.1 Refer to architectural reflected ceiling plans and room finish schedule in addition to mechanical drawings to determine location, quantity, and finish of radiant panels. .2 Panels shall run continuously from wall to wall unless otherwise indicated and specified widths are minimum allowable. Where breaks in panels are required, ensure location lines up with nearest ceiling tile joint. .3 The radiant ceiling extrusions shall consist of extruded aluminum with copper tubing of 12.8 mm (0.504) I.D. mechanically attached to the aluminum faceplate. The copper tube shall be held in place by an aluminum saddle which extends more than halfway around the diameter of the tube. A non-hardening heat conductive paste shall be placed between the copper tubing and the aluminum faceplate. Panels shall weigh no more than 10.5 kg / m2 (2.15 lb / ft2) when operating. .4 Panels shall be finished in the manfacturers standard colour as selected by the Owner. .5 Acceptable material: Twa Panel Systems Inc., Engineered Air Airtex. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

.2
Section 23 83 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
Install in accordance with piping layout and reviewed shop drawings.
.3 .4
Provide for pipe movement during normal operation. Maintain sufficient clearance to permit performance of service maintenance. Valves .1 Install valves with stems upright or horizontal unless approved otherwise. .2 Install isolating valves on inlet and circuit balancing valves on outlet of each unit. .3 Valves shall be accessible in Y-chases or other non-inmate areas. Venting: .1 Install vent on piping at high points and other locations where air will collect..
.5
.6
3.2 LINEAR RADIANT HEATING PANEL INSTALLATION
.1
The mechanical contractor shall cooperate with other trades working in the ceiling to achieve a neat, well coordinated overall installation. Refer to Architectural and mounting details for installation requirements. Piping to the panels shall be as detailed by the manufacturer. All interconnecting of radiant panels by the mechanical contractor shall consist of 0.500 O.D. soft copper tubing or accessories as recommended by the manufacturer. Supply first to panel tubing pass closest to perimeter wall.
.2
.3
All radiant panels shall run continuous from wall-to-wall and shall be field trimmed to length ensuring adequate expansion allowance while maintaining panel end coverage by architectural mouldings. Inactive filler panels will be permitted only where indicated on drawings. Ensure ceiling openings and wall mouldings are installed as per radiant panel shop drawings. All radiant panels shall be installed by personnel wearing clean white gloves, to avoid soiling of panel face. Hanger wires for safety and seismic restraint shall be installed at 1200 mm (4 ft) o.c. or as recommended by the manufacturer. Wire supports to be vertical. Adjust so that primary weight of panel is on wire supports. Panel shall lay in contact with ceiling support grid along its full perimeter.
.4
.5

.6
Section 23 83 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
All system piping shall be thoroughly cleaned, flushed , drained, and refilled before radiant panels are connected into the system. No installation of finished radiant panels shall begin until all glazing ahs been completed and all exterior openings closed in.
.7
.8
All active panels shall be covered with a minimum of 50 mm (2 inch) thick fibreglass batt insulation. Insulation shall have foil face both sides, edges with foil tape so that no fibres are exposed in return air space.
Secure panel installations shall be rigid with no gaps, crevices or openings accessible to space. Installations shall be smooth and continuous with no protruding edges or fasteners. If installation panel section is provided, this seam shall be caulked after final installation with secure caulking as specified in Section 07 92 00 Joint Sealing.
.9
HUMIDIFIERS
Section 23 84 13 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning. Section 23 31 14 - Metal Ducts - Low Pressure to 500 Pa.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 .2
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with Section [01 33 00].
.2
Indicate following: .1 Capacity .2 Construction .3 Control Interface
.1
.1
.2
.3
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Furnish list of individual manufacturer's recommended spare parts for equipment, addresses of suppliers, list of specialized tools necessary for adjusting, repairing or replacing, for inclusion into operating manual.
HUMIDIFIERS
Section 23 84 13 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.7 MANUFACTURED ITEMS
.1
Catalogued or published ratings shall be those obtained from tests carried out by manufacturer or those ordered by manufacturer from independent testing agency signifying adherence to codes and standards in force.
PART 2 - PRODUCT 2.1 PACKAGED ELECTRODE STEAM GENERATING TYPE
.1
CSA certified and ULC listed.
.2 Components housed in factory fabricated cabinet with factory enamelled finish. Unit complete with factory fabricated floor stand. .3 Probe style water level control compatible with local water conditions. .4 Automatic drain adjustable for duration and frequency. Provide automatic drain water cooler system to limit temperature of discharge. .5 Integral water skimmer/overflow port.
.6 Incoloy sheathed heating elements designed to shed mineral scale. Heating elements shall be removable for replacement.
Access cover for service of evaporating chamber shall .7 be operable without use of tools.
.8 Cleanout tray for periodic removal of sediment from evaporator chamber. .9 Controls to consist of: .1 Solid state panel with solid state relay. .2 Solenoid valves on water fill, drain lines and drain cooler. .3 Real time clock/timer. .4 User input keypad. .5 Tank temperature sensor. .6 Modulating, time-proportional with operating and high limit humidistats. .7 Provide modulated input from EMCS system of 0-10 vdc.
.10 Provide steam dispersion unit matched to required performance and manufactured by same source as humidifier. Dispersion unit shall consist of bottom header (sloped for condensate removal) and vertical dispersion tubes equipped with performance calibrated orifice nozzles.
HUMIDIFIERS
Section 23 84 13 Page 3 2011-06-10
.11 Acceptable material: DriSteem Vapourstream VLC as scheduled on drawings with 2-single tube manifold, Pure, Nortec. .1 Alternative Materials: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install in accordance with manufacturers instructions. Water service overflow drain: to manufacturers' recommendation. Install access doors or panels in adjacent ducting.
When installing in ducting, provide waterproof duct up and downstream.
.2
.3 .4
.5
Install capped drain connection at low point in duct.
3.2 START-UP
.1
General: In accordance with Section 01 91 00 - General Commissioning Requirements, supplemented as specified herein. Verify: .1 Steam lines are sloped to ensure steam condensate is drained away from the humidifier. .2 Vapour lines and manifolds are sloped to ensure condensate is drained away from the duct system. .3 Visually check distribution manifold to ensure: .1 Even distribution of vapour. .2 Freedom from water deposits.
.2
3.3 TRAINING
.1
Refer to Section 01 91 00 - General Commissioning Requirements.
EMCS START-UP, VERIFICATION AND TESTING
Section 25 01 11 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Methods and procedures for start-up, verification and commissioning, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) and includes: .1 Start-up testing and verification of systems. .2 Check out demonstration or proper operation of components. .3 On-site operational tests. Related Sections. .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 Section Section Section Section Section 01 01 01 01 25 33 78 91 79 05 00 00 00 00 01 Submittal Procedures. Closeout Submittals. Commissioning. Demonstration and Training. EMCS: General Requirements.
.2
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1
For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.

AEL: ratio between total test period less any system downtime accumulated within that period and test period. Downtime: results whenever EMCS is unable to fulfill required functions due to malfunction of equipment defined under responsibility of EMCS contractor. Downtime is measured by duration, in time, between time that Contractor is notified of failure and time system is restored to proper operating condition. Downtime not to include following: .1 Outage of main power supply in excess of back-up power sources, provided that: .1 Automatic initiation of back-up was accomplished. .2 Automatic shut-down and re-start of components was as specified. .2 Failure of communications link, provided that: .1 Controller automatically and correctly operated in stand-alone mode. .2 Failure was not due to failure of any specified EMCS equipment. .3 Functional failure resulting from individual sensor inputs or output devices, provided that: .1 System recorded said fault.
.2
.3
Section 25 01 11 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2 Equipment defaulted to fail-safe mode. .3 AEL of total of all input sensors and output devices is at least 99% during test period.
.1
Confirm with Departmental Representative that Design Criteria and Design Intents are still applicable.
.2
Commissioning personnel to be fully aware of and qualified to interpret Design Criteria and Design Intents.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. Final Report: submit report to Departmental Representative. .1 Include measurements, final settings and certified test results. .2 Bear signature of commissioning technician and supervisor .3 Report format to be approved by Departmental Representative before commissioning is started. .4 Revise "as-built" documentation, commissioning reports to reflect changes, adjustments and modifications to EMCS as set during commissioning and submit to Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .5 Recommend additional changes and/or modifications deemed advisable in order to improve performance, environmental conditions or energy consumption.
.1
Provide documentation, O&M Manuals, and training of O&M personnel for review of Departmental Representative before interim acceptance in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
1.6 COMMISSIONING
.1 .2
Do commissioning in accordance with Section 01 91 00. Carry out commissioning under direction of Departmental Representative and in presence of Departmental Representative and PWGSC Commissioning Manager.

.3
Section 25 01 11 Page 3 2011-06-10
Inform, and obtain approval from, Departmental Representative in writing at least 14 days prior to commissioning or each test. Indicate: .1 Location and part of system to be tested or commissioned. Testing/commissioning procedures, anticipated .2 results. .3 Names of testing/commissioning personnel. Correct deficiencies, re-test in presence of Departmental Representative until satisfactory performance is obtained.
Acceptance of tests will not relieve Contractor from responsibility for ensuring that complete systems meet every requirement of Contract.
.4
.5
.6 .7
Load system with project software. Perform tests as required.
1.7 COMPLETION OF COMMISSIONING
.1
Commissioning to be considered as satisfactorily completed when objectives of commissioning have been achieved and reviewed by Departmental Representative and PWGSC Commissioning Manager.
1.8 ISSUANCE OF FINAL CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION
.1
Final Certificate of Completion will not be issued until receipt of written approval indicating successful completion of specified commissioning activities including receipt of commissioning documentation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide sufficient instrumentation to verify and commission the installed system. Provide two-way radios.
Instrumentation accuracy tolerances : higher order of magnitude than equipment or system being tested.
.2
.3
Locations to be approved, readily accessible and readable.

Application: to conform to normal industry standards.
.4
Section 25 01 11 Page 4 2011-06-10
3.1 PROCEDURES
.1
Test each system independently and then in unison with other related systems.
.2
Commission each system using procedures prescribed by the Commissioning Manager. Commission integrated systems using procedures prescribed by Commissioning Manager. Debug system software. Optimize operation and performance of systems by fine-tuning PID values and modifying CDLs as required.
Test emergency and life safety procedures including operation and integrity of refuge systems under normal and emergency power conditions as applicable.
.3
.4 .5
.6
.1
Pre-Installation Testing. .1 General: consists of field tests of equipment just prior to installation. .2 Equip each Building Controller with sensor and controlled device of each type (AI, AO, DI, DO). .3 Additional instruments to include: .1 DP transmitters. .2 DP switches used for dirty filter indication and fan status. .4 In addition to test equipment, provide inclined manometer, digital micro-manometer, milli-amp meter, source of air pressure infinitely adjustable between 0 and 500 Pa, to hold steady at any setting and with direct output to milli-amp meter at source. .5 After setting, test zero and span in 10 % increments through entire range while both increasing and decreasing pressure. .6 DP switches to open and close within 2% of setpoint. Completion Testing. .1 General: test after installation of each part of system and after completion of mechanical and electrical hook-ups, to verify correct installation and functioning. .2 Include following activities: .1 Test and calibrate field hardware including stand-alone capability of each controller. .2 Verify each A-to-D convertor.
.2
Section 25 01 11 Page 5 2011-06-10
.3 Test and calibrate each AI using calibrated digital instruments. .4 Test each DI to ensure proper settings and switching contacts. .5 Test each DO to ensure proper operation and lag time. .6 Test each AO to ensure proper operation of controlled devices. Verify tight closure and signals. .7 Test operating software. .8 Test application software and provide samples of logs and commands. .9 Verify each CDL including energy optimization programs. .10 Debug software. .11 Blow out flow measuring and static pressure stations with high pressure air. .12 Provide point verification list in table format including point identifier, point identifier expansion, point type and address, low and high limits and engineering units. Include space on commissioning technician and Departmental Representative. This document will be used in final startup testing. .3 Final Startup Testing: Upon satisfactory completion of tests, perform point-by-point test of entire system under direction of Departmental Representative [and PWGSC Commissioning Manager] and provide: .1 Technical personnel capable of re-calibrating field hardware and modifying software. .2 Detailed daily schedule showing items to be tested and personnel available. .3 Commissioning to commence during final startup testing. .4 O&M personnel to assist in commissioning procedures as part of training. .5 Commissioning to be supervised by qualified supervisory personnel and Departmental Representative. .6 Operate systems as long as necessary to commission entire project. .7 Monitor progress and keep detailed records of activities and results. .4 Final Operational Testing: to demonstrate that EMCS functions in accordance with contract requirements. .1 Prior to beginning of 20 day test demonstrate that operating parameters (setpoints, alarm limits, operating control software, sequences of operation, trends, graphics and CDL's) have been implemented to ensure proper operation and operator notification in event of off-normal operation.
Section 25 01 11 Page 6 2011-06-10
.1 Repetitive alarm conditions to be resolved to minimize reporting of nuisance conditions. .2 Test to last at least 20 consecutive 24 hour days. .3 Tests to include: Demonstration of correct operation .1 of monitored and controlled points. .2 Operation and capabilities of sequences, reports, special control algorithms, diagnostics, software. .4 System will be accepted when: .1 EMCS equipment operates to meet overall performance requirements. Downtime as defined in this Section must not exceed allowable time calculated for this site. .2 Requirements of Contract have been met. .5 In event of failure to attain specified AEL during test period, extend test period on day-to-day basis until specified AEL is attained for test period. .6 Correct defects when they occur and before resuming tests.
3.3 ADJUSTING
.1
Final adjusting: upon completion of commissioning as reviewed by Departmental Representative, set and lock devices in final position and permanently mark settings.
3.4 DEMONSTRATION
.1
Demonstrate to Departmental Representative operation of systems including sequence of operations in regular and emergency modes, under normal and emergency conditions, start-up, shut-down interlocks and lock-outs in accordance with Section [01 79 00].
EMCS - TRAINING
Section 25 01 12 Page 1 2011-06-10
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. Requirements and procedures for training .1 program, instructors and training materials, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work. Related Sections. .1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
.2
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 .2
CDL - Control Description Logic. For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00, supplemented and modified by requirements of this Section. Submit training proposal complete with hour-by-hour schedule including brief overview of content of each segment to Departmental Representative [30 days] prior to anticipated date of beginning of training. .1 List name of trainer, and type of visual and audio aids to be used. .2 Show co-ordinated interface with other EMCS mechanical and electrical training programs. Submit reports within one week after completion of training program that training has been satisfactorily completed.
.2
.3
.1
Provide competent instructors thoroughly familiar with aspects of EMCS installed in facility. Departmental Representative reserves right to approve instructors.
.2
1.5 INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide instruction to designated personnel in adjustment, operation, maintenance and pertinent safety requirements of EMCS installed. Training to be project-specific.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.6 TIME FOR INSTRUCTION
.1
EMCS - TRAINING
Section 25 01 12 Page 2 2011-06-10
Number of days of instruction to be as specified in this section (1 day = 8 hours including two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunch time).
1.7 TRAINING MATERIALS
.1
Provide equipment, visual and audio aids, and materials for classroom training. Supply manual for each trainee, describing in detail data included in each training program. .1 Review contents of manual in detail to explain aspects of operation and maintenance (O&M).
.2
1.8 TRAINING PROGRAM
.1 .2
To be in 2 phases over 6 month period.

Phase 1: 1 day program to begin before 20 day test period at time mutually agreeable to Contractor, Departmental Representative and PWGSC Commissioning Manager. .1 Train O&M personnel in functional operations and procedures to be employed for system operation. .2 Supplement with on-the-job training during 30 day test period. .3 Include overview of system architecture, communications, operation of computer and peripherals, report generation. .4 Include detailed training on operator interface functions for control of mechanical systems, CDL's for each system, and elementary preventive maintenance. Phase 2: 1 day program to begin 8 weeks after acceptance for operators, equipment maintenance personnel and programmers. .1 Provide multiple instructors on pre-arranged schedule. Include at least following: .1 Operator training: provide operating personnel, maintenance personnel and programmers with condensed version of Phase 1 training.
.3
1.9 ADDITIONAL TRAINING
.1
List courses offered by name, duration and approximate cost per person per week. Note courses recommended for training supervisory personnel.
1.10 MONITORING OF TRAINING
.1
Departmental Representative to monitor training program and may modify schedule and content.
EMCS - TRAINING
Section 25 01 12 Page 3 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
EMCS GENERAL REQUIRMENTS
Section 25 05 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Related Sections:
.1 Section 09 91 23 - Interior Painting]. .2 Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process]. .3 Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification]. .4 Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements Applications and Systems Sequences of Operation.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 American National Standards Institute (ANSI)/The Instrumentation, Systems and Automation Society (ISA). .1 ANSI/ISA 5.5-[1985], Graphic Symbols for Process Displays. .2 ANSI/IEEE 260.1, Letter Symbols for SI and Certain Other Units of Measurements (SI Units, Customary Inch-Pound Units and Certain Other Units).
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-Z234.1-[89(R1995)], Canadian Metric Practice Guide.
.2
1.3 ACRONYMS AND ABBREVIATIONS
.1
Acronyms used in EMCS: .1 AEL - Average Effectiveness Level. .2 AI - Analog Input. .3 AIT - Agreement on International Trade. .4 AO - Analog Output. .5 BACnet - Building Automation and Control Network. .6 BC(s) - Building Controller(s). .7 BECC - Building Environmental Control Center. .8 CAD - Computer Aided Design. .9 CDL - Control Description Logic. .10 CDS - Control Design Schematic. .11 COSV - Change of State or Value. .12 CPU - Central Processing Unit. .13 DI - Digital Input. .14 DO - Digital Output. .15 DP - Differential Pressure.
Section 25 05 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
.16 ECU - Equipment Control Unit. .17 EMCS - Energy Monitoring and Control System. .18 HVAC - Heating, Ventilation, Air Conditioning. .19 IDE - Interface Device Equipment. .20 I/O - Input/Output. .21 ISA - Industry Standard Architecture. .22 LAN - Local Area Network. .23 LCU - Local Control Unit. .24 MCU - Master Control Unit. .25 NAFTA - North American Free Trade Agreement. .26 NC - Normally Closed. .27 NO - Normally Open. .28 OS - Operating System. .29 O&M - Operation and Maintenance. .30 OWS - Operator Work Station. .31 PC - Personal Computer. .32 PCI - Peripheral Control Interface. .33 PCMCIA - Personal Computer Micro-Card Interface Adapter. .34 PID - Proportional, Integral and Derivative. .35 RAM - Random Access Memory. .36 SP - Static Pressure. .37 ROM - Read Only Memory. .38 TCU - Terminal Control Unit. .39 USB - Universal Serial Bus. .40 UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply. .41 VAV - Variable Air Volume.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1
Point: may be logical or physical. .1 Logical points: values calculated by system such as setpoints, totals, counts, derived corrections and may include, but not limited to result of and statements in CDL's. .2 Physical points: inputs or outputs which have hardware wired to controllers which are measuring physical properties, or providing status conditions of contacts or relays which provide interaction with related equipment (stop, start) and valve or damper actuators.
.2
Symbols and engineering unit abbreviations utilized in displays: to ANSI/ISA S5.5. .1 Printouts: to ANSI/IEEE 260.1.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
.1
Section 25 05 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
Refer to control schematics and system descriptions for system architecture.

Work covered by sections referred to above consists of fully operational EMCS, including, but not limited to, following: .1 Building Controllers. .2 Control devices as listed in I/O point summary tables. .3 OWS(s). .4 Data communications equipment necessary to effect EMCS data transmission system. .5 Field control devices. .6 Software complete with full documentation. .7 Complete operating and maintenance manuals. .8 Acceptance tests, technical support during commissioning, full documentation. .9 Wiring interface co-ordination of equipment supplied by others. .10 Miscellaneous work as specified in these sections and as indicated.
.2
.1
In accordance with general conditions of contract.
1.6 PERMITS AND FEES
1.7 METRIC REFERENCES
.1
.2
Conform to CAN/CSA-Z234.1.
Provide required adapters between Metric and Imperial components.
1.8 STANDARD COMPLIANCE

.1 All equipment and material to be from manufacturer's regular production, CSA certified, manufactured to standard quoted plus additional specified requirements.
.2
Where CSA certified equipment is not available submit such equipment to inspection authorities for special inspection and approval before delivery to site.
.3
.4
Submit proof of compliance to specified standards with shop drawings and product data. Label or listing of specified organization is acceptable evidence. For materials whose compliance with organizational standards/codes/specifications is not regulated by an organization using its own listing or label as proof of compliance, furnish certificate stating that material complies with applicable referenced standard or specification.
Section 25 05 01 Page 4 2011-06-10
1.9 EMCS CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS
.1
EMCS contractor to: .1 Have local office within 200 km of project for at least 5 years, staffed by trained personnel capable of providing instruction, routine maintenance, emergency service on systems, .2 Provide record of successful installations performed by Contractor submitting tender of experience with similar computer-based systems. .3 Have access to local supplies of essential parts and provide 7 year guarantee of availability of spare parts after obsolescence.
1.10 SYSTEM DESIGN RESPONSIBILITY
.1 Design and provide all conduit and wiring linking all elements of system, including future capability. .2 Supply sufficient programmable controllers of all types to meet project requirements. Quantity and points contents to be approved by Engineer prior to installation. .3 Location of controllers to be approved by Engineer prior to installation. .4 Provide utility power to controllers.
1.11 LANGUAGE OPERATING REQUIRMENTS
.1 .2
Operator to interface to system in English. Use non-linguistic symbols for displays on graphic terminals wherever possible. All other information to be in English. Operating system executive: primary hardware-to-software interface (specified as part of hardware purchase) with associated documentation to be in English. System manager software: to include system definition point database, additions, deletions or modifications, control loop statements, use of high level programming languages, report generator utility and other OS utilities used for maintaining optimal operating efficiency. These functions to be in English.
.3
.4
Section 25 05 01 Page 5 2011-06-10
.5
EMCS operator: include, in English: .1 All input and output commands and messages from operator-initiated functions and/or field related changes and/or alarms as defined in CDL's or assigned limits (i.e. all commands relating to day-to-day operating functions and not related to system modifications, additions, or logic re-definements). .2 Graphic "display" functions, point commands to turn systems on or off, manually override automatic control of specified hardware points. To be in English at all specified OWS. Point name expansions in English. .3 Reporting function such as trend log, trend graphics, alarm report logs, energy report logs, maintenance generated logs.
1.12 MATERIALS DELIVERY SCHEDULE
.1
Provide Engineer with "Materials Delivery Schedule" within 2 weeks after award of Contract.
1.13 BSCS/EMCS INTERFACE
.1
EMCS contractor shall interface with BSCS contractor in order to complete control functions of the following systems: .1 Secure fire hose shutdown. .2 Range ventilation override. .3 Range exhaust. Refer to appropriate sections for control descriptions.
BSCS contractor shall provide interface panel at location shown on drawings. Interface shall include dry contacts (NO & NC) rated at 2560V, 10A for each interface condition.
.2
.3
.4
It shall be the responsibility of the EMCS contractor to complete systems between contacts and controlled equipment. The EMCS contractor shall fully commission their work in conjunction with the BSCS contractor to ensure and prove correct operation of interfaced systems.
Section 25 05 01 Page 6 2011-06-10
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE SYSTEMS .1 MANUFACTURERS
Johnson Controls, Honeywell Controls, Invensys.
2.2 LOCKABLE PANELS
.1
Panel to be NEMA rated to suit environmental requirements. To have hinged doors equipped with standard keyed-alike cabinet locks, keyed to same key.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS
.1
Installation: to manufacturer's recommendations. Provide printed copies of recommendations with shop drawings or product data.
3.2 PAINTING
.1
Painting to be in accordance with Section 09 91 23 Interior Painting, supplemented as follows: Clean and touch up marred or scratched surfaces of factory finished equipment to match original finish.
Restore to new condition, finished surfaces which have been damaged too extensively to be primed and touched up to make good.
.2
.3
.4
Clean and prime exposed hangers, racks, fastenings, and other support components.
Paint all unfinished equipment installed indoors to CEMA 2Y.1.
.5
3.3 OPERATOR INSTRUCTOR
1.
During and after system commissioning this Trade shall provide on-site operator instruction to the Owners operating personnel. Operation instruction during normal working hours shall be performed by competent representatives familiar with the installed system.
Section 25 05 01 Page 7 2011-06-10
.2
At a time mutually agreed upon with the Owner the Control Contractor shall give eighteen (18) hours of instructions to up to five (5) of the owners designated personnel on the operation of all equipment in the system and describe its intended use. Training to be accomplished as follows: .1 Initial instruction period 2 days at 6 hours each. .2 Followed by two (2) three (3) hour instruction periods within the maintenance period at a date requested by the Owner. .3 Record attendance log for each training period and submit to Engineer.
An Owners Manual, prepared for the project by the Control Contractor shall be used during instruction. Copies of the Owners Manual shall be provided to the Owner with Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
.3
.4
EMCS SUBMITTALS AND REVIEW PROCESS
Section 25 05 02 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. Methods and procedures for shop drawings .1 submittals, preliminary and detailed review process including review meetings, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS). Related Sections. .1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements. .3 Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-up, Verification and Commissioning.
.2
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1
Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
.1
Preliminary Design Review: to contain following contractor and systems information. .1 Names of sub contractors and site specific key personnel. .2 Sketch of site specific system architecture. .3 Specification sheets for each item including memory provided, programming language, speed, type of data transmission. .4 Descriptive brochures. .5 Sample CDL and graphics (systems schematics). .6 Response time for each type of command and report. .7 Item by item statement of compliance.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section [01 33 00] and coordinate with requirements in this Section.
Shop Drawings to consist of 10 hard copies and 1 soft copy of design documents, shop drawings, product data and software.
.2
.3
Hard copy to be completely indexed and coordinated package to assure compliance with contract requirements and arranged in same sequence as specification and cross-referenced to specification section and paragraph number.
Section 25 05 02 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4
Soft copy to be in Autocad - latest version and Microsoft Word latest version format, structured using menu format for easy loading and retrieval on OWS.
1.5 DETAIL SHOP DRAWING REVIEW
.1
Submit detailed shop drawings within 60 working days after award of contract and before start of installation and include following:
.1 Corrected and updated versions (hard copy only) of submissions made during preliminary review. .2 .3 Wiring diagrams. Piping diagrams and hook ups.
.4 Interface wiring diagrams showing termination connections and signal levels for equipment to be supplied by others. .5 Shop drawings for each input/output point, sensors, transmitters, showing information associated with each particular point including: .1 Sensing element type and location. .2 Transmitter type and range. Associated field wiring schematics, .3 schedules and terminations. .4 Complete Point Name Lists. .5 Setpoints, curves or graphs and alarm limits (high and low, 3 types critical, cautionary and maintenance), signal range. .6 Software and programming details associated with each point. .7 Manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and procedures. .8 Input and output signal levels or pressures where new system ties into existing control equipment. Control schematics, narrative description, CDL's fully showing and describing automatic and manual procedure required to achieve proper operation of project, including under complete failure of EMCS. Graphic system schematic displays of air and water systems with point identifiers and textual description of system, as specified. Listing and example of specified reports. Listing of time of day schedules.
.6
.7
.8 .9
Section 25 05 02 Page 3 2011-06-10
.10
Mark up to scale construction drawing to detail control room showing location of equipment and operator work space.
.11
Type and size of memory with statement of spare memory capacity. Full description of software programs provided.
.12
.1
Preliminary Design Review Meeting: Convene meeting within 45 working days of award of contract to: .1 Undertake functional review of preliminary design documents, resolve inconsistencies. .2 Resolve conflicts between contract document requirements and actual items (e.g.: points list inconsistencies). .3 Review interface requirements of materials supplied by others. .4 Review "Sequence of Operations". Contractor's programmer to attend meeting.
Departmental Representative retains right to revise sequence or subsequent CDL prior to software finalization without cost to Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
EMCS PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
Section 25 05 03 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Requirements and procedures for final control diagrams and operation and maintenance (O&M) manual, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work. Related Sections. .1 Section 01 78 .2 Section 25 05 .3 Section 25 05 Process. .4 Section 25 01 and Commissioning. 00 - Closeout Submittals. 01 - EMCS: General Requirements. 02 - EMCS: Submittals and Review 11 - EMCS: Start-up, Verification
.2
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 .2 .3
BECC - Building Environmental Control Centre. OWS - Operator Work Station. For additional acryonyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 78 00, supplemented and modified by requirements of this Section. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual to Departmental Representative in English. Provide soft copies and hard copies in hard-back, 50 mm 3 ring, D-ring binders. .1 Binders to be 2/3 maximum full. .2 Provide index to full volume in each binder. .3 Identify contents of each manual on cover and spine. .4 Provide Table of Contents in each manual. .5 Assemble each manual to conform to Table of Contents with tab sheets placed before instructions covering subject.
.2
.3
1.4 AS-BUILTS
.1
Provide 1 copy of detailed shop drawings generated in Section 25 05 02 and include: .1 Changes to contract documents as well as addenda and contract extras. .2 Changes to interface wiring.
Section 25 05 03 Page 2 2011-06-10
.3 Routing of conduit, wiring and control air lines associated with EMCS installation. .4 Locations of obscure devices to be indicated on drawings. .5 Listing of alarm messages. .6 Panel/circuit breaker number for sources of normal/emergency power. .7 Names, addresses, telephone numbers of each sub-contractor having installed equipment, local representative for each item of equipment, each system. .8 Test procedures and reports: provide records of start-up procedures, test procedures, checkout tests and final commissioning reports as specified in Section [25 01 11]. .9 Basic system design and full documentation on system configuration. .2 Submit for final review by Departmental Representative. Provide before acceptance 5 Hard and 1 soft copy incorporating changes made during final review.
.3
1.5 O&M MANUALS
.1
Custom design O&M Manuals (both hard and soft copy) to contain material pertinent to this project only, and to provide full and complete coverage of subjects referred to in this Section.
.2
Provide 4 complete sets of hard and soft copies prior to system or equipment tests.
.3
Include complete coverage in concise language, readily understood by operating personnel using common terminology of functional and operational requirements of system. Do not presume knowledge of computers, electronics or in-depth control theory.
.4
Functional description to include: .1 Functional description of theory of operation. .2 Design philosophy. .3 Specific functions of design philosophy and system. .4 Full details of data communications, including data types and formats, data processing and disposition data link components, interfaces and operator tests or self-test of data link integrity. .5 Explicit description of hardware and software functions, interfaces and requirements for components in functions and operating modes. .6 Description of person-machine interactions required to supplement system description, known or established constraints on system operation, operating procedures currently implemented for implementation in automatic mode.
Section 25 05 03 Page 3 2011-06-10
.5
System operation to include: .1 Complete step-by-step procedures for operation of system including required actions at each OWS. .2 Operation of computer peripherals, input and output formats. .3 Emergency, alarm and failure recovery. .4 Step-by-step instructions for start-up, back-up equipment operation, execution of systems functions and operating modes, including key strokes for each command so that operator need only refer to these pages for keystroke entries required to call up display or to input command. Software to include: .1 Documentation of theory, design, interface requirements, functions, including test and verification procedures. .2 Detailed descriptions of program requirements and capabilities. .3 Data necessary to permit modification, relocation, reprogramming and to permit new and existing software modules to respond to changing system functional requirements without disrupting normal operation. .4 Software modules, fully annotated source code listings, error free object code files ready for loading via peripheral device Complete program cross reference plus linking .5 requirements, data exchange requirements, necessary subroutine lists, data file requirements, other information necessary for proper loading, integration, interfacing, program execution. .6 Software for each Controller and single section referencing Controller common parameters and functions. Maintenance: document maintenance procedures including inspection, periodic preventive maintenance, fault diagnosis, repair or replacement of defective components, including calibration, maintenance, repair of sensors, transmitters, transducers, controller and interface firmware's, plus diagnostics and repair/replacement of system hardware. System configuration document: .1 Provisions and procedures for planning, implementing and recording hardware and software modifications required during operating lifetime of system. .2 Information to ensure co-ordination of hardware and software changes, data link or message format/content changes, sensor or control changes in event that system modifications are required.
.6
.7
.8
Section 25 05 03 Page 4 2011-06-10
.9
Programmer control panel documentation: provide where panels are independently interfaced with BECC, including interfacing schematics, signal identification, timing diagrams, fully commented source listing of applicable driver/handler.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
EMCS - IDENTIFICATION
Section 25 05 54 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Requirements and procedures for identification of devices, sensors, wiring tubing, conduit and equipment, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS) Work and nameplates materials, colours and lettering sizes. Related Sections. .1 Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .2 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
.2
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA C22.1-09, The Canadian Electrical Code, Part I (21st Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
.1
For acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
.1
Language Operating Requirements: provide identification for control items in English.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00 supplemented and modified by requirements of this Section. Submit to Departmental Representative for approval samples of nameplates, identification tags and list of proposed wording.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NAMEPLATES FOR PANELS
.1
Identify by Plastic laminate, black core, square corners, lettering accurately aligned and engraved into core. Sizes: 25 x 67 mm minimum. Lettering: minimum 7 mm high, white.
Inscriptions: machine engraved to identify function.
.2 .3 .4
Section 25 05 54 Page 2 2011-06-10
2.2 NAMEPLATES FOR FIELD DEVICES
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Identify by plastic encased cards attached by chain. Sizes:50 x 100 mm minimum. Lettering: minimum 5 mm high. Data to include: point name and point address. Companion cabinet: identify interior components using plastic enclosed cards with point name and point address.
2.3 NAMEPLATES FOR ROOM SENSORS
.1 .2 .3
Identify by stick-on labels using point identifier.

Location: as directed by Departmental Representative.
Letter size: to suit, clearly legible.
2.4 WARNING SIGNS
.1
Equipment including motors, starters under remote automatic control: supply and install orange coloured signs warning of automatic starting under control of EMCS. Sign to read: "Caution: This equipment is under automatic remote control of EMCS" as reviewed by Departmental Representative.
.2
2.5 WIRING
.1
Supply and install numbered tape markings on wiring at panels, junction boxes, splitters, cabinets and outlet boxes. Colour coding: to CSA C22.1. Use colour coded wiring in communications cables, matched throughout system.
.2
.3
Power wiring: identify circuit breaker panel/circuit breaker number inside each EMCS panel.
2.6 CONDUIT
.1 .2
Colour code EMCS conduit. Pre-paint box covers and conduit fittings.
Section 25 05 54 Page 3 2011-06-10
3.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
Ensure that manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible at all times.
3.2 EXISTING PANELS
.1
Correct existing nameplates and legends to reflect changes made during Work.
EMCS WARRANTY AND MAINTENANCE
Section 25 08 20 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes. .1 Requirements and procedures for warranty and activities during warranty period and service contracts, for building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS). Related Sections. .1 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements. References. .1 Canada Labour Code (R.S. 1985, c. L-2)/Part I - Industrial Relations. .2 Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA Z204-[94(R1999)], Guidelines for Managing Indoor Air Quality in Office Buildings.
.2
.3
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 .2 .3
BC(s) - Building Controller(s). OWS - Operator Work Station. For additional acronyms and definitions refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.

Submit detailed preventative maintenance schedule for system components to Departmental Representative.
.3
Submit detailed inspection reports to Departmental Representative.

Submit dated, maintenance task lists to Departmental Representative and include the following sensor and output point detail, as proof of system verification: .1 Point name and location. .2 Device type and range. .3 Measured value. .4 System displayed value. .5 Calibration detail .6 Indication if adjustment required, .7 Other action taken or recommended. Submit network analysis report showing results with detailed recommendations to correct problems found.
.4
.5

.6
Section 25 08 20 Page 2 2011-06-10
Records and logs: in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .1 Maintain records and logs of each maintenance task on site. .2 Organize cumulative records for each major component and for entire EMCS chronologically. Submit records to Departmental Representative, .3 after inspection indicating that planned and systematic maintenance have been accomplished.
Revise and submit to Departmental Representative in accordance with Section 01 78 00 "As-built drawings" documentation and commissioning reports to reflect changes, adjustments and modifications to EMCS made during warranty period.
.7
1.4 MAINTENANCE SERVICE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
.1
Provide services, materials, and equipment to maintain EMCS for specified warranty period. Provide detailed preventative maintenance schedule for system components as described in Submittal article.
.2
Emergency Service Calls: .1 Initiate service calls when EMCS is not functioning correctly. .2 Qualified control personnel to be available during warranty period to provide service to "CRITICAL" components whenever required at no extra cost. .3 Furnish Departmental Representative with telephone number where service personnel may be reached at any time. .4 Service personnel to be on site ready to service EMCS within 2 hours after receiving request for service. .5 Perform Work continuously until EMCS restored to reliable operating condition.
Operation: foregoing and other servicing to provide proper sequencing of equipment and satisfactory operation of EMCS based on original design conditions and as recommended by manufacturer.
.3
.4
Work requests: record each service call request, when received separately on approved form and include: .1 Serial number identifying component involved. .2 Location, date and time call received. .3 Nature of trouble. .4 Names of personnel assigned. .5 Instructions of work to be done. .6 Amount and nature of materials used. .7 Time and date work started. .8 Time and date of completion.
Section 25 08 20 Page 3 2011-06-10
.5
Provide system modifications in writing. .1 No system modification, including operating parameters and control settings, to be made without prior written approval of Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Perform as minimum (3) three minor inspections and one major inspection (more often if required by manufacturer) per year. Provide detailed written report to Departmental Representative as described in Submittal article. Perform inspections during regular working hours, 0800 to 1630 h, Monday through Friday, excluding statutory holidays. Following inspections are minimum requirements and should not be interpreted to mean satisfactory performance: .1 Perform calibrations using test equipment having traceable, certifiable accuracy at minimum 50% greater than accuracy of system displaying or logging value. .2 Check and Calibrate each field input/output device in accordance with Canada Labour Code - Part I and CSA Z204. .3 Provide dated, maintenance task lists, as described in Submittal article, as proof of execution of complete system verification. Minor inspections to include, but not limited to: .1 Perform visual, operational checks to BC's, peripheral equipment, interface equipment and other panels. .2 Check equipment cooling fans as required. Visually check for mechanical faults, air leaks .3 and proper pressure settings on pneumatic components. .4 Review system performance with Departmental Representative to discuss suggested or required changes.
.2
.3
.4

.5
Section 25 08 20 Page 4 2011-06-10
Major inspections to include, but not limited to: .1 Minor inspection. .2 Clean OWS(s) peripheral equipment, BC(s), interface and other panels, micro-processor interior and exterior surfaces. .3 Check signal, voltage and system isolation of BC(s), peripherals, interface and other panels. .4 Verify calibration/accuracy of each input and output device and recalibrate or replace as required. .5 Provide mechanical adjustments, and necessary maintenance on printers. .6 Run system software diagnostics as required. .7 Install software and firmware enhancements to ensure components are operating at most current revision for maximum capability and reliability. .1 Perform network analysis and provide report as described in Submittal article. Rectify deficiencies revealed by maintenance inspections and environmental checks. Continue system debugging and optimization. Testing/verification of occupancy and seasonal-sensitive systems to take place during four (4) consecutive seasons, after facility has been accepted, taken over and fully occupied. .1 Test weather-sensitive systems twice: first at near winter design conditions and secondly under near summer design conditions.
.6
.7 .8
EMCS EQUIPMENT/ PRODUCTS
Section 25 10 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 NOT USED
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1 The Building Management System shall be capable of integrating multiple building functions, including equipment supervision and control, alarm management, energy management, and trend data collection. The BMS shall consist of the following: .1 Digital Panel. .2 Standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). .3 Color Graphics Workstation.
The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit expansion of both capacity and functionality through the addition of sensors, actuators, ASCs, and operator devices.
.2
.3
.4
The failure of any single component or network connection shall not interrupt the execution of control strategies at other operational devices. Acceptable Suppliers: .1 Delta Controls. .2 Alternative suppliers: Approved by addendum in accordance with instructions to bidders.
.5
2.2 NETWORKING/ COMMUNICATIONS
.1
Inherent in the system's design shall be the ability to expand or modify the network either via a local network, auto-dial telephone line modem connections, or a combination of the two networking schemes.
Section 25 10 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
.2
Local Network .1 Panel Support: The Digital Panel shall directly oversee a local network such that communications may be executed directly to and between ASCs.
Data Access: All operator devices, either network resident or connected via dial-up modems, shall have the ability to access all point status and application data on the network. Access to system data shall not be restricted by the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Global Data Sharing: Global Data Sharing or Global point broadcasting shall allow point data to be shared between ASCs, when it would be inefficient or impractical to locate multiple sensors.
.2
.3
.4
General Network Design: Network design shall include the following provisions: .1 Data transfer rates for alarm reporting and quick point status from multiple ASCs. The minimum baud rate shall be minimum 19200 baud.
Support of any combination of ASCs. A minimum of 100 ASCs shall be supported on a single local network. The bus shall be addressable for up to 255 ASCs.
.2
.3
Detection of single or multiple failures of ASCs or the network media. Error detection, correction, and re-transmission to guarantee data integrity. Commonly available, multiple-sourced, networking components shall be used. Use of an industry standard protocol, such as Optomux, and IEEE RS-485 communications interface.
.4
.5
.6
Section 25 10 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.3
Dial-Up Communications: Auto-dial/auto-answer communications shall be provided to allow Digital Panels to communicate with remote operator terminals on an occasional basis via telephone lines. .1 Dial-Up Digital Panels: Auto-Dial Digital Panels shall automatically place calls to remote terminals to report critical alarms. .1 Digital Panels shall analyze and prioritize all alarms to minimize the initiation of calls. Non-critical alarms shall be buffered in memory and reported as a group of alarms, or until an operator manually requests a report of all alarms. The auto-dial program shall include provisions for handling busy signals, "no-answers," and incomplete data transfers. Default devices shall be called when communications cannot be established with primary devices.
.2
.2
Dial-Up Remote Operator Terminals: Operators at dial-up remote operator terminals shall be able to perform all control functions and all data base generation and modification functions as described for local operator terminals connected via the RS-232 port. Routines shall be provided to automatically answer calls, and display information sent from remote Digital Panels. The fact that communication is taking place with remote control systems over telephone lines shall be completely transparent to an operator.
.1
An operator shall be able to access remote buildings by selecting any facility by its logical name. The PC Dial-Up program shall maintain a user-definable cross-reference of buildings and associated telephone numbers, so the user shall not be required to remember or manually dial telephone numbers.
Section 25 10 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.2
Alarm and data file transfers handled via dial-up transactions shall not interfere with local network activity, nor shall local network activity keep the remote operator's terminal from handling incoming calls. Both local and remote operators shall be able to access and perform functions with the Digital Panel simultaneously. Manual and Automatic transfer of Database and Trend Information shall capable of being accomplished over the Dial-up connection to the remote Digital Panels.
.3
.4
.3
Modem Characteristics: Dial-up communications shall make use of 56,600 baud modems and voice grade telephone lines. Each Digital Panel shall have its own modem for remote monitoring or diagnostics purposes.
2.3 DIGITAL PANELS
.1
General: Digital Panels shall be microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, multi-user, digital control processors. Memory: Each Digital Panel shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including: Control processes Energy Management Applications Alarm Management Trend Data Maintenance Support Applications Operator I/O Dial-Up Communications Manual Override Monitoring
.2
Section 25 10 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
.3
Expandability: The system shall be modular in nature, and shall permit easy expansion through the addition of field controllers, sensors, and actuators.
.4
Serial Communication Ports: Digital Panels shall provide at least two RS-232C serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of multiple operator I/O devices, such as laptop computers, Personal Computers, and Video Display terminals. Override Monitoring: Digital Panels shall monitor the status of all overrides, and include this information in logs and summaries to inform the operator that automatic control has been inhibited. Integrated On-line Diagnostics: Each Digital Panel shall continuously perform self-diagnostics, communication diagnosis and diagnosis of all subsidiary equipment. Digital Panels shall provide both local and remote annunciation of any detected component failures, or repeated failure to establish communication. Indication of the diagnostic results shall be provided at each Digital Panel.
Surge and Transient Protection: Isolation shall be provided at all network terminations, as well as all field point terminations, to suppress induced voltage transients consistent with IEEE Standard 587-1980. Isolation levels shall be sufficiently high as to allow all signal wiring to be run in the same conduit as high voltage wiring where acceptable by electrical code. Powerfail Restart: In the event of the loss of normal power, there shall be an orderly shutdown of the Digital Panel to prevent the loss of data base or operating system software. Non-volatile memory shall be incorporated for all critical controller configuration data, and battery backup shall be provided to support the real-time clock and all volatile memory for a minimum of 72 hours. Upon restoration of normal power, the Digital Panel shall automatically resume full operation without manual intervention. Should Digital Panel memory be lost for any reason, the user shall have the capability of reloading the Digital Panel via the local RS-232C port, or telephone line dial-in.
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
UPS: Provide uninterruptible power supply to hold panel operation for a minimum of 15 minutes
Section 25 10 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
to allow an orderly shutdown of control systems in a power interruption situation. If additional capacity is required for this situation, the EMCS contractor shall include in the tender price.
2.4 SYSTEM SOFTWARE FEATURES
.1
General .1
All necessary software to form a complete operating system, as described in this specification, shall be provided.
.2
The software programs specified in this section shall be provided as an integral part of the Digital Panel, and shall not be dependent upon any higher level computer for execution.
.2
Control Software Description: .1 Equipment Cycling Protection: Control software shall include a provision for limiting the number of times each piece of equipment may be cycled within any one-hour period. Powerfail Motor Restart: Upon the resumption of normal power, the DDC panel shall analyze the status of all controlled equipment, compare it with normal occupancy scheduling, and turn equipment on or off as necessary to resume normal operation. All programs shall be executed automatically without the need for operator intervention, and shall be flexible enough to allow user customization. Programs shall be applied to building equipment described in the "Execution" portion of this specification.
.2
.3
.3
Programming Capability: Digital Panels shall be able to execute configured processes defined by the user to automatically perform calculations and control routines. .1 Process Inputs and Variables: It shall be possible to use any of the following in a configured process:
Section 25 10 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
Any system-measured point data or status Any calculated data Any results from other processes Boolean logic operators (and, or)
.2
Process Triggers: Configured processes may be triggered based on any combination of the following: Time of day Calendar Date Other processes Events (e.g., point alarms)
.3
Data Access: A single process shall be able to incorporate measured or calculated data from any and all other ASCs. In addition, a single process shall be able to issue commands to points in any and all other ASCs on the local network.
.4
Alarm Management: Alarm management shall be provided to monitor, buffer, and direct alarm reports to operator devices and memory files. Each Digital Panel shall perform distributed, independent alarm analysis and filtering to minimize operator interruptions due to non-critical alarms, minimize network traffic, and prevent alarms from being lost. At no time shall the Digital Panel's ability to report alarms be affected by either operator activity at the local I/O device, or communications with other ASCs on the network. .1 Point Change Report Description: All alarm or point change reports shall include the point's English language description, and the time and date of occurrence. Prioritizing: The user shall be able to define the specific system reaction for each point. Alarms shall be prioritized to minimize nuisance reporting and to speed operator response to critical alarms. A minimum of four (4) priority levels shall be provided. Users shall have the ability to manually inhibit alarm reporting for each point. The user shall also be able
.2
Section 25 10 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
to define conditions under which point changes need to be acknowledged by an operator, and/or logged for analysis at a later date. .3 Report Routing: Alarm reports and messages shall be directed to an operator device. Alarm Messages: In addition to the point's descriptor and the time and date, the user shall be able to print, display or store a 60-character alarm message to more fully describe the alarm condition or direct operator response. Auto-Dial Alarm Management: In Dial-up applications, only critical alarms shall initiate a call to a remote operator device. In all other cases, call activity shall be minimized by time-stamping and saving reports until a manual request is received, or until the buffer space is full. The alarm buffer must store a minimum of 50 alarms. Remote Alarm Horn: Each Digital Panel shall be capable of triggering a binary output on an ASC when a critical or network alarm is received. The alarm horn feature shall be silenced when the critical alarm is acknowledged. Trend Analysis: A data collection utility shall be provided to automatically sample, store, and display system data. Measured and calculated analog and binary data shall be assignable to user-definable trends for the purpose of collecting operator-specified performance data over extended periods of time. Sample intervals of 1 minute to 24 hours, in one-minute or one-hour intervals, shall be provided. Each Digital Panel shall have a dedicated buffer for trend data, and shall be capable of storing 32 trend logs. Each trend log shall have up to 4 points trended at 168 data samples each. Data shall be stored at the Digital Panel. Runtime Totalization: Digital Panels shall automatically accumulate and store runtime hours for binary input and output points specified in the "Execution" portion of this specification.
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Section 25 10 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
.1
The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit for Runtime Totalization. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
.2
.5
Pulse Totalization: Digital Panels shall automatically sample, calculate and store consumption totals on a daily, weekly, or monthly basis for user-selected binary pulse input-type points. .1
Totalization shall provide calculation and storage accumulations of up to 9,999,999 units (e.g. KWH, gallons, KBTU, tons. etc.).
.2
The Totalization routine shall have a sampling resolution of one minute. The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
The information available from the Pulse Totalization shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
.3
.4
Peak Demand, with date and time stamp 24-hour Demand Log Accumulated for day Sunday through Saturday usage Sunday through Saturday Demand Demand annual history for past 12 periods Annual history for past 12 periods .6
Event Totalization: Digital Panels shall have the ability to count events, such as the number of times a pump or fan system is cycled on and off.
.1
The Event Totalization feature shall be able to store the records associated with a minimum of 9,999,999 events before reset.
Section 25 10 00 Page 10 2011-06-10
.2
The user shall have the ability to define a warning limit. Unique, user-specified messages shall be generated when the limit is reached.
2.5 APPLICATIONS SPECIFIC CONTROLLERS HVAC APPLICATIONS
.1
Each Digital Panel shall be able to extend its monitoring and control through the use of standalone Application Specific Controllers (ASCs). Each ASC shall operate as a standalone controller capable of performing its specified control responsibilities independently of other controllers in the network. Each ASC shall be a microprocessor-based, multi-tasking, real-time digital control processor. Each ASC shall have sufficient memory to support its own operating system and data bases including:
.2
.3
.4
Control Processes Energy Management Applications Operator I/O (Portable Service Terminal)
The operator interface to any ASC point data or programs shall be through the Digital Panel or portable operator's terminal connected to any ASC on the network.
.5
ASCs shall directly support the temporary use of a portable service terminal that can be connected to the ASC via zone temperature or directly at the controller. The capabilities of the portable service terminal shall include, but not be limited to, the following: Display temperatures Display status Display setpoints Display control parameters Override binary output control Override analog setpoints
Section 25 10 00 Page 11 2011-06-10
Modification of gain and offset constants .6 Powerfail Protection: All system setpoints, proportional bands, control algorithms, and any other programmable parameters shall be stored such that a power failure of any duration does not necessitate reprogramming the ASC.
2.6 OPERATOR INTERFACE
.1
Basic Interface Description: .1 Command Entry/Menu Selection Process: Operator interface software shall minimize operator training through the use of English language prompting and English language point identification.
The operator interface shall also have the option of using a mouse or similar pointing device for a "point and click" approach to facilities management. Users shall be able to start and stop equipment or change setpoints from graphical displays through the use of a mouse or similar pointing device.
.2
.3
Graphical and Text-Based Displays: At the option of the user, the Operator interface shall provide consistent graphical or text-based displays of all system point and application data described in this specification. Point identification, engineering units, status indication, and application naming conventions shall be the same at all operator devices. Password Protection: Multiple-level password access protection shall be provided to allow the user/manager to limit control, display, and data base manipulation capabilities as he deems appropriate for each user, based upon an assigned password. .1
Passwords shall be exactly the same for all operator devices.
.4
.2
A minimum of four (4) levels of access shall be supported: Level 1 = Data Access and
Section 25 10 00 Page 12 2011-06-10

Display
Level 2 = Level 1 + Operator Overrides and Commands

Level 3 = Level 2 + Operator Management Level 4 = Level 3 + Database Generation and Modification.
.3
A minimum of eight (8) passwords shall be supported at each Digital Panel. Operators will be able to perform only those commands available for their respective passwords. Menu selections displayed at any operator device shall be limited to only those items defined for the access level of the password used to log-on. User-definable, automatic log-off timers of from 1 to 60 minutes shall be provided to prevent operators from inadvertently leaving devices logged on.
.4
.5
.5
Operator Commands: The operator interface shall allow the operator to perform commands including, but not limited to, the following: Start-up or shutdown selected equipment Adjust setpoints Add/Modify/Delete time programming Enable/Disable process execution Lock/Unlock alarm reporting for each point Enable/Disable Totalization for each point Enable/Disable Trending Enter temporary override schedules Define Holiday Schedules Change time/date
Section 25 10 00 Page 13 2011-06-10
Enter/Modify analog alarm limits Enable/Disable demand limiting Enable/Disable duty cycle Enable/Disable average/high/low signal select and reset .6 Logs and Summaries: Reports shall be generated manually, and directed to the displays. As a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily obtain the following types of reports: .1
A general listing of all points in the system shall include, but not be limited to, the following:
Points currently in alarm Off-line points

Points currently in override status
.2
Points in Weekly Schedules Holiday Programming
Summaries shall be provided for specific points, for a logical point group, for a user-selected group of groups, or for the entire facility without restriction due to the hardware configuration of the facility management system. Under no conditions shall the operator need to specify the address of hardware controller to obtain system information.
.7
System Configuration and Definition: All temperature and equipment control strategies and energy management routines shall be definable by the operator. System definition and modification procedures shall not interfere with normal system operation and control.
.1
The system shall be provided complete with all equipment and documentation necessary to allow an operator to independently perform
Section 25 10 00 Page 14 2011-06-10
the following functions: Add/Delete/Modify Application Specific Controllers Add/Delete/Modify points of any type, and all associated point parameters, and tuning constants Add/Delete/Modify alarm reporting definition for each point
Add/Delete/Modify energy management applications
Add/Delete/Modify time- and calendar-based programming Add/Delete/Modify Totalization for every point Add/Delete/Modify Historical Data Trending for every point Add/Delete/Modify configured control processes Add/Delete/Modify dial-up telecommunication definition Add/Delete/Modify all operator passwords Add/Delete/Modify Alarm Messages .8 Programming Description: Definition of operator device characteristics, ASCs, individual points, applications and control sequences shall be performed through fill-in-the-blank templates. .1 Network-Wide Strategy Development: Inputs and outputs for any process shall not be restricted to a single ASC, but shall be able to include data from any and all other ASCs to allow the development of network-wide control strategies.
.9
System Definition/Control Sequence Documentation: All portions of system definition shall be self-documenting to provide hardcopy printouts of all configuration and application data.
Section 25 10 00 Page 15 2011-06-10
.10
Data base Save/Restore/Back-Up: Back-up copies of all ASC and Digital Panel data bases shall be stored in at least one personal computer or laptop. Users shall also have the ability to manually execute downloads of an ASC or Digital Panel data base.
.2
Dynamic Color Graphic Displays: Color graphic floor plan displays, and system schematics for each piece of mechanical equipment, including air handling units and hot water boiler systems, shall be provided as specified in the Execution portion of this specification to optimize system performance analysis and speed alarm recognition.
.1
System Selection/Penetration: The operator interface shall allow users to access the various system schematics and floor plans via a graphical penetration scheme, menu selection, or text-based commands. Dynamic Data Displays: Dynamic temperature values, humidity values, flow values, and status indication shall be shown in their actual respective locations, and shall automatically update to represent current conditions without operator intervention. Areas in a building or equipment within a building shall be capable of being assigned to change color to reflect the condition within the area or status of the equipment.
.2
.3
Graphics Definition Package: Graphic generation software shall be provided to allow the user to add, modify, or delete system graphic displays. .1 The EMCS contractor shall provide libraries of pre-engineered screens and symbols depicting standard air handling unit components (e.g. fans, filters, dampers, etc.), complete mechanical systems (e.g. constant volume-terminal reheat, etc.) and electrical symbols.
The graphic development package shall use a mouse or similar pointing device in conjunction with a drawing program to allow the user to perform the following:
.2
Section 25 10 00 Page 16 2011-06-10
Define symbols Position and size symbols Define background screens Define connecting lines and curves Locate, orient and size descriptive text Define and display colors for all elements
Establish correlation between symbols or text and associated system points or other displays.
Define an area of a graphic or a symbol and select colors for each of the point states Graphical displays can be created to represent any logical grouping of system points or calculated data based upon building function, mechanical system, building layout, or any other logical grouping of points which aids the operator in the analysis of the facility.
To accomplish this, the user shall be able to build graphic displays that include point data from multiple application specific controllers.
.3
.4
.4
Hardware Requirements .1 Personal Computer: .1

Provide a Pentium IV Computer with a minimum 256 Mb of memory, 80 GB hard drive, 1.44 Mb floppy Drive, 1.6 Mb video card, 19" ultra resolution LCD color monitor, a 56,600 Baud modem, Enhanced Keyboard and Mouse.
.2
Printer: .1
Provide a suitable alarm and report printer for connection to either the Digital Panel or Personal Computer.
.3
Modem: .1 Provide a Hayes compatible 56,600
Section 25 10 00 Page 17 2011-06-10
baud modem. .4 UPS: Provide uninterruptible power supply to hold equipment operation for a minimum of 15 minutes to allow an orderly shutdown of control systems in a power interruption situation. If additional capacity is required for this situation, the EMCS contractor shall include in the tender price. OWS Desk .1
Provide desk to mount P.C., printer, modem and support other activities of operator. Minimum desk surface to be 1200 mm (wide) x 750 mm (front / back) x 750 mm (high). Desk shall have shelf below top surface to support computer with monitor, keyboard and mouse on desk surface. Unit shall be mounted on casters. Location as noted on drawing.
.5
2.7 FIELD SENSORS
.1
Temperature Sensors .1 Temperature sensors shall be 1000 OHM nickel RTD type. Analog temperature sensors shall provide an output signal that varies continuously with the sensed temperature, within a specified range. Binary temperature sensors shall provide an output signal that is either on or off depending upon whether the sensed temperature is above or below the setpoint temperature. All sensors of a particular category shall be of the same type and manufacturer. Provide temperature sensors suitable for one or more of the following mounting methods: duct mount, pipe thermowell mount. Insertion Type - Suitable for insertion into air ducts at any angle, and shall have a minimum insertion of 6". Immersion Type - Suitable for immersion into fluids in tanks or pipes with separable well and heat transfer compound. Sensor wells shall be brass and compatible with the sensor.
.2
.3
Section 25 10 00 Page 18 2011-06-10
.4
Averaging Type with Extended Element Suitable for duct mounting to obtain average temperature by sampling along a capillary tube element. Outside Air Sensing Type - Shall have sun shades to minimize solar effects and shall be mounted to minimize building outside air film effects. Space Type - Non-Secure Areas occupied/unoccupied override switches. Thermostats/ sensors for terminal boxes shall have lockable access to temperature setpoint adjustment. Portable operator terminal shall be able to connect to space thermostat/sensor. Space Type Secure Areas Cells locate sensors in secure &-chase areas in exhaust ducts from cells. Sensors shall be moisture resistant, general purpose RTD/thermistor sensing element suitable for duct mounting. Sensing element to be securely attached to metal enclosure with conduit connections. Enclosure to be firmly attached to duct. Sensing element to be selected to suit actual duct size. .1 Acceptable material: Johnson Controls TE-6311M-1, Greystone, Precon.
.5
.6
.7
.8
Space Type Secure Areas Common Spaces locate sensors as shown on drawings. Sensors shall be moisture resistant, general purpose RTD/thermistor sensing element suitable for mounting concealed on rear side of blank wall plate. Sensing element to be firmly adhered to back of blank plate. Enclosure shall be designed and manufactured for secure installation in poured concrete walls and shall consist of 10 ga steel backplate for cast-in-place concrete construction, one-piece blank 10 ga steel front plate finished in baked white enamel and fastened with secure screws in each corner. .1 Acceptable material: Johnson Controls, Greystone, Precon (w/ Cooper Fail-Safe SPC box and cover).
.2
Differential Pressure Switches
Section 25 10 00 Page 19 2011-06-10
.1
All pressure sensing elements shall be corrosion resistant. Pressure sensing elements shall be diaphragm type as required by the application. Units shall have adjustable range and differential pressure settings. Pressure sensor switches shall be snap action type. Sensor assembly shall operate automatically and reset automatically when conditions return to normal. Protect complete sensor assembly against vibration at all critical movement pivots and slides.
Sensors on all liquid lines shall have an isolation valve installed between each sensor and its pressure source.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.3
Control Valves .1
Sized by temperature control manufacturer and guaranteed to meet the heating and cooling requirements; each tagged for project location. Water valves shall be sized on the basis of 15% of the total system pressure drop, but not more than 10' of head drop. Size motorized hot water control valves for not more than 5' of head drop. Pressure drop for valves shall be submitted for review.
.2
Equal percentage type, equipped with characteristic type throttling plug, stainless steel stem, removable composition discs, and rubber diaphragms. Provided with necessary features to operate in sequence with other valves or damper operators and adjustable throttling range.
Valves NPS2 and smaller: screwed bodies; NPS 2 1/2" and larger: flanged bodies; designed for 125 PSI operating pressure. Arranged to fail-safe as called for, tight closing and quiet operating. Physical sizes of valves will be such that they will fit within the physical space
.3
.4
Section 25 10 00 Page 20 2011-06-10
provided within radiation and equipment enclosures. Verify before ordering materials. .4 Electric Operators (Valve) .1 Provide a 24 vac control operators which are 0-10 VDC input proportional and designed for water or steam service valve bodies. Operator shall be Synchronous motor driven with 50 lb force and force sensor safety stop. Enclosure shall be cast aluminum.
.5
Electric Operators (Damper) .1

Provide 24 vac damper actuators which are 0-10 vac input proportional and designed to operate position dampers. Operator shall be synchronous motor driven with up to 100 in.lb. force sensor safety stops and spring return as required. Enclosure shall be cast aluminum.
.6
Static Pressure Transmitters .1

The sensors shall be a variable capacitance type, utilizing a stainless steel diaphragm and insulated electrode for positioning of the diaphragm.
.2
The sensor shall produce a linear 4 to 20 mA or 0-5 VDC with accuracys of 1% full scale in normal ambient temperature environments.
Pressure ranges 0 to 0.1 in w.g. through 0 to 25.0 in w.g.
.3
.4
The transmitter shall be temperature compensated to account for any thermal error over the entire temperature range of 40oF-100oF, 0-95% RH. Overpressurization 10 in w.g. up to ten times range. The transmitter shall have zero span adjustment capability, but shall be factory calibrated.
.5
.7
Relative Humidity Sensors .1 Relative humidity sensors shall be an analog precision resistance type relative humidity detector. Sensor shall have an
Section 25 10 00 Page 21 2011-06-10
overall accuracy of +/- three (3%) percent of span over a range of 5% - 95% relative humidity. .8 Air Flow Measurement .1 Airflow measurement stations shall be provided in inlets of air handler equipment as shown.
Sensing elements shall be manufactured of extruded aluminum with integral total and static pressure monitor chambers.
.2
.3
Airflow sensing elements shall increase system pressure drop by less than 0.03 w.c. at velocity at 2000 fpm. Acceptable Material: FE-1050. Paragon Controls
.4
PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1
Install the digital panel, PC, printer, and other associated hardware as shown on plans.
.2
Verify location of thermostats and other exposed control sensors with drawings before installation. Locate thermostats at same elevation as light switches.
Install damper motors on outside of ducts. Do not locate in air stream, except for roof mounted equipment. Wire "hand/off/auto" selector switches such that automatic operating controls and not safety controls and electrical over current protection shall be overridden when switch is in the "hand" position.
.3
.4
.5
Unless specified otherwise, install all outdoor air sensors on the north exposure of the building. Install all safety limits at the operators level. Where secure area temperature sensors are installed in masonry construction, coordinate installation with masonry trade. Temperature sensors shall be installed in steel block section as specified in Section 04 29 13.
.6
.7
Section 25 10 00 Page 22 2011-06-10
EMCS LOCAL AREA NETWORK (LAN)
Section 25 10 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1 Section Includes: .1 System requirements for Local Area Network (LAN) for Building Energy Monitoring and Control System (EMCS). Related Sections: .1 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements.
.2
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA T529-[95(R2000)], Telecommunications Cabling Systems in Commercial Buildings (Adopted ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-A with modifications). .2 CSA T530-[99(R2004)], Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (Adopted ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A with modifications).
.2
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)/Standard for Information technology Telecommunications and information exchange between systems - Local and metropolitan area networks Specific requirements. .1 IEEE Std 802.3TM -[2002], Part 3: Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access method and physical layer specifications. Telecommunications Industries Association (TIA)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) .1 TIA/EIA-568-[March 2004], Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards Set, Part 1 General Requirements Part 2 Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components Part 3 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. .2 TIA/EIA-569-A-[December 2001], Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces. Treasury Board Information Technology Standard (TBITS). .1 TBITS 6.9-[2000], Profile for the Telecommunications Wiring System in Government Owned and Leased Buildings - Technical Specifications.
.3
.4
Section 25 10 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 DEFINITIONS
.1
Acronyms and definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
.1
Data communication network to link Operator Workstations and Master Control Units (MCU) in accordance with CSA T529 TIA/EIA-568 and CSA T530 TIA/EIA-569-A and TBITS 6.9. .1 Provide reliable and secure connectivity of adequate performance between different sections (segments) of network. .2 Allow for future expansion of network, with selection of networking technology and communication protocols.
Data communication network to include, but not limited to: .1 EMCS-LAN. .2 Modems. .3 Network interface cards. .4 Network management hardware and software. .5 Network components necessary for complete network.
.2
.1
EMCS Local Area Network (EMCS-LAN). .1 High speed, high performance, local area network over which MCUs and OWSs communicate with each other directly on peer to peer basis in accordance with IEEE 802.3/Ethernet Standard.
.2 EMCS-LAN to: BACnet. .3 Each EMCS-LAN to be capable of supporting at least 50 devices. .4 Support of combination of MCUs and OWSs directly connected to EMCS-LAN. .5 High speed data transfer rates for alarm reporting, quick report generation from multiple controllers, upload/download information between network devices. Bit rate to be 10 Megabits per second minimum. .6 Detection and accommodation of single or multiple failures of either OWSs, MCUs or network media. Operational equipment to continue to perform designated functions effectively in event of single or multiple failures. .7 Commonly available, multiple sourced, networking components and protocols to allow system to co-exist with other networking applications including office automation.
Section 25 10 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
.2
Dynamic Data Access. .1 LAN to provide capabilities for OWSs, either network resident or connected remotely, to access point status and application report data or execute control functions for other devices via LAN. .2 Access to data to be based upon logical identification of building equipment. Network Medium. .1 Network medium: shielded twisted cable, or fibre optic cable compatible with network protocol to be used within buildings. Fibre optic cable to be used between buildings.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
EMCS FIELD CONTROL DEVICES
Section 25 30 02 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Related Sections: .1 Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. .2 Section 23 09 43 - Pneumatic Control System for HVAC. .3 Section 23 33 15 - Dampers - Operating. .4 Section 25 01 11 - EMCS: Start-Up, Verification and Commissioning. .5 Section 25 05 01 - EMCS: General Requirements. .6 Section 25 05 02 - EMCS: Shop Drawings, Product Data and Review Process. .7 Section 25 05 54 - EMCS: Identification. .8 Section 25 90 01 - EMCS: Site Requirements Applications and Systems Sequences of Operation. .9 Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results Electrical]. .10 Section 26 27 10 - Modular Wiring System. .11 Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI). ANSI C12.7-[1993(R1999)], Requirements for .1 Watthour Meter Sockets. .2 ANSI/IEEE C57.13-[1993], Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers. American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM). .1 ASTM B148-[97(03)], Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA). .1 NEMA 250-[03], Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). Air Movement and Control Association, Inc. (AMCA). .1 AMCA Standard 500-D-[98], Laboratory Method of Testing Dampers For Rating.
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CAN/CSA-C22.1-069, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21st Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Section 25 30 02 Page 2 2011-06-10
1.3 DEFINITIONS
.1
Acronyms and Definitions: refer to Section 25 05 01.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings and manufacturer's installation instructions in accordance with Section 25 05 02.
.2
Pre-Installation Tests. .1 Submit samples at random from equipment shipped, as requested by Departmental Representative, for testing before installation. Replace devices not meeting specified performance and accuracy. Manufacturer's Instructions: .1 Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for specified equipment and devices.
.3
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1
Electrical: .1 Division 26 to provide power wiring from power panels to EMCS field panels. Circuits to be for exclusive use of EMCS equipment. Panel breakers to be identified on panel legends tagged and locks applied to breaker switches.
.2
Mechanical: .1 Pipe Taps Required For EMCS equipment will be supplied and installed by Division 22 / 23. .2 Wells and Control Valves Shall Be Supplied by EMCS Contractor and Installed by Division 22 / 23 .3 Installation of air flow stations, dampers, and other devices requiring sheet metal trades to be mounted by Division 23. Costs for installation to be carried by designated trade.
.3
Structural: .1 Special steelwork as required for installation of work.
1.6 PERSONNEL QUALIFICATIONS
.1
Qualified supervisory personnel to: .1 .2 Continuously direct and monitor all work. Attend site meetings.
Section 25 30 02 Page 3 2011-06-10
2.1 SPECIAL SUPPORTS

.1 Structural grade steel, primed and painted after construction and before installation.
2.2 WIRING
.1 .2
As per requirements of Division 26. For 70V and above copper conductor with chemically cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene insulation rated RW90 and 600V. Colour code to CSA 22.1.
For wiring under 70 volts use FT6 rated wiring where wiring is not run in conduit. All other cases use FT4 wiring.
.3
.4
.5
Sizes: .1 120V Power supply: to match or exceed breaker, size #12 minimum. .2 Wiring for safeties/interlocks for starters, motor control centres, to be stranded, #14 minimum. .3 Field wiring to digital device: 20AWG stranded twisted pair. .4 Analog input and output: shielded #20 minimum stranded twisted pair. Wiring must be continuous without joints. .5 More than 4 conductors: #22 minimum solid copper. Terminations: .1 Terminate wires with screw terminal type connectors suitable for wire size, and number of terminations.
2.3 CONDUIT
.1 .2 As per requirements of Division 26. Electrical metallic tubing to CSA C22.2 83. Flexible and liquid tight flexible metal conduit to CSA C22.2 56. Rigid steel threaded conduit to CSA C22.2 45. Junction and pull boxes: welded steel. .1 Surface mounting cast FS: screw-on flat covers. .2 Flush mounting: covers with 25 mm minimum extension all round. Cabinets: sheet steel, for surface mounting, with hinged door, latch lock, 2 keys, complete with perforated metal mounting backboard. Panels to be keyed alike for similar functions and or entire contract as approved.
.3
.4
Section 25 30 02 Page 4 2011-06-10
.5 .6
Outlet boxes: 100 mm minimum, square. Conduit boxes, fittings: .1 Bushings and connectors: with nylon insulated throats. .2 With push pennies to prevent entry of foreign materials. Fittings for rigid conduit: .1 Couplings and fittings: threaded type steel. .2 Double locknuts and insulated bushings: use on sheet metal boxes. .3 Use factory "ells" where 90 degree bends required for 25 mm and larger conduits. Fittings for thin wall conduit: .1 Connectors and couplings: steel, set screw type.
.7
.8
2.4 WIRING DEVICES, COVER PLATES
.1 .2
Conform to CSA. Receptacles: .1 Duplex: CSA type 5-15R. .2 Single: CSA type 5-15R. Cover plates and blank plates: finish to match .3 other plates in area.
2.5 STARTERS, CONTROL DEVICES
.1
Starter diagrams: .1 Provide copy of wiring and schematic diagrams - mount one copy in each starter with additional copies for operation and maintenance manual. Auxiliary Control Devices: .1 Control transformers: 60 Hz, primary voltage to suit supply, 120 V single phase secondary, VA rating to suit load plus 20% margin. .2 Auxiliary contacts: one "Normally Open" and one "Normally Closed" spare auxiliary contact in addition to maintained auxiliary contacts as indicated.
.2
.3 Hand-Off-Automatic switch: heavy duty type, knob lever operator. .4 Double voltage relays: with barrier to separate relay contacts from operating magnet. Operating coil voltage and contact rating as indicated.
Section 25 30 02 Page 5 2011-06-10
2.6 SUPPORTS FOR CONDUIT, FASTENINGS, EQUIPMENT
.1
Solid masonry, tile and plastic surfaces: lead anchors or nylon shields. .1 Hollow masonry walls, suspended drywall ceilings: toggle bolts.
.2
Exposed conduits or cables: .1 50 mm diameter and smaller: one-hole steel straps. .2 Larger than 50 mm diameter: two-hole steel straps.
.3
Suspended support systems: Individual cable or conduit runs: support with .1 6 mm diameter threaded rods and support clips. .2 Two or more suspended cables or conduits: support channels supported by 6 mm diameter threaded rod hangers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install equipment, components so that manufacturer's and CSA labels are visible and legible after commissioning is complete
3.2 SUPPORTS
.1
Install special supports as required and as indicated.
3.3 ELECTRICAL GENERAL .1
Do complete installation in accordance with requirements of: .1 Division 26, this specification. .2 CSA 22.1 Canadian Electrical Code. .3 ANSI/NFPA 70. .4 ANSI C2.
.2 Fully enclose or properly guard electrical wiring, terminal blocks, high voltage above 70 V contacts and mark to prevent accidental injury. .3 Do underground installation to CAN/CSA C22.3No.7, except where otherwise specified.
Section 25 30 02 Page 6 2011-06-10
.4 Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for storage, handling and installation. .5 Check factory connections and joints. Tighten where necessary to ensure continuity. .6 Install electrical equipment between 1000 and 2000 mm above finished floor wherever possible and adjacent to related equipment. .7 Protect exposed live equipment such as panel, mains, outlet wiring during construction for personnel safety. .8 Shield and mark live parts "LIVE 120 VOLTS" or other appropriate voltage. .9 Install conduits, and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete. .10 Holes through exterior wall and roofs: flash and make weatherproof. .11 Make necessary arrangements for cutting of chases, drilling holes and other structural work required to install electrical conduit, cable, pull boxes, outlet boxes. .12 Install cables, conduits and fittings which are to be embedded or plastered over, neatly and closely to building structure to minimize furring.
3.4 CONDUIT SYSTEM
.1 All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Provide complete conduit system to link Building Controllers to main control panel. Conduit sizes to suit wiring requirements and to allow for future expansion capabilities specified for systems. Maximum conduit fill not to exceed 40%. Design drawings do not show conduit layout. .2 Install conduits parallel or perpendicular to building lines, to conserve headroom and to minimize interference. Conduit shall be installed tight to building structure unless authorized by the Engineer. .3 Do not run exposed conduits in normally occupied spaces unless otherwise indicated or unless impossible to do otherwise. Obtain approval from Engineer before starting such work. Provide complete conduit system to link field panels and devices with main control centre. Conduit size to match conductors plus future expansion capabilities as specified. .4 Locate conduits at least 150 mm parallel from hot pipes and at least 50 mm at crossovers.
Section 25 30 02 Page 7 2011-06-10
.5 Bend conduit so that diameter is reduced by less than 1/10th original diameter. .6 Field thread on rigid conduit to be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight. .7 Limit conduit length between pull boxes to less than 30 m. .8 Use conduit outlet boxes for conduit up to 32 mm diameter and pull boxes for larger sizes. .9 Fastenings and supports for conduits, cables, and equipment: .1 Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures as indicated and as required to support cable and conduit runs. .2 Provide adequate support for raceways and cables, sloped vertically to equipment. .3 Use supports or equipment installed by other trades for conduit, cable and raceway supports only after written approval from Engineer. .10 Install polypropylene fish cord in empty conduits for future use. .11 Where conduits become blocked, remove and replace blocked sections.
Pass conduits through structural members only after .12 receipt of Engineer's written approval.
.13 Conduits may be run in flanged portion of structural steel. .14 Group conduits wherever possible on suspended or surface channels. .15 Pull boxes: .1 Install in inconspicuous but accessible locations. .2 Support boxes independently of connecting conduits. .3 Fill boxes with paper or foam to prevent entry of construction material. .4 Provide correct size of openings. Reducing washers not permitted. .5 Mark location of pull boxes on record drawings. Identify AC power junction boxes, by panel and .6 circuit breaker.
.16 Install terminal blocks or strips indicated in cabinets.
Section 25 30 02 Page 8 2011-06-10
.17 Install bonding conductor for 120 volt and above in conduit. .18 No conduit shall be exposed in non-secure areas.
.19 Particular care is to be taken when laying out and installing conduit and devices in secure Y-chases. Conduit and devices are to be mounted so they do not protrude into service space. Orient to back side of duct or pipe to be close to wall.
3.5 WIRING
.1 .2 Install multiple wiring in ducts simultaneously. Do not pull spliced wiring inside conduits or ducts.
.3 Use CSA certified lubricants of type compatible with insulation to reduce pulling tension. .4 Tests: use only qualified personnel. Demonstrate that: .1 Circuits are continuous, free from shorts, unspecified grounds. .2 Resistance to ground of all circuits is greater than 50 Megohms.
.5 Provide Engineer with test results showing locations, circuits, results of tests. .6 Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and install to manufacturer's recommendations. Accommodate all strands in lugs. Where insulation is stripped in excess, neatly tape so that only lug remains exposed. .7 Wiring in main junction boxes and pull boxes to terminate on terminal blocks only, clearly and permanently identified. Junctions or splices not permitted for sensing or control signal covering wiring. .8 Do not allow wiring to come into direct physical contact with compression screw. .9 Install ALL strands of conductor in lugs of components. Strip insulation only to extent necessary for installation.
3.6 WIRING DEVICES, COVER PLATES
.1
Receptacles: .1 Install vertically in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location. .2 Cover plates: Install suitable common cover plate where .1 wiring devices are grouped. .2 Use flush type cover plates only on flush type outlet boxes.
Section 25 30 02 Page 9 2011-06-10
3.7 STARTERS, CONTROL DEVICES
.1 Install and make power and control connections as indicated. .2 Install correct over-current devices.
Identify each wire, terminal for external connections .3 with permanent number marking identical to diagram.
.4
Performance Verification: .1 Operate switches and controls to verify functioning. .2 Perform start and stop sequences of contactors and relays. .3 Check that interlock sequences, with other separate related starters, equipment and auxiliary control devices, operate as specified.
3.8 GROUNDING
.1 Install complete, permanent, continuous grounding system for equipment, including conductors, connectors and accessories. .2 Install separate grounding conductors in conduit within building. .3 Install ground wire in all PVC ducts and in tunnel conduit systems.
Tests: perform ground continuity and resistance tests, .4 using approved method appropriate to site conditions.
3.9 TESTS
.1 General: .1 Perform following tests. .2 Give 14 days written notice of intention to test. .3 Conduct in presence of Engineer and authority having jurisdiction. Engineer will have option to forego attendance and allow test to proceed. .4 Conceal work only after tests satisfactorily completed. .5 Report results of tests to Engineer in writing.
.2
Preliminary tests:
Conduct as directed to verify compliance with .1 specified requirements. .2 Make needed changes, adjustments, replacements.
Section 25 30 02 Page 10 2011-06-10
.3
Insulation resistance tests: .1 Megger all circuits, feeders, equipment for 120 - 600V with 1000V instrument. Resistance to ground to be more than required by Code before energizing. .2 Test insulation between conductors and ground, efficiency of grounding system to satisfaction of Engineer and authority having jurisdiction.
EMCS CONTROL SEQUENCES
Section 25 90 01 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 PURPOSE
.1 Control sequences are intended to relay the general intent of how mechanical systems are to operate. They are not intended to give direct instruction in the construction or programming of the system. Each control sequence to be custom function. Provide documentation of herein. programmed for its intended control sequence logic used
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 - NOT USED
.1 Not used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
.1 Contractor components otherwise. shall provide full EMCS control of all of building unless noted specifically to be mechanical controlled
.2
All noted set points to be adjustable through EMCS.
3.2 SEQUENCE
.1 Air Handler Unit AHU-1 (Living Unit) .1 Outside air intake path: .1 Unit is configured as follows: .1 Heat recovery unit HRV-1: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 Outside air intake damper. Summer prefilter. Outside air preheat coil. Winter prefilter. Heat recovery core. Ventilation air supply fan.

.2
Section 25 90 01 Page 2 2011-06-10
Indoor air supply fan: .1 .2 .3 .4 Isolation damper. Final filter. Heating coil. Supply air fan. Air control valves.
.3
Duct system: .1
.2
Indoor air exhaust path: .1 Duct system: .1 .2 .2 .1 .2 .3 .4 Air control valves. Isolation damper. Prefilter. Heat recovery core. Exhaust air fan. Exhaust air discharge damper.
Heat recovery unit HRV-1:
.2
Scheduling .1 .2 This system is intended to operate full time. Provide ability to schedule on daily, weekly, annual, holiday (fixed and floating). Owner will have complete access for scheduling and override. Owner access shall be from a dedicated screen in the graphic interface. Upon system start-up: .1 The outside air intake damper with its associated isolation damper and the exhaust air discharge damper with its associated isolation damper shall be fully opened. When the status of the dampers are proven by their end switches, the ventilation air supply fan, supply air fan and exhaust air fan shall be started. Upon proof of status of all fans, the control routines for the heat recovery section, preheat coil and heating coil shall be enabled. If OAT is below 5C, 3 way control valve at preheat coil shall position to maintain 5C downstream of the coil (before entering heat recovery core). 3 way control valve at heating coil shall position to maintain 20C downstream of the coil in the supply duct system. If OAT is above 5C, preheat coil shall be bypassed. 3 way control valve at heating coil shall position to maintain 20C downstream of the coil in the supply duct system. Provide supply air temperature reset to lower SAT as outdoor air temperature rises.
.3
Operation .1
.2
.2
Supply Air Temperature Control: .1
.2

.3
Section 25 90 01 Page 3 2011-06-10
Where conditions permit, enable economizer control of HRV1 so that variable amounts of outdoor air bypass heat recovery core. Supply and exhaust air valves shall monitor and control airflow to all spaces served by this system. A variable speed drive on the supply air fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain a constant downstream duct pressure. Measure pressure at two locations. Control to average. Provide warning if individual measurements vary more than 15%. A variable speed drive on the exhaust air fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain the sum of the exhaust air valves equal to the sum of the supply air valves plus an offset of 100 l/s. A variable speed drive on the ventilation air supply fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain the ventilation supply airflow equal to the sum of the supply air valve flows.
.3
Supply / Exhaust Air Volume Control .1 .2
.3
.4
.4
Air Conditioning (Open Staff, Unit Control, Living Unit

galleries)
.1 .2
When the economizer cycle is no longer able to maintain space temperature activate air conditioning system. Air conditioning shall be provided by a single stage dx system consisting of a duct mounted coil and remote roof mounted condensing unit. Individual branches shall be equipped with air flow control valves with flow sensing and duct reheat coils. EMCS shall monitor duct temperature and cycle condensing unit to maintain S/A temperature of 13C. Individual zones shall control temperatures by varying air flow volume down to minimum (at 70% of design). If all air valves have reduced airflow, reset S/A temperature higher to maintain airflow through the dx coil. If any airflow zone is at minimum and still calling for hat while another is at maximum airflow, modulate zone reheat coil to satisfy heating requirement. Owners staff shall be able to implement special airflow routines throughout a touch screen associated with the BSCS system. Cooperate fully with BSCS contractor to ensure complete and fully integrated systems. Exhaust air flow may be stopped from any spaces associated with any air valve. In this condition, supply air flow will continue as described for normal operation. Remaining exhaust air valves will adjust to try to maintain the sum of the supply air flows. If remaining air valves are full open and air flow does not match design, reduce set point of supply air valves equally until flows equalize. Adjust speed of ventilation air supply fan to match revised system air flow. Supply air flow may be stopped to any spaces associated with any air valve. In this condition, exhaust air flow will continue as described for normal operation.
.3
.5
Emergency Sequences .1
.2
.3
Section 25 90 01 Page 4 2011-06-10
Remaining supply air valves will adjust to try to maintain the sum of the exhaust air flows. If remaining air valves are full open and air flow does not match design, reduce setpoint of exhaust air valves equally until flows equalize. Adjust speed of ventilation air supply fan to match revised system air flow. .4 Exhaust and supply air flow may be stopped for any spaces associated with air valve sets. In this condition all other shall remain normal and system will adjust to reduced total air flow condition.
.4
Alarms .1 Air handling unit AHU-1 shall be equipped with the following alarms: .1 Low temperature downstream of preheat coil. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of preheat coil falls 5C below setpoint and remains for longer than 5 minutes or falls 10C below setpoint, shutdown AHU-1 and associated HRV-1 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed), initiate alarm at OWS. If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of heat recovery core falls below 0C reset LAT of preheat coil to maintain temperature. If preheat coil remains reset for longer than 5 minutes, initiate alarm at OWS. System shall remain in operation unless LWT from preheat coil reaches 5C at which time shutdown AHU-1 and associated HRV1 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed), initiate alarm at OWS. Low temperature downstream of heating coil. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of heating coil falls below 15C and remains for longer than 5 minutes, initiate an alarm at OWS. System shall remain in operation unless LAT falls below 13C in which case shutdown AHU-1 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed), initiate alarm at OWS. If all system conditions are met and at minimum and supply air temperature downstream of AHU-1 rises more than 5C above outdoor air temperatures and remains for longer than 5 minutes, initiate alarm at OWS. System will continue to operate until operator intervenes to shutdown.
.2
Low temperature downstream of heat recovery core. .1
.2
.3
.4
High supply air temperature. .1
.5
Each filter bank location shall be monitored for pressure drop with a change filter warning initiated when pressure differential rises beyond an acceptable value.
Section 25 90 01 Page 5 2011-06-10
.3
High Duct Static Pressure .1 Monitor duct pressures as follows: .1 .2 .2 .3 Supply air discharge relative to building. Exhaust air inlet relative to building
Adjust associated fan operating speeds to maintain maximum pressure differentials at monitored points. If pressure differential rises above the positive (or falls below the negative) pressure that the duct systems can safely maintain, shut fan system down and initiate alarm.
.2
Air Handler Unit AHU-2 (Programs and Administration) .1 Outside air intake path: .1 Unit is configured as follows: .1 Heat recovery unit HRV-2: .1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .2 .1 .2 .3 Outside air intake damper. Summer prefilter. Outside air preheat coil. Winter prefilter. Heat recovery core. Ventilation air supply fan. Return air prefilter. Return air fan. Return air / ventilation in mixing box complete with isolation damper on ventilation air inlet. Final filter. Heating coil. Supply air fan. Administration / Gallery .1 .2 .3 air valve). .2 .2 Programs .1 Air control valves. DX cooling coil. Humidifier distribution. Air control valves (including bypass
Indoor air handler unit AHU-2:
.4 .5 .6 .3 .1
Duct system:
Indoor air exhaust path:

.1
Section 25 90 01 Page 6 2011-06-10
Duct system: .1 .2 .3 Administration / Gallery .1 .1 Ducting only. Ducting only. combined Administration / Programs Isolation damper (on Gallery / Programs).
.2
Heat recovery unit HRV-2: .1 .2 .3 .4 Prefilter. Heat recovery core. Exhaust air fan. Exhaust air discharge damper.
.2
Scheduling .1 Unit shall operate on a daily, weekly, annual, holiday (fixed and floating schedule). Owner will have complete access for scheduling and override. Owner access shall be from a dedicated screen in the graphic interface. Upon system start-up: .1 The outside air intake damper with its associated isolation damper and the exhaust air discharge damper with its associated isolation damper shall be fully opened. When the status of the dampers are proven by their end switches, the ventilation air supply fan, return fan, supply fan and exhaust air fan shall be started. Upon proof of status of all fans, the control routines for the heat recovery section, preheat coil and heating coil shall be enabled. If OAT is below 10C, 3 way control valve at preheat coil shall position to maintain 10C downstream of the coil (before heat recovery core). 3 way control valve at heating coil shall position to maintain 20C downstream of the coil in the supply duct system. If OAT is above 10C, preheat coil shall be way control valve at heating coil shall maintain 20C downstream of the coil in the system. Provide supply air temperature reset as outdoor air temperature rises. bypassed. 3 position to supply duct to lower SAT
.3
Operation .1
.2
.2
Supply Air Temperature Control: .1
.2
.3
Where conditions permit, enable economizer control of HRV2 so that variable amounts of outdoor air bypass heat recovery core. Supply air valves shall monitor and control airflow to all spaces served by this system as follows: .1 Administration a system of air valves as shown on drawings will monitor and vary air flow to zones
.3
Supply / Exhaust / Return Air Volume Control .1
Section 25 90 01 Page 7 2011-06-10
served in response to space conditions. Minimum air flow will be set at 50% of design air flow. .2 Programs Gallery an air valve as shown on drawings will monitor and vary air flow in response to space conditions. Minimum airflow will be set at 50% of design air flow. Programs A system of air valves as shown on drawings will monitor and control air flow to zones served at constant volume.
.3
.2 .3
Ventilation air supply fan and exhaust air fan shall operate at constant speed with no dynamic volume control. A variable speed drive on the supply air fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain a constant downstream duct pressure. A variable speed drive on the return air fan shall adjust the fan speed to maintain air flow equal to supply air delivered to the administration and gallery areas. Measure supply air as sum of air valve box flows. Measure return air flow by fan inlet volume probes. When the economizer cycle is no longer able to maintain space temperature activate air conditioning system. Air conditioning shall be provided by a single stage dx system consisting of a duct mounted coil and remote roof mounted condensing unit. Individual branches shall be equipped with air flow control valves with flow sensing. EMCS shall monitor duct temperature and cycle condensing unit to maintain S/A temperature of 13C. Individual rooms and zones shall control temperatures by varying air flow volume down to minimum (at 60% of design). Bypass airvalve shall maintain flow at dx coil by opening in response to duct pressure rise. If all air valves have reduced airflow, reset S/A temperature higher to maintain maximum airflow through the dx coil. Maintain space humidity by measuring return air humidity level from space served. Provide humidity high limit control downstream of humidifier in duct. Humidity level to be reset based on outside air temperature. Initially set indoor humidity level at 25% when outdoor air temperature is 25C rising to 40% at indoor air temperature of 10C.
.4
.4
Air Conditioning (Administration and Programs Gallery) .1 .2
.3
.5
Humidification (Administration) .1
.2
.4
Alarms .1 Air handling unit AHU-2 shall be equipped with the following Alarms: .1 Low temperature downstream of preheat coil. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of preheat coil falls 5C below setpoint and remains for longer than 5 minutes or falls 10C below setpoint, shutdown
Section 25 90 01 Page 8 2011-06-10
AHU-2 and associated HRV-2 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed, humidifier off), initiate alarm at OWS. .2 Low temperature downstream of heat recovery core. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of heat recovery core falls below 0C reset LAT of preheat coil to maintain temperature. If preheat coil remains reset for longer than 5 minutes, initiate alarm at OWS. System shall remain in operation unless LWT from preheat coil reaches 5C at which time shutdown AHU-2 and associated HRV2 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed, humidifier off), initiate alarm at OWS. Low temperature downstream of heating coil. .1 If all system conditions are met and at maximum and supply air temperature downstream of heating coil falls below 15C and remains for longer than 5 minutes, at which time shutdown AHU-2 and associated HRV-2 (fans off, outside air, exhaust air and isolation dampers closed, humidifier off), initiate alarm at OWS.
.2
.3
.4
Each filter bank location shall be monitored for pressure drop with a change filter warning initiated when pressure differential rises beyond an acceptable value. On humidity level above setpoint for longer than 15 minutes, initiate warning at OWS. On high humidity, shut down humidifier, initiate alarm at OWS.
.5
.3
Boilers .1 System is configured as follows: .1 2. .2 .1 .3 Two (2) boilers piped in reverse return parallel. Two (2) circulation pumps piped in parallel. Refer to Operation
Scheduling
Operation .1 Boilers .1 EMCS shall communicate with boiler control interface. Interface shall allow EMCS to send HWS setpoint and monitor boiler controller generated fault and error messages including boiler failure alarms. Heating water supply temperature shall response to outside air temperature. reset in
.2 .3
Monitor water temperatures in order to reset supply water temperature to maintain lowest return water temperature possible. If all modulating heating control valves are less than 90% open and have
Section 25 90 01 Page 9 2011-06-10
remained so for longer than 30 minutes and if all two position control valves have been open less than 75% of the same period, reduce supply water temperature by 5C. Continue monitoring and adjusting to maintain lowest possible operating temperature. .4 .5 Boilers shall modulate both at same value so as to maintain lowest individual firing level. Boilers shall remain off until associated loop circulation pump is commanded on and proven by current transformer relays. P-1 and P-2 are each 100% capacity and are activated by the EMCS and a lead/lag algorithm. One pump will start when outdoor air temperature drops below 15C. Cycle lead/lag pumps based on operating time. Pump will shut down when outdoor temperature rises above 18C. On failure of lead pump, switch operation to lag pump, initiate alarm. Provide off season cycle whereby one pump shall operate for 20 minutes once per month in non-heating season. Cycle pump at 05:00 a.m. accordance to schedule.
.2
Circulation Pumps P-1 and P-2 .1 .2
.3 .4
.4
Perimeter Heating Systems .1 Radiant Ceiling Panels .1 Secure Areas Cells .1 Units configured as follows: .1 .2 Radiant panel heaters. Cell temperature sensor located in exhaust air stream secure in y-chase.
.2
Scheduling .1 Capable of being scheduled for daytime/nightime setpoint adjustment. Initially set for constant temperature. Primary heat source for rooms so equipped will be the perimeter radiant panel system. Control valve shall be 2 position on/off. Locate control valves remote from cell in secure y-chase. On drop in room temperature, open valve until setpoint is satisfied. control
.3
Operation .1 .2
.3 .2
Secure Areas Corridors and Programs .1 Units configured as follows:
Section 25 90 01 Page 10 2011-06-10
.1 .2
Radiant panel heater. Space temperature sensor located in space complete with blank cover with tamperproof (Torx with pin) fasteners. Cell corridor systems shall be capable of being scheduled for daytime/night time setpoint adjustment. Initially set for constant temperature. Program area systems shall be capable of being scheduled for daily and weekly daytime/night time setpoint adjustment. Initially set for constant temperature. Primary heat source for rooms so equipped will be the perimeter radiant panel system. Control valve shall be 2 position Locate control valves as follows: .1 Cell chase. .2 corridor in adjacent on/off. Y-
.2
Scheduling .1
.2
.3
Operation .1 .2
secure
Program in adjacent gallery space. control
.3 .3
On drop in room temperature, open valve until setpoint is satisfied.
Administration .1 Units configured as follows: .1 .2 Radiant panel heater. Room temperature sensor located in room as shown. Temperature sensor to be blank face with +/- temperature adjust slide bar and occupied/non-occupied override push button. Capable of being scheduled for daily and weekly daytime/night time setpoint adjustment. Primary heat source for rooms so equipped will be the perimeter radiant panel system. Control valve shall be 2 position on/off. On drop in room temperature, open valve until setpoint is satisfied. Refer to central cooling operation. system control for
.2
Scheduling .1
.3
Operation .1 .2 .3 .4
description
.5
Standalone Systems .1 The following equipment systems shall be controlled standalone electric controls. System setpoints shall adjustable locally at the controller. Unit Heaters by be
.2

.1
Section 25 90 01 Page 11 2011-06-10
Unit configured as follows: .1 .2 Supply air fan. Heating coil (hydronic). No schedule. Room thermostat will open a 2 position control valve and cycle the unit fan on in order to maintain space temperature. Control system shall be low voltage electric. Provide all line voltage relays required for operation.
.2 .3
Scheduling .1 .1 Operation
.2
.3
Console Style Force Flows .1 Unit configured as follows: .1 .2 .2 .3 .1 .1 Supply air fan. Heating coil (hydronic). No schedule. Room thermostat will open a 2 position control valve and cycle the unit fan on in order to maintain space temperature. Control system shall be low voltage electric. Provide all line voltage relays required for operation. Where force flow is located in entry or exit vestibule, include freezestat to shutoff unit fan to prevent coil freeze-up.
Scheduling Operation
.2
.3
.6
Secure Fire hose Isolation .1 For each hose isolation solenoid valve a set of normally open dry contacts will be provided by BSCS. Closure of these contacts will be through the BSCS touch screen. Complete a low voltage circuit between each contact set to the electric pilot valve at each isolation valve. Power supply shall be by EMCS contractor. Cooperate fully with BSCS contractor to ensure a complete and fully integrated system. .1 Pump shall be operated on an adjustable daily schedule through the OWS. .2 Initial schedule as follows: 6:01 a.m. to 6:30 a.m. 6:31 a.m. to 10:00 a.m. 10:01 a.m. to 12:00 noon 12:01 p.m. to 2:00 p.m. 2:01 p.m. to 5:00 p.m. 29 min on / 0 min off 5 min on / 25 min off 5 min on / 10 min off 5 min on / 25 min off 5 min on / 15 min off
.7
Domestic Hot Water Recirculation Pump P-4
Section 25 90 01 Page 12 2011-06-10
5:01 p.m. to 8:00 p.m. 8:01 p.m. to 10:00 p.m. 10:01 p.m. to 6:00 a.m. .8 Range Exhaust .1 Systems are configured as follows: .1 Range A and B .1 .2 .3 .2 .1 .2 .3 .3 .1 .2 .3 .4 .1 .2 .3 .2 .3 Scheduling .1 .1 No schedule. Operation
5 min on / 25 min off 5 min on / 15 min off 5 min on / 15 min off
Range A exhaust fan EF-1 with motorized damper. Range B exhaust fan EF-2 with motorized damper. Roof hood over Dining Area A with motorized damper. Range C exhaust fan EF-3 with motorized damper. Range D exhaust fan EF-4 with motorized damper. Roof hood over Dining Area C with motorized damper. Range E exhaust fan EF-5 with motorized damper. Range F exhaust fan EF-6 with motorized damper. Roof hood over Dining Area E with motorized damper. Range G exhaust fan EF-7 with motorized damper. Range H exhaust fan EF-8 with motorized damper. Roof hood over Dining Area G with motorized damper.
Range C and D
Range E and F
Range G and H
For each exhaust fan listed, a set of normally open dry contacts will be provided by BSCS. Closure of these contacts will be through the BSCS touch screen. Complete a low voltage circuit between each contact and its corresponding exhaust fan starter and damper end switch. Power supply shall be by EMCS contractor. Cooperate fully with BSCS contractor to ensure a complete and fully integrated system. Upon closure of any selected exhaust fan run contact: .1 .2 .3 Open associated motorized dampers on exhaust fan and at Dining Area roof intake. When dampers are proven open by end switches start exhaust fan. Either or both exhaust fans associated with each Dining Area may be run. Stop exhaust fan. Close motorized dampers.
.2
.3
Upon deactivation of selected exhaust fan run contract: .1 .2
Section 25 90 01 Page 13 2011-06-10
.4
Alarms .1 Range exhaust systems shall be equipped with the following alarms: .1 System in operation .1 An alarm will be issued when any system is in operation.
.2
Low temperature in range .1 When temperature in range drops to 5C as measured by temperature sensor at end of range, issue an alarm to OWS. System shall remain in operation until shutdown through BSCS.
COMMON WORK RESULT FOR - ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00 Page 1 2011-06-11
1.1 SUMMARY
.1
Section Includes: .1 General requirements that are common to sections found in Division 26 Electrical, 27 - Communications 28 - Electronic Safety and Security. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-C22.1-[09], Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21st Edition), Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN3-C235-[83(R2006)], Preferred Voltage Levels for AC Systems, 0 to 50,000 V. .3 Do underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No.7-06, Underground Systems, except where specified otherwise. The Ontario Electrical Safety Code 2009, and all bulletins (Ontario). Hydro requirements and local applicable codes and regulations.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
.2
.3
.1 .2
Operating voltages: to CAN3-C235. Motors, electric heating, control and distribution devices and equipment to operate satisfactorily at 60 Hz within normal operating limits established by above standard.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2 .3
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS. Submit for review single line electrical diagrams under Plexiglas and locate as follows: .1 Electrical distribution system in main electrical room.
Submit for review fire alarm riser diagram, plan and zoning of building under Plexiglas at fire alarm control panel and annunciator.
.4
.5
Shop drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario within [3] weeks of Award of

.6

Contract.
Section 26 05 00 Page 2 2011-06-11
Quality Control: in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Provide CSA certified equipment and materials. .2 Where CSA certified equipment and material is not available, submit such equipment and material to authority having jurisdiction for special approval before delivery to site. .3 Submit test results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation. .4 Permits and fees: in accordance with General Conditions of contract. Pay associated fees. Departmental Representative will provide drawings and specifications required by Electrical Inspection Department and Supply Authority at no cost. .5 Submit, upon completion of Work, load balance report as described in PART 3 - Load Balance. .6 Submit certificate of acceptance from Electrical Inspection Department having jurisdiction upon completion of Work to Departmental Representative.
.1
Quality Assurance: in accordance with Section 01 45 00. The work of this division to be carried out by a contractor who holds a valid Master Electrical contractor license as issued by the Province that the work is being contracted.
Qualifications: electrical Work to be carried out by qualified, licensed electricians or apprentices in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction as per the conditions of Provincial Act respecting manpower vocational training and qualification.
.2
.3
.4
Conduct a complete testing, start-up and Commissioning Program as specified in Division 01.
Submit a complete testing and Commisioning Schedule and notify the Engineer a minimum of 40 hours prior to performance of testing. Submit a complete testing and Commissioning repoertat completeion of the work.
.5
.6
.1
Material Delivery Schedule: provide Departmental Representative with schedule within 2 weeks after award of Contract. Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.7 SYSTEM STARTUP
.1
Section 26 05 00 Page 3 2011-06-11
Instruct operating personnel in operation, care and maintenance of systems, system equipment and components. Arrange and pay for services of manufacturer's factory service engineer to supervise start-up of installation, check, adjust, balance and calibrate components and instruct operating personnel.
.2
.3
Provide these services for such period, and for as many visits as necessary to put equipment in operation, and ensure that operating personnel are conversant with aspects of its care and operation.
1.8 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in technical sections for use by operation and maintenance personnel.
.2
Operating instructions to include the following: .1 Wiring diagrams, control diagrams, and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment. .2 Start up, proper adjustment, operating, lubrication, and shutdown procedures. .3 Safety precautions. Procedures to be followed in event of equipment .4 failure. .5 Other items of instruction as recommended by manufacturer of each system or item of equipment. Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic. Post instructions where directed.
For operating instructions exposed to weather, provide weather-resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures.
.3
.4 .5
.6
Ensure operating instructions will not fade when exposed to sunlight and are secured to prevent easy removal or peeling.
Provide a mock-up of the complete electrical systems in one four-cell and two utility chase (Y-chase) module. The mock-up to be constructed as per Section 01 45 00. Include a sample of the cell light fixtures and smoke detection aspirator panel.
1.9 MOCK-UP
.1
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 2 PRODUCTS
Section 26 05 00 Page 4 2011-06-11
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
.1
Provide material and equipment in accordance with Section 01 61 00.

Material and equipment to be CSA certified. Where CSA certified material and equipment is not available, obtain special approval from [authority having jurisdiction before delivery to site and submit such approval as described in PART 1 - Submittals.
.2
.3
Factory assemble control panels and component assemblies. Uniformity of manufacturer shall be maintained for any particular item or type of equipment throughout the building.
.4
2.2 ELECTRIC MOTORS, EQUIPMENT AND CONTROLS
.1
Supplier and Installer responsibility is indicated in Motor Control and Equipment Schedule on electrical drawings and related Mechanical responsibility is indicated on Mechanical Equipment Schedule on mechanical drawings.
Control wiring and conduit: in accordance 26 29 03 except for conduit, wiring and below 50 V which are related to control specified in mechanical sections and as mechanical drawings. with Section connections systems shown on
.2
2.3 WARNING SIGNS
.1
Warning Signs: in accordance with requirements of authority having jurisdiction, inspection authorities and Departmental Representative. Decal] signs, minimum size 175 x 250 mm.
.2
2.4 WIRING TERMINATIONS
.1
Ensure lugs, terminals, screws used for termination of wiring are suitable for either copper or aluminum conductors.
2.5 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify electrical equipment with nameplates and labels as follows: .1 Nameplates: plastic laminate 3 mm thick black face, white core, mechanically attached with self

tapping screws. .2 Sizes as follows:
Section 26 05 00 Page 5 2011-06-11
NAMEPLATE SIZES Size 1 10 x 50 mm Size 2 12 x 70 mm Size 3 12 x 70 mm Size 4 20 x 90 mm Size 5 20 x 90 mm Size 6 25 x 100 mm Size 7 25 x 100 mm .2
1 1 2 1 2 1 2
line line lines line lines line lines
3 mm high letters 5 mm high letters 3 mm high letters 8 mm high letters 5 mm high letters 12 mm high letters 6 mm high letters
Labels: embossed plastic labels with 6 mm high letters unless specified otherwise.
.3
Wording on nameplates and labels to be approved by Departmental Representative prior to manufacture. Allow for minimum of twenty-five 25 letters per nameplate and label. Identifications to be English.
Nameplates for terminal cabinets and junction boxes to indicate system and/or voltage characteristics.
.4
.5 .6
.7
Nameplates for disconnects, starters and contactors: indicate equipment being controlled and voltage. Nameplates for Terminal cabinets and pull boxes: indicate system and voltage. Nameplates for Transformers: indicate capacity, primary and secondary voltages. All nameplates shall be mechanically attached with a minimum of two chrome self tapping screws as well as the self adhesive.
.8
.9
.10
2.6 WIRING IDENTIFICATION
.1
Identify wiring with permanent indelible identifying markings, either numbered or coloured plastic tapes, on both ends of phase conductors of feeders and branch circuit wiring. Maintain phase sequence and colour coding throughout.
.2 .3 .4
Colour coding: to CSA-C22.1.

Use colour coded wires in communication cables, matched throughout system.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.7 CONDUIT AND CABLE IDENTIFICATION
.1
Section 26 05 00 Page 6 2011-06-11
Colour code conduits, boxes and metallic sheathed cables. Code with plastic tape or 305mm band of paint at points where conduit or cable enters wall, ceiling, or floor, and at 15 m intervals. Telephone Communication System Fire Alarm Emergency Television Signal Distribution Building Security Control System Computer Network (Data) UPS System Light Green Purple Red Orange Pink White Blue Grey.
.2
.3
Code Identify all system junction boxes with enamel spray paint on entire cover. Colour shall match those specified for conduit and cable identification. Identify all junction boxes, containing branch circuit conductors, with black felt marker indicating panel and breaker number (i.e. B-24).
.4
2.8 FINISHES
.1
Shop finish metal enclosures by removal of rust and scale, cleaning, application of rust resistant primer inside and outside, and at least two coats of finished enamel. .1 Paint outdoor electrical equipment "equipment green" finish to EEMAC Y1-1. .2 Paint indoor switchgear and distribution enclosures light grey to EEMAC 2Y-1.
.2
Clean and touch up surfaces to shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint.
Clean, prime, and paint exposed fastenings to prevent rusting. hangers, racks,
.3
.4
All electrical fittings, supports, hanger rods, pull boxes, channel fittings, conduit racks, outlet boxes, brackets, clamps, etc. shall either have a galvanized finish, or have a painted finish over corrosion resistant primer.
.5
Where indicated herein and on drawings, provide finishes to match samples as provided by the Engineer.
Section 26 05 00 Page 7 2011-06-11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Complete installation in accordance with the latest edition of the Canadian Electrical Code Part I (CSA C22.1) and the [Provincial] Supplement, as well as Municipal and Provincial Codes and Regulations and the local authorities having jurisdiction. Where this specification is at variance with applicable Codes and Standards, the more stringent shall apply. Complete overhead and underground systems in accordance with CSA C22.3 No. 1 and underground systems in accordance with C22.3 No. 7 except where specified otherwise. Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor) and pneumatic tubing (supplied by Section 11 19 20 DEC Contractor) in conduit and wire trays provided by Electrical Contractor (Division 26). Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted.
.2
.3
.4
Coordinate control cabling, low voltage wires and pneumatic tubing in conduit, raceways and cable trays with Section 11 19 20 DEC Contractor Section
27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor.
3.2 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS
.1
Ensure manufacturer's nameplates, CSA labels and identification nameplates are visible and legible after equipment is installed.
3.3 CONDUIT AND CABLE INSTALLATION
.1
Install conduit and sleeves prior to pouring of concrete. .1 Sleeves through concrete: schedule 40 steel pipe, sized for free passage of conduit, and protruding 50 mm.
Install cables, conduits and fittings to be embedded or plastered over, neatly and close to building structure so furring can be kept to minimum. Conduit shall be laid out to avoid interference with
.2
.3
Section 26 05 00 Page 8 2011-06-11
other trades, and to maintain maximum headroom. Arrange conduit to conserve space, allow maintenance, and avoid crossovers where possible. .4 Holes through exterior walls and roof shall be flashed and made completely weatherproof. Identify on as-built drawings locations both ends of all conduits.
.5
3.4 LOCATION OF OUTLETS
.1 .2
Locate outlets in accordance with Section 26 05 32. Do not install outlets back-to-back in wall; allow minimum 150 mm horizontal clearance between boxes.
Change location of outlets at no extra cost or credit, providing distance does not exceed 3000 mm, and information is given before installation.
.3
.4
Locate light switches on latch side of doors. .1 Locate disconnect devices in mechanical and elevator machine rooms on latch side of floor. Coordinate the rough-in location of all outlets with Architectural, structural, and mechanical drawings. Ensure compatibility with finishes, accessories, and devices by others.
.5
3.5 MOUNTING HEIGHTS
.1
Mounting height of equipment is from finished floor to centreline of equipment unless specified or indicated otherwise. If mounting height of equipment is not specified or indicated, verify before proceeding with installation.
.2
.3
Install electrical equipment at following heights unless indicated otherwise. .1 Local switches: 1200 (1300 mm in concrete block). .2 Wall receptacles: .1 General: 450 mm, [500 mm in concrete block). .2 Above top of continuous baseboard heater: 200 mm. .3 Above top of counters or counter splash backs: 175 mm. .4 In Mechanical Rooms: 1400 mm .5 For microwaves: coordinate with Architectural millwork. .3 Panelboards: 1800 mm to top of panel. .4 Telephone and interphone outlets: 450 mm (500 mm in concrete block). .5 Wall mounted telephone and interphone outlets for non-accessible locations: 1500 mm. .6 Fire alarm stations: 1350 mm [maximum 1200 mm

.7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13
Section 26 05 00 Page 9 2011-06-11
for accessible space. Audio/VisualFire alarm signal device: 2100 mm. End of Line resistor for Signal circuit: 1850 mm. Television outlets: 450 (500 mm in concrete block). Wall mounted speakers: 2100 mm. Clocks: 2100 mm. Motor Starters (loose): 1200mm Wall mounted exit lights: 2200 mm.
3.6 CO-ORDINATION OF PROTECTIVE DEVICES
.1
Ensure circuit protective devices such as overcurrent trips, relays and fuses are installed to required values and settings.
.1
Conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 45 00 Quality Control
.1 .2 .3 .4
.5 .6
Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing. Circuits originating from branch distribution panels. Lighting and its control. Motors, heaters and associated control equipment including sequenced operation of systems where applicable. Systems: fire alarm system; communication systems. Insulation resistance testing: .1 Megger circuits, feeders and equipment up to 350 V with a 500 V instrument. .2 Megger 350-600 V circuits, feeders and equipment with a 1000 V instrument. .3 Check resistance to ground before energizing
.2
Load Balance: .1 Measure phase current to panelboards with normal loads (lighting) operating at time of acceptance; adjust branch circuit connections as required to obtain best balance of current between phases and record changes. .2 Measure phase voltages at loads and adjust transformer taps to within 2% of rated voltage of equipment. .3 Provide upon completion of work, load balance report as directed in PART 1 - Submittals: phase and neutral currents on panelboards, dry-core transformers and motor control centres, operating under normal load, as well as hour and date on which each load was measured, and voltage at time of test.

.3
Section 26 05 00 Page 10 2011-06-11
Conduct following tests in accordance with Section 01 11 01: .1 Power distribution system including phasing, voltage, grounding and load balancing. .2 Circuits originating from branch distribution panels. .3 Lighting and its control. Motors, heaters and associated control equipment .4 including sequenced operation of systems where applicable. .5 Systems: fire alarm system, communications. Carry out tests in presence of Departmental Representative. Provide instruments, meters, equipment and personnel required to conduct tests during and at conclusion of project. Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS. .2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.
.4
.4
.5
3.8 CLEANING
.1
Clean and touch up surfaces of shop-painted equipment scratched or marred during shipment or installation, to match original paint. Clean and prime exposed non-galvanized hangers, racks and fastenings to prevent rusting.
.2
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 21 Waste Management and Disposal, and with the Waste Reduction Workplan.
.2
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.3
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.10 BREAKDOWN AND PRICE
.1
Section 26 05 00 Page 11 2011-06-11
During the course of construction, when the Contractor is requested to submit a price for the performance of additional work, the price shall be broken down as requested by the Engineer to show quantity, material, and labour charges for each item.
.2
Submit a Contract Price Breakdown to the Engineer within 30 days of award of the contract, and with each monthly progress claim during construction. Submit invoices to support claims for material on site, when requested. Price breakdowns shall be submitted in a format acceptable to the Engineer.
3.11 OWNERS EQUIPMENT
.1
This Contractor is responsible for electrical service connections to all Owner's equipment being supplied and installed in the building and that are shown in the contract documents. All Owner's equipment will be supplied complete with starters and disconnects as required.
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0 1000 V
Section 26 05 20 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for wire and box connectors.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18.4-04(R2009), Hardware for the Support of Conduit, Tubing and Cable. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.18-98(R2003), Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware. .3 CSA C22.2 No.65-03, Wire Connectors.
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC) .1 EEMAC 1Y-2, 1961 Bushing Stud Connectors and Aluminum Adapters (1200 Ampere Maximum Rating). National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA).
.2
.3
.1
.2
Divert unused wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
All fixture and branch wiring joints in junction and outlet boxes shall be made with a CSA certified pressure type connector rated at 600 volts maximum. Connector body shall consist of a cone shaped coil spring insert, insulated with a colour coded flame retardant, thermoplastic shell, which shall be knurled for easy grip. Lugs, terminals, and screws used for termination of conductors, shall be suitable for type of conductor
.2
WIRE AND BOX CONNECTORS 0 1000 V
Section 26 05 20 Page 2 2011-06-11
used. .3 .4 Wire connectors to CSA C22.2 No. 65-93. Acceptable manufacturers: Buchanan or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Remove insulation carefully from ends of conductors and: .1 Install mechanical pressure type connectors and tighten screws [with appropriate compression tool recommended by manufacturer]. Installation shall meet secureness tests in accordance with CSA C22.2 No.65.
WIRE AND CABLES (0 -1000 v)
Section 26 05 21 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Provide product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
1.2 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Electrical Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
.1
Branch circuit wiring shall be building wire in conduit unless noted otherwise.
.2
Motor control and motor feeders shall be building wire in conduit as noted. Drops to lighting fixtures and equipment requiring flexible connection shall be AC90. Power service feeders shall be conduit and wire as noted. Minimum power conductor size shall be #12 AWG. Minimum control conductor size shall be #14 AWG. Maximum lighting circuit conductor size shall be #10 AWG. Cable installed in hazardous areas shall be approved for that classification. Wire and cables for 600 volt wiring shall be insulated to 1000 volts. Wire and cables for 208 volt wiring shall be insulated to 600 volts.
.3
.4 .5 .6 .7 .8
.9 .10
2.1 BUILDING WIRES
.1
Conductors: stranded for 10 AWG and larger. Minimum size: 12 AWG.

.2
Section 26 05 21 Page 2 2011-06-11
Copper conductors: size as indicated, with 1000 V insulation of cross-linked thermosetting polyethylene material rated R90, RW90 XLPE and RWU90 XLPE as noted on the drawings.
2.2 TECK 90 CABLE
.1 .2
Cable: in accordance with Section [26 05 00]. Conductors: .1 Grounding conductor: copper. .2 Circuit conductors: copper, size as indicated. Insulation: .1 Cross-linked polyethylene rated minus 40 deg. C, RW90. .3 Rating: , 1000 V. Armour: interlocking aluminum. Overall covering: thermoplastic polyvinyl chloride. Fastenings: .1 One hole steel straps to secure surface cables 50 mm and smaller. Two hole steel straps for cables larger than 50 mm. .2 Channel type supports for two or more cables at 3000 mm centers. .3 Threaded rods: 6 mm diameter to support suspended channels. Connectors: .1 [Watertight],approved for TECK cable.
.3
.4 .5 .6
.7
2.3 ARMOURED CABLES
.1 .2 .3
Conductors: insulated, copper, size as indicated. Type: AC90

Armour: interlocking type fabricated from galvanized steel strip.
.4 .5
Overall covering: thermoplastic PVC, flame resistant. Connectors: anti short connectors.
2.5 CONDUCTORS
.1
Conductors shall be colour coded in accordance with the following: .1 Single Phase Hot Black or Red Neutral White .2 Two Phase Hot Red Hot Black
Section 26 05 21 Page 3 2011-06-11

Neutral A Phase B Phase C Phase Neutral Equipment White Red Black Blue White Green
.3
Three Phase
.4
Ground Wires
Complete conductor insulation shall be the specified colour. Colour coding at the ends of the cable only will not be permitted.
.2
Conductor phasing shall be made phase A, B, C from left to right when facing equipment.
2.6 WIRE AND CABLE ACCESSORIES
.1
Provide wire pulling compound which is compatible with the conduit system and the cable insulation.
.2
Provide Buchanan B-Cap type wire connectors, sized for the conductor for connection of lighting circuit connectors.
Provide watertight cable connectors with hazardous location rating where required. Wire markers shall be mylar/cloth adhesive strip type. Ideal Cat No. 43-xxx or equal.
.3
.4
.5
Cable ties for indoor use shall be natural 6/6 nylon type with minimum 30 lb tensile strength. Cable ties for outdoor use shall be weather resistant nylon 12 type with minimum 90 lbs tensile strength. Acceptable Products - Panduit `Pan-Ty', T & B `Ty-Rap'.
2.7 CONNECTORS
.1
Pressure type wire connectors with current carrying parts of copper alloy sized to fit copper conductors as indicated. Fixture type splicing connectors with fixture type current carrying parts of copper sized to fit copper #10 AWG or less.
.2
.3
Compression lugs shall be used for motor leads and power connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL CABLE INSTALLATION
.1
Install cable in trenches in accordance with Section 33 71 73.02.
.2
Lay cable in cable trays in accordance with Section
Section 26 05 21 Page 4 2011-06-11
26 05 36. .3 .4 .5 .6 Terminate cables in accordance with Section 26 05 20. Cable Colour Coding: to Section 26 05 00.
Conductor length for parallel feeders to be identical. Lace or clip groups of feeder cables at distribution centres, pull boxes, and termination points. Wiring in walls: typically drop or loop vertically from above to better facilitate future renovations. Generally wiring from below and horizontal wiring in walls to be avoided unless indicated.
.7
.8
Branch circuit wiring for surge suppression receptacles and permanently wired computer and electronic equipment to be 2-wire circuits only, i.e. common neutrals not permitted. Provide numbered wire collars for control wiring. Numbers to correspond to control shop drawing legend. Obtain wiring diagram for control wiring.
.9
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BUILDING WIRES
.1
Install wiring as follows: .1 In conduit systems in accordance with Section 26 05 34. .2 In underground ducts in accordance with Section 33 71 73.02.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF TECK90 CABLE (0-1000 V)
.1 .2
Group cables wherever possible on channels. Install cable exposed, securely supported by hangers.
CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS
Section 26 05 22 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for connectors and terminations.
.1
Section 26 05 33 - Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.41-07, Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
.1
1.5 CERTIFICATES
.1
Obtain inspection certificate of compliance covering high voltage stress coning from inspection authority and include it with maintenance manuals.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS
.1
Copper long barrel compression connectors to CSA C22.2 as required sized for conductors.
CONNECTORS AND TERMINATIONS
Section 26 05 22 Page 2 2011-06-11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install terminations, and splices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Bond and ground as required [to CSA C22.2 No.41].
GROUNDING - SECONDARY
Section 26 05 28 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 26 05 01 - Common Work Results - Electrical.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) .1 IEEE 837-2002, Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation Grounding.
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-Z32-09, Electrical Safety and Essential Electrical Systems in Health Care Facilities.
.2
.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT
.1
Clamps for grounding of conductor: size as required to electrically conductive underground water pipe. Copper conductor: minimum 6 m long for each concrete encased electrode, bare, stranded, tinned, soft annealed, size as indicated.
.2
.3 .4
Rod electrodes: copper clad steel 19 mm dia by 3 m long.

Grounding conductors: bare stranded copper, tinned, soft annealed, size as indicated.
.6 .7
Insulated grounding conductors: green. Ground bus: copper, size as indicated, complete with insulated supports, fastenings, connectors. Non-corroding accessories necessary for grounding system, type, size, material as indicated, including but not necessarily limited to: .1 Grounding and bonding bushings. .2 Protective type clamps. .3 Bolted type conductor connectors. .4 Thermit welded type conductor connectors. .5 Bonding jumpers, straps. .6 Pressure wire connectors.
.8
Section 26 05 28 Page 2 2011-06-11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Install complete permanent, continuous grounding system including, electrodes, conductors, connectors, accessories. [Where EMT is used, run ground wire in conduit.]
Install connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
.3
Protect exposed grounding conductors from mechanical injury.

Make buried connections, and connections to conductive water main, electrodes, using [copper welding by thermit process] [permanent mechanical connectors or inspectable wrought copper compression connectors to ANSI/IEEE 837]. Use mechanical connectors for grounding connections to equipment provided with lugs.
.4
.5
.6 .7
Soldered joints not permitted. Install bonding wire for flexible conduit, connected at [both] [one] end[s] to grounding bushing, solderless lug, clamp or cup washer and screw. Neatly cleat bonding wire to exterior of flexible conduit.
Install separate ground conductor to outdoor lighting standards.
.8
.10
Make grounding connections in radial configuration only, with connections terminating at single grounding point. Avoid loop connections. Bond single conductor, metallic armoured cables to cabinet at supply end, [and provide non-metallic entry plate at load end] [and load end]. Ground secondary service pedestals.
.11
.15
3.2 MANHOLES
.1
Install conveniently located grounding stud, electrode, stranded copper conductor in each manhole.
Install ground rod in each manhole so that top projects through bottom of manhole. Provide with lug to which grounding connection can be made.
.2
Section 26 05 28 Page 3 2011-06-11
3.3 ELECTRODES
.1
Make ground connections to continuously conductive underground water pipe on street side of water meter. Install rod, electrodes and make grounding connections. Bond separate, multiple electrodes together.
Use size 2/0 AWG copper conductors for connections to electrodes.
.2
.3 .4
3.4 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
.1
Install grounding connections to typical equipment included in, but not necessarily limited to following list. Service equipment, transformers, switchgear, duct systems, frames of motors, motor control centres, starters, control panels, building steel work, generators, elevators and escalators, distribution panels, outdoor lighting.
3.6 GROUNDING BUS
.1
Install copper grounding bus mounted on insulated supports on wall of electrical room.
Ground items of electrical equipment in electrical room to ground bus with individual bare stranded copper connections size 2/0AWG.
.2
3.8 COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS
.1
Install grounding connections for telephone, sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems as follows: .1 Telephones: make telephone grounding system in accordance with telephone company's requirements. .2 Sound, fire alarm, intercommunication systems as indicated.
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section [26 05 01].

Perform ground continuity and resistance tests using method appropriate to site conditions and to approval of Departmental Representative and local authority having jurisdiction over installation.
.3 .4
Perform tests before energizing electrical system. Disconnect ground fault indicator during tests.
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 29 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities.
.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material [in appropriate on-site bins] for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Engineer.
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPORT CHANNELS
.1
U shape, size 41 x 41 mm, 2.5 mm thick, surface mounted.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Secure equipment to hollow masonry, tile and plaster surfaces with lead anchors.
Secure equipment to poured concrete with expandable inserts. Secure equipment to hollow masonry walls or suspended ceilings with toggle bolts.
.2
.3
.4
Secure surface mounted equipment with twist clip fasteners to inverted T bar ceilings. Ensure that T bars are adequately supported to carry weight of equipment specified before installation.

.5
HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 29 Page 2 2011-06-11
Support equipment, conduit or cables using clips, spring loaded bolts, cable clamps designed as accessories to basic channel members. Fasten exposed conduit or cables to building construction or support system using straps. .1 One-hole [malleable iron] [steel] straps to secure surface conduits and cables 50 mm and smaller. .2 Two-hole steel straps for conduits and cables larger than 50 mm. .3 Beam clamps to secure conduit to exposed steel work. Suspended support systems. .1 Support individual cable or conduit runs with 6 mm dia threaded rods and spring clips. .2 Support 2 or more cables or conduits on channels supported by 6 mm dia threaded rod hangers where direct fastening to building construction is impractical. For surface mounting of two or more conduits use channels at 3000 Mm on centre spacing.
Provide metal brackets, frames, hangers, clamps and related types of support structures where indicated or as required to support conduit and cable runs. Ensure adequate support for raceways and cables dropped vertically to equipment where there is no wall support. Do not use wire lashing or perforated strap to support or secure raceways or cables. Do not use supports or equipment installed for other trades for conduit or cable support except with permission of other trade and approval of Departmental Representative. Install fastenings and supports as required for each type of equipment cables and conduits, and in accordance with manufacturer's installation recommendations.
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
Section 26 05 31 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-[09], Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 21st Edition.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 11 01. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 11 01. .1 Provide drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
.2
.3
.1 .1
Waste Management and Disposal: Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 11 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SPLITTERS
.1
Construction: sheet metal enclosure, welded corners and formed hinged cover suitable for locking in closed position.
.2
Terminations: main and branch lugs to match required size and number of incoming and outgoing conductors as indicated.
Spare Terminals: minimum three spare terminals or lugs on each connection or lug block sized less than 400 A.
.3
SPLITTERS, JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS
Section 26 05 31 Page 2 2011-06-11
2.2 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES
.1 .2
Construction: welded steel enclosure. Covers Flush Mounted: 25 mm minimum extension all around. Covers Surface Mounted: screw-on turned edge covers.
.3
2.3 CABINETS
.1
Construction: welded sheet steel as indicated hinged door, latch lock 2 keys and catch Type E Empty: surface return flange mounting as indicated. Type T Terminal: surface return flange mounting as indicated containing 19 mm plywood backboard.
.2
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SPLITTER INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Mount plumb, true and square to building lines.

Extend splitters full length of equipment arrangement except where indicated otherwise.
3.2 JUNCTION, PULL BOXES AND CABINETS INSTALLATION
.1
Install pull boxes in inconspicuous but accessible locations. Mount cabinets with top not higher than 2 m above finished floor except where indicated otherwise. Only main junction and pull boxes are indicated. Install additional pull boxes as required by CSA C22.1.
.2
.3
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
.1 .2
Equipment Identification: to Section 26 05 00.

Identification Labels: size 2 indicating system name, voltage and phase as indicated.
OUTLET BOXES, CONDUIT BOXES AND FITTINGS
Section 26 05 32 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-[09], Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1, 21st Edition.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 11 01. Submit samples for floor box in accordance with Section 01 11 01.
.2
.1
.2
Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 11 01.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OUTLET AND CONDUIT BOXES GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5
Size boxes in accordance with CSA C22.1. 102 mm square or larger outlet boxes as required. Gang boxes where wiring devices are grouped.
Blank cover plates for boxes without wiring devices. Combination boxes with barriers where outlets for more than one system are grouped.
2.2 GALVANIZED STEEL OUTLET BOXES
.1 .2
One-piece electro-galvanized construction. Single and multi gang flush device boxes for flush installation, minimum size 76 x 50 x 38 mm or as indicated. 102 mm square outlet boxes when more than one conduit enters one side with extension and plaster

.3

rings as required.
Section 26 05 32 Page 2 2011-06-11
Utility boxes for outlets connected to surface-mounted EMT conduit, minimum size 102 x 54 x 48 mm.
102 mm square or octagonal outlet boxes for lighting fixture outlets. Extension and plaster rings for flush mounting devices in finished walls.
.4
.5
2.3 MASONRY BOXES
.1
Electro-galvanized steel masonry single and multi gang boxes for devices flush mounted in exposed block walls.
2.4 CONCRETE BOXES
.1
Electro-galvanized sheet steel concrete type boxes for flush mount in concrete with matching extension and plaster rings as required.
2.5 FLOOR BOXES
.1
Concrete tight electro-galvanized sheet steel floor boxes with adjustable finishing rings to suit floor finish with brass faceplate. Device mounting plate to accommodate short or long ear duplex single receptacles. Minimum depth: 73 mm for receptacles and communication outlets. Adjustable, watertight, concrete tight, cast floor boxes with openings drilled and tapped for 16, 21 and 27 mm conduit. Minimum size: 73 mm deep.
.2
2.6 CONDUIT BOXES
.1
Cast FS or FD boxes with factory-threaded hubs and mounting feet for surface wiring of devices.
2.7 FITTINGS GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Bushing and connectors with nylon insulated throats.
Knock-out fillers to prevent entry of debris.

Conduit outlet bodies for conduit up to 35 mm and pull boxes for larger conduits. Double locknuts and insulated bushings on sheet metal boxes.
.4
Section 26 05 32 Page 3 2011-06-11
2.9 SERVICE FITTINGS
.1
'High tension' receptacle fitting made of 2 piece stainless steel with brushed aluminum housing finish for two duplex receptacles. Bottom plate with two knockouts for centered or offset installation. 12 x 102 mm extension piece as indicated.
Pedestal type 'low tension' fitting made of 2 piece stainless steel with brushed aluminum housing finish to accommodate two amphenol jack connectors.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Support boxes independently of connecting conduits. Fill boxes with paper, sponges or foam or similar approved material to prevent entry of debris during construction. Remove upon completion of work. For flush installations mount outlets flush with finished wall using plaster rings to permit wall finish to come within 6 mm of opening.
Provide correct size of openings in boxes for conduit, mineral insulated and armoured cable connections. Do not install reducing washers.
.3
.4
.5
Vacuum clean interior of outlet boxes before installation of wiring devices. Identify systems for outlet boxes as required.
.6
CONDUITS, CONDUIT FASTENINGS AND CONDUIT FITTINGS
Section 26 05 34 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 18-[98(R2003)], Outlet Boxes, Conduit Boxes, Fittings and Associated Hardware, A National Standard of Canada. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 18.1-04, Metallic Outlet Boxes. .3 CAN/CSA-C22.2 NO. 18.2-06, Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes. .4 CSA C22.2 No. 45-[M1981(R2008)], Rigid Metal Conduit. .5 CSA C22.2 No. 56-[04], Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquid-Tight Flexible Metal Conduit. .6 CSA C22.2 No. 83-[M1985(R2008)], Electrical Metallic Tubing. .7 CSA C22.2 No. 211.2-[06], Rigid PVC Conduit. .8 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.3-[05], Nonmetallic Mechanical Protection Tubing (NMPT), A National Standard of Canada (February 2006).
1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1

Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheets. .1 Submit cable manufacturing data.
.2
.3
Quality assurance submittals: .1 Test reports: submit certified test reports. .2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .3 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
.1
Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
.2
.3
Section 26 05 34 Page 2 2011-06-11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 CONDUITS
.1
Rigid metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 45, galvanized steel threaded.
.2
Electrical metallic tubing EMT: to CSA C22.2 No. 83, with couplings. Rigid pvc conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 211.2. Flexible metal conduit: to CSA C22.2 No. 56, steel liquid-tight flexible metal. Flexible pvc conduit: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 227.3.
.3 .4
.5
2.3 CONDUIT FASTENINGS
.1
One hole steel straps to secure surface conduits 50 mm and smaller. .1 Two hole steel straps for conduits larger than 50 mm. Beam clamps to secure conduits to exposed steel work.
.2 .3
Channel type supports for two or more conduits at3000 mm on centre. Threaded rods, 6 mm diameter, to support suspended channels.
.4
2.4 CONDUIT FITTINGS
.1
Fittings: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 18, manufactured for use with conduit specified. Coating: same as conduit.
.2
Ensure factory "ells" where 90 degrees bends for 25 mm and larger conduits. Watertight connectors and couplings for EMT. .1 Set-screws are not acceptable.
.3
2.5 EXPANSION FITTINGS FOR RIGID CONDUIT
.1
Weatherproof expansion fittings with internal bonding assembly suitable for 200 mm linear expansion. Watertight expansion fittings with integral bonding jumper suitable for linear expansion and 19 mm deflection.
.2

.3
Section 26 05 34 Page 3 2011-06-11
Weatherproof expansion fittings for linear expansion at entry to panel.
2.6 FISH CORD
.1
Polypropylene.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install conduits to conserve headroom in exposed locations and cause minimum interference in spaces through which they pass.
Conceal conduits except in mechanical and electrical service rooms in unfinished areas.
.2
.3
Use rigid galvanized steel threaded conduit except where specified otherwise.
Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT) except in cast concrete, above 2.4 m not subject to mechanical injury.
.4
.5 .6
Use rigid pvc conduit underground.

Use flexible metal conduit for connection to motors in dry areas, connection to surface or recessed fluorescent fixtures work in movable metal partitions. Use liquid tight flexible metal conduit for [connection to motors or vibrating equipment in damp, wet locations.
.7
.8
Minimum conduit size for lighting and power circuits: 19 mm. Bend conduit cold: Replace conduit if kinked or flattened more than .1 1/10th of its original diameter.
Mechanically bend steel conduit over 19 mm diameter.
.9
.10

.11
Section 26 05 34 Page 4 2011-06-11
Field threads on rigid conduit must be of sufficient length to draw conduits up tight.
.18 .19
Install fish cord in empty conduits. Run 2-25 mm spare conduits up to ceiling space and 2-25 mm spare conduits down to ceiling space from each flush panel. .1 Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction boxes in ceiling space or in case of an exposed concrete slab, terminate each conduit in surface type box. Remove and replace blocked conduit sections. .1 Do not use liquids to clean out conduits. Dry conduits out before installing wire.
.20
.21
3.3 SURFACE CONDUITS
.1 .2
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines.

Locate conduits behind infrared or gas fired heaters with 1.5 m clearance.
.3 .4
Run conduits in flanged portion of structural steel. Group conduits wherever possible on suspended channels.
Do not pass conduits through structural members except as indicated. Do not locate conduits less than 75 mm parallel to steam or hot water lines with minimum of 25 mm at crossovers.
.5
.6
3.4 CONCEALED CONDUITS
.1 .2 .3
Run parallel or perpendicular to building lines. Do not install horizontal runs in masonry walls. Do not install conduits in terrazzo or concrete toppings.
3.5 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
.1
Locate to suit reinforcing steel. .1 Install in centre one third of slab. Protect conduits from damage where they stub out of concrete.
Install sleeves where conduits pass through slab or
.2
.3

.4

wall.
Section 26 05 34 Page 5 2011-06-11
Provide oversized sleeve for conduits passing through waterproof membrane, before membrane is installed. .1 Use cold mastic between sleeve and conduit.
.5
Conduits in slabs: minimum slab thickness 4 times conduit diameter.

Encase conduits completely in concrete with minimum 25 mm concrete cover.
.6
.7
Organize conduits in slab to minimize cross-overs.
3.6 CONDUITS IN CAST-IN-PLACE SLABS ON GRADE
.1
Run conduits [NPS 1] [25 mm] and larger below slab and encase in 75 mm concrete envelope. .1 Provide 50 mm of sand over concrete envelope below floor slab.
3.7 CONDUITS UNDERGROUND
.1 .2
Slope conduits to provide drainage. Waterproof joints pvc excepted with heavy coat of bituminous paint.
3.8 CLEANING
.1 .2
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRIC SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 36 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.126-[M91(R1997)], Cable Tray Systems.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) standards .1 NEMA VE 1-[2002], Metal Cable Tray Systems.
.2
.1
Submit shop drawings and product data in accordance with section [01 33 00].
.2 .3
Identify types of cabletroughs used. Show actual cabletrough installation details and suspension system.
.1
.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative . Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLETROUGH
.1 .2 .3
Cabletroughs and fittings: to NEMA [FG 1] [VE 1]. Ventilated type, Class[A] to CAN/CSA C22.2 No.126. Trays: galvanized steel, 600 mm wide with depth of 100 mm.

.4
CABLE TRAYS FOR ELECTRIC SYSTEMS
Section 26 05 36 Page 2 2011-06-11
Fittings: horizontal elbows, end plates, drop outs, vertical risers and drops, tees, wyes, expansion joints and reducers where required, manufactured accessories for cabletrough supplied. .1 Radii on fittings: [300] [600] [900] mm minimum. Barriers where different voltage systems are in same cabletrough.
.5
2.2 SUPPORTS
.1
Provide supports as required.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Install complete cabletrough system. Support cabletrough on [one] [both] side[s].

Remove sharp burrs or projections to prevent damage to cables or injury to personnel.
3.2 CABLES IN CABLETROUGH
.1 .2
Install cables individually.

Lay cables into cabletrough. Use rollers when necessary to pull cables. Secure cables in cabletrough at 6 m centres, with nylon ties.
.3
.4
Identify cables every 30 m with size 2 nameplates.
INSTALLATION OF CABLES IN TRENCHES AND DUCTS
Section 26 05 43.01 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 31 23 33.01 - Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1 .2
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International)
Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. (ICEA)
.1

.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Unused sealant material must not be disposed of into sewer system, into streams, lakes, onto ground or in other location where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of preservative treated wood through incineration.
.4
.5
.6
.7
Do not dispose of preservative treated wood with other materials destined for recycling or reuse.
Dispose of treated wood, end pieces, wood scraps and sawdust at sanitary landfill approved by Departmental Representative.
.8
.9
Section 26 05 43.01 Page 2 2011-06-11
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE PROTECTION
.1
38 x 140 mm planks pressure treated with clear coloured, water repellent preservative.
2.2 MARKERS
.1
Concrete type cable markers: 600 x 600 x 100 mm with words: cable, joint or conduit impressed in top surface, with arrows to indicate change in direction of cable and duct runs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DIRECT BURIAL OF CABLES
.1
After sand bed specified in Section 31 23 33.01, is in place, lay cables maintaining 75 mm clearance from each side of trench to nearest cable. Do not pull cable into trench. Provide offsets for thermal action and minor earth movements. Offset cables 150 mm for each 60 m run, maintaining minimum cable separation and bending radius requirements.
Make termination and splice only as indicated leaving 0.6 m of surplus cable in each direction. .1 Make splices and terminations in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using approved splicing kits.
.2
.3
.4 .5
Underground cable splices not acceptable.

Minimum permitted radius at cable bends for rubber, plastic or lead covered cables, 8 times diameter of cable; for metallic armoured cables, 12 times diameter of cables or in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.6
Cable separation: .1 Maintain 75 mm minimum separation between cables of different circuits. .2 Maintain 300 mm horizontal separation between low and high voltage cables. .3 When low voltage cables cross high voltage cables maintain 300 mm vertical separation with low
Section 26 05 43.01 Page 3 2011-06-11
.4
.5
.6
voltage cables in upper position. At crossover, maintain 75 mm minimum vertical separation between low voltage cables and 150 mm between high voltage cables. Maintain 300 mm minimum lateral and vertical separation for fire alarm and control cables when crossing other cables, with fire alarm and control cables in upper position. Install treated planks on lower cables 0.6 m in each direction at crossings.
.7
After sand protective cover specified in Section 31 23 33.01, is in place, install continuous row of overlapping 38 x 140 mm pressure treated planks as indicated to cover length of run.
3.2 CABLE INSTALLATION IN DUCTS
.1
Install cables as indicated in ducts. .1 Do not pull spliced cables inside ducts. Install multiple cables in duct simultaneously.
Use CSA approved lubricants of type compatible with cable jacket to reduce pulling tension.
.2 .3
.4
To facilitate matching of colour coded multiconductor control cables reel off in same direction during installation.
Before pulling cable into ducts and until cables are properly terminated, seal ends of lead covered cables with wiping solder; seal ends of non-leaded cables with moisture seal tape. After installation of cables, seal duct ends with duct sealing compound.
.5
.6
3.3 MARKERS
.1
Mark cable every 150 m along duct runs and changes in direction.
.2 .3
Mark underground splices. Where markers are removed to permit installation of additional cables, reinstall existing markers.
Install concrete cable markers within 180 m from each side of runway centreline; 45 m from each side of taxi way centreline; 50 m from edge of taxi ramps or aprons. Lay concrete markers flat and centred over cable with top flush with finish grade.
.4
.5
Section 26 05 43.01 Page 4 2011-06-11
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Perform tests using qualified personnel. Provide necessary instruments and equipment.
Check phase rotation and identify each phase conductor of each feeder. Check each feeder for continuity, short circuits and grounds. Ensure resistance to ground of circuits is not less than 50 megohms.
.3
.4
.5
Pre-acceptance tests. .1 After installing cable but before splicing and terminating, perform insulation resistance test with 1000 V megger on each phase conductor. .2 Check insulation resistance after each splice and/or termination to ensure that cable system is ready for acceptance testing. Acceptance Tests .1 Ensure that terminations and accessory equipment are disconnected. .2 Ground shields, ground wires, metallic armour and conductors not under test. .3 Leakage Current Testing.
.6
.7
Provide Departmental Representative with list of test results showing location at which each test was made, circuit tested and result of each test.
Remove and replace entire length of cable if cable fails to meet any of test criteria.
.8
FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS
Section 26 05 80 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA C22.2 No. 100-[95], Motors and Generators. .2 CSA C22.2 No. 145-[M1986(R1992)], Motors and Generators for use in Hazardous Locations.
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada .1 EEMAC M1-6. .2 EEMAC M1-1.
.2
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets. WHMIS acceptable to Labour Canada, and Health and Welfare Canada. Submit product data sheets for motors. Include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, horsepower, watt rating, limitations and finish.
.2
.3
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate dimensions, recommended installation procedure, wiring diagrams, sizes and location of mounting bolt holes and recommended support method.
.2
.1
Provide maintenance data for fractional horsepower motors for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers.
.2
.3

.4
FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTORS
Section 26 05 80 Page 2 2011-06-11
Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard in accordance with the Waste Management Plan.
Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling. Collect, package and store expired motors for either recycling or rebuilding and return to recycler or rebuilder.
.5
.6
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FRACTIONAL HORSEPOWER MOTOR
.1
Non-hazardous locations: to CSA C22.2 No. 100 and EEMAC M1-6. Motor with inherent overheating protectors.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Install wiring, flexible connections and grounding. Check rotation before coupling to driven equipment.
MOTORS: 0.746 TO 149 KW
Section 26 05 81 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No. 100-[04], Motors and Generators. .2 CSA C22.2 No. 145-[M1986(R2004)], Motors and Generators for Use in Hazardous Locations.
Electrical and Electronic Manufacturers' Association of Canada (EEMAC) .1 EEMAC M1-7-[1992], Standard for Motors and Generators. .2 EEMAC M2-1-[1966], Standard for Lead Marking and Connections for Single-Phase and Polyphase Induction Motors.
.2
1.2 SUBMITTALS
.1 .2
Submittals: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 47 15 and Section 02 61 33 and include: product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, horsepower, watt rating, limitations and finish. Shop drawings: .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Indicate: .1 Overall dimensions of motor. .2 Shaft centreline to base dimension. .3 Shaft extension diameter and keyway, coupling dimensions and details. .4 Fixing support dimensions. .5 Dimensioned position of ventilation openings. Details of ventilation duct attachments. .6 Terminal box location and size of terminals. .7 Arrangement and dimensions of accessories. .8 Diagram of connections. .9 Starting current and relative data necessary for use in design of motor starting equipment. .10 Speed/torque characteristic. .11 Weight. .12 Installation data. Closeout Submittals: .1 Provide maintenance data for motors for
.3
.4
Section 26 05 81 Page 2 2011-06-11
incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. .2 Data necessary for maintenance of motors. .3 Manufacturer's recommended list of spare parts. .5 Quality Assurance: Departmental Representative reserves the right .1 to witness standard factory testing of motors [50 hp] [37.3 kW] and above. .2 Submit site tests results of installed electrical systems and instrumentation.
.1
Deliver, store, handle and protect materials in accordance with Section 01 61 00.
Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
.2
.3 .4
Handle motors with suitable lifting equipment. Store motors in heated, dry, weather-protected enclosure.
.1
.2
Collect, package and store expired motors for either recycling or rebuilding and return to recycler or rebuilder.
1.5 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials and spare parts in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Motors: .1 Non-hazardous locations: to CSA C22.2 No. 100 and EEMAC M1-7. Lead markings: to EEMAC M2-1.
.2
2.2 CORROSION PREVENTION AND FINISH PAINTING
.1
Provide equipment resistant to corrosion from severe moisture conditions.
Section 26 05 81 Page 3 2011-06-11
2.3 MOTOR TYPE
.1
Squirrel cage.
2.4 DESIGN LETTERS
.1
Polyphase squirrel cage induction motors design [A] [B] [C] [D].
.2
Single phase integral induction motors design [L] [M].
2.5 ENCLOSURE
.1
Open drip proof fully guarded.
2.6 APPLICATION
.1
Motor suitable for driving pumps, fans, blower, compressor.
2.7 INSULATION
.1 .2
Class: B. Ambient temperature: 40 degrees C.
2.8 LOCKED ROTOR KVA PER [HP] [KW]
.1
Locked rotor kVA per [hp] [kW], code letter.
2.9 DIRECTION OF ROTATION
.1
Direction of rotation, [counter] [clock wise] when facing end of machine opposite drive.
2.10 BEARINGS
.1
Antifriction type bearings, fitted with readily accessible facilities for lubrication while motor running or stationary.
2.11 MOTOR MOUNTING AND TERMINAL HOUSING
.1
[Horizontal floor mounting, assembly [F-1] [F-2]] [horizontal wall mounting, assembly W- [1] [______]] [horizontal ceiling mounting, assembly [C-1] [C-2]].

.2
Section 26 05 81 Page 4 2011-06-11
Vertical [flange] [______] mounting with thrust bearing. Slide rails for motor mounting.
.3
2.12 SHAFT
.1
[Standard] [______] shaft extension.
2.13 THERMAL PROTECTION
.1
Factory installed [thermistors] [[copper] [nickel] [platinum] RTD], [one] [______] in each phase, wired to identified terminals in motor terminal box.
2.14 STARTING METHOD
.1
Terminate winding connection necessary for appropriate starting method and identify in motor terminal box.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Dry out motor if dampness present in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.2
Install motor on [driven machinery] [baseplate] [structure] [slide rails] [concrete base, ensuring it has fully cured before installation] rigid plumb and square, using only lifting facilities provided. Make wiring connections. .1 Use liquid tight pvc jacketed flexible conduit between rigid conduit and motor.
Make flexible conduit long enough to permit movement of motor over entire length of slide rails. Check for correct direction of rotation, with motor uncoupled from driven equipment.
.3
.4
.5

.6
Section 26 05 81 Page 5 2011-06-11
Align and couple motor to driven machinery to manufacturer's instructions, using only correct parts such as couplings, belts, sheaves, as provided by manufacturer.
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
3.4 CLEANING
.1 .2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SHOP DRAWING AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
METERING AND SWITCHBOARD Section 26 09 23.0100 INSTRUMENTS Page 1 2011-06-11
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Electrical Maintenance Manuals.
.1
Micro-processor based solid state instrument unit capable of displaying voltage and current for each phase as well as KVA-KVAR-KW-PF-HZ and the accumulated MWHR and KW demand. The unit shall also continuously monitor and store minimum values of volts and power factor and maximum values of AMPS-KW-KVA-KVAR-KWD.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 DIGITAL METERING
.1
Digital metering unit shall be suitable for flush mounting in panel. Unit shall be capable of measuring and displaying the following: volts (each phase) current (each phase) frequency power factor KVA KW KW demand KVAR Total MWHR Total MQHR
.2
.3
Selector pushbuttons shall allow selection of the following: Phase Function Maximum Value Minimum Value
.4
Unit shall be complete with RS232C port to allow connection to computer. A test block shall allow testing of the meter for
.5

.6
METERING AND SWITCHBOARD Section 26 09 23.0100 INSTRUMENTS Page 2 2011-06-11

accuracy. A normally open set point relay shall operate when measured KW demand exceeds selected set point. Relay shall release when the measured KW demand equals or is less than the selected set point. Contacts shall be rated at minimum 1 amp 120 V (dry).
2.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
.1
Current transformers: doughnut type, ratio XXXXA to 5 A, 600 V to monitor total load current of building. C.T. primary current rating to match the rating of the bus on which the C.T. will be installed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 .2 Install current transformers on main bus.
Connect secondary of current transformers to unit as per manufacturers recommendation. Digital metering unit shall be flush mounted on front of main distribution centre at eye level.
.3
3.3 TESTING
.1
Energize system and test to ensure peak load controller functions as intended.
Provide necessary metering apparatus to check accuracy of digital metering unit.
.2
LIGHTING CONTROL EQUIPMENT - LOW VOLTAGE
Section 26 09 24 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Low voltage control system designed to provide remote switching of lighting loads by use of: .1 Low voltage momentary contact switches .2 Low voltage relays. .3 Control transformers
.2
Provide Low Voltage Remote Control System equipment for lighting and other loads as indicated on the drawings and schedules and indicated herein. Low voltage relay panels shall be supplied, factory-assembled and factory tested by a single manufacturer.
.3
.4
The low voltage relay panels shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings. The numbered relays in the panel shall be wired to control the power to each load as indicated on the Panel Wiring Schedules included in the drawings. All power wiring will be identified with the number of relay controlling it at the load.
.5
Plug-in intelligence cards in panels shall provide programmable operation. Occupant-Sensitive Operating Scenarios The intelligence cards must support the following operating scenarios: .1 Schedule With Flick Warn Occupant sensitive scheduling capability shall be provided for each relay. Individual relays may be programmed to flick (blink) five minutes before a scheduled OFF. Individuals pressing the associated low voltage direct wired switch (or placing a phone override) during this period will be exempted from the OFF sweep. .2 Time-delay Overrides With Flick Warn Each relay may be assigned a time delay which will be compatible with scheduled occupancy. In particular, direct overrides of the relay by an occupant will initiate a programmable time delay of 2 minutes to 24 hours. The time-delay OFF action will be ignored if it falls within
.6
Section 26 09 24 Page 2 2011-06-11
.7
a scheduled ON period. The time-delay OFF action will be preceded by a flick warn if that relay is flickable. .3 Preemptive Override Capability (HID Scenario) Any relay that is ON and has a time delay will intelligently monitor a local occupants ON override before the scheduled off sweep. If the relays time delay would cause the relay to go OFF before the scheduled OFF, the override is ignored. If the time delay would cause the relay to stay ON after its scheduled OFF, it shall be accepted by the system. .4 Common Area Interlock With Egress Timer Common areas or loads such as halls, support equipment, fans, etc. shall remain ON as long as any associated occupant area is ON. Turning OFF the last such occupant area will initiate a programmable regress time delay to allow that last occupant to exit the area safely. .5 Master Switch Control With Flick Option Programmable switches in each panel shall allow relays to be softwired into groups while still retaining individual relay control. These master switches shall be capable of either direct ON/OFF control or ON/Flick-OFF control. Any remote master switch which could cause an individual occupant to be left in the dark must have the flick warn function. .6 Cleaning Scenario The system shall allow the cleaning crew to turn ON specified lighting via a special Cleaning Switch. This switch will not turn OFF any area which is scheduled ON or has an occupancy override in effect; ie, occupant overrides will have priority over cleaning. These lights will automatically time out after the normal time delay for each relay is reached, although a forced time delay ranging from 1 minute to 24 hours can be substituted on a panel by panel basis. Status and Runtime Data The intelligence cards shall also store the current status of all relays, how that status was initiated, and historical runtime data for management analysis.

.8
Section 26 09 24 Page 3 2011-06-11
Communications Each intelligence card shall support two communications ports - an RS232 port and a dataline port. Either or both may be used for programming, monitoring, and control. The dataline shall allow simultaneous operation of multiple RS232 communications access points to support multiple operator terminals and communications with other building automation systems. All relay changes of state and programmable switch actions shall be communicated over both the RS232 port and the dataline to support interactive graphics and online status monitoring. Distributed Control With Direct Relay Override Each panel shall be capable of standalone automatic operation. None of the operating scenarios discussed above shall depend on the operation of a central computer. Furthermore, the direct relay override switches and occupancy sensors shall continue to operate should a local intelligence card fail. Off-Line Programming All programming shall be possible offline on an IBM PC compatible personal computer with English descriptors of all loads, windows, and help screens. Program data for the panel intelligence shall then be transferred from the PC to the panel with all data transferred confirmed for accuracy. Program data in each panel shall also be possible to be transferable to the PC for editing. Operating Scenarios The operating scenarios described above must reside within each controller card. Systems which rely on the operator to develop these scenarios using a programming language will not be allowed.
.9
.10
.11
1.3 CODES
.1 All components shall carry CSA approval and conform to CEC Code 22.0 for Class Two Energy Limiting Systems.
All external control wiring between Low Voltage Relay Panels, local switches, area masters, etc. shall be installed in accordance with
.2
Section 26 09 24 Page 4 2011-06-11
manufacturer's recommendations and in conformance to CEC Code 22.1 for Class II Systems.
1.4 SYSTEM CONTROL

Control of the low voltage relays shall be by .1 local low voltage switches and/or by inputs from the building security control system (BSCS).
.2
Cell lighting and power circuit relays shall be controlled by the BSCS. Local cell switches shall be wired to the BSCS. Control logic will be a function of the BSCS system.
.3
All timed programs and group control inputs for office lights and exterior lights shall be integral to the lighting control system. Programming of the relays into groups shall reside in the lighting control system.

.1
All components and assemblies are to be factory pretested and burned-in prior to installation.
.2
Factory trained technicians shall be available to functionally test each component after installation to verify proper operation. Factory application Engineers shall be available for on-site training as well as telephone support
.3
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section [01 33 00].
.2
Manufacturer of Low Voltage Panels shall provide an approval drawing for each and every Low Voltage Panel prior to manufacture. Manufacturer shall keep original drawings on record at factory and supply copies for approval and copies for record. Manufacturer of Low Voltage Panels shall affix to each panel prior to shipping: .1 One copy of the approved drawing for that panel (affixed on inside panel cover). .2 Aluminum nameplate bearing a unique identification number for future reference to drawings on record in factory. Submit typical wiring diagrams for all components including, but not limited to, relay panels,
.3
.4
Section 26 09 24 Page 5 2011-06-11
relays, low voltage switches, occupancy sensors, data communications devices and wire.
.1
Submit maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 00.
.1
Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 20, and with Waste Reduction Workplan.
Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic waste in designated containers. Ensure emptied containers are sealed and stored safely for disposal away from children.
.2
.3
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Electrical Maintenance Manual specified in Section 01 33 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Control system: by one manufacturer and assembled from compatible components.
.1 2.2 STANDARD DUTY REMOTE CONTROL SWITCHES, WALLPLATES AND BRACKET
Remote control switches - single pole double throw momentary contact, standard duty rated 3A, 28 VAC.
Single switches shall be mounted on a single gang brushed stainless steel wallplate. At multiple switches locations, switches shall be mounted on one common brushed stainless steel cover plate.
.2
.3
2.3 MAXIMUM SECURITY SWITCHES AND WALLPLATES
.1
In all cell locations, inmate common areas and inmate program areas provide maximum security rated devices.

.2
Section 26 09 24 Page 6 2011-06-11
Maximum security switches shall be a vandal resistant, 13mm diameter push button for mounting onto a security rated cover plate. The push button body and the mounting nut shall be secured to the cover plate to prevent tampering.
The coverplate shall be a 10 gauge cold rolled steel (CRS) construction, one-piece, dieformed, continuous welded with edges ground smooth over a 10 gauge CRS backplate. Backplate secured to the mounting box with provision for device mount. cover plate attached with four recessed head security screws.
.3
2.4 LOW VOLTAGE RELAYS
.1
Electrically operated by momentary impulse, mechanically latched until activated. .1 Heavy duty relay coil resistance 54 ohms,
.2 .3 .4 .5
85 ohms impedance at 60 Hz rated for HID ballasts. Operating voltage - 24 VAC. Load contacts - 20A 347 VAC. Clamp type screw terminals for line circuit connections. Coloured pre-stripped leads for low voltage circuit connections.
2.5 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
.1
Control transformer: low voltage power class 2, energy limiting, input 120 V or 347 V, 60 Hz, output 24 VAC, VA rating to suit each panel application plus 50% spare capacity.
.2
Transformers shall include internal overcurrent protection with automatic reset, and metal oxide varistor protection against voltage spikes.
2.6 RECTIFIER
.1
Selenium type: 24 V, AC, 60 Hz input, 0.36 A continuous duty output.
.2
Silicon type: 24 V, AC, 60 Hz input, [7.5 A continuous duty] [20 A intermittent duty] output.
2.7 FACTORY ASSEMBLED LOW.1
Relay panel complete with pre-mounted relays as
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 VOLTAGE PANELS
.2

indicated on drawings.
Section 26 09 24 Page 7 2011-06-11
Panels shall be constructed of 14 Ga. cold rolled steel and painted Grey ASA 61. All panels shall have knockouts line up for joining two or more panels horizontally or vertically by using conduit nipples. Each panel shall be complete with stepped barrier separating high voltage and low voltage compartments. High voltage compartment shall have only one system voltage unless proper steel barrier provided.
.3
.4
.5
Panel cover shall be hinged and lockable. A wiring schedule directory card shall be affixed to the inside of the door to allow ready identification of relay, circuits, and loads controlled.
Relay panels shall contain, in a single enclosure all components necessary to perform the system functions as noted in the specifications and drawings.
.6
.7
All components shall be pre-assembled and pre-wired on a removable steel backplate at the factory as per approval drawings. Arboron or Plywood back panels are not acceptable.
Component leads shall be wired to L.V. terminal strips which shall include extra points as necessary for external interconnects by the contractor. Terminal strips and relays shall be labelled by the manufacturer to correspond with the approval drawings.
.8
.9
2.8 TIME/PHOTO ELECTRIC CONTROL
.1
Photoelectric sensor housing shall be CSA Type 4 enclosure for exterior mounting. Position unit so as not to be influenced by stray lighting, or other interference.
Time/Photo controller for control of exterior lighting shall be microprocessor based electronic type with the capability of 7 day programming, astronomic time programming and photo based programming. Controller shall be an integral component of the low voltage panel.
.2
Section 26 09 24 Page 8 2011-06-11
2.9 MANUFACTURERS .1
Acceptable manufacturers: Wattstopper. CGE, Douglas,
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Locate and install equipment in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and as indicated.
.2
Connect low voltage circuits in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Connect line voltage circuits from designated panels. Switches shall be mounted where indicated on the drawings. Low voltage wiring from the switches to the low voltage relay panel or the BSCS system l/o cabinets shall be contained in conduit. Each low voltage wire shall be labelled with the relay number (1-48) at each switch. All relays and switches shall be tested after installation to confirm proper operation and the loads recorded on the directory card in each panel. All panels shall provide expansion slots for the addition of automation cards. The automation cards in selected panel shall be totally compatible with the manual operation of the low voltage switches and, in the event of a card failure, the switches shall continue to operate to provide relay control. All low voltage wiring shall be installed in conduit or cable trays.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Low voltage wiring shall be multi-conductor, low voltage control cables, conductor size #18 insulated c/w overall FT4 rated jacket.
To facilitate installation and minimize risk of on-site damage to panels the manufacturer shall make provision for shipment of panel tubs for installation prior to shipment of pre-assembled removable backplates.
.8
Section 26 09 24 Page 9 2011-06-11
3.2 TESTS
.1
Panels shall be fully tested by the manufacturer prior to shipment. Actuate control units in presence of The Departmental Representative to demonstrate all lighting circuits are controlled as designated. Test all connections to/from the BSCS control system and confirm correct operation of all control interfaces between the BSCS and the low voltage lighting control equipment.
.2
.3
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
.1
DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS UP TO 600 V PRIMARY
Section 26 12 16.01 Page 1 2011-06-11
Materials and components for dry type transformers up to 600 V primary, equipment identification and transformer installation.
.1
1.3 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.47-[M90(R2001)], Air-Cooled Transformers (Dry Type). .2 CSA C9-[M1981(R2001)], Dry-Type Transformers.
National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)
.2
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
.1
.1

.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TRANSFORMERS
.1
Use transformers of one manufacturer throughout project and in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.2No.47 CSA-C9.

.2
Section 26 12 16.01 Page 2 2011-06-11
Design 1. .1 Type: ANN. .2 Insulation: Class H, 150 degrees C temperature rise. .3 Basic Impulse Level (BIL): standard NEMA. .4 Hipot: standard. .5 Average sound level: : less than 60 decibels measured in any third octave band between 60 Hz and 1000 Hz. (300-500 KVA rating). .6 Impedance at 170 degrees C: six percent maximum .7 Enclosure: EEMAC 1, removable metal front panel. .8 Mounting: floor .9 Finish: ASA 61 grey .10 Windings: copper .11 Taps: 2.5% of full capacity
Transformers located in areas where fire protection sprinklers are located must be complete with a non-combustible hood or shield to prevent spray from fire protection sprinklers from entering the transformer.
.3
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.2
Nameplate for each transformer Size 7 engraved in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Indicate transformer designation, capacity, primary and secondary voltages, phase, and name of load the transformer energizes (i.e., T-2, 300 kVA, 600/120/208V, three phase, feeds Sub-Distribution SD-1"). Mount on front face of transformer.
2.3 MANUFACTURERS
.1
Acceptable manufacturers: Hammond, Polygon, Square D, Rex Manufacturing, Delta, Cutler-Hammer, GE Industrial Systems, or approved equivalent.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2 .3
Mount dry type transformers up to 75 kVA [as indicated].
Mount dry type transformers above 75 kVA on floor. Mount floor mounted dry type transformers on 100mm concrete housekeeping pad.

.4
Section 26 12 16.01 Page 3 2011-06-11
Ensure adequate clearance around transformer for ventilation. Install transformers in level upright position. Remove shipping supports only after transformer is installed and just before putting into service. Loosen isolation pad bolts until no compression is visible.
Make primary and secondary connections in accordance with wiring diagram.
.5 .6
.7
.8
.9 .10
Energize transformers after installation is complete. Use flexible conduit to make connections to transformer. Adjust primary taps as necessary to produce rated secondary voltage at no load.
Isolate transformer noise and vibration from occupied areas of the building. Provide neoprene isolation for support of the transformer, and utilize flexible wiring connections. Advise other trades not to locate services in the area adjacent to the transformer, that may hinder the isolation of the transformer noise and vibration.
.11
1.2 NOISE/VIBRATION ISOLATION
.1
.2
Utilize Vibro-Acoustics type NSN resilient elements below transformers.
SPRINKLER PROOF EQUIPMENT
Section 26 24 05 Page 1 2011-06-11
1.1 WORK INCLUDED
.1
Provide all wall mounted equipment in sprinklered areas with accessories to prevent the entry of water into the enclosures in the event that the sprinkler system is activated.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Gaskets on on lighting, receptacle and distribution panelboards.

Gaskets on doors and drip shields on fire alarm and communication systems panels and enclosures. Louvres facing outward and downward where openings are required for heat dissipation. Expanded metal screening is not acceptable. CSA certified sealing rings for rigid steel galvanized conduit and CSA certified raintight connectors for steel galvanized electrical metallic tubing (EMT).
.2
.3
.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install sealing rings and raintight connectors on conduit terminations entering the top or side of panel enclosures and for all conduit terminations pull boxes, junction boxes, splitter troughs, wireways, auxiliary gutters, cable troughs and disconnect switches installed below the level of sprinkler heads.
all all for
the
PANELBOARDS BREAKER TYPE
Section 26 24 16.01 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for standard and custom breaker type panelboards.
.1
Section 06 10 00.0 - Rough Carpentry - Short Form: Plywood Backboard. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical. Section 26 28 21 - Moulded Case Circuit Breakers.
.2 .3
1.3 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.29-[M1989(R2009)], Panelboards and enclosed Panelboards.
1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1

Drawings to include electrical detail of panel, branch breaker type, quantity, ampacity and enclosure dimension.
.2
.1

.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
Section 26 24 16.01 Page 2 2011-06-11
2.1 PANELBOARDS
.1
Panelboards: to [CSA C22.2No.29] and product of one manufacturer. .1 Install circuit breakers in panelboards before shipment.
.2
In addition to CSA requirements manufacturer's nameplate must show fault current that panel including breakers has been built to withstand.
.2
Sequence phase bussing with odd numbered breakers on left and even on right, with each breaker identified by permanent number identification as to circuit number and phase.
.4
Panelboards: mains, number of circuits, and number and size of branch circuit breakers as indicated. Distribution panels shall be provided with circuit capacity to accommodate the number of breakers shown plus capacity for at least six additional breakers of the maximum size provided. Panelboards to be complete with a hinged lockable door. Two keys for each panelboard and key panelboards alike. Tinned Copper bus with neutral of same ampere rating as mains. Mains: suitable for bolt-on breakers. Trim with concealed front bolts and hinges. Trim and door finish: baked grey enamel ASA61.
Panelboards shall be complete with a factory mounted ground bus, with one terminal per circuit.
.5
.6
.7 .8 .9 .10
.10
Breaker directory typewritten on bristol board secured to inside door of panelboard with directory frame.
Provide drip shields for surface panelboards mounted in sprinklered areas.
.11
2.3 BREAKERS
.1 .2
Breakers: to Section 26 28 21. Breakers with thermal and magnetic tripping in panelboards except as indicated otherwise.

.3
Section 26 24 16.01 Page 3 2011-06-11
Lock-on devices for security system, exit light circuits, and other loads as indicated on the drawings. Breakers less than 19mm wide will not be permitted. All branch breakers shall be bolt-on type.
Branch breakers in lighting and power panelboards shall be rated at not less than 10,000 amps symmetrical interrupting capacity at 240 volts. Breakers in distribution panels shall have short circuit ratings as indicated or not less than the specified symmetrical interrupting capacity of the panelboard. Two and three pole breakers shall have one common simultaneous trip. Main breakers on the main normal and emergency power distribution panels shall be solid state electronic trip type.
.4 .5 .6
.7
.8
.8
.1
.2 Nameplate for each panelboard size 5 engraved in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Indicate panel designation, voltage, and phase (i.e. "PANEL 2E" 120/208V 3PH 4W). Mount on exterior face of panelboard cover. .3 Nameplates for distribution panelboard branch breakers size 4 engraved in accordance with Section 26 05 01. .4 Complete circuit directory with typewritten legend showing location and load of each circuit. .5 Identify all spare breakers on breaker directory as "SPARE" (in pencil).
2.5 MANUFACTURERS
.1 Acceptable manufacturers: Schneider Canada, Siemens Canada Ltd., Cutler Hammer Canada, General Electric.
Section 26 24 16.01 Page 4 2011-06-11
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Locate panelboards as indicated and mount securely, plumb, true and square, to adjoining surfaces. Install surface mounted panelboards on plywood backboards. Where practical, group panelboards on common backboard. Mount panelboards to height given in Section 26 05 00 or as indicated.
.3
.4 .5 .6
Connect loads to circuits as indicated. Connect neutral conductors to common neutral bus. Co-ordinate the thickness of partition walls in which panelboards are to be located prior to rough-in. Failure to do this work shall require this Contractor to assume any costs for modifying walls, revising panels or electrical components.
Thoroughly vacuum all panelboards to remove construction debris and dust, prior to installation of panel covers.
.7
.8
Multi-section double wide panelboard tubs shall be spaced 40 mm apart and secured together using manufacturer's spacers and mounting hardware. A minimum of two close nipples complete with locknuts shall be installed between the tubs. Install 3 - 25 mm spare conduits up to ceiling space from each flush panel. Terminate these conduits in 152 x 152 x 102 mm junction boxes located in the accessible ceiling space above.
.9
MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES FOR - ELECTRICAL
Section 26 24 19 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) CAN/CSA-ISO 9000-05, Quality Management Systems .1 - Fundamentals and Vocabulary. .2 CAN/CSA-Q9000-[92], Quality Management and Quality Assurance Standards - Guidelines for Selection and Use.
1.2 PRODUCT DATA
.1
Submit product data in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Submit WHMIS MSDS - Material Safety Data Sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00. WHMIS acceptable to Labour Canada, and Health and Welfare Canada. Submit product data sheets for sills, busbars and compartments. Include product characteristics, physical size and finish. Manufacturer's Instructions: Provide to indicate special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
.2
.3
.4
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate: .1 Outline dimensions .2 Configuration of identified compartments. .3 Floor anchoring method and dimensioned foundation template. .4 [Cable] [Bus duct] entry and exit locations. .5 Dimensioned position and size of busbars and details of provision for future extension. .6 Schematic and wiring diagrams.
.2
.1

.2
Section 26 24 19 Page 2 2011-06-11
Collect, package and store existing busbars, wireways, sills, copper ground straps and other associated components for recycling and reuse.
.1
Provide operation and maintenance data for motor control centre for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Include data for each type and style of starter.
.2
1.6 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLY CHARACTERISTICS
.1
600 V, 60Hz, wye connected, 3 phase, 3 wire, grounded.
2.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
.1
Compartmentalized vertical sections with common power busbars. Floor mounting, free standing, enclosed dead front. Indoor CSA [1] gasketted enclosure, front mounting.
.2 .3 .4
Class I Type B.
2.3 VERTICAL SECTION CONSTRUCTION
.1
Independent vertical sections fabricated from rolled flat steel sheets bolted together to form rigid, completely enclosed assembly. Each vertical section divided into compartment units, minimum 305 mm high, as indicated.
.2
.3
Each unit to have complete top and bottom steel plate for isolation between units. Horizontal wireways, equipped with cable supports,
.4
Section 26 24 19 Page 3 2011-06-11
across top and bottom, extending full width of motor control centre, isolated from busbars by steel barriers.
.5
Vertical wireways c/w doors for load and control conductors extending full height of vertical sections, and equipped with cable tie supports. Installation wiring to units accessible with doors open and units in place. Openings, with removable coverplates, in side of vertical sections for horizontal wiring between sections. Incoming cables to enter at top or bottom [as indicated].
Provision for outgoing cables to exit via top or bottom.
.6
.7
.8 .9 .10
Removable lifting means.

Provision for future extension of both ends of motor control centre including busbars without need for further drilling, cutting or preparation in field.
.11
Divide assembly for shipment to site, if necessary complete with hardware and instructions for re-assembly.
2.4 SILLS
.1
Continuous 25 mm channel iron floor sills for mounting bases with 19 mm diameter holes for bolts.
2.5 BUSBARS
.1
Main horizontal and branch vertical, three phase [and neutral] high conductivity tin plated copper busbars in separate compartment bare self-cooled, extending entire width and height of motor control centre, supported on insulators and rated: .1 Main horizontal busbars: as indicated. .2 Branch vertical busbars: 300 A.
.2
Branch vertical busbars for distribution of power to units in vertical sections.

No other cables, wires, equipment in main and branch busbar compartments.
.3
.4
Brace buswork to withstand effects of short-circuit current of 42 kA rms symmetrical. Bus supports: with high dielectric strength, low moisture absorption, high impact material and long creepage surface designed to discourage collection of dust.
.5
Section 26 24 19 Page 4 2011-06-11
2.6 GROUND BUS
.1
Copper ground bus extending entire width of motor control centre. [Vertical ground bus strap, full height of section, tied to horizontal ground bus, engaged by plug-in unit ground stab.
.2
.1 2.7 MOTOR STARTERS AND DEVICES .2 ANDADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Provide starters in accordance with Section 26 29 10. Provide AFDs in accordance with Section 26 29 23.
2.8 STARTER UNIT COMPARTMENTS
.1
Units EEMAC size 5 and smaller, circuit breaker units 225A and smaller, plug-in type with self-disconnect. Guide rail supports for units to ensure that stabs make positive contact with vertical bus. Provision for units to be installed or removed, off load, while buses energized.
.2
Unit mounting: .1 Engaged position - unit stabbed into vertical bus. .2 Withdrawn position - unit isolated from vertical bus but supported by structure. [Terminal block accessible for electrical testing of starter]. .3 Provision for positive latching in either engaged or withdrawn position and padlocking in withdrawn position. .4 Stab-on connectors free floating tin plated clips, self-aligning, backed up with steel springs. External operating handle of circuit switch interlocked with door to prevent door opening with switch in "on" position. Provision for padlocks to lock operating handle in "off" position and lock door closed. Hinge unit doors on same side.
Overload relays manually reset from front with door closed.
.3
.4 .5
.6
Pushbuttons and indicating lights mounted on door front.

.7
Section 26 24 19 Page 5 2011-06-11
Devices and components by one manufacturer to facilitate maintenance. Pull-apart terminal blocks for power and control to allow removal of starter units without removal of field wiring.
.8
2.9 WIRING IDENTIFICATION
.1
Provide wiring identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. .1 Motor control centre main nameplate: size No. 7, engraved. .2 Individual compartment nameplates: size No. 5, engraved as indicated.
2.11 FINISHES
.1 .2
Apply finishes in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Paint motor control centre exterior light gray and interiors white.
.1
Provide manufacturer's type test certificates including short circuit fault damage certification up to short circuit values specified under bus bracing. Manufacturer to provide proof of quality control program in accordance with CAN/CSA-Q9000.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Set and secure motor control centre in place on channel bases, rigid, plumb and square to building floor and wall. Make field power and control connections as indicated.
.2 .3
Ensure correct overload heater elements are installed.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
.1 .2
Section 26 24 19 Page 6 2011-06-11
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00.

Ensure moving and working parts are lubricated where required.
.3
Operate starters to prove satisfactory performance of motor control centre during 8 hours period.
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Switches, receptacles, wiring devices, cover plates and their installation.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-C22.2 No.42-99(R2004), General Use Receptacles, Attachment Plugs and Similar Devices. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No.42.1-00(R2004), Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices (Bi-National standard, with UL 514D). .3 CSA-C22.2 No.55-M1986(R2003), Special Use Switches. .4 CSA-C22.2 No.111-00(R2005), General-Use Snap Switches (Bi-national standard, with UL 20, twelfth edition).
.1
.1

Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SWITCHES
.1
20 A, 120 V, single pole, three-way, four-way switches as indicated to: CSA-C22.2 No.111. Manually-operated specification grade AC switches with following features:
.2
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26 Page 2 2011-06-11
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .3 .5
Terminal holes approved for No. 10 AWG wire. Silver alloy contacts. Urea or melamine moulding for parts subject to carbon tracking. White rectangular rocker type operator (decorator style). Grounding terminal or self-grounding clip.
Switches of one manufacturer throughout project. Acceptable Manufacturers: Pass and Seymour #26011-W, Hubbell #2101WA, Leviton #5691-W, Arrow Hart #DEC 115W, or approved equal.
Keyed switches shall be cam lock style equal to Pass & Seymour #20AC1-KL (SPST), #20AC2-KL (DPST), #20AC3-KL(3 way), and #20AC4-KL (four way) complete with 2 keys per switch. All keyed switches shall be keyed alike. Key shall be removable in both positions.
.6
2.2 RECEPTACLES
.1 .2 .3
Receptacles of one Manufacturer throughout project. Receptacles to: CSA C22.2 No. 42.
Specification grade duplex receptacle shall be CSA type 5-15R, 125V, 15A, U-ground with the following features: .1 Heavy-duty, one-piece, chromate plate steel mounting strap secured to body of receptacle at both ends. .2 Heavy-duty white nylon rectangular face ("decorator" style). .3 Suitable for #10 AWG conductors side and back wiring. .4 Break off links for use as split receptacle. .5 Triple wipe constant pressure power contacts with fingers in contact when receptacle is not in use. .6 Acceptable manufacturers, Pass and Seymour #26252-W, Hubbell #2152WA, Leviton #16262-W, Bryant #9252-W, Arrow Hart # DECB 15W or approved equal. Ground fault circuit interrupter receptacles shall be CSA type 5-15R, 125V U-ground, Class A rated, with the following features: .1 Test and reset buttons with indicating band of reset button to indicate ground fault trip. .2 Heavy-duty, one-piece, chromate steel mounting strap secured to body of receptacle at both ends. .3 Heavy-duty white nylon rectangular face. .4 Constant pressure power contacts with fingers in contact when receptacle is not in use. .5 Acceptable manufacturers Hubbell #GF5252-WHI, Pass and Seymour #1591-RW, Leviton #6599, Arrow Hart #GF5242W, or approved equal.
.4

.5
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26 Page 3 2011-06-11
Safety type duples receptacles shall be CSA type 5-15R, 125V, U-ground with the following features: .1 Duplex receptacle complete with safety shutter that prevents insertion of objects into receptacle slots. Shutter to open easily for insertion of 2 or 3 prong plug. .2 Heavy duty, one-piece, chromate plated steel mounting strap secured to body of receptacle at both ends. .3 Heavy-duty white nylon face. .4 Break off links for use as split receptacle. .5 Triple wire constant power pressure contacts with fingers in contact when receptacle is not in use. .6 Pigtail leads resulting in no live parts exposed when coverplate is removed. Acceptable manufacturers: Pass and Seymour #885TRW, Leviton #16262-SGS, Cooper #TR8200W, or approved equivalent. Surge suppression duplex receptacles shall be CSA type 5-15R, 125V, 15A, U-ground with the following features: .1 Heavy-duty, one-piece, wrap-around steel mounting strap integral ground contacts. .2 Heavy-duty blue nylon rectangular face, colour orange for emergency power and grey for UPS power. Suitable for #10 AWG conductors back or side .3 wiring. .4 Triple wipe constant pressure power contacts with fingers in contact when receptacle is not in use. .5 Metal oxide varistor to absorb and dissipate transient surges. .6 Acceptable manufacturers Hubbell #5262SA, Pass and Seymour #5262-BLSP, Leviton #5280-B, Cooper #1308BL or approved equal. Receptacles other than 120 volt, 15 amp, 5-15R type, shall be provided with a matching nylon cord end connectors. Install cord end connector on Owner supplied equipment.
.6
.7
2.5 COVER PLATES
.1 .2
Coverplates from one Manufacturer throughout project. Cast coverplates for wiring devices mounted in surface mounted FS or FD type conduit boxes. Weatherproof double-lift, spring-loaded cast aluminum coverplates, complete with gaskets for duplex receptacles as indicated.
Maximum security grade wall plates for wiring devices in cells and all inmate areas. Maximum security wall
.3
.4
WIRING DEVICES
Section 26 27 26 Page 4 2011-06-11
plates shall include a 10 gauge CRS backplate with provision for attachment to outlet box and wall structure, mounting of the device and attachment of the cover. the cover shall be 10 gauge CRS, one piece die-formed, continuous welded with ground smooth edges attached with four security screws. Fail-Safe type SSB/SPC, Kenall type WSP/SPD or approved equal. .5 Type 302 stainless steel coverplates for all other devices. Thickness shall be minimum .9 mm (.04). Finish shall be smooth satin without lines.

.1 Switches: .1 Install single throw switches with handle in "UP" position when switch closed. .2 Install switches in gang type outlet box when more than one switch is required in one location. .3 Mount toggle switches at height in accordance with Section 26 05 01 as indicated. .4 Locate light switches on latch side of door. Receptacles: .1 Install receptacles in gang type outlet box when more than one receptacle is required in one location. .2 Mount receptacles at height in accordance with Section 26 05 00 as indicated. Where split receptacle has one portion switched, .3 mount vertically and switch upper portion. Cover plates: .1 Protect stainless steel cover plate finish with paper or plastic film until painting and other work is finished. .2 Install suitable common cover plates where wiring devices are grouped. .3 Do not use cover plates meant for flush outlet boxes on surface-mounted boxes. Device Identification .1 Identify all receptacles with "Brady" marker describing circuit number (ie. "A-32"). Marker shall be fastened around mounting ears of receptacle. .2 Identify all receptacle coverplates with clear self-adhesive mylar tape with black lettering. .3 Identify receptacle coverplates for designated computer receptacles with additional label as above indicating "COMPUTER ONLY". Steel Unit Masonry .1 Coordinate installation of all wiring devices with Section 11 19 70.
.2
.3
.4
.5
FUSES LOW VOLTAGE
Section 26 28 13.01 Page 1 2011-06-11
1.1 SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 11 11 01. Product Data: .1 Provide fuse performance data characteristics for each fuse type and size above 200 A. Performance data to include: average melting time-current characteristics. Provide shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 11 01. Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada.
.2
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
.2
.1 .2 .3
Ship fuses in original containers. Do not ship fuses installed in switchboard. Store fuses in original containers in moisture free location. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 11 01.
.4
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 11 01. Three spare fuses of each type and size installed.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSES - GENERAL
.1
HRC fuses to have interrupting capability of 200 A symmetrical. Fuses: product of one manufacturer.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.2 FUSE TYPES
.1
FUSES LOW VOLTAGE
Section 26 28 13.01 Page 2 2011-06-11
1 600 amp Form I, HRC Fuses, Class J .1 Type J1, time delay, capable of carrying 500% rated current for 10 s minimum. .2 Type J2, fast acting.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install fuses in mounting devices immediately before energizing circuit.
.2
Ensure correct fuses fitted to physically matched mounting devices. .1 Install rejection clips for Class R fuses. Ensure correct fuses fitted to assigned electrical circuit. Provide spare fuses to owner.
.3
.4
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Section 26 28 16.02 Page 1 2011-06-11
.1
Materials for moulded-case circuit breakers, circuit breakers, and ground-fault circuit-interrupters.
.1
Section 26 28 18 - Ground Fault Equipment Protection.
1.3 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International). .1 CSA-C22.2 No. 5-[02(R2007)], Moulded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit-Breaker Enclosures (Tri-national standard with UL 489, and NMX-J-266-ANCE).
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1
.1
.2
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers in accordance with Waste Management Plan.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BREAKERS GENERAL
.1 .2
Moulded-case circuit breakers: to CSA C22.2 No. 5 Bolt-on moulded case circuit breaker: quick- make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic operation.

.3
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
Section 26 28 16.02 Page 2 2011-06-11
Bolt on moulded case circuit breakers: quick- make, quick-break type, for manual and automatic operation. Common-trip breakers: with single handle for multi-pole applications. Magnetic instantaneous trip elements in circuit breakers to operate only when value of current reaches setting. .1 Trip settings on breakers with adjustable trips to range from 3-10 times current rating. Breakers shall trip in centre position.
.4
.5
.6
2.2 THERMAL MAGNETIC BREAKERS
.1
Moulded case circuit breaker to operate automatically by means of thermal and magnetic tripping devices to provide inverse time current tripping, overload condition and instantaneous tripping for short circuit protection.
2.3 ENCLOSURE
.1
Breaker enclosures shall be surface mounted unless otherwise noted. The breaker shall be capable of being padlocked either in the "ON" or "OFF" position.
2.4 MANUFACTURERS
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: Schneider Canada, Siemens Canada Ltd., Cutler Hammer Canada Ltd., General Electric.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install circuit breakers as indicated.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Section 26 28 23 Page 1 2011-06-11
1.1 PRODUCT DATA
.1
.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
.1
Fusible, non-fusible, horsepower rated disconnect switch in CSA Enclosure 1, size as indicated. Provision for padlocking in off switch position.
Mechanically interlocked door to prevent opening when handle in ON position.
.2 .3
.4 .5
Fuses: size as indicated, to Section 26 28 14. Fuseholders: suitable without adaptors, for type and size of fuse indicated. Quick-make, quick-break action. ON-OFF switch position indication on switch enclosure cover.
.6 .7
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Indicate name of load controlled on size 4 nameplate.
.2
2.3 MANUFACTURERS
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: Cutler-Hammer, Siemens Canada Ltd., Schneider Canada, General Electric.
DISCONNECT SWITCHES FUSED AND NON-FUSED
Section 26 28 23 Page 2 2011-06-11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install disconnect switches complete with fuses as indicated.

Mount securely at 1800 mm above finished floor to top of switch. Provide a minimum of 1000 mm clear floor space in front of the switch.
.2
.3
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section Identification 26 05 00.

Nameplate for each disconnect switch Size 5 engraved in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Indicate disconnect load, amperage, voltage, and phase (i.e., roof top unit, 60 amp, 120/208V, 3 phase). Identify circuit number on disconnect switch (i.e. B-36).
.4
.5
CONTACTORS
Section 26 29 01 Page 1 2011-06-11
.1
Materials and installation for contactors for system voltages up to 600 V
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.14-[95(R2001)], Industrial Control Equipment.
1.3 PRODUCT DATA
.1
.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONTACTORS
.1 .2
Contactors: to CSA C22.2 No.14. Mechanically held controlled by pilot devices as indicated and rated for type of load controlled. Half size contactors not accepted. Coil Voltage: 120 VAC.
Complete with 2 normally open and 2 normally closed auxiliary contacts unless indicated otherwise.
.3
.4 .5
Mount in CSA Enclosure 1 unless otherwise indicated. Include following options in cover: .1 Red indicating lamp. .2 Hand-Off-Auto selector switch. .4 On-Off selector switch.
.1

.2
CONTACTORS
Section 26 29 01 Page 2 2011-06-11
Size 4 nameplate indicating name of load controlled.
2.3 MANUFACTURER
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers: Allen-Bradley, Siemens Canada Ltd., Cutler-Hammer Ltd., Square D Company Ltd., General Electric
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install contactors and connect auxiliary control devices.
MOTOR STARTERS TO 600 V
Section 26 29 10 Page 1 2011-06-11
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC) .1 IEC 60947-4-1-[2002], Part 4: Electromechanical contactors and motor-starters.
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 11 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. Shop Drawings: .1 Provide shop drawings: in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit drawings stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. .2 Provide shop drawings for each type of starter to indicate: .1 Mounting method and dimensions. .2 Starter size and type. .3 Layout and components. .4 Enclosure types. .5 Wiring diagram. .6 Interconnection diagrams.
.2
.3
.1

Submit operation and maintenance data for each type and style of motor starter for incorporation into maintenance manual.
.2
.3
Extra Materials: .1 Provide listed spare parts for each different size and type of starter.
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00.

.2
Section 26 29 10 Page 2 2011-06-11
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse [and return] [by manufacturer] of [pallets] [crates] [paddling] [and] [packaging materials] in accordance with Section [01 74 20].
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Starters to CSA C22.2 No. 14-M91, EEMAC E14-1. .1 Half size starters not acceptable. .2 Control transformers - to CSA C22.2 No. 66-1988. .3 Resistors - to EEMAC 13E-1-1965. .4 Auto transformers - to CSA C22.2 No. 47-M90.
2.2 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS
.1
Single phase manual motor starters of size, type, rating, and enclosure type as indicated, with components as follows: .1 Switching mechanism, quick make and break. .2 One overload heater, manual reset, trip indicating handle. Accessories: .1 Toggle switch heavy duty labelled as indicated. .2 Indicating light: heavy duty type and colour as indicated. .3 Locking tab to permit padlocking in "ON" or "OFF" position.
.2
2.3 FULL VOLTAGE MAGNETIC STARTERS
.1
Magnetic and combination magnetic starters of size, type, rating and enclosure type as indicated with components as follows: .1 Contactor solenoid operated, rapid action type. .2 Motor overload protective device in each phase, manually reset from outside enclosure. .3 Wiring and schematic diagram inside starter enclosure in visible location. .4 Identify each wire and terminal for external connections, within starter, with permanent number marking identical to diagram. .5 Power and control terminals.
.2
Combination type starters to be circuit breaker with operating lever on outside of enclosure to control circuit breaker, and provision for:
Section 26 29 10 Page 3 2011-06-11
.1 .2 .3 .4 .3
Locking in "OFF" position with up to 3 padlocks. Independent locking of enclosure door. Provision for preventing switching to "ON" position while enclosure door open. Locking in ON position.
Accessories: .1 Selector switches: heavy duty labelled as indicated. Indicating lights: heavy duty type and color as .2 indicated. .3 1-N/O and 1-N/C spare auxiliary contacts unless otherwise indicated.
2.13 CONTROL TRANSFORMER
.1
Single phase, dry type, control transformer with primary voltage as indicated and 120 V secondary, complete with secondary fuse, installed in with starter as indicated. Size control transformer for control circuit load plus 20% spare capacity.
.2
2.14 ACCESSORIES
.1 .2 .3
Pushbutton: heavy duty, oil tight as required.

Selector switches: heavy duty, oil tight as required.
Indicating lights: heavy duty, oil tight, type and colour as indicated.
2.15 FINISHES
.1
Apply finishes to enclosure in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.1
Provide equipment identification in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Manual starter designation label, white plate, black letters, size 1, engraved as indicated. Magnetic starter designation label, white plate, black letters, size 1 engraved as indicated.
.2
.3
Section 26 29 10 Page 4 2011-06-11
2.17 MANUFACTURERS
.1
Acceptable Manufacturers are: Allen-Bradely Canada Company, Siemens Canada Ltd., Cutler-Hammer Canada Ltd., Schneider Canada, General Electric, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install starters and control devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install and wire starters and controls as indicated.
.2 .3 .4
Ensure correct fuses installed.

Confirm motor nameplate and adjust overload device to suit. Provide the necessary conduit for mechanical heating and ventilation control to the starters as required under the mechanical contract. Confirm with the Mechanical Contractor the conduit requirements prior to installation. The Electrical Contractor shall complete all control wiring required which is not specifically related to the controls systems as outlined in the mechanical specifications. All control wiring outlined in the mechanical specifications as part of the controls systems shall be completed by the Controls Contractor. The Electrical Contractor shall supply all control equipment specifically noted on plans or specifications. All other equipment required shall be supplied by Mechanical or other trades. The electrical Contractor shall co-operate with the Mechanical trades to ensure that all control sequences and equipment are correct. The Electrical Contractor shall be supplied with all electrical equipment from other trades and shall verify that its characteristics are correct. It will be the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to obtain from the Mechanical Contractor, and all other trades, complete detailed wiring diagrams for all equipment supplied by these trades requiring electrical wiring by the Electrical Contractor's work and the work of other trades. It is the Electrical Contractor's responsibility to point out immediately any discrepancies in these diagrams or any reason they cannot be adhered to. All control equipment such as immersion type thermostats, coil
.5
.6
Section 26 29 10 Page 5 2011-06-11
freeze protection, pneumatic control devices, etc. shall be installed by the trade responsible for its supply and operation. .7
It is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to provide a dedicated line voltage power source where required for control systems. It is the responsibility of the electrical contractor to provide all control devices such as pushbutton stations, when they do not form part of a control panel.
.8
.1
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00 and manufacturer's instructions. Operate switches and contactors to verify correct functioning.
Perform starting and stopping sequences of contactors and relays. Check that sequence controls, interlocking with other separate related starters, equipment, control devices, operate as indicated.
.2
.3
.4
3.3 CLEANING
.1
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SHOP DRAWING AND PRODUCT DATA
.1
ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
Section 26 29 23 Page 1 2011-06-11
Manufacturer shall provide a complete set of shop drawings for this specific project. Drawings shall include, but not limited to, dimensioned outline drawing, schematic diagram, power and control connection diagram, full list of features, installation instructions, and operating instructions produced specifically for this project. Drawings shall be approved by the Engineer before fabrication and supply of equipment.
.2
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Electrical Maintenance Manuals.

Submit a detailed operating, maintenance and testing procedure document prepared specifically for this project. The Owner's operating personnel shall be instructed in the operation of the systems for a minimum of one(1) hour. Written documentation bearing name and signature of Owner's personnel who received the above instructions shall be included in the operating instructions and service manuals. All AFD parameter settings shall be documented in the operating and maintenance manual.
.2
.3
.4
1.3 SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS
.1
The supplier shall be fully qualified in the performance of work specified herein. Service personnel shall be located within the Province of [Province] and shall be experienced in the installation and operation of the system.
1.4 VERIFICATION
.1
The AFD manufacturer shall supply on site start-up, commissioning and operator training. Allow for all cost and labour for as many trips as necessary to complete these requirements. Labour, expenses and all parts shall be at the AFD suppliers cost until the warranty period expires. Warranty shall be for a minimum of 24 months after shipment or 18 months after energization.
Upon completion of installation of the system, a factory trained manufacturer's representative shall perform a
.2
Section 26 29 23 Page 2 2011-06-11
completion verification and inspection of all installed equipment. A certificate of verification confirming that the commissioning and inspection have been performed, shall be submitted. .3
The factory trained manufacturers representative shall witness all connections between building automated controls system (BACS) and the AFD and shall assist the controls contractor with all input and output connections between the AFD and the BACS.
1.5 STANDARDS
.1
The AFD shall be designed, manufactured and tested in accordance with the latest applicable standards of IEC, UL, CUL, CSA and NEMA.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 ADJUSTABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
.1
The adjustable frequency drive operation shall be based on Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) design utilizing insulated gate bi-polar transitors (IGBTs). Each unit shall be built to CSA Z299.3 level of quality control or equivalent. The AFD shall be complete with a digital control system. All AFD's shall use the same common logic for all units as specified for this project.
.2
.3
The AFD shall be rated for continuous duty while operating standard squirrel cage induction motors as listed in the motor schedule. The AFD shall have a continuous current rating at least 10% in excess of the motor full load amp rating. An overload service factor of 110% for one minute duty (variable torque) must be supplied to ensure adequate safety margins for all applications.
For maintenance and testing purposes, the AFD shall have a test mode whereas the AFD shall be capable of stable operation over entire speed range (starting, stopping, running) with the motor disconnected.
.4
.5
The AFD efficiency shall be a minimum of 95% for all inverters when operated at full speed and load.
Input voltage shall be rated for the system voltage and have a minimum voltage tolerance of + 10% from nominal, and a line frequency variation of 48 to 62 Hz. The output voltage shall vary linearly with the speed to maintain the motors design voltage to frequency ratio from zero speed to 60 hertz. Frequency stability shall be maintained within 1% over the entire speed range.
.6
.7
AFD shall be enclosed in the motor control centres unless

.8

otherwise noted.
Section 26 29 23 Page 3 2011-06-11
The AFD shall maintain the line side displacement power factor at no less than 0.96 regardless of speed or load. The AFD shall be capable of starting a spinning motor. The AFD shall be able to determine the motor speed in any direction and resume operation without tripping.
.9
.10
Protective devices to be incorporated are: .1 .2

Main incoming door interlocked circuit breaker or disconnect switch. The AFD shall be protected by three Class J high interrupting capacity fuses to supply fault protection of the drive for faults up to 100,000 amps RMS symmetrical. A fully rated external AC line reactor to minimize line current harmonics and provide transient protection for a minimum of 5000 volts, 50 microseconds pulse in accordance with ANSI C42-61. Integral electronic motor overload protection adjustable from 50 to 110% of the drive rating to coordinate with actual motor full load ampere rating. Current in excess of this setting will cause a timed overload trip to occur. Instantaneous output short circuit protection for phase to phase and phase to ground faults. Over voltage DC Bus monitor/protection. Supply under voltage protection as required to maintain logic and control during power dips and power loss conditions, such as transfer switch operations. Loss of supply voltage and loss of phase protection. AFD heat sink over temperature detection circuit to shut down the AFD and provide an O/T fault indication. Capable of operating without a motor over the entire frequency range for maintenance and testing purposes. Accepts the motor output circuit being opened, while the motor is operating without damaging inverter.
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7
.8 .9
.10
.11

.12
Section 26 29 23 Page 4 2011-06-11
The following motor protection shall be provided for the motor. The following protection shall be related to the specific motor and not the AFD. separate I2t overload protection (AFD overload protection not acceptable for motor overload.) stall protection. phase to ground fault protection. instantaneous overcurrent protection. phase to phase fault protection. adjustable torque limit setpoints. The AFD shall have an active current limit to prevent the motor from operating in an overload condition. When the current limit setting is reached, the output frequency is reduced such that the load reduces to less than the current limit setpoint. When the actual load decreases, the speed will ramp back to process setpoint. Provide an output isolation contactor to provide for a positive isolation between the motor and the inverter. The contactor shall remain energized for power interruptions of up to 0.5 seconds.
.13
.14
11.
Operational Features .1 Regenerative override circuit to allow deceleration of high inertia loads without nuisance shutdowns. Instantaneous fault shutdown. Automatic restart after power outage, if the run command is maintained closed. Automatic attempt to restart after any fault. If unable to restart, the drive shall lockout the inverter after 3 unsuccessful attempts within a 90 second time period. The Fault counter will reset to zero automatically after 3 minutes of continuous operation. Adjustable minimum speed setting from 0-70% and a maximum speed setpoint from 50-100% of the 60 hertz rating. Separately adjustable accelerating and deceleration ramp rates programmable between 1 and 300 seconds. A fast acceleration to minimum speed shall be used on all starts. Input speed reference signal shall be 4-20mA DC for remote auto mode operation and local potentiometer or keypad entry for manual mode of operation. The 4-20mA input shall be isolated such that either input line can be grounded or both floating. Output speed monitoring shall be by a 4-20mA isolated signal. Output load monitoring shall be by a 4-20mA
.2 .3 .4
.5
.6
.7
.8 .9

isolated signal.
Section 26 29 23 Page 5 2011-06-11
.10
.11 .12 .13 .14
.15
.16
.17
.18
Provide digital or analog displays for the following functions on each AFD front panel: speed reference input speed output (%) motor frequency (hertz) current (%) motor voltage (%) High performance inner current loop regulator. Optimized tuning of air gap flux. Programmable V/Hz profiles. The AFD shall have a "SELF TUNE MODE" which will automatically do the calibration of motor parameters to match AFD regulator settings. AFD shall indicate date and time display of all trips (or the time elapsed since failure displayed). AFD shall have elapsed time meter (non-re-settable) or indicate hours and minutes of operation (inverter running). The AFD shall have a rotating restart circuit that will allow for a safe start into a motor that is rotating in the forward or reverse direction and accelerate it to the desired speed in the proper direction. Audible noise generated by AFD shall not exceed 85 dBA at 1 metre intervals around AFD.
.12
Environmental Capabilities .1 The drive shall operate without mechanical or electrical damage under any combination of the following conditions: .1 Ambient temperature 0-40oC. .2 Humidity 0-95% (non condensing). .3 Vibration up to 0.5 G. .4 Altitude 0-1000 metres.
.13
AFD self cooled by natural convection shall automatically shutdown if heat sink temperature exceeds setpoint. If forced air cooling is used the AFD shall provide immediate shutdown on cooling air loss and provide annunciation of this shutdown. The AFDs shall limit harmonic distortion reflected onto the utility system by utilizing standard 3% nominal impedance integral ac three-phase line reactors. Customer terminal blocks for control wires shall be separated from power wire connections and shall be able to accept connections for 12 AWG wires. Printed circuit board terminal blocks are not acceptable. The AFD shall be manufactured and tested to quality control CSA Z299.3 standards or better. Each unit
.14
.15
.16
Section 26 29 23 Page 6 2011-06-11
shall be full load tested in heat chamber at 40oC for a minimum of four hours of continuous operation without any trips or faults. .17 Bypass .1 Provide a bypass control scheme to safely apply full voltage to the driven motor in the event of a failure to the Adjustable Frequency Drive. The bypass scheme shall meet the following requirements: .1 Provide a sectional CSA Approved enclosed cabinet or use the AFD cabinet with proper shrouding of all live parts, to provide isolation for maintenance of the AFD when in bypass mode. .2 Provide a separate circuit disconnect in parallel to the AFD circuit disconnect to feed the 3 phase power to the bypass section only. .3 Provide high interrupting capacity fuses on the load side of the circuit disconnect for fault clearing capability of 100,000 Amperes RMS Symmetrical. .4 Provide a door mounted Line-Off-AFD selections switch to select operations at constant speed or at adjustable speed. .5 Provide two mechanically and electrically interlocked contactors for line and AFD operations. .6 Provide a thermal overload relay which will protect the motor in either mode of operation. .7 Provide a separate start/stop pushbutton to start the bypass mode manually. In auto mode, the same run command from the DDC will start and stop the motor in either mode. .8 Provide all the necessary control logic, time delay relays and interlocks to provide a safe reliable bypass control scheme. The control scheme shall provide a safe transfer to either mode of operation for all possible operating conditions. .9 Control logic shall maintain all external interlocks active in either mode of operation.
The AFD shall be complete with a communication card for interface with the building management system (i.e. Johnson N2, Modbus RTU, DeviceNet, Interbus-S, Profibus-DP, Lonworks, IMPAAC, Staefa etc.).
.18
.19
The AFD shall be complete with an input EMI filter to minimize conducted electrical noise to meet the requirements of IEC 61800-3.

.20

Control Functions
Section 26 29 23 Page 7 2011-06-11
.1 Frequently accessed AFD programmable parameters shall be adjustable from a digital operator keypad located on the front of the AFD. When the AFD is located in a motor control centre, the digital operator keypad shall be located on the face of the motor control centre. The AFDs shall have a 3 line x 16 character alphanumeric programmable display with status indicators. Display shall be adjustable for contrast with large characters easily visible in normal light. .2 Standard advanced programming and trouble-shooting functions shall be available by using a personal computers RS-232 port and Windows TM based software. In addition, the software shall permit control and monitoring via the AFDs RS232 port. The manufacturer shall supply a compact disk with the required software. An easily understood instruction manual and software help screens shall also be provided. The computer software shall be used for modifying the drive set-up and reviewing diagnostic and trend information. .3 The operator shall be able to scroll through the keypad menu to choose between the following: .1 Monitor .2 Operate .3 Parameter set-up .4 Actual parameter values .5 Active faults .6 Fault history .7 LCD contrast adjustment .8 Information to indicate the standard software and optional features software loaded. .4 The following set-ups and adjustments, at a minimum, are to be available: .1 Start command from keypad, remote or communications port .2 Speed command from keypad, remote or communications port .3 Motor direction selection .4 Maximum and minimum speed limits .5 Acceleration and deceleration times, two settable ranges .6 Critical frequency avoidance .7 Torque limit .8 Multiple attempt restart function .9 Multiple pre-set speeds adjustment .10 Catch a spinning motor start or normal start selection .11 Programmable analog output .12 DC brake current magnitude and time .13 Proportional / integral process control
Section 26 29 23 Page 8 2011-06-11
.5 The AFDs shall have the following system interfaces: .1 Inputs a minimum of six (6) programmable digital inputs, two (2) analog inputs and serial communications interface shall be provided with the following available as a minimum: .1 Remote manual / auto .2 Remote start / stop .3 Remote forward / reverse .4 Remote pre-set speeds .5 Remote external trip .6 Remote fault reset .7 Process control speed reference interface, 4-20mAdc .8 Potentiometer and 0-10 Vdc speed reference interface .9 RS232 (or DPI Scanport) programming and operation interface port .10 Serial communications port or DPI Scanport (c/w c/w communications module) .2 Outputs a minimum of two (2) discrete programmable digital outputs, and one (1) programmable analog output shall be provided, with the following available at minimum: .1 Programmable relay outputs with one (1) set of Form C contacts for each, selectable with the following available at minimum: .1 Fault .2 Run .3 Ready .4 Reversing .5 At speed .6 In torque limit .7 Motor rotation direction opposite of commanded .8 Over temperature .2 Programmable analog output signal, selectable with the following available at minimum: .1 Output current .2 Motor speed .3 Motor torque .4 Motor power .5 Motor voltage .6 DC link voltage

.6
Section 26 29 23 Page 9 2011-06-11
Monitoring and Displays .1 The AFDs display shall be a LCD type capable of displaying the following indicators: .1 Run .2 Forward .3 Reverse .4 Stop .5 Ready .6 Alarm .7 Fault .2 The AFDs LCD display shall be capable of indicating the following monitoring functions at a minimum: .1 Output frequency .2 Output speed .3 Motor current .4 Motor torque .5 Motor power .6 Motor voltage .7 DC-link voltage .8 Heatsink temperature .9 Total operating days counter .10 Total megawatt hours .11 Voltage level of analog input .12 Current level of analog input .13 Digital inputs status .14 Digital relay outputs status .15 Motor temperature rise, percentage of allowable
.7
Diagnostic Features .1 Fault History .1 Recorded and log faults .2 Indicate the most recent first, and store up to 4 faults
.21 Acceptable Manufacturers: Cutler Hammer SVX9000, Schneider Electric Altivar, Rockwell Powerflex 700, or approved equivalent.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install AFDs in accordance with manufacturers recommendation.
UNITERRUTABLE POWER SYSTEM STATIC
Section 26 33 53 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE OF WORK
.1
Supply, install and commission a complete UPS system to automatically maintain AC power within specified tolerances to the critical loads, without interruption, during failure or deterioration of the utility power supply and / or emergency power supply.
.2
The vendor shall supply all of the materials and equipment necessary for a complete UPS system. The system shall be fully compatible with the electrical, environmental and physical space conditions of the site.
.1
Both single and three phase Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS).
.1
Section [26 33 16 - Battery Racks].
1.4 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) ANSI S1.13-[1995(R1999)], Measurement of Sound .1 Pressure Levels in Air. .2 Specification for Sound Level Meters. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-C813.1-[01], Performance Test Method for Uninterruptible Power Supplies.
.2
1.5 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
.1
Normal operation: .1 System operates on mains power when mains voltage is within +/-10% of nominal value and mains frequency is between 59.5 and 60.5 Hz. Battery operation: .1 System transfers automatically to battery operation. When manually selected at control panel; .1 .2 When mains power fails; .3 When mains voltage varies more than 10% from nominal or mains frequency varies more than 0.5 Hz from 60 Hz; .4 When mains power is restored and mains
.2
Section 26 33 53 Page 2 2011-06-11
voltage is within 10% of nominal and mains frequency is within 0.3 Hz of 60 Hz, system automatically resynchronizes with mains; .5 Slew rate of frequency during transition period of system output automatically synchronizing with mains and return to its internal frequency to be set between 0.5 to 1.0 Hz per second. .3 Bypass operation: For maintenance purposes, system can be bypassed .1 automatically by manual selection at control panel to connect load directly to ac mains. Transfer without load interruption and leaving inverter energized. .2 Load transfer from mains back to system automatically by manual selection at control panel when maintenance completed. .3 Automatic transfer of load to mains in not more than 1/4 cycle including sensing with inverter left energized but disconnected from load in case of: .1 Inverter overloaded; .2 Short circuit in load; .4 Automatic retransfer of load to system without load interruption when above conditions disappear. .5 Automatic transfer of load to mains in not more than 1/4 cycle including sensing and shutdown of inverter in case of inverter internal malfunctions. .6 Automatic transfer of load to mains without load interruption and inverter shutdown in case of: .1 Over temperature harmful to system. .2 Loss of forced ventilation. .3 Low voltage of dc supply to inverter. .7 Bypass capable of closing onto and withstanding momentary fault current of 800% of rating for 0.01 s.
1.6 SYSTEM PROTECTION
.1
Circuit breakers in system used to isolate it from load and from mains for safe working on equipment, and for manual blocking of bypass automatic control to prevent inadvertent operation of bypass during Work on inverter.
.2
Automatic circuit breakers and protection included in: .1 Ac input to rectifier; .2 Battery input; .3 Bypass circuit input; .4 Inverter output. Surge suppressors: .1 To protect system against supply voltage switching transients; .2 To protect internal circuits where necessary against voltage transients.
.3

.4
Section 26 33 53 Page 3 2011-06-11
Current limiting devices, with panel front indication of device operation, to protect inverter SCR's. Suitable devices, with panel front indication of device operation, to protect rectifier diodes. Failure of circuit or component not to cause equipment to operate in dangerous or uncontrolled mode.
.5
.6
1.7 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. Include: .1 Outline sketch showing arrangement of cubicles, meters, controls, recommended aisle spaces, battery rack, battery arrangement and dimensions. .2 Shipping weight .3 Schematic diagram showing interconnection of rectifier, inverter, battery, bypass switch, meters, controls and indicating lamps. .4 Description of system operation, referenced to schematic diagram, for: .1 Manual control during initial start-up and load transfer to bypass and back to inverter output; .2 Inverter; .3 Bypass; .5 System performance and reliability: Consider any deviation from the required .1 output power waveform as failure in UPS and include estimate, with supporting calculations, of the Mean Time Between Failures (MTBF) expressed in hours. .2 Provide estimate with supporting data for Mean Time to Repair factor (MTTR). .6 Full load kVA output at [unity] power factor. .7 Efficiency of system at 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% rated load. .8 Type of ventilation: natural or forced. .9 Battery: .1 Number of cells; .2 Maximum and minimum voltages; .3 Type of battery; .4 Type of plates; .5 Catalogue data with cell trade name and type; .6 Size and weight of each cell; .7 Cell charge and discharge curves of voltage, current, time and capacity; Derating factor for specified temperature .8 range; .9 Nominal ampere hour capacity of each cell; .10 Maximum short circuit current; .11 Maximum charging current expected for
.2
Section 26 33 53 Page 4 2011-06-11
fully discharged condition; .12 Recommended low voltage limit for fully discharged condition; .13 Expected life. .10 Inverter: .1 Type and catalogue number; Dc current at minimum battery voltage to .2 produce full load ac output. .11 Rectifier: .1 Type and capacity, with catalogue number; .2 Battery charging sequence; .3 Current-time data for Silicon Controlled Rectifier (SCR) protective devices; .4 Guaranteed noise level; .5 Estimated life; .6 Metering; .7 Alarms. .12 Manufacturer's field experience with UPS of similar ratings including engineering expertise, manufacturing facilities and listing of UPS units manufactured and installed during last 5 years including model, customer, location and installation dates. .13 Evaluation of Canadian content. .14 Heat losses at no load, 25%, 50%, 75% and 100% of rated output, in kW. .15 Cooling air required in m/s. .16 List of recommended spare parts, tools and instruments with catalogue numbers and current prices. .17 Typical operation and maintenance manual. .18 Description of factory test facilities. .19 Manufacturer's maintenance capabilities including: .1 Willingness to undertake maintenance contract; .2 Number of trained personnel available; .3 Location of trained personnel and repair facilities.
.1
Provide data for incorporation into Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 01 33 00.
.1
Vendor Qualifications .1 The UPS manufacturer shall have a minimum ten years experience in the design, manufacture and testing of solid state UPS. .2 The UPS manufacturer shall have ISO 9001 certification for Engineering/R & D, manufacturing facilities and the field service organization. .3 The supplier shall have sales and service facilities in the Western Canada region which have been
Section 26 33 53 Page 5 2011-06-11
operational for a minimum 5 years. The UPS manufacturer shall maintain a national / international service network with qualified support available 24 hours / day, 7 days / week, 365 days / year. .4 The UPS manufacturer shall maintain a parts stocking network in Canada to ensure around-the-clock parts availability to the site within 24 hours. .2 Standards .1 The UPS system equipment and components shall be manufactured in accordance with the following applicable standards: CSA 22.2, No. 107.1 IEEE 587, Category B (ANSI C62.41) Canadian Electrical Code, C22.1-06 UL Standard 1778 .2 The UPS system shall be UL listed and CSA certified. .3 Factory Testing .1 Before shipment, the manufacturer shall fully and completely test the operation of the system to ensure compliance with the specifications and with applicable codes and standards.
.1
Provide data for incorporation into operation and maintenance manual specified in Section [01 78 00].
Submit interim, draft final, and final Operation and Maintenance (OM) Manual. Final manual approved by Engineer. Submit interim copies to Engineer prior to notification of factory test date.
.2
.3
Operation and Maintenance Manual to include: .1 Operation and maintenance instructions concerning design elements, construction features, component functions and maintenance requirements to permit effective operations maintenance and repair. .2 Technical data: .1 Approved shop drawings; .2 Characteristic curves for automatic circuit breakers and protective devices; .3 Project data; .4 Technical description of components; .5 Parts lists with names and addresses of suppliers.
.1
Section 26 33 53 Page 6 2011-06-11
Crating: .1 Adequately enclosed and protected from weather and shipping damage by use of minimum 12 mm plywood with vapour barrier inside. .2 For tractor train or sea shipment use double layer of vapour barrier and 19 mm plywood covering. .3 Subassemblies may be packed separately. .4 Label crates: .1 Shipping address. .2 Weight and dimensions .3 Serial number of unit and brief description of contents. .4 Stencilled with durable paint on at least two sides of each crate. .5 List of contents: .1 In weatherproof envelope stapled on outside of each crate; .2 Copy placed inside each crate.
.1
.2
.3
Divert unused batteries from landfill to local battery recycling facility approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
1.13 WARRANTY
.1
For Work of this Section 26 33 53 - Uninterruptible Power Systems Static, 18 month warranty period after start up prescribed in subsection GC3.13 of General Conditions "C" is extended to [20] years.
1.14 SYSTEM START-UP
.1
Arrange with Departmental Representative: .1 For factory service engineer to supervise start-up of system, checking, adjusting and testing on site; .2 For instruction of personnel on theory, construction, installation, operation and maintenance of system: .1 After installation and during site testing; .2 At factory during shop testing.

.2
Section 26 33 53 Page 7 2011-06-11
Advise on: .1 Expected failure rate of equipment; .2 Type of expected failures; .3 Estimated time between major overhauls based on 20 year equipment life; .4 Estimated cost of major overhaul based on current costs and excluding travelling expenses; .5 Type and cost of test equipment needed for fault isolating and performing preventive maintenance.
1.15 EXTRA MATERIALS
.1
Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. Include: .1 Four sets of each type and size of fuses used; .2 Four sets indicating lamps; .3 Spare parts provided.
.2
1.16 VERIFICATION
.1
Upon completion of installation of the system, a factory-trained manufacturer's representative shall perform a complete inspection of all installed equipment.
The UPS manufacturers representative shall supply on site start-up, commissioning and operator training. Allow for all cost and labour for as many trips as necessary to complete these requirements.
.2
.3
A certificate of verification confirming that the inspection, commissioning and Owner training have been performed shall be submitted.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SYSTEM
.1 The UPS system shall operate in conjunction with the building electrical system to provide power conditioning, back-up and distribution for critical electrical loads. The UPS system shall consist of the following major components: .1 UPS modules. .2 Battery module. .3 Bypass and isolation module
A bypass and isolation system shall be provided to allow .2 the UPS module to be disconnected from the system for service and testing without affecting the operation of the load.

.3
Section 26 33 53 Page 8 2011-06-11
System Parameters .1 Input source voltage: 208V, 3 phase, 4W. .2 Output load voltage: 208V, 3 phase, 4W.
2.2 UPS MODULE
.1
The UPS module shall be a self-contained unit consisting of the following main components: .1 Rectifier / Charger .2 Static Inverter .3 Static Bypass .4 Control and Monitor Panel
.2 The UPS module shall operate as an on-line, fully automatic unit in the following modes: .1 Normal Mode: The output shall be continuously supplied by the input power supply via the rectifier / charger and the static inverter. The rectifier / charger shall simultaneously charge the batteries. .2 Input Power Fail Mode: On failure of the input power source the output shall continue to be supplied by the static inverter with power supplied by the batteries. There shall be no interruption to the output upon failure of the input power source. .3 Recharge Mode: On restoration of the input power source, the rectifier / charger shall simultaneously recharge the batteries and supply power to the output via the inverter, again with no interruption to the output. .4 Bypass Mode: On a UPS module internal failure, overload condition or load fault, the static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the output to the input power source. Return to the normal mode on elimination of the abnormal condition shall also be automatic. It shall be possible to bypass to the input source manually without interruption of power to the output. .3 The UPS module shall be sized to provide a minimum output of 30 KVA and 24 KW.
Section 26 33 53 Page 9 2011-06-11
.4 The UPS module shall meet the following operational and performance specifications: Input Power Factor: >0.95 lag Input Current Total Harmonic Distortion: <10% Output Voltage Regulation: +1% (100% balanced load) Output Voltage Transient Response: +5% 100% load step Output Voltage Total Harmonic Distortion: <5.0% 100% non-linear with a 3:1 crest factor) Output Frequency Regulation: +0.1% Noise Generation: <65 dBA at 1.0M (full load) Overload Capability: 125% rated load for 10 minutes 150% rated load for 10 seconds Efficiency (AC to AC with nominal input voltage and battery fully charged and 100% load): 92% minimum
Mean Time Between Failure (resultant successful emergency transfer to internal bypass): >62,000 hours* Mean Time Between Failure (any module component): >43,000 hours*
Mean Time Between Failure shall be derived in accordance with MIL HDBK 217E guidelines (ground benign conditions at 25C).
.5
The UPS module shall be operational, without derating, in ambient temperatures from 0 to 40C, relative humidity 95% non-condensing and elevation up to 1500M. The UPS module shall meet FCC Rules and Regulations 47, Part 15, Sub-part J for Class A, EMI suppression devices.
.6
.7
The UPS module shall meet IEC 801-2 electrostatic discharge ratings and shall withstand up to 25 KV without damage and with no disturbance or adverse effect to the critical load. The UPS module shall be housed in free-standing, Nema 1 enclosures c/w hinged front access doors and levelling feet. Enclosures shall provide full front access to all internal components and connections. Cable entry shall be through either the top or bottom of the cabinet. The UPS module enclosure shall be designed for fan forced air cooling with inlet air filters. Operation of the cooling system shall be monitored and alarmed by the UPS module controls. The UPS module rectifier / charger shall be a six-pulse, phase-controlled, solid state design to convert the input A.C. power to regulated D.C. for input to the inverter and to charge the batteries.
.8
.9
.10

.11
Section 26 33 53 Page 10 2011-06-11
The UPS module inverter shall be a pulse-width-modulated design utilizing high speed switched IGBTs.
.12
The static bypass switch shall be a solid state device to provide high speed switching of the UPS module output from the inverter to the bypass source. The static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the output to bypass on overload of the inverter, inverter failure or depletion of the battery supply (bypass available). The static switch shall interrupt the output when a fault is detected and the bypass supply is out of acceptable voltage and frequency limits. The switch shall automatically retransfer to the inverter when it is capable of assuming the output load.
The UPS module shall be equipped with a complete, user-friendly control, monitoring and diagnostic system and operator interface to perform the following functions:
.13
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .14
Input power supply monitoring Battery monitoring and management Inverter controls Output synchronization Output monitoring Bypass controls Complete system diagnostics and alarming Input and output electrical metering
The operator interface shall provide complete indication of all system alarms, programming functions and metering via a combination of indicator lights, LCD English language display, digital metering unit and control devices. A communication link shall be provided to allow monitoring and control of the UPS module from a remote site. The UPS module shall contain a battery management system with the following features:
.15
.16
.1 Monitoring and display of battery time available, accurate to +3%. .2 Periodic testing of the batteries on a user defined schedule. Tests shall not consume more than 10% of the available battery run time. .3 The UPS module shall be equipped with a battery temperature sensing unit and automatically reduce the float charge voltage in response to increases in battery temperature. .4 The module shall be provided with monitoring and control circuits to protect the batteries from damage due to excessive discharge. .5 Low battery condition alarming.
Section 26 33 53 Page 11 2011-06-11
.6 Historical recording and trending of up to thirty previous tests and power outage events. .17 System Protection .1 The UPS module shall have built-in protection against: surges, sags and overvoltage from the AC sources, over-voltage and voltage surges from output terminals of parallel sources, and load switching and circuit breaker operation in the distribution system. .2 The UPS module shall be protected against sudden changes in output load and short circuits at the output terminals. .3 The UPS module shall have built-in protection against permanent damage to themselves and the connected load for all predictable types of malfunctions. Fast-acting current limiting devices shall be used to protect against cascading failure of solid-state devices. .4 Internal UPS malfunctions shall cause the module to trip off-line with minimum damage to the module and provide maximum information to maintenance personnel regarding the source of the trip.
2.3 BATTERY MODULE
.1
A separate battery module which shall include the system batteries and a disconnect device housed in a dedicated enclosure, shall be provided.
System batteries shall be long life, valve regulated, high rate discharge lead - calcium type with expected life of 200 complete full load discharge cycles when operated and maintained within specifications. Batteries shall have a 10 year pro rata warranty under full float operation.
.2
.3
The battery cabinet shall be Nema 1 type sized to accommodate the number of battery cells required plus 15% and shall match the UPS module enclosures in appearance and depth. The cabinet shall be complete with spill containment apparatus. The battery module shall include a D.C. rated main circuit breaker to protect the batteries in the module and to provide disconnection of the batteries from the UPS module. The breaker shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts wired to the monitoring circuits of the UPS module and a D.C. shunt trip. The battery module shall be complete with interconnecting wiring of the battery cells with quick disconnect wiring devices.
Each battery module shall be sized to support the full load of 30 KVA (24 KW) for a period of 60 minutes.
.4
.5
.6
Section 26 33 53 Page 12 2011-06-11
2.4 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
.1
Liebert NX Series, Eaton Powerware 9355 Series, or approved equivalent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Locate UPS cubicles, battery rack and battery as indicated. Locate and install remote mode lights and alarm cabinet[s] as indicated. Assemble and interconnect components to provide complete UPS as specified. Connect ac mains to main input terminal. Connect UPS output to load. Render the entire assembly rodent and insect-proof by means of plates, screens and grouting. Start-up UPS and make preliminary tests to ensure satisfactory performance.
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
.6
3.2 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING
.1
The start-up and commissioning of the equipment shall be performed by a factory trained manufacturers service technician, who is experienced in the start-up, testing and servicing of the equipment supplied.
The equipment shall be completely assembled, energized and tested before connecting to the critical load. Once the system has passed the hot test, it shall be connected to the load and re-tested to confirm correct operation within the electrical system.
.2
.3
Start-up and commissioning of the system shall include but not be limited to the following: .1 Visual inspection of all equipment for signs of damage or foreign materials. Ensure that all barriers and warning signs are in place.
Section 26 33 53 Page 13 2011-06-11
.2 Check all power connections for tightness. Check control wiring terminations and plugs for tightness or proper seating. .3 Check the DC buses for possible short circuits. .4 Check all input power supplies for correct voltage and phase rotation. .5 Check all lamp test functions. .6 Verify that all alarms are in a go condition. Inspect battery modules for proper electrolyte .7 levels, proper polarity and any signs of damage. .8 Energize the UPS modules and verify the correct DC voltage, walk-up and AC phase on. .9 Check the DC link holding voltages, AC output voltages and output waveforms. .10 Check the final DC link voltage and inverter AC output and adjust if required. .11 Check for proper synchronization. .12 Check for the voltage difference between the inverter output and the bypass source. .13 With the equipment connected to the load, measure and record the following: Input Power Demand Input Power Factor Input Waveform Harmonics & THD Output Power Demand Output Power Factor Output Waveform Harmonics & THD .14 Simulate utility outages and verify correct operation and proper recharge.
3.3 OWNER ON-SITE TRAINING
.1
Include the Owners maintenance personnel in the start-up and commissioning of the system. After commissioning is complete and the system is connected and operating, and before leaving the site, the manufacturers service technician shall provide a minimum of two hours of Owner instruction. The instruction session shall include but not be limited to the following: .1 Complete review of all system drawings and correlation of the drawings with the physical equipment. .2 Complete review of the operating and maintenance manuals and correlation of the manuals with the physical equipment. .3 Complete review of all system operating parameters, indicators and alarm conditions. .4 Hands-on operation of all system controls including system energization, static bypass and maintenance bypass.
.2
.3
Section 26 33 53 Page 14 2011-06-11
.5 Hands-on instruction of all safety procedures and features relative to operation and maintenance of the equipment. .6 System troubleshooting instruction.
TRANSIENT VOLTAGE SURGE SUPPRESSORS
Section 26 43 13 Page 1 2011-06-11
1.1 SCOPE
.1
These specifications describe pertinent material requirements and installation practices for Low Voltage AC Power Panel Surge Protective Devices (SPD), also known as Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors (TVSS). The contractor shall furnish and install the SPDs equipment having the electrical characteristics, ratings and modifications as specified herein and as shown on the contract drawings.
1.2 APPLICABILITY
.1
SPDs shall be fully applicable for the purpose of protecting all facility AC electrical circuits from the hazardous effects of transient voltages. These transients may be generated externally by lightning induced energies, utility load factor corrections, and substation switching or they can be internally generated due to inductive and/or capacitive load switching.
1.3 SUITABILITY
.1
SPDs shall be suitable for all panelboards and motor control centres as indicated on the electrical floor plans. Products are to be configured for parallel installation - no series designs shall to be considered acceptable. Design products to allow installation as a stand-alone device allowing mounting adjacent to panelboards, MCCs. Installation is to be accomplished by a qualified electrical contractor.
.1
Section 06 10 12: Fire retardant treated plywood backboards. Section 26 05 00 - Common Work Results - Electrical. Section 26 05 28: Grounding - Secondary. Section 26 05 29: Fastenings and Supports. Section 26 05 20: Wire and Box Connectors - 0-1000 V. Section 26 05 21: Wires and Cables (0-1000 V). Section 26 05 34: Conduits, Conduit Fastenings and Conduit Fittings. Section 26 28 14: Fuses - Low Voltage.
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7
.8

.9 .10
Section 26 43 13 Page 2 2011-06-11
Section 26 28 21: Moulded Case Circuit Breakers. Section 26 28 23: Disconnect Switches - Fused and Non-Fused.
1.5 REFERENCES
.1
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE): .1 IEEE C62.41-1991, Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. .2 IEEE C62.45-[2002], Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. .3 IEEE C62.62-2000, Standard Test Specifications for Surge Protective Devices. .4 IEEE 142-2007, Recommended Practice for Grounding of Industrial and Commercial Power Systems - Green Book. .5 IEEE 1100-2005, Recommended Practice for Powering and Grounding Electronic Equipment Emerald Book. Canadian Standards Association (CSA): .1 CSA-C22.1-2009, Canadian Electrical Code, Part I. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc (UL): UL 1449(R2006), Standard for Transient Voltage .1 Surge Suppressors. .2 UL 1283 (Fourth Edition)- 2005, Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA): .1 NEMA LS1 - 1992 (R2000), Low Voltage Surge Protective Devices (1000 volts or less).Withdrawn Other relevant standards: .1 MIL-STD-220B, Method of Insertion-Loss Measurement.
.2
.3
.4
.5
1.6 DEFINITIONS
.1
L-G: measurements from phase to equipment grounding conductor as line terminals of utilization equipment. L-L: measurements from phase to phase in a polyphase system, or from one line to another line in a single phase system. L-N: measurement from phase(s) to neutral for both single and three phase systems. N-G: measurements from neutral to equipment grounding
.2
.3
.4

.5
Section 26 43 13 Page 3 2011-06-11
conductor at line terminal of utilization equipment.
External mounted surge suppressor: Transient Voltage Surge Suppressor (TVSS) mounted outside of the power panel as a separate component.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
.1
Product data: submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and data sheets in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Maintenance data: submit operation and maintenance data, and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00. Test reports: submit cover sheet of Test Report certifying compliance with UL 1449 Second Edition. .1 Submit Test Reports in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Submit copy of Test Report certifying compliance with MIL-STD-220B for sound attenuation. .3 Submit documentation showing equipment testing to ANSI/IEEE C62.41 and IEEE C62.45. SPD submittals shall include, but shall not be limited to, the following information: .1 Data for each suppressor type indicating conductor sizes, conductor types, and connection configuration and lead lengths. .2 Manufacturer's certified test data indicating the ability of the product to meet or exceed requirements of this specification. .3 Drawings, with dimensions, indicating SPD mounting arrangement and lead length configuration, and mounting arrangement of any optional remote diagnostic equipment and assemblies. .4 List and detail all protection systems such as fuses, disconnecting means and protective materials. .5 Indicate SPD wiring, bonding, and grounding connections on wiring diagrams for each system. Include installation details demonstrating mechanical and electrical connections to equipment to be protected.
.3
.4
.1
Qualifications: .1 All SPDs shall be manufactured by a single ISO-9001 registered company normally engaged in the design, development and manufacture of such devices for electrical and electronic system equipment protection.

.2
Section 26 43 13 Page 4 2011-06-11
.3
.4
.5
.6
Manufacturer shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of surge suppression products for the specified categories for minimum of ten (10) years. Manufacturer shall offer repair or replacement service for all materials and components incorporated in the Surge Protective Devices. Technical assistance (no cost to customer) shall be provided by manufacturer through a factory representative or a local distributor and a factory staffed toll-free technical hotline. Manufacturer shall provide a toll-free Customer Service number to facilitate all inquiries regarding product returns, warranty claims, purchasing requirements and payment or credit issues. Equipment certification: "Listed" by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall exhibit the UL Listing Mark for the category "Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors" or TVSS. Provide UL Listing Card under category TVSS to confirm compliance to UL 1449 Second Edition Standard and assigned Suppressed Voltage Ratings
.1
Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. Store materials in dry, secure location and protect from weather.
.2
.3 .4
Protect from moisture and humidity. Store in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Waste management and disposal in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.5
1.10 WARRANTY
.1
For the work of this Section 26 43 13 the 12 month warranty period prescribed in GC3.13 of General Conditions is extended to twenty (20) years. Any SPD device that shows evidence of failure or incorrect operation, during twenty (20) year warranty period, shall be replaced by the manufacturer without question. Repairs to modules are not acceptable, only new and unused materials are to be allowed (Excludes installation labor and site preparations).
Since "Acts of Nature" or similar statements typically
.2
.3
Section 26 43 13 Page 5 2011-06-11
include the threat of lightning to which the SPD shall be exposed, any such clause limiting warranty responsibility in the general conditions of this specification shall not apply to this section. This is, the warranty shall cover the effects of lightning, single phasing, and all other electrical anomalies. The warranty shall cover the entire device, not just various components, such as modules only.
.4
All SPD devices, subassemblies, and components are to be 100% tested and certified by the manufacturer to meet their published performance parameters. A certificate of compliance shall be provided with all goods delivered.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PANELBOARD MOUNTED .1 UNITS

.2
The Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Unit shall be multiple phase type, suitable for connection to panelboards.
Performance features of the unit shall include: .1 Frequency: 60Hz .2 Voltage/Phase: as indicated on drawings. .3 Power Factor: 0.97. Maximum continuous operating voltage (MCOV) .4 shall be greater than 115% of the normal system operating voltage. .5 The surge protection unit shall have directly connected suppression elements between line-neutral, line-ground, and neutral-ground. .6 Total surge current (based upon a 8 x 20 microsecond waveform) that the surge protection device shall be capable of surviving shall not be less than 120 kA per phase, or 60 kA per mode on L-G, L-N, and N-G.
Section 26 43 13 Page 6 2011-06-11
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
.14 .15
The manufacturer must provide certified UL 1449 surge voltage rating on all protected modes. The maximum UL 1449 surge voltage rating for the device must not exceed the following: Mode 120/208V Y 347/600V Y L-N; L-G; N-G 400V 1200V L-L 800V 2000V The let-through voltage based upon IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category C3 surges (20 KV, 10 KA) shall be less than the following: Mode 120/208V Y 347/600V Y L-N 520V 1300V The let-through voltage based upon IEEE C62.41 and C62.45 recommended procedures for Category B3 ringwave (6 kV, 500 amps) shall be less than: Mode 120/208V Y 347/600V Y L-N 480V 300V Surge current shall be equally distributed to all MOV components to ensure equal stressing. The surge suppression platform must be rated to 200 kA per phase and provide equal impedance paths to each matched MOV. Each unit shall include a EMI/RFI noise rejection filter to provide noise attenuation for electric line noise exceeding 44 dB at 100 kHz (using MIL-STD-220A insertion loss test method). Filter bandwidth of 100 kHz to 100 MHz. Each surge suppression unit shall be complete with 200 kA interrupting capacity surge rated fuses. Integral diagnostics shall monitor: fusing system individual MOVs (including neutral to ground) using internal infrared sensors overheating in all modes using a thermal detection circuit Unit to be complete with self diagnostics, and neon indicating light per phase (to indicate failure of individual phase protection). The unit shall include both capacitive filtering and voltage dependant metal oxide varistors. The unit shall be concealed behind the hinged lockable door for the panel.
.3
Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Unit shall be Cutler-Hammer Clipper, Siemens Sentron TPS, General Electric Industrial Systems TME, Schneider Electric Ltd. IMA, or approved equivalent.
Section 26 43 13 Page 7 2011-06-11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install Transient Surge Suppression Unit according to manufacturers recommendations.
.2
TVSS shall be factory mounted integral with the panelboard.

A direct bus bar connection shall be used to mount the TVSS component to the panelboard bus bar.
.3
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 1 2011-06-11
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI C82.1-2004, American National Standard for Lamp Ballasts - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts. .2 ANSI C82.4-2002, American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium (LPS). American National Standards Institute/Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers ( ANSI/IEEE) .1 ANSI/IEEE C62.41-[1991], Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage AC Power Circuits. ASTM International Inc. .1 ASTM F1137-[00(2006)], Standard Specification for Phosphate/Oil and Phosphate/Organic Corrosion Protective Coatings for Fasteners. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) ICES-005-[07], Radio Frequency Lighting Devices. Underwriters' Laboratories of Canada (ULC)
.2
.3
.4 .5 .6
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Provide complete photometric data prepared by independent testing laboratory for luminaires where specified, for review by Departmental Representative Quality assurance submittals: provide following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Manufacturer's instructions: provide manufacturer's written installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
.2
.3
.1
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 2 2011-06-11
Provide mock-ups in accordance with Section 01 45 00.
.1
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse accordance with Section 01 74 20. in
.3
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
.5
Disposal and recycling of fluorescent lamps as per local regulations.
1.5 SPARE LAMPS AND BALLASTS
.1
.2
Provide spare lamps as follows: .1 5% of each lamp type. Provide spare ballasts as follows: .1 Two (2) spare ballasts for each type and wattage of fluorescent ballast.
1.6 GUARANTEE
.1
Replace: .1 Incandescent and tungsten halogen lamps burning out within 3 months of Substantial Performance of Work. .2 Fluorescent and HID lamps burning out within 6 months of takeover. .3 Ballasts that fail or exceed their original noise level rating within 12 months of Substantial Performance of Work.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 LAMPS
.1 .2 Provide lamps as indicated on the luminaire schedule. A type Incandescent lamps shall be rated at 130 Volts, 2500 hour life, 1380 initial lumens (100W), extended service, inside frosted. Fluorescent lamps to be - T8, 32 Watt, medium bi-pin, rapid-start, 3500 K, 20,000 hour lamp life, 2950
.3

.4
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 3 2011-06-11
initial lumens, CRI 80; or as indicated.

Metal halide lamps shall be rated at 3500oK correlated colour temperature, 70 colour rendering index (CRI). 175W 14,000 initial lumens, 10,000 hour life 250W 18,000 initial lumens, 10,000 hour life 400W 36,000 initial lumens, 20,000 hour life.
.5
High pressure sodium lamps shall be rated at 2100K correlated colour temperature, coated lamp. 35W 2,150 initial lumens, 16,000 hour life 50W 3,800 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 70W 6,000 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 100W 8,800 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 150W 15,000 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 250W 27,500 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life 400W 47,500 initial lumens, 24,000 hour life Compact fluorescent lamps shall be T-4 amalgam bulb type rated at 10,000 hour life, 3000K correlated colour temperature, 82 colour rendering index (CRI). 18 W 1200 initial lumens 26 W 1800 initial lumens 32 W 2400 initial lumens 42 W 3200 initial lumens
.6
2.2 BALLASTS
.1 Fluorescent Ballasts (T8) Voltage rating shall be as indicated in luminaire .1 schedule with a range of plus or minus 10% of nominal. .2 Fluorescent ballasts shall be high frequency, electronic rapid start type, operating lamps at a frequency of 21 kHz or higher. .3 Ballasts shall meet all applicable ANSI and IEEE standards regarding harmonic distortion, and as a minimum, input current THD content shall be less than 10%. .4 Ballasts shall not be affected by lamp failure, and shall yield normal lamp life. .5 Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.6. .6 Power factor shall be minimum 99%. .7 Ballast shall carry a minimum five year warranty. .8 Input line amps shall be less than 0.53 for two F32T8 lamps (120 Volt). .9 Maximum total ballast watts (2-F32T8 lamps) shall not exceed 63 input watts. .10 Sound level rating shall be Class A. .11 EMI/RFI emissions shall meet FCC CFR 47 Part 18 Subpart C Class A. .12 Line transient / auto surge protection compliance with ANSI 62.41. .13 Ballast factor: minimum 0.875. .14 Ballasts for T8 lamps shall be Motorola #M2-RN-T8-ILL-120; Advance #RCN-2S32-SC or approved equal.

.2
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 4 2011-06-11
Fluorescent Dimming Ballast (T8) .1 Dimming range of electronic dimming ballast shall be from 100% to 1% with continuous, smooth, and flicker free light level output over the entire dimming range. .2 Dimming ballasts shall be high frequency, electronic rapid start, operating lamps at a frequency of 25 kHz or higher. .3 Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.6. .4 Power factor shall be minimum 95%. .5 Ballast shall carry a three year warranty. Input line amps shall be .57 for two F32T8 lamps .6 (120 volt). .7 Maximum total ballast watts (2-F32T8 lamps) shall not exceed 67 watts. .8 Sound level rating shall be Class A. .9 Line transient / auto surge protection compliance with ANSI C62.41. .10 Ballast factor: minimum .93. .11 Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10%. .12 Ballast shall internally limit inrush current to not exceed seven amps at 120 volts. .13 Ballast shall preheat lamp cathodes to ensure rated lamp life is not diminished. .14 EMI/RFI emissions shall meet FCC CFR 47 Part 18 Subpart C Class A. .15 Ballast shall be Lutron Hi-Lume FDB series or approved equal. Fluorescent Ballast (Compact Fluorescent Lamps) .1 Electronic ballasts shall be high frequency, electronic rapid start, operating lamps at a frequency of 25 kHz or higher. .2 Lamp current crest factor shall not exceed 1.5. .3 Power factor shall be minimum 99%. .4 Ballast shall carry a five year warranty. .5 Input line amps shall be .44 for one 42 watt compact fluorescent lamp (120 volt). .6 Maximum total ballast watts shall not exceed 44 watts (1-42 watt TT compact fluorescent lamp). .7 Sound level rating shall be Class A. .8 Line transient / auto surge protection compliance with ANSI C62.41. .9 Ballast factor: minimum 1.0. .10 Total harmonic distortion shall be less than 10%. .11 EMI/RFI emissions shall meet FCC CFR 47 Part 18 Subpart C Class A. .12 Ballast shall be Motorola #MI-CF-42-S-120 (for 42W lamp) or approved equal. Metal Halide Ballasts Voltage rating shall be as indicated in luminaire .1 schedule with a range of plus or minus 10% of nominal. .2 Ballast shall be totally encased and designed for operation in 40oC ambient temperature.
.3
.4
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 5 2011-06-11
.3 .4 .5
Power factor shall be minimum 95% with 95% of rated lamp lumens. Capacitor shall be non PCB. Minimum starting temperature of minimum 29oC at 90% line voltage.
.5
High Pressure Sodium Ballasts .1 Voltage rating shall be as indicated in luminaire schedule with a range of plus or minus 10% of nominal. .2 Ballast shall be totally encased and designed for operation in 40oC ambient temperature. .3 Power factor shall be minimum 95% with 95% of rated lamp lumens. .4 Capacitor shall be non-PCB. .5 Minimum starting temperature of minus 34oC at 90% line voltage.
2.3 FINISHES
.1
Light fixture finish and construction to meet ULC listing[s] and CSA certification[s] related to intended installation.
2.4 OPTICAL CONTROL DEVICES
.1
As indicated in luminaire schedule.
2.5 LUMINAIRES
.1
As indicated in luminaire schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Locate luminaires as indicated.

Provide plaster frame and trim as required, and turn over to trade providing ceiling installation.
.3 .4
Support luminaires directly from building structure.

Provide low temperature rated ballasts for exterior installations.
LIGHTING
Section 26 50 00 Page 6 2011-06-11
.5
Install recessed fluorescent luminaires so that they can be completely removable from below the finished ceiling.
.6
Recessed downlights installed in t-bar ceilings shall be secured to blocking spanning between ceiling grid members. Secure recessed downlight to blocking to ensure that luminaire does not move when trim is adjusted, or removed for re-lamping.
Recessed lighting luminaires in inaccessible ceilings shall be secured to blocking attached to building structure. Where no finished ceiling exists, luminaires shall be suspended on rigid conduit hangers complete with ball aligner, and outlet box canopy. All suspension components shall be degreased and painted white, unless otherwise noted.
.7
.8
.9
Replace ballasts, which in the opinion of The Departmental Representative, are found to exhibit excessive noise.
Coordinate installation of luminaires with Divisions 21 & 23 to avoid conflicts between luminaires, and mechanical system components. A maximum of two fluorescent luminaires recessed in t-bar shall be energized from one junction box mounted on the underside of the structural ceiling. A separate armoured cable drop shall be provided for each luminaire. Length of drop shall be adequate to allow relocation of luminaire one metre from its specified location. Luminaires in inmate cells, range corridors, shower stalls and all maximum security areas shall be solidly attached to the building structure with concrete anchors and tamper-proof hardware to prevent luminaires from being knocked or pried off by the inmates. Seal all around the luminaire body with epoxy caulking to prevent concealment of contraband behind the luminaire.
.10
.11
.12
3.2 WIRING
.1
Connect luminaires to lighting circuits: .1 Install flexible or rigid conduit for luminaires as indicated.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit LIGHTING Section 26 50 00 Millhaven Institution Page 7 Project No. R45116.001 2011-06-11 .1 For suspended ceiling installations support luminaires 3.3 LUMINAIRE independently of ceiling. SUPPORTS
3.4 LUMINAIRE ALIGNMENT
.1
Align luminaires mounted in continuous rows to form straight uninterrupted line.
.2
Align luminaires mounted individually parallel or perpendicular to building grid lines.
3.5 CLEANING
.1
.2
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
Section 26 50 01 Page 1 2011-06-11
AA
1220mm LONG, TWO LAMP SURFACE CORNER MOUNT FLUORESCENT, ULTRA SECURITY FIXTURE WITH SEPARATELY CONTROLLED 13W FLUORESCENT NIGHT LIGHT, 12ga. ONE-PIECE CLAMSHELL HOUSING, TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS, CONTINUOUS PIANO HINGE, ELECTRONIC BALLASTS (26 50 00). LENSES AS INDICATED IN Section 26 50 00. LENS PORTION TO HINGE ONLY TO ALLOW FOR A CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SECURITY SEALANT BETWEEN HOUSING AND WALL/CEILING. FAILSAFE #FMC-S-232-120-040 OPAL/88-EB81-FNL(PL5) C/W 2-F32 T8/830 LAMPS AND 1-5W TWIN TUBE 4-PIN CF LAMP, 120V. 340x1220mm TWO LAMP SURFACE MOUNT FLUORESCENT ULTRA SECURITY FIXTURE WITH 12ga. ONE-PIECE HOUSING, CONTINUOUS PIANO HINGE, TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST (26 50 00). LENSES AS INDICATED IN Section 26 50 00. KENALL #SCT-2-9/9-232-PB-1-120V-1/J-1 CD LIGHTING #DSC-14-T-2-32-120-EBH-50FP/0 FAILSAFE #FAS-232-120-040 OPAL/88-EB81 MORLITE #SXX-DPH-3030-232-5/B-F2-120V C/W 2-F32 T8/830 LAMPS, 120V. TO MATCH TYPE BB WITH THE ADDITION OF AN 800 LUMEN LED STRIP NIGHT LIGHT. LED TO BE HIGH OUTPUT WARM WHITE. POWER SUPPLY FOR LED STRIP TO BE CONCEALED IN JUNCTION BOX FOR UPS CIRCUIT. 305x1220mm TWO LAMP RECESSED FLUORESCENT SUITABLE FOR T-BAR CEILING, HINGED WHITE DOOR FRAME WITH MITRED CORNERS AND SPRING LOADED LATCHES, 3.2mm THICK K12 LENS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST (Section 26 50 00) AND POST-PAINTED FINISH. LITHONIA #GT232-A12-125 METALUX #GP-232A125-PAF CFI #AAS1GFSVB232-PP C/W 2-F32T8/835 LAMPS, 120V. 305x1219mm TWO LAMP RECESSED FLUORESCENT SUITABLE FOR T-BAR CEILING, C/W ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLAST (Section 26 50 00), HINGED PARABOLIC 24 CELL 50mm DEEP LOUVRE, CONSTRUCTED OF LOW IRIDESCENT SPECULAR ALUMINUM, AND SHALL MEET IES RP-1 RECOMMENDED CRITERIA. METALUX #HR-P2GX-232S213I-120V-EB81 LITHONIA #PM3 G B 2 32 24LD 120 GEB10RS CFI #VRA1G24LS232120 C/W 2-F32T8/835 LAMPS, 120V. 1220 MM SINGLE LAMP UNDER CABINET FLUORESCENT FIXTURE WITH WHITE SNAP ON LENS. ELECTRONIC BALLAST (Section 26 50 00) AND WHITE HOUSING. COLUMBIA #UC 7091 LITHONIA 2UC-1-32-120-HPF C/W 1-F32T8/835 LAMP. METALUX #CL132-120-EB81
BB
BA
CC
DD
EE
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
Section 26 50 01 Page 2 2011-06-11
F4
TWO LAMP SURFACE MOUNTED FLUORESCENT WITH BRUSHED DIE-CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING AND PRISMATIC LENS UP/DOWN AND BLACK TRIM STRIP. METALUX #BAU-232-120 ALKCO HORIZON #HZ4T8-11-WH KENALL #MPW-4-11-32-120 C/W 2-T8/835 LAMPS, 120V. SUFFIX INDICATES NOMINAL IMPERIAL LENGTH (IE F4 IS 4 FT LONG). 305x1220mm TWO LAMP SURFACE FLUORESCENT C/W HINGED FRAMED 3.2mm THICK K12 LENS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST (26 50 00) AND POST PAINTED FINISH. PEERLESS #LX-14-232-.125-HL-PP C&M #SAG-1924-4 CFI #SLB ISFSVB240 120S0W METALUX #MC-232A125 LITHONIA #M 232 A12125 C/W 2-F32T8/835 LAMPS, 120V. 1220mm TWO LAMP FLUORESCENT INDUSTRIAL LUMINAIRE WITH SLOTTED REFLECTOR AND ELECTRONIC BALLAST (26 50 00). CFI #FF248 LITHONIA #LA-232 METALUX #EIM-232 C/W 2-F32T8/835 LAMPS, 120V. 2440mm FOUR LAMP TANDEM FLUORESCENT INDUSTRIAL LUMINAIRE WITH SLOTTED REFLECTOR AND ELECTRONIC BALLAST (26 50 00). CFI #FF248T LITHONIA #TLA-232 METALUX #8TEIM-232 C/W 4-F32T8/835 LAMPS, 120V. 305x1220mm TWO LAMP SURFACE FLUORESCENT C/W HINGED FRAMED 3.2mm THICK K12 LENS, ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLAST (26 50 00) AND POST PAINTED FINISH. PEERLESS #LX-14-232-.125-HL-PP C&M #SAG-1924-4 CFI #SLB ISFSVB240 120S0W METALUX #MC-232A125 LITHONIA #M 232 A12125 C/W 2-F32T8/835 LAMPS, 120V. 370x1220mm TWO LAMP SURFACE MOUNT FLUORESCENT ULTRA SECURITY FIXTURE C/W 12ga. ONE-PIECE HOUSING, TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST (26 50 00). LENSES AS INDICATED IN 26 50 00. LENS PORTION TO HINGE ONLY TO ALLOW FOR A CONTINUOUS BEAD OF SECURITY SEALANT BETWEEN HOUSING AND CEILING. LUMINAIRE TO BE CERTIFIED FOR WET LOCATIONS. FAILSAFE #FMS-S-12-232-120-80/85-EB81 CD LIGHTING #DSA-14-T-2-32-120-EBH-50FP/0 MORLITE #SHXX-14-232-5/B -F2-120-WL C/W 2-F32 T8/830 LAMPS, 120V. 370x1220mm TWO LAMP RECESSED FLUORESCENT ULTRA SECURITY FIXTURE SUITABLE FOR SECURE DRYWALL CEILING C/W 12ga. HOUSING AND ONE-PIECE
GG
H4
H8
JJ
KK
LL
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
Section 26 50 01 Page 3 2011-06-11
CRS OVERLAPPING DOOR FRAME WITH CONCEALED PIANO HINGE, TAMPER RESISTANT FASTENERS, ELECTRONIC BALLAST (26 50 00). LENSES AS INDICATED IN 16505. CD LIGHTING #DFA-14-T-2-32-120-EBH-50FP/0-PF KENALL #RCA-2-9/9-2-32-PB-1-120-1/J-1-PF FAILSAFE #FMR-S12-232-120-80/85-EB81 MORLITE #FXX-DPH-14-232-5/B-F2-120 C/W 2-F32 T8/830 LAMPS, 120V. A COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRE WITH CORROSION RESISTANT POLYCARBONATE THERMOPLASTIC HOUSING, GUARD, GLASS GLOBE AND ELECTRONIC BALLAST (26 50 00). CANPLAS #6801FCF26H1GGS NRL #IPEV-26F-1-PC-GP-C C/W 1-26W TRIPLE TUBE AMALGAM LAMP, 120V. NOT USED. 42W COMPACT FLUORESCENT VERTICAL LAMP OPEN DOWNLIGHT COMPLETE WITH 187mm APERTURE, SPECULAR CLEAR ALZAK IRIDESCENT FREE REFLECTOR, WHITE TRIM RING, ALUMINUM DIE CAST HOUSING LAMP AND DIE CAST ALUMINUM OR 16 GAUGE STEEL MOUNTING FRAME, ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLAST (26 50 00). LIGHTOLIER #8022CCL /7142 HALO #C7042-7400LI LITHONIA #AFV/42TRT-6AR-TRW C/W 1-42W TRIPLE TUBE AMALGAM LAMP (3200 LAMP LUMENS), 120V. 1000W METAL HALIDE FLOODLIGHT WITH DIE-CAST ALUMINUM SLIPFITTER AND HOUSING, TEMPERED GLASS LENS, HYDRO-FORMED REFLECTOR AND CLOSED CELL GASKETTING. MCGRAW-EDISON #AMF-F-1000-MH-120-12-BK LITHONIA #TFA-1000M RE 120 DBL FTS C/W 1-1000W MH LAMP, 347V. 400W METAL HALIDE FLOODLIGHT WITH DIE-CAST ALUMINUM SLIPFITTER AND HOUSING, TEMPERED GLASS LENS, HYDRO-FORMED REFLECTOR AND CLOSED CELL GASKETTING. MCGRAW-EDISON #AMF-F-400-MH-120-12-BK LITHONIA #TFA-400M RM 120 DBL FTS C/W 1-400W MH LAMP, 347V. TO MATCH TYPE 2 WITH THE ADDITION OF A 150W QUARTZ HALOGEN AUTOMATIC RESTRIKE LAMP.
B C
2A
LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
Section 26 50 01 Page 4 2011-06-11
70W METAL HALIDE WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE C/W DIE-CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING AND FRAME, TEMPERED GLASS LENS IN GASKETTED HINGED DOOR, FULL CUT-OFF REFLECTOR, WHITE POLYESTER POWDER FINISH. KEENE #FP-M-070-MA-L-1-W LITHONIA #ASW1 70M SR4SC 120 CSA LPI DWHG LSI #CHWSFT-70MH-F-TT-WHT C/W 1-70W MH LAMP, 120V. 70W METAL HALIDE SQUARE RECESSED DOWNLIGHT WITH TEMPERED PRISMATIC LENS IN STEPPED REGRESSED BAFFLE AND SPECULAR ALZAK REFLECTOR. PRESCOLITE #1016M5-70MHFE-M8 LITHONIA #LAH 70M 12SB FFL 120 LIGHTOLIER #SD12D70HVWH HALO #M5323T-730/11302P C/W 1-70W COATED MH LAMP, 120V. 250W METAL HALIDE WALL MOUNTED LUMINAIRE C/W DIE-CAST ALUMINUM HOUSING AND FRAME, TEMPERED GLASS LENS IN GASKETTED HINGED DOOR, FULL CUT-OFF REFLECTOR, WHITE POLYESTER POWDER FINISH. KEENE #FP-L-250-MA-L-1-W LITHONIA #ASW2 250M SR4SC 120 CSA LPI DWHG LSI #CHWMFT-250MH-F-TT-WHT C/W 1-250W MH LAMP, 120V. END OF SECTION
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 ACTION AND INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS
.1
EXIT LIGHTING
Section 26 53 00 Page 1 2011-06-11
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Product Data: .1 Provide manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet and include product characteristics, performance criteria, physical size, finish and limitations. .2 Provide complete photometric data prepared by independent testing laboratory for luminaires where specified, for review by Departmental Representative Quality assurance submittals: provide following in accordance with Section 01 45 00. .1 Manufacturer's instructions: provide manufacturer's written installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence, and cleaning procedures.
.2
.3
.1
.2
Deliver materials to site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's name, address. Packaging Waste Management: remove for reuse accordance with Section 01 74 20. in
.3
.4
Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility.
.5
Disposal and recycling of fluorescent lamps as per local regulations.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
.1
Exit lights shall meet the requirements of CSA C860, and CSA C22.2 No. 141. Letters shall be 150 mm high x 19 mm wide red in colour, and read "EXIT-SORTIE". The faceplate shall remain captive while relamping. Exit light shall be suitable for wall, end, or ceiling mounting as indicated on drawings and confirmed on site.
.2
.3

.4
EXIT LIGHTING
Section 26 53 00 Page 2 2011-06-11
The exit light shall be illuminated with high brightness LEDs enclosed in an acrylic module which shall evenly distribute light on the lettering. The module containing the LEDs shall be capable of illuminating both single and double face exit signs. Illuminance characteristics shall meet the requirements of CSA-C860.
.5
LEDs shall be connected in parallel (not series) so that failure of an LED shall not cause more than 5 LEDs to be extinguished.
.6 .7
Exit light input shall be maximum 1.5 watts. LEDs shall operate on 120 volt without the use of any external transformer. Design life for the exit light shall be minimum 25 years.
Housing shall be constructed of 16 gauge steel with a baked white enamel finish.
.8
.9
.10
Faceplate shall be wrap-around design with an integral Lexan shield. Snap-out arrow knockouts shall be included on the faceplate to allow field selection of directional indication.
Blank faceplate for the back of single face exit signs, shall not have any knockouts.
.11
.12
Acceptable Manufacturers: AimLite #EXAL-B6L Series, Beghelli #QUADRA-B6L-C860, Lunacell #LER 400B6L, Emergilite # C8ES70, Ready-lite#CX7000, or approved equivalent.

.1 Install exit lights in plain view as indicated, and in accordance with the latest edition of the National Building Code. Exit lighting shall be connected to a separate AC circuit dedicated to exit lighting only. Circuit to be from an emergency power supply source.
Coordinate installation of exit lights with ceiling or wall construction. If necessary, provide hanger to suspend exit light below visual obstructions.
.2
.3

VOLUME 3 of 3
Bid Set No.
COMMUNICATION CABLES INSIDE BUILDINGS
Section 27 00 00 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International) .1 CSA-T529-95(R2000), Telecommunications Cabling Systems in Commercial Buildings (Adopted ANSI/EIA TIA 568a with modifications). .2 CSA-C22.2 No. 214-02, Communications Cables (Bi-national Standard, with UL 444). .3 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4-M90(R2001), Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors for Communication Systems.
.2
Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) .1 TIA/EIA-568-2010, Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standards Set.
.1
Structured system of telecommunications cables (copper and optical fibre installed within buildings for distributing voice and data (including video) signals. Installed in physical star configuration with separate horizontal and backbone sub-systems. Horizontal cables link work areas to telecommunications closet located on same floor. Telecommunications closets linked to central equipment room by backbone cables.
.2
.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 STATION WIRE (ZSW)
.1
4-pair, 24 AWG, 100 ohm cable with insulated copper conductor in separate outer jacket: to C22.2 No. 214. FT-6 fire-rated jacket. Voice-grade electrical transmission requirements: to CSA T529 and TIA-EIA-568. Date-grade electrical transmission requirements to: CSA T529 and TIA-EIA-568.
.2
.3
Section 27 00 00 Page 2 2011-06-11
2.2 COMMUNICATIONS FLAT CABLE (CFC)
.1
4 pair 24 AWG insulated copper conductors in separate flat outer jacket.
2.3 COMMUNICATIONS BUILDING CABLE (CBC)
.1
25 pair 22 AWG insulated copper conductors grouped in 25-pair separately identified modules surrounded by metallic tape shield and covered with thermoplastic jacket: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 214 and CSA T529. FT-4 fire-rated jacket. Voice-grade electrical performance to: CSA-T529.
.2
2.4 PREMISES COMMUNICATION CABLE (PCC)
.1
4 pair 24 AWG 100 ohm impedance insulated copper conductors grouped in 2-pair separately identified modules without metallic shield and surrounded with jacket: to CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 214. FT-4 fire-rated jacket. Electrical/transmission performance to: CSA-T529.
.2
2.5 COAXIAL CABLE (CXC)
.1
One coaxial member, 75 ohm impedance with metallic centre conductor surrounded by dielectric material and metal outer conductors separated by dielectric material and surrounded by jacket: to CAN/CSA C22.2 No. 214. FT-4 fire-rated jacket. For data communications, 24 AWG, 100 ohm impedance. Electrical transmission performance: to CSA-T529. For cable television, 75 ohm impedance. Centre conductor No. #18 AWG solid bare copper; insulation of solid polyethylene ; shield of aluminum foil plus braid; shield coverage 97%. Loss at 500 MHz not to exceed 3.5dB per 30 m.
For 50 ohm coaxial cable systems, type BNC connector for service outlet to: CSA-T529.
.2
.3
.4
2.6 OPTICAL FIBRE CABLE (OFC)
.1
Six (6) strands loose buffer tube 50/125 micrometre multi-mode graded index fibre: to CSA-T529.
Section 27 00 00 Page 3 2011-06-11
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLES
.1
Install UTP horizontal cables, as indicated in conduits space from termination in telecommunications closet to outlets. Install UTP cables, as indicated in telecommunications closet. Terminate 2 UTP cables per work station terminated in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4 and CSA-T529. Terminate STP cable in accordance with CSA-T529.
Install CFC cables under carpet from wall termination points.
.2
.3
.4 .5
.1 One service outlet terminated in accordance with CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4 and CSA-T529. .2 Wall termination unit interconnecting UTP to CFC wiring transition. .6 For distribution of television signals, terminate CXC cable on type F connectors. For distribution of data signals, terminate CXC cable in accordance with CSA-T529. Terminate OFC cables with LC connectors.
.7
3.2 INSTALLATION OF BACKBONE CABLES
.1
Install OFC cable, as indicated in conduit from termination in each telecommunications closet to equipment room. Termination: to CSA-T529. Terminate UTP Category 6 cables in accordance with CSA-T529 on Category 6 patch panel.
For distribution of television signals, terminate CXC cable on type F connectors. Terminate OFC cables on patch panel with LC connectors.
.2
.3 .4
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00. Test UTP cable installations for: .1 Continuity: including open/short, polarity, and pair transpositions.

.2 .3 .4 .5
Section 27 00 00 Page 4 2011-06-11
.6
.7
DC loop resistance. Length using OTDR. Noise Attenuation at 500 MHz. Test optical fibre cables for: .1 End-to-end loss at 850 nm. .2 OTDR tests. Test coaxial cables for: .1 Continuity. .2 Attenuation at 500 MHz. Test UTP cables for: .1 Continuity. .2 Attenuation at 250 MHz.
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 26 Page 1 2011-06-11
.1
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American National Standards Institute (ANSI) .1 ANSI J-STD-607-a-2002,
.1
Telecommunications raceways system consists of outlet boxes, cover plates, terminal distribution racks and cabinets, conduits, cabletroughs, pull boxes, sleeves and caps, fish wires, service poles, service fittings, concrete encased ducts.
.2
Cabletrough distribution system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
.1
Conduits: EMT type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34.

Underground cable ducts:, in accordance with Section 33 65 76.
.2
.3 .4
Cabletroughs:, in accordance with Section 26 05 36. Junction boxes, cabinets type T: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Outlet boxes, conduit boxes size, and fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Fish wire: polypropylene type.
.5
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, including overhead distribution system, fish wire, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes, cover plates,
GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 26 Page 2 2011-06-11
conduit, sleeves and caps, cabletroughs, service poles, miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute complete system.
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 28 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Empty telecommunications raceways system consists of outlet boxes, cover plates, terminal distribution cabinets, conduits, cabletroughs, pull boxes, sleeves and caps, fish wires, service poles, service fittings, concrete encased ducts.
.2
Cabletrough distribution system.
.1
.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused conduit and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
.1
Conduits: EMT type, in accordance with Section 26 05 34. Underground cable ducts:, in accordance with Section 33 65 76. Cabletroughs:, in accordance with Section 26 05 36. Junction boxes, cabinets type: in accordance with Section 26 05 31. Outlet boxes, conduit boxes size, and fittings: in accordance with Section 26 05 31.
.2
.3 .4
.8

.9
PATHWAYS FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 05 28 Page 2 2011-06-11
Fish wire: polypropylene type.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install empty raceway system, including overhead distribution system, fish wire, terminal cabinets, outlet boxes, floor boxes, pull boxes, cover plates, conduit, sleeves and caps, cabletroughs, miscellaneous and positioning material to constitute complete system.
STRUCTURED CABLING FOR COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS
Section 27 10 05 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA-C22.2 No. 214-02, Communications Cables (Bi-National standard with UL 444). .2 CSA-C22.2 No. 232-M1988(R2004), Optical Fiber Cables. Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA)/Electronic Industries Alliance (EIA) .1 TIA/EIA-568-B.1-(2001), Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 1: General Requirements. .2 TIA/EIA-568-B.2-(2001), Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, Part 2: Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling Components. .3 TIA/EIA-568-B.3-(2000), Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard. .4 TIA/EIA-606-A-(2002), Administration Standard for the Commercial Telecommunications Infrastructure. .5 TIA TSB-140-2004, Telecommunications Systems Bulletin - Additional Guidelines for Field-Testing Length, Loss and Polarity of Optical Fiber Cabling Systems. .6 TIA-598-C-(2005), Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding.
.2
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1
Refer to TIA/EIA-598-C, Annex A for definitions of terms: optical-fiber interconnect, distribution, and breakout cables.
.1
Structured telecommunications wiring system consist of unshielded-twisted-pair and optical fiber cables, terminations, connectors, cross-connection hardware and related equipment installed inside building for occupant's telecommunications systems, including voice (telephone), data, and image. Installed in physical star configuration with separate horizontal and backbone sub-systems. .1 Horizontal cables link work areas to telecommunications room located on same floor. .2 Telecommunications rooms linked to main terminal/equipment room (MT/ER) by backbone cables. .3 MT/ER also linked to Entrance Room by backbone cables.
.2
Section 27 10 05 Page 2 2011-06-11
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1
Provide submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00. As-built Records and Drawings: .1 Provide database reflecting cable installation and cross-connections. .2 Provide electronic drawings in AutoCAD 2008 format depicting all construction. .3 Provide two (2) bound complete hard-copy sets of as-built records to the Departmental Representative. .1 Provide and place one hard copy of as-built records for each telecommunications room in plan holder in each telecommunications room.
.2
.1
Health and Safety Requirements: do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.1
Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FOUR-PAIR 100 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR CABLE
.1
Four-pair, 100 ohm balanced unshielded-twisted-pair (UTP) cable, flame test classification FT4 to: CSA-C22.2 No. 214, Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.2 MULTI-PAIR 100 BALANCED TWISTED PAIR CABLE
.1
100 ohm, 200 pairs, sheath consists of thermoplastic jacket without underlying metallic shield, Category 3 to: TIA/EIA-568, flame test classification FT4 or MPG or CMG to: CSA-C22.2 No. 214.
2.3 WORK AREA UTP 2-PAIR.4 MODULAR JACK
.1
Eight-position modular jack "RJ-45", type T568A Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568- B.2: .1 In self-contained surface-mount box, 3 jacks per box. .2 Mounted in compatible single gang faceplate, flush, 3 jack positions per faceplate.

.2
Section 27 10 05 Page 3 2011-06-11
Multi-user telecommunications outlet assembly MUTOA, 12 ports, each port equipped with factory installed "RJ-45" jacks, type T568A Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.5 TERMINATION AND CROSS-CONNECTION HARDWARE FOR UTP
.1
IDC Terminal strips, 25 pair, for terminating multi pair 100 balanced twisted pair cables and supporting cross-connections using jumper wires or compatible plug-ended patch cords: Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Mount or block for housing 10 IDC terminal strips, mounted on wall. .1 Distribution rings or channels capable of externally mating with the above mount for managing cross-connection wires. Patch panel, 1 rack units high, 24 ports: .1 Each port equipped with field installed "RJ-45" jacks, type T568A Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. .2 Horizontal cable-management unit for every 48 ports. Consolidation point, terminates 12 UTP horizontal cables from telecommunications room on IDC terminations. Cables extending to work areas terminate on RJ-45 jacks type T568A Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
.2
.3
.4
2.6 UTP CROSS-CONNECT WIRE
.1
Category 3 one pair to: TIA/EIA-568.
2.7 UTP PATCH CORDS
.1
2.1 metres long, with factory-installed male plug at one end to mate with "RJ-45" jack and with factory-installed male plug at other end to mate with "RJ-45" jack Category 6, 4 pairs to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
2.8 UTP EQUIPMENT CABLE
.1
4 pair "pigtail",5 metres long, with factory-installed male plug on one end to mate with "RJ-45" jack and other end equipped with factory-installed male plug to mate with no connector: Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2.
Section 27 10 05 Page 4 2011-06-11
2.9 UTP WORK AREA CORDS
.1
3 metres long, each end equipped with "RJ-45" plug Category 6 to: TIA/EIA-568-B2.
2.10 OPTICAL-FIBER CABLE
.1
Distribution without conductive members, multi-mode 50/125, 500 MHz km capacity 6 strands to: CSA-C22.2 No. 232 and TIA/EIA-568, flame test classification FT4 or, each end terminated with duplex LC connectors.
2.11 CONSOLIDATION POINT FOR OPTICAL FIBER
.1
Consolidation point, terminates 12 optical-fiber horizontal cables from telecommunications room on duplex LC compatible adapters.
2.12 OPTICAL-FIBER CONNECTORS AT WORK AREA
.1
Faceplate equipped with duplex LC compatible adapters to: TIA/EIA-568-B.1.
2.13 OPTICAL-FIBER PATCH PANEL
.1
Mounted in rack or cabinet 49cm wide], 1 rack units, without lockable cover, capable of terminating 24 pairs of fiber, equipped with duplex LC compatible adapters.
2.14 OPTICAL-FIBER PATCH CORDS
.1
Interconnect cable, 2 strands, 2.1metres long, each end equipped with duplex LC connectors. Multi-Mode 50/125, 500 MHz km capacity to: TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
2.15 OPTICAL-FIBER WORK AREA CORDS
.1
Interconnect cable, two strands, 3 metres long, each end equipped with Duplex LC connectors. Multi-Mode 50/125, 500 MHz km capacity to: TIA/EIA-568-B.3.
Section 27 10 05 Page 5 2011-06-11
3.1 INSTALLATION OF TERMINATION AND CROSS-CONNECT HARDWARE
.1
Install termination and cross-connect hardware in rack as indicated and according to manufacturers' instructions. Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
Install consolidation points, as indicated according to manufacturer's instructions. Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
.2
3.2 INSTALLATION OF HORIZONTAL DISTRIBUTION CABLES
.1
Install horizontal cables as indicated in conduits cable trays and "J" hooks from telecommunication rooms to consolidation point Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A. Support horizontal cables at intervals not exceeding 1.5 metres. .1 Where raceways are used to distribute cables to each zone, provide supplementary "J" hooks to support cables at intervals not exceeding 1.5 metres.
Install horizontal cables from consolidation point to individual work-area jacks. .1 Provide supplementary "J" hooks to support cables at intervals not exceeding 1.5 metres. .2 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
.2
.3
.4
Terminate horizontal cables in telecommunications room and at consolidation point. .1 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
Coil spare cables and store in ceiling space in zone.
.5 .6
Harness slack cable in cabinets, racks, and wall-mounted termination and cross-connection hardware.
3.3 INSTALLATION OF BACKBONE CABLES
.1
Install backbone cables from each telecommunications room to main terminal/equipment room (MT/ER) as indicated and according to manufacturers' instructions. .1 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.

.2
Section 27 10 05 Page 6 2011-06-11
Install backbone cables from MT/ER to carrier demarcation point in Entrance Room as indicated and according to manufacturer's instructions. .1 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
3.4 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT CABLES
.1
Install equipment cables from equipment patch panel as indicated. .1 Identify and label as indicated to: TIA/EIA-606-A.
3.5 IMPLEMENT CROSS-CONNECTIONS
.1
Implement cross-connections using patch cords as specified.
.1
Test horizontal UTP cables as specified below and correct deficiencies provide record of results as hard copy and electronic record on DVD. .1 Perform tests for Permanent Link on installed cables, including spares: .2 Category 6 using certified level III tester to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. .2 Perform tests for Channel on 20% of cross-connected data horizontal cabling installed from each telecommunications room, including shortest and longest drops from each telecommunications room: should more than 5% of tested cables fail, test remaining cross-connected data cables. .1 Category 6 using certified level III tester to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. Test backbone UTP cables as specified below and correct deficiencies: provide record of results as electronic record on CD or USB drive. .1 Perform tests for Permanent Link on 4-pair cables: .1 Category 6 using certified level III tester to: TIA/EIA-568-B.2. .2 Perform Wire Map tests on multi-pair UTP cables to: TIA/EIA-568-B.1. Test Optical-fiber strands for attenuation to: TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and correct deficiencies: provide record of results as hard copy and electronic record on DVD. .1 Test horizontal links need at only one wavelength
.2
.3
Section 27 10 05 Page 7 2011-06-11
.4
.5
(850 nm or 1300 nm) and in one direction. .1 Attenuation to be less than 2.0 dB, unless consolidation point is used. .2 If consolidation point is used, attenuation test result to be less than 2.75 dB when testing between horizontal cross-connect and telecommunications outlet/connector. .2 Test backbone links in both directions. Backbone links: .1 Test multi-mode fiber at both applicable wavelengths (850 nm and 1300 nm). .2 Test single-mode fiber at both applicable wavelengths (1550 nm and 1310 m). .3 Maximum attenuation: Cable attenuation + Connector loss + Splice loss. .1 Multi-mode-fiber attenuation coefficients: .1 3.5 db/km @ 850 nm; and .2 1.5 db km @ 1300 nm .2 Single-mode fiber attenuation coefficients at both 1310 nm and 1550 nm: .1 1.0 db/km for inside plant cable; and .2 0.5 db/km for outside plant cables. .3 Maximum connector insertion loss: 0.75 db per pair and maximum splice insertion loss: 0.3 db. Perform additional Tier 2 tests using optical time domain reflectometer (OTDR) on backbone fiber pairs to: TSB-140. .1 Correct deficiencies. .2 Provide record of results as described in SUBMITTALS. Provide record of results as hard copy and electronic record on DVD to: TIA/TSB-140.
TERMINALS AND CONNECTORS FOR COMMUNICATIONS CONDUCTORS - ENTRANCE
Section 27 11 20 Page 1 2011-06-11
.1
Materials and installation for telephone drop and underground, coaxial and optical-fibre cable terminals.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.2 No.214-02, Communications Cables (Bi-national standard, with UL 444). .2 CSA T530, Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces (Adopted ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-A).
.1
Entrance facility: to CSA T530 and CSA C22.2 No.214.
1.4 PRODUCT DATA
.1
.1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TELEPHONE DROP CABLE TERMINALS
.1
Individual drop cable terminal block: 2 line terminals, one ground terminal and carbon block 150 micrometres gap lightning protectors with fuse, with housing designed for interior mounting.
.2
Multiple drop cable 200 pairs terminal block: carbon block gap lightning protectors without fuse, with housing designed for interior mounting. Terminal blocks where lightning protection is not required: 12 line terminals, one ground terminal with housing designed for interior mounting.
.3
Section 27 11 20 Page 2 2011-06-11
2.2 UNDERGROUND TELEPHONE CABLE TERMINALS
.1
Buried cable terminal for buried cables: base plate, cylindrical weatherproof housing, approximately 305 x 460mm, terminal strips with binding posts and connectors for 200 pairs. Cable terminals for buried cables at reel ends: basic terminal designed to be driven into ground, weatherproof cover approximately 1015 mm from base to top, 2 pair terminal blocks as required, ground clamps and adhesive "ATTENTION" signs and numerals to identify cable circuits.
.2
2.3 COAXIAL CABLE TERMINAL
.1
Outer connector nut, inside threaded, sliding over body of terminal.
.2
Terminal body, inside threaded, designed to screw on to outer sheath of cable.
2.4 OPTICAL-FIBRE TERMINAL
.1
For large installations, fibre distribution frame consisting of 2.13 m x 0.48 m equipment rack containing routing guides horizontal jumper troughs and .1 LC connector module housings with transparent hinged door, each CMH equipped with LC connectors. .2 4 splice module housing each equipped with 4 splice trays for multi-mode fibre, fusion mechanical splice. For smaller installations, wall mounted self-contained interconnect unit equipped with LC connectors, without splice tray.
.2
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Install drop cable terminals inside in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Connect drop cable conductors to terminals and run ground conductor from ground terminal to building electrical system ground. Install buried cable terminals. Connect conductors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Replace weatherproof housing. Drive Z wire terminals into ground until base is flush with ground surface. Install cable, fasten to ground clamps and connect to terminal blocks in accordance
.2
.3

.4
Section 27 11 20 Page 3 2011-06-11
with manufacturer's instructions. Install coaxial cable terminals in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install optical fibre terminals in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
.5
3.2 INSTALLATION OF TELEPHONE CABLES ENTRANCE
.1
Colour match conductors on terminal strips to telephone authority standard. Use appropriate tool for connecting conductors to terminals.
.2
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Section 27 13 13 Page 1 2011-06-11
1.1 NOT USED
.1
Not used.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FIBER OPTIC CABLES
.1
Optical characteristics:
Type Operating Wavelength Maximum Attenuation at 1310 nm Maximum Attenuation at 1550 nm
12 Stands, 50 micron multimode fiber 850 and 1310 nm 0.4 db/km 0.3 db/km
.2
Cable characteristics:
Maximum Installing Tension 600 lbs Maximum Operating Tension 132 lbs Minimum Installing Bending Radius 16.5 cm Minimum Operating Radius 8.2 cm Maximum Vertical Rise 641 m Operating and Storage Temperature -40C to +80C .3 Terminations: LC connectors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIBER OPTIC CABLE INSTALLATION
.1 .2
Contractor shall test cables before installation. Contractor shall not exceed manufacturer's minimum bend radius of the maximum tensile rating.
Use pull boxes to allow fiber optic cable access for backfeeding at every third 90 degree bend. When pulling long lengths of fiber optic cables in conduit, maintain less than 80% fill ratio by cross section.
.3
.4
Pull cables through conduit, fiber optics innerduct or lay-in tray. In the FEC No. 5, all cables shall be
FIBER OPTIC CABLE
Section 27 13 13 Page 2 2011-06-11
securely fastened in place with cable ties and identified as fiber optic cables. .5
Take care not to damage the fiber or connector during shipping, handling and installation.
.6
Arrange for test equipment to demonstrate that the cables are performing in accordance with these specifications. Perform a continuity test to detect splice fractures or other defects through analysis of backs scattering signal using an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Provide Departmental Representative with written certified results of testing. Splicing to existing F.O. cables and terminations shall be carried out by an approved fiberoptic contractor. No splice is allowed for new F.O. cables. Mark fiber optic cables in maintenance holes and pullpits with yellow PVC tape.
.7
.8 .9
TELEVISION SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 27 41 16 Page 1 2011-06-11
.1 A complete raceway and cabling system shall be furnished to provide a television signal in selected rooms. The distribution system shall consist of a separate coaxial cable for each television outlet, terminated at the system distribution cabinets. A branch distribution cabinet shall be provided for each cell area. .2 The system shall include the supply and installation of outlet boxes, conduit cabinets, and outlet coverplates and the installation of system cables. Cable will be supplied and terminated by the local Cable Television provider.
1.2 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Data to include system components.
.2
.1
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
.1
EMT type 19mm.
2.2 COAXIAL CABLE
.1
Cable will be provided by the local Cable Television provider. Cable types indicated on drawings.
2.3 OUTLET BOXES
.1
Outlet boxes shall be a 100 x 100 mm square outlet box with a square cut single device raised cover. Mount where shown on the plans. Outlet boxes shall be of adequate depth so as not to exceed maximum bending
TELEVISION SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Section 27 41 16 Page 2 2011-06-11
radius of coaxial cable (five times radius).
2.4 WALL OUTLET JACKS
.1
Audio visual outlet jacks will be supplied by the LOCAL Cable Television provider. Coverplates shall be as specified in Section 26 27 26 for maximum security areas.
.2
2.5 TELEVISION DISTRIBUTION CABINETS
.1
The distribution cabinets shall be complete with lockable hinged (piano) doors. The branch cabinets shall be 200 mm (8) deep, 1220 mm (48) high and 610 mm (24) wide.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Provide a 120 volt, 15 amp duplex receptacle in each television distribution equipment cabinet. Identify coaxial cable with room or cell number, at both the outlet, and equipment cabinet ends of cable.
.2
.3
Install a #6 AWG insulated ground conductor from the main building ground grid, to a lug in each equipment cabinet. Coordinate the size of the cabinets with The Departmental Representative and Shaw Cable prior to procurement. Cables will be tested by local Cable Television Provider during the commissioning of the system. Replace any cables shown to be damaged or defective. Perform tests in accordance with Section 26 05 00.
.4
.5
3.2 SITE TESTS
.1

PART 1 GENERAL .1
INTERCOMMUNICATIONS AND PROGRAM SYSTEMS
Section 27 51 23 Page 1 2011-06-10
Section Includes .1 Digital Communications Controllers (DCCs) .2 Digital Communication Expanders (DCEs) .3 Administrator Software for configuring and maintaining system .4 Intercom master stations .5 Intercom stations .6 Auxiliary power supplies .7 Paging amplifiers .8 Loudspeakers and horn loudspeakers CSC Specifications: .1 ES/SOW-0101-Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1) .4 ES/SPEC-0006 Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SPEC-0303 Limited Call Intercom System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .6 ES/SPEC-0500 Inmate Cell Call System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .7 ES/SPEC-0900 Door/Barrier/Gate Control System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .8 ES/STD-0204 Fixed/Zoom Lens Closed Circuit Television (Revision 1) .9 ES/STD-0207 High Security Enclosure Closed Circuit Television (Revision 1) .10 ES/STD-0221 Fixed Network Colour Closed Circuit Television Camera (Revision 0) .11 ES/STD-0222 Indoor Network Colour Dome Camera (with Pan/Tilt/Zoom) Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .12 ES/STD-0227 LCD Colour Computer Monitor Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .13 ES/STD-0228 Network Video User Station Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .14 ES/STD-0229 Network Video Recorder Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .15 ES/STD-0230 NTSC-IP Video Converter Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .16 ES/STD-0231 IP-NTSC Video Converter Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .17 ES/STD-0803 Video Display Unit Electronic Systems (Revision 2) EIA-310-C Electronic Industries Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment.
1.1 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS.1
.2

.3 .4 .5
Section 27 51 23 Page 2 2011-06-10
CSA-C22.1-98 Canadian Electrical Code (CEC) Part 1 UL 2572 Drawings
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23
ATP Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan BSCS Building Security & Communication System CEC Canadian Electrical Code CER Common Equipment Room CSA Canadian Standards Association CSC - Correctional Service of Canada DCS - Door Control System/subsystem EIA - Electronic Industries Association ES - Electronic Systems FAAS - Facility Alarm Annunciation System FAT- Factory Acceptance Test FDR Final design Report GFE Government Furnished Equipment GUI Graphical User Interface I/O - Input/Output KVM - Keyboard/Video/Mouse LAN - Local Area Network LCIS - Limited Call Intercom System LCP - Local Control Post MCCP - Main Communications Control Post MTBF - Mean Time before Failure OFC - Optical Fibre Cable PC - Personal Computer

.24 .25 .26 .27 .28 .29 .30 .31
Section 27 51 23 Page 3 2011-06-10
PDC - Power Distribution Centre PDR - Preliminary Design Report PE - Principal Entrance PLC - Programmable Logic Controller PIU - Perimeter Intrusion Unit PWC - Public Works Canada (PWGSC's predecessor) PWGSC - Public Works & Government Services Canada PTT - Push-to-Talk
.32 RU - Rack Units (1.75" vertical space in an EIA-310C standard equipment rack) .33 .34 .35 .36 .37 SAC - System Administration and Control SCP - Secure Control Post SOW - Statement of Work SPEC Specification STD Standard
.38 T&E - Telecommunications and Electronics .39 .40 .41 TES - Telecommunications Equipment Space UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply VAC Volts, Alternating Current
.42 VDC - Volts, Direct Current
.1
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night
.2
Section 27 51 23 Page 4 2011-06-10
or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements. .3 .4 All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the institutional staff. Contractor Experience .1 The contractor shall provide evidence of five years experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Closed Circuit Television Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities. Due to the complex IP virtual matrix design, contractor to provide evidence of team member IT technology and PC Network competency (MCSE or equal). .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC-0404, including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the project; a full understanding, and capability to fulfil warranty obligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations; and the ab ility to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site. Service Response Capability Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period.
.5 .6
1.4 DESIGN PERFORMANCE .1 REQUIREMENTS

.2
Provide a new Limited Call Intercom Subsystem (LCIS) in accordance with the CSC ES/ ES/SPEC -0303 and as shown on the drawings. Provide a high quality LCIS utilizing state-of-art technology with major brand name from a manufacturer with ISO9001 or better standards. Provide a completed system with high quality voice intelligibility, all necessary components, programming, commissioning, patch cables, and interface devices as required and regardless mention of to provide a complete functioning system. Provide Public Address Paging as follows: .1 Include this building in all call pages from the MCCP.
.3
.4
Section 27 51 23 Page 5 2011-06-10
.2 Individual and group zone paging from the Local Control Post in the building. .3 Individual and group zone paging from the BSCS Room. .4 Ability from each CCTV viewing station position in the Security Gallery to page in to eah of the two c outdoor exercise yards. Provide two (2) button intercom stations with area select able buttons, LED indicators, cancel, and push to talk microphones with 2m spiral cord in wall mounted holster for this function. .5 Integrate the intercom system with the door control system. .6 Provide all required software updates and telephone technica support for no less than five years l from the date of substantial completion. .7 All cables will be installed in raceways supplied by Division 26. Review the scope of work as defined in Division 26 and include any additional raceways that may be required to suit the system being installed. .8 Use Shielded CAT -6 cable with specific colour from the rest of the facilitys colour coding to clearly identify the cable as for use with intercom. .9 Provide third party written test results on a station-by-station basis as part of the base bid. .10 Provide an equ ipment enclosure (rack) to house the central exchange complete with all necessary ventilation fans, power supplies, storage drawers, keyboard/mouse/LCD monitors as required to run the system with rear locking door and front smoked glass locking door. Rack must meet CSC standard for Racks EIA-310-C. .11 Provide all specified spare parts and service manuals for maintenance of the Intercommunications and Program system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model num ber, and unit price.
1.5 WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Consultant's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date of system acceptance by CSC.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.6 PRODUCT DATA .1
Section 27 51 23 Page 6 2011-06-10
Submit product data in acco rdance with CSC Specification ES/SOW-0101 Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 Include riser diagram, talk paths of complete intercom system. softcopy (computer files) documentation at each submittal. .2 Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.1 .3 Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.3 .4 Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fibre optic communications channels. .5 Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 8.2. .6 Operator Manual: Provide generic manual for touch -screen operation, as well as system- specific information summarizing the operator-training course content. .7 Provide data for incorporation into maintenance manual specified in CSC Specification ES/SOW-0101 Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .8 Include description of system operation .9 Include parts list using component identification numbers standard to electronics industry.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
.1 General: Submit two sets hardcopy (paper) plus one set
1.8 WASTE MANAGEMENT .1 Separate and recycle w aste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management AND DISPOSAL
and Disposal. .2 Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. .3 Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard and packaging material in appropriate on-site bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. .4 Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Consultant. .5 Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Section 27 51 23 Page 7 2011-06-10
Intercommunications system and software to be designed and manufactured in accordance with ISO-9001 1994 Quality System Standard. Manufacturers quality control program to be registered in accordance with the above noted standard . Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Material will conform to the applicable requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories and the National Standards Institute. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. All system equipment and field devices to be held securely in place. Fastenings and supports shall be selected to provide a safety factor of three. All systems equipment equipped with plug in power connectors to be connected to a dedicated receptacle. Do not use tap connectors for plugging in multiple plugs into a single receptacle. Approved Manufacturers .1 The following manufacturers and their named products are approved for use in this Work: .1 Harding Instrument Co. Ltd; MicroComm DXL .2 Approved Alternate
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
2.2 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION CONTROLLERS (DCCs)
.1
Digital Communication Controllers to each form an intercom exchange capable of independent local operation. Exchange capacity to be increased by connecting up to four Digital Communication Expanders to each DCC. Multiple DCCs to be networked together via digital audio trunks and Ethernet data networks to form larger systems.
.2
.3
Each DCC to include: .1 a Process Control Card (PCC) .2 a Master Control Card (MCC) .3 two Station Control Cards (SCCs) .4 an optional internal PCI card .5 a front panel keypad/display for system setup and maintenance .6 a 110 VAC, 60 Hz power supply for internal functions.

.4
Section 27 51 23 Page 8 2011-06-10
Process Control Card .1 Process Control Card to contain system configuration and data, control exchange operations and switching, and provide exchange network ports. .2 Process Control Card to include: .1 USB network ports for exchange expansion .2 Ethernet network ports for system expansion and external control by touch screen computers and graphic control panels. .3 fiber optic or copper digital audio trunk ports .4 two serial ports .5 an internal modem for transmitting and receiving data over a telephone line. Master Control Cards: .1 include ports for any combination of two intercom or telephone set master stations. .2 include two line level audio inputs with status and control .3 include two line level audio outputs with status and control .4 convert incoming audio signals to digital format and outgoing signals to analog format .5 intercom master station audio, press -to-talk and hook switch status transmitted over two single shielded pair cables with wiring supervision to detect open circuit and short circuit faults .6 telephone set master station functions all transmitted over a single wiring pair. Station Control Cards: .1 each provide sixteen half -duplex intercom station ports which can be employed in adjacent pairs for full duplex devices .2 provide an interface for intercom stations. Units to convert incoming audio signals to digital format and outgoing signals to analog format. Each channel to monitor the status of up to two (2) switches associated with each intercom station .3 each card interfaces with 16 half -duplex channels. Each channel includes a separate audio power amplifier for non-blocking call operation and sixteen (16) independent software controlled volume settings. .4 all station audio, switch, and po wer functions on 400 Series and 401 Series cards to be transmitted over a single shielded pair cable with supervision to detect open circuit and short circuit faults .5 audio and switch functions on 300 Series (Generic Intercom) station control cards to be transmitted on separate wiring pairs.
.5
.6
Section 27 51 23 Page 9 2011-06-10
.1 2.3 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION EXPANDERS (DCEs) .2
Digital Communication Expanders to provide master station and intercom features similar to the DCCs to facilitate exchange expansion. Each DCE to include: .1 a slave Process Control Card (PCC) without exchange control or network functions .2 a Master Control Card (MCC) .3 two Station Control Cards (SCCs) .4 a 110 VAC, 60 Hz power supply for internal functions.
2.4 ADMINISTRATOR SOFTWARE
.1
.2
A Administrator Software to function on a standard PC to support system configuration diagnostics, maintenance, and logging but not be required for system operation. Administrator Software to employ Windows features including views of system tree structure, tables of devices, screens for system settings and adjustments, and tables of operational data. Configuration features to include: .1 creation of overall system architecture. .2 creation of multiple device templates. .3 copy and paste functions with auto -numbering and auto-assignment to create device schedules. .4 configuration error detection and alerts. .5 device naming and call routing functions. .6 device setting and performance functions. Diagnostic and Maintenance features to include: .1 verification of system configuration and installation. .2 verification of system networks. .3 verification of device connections. .4 verification of system operation. .5 diagnostics via modem or Ethernet ports. Logging features to include: .1 display of system activity with filtering options. .2 search by time and date. .3 search by device. .4 search by parameter.
.3
.4
.5
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.5 PANEL, WALL AND RACK MOUNTED INTERCOM MASTER.1 STATIONS
Section 27 51 23 Page 10 2011-06-10
Panel, wall and rack mounted intercom master stations are to consist of display module, master audio interface module, and optional handset and/or loudspeaker/microphone modules mounted on custom faceplates to suit location. Display module to consist of: .1 4 line by 20 character alphanumeric LCD display mounted behind a brushed stainless steel faceplate. Display to include scratch and impact resistant window adjustable viewing angle, and adjustable back lighting. Character size 0.19 H x0.12 W. .2 brushed stainless steel faceplate with overall dimensions of 4.5H x 9.75 W .3 five function keys below display that are used to enter menu selections. Function key action is to be labeled on display and to vary according to location in the menu structure or current options available. .4 19 button keypad including standard 12 numeric keypad keys, two scroll keys, enter key, clear key, headset key, mute key, and press-to-talk key. .5 key switch lifetime for all keys, 10 million operations .6 ribbon cable header to master audio interface module. External master audio interface module to consist of: .1 network and power supply interface, audio amplification and processing module, network and operating status LEDs, ribbon cable header for connection to display module. .2 external microphone interface with phantom power capability .3 external loudspeaker interface .4 telephone handset with press -to-talk switch interface .5 headset jack interface .6 external buzzer contact closure interface .7 surface wall mount enclosure nominally 9 H x 6.5 W x 1.8 D. Flush mounted loudspeaker/microphone module consisting of: .1 2 1/2 diameter mylar cone loudspeaker and electret microphone with offset grille for mounting behind perforated mounting panel. .2 11 gauge, brushed stainless steel faceplate for mounting on two-gang box.
.2
.3
.4
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.6 INTERCOM STATIONS
Section 27 51 23 Page 11 2011-06-10
.1 Intercom stations are to be designed for mounting on standard 2-gang outlet boxes. Faceplates to be constructed of 11 gauge brushed stainless. Internal steel offset grille to restrict inserting objects through speaker grille. Stations to be ruggedly const ructed and resistant to damage from soil and sprays. .2 Each intercom station is to incorporate an internal loudspeaker, microphone preamplifier and function multiplexing circuitry. One (1) pushbutton is to be provided on each station. Pushbuttons to be software assignable for placement of call requests or control of auxiliary functions . .3 Pushbuttons to be single piece stainless steel construction and are backstopped to prevent excessive travel. Switch to have positive tactile action with 1 million-operation lifetime. .4 Loudspeakers to be waterproof mylar cone type. .5 All intercom station functions to be transmitted over a single shielded pair cable. Stations to be provided with MTA type insulation displacement connector that requires no wire stripping for installation. .6 Outdoor intercom stations are to be identical in all respects to standard intercom stations except that all metal plates and hardware to be stainless steel, and internal circuitry and components to be conformally coated. .1 Handset intercom stations are to be designed for mounting on standard outlet boxes. Faceplates are to be constructed of 11 gauge brushed stainless. Handset cradle to include internal hook switch. Handset to be hearing aid compatible with armored cable. Stations to be ruggedly constructed and resistant to damage from soil and sprays. Handset only stations are to be designed for mounting on two-gang outlet boxes. Four-gang handset intercom stations to also incorporate an internal loudspeaker/microphone with an internal offset grille, and one (two) pushbutton(s) to be provided on each station. Pushbuttons to be software assignable for placement of call requests, etc. Pushbuttons to be single piece stainless steel construction and are backstopped to prevent excessive travel. Switch to have positive tactile action with 1 million operation lifetime Loudspeakers to be waterproof mylar cone type. All handset intercom station functions to be transmitted over two shielded pair cables. Stations to be provided with MTA type insulation
2.7 HANDSET INTERCOM STATION
.2 .3
.4
.5 .6
Section 27 51 23 Page 12 2011-06-10
displacement connectors that require no wire stripping for installation.
2.8 PAGING AMPLIFIERS
.1
Provide paging amplifiers and zone switching as required to perform the functions described herein and indicated on the drawings. Paging amplifiers to be the constant voltage output type with power output capacities to drive the loudspeakers connected at sufficient levels with no more than 90% amplifier loading. Loudspeakers to be nominal 8 diameter dual cone type units. Loudspeakers to incorporate 6-ounce permanent magnet and include a 5-watt multi tap transformer for use on 25-volt and 70-volt constant voltage type distribution systems. Each loudspeaker to be provided with a security baffle plate and flush mounted enclosure. Baffle and enclosure to be all metal construction and finished in polar white baked on enamel.
.2
2.9 - LOUDSPEAKERS
.1
.2
2.10 HORN LOUDSPEAKERS
.1
Horn loudspeakers to be weatherproof compression driver units with integral screwdriver adjustable multi-tap transformer for use on both 25-volt and 70-volt constant voltage distribution systems. Integral mounting plate suitable for mounting on a standard outlet box is to include a swivel type alignment bracket. Units are to be rated to handle 15 watts input power. Nominal sensitivity 110 dB SPL at 3 feet with 1 watt input.
.2
2.11 WIRE AND CABLE
.1
Factory manufactured field interface cables to be provided, as required, for all: .1 master station ports .2 station control card ports Field wiring to conform to manufacturers recommendations. Meet or exceed CSC specification ES/SPEC -0006 Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2)
.2 .3
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.12 SPARE PARTS
.1 .2
Section 27 51 23 Page 13 2011-06-10
Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list. Provide: .1 One (1) Digital Communication Controller (DCC) .2 One (1) Digital Communication Expander (DCE) .3 One (1) Station Port Adapter .4 One (1) Touchscreen Master Station .5 Two (2) Two Gang 1-button Intercom station .6 One (1) Two Gang -button Intercom station weather 1 proof .7 One (1) Two Gang 2-button Intercom station .8 One (1) Full duplex Handset .9 One (1) 8 channel amplifier .10 One (1) signal generator card .11 One (1) trouble detector card .12 One (1) trouble indicator card .13 One (1) power supply .14 One (1) distribution amplifier
.3
Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled intercommunications and program spare parts cabinet.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 DETAILED DESIGN DEVELOPMENT
.1 .2 .3
Upon Contract Award, prepare and submit PDR to CSC Design Authority. Upon CSC acceptance of PDR, prepare and submit FDR to CSC Design Authority. Upon CSC acceptance of FDR, proceed with procurement, manufacture and staging of products compliant with FDR. Prepare subsystem configurations using licensed software. Prepare and submit ATP, training course outlines and materials and operating manual to CSC Design Authority. Conduct off-site Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, and systemwide control transfer and redundancy performance.
.4
.1 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS
Inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in and

.2

acceptable manner.
Section 27 51 23 Page 14 2011-06-10
Verify the accuracy of all dimensions, allowances, and clearances on site prior to commencing with any work that may be affected by those dimensions, allowances, and clearances. Comply with manufacturers installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in the Contract Documents. All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement. Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the Work, completed or in progress is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Precautions shall be taken to guard against electrostatic and electromagnetic susceptibility and interference. Provide adequate ventilation for all heat radiating equipment. Install equipment so as to provide maximum safety to the operating and maintenance personnel. Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor). Pneumatic tubing supplied by Section 11 19 20 DEC, shall be installed by Div. 26 in separate a conduit and wire trays. Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted.
.3
.4 .5
.6
.7
.8 .9 .10
3.3 METHOD OD WORK .1 .2 .3
Work to be performed by fully competent technicians in a thorough manner. All workmanship to be of the highest quality and meet recognized standards of craftsmanship. Areas of installation deemed not acceptable by the Owner to be redone at the Contractors expense.

3.4 PROTECTION OF EXISTING PROPERTY .1
Section 27 51 23 Page 15 2011-06-10
Be responsible floors, walls, dust and other necessary dust performance of
for protecting all existing property including ceilings,furniture, and furnishings from damage, construction related activities. Provide all covers and protective pads required for the Work.
.2
Remove all debris and protective coverings at the end of each work period. Leave premises in condition found at start of work in each room or area of work. Except for scheduled activities, do not inconvenience user due to construction operations. Install equipment as indicated and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Interconnect system components. Perform tests in accordance with CSC Specification ES/SOW-0101 Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) and ES/SOW -0102 Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .
.3
3.5 INSTALLATION .1 .2 3.6 TESTS .1
SECURITY DOOR SUPERVISION Section 28 13 27 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 GENERAL
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8
Programmable Logic Controllers Graphical User Interfaces Network Equipment System Software Magnetic Door Switches Terminal Cabinets and Block End of Line Resistors Local Alarm
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CSA C22.1-09 Canadian Electrical Code Part 1 (21st edition) Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.3 No. Nos. 12, 40 and 94, Non-hazardous enclosures National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70 National Electric Code .2 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Electronic Industries Association (ELA) .1 EIA-310-CElectronic Industries Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 ULC-S317 (1996) Installation and Classification of Closed Circuit Equipment (CCVC) Systems for Institutional and Commercial Security Systems. .2 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) .3 UL 294 (1999) Standard for Safety for Access Control System Units. .4 UL 1076 (1995) Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems. Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment Standards Video Display Unit Electronic Systems PWGSC Specifications .1 To be determined Drawings .1 To be determined CSC Telecommunications Standards: .1 ES/SOW-0101 Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5)
.2
.3 .4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9

.3 ES/SPEC-0006 Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .4 ES/SPEC-0303 Limited Call Intercom System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SOW-0404 Electronic System/Equipment Evaluation Criteria Guidelines .6 ES/STD-0803 Electronics Engineering .7 ES/SPEC-0900 Door/Barrier/Gate Control System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2)
.1 .2
System to consist of alarm control panel, motion detectors and intrusion switches located at door to be supervised. System to interface to the CCTV and intercom systems to send messages to each one and allow for interactive audio and video infor mation when processing door calls. System to interface with fire hose cabinet solenoid valves for alarm monitoring.
.3
.4
System to have the capability to review and print the data archive.
1.3 WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturers Warranty: Submit, for Consultants acceptance, manufacturers standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date of system acceptance by CSC.
.2
.1
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to
.2

.3 .4

operational security requirements. All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the institutional staff. Contractor Experience .1 The Contractor shall provide evidence of five years experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Security Door Supervision Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities. .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC-0404, including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the project; a full understanding, and capability to fulfil warranty obligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations; and the ability to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site. Service Response Capability Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period.
.5 .6
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1
General: Submit two sets hardcopy (paper) plus one set softcopy (computer files) documentation at each submittal. Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.1 Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.3 Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW -0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fibre optic communications channels. Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 8.2 Operator Manual: Provide generic manual for touch-screen operation, as well as system- specific information summarizing the operator -training course content.
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.6 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL
.1

Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management And Disposal. Remove from site and dispose of all packaging materials at appropriate recycling facilities. Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard packaging material in appropriate onsite bins for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal and wiring materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Consultant. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in designated area for recycling.
.2 .3
.4
.5
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 .2 .3
Equipment to be designed and manufactured in accordance with ISO-9001 1994 Quality System Standard. Manufacturers quality control program to be registered in accordance with the above noted standard. Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Material will conform to the applicable requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories and the National Standards Institute. All system equipment and field devices to be held securely in place. Fastenings and supports shall be selected to provide a safety factor of three. All systems equipment equipped with plug in power connectors to be connected to a dedicated receptacle. Do not use tap connectors for plugging in multiple plugs into a single receptacle. Acceptable Manufacturers .1 PLC and software: Allen-Bradley (Rockwell Automation), 1201 South Second Street, Milwaukee WI 53204-2496 USA.
.4
.5
.6

.2 PCs: Broadax Systems Inc., 17539 E. Rowland St, City of Industry CA 91748 USA. .3 Touch Screen LCD Monitors: Elo TouchSystems Inc., 6500 Kaiser Drive, Fremont CA 94555 USA .4 Computer Keyboard/Video/Mouse (KVM) Extenders: Dakota Computer Solutions LLC, 1579 Lexington Road, Green Oaks IL 60048 USA. .5 Fiber-optic Hub: Cisco Systems Inc., 170 West Tasman Drive, San Jose CA 95134 USA. .6 Operator Interface Software: Intellution Inc., 325 Foxborough Boulevard, Foxborough MA 02035 USA .7 LAN Software: Microsoft Corporation, Redmond WA USA .8 List of acceptable manufactuers is not exclusive r but supplied alternates are subject to rejection by CSC's Technical Authority unless details have been submitted in advance and accepted by CSC's Technical Authority.
2.2 PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC .1 CONTROLLERS
Enclosures: .1 Provide CSA Type 1 or Type 12 enclosures size 36" W x 36" H x (max) 12" D, suitable for wall mounting on concrete block wall. Provide hinged lockable door. Equip enclosure with removable backpan. .2 Allow for top and bottom entry of surface mount conduits. Power Supplies: .1 Provide 110 VAC/24 VDC power supply for door position switch contact wetting. Modular PLC equipment: .1 Use Allen-Bradley SLC-500 family components and input/output (I/O) modules as required, compatible with existing PLC in Principal Entrance. Field Wiring Terminations: .1 Use Weidmuller ZTR2.5 disconnect test terminal blocks and ZSI2.5 fuse terminal blocks assembled on DIN rails with appropriate end plates and terminal markers. .2 Use Panduit wire guide to contain incoming field wiring and panel wiring. .3 Use heat -shrink wire markers on all cable and wire terminations.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Network interfaces: .1 Use Allen-Bradley SLC-5/05 processors incorporating Ethernet communications interface.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.3 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACES
.1

Computers: .1 As a minimum, the CPU shall be a 3.GHZ Dual Core 4 processor. Initially equipped with sufficient random access memory(RAM)to completely load and execute the proposed application software. The minimum complement of RAM shall be 4 gigabytes (GB). The units shall be industrial type and suitable for rack mounting. .2 As a minimum, for the touchscreen stations provide an internal 160 gigabyte (GB) hard disk storage system and for the server provide an internal 200 gigabyte (GB) hard disk storage system. It shall be possible to expand this capacity by upgrading the fixed disk. .3 Backup and archiving capability shall be prov ided from an internal disk drive unit. Associated software shall allow for archival of data over multiple disks. .4 Provide an internal52X/32X/52X CD -RW drive with 1.2 Mbps transfer rate, 150 ms access time and on board 256K cache memory. Touch-screens: .1 Provide Elo 18" LCD touch screens utilizing capacitive technology, desktop package in locations other than LCPs. Bottomhinged display not acceptable. Comply with CSCs ES/STD-0803. .2 Provide Elo 18" LCD touchscreens, panel -mount in LCPs. Comply with CSC's ES/STD-0803. Pointing Devices: .1 Provide 2-button serial mouse.
.2
.3
2.4 NETWORK EQUIPMENT
.1
Fiber-optic Satellite Hub .1 Provide Cisco Systems 1538M Micro-hub 10/100. Provide 8-drop micro -hub compatible with Cisco Systems 2900 Series Switch provided as GFE. Refer to Drawing A1-440-S-11. Computer KVM Extenders .1 Provide ATen PC Extenders w/serial port, range up to 1000 ft.
.2
2.5 SYSTEM SOFTWARE
.1
Preference will be given to solutions where the system logic is resident in the PLC units and is not computer based. Computer displays for HMI is acceptable but the functionality should be limited to display functions only. The system design philosophy should be clearly identified in the proposal submission.

.2

PLC software .1 Use Rockwell PLC-500 Ladder Logistics PLC programming and configuration language. GUI software .1 Use Intellution FIX v7.0 or compatible upgrade. LAN software .1 Use Microsoft Windows latest version. Software licenses Issue software licenses to CSC authorizing the use of all supplied system software at [name Institution] in perpetuity and defining the terms and conditions of post- warranty software support, including provision of software upgrades if offered.
.3 .4 .5 .1
2.6 MAGNETIC DOOR SWITCHES 2.7 TERMINAL CABINETS AND BLOCKS
.1
Door switches: suitable for surface and flush mounting on door as indicated.
.1 .2
Terminal cabinets: Type T. In accordance with Section 26 05 31 - Splitters, Junction, Pull Boxes and Cabinets. Terminal Blocks: In accordance with Section 2711 19 - Communications Termination Blocks and Patch Panels.
2.8 END-OF-LINE RESISTORS
.1
Mount end-of-line resistors to control supervisory current in each circuit, in control panel.
2.9 LOCAL ALARM
.1
Buzzer for local alarm at each door location and mount in single gang box as indicated. (Not required for this project)
2.10 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE
.1
Provide space for the rack mounted PC for the Door Control System in the Intercom and Public Address, Inmate Cell Call, or CCTV rack. Provide clear labeling and partitioning in the rack.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.11 SPARE PARTS
.1 .2

Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list. Provide: .1 One (1) .2 Two (2) .3 One (1) .4 One (1) .5 Two (2) .6 Two (2) .7 One (1) .8 One (1) .9 One (1) .10 One (1) .11 Fifteen 48 input/48 output combo module input module output module KVM extender push buttons button operators 16 port fibre switch rack mount server touchscreen relay base (15) relays
.3 Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled security door supervision spare parts cabinet.
.1 2.12 CUFF MODE OPERATION
Provide individual adjustable time delay for each sliding cell door to ensure consistent and accurate operation for each stage of the Cuff Mode Operation function.
PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

.1 Installation Methods .1 Install equipment so that manufacturers, ULC and CSA labels are visible and legible. .2 All system components and appurtenances shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and as specified and shown. Units to be mounted outside or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproof or be mounted in weatherproof enclosures. .3 Provide for and ensure that all equipment and systems will operate under the radio frequency interference at the site. Any remedial action will be at the Contractors cost. .4 All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall. .5 Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires (cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor). Pneumatic tubing supplied by Section 11

19 20 DEC shall be installedby Div. 26 in a separate , conduit and wire trays. Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted. .6 Coordinate control cabl ing, low voltage wires and pneumatic tubing in conduit, raceways and cable trays with Section 11 19 20 DEC Contractor and Electrical Contractor (Division 26). .7 All serviceable devices such as locks and door position indicators shall have connection terminated with AMP or MOLEX type connectors provided by the hardware supplier. All connections on the controls side of the lock pigtail shall be secure and shall be terminated by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor.
.1 .2 .3
Upon Contract Award, prepare and submit PDR to CSC Design Authority. Upon CSC acceptance of PDR, prepare and submit FDR to CSC Design Authority. Upon CSC acceptance of FDR, proceed with procurement, manufacture and staging of products compliant with FDR. Prepare subsystem configurations using licensed software. Prepare and submit ATP, training course outlines and materials and operating manual to CSC Design Authority. Conduct off-site Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, system-wide control transfer and redundancy performance.
.4
3.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION .1

.2
The primary purpose of the Door Control System (DCS) is to provide control and status monitoring of all secure doors in the facility. On a failure of the primary PLC the operator must be notified by an alarm that indicates the failure and what action is required. The syst shall switch over em to the secondary PLC and continue to operate. The system shall remain operational on the backup unit even if the primary comes back on -line. Switching back to the primary shall only occur if the secondary fails or by manual command from the maintenance terminal. Systems shall have audible tones to alert the operator as follows: .1 Audible signals shall be clearly heard at any position within a Control Post. .2 Audible tones shall be user selectable.
.3

.3 Tones will be different and distinct for each system event. .4 The volume of the tone signal shall be adjustable. .5 Provide a disable function so that audible alarms can be eliminated on maintenance terminals and adjustable at each console position individually. .6 Audible tone for all changes from inactive to active state, i.e. communication failure, door forced open, server failure.
.4
The DCS shall be connected to the other components of the BSCS system to provide fully integrated operation as described in this specification. The DCS shall be powered from UPS power and shall operate for a minimum of 30 minutes on UPS. The system shall provide for redundant file servers. The communications network between the PLC and the Field I/O shall be via the Ethernet network. The DCS shall provide data entry screens for addition, deletion or modification of all input and output points and their operating characteristics. Data entry shall be customized and allow system administrators to modify points with out having to understand or use traditional PLC programming techniques such as ladder logic. The DCS shall provide data entry screens for the creation and modification of logical points. This would include the defining of doors where a door is the logical association of multiple and different low level points. Programming functions shall be from Microsoft Windows style dialog boxes, Microsoft design principles shall be applied for the creation of all data entry screens. For each door the system shall allow the definition of: .1 Input point for the door monitor switch. .2 Input point for the lock status switch. .3 Output point that activates the lock. .4 Intercom stations on either side of the door. .5 CCTV cameras on either side of the door .6 Amount of time the door lock is activated for .7 Amount of time the alarm switches are bypassed or shunted when the door is commanded to open. .8 Membership in a door interlock group. .9 The above items are intended to present a general intent and is not a complete listing of required functions. Submit with graphic screen presentation samples of all data entry screens for all system functions specified herein. These items are to be considered a shop drawing submittal.
.5 .6 .7 .8
.9

.10

The system shall have a master disable icon on primary workstations. Activation of this icon shall cause the system to suspend all functions at all operator consoles in the room. The workstations will be reset in the BSCS e quipment room via the maintenance screen. Install an Unman Switch in the vestibule outside the LCP that is connected to the system in such a manner that activating it will disable all monitoring and control functions in the LCP. This can be done by disabling the AC power or through software features. Enabling the system will be done in the BSCS room. A device icon (door) selected at a workstation shall only be controllable (lock/unlock) from that same workstation while it is selected. Other wo rkstations that display that same icon shall indicate that the device has been selected but shall not be controllable until the first location has unselected or completed the operation. Following a power failure the door control system shall resume normal operation without human intervention and shall display the real time status of all the doors. Operators will be required to login on restoration of the system. Power failure is defined as any action or activity that causes a loss of electricity to t he system motherboard. The system shall provide for an orderly shutdown. Orderly shutdowns shall close all files and protect data such that no data is lost during the shutdown process. Any number of cell doors, up to the maximum installed complement shall be capable of group operation without a system overload. The unlocking of doors shall executable at any time regardless of whether there is an intercom connection to the door or not. The audio switcher intercom channels will remain active when changing screens. The DCS shall log all events and activities to a database. Include a flexible reporting module that allows retrieval of all information or subsets of information.
.11
.12
.13
.14
.15
.16
.17
3.4 SCOPE OF WORK
.1
Detail-design, supply, install, configure, program and commission new DCS subsystem in accordance with CSC's ES/SPEC-0900 and as shown on the Drawings. Operator shall be provided with the capability to
.2

identify the occupant of each cell with a 4 -character mnemonic or abbreviation configurable from the touch-screen GUI.
.3
Detail-design, supply, install, configure, program and commission two new operator interfaces in accordance with CSC's ES/SPEC-0900 and as shown on the Drawings. Operator Interface shall be associated with alternate control of any networked DCS subsystem. Detail-design, configure, program and commission a local area network (LAN) as shown on the Drawings. Interface the door control system and the electrical systems for the control of lightingthroughout the Unit. All lighting zones are to be controlled from the touch screens in the Local Control Post. In the cells individual controls for the room light, night light and cell receptacle are to be provided. Install a separate PLC in the electrical room along with the necessary interface input / output modules and terminal blocks to control these functions. Provide functionality and indicate interlock doors on screen. System design will include monitoring of Fire Hose Cabinets. All exterior door locks to be equiped with heaters. Integrate DCS subsystems and LAN into one complete DCS employing control transfer and redundant operation as shown on the Drawings. Provide all documentatio n, reports, plans, schedules, and manuals as defined within ES/SOW-0101. Provide all specified spare parts and service manuals for maintenance of the Security Door Supervision system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model number, and unit price.
.4 .5
.6 .7 .8 .9
.10 .11
3.5 DESCRIPTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
.1
Main Communications and Control Post (MCCP). Provide interface as required with the door control system to shut-down during an emergency. Common Equipment Room (CER). Refer to the CCTV Riser Diagram for new fibre cable interface.
.2
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.6 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT
.1

(Not applicable)
3.7 SCHEDULE
.1 .2
The general contractor will be responsible for establishing and coordinating the project schedule. Documentation pre-requisites .1 Installation shall not commence until Preliminary and Final Design Reports (PDR/FDR) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. .2 Acceptance testing shall not commence until project-specific Acceptance Testing Procedures (ATP) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CS Technical C Authority.
.3 Operator and Maintenance Technician Training shall not commence until project- specific Training course outlines and trainee handouts defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. .4 System substantial performance and commencement of the warranty period shall not commence until acceptable ATPs have been completed and signed off by both Contractor and CSC Technical Authority, and Operator training is complete. Substantial performance may nevertheless be granted in the presence of noted deficiencies at the discretion of the Crown. .5 Final completion will not be granted until system is in full operation, all noted deficiencies have been cleared and all doc umentation deliverables have been received by the Crown in the quantities specified.
3.8 CO-ORDINATION WITH .1 INSTITUTIONAL OPERATIONS

.2
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. On -site work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working on-site co-operate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements.
3.9 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
.1
System operation: when supervised door is opened, zone indicating lamp flashes and operates audible alarm at control panel. When "acknowledge" button is operated, audible signal is silenced and flashing light changes to steady glow. System restored to normal when door is closed and "reset" key switch on control panel operated. Buzzer located at each door to give pulsating signal when door opened. Upon acknowledgment from control panel signal to change to continuous note. Buzzer at door location to be silenced only after door reclosed and "reset" key switch operated. Closing of door alone not to affect signal once it s started to sound. ha (Not required for this project). When deactivating switch is operated, supervised door on that zone opened without causing alarm. Zone trouble lamp illuminated when zone is deactivated but audible trouble signal not to sound. Fault in wiring of one zone to cause audible signal to sound even if zone in deactivated position. The following Interrlock Groups are to be provided so that no door will open in the Interlock Group should one of the other doors is already open. .1 Interlock Group A:
.2 .3
.4
.5 .6
.2
.3
.4
Interlock Group B: S2-005 To dining G from dome S2-030 To Gym 1 from dining G S2-006 Lower Range (G-1) S2-018 Upper Range (G-2) Interlock Group C: S2-035 To dining H from dome S2-031 To Gym 1 from dining G S2-036 Lower Range (H-1) S2-048 Upper Range (H-2) Interlock Group D:
S2-003 S2-005 S2-029 S2-035 S2-059 S2-083 S2-089
To To To To To To To
dome from lobby dining G from dome Gym 1 from dome dining H from dome dining I from dome Gym 2 from dome dining J from dome
S2-059 S2-084 S2-060 S2-072
To dining I from dome To Gym 2 from dining I Lower Range (I-1) Upper Range (I-2)

.5 Interlock S2-089 S2-085 S2-090 S2-102 Interlock S2-029 S2-030 S2-031 S2-032 Interlock S2-083 S2-084 S2-085 S2-086 Interlock S2-001 Group E: To dining J from dome To Gym 2 from dining I Lower Range (J-1) Upper Range (J-2) To Gym 1 To Gym 1 To Gym 1 Interior from from from Yard dome dining G dining H sallyport door
.6
Group F:
.7
Group G:
.8
Group H: Exterior to Vestibule sallyport S2-002 Vestibule sallyport to Lobby .9 Interlock Group I: S2-032 Inner Yard sallyport door S2-033 Outer Yard sallyport door .10 Interlock Group J: S2-086 Inner Yard sallyport door S2-087 Outer Yard sallyport door .7 All Interlocks must be able to be disabled so that individual door operation can be easily enabled for each Interlock Group doors.
To Gym 2 from dome To Gym 2 from dining I To Gym 2 from dining J Inner Yard sallyport door
3.10 GRAPHIC SCREENS
.1
Develop a co mplete set of graphic screens that provide the functionality shown in the following examples and as described herein. Contractors shall submit three drafts and one final version of the screens prior to installing the screens on the system. Users shall provide feedback and this feedback will be incorporated in to the next submission. Complete all screen submissions and install on the system for the FAT. These sample screens are to convey the general intent and do not include all details. Contra is to confirm ctor final operating characteristics with CSC. Costs for this consultation and the subsequent changes are to be included in the total contact price. Ensure that interlocked doors are included in the Screen Layouts, Control 'System Operation, and Logging and Reporting sections. Sample Legend
.2
.3
.4
.5
Sample Screens .1 The general operation of the system will be to navigate to the respective screen using the navigation pane then select the item or items to be actioned and execute the appropriate action from the action area. .2 Selection of one of the four cell range screens with the navigation menu will cause the four cameras in the respective range to be displayed on the CCTV viewing screen adjacent the DCS touch screen. The camera display shall be in a quad display mode with the upper range cameras in the two upper quadrants and the lower range in the lower quadrants. .3 When using other screens the selection of cameras will be based on which door is selected. In all cases display at least the two closest cameras to the selected door on the quad display and blank any quadrants not used. .4 The Logout, System Disable and All Call buttons are common to all screens and operate as follows: .1 Logout selecting this button will logoff the current operator and will th display the en logon screen. The touch screen will be inactive until a new operator logs on. .2 System Disable this button will shutdown all terminals in the Control Post will be equivalent to pressing the emergency mushroom button located at the exit to the Post. Unless it can be accomplished in software we suggest disabling 120 Vac to all equipment in the Control Post. Re -enabling the equipment will be done from the BSCS Room on Level .Two
.6

.3 All Call Pressing theAll Call button will turn on all amplifiers and connect the microphone to the paging system. Provide a visual feedback when the amplifiers are ready to page (this feedback applies to all call paging and zone paging on the paging screen). .5 Selection Pane .1 The selection pane allows operators to select one or more cell doors for action as well as the slider doors between the cells and the most common movement areas for inmates (to programs and drug dispensary. .2 To select one or more cells an operator can select all cells by using the Select All button or can select each cell individually by touching the cell button. Each selected cell will have a coloured ring around it. When a cell is selected it can be deselected by touching the cell button again. To deselect all cells use the Clear Selection button. .3 Selecting sliding movement doors is similar you just touch the respective door and it will be selected. One difference with movement doors is that only one can be selected at one time. .4 Once the cell(s) is selected it can be actioned using the action buttons. .6 Action Buttons .1 Open, Close and Stop These buttons will perform the described action. If the Partial Open Button is selected before pressing the Open or Close buttons then the door will stop at the partial open position when it is opening or closing. .2 Intercom Connection If the barrier has an intercom station pressing this button will connect to the door station and the operator will be able to speak to the person from the master station. .3 Cell Excluded cells that are excluded will not be included in any group actions until such times as the cell is selected and the Cell Excluded button pressed again. This is to allow cells to be taken out of service or to leave an inmate in his cell. .4 Gang Lock / Unlock- these buttons will open all twelve cells in the range at one time. Due to the risk involved in doing this if the Gang Unlock is pressed a confirmation button will display and must be pressed before the action will be executed. .7 Button Design .1 Buttons are to be design with a three dimensional look and will show depressed when active. Buttons that change state and latch i.e. Intercom connected are to display a unique colour in either state. .2 Coordinate all button colours and states with CSC during the design phase. .8 Cell Button States .1 Cell buttons shall have at minimum the

following states .1 Door is closed and locked .2 Door is open .3 Door is partially open .4 Door is in travel .5 Door is excluded .6 Door is selected .9 Barrier Door States .1 Barrier doors will have at minimum the following states .1 Door is closed and locked .2 Door is open .3 Door is in travel .4 Door is selected .5 Intercom Call has been placed from the door station.
Figure 2: Door, Lighting and Receptacle Control Range G
Figure 3: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range H
Figure 4: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range I
Figure 5: Door, Cell Lighting and Receptacle Control Range J
Figure 6: Movement Doors Screen
.10 Refer to Figure 6: Movement Doors Screen, door operations here shall generally be the same as operating barrier doors from the cell screens. When doors are swing type then the appropriate action button for Unlock will display. When the selected door is a slider then the open, close and stop buttons will display. The Door buttons shall have the following states: .1 Door is closed and locked .2 Door is open .3 Door is in travel .4 Door is selected .5 Intercom Call has been placed from the door station
Figure 7: Emergency Evacuation Screen
.11 Refer to Figure 7: Emergency Evacuation Screen, these buttons shall operate in the same manner as movement screens except the door will remain unlocked until the operator actions the Secure Fire Unlocked Doors button, this is to allow all persons to exit to a safe point without being locked in.
Figure 8: Zone Paging Screen
.12 Zone paging will allow operators to page individual zones or zone groups. The buttons will indicate when selected and when the amplifiers are ready the ready to page indication will display. When the operator presses the push to talk button on the intercom master all selected zones will receive the page
Figure 9: Utility Control
.13 Refer to Figure 9: Utility Control, this screen shall operate generally as other screens where the item is selected and then actioned on or off. The current state of the function is to be displayed.
3.11 SITE TESTS
.1 .2
Perform tests in accordance with Canadian Electrical Code. Test system components in presence of [Engineer] [Consultant] to ensure correct operation of system. On completion of tests, submit to [Engineer] [Consultant] certificate listing components tested
3.12 FINAL ADJUSTMENTS,.1 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
Upon completion of the work and during interim periods as required under the Contract, perform all final adjustments of levels, timing, equalization, limits,

.2

and operational sequences. Conduct detailed testing of all systems and quipment. e Submit certified test results to the Consultant for review. Conduct commissioning procedures as required under the Contract. Submit report of results together with all required statements and certificates.
.3

PART 1 GENERAL .1
EMERGENCY INMATE CELL CALL
Section 28 13 29 Page 1 2011-06-10
Section Includes .1 Call Originating Devices (COD) .2 Call Cancellation Devices (CCD) .3 Primary Annunciation and Control GUI .4 Data Logging National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70, Article 517, National Electric Code .2 NFPA 101, Life Safety Code Electronic Industries Association (EIA). .1 REC 12749, Power Supplies .2 RS 16051, Sound Systems
1.1 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .1

.2
1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS .1
Canadian Standards Association, (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21st edition) Safety Standard for Electrical Installations .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4-M90 (R2006), Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors for Communication Systems National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70 National Electric Code .2 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code Electronic Industries Association (EIA) .1 EIA-310-C Electronic Industries .2 REC 12749, Power Supplies .3 ANSI/EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 ULC-S317 (1996) Installation and Classification of Closed Circuit Video Equipment (CCVC) Systems for Institutional and Commercial Security Systems .2 Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) .3 UL 294 ( 1999) Standard for Safety for Access Control System Units .4 UL 1076 (1995) Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment CSC Telecommunications Standards: .1 ES/SOW-0101 Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1)
.2
.3
.4
.5 .6
Section 28 13 29 Page 2 2011-06-10
.4 ES/SPEC-0006 Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SPEC-0303 Limited Call Intercom System for Use in Feder al Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .6 ES/SPEC-0500 Inmate Cell Call System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .7 ES/SPEC-0900 Door/Barrier/Gate Control System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Rev ision 2) .8 ES/STD-0204 Fixed/Zoom Lens Closed Circuit Television (Revision 1) .9 ES/STD-0207 High Security Enclosure Closed Circuit Television (Revision 1) .10 ES/STD-0221 Fixed Network Colour Closed Circuit Television Camera (Revision 0) .11 ES/STD-0222 Indoor Network Colour Dome Camera (with Pan/Tilt/Zoom) Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .12 ES/STD-0227 LCD Colour Computer Monitor Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .13 ES/STD-0228 Network Video User Station Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .14 ES/STD-0229 Network Video Recorder Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .15 ES/STD-0230 NTSC-IP Video Converter Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .16 ES/STD-0231 IP-NTSC Video Converter Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .17 ES/STD-0803 Video Display Unit Electronic Systems (Revision 2)
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10
.1
ATP Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan CEC Canadian Electrical Code CER Common Equipment Room CSA Canadian Standards Association CSC - Correctional Service of Canada DCS - Door Control System/subsystem DIN Deutsched Institute fur Normung (a European Standards Organization) ECCS Emergency Cell Call System EIA - Electronic Industries Association ES - Electronic Systems

.11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23 .24 .25 .26 .27 .28 .29
Section 28 13 29 Page 3 2011-06-10
FAAS - Facility Alarm Annunciation System FAT- Factory Acceptance Test FDR Final design Report GFE Government Furnished Equipment GUI Graphical User Interface I/O - Input/Output ICCS - Inmate Call System KVM - Keyboard/Video/Mouse LAN - Local Area Network LCIS - Limited Call Intercom System LCP - Local Control Post MCCP - Main Communications Control Post MTBF - Mean Time before Failure PDC - Power Distribution Centre PDR - Preliminary Design Report PUI - PIDS Integration Unit PLC - Programmable Logic Controller PWC - Public Works Canada (PWGSC's predecessor) PWGSC - Public Works & Government Services Cana .30 PTT - Push-to-Talk .31 RU - Rack Units (1.75" vertical space in an EIA-310C standard equipment rack) .32 .33 .34 .35 .36 .37 .38 SAC - System Administration and Control SCP - Secure Control Post SOW - Statement of Work SPEC Specification STD Standard T&E - Telecommunications and Electronics TES - Telecommunications Equipment Space

.39 .40 .41
Section 28 13 29 Page 4 2011-06-10
UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply VAC - Volts, Alternating Current VDC - Volts, Direct Current
1.3 DESIGN PERFORMANCE .1 REQUIREMENTS
Provide an ECCS complete with Call Originating Devices, key operated Call Cancellation Devices and annunciation at the LCP. .1 Provide backup monitoring capability for the ECCS at the MCCP, route the signal from the COD to the MCCP if it is not answered at the LCP .2 The Inmate Cell Call alarms are to be displayed and recorded on the FAAS in the MCCP. .3 Provide equipment, cabling, installation, programming, configuration, software interface, testing, and training for upgrade to existing FAAS system for datalogging of cell call in the 96 bed living unit. Environment: Design components and systems to operate with all specified requirements under following ambient temperatures: .1 Indoor installations: .1 Temperature: 0oC to 30oC. .2 Humidity: 10 to 90%. .2 Outdoor installations: .1 Temperature: -40oC to 60oC. .2 Humidity: 10 to 100%.
.2
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate project layou t, camera locations, point-to-point diagrams, cable schematics, risers, mounting details and identification labelling scheme including: .1 Functional description of equipment .2 Technical data sheets of all devices .3 Device location plans and cable lists Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures. .1 Submit one sample of each COD, CCD, Primary Annunciation and Control selected complete with housing, brackets and mounting hardware
.2
.3
Section 28 13 29 Page 5 2011-06-10
.2 Samples will be returned for incorporation into work as appropriate .4 Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures .1 Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties .2 Certificates: Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties .1 Submit UL Product safety Certificates .2 Submit verification Certificate that service company is "UL List alarm service company .3 Submit verification Certificate that monitoring facility is "UL Listed central station" .4 Submit verification Certificate that video surveillance system is "Certified alarm system .3 Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions .4 Manufacturer's Field Services: Submit copies of manufacturer's field reports Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals. Include following: .1 System configuration and equipment physical layout .2 Functional description of equipment .3 Instructions on operation, adjustment and cleaning .4 Illustrations and diagrams to supplement procedures .5 Manufacturer's operation instructions Document Requirements: .1 General: Submit three copies of each hard and computer disk copies of all documents in accordance with ES/SOW0101 .2 Submit ten copies of operational manuals in accordance with ES/SOW0101 .3 Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Section 4.1 .4 Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Section 4.3 .5 Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fiber optic communications channels .6 Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Section 8.2 .3 Operator and Maintenance Technician Training shall not commence until project-specific Training course outlines and trainee handouts defined by document ES/SOW -0101 have been submitted by Contractor
.5
.6
Section 28 13 29 Page 6 2011-06-10
and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority .7 Operator Manual(s): All CCTV related components and provide generic manual for touch screen operation, CCTV interface, as well as system specific information summarizing the operator training course content .8 Maintenance Manual: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Section
.1 1.5 WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL .2 .3 .4
Deposit packaging materials in appropriate container on site for recycling or reuse. Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recycling facilities are available. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene and plastic packaging material in app ropriate on -site bin.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.6 WARRANTY
Section 28 13 29 Page 7 2011-06-10
.1 Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Consultant's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. .2 Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date of system acceptance by CSC.
.1
Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC .2
Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements. .3 All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the institutional staff. .4 Contractor Experience .1 The contractor shall provide evidence of five years experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Emergency Inmate Cell Call Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities. .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC-0404, including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the project; a full understanding, and capability to fulfil warranty ob ligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations; and the ability to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site. .5 Service Response Capability .1 Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period
.1 Main Communications and Control Post (MCCP) 1.8- DESCRIPTION OF .1 Provide the required interface with the existing EXISTING FACILITIES (if display device in MCCP. required) .2 Common Equipment Room (CER)

.1
Section 28 13 29 Page 8 2011-06-10
Refer to CCTV Riser for fibre link.
1.9 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT 1.10 SCOPE OF WORK
.1
(Not applicable for this project)
.1 The word provide shall mean to detail-design, supply and install, configure and test, program, commission and warrant the system .2 Provide a new Cell Call Subsystem in accordance with the CSC ES/ ES/SPEC-0500 and as shown on the drawings utilizing state-of-art technology with major brand name from a manufacturer with ISO9001 or better standards .3 Provide a completed system with all necessary components, programming, commissioning, patch cables, and interface devices as required and regardless of mention to provide a complete functioning system .4 Provide all required software updates and telephone technical support for no less then five years from the date of substantial completion .5 All cables must be installed in rigid steel conduit fitted with double the normal number of support hangar. Administration areas not normally accessed by inmates may use standard EMT. Conduits will be provided by Division 26. Review the scope of work as defined in Division 26 and include any additional raceways that may be required to suit the system being installed .6 Use CAT-6 cable with a specific colour different from the rest of the facilitys col our coding to clearly identify the cable as for use with the Cell Call system .7 Provide all specified spare parts and service manuals for maintenance of the Cell Call system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model number, and unit price
.1 .2 .3 .4
Call Originating Devices (COD) Call Cancellation Devices (CCD) Primary Annunciation and Control GUI Data Logging shall be via the PIU FAAS
1.12 CELL CALL GENERAL OPERATION: 1.13 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
.1
Refer to ES/SPEC-500
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.14 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS PART 2 - PRODUCTS

.1 Refer to ES/SPEC-500
Section 28 13 29 Page 9 2011-06-10
.1
Refer to ES/SPEC-500
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Cell call equipment to be designed and manufactured in accordance with ISO-9001 1994 Quality System Standard. Manufacturers quality control program to be registered in accordance with the above noted stan dard Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Material will conform to the applicable requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories and the National Standards Institute All system equipment and field devices to be held securely in place. Fastenings and supports shall be selected to provide a safety factor of three
.2 .3
.4
.5
All systems equipment equipped with plug in power connectors to be connected to a dedicated receptacle. Do not use tap connectors for plugging in multiple plugs into a single receptacle Acceptable Manufacturers .1 Harding Instruments .2 Marcomm Fibre Optics .3 Senstar Stellar .4 Delco Automation or approved alternates.
.6
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.2 JUNCTION BOX
.1
Section 28 13 29 Page 10 2011-06-10
Metal, sized to handle all system conduit interconnections with appropriate expansion.
2.3 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
.1
Ensure that all equipment and systems are capable of operating under RFI conditions at the site. All corrective action is to be at the Contractors cost.
2.4 IN CELL CALL OPERATING DEVICE
.1 .2
In cellCOD shall be a vandal resistant long life switch designed for this purpose. Units to be designed for mounting in concrete or block walls with the switch on the opposite side of the wall from the actuator to provide an extremely high level of ruggedness and security. In cell COD to be mounted on heavy duty 11 gauge cover plate mounted to the back box with approved security screws Units to include line supervision circuitry Call Operating Device shall be Harding Instruments COD-210
.3
.4 .5
2.5 CALL CANCELLATION DEVICE
.1
Call cancellation device to be cylinder operated switch mounted on 11 gauge steel single gang plate. To be of same manufacturer and model to match cylinders used in existing institution. All Call Cancellation Device cylinders to be keyed to the same key Provide 50 keys with the project
.2 .3
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.6 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE
.1
Section 28 13 29 Page 11 2011-06-10
Provide an equipment enclosure (rack) to house the Cell Call equipment. Rack shall be complete with all necessary ventilation fans, power supplies, storage drawers, rear locking door, and front smoked glass locking door. Rack must meet CSC standard for Racks EIA-310-C. Provide cable management devices to allow for future moves, adds and changes without tools.
.2
Ensure sufficient venting for racks below the cable tray in the BSCS room. Do not raise the cable tray beyon the height as mandated by code CSC Specification ES/SPEC-0006 Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) applies. Factory manufactured field interface cables to be provided, as required for all: .1 Master station ports .2 Station control card ports Field wiring to conform to manufacturers recommendations Unless otherwise noted, all wiring is to be installed in conduit or wireways If more or larger conduit is required than exists or is indicated on the drawings, allow for such additional conduit in contract price All cable within equipment racks, cupboards, and cabinets, or on backboards, to be neatly bundled and secured Wires shall not be nicked, have strands removed, or have frayed strands when removing insulation or terminating Factory manufactured interface cables to be provided for each field interface board. Terminal blocks to be provided in cabinet or on ba ckboard for factory cable interface to field wiring Wiring shall be executed in strict adherence to standard broadcast practices Colour identification of wiring: .1 Identify wiring by continuous insulation colour .2 Where multi -conductor cables are used, use the same colour-coding system for identification throughout Maintain uniform phasing and colourcoding throughout system
2.7 WIRE AND CABLE
.1
.2
.3 .4 .5
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
.11

.12
Section 28 13 29 Page 12 2011-06-10
Name identification of wiring: .1 Identify wiring at all equipment locations, pull boxes, junction boxes and outlet boxes .2 Develop a uniform identification scheme for use throughout the system .3 Record wire name identification on all applicable drawings and provide wiring tables with in the operating and installation manuals .13 Use one of the following marking materials: .1 Heat shrink sleeves .2 Clear plastic tape wrap-on strips with designated labelling sections .3 Slip-on identification bead markers or sleeves
2.8 SPARE PARTS
.1 .2
Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list . Provide: .1 Ten (10) 0.5A Fuses .2 Ten (10) 5A Fuses .3 One (1) 24V 16pt input/12pt output monitored module .4 One (1) 24V 32pt input module .5 Two (2) key operated switches .6 One (1) LCD touchscreen operator panel Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled cell call spare parts cabinet
.3
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1 .2 .3
Upon Contract Award, prepare and submit PDR to CSC Design Authority. Upon CSC acceptance of PDR, prepare and submit FDR to CSC Design Authority. Upon CSC acceptance of FDR, proceed with procurement, manufacture and staging of products compliant with FDR. Prepare subsystem configurations using licensed software. Prepare and submit ATP, training course outlines and materials and operating manual to CSC Design Authority. Conduct off-site Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, and systemwide control transfer and redundancy performance.
.4

.5
Section 28 13 29 Page 13 2011-06-10
Provide all work for inmate cell call alarms to be displayed, controlled, and logged on the FAAS, in the MCCP. New cell call annunciation and controls on the FAAS are to be consistent with existing system naming conventions and procedures. Confirm response procedures with Owner regarding delay times for response from the MCCP.
.1 3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION PROVISIONS .2
Inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. Verify the accuracy of all dimensions, allowance, and clearances on site prior to commencing with any work that may be affected by those dimensions, allowances, and clearances. Comply with manufacturers installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in the Contract Documents. All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall. Provide attachment and connection devices and methods necessary for securing Work. Secure Work true to line and level. Allow for expansion and building movement Supervise construction activities to ensure that no part of the Work, completed or in progress issubject to harmful, dangerous, damaging or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period. Precautions shall be taken to guard against electrostatic and electromagnetic susceptibility and interference Provide adequate ventilation for all heat radiating equipment. Install equipment so as to provide maximum safety to the operating and maintenance personnel .1 Work to be performed by fully competent technicians in a thorough manner. All workmanship to be of the highest quality and meet recognized standards of craftsmanship.
.3
.4 .5
.6
.7
.8 .9
3.3 METHOD OF WORK

.2
Section 28 13 29 Page 14 2011-06-10
.3 Areas of installation deemed not acceptable by the Owner to be redone at the Contractorexpense. s
3.4 PROTECTION OF EXISTING PROPERTY (if required)
.1
Be responsible for protecting all existing property including floors, walls, ceilings, furniture, and furnishings from damage, dust and other construction related activities. Provide all necessary dust covers and protective pads required for performance of the Work. Remove all debris and protective coverings at the end of each work period. Leave premises in co ndition found at start of work in each room or area of work. Except for scheduled activities, do not inconvenience user due to construction operations.
.2
.3
.1
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and datasheet. Manufacturers directions shall be followed in all cases where the manufacturers of equipment or materials used in the Work furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or Specifications.
.2
3.6 INSTALLATION
.1
Installation shall no commence until Preliminary and t Final Design Reports (PDR/FDR) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the Institutional staff. Provide complete Inmate cell call system as indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
.2 .3 .4
.5
Install cable, boxes, mouning hardware, brackets, and t system components in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install components secure, properly aligned and in locations shown on reviewed shop drawings.

.6 .7 .8
Section 28 13 29 Page 15 2011-06-10
Install equipment so that manufacturers, ULC and CSA labels are visible and legible. Install ULC labels where required. Units to be mounted outside or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproof or be mounted in weatherproof enclosures. Engrave all cell call coverplates with CALL, including installed coverplates and spares. Coverplates to be engraved prior to installation. Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage wires(cabling and wires supplied by Section 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor). Pneumatic tubing supplied by Section 11 19 20 DEC, shall be installed by Div. 26 in a separate conduit and wire trays. Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted. .1 Manufacturers Services: .1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its products and submit written reports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance of Work with Contract. .2 Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed: .1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work, or other Work, on which the Work of this Section depends, is complete but before installation begins. .2 Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete .3 Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning is carried out
.9
3.8 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION

.1
General: Submit two sets hardcopy (paper) plus one set softcopy (computer files) documentation at each submittal. Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.1 Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.3
.2 .3

.4
Section 28 13 29 Page 16 2011-06-10
Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW -0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fibre-optic communications channels. Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 8.2 Operator Manual(s): All CCTV related components and provide generic manual for touch-screen operation, CCTV interface, as well as system -specific information summarizing the operator-training course content.
.5 .6
3.9 VARIFICATION
.1
Operator and Maintenance Technician Training shall not commence until project-specific Training course outlines and trainee handouts defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. System substantial performance and commencement of the warranty period shall not commence until acceptable ATPs have been completed and signed off by both Contractor and CSC Technical Authority, an Operator d training is complete. Substantial performance may nevertheless be granted in the presence of noted deficiencies at the discretion of the Crown. Final completion will not be granted until system is in full opera tion, third party written tests submitted and verified by the consultant, all noted deficiencies have been cleared and all documentation deliverables have been received by the Crown in the quantities specified. Acceptance testing shall not commence until project Acceptance Testing Procedures (ATP) defined by document ES/SOW -0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. Conduct offsite Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, system-wide control transfer and redundancy performance
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Obtain reports, within 3 days of review, and submit, immediately, to Consultant. Upon completion of the work and during interim periods as required under the Contract, perform all final adjustments of levels, timing, equalisation, limits, and operational sequences.

.7 .8
Section 28 13 29 Page 17 2011-06-10
Conduct detailed testing of all systems and equipment. Submit test results to the Consultant for review. Conduct commissioning procedures as required under the Contract. Submit report of results toge ther with all required statements and certificates. Final completion will not be granted until system is in full operation, all noted deficiencies have been cleared and all documentation deliverables have been received by the Crown in the quantities specified
.9
.10 Perform verification inspections and test in the presence of Consultant. .1 Provide all necessary tools, ladders and equipment .2 Ensure appropriate subcontractors, and manufacturer's representatives are present for verification .11 Visual verification: Objective is to assess quality of installation and assembly and overall appearance to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Visual inspection to include: .1 Sturdiness of equipment fastening. .2 Non-existence of installation related damages. .3 Compliance of device locations with reviewed shop drawing .4 Compatibility of equipment installation with physical environment. .5 Inclusion of all accessories. .6 Device and cabling identification. .7 Application and location of ULC approval decals .12 Technical verification: Purpose to ensure that all systems and devices are properly installed and free of defects and damage. Technical verification includes: .1 Measurements of tension and power .2 Connecting joints and equipment fastening .3 Measurements of signals (dB, baud rate, etc) .4 Compliance with manufacturer's specification, product literature and installation instructions .13 Operational verification: Purpose to ensure that devices and systems' performance meet or exceed established functional requirements. Operational verification includes: .1 Operation of each device individually and within its environment .2 Operation of each device in relation with programmable schedule and or/specific functions .3 Demonstrate: .1 Refer to ES/SPEC-0500 .1 .2 Remove protective coverings from components. Adjust for correct function.
3.10 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING

.3
Section 28 13 29 Page 18 2011-06-10
Clean housing, system components, free from marks, packing tape, and finger prints, in accordance with manufacturer's written cleaning recommendations.

PART 1 GENERAL .1
PORTABLE PERSONAL ALARM SYSTEM
Section 28 16 02 Page 1 2011-06-10
Section Includes .1 System .1 Software .2 Reciever .3 High Gain Antenna .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 Transmitters Transmitter Programmer Power Supply UPS Cable CSC Specifications: .1 ES/SOW-0101 Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1) .4 ES/SPEC-0006 Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SPEC-0600 Personal Portable Alarm Systems (Revision 2) .6 ES/SPEC-0601 - Fixed Point Security Alarm System (Revision 2) .7 ES/SPEC-0602 - PPA system (Revision 3) Canadian Standards Association (CSA) International. .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21st edition) Safety Standard for Electrical Installations .2 CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 182.4-M90 (R2006), Plugs, Receptacles, and Connectors for Communication Systems Electronic Industries Association (EIA). .1 REC 12749, Power Supplies .2 RS 16051, Sound Systems Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) .1 UL 1635 (1996) The Standard for Digital Alarm Communicator System Units .4
1.1 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS .1
.2
.3
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 .2
ATP Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan BSCS Building Security & Communication System

.4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 .20 .21 .22 .23 .24 .25 .26 .27 .28 .29 .30 .31

.3
Section 28 16 02 Page 2 2011-06-10
CEC Canadian Electrical Code CER Common Equipment Room CSA Canadian Standards Association CSC - Correctional Service of Canada DCS - Door Control System/subsystem EIA - Electronic Industries Association ES - Electronic Systems FAAS - Facility Alarm Annunciation System FAT- Factory Acceptance Test FDR Final design Report GFE Government Furnished Equipment GUI Graphical User Interface LCP - Local Control Post LED - Light Emitting Diode MCCP - Main Communications Control Post MTBF - Mean Time before Failure OFC Optical Fibre Cable PC-Personal Computer PDC - Power Distribution Centre PDR - Preliminary Design Report PE Principal Entrance PIN - Personal Identification Number PIU - Perimeter Intrusion Unit PPA Portable Personal Alarm PPD - Personal Protection Device PWC - Public Works Canada (PWGSC's predecessor) PWGSC - Public Works & Government Services Canada RFI - Radio Frequency Interference

.32 .33 .34 .35 .36 .37 .38 .39 .40 .41 .42 .43 .44 .45
Section 28 16 02 Page 3 2011-06-10
RU - Rack Units (1.75" vertical space in an EIA-310C standard equipment rack) SAC - System Administration and Control SCP - Secure Control Post SOW - Statement of Work SPEC Specification STD Standard STP - Shielded Twisted Pair T&E - Telecommunications and Electronics TES - Telecommunications Equipment Space UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply UTP - Unshielded Twisted Pair VAC - Volts, Alternating Current VDC - Volts, Direct Current LCD - Liquid Crystal Display Security Clearance .1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements. All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the institutional staff Contractor Experience .1 The contractor shall provide evidence of five years experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Portable Alarm Location Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC-0404,
.1
.2
.3 .4
Section 28 16 02 Page 4 2011-06-10
including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the project; a full understanding, and capability to fulfil warranty obligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations; and the ability to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site .5 Service Response Capability .1 Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1
General: Submit two sets hardcopy (paper) plus one set softcopy (computer files) documentation at each submittal. Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.1 Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 4.3 Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW -0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fibre optic communications channels Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW-0101 Section 8.2 Operator Manual: Provide generic manual for touch-screen operation, as well as system-specific information summarizing the operator -training course content Provide dat for incorporation into maintenance manual a specified in CSC Specification ES/SOW-0101 Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) Include description of system operation .1 Include parts list using component identification numbers standard to electronics industry
.2 .3 .4
.5 .6
.7
.8
. 1 Provide data for incorporation into Operation &
Maintenance manuals as specified in Sections 01 78 00 - Closeout Submittals and
.2 O&M manuals to include

.1 .2 .3 Table of contents Warranty information.
Section 28 16 02 Page 5 2011-06-10
Completed test reports and certificates.
.4 Include parts list using component identification to electronics industry standard and serial numbers .5 Description of system operation. .6 Functional description for equipment .7 Product data. .8 Manufacturers installation instructions. .9 Maintenance schedule. .10 Cleaning instructions. .11 Training manual .3 As-built Drawings to include:
.1 Equipment layout, indicate device type at each location on the floorplans. .2 .3 .4 .5 Device mounting and location details. Wiring diagrams. Typical devices connection detail drawings. Wiring diagrams.
.6 Zone layout drawing indicating number and location of zones and areas covered
1.6 - WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

.1 Separate and recycle waste materials in accordance with Section 01 74 19 - Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.6 WARRANTY
Section 28 16 02 Page 6 2011-06-10
.1 Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit, for Consultant's acceptance, manufacturer's standard warranty document executed by authorized company official. .2 Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date of system acceptance by CSC.
.1 Installation Contractor shall be a fully authorized dealer of Senstar Stellar Products. Proof of authorization shall accompany all documents. The Contractor must show proof of trained technical personnel as per manufacturer's requirements .2 System shall be installed to provide ease of operation, servicing, maintenance, testing and expansion of additional services .3 The Portable Personal Alarm (PPA) system shall meet safety requirements specified in accordance with UL standards. .4 The system shall be provided with a high level of flexibility and comprehensive system management and database reporting facilities. .5 Allow monitoring of overall system for functionality and alarms from multiple points .6 Demonstrated MTBF for the PPA system (excluding consumable items such as batteries) shall be less than one failure per two years per 4,645 square m (50,000 square ft.) of indoor coverage, and less than one failure per two years per 18,580 square m (200,000 square ft.) of outdoor coverage
1.10 SCOPE OF WORK
.1 Supply and install a new PPA system as shown on the drawings and specified herein .2 Supply and install a completed system integra with other ted systems with all necessary components, panels, equipment, devices, programming, configuration, testing, commissioning, patch cables and interface devices as required and regardless of mention to form a complete functioning system .3 Integration with the Video Surveillance System to allow control by partition .4 Provide training and Operation & Maintenance manuals, as-built documentation, personnel training, demonstration, commissioning and extended warranty .5 Supply and install PPA system as follows: .1 Supply and install all system equipment,
Section 28 16 02 Page 7 2011-06-10
monitoring devices and equipment, workstations, transmitters, interface equipment, transmitters and cabling .2 Systems programming, configuration, testing and commissioning .3 Spare parts .6 All cables will be installed in raceways unless noted otherwise .7 Provide written test results on a device-by-device basis as part of the base bid .8 Supply and install equipment enclosures to house control panels complete with keyboard/mouse/LCD monitor console .9 Provide all specified spare parts, training, and service manuals for maintenance of the PPA system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model number, and unit price
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
.1
The PPA system shall provide a means of identifying and locating a person wearing a Personal Protection Device (PPD) within a prescribed area, when the person initiates a duress alarm. An alarm is on the PPD unit by pressing thebutton on the unit, removing a pin attached to a lanyard from the PPD, or by tilting the PPD beyond a specified angle for a specified period (man-down feature). The PPA system shall consist of individual PPDs that are carried by staff, a receiving system that determines the identification and location of each PPD transmitting an call and a reporting system, which is capable of displaying both the identification and location of the PPD that has generated the duress call on computer-based facility maps The PPA system shall have the ability to simultaneously display the identity and the location of multiple PPDs that are reporting duress alarms, within a facility The PPA system shall maintain a historical record and archive of all duress larms, from all PPDs. The record a shall include the alarm ID, date and time at which the duress alarm was received. The record shall be saved in a common format so that the data can be exported
.2
.3
.4
.5

.6
Section 28 16 02 Page 8 2011-06-10
and accessed for analysis and archiving The PPA system shall, as an option, be capable of communicating duress alarm information to computer-based third party equipment, through the development of appropriate software data protocols The PPA system shall operate within a licensed frequency band that will not be shared by other RF equipment at the same location The PPA system equipment shall carry the appropriate RF registrations for use in the country where it will be installed The PPA system shall have alarm locating feature however, this feature is not required to be activated at this time.
.7
.8
.9
2.2 STANDARD OF ACCEPTANCE
.1 .2 .3
Senstar Stellar Flare Portable Personal Alarm (PPA) system . Senstar Stellar Flash Personal Protection Device (PPD), provide minimum of 30 units c/w all accessories and batteries System to be compatible with existing facility equipment
2.3 MATERIALS
.1
Provide an integrated PPA system of type, size, capacity, and characteristics as indicated. System shall consist of pocket transmitters, receivers, software, and all programming and configuration for connecting to the existing system for datalogging of all events. Ancillary equipment will include power supplies, terminal cabinets, enclosures, brackets,wall plates, outlets, connectors, mounting hardware, identification, cabling, boxes and fittings, supporting devices, grounding and other components as required for a complete installation All systems, products and equipment shall be rated for 24 hour per day continuous operation Provide tamper-resistant, stainless steel enclosures with security screws. Panels and cabinets shall be equipped with hinged doors and locks that are keyed alike Mount power supplies and power distribution terminal strips in locked wall-mounted cabinets
.2
.3 .4
.5

.6 .7
Section 28 16 02 Page 9 2011-06-10
All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall Equipment shall operate from a primary power source of 110 V AC, 60 Hz AC power. Provide transformers and power supplies to achieve required system voltage levels Contractor shall provide the system set-up and data entry for a complete and fully operational system. Provide the Owner with data forms and instructions on how to fill out the forms for all user defined data Contractor shall install and configure the graphic maps for the system. The entire facility shall be shown on the maps and all installed devices shall be shown on the maps. The maps shall be laid out in a logical manner consistent with the operating areas of the facility. Submit draft maps to the Consultant for review and approval. Correct and modify the maps as directed by the Consultant
.8
.9
2.4 OPERATION
.1
The PPA system shall audibly report the occurrence of a duress alarm within two seconds of the PPD transmission. The identity and location of the duress alarm shall be displayed on a graphic site map of the facility within six seconds of the PPD transmission. The PPA system shall be capable of identifying and locating transmitting PPDs outside of a building to a minimum distance of 91 m (300 ft.) from the building, without requiring the installation of any system equipment outside the building. The PPA system shall be capable of reporting the identification and location of PPD transmissions in outdoor areas, regardless of size, by installing the appropriate system equipment A valid alarm from a PPD shall never fail to be reporte d by the PPA system because a persons body covered the PPD The PPA system shall provide both indoor and outdoor identification and location in multi -building (campus) configurations. In fully enclosed structures, where floors and rooms are completey delimited by concrete l and steel materials, the system shall be able to locate PPDs with an indoor accuracy to within a 6 m (20 ft.) radius. The system shall be able to locate PPDs with an outdoor accuracy to within a 15 m (50 ft.) radius In fully enclosed structures, where floors and rooms are completely delimited by concrete and steel
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Section 28 16 02 Page 10 2011-06-10
materials, the PPA system shall provide accurate PPD transmission locations to the correct floor of a building, on the correct side of an exterior wall, and within the defined locating accuracy, with a minimum success rate of 95%, averaged over the entire site. PPD transmission location accuracy shall be qualified through a predefined, and agreed upon, site acceptance test procedure, performed by the installer .7 A valid alarm from a PPD shall be reported by the PPA system anywhere within the defined area of indoor and outdoor coverage with a minimum reliability of 99.9%. An alarm shall never fail to be reported because of the presence of nearby concrete walls, metal structures, or other environmental considerations inside or outside of buildings, if such considerations were in place at the time of the installation of the system/ .8 A valid alarm from a PPD shall never fail to be reported by the PPA system anywhere w ithin the defined area of indoor and outdoor coverage as a result of doors to cells, corridors, or other rooms or areas being closed or opened. .9 Locating accuracy and alarm reporting reliability shall not be degraded by smoke, sunlight, infrared or visi ble light sources, or by sonic or ultrasonic noise .10 Locating accuracy and alarm reporting reliability shall not be degraded by the presence of metal in concrete or block walls, in floors, or in other structures providing the metal was in place at the time of the systems installation .11 Locating accuracy and alarm reporting reliability shall not be degraded by the presence of nearby electrical equipment including computers, radios, and other devices, provided the equipment meets current National Regulatory requirements for RF emissions
.12 Each person using the PPA system shall wear a PPD. A user shall be capable of transmitting a duress alarm, which will be reported at the control computer, by pressing a button on eth PPD. Optionally, a PPD shall be capable of transmitting a duress alarm by the removal of a pin attached to a lanyard from the PPD, or by the activation of the man-down function. The man-down function shall include the following user-programmable features:
.1 tilt angle .2 audible warning of pending alarm
Section 28 16 02 Page 11 2011-06-10
.3 silent mode (no audible warning .4 time delay before warning of pending alarm .5 warning duration, and .6 optional retransmission of the man-down alarm at user-defined intervals .13 An alarm shall always be reported as originating from one location. A duress alarm shall not be reported as originating from more than a single location, or from several possible locations .14 An alarm shall report floor level in multi -level facilties .15 The location of a duress alarm transmission shall be visually presented on a computer generated graphic floor plan of all, or part, of the facility. The boundary of the zone in alarm shall be highlighted. Optionally, the alarm point within the zone shall be displayed .16 The acknowledgement and clearing of duress alarms, and all other alarm handling functions, shall be performed using a computer mouse and a point -and click interface. A computer keyboard shall not be required for the alarm processing operation of the PPA system .17 The PPA system shall continuously monitor the state of all system hardware. The system shall be capable of immediately reporting a maintenance or diagnostic alarm, upon the detection of a system problem or the failure a hardware of component .18 The failure of AC power, resulting in the operation of any installed equipment on its integral backup battery, shall result in a warning alarm within 10 minutes of the condition having been continuously present .19 The PPA syste shall create and maintain a record of all m system equipment failure alarms .20 The PPA system shall report duress alarms with a distinct audible and visual indication that is easily distinguished from equipment, maintenance, and diagnostic alarms
.21 Thesystem shall archive all alarm data. The archive shall include the ID, location, and time of each duress alarm, for all alarm occurrences. The log shall include the time at which each duress alarm was acknowledged and the time it was cleared
.22 Each PPD s all be configurable by the system administrator h to report any desired identification code, without return to the factory. This will enable any PPD to be used as a replacement for another PPD that is damaged or otherwise needs to be replaced .23 Optionally each PPD shall be capable of being configured , by the system administrator to transmit repeatedly after a duress call is initiated. In this way, a PPD can be tracked and located if the person carrying it does not remain in one location
Section 28 16 02 Page 12 2011-06-10
.24 The PPD shall utomatically report a low battery condition a .25 The PPD shall be capable of operating normally for a minimum of one week, following the reporting of a low battery condition .26 The PPD shall use non-rechargeable, commercially available batteries, which can be replaced by the user, or by the system administrator .27 Under normal operating conditions (i.e., 3 test transmissions per day, standard PPD) the PPD battery shall provide a minimum life time of one year, before a low battery condition is reported
2.5 RECORDING AND STORAGE OF ALARM DATA
.1
The PPA system shall log all duress alarms, equipment failure alarms, and warning alarms to computer hard disk. Duress alarms shall be displayed as a distinct log, separate from equipment failure and other alarms The data logged for each alarm shall include the identification and location of the alarm, the time of the alarm, the time that the alarm condition was acknowledged and the time that the alarm was cleared from the system
.2 .3
.4 All logged data shall be saved in a current Windows-compatible, commonly accessible data format, from which data can be exported or retrieved by the system administrator, or others, for analysis or to archive .5 The PPA system administrator shall be provided with th e capability of selecting and printing any, or all, alarms from the alarm logs on demand .6 It shall be possible to convert and edit Autocad files of the facility for use as floor plans in the control computer
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.6 SYSTEM HARDWARE & .1 SOFTWARE FUNCTIONALITY
Section 28 16 02 Page 13 2011-06-10
The PPA system shall support communications between the distributed receivers and the control computer using any of, or a combination of, the following media : .1 unused existing fiber-optic links .2 unused existing wirepairs such as telephone or data lines .3 shielded twisted-pair cabling, and .4 wireless paths (RF). The PPA system shall be capable of locating PPDs accurately in all prescribed parts of a facility without requiring the installation of locating hardware in every room, closet, and other discrete location throughout the facility Each receiver and each system electrical device shall be capable of including, individual integral battery backup. When fully charged, the backup batteries shall provide a minimum of 4 continuous hours of operation following the loss of AC power It shall be possible to configure the PPA system to operate at any of a number of frequencies within the approved band. The selection of the operating frequency for each site enables the system to avoid RF interference fr om pre -existing RF sources on, or near, the site The RF receivers, transmitters and other hardware items shall be microprocessor based, and shall be designed such that software reconfigurations and software upgrades can be accomplished without remov the units ing from the site. Installed equipment shall be capable of receiving software patches or software upgrades from the control computer at the site, without the need to physically access each piece of equipment The PPA system shall run regul diagnostic checks on ar all installed equipment, and it shall report any exceptions or failures as alarms on the control computer The PPA system shall perform a locating accuracy check, and RF receiver functionality verification a minimum of once pe day, to ensure that all receiver equipment r is functioning correctly The PPA system shall provide notification of the failure of any integral backup battery by means of a failure alarm or warning alarm The PPDs shall be water resistant such t hat they will not malfunction after being exposed to 30 seconds of heavy rain.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.1
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.8 SYSTEM CAPACITY
.2
Section 28 16 02 Page 14 2011-06-10
Other than for cosmetic damage, the PPDs shall not be damaged or malfunction after six drops onto a tiled floor from a height of 1.5 m (5 ft.) with one drop on each of the six sides on three orthogonal axes The PPDs shall have an operating temperature range of -20C to +60C (-4F to +140F). The receivers and other installed devices shall have an operating temperature range of -0C to +60C (0F to +140F).
.3 .4
.1
The PPA system shall support a minimum of 4,000 unique PPD identification codes.
.2 The PPA system shall utilize local emergency power (from the closest mechanical room) to install IR locators for zone designation and wireless repeaters to extend coverage areas .3 All transmissions of alarms shall be activated and transmitted through RF (radio frequency) signals. No additional wiring, trenching or conduit runs shall be acceptable to achieve alarm status between multiple structures The PPA system shall have several ways of presenting incoming alarms. Central computer and alarm software shall control all alarms and configuration of system operation
.4
.5
System modules and transmitters shall be field programmable through the use of a l aptop computer or programming module. No components of the system shall require dis-assembly in order to change features or software programming parameters
.1 Size, excluding holster: .1 120 x 50 x 25 mm (4.7 x 2 x 1 in)
.2 Weight including holster and battery: .1 200 g (7 oz) -40C to +50C (-40F to +122F) 0% to 90% non-condensing .3 Temperature Range:
2.9 PERSONAL PROTECTION DEVICE (PPD)
.1 .4 .1
Humidity:

.5 Enclosure:
Section 28 16 02 Page 15 2011-06-10
.1 Black ABS plastic .2 Tamper resistant screws .6 Holster: .1 Black leather with belt loop and snaps .7 Battery: .1 9Volt alkaline .2 User replaceable .3 Battery life: .1 One to two years .4 Low battery warning: .1 Alarm to head end computer warning: .8 .5 Battery life after low battery .1 At least 15 days Antenna: .1 Internal (optional external) .2 Frequency range: .1 Operates in the international public safety band: 420 to 470 MHz .2 Reprogrammable to meet local frequency allocation guidelines: (Canada: 420 to 450 MHz) .3 Frequency within band: .1 Factory programmable
2.10 TRANSMITTER PROGRAMMER
.1 Connection to Transmitter: .1 457mm(18 in.) cable connects header beneath battery to cover .2 Connection to Computer .1 1.82 m (6 ft.) RS-232C cable .3 software .1 CD ROM with manual .4 software platform: .1 Windows 98, 2000 or XP .5 User Programmable Functions: .1 ID code .2 Man-down time and angle

.3 Man- down reset option
Section 28 16 02 Page 16 2011-06-10
2.11 POWER SUPPLY
. 1 Continuous low-voltage operation output

.2 Voltage shall be compatible with equipment requirements .3 Fitted with tamper contact .4 Power supplies shall meet or exceed all applicable UL/ULC and CSA standards
2.12 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURES
.1 Supply and install all enclosures as per the drawings and as specified in Section 27 11 19 Communications Distribution Equipment .1 To overcome the risk of power outage, an uninterruptible power supply sub -system shall be provided to ensure constant power supply during generator start-up .2 Should the generator fail to start up and take over after 10 minutes, the system should start the execution of an activity interruption program aimed at placing the system in stand-by mode in an orderly fashion, without loss of information and prepare it for re-start .3 The application server should be installed in service mode so that no human intervention is required during the re -start .4 UPS equipment shall be Line Interactive type
2.13 UPS
2.14 SPARE PARTS
.1 Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list .2 Provide .1 One (1) receiver .3 Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled PPA spare parts cabinet
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalogue installation instructions, product carton installation instructions and datasheet.
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
InstallPPA system and ancillary equipment as indicated, in accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices, to ensure that the Personal Portable Alarm

.2
Section 28 16 02 Page 17 2011-06-10
System fulfils all requirements. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations, procedures and standards for the assembly and operation of the PPA system. Provide system feature program requirements as per Consultant's directives. Provide detailed documentation on all programming and numbering of the system's modules, locators and transmitters for future reference. Consideration shall be given to heat sensitive equipment so that it is not placed near or immediately over a heat source, such as a large power supply or a high power transceiver. All system modules that include microprocessor chips and related component equipment will be installed in an environmentally controlled room with an operating range of 0- +40C. Equipment shall be located away from interference sources. It shall be the contract or's responsibility to insure that no interference on the radio frequency will disrupt or impede the performance or function of the PPA system. System should not be installed next to or near high voltage transformers or electrical devices. Receivers shall not be installed into metal cabinets or restrictive areas where RF signal would be impeded. All terminators and connectors throughout the system shall have crimp on coaxial connectors, multi-pin connectors, solder terminals, telephone-type punch down terminal strips or machine wire -wrapped terminals in cabinets, and screw type or plug and socket connections at all equipment. Properly utilize terminations in the applications for which they are intended by the manufacturer
.3
.4
.5
.6
Do not install control cables and power distribution wiring adjacent to signal cables. Power distribution cabling shall be on the opposite side from signal wiring in equipment enclosures and shall be uniformly located throughout an installation. Construct racks and cabinets to easily accommodate interconnecting cables entering from above or below. Provide interconnecting cables with plugs for disconnecting each incoming and outgoing cable on at least one end All power wiring interconnects in each group of equipment racks or consoles shall be done with flexible conduit, properly installed and of the proper size. Supply and install a custom cabinet to store PPDs. All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks
.7
.8
.9 .10
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.3 METHOD OF WORK
.2
Section 28 16 02 Page 18 2011-06-10
wherever there is a concrete block wall .1 Work to be performed by fully competent technicians in a thorough manner. All workmanship to be of the highest quality and meet recognized standards of craftsmanship. .3 Areas of installation deemed not acceptable by the Owner to be redone at the Contractors expense.
3.4 TEASTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING

.1 .2
Except where otherwise specified, arrange and pay for testing, adjusting and balancing of system. If test results do not conform to applicable requirements, repair, replace, adjust or balance equipment and systems. Repeat testing as necessary until acceptable results are achieved. Log and tabulate test results in appropriate test . plan Test, adjust and balance to verify the full and proper operation of each system component and integrated function
.3 .4

.1
Manufacturer's Services .1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and cleaning, of its products and submit written reports in acceptable format to verify compliance of Work with Contract .2 Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed: .1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work, or other Work, on which the Work of this Section depends, is complete but before installation begins .2 Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete .3 Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning is carried out .4 Obtain reports, w ithin three (3) days of review and submit immediately to the Consultant
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.6 VERIFICATION
Section 28 16 02 Page 19 2011-06-10
.1 .2 .3 .4
Perform verification inspections and test in the presence of Consultant Provide all necessary tools, ladders and equipment Ensure appropriate subcontractors and manufacturer's representatives are present for verification Visual verification: .1 Objective is to assess quality of installation and assembly and overall appearance to ensure compliance with Contract Documents .2 Visual inspection to include: .1 Sturdiness of equipment fastening .2 Non-existence of installation related damages .3 Compliance of device locations with reviewed shop drawings .4 Compatibility of equipment installation with physical environment .5 Inclusion of all accessories .6 Device and cabling identification .7 Application and location of ULC approval decals Technical verification: .1 Purpose to ensure that all systems and devices are properly installed and free of defects and damage .2 Technical verification includes: .1 Measurements of coverage patterns .2 Connecting joints and equipment fastening .3 Compliance with manufacturer's specification, product literature and installation instructions Operational verification: .1 Purpose to ensure that devices and systems' performance meet or exceed established functional requirements. .2 Operational verification includes: .1 Operation of each device individually and within its environment .2 Operation of each device in relation with programmable schedule and or/specific functions .3 Verify that System is fully operational and meets all system performance requirements of this specification .4 Total system test .1 Proceed with testing when system and subsystems are functionally tested and accepted. Total System tests to verify that requirements have been met for DC (and/or audio), sub carrier and control signals in accordance with this specification .5 Safety
.5
.6
Section 28 16 02 Page 20 2011-06-10
.1 Demonstrate with documentation that access control system meets safety requirements specified in UL 294 .6 Performance testing and commissioning .1 Test procedure: perform test on a "go-no-go" basis .1 Make only operator adjustments required to show proof of performance. .2 Test to demonstrate and verify that installed System complies with installation and technical requirements of this specification under operating conditions. .3 Test results to be evaluated by Consultant as either acceptable or unacceptable using following procedures .2 Documentation review .1 This review will determine if information provided is sufficient to meet requirements of this specification. .2 Provide for review all system manuals, as installed drawings, pretest forms, antenna radiation patterns, equipment cabinet pictorials, antenna pictorials, antenna mount pictorials, video and audio equipment det ails .3 Mechanical inspection .1 Arrange site tour for Consultant, Owners representatives and Contractor to review all areas to insure that all systems and subsystems are installed in place for proof of performance testing .2 Provide system inventory at this time. Verify following items before beginning proof of performance tests: .1 All elec trical power circuits designated for system equipment are properly labeled, wired, phased, protected and grounded. .2 Conductor ends are protected by heat shrink wrap; audio spade lugs, barrier strips and punch blocks are used. .3 Dust, debris, solder splatter, etc. are cleaned and removed from site. .4 All equipment and cabling is properly labeled. .5 All equipment identified in system's equipment lists are in-place and properly installed. .6 Each system ground is installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and this specification

.1 .2
Remove protective coverings from accessories and components. Adjust all components for correct function.

.3
Section 28 16 02 Page 21 2011-06-10
Clean housings and system components, free from dirt, marks, packing tape, and finger prints, in accordance with manufacturer's written cleaning recommendations.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Cameras .1 Fixed and PTZ cameras .2 Lenses .3 Camera enclosures .4 Camera power supply Digital video management system Analogue video handling .1 Sequential switcher .2 Quad splitter .3 Matrix switch .4 Master distribution amplifier Encoders .5 Network video recorders/archivers .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 Network video user stations KVM extenders KVM switch and console Monitors Power over Ethernet injectors Power supplies UPS Cable
.2 .3
.4
1.2 REFERENCE DOCUMENTS
.1 .2 .2
National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 101, Life Safety Code.
Electronic Industries Association (EIA) .1 REC 12749, Power Supplies. .2 RS 16051,Sound Systems.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.3 REFERENCE STANDARDS
.1
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CSA C22.1-09, Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1 (21st edition) Safety Standard for Electrical Installations. .2 CAN/CSA-C22.3 No.182.4-M90(R2006), Plugs, Receptacles and Connectors for CommunicationSystems. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) .1 NFPA 70, National Electric Code. .2 NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) .1 REC 12749, Power Supplies. .2 ANSI/EIA/TIA-568 Commercial Building. Underwriters Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 ULC-S317-(1996), Installation and Classification of Closed Circuit Video Equipment (CCVC) Systems for Institutional and Commercial Security Systems. .2 Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) .3 UL 294 (1999) Standard for Safety for Access Control System Units. .4 UL 1076 (1995) Standard for Safety for Proprietary Burglar Alarm Units and Systems. CSC Standards: .1 ES/ SOW-0101 Procurement & Installation of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 3) .2 ES/SOW-0102 Quality Control for Procurement and Installations of Electronic Security Systems (Revision 5) .3 ES/SOW-0404 Electronic System Proposal Evaluation Criteria (Revision 1) .4 ES/SPEC-0006 Conduit, Space, and Power Requirements for Security Systems Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .5 ES/SPEC-0303 Limited Call Intercom System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Rev ision 2) .6 ES/SPEC-0500 Inmate Cell Call System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .7 ES/SPEC-0900 Door/Barrier/Gate Control System for Use in Federal Correctional Institutions (Revision 2) .8 ES/STD-0204 Fixed/Zoom Lens Closed Circuit Television (Revision 1) .9 ES/STD-0207 High Security Enclosure Closed Circuit Television (Revision 1) .10 ES/STD-0221 Fixed Network Colour Closed Circuit Television Camera (Revision 0) .11 ES/STD-0222 Indoor Network Colour Dome Camera (with Pan/Tilt/Zoom) Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .12 ES/STD-0227 LCD Colour Computer Monitor Closed Circuit Television (Revision 0) .13 ES/STD-0228 Network Video User Station Closed
.2
.3
.4
.5
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 3 2011-06-10

Recorder Closed Converter Closed Converter Closed Unit Electronic
Circuit Television (Revision 0) .14 ES/STD-0229 Network Video Circuit Television (Revision 0) .15 ES/STD-0230 NTSC-IP Video Circuit Television (Revision 0) .16 ES/STD-0231 IP-NTSC Video Circuit Television (Revision 0) .17 ES/STD-0803 Video Display Systems (Revision 2)
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1 .2 .3 .4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13 .14 .15 .16 .17 .18 .19 .20 .21
AGC: Automatic Gain ATP: Acceptance Testing Procedure/Plan CCTV: Closed Circuit Television. CCVC: Closed Circuit Video. CCD: Charge Coupled Device. CEC: Canadian Electrical Code CER: Common Equipment Room CSA: Canadian Standards Association CSC: Correctional Service of Canada DIN: Deutsches Institut fur Normung (a European Standards Organization EIA: Electronic Industries Association ES: Electronic Systems FAAS: Facility Alarm Annunication System FAT: Factory Acceptance Test FDR: Final Design Report FOV: Field of View. GFE: Government Furnished Equipment GUI: Graphical User Interface I/O: Input/Output KVM: Keyboard/Video/Mouse LAN: Local Area Network

.22 .23 .24 .25 .26 .27 .28 .29 .30 .31 .32 .33 .34 .35 .36 .37 .38 .39 .40 .41 .42 .43
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
LCP: Local Control Post MTBF: Mean Time Before Failure NVRS: Network Video Recorder System OFC: Optical Fiber Cable PC: Personal Computer PDC: Power Distribution Centre PE: Principal Entrance PIU: PIDS Integration Unit PWC: Public Works Canada (PWGSCs predecessor) PWGSC: Public Works and Government Services Canada RU: Rack Units SCP: Secure Control Post SOW: Statement of Work SPEC: Specifications STD: Standard T&E: Telecommunications and Electronics TES: Telecommunications Equipment Space UPS: Uninterruptible Power Supply V&C: Visits and Correspondence VAC Volts: Alternating Current VDC Volts: Direct Current VVMS: Virtual Video Matrix Switcher
1.5 DESIGN PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Support: Provide a CCTV System for real time viewing and digital network recording with the highest possible clarity for post event investigations. Camera functions such as pan/tilt and zoon fully supported by CCTV system. .1 Provide operator with ability to control all camera functions.

.2
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
Alarm point monitoring : System capable, upon alarm recognition, of switching CCTV cameras associated with alarm point. Switching: .1 Provision to switch any camera in s ystem to any monitor in system manually or automatically. .2 Provision to switch system video recorders to selective monitor outputs in system. Control: Provision for any camera equipped with pan, tilt, and/or motorized zoom lens: .1 Manually control pan, tilt and lens functions. .2 Set pan and tilt home position. .3 Set and clear movement limits of pan and tilt mechanism. .4 Adjust motorized zoom lens. Enter and edit CCTV programs and save them for future use. Set dwell time for viewing of any camera picture. Define sequence for viewing cameras on each monitor. Bypass cameras in system during sequencing to monitor. Provide ability to display stored 'video image' of cardholder, and switch realtime ca mera to card reader location for specific card usage.(Not applicable for this project) Overall control of CCTV provided through software control, which provides complete integration of security components. Environment: Design video components and systems to operate with all specified requirements under following ambient temperatures: .1 Indoor installations: .1 Temperature: 0 C to 30 C. .2 Humidity: 10 to 90%. .2 Outdoor installations: .1 Temperature: -40 C to 60 C. .2 Humidity: 10 to 100%.
.3
.4
.5 .6 .7 .8 .9
.10
.11
1.6 SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. Shop Drawings: Submit in accordance with Section
.2
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. .1 Submit shop drawings to indicate project layout, camera locations, point-to-point diagrams, cable schematics, risers, mounting details and identification labeling scheme including: .1 Functional description of equipment. .2 Technical data sheets of all devices. .3 Device location plans and cable lists. .4 Video camera surveillance chart. .5 Video interconnection detail drawings. .6 Calculation of the recording period for video storage and RAID array. .3 Samples: Submit in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. .1 Submit one sample of each camera selected complete with housing, brackets and mounting hardware. .2 Camera will be returned for incorporation into work as appropriate. Quality Assurance Submittals: Submit the follow ing in accordance with Section 01 33 00 Submittal Procedures. .1 Test Reports: Submit certified test reports from approved independent testing laboratories indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Certificates: Submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .1 Submit UL Product safety Certificates. .2 Submit verification Certificate that service company is "UL List alarm service company". .3 Submit verification Certificate that monitoring facility is "UL Listed central station". .4 Submit verification Certificate that video survelliance system is "Certified alarm system". .3 Instructions: Submit manufacturer's installation instructions. .4 Manufacturer's Field Services: Submit copies of manufacturer's field reports. .5 Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 Closeout Submittals. Include following: .1 System configuration and equipment physical layout. .2 Functional description of equipment. .3 Instructions on operation, adjustment and cleaning. .4 Illustrations and diagrams to supplement
.4
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
procedures. .5 Manufacturer's operation instructions .6 Document Requirements: .1 General: Submit three copies of each hard and computer disk copies of all documents in accordance with ES/SOW0101 .2 Submit ten copies of operational manuals in accordance with ES/SOW0101 .3 Preliminary Design Report (PDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW101 Section 4.1 0 .4 Final Design Report (FDR): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW101 Section 4.3 0 .5 Acceptance Testing Plan (ATP): Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Sections 6.1 and 7.2. ATP shall also include test procedure and certificate for fiber optic communications channels. .6 Training Plan and Course Materials: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW101 Section 8.2 0 .3 Operator and Maintenance Technician Training shall not commence until project-specific Training course outlines and trainee handouts defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority. .7 Operator Manual(s): All CCTV related components and provide generic manual for touchscreen operation, CCTV interface, as well as system specific information summarizing the operator training course content. .8 Maintenance Manual: Provide documentation defined by ES/SOW0101 Section
.1 .2 .3 .4
Deposit packaging materials in appropriate container on site for recycling or reuse. Avoid using landfill waste disposal procedures when recycling facilities are available. Collect and separate plastic, paper packaging and corrugated cardboard. Dispose of corrugated cardboard, polystyrene and plastic packaging material in appropriate on -site bin.
1.8 WARRANTY
.1
Manufacturers Warranty: Submit, for Consultants acceptance, manufacturers standard warranty document

.2
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
executed by authorized company official. Provide one year warranty on defective parts and installation labour, commencing on the date f system o acceptance by CSC.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.9 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
.1 Security Clearance
.1 No employee of the Contractor will be permitted to enter or work in the Institution without a current valid security clearance issued by CSC. .2 Precedence of Institutional Operations .1 While working on this project, it is essential that Contractors take every precaution to reduce any disturbance to normal institutional operations to a minimum. Onsite work may have to be performed at night or during other periods set by the Institution. The Contractor must recognize that it is essential that his personnel working onsite cooperate fully with the security staff at the institution by conforming to operational security requirements. .3 Contractor Experience .1 The contractor shall prov ide evidence of five years experience in the detail design, supply and installation of Closed Circuit Television Systems in Federal Correctional Facilities. Due to the complex IP virtual matrix design, contractor to provide evidence of team member IT techology n and PC Network competency (MCSE or equal). .2 Contractor shall demonstrate full compliance with the mandatory requirements set out in ES/SPEC -0404, including corporate capability; qualifications and experience of personnel assigned to the projct; a full understanding, and e capability to fulfil warranty obligations; ability to obtain the necessary level of security clearance for its onsite personnel to the installation locations; and the ability to execute the Contract in the language designated at the installation site. .4 Service Response Capability .1 Contractor shall provide service response capability within 24 hours both during and after the system warranty period.
1.10 DESCRIPTION OF EXISTING FACILITIES
.1
Main Communications and Control Post (MCCP) .1 Provide interface as required with the new cameras and the existing viewing server. Common Equipment Room (CER) .1 Refer to the CCTV Riser for fibre link.
.2
1.11 GOVERNMENT FURNISHED EQUIPMENT

.1
Interface with the existing equipment.
1.12 SCOPE OF WORK
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 10 2011-06-10
.1 Provide a high resolution CCTV system utilizing state of art IP technology for real time viewing and digital network recording with the highest possible clarity for post event investigations. Cameras and recorders shall operate using MJPEG compression. System will be from a major brand name from a manufacturer with ISO9000 or better standards. .2 System shall be sized to provide as a minimum 54.2 GB of storage per camera .3 Provide a complete system with high quality colour (auto switching to black and white at low light) pictures, with all necessary components, programming, commissioning, patch cables, and interface devices as required and regardless of mention to provide a complete functioning system. .4 Provide all required phase lock, common g round reference filters, ground loop transformers, synchronization and any other equipment required to ensure proper video transmission with zero picture roll or tearing. .5 Provide CCTV Monitors and keyboards and all necessary devices to call any camera to any monitor or quad monitor view position. Provide Joystick with vector control of any moveable camera and programming control of basic -position pre locations from the same keypad via operator password protection. .6 Provide all devices in accordan to the following CSCs ce ES/STD-0207, ES/STD-0221, ES/STD-0204, ES/STD-0231, ES/STD-0203, ES/STD-0222, ES/STD-0214 specifications. .7 Each CCTV control position will be provided with a keyboard connected to the virtual software based, matrix switch to allow manual selection of cameras via the IP Network. .8 Connect, terminate and focus all cameras to IP streaming devices as located on the drawings with virtual matrix IP control system with group salvo macro commands for area by area camera call -up, integrate camera programming and PTZ commands, video display IP decoders and monitors, and network video recorders and storage devices. .9 Integrate the CCTV Subsystem as with the Door Control system. .10 Provide all documentation, reports, plans, sc hedules, and manuals as defined within ES/SOW-0101. .11 All cables shall be installed in conduit provided by Division 26, coordinate with Division 26 and ensure all conduits as laid out are adequate. If any conduit is inadequate then identify the discre pancy prior to the close of tenders.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 11 2011-06-10
.12 Use Cat 6 cable from all cameras to the network switches located in the [BSCS] [T & E] room. Where the use of IP based cameras is not possible i.e. for zoom pan tilt cameras then locate the digital streamer box a close as possible to the s camera location. Use CAT6 cable for Low Voltage power to all cameras for Camera Power. Use 16 Gauge wire for Heater and Blower power and 16 Gauge wire for Dome Zoom Pan and Tilt power. .13 Provide terminal servers, communication and closed CCTV network 10/100Mb/1Gig switches etc as required. .14 Provide all specified spare parts and service anuals m for maintenance of the Video Surveillance system. Provide complete listing of provided parts including quantity, manufacturer, model number, and unit price.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
All system hardware and software components to be designed and manufactured in accordance with ISO9001 Quality System Standard. Manufacturers quality control program to be registered in accordance with the above noted standard. Units of the same type of equipment shall be products of a single manufacturer. All material and equipment shall be new and currently in production. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. Material will conform to the applicable requirements of the Underwriters Laboratories and the National Standards Institute. Each major component of equipment shall have the manufacturer's name and address, and the model and serial number in a conspicuous place. All system equipment and field devices to be held securely in place. Fastenings and supports shall be selected to provide a safety factor of three. All systems equipment equipped with plug in power connectors to be connected to adedicated receptacle. Do not use tap connectors for plugging in multiple plugs into a single receptacle. Acceptable Manufacturers .1 Fixed CCTV Camera AXIS 3343VE .2 Pan and Tilt Dome Camera AXIS Q032-E
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 12 2011-06-10
.3 Lenses to be of high quality and compatible with the specified camera. .4 Housings Pelco, Videoalarm .5 NVR Servers to be Dell, HP or IBM .6 Network Data Switches to be Cisco .7 Computer Keyboard/Video/Mouse (KVM) Extenders: ATen. .7 Video Camera Characteristics: .1 Fixed cameras shall be Axis 3343VE or approved equal .2 Cameras shall be powered over the Ethernet cable .3 Pan/Tilt/Zoom cameras shall be Axis Q032-E or approved equal Lenses .1 2.5 LENS 1/3 INCH 2.8 12MM, AUTO IRIS .1 The varifocal lens shall be compatible with the AXIS cameras .2 The lens shall include a spot filter .3 The unit shall have an aspherical lens element .4 Specifications: .1 Focal length 2.8 to 11mm .2 Iris auto iris, direct drive .3 Focus manual .4 Zoom manual .5 A perture Range f1.4 360 c/w ND spot Filter .6 Lens must be IR corrected to 950 nm spectrum LCD Flat Screen Monitoring .1 Provide 17 flat screen monitor(s) with the following minimum specifications: .1 600 TV Line Resolution minimum .2 Loop through composite BNC, S-video and RCA audio inputs .3 VGA input with 15 pin D-sub connector .4 On-Screen set up display .5 TFT active matrix with 1024 x 768 pixels .6 Panel size to be 390w x 70 D x 395 H mm maximum .7 Supply with matching power supply with ULC or CSA safety approvals .8 ABS plastic chassis, charcoal finish CCTV Digital Decorders .1 Digital decoders shall be compatible with the Axis cameras specified and shall decode both live and archived video to 17 LCD NTSC monitors. Video Keyboards .1 Video keyboards shall be compatible with the Genetec system and shall allow for full control of the video system. Video Software System
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 13 2011-06-10
.1 The Video Software System shall be an expansion and upgrade of the existing Genetec Omnicast Enterprise system to the most current version including license to ensure all viewing stations (including viewing station at the MCCP) and BSCS stations can be logged in concurrently. Provide new camera licences as applicable. .2 It shall consist of expansion of server software modules (SSM) and client software applications (CSA) that are installed on separate workstations. .3 The minimum configuration of the PC or PCs running the SSM shall be: .1 Asus NCCH-DL Dual Socket Motherboard .2 Processor: Dual Intel Nocona with 800FSB .3 Chipset: Intel 82875P, Intel 6300ESB ICH .4 Memory: Dual Channel PC3200 ECC Unbuffered up to 4GB .5 Expansion: 2 x PCI , 2 x PCI-X .6 Management Software: ASWM2.0 .7 Board size: 12" x 9.8" ATX .8 On board LAN: IntelPRO /1000 CT Network Connection .4 Intel Nocona core 64-Bit Xeon 3.4GHz Processors .1 800MHz FSB & 1MB L2 CPU Cache .2 2GB of Dual Channel ECC Registered DDR Memory 1 Ea Hitachi GST 500GB Hard Drive .1 Capacity (GB) 500 .2 Interface Serial SATA 3Gb/sec .3 Spindle Speed (RPM)7200 .4 Buffer Memory 32MB .5 Average Seek (msec)8.5 .6 Maximum Internal Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec)757 .7 Maximum External Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec)150 .8 Sustained Transfer Rate 61.4-29.7 .9 Track-to-Track Seek Time (typical read, ms) 1.1 1G ECC PC3200 Memory .1 Memory Size 1024MB .2 Memory Speed 533MHz PC4200 .3 Memory CAS Latency 3-3-3-8 .4 Memory Type DDR2 .5 Pins 240 NVIDIA FX1300 Video Card .1 128MB DDR memory .2 256-bit memory interfaces .3 17.6 GBs memory bandwidth DVD-RW Read Write Drive
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9 4U Industrial Rack Mount Chassis / Mid Tower Case as per Site .10 APS-400X-12V Power Supply

.11 .12
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 14 2011-06-10
Windows XP Professional Operating System Synergy KWM Software
.13 The configuration CSA to support simultaneous viewing of 16 cameras at 4CIF resolution and 30 frames per second shall be: .1 Asus NCCH-DL Dual Socket Motherboard .1 Processor: Dual Intel Nocona with 800FSB .2 Chipset: Intel 82875P, Intel 6300ESB ICH .3 Memory: Dual Channel PC3200 ECC Unbuffered up to 4GB .4 Expansion: 2 x PCI, 2 x PCI-X .5 Management Software: ASWM2.0 .6 Board size: 12x9.8 ATX .7 On board LAN: IntelPRO/1000 CT Network Connection .2 Intel Nocona core 64-Bit Xeon 3.4GHz Processors .1 800MHz FSB & 1MB L2 CPU Cache .2 2GB of Dua Channel ECC Registered DDRMemory l .3 1G ECC PC3200 Memory .1 Memory Size 1024MB .2 Memory Speed 533MHz PC4200 .3 Memory CAS Latency 3-3-3-8 .4 Memory Type DDR2 .5 Pins 240 .4 1 Ea Hitachi GST 500GB Hard Drive (Operating System) .1 Capacity (GB) 500 .2 Interface Serial SATA 3Gb/sec .3 Spindle Speed (RPM)7200 .4 Buffer Memory 32MB .5 Average Seek (msec)8.5 .6 Maximum Internal Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec) 757 .7 Maximum External Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec) 150 .8 Sustained Transfer Rate 61.4-29.7 .9 Track-to-Track Seek Time (typical read, ms) 1.1 Adaptec Serial ATA RAID 2810SA RAID 5 Controller .1 8-Port I/O processor-based SATA RAID controller Card 1.5GBits/Sec .6 4 ea Hitachi GST 250GB Hard Drives (Archive Storage, not including RAID) .1 Capacity (GB) 500 .2 Interface Serial ATA/150 .3 Spindle Speed (RPM)7200 .4 Buffer Memory 8MB .5 Average Seek (msec)8.5 .6 Maximum Internal Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec) 757 .7 Maximum External Transfer Rate (Mbits/sec) 150 .8 Sustained Transfer Rate 61.4-29.7 .9 Track-to-Track Seek Time (typical read, ms) 1.1 .10 Track-to-Track Seek Time (typical read, ms) 1.1 .5
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 15 2011-06-10
.7
Chenpro RM311 Rack Mount Server Chassis .1 APS-400X-12V Power Supply .2 8xHDDBays .3 SATA Backplane .8 NVIDIA GeForce 6200 Video Card .1 128MB DDR memory .2 10.6 GBs memory bandwidth .9 DVD-RW Read Write Drive .10 WindowsXP Professional Operating System .14 Network Data Switches .1 Network switches shall provide Power over Ethernet (POE) .2 Network data switches shall be Cisco 3750 or approved equal .15 .16 Patch Panels .1 Patch panels shall be NORDX/CDT or approved equal
Camera Housings .1 Housing shall be compatible with the specified cameras and the mounting location. .2 All outdoor housings are to be provided with heaters and blowers that are compatible with the weather c onditions expected in [Institution Location] .3 Enclosures shall be high security, constructed of heavy gauge steel and designed for installation in detention facilities. .4 All domes are to include smoked bubbles to hide where the camera is pointing. .5 Not less than 10 gauge steel construction and include. .6 Tamper screws with no exposed cables or mounting hardware. .7 Heavy Duty 12.5 mm (1/2) thick clear Lexan window with impact resistance 140 lbs min. .8 Powder coat polyester finished. .17 Transmission Methods: Coax, UTP, Fiber Optics, and control cabling as required by location and manufacturer.
2.2 CAMERA POWER SUPPLY 2.3 JUNCTION BOX
.1
Camera power shall be supplied from the Cisco switch . Provide power supplies for other devices as required. Metal, sized to handle all system conduit interconnections with appropriate expansion.
.1
2.4 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE
.1
Ensure that all equipment and systems are capable of operating under RFI conditions at the site. All corrective action is to be at the Contractors cost.
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 16 2011-06-10
2.5 EQUIPMENT ENCLOSURE.1
Provide an equipment enclosure (rack) to house the CCTV head end equipment including termination panels and space allowance for all future equipment. Rack shall be complete with all necessary ventilation fans, power supplies, storage drawers, rear locking door, and front smoked glass locking door. Rack must meet CSC standard for Racks EIA-310-C. Provide cable management devices to allow for future moves, adds and changes without tools. Ensure sufficient venting for racks below the cable tray in the BSCS room. Do not raise the cable tray beyond the height as mandated by code.
.2
.3
2.6 SPARE PARTS
.1 .2
Provide all listed spare parts with spare parts list. Provide: .1 Two (2) .2 One (1) .3 One (1) .4 One (1) .5 One (1) .6 One (1) .7 One (1) .8 One (1) .9 One (1) .10 Two (2) .11 one (1) .12 One (1) .13 One (1) .14 One (1) fixed IP network camera PTZ IP network camera encoder vari-focal lens with IR filter video keyboard joystick controller 24 port PoE switch power supply server/archiver workstation monitors KVM extender monitor extender KVM switcher RS-232 to RS-485 converter
.3
Spare parts to be stored in a suitably sized and labelled video surveillance spare parts cabinet.
PART 3 EXECUTION
.1
Compliance: Comply with manufacturer's written data, including product technical bulletins, product catalog installation instructions, product carton installation instructions, and datasheet Manufacturers directions shall be followed in all cases
.2
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 17 2011-06-10
where the manufacturers of equipment or materials used in the Work furnish directions covering points not shown on the Drawings or Specifications. Installation shall not commence until Preliminary and Final Design Reports (PDR/FDR) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority .2 .3 .4 .5 All work shall be coordinated with the Technical Authority and the Institutional staff Install video surveillance equipment and components in accordance with ULC-S317 All wall mounted devices will be housed in steel blocks wherever there is a concrete block wall Install cable, boxes, mounting hardware, brackets, video cameras and system components in accordance with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install components secure, properly aligned and in locations shown on reviewed shop drawings. Connect cameras to cabling in accordance with installation instructions Install equipment so that manufacturers, ULC and CSA labels are visible and legible. Install ULC labels where required Units to be mounted outside or subject to inclement conditions shall be weatherproof or be mounted in weatherproof enclosures Camera Mounting: .1 Locate ceiling mountedcameras in tiles or in secure ceiling in locations .2 Ensure camera views are consistent for each dining area
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
.6 .7 .8
.9
.10
.11
Viewing Station Installation: .1 Provide wall mounting equipment, anchors, and bracing as required for a stable installation .2 Provide tilt adapters compatible with swivel arms for monitors to allow flexibility to adjust monitor angles .3 Account for screen glare when positioning monitors .4 Install the keyboard shelf for mouse controls at 900mm and monitors directly above at 1700mm AFF. Coordinate location with existing pipes to maximize corridor width and with site instructions regarding location within the Security Galleries .12 Electrical Contractor (Division 26) will be responsible for installation of all control cabling, low voltage
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 18 2011-06-10
wires (cabling and wires supplied bySection 27 51 23, 28 13 27, 28 13 29 and 28 23 00 Contractor Pneumatic ). tubing supplied by Section 11 19 20 DEC, shall be installed by Div. 26 in a separate conduit and wire trays. Splices or tees in pneumatic tubing shall NOT be permitted.
.1
Manufacturer's Services: .1 Have manufacturer of products, supplied under this Section, review Work involved in the handling, installation/application, protection and claning, of e its products and submit writtenreports, in acceptable format, to verify compliance of Work with Contract. .2 Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation i accordance with n manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, at stages listed: .1 After delivery and storage of products, and when preparatory Work, or other Work, on which the Work of this Section depends, is complete but before installation begins. .2 Twice during progress of Work at 25% and 60% complete. .3 Upon completion of the Work, after cleaning is carried out.
3.4 VERIFICATION
.1 Acceptance testing shall not commence until project Acceptance Testing Procedures (ATP) defined by document ES/SOW-0101 have been submitted by Contractor and reviewed/accepted by CSC Technical Authority .2 System substantial performance and commencement the of warranty period shall not commence until acceptable ATPs have been completed and signed off by both Contractor and CSC Technical Authority, and Operator training is complete. Substantial performance may nevertheless be granted in the presence of noted deficiencies at the discretion of the Crown. Conduct offsite Factory Acceptance Test (FAT) witnessed by CSC Design Authority, to demonstrate compliant subsystem operation, subsystem non-interference, system-wide control transfer and redundancy performance. Obtain reports, within 3 days of review, and submit, immediately, to Consultant. Upon completion of the work
.3
.4
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 19 2011-06-10
and during interim periods as required under the Contract, perform all final adjustments of levels, timing, equalisation, limits, and operational sequences. .5 .6 Conduct detailed testing of all systems and equipment. Submit test results to the Consultant for review. Conduct commissioning procedures as required under the Contract. Submit report of results together with all required statements and certificates. Final completion will not be granted until system is in full operation, all noted deficiencies have been cleared and all documentation deliverables have been received by the Crown in the quantities specified. Perform verification inspections and test in the presence of Consultant. .1 Provide all necessary tools, ladders and equipment .2 Ensure appropriate subcontractors, and manufacturer's representatives are present for verification Visual verification: Objective is to assess quality of installation and assembly and overall appearance to ensure compliance with Contract Documents. Visual inspection to include: .1 Sturdiness of equipment fastening .2 Non-existence of installation related damages .3 Compliance of device locations with reviewed shop drawings .4 Compatibility of equipment installation with physical environment .5 Inclusion of all accessories .6 Device and cabling identification .7 Application and location of ULC approval decals Technical verification: Purpose to ensure that all systems and devices are properly installed and free of defects and damage. Technical verification includes: .1 Measurements of tension and power .2 Connecting joints and equipment fastening .3 Measurements of signals (dB, lux, baud rate, etc) .4 Compliance with manufacturer's specification, product literature and installation instructions Operational verification: Purpose to ensure that devices and systems' performance meet or exceed established functional requirements. Operational verification includes: .1 Operation of each device individually and within its environment .2 Operation of each device in relation with programmable schedule and or/specific functions .3 Operation control of camera lens, pan, tilt and
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
Section 28 23 00 Page 20 2011-06-10
zoom .4 Switching of camera to any monitor .5 Switching of system video recorder to selective monitor .6 Set dwell times .7 Demonstrate .1 Sequence viewing of cameras on each monitor .2 Bypass capability .3 Display of stored image to cardholder
.1 .2 .3
Remove protective coverings from cameras and components. Adjust cameras for correct function. Clean camera housing, system components and lens, free from marks, packing tape, and finger prints, in accordance with manufacturer's written cleaning recommendations.
FIRE DETECTION AND ALARM
Section 28 31 00 Page 1 2011-06-10
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Government of Canada TB OSH Chapter 3-03, [1997-01-28], Treasury .1 Board of Canada, Occupational Safety and Health, Chapter 3-03, Standard for Fire protection Electronic Data Processing Equipment. .2 TB OSH Chapter 3-04, [1994-12-22], Treasury Board of Canada, Occupational Safety and Health, Chapter 3-04, Standard for Fire Alarm Systems. Health Canada/Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) .1 Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS). NBC- National Building Code of Canada Underwriter's Laboratories of Canada (ULC) .1 CAN/ULC-S524-06, Standard for the Installation of Fire Alarm Systems. .2 CAN/ULC-S525-07, Audible Signal Device for Fire Alarm Systems. .3 CAN/ULC-S526-07, Visual Signal Devices for Fire Alarm Systems. .4 CAN/ULC-S527-1999, Control Units. .5 CAN/ULC-S528-05, Manual Pull Stations for Fire Alarm Systems. .6 CAN/ULC-S529-02, Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems. .7 CAN/ULC-S530-M91, Heat Actuated Fire Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems. .8 CAN/ULC-S531-02, Standard for Smoke Alarms. .9 CAN/ULC-S536-97, Inspection and Testing of Fire Alarm Systems. .10 CAN/ULC-S537-04, Verification of Fire Alarm Systems. National Fire Protection Agency .1 NFPA 72-2007, National Fire Alarm Code. .2 NFPA 90A-[2009], Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
.2
.3 .4
.5
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data: .1 Submit manufacturer's printed product literature, specifications and datasheet in accordance
Section 28 31 00 Page 2 2011-06-10
with Section 01 33 00. .1 Submit [two] copies of Workplace Hazardous Materials Information System (WHMIS) Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS) in accordance with Section [01 33 00]. .2 Shop Drawings: .1 Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Shop drawings: stamped and signed by professional engineer registered or licensed in Province s of Ontario, Canada. .2 Include: .1 Layout of equipment. .2 Zoning. .3 Complete wiring diagram, including schematics of modules. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .1 Certificates: submit certificates signed by manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions. Closeout Submittals: .1 Submit maintenance and engineering data for incorporation into manual specified in Section 01 78 00 in accordance with ANSI/NFP A 20. .2 Authority of Jurisdiction will delegate authority for review and approval of submittals required by this Section. Submit to Authority of Jurisdiction 2 sets of .3 approved submittals and drawings immediately after approval but no later than 15 working days to prior to final inspection. .4 Submit following: .1 Manufacturer's Data for: .1 Control panel and modules. .2 Storage batteries. .3 Battery charger. .4 Manual pull stations. .5 Heat detectors. .6 Open-area smoke detectors. .7 Duct smoke detectors. .8 Alarm bells. .9 Alarm horns. .10 Visible appliances. .11 Main annunciator. .12 Remote annunciator panel. .13 Graphic annunciator panel. .14 Valve tamper switches. .15 Wiring. .16 Surge suppression devices.
.3
.4
Section 28 31 00 Page 3 2011-06-10
.2
.3 .4 .6
Submit [1] original for each item .35 and clear, legible, first-generation photocopies for remainder of specified copies. System wiring diagrams: .1 Submit complete wiring diagrams of system showing points of connection and terminals used for electrical connections in the system. .2 Show modules, relays, switches and lamps in control panel. Instructions for operation: Schedules: .1 Conductor wire marker schedule. Test Reports: .1 Open-area 2-wire smoke detectors. .2 Preliminary testing: .1 Final acceptance testing. .2 Submit for inspections and tests specified under [Field Quality Control.
.1
Qualifications: .1 Installer: company or person specializing in fire alarm system installations with 5 - years experience.
Provide services of representative or technician from manufacturer of system, experienced in installation and operation of type of system being provided, to supervise installation, adjustment, preliminary testing, and final testing of system and to provide instruction to project personnel.
.2
.3
System: .1 To TB OSH Chapter 3-04. .2 Subject to Fire Commissioner of Canada (FC) approval. .3 Subject to FC inspection for final acceptance.
.4
Extra Materials: .1 Provide maintenance materials in accordance with Section 01 78 00. .2 Include: .1 12 spare glass rods for manual pull box stations if applicable. Maintenance Service: .1 Provide one year's free maintenance with two inspections by manufacturer during warranty period. Inspection tests to conform to CAN/ULC- S536. Submit inspection report to Departmental Representative.
.5
Section 28 31 00 Page 4 2011-06-10
.1
Packing, shipping, handling and unloading: .1 Deliver, store and handle in accordance with Section 01 61 00. .2 Deliver, store and handle materials in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions. Waste Management and Disposal: .1 Construction/Demolition Waste Management and Disposal: separate waste materials for reuse and recycling in accordance with Section 01 74 20.
.2
1.6 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM
.1
Provide complete, electrically supervised, temporal common coded, manual and automatic, zoned, annunciated, fire alarm system.
Provide separate circuits from control panel to each zone of initiating devices. Transmission of signals from more than one zone over common circuit to control panel is prohibited.
.2
.3
New System Equipment includes: .1 Control panel to carry out fire alarm and protection functions including receiving alarm signals, initiating two-stage alarm, supervising system continuously, actuating zone annunciators, and initiating trouble signals. .2 Communication link to the existing facility fire alarm system network. .3 Power supply facilities. .4 Manual alarm stations. .5 Automatic alarm initiating devices. .6 Audible signal devices. .7 End-of-line devices. .8 Annunciators. .9 Visual alarm signal devices. .10 Ancilliary devices. Existing system modification .1 Main system modifications and programming to accept communication with the new control panel.
.2
1.7 SUPPLIER QUALIFICATIONS
.1
The supplier shall be fully qualified in the performance of work specified herein. Service personnel shall be located within the Province of Ontario and shall be experienced in the installation and operation of the system. The supplier shall be an established fire alarm supplier with a service department maintained in the Province of [Province] both current, and for the previous five (5) years.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.8 CELL SMOKE DETECTION MOCK-UP
.1 .2
Section 28 31 00 Page 5 2011-06-10
Prepare in accordance with Section 01330. Supply and install a full-size mock-up of the cell detection system for one four cell group. Mock-up to be indicative of the final installation in every aspect with all functions operable for review and testing.
Notify the Engineer at least seven (7) days in advance for review of the mock-up.
.3
.4
Simulate expected atmosphere and smoke conditions in each of the four cells and record system sensitivity adjustments required to provide reliable smoke sensing without false alarms. The mock-up may be used as part of the work provided it meets the Engineers approval. The approved mock-up will establish the minimum acceptable standard for the remaining work.
.5
.6
1.9 CASH ALLOWANCE
.1
The contractor shall include a cash allowance as described in Section 01210 for the following materials and services: .1 Master Fire Alarm Control Panel .2 Addressable Manual Stations .3 Intelligent Multi-Sensor Detectors .5 Intelligent Heat Detector .6 Addressable Monitor Modules .7 Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector Housings .8 Audible/Visual Signal Devices .9 End-of-Line Devices .10 Short Circuit Loop Isolator Modules .11 LCD Alphanumeric Display Remote Annunciators .12 Electromagnetic Door Holders .13 Fire Alarm System power supplies (including power supply capacity for the Cell Smoke Detection equipment. .14 Fire Alarm System auxiliary devices and miscellaneous materials .15 Fire Alarm System supplier services for installation testing and verification including verification report .16 Fire Alarm System supplier services for on-site training .17 Fire Alarm System supplier submittals including shop drawings, close out submittals, as-built drawings and extra materials. .18 Fire Alarm System supplier warrantees and required system maintenance services.
.2
The following materials and services shall not be
Section 28 31 00 Page 6 2011-06-10
included in the cash allowance and shall be included in the contract price: .1 Cell Smoke Detection System including: Air sampling aspirator units Air sampling piping and sampling tubes RS485 communications network to connect all of the aspirator units to the central annunciator/programmer Central annunciator/programmer unit (to be located at the main fire alarm panel) .2 Installation of the Cell Smoke Detection System.
.3 Cell Smoke Detection System auxiliary devices and miscellaneous materials. .4 Cell Smoke Detection System supplier services for testing and verification, verification report and onsite training. .5 Cell Smoke Detection System supplier submittals including shop drawings, close out submittals, as built drawings and extra materials. .6 Cell Smoke Detection System supplier warrantees and required system maintenance services. .7 Installation of the Fire Alarm Cell Smoke Detection Systems equipment and all system wiring. .8 Contractor services for the testing and verification of the fire alarm and cell smoke detection systems, on-site training and submittals. .9 Submittal of contractors warrantee.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUSTAINABLE REQUIREMENTS
.1
Materials and products in accordance with Section 01 47 15.
2.2 MATERIALS
.1
Equipment and devices: ULC listed and labelled and supplied by single manufacturer. Power supply: to CAN/ULC-S524. Audible signal devices: to CAN/ULC-S525.
.2 .3

.4 .5 .6 .7 .8 .9
Section 28 31 00 Page 7 2011-06-10
Visual signal devices: to CAN/ULC-S526. Control unit: to CAN/ULC-S527. Manual pull stations: to CAN/ULC-S528. Thermal detectors: to CAN/ULC-S530. Smoke detectors: to CAN/ULC-S529. Smoke alarms: to CAN/ULC-S531.
2.3 SYSTEM OPERATION
.1
The alarm activation of any area smoke detector, heat detector, manual pull station, cell smoke sampling device monitor module or sprinkler waterflow, shall cause the following functions to automatically occur:
.1
First Stage a. The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel and / or remote annunciator(s). b. The displays on system fire alarm control panels and network controllers shall indicate all applicable information associated with the alarm condition including; zone, device type, device location and time / date. .c All system activity / events shall be documented in system history. .d Any remote or local annunciator LCD / LEDs associated with the alarm zone shall be illuminated. .e Activate audible notification appliances throughout the building with an alert tone at 30 strokes per minute. .f Activate visual strobe notification appliances throughout the building. The visual strobe shall continue to flash until the system has been reset. .g Transmit signal to the Central Station with point identification. .h All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. .i All self-closing fire / smoke doors held open shall be released. .j Shut down all ventilation air fans. .k If the alarm is initiated from a pre-action system initiating device, the pre-action valve shall be activated to release water into the sprinkler piping. .l Shut down central vacuum cleaning system.
.2
Second Stage
Section 28 31 00 Page 8 2011-06-10
The alarm activation of any automatic or manual second stage initiating device shall cause the functions as described in the first stage to occur with the exception that the audible notification appliances shall sound an evacuation tone at 120 strokes per minute. The second stage shall be initiated under the following circumstances: .a Automatically if the first stage signal is not acknowledged within 5 minutes of its initiation. .b Manually from a switch at the Command Post. .c Manually from a second stage pull station keyswitch. .2
The Supervisory activation of any sprinkler valve supervisory switch, shall cause the following functions to automatically occur:
.1 The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel and / or remote annunciator. .2 The displays on the system fire alarm control panels and network controllers shall indicate all applicable information associated with the supervisory condition including; zone, device type, device location and time / date. .3 All system activity / events shall be documented on the system history file. .4 Any remote or local annunciator LCD / LEDs associated with the supervisory zone shall be illuminated. .5 All automatic events programmed to the alarm point shall be executed and the associated outputs activated. .6 Transmit signal to the Central Station with point identification. .3
The trouble activation of any internal or field device or wiring fault shall cause the following functions to occur:
.1 The internal audible device shall sound at the control panel and / or remote annunciator. .2 The displays on the system fire alarm control panels and network controllers shall indicate all applicable information associated with the trouble condition including; zone, device type, device location and time / date. .3 All system activity / events shall be documented on the system history file. .4 Any remote or local annunicator LCD / LEDs associated with the trouble zone shall be illuminated. .5 Transmit trouble signal to the Central Station. .4 Silencing the System
Section 28 31 00 Page 9 2011-06-10
.1 Audio tones (but not the visual devices) may be silenced by activation of any of the System Silence switches. Note that this does not acknowledge the alarm, and if the acknowledge switch is not turned on, the audible evacuation tone will automatically come on after 5 minutes. .2 If a new alarm comes in after the system has been silenced, the alert tone will re-sound throughout the building, and the 5 minute evacuation tone timeout will be re-initiated. The silence switch must be turned off, then back on to re-silence the new audible alarm. .3 To silence the strobes, the panels must be reset. .5 Resetting the System .1 It shall be possible to reset the system by operation of the system reset function devices at the fire alarm control panel. .6 System Testing and Maintenance
.1 For the purposes of system testing and maintenance, output disable functions shall be implemented to reduce the volume of the audio signal circuits, to disable the audio and visual (i.e. strobe) signal circuits, magnetic door release functions, fire shutter releases, smoke damper operations, fan controls, and pre-action valve operation.
.2 Activation of the output disables shall be possible by individual function or group of functions and on individual devices or circuits, by zone or globally.
.3 Activation of any of the bypass functions shall result in a trouble alarm to be initiated on the system. The system bypass function shall have to be turned off in order for the trouble alarm to be removed. .4 Activation of the bypass functions shall be initiated via switches at the main fire alarm panel.
2.3 MASTER FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL
.1
The master fire alarm control panel shall provide the following features:
capacity for up to ten isolated intelligent .1 signalling line circuits each with the capacity for up to 318 individually identifiable and controllable detection/control points; .2 capacity to monitor addressable initiating
Section 28 31 00 Page 10 2011-06-10
modules to monitor normally open and normally closed contacts; .3 automatic drift compensation of intelligent smoke detectors; .4 automatic system test to activate and verify all detection devices in the system; .5 multiple two wire communication loops each supporting up to 60 intelligent detection devices; .6 completely field programmable from the front panel keyboard; .7 automatic default programming; .8 programmable timers for silence inhibit, alarm cutout, and alarm verification; .9 4000 event history log stored in non-volatile memory with display, scale, and print options; .10 real time non-volatile clock for time and date stamp of all events; .11 multiple user assignable passwords; .12 maintenance alert function to automatically warn of contaminated detectors before a false alarm occurs; .13 status report for all devices in system, including detector sensitivity and verification tally; .14 keypad with full alphabet capacity; .15 keypad controls for: .1 Acknowledge Switch: Activation of the control panel acknowledge switch in response to new Alarms and/or Troubles shall silence the local panel piezo electric signal and change the Alarm and Trouble LEDs from flashing mode to steady-On mode. If multiple Alarm or Trouble conditions exist, depression of this switch shall advance the 32 character LCD display to the next Alarm or Trouble condition. .2 Signal Silence Switch: Activation of the Signal Silence Switch shall cause all programmed Alarm Indicating Appliances and relays to return to the normal condition after an alarm condition. The selection of indicating circuits and relays that are silenceable by this switch shall be fully field programmable within the confines of all applicable standards. The FACP software shall include silence inhibit and auto-silence timers. .3 System Reset Switch: Activation of the System Reset Switch shall cause all electronically-latched initiating devices, appliances or software zones, as well as all associated output devices and circuits, to return to their normal condition. Holding the RESET switch shall perform a Lamp Test function. .4 System Test Switch: Activation of the System Test Switch shall initiate an automatic test of all Intelligent/Addressable detectors in the system. The System Test shall activate the electronics in each intelligent sensor,
Section 28 31 00 Page 11 2011-06-10
simulating an alarm condition from that sensor to the Fire Alarm Control Panel. The Fire Alarm Control Panel shall interpret the data from each sensor installed in the system. A report summarizing the results of this test shall be displayed automatically on the System Liquid Crystal Display, as well as on any CRTs or printers in the System. .5 Lamp Test Switch: Activation of the Lamp Test Switch shall sequentially turn on all LED indicators, System Liquid Crystal Display and Local Piezo-Electric signal, and then automatically return the Fire Alarm Control Panel to the previous condition. .6 separate LED display of: system trouble (yellow) supervisory/security (yellow) ac power signals silenced (yellow) system alarm (red) pre-alarm (yellow) ground fault cpu fail test capacity to annunciate custom descriptive identification of each addressable device on a 32 character Multi-line alphanumeric LCD display with LED backlight. LED display shall simultaneously display type of event, type of device, custom point label, custom zone label, time and date, and point number; remote printer option; Smoke Detector Sensitivity Adjust: Means shall be provided for adjusting the sensitivity of any or all analog intelligent smoke detectors in the system from the System keypad. Sensitivity range shall be within the allowed UL window.
.2 The fire alarm control panel shall communicate with each of the devices via one pair of conductors. .3 The control panel shall contain a power supply module to provide 24VDC and 5VDC power to the system. .4 The panel shall contain a standby power source (24V gell-cell batteries) to power the fire alarm panel and all of the cell smoke detection aspirator units for not less than 24 hours plus 1 hour in alarm mode at 100% load upon a normal AC power failure. Batteries shall be completely maintenance free, with no liquids required. The fire alarm system shall include a charging circuit to automatically maintain the electrical charge of the battery.
Section 28 31 00 Page 12 2011-06-10
.5 The Control Panel shall be equipped with a network control module to communicate alarm and trouble information with the main building system via a communication link. This contract shall provide a filter optic cable from the Control panel to the main network panel in the CCMS. Fibre Optic Cable to be armoured type, superior Essex# 430066 G01 tye OFNP or equivalent.
2.4 ADDRESSABLE MANUAL STATIONS
.6 The Master Fire Alarm Control Panel shall be a Siemens to match the existing facility system.
.1
Addressable Manual Stations shall be two-stage type provided to connect to the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signalling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops.
The Manual Station shall, on command from the Control Panel, send data to the panel representing the state of the manual switch. Manual Fire Alarm Stations shall use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after activation they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. Second stage action shall be key controlled. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation that cannot be reset without the use of a key.
.2
.3
.4
Manual Stations shall be constructed of LEXAN or extruded aluminum with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. FIRE/FEU shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters. Stations shall be suitable for surface mounting on a recessed outlet box. The Manual Station shall provide address-setting means using decimal switches.
Addressable manual stations shall be Siems, two-stage.
.5
.6
2.5 INTELLIGENT MULTI SENSOR Detectors
.7
.1
Multi Sensor Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signalling Line Circuit loops. The multi sensor detector shall process and analyze information from ionization, photoelectric, and heat sensors within the detector.
.2
The detectors shall use a unipolar chamber to
Section 28 31 00 Page 13 2011-06-10
measure smoke density and shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of smoke density. .3 The detectors shall be ceiling mounted and shall include a twist-lock base.
.4
The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated remotely on command from the control panel.
.5
The detectors shall store an internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type of detector.
The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs to indicate "normal" system polling status and "alarm" state.
.6
.7
The detector sensitivity shall be set through the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and shall be adjustable in the field through the field programming of the system. Sensitivity may be automatically adjusted by the panel on a time-of-day basis. Using software in the Fire Alarm Control Panel, the detectors shall automatically compensate for dust accumulation and other slow environmental changes that may affect their performance. The detectors shall be listed by UL as meeting the calibrated sensitivity test requirements of NFPA Standard 72E. Intelligent Multi-Sensor Detectors shall be Siemens.
.8
2.6 INTELLIGENT HEAT DETECTORS
.8
.1
Heat Detectors shall be Intelligent and Addressable, and shall connect with two wires to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signalling Line Circuits.
.2
The detectors shall use an electronic sensor to measure thermal conditions (fixed temperature/rate of rise) caused by a fire and
Section 28 31 00 Page 14 2011-06-10
shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel representing the analog level of such thermal measurements.
.3
The detectors shall be ceiling mounted and shall include a twist-lock base.
The detectors shall provide a test means whereby they will simulate an alarm condition and report that condition to the control panel. Such a test may be initiated on command from the control panel. The detectors shall provide dual alarm and power LEDs to indicate "normal" polling status and "alarm" state. An output connection shall also be provided in the base to connect an external remote alarm LED.
.4
.5
.6
2.7 ADDRESSABLE MONITOR MODULE

.7
Intelligent Heat Detectors shall be Siemens.
.1
Addressable Monitor Modules shall be provided to connect one supervised IDC zone of Alarm Initiating Devices to one of the Fire Alarm Control Panel Signalling Line Circuit (SLC) Loops (ie sprinkler flow and tamper switches). The Monitor Module shall mount in a 102 mm square, 54 mm deep electrical box. The Monitor module shall be identified by a device specific address. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Monitor module is operational and in regular communication with the control panel.
.2
.3
2.8 ADDRESSABLE CONTROL MODULE

.4
Addressable Monitor Modules shall be Siemens.
.1
Addressable Control Modules shall be provided to supervise and control the operation of conventional signal devices, fan shutdown, elevator return to home signal, electro-magnetic door holders, and other auxiliary control functions. The control module may be set to operate as a dry contact relay.
.2
The Control Module shall mount in a 102 mm square, 54 mm deep electrical box.
Section 28 31 00 Page 15 2011-06-10
.3
2.9 INTELLIGENT DUCT SMOKE DETECTOR HOUSING

.4
The Control Module shall be identified by a device specific address. An LED shall be provided that shall flash under normal conditions, indicating that the Control Module is operational, and is in regular communication with the Fire Alarm Control Panel.
Addressable Control Modules shall be Siemens.
.1
The Duct Smoke Detector Housing shall accommodate an Intelligent photoelectric type smoke detector, as specified elsewhere in the specifications. When sufficient smoke is sensed, an alarm signal is initiated at the Fire Alarm Control Panel, and appropriate action taken to shutdown air handling systems to help prevent the rapid distribution of toxic smoke and fire gases throughout the areas served by the duct system. Appropriate length of sampling tube shall be provided and installed to suit the duct upon which the in duct smoke detector housing is mounted. The Intelligent Duct Smoke Detector Housing shall be Siemens.
.3
.4
2.10 AUDIO/VISUAL SIGNAL DEVICE

.5
.1
2.11 END OF LINE DEVICES

.2
Both audible and visual signals shall be contained in one common flush mounted device. The lens for the visual section shall be constructed of polycarbonate with "FIRE/FEU" in contrasting letters on both sides of the lens. The lens shall project from the face of the enclosure to allow visibility from the side of the device. The visual signal shall consist of xenon flash tube which shall flash at a rate of between one and three flashes per second. The visual signal shall produce a minimum effective luminous intensity of 15 cd, a flash duration of 200 ms or less, with a maximum duty cycle of 40% (as per ULC/CAN-S526). The audible portion of the device shall have two tone options, two audibility options, and the option to switch between a temporal 3 pattern and a non-temporal continuous pattern. Sound level shall be minimum 97 dBA (measured in anechoic room at 3 metres, and shall meet requirements of ULC Standard S525. The audible/visual signal WALL AND ceiling mounted device shall be Siemens.
Section 28 31 00 Page 16 2011-06-10
2.12 SHORT CIRCUIT LOOP ISOLATOR MODULES
.1
End-of-line devices to control supervisory current in signalling circuits, sized to ensure correct supervisory current for each circuit. Open, short or ground fault in any circuit will alter supervisory current in that circuit, producing audible and visible alarm at main control panel and remote annunciator.
.1
Short circuit loop isolator modules shall be provided between each floor or floor area so that a fault on one floor does not affect the operation of devices on another floor area. No more than twenty-five (25) devices shall be connected between short circuit isolators. if a fault occurs, isolators shall remove power to all devices beyond the isolator on the loop to the next isolator. When the fault is removed, the module shall automatically restore the loop to normal condition.
2.13 LCD ALPHANUMERIC DISPLAY REMOTE ANNUNCIATOR
.2
.3
Fault isolator modules shall be Siemens.
.1 The alphanumeric display annunciator shall be a supervised, back-lit LCD display containing a minimum six hundred and forty (640) characters for alarm annunciation in clear English text.
2.14 CELL SMOKE DETECTION
.2 The LCD annunciator shall display all alarm and trouble conditions in the system.
.3
The annunciators shall be Siemens.
.1
Cell smoke detection shall be provided by an air sampling system with a central 16 port aspirator unit to draw air from the exhaust air ducts of up to 16 cells through an integral high sensitivity smoke detector unit.
The air sampling pipes shall be 13 mm internal diameter installed to draw air from the cell exhaust duct and return the air sample to the same duct.
.2
.3
Smoke detection in each of the 16 sampling ports shall be annunciated separately. The air sampling system outputs shall be connected to the main fire alarm system via monitor modules to provide activation of the system alarms.

.4
Section 28 31 00 Page 17 2011-06-10
The air sampling system shall be designed to be relatively maintenance-free. Regular required cleaning of filters is not acceptable. The use of distilled water with re-fillable water storage at the aspirator unit is not acceptable. The air sampling system and detector shall be ULC listed for use in the proposed application.
.5
.6
The air sampling/smoke detection unit panel assembly shall include the following: .1 LEDs indicating alarms on each of the four sampling tubes .2 Power indicator .3 Fault indicator .4 RS-232 serial computer interface port .5 Reset switch to clear all alarms .6 Output alarm contacts .7 Output system trouble contacts
.7
Programming shall be via a unit mounted keypad or via a network computer. Each zone (sampling tube) shall be individually programmable to any of ten sensitivity settings. It shall be possible to automatically change the settings three times per day with different settings for each day of the week. The air sampling detector units shall be networkable via a RS485 loop. Each zone shall be individually monitored and programmed via a remote LCD display.
.8
2.15 ELECTROMAGNETIC DOOR HOLDERS
.9 .10
Cell Smoke Detection System shall be Vesda VFT-15

All of the detector units shall be connected together on a RS485 loop with an annunciator programmer to be located at the main fire alarm panel location.
.1
Standard Duty Door Holders .1 Standard duty electromagnetic door holders shall be constructed of a brushed zinc housing, with a minimum holding force of 111 Newtons (25 pounds). .2 Door holders shall be flush wall mounted or floor mounted as indicated on the drawings. .3 Door holders shall operate at 24 AC/DC.
.2
Heavy Duty Door Holders .1 Heavy Duty holders shall be constructed of brushed stainless steel, fully sealed and tamper-proof with a holding force of 1800 pounds. .2 Door holders shall be surface wall mount type. Strike plate and magnetic unit shall mount using steel, recessed, tamper-proof screws.
2.16 DEVICE SECURITY COVERS
Section 28 31 00 Page 18 2011-06-10
.3 Door holders shall operate at 24V D.C. Securitron #M82SC.
2.17 MANUFACTURERS
.1
Smoke detector cages for detectors within reach in prisoner areas shall be maximum security rated protective type. Protective corners for alarm signalling devices located in prisoner areas shall be suitable for flush mount application.
2.18 AS-BUILT RISER DIAGRAM
.2
.1
Acceptable manufacturers:
Siemens Canada.
.1
Fire alarm system riser diagram: in glazed frame, minimum size 600 x 600 mm
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
3.2 INSTALLATION
.1
Install systems in accordance with CAN/ULC-S524 [and TB OSH Chapter 3-04]. Install main control panel and connect to ac power supply, [ac] [dc] standby power.
Locate and install manual alarm stations and connect to alarm circuit wiring.
.2
.3
.4
Locate and install detectors and connect to alarm circuit wiring. Do not mount detectors within 1 m of air outlets. Maintain at least 600 mm radius clear space on ceiling, below and around detectors. Locate duct type detectors in straight portions of ducts. Connect alarm circuits to main control panel. Locate and install audible/visual devices and connect to signaling circuits. Connect signaling circuits to main control panel. Install end-of-line devices at end of alarm of
.5 .6
.7 .8

.9
Section 28 31 00 Page 19 2011-06-10
signaling circuits. Install remote annunciator panels and connect to annunciator circuit wiring. Locate and install door releasing devices.
Locate and install remote relay units to control fan shut down.
.10 .11
.12
Sprinkler system: wire alarm and supervisory switches and connect to control panel. Install 19 mm conduit to the telephone service board. Class A wiring shall be used for the fire alarm system. The primary wiring circuit and the return circuit shall not be installed in the same conduit. Wiring for initiating device circuits, and signaling line circuits shall be #18 gauge minimum. Wiring used for the multiplex communication loop shall be twisted and shielded.
.13 .14
.15
.1
Site Tests: .1 Perform tests in accordance with Section [26 05 00] and CAN/ULC-S537. .2 Fire alarm system: .1 Test each device and alarm circuit to ensure manual stations, thermal and smoke detectors, sprinkler system transmit alarm to control panel and actuate first stage alarm. .2 Check annunciator panels to ensure zones are shown correctly. .3 Simulate grounds and breaks on alarm and signaling circuits to ensure proper operation of system. .4 Class A circuits. .1 Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm signal on each side of single open-circuit fault condition imposed near midmost point of circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test. .2 Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm signal during ground-fault condition imposed near midmost point of circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test. .5 Class B circuits. .1 Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm signal on
Section 28 31 00 Page 20 2011-06-10
line side of single open-circuit fault condition imposed at electrically most remote device on circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test. .2 Test each conductor on circuits for capability of providing alarm signal during ground-fault condition imposed at electrically most remote device on circuit. Reset control unit after each alarm function and correct imposed fault after completion of each test. .2 Manufacturer's Field Services: .1 Obtain written report from manufacturer verifying compliance of Work, in handling, installing, applying, protecting and cleaning of product and submit Manufacturer's Field Reports as described in PART 1 - SUBMITTALS. .2 Provide manufacturer's field services consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection of product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. .3 Schedule site visits, to review Work, as directed in PART 1 - QUALITY ASSURANCE.
Verification requirements in accordance with Section 01 47 17, include: .1 Materials and resources. .2 Storage and collection of recyclables. .3 Construction waste management. .4 Resource reuse. .5 Recycled content. .6 Local/regional materials. .7 Low-emitting materials.
.3
3.4 TRAINING
.1
Arrange and pay for on-site lectures and demonstrations by fire alarm equipment manufacturer to train operational personnel in use and maintenance of fire alarm system.
3.5 CLEANING
.1 .2
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 1 - GENERAL
CORRECTED MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY FOR FILL
Section 31 05 10 Page 1 2011-05-27
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM C127-07, Standard Test Method for Density, Relative Density (Specific Gravity) and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate. .2 ASTM D698-00ae1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft (600 kN-m/m)). .3 ASTM D1557-02e1, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft (2,700 kN-m/m)). .4 ASTM D4253-00(2006), Standard Test Methods for Maximum Index Density and Unit Weight of Soils Using a Vibratory Table.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1
Corrected maximum dry density is defined as:
SPEC NOTE: Select one of following equations according to agency practice, and delete other equation.
D = (F1 x D1) + (0.9 x D2 x F2). Where: D = corrected maximum dry density kg/m. .1 F1 = fraction (decimal) of total field sample passing 19 mm sieve. .2 F2 = fraction (decimal) of total field sample retained on 19 mm sieve (equal to 1.00 - F1). .3 D1 = maximum dry density, kg/m of material passing 19 mm sieve determined in accordance with Method A of ASTM D698. .4 D2 = bulk density, kg/m, of material retained on 19 mm sieve, equal to 1000G where G is bulk specific gravity (dry basis) of material when tested to ASTM C127. .3 For free draining aggregates, determine D1 (maximum dry density) to ASTM D4253 dry method when directed by Departmental Representative.
.1 .2
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
CORRECTED MAXIMUM DRY DENSITY FOR FILL
Section 31 05 10 Page 2 2011-05-27
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
AGGREGATE MATERIALS
Section 31 05 17 Page 1 2011-05-27
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) .1 ASTM D4791-05e1, Standard Test Method for Flat Particles, Elongated Particles, or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate.
1.2 SAMPLES
.1 .2
Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Allow continual sampling by Departmental Representative during production. Provide Departmental Representative with access to source and processed material for sampling. Install sampling facilities at discharge end of production conveyor, to allow Departmental Representative to obtain representative samples of items being produced. Stop conveyor belt when requested by Departmental Representative to permit full cross section sampling.
Pay cost of sampling and testing of aggregates which fail to meet specified requirements.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Provide water, electric power and propane to Departmental Representative laboratory trailer at production site.
.1
Divert unused granular materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Aggregate quality: sound, hard, durable material free from soft, thin, elongated or laminated particles, organic material, clay lumps or minerals, or other substances that would act in deleterious manner for use intended.

.2
AGGREGATE MATERIALS
Section 31 05 17 Page 2 2011-05-27
Flat and elongated particles of coarse aggregate: to ASTM D4791. .1 Greatest dimension to exceed five times least dimension.
.3
Fine aggregates satisfying requirements of applicable section to be one, or blend of following: .1 Natural sand. .2 Manufactured sand. .3 Screenings produced in crushing of quarried rock, boulders, gravel or slag. Coarse aggregates satisfying requirements of applicable section to be one of or blend of following: .1 Crushed rock. .2 Gravel and crushed gravel composed of naturally formed particles of stone. .3 Light weight aggregate, including slag and expanded shale.
.4
.1
Inform Departmental Representative of proposed source of aggregates and provide access for sampling at least 4 weeks prior to commencing production.
.2
If, in opinion of Departmental Representative, materials from proposed source do not meet, or cannot reasonably be processed to meet, specified requirements, locate an alternative source or demonstrate that material from source in question can be processed to meet specified requirements. Advise Departmental Representative 4 weeks in advance of proposed change of material source. Acceptance of material at source does not preclude future rejection if it fails to conform to requirements specified, lacks uniformity, or if its field performance is found to be unsatisfactory.
.3
.4
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.1
Topsoil stripping
AGGREGATE MATERIALS
Section 31 05 17 Page 3 2011-05-27
.1 Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen condition or in any manner in which soil structure is adversely affected. .2 Begin topsoil stripping of areas as directed by Departmental Representative after area has been cleared of brush, weeds and grasses and removed from site. .3 Strip topsoil to depths as directed by Departmental Representative. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil. .4 Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m.
.2
Aggregate source preparation .1 Prior to excavating materials for aggregate production, clear and grub area to be worked, and strip unsuitable surface materials. Dispose of cleared, grubbed and unsuitable materials as approved by authority having jurisdiction. .2 Where clearing is required, leave screen of trees between cleared area and roadways as directed. .3 Clear, grub and strip area ahead of quarrying or excavating operation sufficient to prevent contamination of aggregate by deleterious materials. .4 When excavation is completed dress sides of excavation to nominal 1.5:1 slope, and provide drains or ditches as required to prevent surface standing water. .5 Trim off and dress slopes of waste material piles and leave site in neat condition. Processing .1 Process aggregate uniformly using methods that prevent contamination, segregation and degradation. .2 Blend aggregates, if required, to obtain gradation requirements, percentage of crushed particles, or particle shapes, as specified. Use methods and equipment approved by Departmental Representative. .3 Wash aggregates, if required to meet specifications. Use only equipment approved by Departmental Representative. .4 When operating in stratified deposits use excavation equipment and methods that produce uniform, homogeneous aggregate. Handling .1 Handle and transport aggregates to avoid segregation, contamination and degradation. Stockpiling .1 Stockpile aggregates on site in locations as
.3
.4
.5
AGGREGATE MATERIALS
Section 31 05 17 Page 4 2011-05-27
indicated unless directed otherwise by Departmental Representative. Do not stockpile on completed pavement surfaces. .2 Stockpile aggregates in sufficient quantities to meet Project schedules. .3 Stockpiling sites to be level, well drained, and of adequate bearing capacity and stability to support stockpiled materials and handling equipment. .4 Except where stockpiled on acceptably stabilized areas, provide compacted sand base not less than 300 mm in depth to prevent contamination of aggregate. Stockpile aggregates on ground but do not incorporate bottom 300 mm of pile into Work. .5 Separate different aggregates by strong, full depth bulkheads, or stockpile far enough apart to prevent intermixing. .6 Do not use intermixed or contaminated materials. Remove and dispose of rejected materials as directed by Departmental Representative within 48 h of rejection. .7 Stockpile materials in uniform layers of thickness as follows: .1 Max 1.0 m for coarse aggregate and base course materials. .2 Max 1.0 m for fine aggregate and sub-base materials. .3 Max 1.0 m for other materials. .8 Uniformly spot-dump aggregates delivered to stockpile in trucks and build up stockpile as specified. Do not cone piles or spill material over edges .9 of piles. .10 Do not use conveying stackers. .11 During winter operations, prevent ice and snow from becoming mixed into stockpile or in material being removed from stockpile.
3.2 CLEANING
.1
Leave aggregate stockpile site in tidy, well drained condition, free of standing surface water.
.2
Leave any unused aggregates in neat compact stockpiles as directed by Departmental Representative.
.3
For temporary or permanent abandonment of aggregate source, restore source to condition meeting requirements of authority having jurisdiction.
SOIL STRIPPING AND STOCKPILING
Section 31 14 13 Page 1 2011-05-27
1.1 REFERENCES
Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 180, November 2005 General Specification for the Management of Excess Materials 2 Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 206, November 2009 Construction Specification for Grading 3. U.S. Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) / Office of Water .1 EPA 833-R-06-004, May 2007, Developing Your Stormwater Pollution Prevention Plan - A Guide for Construction Sites. 1
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NOT USED
.1
Not Used.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 STRIPPING OF TOPSOIL

.1 Remove topsoil before any construction procedures commence to avoid compaction of topsoil. Handle topsoil only when it is dry and warm. Remove vegetation from targeted areas by non-chemical means and dispose of stripped vegetation by alternative disposal. Remove brush from targeted area by non-chemical means and dispose of through alternative disposal. Strip topsoil to depths as indicated. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil. Pile topsoil in berms in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Stockpile height not to exceed 3 m. Dispose of unused topsoil at locations as indicated by Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
.4
.5
.6
.7

.8 .9
Section 31 14 13 Page 2 2011-05-27
Protect stockpiles from contamination and compaction. Topsoil that has been piled for long term storage will be covered with trefoil or grass to maintain agricultural potential of soil.
3.2 PREPARATION OF GRADE
.1
Verify that grades are correct. If discrepancies occur, notify Departmental Representative and do not commence work until instructed by Departmental Representative. .1 Grade area only when soil is dry to lessen soil compaction. .2 Grade soil establishing natural contours and eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positive drainage.
3.3 PLACING OF TOPSOIL
.1
Place topsoil only after Departmental Representative has accepted subgrade.
.2
During dry conditions spread topsoil in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm, over unfrozen subgrade free of standing water. Establish traffic patterns for equipment that will prevent driving on topsoil after it has been spread to avoid compaction. Cultivate the soil following spreading procedures.
.3
.4
3.4 SUB-SOILING
.1 Following the spreading and cultivating procedures sub-soil the area to improve drainage and agricultural potential of soil. With a vibrating sub-soiler work the area to a depth of 40 cm. Follow the contour lines of the natural grades of the area. Cross sub-soil the area following the first pass. Cultivate the soil with a chain harrow to de-clod the soil.
.2
.3 .4
3.5 CLEANING
.1
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11.

.2
Section 31 14 13 Page 3 2011-05-27
On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
ROUGH GRADING
Section 31 22 13 Page 1 2011-05-27
.1
Section 31 23 33.01 - Excavation, Trenching and Backfilling.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM D698-07e1, Test Method for Laboratory .1 Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (600 kN-m/m).
.1
Known underground and surface utility lines and buried objects are to be located prior to commencing work.
1.4 PROTECTION
.1
Protect and/or transplant existing fencing, trees, landscaping, natural features, bench marks, buildings, pavement, surface or underground utility lines which are to remain as directed by Departmental Representative. If damaged, restore to original or better condition unless directed otherwise. Maintain access roads to prevent accumulation of construction related debris on roads.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 .2 Fill material in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01.
Excavated or graded material existing on site may be
ROUGH GRADING
Section 31 22 13 Page 2 2011-05-27
suitable to use as fill for grading work if approved by Departmental Representative.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Do not handle topsoil while in wet or frozen condition or in any manner in which soil structure is adversely affected as determined by Departmental Representative.
.2
Commence topsoil stripping of areas as directed by Departmental Representative after area has been cleared of brush, weeds and grasses and removed from site. Strip topsoil to depths as directed by Departmental Representative. Rot till weeds and grasses and retain as topsoil on site. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m. Dispose of unused topsoil as directed by Departmental Representative off site.
.3
.4
.5
3.2 GRADING
.1
Rough grade to levels, profiles, and contours allowing for surface treatment as indicated. Rough grade to following depths below finish grades:
.2
.1 .2 .3 .3 .4 .5
150 mm for grassed areas. 400 mm for asphalt (type 1) paving. 550 mm for asphalt (type 2) paving.
Slope rough grade away from building as directed. Grade ditches to depth as directed.
Prior to placing fill over existing ground, scarify surface to depth of 150 mm. Maintain fill and existing surface at approximately same moisture content to facilitate bonding.
.6
Compact filled and disturbed areas to Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density to ASTM D698, as follows: 95% under all areas.

.7
ROUGH GRADING
Section 31 22 13 Page 3 2011-05-27
Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs to remain.
3.3 TESTING
.1
Inspection and testing of soil compaction will be carried out by testing laboratory. Costs of tests will be paid under a Cash Allowance by Departmental Representative. Refer to Sections 01 29 83 and 01 45 00.
3.4 SURPLUS MATERIAL
.1
Remove surplus material and material unsuitable for fill, grading or landscaping off site as directed by Departmental Representative.
EXCAVATING, TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 1 2011-05-27
1.1 MEASUREMENT PROCEDURES
.1
Excavated materials will be measured in cubic metres in their original location. .1 Common excavation quantities measured will be actual volume removed within following limits: .1 Width for trench excavation as indicated. .2 Width for excavation for structures as indicated. .3 Depth from ground elevation and surface of pavement immediately prior to excavation, to elevation as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2 Rock quantities measured will be actual volume removed within following limits: .1 Width for trench excavation as indicated. .2 Width for excavation for structures to be bounded by vertical planes up to 500 mm outside of and parallel to neat lines of footings as indicated. .3 Depth from rock surface elevations immediately prior to excavation, to elevation as indicated. .4 Where design elevation is less than 300 mm below original rock surface, depth will be considered to be 300 mm below original rock surface. .5 Volume of individual boulders and rock fragments will be determined by measuring three maximum mutually perpendicular dimensions. .2 Sheeting and bracing left in place on direction of Departmental Representative will be measured in square metres of surface area of plane surface of sheeting. Shoring, bracing, cofferdams, underpinning and de-watering of excavation will not be measured separately for payment.
Backfilling to authorized excavation limits will be measured in cubic metres compacted in place for each type of material specified. Placing and spreading of topsoil will be measured for payment in cubic metres calculated from cross sections taken in area of excavation from original location. .1 If double handling of topsoil is directed by Departmental Representative stockpiling and later placing, then quantities will be measured twice; on
.3
.4
.5
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 2 2011-05-27
excavation from original location and on excavation from stockpile.
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials International (ASTM) .1 ASTM C117-95, Standard Test Method for Material Finer than 0.075 mm (No.200) Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing. .2 ASTM C136-06, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. .3 ASTM D422-63(2007), Standard Test Method for Particle-Size Analysis of Soils. .4 ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (12,400 ft-lbf/ft ) (600 kN-m/m ). .5 ASTM D1557-09, Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort (56,000 ft-lbf/ft ) (2,700 kN-m/m ). .6 ASTM D4318-05, Standard Test Methods for Liquid Limit, Plastic Limit, and Plasticity Index of Soils. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series. .2 CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric.
.2
.3
Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A3001, A3002, A3003, A3004 and A3005). .1 CSA-A3001-08, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete. .2 CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. Ontario Provincial Standard Specifications (OPSS)/Ontario Ministry of Transportation .1 OPSS 1004 November 2006, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Material Specification for Aggregates - Miscellaneous. .2 OPSS 1010 April 2004, Ontario Provincial Standard Specification, Material Specification for Aggregates - Base, Subbase, Select Subgrade, and Backfill Material.
.4
1.3 DEFINITIONS
.1 Excavation classes: two classes of excavation will be
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 3 2011-05-27
recognized; common excavation and rock excavation. .1 Rock : solid material in excess of 1.00 m and which cannot be removed by means of heavy duty mechanical excavating equipment with 0.95 to 1.15 m bucket. Frozen material not classified as rock. .2 Common excavation: excavation of materials of whatever nature, which are not included under definitions of rock excavation. .2 Unclassified excavation: excavation of deposits of whatever character encountered in Work.
.3
Topsoil: .1 Material capable of supporting good vegetative growth and suitable for use in top dressing, landscaping and seeding. .2 Material reasonably free from subsoil, clay lumps, brush, objectionable weeds, and other litter, and free from cobbles, stumps, roots, and other objectionable material larger than 25 millimeters in any dimension.
Waste material: excavated material unsuitable for use in Work or surplus to requirements.
.4
.5
Borrow material: material obtained from locations outside area to be graded, and required for construction of fill areas or for other portions of Work.
Recycled fill material: material, considered inert, obtained from alternate sources and engineered to meet requirements of fill areas.
.6
.7
Unsuitable materials: .1 Weak, chemically unstable, and compressible materials. .2 Frost susceptible materials: .1 Fine grained soils with plasticity index less than 10 when tested to ASTM D4318, and gradation within limits specified when tested to ASTM D422 and ASTM C136: Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.2. .2 Table:
Sieve Designation % Passing 2.00 mm 100 0.10 mm 45 - 100 0.02 mm 10 - 80 0.005 mm 0 - 45 .3 Coarse grained soils containing more than 20% by mass passing 0.075 mm sieve.

.8
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 4 2011-05-27
Unshrinkable fill: very weak mixture of cement, concrete aggregates and water that resists settlement when placed in utility trenches, and capable of being readily excavated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
.1
Make submittals in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
Preconstruction Submittals: .1 Submit construction equipment list for major equipment to be used in this section prior to start of Work. .2 Submit records of underground utility locates, indicating: location plan of existing utilities as found in field, location plan of relocated and abandoned services, as required. Samples: .1 Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. .2 Inform Departmental Representative at least 4 weeks prior to beginning Work, of proposed source of fill materials and provide access for sampling. .3 Submit 70 kg samples of type of fill, including representative samples of excavated material. .4 Ship samples to Departmental Representative, in tightly closed containers to prevent contamination and exposure to elements. .5 At least 4 weeks prior to beginning Work, inform Departmental Representative source of fly ash and submit samples to Departmental Representative. .1 Do not change source of Fly Ash without written approval of Departmental Representative.
.3
.1
Where Departmental Representative is employee of Contractor, submit proof that Work by Departmental Representative is included in Contractor's insurance coverage.
Submit design and supporting data at least 2 weeks prior to beginning Work.
.2
.3
Design and supporting data submitted to bear stamp and signature of qualified professional engineer registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada. Keep design and supporting data on site.
.4

.5
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 5 2011-05-27
Engage services of qualified professional Engineer who is registered or licensed in Province of Ontario, Canada in which Work is to be carried out to design and inspect cofferdams, shoring, bracing and underpinning required for Work.
Do not use soil material until written report of soil test results are reviewed by Departmental Representative.
.6
.7
Health and Safety Requirements: .1 Do construction occupational health and safety in accordance with Section 01 35 29.06.
.1
.2
Divert excess aggregate materials from landfill to local facility for reuse as directed by Departmental Representative.
.1 .2
Examine soil report. Buried services: .1 Before commencing work establish location of buried services on and adjacent to site. .2 Arrange with appropriate authority for relocation of buried services that interfere with execution of work: pay costs of relocating services. .3 Remove obsolete buried services within 2 m of foundations: cap cut-offs. .4 Size, depth and location of existing utilities and structures as indicated are for guidance only. Completeness and accuracy are not guaranteed. .5 Prior to beginning excavation Work, notify Departmental Representative and applicable authorities having jurisdiction, establish location and state of use of buried utilities and structures. Departmental Representative and authorities having jurisdiction to clearly mark such locations to prevent disturbance during Work. .6 Confirm locations of buried utilities by careful soil hydrovac methods. .7 Maintain and protect from damage, water, sewer, gas, electric, telephone and other utilities and structures encountered. .8 Where utility lines or structures exist in area of excavation, obtain direction of Departmental Representative before re-routing. .9 Record location of maintained, re-routed and
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 6 2011-05-27
abandoned underground lines. .10 Confirm locations of recent excavations adjacent to area of excavation. .3 Existing buildings and surface features: .1 Conduct, with Departmental Representative, condition survey of existing buildings, trees and other plants, lawns, fencing, service poles, wires, rail tracks, pavement, survey bench marks and monuments which may be affected by Work. .2 Protect existing buildings and surface features from damage while Work is in progress. In event of damage, immediately make repair as directed by Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Type 1 and Type 2 fill: properties to Section 31 05 16 and the following requirements: .1 Crushed, pit run or screened stone, gravel or sand. .2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.2.
.3 Sieve Designation 75 mm 50 mm 37.5 mm 25 mm 19 mm 12.5 mm 9.5 mm 4.75 mm 2.00 mm 0.425 mm 0.180 mm 0.075 mm .2
Table: % Passing Type 1 100 75-100 50-100 30-70 20-45 10-25 3-8 Type 2 100 22-85 5-30 0-10
Type 3 fill: selected material from excavation or other sources, approved by Departmental Representative for use intended, unfrozen and free from rocks larger than 75 mm, cinders, ashes, sods, refuse or other

deleterious materials.
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 7 2011-05-27
.3
Granular material: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1010 for: .1 Granular A, maximum size 19.0 mm. .2 Granular B, Type II, maximum size 26.5 mm. .3 Granular M, maximum size 13.2 mm. Sand: clean, washed, minimum 100% passing 4.75 mm sieve, maximum 5% passing 0.075 mm sieve to OPSS 1004.05.04, November 2006. Drainage material: 19 mm crushed stone or 19 to 63 mm clean gravel to OPSS 1004.05.07, November 2006. Unshrinkable fill: proportioned and mixed to provide: .1 Maximum compressive strength of 0.4 MPa at 28 days. .2 Maximum cement content of 25 kg/m : to CAN/CSA-A3001, Type GU. .3 Minimum strength of 0.07 MPa at 24 h. .4 Concrete aggregates: to CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2. .5 Portland Cement: Type 10. .6 Slump: 160 to 200 mm. Culvert: to CSA G401, 2 mm, corrugated steel, round, galvanized with Z610 zinc coating designation to ASTM A653/A653M.
.4
.5
.6
.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SITE PREPARATION
.1
Remove obstructions, ice and snow, from surfaces to be excavated within limits indicated.
.2
Cut pavement or sidewalk neatly along limits of proposed excavation in order that surface may break evenly and cleanly.
3.2 PREPARATION/ PROTECTION
.1
Protect existing features in accordance with Section 01 56 00 and applicable local regulations. Keep excavations clean, free of standing water, and loose soil. Where soil is subject to significant volume change due to change in moisture content, cover and protect to
.2
.3
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 8 2011-05-27
Departmental Representative approval. .4 Protect natural and man-made features required to remain undisturbed. Unless otherwise indicated or located in an area to be occupied by new construction, protect existing trees from damage.
Protect buried services that are required to remain undisturbed.
.5
.1
Begin topsoil stripping of areas as directed by Departmental Representative after area has been cleared of brush, weeds and grasses and removed from site. Strip topsoil to depths as directed by Departmental Representative. .1 Do not mix topsoil with subsoil. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. .1 Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m and should be protected from erosion. Dispose of unused topsoil to location as directed by Departmental Representative off site.
.2
.3
.4
3.4 STOCKPILING
.1
Stockpile fill materials in areas designated by Departmental Representative. .1 Stockpile granular materials in manner to prevent segregation. Protect fill materials from contamination.
.2
.3
Implement sufficient erosion and sediment control measures to prevent sediment release off construction boundaries and into water bodies.
3.5 COFFERDAMS, SHORING, BRACING AND UNDERPINNING
.1
Maintain sides and slopes of excavations in safe condition by appropriate methods and in accordance with Health and Safety Act for the Province of Ontario. .1 Where conditions are unstable, Departmental Representative to verify and advise methods.

.2
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 9 2011-05-27
Obtain permit from authority having jurisdiction for temporary diversion of water course. Construct temporary Works to depths, heights and locations as directed by Departmental Representative. During backfill operation: .1 Unless otherwise indicated or directed by Departmental Representative, remove sheeting and shoring from excavations. .2 Do not remove bracing until backfilling has reached respective levels of such bracing. .3 Pull sheeting in increments that will ensure compacted backfill is maintained at elevation at least 500 mm above toe of sheeting.
When sheeting is required to remain in place, cut off tops at elevations as indicated.
.3
.4
.5
.6
Upon completion of substructure construction: .1 Remove cofferdams, shoring and bracing. .2 Remove excess materials from site and restore water courses as indicated and as directed by Departmental Representative.
3.6 DEWATERING AND HEAVE PREVENTION
.1
Keep excavations free of water while Work is in progress. Provide for Departmental Representative's review details of proposed dewatering or heave prevention methods, including dikes, well points, and sheet pile cut-offs. Avoid excavation below groundwater table if quick condition or heave is likely to occur. .1 Prevent piping or bottom heave of excavations by groundwater lowering, sheet pile cut-offs, or other means.
Protect open excavations against flooding and damage due to surface run-off.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Dispose of water in manner not detrimental to public and private property, or portion of Work completed or under construction. Provide and maintain temporary drainage ditches .1 and other diversions outside of excavation limits.
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.7 EXCAVATION
.1
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 10 2011-05-27
Advise Departmental Representative at least 7 days in advance of excavation operations for initial cross sections to be taken. Excavate to lines, grades, elevations and dimensions as directed by Departmental Representative. Excavation must not interfere with bearing capacity of adjacent foundations.
Do not disturb soil within branch spread of trees or shrubs that are to remain. .1 If excavating through roots, excavate by hand and cut roots with sharp axe or saw. For trench excavation, unless otherwise authorized by Departmental Representative in writing, do not excavate more than 30 m of trench in advance of installation operations and do not leave open more than 15 m at end of day's operation.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Keep excavated and stockpiled materials safe distance away from edge of trench as directed by Departmental Representative.
Restrict vehicle operations directly adjacent to open trenches. Dispose of surplus and unsuitable excavated material off site.
.7
.8
.9
Do not obstruct flow of surface drainage or natural watercourses.

Earth bottoms of excavations to be undisturbed soil, level, free from loose, soft or organic matter.
.10
.11
Notify Departmental Representative when bottom of excavation is reached. Obtain Departmental Representative approval of completed excavation. Remove unsuitable material from trench bottom including those that extend below required elevations to extent and depth as directed by Departmental Representative. Correct unauthorized over-excavation as follows: .1 Fill under bearing surfaces and footings with Type 2 fill compacted to not less than 100% of Standard Proctor maximum dry density. .2 Fill under other areas with Type 2 fill compacted to not less than 95% of Standard Proctor maximum dry density.
.12
.13
.14

.15
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 11 2011-05-27
Hand trim, make firm and remove loose material and debris from excavations. .1 Where material at bottom of excavation is disturbed, compact foundation soil to density at least equal to undisturbed soil. .2 Clean out rock seams and fill with concrete mortar or grout to approval of Departmental Representative. Install geotextiles as directed by Departmental Representative.
.16
3.8 FILL TYPES AND COMPACTION
.1
Use types of fill as indicated or specified below. Compaction densities are percentages of maximum densities obtained from ASTM D698. .1 Exterior side of perimeter walls: use Type 3 fill to subgrade level. Compact to 95% of maximum dry density. .2 Within building area: use Type 2 to underside of base course for floor slabs. Compact to 100% of maximum dry density. .3 Under concrete slabs: provide 150 mm compacted thickness base course of Type 1 fill to underside of slab. Compact base course to 100%. .4 Retaining walls: use Type 2 fill to subgrade level on high side for minimum 500 mm from wall and compact to 95%. For remaining portion, use Type 3 fill compacted to 95%. .5
Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated.
3.9 BEDDING AND SURROUND OF UNDERGROUND SERVICES
.1
Place and compact granular material for bedding and surround of underground services as indicated and as specified in Sections 33 11 18, 33 31 13 and 33 44 01.
.2
Place bedding and surround material in unfrozen condition.
3.10 BACKFILLING
.1 Do not proceed with backfilling operations until completion of following: .1 Departmental Representative has inspected and approved installations. .2 Departmental Representative has inspected and
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 12 2011-05-27
approved of construction below finish grade. .3 Inspection, testing, approval, and recording location of underground utilities. .4 Removal of concrete formwork. .5 Removal of shoring and bracing; backfilling of voids with satisfactory soil material. .2 Areas to be backfilled to be free from debris, snow, ice, water and frozen ground.
Do not use backfill material which is frozen or contains ice, snow or debris.
.3
.4
Place backfill material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades indicated. Compact each layer before placing succeeding layer. Backfilling around installations:
.5
.1 Place bedding and surround material as specified elsewhere. .2 Do not backfill around or over cast-in-place concrete within 24 hours after placing of concrete. .3 Place layers simultaneously on both sides of installed Work to equalize loading. .4 Where temporary unbalanced earth pressures are liable to develop on walls or other structures: .1 Permit concrete to cure for minimum 14 days or until it has sufficient strength to withstand earth and compaction pressure and approval obtained from Departmental Representative or: .2 If approved by Departmental Representative, erect bracing or shoring to counteract unbalance, and leave in place until removal is approved by Departmental Representative. .6 .7 Place unshrinkable fill in areas as indicated.
Consolidate and level unshrinkable fill with internal vibrators.
3.11 RESTORATION
.1
Upon completion of Work, remove waste materials and debris in accordance to Section 01 74 20, trim slopes, and correct defects as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
Replace topsoil as directed by Departmental Representative.

.3
Sect 31 23 33.01 Page 13 2011-05-27
Reinstate lawns to elevation which existed before excavation. Reinstate pavements disturbed by excavation to thickness, structure and elevation which existed before excavation.
Clean and reinstate areas affected by Work as directed by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit GEOTEXTILES Section 31 32 21 Millhaven Institution Page 1 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
During delivery and storage, protect geotextiles from direct sunlight, ultraviolet rays, excessive heat, mud, dirt, dust, debris and rodents.
.1
Geotextiles placed in the work will be measured in square meters as indicated on the Unit Price Table.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIAL
.1
Geotextile: non-woven synthetic fibre fabric, supplied in rolls.

Seams: sewn or lapped inaccordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Thread for sewn seams: equal or better resistance to chemical and biological degration than geotextile.
.2
.3
.4
Physical properties: .1 Thickness: to CAN/CGSB-148.1-M85, number 3 minimum 3.5 mm. .2 Mass per unit area: to CAN/CGSB-148.1-M85, number 2, minimum 375 g/m. .3 Tensile strength and elongation: to CAN/CGSB-4.2-90, method 9.2. .1 Tensile strength: minimum 690 N, wet condition. .2 Seam strength: equal to or greater than tensile strength of fabric. .3 Mullen burst strength: to CAN/CGSB-4.2-M88, method 11.1, minimum 2.2 kPa, wet condition.
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit GEOTEXTILES Section 31 32 21 Millhaven Institution Page 2 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
.1
Place geotextile material along the side of existing shoreline as indicated on the drawing. Place geotextile material smooth and free of tension stress, folds, wrinkles and creases.
.2
.3
Overlap each successive strip of geotextile 500 mm over previously laid strip. Join successive strips of geotextile by sewing. Protect geotextile material from displacement and damage during placement of filter stone material. Replace damaged or deteriorated geotextile.
.4 .5
.6
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit GRANULAR BASE Section 32 11 20 Millhaven Institution Page 1 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27______
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Granular base course will be measured in tonnes of aggregate incorporated into the work. Hauling granular sub-base course material will be measured in tonne-kilometres, computed by taking the product of the number of tonnes of material acceptably placed and the haul distance in kilometres and fractions thereof. The haul distance will be measured along the shortest route determined by the Departmental Representative as being feasible and satisfactory. Water for compaction will be measured in 1000 litre units for water authorized by the Departmental Representative and acceptably applied. Water used on access roads will not be measured for payment. Compaction and water for compaction are considered included in the producing and placing and will not be measured separately for payment.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Granular A: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 01010, April 2004. Maximum size Granular A is 19.0 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING
.1
Place on a clean surface, properly shaped and compacted and free from snow or ice.
.2
Place material in layers not exceeding 75 mm when compacted. Spread each layer uniformly using approved grading equipment and methods.
.3
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit GRANULAR BASE Section 32 11 20 Millhaven Institution Page 2 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27______
3.2 COMPACTING
.1
Compact each layer to minimum 100% Standard Proctor Density. Add water as required to maintain material at or near optimum moisture content while compacting.
.2
3.3 FINISHING
.1
Finish compacted surface to within 12 mm of established grade as indicated by a 3 m straightedge placed in any direction Correct irregularities greater than 12 mm by loosening the surface and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.
.2
.1
The Departmental Representative may perform field and laboratory tests for control of moisture, density and aggregate gradation. Results will control Contractor's operations.
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit GRANULAR SUB-BASE Section 32 11 24 Millhaven Institution Page 1 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27 PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Granular sub-base course will be measured in tonnes of aggregate incorporated into the work. Hauling granular sub-base course material will be measured in tonne-kilometres, computed by taking the product of the number of tonnes of material acceptably placed and the haul distance in kilometres and fractions thereof. The haul distance will be measured along the shortest route determined by the Departmental Representative as being feasible and satisfactory. Water for compaction will be measured in 1000 litre units for water authorized by the Departmental Representative and acceptably applied. Water used on access roads will not be measured for payment. Compaction and water for compaction are considered included in the producing and placing and will not be measured separately for payment.
.2
.3
.4
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Granular B: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1010, April 2004. Maximum size Granular B Type 1, is 26.5 mm.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACING
.1
Place on a clean surface, properly shaped and compacted and free from snow or ice.
.2
Place material in layers not exceeding 75 mm when compacted. Spread each layer uniformly using approved grading equipment and methods.
.3
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit GRANULAR SUB-BASE Section 32 11 24 Millhaven Institution Page 2 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27
3.2 COMPACTING
.1
Compact each layer to minimum 100% Standard Proctor Density. Add water as required to maintain material at or near optimum moisture content while compacting.
.2
3.3 FINISHING
.1
Finish compacted surface to within 12 mm of established grade as indicated by a 3 m straightedge placed in any direction Correct irregularities greater than 12 mm by loosening the surface and adding or removing material until surface is within specified tolerance.
.2
.1
The Departmental Representative may perform field and laboratory tests for control of moisture, density and aggregate gradation. Results will control Contractor's operations.
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit ASPHALT TACK COAT Section 32 12 15 Millhaven Institution Page 1 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SAMPLES
.1
Make samples of the materials available to the Departmental Representative.
1.2 PROTECTION
.1
Exclude traffic until tack coat has cured.
1.3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS
.1
Apply tack coat when air temperatures are 10C or higher. Do not apply when weather is foggy or rainy. Apply tack coat within the temperature ranges recommended by the Canadian General Standards Board for the material supplied.
.2 .3
.1
Asphalt tack coat will be measured in litres at 15C of diluted emulsified asphalt actually applied.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Asphalt material: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1103, November 2007 for slow setting type, grade SS-1.
2.2 EQUIPMENT
.1
Pressure distributer: .1 Distributer shall be so designed, equipped, maintained, and operated that the asphalt material at even heat may be applied uniformly on variable widths of surface up to 4.5 m at readily determined and controlled rates from 0.23 to 9 L/m, with uniform pressure, and with an allowable variation from any specified rate not to exceed 0.09 L/m. .2 Distributer equipment shall include a tachometer, pressure gauges, accurate volume measuring
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit ASPHALT TACK COAT Section 32 12 15 Millhaven Institution Page 2 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27
devices or a calibrated tank, and a thermometer for measuring temperatures of tank contents. .3 Equip distributers with a power unit for the pump, and full circulation spray bar, adjustable laterally and vertically.
.2
Rotary power broom: self-propelled, pneumatic tired units, capable of vertical and horizontal angular adjustment, and of sufficient power and brushing capacity to completely clean the surface to be treated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Clean all surfaces to be treated immediately prior to application of tack coat.
.2
Paint contact surfaces of curbs, gutters, headers, manholes and like structures with a thin, uniform coat of asphaltic material.
3.2 APPLICATION
.1
Apply asphalt material at a rate of 0.5 L/m of surface or as directed by the Departmental Representative. Exercise care in controlling the drying or curing period so that coating reaches a tacky or sticky condition before placing asphaltic pavement mixtures.
.2
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit ASPHALTIC CONCRETE Section 32 12 17 Millhaven Institution PAVING Page 1 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 PROTECTION
.1
Protect buildings, landscaping, roads, driveways, sidewalks, trees and shrubs on site and adjacent property that may be damaged by paving machinery, equipment or personnel. Make good property damaged due to paving operations. Take necessary precautions to protect workmen and public from hazards of paving operations. Keep vehicular traffic off newly paved areas until paving properly cured. Provide access to building at all times. Arrange paving schedule so as not to interfere with normal use of premises.
.2
.3
.4
.1
Excavation will be measured in cubic metres of materials encountered of whatever nature position. Granular sub-base will be measured in tonnes of aggregate incorporated into the work.
Granular base will be measured in tonnes of aggregate incorporated into the work. Crushed rock screenings will be measured in tonnes of aggregate incorporated into the work. Compaction is considered included in the supplying and placing of aggregates and will not be measured separately for payment. Asphalt base course will be measured by the tonne used and accepted in the work.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
Asphalt surface course will be measured by the tonne used and accepted in the work. Primer is considered included in the asphalt base course and will not be measured separately for payment.
Cleaning pavement surfaces will be measured in square metres of surface cleaned.
.8
.10
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit ASPHALTIC CONCRETE Section 32 12 17 Millhaven Institution PAVING Page 2 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1
Asphalt base course: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1150, November 2010 for type [HL 8. Maximum size aggregate 26.5 mm. Asphalt surface course: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1150, November 2010 for type HL 3. Maximum size aggregate 16.0 mm.
.2
.3
Primer: emulsified asphalt to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1103, November 2007 for rapid setting type. Granular base: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular A. Maximum size 19.0 mm. Granular sub-base: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular B. Maximum size 26.5 mm. Crushed rock screenings: to Ontario Provincial Standard Specification OPSS 1010, April 2004 for Granular M. Maximum size 9.5 mm.
.4
.5
.6
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING
.1
Remove dust, contaminants, loose and foreign materials, oil and grease in designated areas.
Use rotary power brooms supplemented by hand brooming as required.
.2
.3
Where directed, remove to existing pavement level, sealing compound which has protruded excessively and dispose of removed material as directed. Keep drainage system clear of loose and waste materials.
.4
3.2 EXCAVATING
.1 .2
Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated or required for construction of work. Make excavation to clean lines to minimize quantity of fill material required.
.3 Earth bottoms of excavations to be dry undisturbed soil, reasonably level, free from loose or organic matter.
3.3 INSPECTION
.1
Check graded subgrade for conformity with elevations and cross-sections before placing granular sub-base and granular base material. Proof-roll subgrade, sub-base and base surface with mass and type of roller approved by Departmental Representative. .1 Check for unstable areas. .2 Check for areas requiring additional compaction.
Notify Departmental Representative of unsatisfactory conditions. Do not begin paving work until such conditions have been corrected and are ready to receive paving.
.2
.3
.4
.5
When complete, have Departmental Representative inspect excavations to verify soil bearing capacity, depths and dimensions. Excavation, beyond limits shown on drawings, if authorized in writing by Departmental Representative, will be paid for as extra to Contract price in accordance with General Conditions. Quantities will be calculated in place, compaction included. Truck load measurements not acceptable.
Correct unauthorized excavation at no extra cost by filling with Granular A material.
.6
.7
3.4 [GRANULAR SUB[AND] [GRANULAR BASE]
.1
Place 200 mm (for asphalt type 1) and 300 mm (for asphalt type 2) compacted thickness of granular sub-base. Place 150 mm compacted thickness of granular base. Place in layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. Compact each layer to 100 % Standard Proctor Density.
.2 .3
3.5 ASPHALT COURSE
.1 .2
Apply primer at approximately 0.5 L/m. Place 50 mm (asphalt type 2) of compacted asphaltic concrete base course.
.3 Place 50 mm ( for both, asphalt type 1 and asphalt type 2) of compacted asphaltic concrete surface course. Minimum 7C air temperature when placing mixture. Minimum 118C mixture temperature when spread. Maximum 149C mixture temperature at any time.
Compact each course with roller when it can support roller mass without undue cracking or displacement.
.4 .5 .6 .7
.8
Roller, power driven, minimum mass 9 tonnes, minimum wheel width 600 mm.
Roll until roller marks are eliminated. Compact to 96 % laboratory density.
.9
.10
Keep roller speed slow enough to avoid mixture displacement. Moisten roller wheels to prevent mixture adhesion.
Compact mixture with hot tampers in areas inaccessible to roller.
.11 .12
.13
Finish surface true to grade and free from deviations exceeding 1:1000 when measured in any direction with a 3 m straight edge.
3.6 JOINTS
.1
Cut back bituminous course to full depth in straight or curved lines as required to expose fresh vertical surfaces. Remove any broken or loose material.
.2
Paint exposed edge of asphaltic joints, edges of manholes and catchbasin frames, curbs and similar items with asphalt primer prior to placing asphalt courses. Where paving comprises two courses overlap longitudinal joints not less than 600 mm. Carefully place and compact hot asphaltic material against joints.
.3
.4
TOPSOIL PLACEMENT AND GRADING
Section 32 91 19.13 Page 1 2011-05-27
1.1 REFERENCES
.1
Agriculture and Agri-Food Canada .1 The Canadian System of Soil Classification, Third Edition, 1998. Canadian Council of Ministers of the Environment .1 PN1340-2005, Guidelines for Compost Quality.
.2
1.2 DEFINITIONS
.1 Compost: .1 Mixture of soil and decomposing organic matter used as fertilizer, mulch, or soil conditioner. .2 Compost is processed organic matter containing 40% or more organic matter as determined by Walkley-Black or Loss On Ignition (LOI) test. .3 Product must be sufficiently decomposed (i.e. stable) so that any further decomposition does not adversely affect plant growth (C:N ratio below (25) (50)), and contain no toxic or growth inhibiting contaminates. .4 Composed bio-solids to: CCME Guidelines for Compost Quality, Category (A) (B).
.1
Pre-installation meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, installation instructions and warranty requirements.
.1
.2
Divert unused soil amendments from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused soil amendments into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.3
Section 32 91 19.13 Page 2 2011-05-27
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TOPSOIL
.1 Topsoil for seeded areas: mixture of particulates, micro organisms and organic matter which provides suitable medium for supporting intended plant growth. .1 Soil texture based on The Canadian System of Soil Classification, to consist of 20 to 70% sand, minimum 7% clay, and contain 2 to 10% organic matter by weight. .2 Contain no toxic elements or growth inhibiting materials. .3 Finished surface free from: .1 Debris and stones over 50 mm diameter. .2 Course vegetative material, 10 mm diameter and 100 mm length, occupying more than 2% of soil volume. .4 Consistence: friable when moist.
2.2 SOIL AMENDMENTS

.1 Fertilizer: .1 Fertility: major soil nutrients present in following amounts: .2 Nitrogen (N): 20 to 40 micrograms of available N per gram of topsoil. .3 Phosphorus (P): 40 to 50 micrograms of phosphate per gram of topsoil. .4 Potassium (K): 75 to 110 micrograms of potassium per gram of topsoil. .5 Calcium, magnesium, sulfur and micro-nutrients present in balanced ratios to support germination and/or establishment of intended vegetation. .6 Ph value: 6.5 to 8.0. Peat moss: .1 Derived from partially decomposed species of Sphagnum Mosses. .2 Elastic and homogeneous, brown in colour. .3 Free of wood and deleterious material which could prohibit growth. .4 Shredded particle minimum size: 5 mm. Sand: washed coarse silica sand, medium to course textured.
.2
.3
.4
Organic matter: compost Category A, in accordance with CCME PN1340, unprocessed organic matter, such as rotted manure, hay, straw, bark residue or sawdust, meeting
Section 32 91 19.13 Page 3 2011-05-27
the organic matter, stability and contaminant requirements. .5

Use composts meeting Category B requirements for land fill reclamation and large scale industrial applications.
.6
Limestone: .1 Ground agricultural limestone. .2 Gradation requirements: percentage passing by weight, 90% passing 1.0 mm sieve, 50% passing 0.125 mm sieve. Fertilizer: industry accepted standard medium containing nitrogen, phosphorous, potassium and other micro-nutrients suitable to specific plant species or application or defined by soil test.
.7
.1
Advise Departmental Representative of sources of topsoil and manufactured topsoil to be utilized with sufficient lead time for testing. Contractor is responsible for amendments to supply topsoil as specified.
Soil testing by recognized testing facility for PH, P and K, and organic matter.
.2
.3
.4
Testing of laboratory .1 Soil accordance
topsoil will be carried out by testing designated by Departmental Representative. sampling, testing and analysis to be in with Provincial standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
.1
Strip topsoil to depths as directed by Departmental Representative. Avoid mixing topsoil with subsoil where textural .1 quality will be moved outside acceptable range of intended application. Stockpile in locations as directed by Departmental Representative. .1 Stockpile height not to exceed 2 m.
.2

.3
Section 32 91 19.13 Page 4 2011-05-27
Disposal of unused topsoil is to be in an environmentally responsible manner but not used as landfill as directed by Departmental Representative.
Protect stockpiles from contamination and compaction.
.4
3.2 PREPARATION OF EXISTING GRADE
.1
Verify that grades are correct. .1 If discrepancies occur, notify Departmental Representative and do not commence work until instructed by Departmental Representative.
Grade soil, eliminating uneven areas and low spots, ensuring positive drainage.
.2
.3
Remove debris, roots, branches, stones in excess of 50 mm diameter and other deleterious materials. .1 Remove soil contaminated with calcium chloride, toxic materials and petroleum products. .2 Remove debris which protrudes more than 75 mm above surface. .3 Dispose of removed material off site.
.4
Cultivate entire area which is to receive topsoil to minimum depth of 100 mm. .1 Cross cultivate those areas where equipment used for hauling and spreading has compacted soil.
3.3 PLACING AND SPREADING OF TOPSOIL/PLANTING SOIL
.1
Place topsoil after Departmental Representative has accepted subgrade. Spread topsoil in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm.
.2 .3
For sodded areas keep topsoil 15 mm below finished grade. Spread topsoil to following minimum depths after settlement. .1 150 mm for seeded areas. .2 135 mm for sodded areas. .3 300 mm for flower beds. .4 500 mm for shrub beds.
Manually spread topsoil/planting soil around trees, shrubs and obstacles.
.4
.5
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.4 FINISH GRADING
.1
Section 32 91 19.13 Page 5 2011-05-27
Grade to eliminate rough spots and low areas and ensure positive drainage. .1 Prepare loose friable bed by means of cultivation and subsequent raking.
.2
Consolidate topsoil to required bulk density using equipment approved by Departmental Representative. .1 Leave surfaces smooth, uniform and firm against deep footprinting.
3.5 ACCEPTANCE
.1 Departmental Representative will inspect and test topsoil in place and determine acceptance of material, depth of topsoil and finish grading.
3.6 SURPLUS MATERIAL
.1
Dispose of materials except topsoil not required where directed by Departmental Representative off site.
3.7 CLEANING
.1 .2
Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11. Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 1 2011-05-27
.1 .2
Section 31 22 13 - Rough Grading. Section 32 91 19.13 - Topsoil Placement and Grading
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
Canadian Nursery Landscape Association (CNLA) Canadian Standards for Nursery Stock, 8th .1 Edition, 2006.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
.1
Product Data. Submit product data in accordance with Section .1 01 33 00. .2 Provide product data for: .1 Seed. .2 Mulch. .3 Tackifier. .4 Fertilizer. .3 Submit in writing to Departmental Representative seven days prior to commencing work: .1 Volume capacity of hydraulic seeder in litres. .2 Amount of material to be used per tank based on volume. .3 Number of tank loads required per hectare to apply specified slurry mixture per hectare.
.1
Test Reports: certified test reports showing compliance with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. Certificates: product certificates signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and criteria and physical requirements. Pre-Installation Meetings: conduct pre-installation meeting to verify project requirements, installation instructions and warranty requirements.
.2
.3
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 1.5 SCHEDULING
.1
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 2 2011-05-27
Schedule hydraulic seeding to coincide with preparation of soil surface.

Schedule hydraulic seeding using grass mixtures and mixtures containing Crownvetch or Trefoil between dates recommended by the Provincial Agricultural Department.
.2
.1
.2
Divert unused fertilizer from landfill to official hazardous material collections site approved by Departmental Representative. Do not dispose of unused fertilizer into sewer systems, into lakes, streams, onto ground or in locations where it will pose health or environmental hazard.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 Seed Type 1: "Canada Certified seed, Canada No.1 Lawn Grass Mixture in accordance with Government of Canada Seeds Act and Regulations and having a minimum germination of 75 % and minimum purity of 97 %. .1 Grass mixture .1 .2 .3 .4
.2
seed mixture: Low maintenance seed 35 30 25 10 % % % % Creeping Red Fescue Turf Type Perennial Rye Tall Fescue Kentucky Blue Grass
Seed Type 2: "Canada Certified seed, Canada No.1 Lawn Grass Mixture in accordance with Government of Canada Seeds Act and Regulations and having a minimum germination of 75 % and minimum purity of 97 %.
Grass seed mixture: Low maintenance seed .1 mixture .1 45 % Creeping Red Fescue .2 5 % Norlea Perennial Rye .3 50 % Kentucky Blue Grass

.3
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 3 2011-05-27
Mulch: specially manufactured for use in hydraulic seeding equipment, non-toxic, water activated, green colouring, free of germination and growth inhibiting factors with following properties: .1 Type I mulch: .1 Made from wood cellulose fibre. .2 Organic matter content: 95% plus or minus 0.5%. .3 Value of pH: 6.0. .4 Potential water absorption: 900%. .2 Type II mulch: .1 Made from newsprint, raw cotton fibre and /or straw, processed to produce fibre lengths of 15 mm minimum and 25 mm maximum. Greater proportions of ingredients to be straw. Tackifier: water dilutable, liquid dispersion containing polyvinyl acetate terpolymer emulsion or colloidal polyacharide tackifier, adhering to mulch during manufacturing, non toxic and without growth or germination inhibiting factors. Water: free of impurities that would inhibit germination and growth. Fertilizer: .1 To Canada "Fertilizers Act" and "Fertilizers Regulations". .2 Complete synthetic, slow release with 35% of nitrogen content in water-insoluble form. Inoculants: inoculant containers to be tagged with expiry date.
.4
.5
.6
.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WORKMANSHIP
.1 Do not spray onto structures, signs, guide rails, fences, plant material, utilities and other than surfaces intended. Clean-up immediately, any material sprayed where not intended, to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Do not perform work under adverse field conditions such as wind speeds over 10 km/h, frozen ground or ground covered with snow, ice or standing water.
.2
.3

.4
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 4 2011-05-27
Protect seeded areas from trespass until plants are established.
.1
Fine grade areas to be seeded free of humps and hollows. Ensure areas are free of deleterious and refuse materials.
.2
Cultivated areas identified as requiring cultivation to depth of 25 mm. Ensure areas to be seeded are moist to depth of 150 mm before seeding. Obtain Departmental Representative approval of grade and topsoil depth before starting to seed.
.3
.4
3.3 FERTILIZING PROGRAM
.1
Apply fertilizer type 1 at a rate recommended by manufacturer. Apply after fine grading and prior to compaction. Mix thoroughly into upper 50 mm of topsoil.
.2 .3
Lightly water to aid the breakdown of fertilizer. Apply fertilizer 48 hours before Hydro-seeding.
3.4 PREPARATION OF SLURRY
.1
Measure quantities of materials by weight or weight-calibrated volume measurement satisfactory to Departmental Representative. Supply equipment required for this work.
Charge required water into seeder. Add material into hydraulic seeder under agitation. Pulverize mulch and charge slowly into seeder.
.2
.3
After all materials are in the seeder and well mixed, charge tackifier into seeder and mix thoroughly to complete slurry.
3.5 SLURRY
.1 .1
Hydraulic seeding equipment: Slurry tank.
96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 APPLICATION
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 5 2011-05-27
.2 Agitation system for slurry to be capable of operating during charging of tank and during seeding, consisting of recirculation of slurry and/or mechanical agitation method. .3 Capable of seeding by 50 m hand operated hoses and appropriate nozzles. .4 Tank volume to be certified by certifying authority and identified by authorities "Volume Certification Plate". .2 Slurry mixture applied per hectare. .1 Seed: Grass 300 kg. .2 Mulch: Type I 1400 to 2000 kg/Ha depending on the slope and as recommended by the supplier. .3 Tackifier: apply at the rate of 50 to 100 kg/Ha depending on the slope and as recommended by the supplier. .4 Water: Minimum 30,000 L or quantity as required to form slurry in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. .5 Fertilizer: apply at rate as recommended by the supplier.
Apply slurry uniformly, at optimum angle of application for adherence to surfaces and germination of seed. .1 Using correct nozzle for application. .2 Using hoses for surfaces difficult to reach and to control application.
.3
.4
Blend application 300 mm into adjacent grass areas or sodded areas to form uniform surfaces. Re-apply where application is not uniform.
Remove slurry from items and areas not designated to be sprayed.
.5 .6
.7
Protect seeded areas from trespass satisfactory to Departmental Representative.

Remove protection devices as directed by Departmental Representative.
.8
3.6 MAINTENANCE DURING ESTABLISHMENT PERIOD
.1
Perform following operations from time of seed application until acceptance by Departmental Representative. Grass Mixture: Repair and reseed dead or bare spots to allow .1 establishment of seed prior to acceptance. .2 Mow grass to 50 mm whenever it reaches height of 70 mm. Remove clippings which will smother grass as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 6 2011-05-27
.3 Fertilize seeded areas after 10 weeks after germination provided plants have mature true leafs in accordance with fertilizing program. Spread half of required amount of fertilizer in one direction and remainder at right angles. .4 Control weeds by mechanical or chemical means utilizing acceptable integrated pest management practices. .5 Water seeded area to maintain optimum soil moisture level for germination and continued growth of grass. Control watering to prevent washouts. .3 Legume Mixture: .1 Repair minor dead and bare spots as determined by Departmental Representative to allow establishment of seed prior to acceptance. .2 Negotiate repair of major dead and bare spots as determined by Departmental Representative in accordance with site climatic averages and recommendations of local agricultural governmental representative. .3 Water seeded areas to maintain optimum soil moisture level for germination and continued growth. Control watering to prevent washouts.
3.7 ACCEPTANCE
.1
Seeded areas will be accepted by Departmental Representative provided that: .1 Plants are uniformly established. Seeded areas are free of rutted, eroded, bare or dead spots. .2 Areas have been mown at least twice. .3 Areas have been fertilized.
Areas seeded in fall will achieve final acceptance in following spring, one month after start of growing season provided acceptance conditions are fulfilled.
.2
3.8 MAINTENANCE DURING WARRANTY PERIOD
.1
Perform following operations from time of acceptance until end of warranty period: .1 Repair and reseed dead or bare spots to satisfaction of Departmental Representative. Mow grass to 50 mm whenever it reaches height .2 of 70 mm. Remove clippings which will smother grass as directed by Departmental Representative. Mow grass minimum 2 times.
HYDRAULIC SEEDING
Sect 32 92 19.16 Page 7 2011-05-27
.3 Fertilize seeded areas in accordance with fertilizing program. Spread half of required amount of fertilizer in one direction and remainder at right angles and water in well.
3.9 CLEANING
.1
Upon completion of installation, remove surplus materials, rubbish, tools and equipment barriers.
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit MAINTENANCE HOLES AND Section 33 05 14 Millhaven Institution CATCH BASINS Page 1 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2 .3
Section 31 23 33.01: Excavating and backfilling. Section 33 44 01: Storm sewers. Section 33 31 13: Public sanitary utilty sewerage piping.
.1
Departmental Representative will inspect material at construction site.
.1
Maintenance holes and catch basins will be measured in units including frames, gratings and covers for the classes indicated on the Unit Price Table.
.2
Adjusting tops of existing maintenance holes or catch basins will be measured in units. Gratings will be measured in units supplied.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
.1 .2
Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001-08, Type 10. Water, aggregates, admixtures: to CSA-A23.109/A23.2-09, Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete. Frames, gratings, covers: to following requirements for designated materials: .1 Metal gratings and covers to bear evenly on frames. A frame with grating or cover to constitute one unit. Assemble and mark unit components before shipment. .2 Maintenance hole frames and covers: cover cast with perforations and complete with two 25 mm square lifting holes to OPSD 401.010 Nov. 2007, Type A. .3 Catch basin frames and covers: to OPSD
.3
400.010 Nov. 2007. .4 Precast maintenance holes: to OPSD 701.010 Nov. 2009 and OPSD 701.011 Nov.2009. Ladder rungs: to OPSD 405.010 Nov. 2008. Mortar: .1 Aggregate: to CSA A179-04(R2009). .2 Cement: to CAN/CSA-A3002-08. Adjustment rings: precast concrete to OPSD 704.010 Nov. 2009.
.5 .6
.7
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
.1 .2
Excavation and backfill to Section 31 23 33.01. Excavation requires approval prior to installing maintenance holes or catch basins.
3.2 CONCRETE WORK
.1 .2
Do concrete work to CSA-A23.1-09/A23.2-09. Position metal inserts to dimensions and details shown or required.
3.3 INSTALLATION
.1
Construct units to details indicated, plumb and true to alignment and grade. Complete maintenance holes as pipe laying progresses. Maximum of 3 maintenance holes behind point of pipe laying will be allowed. Pump maintenance hole excavation dry and remove soft and foreign material before placing concrete base. Set precast concrete slab on 150 mm minimum of well compacted granular A material. Set bottom section of precast unit in place. Make each successive joint watertight with approved rubber ring gaskets, mastic joint filler, cement mortar, or combination thereof. Clean surplus mortar and joint compounds from interior surface of unit as work progresses. Plug lifting holes with precast concrete plugs set in cement mortar or compound.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8 For sanitary sewers: .1 Place stub outlets and bulkheads at elevations and in positions indicated. .2 Bench to provide a smooth U-shaped channel. Side height of channel to be full diameter of sewer. Adjacent floor to be sloped at 75 mm/m. Channels to be curved smoothly. Slope invert to establish sewer grade. Installing units in existing systems: .1 Where new unit is within existing run of pipe, carefully remove existing pipe to dimensions required and install new unit as specified. .2 Make joints watertight between new unit and existing pipe. .3 Where deemed expedient to maintain service around existing pipes and when systems constructed under this project are ready to be put into operation, complete the installation with appropriate break-outs, removals, redirection of flows, blocking unused pipes or any other necessary work. Place frame and cover on top section to elevation indicated. If adjustment required use concrete ring.
Clean units of debris and foreign materials; remove fins or sharp protuberances.
.9
.10
.11
3.4 ADJUSTING TOPS EXISTING UNITS
.1
Remove existing gratings, and frames, and of store for re-use at locations designated by Departmental Representative. Sectional units: .1 Raise or lower straight walled sectional units by adding or removing precast sections as required. .2 Raise or lower tapered units by removing cone section, adding, removing, or substituting riser sections to obtain required elevation, then replace cone section. Monolithic units: .1 Raise monolithic units by roughening existing top to ensure proper bond and extend to required elevation with cast-in-place concrete. .2 Lower monolithic units with straight wall by removing concrete to elevation indicated for rebuilding. .3 When monolithic units with tapered upper section are to be lowered more than 150 mm remove concrete for entire depth of taper plus as much straight wall as necessary, then rebuild upper
.2
.3
section to required elevation with cast-in-place concrete. .4 Install additional maintenance hole ladder rungs in adjusted portion of units as required. .5 Re-use existing gratings, frames. .6 Re-set gratings and frames to required elevation on full bed of cement mortar, parge and trowel smooth.
3.5 SEALING OVER EXISTING UNITS
.1
Cut galvanized iron sheet to extend 50 mm beyond opening of existing maintenance hole or catch basin grating. Center iron sheet over existing grating and spot or stitchweld to grating.
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit WATER MAINS Section 33 11 18 Millhaven Institution Page 1 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
.1
Provide record drawings and specifications, including directions for operating valves, list of equipment required to operate valves, maintenance and operating instructions in accordance with Section 01 11 01.
1.3 SCHEDULING OF WORK
.1
Schedule work to minimize interruptions to existing services.
.2
Submit schedule of expected interruptions for approval by Departmental Representative and adhere to interruption schedule as approved by Departmental Representative.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE, JOINTS AND FITTINGS
.1
Polyvinyl chloride pressure pipe and fittings: to AWWA C900 class 150 and certified to CSA-B137.3 Polyethylene pressure pipe and fittings: to CAN/CSA-B137.1-09, type PE series 160. .1 Polyethylene to polyethylene joints: to be thermal butt fusion welded. Construction Specification for Watermain Installation in Open Cut: to OPSS 701, November 2006.
.2
.3
2.2 PIPE BEDDING MATERIALS
.1 Granular material to following requirements: .1 Crushed or screened stone, gravel or sand free from clay lumps, cementation, organic material, frozen material and other deleterious materials. .2 To OPSS 1010, April 2004, Granular M
aggregate, maximum size 19 mm. .2
Concrete required for cradles, encasement, supports and thrust blocks: 25 MPa.
2.3 PIPE DISINFECTION
.1
Sodium hypochlorite or calcium hypochlorite to ANSI/AWWA B300-10 to disinfect water mains.
.1
Provide 1 service post wrench for curb stops.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.1
Clean pipes, fittings, valves, hydrants, and appurtenances of accumulated debris and water before installation. Carefully inspect materials for defects. Remove defective materials from site.
3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
.1
Do trenching and backfilling work required to install water main and service connections.
Trench depth to provide cover over pipe of not less than 1.7 m from finished grade.
.2
.3
Do not backfill trenches until installed work has been checked and accepted by Departmental Representative and hydrostatic and leakage test results are within limits specified.
Backfill to existing grade with excavated material. Remove excess material from site.
.4
3.3 GRANULAR BEDDING
.1 .2
Place 150 mm granular bedding materials under pipe. Shape bed true to grade to provide continuous uniform bearing surface for pipe exterior.
Shape transverse depressions in bedding as required to make joints.
.3
.4
Compact full width of bed to at least 95% of Standard Proctor density.
.5 Place minimum 150 mm thickness of granular bedding material around sides of pipe and over top of pipe and compact as for bedding.
3.4 PIPE INSTALLATION
.1
Lay and join pipes to manufacturer's standard instructions and specifications. Handle pipe by approved methods. Do not use chains or cables passed through pipe bore so that weight of pipe bears on pipe ends. Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade. Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed throughout its full length. Take up and replace defective pipe. Correct pipe which is not in true alignment or grade or pipe which shows undue settlement after installation. Face socket ends of pipe in direction of laying. For mains on a grade of 2% or greater, face socket ends up-grade. Do not exceed permissible deflection at joints as recommended by pipe manufacturer. Keep jointing materials and installed pipe free of dirt and water and other foreign materials. Whenever work is stopped, install a removable watertight bulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry of foreign materials. Position and join pipes with equipment and methods approved by Departmental Representative. Cut pipes in an approved manner as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its coating and to leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Align pipes carefully before jointing. Install gaskets to manufacturer's recommendations. Support pipes with hand slings as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. Gaskets so disturbed or contaminated shall be removed, cleaned, lubricated and replaced before jointing is attempted again. Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9 .10
.11
.12
.13 Ensure completed joints are restrained by compacting bedding material alongside and over installed pipes or as otherwise approved by Departmental Representative. Do not lay pipe on frozen bedding. Leave joints and fittings exposed for hydrostatic and leakage testing unless otherwise approved by Departmental Representative.
.14 .15
3.5 SERVICE CONNECTION
.1
Terminate building service at location indicated opposite point of connection to main. Install coupling necessary for connection to building plumbing. If plumbing is already installed, make connection, otherwise cap or seal end of pipe and place temporary marker to locate pipe end. Do not install service connections until satisfactory completion of hydrostatic and leakage tests of water main. Construct service connections at right angles to watermain unless otherwise directed. Locate curb stops 300 mm inside service connection.
Tappings on PVC pipe to be either PVC valve tees or bronze type service clamps, strap type with "O" ring seal cemented in place.
.2
.3
.4
.5
Tappings for PE pipe shall be PE tapping tees or multi-saddle tees. Tap main at 2:00 o'clock or 10:00 o'clock position only; not closer to a joint nor closer to adjacent service connections than recommended by manufacturer, or 1 m, whichever is greater. Install rigid stainless steel liners in small diameter plastic pipes with compression fittings. Install curb stop with corporation box on services NPS 2 or less in diameter. Set box plumb over stop and adjust top flush with final grade elevation. Leave curb stop valves fully closed.
.6
.7
.8
3.6
THRUST BLOCKS
.1
Place concrete thrust blocks between valves, tees, plugs, caps, bends, changes in pipe diameter, reducers, hydrants and fittings and undisturbed ground to suit pipe manufacturer's recommendations. Keep joints and couplings free of concrete.
.2
.3 Do not backfill over concrete within 24 h after placing.
3.7 HYDROSTATIC AND LEAKAGE TESTING
.1
Provide labour, equipment and materials required to perform hydrostatic and leakage tests hereinafter described.
.2
Notify Departmental Representative at least 24 h in advance of all proposed tests. Perform tests in presence of Departmental Representative. Where any section of system is provided with concrete thrust blocks, do not conduct tests until at least 2 days after placing concrete. Apply hydrostatic test pressure of kPa based on elevation of lowest point in main and corrected to elevation of test gauge, for a period of 1 h. Examine exposed pipe, joints, fittings and appurtenances while system is under pressure. Remove joints, fittings and appurtenances found defective and replace with new sound material and make watertight.
Repeat hydrostatic test until all defects have been corrected.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Apply a leakage test pressure of 1034 kPa after complete backfilling of trench, based on elevation of lowest point in main and corrected to elevation of gauge, for period of 2 h. Define leakage as amount of water supplied from water storage tank in order to maintain test pressure for 2 h. Do not exceed allowable leakage of 0.03 L/mm diameter per 300 m of pipe, including lateral connections, per hour. Locate and repair defects if leakage is greater than amount specified. Repeat test until leakage is within specified allowance for full length of watermain.
.9
.10
.11
.12
3.8 FLUSHING AND DISINFECTING
.1
Flushing and disinfecting operations shall be witnessed by Departmental Representative. Notify Departmental Representative at least 4 days in
advance of proposed date when disinfecting operations will commence. .2 Flush water mains through available outlets with a sufficient flow to produce a velocity of 1.5 m/s, within pipe for 10 min, or until foreign materials have been removed and flushed water is clear. Flushing flows shall be as follows: Flow (L/s) Minimum 38
.3
Pipe Size NPS 6 and below .4 .5
Provide connections and pumps as required. Open and close valves, hydrants and service connections to ensure thorough flushing.
When flushing has been completed to satisfaction of Departmental Representative, introduce a strong solution of chlorine into watermain and ensure that it is distributed throughout entire system.
.6
.7
Rate of chlorine application shall be proportional to rate of water entering pipe. Chlorine application to be close to point of filling water main and to occur at same time. Operate valves, hydrants and appurtenances while main contains chlorine solution. Flush line to remove chlorine solution after 24 h. Measure chlorine residuals at extreme end of pipeline being tested. Perform bacteriological tests on water main, after chlorine solution has been flushed out. Take samples daily for minimum of two days. Should contamination remain or recur during this period, repeat disinfecting procedure. Specialist contractor shall submit certified copy of test results. Take water samples at service connections, in suitable sequence, to test for chlorine residual. After adequate chlorine residual not less than 50 ppm has been obtained leave system charged with chlorine solution for 24 h. Further samples shall be taken to ensure that there is still not less than 10 ppm of chlorine residual remaining throughout system.
.8
.9
.10 .11
.12
.13
.14
UBLIC SANITARY UTILITY SEWERAGE PIPING
Section 33 31 13 Page 1 2011-05-27
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Materials and installation for gravity sewers.
.1 .2
Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. Section 31 23 33.01 - Excavating Trenching and Backfilling. Section 31 05 17 - Aggregate Materials.
.3
1.3 REFERENCES
.1 American Society for Testing and Materials International, (ASTM) .1 ASTM C14M-05a, Standard Specification for Concrete Sewer, Storm Drain and Culvert Pipe (Metric). .2 ASTM C76M-05, Standard Specification for Reinforced Concrete Culvert, Storm Drain and Sewer Pipe (Metric). .3 ASTM C136-06, Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates. .4 ASTM C443M-05a, Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe and Manholes, Using Rubber Gaskets (Metric). .5 ASTM D698-07e1, Standard Test Method for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort (600 kN-m/m). .6 ASTM D2680-01(2009), Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Composite Sewer Piping. .7 ASTM D3034-08, Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings. Canadian General Standards Board (CGSB) .1 CAN/CGSB-8.1-88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Inch Series. .2 CAN/CGSB-8.2-M88, Sieves, Testing, Woven Wire, Metric. Canadian Standards Association (CSA International) .1 CAN/CSA-A3000-03, Cementitious Materials Compendium (Consists of A5-03, A8-03, A23.5-03,
.2
.3
Section 33 31 13 Page 2 2011-05-27
A362-03, A363-03, A456.1-03, A456.2-03, A456.3-03). .1 CAN/CSA-3001, Portland Cement. .2 CAN/CSA-A257 Series-M92(R1998), Standards for Concrete Pipe. .3 CSA B1800-02, Plastic Non-pressure Pipe Compendium - B1800 Series (Consists of B181.1, B181.2, B181.3, B181.5, B182.1, B182.2, B182.4, B182.6, B182.7, B182.8 and B182.11). .1 CSA B182.1-02, Plastic Drain and Sewer Pipe and Pipe Fittings. .2 CSA B182.2-02, PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings (PSM Type). .3 CSA B182.6-02, Profile Polyethylene Sewer Pipe and Fittings for Leak-Proof Sewer Applications. .4 CSA B182.11-02, Recommended Practice for the Installation of Thermoplastic Drain, Storm, and Sewer Pipe and Fittings. .4 Department of Justice Canada (Jus) .1 Canadian Environmental Protection Act, 1999 (CEPA). Transport Canada (TC) .1 Transportation of Dangerous Goods Act, 1992 (TDGA).
.5
1.4 DEFINITIONS
.1
Pipe section is defined as length of pipe between successive manholes and/or between manhole and any other structure which is part of sewer system.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
.1
Submit shop drawings in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Indicate proposed method for installing carrier pipe for undercrossings. Submit samples in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Inform Departmental Representative at least 2 weeks prior to beginning Work, of proposed source of bedding materials and provide access for sampling. Submit manufacturer's test data and certification at least 2 weeks prior to beginning Work. Ensure certification is marked on pipe. Submit manufacturers information data sheets and instructions in accordance with Section 01 33 00.
.2
.3 .4
.5
.6 .7
Section 33 31 13 Page 3 2011-05-27
.1
.1
.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Separate for reuse and recycling and place in designated containers Steel, Metal, Plastic waste in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused concrete materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused Corrugated High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) materials from landfill for recycling as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused aggregate materials from landfill to facilit] for reuse as approved by Departmental Representative. Place materials defined as hazardous or toxic in designated containers. Handle and dispose of hazardous materials in accordance with the CEPA, TDGA, Regional and Municipal regulations. Dispose of unused asbestos cement pipe in accordance with regulations governing disposal of hazardous materials. Fold up metal banding, flatten and place in
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.10
.11
.12
.13
Section 33 31 13 Page 4 2011-05-27
designated area for recycling.
1.8 SCHEDULING
.1
Schedule Work to minimize interruptions to existing services and maintain existing sewage flows during construction.
.2
Submit schedule of expected interruptions for approval and adhere to approved schedule. Notify Departmental Representative and building manager 24 hours minimum in advance of any interruption in service.
.3
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE PIPE

.1 Non-reinforced circular concrete pipe and fittings: to CAN/CSA-A257, Class 3, designed for flexible rubber gasket joints to CAN/CSA-A257. Reinforced circular concrete pipe and fittings: to CAN/CSA-A257, strength classification 100 D, designed for flexible rubber gasket joints to CAN/CSA-A257. Lifting holes: .1 Pipe 900 mm and less diameter - no lift holes. .2 Pipe greater than 900 mm diameter - lift holes not to exceed two in a piece of pipe. .3 Provide pre-fabricated plugs to seal lift holes water tight after installation of pipe.
.2
.3
2.2 PLASTIC PIPE

.1 Type PSM Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC): to CSA-B182.2. .1 Standard Dimensional Ratio (SDR): 35. .2 Locked-in gasket and integral bell system. .3 Nominal lengths: 4 m. .1 Type PSM Poly (Vinyl) Chloride: to CSAB182.2. .2 Plastic pipe: to CSA B182.1, with push-on joints.
2.3 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
.3
Cast iron pipe: to CAN/CSA-B70, with rubber gasket push-on joints to ANSI/AWWA C111/A21.11. Fittings: to CAN/CSA-B70. Portland cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001, normal type 10.
2.4 CEMENT MORTAR
.1

.2
Section 33 31 13 Page 5 2011-05-27
Mix mortar one part by volume of cement to two parts of clean, sharp sand mixed dry. .1 Add only sufficient water after mixing to give optimum consistency for placement. .2 Do not use additives.
2.5 PIPE BEDDING AND SURROUND MATERIALS
.1
Granular material to Section 31 05 17 and following requirements: .1 Crushed or screened stone, gravel or sand. .2 Gradations to be within limits specified when tested to ASTM C136 and ASTM C117. Sieve sizes to CAN/CGSB-8.2.
.2
Table
Sieve Designation 200 mm 75 mm 50 mm 38.1 mm 25 mm 19 mm 12.5 mm 9.5 mm 4.75 mm 2.00 mm 0.425 mm 0.180 mm 0.075 mm .3
% Passing Stone/Gravel 100 65-90 35-55 10-25 0-8
% Passing Gravel/Sand 100 50-100 30 - 90 10 - 50 0-10
Concrete mixes and materials for cradles, encasement, supports: to Section 03 30 00.
.1
Type 3, in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
.1
Clean and dry pipes and fittings before installation. Obtain Departmental Representative's approval of pipes and fittings prior to installation.
.2
Section 33 31 13 Page 6 2011-05-27
3.2 TRENCHING
.1
Do trenching Work in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01. Do not allow contents of any sewer or sewer connection to flow into trench. Trench alignment and depth require approval of Departmental Representative prior to placing bedding material and pipe. Do concrete Work in accordance with Section 03 30 00. .1 Place concrete to details as directed by Departmental Representative.
.2
.3
3.3 CONCRETE BEDDING AND ENCASEMENT
.1
.2
Position pipe on concrete blocks to facilitate placing of concrete. .1 When necessary, rigidly anchor or weight pipe to prevent flotation when concrete is placed. Do not backfill over concrete within 24 hours after placing.
.3
.1 .2
Place bedding in unfrozen condition. Place granular bedding materials in uniform layer[s] not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness. Shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous, uniform bearing surface for pipe. .1 Do not use blocks when bedding pipe. Shape transverse depressions as required to suit joints. Compact each layer full width of bed to at least 95 % maximum density to ASTM D698. Fill excavation below bottom of specified bedding adjacent to manholes or structures with compacted bedding material.
.3
.4
.5
.6
3.5 INSTALLATION
.1 Lay and join pipes in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and to approval of Departmental Representative. Handle pipe using methods approved by Departmental Representative. .1 Do not use chains or cables passed through
.2
Section 33 31 13 Page 7 2011-05-27
rigid pipe bore so that weight of pipe bears upon pipe ends. .3 Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade, with pipe invert smooth and free of sags or high points. .1 Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed throughout its full length. Begin laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction with socket ends of pipe facing upgrade. Do not exceed maximum joint deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not allow water to flow through pipe during construction, except as may be permitted by Departmental Representative. Whenever Work is suspended, install removable watertight bulkhead at open end of last pipe laid to prevent entry of foreign materials. Install plastic pipe and fittings in accordance with CSA B182.11. Pipe jointing: .1 Install gaskets in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. .2 Support pipes with hand slings or crane as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. .3 Align pipes before joining. .4 Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, gravel and other foreign material. .5 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. Gaskets so disturbed shall be removed, cleaned and lubricated and replaced before joining is attempted. .6 Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe. .7 Minimize joint deflection after joint has been made to avoid joint damage. .8 At rigid structures, install pipe joints not more than 1.2 m from side of structure. .9 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is complete as outlined in manufacturer's recommendations. .10 When stoppage of Work occurs, block pipes as directed by Departmental Representative to prevent creep during down time. Plug lifting holes with pre-fabricated plugs
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
.9
.11
Section 33 31 13 Page 8 2011-05-27
approved by Departmental Representative, set in shrinkage compensating grout. .12 Cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings or closure pieces as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its coating and to leave smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe. Make watertight connections to manholes. .1 Use shrinkage compensating grout when suitable gaskets are not available. Use prefabricated saddles or field connections approved by Departmental Representative, for connecting pipes to existing sewer pipes. .1 Joints to be structurally sound and watertight.
.13
.14
3.6 PIPE SURROUND

.1 .2 Place surround material in unfrozen condition. Upon completion of pipe laying, and after Departmental Representative has inspected pipe joints, surround and cover pipes as indicated. .1 Leave joints and fittings exposed until field testing is completed. Hand place surround material in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness as indicated. Place layers uniformly and simultaneously on each side of pipe. Compact each layer from pipe invert to mid height of pipe to at least 95% maximum density to ASTM D698. Compact each layer from mid height of pipe to underside of backfill to at least 90% maximum density to ASTM D698. When field test results are acceptable to Departmental Representative, place surround material at pipe joints. Place backfill material in unfrozen condition. Place backfill material, above pipe surround in uniform layers not exceeding 150 mm compacted thickness up to grades as indicated. Under paving and walks, compact backfill to at
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
3.7 BACKFILL
.1 .2
.3
Section 33 31 13 Page 9 2011-05-27
least 95 % maximum density to ASTM D698. .1 In other areas, compact to at least 90% maximum density to ASTM D698. .4 Place unshrinkable fill in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01.
3.8 SERVICE CONNECTIONS
.1
Install pipe to CSA B182.11 and manufacturer's instructions and specifications. Maintain grade for 100 and 125 mm diameter sewers at 1 vertical to 50 horizontal unless directed otherwise by Departmental Representative. Service connections to main sewer: Departmental Representative approved saddles. .1 Do not use break-in and mortar patch-type joints. Service connection pipe: not to extend into interior of main sewer.
Make up required horizontal and vertical bends from 45 degrees bends or less, separated by straight section of pipe with minimum length of four pipe diameters. .1 Use long sweep bends where applicable.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Plug service laterals with water tight caps or plugs as approved by Departmental Representative. Place location marker at ends of plugged or capped unconnected sewer lines. .1 Each marker: 38 x 89 mm stake extending from pipe end at pipe level to 0.6 m above grade. .2 Paint exposed portion of stake red with designation SAN SWR LINE in black.
.7
3.9 FIELD TESTING

.1
Repair or replace pipe, pipe joint or bedding found defective.
.2
When directed by Departmental Representative, draw tapered wooden plug with diameter of 50 mm less than nominal pipe diameter through sewer to ensure that pipe is free of obstruction. Remove foreign material from sewers and related appurtenances by flushing with water.
.3
.15
Television and photographic inspections:
Section 33 31 13 Page 10 2011-05-27
.1 Carry out inspection of installed sewers by television camera, photographic camera or by other related means. .2 Provide means of access to permit Departmental Representative to do inspections.
_______________________________________________________________________ 96 Bed Maximum Living Unit STORM SEWERS Section 33 44 01 Millhaven Institution Page 1 Project No. R45116.001 2011-05-27
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1
Section 31 23 33.01: Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling. Section 33 05 14: Maintenance holes and catch basins.
.2
1.2 MATERIAL CERTIFICATION
.1
At least 2 weeks prior to commencing work, submit manufacturer's test data and certification that pipe materials meet requirements of this section.
1.3 SCHEDULING OF WORK
.1
Schedule work to minimize interruptions to existing services.
.2 .3
Maintain existing flow during construction. Submit schedule of expected interruptions for review and adhere to approved schedule.
.1
Make available 1 copy of manufacturer's installation instructions.
.1
Trenching and backfill will be measured under Section 31 23 33.01. Supply and installation of storm sewer including excavation and backfilling will be measured horizontally from maintenance hole to maintenance hole in metres of each pipe size and depth class indicated on the Unit Price Table.
.2
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONCRETE PIPE

.1 Non-reinforced circular concrete pipe and fittings:
to CAN/CSA- A257.1-09, designed for flexible rubber gasket joints to CAN/CSA-A257.3-09. .2 Reinforced circular concrete pipe and fittings: to CAN/CSA-A257.2-09, designed for flexible rubber gasket joints to CAN/CSA-A257.3-09. Lifting holes: .1 Pipe 900 mm and less in diameter; no lift holes. .2 Pipe greater than 900 mm in diameter; lift holes not to exceed two in a piece of pipe. .3 Provide pre-fabricated plugs to effectively seal lift holes after installation of pipe.
.3
2.2 CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE
.1
Corrugated steel pipe: to CSA G401-07.
2.3 PIPE BEDDING MATERIALS
.1 Granular material: .1 Bedding sand: natural sand or crushed rock screenings to following grading requirements: OPSS Sieve Size Percent Passing 4.75 mm 95 - 100 2.36 mm 80 - 100 1.18 mm 50 - 85 600 micrometres 25 - 60 150 micrometres 0 - 10 .2 Bedding stone: crushed stone or crushed gravel to following grading requirements:
OPSS Sieve Size 22.40 mm 16.00 mm 13.2 mm 4.75 mm 1.18 mm 300 micrometres 75 micrometres .2
Percent Passing 100 75 - 100 65 - 90 35 - 55 15 - 45 5 - 22 0 - 8
Concrete required for cradles, encasement, supports: to Section 03 30 12.
2.4 JOINT MORTAR
.1 .2
Portland cement: to CAN/CSA-A3001-08, Type 10. Mortar to consist of one part Portland cement to two parts clean sharp sand mixed with minimum
amount of water to obtain optimum consistency for use intended. Do not use additives.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1
PREPARATION
.1
Clean pipes and fittings of debris and water before installation. Carefully inspect materials for defects before installing. Remove defective materials from site.
3.2 TRENCHING AND BACKFILLING
.1
Do trenching and backfilling in accordance with Section 31 23 33.01. Trench line and depth require approval prior to placing bedding material and pipe. Water jetting of backfill under haunches of corrugated steel pipe may be permitted if recommended by manufacturer and approved by Departmental Representative.
.2 .3
3.3 CONCRETE AND ENCASEMENT
.1
Place concrete to details indicated or Bedding directed. Pipe may be positioned on concrete blocks to facilitate placing of concrete. When necessary rigidly anchor or weight pipe to prevent flotation when concrete is placed. Do not backfill over concrete within 24 hours after placing.
.2
.3
.1
Place granular bedding materials to details indicated or directed. Shape bed true to grade and to provide continuous, uniform bearing surface for barrel of pipe. Do not use blocks when bedding pipe.
Shape transverse depressions as required to receive bell if bell and spigot pipe is used.
.2
.3
.4
Compact full width of bed to at least 95% Standard Proctor Density.
.5 Use bedding stone in lieu of sand bedding material when directed. Fill excavation below bottom of specified bedding adjacent to maintenance holes or catch basins with bedding material or common backfill as directed.
.6
3.5
INSTALLATION
.1
Lay and join pipe in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
.2
Handle pipe by approved methods. Do not use chains or cables passed through rigid pipe bore so that weight of pipe bears upon pipe ends. Lay pipes on prepared bed, true to line and grade with pipe inverts smooth and free of sags or high points. Ensure barrel of each pipe is in contact with shaped bed throughout its full length. Commence laying at outlet and proceed in upstream direction with socket ends of pipe facing upgrade. Do not exceed maximum joint deflection recommended by pipe manufacturer. Do not allow water to flow through pipes during construction except as may be permitted by Departmental Representative.
Position and join pipes by approved methods. Do not use excavating equipment to force pipe sections together.
.3
.4
.5
.6
.7
.8
Joints: .1 Corrugated steel pipe: .1 Install flexible sealing rings where called for. .2 Match corrugations or indentations of coupler band with pipe sections before tightening. .3 Tap coupler firmly while tightening, to take up slack and ensure a snug fit. .4 Ensure bolts are inserted and tightened. .2 Concrete pipe: .1 Install gaskets as recommended by manufacturer. .2 Support pipe with hand slings or crane as required to minimize lateral pressure on gasket and maintain concentricity until gasket is properly positioned. .3 Align pipes carefully before joining. .4 Maintain pipe joints free from mud, silt, gravel and other foreign material.
.5 Avoid displacing gasket or contaminating with dirt or other foreign material. Remove disturbed or dirty gaskets; clean, lubricate and replace before joining is attempted. .6 Complete each joint before laying next length of pipe. .7 Minimize joint deflection after joint has been made to avoid joint damage. .8 Apply sufficient pressure in making joints to ensure that joint is complete as outlined in manufacturer's recommendations. Mortared joints: .1 Pipe interior: Circular pipes 700 mm in diameter and larger shall have interior gap between ends of adjacent pipes filled with mortar. Apply mortar a minimum 7 days after backfilling has been completed to allow pipe settlement to occur. Finish interior surface of joints smooth. .2 Pipe exterior: For bell and spigot pipe, mortar to be used for caulking outside of joints. Press and caulk mortar into place. Allow mortar to set minimum of one hour before backfilling.
.3
.9
When any stoppage of work occurs, block pipes as directed to prevent "creep" during down time. Plug lifting holes with approved prefabricated plugs set in non-shrink grout.
Cut pipes as required for special inserts, fittings or closure pieces in a neat manner, as recommended by pipe manufacturer, without damaging pipe or its coating and to leave a smooth end at right angles to axis of pipe.
.10
.11
.12
Make watertight connections to maintenance holes and catch basins. Use non-shrink grout when suitable gaskets are not available. Use prefabricated saddles or approved field connections for connecting pipes to existing sewer pipes. Joint to be structurally sound and watertight. Plug open upstream ends of pipes with removable watertight concrete, steel or wooden bulkheads.
.13
.14
CONCRETE ENCASED DUCT BANKS AND MAINTENANCE HOLES
Section 33 65 73 Page 1 2011-06-11
PART 1 - GENERAL
.1 .2
Section 26 05 28 - Grounding Secondary. Section 31 23 33 01 Excavating, Trenching and Backfilling Section 02-30-00 Cast-In-Place Concrete
.3
1.2 REFERENCES
.1
American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) ASTM A497/A497M-07, Standard Specification for .1 Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Deformed, for Concrete. .2 ASTM D1056-[07], Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. .3 ASTM A82/A82M-05a, Standard Specification for Steel Wire, Plain, for Concrete Reinforcement. .4 ASTM A185/A185M-05a, Standard Specification for Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement, Plain, for Concrete. .5 ASTM C139-05, Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch Basins and Manholes. .6 ASTM C 478/C478M-06, Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections. .7 ASTM D1056-00, Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. Canadian Standards Association (CSA) .1 CAN/CSA-A3000-08, Cementitious Materials Compendium. Includes: .1 CAN/CSA-A3001-08, Cementitious Materials for Use in Concrete. .2 CSA-A23.1-[09]/A23.2-[09], Concrete materials and methods of concrete construction/Test methods and standard practices for concrete.
.2
1.3 SHOP DRAWINGS
.1
Submit shop drawings for precast maintenance holes in accordance with Section 01 33 00. Quality assurance submittals: submit following in accordance with Section 01 45 00 - Quality Control. .1 Test reports: submit certified test reports for specified materials from approved independent testing laboratories, indicating compliance with specifications for specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .2 Certificates: submit certificates signed by
.2
Section 33 65 73 Page 2 2011-06-11
manufacturer certifying that materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical properties. .3 Manufacturer's Instructions: submit manufacturer's installation instructions and special handling criteria, installation sequence and cleaning procedures.
.1
.2
.3
Collect and separate for disposal paper, plastic, polystyrene, corrugated cardboard, packaging material [in appropriate on-site bins] for recycling in accordance with Waste Management Plan. Divert unused metal materials from landfill to metal recycling facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused and broken concrete materials from landfill to local facility as approved by Departmental Representative. Divert unused aggregate materials from landfill to facility for reuse as approved by Departmental Representative.
.4
.5
.6
.7
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PVC DUCTS
.1
PVC ducts, type EB1, encased in reinforced concrete.
2.2 PVC DUCT FITTINGS
.1
Rigid PVC opaque solvent welded type couplings, bell end fittings, plugs, caps, adaptors as required to make complete installation.
.2 .3
Expansion joints. Rigid PVC 5 degree angle couplings.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 2.3 MANHOLES
.1 .2 .3 .4

Provide type indicated.
Section 33 65 73 Page 3 2011-06-11
Top, walls, and bottom: reinforced concrete. Walls and bottom: monolithic concrete construction. Locate duct entrances and windows near corners of structures to facilitate cable racking. Covers: fit frames without play.
Form steel and iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles.
.5 .6
.7 .8
Castings: warp and blow hole free.

Exposed metal: smooth finish without sharp lines and arises.
.9 .10
Provide lugs, rabbets, and brackets. Set pulling-in irons and other built-in items in place before depositing concrete. Install pulling-in iron in wall opposite each duct line entrance.
Cable racks, including rack arms and insulators: sized to accommodate cable.
.11
.12
2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE MAINTENANCE HOLES
.1
Precast concrete maintenance holes and auxiliary sections fabricated in steel forms. Aggregates: to CAN/CSA-A23.1/A23.2. Cement CAN/CSA-A3001, Type 50. Steel welded wire fabric mesh reinforcing: to CAN/CSA-G30.18.
Pulling inserts and bolts for racks integrally cast in concrete.
.2 .3 .4
.5
.6
Neoprene gasket seals between maintenance hole sections: to ASTM D1056. Size: as shown on drawings.
.7 .8
Precast Concrete Maintenance Holes: to ASTM C478/C478M.
Section 33 65 73 Page 4 2011-06-11
2.5 DRAINAGE
.1
Floor drain fittings in each maintenance hole consisting of floor drain, back water valve, trap and pipe connection to Dry sump. Sump pit: 300 x 300 x 125 mm.
.2
2.6 MAINTENANCE HOLE NECKS
.1
Concrete brick and mortar.
2.7 MAINTENANCE HOLE FRAMES AND COVERS
.1 .2 .3
Cast iron maintenance hole frames and covers. Bolted on covers to prevent unauthorized entry. Size: 762 mm clear diameter.
2.8 GROUNDING
.1
Ground rods: in accordance with Section 26 05 28 for cable rack grounding.
2.9 CABLE RACKS
.1 .2
Hot dipped galvanized cable racks and supports. 12 x 100 mm preset inserts for rack mounting.
2.10 CABLE PULLING EQUIPMENT
.1
Pulling iron: galvanized steel rods, size and shape as indicated. Pull rope: [6] mm stranded [nylon] [polypropylene], tensile strength [5] kN, continuous throughout each duct run with [3] m spare rope at each end.
.2
2.11 MARKERS
.1
Concrete type cable markers: 600 x 600 x 100 mm, with words: "Cable", "Joint", "Conduit" impressed in top surface, with arrows to indicate change in direction of duct runs.
Section 33 65 73 Page 5 2011-06-11
.1
Install underground duct banks and maintenance holes including formwork.

Build duct bank and maintenance holes on undisturbed soil or on well compacted granular fill not less than 150 mm thick, compacted to 95% of maximum proctor dry density]. Open trench completely between maintenance holes to be connected before ducts are laid and ensure that no obstructions will necessitate change in grade of ducts. Prior to laying ducts, construct "mud slab" not less than 75 mm thick. Install ducts at elevations and with slope as indicated and minimum slope of 1 to 400.
.2
.3
.4
.5
.6
Install base spacers at maximum intervals of 1.5 m levelled to grades indicated for bottom layer of ducts. Lay PVC ducts with configuration and reinforcing as indicated with preformed interlocking, rigid plastic intermediate spacers to maintain spacing between ducts at not less than 75 mm horizontally and vertically. .1 Stagger joints in adjacent layers at least 150 mm and make joints watertight. .2 Encase duct bank with 75 mm thick concrete cover. Use galvanized steel conduit for sections extending above finished grade level.
Make transpositions, offsets and changes in direction using 5 degree bend sections, do not exceed a total of 20 degree with duct offset. Use bell ends at duct terminations in maintenance holes or buildings.
.7
.8
.9
.10
Use conduit to duct adapters when connecting to conduits.

Terminate duct runs with duct coupling set flush with end of concrete envelope when dead ending duct bank for future extension. Cut, ream and taper end of ducts in field in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, so that duct ends are fully equal to factory-made ends.
.11
.12
.13
Allow concrete to attain 50% of its specified strength

before backfilling. .14
Section 33 65 73 Page 6 2011-06-11
Use anchors, ties and trench jacks as required to secure ducts and prevent moving during placing of concrete. .1 Tie ducts to spacers with twine or other non-metallic material. .2 Remove weights or wood braces before concrete has set and fill voids.
.15
Clean ducts before laying. .1 Cap ends of ducts during construction and after installation to prevent entrance of foreign materials. Immediately after placing of concrete, pull through each duct steel mandrel not less than 300 mm long and of diameter 6 mm less than internal diameter of duct, followed by stiff bristle brush to remove sand, earth and other foreign matter. Avoid disturbing or damaging ducts where concrete has not set completely. Pull stiff bristle brush through each duct immediately before pulling-in cables.
Install four 3 m lengths of 10M reinforcing rods, one in each corner of duct bank when connecting duct to maintenance holes or buildings. .1 Wire rods to [15M] [10M] dowels at maintenance or building and support from duct spacers. .2 Protect existing cables and equipment when breaking into existing maintenance holes. .3 Place concrete down sides of duct bank filling space under and around ducts. .4 Rod concrete with flat bar between vertical rows filling voids. In each duct install pull rope continuous throughout each duct run with 3 m spare rope at each end.
.16
.17
.18
3.2 MAINTENANCE HOLES
.1 .2
Install precast maintenance holes.

Provide 115 mm deep window to facilitate cable bends in wall at each duct connection. Terminate ducts in bell-end fitting flush with window face. Provide four [10M] steel dowels at each duct run connection to anchor duct run. [On runs of 16 ducts and over, support concrete duct encasement on a [700] mm wide by [75] mm thick concrete pier poured against maintenance hole wall between slab and bottom of duct run, provide dowels for anchoring].
.3
Alternately connect large duct runs by leaving square opening in wall, later pouring duct run and wall opening in one pour, and install [10M x 3m] reinforcing rods in duct run at maintenance hole connection.

.4
Section 33 65 73 Page 7 2011-06-11
Build up concrete maintenance hole neck to bring cover flush with finished grade in paved areas and [40] mm above grade in unpaved areas. Install maintenance hole frames and covers for each maintenance hole. Set frames in concrete grout onto maintenance hole neck.
.5
.6
Drain floor towards sump with 1 to 48 slope minimum and install drainage fittings as indicated.
Install cable racks, anchor bolts and pulling irons as indicated.
.7
.8
Grout frames of maintenance holes. Cement grout to consist of two parts sand and one part cement and sufficient water to form a plastic slurry.
Ensure filling of voids in joint being sealed. Plaster with cement grout, walls, ceiling and neck. Spray paint "X" on ceiling of maintenance hole above floor drain or sump pit.
.9
.10
3.3 MARKERS
.1
Mark location of duct runs under hard surfaced areas not terminating in maintenance hole with [railway spike] driven flush in edge of pavement, directly over run. .1 Place concrete duct marker at ends of such duct runs. .2 Construct markers and install flush with grade.
Mark ducts every 150 m along straight runs and changes in direction. Where markers are removed to permit installation of additional duct, reinstall existing markers.
.2
.3
.4
Lay concrete markers flat and centered over duct with top 25 mm above earth surface. Provide drawings showing locations of markers.
.5
3.4 INSPECTIONS
.1
Inspection of duct will be carried out by Departmental Representative prior to placing. Placement of concrete and duct cleanout to be done when Departmental Representative present.
96 Bed Max. Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001 3.5 MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS
.1
Section 33 65 73 Page 8 2011-06-11
Compliance: comply with manufacturer's written recommendations or specifications, including product technical bulletins, handling, storage and installation instructions, and datasheets. Proceed in accordance with Section 01 74 11 - Cleaning. On completion and verification of performance of installation, remove surplus materials, excess materials, rubbish, tools and equipment.
3.6 CLEANING
.1 .2
INSPEC-SOL INC. 1225 Gardiners Rd., Unit 104, Kingston, Ontario, K7P 0G3, Phone: (613) 389-9812, Fax: (613) 389-5287 www.inspecsol.com
Reference No.: T030693-A1 May 4, 2011 Karen Durnford-McIntosh, P.Eng., CD, M.Sc.E. District Office Manager Real Property Professional & Technical Program Public Works and Government Services Canada Ontario Region 294 King Street East Kingston, ON K7L 3B2
RE:
Geotechnical Investigation Millhaven Institution Proposed New Maximum Security Housing Unit Millhaven, Ontario (Contract No. 700168745)
Dear Ms. Durnford-McIntosh: As requested, Inspec-Sol Inc. (Inspec-Sol) has completed the Geotechnical Investigation for the above-mentioned project. We herein offer the following comments and recommendations for the design of the proposed building structure. We trust that this information meets with your approval. Please do not hesitate to contact us, should any questions arise. Yours truly, INSPEC-SOL Inc.
Joseph B. Bennett, P.Eng. Vice president JBB/nc Enclosures Dist: 1) Ms. Durnford-McIntosh, by Email: Karen.Durnford-McIntosh@pwgsc-tpsgc.gc.cs
Reference No.: T030693-A1
TABLE OF CONTENTS 1.0 2.0 3.0 INTRODUCTION .................................................................................................1 SITE DESCRIPTION ...........................................................................................2 FIELDWORK ........................................................................................................2 3.1 4.0 Geotechnical Investigation ..........................................................................2
4BLABORATORY TESTING ..................................................................................3 4.1 4.2 Chemical Testing .........................................................................................3 Geotechnical Testing ...................................................................................3
5.0
SUBSOIL CONDITIONS .....................................................................................3 5.1 5.2 5.3 Fill................................................................................................................4 Native Clayey Silt........................................................................................4 Limestone Bedrock ......................................................................................4
6.0 7.0
GROUNDWATER.................................................................................................4 DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ...................................................5 7.1 7.2 General Considerations................................................................................5 Foundations..................................................................................................6 7.2.1 Frost Protection................................................................................6 7.2.2 General Considerations....................................................................7 Seismic Site Classifications .........................................................................7 Floor Slabs ...................................................................................................7 Permanent Drainage.....................................................................................8 Excavation and Dewatering .........................................................................8 Building Backfill..........................................................................................9 7.7.1 Engineered Fill.................................................................................9 7.7.2 Foundation Wall Backfill...............................................................10 Service Trenches........................................................................................11 7.8.1 Bedding and Cover ........................................................................11 7.9 Service Trench Backfill .................................................................11 Pavement Sections .....................................................................................12 Chemical Results of Soil Analysis ............................................................14 Construction Field Review ........................................................................14
7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7
7.8
7.10 7.11 7.12 8.0
LIMITATION OF THE INVESTIGATION ....................................................15
Reference No.: T030693-A1
ii
TABLES Table 1: Recommended Pavement Sections
Page 13
DRAWINGS Site Location Plan Borehole Location Plan T030693-A1-1 T030693-A1-2
ENCLOSURES Borehole Logs BH1 to BH12 Enclosure Nos. 1 - 12
APPENDICES Notes on Borehole and Test Pit Reports Laboratory Analytical Reports Appendix A Appendix B
Reference No. T030693-A1
1.0
INTRODUCTION
Inspec-Sol Inc. (Inspec-Sol) was retained by Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC) to undertake a Geotechnical Investigation for the proposed new Maximum Security Housing Unit to be located within the Millhaven Institution in Millhaven, ON. The authorization to proceed with this study was provided by Karen Dunford-McIntosh, District Office Manager with PWGSC. The purpose of the investigation was to evaluate the subsoil stratigraphy in the area of the proposed development in order to summarize the soil and groundwater conditions found at the borehole locations for designers, and based upon the data, provide design recommendations concerning foundation type and associated bearing capacity, floor slab, seismic site classification, drainage requirements and pavement structure. As well we have provided comments on excavation, backfill and construction field review. As part of this study, laboratory testing was carried out on selected soils samples as per Ontario Regulation (O. Reg.) 558/00 for Ministry of Environmental landfill disposal criteria. The laboratory testing results are presented in a separate letter report. This report has been prepared with the understanding that the design will be carried out in accordance with all applicable codes and standards. Any changes to the project described herein will require that Inspec-Sol be retained to assess the impact of the changes on the report recommendations provided herein. The scope of work for Inspec-Sol consisted of the following activities: Field Exploration: Advancement of a total of twelve (12) boreholes across the Site as requested by the Structural Engineers; Laboratory Testing: Submittal of six (6) samples to the laboratory for analysis of pH and sulfate concentration; and submission of soil samples for Reg. 558 (results submitted under separate letter); and Analysis and Report: Review of field results and preparation of geotechnical recommendations for design and construction of the proposed structure.
2.0
SITE DESCRIPTION
The Site is located along the northeast corner of the Millhaven Institution compound. At the time of investigation, the subject property was enclosed with a chain link fence. Surrounding the Site is a gravel track along with gravel access road and a sport field to the north. To the south is an existing building (MHU) and a paved parking area, asphalt pavement area is present to the northwest, the remaining adjacent properties are generally flat and are covered with grass surface. It is our understanding that the proposed development will consist of a two-storey building which will house 96 living units. The location of the Site is shown on the Site Location Map, Dwg. No. T030693-A1-1.
3.0 3.1
FIELDWORK Geotechnical Investigation
The geotechnical investigation program consisted of advancing twelve (12) boreholes (BH1 to BH12) across the Site. The drilling program was undertaken on April 12 and 13, 2011 by means of a track-mounted drill rig with continuous flight auger equipment. Standard Penetration Tests (SPTs) were performed at regular intervals using a 50 mm diameter split-barrel sampler and a 63.5 kg hammer free falling from a distance of 760 mm, to collect soil samples for laboratory testing. The number of drops required to drive the sampler 0.3m was recorded and is shown on the borehole logs as N value. Where applicable, the undrained shear strength of the collected samples was assessed using a pocket penetrometer. All boreholes were advanced to practical refusal (on assumed bedrock), followed by approximately 3.0m of rock coring in Boreholes BH1, BH4, BH5, BH8, BH10 and BH12 in order to confirm the existence of bedrock and comment on rock quality. Standpipe piezometers were installed as part of our scope of work. Boreholes were backfilled with auger cuttings upon the completion of the drilling. All field activities were completed under the supervision of Inspec-Sol personnel.
The elevations and locations of the boreholes were surveyed by Inspec-Sol personnel, following the completion of the investigation program. The temporary job benchmark used for surveying is described as TBM#3 Scribe on concrete fence foundation at the southwest corner of the proposed Site which has a geodetic elevation of 95.955m, as provided by the Client. The locations of the boreholes are shown on the enclosed, Dwg. No. T030693-A1-2.
4.0
4B
LABORATORY TESTING Chemical Testing
4.1
The chemical testing component of this Geotechnical Investigation consisted of the following tests. Six (6) samples were submitted to Paracel Laboratories Ltd. on April 15, 2011 under chain of custody number 83775. The samples were submitted for the parameters of sulphate and pH. The testing results were received on April 21, 2011 under order number 1117026. The Certificate of Analysis received from the laboratory can be found attached as Appendix B.
4.2
Geotechnical Testing
The geotechnical testing component of this Geotechnical Investigation consisted of the following tests. Compressive strength testing was performed on a total of four (4) rock cores. The Results of Geotechnical Laboratory Testing is discussed in Section 5.3 of this report.
5.0
SUBSOIL CONDITIONS
In general, soils encountered at the boreholes locations consisted of fill material, overlying native clayey silt, followed by limestone bedrock. General descriptions of the subsurface conditions are summarized below with detailed descriptions at each of the borehole locations provided on the Borehole Logs, Enclosures Nos. 1 to 12. Notes for the borehole logs are provided in Appendix A.
5.1
Fill
Fill was encountered at all borehole locations extending to a depth of between 0.9m (BH-1) to 2.9m (BH-8). The fill material depth and texture varies throughout the site and included sand and gravel with various portions of silts and clays with occasional cobbles and boulders. This information is solely for general planning purposes and should not be used for quantity take offs.
5.2
Native Clayey Silt
Native clayey silt was found within all boreholes except in Boreholes BH-3, BH-5, BH-8, BH11 and BH-12. The clay extended to a depth of approximately 1.3m to 2.7m below existing grade. The soil was generally brown to grey in colour, moist, with very stiff to hard consistency.
5.3
Limestone Bedrock
Limestone bedrock was encountered below the fill or clayey silt at depth of approximately 1.4m to 2.9m. The type of rock and quality was confirmed by coring in Boreholes BH-1, BH-4 BH-5, BH-8, BH-10 and BH-12. The bedrock surface was found at elevation of approximately 92.6m (BH-8) to 94.9m (BH-3). Based on retrieved core samples, the bedrock is described as having poor to excellent rock quality (Rock Quality Designation between 47% to 100%). Compressive strength testing was performed on a total of four (4) intact rock samples. The uniaxial compressive strength was found to range from approximately 96 MPa to 111 MPa. It must be emphasized that the lab results were performed in individual samples of intact bedrock, and would not reflect the properties of a weathered and fractured rock mass or areas with occasional clay infill.
6.0
GROUNDWATER
Standpipes were installed in Boreholes BH-2, BH-9 and BH-11 to measure the groundwater levels as part of the scope of work. The groundwater table ranged from 1.5m (BH-9) to 2.5m (BH-2) and BH-11 was dry. The standpipes were installed on the first day of the drilling program and hence groundwater levels were measured at the end of the first day as well as at the
beginning and end of the second day. The standpipes were subsequently decommissioned following the completion of the drilling program. It is noted that groundwater table is subject to seasonal fluctuations and in response to precipitation and snowmelt events, and is anticipated to be at its highest level during the thaw in early spring.
7.0 7.1
DISCUSSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS General Considerations
The recommendations in this report are based on Inspec-Sols understanding of the proposed development, which is described in Section 2.0. Based on the subsurface conditions encountered in the boreholes, and assuming them to be representative of the subsurface conditions across the proposed area, the following recommendations are provided. The most significant geotechnical considerations for design and construction of the proposed structure are that: The extent of the fill material and the voids encountered; Bedrock was encountered at 1.5m to 2.5m depth below existing grade or at elevation between approximately 92.6m and 94.9m at the Site; and Frost protection for foundation elements;
7.2
Foundations
Conventional spread and strip footings are considered suitable for this site. The new building codes require that buildings to be designed using limit states design values of Ultimate Limit State (ULS) and Serviceability Limit State (SLS) and to check against allowable bearing values. For this Site, two (2) options are provided: Option 1: Footings placed on competent Limestone bedrock. The bearing pressure values for the design of the building foundations for this option is 1000 kPa for the factored ULS state based on a minimum footing width of 0.6m. There is no corresponding SLS value for footings set on bedrock, as the stresses to achievable movements that approach the strain for this condition would exceed the compressive strength of the rock mass. Based upon the core information for this Site and for design purposes only, competent bedrock may be assumed to be at the top of bedrock. This will need to be confirmed during construction. The total and differential settlements for foundations supported on the limestone bedrock are expected to be nil to very minor in addition to any elastic compression of any structural foundation materials. Option 2: Footings founded on Engineered Fill over bedrock are considered adequate to support the proposed structure with a bearing pressure of 250 kPa for factored ULS and 100 kPa for SLS. This is also based on a minimum footing width of 0.6m. The estimated total settlement of footings designed on Engineered Fill with the recommended bearing values will be less than 25 mm and differential settlements between adjacent column footings are not expected to exceed 12 mm. Since Engineered Fill is a granular material, any settlement is expected to occur as the building loads are applied.
7.2.1
Frost Protection
All exterior footings associated with heated areas of the building must be provided with at least 1.2m of earth cover or its equivalent in insulation, in order to provide adequate protection against detrimental frost action. This cover depth should be increased to 1.5m for footings in unheated or stand-alone structure such as entrance canopies.
7.2.2
General Considerations
Footings set at varying levels and/or constructed adjacent to utility trenches, sump pits or similar should be constructed such that the higher footings be set at a level below an imaginary line constructed 1H:1V from the base of the lower excavation. It is recommended that Inspec-Sol be retained to complete a review for compliance with our recommendations and during construction to verify suitability of subgrade materials. During construction, verification of competent bedrock must include the contractor drilling a 30 mm to 50 mm diameter probe hole to 1.5m below footing level to allow the Geotechnical Engineer representative to evaluate for mud seams or other anomalies within the bedrock. If Inspec-Sol considers local areas of rock to be too weathered or fractured requiring Inspec-Sol to state the rock is not competent then this may lead to recommendations of deepening the footing excavation further into the bedrock.
7.3
Seismic Site Classifications
Based on the borehole program that was undertaken as part of this Geotechnical Investigation, bedrock was encountered within the sampling depths. At this point there is enough information available to assign a Site Class C according to Table 4.1.8.4.A of the Ontario Building Code (OBC-2006). If a higher Site Class is beneficial, please inform Inspec-Sol if this is required so we can discuss the available options.
7.4
Floor Slabs
Conventional slab-on-grade is considered suitable for the proposed building. The results of investigation indicate that the fill includes cobbles and boulders with the possibility of voids noted at several locations. The presence of these voids may result in differential settlement of floor slabs. Therefore the recommended approach is to remove all existing overburden materials within the footprint of the building and backfill with engineered fill placed in lifts not exceeding 200 mm thickness and compacted to at least 100% of its Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density (SPMDD). Soils should be handled, transported and disposed of in an environmentally suitable manner meeting current environmental legislation.
A capillary moisture barrier consisting of a layer of either 19 mm clear stone or Granular A at least 200 mm thick should underlie the slabs. This layer should be compacted to 100% of its Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density (SPMDD) and placed on approved subgrade surfaces. If floor coverings are to be used, vapour barriers are also recommended to be incorporated beneath the slab. Floor toppings may be impacted by curing and moisture conditions of the concrete. Floor finish manufacturers specifications and requirements should be consulted and procedures outlined in the specifications should be followed. The slabs should be free floating, and should not be tied into the foundation walls or grade beams. The placement of construction and control joints in the concrete should be in accordance with generally accepted practice.
7.5
Permanent Drainage
Under floor drains and perimeter drainage are not considered necessary for a structure with no basement and a floor slab set at a minimum of 0.3m above finished exterior grades.
7.6
Excavation and Dewatering
All excavations should be completed and maintained in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHSA) requirements. The following recommendations for excavations should be considered to be a supplement to, not a replacement of, the OHSA requirements. Based on the results of the Geotechnical Investigation, the fill and native clayey silt overburden are considered to be Type 3 soils, as defined by the OHSA Regulations for Construction. The limestone bedrock may be considered as Type 1 soil, as defined by the OHSA Regulations for Construction, if deeper excavation is expected to be penetrated for deep services. Excavations into the overburden material should be relatively straightforward with conventional excavation equipment and techniques. Occasional cobbles and boulders are anticipated on this Site. Excavations through the weathered limestone bedrock may require the use of heavy excavation equipment and hydraulic or pneumatic operated hoe rams or similar. Surface water and groundwater seepage is expected in the excavated areas, particularly at the overburden/bedrock interface. Water quantities will depend on seasonal conditions, depth of excavations, and duration in which the trench is kept open. Conventional construction
dewatering techniques and other water control measures should be taken during construction so as to prevent disturbing the subgrade soils and movement of soils in the excavation trench walls, such as pumping from sumps and or ditches.
7.7
Building Backfill
The placement and compaction of the materials that will support the footings and floor slabs must be treated as Engineered Fill. Compaction equipment must be of size and distance away to prevent damage to the walls during the time of placement.
7.7.1
Engineered Fill
The fill operations for Engineered Fill must satisfy the following criteria: Engineered Fill must be placed under continuous supervision of the Geotechnical Engineer. Prior to placing any Engineered Fill, all overburden materials must be removed. Prior to the placement of Engineered Fill, the source or borrow areas for the Engineered Fill must be evaluated for its suitability. Samples of proposed fill material must be provided to the Geotechnical Engineer and tested in the geotechnical laboratory for Standard Proctor Maximum Dry Density (SPMDD) and grain size, prior to approval of the material for use as Engineered Fill. The Engineered Fill must consist of environmentally suitable soils (as per industry standard procedures of federal or provincial guidelines/regulations), free of organics and other deleterious material (building debris such as wood, bricks, metal, and the like), compactable, and of suitable moisture content so that it is within -2% to +0.5% of the Optimum Moisture as determined by the Standard Proctor Test. Imported granular soils meeting the requirements of Granular A, Granular B Type I or Type II OPSS 1010 criteria would be suitable. The Engineered Fill must be placed in maximum loose lift thicknesses of 0.2m. Each lift of Engineered Fill must be compacted with a heavy roller to 100% SPMDD. Field density tests must be taken by the Geotechnical Engineer, on each lift of Engineered Fill. Any Engineered Fill, which is tested and found to not meet the specifications, shall be either removed or reworked and retested. The lateral extent of Engineered Fill beneath foundations should be equivalent to 1.5 D from any edge of the foundation, where D is depth of the Engineered Fill below the footings.
10
7.7.2
Foundation Wall Backfill
The backfill placed against the foundation walls should be free-draining granular materials meeting the grading requirements of OPSS 1010 for Granular B Type II specifications up to within 0.3m of the ground surface. The upper 0.3m should be a low permeable soil to reduce surface water infiltration. Foundation backfill should be placed and compacted as outlined below: Free-draining granular backfill should be used for the foundation wall; Backfill should not be placed in a frozen condition, or place on a frozen subgrade; Backfill should be placed and compacted in uniform lift thickness compatible with the selected construction equipment, but not thicker than 0.2m. Backfill should be placed uniformly on both sides of the foundation walls to avoid build-up of unbalanced lateral pressures; At exterior flush door openings the underside of sidewalks should be insulated, or the sidewalk should be placed on frost walls to prevent heaving. Granular backfill should be used and extended laterally beneath the entire area of the entrance slab. The entrance slab should slope away from he building; For backfill that would underlie paved areas, sidewalks or exterior slabs-on-grade, each lift should be uniformly compacted to at least 98% of its SPMDD; For backfill on the building exterior that would underlie landscaped areas, each lift should be uniformly compacted to at least 95% of its SPMDD; In areas on the building exterior where an asphalt or concrete pavement will not be present adjacent to the foundation wall, the upper 0.3m of the exterior foundation wall backfill should be a low permeable soil to reduce surface water infiltration; and Exterior grades should be sloped away from the foundation wall, and roof drainage downspouts should be placed so that water flows away from the foundation wall.
11
7.8
Service Trenches
7.8.1 Bedding and Cover
The following are recommendations for service trench bedding and cover materials: Bedding for buried utilities should be OPSS Granular A or B Type II as applicable, and placed in accordance with pertinent Ontario Provincial Standard Drawings (OPSD); Use of clear 19 mm stone is not recommended for use as bedding. The voids in the stone may result in a low gradient water flow and infiltration of fines from the surrounding soils and cover materials, causing settlement and loss of support to pipes and structures; The cover material should be a sand material or Granular A and the dimensions should comply with pertinent OPSD standards; The bedding material and cover materials should be compacted as per OPSS 501 and 514 and to at least 95% of its SPMDD; and Compaction equipment should be used in such a way that the utility pipes are not damaged during construction.
7.9
Service Trench Backfill
Backfill above the cover for buried utilities should be in accordance with the following recommendations: For service trenches under pavement areas, the backfill should be placed and compacted in uniform thickness compatible with the selected compaction equipment and not thicker than 200mm. Each lift should be compacted to a minimum of 95% SPMDD; The backfill placed in the upper 300 mm below the pavement subgrade elevation should be compacted to a minimum of 100% SPMDD; To reduce the potential for differential settlement and frost heave, the selected backfill materials should reasonably match the existing soil profile within the frost penetration zone (1.2m below finished grade). Alternatively, if imported backfill, including granular materials, are used then the excavation sides should have frost tapers as per OPSD 800 series which essentially indicates that there should be a backslope of 10H:1V from the bedding grade to the finished grade;
12
If the native excavated soils are used as backfill, this material should be protected from moisture increases during construction. The native excavated soils may should be assessed and approved by a Geotechnical Engineer prior to placement; and Excavated soils that are too wet (i.e. greater than 5% above the optimum moisture content based upon a Standard Proctor Test) will become problematic to compact and may not perform properly during construction period. If such conditions occur, the options include drying of the soils; compacting and leaving the area untravelled for a period of time; importation of more suitable material; or a combination of above and the use of geotextiles at the base and possibly additional layers within the pavement structures granular base courses. The appropriate measures will need to be discussed during construction period and be such to achieve adequate performance from the pavement structure.
7.10
Pavement Sections
Roadways and driveways are expected to be constructed over the fill subgrade. In order to prepare the site for the pavement area, it is recommended that the grade be levelled and the exposed subgrade be proof rolled. Any areas where rutting or appreciable deflection is noted should be excavated and replaced with suitable fill, and use of geotextiles may be warranted for strength improvement. The fill should be compacted to at least 95% of its SPMDD. Excavated native clayey silt from trench and foundation excavations may be utilized as fill under parking lot areas to reach design grades, provided that moisture conditions are acceptable.
13
The pavement sections, described in Table 1 below, are general recommendations and for areas subjected to parking lot and heavy truck traffic. Alternative designs would require additional testing and analysis. Table 1: Recommended Pavement Sections Pavement Layer HL3 Asphalt Surface* HL8 Asphalt Binder Granular A Basecourse Granular B Type II Subbase
*HL1 in truck turning areas.
Light Duty (Automobile Parking) 50 mm n/r 150 mm 200 mm
Heavy Duty (Travelled Roadways) 50 mm 50 mm 150 mm 300 mm
In order to accommodate the recommended thicknesses, designers will need to review grades and determine where stripping or filling is necessary. Pavement materials and workmanship should conform to the appropriate OPSS. Drainage of the pavement layers is important. The subgrade surface and each layer of the pavement section should be provided with a suitable cross fall (approximately 2%) to prevent water from ponding on the pavement surface and beneath the pavement layers. Surface runoff should be directed to storm sewers, or allowed to flow into ditches. Sufficient field-testing should be carried out during construction to assess compaction of each lift of the pavement layers. This should be accompanied by laboratory testing of the granular and asphalt materials. All granular base course materials should be compacted to 100% of its SPMDD. The asphalt materials should be compacted as per OPSS 310. In general the HL8 binder course should be compacted to a minimum of 97% of the Marshall Bulk Relative Density or 91% to 96.5% of the Marshall Maximum Relative Density as per OPSS Table 9. The surface coarse HL3 should be compacted to 92% to 96.5% of the Marshall Maximum Relative Density as per OPSS Table 9.
14
Annual or regular maintenance will be required to achieve maximum life expectancy. Generally, the asphalt pavement maintenance will involve crack sealing and repair of local distress.
7.11
Chemical Results of Soil Analysis
The results of the chemical testing of soils included in the scope of work is intended for design purposes to initially assess for evidence of sulphate attack on buried concrete. We would suggest that designers review the data, and if upon review it is decided further assistance or investigation is required, then Inspec-Sol may be able to be retained to provide further assistance, depending upon the application. In terms of buried concrete, the results from samples tested indicate there is less than moderate potential for sulphate attack of buried concrete, as per Table 3 of CSA A23.1 and therefore subsurface concrete does not need sulphate resistance requirements.
7.12
Construction Field Review
The recommendations provided in this report are based on an adequate level of construction monitoring being conducted during construction phase of the proposed expansion. Due to the nature of the proposed development, an adequate level of construction monitoring is considered to be as follows: Prior to construction of footings, the exposed foundation subgrade should be examined by a Geotechnical Engineer or a qualified Technologist acting under the supervision of a Geotechnical Engineer, to assess whether the subgrade conditions correspond to those encountered in the boreholes, and the recommendations provided in this report have been implemented; A qualified Technologist acting under the supervision of a Geotechnical Engineer should monitor placement of Engineered Fill underlying footings and floor slabs; Backfilling operations should be conducted in the presence of a qualified Technologist to ensure that proper material is employed and specified compaction is achieved; and Placement of concrete reinforcement in foundations and floor slabs should be reviewed prior to concrete placement. As well, qualified personnel should conduct testing of concrete.
15
8.0
LIMITATION OF THE INVESTIGATION
This report is intended solely for Public Works and Government Services Canada and other parties explicitly identified in the report and is prohibited for use by others without InspecSols prior written consent. This report is considered Inspec-Sols professional work product and shall remain the sole property of Inspec-Sol. Any unauthorized reuse, redistribution of or reliance on the report shall be at the Client and recipients sole risk, without liability to InspecSol. Client shall defend, indemnify and hold Inspec-Sol harmless from any liability arising from or related to Clients unauthorized distribution of the report. No portion of this report may be used as a separate entity; it is to be read in its entirety and shall include all supporting drawings and appendices. The recommendations made in this report are in accordance with our present understanding of the project, the current site use, ground surface elevations and conditions, and are based on the work scope approved by the Client and described in the report. The services were performed in a manner consistent with that level of care and skill ordinarily exercised by members of Geotechnical Engineering professions currently practicing under similar conditions in the same locality. No other representations, and no warranties or representations of any kind, either expressed or implied, are made. Any use which a third party makes of this report, or any reliance on or decisions to be made based on it, are the responsibility of such third parties. All details of design and construction are rarely known at the time of completion of a geotechnical study. The recommendations and comments made in the study report are based on our subsurface investigation and resulting understanding of the project, as defined at the time of the study. We should be retained to review our recommendations when the drawings and specifications are complete. Without this review, Inspec-Sol will not be liable for any misunderstanding of our recommendations or their application and adaptation into the final design. By issuing this report, Inspec-Sol is the Geotechnical Engineer of record. It is recommended that Inspec-Sol be retained during construction of all foundations and during earthwork operations to confirm the conditions of the subsoil are actually similar to those observed during our study. The intent of this requirement is to verify that conditions encountered during construction are consistent with the findings in the report and that inherent knowledge developed as part of our study is correctly carried forward to the construction phases.
16
It is important to emphasize that a soil investigation is, in fact, a random sampling of a site and the comments included in this report are based on the results obtained at the twelve (12) test locations only. The subsurface conditions confirmed at these test locations may vary at other locations. Soil and groundwater conditions between and beyond the twelve (12) test locations may differ both horizontally and vertically from those encountered at the test locations and conditions may become apparent during construction, which could not be detected or anticipated at the time of our investigation. Should any conditions at the site be encountered which differ from those found at the test locations, we request that we be notified immediately in order to permit a reassessment of our recommendations. If changed conditions are identified during construction, no matter how minor, the recommendations in this report shall be considered invalid until sufficient review and written assessment of said conditions by InspecSol is completed. We trust that this report meets with your requirements. Please do not hesitate to contact us, should any questions arise. Yours truly, INSPEC-SOL INC.
Bashar Hammoud, P. Eng. BH/jbb/nc
Joseph B. Bennett, P. Eng.
DRAWINGS
SITE LOCATION MAP BOREHOLE LOCATION PLAN
Do
yle
Ro
ad
1:15,000
.
150 300 Metres
450
Taylor-Kidd Bouleva rd
SITE
MILLHAVEN
Sir J ohn Jo h n nso e Dr iv
Ba
th
Ro
ad
Pu rdy Ro ad
Main Street
Source: MNR NRVIS, 2008. Produced by CRA under licence from Ontario Ministry of Natural Resources, Queen's Printer 2008 Datum: NAD 83 Projection: UTM Zone 18
T030693-A1 GEOTECHNICAL INVESTIGATION SITE LOCATION PLAN NEW MAXIMUM SECURITY HOUSING UNIT MILLHAVEN INSTITUTION, MILLHAVEN, ON Public Works & Government Services Canada
T030693-A1(001)GIS-OT001 April 26, 2011
ENCLOSURES
BOREHOLE LOGS
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:
BOREHOLE No.: ELEVATION:

CLIENT: Public Works and Government Services Canada Geotechnical Investigation Millhaven Institution, Millhaven, Ontario D. Hill April 13, 2011
STRATIGRAPHY
BH-1 96.42 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
SS Split Spoon ST Shelby Tube RC Rock Core
PROJECT: LOCATION:
DESCRIBED BY: DATE (START):

SCALE
CHECKED BY: DATE (FINISH):
B. Hammoud April 13, 2011

SAMPLE DATA Penetration Index / RQD Recovery Type and Number
Water Level
Water content (%) Atterberg limits (%) N Penetration Index based on Split Spoon sample N Penetration Index based on Dynamic Cone sample Cu Shear Strength based on Field Vane Cu Shear Strength based on Lab Vane S Sensitivity Value of Soil Shear Strength based on Pocket Penetrometer
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
DESCRIPTION OF SOIL AND BEDROCK
State
OVC
meters
96.42
GROUND SURFACE FILL - sand and gravel, medium brown, moist. SS1
ppm
SCALE FOR TEST RESULTS
10
50
0.5
Becoming clayey silt, some gravel, some organics. SS2 CLAYEY SILT - very stiff, dark brown, moist. BOULDER - Limestone, grey. Assumed, possible void. 100 R
1.0
95.5 95.1
1.5
2.0
RC1 40 22
2.5
93.9
LIMESTONE - good quality, grey, fossiliferous, micritic, cut by occasional styolites.
3.0
Becoming excellent quality.
3.5
92.8 92.7
Horizontal fracture. Fractured zone. RC2 100 90
4.0
BOREHOLE LOG T030693-A1-BH LOGS.GPJ INSPEC_SOL.GDT 4/29/11
Horizontal fracture.
4.5
91.7 Borehole terminated at 4.7 m in limestone bedrock.
5.0
5.5
6.0
NOTES: Possible void between 1.5 and 2.5 m below grade.
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-2 95.95 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.95
GROUND SURFACE FILL - silty sand, some lime stone gravel, brownish grey, moist. SS1
ppm
10
46
0.5
1.0
SS2
38
16
1.5
SS3 17 6
2.0
93.8 93.6 CLAYEY SILT - dark brown, moist. Borehole terminated at 2.4 m on assumed bedrock.
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
NOTES: Piezometer installed to monitor water levels over drill program / removed at the end of the program.
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-3 95.94 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.94
GROUND SURFACE FILL - sand and gravel, some silt, medium brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
29
0.5
1.0
SS2 94.9 94.6 Assumed weathered rock. Borehole terminated at 1.4 m on assumed bedrock.
66
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
NOTES:
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-4 96.01 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
96.01
GROUND SURFACE FILL - clayey silt, some gravel, medium brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
58
10
0.5
1.0
SS2
66
1.5
SS3 67 6
2.0
93.9 CLAYEY SILT - assumed from auger cuttings, very soft, greyish black, moist.
2.5
93.3 LIMESTONE - good quality, grey, fossiliferous, micritic, cut by occasional stylolites. Horizontal fracture. Horizontal fracture. RC1 Becoming excellent quality. 100 72
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
RC2
100
100
5.5
6.0
NOTES: First blow of final 150 mm of SS3 drove spoon to 2.6 m. Possible void between fill and bedrock.
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-5 95.69 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.69
GROUND SURFACE FILL - clayey, sand and gravel, medium brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
71
10
0.5
1.0
SS2
38
10
1.5
Becoming more clayey.
2.0
93.5 LIMESTONE - excellent quality, grey, fossiliferous, micritic, cut by occasional stylolites.
2.5
RC1 100 100
3.0
3.5
4.0
RC2
100
100
4.5
5.0
90.7
Borehole terminated at 5.0 m in limestone bedrock.
5.5
6.0
NOTES:
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-6 95.82 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.82
GROUND SURFACE FILL - clayey silt, some gravel, medium brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
58
0.5
1.0
SS2
33
30
1.5
94.2 CLAYEY SILT - very stiff, medium brown, moist. SS3 58 13
>>
2.0
93.6 Borehole terminated at 2.2 m on assumed bedrock.
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
NOTES:
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-7 95.66 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.66
GROUND SURFACE FILL - clayey silt, some gravel, dark brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
25
15
0.5
Auger refusal on assumed boulder - BH moved to ~ 1.0 m and re-drilled. Laboured drilling between 1.0 and 2.0 m.
1.0
1.5
SS2 21 5
2.0
93.5 CLAYEY SILT - assumed from auger cuttings, dark brown to black, moist.
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
NOTES:
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-8 95.51 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.51
GROUND SURFACE FILL - silty, some gravel, dark brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
46
27
0.5
1.0
SS2
50
14
1.5
2.0
Becoming silty clay, some gravel, greyish black, moist.
2.5
SS3 92.6
50
3.0
92.4
LIMESTONE - good quality, grey, fossiliferous, micritic, cut by numerous stylolites. Fractured zone. Becoming excellent quality. RC1 100 75
3.5
4.0
4.5
Horizontal fracture. Horizontal fracture.
5.0
RC2
100
85
5.5
6.0
NOTES:
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-9 96.14 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
96.14
GROUND SURFACE FILL - silty, some sand and gravel, medium brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
54
24
0.5
1.0
SS2
17
14
1.5
94.6
CLAYEY SILT - very stiff, brownish grey, moist, trace organics. SS3 58 8
2.0
2.5
SS4 93.6 Borehole terminated at 2.6 m on assumed bedrock.
50
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
NOTES: Piezometer installed to monitor water levels over drill program / removed at the end of the program.
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:
10

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-10 95.63 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.63
GROUND SURFACE FILL - sand, some silt, some gravel, medium brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
42
20
0.5
Becoming clayey silt, some gravel, medium brown, moist.
SS2
36
1.0
1.5
94.1
CLAYEY SILT - hard, greenish grey, moist, some organics. SS3 17 9

>>
2.0
93.3 LIMESTONE - good quality, grey, fossiliferous, micritic, cut by occasional stylolites. Horizontal fracture.
2.5
3.0
Sub-vertical fracture.
RC1
100
82
3.5
91.9 91.8
Sub-vertical fracture. Fractured zone. Becoming excellent quality.
4.0
4.5
RC2
100
86
5.0
90.3
Borehole terminated at 5.3 m in limestone bedrock.
5.5
6.0
NOTES:
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:
11

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-11 95.32 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.32
GROUND SURFACE FILL - silty, some gravel, dark brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
71
14
0.5
SS2 R
1.0
1.5
SS3 33 12
2.0
2.5
3.0
3.5
4.0
4.5
5.0
5.5
6.0
NOTES: Piezometer installed to monitor water levels over drill program / removed at the end of the program. Borehole was dry.
REFERENCE No.:
T030693-A1
ENCLOSURE No.:
12

STRATIGRAPHY
BH-12 95.39 m
BOREHOLE LOG
Page: 1 of 1
LEGEND
PROJECT: LOCATION:

SCALE

Water Level
50kPa 100kPa 150kPa 200kPa 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90
Stratigraphy
Elevation (m)
Depth BGS
State
OVC
meters
95.39
GROUND SURFACE FILL - sand and gravel, greyish brown, moist. SS1
ppm
10
0.5
94.8 Assumed fill - split spoon refusal on assumed cobbles and boulders. SS2 R
1.0
1.5
93.9
CLAYEY SILT - trace gravel, very stiff, brownish grey, moist to wet. SS3 31 10
2.0
93.3 LIMESTONE - poor quality, grey, fossiliferous, micritic, cut by occasional stylolites.
2.5
RC1 100 47
3.0
3.5
Becoming good quality. Becoming excellent quality.
4.0
RC2
100
74
4.5
5.0
90.2 Borehole terminated in limestone bedrock at 5.2 m.
5.5
6.0
NOTES:
A P P E N D I X A EXPLANATORY NOTES FOR BOREHOLE LOGS
NOTES ON BOREHOLE AND TEST PIT REPORTS

SOIL DESCRIPTION:
Each subsoil stratum is described using the following terminology. The relative density of granular soils is determined by the standard penetration index ("N" value), while the consistency of clayey soils is measured by the value of the undrained shear strength (Cu).
CLASSIFICATION Clay Silt Sand
(UNIFIED SYSTEM)
fine 0,075 to 0,425mm medium 0,425mm to 2,0mm coarse 2,0 to 4,75mm fine coarse 4,75mm to 19mm 19 to 75mm
TERMINOLOGY
< 0,002mm 0,002 to 0,075mm 0,075 to 4,75mm
Gravel Cobbles Boulders
4,75 to 75mm 75 to 300mm > 300mm
"traces" "some" adjective (silty, sandy) "and"
1 10 20 35
10% 20% 35% 50%
RELATIVE DENSITY OF STANDARD PENETRATION GRANULAR SOILS INDEX "N" VALUE (BLOWS/ft - 300mm) Very loose Loose Compact Dense Very dense 0-4 4 - 10 10 - 30 30 - 50 > 50
CONSISTANCY OF COHESIVE SOILS Very soft Soft Medium Stiff Very stiff Hard
UNDRAINED SHEAR STRENGTH (Cu) (P.S.F.) < 250 250 - 500 500 - 1000 1000 - 2000 2000 - 4000 > 4000 (kPa) < 12 12 - 25 25 - 50 50 - 100 100 - 200 > 200
ROCK QUALITY DESIGNATION "RQD" (%) VALUE < 25 25 - 50 50 - 75 75 - 90 > 90 QUALIFICATIVE very poor poor fair good excellent sand
STRATIGRAPHIC LEGEND
gravel
cobbles & boulders
Bedrock (limestone)
silt
clay
organic soil
fill
SAMPLES:
TYPE AND NUMBER
The type of sample recovered is shown on the log by the abbreviation listed hereafter. The numbering of samples is sequential for each type
of sample.
SS: Split spoon SSE, GSE, AGE: Environnemental sampling
ST: Shelby tube PS: Piston sample (Osterberg)
RECOVERY
AG: Auger RC: Rock core GS: Grab sample
The recovery, shown as a percentage, is the ratio of length of the sample obtained to the distance the sampler was driven/pushed into the soil.
RQD
The "Rock Quality Designation" or "RQD" value, expressed as a percentage, is the ratio of the total length of all core fragments of 4 inches (10cm) or more to the total length of the run.
IN-SITU TESTS:
N: Standard penetration index R: Refusal to penetration NC: Dynamic cone penetration index Cu: Undrained shear strength Pr: Pressuremeter A: Atterberg limits w: Water content g: Unit weight k: Permeability ABS: Absorption (Packer test)
LABORATORY TESTS:
Ip : Plasticity index W l: Liquid limit W p: Plastic limit
H: Hydrometer analysis GSA: Grain size analysis
C: Consolidation O.V.: Organic vapor CS: Swedish fall cone CHEM: Chemical analysis
PS-020.01/IA/06-05
A P P E N D I X B LABORATORY ANALYTICAL REPROTS
Certificate of Analysis
Inspec Sol (Kingston)
1225 Gardiners Rd. Kingston, ON K7P0G3 Attn: Matt Storms Client PO: Project: T030693-A1 Custody: 83775 Paracel ID
1117026-01 1117026-02 1117026-03 1117026-04 1117026-05 1117026-06
Phone: (613) 389-9812 Fax: (613) 389-5287 Report Date: 21-Apr-2011 Order Date: 15-Apr-2011 Order #: 1117026
This Certificate of Analysis contains analytical data applicable to the following samples as submitted: Client ID
BH2 BH8 BH5 BH1 BH10 BH11
Approved By:
Mark Foto, M.Sc. For Dale Robertson, BSc Laboratory Director
Any use of these results implies your agreement that our total liabilty in connection with this work, however arising shall be limited to the amount paid by you for this work, and that our employees or agents shall not under circumstances be liable to you in connection with this work
Page 1 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Client: Inspec Sol (Kingston) Client PO: Project Description: T030693-A1 Report Date: 21-Apr-2011 Order Date:15-Apr-2011
Analysis Summary Table

Analysis Anions pH Solids, % Method Reference/Description EPA 300.1 - IC, water extraction EPA 150.1 - pH probe, CaCl buffered extraction Gravimetric, calculation Extraction Date Analysis Date 20-Apr-11 20-Apr-11 21-Apr-11 21-Apr-11 20-Apr-11 20-Apr-11
Page 2 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Client: Inspec Sol (Kingston) Client PO:
Client ID: Sample Date: Sample ID: MDL/Units Physical Characteristics % Solids General Inorganics pH Anions Sulphate
5 ug/g dry 0.05 pH Units 0.1 % by Wt.
Report Date: 21-Apr-2011 Order Date:15-Apr-2011 Project Description: T030693-A1

BH2 13-Apr-11 1117026-01 Soil 86.9 7.43 54 BH10 13-Apr-11 1117026-05 Soil 89.2 7.53 248 BH8 13-Apr-11 1117026-02 Soil 75.0 7.03 179 BH11 13-Apr-11 1117026-06 Soil 87.2 7.35 80 BH5 13-Apr-11 1117026-03 Soil 90.0 7.49 24 BH1 13-Apr-11 1117026-04 Soil 79.2 7.52 19 -
Client ID: Sample Date: Sample ID: MDL/Units Physical Characteristics % Solids General Inorganics pH Anions Sulphate
0.1 % by Wt. 0.05 pH Units 5 ug/g dry
Page 3 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Client: Inspec Sol (Kingston) Client PO: Project Description: T030693-A1
Reporting Limit Source Result %REC Limit RPD Limit
Report Date: 21-Apr-2011 Order Date:15-Apr-2011
Method Quality Control: Blank

Analyte Result Units %REC RPD Notes
Anions
Sulphate ND 5 ug/g
Page 4 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Method Quality Control: Duplicate

Anions
Sulphate 14.7 7.40 92.9 5 0.05 0.1 ug/g dry pH Units % by Wt. 16.4 7.43 93.1 10.8 0.4 0.2 20 10 25
General Inorganics
pH
Physical Characteristics
% Solids
Page 5 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Method Quality Control: Spike

Anions
Sulphate 93.7 5 ug/g ND 93.7 78-111
Page 6 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Client: Inspec Sol (Kingston) Client PO: Sample and QC Qualifiers Notes
None
Sample Data Revisions

None
Work Order Revisions/Comments:

None
Other Report Notes:

n/a: not applicable MDL: Method Detection Limit Source Result: Data used as source for matrix and duplicate samples %REC: Percent recovery. RPD: Relative percent difference. Soil results are reported on a dry weight basis when the units are denoted with 'dry'. Where %Solids is reported, moisture loss includes the loss of volatile hydrocarbons.
Page 7 of 7
INSPEC-SOL INC. 1225 Gardiners Rd., Unit 104, Kingston, Ontario, K7P 0G3, Phone: (613) 389-9812, Fax: (613) 389-5287 www.inspecsol.com
Reference No.: T030693-A1 May 4, 2011 Karen Durnford-McIntosh, P.Eng., CD, M.Sc.E. District Office Manager Real Property Professional & Technical Program Public Works and Government Services Canada Ontario Region 294 King Street East Kingston, ON K7L 3B2
Re:
Geotechnical Investigation Environmental Soil Analysis Millhaven Institution Proposed New Maximum Security Housing Unit Millhaven, Ontario (Contract No. 700168745)
Dear Ms. Durnford-McIntosh: Further to your request, we have submitted for analysis soil samples collected as part of the recent geotechnical investigation conducted at the above-mentioned Site. We understand soil analysis is being done to determine appropriate landfill disposal options for the excess soil generated as a result of the proposed excavation activities at the Site. Two (2) soil samples were submitted for analysis of Ontario Regulation (O. Reg.) 558/00 Metals, Flashpoint, Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) and Pesticides. Based on the analytical results, the soil samples collected at the Site are considered to be non-hazardous as per O. Reg. 558/00 Schedule 4 Leachate Quality Criteria and may be disposed of at a landfill registered to accept this type of waste. A copy of the analytical results as well as a comparision table is attached at the end of this letter.
We trust that this information meets with your approval. Please do not hesitate to contact us, should any questions arise. Yours truly, INSPEC-SOL Inc.
Joseph B. Bennett, P.Eng. Vice president JBB/nc Enclosures Dist: Ms. Durnford-McIntosh, PWGSC, by Email: Karen.Durnford-McIntosh@pwgsc.gc.ca
ENCLOSURES
Table 1 T030693-E1 Comparison of Analytical Results - Soil O.Reg.558/00 - TCLP Extraction Schedule 4 - Leachate Quality Criteria REG 558/00 Parameter Units Concentration BH2 BH8
EPA 1311 - TCLP Leachate Inorganics Arsenic mg/L Barium mg/L Boron mg/L Cadmium mg/L Chromium mg/L Lead mg/L Mercury mg/L Selenium mg/L Silver mg/L Uranium mg/L Initial pH pH units Final pH pH units OC PESTICIDES AND PCBs Aldrin + Dieldrin ug/L Chlordane ug/L DDT (total isomers) ug/L Endrin ug/L Heptachlor + Hetachlor epoxide ug/L Lindane ug/L Methoxychlor/1,1,1-Trichloro-2,2bis(p-methoxyphenyl) ethane ug/L
2.5 100 500 0.5 5 5 0.1 1 5 10 NV NV 70 700 3000 20 300 400 90000 300 NV NV
<0.05 0.71 0.05 <0.01 <0.05 <0.05 <0.005 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 8.76 6.06 <0.012 <0.018 <0.024 <0.006 <0.012 <0.006 <0.024 <0.1 >70 86.9
<0.05 0.99 0.07 <0.01 <0.05 <0.05 <0.005 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 8.64 6.85 <0.012 <0.018 <0.024 <0.006 <0.012 <0.006 <0.024 <0.1 >70 75.0
PCBs ug/L PHYSICAL CHARACTERISTICS Flashpoint C % Solids % by Wt. DECTECTION OF CONTAMINANT EXCEEDENCE
Subcontracted Analysis
1225 Gardiners Rd. Kingston, ON K7P0G3 Attn: Matt Storms Paracel Report No.: Client Project(s): Client PO: Reference: CoC Number:
1117026 T030693-A1 Preferred Supplier Pricing 83775
Tel: (613) 389-9812 Fax: (613) 389-5287
Order Date: Report Date:
15-Apr-11 3-May-11
Sample(s) from this project were subcontracted for the listed parameters. A copy of the subcontractors report is attached
Paracel ID
1117026-01 1117026-02
Client ID
BH2 BH8
Analysis
REG 558 - OC Pesticides REG 558 - OC Pesticides
EXOVA ACCUTEST REPORT OF ANALYSIS
Report Number: Date: Date Submitted: Project: 1117026
Client: Paracel Laboratories Ltd. 300-2319 St. Laurent Blvd. Ottawa K1G 4J8 Attention: Mr. Dale Robertson
1107827 2011-05-02 2011-04-19
Chain of Custody Number: 742300 LAB ID: Sample Date: Sample ID: 874493 2011-04-13 BH2 874494 2011-04-13 BH8
P.O. Number: Matrix:
REG 347 LCH GUIDELINE REG 558
UNITS
MRL
TYPE
LIMIT
UNITS
LQC
70
ug/L
LQC
700
ug/L
PARAMETER Organochlorine Pesticides (OCPs) & PCBs Aldrin Dieldrin Aldrin + Dieldrin a-chlordane g-chlordane Oxychlordane Chlordane (Total) op-DDT pp-DDT Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane (DDT) + Metabolites Endrin gamma-BHC (Lindane) Heptachlor Heptachlor epoxide Heptachlor + Heptachlor Epoxide Methoxychlor Polychlorinated Biphenyls (PCBs) ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L 0.006 0.006 0.012 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.018 0.006 0.006 0.024 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.006 0.012 0.024 0.1 <0.006 <0.006 <0.012 <0.006 <0.006 <0.006 <0.018 <0.006 <0.006 <0.024 <0.006 <0.006 <0.006 <0.006 <0.012 <0.024 <0.1 <0.006 <0.006 <0.012 <0.006 <0.006 <0.006 <0.018 <0.006 <0.006 <0.024 <0.006 <0.006 <0.006 <0.006 <0.012 <0.024 <0.1
LQC LQC LQC
3000 20 400
ug/L ug/L ug/L
LQC LQC LQC
300 90000 300
ug/L ug/L ug/L
MRL = Method Reporting Limit INC = Incomplete AO = Aesthetic Objective OG = Operational Guideline MAC = Maximum Allowable Concentration IMAC = Interim Maximum Allowable Concentration
Comment:
APPROVAL: Mina Nasirai

Organic Lab Supervisor 1 of 1
Results relate only to the parameters tested on the samples submitted.
Methods references and/or additional QA/QC information available on request.
8-146 Colonnade Road, Ottawa, ON, K2E 7Y1
1225 Gardiners Rd. Kingston, ON K7P0G3 Attn: Matt Storms Client PO: Project: T030693-A1 Custody: 83775 Paracel ID
1117026-01 1117026-02
Phone: (613) 389-9812 Fax: (613) 389-5287 Report Date: 21-Apr-2011 Order Date: 15-Apr-2011 Order #: 1117026
This Certificate of Analysis contains analytical data applicable to the following samples as submitted: Client ID
BH2 BH8
Approved By:
Mark Foto, M.Sc. For Dale Robertson, BSc Laboratory Director
Any use of these results implies your agreement that our total liabilty in connection with this work, however arising shall be limited to the amount paid by you for this work, and that our employees or agents shall not under circumstances be liable to you in connection with this work
Page 1 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Client: Inspec Sol (Kingston) Client PO: Project Description: T030693-A1 Report Date: 21-Apr-2011 Order Date:15-Apr-2011
Analysis Summary Table

Analysis Method Reference/Description Anions EPA 300.1 - IC, water extraction Flashpoint Penski Martin Closed Cup Metals, leachate EPA 6020 - ICP-MS, digestion pH EPA 150.1 - pH probe, CaCl buffered extraction REG 558 - Mercury EPA 7471A - Cold Vapour AA Solids, % Gravimetric, calculation TCLP Metals/SVOCs - Extraction EPA 1311 TCLP Extraction Procedure Extraction Date Analysis Date 20-Apr-11 20-Apr-11 21-Apr-11 21-Apr-11 19-Apr-11 19-Apr-11 21-Apr-11 21-Apr-11 19-Apr-11 19-Apr-11 20-Apr-11 20-Apr-11 18-Apr-11 19-Apr-11
Page 2 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Client: Inspec Sol (Kingston) Client PO:
Client ID: Sample Date: Sample ID: MDL/Units Physical Characteristics % Solids Flashpoint EPA 1311 - TCLP Leachate Inorganics Arsenic Barium Boron Cadmium Chromium Lead Mercury Selenium Silver Uranium Initial pH Final pH General Inorganics pH Anions Sulphate
5 ug/g dry 0.05 pH Units 0.05 mg/L 0.05 mg/L 0.05 mg/L 0.01 mg/L 0.05 mg/L 0.05 mg/L 0.005 mg/L 0.05 mg/L 0.05 mg/L 0.05 mg/L 0.05 pH Units dry 0.05 pH Units dry 0.1 % by Wt. C

BH2 13-Apr-11 1117026-01 Soil 86.9 >70 <0.05 0.71 0.05 <0.01 <0.05 <0.05 <0.005 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 8.76 6.06 7.43 54 BH8 13-Apr-11 1117026-02 Soil 75.0 >70 <0.05 0.99 0.07 <0.01 <0.05 <0.05 <0.005 <0.05 <0.05 <0.05 8.64 6.85 7.03 179 -
Page 3 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Method Quality Control: Blank

Anions
Sulphate Arsenic Barium Boron Cadmium Chromium Lead Mercury Selenium Silver Uranium ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND 5 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.01 0.05 0.05 0.005 0.05 0.05 0.05 ug/g mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L
EPA 1311 - TCLP Leachate Inorganics
Page 4 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Method Quality Control: Duplicate

Anions
Sulphate Arsenic Barium Boron Cadmium Chromium Lead Mercury Selenium Silver Uranium 14.7 ND 0.718 0.073 ND ND 0.075 ND ND ND ND 7.40 92.9 5 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.01 0.05 0.05 0.005 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.05 0.1 ug/g dry mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L mg/L pH Units % by Wt. 16.4 ND 0.712 0.076 ND ND 0.075 ND ND ND ND 7.43 93.1 10.8 20 29 34 33 33 32 32 20 28 28 27 10 25

0.8 3.1
0.4
General Inorganics
pH 0.4 0.2
Physical Characteristics
% Solids
Page 5 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Method Quality Control: Spike

Anions
Sulphate Arsenic Barium Boron Cadmium Chromium Lead Mercury Selenium Silver Uranium 93.7 47.6 47.6 46.8 45.7 48.4 47.1 0.0312 47.2 46.0 46.5 5 ug/g ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ug/L mg/L ug/L ug/L ug/L ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND ND 93.7 95.2 95.2 93.6 91.3 96.8 94.2 104 94.4 92.0 93.0 78-111 83-117 83-116 71-128 78-119 80-124 77-126 70-130 81-125 70-128 70-131
0.005
Page 6 of 7
Order #: 1117026
Client: Inspec Sol (Kingston) Client PO: Sample and QC Qualifiers Notes Sample Data Revisions
None
Work Order Revisions/Comments:

None
Other Report Notes:

n/a: not applicable MDL: Method Detection Limit Source Result: Data used as source for matrix and duplicate samples %REC: Percent recovery. RPD: Relative percent difference. Soil results are reported on a dry weight basis when the units are denoted with 'dry'. Where %Solids is reported, moisture loss includes the loss of volatile hydrocarbons.
Page 7 of 7
Correctional Service Canada Technical Services Branch Electronics Systems
ES/SPEC-0006 Revision 2 14 January, 2002
ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION CONDUIT, SPACE AND POWER REQUIREMENTS FOR SECURITY SYSTEMS FOR USE IN FEDERAL CORRECTIONAL INSTITUTIONS
AUTHORITY This Specification is approved by the Correctional Service of Canada for the procurement and Installation of Conduits for Electronic Security Systems in Canadian federal correctional institutions. Recommended corrections, additions or deletions should be addressed to the Design Authority at the following address: Director, Engineering Services, Correctional Service of Canada, 340 Laurier Avenue West, Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0P9
Prepared by: Manager, Dir Electronics Systems Research
Approved by: ector, Engineering Services
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 2 ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 5 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................ 6 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 7 1.1 General................................................................................................................................ 7 1.2 Scope .................................................................................................................................. 7 1.3 Off-The-Shelf Equipment .................................................................................................... 7 1.4 Equipment Procurement ..................................................................................................... 7 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 8 REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 9 3.1 General................................................................................................................................ 9 3.2 Environmental Conditions ................................................................................................... 9 3.3 Conduits, Cable Troughs and Raceways .......................................................................... 10 3.3.1 Conduits ............................................................................................................... 10 3.3.2 Cable Troughs and Raceways ............................................................................. 10 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................... 12 4.1 Perimeter Intrusion Detection Systems............................................................................. 12 4.1.1 Motion Detection System ..................................................................................... 12 4.1.1.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 12 4.1.1.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 12 4.1.1.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 12 4.1.2 Fence Disturbance Detection System.................................................................. 12 4.1.2.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 13 4.1.2.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 13 4.1.2.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 13 4.1.3 PIDS Microwave................................................................................................... 13 4.1.3.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 13 4.1.3.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 13 4.1.3.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 13 4.1.4 PIDS Closed Circuit Television ............................................................................ 14 4.1.4.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 14 4.1.4.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 14 4.1.4.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 14
2.0 3.0
4.0
Correctional Service Canada Technical Services Branch
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.1.5
4.2
4.3
4.4
MCCP Console .................................................................................................... 15 4.1.5.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 15 4.1.5.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 15 4.1.5.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 15 Facility Alarm Systems ...................................................................................................... 16 4.2.1 Inmate Cell Call System ....................................................................................... 16 4.2.1.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 16 4.2.1.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 16 4.2.1.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 16 4.2.2 Fixed Point Security Alarm System ...................................................................... 16 4.2.2.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 17 4.2.2.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 17 4.2.2.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 17 4.2.3 Personal Portable Alarm System ......................................................................... 17 4.2.3.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 17 4.2.3.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 17 4.2.3.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 17 4.2.4 Portable Alarm Location System .......................................................................... 18 4.2.4.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 18 4.2.4.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 18 4.2.4.3 Power Requirement ................................................................................ 18 Access Control & Supplementary Systems....................................................................... 18 4.3.1 Door Control & Corridor Monitoring System......................................................... 18 4.3.1.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 18 4.3.1.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 18 4.3.1.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 19 4.3.2 Closed Circuit Television System......................................................................... 19 4.3.2.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 19 4.3.2.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 19 4.3.2.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 19 4.3.3 Supplementary Intrusion Detection System ......................................................... 19 4.3.3.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 19 4.3.3.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 19 4.3.3.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 20 4.3.4 Voice Recording Equipment................................................................................. 20 4.3.4.1 Space Requirements............................................................................... 20 4.3.4.2 Power Requirements............................................................................... 20 4.3.5 Video Recording Equipment ................................................................................ 20 4.3.5.1 Space Requirements............................................................................... 20 4.3.5.2 Power Requirements............................................................................... 20 Communications Systems................................................................................................. 21 4.4.1 Two Way Communications Radio........................................................................ 21 4.4.1.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 21 4.4.1.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 21 4.4.1.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 21 4.4.2 Public Address System ........................................................................................ 21
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification
4.5
4.6 4.7 5.0
4.4.2.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 22 4.4.2.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 22 4.4.2.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 22 4.43 Limited Call Intercom System (LCIS) ................................................................... 22 4.4.3.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 22 4.4.3.2 Space and Power Requirements ............................................................ 22 4.4.4 Restricted Visit Intercom System ......................................................................... 22 4.4.4.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 23 4.4.4.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 23 4.4.4.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 23 4.4.5 Entertainment Cable Television ........................................................................... 23 4.4.5.1 Conduit Requirements ............................................................................ 23 4.4.5.2 Space Requirements............................................................................... 23 4.4.5.3 Power Requirements............................................................................... 23 Control Posts (CP) and Terminal Equipment Spaces (TES) ............................................ 24 4.5.1 Conduit Requirements ......................................................................................... 24 4.5.2 Space Requirements............................................................................................ 24 4.5.3 Power Requirements............................................................................................ 24 Installation Requirements.................................................................................................. 24 Documentation Requirements........................................................................................... 24
QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................. 25 5.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 25 ...................................................................................................................................... 25
6.0 DELIVERY
APPENDIX A SUMMARY OF SYSTEM CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS ...................................................... 26 APPENDIX B SUMMARY OF SYSTEM SPACE REQUIREMENTS .......................................................... 28 APPENDIX C SUMMARY OF SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS......................................................... 31
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: CER COTS CSA CSC DES EIA EMT GFE MCCP PVC RFP SOW STR TES Common Equipment Room Commercial-Off-The- Shelf Canadian Standards Association Correctional Service Canada Director Engineering Services Electronic Industries Association Electrical Metallic Tubing Government Furnished Equipment Main Communications and Control Post Polyvinyl Chloride Request for Proposal Statement of Work Statement of Technical Requirements Terminal Equipment Space
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Contractor Project Officer Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment
Director, Engineering Services (DES) - Correctional Service Canada (CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Services Canada (PW&GSC) is responsible for all contractual matters associated with the system design and implementation. The company selected as the successful bidder. A CSC employee or a contracted person designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. Equipment currently on the market with available field reliability data, manuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 1.0 1.1 INTRODUCTION General
This specification defines the requirements for the design and installation of conduits, cable troughs and raceways as well as space and power requirements for telecommunications and electronic security systems in the Correctional Service of Canada (CSC) facilities. 1.2 Scope This specification has been developed to ensure high standards for the installation of conduits, cable troughs and details equipment space and power requirements for electronic systems. It defines workmanship standards which may not be fully covered in subsidiary specifications. All contractor's documentation and installation procedures shall meet this specification for reliability, maintainability, longevity, appearance and operational use. 1.3 Off-The-Shelf Equipment The contractor shall provide commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) materials wherever possible. COTS materials shall meet or exceed the manufacturing standards as listed in this specification. Where COTS material is unavailable or unsuitable for a specific application, the contractor may manufacture or arrange for the manufacturing of a particular item to suit the requirements. Manufactured materials shall meet or exceed the best commercial equipment manufacturing standards. 1.4 Equipment Procurement Any ordering of material before the approval of the system design report will be undertaken at the contractor's own risk. The Design Authority may authorize the procurement of certain long lead items at, or shortly after a preliminary design review of the proposed system.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 2.0 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of the Request for Proposal (RFP) shall form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. ES/SOW-0101 ES/SOW-0102 EIA-310-C CSA C22.1 CSA C22.2 Statement of Work for Procurement and Installation of Electronic Systems Statement of Work for Quality Control of Electronic Systems Electronic Industries Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment. Canadian Electrical Code - Part 1 Safety Standard for Electrical Installations Canadian Electrical Code - Part II
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.0 3.1 REQUIREMENTS General
The contractor shall supply all necessary conduits, cable troughs and raceways and any other items that may be required for the satisfactory completion of the specified project. All installation workmanship shall be performed in accordance with the Statement of Work, Standards specified in Section 2.0 of this specification and all applicable national, provincial, and local electrical codes. A conduit diagram shall be supplied in the installation documentation to detail where connections terminate and how conduits are routed and terminated. Conduits, ducts, trays, etc. may be either Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) or supplied and installed by the contractor depending on the particular institution. The determination will be made by the Design Authority and will be identified in the STR. The contractor shall provide Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard racks, panels and associated hardware according to the space requirements of this specification. The contractor shall provide all necessary wiring, circuit panels, circuit breakers and associated hardware according to the power requirements of this specification. 3.2 Environmental Conditions All materials and equipment which are used in CSC installations shall be chosen with consideration being given to the intended use, safety, retention of appearance, maintainability and durability under rugged operating conditions. These materials shall perform over the following environmental ranges: a. Indoor Equipment Temperature: Humidity: b. 0 C to 50 C; and 20% to 95% non-condensing.
Outdoor Equipment Temperature: Humidity: -40 C to +55 C; and up to 100% condensing.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.3 3.3.1 Conduits, Cable Troughs and Raceways Conduits
Conduits installed above ground, and accessible to the inmate population, shall be rigid steel. Metal conduits installed in secure and inmate accessible areas shall be fitted with double the normal quantity of support hangars. In locations subject to extreme temperature changes, and/or where conduit lengths are of nonstandard size, the contractor shall make provisions for the inclusion of conduit expansion joints. Outdoor conduit shall not be damaged by combinations of direct exposure to the sun, wind, rain, lightning, hail, snow and ice as may be expected to occur at each institution location. Rigid Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) conduits shall be used only in buried applications. Rigid PVC conduits shall not be threaded, but may be used with approved adapters and couplings applied in a manner consistent with industry standards. PVC conduits which cross roadways shall be encased in poured concrete. The contractor shall provide a suitable means of protecting the buried conduit against damage caused by digging or excavating. The preferred method is installing a tape marker directly above the conduit path. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) conduit may be used in administrative areas, and locations which are not normally assessable to the inmate population. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduits may be used where a flexible connection is required, ie. cameras, microwave dishes, etc. In such applications, the length of "flex" conduit shall not exceed one (1) metre. In addition to these requirements, the latest issue of applicable industrial standards apply, including: a. b. 3.3.2 CSA Standard C22.2 - Rigid Metal Conduit CSA Standard C22.2 - Flexible Metal Conduit
Cable Troughs and Raceways Cable troughs and raceways shall be continuous and shall be constructed of metal. The contractor shall provide adequate mounting devices which will permit the use of fastening devices that will not damage conductor insulation. Cable troughs, raceways, and fittings shall be free from burrs or other sharp edges which may cause damage to the cable or insulated conductors. All troughs and raceways shall be installed as a complete system before the conductors or cables are installed.
10
Cable troughs may be either ventilated or solid and unless otherwise specified, shall be equipped with covers and steel guards to protect against damage. In addition to these provisions, the latest issue of appropriate standards shall apply, including: a. b. c. CSA Standard C22.2 - Cable Troughs and Fittings. CSA Standard C22.2 - Raceways and Fittings. CSA Standard C22.2 - Surface Raceways and Fittings.
11
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.0 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
Summary tables of the electronic security systems minimum conduit, space and power requirements are provided as Appendix A, Appendix B and Appendix C respectively to this specification. 4.1 4.1.1 Perimeter Intrusion Detection Systems Motion Detection System The Motion Detection System (MDS) is designed to detect motion between the fences. One system which is type approved for use in CSC uses the Leaky Coax - buried cable technology. The perimeter is divided into sectors and two sectors are controlled by a single local control module. Signal and power fed to the field mounted electronic controllers via the buried coax cables. The main MDS control modules are installed in the common equipment room (CER). 4.1.1.1 Conduit Requirements Cable entry to the area between the two perimeter fences is made at a single point, usually at the gatehouse. One (1) 38 mm conduit is required from the CER to the area between the two perimeter fences. This conduit is stubbed underground between the fences several meters from the gatehouse. 4.1.1.2 Space Requirements The MDS control equipment will normally occupy about half of the area of a 2.483 meter rack, usually supplied by the PIDS contractor. 4.1.1.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for the MDS equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptable power supply. 4.1.2 Fence Disturbance Detection System The Fence Disturbance Detection System (FDS) is designed to detect particular movement and vibration patterns on the inner perimeter fence. This is accomplished by mounting electromechanical fence sensors (geophones, electret or piezoelectric vibration detectors) on the fence. The perimeter is divided into sectors and one array of sensors covers one sector. The cables from all the sectors are run along the top of the fence to the gatehouse and to the control equipment mounted in the CER.
12
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.1.2.1 Conduit Requirements
FDS cable entry to the inner perimeter fence is made at a single point, usually at the gatehouse. Depending on the size of the perimeter and the number of sectors, the requirement is for a minimum of one (1) 38 mm conduit from the gatehouse to the top of the inner fence. The conduit is capped with a weather proof cable outlet. 4.1.2.2 Space Requirements The FDS control equipment will normally occupy approximately half of the area of a 2.483 m rack supplied by the contractor. 4.1.2.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for the FDS equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power supply. 4.1.3 PIDS Microwave Bistatic microwave (beam) systems are normally installed across the pedestrian and vehicle entrance portals ( sallyports) to detect movement in the area. The microwave systems are integrated into the PIDS motion detection system. These systems allow small portal sectors to be turned off to allow authorized staff and vehicle access without effecting the entire perimeter security. 4.1.3.1 Conduit Requirements Microwave cable to each of the pedestrian and vehicle sallyport areas are required from the closest motion detection system (MDS) local control module. One buried (1) 19 mm PVC conduit is required from each sallyport to the closest perimeter MDS unit. 4.1.3.2 Space Requirements The control equipment will normally occupy approximately 0.5 metre of rack space supplied by the contractor. 4.1.3.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for the microwave equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, interruptible power supply.
13
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.1.4 PIDS Closed Circuit Television
Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) monochrome cameras are placed in strategic positions around the perimeter fence. The cameras monitor the institutional side of the inside perimeter fence and the area between the fences. When there is an alarm on the FDS and/or MDS, the CCTV cameras monitoring the appropriate sector inside fence and between the fences are selected for viewing. During an alarm period the video displayed on the monitors from the selected cameras are recorded on a time-lapse video cassette recorder. The CCTV cameras are usually grouped at the corners of the perimeter and mounted on self supporting towers. 110 VAC power is provided to an VAC distribution panel mounted at each corner of the perimeter. VAC power is distributed to the cameras. External vertical synchronization of the CCTV cameras is by the distribution of an independent vertical pulse to all the cameras and components of the system. 4.1.4.1 Conduit Requirements CCTV Signal and Control. Two (2) 50 mm conduits run from the CER to the cameras in the corners of the perimeters in both directions. These conduits for the CCTV camera signal and control wiring terminate in a exterior distribution box mounted on the closest camera towers. Two (2) 50 mm conduits run around the perimeter terminating at each of the camera groups at the perimeter corners. CCTV AC Power. Two (2) 38 mm conduits are required from the power distribution panel in the CER to the power junction box on the closet perimeter camera tower. One conduit is required to run in both directions. VAC power is required for the cameras and the heater and wipers in the camera housings. One (1) 38 mm conduit is required to run form the power junction box around the perimeter providing power to each camera group. 4.1.4.2 Space Requirements The video distribution and switching equipment in the CER require approximately 1.0 m of rack space. The four video monitors, wiper control and camera on/off switch panels in the MCCP console require space in one (1) EIA standard console cabinet.. A separate standalone rack in the MCCP is provided to accommodate five (5) time lapse VCRs. 4.1.4.3 Power Requirements The power required in the CER for video switching and control equipment is one 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere uninterruptible power supply.
14
The power requirement for the perimeter cameras is a 110.0 VAC, 20 ampere supply to each group of usually four (4) cameras from the power distribution panel in the CER. A camera and housing requires 300 watts each, including heaters, wipers and all other the environmental control units for the camera housing units. 4.1.5 MCCP Console The control and annunciation equipment for the PIDS and the Facility Alarm Annunciation System are mounted in the console cabinets in the MCCP. The control and annunciation units are normally connected to processing equipment in the CER by cables running under the computer flooring. There is a requirement for rigid conduit between the MCCP and the CER for the 110 VAC uninterruptible power supply (UPS). 4.1.5.1 Conduit Requirements One (1) 19 mm conduit is required from the UPS location in the CER to the MCCP console. 4.1.5.2 Space Requirements The console cabinet space requirement will depend on the number of systems provided at the institution and usually consists of six console racks in the MCCP joined together to form the control console. One medium equipment rack for the maintenance video display unit (VDU) and a low profile cabinet with sliding shelves for the time-lapse VCRs and printer. The MCCP will require a room with a floor area of no less than approx. 23.6 square metres. The CER will require a room with a floor area of no less than 9.0 square metres for the equipment and approx. 6.3 square metres for spare equipment storage and maintenance. Both rooms require computer flooring, all conduits entering will be stubbed or terminated under the computer floor. Both rooms need to be as square as possible to allow for optimum equipment placement. The UPS will require a room with a floor area of approx. 6.3 square metres if the UPS is located at a different site to the CER. The UPS can be located in the CER within the requirement shown above. The floor may be concrete. The ventilation system in the CER should keep the temperature below 29.0 degrees C and vent to the outside to eliminate gases that may escape during battery operation or charging. 4.1.5.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for the MCCP console is two 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power circuits.
15
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.2 4.2.1 Facility Alarm Systems Inmate Cell Call System
The ICCS is provided so that an occupant of a cell may request assistance from the control post. This is achieved by operating a call originating device (COD) mounted in the cell. The call is annunciated in the control post, the guard responds to the call and cancels the call by operating a call cancelling device (CCD) external to the cell and adjacent to the cell door. 4.2.1.1 Conduit Requirements One (1) 15 mm conduit is required from each cell, the conduits from four cells are combined in a junction box in the pipe chase. Two or three of these junction boxes are linked together by 25 mm conduit. One (1) 38 mm conduit connects the group to the terminal equipment space (TES) where they are terminated. One (1) 25 mm conduits are provided from the TES to the control post. These are shared by the electronics contractors with each contractor using at least one each. The cables interconnecting the equipment in the TES to the CER are normally installed in a cable tray which runs throughout the institution. 4.2.1.2 Space Requirements The equipment should normally occupy half the area of an one (1) 2.483 m rack in each TES. 4.2.1.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for this system is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. 4.2.2 Fixed Point Security Alarm System The FPSA system is provided so that an occupant of designated rooms may request assistance from the control post. This is achieved by operating a call originating device (COD) mounted on the wall or under a desk. The call is annunciated in the control post, the guard responds to the room.
16
One (1) 15 mm conduit is required from each designed room, the conduits from these rooms may be combined in a junction box. Two or three of these junction boxes may be linked together. The link will be 25 mm conduit and one (1) conduit (38 mm) is then run to the CER where it is terminated under the computer flooring. 4.2.2.2 Space Requirements The FPSA COD is mounted on a wall or under the desk in the designated room. 4.2.2.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for this system is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. 4.2.3 Personal Portable Alarm System The PPA system is used by CSC staff working in all areas of the institution to alert the central security post staff to serious incidents or potentially dangerous personal security or safety situations. The PPA system consists of a central controller, a central receiver and a number of portable wireless transmitting devices (transmitters) in belt worn leather cases. PPA alarms are sent to the security post when these small portable transmitters are activated by the staff member. Alarm identification, alarm time and cancellation may be recorded on a data logger. 4.2.3.1 Conduit Requirements One (1) 15 mm conduit is required from the PPA receiver which is located in a central area of the institution to the MCCP where the PPA controller is located. This conduit will accommodate the twisted and alarm signal wires. One (1) 15 mm conduit is required between the PPA receiver and the antenna which is located on the roof, the side of a building or on an existing radio tower. 4.2.3.2 Space Requirements The PPA receiver will be mounted in a rack or on the wall in a central location of the institution. The PPA controller will be mounted in the MCCP control or on a shelve in the CER. 4.2.3.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for the PPA equipment in the MCCP is a 110 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power circuit.
17
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.2.4 Portable Alarm Location System
The PAL system operates in conjunction with the Personal Portable Alarm (PPA) system to locate an area where the PPA alarm is originating from. The PAL system consists of central monitoring equipment, a number of nodes and a number of wireless sensors distributed within an institution. PPA alarm locations can be determined and sent to the security post. Alarm identification, alarm time and cancellation are data logged. 4.2.4.1 Conduit Requirements One (1) 15 mm conduit is required from each PAL node which is located throughout the institution to the CER where the PAL controller is located. This conduit will accommodate a coaxial cable for the alarm signal from each node. 4.2.4.2 Space Requirements The PALS nodes and wireless sensors will be mounted in the ceilings throughout the institution. The PALS controller in the CER will require approximately three (3) feet of rack space. 4.2.4.3 Power Requirement The power requirement for the PALS equipment in the CER is one 110 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power circuit. 4.3 4.3.1 Access Control & Supplementary Systems Door Control & Corridor Monitoring System This system provides room and corridor access by door control from a designated CP. The door control system is usually integrated with a CCTV system to allow staff to view the person(s) requesting access. 4.3.1.1 Conduit Requirements Two (2) 15 mm conduits are required from under the CER floor or the TES to the room and corridor doors requiring controlled access. One conduit will accommodate the CCTV system for video and camera control purposes. The other conduit is required for the door access control system. 4.3.1.2 Space Requirements The rack space requirement will usually consists of approximately two (2) feet of one (1) 2.483 m rack in the CER or TES and one rack in the MCCP control console or CP console.
18
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.3.1.3 Power Requirements
The power requirement for the door control and monitoring system is one 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. 4.3.2 Closed Circuit Television System This system allows observations to be made in cells, corridors, exercise yards and other locations where there is a need. The system usually consists of several cameras mounted at these locations with monitors grouped together at a convenient point such as the control post or the MCCP. 4.3.2.1 Conduit Requirements Two (2) 15 mm conduits are required to each camera location, one for signal wiring and the other for VAC power to the camera and housing. If the camera has pan/tilt/zoom facilities, one of the two conduits may have to be increased in size to 19 mm to accommodate possible control wiring. 4.3.2.2 Space Requirements The only space requirement for this system is rack space in a console for the monitors and possibly a pan/tilt/zoom controller. 4.3.2.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for the CCTV equipment is one 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. 4.3.3 Supplementary Intrusion Detection System This system provides supplement outdoor intrusion detection from the MCCP. The SIDS monochrome CCD camera is usually mounted on a high tower or roof top to provide surveillance and assessment of designated area(s). 4.3.3.1 Conduit Requirements Two (2) 15 mm conduits are required from under the CER floor to the outdoor camera location. One conduit will accommodate the CCTV system for video and camera control cables. The other conduit is required for the camera and enclosure VAC power. 4.3.3.2 Space Requirements Rack space in the MCCP control console is required for the SIDS monitor and camera Pan/Tilt/Zoom controller. The size of the rack space will depend on the size of the monitor and controller.
19
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.3.3.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for this system is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere supply. 4.3.4 Voice Recording Equipment
The Voice Recorder Equipment (VRE) records all conversations on the telephones, radios, PA and PIDS PA systems in the MCCP. VRE wiring can be run under the computer flooring and conduit is not normally required. 4.3.4.1 Space Requirements The VRE is self contained in its own moveable rack and requires a floor area of 650 mm square with an equal area in front and behind for operator and technician access. It can be mounted with its back against a wall if required, however this is not preferable. 4.3.4.2 Power Requirements The power requirement for this system is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere supply. 4.3.5 Video Recording Equipment The Video Cassette Recorders (VCR) record all video from the various CCTV cameras installed throughout the institution. VCR installed in the MCCP will record the PIDS video form the perimeter cameras. VCR install in Security CP throughout the institution will record the video from their particular areas of surveillance interest. VCR wiring can be run under the computer flooring and conduit is not required. 4.3.5.1 Space Requirements The VCRs are normally installed in moveable racks and requires a floor area of 650 mm square with an equal area in front and behind for operator and technician access. Due to limited space in some CP, the VCRs may be on shelves under the desks. 4.3.5.2 Power Requirements The power requirement for this system is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere supply.
20
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.4 4.4.1 Communications Systems Two Way Communications Radio
The two way radio system provides routine operational, maintenance as well as emergency response communications between control posts, guards and vehicles in and around the facility. Base station radios and Digital Interface Units are installed in standard EIA electronic equipment racks in the CER. The MCCP base station radios are connected to a common antenna mounted on an external tower. In the repeater configuration, the base stations are connected via a series of filters to a common antenna. Rack mounted remote radio controllers are mounted in the MCCP console. Digital Interface Units (DIU) are used to configure the base station radios for digital communications Base station radios located in security control posts and maintenance control centres are connected to their own local antennas. 4.4.1.1 Conduit Requirements One (1) 19 mm conduit is required from the CER to the antenna tower. The conduit may terminate at the base of the tower, if the tower is mounted on the roof. In the case of a ground mounted tower the conduit will continue up the tower. The lower portion of the tower is protected by anti climb shields. 4.4.1.2 Space Requirements Three base station radios with associated DIUs will use approximately half of a EIA standard 2.483 m equipment rack in the CER. If the radios are configured as repeaters and filters are used, another EIA standard 2.483 m rack will be required. In the MCCP console, the remote controller will require 5 inches (3 U) of console cabinet space. 4.4.1.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for this system is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere supply. 4.4.2 Public Address System The PA system is designed to allow the entire institution to be addressed or limited areas to be addressed from various points throughout the institution.
21
Loudspeakers are distributed throughout the institution in areas where they are required. They are mounted in 254 mm x 254 mm x 102 mm back boxes mounted in the walls or in the ceilings. The boxes are joined in series by 15 mm conduit for the first ten or so boxes and then by 19 mm conduit to the cable tray. Where two strings of speaker boxes combine into one the resultant conduit is usually 19 mm. A 25 mm conduit is used between a TES and its respective control post. 4.4.2.2 Space Requirements The PA equipment requires approximately half of a 2.483 m rack in the CER or half of a 2.483 m rack in a TES. 4.4.2.3 Power Requirements The power requirement is for a 110 VAC, 15.0 ampere supply in the CER or a 110 VAC, 15.0 ampere supply in a TES. 4.43 Limited Call Intercom System (LCIS) The LCIS is designed to provide communications between the control posts and points such as beyond a barrier controlled by the post. The control post has a master station mounted in a console and the remote station is mounted in a back box in the wall. 4.4.3.1 Conduit Requirements The remote station is mounted in a 102 mm x 102 mm x 65 mm back box placed 1500 mm from the floor. One (1) 15 mm conduit connects these points to the TES or the cable tray. One (1) 25 mm conduit is used between a TES and its respective control post. 4.4.3.2 Space and Power Requirements The LCIS usually forms part of the PA. Refer to the PA section for space and power requirements. 4.4.4 Restricted Visit Intercom System The purpose of the RVIS is to provide a means of two-way (full-duplex) voice communication between an inmate and visitor while denying physical exchange. Typically, by providing transparent partitioning between the inmate and visitor, physical access is denied while allowing visual contact between each half of a restricted visiting booth. Within each booth, telephone handset will allow voice communication between the two halves. The control post has a master station mounted in a console.
22
One (1) 15 mm conduit is required from each booth to the Restricted Visit Control Post. 4.4.4.2 Space Requirements The RVIS telephone handsets are securely mounted on the wall of the booths. The RVIS controller is mounted in the console in the Restricted Visit CP. 4.4.4.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for this system is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere supply. 4.4.5 Entertainment Cable Television The Entertainment Cable Television (ECTV) System distributes FM radio and television signals to each cell and various other points throughout the institution. The signals are received off-air via an antenna array for local and satellite signals or from a cable company. A signal from a VCR can be introduced. All these signals are processed in the headend equipment and then distributed via splitters and amplifiers distributed throughout the system. 4.4.5.1 Conduit Requirements A conduit outlet is required in each cell and in various inmate and staff lounges. Groups of four cell block outlet boxes are connected to a junction box by 19 mm conduit. The junction boxes are linked in groups of two or three and then to the TES using 38 mm conduit. All other locations utilize 19 mm conduit to their respective TES locations. The cable distributing the signals to the TES from the head end location is installed in a cable tray which runs throughout the institution. One (1) 19 mm conduit is required between the head-end equipment rack and the antenna site. 4.4.5.2 Space Requirements The head-end equipment will occupy a half of a 2.483 m rack in the equipment room closest to the antenna site. The remainder of the equipment consists of amplifiers and splitters and is accommodated in a 400 mm x 400 mm x 100 mm cabinet located in each of the pertinent TES. This cabinet can either be mounted on the wall or placed under the computer flooring. 4.4.5.3 Power Requirements The power requirement for this system is a 110 VAC, 15.0 ampere supply.
23
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 4.5 Control Posts (CP) and Terminal Equipment Spaces (TES)
There are several control posts and TES's throughout the institution. They are usually paired and connected by banks of conduits to enable connection between the main equipment of the various systems and the control panels that are associated with them. The number of conduits provided is normally very generous and provides for any possible expansion or replacement of the systems. 4.5.1 Conduit Requirements All the consoles in the control posts with computer flooring do not require conduits. Normally the TES and CP locations are connected by cable trays or at least one 50 mm conduit. 4.5.2 Space Requirements In each TES accommodation is required for two 2.483 racks, one rack to house the cell call system and the other the PA and LCIS equipment. 4.5.3 Power Requirements Two (2) 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere power circuits are required. 4.6 Installation Requirements The conduit shall be installed at the site in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work and the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work. 4.7 Documentation Requirements All as-build drawings and documentation shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
24
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 5.0 5.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE General
All on-site installation work, and installation acceptance shall be conducted in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. 6.0 DELIVERY Delivery requirements for drawings, plans, etc. (where applicable) shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
25
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification APPENDIX A SUMMARY OF SYSTEM CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS System MDS FDS MICROWAVE PIDS CCTV Conduit Requirements
One 38 mm conduit from the CER to the area between the two perimeter fences. One 38 mm conduit from the CER to the inner perimeter fence. One 19 mm conduit from the closest local control module to the sallyport area. Signal and Control. Two 50 mm conduits from the CER to the perimeter camera towers in both directions with junction boxes at each of the towers. One 19 mm conduit from the junction box to the cameras on the tower. VAC Power. Two 50 mm conduits from the electrical distribution panel in the CER to the junction box on the perimeter. One 38 mm conduit around the perimeter providing power to each camera group.
PIDS PA
Two 25 mm conduits from the CER to the first group of speakers on the perimeter fence, one in each direction. One 25 mm conduit between speaker locations. Control and signal cables (no conduit required) under the computer flooring to the CER. VAC UPS power in 19 mm conduit from the CER. One 15 mm conduit from each cell to a junction box in the pipe chase. Junction boxes linked together by 25 mm conduit. One 38 mm conduit from the group junction box to the CP/TES. One 25 mm conduit from the TES to the CP. One 15 mm conduit from each designed room to a junction box. Junction boxes connected by 25 mm conduit. One 38 mm conduit from a main junction box to the CER. One 15 mm conduit from the PPA receiver to the MCCP. One 15 mm conduit from the PPA receiver to the antenna. One 15 mm conduit from each PALS node to the CER. Two 15 mm conduits (one for CCTV, one for power) from the CER or from the TES to the room and/or corridor doors requiring controlled access.
MCCP ICCS
FPSA
PPA PALS Door Control
26
System Supp. CCTV
Conduit Requirements Two 15 mm conduits to each camera location, one for signal wiring and the other for AC power to the camera and housing. If the camera has pan/tilt/zoom facilities, one of the two conduits may have to be increased in size to 19 mm to accommodate additional control wiring. Two 15 mm conduits from the CER to the camera location. One conduit for video and camera control cables. The other conduit for the camera and enclosure VAC power. Cables under the computer flooring. Cables under the computer flooring. One 19 mm conduit from the Base Station to the antenna location. One 15 mm conduit between speaker locations. Combine speaker locations require one 19 mm conduit. One 25 mm conduit from the TES to the CP. One 15 mm conduit from remote stations to the TES or the cable tray. One 15 mm conduit from each booth to the RVIS CP. One 15 mm conduit to in each cell and various inmate lounges. Groups of cell outlet boxes are connected to a junction box by 19 mm conduit. One 38 mm conduit from junction boxes to the TES. One 19 mm conduit from the head-end equipment rack and the antenna site. CER and various TES are linked by one 50 mm conduit.
SIDS
MCCP/VRE MCCP/VCR Two-way Radio Interior PA
LCIS RVIS ECTV
CER/TES
27
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification APPENDIX B SUMMARY OF SYSTEM SPACE REQUIREMENTS System MDS FDS MICROWAVE PIDS CCTV Space Requirements The MDS control equipment requires approximately 1.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER.
The FDS control equipment requires approximately 1.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER. The microwave control equipment requires approximately 0.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER. The video distribution and switching equipment require approximately 1.0 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER. The PIDS CCTV equipment in the MCCP requires approximately 1.0 m of EIA standard console cabinet space. A separate standalone rack is required to housed five (5) time lapse VCRs in the MCCP.
PIDS PA MCCP
The PIDS PA equipment requires approximately 0.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER. The MCCP console usually consists of six EIA standard console cabinets joined together to form the control console. The maintenance video display unit (VDU) and ancillary equipment require approximately 1.0 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the MCCP. The time-lapse VCRs and printer require a low profile cabinet with sliding shelves in the MCCP.
ICCS FPSA PPA
The ICCS control equipment requires approximately 1.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the TES. The FPSA control equipment requires approximately 0.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER. The PPA receiver requires to be mounted on a shelve in a rack or on the wall in a central location of the institution. The PPA controller mounted on a shelve requires approximately 0.25 m of the rack space in the ancillary equipment rack space in the MCCP.
28
System PALS
Space Requirements The PALS nodes and wireless sensors will be mounted in the ceilings throughout the institution. The PALS controller requires approximately 1.0 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER. The hall and door control equipment require approximately 1.0 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER or TES. The operator control equipment requires approximately 0.25 m of rack space in the control console. Video switchers, multiplexers, etc. require rack space in EIA standard equipment racks in the CER or TES. The space requirement will depend on the type and amount of video equipment being used. The space requirement in the control console for the monitors and the pan/tilt/zoom controller if applicable will depend on the type and amount of video equipment being used.
Door Control
Suppl. CCTV
SIDS
The space requirement for the SIDS control equipment in the CER will depend on the type of equipment being used. Rack space in the control console is required for the monitors and a pan/tilt/zoom controller if applicable. The Voice Recording Equipment is usually self contained in its own moveable rack in the MCCP and requires a floor area of 650 mm square with an equal area in front and behind for operator and technician access. The Time Lapse Video Cassette Recorders are normally installed in moveable racks in the MCCP and require a floor area of 650 mm square with an equal area in front and behind for operator and technician access. Three base station radios with associated DIUs require approximately 1.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the CER. If the radios are configured as repeaters, another EIA standard equipment is required for the filters. In the MCCP console, the remote controller requires 5 inches (3 U) of console cabinet space.
MCCP/VRE
MCCP/VCR
Two-way Radio
Interior PA
The Public Address equipment requires approximately 1.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space in the TES.
29
System LCIS RVIS ECTV
Space Requirements The Limited Call Intercom System usually forms part of the interior PA system. The Restricted Visit Intercom System controller is mounted in the console in the Restricted Visit CP. The Entertainment Cable TV system head-end equipment requires approximately 1.5 m of EIA standard equipment rack space close to the antenna site. Amplifiers and splitters will be accommodated in the EIA standard equipment racks in the TES or amplifiers and splitters can be a small cabinet mounted on the wall or placed under the computer flooring.
TES
Each TES requires two EIA standard equipment racks, one rack to house the inmate cell call system and ancillary equipment. The other rack will house the interior PA and LCIS equipment.
30
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification APPENDIX C SUMMARY OF SYSTEM POWER REQUIREMENTS System MDS FDS MICROWAVE PIDS CCTV Power Requirements
The power requirement for the MDS equipment in the CER is one 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power circuit. The power requirement for the FDS equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power circuit. The power requirement for the microwave equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power circuit. The power required in the CER for video switching and control equipment is one 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere uninterruptible power circuit. The power requirement for the perimeter cameras is a 110.0 VAC, 20 ampere circuit to each group of usually four (4) cameras from the power distribution panel in the CER. The power requirement for the PIDS PA equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power circuit. The power requirement for the MCCP console is two 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere, uninterruptible power circuits. The power requirement for the Inmate Cell Call System equipment in the security Control Post is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Fixed Point Security Alarm system equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Personal Portable Alarm system equipment in the MCCP is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Portable Alarm Location System equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Hall, Corridor and Door Monitor and Control system in the security Control Post is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Supplementary CCTV system equipment in the security Control Post is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Supplementary Intrusion Detection System equipment in the CER is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit.
PIDS PA MCCP ICCS FPSA PPA PALS Door Control
Suppl. CCTV SIDS
31
System MCCP/VRE MCCP/VCR Two-way Radio Interior PA LCIS
Power Requirements The power requirement for the Voice Recording Equipment in the MCCP is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Video Cassette Recorder equipment in the MCCP is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Radio Communications system equipment is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Interior Public Address system equipment in the security Control Post is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The Limited Call Intercom System is usually part of the Interior PA system. If a standalone LCIS installed, the power requirement for this system is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Restricted Visits Intercom System equipment in the RV Control Post a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Entertainment Cable TV system equipment is a 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuit. The power requirement for the Terminal Equipment Space room is two 110.0 VAC, 15.0 ampere circuits.
RVIS ECTV TES
32
ES/SPEC-0303 Revision 2 29 April 2002 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION LIMITED CALL INTERCOM SYSTEM FOR USE IN FEDERAL CORRECTIONAL INSTITUTIONS
AUTHORITY This Specification is approved by the Correctional Service of Canada for the procurement and Installation of a Perimeter Intrusion Detection System (PIDS) in Canadian federal correctional institutions. Recommended corrections, additions or deletions should be addressed to the Design Authority at the following address: Director, Engineering Services, Correctional Service of Canada, 340 Laurier Avenue West, Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0P9
Electronics Systems Division Electronic Engineering Specification
ES/SPEC-0303 Revision 2 29 April 2002
TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 2 ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 4 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................ 5 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 6 1.1 General................................................................................................................................ 6 1.2 Purpose ............................................................................................................................... 6 1.3 Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment.................................................................................. 6 1.4 Technical Acceptability........................................................................................................ 6 1.5 Equipment Procurement ..................................................................................................... 7 1.6 Quantity of Equipment......................................................................................................... 7 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 8 REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 9 3.1 General................................................................................................................................ 9 3.1.1 System Configuration............................................................................................. 9 3.1.2 Period of Operation ................................................................................................ 9 3.2 System Requirements......................................................................................................... 9 3.2.1 General .................................................................................................................. 9 3.2.2 Control Station...................................................................................................... 10 3.2.3 Control Panel........................................................................................................ 10 3.2.4 Handset or Microphone/Speaker ......................................................................... 10 3.2.5 Remote Station .................................................................................................... 10 3.2.6 Handset or Microphone/Speaker ......................................................................... 11 3.2.7 Call Button............................................................................................................ 11 3.2.8 Enclosure ............................................................................................................. 11 3.2.9 Common Equipment ............................................................................................ 11 3.2.10 Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts ........................................................................... 11 3.2.11 Interface to Video Tape Recorder ........................................................................ 12 Design Requirements........................................................................................................ 12 3.3.1 General ................................................................................................................ 12 3.3.2 Wiring Supervision ............................................................................................... 12 3.3.3 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability................................................................ 12 3.3.4 Power Failure ....................................................................................................... 12 3.3.5 System Failure ..................................................................................................... 13
2.0 3.0
3.3
3.4
3.3.6 Human Factors..................................................................................................... 13 3.3.7 Existing Equipment .............................................................................................. 13 3.3.8 Control Panels...................................................................................................... 13 Operational Requirements ................................................................................................ 13 3.4.1 Wall-Mounted Remote Station Operation ............................................................ 13 3.4.2 Ceiling-Mounted Remote Station Operation ........................................................ 15 3.4.3 Interface With PA System in Living Units............................................................. 15 3.4.4 All Call .................................................................................................................. 15 3.4.5 Pre-Announcement Chime................................................................................... 15
3.5 Envir onmental Requirements............................................................................................ 15 3.6 Power Requirements......................................................................................................... 16 3.7 Installation Requirements.................................................................................................. 16 3.8 Documentation Requirements........................................................................................... 16 3.9 Support Requirements ...................................................................................................... 16 3.10 Training Requirements...................................................................................................... 16 4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................. 17 4.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 17 ...................................................................................................................................... 17
5.0 DELIVERY 6.0 7.0
INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................................................... 17 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 17
ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: CER COTS CSA CSC DES EIA GFE LCIS MCCP PTT RFP SOW TES Common Equipment Room Commercial-Off-The- Shelf Canadian Standards Association Correctional Service Canada Director Engineering Services Electronic Industries Association Government Furnished Equipment Limited Call Intercom System Main Communications and Control Post Push-to-Talk Request for Proposal Statement of Work Terminal Equipment Space
DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Contractor Project Officer Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment Director, Engineering Services (DES) - Correctional Service Canada (CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Services Canada (PW&GSC) is responsible for all contractual matters associated with the system design and implementation. The company selected as the successful bidder. A CSC employee or a contracted person designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. Equipment currently on the market with available field reliability data, manuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract.
1.0 1.1
INTRODUCTION General This specification defines the essential tec hnical and f unctional r equirements of the Cor rectional Service Canada (CSC) for the procurement and installation of a Limited Call Intercom System (LCIS) for federal correctional institutions.
1.2
Purpose The pur pose of the LCIS is to pr ovide a m eans of tw o-way ( half-duplex) voic e c ommunication between an attendant at a master control station and another staff member at a remote station. The primary use of the system is to enable staff in remote locations to pass queries or status reports to a master control station. The attendant at the c ontrol panel can then use the system to further communicate with the specific remote location if required. The LCIS described herein would be applicable to new institutions to be constructed. It could also be retrofitted into existing institutions whenever it becomes necessary to add a Limited Call Intercom capability or replace existing obsolete equipment.
1.3
Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment The LCIS shall use commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) equipment and proven designs to the maximum extent possible. All new equipment shall meet the specified lifespan requirements. New equipment designs shall be restricted to unique interfaces and common control console.
1.4
Technical Acceptability The Cor rectional Ser vice Canada ( CSC) oper ational envir onment is unique for its diversity of locations, climate exposures and the physical restrictive construction techniques of penal institutions. Maintaining national s ecurity, the s afety of staff and offenders alike is CSC's commitment to the government and public . Elec tronic s ecurity s ystems oper ating in this unique envir onment s hall maintain very high standards of dependability and reliability. The CSC Engineering Ser vices Divis ion has es tablished tec hnical s pecifications and equipm ent standards for specific electronic security systems which are based on very specific and restrictive operational per formance c riteria as detailed in its Elec tronic Engineer ing Standar d. T echnical acceptability of thes e s ystems m eans that the equipm ent c omplies w ith the pertinent CSC specifications and standards. The technical acceptance process shall involve system and subsystem evaluation in accordance with the applic able CSC s pecifications in one of CSC f acilities. CSC may when it deems necessary,
request the supplier to arrange for a f ull site dem onstration. CSC s hall verify in depth any of the system technical specifications called up. CSC may rely on manufacturer's test results for specific areas of the specification where an independent test facility has conducted the test, and the facility is deemed acceptable to CSC. It is the s upplier's r esponsibility to m ake new developm ents in pr oducts available to CSC for evaluation. Equipment qualification is an ongoing pr ocess and c an be initiated at any tim e by a vendor. Any vendor can have access to the CSC s pecifications and s tandards. Any new development or products should be submitted to the CSC Engineering Services Division, Technical Authority in a suitable time frame prior to any tendering process to allow for an acceptable evaluation period. The evaluation period may take up to sixteen (16) months. 1.5 Equipment Procurement Any ordering of equipment/material before the appr oval of the LCIS system design report will be undertaken at the c ontractor's own risk. T he Design Authority may authorize the pr ocurement of certain long lead items at, or shortly after a preliminary design review of the proposed system. 1.6 Quantity of Equipment The quantity and location of the LCIS equipment required for CSC institutions will be contained in the specification identified in the Request for Proposal (RFP).
2.0
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of the Request for Proposal (RFP) shall form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. ES/SOW-0101 ES/SOW-0102 EIA-310-C Statement of Work for Electronic Systems for Correctional Service of Canada Institutions. Statement of Work for Quality Control for installation of Electronic Systems in Federal Correctional Institutions. Electronic Industry Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment
3.0 3.1
REQUIREMENTS General The contractor shall design, supply, install, test and provide documentation and training for an LCIS in accordance with the Specifications, Standards and Statement of Works specified in Section 2.0 of this specification.
3.1.1
System Configuration The LCIS shall consist of the following elements in the quantities given in the Statement of Technical Requirements (STR): a. b. c. d. e. Control Station consisting of a control panel and a telephone handset/speaker combination; Remote Stations consisting of a microphone/speaker combination, a call button (if specified) and an enclosure; Common equipment (amplifiers, power supplies, switchers, a voice tape recorder, etc.); Interconnecting wiring, cables, etc.; and Conduit, ducts, outlet boxes, etc.
3.1.2
Period of Operation The LCIS and all as sociated equipment shall be rated for and capable of 24 hours per day, seven days per week operation.
3.2 3.2.1
System Requirements General The LCIS shall provide satisfactory sound distribution within each designated area of the institution. The equipment shall produce high speech intelligibility throughout the area covered by the system at all nor mal microphone distances. The system shall be f ree of audible transients as circuits are selected and disabled and microphones are switched.
3.2.2
Control Station The control station, consisting of a control panel and a telephone hands et or microphone/speaker combination, allows an oper ator c ontrols over a num ber of r emote s tations. T he loc ation of the control station will be identified in the STR.
3.2.3
Control Panel The control panel s hall contain the nec essary controls and annunc iators to per mit the oper ator to have independent control over each remote station. Only one half-duplex voice path between the control station and any of the remote stations may exist at one time. The required physical configuration of the control panel and the number of remote stations may vary with each particular application and will be specified in the Statement of Technical Requirement.
3.2.4
Handset or Microphone/Speaker A handset or microphone/speaker combination (as specified in the STR) shall be supplied with each control panel. The handset/microphone shall contain a PUSH-TO-TALK (PTT) switch to enable a selected voice path. T his s witch s hall be a non- latching ty pe w hich autom atically dis ables the transmitter/microphone when released. The location of the speaker (mounted on the control panel or in a separate enclosure) and the requirement for a volume control will be detailed in the STR.
3.2.5
Remote Station Different types of remote station assemblies may be required depending on the specific application: a. b. c. indoor ceiling/wall-mounted (e.g., living units); indoor desk top mounted (e.g., office); or outdoor wall-mounted (e.g., exterior doors).
The assemblies for outdoor mounting shall be rugged, weather proof units capable of satisfactory operation under the environmental conditions specified in this specification. All assemblies shall have high r esistance to dam age and des truction due to deliber ate physical abuse. The contractor shall submit a prototype sample of each type of assembly for approval by the Design Authority prior to proceeding with the procurement of system quantities.
10
3.2.6
Handset or Microphone/Speaker The hands et or m icrophone/speaker c ombination s hall be c apable of transmitting/handling the required power levels and s hall be c ompatible with the enc losure in w hich they are housed. The requirement for a volume control will be defined in the STR.
3.2.7
Call Button In some installations (i.e., wall-mounted), the inter com assembly shall incorporate a CALL button enabling a person at a remote station to s ignal the attendant at the c ontrol station. T he STR will specify if this option is required.
3.2.8
Enclosure The intercom enclosure shall be physically rugged to prevent damage by physical abuse. The STR will specify whether the enclosures are Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) or are to be supplied by the contractor.
3.2.9
Common Equipment Where feasible and practical all common equipment (e.g., power supplies, logic boards, amplifiers, etc.) shall be located in the Terminal Equipment Spaces supplied for that purpose. This area will be identified in the STR. Consistent with the f oregoing, only items of equipment such as visual and audible annunc iators, s witches, ac tuators, etc . w hich the oper ator m ust ac cess dir ectly s hall be located in the control panels. To the maximum practical extent, off-the-shelf equipment shall be selected for use in the LCIS. New designs shall be restricted to common interface areas, control panels and consoles, or unique devices for which an off-the-shelf item does not exist.
3.2.10 Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts The contractor shall supply all necessary terminations, cross connection cabinets, conduits, wire and cabling and any other items that may be required for the s atisfactory completion of the s pecified system. All ins tallation w orkmanship s hall be per formed in accordance with ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work and all applicable national, provincial, and local electrical codes. A wiring diagram shall be s upplied in the Ins tallation section of the Maintenance Manual to detail where module connections terminate and how wires are routed and terminated. Conduits, cables, ducts, trays, etc. may be either G overnment F urnished Equipm ent ( GFE) or supplied and installed by the contractor depending on the particular institution. The determination will be made by the Design Authority and will be identified in the STR.
11
Connectors provided on the ends of any cable must mate with the corresponding connector on the equipment. Adapters from one type of connector to another are not acceptable. 3.2.11 Interface to Voice Tape Recorder The contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface the LCIS to a good quality Voice Tape Recorder (if required). 3.3 3.3.1 Design Requirements General To the maximum practical extent, off-the-shelf equipment should be selected for use in the system. New designs should be restricted to common interface areas, control panels and consoles, or unique devices for which an off-the-shelf item does not exist. A design objective is to minimize the number of wires required between all elements of the system. A s pace-diversity appr oach to s ystem planning s hall be employed to ensure that loss of one interconnection routing does not impair the operational capability of the complete system. 3.3.2 Wiring Supervision Wiring shall be supervised in all system modes. An alarm shall occur if any system wiring is cut or shorted to other wires or if the s ystem devic es ar e tam pered w ith by unauthor ized people or environmental conditions. 3.3.3 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability Elements of the LCIS shall have high resistance to damage, destruction, or conversion to other uses (including weapons). All inter connecting s ervice m ust be s ecure agains t tam pering or im proper interference. Elements of the system shall be isolated from one another to prevent the passage of contraband between inmate and visitor. 3.3.4 Power Failure Loss or restoration of primary power to the LCIS shall not procedure spurious oscillations, clicks, or other unwanted noise in the s peaker outputs. W hen power is restarted after a pow er failure, the system shall resume normal operation without operator action and shall automatically restart either in a "no-circuits-selected" condition or in the same state as existed before the power failure.
12
3.3.5
System Failure An LCIS failure shall be deemed to have occurred when any required communication is not produced or when any required control function cannot be performed.
3.3.6
Human Factors Elements of the system which are used directly by staff or inmates (i.e., control panels, annunciators, etc.) shall conform with accepted principles of good human factors design.
3.3.7
Existing Equipment In m ost ins tallations, c ontrol elem ents of the s ystem will share console space with other electrical/electronic equipment such as door controls, lighting controls, etc. and will be operated by the same staff member. In such cases it is important that effort be made to coordinate the functional and operational design of the system according to accepted human engineering principles to ensure a uniform appearance and commonality of a layout to assist the operator in the performance of his duties.
3.3.8
Control Panels Mounting s pace within c ontrol pos ts is us ually lim ited and the pr oblem of deter mining a suitable equipment mounting location is minimized if the control panels are small. Therefore, the des igner should make maximum possible use of annunciation and control devices which combine two or more functions into a single unit (e.g., a lighted push-button instead of a separate light and an unlit pushbutton). The LCIS may use EIA s tandard display and c ontrol panels or video dis play units. T he design of either dis play and c ontrol m ethod s hall be in accordance with ES/STD-0802 or ES/STD-0803, Standards.
3.4 3.4.1
Operational Requirements Wall-Mounted Remote Station Operation The normal sequence of events relating to the use of the wall-mounted intercom station shall be as follows: a. a person at a remote station presses the CALL button causing: (1) the annunciator light identifying that station on the control panel to flash continuously;
13
(2)
a brief chime note to be autom atically repeated at the control station. The chime interval shall be adjustable (from the rear of the panel) between 5 and 15 seconds. Chime volume shall be adjustable from the r ear of the c ontrol panel or from the common control equipment. Depressing the CALL button again bef ore the control station has responded shall have no effect on the system, i.e., the chime sequence shall continue unaffected and the associated annunciator light shall continue flashing. This condition shall persist until:
b.
the attendant at the c ontrol station depresses the pus h-button switch associated with the flashing annunciator light. This shall cause: (1) (2) the annunciator light to change to a steady ON condition. the audible annunciator to turn OFF.
This action shall also enable the voice path between the two stations, with the remote unit in the TALK mode and the control station in the LISTEN mode. c. to talk to the remote station, the operator at the control station depresses the PTT switch on the handset/microphone. This s hall put the r emote s tation in the LIST EN m ode. T he annunciator light shall remain steady ON throughout with the audible chime annunciator OFF. when the conversation is completed the attendant at the control station once again depresses the illuminated visual annunciator switch causing it to ex tinguish and the voic e path to be disabled.
d.
If a new call request from a remote unit is initiated before an existing call has been completed, the system shall: a. if the existing call has not yet been answered: (1) (2) b. leave the audible annunciator on. flash the visual annunciators associated with both calls.
if the existing call has been answered: (1) (2) flash the visual annunciator for the new call and leave the one f or the existing call steady ON. the audible annunciator will not resume in this case.
14
In either cases a. or b. the control station operator may select any of the incoming call requests in any order by depressing the appropriate flashing push-button as per a single call. 3.4.2 Ceiling-Mounted Remote Station Operation The oper ation of the c eiling-mounted r emote s tation s hall be s imilar to that of the w all-mounted version except that there is no call button. The request by an of ficer in the r ange to es tablish the voice circuit will be communicated visually to the officer at the control station. The voice path may then be enabled/disabled from the control panel in the same manner as previously detailed for the wall-mounted remote station. These remote stations shall be automatically disabled as soon as the Public Address system in that zone is activated. 3.4.3 Interface With PA System in Living Units Provision of a suitable interface in the Living Units will permit interconnection with the PA System. 3.4.4 All Call The control station handset shall be selected to all intercom links simultaneously by the activation of a manually operated switch. The handset transmitter shall then have established precedence at all activated remote stations. The "all call" selection shall be visually annunciated on the control panel by a steady ON indicator. 3.4.5 Pre-Announcement Chime A brief pre-announcement chime shall be interjected onto the selected intercom link(s) subsequent to an "all call" selection. The chime shall be heard at the selected remote station(s) and the receiver of the handset at the control station. 3.5 Environmental Requirements The LCIS shall operate over the following environmental conditions: 3.5.1 3.5.2 Temperature: Humidity: 0 C to +50 C (indoor equipment), -40 C to +55 C (outdoor equipment); and 0 to 95% relative, non-condensing (indoor equipment), Up to 100% relative, condensing.
15
3.5.3
Location
indoor equipment in a sheltered environment; and outdoor equipment includes but is not limited to extremes of sun, wind, driving rain, hail, snow, ice loading, blown sand and dust.
3.6
Power Requirements The LCIS shall use VAC power within the following limits:
3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3
Voltage: Frequency: Transients:
120 VAC 10%; 60 Hz 1.5%; up to 5 times nominal voltage for up to 100 msec durations. Changes in the input power or any fluctuations within the above limits shall not cause damage to the unit; and power consumption shall not exceed 100 watts.
3.6.4 3.7
Power:
Installation Requirements The Restricted Visit Intercom System shall be installed at the site in accordance with the ES/SOW0101, Statement of Work and the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work.
3.8
Documentation Requirements All final system documentation shall be pr ovided with a Copyright Release for the doc umentation delivered in support of the system. The documentation shall be in ac cordance with the ES/SOW0101, Statement of Work.
3.9
Support Requirements The LCIS maintenance and spares support shall be provided in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
3.10
Training Requirements Operator training and maintenance training on the system shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW0101, Statement of Work.
16
4.0 4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE General The s ystem Q uality As surance pr ogramme s hall be pr ovided as detailed in the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. All on- site ins tallation w ork, tes t plans and s ystem ac ceptance tes ting s hall be c onducted in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
5.0
DELIVERY Delivery requirements for the LCIS doc uments, drawings, plans, manuals, etc. (where applicable) shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. Delivery requirements of the s ystem equipm ent s hall be in ac cordance w ith the ES/SO W-0102, Statement of Work.
6.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the LCIS shall not be affected by the use of standard electronic equipment used at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment shall be in accordance with ES/SOW0101, Statement of Work.
7.0
SAFETY The LCIS shall meet the applicable Canadian Standards Association (CSA) standards.
- END OF TEXT -
17
ES/SPEC-0500 Revision 2 14 January, 2002 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION INMATE CELL CALL SYSTEM FOR USE IN FEDERAL CORRECTIONAL INSTITUTIONS
AUTHORITY This Specification is approved by the Correctional Service of Canada for the procurement and Installation of an Inmate Cell Call system, subsystem, and equipment in Canadian federal correctional institutions. Recommended corrections, additions or deletions should be addressed to the Design Authority at the following address: Director, Engineering Services, Correctional Service of Canada, 340 Laurier Avenue West, Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0P9
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 2 ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 4 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................ 5 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 6 1.1 General................................................................................................................................ 6 1.2 Purpose ............................................................................................................................... 6 1.3 Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment.................................................................................. 6 1.4 Technical Acceptability........................................................................................................ 6 1.5 Equipment Procurement ..................................................................................................... 7 1.6 Quantity of Equipment......................................................................................................... 7 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 8 REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 9 3.1 General................................................................................................................................ 9 3.1.1 System Capacity .................................................................................................... 9 3.1.2 Period of Operation ................................................................................................ 9 3.2 System Requirements......................................................................................................... 9 3.2.1 Call Originating Device........................................................................................... 9 3.2.2 COD Procurement................................................................................................ 10 3.2.3 Prototype Approval............................................................................................... 10 3.2.4 Primary Annunciation and Control Panel ............................................................. 10 3.2.5 Secondary Annunciation Panel ............................................................................ 11 3.2.6 Call Cancellation Device ...................................................................................... 11 3.2.7 Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts ........................................................................... 11 3.2.8 Control Equipment ............................................................................................... 12 3.2.9 Interface to Data Logger ...................................................................................... 12 3.3 Design Requirements........................................................................................................ 12 3.3.1 General ................................................................................................................ 12 3.3.2 Wiring Supervision ............................................................................................... 12 3.3.3 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability................................................................ 12 3.3.4 Power Failure ....................................................................................................... 13 3.3.5 System Failure ..................................................................................................... 13 3.3.6 Human Factors..................................................................................................... 13 3.3.7 Existing Equipment .............................................................................................. 13 3.3.8 Annunciation and Control Panels ......................................................................... 13 3.4 Operational Requirements ................................................................................................ 14 3.4.1 Single Call ............................................................................................................ 14 3.4.2 Multiple Calls ........................................................................................................ 15 3.4.3 Enable/Disable ..................................................................................................... 15 3.4.4 Call Transfer......................................................................................................... 16 3.4.5 Interface To Data Logger ..................................................................................... 16
2.0 3.0
3.4.6 Audio/Visual Test Indicating Device..................................................................... 17 3.5 Envir onmental Requirements............................................................................................ 17 3.6 Power Requirements......................................................................................................... 17 3.7 Installation Requirements.................................................................................................. 17 3.8 Documentation Requirements........................................................................................... 17 3.9 Support Requirements ...................................................................................................... 17 3.10 Training Requirements...................................................................................................... 18 4.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................. 19 4.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 19 ...................................................................................................................................... 19
5.0 DELIVERY 6.0 7.0
INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................................................... 19 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 19
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: CCD CER COD COTS CSA CSC DES EIA GFE ICCS MCCP PACP RFP SAP SOW STR TES Call Cancellation Device Common Equipment Room Call Originating Device Commercial-Off-The- Shelf Canadian Standards Association Correctional Service Canada Director Engineering Services Electronic Industries Association Government Furnished Equipment Inmate Cell Call System Main Communications and Control Post Primary Annunciation and Control Panel Request for Proposal Secondary Annunciation Panel Statement of Work Statement of Technical Requirements Terminal Equipment Space
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Contractor Project Officer Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment
Director, Engineering Services (DES) - Correctional Service Canada (CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Service Canada (PW&GSC) is responsible for all contractual matters associated with the system design and implementation. The company selected as the successful bidder. A CSC employee or a contracted person designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. Equipment currently on the market with available field reliability data, manuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract.
This specification defines the essential tec hnical and f unctional r equirements of the Cor rectional Service Canada (CSC) for the procurement and installation of an Inmate Cell Call System (ICCS) for federal correctional institutions. 1.2 Purpose The primary purpose of the ICCS is to provide a means for inmates to indicate to the appropriate staff from their cells that they need s ome form of attention. T he system will assist the staff in dealing effectively with these requests for attention and to provide an output to a data logging recorder of all system events as the permanent status record and for possible use as documentary evidence. In a Cell Range, a Call Ordinating Device (COD) shall be installed in each cell, a corresponding white annunciating Outside Cell Indicating Device (Optional) shall be installed on the outside of each cell, complete with control equipment, will monitor the system at the Range Control Post CP). If a call is not acknowledged in the Range CP after a specified time delay (variable 1-15 minutes) then the call shall be automatically transferred and annunciated at the Main Com munications and Control Post (MCCP) where appropriate action will be initiated. The ICCS described herein would be applicable to new institutions to be constructed. It could also be retrofitted into existing institutions whenever it becomes necessary to add a cell call capability or replace existing obsolete equipment. 1.3 Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment The ICCS shall use commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) equipment and proven designs to the maximum extent possible. All new equipment shall meet the specified lifespan requirements. New equipment designs shall be restricted to unique interfaces and common control console. 1.4 Technical Acceptability The Cor rectional Ser vice Canada ( CSC) oper ational envir onment is unique for its diversity of locations, climate exposures and the physical restrictive construction techniques of penal institutions. Maintaining national s ecurity, the s afety of staff and offenders alike is CSC's commitment to the government and public . Elec tronic s ecurity s ystems oper ating in this unique envir onment s hall maintain very high standards of dependability and reliability.
The CSC Engineering Ser vices Divis ion has es tablished tec hnical s pecifications and equipm ent standards for specific electronic security systems which are based on very specific and restrictive operational per formance c riteria as detailed in its Elec tronic Engineer ing Standar d. T echnical acceptability of thes e s ystems m eans that the equipm ent c omplies w ith the pertinent CSC specifications and standards. The technical acceptance process shall involve system and subsystem evaluation in accordance with the applicable CSC specifications in one of CSC facilities or may be tested in a CSC facility to verify the effectiveness of the proposed tec hnologies w hen s ubjected to the r estrictive oper ational environment. CSC shall also verify in depth any of the system technical specifications called up. CSC may when it deems necessary, request the supplier to arrange for a full site demonstration. CSC may rely on manufacturer's test results for specific areas of the specification where an independent test facility has conducted the test, and the facility is deemed acceptable to CSC. It is the s upplier's r esponsibility to m ake new developm ents in pr oducts available to CSC for evaluation. Equipment qualification is an ongoing pr ocess and c an be initiated at any tim e by a vendor. Any vendor can have access to the CSC specifications and standards. Any new development or products should be submitted to the CSC Engineering Services Division, Technical Authority in a suitable time frame prior to any tendering process to allow for an acceptable evaluation period. The evaluation period may take up to sixteen (16) months. 1.5 Equipment Procurement Any ordering of equipment/material before the approval of the ICCS design report will be undertaken at the contractor's own risk. The Design Authority may authorize the procurement of certain long lead items at, or shortly after a preliminary design review of the proposed ICCS. 1.6 Quantity of Equipment The quantity and location of the equipm ent r equired f or CSC ins titutions will be c ontained in the specification identified in the Statement of Technical Requirements (STR).
The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of the Request for Proposal shall form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. ES/SOW-0101 ES/SOW-0102 ES/SPEC-0005 ES/SPEC-0102 ES/STD-0802 ES/STD-0803 EIA-310-C Statement of Work for Electronic Systems for Correctional Service of Canada Institutions. Statement of Work for Quality Control for installation of Electronic Systems in Federal Correctional Institutions. Specification for Main Com munications and Contr ol Pos t Integr ation Consoles Specification for Data Logger Systems Standard for Display and Control Panels Standard for Video Display Units Electronic Industry Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.0 3.1 REQUIREMENTS General
The Inmate Cell Call System (ICCS) consists of a number of Call Originating Devices (COD), one or more Primary Annunciation and Control Panels (PACP), one Secondary Annunciation Panel (SAP), a number of Call Cancellation Devices (CCD), wires, cables, conduits, ducts, etc.; and an interface with a Data Logger. 3.1.1 System Capacity The number of control panels and the num ber of cells served by each shall be as specified in the STR. The system shall be of a modular design and it shall be possible at a future date to add more primary annunciation panels and associated cell equipment to the basic installed complement without replacing the existing hardware. 3.1.2 Period of Operation The system and all associated equipment shall be rated for and capable of 24 hours per day, seven days per week operation. 3.2 3.2.1 System Requirements Call Originating Device The COD shall be flush mounted on the w all in the inm ate's cell. It s hall contain a tam per proof switch, which when activated, originates a call to the PACP in the Control Post (CP). This device is located in an area continually exposed to the inmate. The COD shall be highly resistant to physical attack, tampering, liquids, jamming, abrasives, heated objects, etc. Differences in institutional construction pr eclude a s ingle CO D des ign w hich is us able in ever y situation. Mounting information for each specific site application will be given in the STR. In order to prevent damage due to excessive force the switch mechanism shall be effectively isolated from any applied load greater than that necessary to activate it. The switch mechanism shall provide a positive touch feedback and audible c lick to the inm ate so that the inm ate is fully aware of its actuation. T he s witch w iring s hall be des igned s o that des truction of the unit w ill s ever the conductors, yielding only the m inimum possible length of light-gauge wire, and will not dis turb the built-in wiring beyond a local junction box. The force required to operate the push-button shall be between 5.6 and 11.0 N (20 and 40 oz.). The push button shall have a minimum diameter of 2.5 cm.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.2.2 COD Procurement
The ST R s hall def ine w hether the CO D w ill be deliver able item s under the c ontract or w ill be Government Furnished Equipment (GFE). 3.2.3 Prototype Approval When the contractor is to supply the COD as part of the system, a working COD prototype shall be provided to the Des ign Author ity f or appr oval pr ior to manufacturing or purchasing of system quantities. Figure 1.0 is a sketch of one acceptable design concept when the cell has an adjacent pipe chase. Bidders may quote to this design or may propose an alternative provided it meets the necessary requirements. 3.2.4 Primary Annunciation and Control Panel The PACP may be rack, desk, or wall-mounted and will usually be installed in the Security Control Post, Living Unit O ffice, which is responsible for the s upervision of an ar ea containing a gr oup of inmate cells. It shall contain the following annunciations and controls: a. b. c. d. e. f. one Visual Indicating Device for each cell; one Acknowledge Call Indicating Device for the complete group of cells; one Audible Indicating Device for the complete group of cells; one Call Disable Device (CDD) for each cell; one Call Disable Indicator for each cell; and one Audio/Visual Test Indicating Device.
In addition, a means of individually cancelling each inmates cell call shall be provided in the system. This shall be accomplished by a Call Cancellation Device which will be either: a. b. a manually-operated switch located on the PACP; or a key-operated switch located on the corridor wall near each cell.
The Request for Proposal will specify the type of Call Cancellation Device to be used.
10
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.2.5 Secondary Annunciation Panel
The SAP is located in the control console of the Main Communication and Control Post (MCCP) and provides annunciation and status (but not control) of the complete ICCS by major area (i.e., Security control post, Living units, etc.). The zones are identified in the STR. For each of these areas the Secondary Annunciation Panel shall indicate: a. b. if any cell calls have not been acknowledged or cancelled within a preset, adjustable time (1 to 15 minutes); and if any COD has been disabled.
The identification of the actual cell which is unacknowledged, uncancelled, or disabled shall not be annunciated. The SAP shall contain an Audio/Visual Test Indicating Device for checking the operability of all visual and audible annunciators on the panel. In addition, it shall contain a common Acknowledge Device and an Audible Indicating Device which shall sound for every call transfer and every call disable. The Acknowledge Device when operated shall silence the Audible Indicating Device for all existing calls. 3.2.6 Call Cancellation Device The CCD may be located in the PACP(s) or may be located in the cell range or living unit corridor. The device will be ex posed to inm ate abuse or attack and must therefore be rugged and tamper resistant and shall be key-operated. Operating the key shall require the user to overcome a spring resistance of 113 m.n.m. to 678 m.n.m. (1 in-lb to 6 in-lb) and the key shall be removable only in the rest position. A single key shall operate all CCD's. 3.2.7 Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts The contractor shall supply all necessary terminations, cross connection cabinets, conduits, wire and cabling and any other items that may be required for the s atisfactory completion of the s pecified system. All ins tallation w orkmanship s hall be per formed in accordance with ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work and all applicable national, provincial, and local electrical codes. A wiring diagram shall be s upplied in the Ins tallation section of the Maintenance Manual to detail where module connections terminate and how wires are routed and terminated. Conduits, cables, ducts, trays, etc. may be either GFE or supplied and installed by the contractor depending on the particular institution. The determination will be made by the Design Authority and will be identified in the RFP. Connectors provided on the ends of any cable must mate with the corresponding connector on the equipment. Adapters from one type of connector to another are not acceptable.
11
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.2.8 Control Equipment
The maximum feasible am ount of c ommon c ontrol equipm ent ( power s upplies, logic boar ds, amplifiers, etc .) s hall be loc ated in T erminal Equipm ent Spac es ( TES) and Com mon Equipment Room (CER) provided for the purpose. These areas will be identified in the STR. It is preferred that only equipm ent s uch as lights , s witches, ac tuators, etc . which the oper ator must access directly should be located in the Control Posts and Living Unit Offices. 3.2.9 Interface to Data Logger The contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface the ICCS to the MCCP Data Logger described in ES/SPEC-0005, Specification. 3.3 3.3.1 Design Requirements General To the maximum practical extent, off-the-shelf equipment should be selected for use in the ICCS. New designs should be restricted to common interface areas, control panels and consoles, or unique devices for which an off-the-shelf item does not exist. A design objective is to minimize the number of wires required between all elements of the system. A s pace-diversity appr oach to s ystem planning s hall be employed to ensure that loss of one interconnection routing does not impair the operational capability of the complete ICCS system. 3.3.2 Wiring Supervision Wiring shall be supervised in all system modes. An alarm shall occur if any system wiring is cut or shorted to other wires or if the s ystem devic es ar e tam pered w ith by unauthor ized people or environmental conditions. 3.3.3 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability Elements of the ICCS will operate in areas exposed to inmate access and shall have high resistance to damage, destruction, or conversion to other uses (including weapons). All interconnecting service must be secure against tampering or improper eavesdropping interference.
12
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.3.4 Power Failure
Loss or restoration of primary power to the system shall not produce spurious call annunciations or outputs to the data logger. When power is returned after a power failure, the system shall resume normal operation without operator action and s hall autom atically s tart f rom a "no- calls-present", cleared condition with no cells disabled. 3.3.5 System Failure A system failure shall be deemed to have occurred when any required annunciation (visual or audible) is not produced or when any required control function cannot be performed. This applies to both the primary and the secondary control units. 3.3.6 Human Factors Elements of the ICCS which are used directly by staff or inmates (i.e., control panels, annunciators, call originating devices, etc.) shall conform with accepted principles of good human factors design. 3.3.7 Existing Equipment In most installations, control and annunciation elements of the ICCS will share console space with other electrical/electronic equipment such as door controls, lighting controls, etc. and will be operated by the s ame s taff m ember. In s uch c ases it is im portant that ef fort be m ade to c oordinate the functional and operational design of the ICCS according to accepted human engineering principles to ens ure a unif orm appear ance and c ommonality of a lay out to as sist the oper ator in the performance of his duties. 3.3.8 Annunciation and Control Panels Mounting s pace within c ontrol pos ts is us ually lim ited and the pr oblem of deter mining a suitable equipment mounting location is minimized if the control panels are small. Therefore, the des igner should make maximum possible use of annunciation and control devices which combine two or more functions into a single unit (e.g., a lighted push-button instead of a separate light and an unlit pushbutton). The control units may use Electronic Industries Association (EIA) standard display and control panels or video display units. The design of either display and control method shall be in accordance with ES/STD-0802 or ES/STD-0803 Standards.
13
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.4 3.4.1 Operational Requirements Single Call
The functioning of equipment in response to a single call when an inmate in his cell operates the COD is as follows: a. b. c. d. the associated Visual Indicating Device on the PACP in the appropriate control post flashes; the Audible Indication Device turns steady ON; the Outside Cell Indicator Device (if present) flashes; and the Data Logger records the call.
NOTE: The Audible Indic ating Device shall have a pleas ing tone and an internal control shall be provided to adjust its audible level. The staff member will either operate the Master Acknowledge Device causing: a. b. c. d. the associated Visual Indicating Device on the PACP in the control post changes to steady ON; the Audible Indicating Device silences; the Outside Cell Indicating Device (if present) changes to steady ON; and the Data Logger records the acknowledgement, or
The staff member will activate the Call Cancellation Device associated with that call causing: a. b. c. d. the associated Visual Indicating Device on the PACP to return to the OFF state; the Audible Indicating Device to become silent; the Outside Cell Indicating Device (if present) to shut OFF; and the Data Logger to record the Call Cancellation.
Subsequent operation of the COD before the original call from it has been cancelled shall not cause a change of status of any visual or audible annunciator. Only the initial call shall be recorded on the MCCP Data Logger.
14
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.4.2 Multiple Calls
The ICCS shall have the ability to satisfactorily handle multiple simultaneous calls in the same manner as single calls. If prior calls have been acknowledged and not yet cancelled, a subsequent call from another COD shall cause the Audible Indic ating Device to sound again. A single operation of the Master Acknowledge Device shall silence the Audible Indicating Device regardless of the number of calls present. There shall be no change in the status of calls already acknowledged. The calls may be selectively cancelled with the as sociated CCD in any des ired s equence, independent of the sequence in which they were initiated. Any number of calls, up to the maximum installed complement shall be capable of being s eparately annunciated and logged w ithout system overload. The Data Logger shall record: a. b. c. 3.4.3 each call origination; each call cancellation; and the ac knowledgement of one or m ore c alls ( the num ber of c alls pr esent w hen the acknowledgement was made need not be recorded).
Enable/Disable When the Call Disable Device is operated on the PACP or SAP, the associated Call Disable Indicator shall be illuminated. Any further activation of the CO D shall be totally disregarded by the s ystem including the data logger. If an unac knowledged c all is pr esent on the c ircuit being dis abled, operation of that call disable device shall effectively cause an acknowledgement to occur, i.e., the Audible Indicating Device shall silence, and the Visual Indicating Device and Outside Cell Indicating Device shall change from flashing to steady. However, it shall not be possible to cancel a call by use of the Disable Device. Calls may be cancelled when the circuit is in the disabled state by operating the CCD. If an uncancelled call is still present when the circuit is enabled again, its status will become the same as if it had been acknowledged but not cancelled, i.e., Audible Indicating Device is not activated and the Visual Indicating Device and Outside Cell Indicating Device are steady ON. The data logger shall record the disabling and enabling of each cell call circuit.
3.4.4
Call Transfer If a call is not "ac knowledged" or "c ancelled" af ter a s pecific per iod of tim e ( adjustable 1 to 15 minutes) the c all will automatically be tr ansferred to the SAP at the MCCP. All annunciations will continue normally at the PACP. There shall be no indic ation at the PACP that a c all transfer has occurred.
15
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification At the Secondary Annunciation Panel, the call transfer shall: a. b. c.
cause a flashing of the visual annunciation for the zone which has caused the transfer; sound the audible annunciator; and be recorded by the data logger.
Operation of the common acknowledge device at the SAP in response to a call transfer shall: a. b. c. cause the visual annunciation to alter from flashing to steady; silence the Audible Indicating Device; and be recorded by the Data Logger.
The visual annunciation of call transfer shall extinguish only when all calls transferred from that zone are acknowledged and/or cancelled. Visual annunciation of a disabled condition shall extinguish only when all cell call circuits have been enabled in that zone. 3.4.5 Interface To Data Logger The Inmate Cell Call System shall provide an output to the Data Logger described in ES/SPEC-0005, Specification to provide separate indication of all call-related activities in the ICCS including: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. call origination (zone and cell number for initial call); call acknowledgement at PACP (zone number only); call cancellation (zone and cell number); circuit disable (zone and cell number); circuit enable (zone and cell number); call transfer to SAP (zone number only); and call acknowledge at SAP.
All of thes e ac tivities s hall be logged w ith the tim e-of-day and the z one and cell number where applicable in plain-language (or abbreviation thereof) without the need for a cross-reference table.
16
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.4.6 Audio/Visual Test Indicating Device
Both the PACP and SAP shall contain an Audio/Visual Test Indicating Device which when activated shall cause all visual annunciators and the Audible Indic ating Device on that panel to tur n ON and remain ON until the Audio/Visual Test Indicating Device is released. Operation and release of the Audio/Visual Test Indicating Device shall not cause any change of system status with respect to calls in progress and shall not be recorded by the data logger. 3.5 Environmental Requirements The ICCS shall operate over the following indoor environmental conditions: 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.6 Temperature: Humidity: 0 C to +50 C; and 0 to 90% relative, non-condensing.
Power Requirements The ICCS shall use VAC power within the following limits:
3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3
3.6.4 3.7
Power:
Installation Requirements The ICCS shall be installed at the site in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work and the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work.
3.8
Documentation Requirements All final ICCS documentation shall be provided in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
3.9
Support Requirements The ICCS maintenance and spares support shall be provided in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
17
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.10 Training Requirements
Operator training and maintenance training on the ICCS shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW0101, Statement of Work.
18
The ICCS Quality Assurance programme s hall be pr ovided as detailed in the ES/SO W-0101, Statement of Work. All on- site ins tallation w ork, tes t plans and s ystem ac ceptance tes ting s hall be c onducted in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. 5.0 DELIVERY Delivery requirements for the ICCS documents, drawings, plans, manuals, etc. (where applicable) shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. Delivery r equirements of the ICCS equipm ent s hall be in ac cordance with the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work. 6.0 INTERFERENCE Performance of the ICCS shall not be affected by the use of standard electronic equipment used at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment are as follows: 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 7.0 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF and UHF transceivers at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency tr ansmitting r eceiving and r edistribution equipm ent at 5 m etres or more; and Personal computer and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more.
SAFETY All ICCS electrically powered elements shall meet the applicable CSA standards.
19
ES/SPEC-0600 Revision 2 22 January 2002 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION PERSONAL PORTABLE ALARM SYSTEMS FOR FEDERAL CORRECTIONAL INSTITUTIONS
AUTHORITY This Specification is approved by the Correctional Service of Canada for the procurement and installation of Personal Portable Alarm (PPA) Systems in Canadian federal correctional institutions. Recommended corrections, additions or deletions should be addressed to the Design Authority at the following address: Director, Engineering Services, Correctional Service of Canada, 340 Laurier Avenue West, Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0P9
ES/SPEC-0600 Revision 2 22 January 2002
TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 2 ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 4 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................ 5 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 6 1.1 General................................................................................................................................ 6 1.2 Purpose and Intended Use ................................................................................................. 6 1.3 Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment.................................................................................. 6 1.4 Technical Acceptability........................................................................................................ 6 1.5 Equipment Procurement ..................................................................................................... 7 1.6 Quantity of Equipment......................................................................................................... 7 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 8 REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 9 3.1 System Configuration .......................................................................................................... 9 3.1.1 Registration ............................................................................................... 9 3.2 Description of System Elements ......................................................................................... 9 3.2.1 Transmitters ........................................................................................................... 9 3.2.1.2 Carrying Cases ....................................................................................... 10 3.2.2 Receivers ............................................................................................................. 10 3.2.3 Decoders.............................................................................................................. 10 3.2.4 Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts ........................................................................... 10 3.2.5 Control Equipment ............................................................................................... 11 3.2.6 Interface to Data Logger ...................................................................................... 11 3.2.7 Interface to FIU .................................................................................................... 11 3.2.8 Outdoor Antenna.................................................................................................. 11 Functional Operation of System Elements........................................................................ 12 3.3.1 System Coverage................................................................................................. 12 3.3.2 Period of Operation .............................................................................................. 12 3.3.3 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability................................................................ 12 3.3.4 Backup Power ...................................................................................................... 12 System Capacity ............................................................................................................... 12 Environmental Requirements............................................................................................ 13 3.5.1 Outdoor Equipment .............................................................................................. 13 3.5.2 Indoor Equipment................................................................................................. 13 3.5.3 Electrical Power.................................................................................................... 13 3.5.3.1 Receiver and Decoder Power ................................................................. 13 3.5.3.2 Power Failure .......................................................................................... 13 3.5.3.3 Transmitter Power................................................................................... 14
2.0 3.0
3.3
3.4 3.5
3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 4.0
3.5.3.4 Transmitter Frequency............................................................................ 14 Installation Requirements.................................................................................................. 14 Documentation Requirements........................................................................................... 14 Support Requirements ...................................................................................................... 14 Training Requirements...................................................................................................... 14
QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................. 15 4.1 In-Plant Tests .................................................................................................................... 15 4.2 On-Site Tests .................................................................................................................... 15 4.2.1 Installation Tests .................................................................................................. 15 4.2.2 System and Equipment Tests .............................................................................. 15 4.3 Test Performance ............................................................................................................. 15 4.4 Plans and Procedures ....................................................................................................... 15 4.5 Test Reports...................................................................................................................... 15 DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................ 16 INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................................................... 16 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 16
5.0 6.0 7.0
ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: COTS CP CSA CSC DES EIA FIU GFE RFP PW&GSC QA SPEC SOW UPS Commercial-Off-The-Shelf Control Post Canadian Standards Association Correctional Service Canada Director Engineering Services Electronic Industries Association FAAS Integration Unit Government Furnished Equipment Request for Proposal Public Works & Government Services Canada Quality Assurance Specification Statement of Work Uninterruptable Power Supply
DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Contractor Project Officer Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment Director, Engineering Services (DES), Correctional Service Canada (CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Services of Canada (PW&GSC) is responsible for all contractual matters associated with the system design and implementation. The company selected as the successful bidder. A CSC employee or a contracted person designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. Equipment currently on the market with available field reliability data, manuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract.
1.0 1.1
INTRODUCTION General This specification defines the essential technical and functional requirements for a Personal Portable Alarm (PPA) system for Correctional Service Canada (CSC) facilities across Canada.
1.2
Purpose and Intended Use The purpose of the PPA system is to enable CSC staff working in all areas of an institution/facility to alert the central security post officer to serious incidents or potentially dangerous situations. PPA alarms will be sent to the security post by a portable wireless alarm transmitting device carried by the staff member. Alarm identification, alarm time and cancellation information will be recorded on a hard copy printer (data logger) for a permanent record. The stand-alone data logger is not part of this specification.
1.3
Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment The PPA system shall use commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) equipment and proven designs to the maximum extent possible. All new equipment shall meet the specified lifespan requirements. New equipment designs shall be restricted to unique interfaces and common control console.
1.4
Technical Acceptability The Cor rectional Ser vice Canada ( CSC) oper ational envir onment is unique for its diversity of locations, climate exposures and the physical restrictive construction techniques of penal institutions. Maintaining national security, the s afety of staff and of fenders alike is CSC's commitment to the government and public . Elec tronic s ecurity s ystems oper ating in this unique environment shall maintain very high standards of dependability and reliability. The CSC Engineering Ser vices Divis ion has es tablished tec hnical s pecifications and equipm ent standards for specific electronic security systems which are based on very specific and restrictive operational per formance c riteria as detailed in its Elec tronic Engineer ing Standar d. T echnical acceptability of thes e s ystems m eans that the equipm ent c omplies w ith the pertinent CSC specifications and standards. The technical acceptance process shall involve system and subsystem evaluation in accordance with the applicable CSC specifications in one of CSC facilities or may be tested in a CSC facility to verify the effectiveness of the proposed tec hnologies w hen s ubjected to the r estrictive oper ational environment. CSC shall also verify in depth any of the system technical specifications called up. CSC may when it deems necessary, request the supplier to arrange for a full site demonstration. CSC may rely on manufacturer's test results for specific areas of the specification where an independent test facility has conducted the test, and the facility is deemed acceptable to CSC.
It is the s upplier's r esponsibility to m ake new developm ents in pr oducts available to CSC for evaluation. Equipment qualification is an ongoing pr ocess and c an be initiated at any tim e by a vendor. Any vendor can have access to the CSC s pecifications and s tandards. Any new development or products should be submitted to the CSC Engineering Services Division, Technical Authority in a suitable time frame prior to any tendering process to allow for an acceptable evaluation period. The evaluation period may take up to sixteen (16) months. 1.5 Equipment Procurement Any ordering of equipment/material before the approval of the PPA design report will be undertaken at the contractor's own risk. The Design Authority may authorize the procurement of certain long lead items at, or shortly after a preliminary design review of the proposed PPA system. 1.6 Quantity of Equipment The quantity and location of the equipm ent r equired f or CSC ins titutions will be c ontained in the specification identified in the Statement of Technical Requirements (STR).
2.0
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of the Request for Proposal (RFP) are included in the PPA specification to the extent specified herein. ES/SOW-0101 ES/SOW-0102 ES/STD-0601 ES/SPEC-0102 ES/SPEC-0005 Mil Std - 810C EIA-310-C Note 1 Statement of Work for the Installation of Electronic Systems Statement of Work for the Quality Control of Electronic Systems Installations Standard for the Personal Portable Alarm System Specification for the Data Logger System (see note 1) Specification for the Main Communications and Control Post Integration Console The applicable paragraphs for shock and vibration Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment Specification ES/SPEC-0102 is only applicable to institutions without Facility Alarm Annunciation System Integration Units
3.0
REQUIREMENTS The contractor shall design, install, test and provide operational and maintenance documentation for a PPA system in accordance with the Specifications, Statement of W orks and Standar ds listed in Section 2.0.
3.1
System Configuration The Request for Proposal shall include the quantity and location of the various hardware elements making up the complete PPA system. These elements are as follows: a. b. c. d. e. f. Portable Alarm Transmitter (with a unique ID code); Transmitter Carrying Case; Fixed Alarm Receiver; Alarm Decoder (with control panel); Antenna; and Interconnecting wiring, cables, etc.
3.1.1
Registration Transmitters and receivers shall be registered with Industry Canada and shall be Industry Canada type-approved.
3.2 3.2.1
Description of System Elements Transmitters The PPA transmitter shall be a compact, lightweight unit, which can be carried or worn by the staff. It shall have enough effective radiated power to be able to provide complete PPA coverage from all areas of the institution. The transmitter may be required to have a self-test feature, which will register the test at the Decoder and on the data logger . If the self-test feature is used, it will not cause an alarm at the Decoder or at the PIU when activated. The transmitter shall be a self-contained unit with an interchangeable ID code module, including antenna and internal batteries. The transmitter shall be capable of transmitting at least 500 alarms of one (1) second duration from set of batteries. The batteries shall be easily accessible for quick changing. The transmitter shall meet weigh less than 200 grams (with batteries).
3.2.1.2 Carrying Cases The c ontractor s hall s upply PPA tr ansmitter c arrying c ases for belt or harness mounting as determined by the CSC Des ign Authority. T he carrying case shall be able to be m ounted either horizontal or vertical position. 3.2.2 Receivers The receiver shall have the required sensitivity and selectivity to receive an alarm signal from all areas of a facility without interference from other institution RF communication equipment. It will send the alarm signal to the decoder for processing. 3.2.3 Decoders The dec oder s hall pr ocess all c oded s ignals f rom the PPA tr ansmitters and activate the corresponding displays and annunciators. It shall be capable of decoding a minimum of 500 different PPA transmitters as well as store and decode a minimum of 10 alarms within 10.0 seconds. The decoder shall have the c apability to be inter faced w ith an RS- 232C pr otocol to output the received alarm ID number, time and date to the Facility Alarm Annunciation System Integration Unit (FIU). If another standard communications protocol is proposed to be used, approval is required by the Design Authority and the contractor shall provide all technical and interconnection information. The decoder shall also be able to receive alarm acknowledge and reset functions from the FIU to cancel an alarm. If no FIU is available, the decoder shall be able to interface directly to a stand alone data logger. The decoder shall display alarm identification in easy readable LEDs. It shall contain the following: a. b. c. 3.2.4 an audible annunciator, an alphanumeric display, acknowledge and reset buttons to extinguish the alarm indicator and the audible annunciator.
Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts The contractor shall supply all necessary terminations, cross connection cabinets, conduits, wire and cabling and any other items that may be required for the s atisfactory completion of the s pecified system. All ins tallation w orkmanship s hall be per formed in accordance with ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work and all applicable national, provincial, and local electrical codes. A wiring diagram shall be s upplied in the Ins tallation section of the Maintenance Manual to detail where module connections terminate and how wires are routed and terminated. Conduits, cables, ducts, trays, etc. may be either G overnment F urnished Equipm ent ( GFE) or supplied and installed by the contractor depending on the particular institution. The determination will be made by the Design Authority and will be identified in the STR.
10
Connectors provided on the ends of any cable must mate with the corresponding connector on the equipment. Adapters from one type of connector to another are not acceptable. 3.2.5 Control Equipment The maximum feasible am ount of c ommon c ontrol equipm ent ( power s upplies, logic boar ds, amplifiers, etc .) s hall be loc ated in T erminal Equipm ent Spac es ( TES) and Com mon Equipment Room (CER) provided for the purpose. These areas will be identified in the STR. It is preferred that only c ontrol equipm ent s uch as lights , s witches, ac tuators, etc . which the oper ator m ust access directly should be located in the Control Posts. 3.2.6 Interface to Data Logger The contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface the PPA s ystem to the Data Logger described in the ES/SPEC- 0102, Specification. If no FIU is available, the contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface to the data logger. The PPA unit will provide as a minimum, event information to the Data Logger in dry contact closure, opto-isolated output form or ASCII Standard Code using a standard communications protocol as follows: a. b. c. 3.2.7 alarmed transmitter ID code, transmitter alarm cancellation, and time and date of the event.
Interface to FIU The contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface the FIU described in the ES/SPEC-0005, Specification. The PPA Decoder shall provide an ID code alarm signal to the facility alarm annunciation system (FAAS). This information must be in dry contact closure, opto- isolated output f orm or ASCII Standar d Code us ing a standard communications protocol.
3.2.8
Outdoor Antenna The contractor shall supply and ins tall the outdoor antenna ar ray with associated hardware. The Design Authority shall approve the proposed antenna location.
11
3.3
Functional Operation of System Elements Each PPA transmitter activation shall cause the transmitter ID code to be displayed and annunciated on the alarm control panel of the Integr ation Cons ole when pr esent. O perating the F IUs alar m acknowledge and reset functions on the video display unit or control panels shall cancel the alarm and return PPA the system to its pr e-alarm s tate. An alar m m ust be ac knowledged bef ore it is possible to reset and cancel the alarm.
3.3.1
System Coverage The PPA system s hall pr ovide c omplete alar m c overage thr oughout all ar eas of the ins titution designated in the STR.
3.3.2
Period of Operation The PPA system shall be capable of providing at least 500 alarm transmissions of one (1) second duration over 24 hour-per-day, seven (7) days per week operation on one (1) set of batteries.
3.3.3
Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability The PPA tr ansmitters s hall have high r esistance to dam age and des truction due to shock and vibration in accordance with ES/STD-601. The transmitters shall also have high resistance to being tampered with. In the event that a PPA transmitter is sabotaged or is intentionally being activated to interfere with the PPA system, the equipment shall be capable of neutralizing the problem PPA transmitter and return the system to normal operation.
3.3.4
Backup Power Emergency backup power shall be pr ovided to the r eceiver and the c ontrol equipment to sustain operations for at least four hours. Switching to the emergency back up power shall not cause the PPA system to lose the operating mode which it was in prior to the power failure.
3.4
System Capacity The system shall be designed to handle a minimum of 500 PPA transmitters.
12
3.5 3.5.1
Environmental Requirements Outdoor Equipment All elements of the PPA system, which are located or used outdoors, shall operate over the following range of environmental conditions: Temperature: Humidity: Location: -40 to +50 C; up to 100%; and Extremes of winds, driving rain, blowing dust and sun exposure.
Outdoor antennas plus any associated mounts, towers, cabling, etc. shall operate satisfactorily and without damage with a combination of 160 km/hr. wind and 1.3 cm radial ice load. 3.5.2 Indoor Equipment All elements of the PPA system, which are located or used indoors, shall operate over the following range of environmental conditions: Temperature: Humidity: Location: 3.5.3 0 to 40 C; 20 to 95%; and Sheltered environment.
Electrical Power All power supplies shall be equipped with automatic protection circuitry to prevent damage from overvoltage or over-current conditions.
3.5.3.1 Receiver and Decoder Power The receiver and decoder s hall be oper ated f rom the r egular 115 volts , 60 Hz s ingle phas e commercial power source. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to supply any power supplies to generate other necessary voltages. 3.5.3.2 Power Failure Loss or restoration of primary power to the receiver or decoder shall not generate spurious alarms or erroneous signals to the data logger . When power is restored after a power failure, the system shall resume normal operation without operator action and shall retain the same alarm state as before the power failure.
13
3.5.3.3 Transmitter Power The PPA transmitter shall be powered by readily available commercial non-rechargeable batteries. The contractor shall include in his proposal the type of batteries to be used in his transmitters as well as the minimum number of transmissions before they require replacing. 3.5.3.4 Transmitter Frequency The PPA transmitter shall operate on a frequency of 426.7875 MHz. 3.6 Installation Requirements The PPA system shall be installed at the site in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work and the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work. 3.7 Documentation Requirements All final PPA system documentation shall be provided with a Copyright Release for the documentation delivered in support of the s ystem. T he PPA doc umentation s hall be in ac cordance w ith the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. 3.8 Support Requirements The PPA maintenance and spares support shall be provided in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. 3.9 Training Requirements Operator tr aining and m aintenance tr aining on the PPA s ystem s hall be in ac cordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
14
4.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE The contractor shall comply with the requirements of Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101 regarding Product Assurance and Site Acceptance. These are summarized below.
4.1
In-Plant Tests Prior to delivery of the PPA equipm ent, tes ts will be c onducted at the c ontractor's plant to ver ify compliance with this specification. A record of compliance for each unit complete with serial number shall be provided to the Design Authority.
4.2
On-Site Tests After the PPA system on-site installation, performance and installation tests shall be conducted on the site to demonstrate compliance with this specification.
4.2.1
Installation Tests Visual and mechanical inspections of the c ontractor's ins tallation w ill be c onducted to ens ure compliance with Statem ent of W ork, ES/SO W-0102 and m anufacturer's ins tallation recommendations.
4.2.2
System and Equipment Tests Performance tests shall be conducted on the site to demonstrate compliance with this specification.
4.3
Test Performance All tests for compliance shall be conducted by the contractor and witnessed by the Design Authority, or his authorized representative. All required tests shall be completed successfully prior to system acceptance and commissioning into service.
4.4
Plans and Procedures All plans and procedures required to support s ystem and equipm ent tes ts s hall be pr epared in accordance with the requirements of Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101.
4.5
Test Reports Results of all tests and retests shall be documented by the contractor and submitted to the Design Authority. The requirements are defined in Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101.
15
5.0
DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS Delivery requirements for all documents, drawings, plans, manuals, etc. are given in the Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101.
6.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the system shall not be affected by the use of standard electronic equipment used at the ins titution. Dis tance lim its of s tandard elec tronic equipm ent s hall be in accordance with ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
7.0
SAFETY All s ystem elec trically powered elem ents s hall m eet the applic able Canadian Saf ety Association (CSA) standards.
16
TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................ 2 ABBREVIATIONS................................................................................................................................ 4 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 5 1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................... 6 1.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 6 1.2 Purpose and Intended Use ........................................................................................... 6 1.3 Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment .............................................................................. 6 1.4 Technical Acceptability ................................................................................................ 7 1.5 Equipment Procurement ............................................................................................... 7 1.6 Quantity of Equipment ................................................................................................. 7 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................... 8 REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................... 9 3.1 System Configuration................................................................................................... 9 3.2 System Elements........................................................................................................ 9 3.2.1 Alarm Originating Device .................................................................................. 9 3.2.2 Annunciator Panel (if no FAAS is available) ........................................................ 9 3.2.3 Control Equipment ......................................................................................... 10 3.2.4 Interface to Data Logger ................................................................................. 10 3.2.5 Interface to FAAS .......................................................................................... 10 3.2.6 Interconnecting Wire, Cable, Conduit............................................................... 10 3.2.7 Prototype Approval ........................................................................................ 11 3.3. Functional Operation of System Elements ................................................................... 11 3.3.1 Single Alarm ................................................................................................. 11 3.3.2 Multiple Alarms ............................................................................................. 12 3.4 System Capacity....................................................................................................... 13 3.5 Environmental Requirements ...................................................................................... 13 3.6 Electrical Power ........................................................................................................ 13 3.7 Power Failure ............................................................................................................ 13 3.8 Period of Operation .................................................................................................... 13 3.9 Wiring Supervision ..................................................................................................... 13 3.10 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability ......................................................................... 14 QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................... 15 4.1 General .................................................................................................................... 15 4.2 FPSA Failure ............................................................................................................ 15
2.0 3.0
4.0
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 5.0 6.0
PREPARATION FOR DELIVERY ............................................................................................ 15 NOTES................................................................................................................................. 15 6.1 General .................................................................................................................... 15 6.2 Systems Approach.................................................................................................... 15 6.3 Human Factors ......................................................................................................... 16 6.4 Existing Equipment ................................................................................................... 16 6.5 Design of Annunciation and Control Panels .................................................................. 16
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: ACK AOD CER CSC DES FAAS FPSA GFE ICCS MCCP PIDS PIU QA RFP SOW STR TES Acknowledge Alarm Originating Device Common Equipment Room Correctional Service Canada Director, Engineering Services Facility Alarm Annunciation System Fixed Point Security Alarm Government Furnished Equipment Integrated Communication and Control System Main Communication & Control Post Perimeter Intrusion Detection System PIDS Integration Unit Quality Assurance Request for Proposal Statement of Work Statement of Technical Requirements Terminal Equipment Space
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Contractor Project Officer Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment Annunciator
Director, Engineering Services (DES), Correctional Service Canada (CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Services of Canada (PW&GSC) is responsible for all contractual matters associated with the system design and implementation. The company selected as the successful bidder. A CSC employee or a contracted person designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. Equipment currently on the market with available field reliability data, manuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract. A device which provides a sensory output (visual or audible) to a human operator pertaining to the status of the equipment or system.
This specification defines the functional requirements of the Correctional Service Canada (CSC) for the design, supply, installation and testing of a Fixed Point Security Alarm (FPSA) system for use in federal correctional institutions. 1.2 Purpose and Intended Use The FPSA is a simple, effective and relatively inexpensive means for staff members to signal the existence of an emergency situation requiring immediate assistance from security staff. These emergency situations would be either: a. b. where the safety of the staff member or others in the immediate area may be in jeopardy; or where the individual must be free to take certain immediate action in response to the emergency situation (e.g., closing doors, barriers, etc.) and operation of the telephone or other means of signalling is impractical.
The FPSA alarm is initiated by the operation of the push-button switches located throughout the institution. The alarm indication occurs on an annunciator panel located at a central control post or on the Facility Alarm Annunciator System (FAAS) in the Main Communications and Control Post (MCCP) which is continuously staffed. The quantity and location of all elements of the system are given in the Statement of Technical Requirements (STR). The FPSA will be required to provide output signalling to the standalone Data Logger subsystem if no FAAS is available in the Control Post. If an FAAS is available, the FAAS will provide the output to the data logger. The data logger shall record the alarm originating location and time, the subsequent alarm acknowledgement and cancellation times. 1.3 Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment The FPSA shall use commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) equipment and proven designs to the maximum extent possible. All new equipment shall meet the specified lifespan requirements. New equipment designs shall be restricted to unique interfaces and common control consoles.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 1.4 Technical Acceptability
The Correctional Service Canada (CSC) operational environment is unique for its diversity of locations, climate exposures and the physical restrictive construction techniques of penal institutions. Maintaining national security, the safety of staff and offenders alike is CSC's commitment to the government and public. Electronic security systems operating in this unique environment shall maintain very high standards of dependability and reliability. The CSC Engineering Services Division has established technical specifications and equipment standards for specific electronic security systems which are based on very specific and restrictive operational performance criteria as detailed in its Electronic Engineering Standard. Technical acceptability of these systems means that the equipment complies with the pertinent CSC specifications and standards. The technical acceptance process shall involve system and subsystem evaluation in accordance with the applicable CSC specifications in one of CSC facilities or may be tested in a CSC facility to verify the effectiveness of the proposed technologies when subjected to the restrictive operational environment. CSC shall also verify in depth any of the system technical specifications called up. CSC may when it deems necessary, request the supplier to arrange for a full site demonstration. CSC may rely on manufacturer's test results for specific areas of the specification where an independent test facility has conducted the test, and the facility is deemed acceptable to CSC. It is the supplier's responsibility to make new developments in products available to CSC for evaluation. Equipment qualification is an ongoing process and can be initiated at any time by a vendor. Any vendor can have access to the CSC specifications and standards. Any new development or products should be submitted to the CSC Engineering Services Division, Technical Authority in a suitable time frame prior to any tendering process to allow for an acceptable evaluation period. The evaluation period may take up to sixteen (16) months. 1.5 Equipment Procurement Any ordering of equipment/material before the approval of the FPSA design report will be undertaken at the contractor's own risk. The Design Authority may authorize the procurement of certain long lead items at, or shortly after a preliminary design review of the proposed system. 1.6 Quantity of Equipment The quantity and location of the equipment required for CSC institutions will be contained in the specification identified in the STR.
The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of the Request for Proposal (RFP) shall form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. ES/SOW-0102 ES/SPEC-0003 ES/SPEC-0005 ES/SPEC-0102 ES/SPEC-0603 Statement of Work for Quality Control Electronic Systems Installations Specification for Human Engineering Design Criteria fo r the Integrated Communication and Control Systems Specifications for Integration of Electronic Systems in Control Posts Specification for a Data Logger Systems Specifications for Facility Alarm Annunciation Sy stem Integration Unit
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.0 3.1 REQUIREMENTS System Configuration The FPSA shall consist of the following elements in the quantities given in the STR: a. b. c. d. e. f. 3.2 3.2.1 Alarm Originating Devices (AOD) (2 types possible), Annunciator Panel (if no FAAS is available), Control Equipment (if required), Interface to Data Logger (if no FAAS is available), Interface to FAAS, (if FAAS is available), and Interconnecting wiring, cable, conduits, ducts, etc.
System Elements Alarm Originating Device Located at designated points there shall be an Alarm Originating Device consisting of a simple, rugged, non-latching push button switch mounted in a suitable enclosure. The AOD will be used under emergency conditions , it shall be easy to operate and shall provide a positive touch feedback and audible click to the operator so that he is fully aware of its actuation. Two types of AOD shall be available: a.Type 1 b.Type 2 Wall-mounted style with palm-operated, red button having a minimum diameter of 5.0 cm; and Small style suitable for inconspicuo us mounting in the knee-well of a desk. Its button shall have a minimum diameter of 2.5 cm.
3.2.2
Annunciator Panel (if no FAAS is available) Located in a console at a designated central post there shall be an annunciator panel at which all alarms originated in the system are annunciated, acknowledged and cancelled. This annunciator panel shall contain the following: a. b. a visual annunciator device for each AOD, a single audible annunciator device,
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification c. d. e. a common alarm acknowledge device, an alarm cancellation device for each AOD, and
a single non-latching audio/visual test initiating device which will cause all visual annunciator devices to operate and the audible annunciator device to sound as long as it remains held.
NOTE: The cancellation device shall be integrated with the visual annunciator device. The combined device would be an illuminated switch : the light providing the visual annunciator and the switch providing the alarm cancellation function. The annunciator panel shall comply with EIA standards for 19" rack mounted equipment. The audible annunciator device shall be equipped with an internal volume control, accessible only from the rear of the panel to permit the sound level to be adjusted to suit operator preference and ambient noise levels. 3.2.3 Control Equipment Common control equipment (logic boards, power supplies, etc.) shall be located in the Terminal Equipment Spaces and/or the Common Equipment Room (CER) provided for this purpose. These areas will be identified in the STR. Lights, switches, actuators, etc. which the operator must access directly should be located in the Control Post, Offices, etc. 3.2.4 Interface to Data Logger The contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface the FPSA to the standalone Data Logger described in the ES/SPEC-0102, Specification. 3.2.5 Interface to FAAS The contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and interface equipment required to interface the FPSA to the FAAS described in the ES/SPEC-0603, Specification. 3.2.6 Interconnecting Wire, Cable, Conduit The contractor shall supply all necessary terminations, cross connection cabinets, conduits, wire and cabling and any other items that may be required for the satisfactory completion of the specified system. All installation workmanship shall be performed in accordance with Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0102 and all applicable national , provincial and local electrical codes. A wiring list shall be supplied in the installation section of the Maintenance Manual to detail where module connections terminate and how wires are routed and terminated.
10
Conduit, cable, ducts , trays, etc. may be either GFE or supplied and installed by the contractor depending on the particular institution. The determination will be made by the Request for Proposal. Connectors provided on the ends of any cable must mate with the corresponding connector on the equipment. Adapters from one type of connector to another are not acceptable. 3.2.7 Prototype Approval The contractor shall submit one prototype of each AOD and the Annunciator Panel to the Design Authority for approval prior to manufacture or purchase or production quantities. The Annunciator Panel shall be complete with respect to layout, size, material, finish and colour and shall contain at least the following functioning devices: a. b. c. d. e. two visual annunciators, two associated alarm cancellation devices. the alarm acknowledge device, the audible annunciator (with volume control), and the Audio/Visual Test Initiating Device.
The devices shall be fully operable but need not necessarily demonstrate the intended sequence of annunciation and control functions. 3.3. 3.3.1 Functional Operation of System Elements Single Alarm Starting from a condition where no alarms are in the system, the normal functioning of the FPSA shall be as follows: An AOD activation causes: 1) 2) the associated alarm annunciator device on the annunciator panel to flash or the alarm number and location to flash on the FAAS; and the audible annunciator on the annunciator panel or on the FAAS to sound.
11
The security officer in the post containing the annunciator panel or the FAAS will acknowledge the alarm by operating the alarm acknowledge device on the annunciator panel or FAAS causing: 1) 2) the associated alarm annunciator to change from flashing to steady ON; and the audible annunciator to turn OFF.
Once the alarm has been responded to and the security officer is satisfied that the situation is normalized he will operate the alarm cancellation causing the associated alarm annunciator to extinguish. Each of the above actions (Alarm, Acknowledge and Cancellation) shall be recorded on the associated Data Logger with the time-of-day. The alarm location number shall also be recorded for the Alarm and the Cancellation operations. Subsequent operation of the AOD before the original call from it has been cancelled shall not cause a change of status of any visual or audible annunciator. 3.3.2 Multiple Alarms If an alarm is initiated from an AOD before the previous alarm from another AOD has been cancelled the following shall occur: a. b. c. the audible annunciator shall be turned on again; the visual alarm annunciator for the second alarm shall flash; and the visual alarm annunciator for the first alarm shall remain unchanged (i.e., it shall remain flashing if the first alarm has not been acknowledged; it shall remain steady ON if the first alarm has been acknowledged).
The acknowledge button shall silence the audible tone and change visual alarm annunciators which were flashing to a steady condition regardless of the number of alarms present. Subsequent operation of the acknowledge device shall have no effect on alarms already acknowledged. Alarms may be selectively cancelled with the Alarm Cancellation Device in any desired sequence, independent of the order in which they were initiated. Any number of alarms up to the maximum installed shall be capable of being separately annunciated and logged without system overload. Data Logging requirements for multiple alarms are the same as single alarms.
12
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.4 System Capacity
The system shall be of modular design and it shall be capable of expansion at a future date without rewiring the existing hardware. The bidder shall state in his engineering proposal the amount of such expansion that his system is capable of. 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.6 Environmental Requirements Temperature: Humidity: Location: 0 to + 50 C; 10 to 95 percent Relative Humidity; and Indoor sheltered environment.
Electrical Power The FPSA shall be operated from a single phase power source having the following characteristics:
3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3 3.7
Voltage: Transients: Frequency: Power Failure
120 V 5%; Transients shall not exceed 10% of the steady state value and shall return to normal within 3 cycles; and 60 Hz 1.5 Hz
Lost or restoration of primary power to the system shall not cause spurious alarm annunciations or outputs to the data logger. When power is returned after a failure, the system shall resume operation without operator action and shall start from a "no-alarm-present", cleared condition. 3.8 Period of Operation The system and all associated equipment shall be rated for and capable of 24 hours per day, seven days per week operation. 3.9 Wiring Supervision Wiring shall be supervised in all system modes. An alarm shall occur if any system wiring is cut or shorted to other wires or if the system devices are tampered with by unauthorized people or environmental conditions.
13
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Specification 3.10 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability
Elements of the FPSA must operate in areas exposed to inmate access and shall have high resistance to damage, destruction, or conversion to other uses (including weapons). All interconnecting service must be secure against tampering or improper interference.
14
The contractor shall conduct a Quality Assurance programme as detailed in the Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101 and consisting (as a minimum) of: a. b. an internal quality control programme, and a comprehensive system-test programme.
All on-site installation work shall meet the requirements of ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work. 4.2 FPSA Failure A system failure shall be deemed to have occurred when any required annunciation (visual or audible) is not produced or when any required control function cannot be performed. 4.3 Availability The system shall be designed such that its system availability is equal to or better than that specified in the Appendix to the STR. 5.0 PREPARATION FOR DELIVERY Delivery requirements for documents, drawings, plans, manuals, etc. (where applicable) are given in the SOW. 6.0 6.1 NOTES General The information in paragraphs 6.2 through 6.5 is provided to assist the bidder/contractor in preparing an equipment design to meet the requirements of this specification. The extent to which these Design Objectives are attained will be a factor in CSC evaluation of the Proposals. 6.2 Systems Approach To the maximum practical extent, off-the-shelf equipment should be selected for use in the FPSA. New designs should be restricted to common interface areas, control panels and consoles, or unique devices for which an off-the-shelf item does not exist.
15
A design objective is to minimize the number of wires required between all elements of the system. Where feasible, a space-diversity approach to system planning should be employed to ensure that loss of one interconnection routing does not impair the operational capability of the complete system. 6.3 Human Factors Whenever possible, elements of the FPSA which are used directly by staff (i.e., control panels, annunciators, alarm originating devices, etc.) should conform with the design principles stated in the Specification, ES/SPEC-0003. 6.4 Existing Equipment In most installations, control and annunciation elements of the FPSA will be located near other electrical or electronic equipment such as door controls, lighting controls, etc. It is important that effort be made to coordinate the functional and operational design of the FPSA according to accepted human engineering principles to ensure a uniform appearance and commonality of layout to assist the operator in the performance of his duties. 6.5 Design of Annunciation and Control Panels Mounting space within control posts is usually very limited and problems of determining a suitable equipment mounting location is minimized if the control panels are small. Therefore, the designer should make maximum possible use of annunciation and control devices which combine two or more functions into a single unit (e.g., lighted push-buttons, etc.). - END OF TEXT -
16
ES/SPEC-0602 Revision 3 22 January 2002 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING SPECIFICATION PORTABLE ALARM LOCATION SYSTEMS FOR FEDERAL CORRECTIONAL INSTITUTIONS
AUTHORITY This Specification is approved by the Correctional Service of Canada for the procurement and installation of Portable Alarm Location Systems (PALS) in Canadian federal correctional institutions. Recommended corrections, additions or deletions should be addressed to the Design Authority at the following address: Director, Engineering Services, Correctional Service Canada, 340 Laurier Avenue West, Ottawa, Ontario, K1A 0P9
TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 2 ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 4 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................ 5 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 6 1.1 General................................................................................................................................ 6 1.2 Purpose and Intended Use ................................................................................................. 6 1.3 Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment.................................................................................. 6 1.4 Technical Acceptability........................................................................................................ 6 1.5 Equipment Procurement ..................................................................................................... 7 1.6 Quantity of Equipment......................................................................................................... 7 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 8 REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................................ 9 3.1 General................................................................................................................................ 9 3.1.1 System Configuration............................................................................................. 9 3.1.2 System Coverage................................................................................................... 9 3.1.3 System Capacity .................................................................................................... 9 3.1.4 Period of Operation ................................................................................................ 9 3.2 System Requirements......................................................................................................... 9 3.2.1 Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts ............................................................................. 9 3.2.2 Control Equipment ............................................................................................... 10 3.2.3 Interface to Data Logger ...................................................................................... 10 3.2.4 Interface to FIU .................................................................................................... 10 3.2.5 System Self-Test Unit .......................................................................................... 10 3.3 Functional Operation of System Elements........................................................................ 10 3.3.1 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability................................................................ 11 3.3.2 Backup Power ...................................................................................................... 11 3.3.3 Power Failure ....................................................................................................... 11 3.5 Power Requirements......................................................................................................... 11 3.6 Installation Requirements.................................................................................................. 11 3.7 Documentation Requirements........................................................................................... 12 3.8 Support Requirements ...................................................................................................... 12 3.9 Training Requirements...................................................................................................... 12 QUALITY ASSURANCE................................................................................................................. 13 4.1 In-Plant Tests .................................................................................................................... 13 4.2 On-Site Tests .................................................................................................................... 13 4.2.1 Installation Tests .................................................................................................. 13 4.2.2 System and Equipment Tests .............................................................................. 13
2.0 3.0
4.0
4.3 4.4 4.5 5.0 6.0 7.0
Test Performance ............................................................................................................. 13 Plans and Procedures ....................................................................................................... 13 Test Reports...................................................................................................................... 13
DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS........................................................................................................ 14 INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................................................... 14 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 14
ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: COTS CP CSA CSC DES EIA FIU GFE RFP PALS PW&GSC QA SPEC SOW UPS Commercial-Off-The-Shelf Control Post Canadian Standards Association Correctional Service Canada Director Engineering Services Electronic Industries Association FAAS Integration Unit Government Furnished Equipment Request for Proposal Portable Alarm Location System Public Works & Government Services Canada Quality Assurance Specification Statement of Work Uninterruptable Power Supply
DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Contractor Project Officer Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment Director, Engineering Services ( DES), Cor rectional Ser vice Canada ( CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Services of Canada (PW&GSC) is responsible for all contractual matters associated with the system design and implementation. The company selected as the successful bidder. A CSC employee or a contracted person designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. Equipment c urrently on the m arket w ith available f ield r eliability data, m anuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract.
1.0 1.1
INTRODUCTION General This specification defines the essential technical and functional requirements for a Portable Alarm Location System (PALS) for Correctional Service Canada (CSC) facilities across Canada.
1.2
Purpose and Intended Use The Portable Alarm Location System operates in c onjunction with the ex isting Personal Portable Alarm (PPA) system to locate an area where an alarm is originating from. The PPA system is used by CSC staff working in all ar eas of the institution to alert the central security post staff to serious incidents or potentially dangerous personal security or safety situations. The Portable Alarm Location System consists of central monitoring equipment and a number of wireless sensors distributed within an institution. PPA alarm locations both indoors and outdoors can be determined to within a specified area and displayed on an existing Facility Alarm Annunciation System (FAAS) Integration Unit (FIU) in the Main Communications and Control Post (MCCP) or displayed on a PALS Video Display Unit if the FIU is not available in the s ecurity Contr ol Pos t. Alar m identif ication, alar m tim e and cancellation may be recorded on a data logger. The stand alone data logger is not part of this specification.
1.3
Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment The Por table Alar m Loc ation System s hall us e c ommercial of f-the-shelf ( COTS) equipment and proven designs to the maximum extent possible. All new equipment shall meet the specified lifespan requirements. New equipment designs shall be restricted to unique interfaces and common control console.
1.4
Technical Acceptability The Cor rectional Ser vice Canada ( CSC) oper ational envir onment is unique for its diversity of locations, climate exposures and the physical restrictive construction techniques of penal institutions. Maintaining national s ecurity, the s afety of staff and offenders alike is CSC's commitment to the government and public . Elec tronic s ecurity s ystems oper ating in this unique environment shall maintain very high standards of dependability and reliability. The CSC Engineering Ser vices Divis ion has es tablished tec hnical s pecifications and equipm ent standards for specific electronic security systems which are based on very specific and restrictive operational per formance c riteria as detailed in its Elec tronic Engineer ing Standar d. T echnical acceptability of thes e s ystems m eans that the equipm ent c omplies w ith the pertinent CSC specifications and standards.
The technical acceptance process shall involve system and subsystem evaluation in accordance with the applicable CSC specifications in one of CSC facilities or may be tested in a CSC facility to verify the effectiveness of the proposed tec hnologies w hen s ubjected to the r estrictive oper ational environment. CSC shall also verify in depth any of the system technical specifications called up. CSC may when it deems necessary, request the supplier to arrange for a full site demonstration. CSC may rely on manufacturer's test results for specific areas of the specification where an independent test facility has conducted the test, and the facility is deemed acceptable to CSC. It is the s upplier's r esponsibility to m ake new developm ents in pr oducts available to CSC for evaluation. Equipment qualification is an ongoing pr ocess and c an be initiated at any tim e by a vendor. Any vendor can have access to the CSC s pecifications and s tandards. Any new development or products should be submitted to the CSC Engineering Services Division, Technical Authority in a suitable time frame prior to any tendering process to allow for an acceptable evaluation period. The evaluation period may take up to sixteen (16) months. 1.5 Equipment Procurement Any ordering of equipm ent/material bef ore the appr oval of the s ystem des ign r eport w ill be undertaken at the c ontractor's own risk. T he Design Authority may authorize the pr ocurement of certain long lead items at, or shortly after a preliminary design review of the proposed system. 1.6 Quantity of Equipment The quantity and location of the equipm ent r equired f or CSC ins titutions will be c ontained in the specification identified in the Statement of Technical Requirements (STR).
2.0
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of the Request for Proposal (RFP) are included in the Portable Alarm Location System specification to the extent specified herein. ES/SOW-0101 ES/SOW-0102 ES/STD-0601 ES/STD-0602 ES/SPEC-0102 ES/SPEC-0005 EIA-310-C Note 1 Note 2 Statement of Work for the Installation of Electronic Systems Statement of Work for the Quality Control of Electronic Systems Installations Standard for Personal Portable Alarm Systems Standard for Portable Alarm Location Systems Specification for the Data Logger Systems (see note 1) Specification for the Main Communications and Control Post Integration Console (see note 2) Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment Specification ES/SPEC-0102 is only applicable to institutions without Facility Alarm Annunciation System Integration Units. Specification ES/SPEC-0005 is only applicable to institutions with Facility Alarm Annunciation System Integration Units.
3.0 3.1
REQUIREMENTS General The contractor shall design, install, test and provide operational and maintenance documentation for a Portable Alarm Location System in accordance with the Specifications, Standards and Statement of Works listed in Section 2.0 of this specification. Standard ES/STD-0602 specifies the design, technical and functional requirements for the Portable Alarm Location System.
3.1.1
System Configuration The Request for Proposal shall include the quantity and location of the various hardware elements of the Portable Alarm Location System. However, the ac tual location and num ber of the wireless sensors required to provide complete facility coverage will be site specific and can only be determined by the contractor after extensive on-site RF propagation tests have been completed.
3.1.2
System Coverage The PALS shall provide complete alarm loc ation c overage thr oughout all ar eas of the ins titution designated in the STR.
3.1.3
System Capacity The Portable Alarm Location System shall be designed to handle a minimum of 500 portable alarm transmitters.
3.1.4
Period of Operation The Portable Alarm Location System shall be capable of locating any PPA alarm 24 hour-per-day, seven (7) days per week.
3.2 3.2.1
System Requirements Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts The contractor shall supply all necessary terminations, cross connection cabinets, conduits, wire and cabling and any other items that may be required for the s atisfactory completion of the s pecified system. All ins tallation w orkmanship s hall be per formed in accordance with ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work and all applicable national, provincial, and local electrical codes. A wiring diagram shall be s upplied in the Ins tallation section of the Maintenance Manual to detail where module connections terminate and how wires are routed and terminated.
Conduits, cables, ducts, trays, etc. may be either G overnment F urnished Equipm ent ( GFE) or supplied and installed by the contractor depending on the particular institution. The determination will be made by the Design Authority and will be identified in the STR. Connectors provided on the ends of any cable must mate with the corresponding connector on the equipment. Adapters from one type of connector to another are not acceptable. 3.2.2 Control Equipment The maximum feasible amount of control equipment (power supplies, logic boards, amplifiers, etc.) shall be located in T erminal Equipment Spaces (TES) and/or Common Equipment Rooms (CER) provided for the purpose. These areas will be identified in the STR. It is preferred that only control equipment which the operator must access directly should be located in the Control Posts. 3.2.3 Interface to Data Logger The contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface the Portable Alarm Location System to the data logger in the F acility Alarm Annunciation System Integration Unit (FIU) as described in the ES/SPEC-0005, Specification. If no FIU is available, the contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface to the data logger as specified in ES/SPEC-0102. The Portable Alarm Location System will provide as a minimum, event information to the data logger in dry contact closure, opto-isolated output form or ASCII Standard Code using a standard communications protocol. 3.2.4 Interface to FIU The contractor shall supply and install all necessary wiring and control equipment required to interface the FIU described in the ES/SPEC-0005, Specification. The information must be in ASCII Standard Code using a standard communications protocol. 3.2.5 System Self-Test Unit The contractor shall supply and install the Portable Alarm Location System Self-Test Unit which will periodically test the system to deter mine the s ystem s tatus and pr ovide a w arning to the c entral monitor post if any sensors performance starts to deteriorate. 3.3 Functional Operation of System Elements Each PPA transmitter activation shall cause the alarm location to be displayed and annunciated on the alar m c ontrol panel of the Integr ation Cons ole w hen present. Operating the FIUs alarm acknowledge and reset functions on the video display unit or control panels shall cancel the alarm and return PALS to its pre-alarm state. An alarm location must be acknowledged before it is possible to reset and cancel the alarm.
10
3.3.1
Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability The Portable Alarm Location System wireless sensors shall have high r esistance to dam age and destruction and shall also have high resistance to being tampered with. In the event that a wireless sensor or any elements of the system are sabotaged or are intentionally being tampered with, the system shall be capable of providing a warning to the c entral monitoring post.
3.3.2
Backup Power Emergency backup power shall be provided to the w ireless sensors and the c ontrol equipment to sustain operations for at least four (4) hours. Switching to the emergency back up power shall not cause the PALS to lose the operating mode which it was in prior to the power failure.
3.3.3
Power Failure Loss or r estoration of pr imary pow er to the Por table Alar m Loc ation Sy stem s hall not gener ate spurious alarms or erroneous signals to the data logger. When power is restored after a power failure, the system shall resume normal operation without operator action and shall retain the same alarm state as before the power failure.
3.4
Environmental Requirements The Portable Alarm Loc ation Sy stem s hall oper ate ef fectively over the indoor and outdoor environmental conditions as specified in the Standard, ES/STD-0602.
3.5
Power Requirements The Portable Alarm Location System shall use VAC power as specified in the Standar d, ES/STD0602.
3.6
Installation Requirements The Portable Alarm Location System shall be installed at the site in accordance with the ES/SOW0101, and the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Works.
3.7
Documentation Requirements All final Portable Alarm Location System documentation shall be provided with a Copyright Release for the doc umentation deliver ed in s upport of the s ystem. T he PALS documentation shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
11
3.8
Support Requirements The Por table Alar m Loc ation Sy stem m aintenance and s pares support shall be provided in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
3.9
Training Requirements Operator training and m aintenance training on the PALS s ystem shall be in ac cordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
12
4.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE The contractor shall comply with the requirements of Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101 regarding Product Assurance and Site Acceptance. These are summarized below.
4.1
In-Plant Tests Prior to delivery of the PALS equipm ent, tests will be c onducted at the c ontractor's plant to ver ify compliance with this specification. A record of compliance for each unit complete with serial number shall be provided to the Design Authority.
4.2
On-Site Tests After the Portable Alarm Location System on-site installation, performance and installation tests shall be conducted on the site to demonstrate compliance with this specification.
4.2.1
Installation Tests Visual and mechanical inspections of the c ontractor's ins tallation w ill be c onducted to ens ure compliance with Statem ent of W ork, ES/SO W-0102 and m anufacturer's ins tallation recommendations.
4.2.2
System and Equipment Tests Performance tests shall be conducted on the site to demonstrate compliance with this specification.
4.3
Test Performance All tests for compliance shall be conducted by the contractor and witnessed by the Design Authority, or his authorized representative. All required tests shall be completed successfully prior to system acceptance and commissioning into service.
4.4
Plans and Procedures All plans and procedures required to support s ystem and equipm ent tes ts s hall be pr epared in accordance with the requirements of Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101.
4.5
Test Reports Results of all tests and retests shall be documented by the contractor and submitted to the Design Authority. The requirements are defined in Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101.
13
5.0
DELIVERY REQUIREMENTS Delivery requirements for all Portable Alarm Location System documents, drawings, plans, manuals, etc. are given in the Statement of Work, ES/SOW-0101.
6.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the Por table Alarm Location System shall not be af fected by the us e of standard electronic equipment used at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment shall be in accordance with ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
7.0
SAFETY All Portable Alarm Location System electrically powered elements shall meet the applicable Canadian Safety Association (CSA) standards.
14
ES/SPEC-0900 Revision 2 10 July 2003
TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS ........................................................................................................................ 2 ABBREVIATIONS................................................................................................................................ 4 DEFINITIONS ...................................................................................................................................... 5 1.0 INTRODUCTION ...................................................................................................................... 6 1.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 6 1.2 Purpose...................................................................................................................... 6 1.3 Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment .............................................................................. 6 1.4 Technical Acceptability ................................................................................................ 6 1.5 Equipment Procurement ............................................................................................... 7 1.6 Quantity of Equipment ................................................................................................. 7 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS .................................................................................................... 8 REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................................................... 9 3.1 General ...................................................................................................................... 9 3.1.1 Period of Operation .......................................................................................... 9 3.2 System Requirements ................................................................................................. 9 3.2.1 General .......................................................................................................... 9 3.2.2 System Capacity............................................................................................. 9 3.2.3 System Redundancy ....................................................................................... 9 3.2.4 Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts ...................................................................... 10 3.2.5 Control Equipment ......................................................................................... 10 3.2.6 Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability ............................................................. 10 3.3 Design Requirements................................................................................................. 10 3.3.1 General ........................................................................................................ 10 3.3.2 Control and Display Terminal .......................................................................... 11 3.3.4 Power Failure ................................................................................................ 11 3.3.5 System Failure.............................................................................................. 11 3.3.6 Human Factors ............................................................................................. 12 3.3.7 Existing Equipment ....................................................................................... 12 3.4 Operational Requirements .......................................................................................... 12 3.4.1 Single Cell Door, Barrier or Gate Control .......................................................... 12 3.4.2 Group Operation ............................................................................................ 12 3.4.3 Barrier Emergency Control ............................................................................. 12 3.4.4 System Stat us Indication ............................................................................... 13 3.4.5 Indicator Test Device...................................................................................... 13
2.0 3.0
Correctional Services Canada Technical Services Branch
3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0
Environmental Requirements ...................................................................................... 13 Power Requirements.................................................................................................. 13 Installation Requirements ........................................................................................... 13 Documentation Requirements ..................................................................................... 14 Support Requirements ............................................................................................... 14 Training Requirements ............................................................................................... 14
QUALITY ASSURANCE ......................................................................................................... 14 4.1 General .................................................................................................................... 14 DELIVERY............................................................................................................................ 14 INTERFERENCE ................................................................................................................... 14 SAFETY ............................................................................................................................... 15
ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: CER COTS CP CSA CSC DES DCS EIA GFE Hz ICCS msec RFP PW&GSC QA SPEC SOW TES UPS VAC Common Equipment Room Commercial-Off-The-Shelf Control Post Canadian Standards Association Correctional Service Canada Director of Engineering Services Door/Barrier/Gate Control System Electronic Industries Association Government Furnished Equipment Hertz Inmate Cell Call System Millisecond Request for Proposal Public Works & Government Services Canada Quality Assurance Specification Statement of Work Terminal Equipment Space Uninterruptable Power Supply Voltage Alternating Current
DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Contractor Project Officer Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment Director, Engineering Services (DES), Correctional Service Canada (CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Service Canada (PW&GSC) is responsible for all contractual matters associated with the system design and implementation. The company selected as the successful bidder. A CSC employee or a contracted person designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. Equipment currently on the market with available field reliability data, manuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract.
1.0 1.1
INTRODUCTION General This specification defines the essential technical and functional requirements of the Correctional Service Canada (CSC) for the procurement and installation of a Door/Barrier/Gate Control System (DCS) in federal correctional institutions.
1.2
Purpose The primary purpose of the Door/Barrier/Gate Control System is to provide control and status monitoring of the electrical/mechanical doors, barriers and gates in the correctional facilities. The system will enable the staff to effectively control the movement of inmates and other persons within the institution. The DCS system may be used in both medium and maximum security institutions.
1.3
Commercial-Off-The-Self Equipment The DCS shall use commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) equipment and proven designs to the maximum extent possible. All new equipment shall meet the specified lifespan requirements. New equipment designs shall be restricted to unique interfaces and common control consoles.
1.4
Technical Acceptability The Correctional Service Canada (CSC) operational environment is unique for its diversity of locations, climate exposures and the physical restrictive construction techniques of penal institutions. Maintaining national security, the safety of staff and offenders alike is CSC's commitment to the government and public. Electronic security systems operating in this unique environment shall maintain very high standards of dependability and reliability. The CSC Engineering Services Division has established technical specifications and equipment standards for specific electronic security systems which are based on very specific and restrictive operational performance criteria as detailed in its Electronic Engineering Standard. Technical acceptability of these systems means that the equipment complies with the pertinent CSC specifications and standards. The technical acceptance process shall involve system and subsystem evaluation in accordance with the applicable CSC specifications in one of CSC facilities or may be tested in a CSC facility to verify the effectiveness of the proposed technologies when subjected to the restrictive operational environment.
CSC shall also verify in depth any of the system technical specifications called up. CSC may when it deems necessary, request the supplier to arrange for a full site demonstration. CSC may rely on manufacturer's test results for specific areas of the specification where an independent test facility has conducted the test, and the facility is deemed acceptable to CSC. It is the supplier's responsibility to make new developments in products available to CSC for evaluation. Equipment qualification is an ongoing process and can be initiated at any time by a vendor. Any vendor can have access to the CSC specifications and standards. Any new development or products should be submitted to the CSC Engineering Services Division, Technical Authority in a suitable time frame prior to any tendering process to allow for an acceptable evaluation period. The evaluation period may take up to sixteen (16) months. 1.5 Equipment Procurement Any ordering of equipment/material before the approval of the Door/Barrier/Gate Control System design report will be undertaken at the contractor's own risk. The Design Authority may authorize the procurement of certain long lead items at, or shortly after a preliminary design review of the proposed DCS. 1.6 Quantity of Equipment The quantity and location of the equipment required for CSC institutions will be contained in the specification identified in the Request for Proposal (RFP).
2.0
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of the Request for Proposal (RFP) shall form a part of this specification to the extent specified herein. ES/SOW-0101 ES/SOW-0102 ES/STD-0802 ES/STD-0803 EIA-310-D CSA-C22.1 Statement of Work for Electronic Systems for Correctional Service of Canada Institutions. Statement of Work for Quality Control for installation of Electroni c Systems in Federal Correctional Institutions. Standard for Display and Control Panel Standard for Video Display Unit Electronic Industry Association Standard for Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment Canadian Electrical Code, Part 1.
3.0 3.1
REQUIREMENTS General The Door/Barrier/Gate Control System (DCS) consists of a number of control panels with the necessary inputs and outputs to control the door, barrier or gate motors and monitor the limit and status switches at each door, barrier or gate.
3.1.1
Period of Operation The system and all associated equipment shall be rated for and capable of 24 hours per day, seven days per week continuous operation.
3.2 3.2.1
System Requirements General The DCS shall be a reliable, maintainable, modular and expandable state-of-the-art door/barrier/gate control system. Any system components located in areas continually exposed to the inmates shall be highly resistant to physical attack, tampering, liquids, jamming, abrasives, heated objects, etc. The system shall be designed in such a way that any failure of any component shall not affect more than one group of cell doors, barriers and gates designated in the range and the failure of one group shall not cause a complete system failure. Each group of cell doors, barriers and gates shall have a dedicated control and display terminal.
3.2.2
System Capacity The number of control and display terminals and the number of cell doors, barriers and/or gates controlled and monitored by each control panel shall be as specified in the RFP. The DCS shall be of a modular design and it shall be possible at a future date to add more control terminals and associated equipment to the basic installed complement without changing the existing hardware.
3.2.3
System Redundancy For redundancy purposes, two or more control processors shall be used with one processor as the main control and the other processors as the back up. Switching to the back up processors shall not cause interruption or loss of system conditions. The communications network between the control processors and the various cell doors, barriers and gates shall have redundant paths. If one communications path fails or is disabled, the other paths shall enable uninterrupted operations to be continued.
3.2.4
Wires, Cables, Conduits, Ducts The contractor shall supply all necessary terminations, cross connection cabinets, conduits, wire and cabling and any other items that may be required for the satisfactory completion of the specified system. All installation workmanship shall be performed in accordance with ES/SOW0102, Statement of Work and all applicable national, provincial, and local electrical codes. A wiring diagram shall be supplied in the Installation section of the Maintenance Manual to detail where module connections terminate and how wires are routed and terminated. Conduits, cables, ducts, trays, etc. may be either Government Furnished Equipment (GFE) or supplied and installed by the contractor depending on the particular institution. The determination will be made by the Design Authority and will be identified in the Request for Proposal. Connectors provided on the ends of any cable must mate with the corresponding connector on the equipment. Adapters from one type of connector to another are not acceptable.
3.2.5
Control Equipment To the maximum extent, the common control equipment (power supplies, logic boards, amplifiers, etc.) shall be located in Terminal Equipment Spaces (TES) and/or Common Equipment Rooms (CER) provided for the purpose. These areas will be identified in the RFP. It is preferred that only equipment such as control and display terminals which the operator must access directly should be located in the Control Posts (CP), Living Unit Offices or Nursing Stations.
3.2.6
Sabotage, Tampering and Survivability Any elements of the DCS located in areas exposed to inmates shall have high resistance to damage, destruction, or conversion to other uses (including weapons). All interconnecting service must be secure against tampering or damage.
3.3 3.3.1
Design Requirements General To the maximum extent, off-the-shelf equipment shall be selected for use in the DCS. New designs shall be restricted to common interface areas, control panels and consoles, or unique devices for which an off-the-shelf item does not exist. A design objective is to minimize the number of wires required among all elements of the system. A space-diversity approach to system communications shall be employed to ensure that loss of one interconnection routing does not impair the operational capability of the complete system.
10
3.3.2
Control and Display Terminal The control and display terminal may be an EIA standard rack, desk, or wall-mounted control panel with a number of indicator lights and buttons or the control terminal may be a touch-sensitive video display unit with graphic maps. If a control and display panel is used, each series of buttons shall have moveable, reusable tags located adjacent to each or a means of identifying each cell door, barrier or gate. If a graphic map is used, all icons shall be identified and labelled. The control and display terminal will usually be installed in the Security Control Post, Living Unit Office, or Nursing Station which is responsible for the supervision of an area containing the group of inmate cells called a range. Mounting space within control posts is usually limited and the problem of determining a suitable equipment mounting location is minimized if the control and display terminals are small. Therefore, the designer should make maximum possible use of control devices which combines two or more functions into a single unit, e.g., a lighted push-button instead of a separate light and an unlit pushbutton if a control and display panel is used. The EIA standard display and control panels or video display units shall be in accordance with ES/STD-0802 or ES/STD-0803 Standards respectively.
3.3.4
Power Failure The door control system shall be equipped with an uninterruptible power supply (UPS) capable of keeping the displays operational for a minimum of thirty (30) minutes in the event of a Hydro power failure. If a door is manually opened or closed during a Hydro power failure the display shall register the change. The status of the UPS (normal or battery operation) shall be displayed on the control panel(s). In the event of a primary power outage lasting more tha the period mentioned above ; the door control system shall shut down automatically and the status of the doors shall not be affected by the shut down. Ie.. if a door was locked prior to the shut down, the door shall remain locked after the shut down. After restoration of the primary power ; the door control system shall resume normal operation without humain intervention and shall display the current status of all the doors.
3.3.5
System Failure A DCS failure shall be deemed to have occurred when any required door, barrier and/or gate action is not produced or when any required control or monitor function cannot be performed.
11
3.3.6
Human Factors Elements of the Door/Barrier/Gate Control System which are used directly by staff (i.e., control panels, etc.) shall conform with accepted principles of good human factors design.
3.3.7
Existing Equipment In most installations, control elements of the Door/Barrier/Gate Control System will share console space with other electrical/electronic equipment such as Inmate Cell Call Systems (ICCS), lighting controls, etc. and will be operated by the same staff member. In such cases it is important that effort be made to coordinate the functional and operational design of the system according to accepted human engineering principles to ensure a uniform appearance and commonality of layout to assist the operator in the performance of his duties.
3.4 3.4.1
Operational Requirements Single Cell Door, Barrier or Gate Control The control and display terminal shall provide an OPEN, CLOSE, GROUP and STOP function in accordance with the appropriate Standards ES/STD-0802 or ES/STD-0803.
3.4.2
Group Operation The door control system shall have the ability to satisfactorily handle a group of cell doors in the same manner as a single cell door, in accordance with the appropriate Standards ES/STD-0802 or ES/STD-0803. Cell doors may be selectively cancelled from the group in any desired sequence, independent of the sequence in which they were initiated. Any number of cell doors, up to the maximum installed complement shall be capable of group operation without a system overload. A visual (flashing light) and an audible alarm (buzzer) shall preclude the group close function by a few seconds in each range. That is; when the group close button is actuated, a flashing light will be viewed and a series of audible bursts will be heard in each of the applicable range, and a few second later all the doors in the group register will close. The frequency and level of the flashing light and the audio burst shall be adjustable independently.
3.4.3
Barrier Emergency Control Each control and display terminal shall provide an EMERGENCY CLOSE function for all barriers normally operated from the control post. The button shall have a red light to indicate that the emergency control has been activated.
12
3.4.4
System Status Indication Each control and display terminal shall provide a system status indicator. The status indicator shall be green for normal operations and red for system failure. A separate indicator shall indicate if the system is on the uninterruptable power supply (UPS) battery back up.
3.4.5
Indicator Test Device The control and display terminal shall contain an Indicator Test button which when activated shall cause all visual indicators on the control and display panel to turn ON and remain ON until the test button is released. Operation and release of the test button shall not cause any change of system status with respect to the events in progress.
3.5
Environmental Requirements The Door/Barrier/Gate Control System shall operate over the following indoor environmental conditions:
3.5.1 3.5.2 3.6
Temperature: Humidity:
0 C to +50 C; and 0 to 90% relative, non-condensing.
Power Requirements The DCS shall use VAC power within the following limits:
3.6.1 3.6.2 3.6.3
3.6.4 3.7
Power:
Installation Requirements The Door/Barrier/Gate Control System shall be installed at the site in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work and the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work.
13
3.8
Documentation Requirements All final Door/Barrier/Gate Control System documentation shall be provided with a Copyright Release for the documentation delivered in support of the system. The DCS documentation shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
3.9
Support Requirements The Door/Barrier/Gate Control System maintenance and spares support shall be provided in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
3.10
Training Requirements Operator training and maintenance training on the Door/Barrier/Gate Control System shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
4.0 4.1
QUALITY ASSURANCE General The Door/Barrier/Gate Control System Quality Assurance programme shall be provided as detailed in the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. All on-site installation work, test plans and system acceptance testing shall be conducted in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
5.0
DELIVERY Delivery requirements for the DCS documents, drawings, plans, manuals, etc. (where applicable) shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work. Delivery requirements of the Door/Barrier/Gate Control System equipment shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work.
6.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the DCS shall not be affected by the use of standard electronic equipment used at the institution. Distance limits shall be in accordance with the ES/SOW-0101, Statement of Work.
14
7.0
SAFETY All Door/Barrier/Gate Control System electrically powered elements shall meet the applicable Canadian Standards Association (CSA) standards.
15
ES/STD-0204 Revision 1 November 2001 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING STANDARDS FIXED/ZOOM LENS CLOSED CIRCUIT TELEVISION
Approved by: ector, Engineering Service
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Standards
ES/STD-0204 Revision 1 November 2001
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of Correctional Service Canada (CSC) for Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) camera lens at federal correctional institutions.
2.0
GENERAL Automatic iris, fixed and zoom lenses are used in indoor and outdoor security surveillance and assessment CCTV systems. In outdoor applications, the camera and lens are normally mounted in weatherproof, environmental enclosures. In indoor applications, the camera and lens are normally mounted in dustproof, secure enclosures.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS The lens shall operate in the following environmental conditions: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: -10 C to 50 C; and up to 95% non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS Control voltage for a zoom lens shall be in following range: 4.1 Voltage: 6 VDC to 12 VDC.
5.0
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS The weight and dimensions for the lens shall be application specific.
6.0
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The lens shall have: 6.1 6.2 6.3 an auto iris; a neutral density spot filter; and be designed and built to provide ten years of reliable, trouble-free operation;
ES/STD-0204 Revision 1 November 2001
7.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The lens shall meet the following requirements: 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 Format: Mount: Focal Length: Response Time: Sensitivity: Voltage: Current: Impedance: Scene Illumination: Aperture Ratio: Zoom Time: Focus Time: compatible with camera; standard C-mount or CS-mount; fixed, zoom lenses may be used to achieve nonstandard focal lengths; <10 sec; 0.5 Vp-p to 1.0 Vp-p video signal level; 6 to 12 VDC (zoom lens); <100 ma; high; 0.05 fc at f/1.4 1:1.4; 5 1.5 sec; and 5 1.5 sec
8.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the lens shall not be affected by the presence and use of standard electronic equipment used at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment are as follows: 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF and UHF transceivers at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving equipment/systems at 5 metres or more; and Person computer and/or work stations at 5 metres or more.
ES/STD-0207 Revision 1 23 May, 2003
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of Correctional Service of Canada (CSC) for Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) high security camera enclosures for indoor use at federal correctional institutions.
2.0
GENERAL High security indoor enclosures are used in security surveillance and assessment areas and require maximum protection from vandalism. The enclosure is attached flush to walls or ceiling of detention cells with no exposed mounting hardware. The front cover has an impact-resistant clear lexan window. With the enclosure being mounted in difficult to access locations, reliability and ease of maintenance are essential.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS The high security enclosure shall operate over the following conditions: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: 0 C to +50 C; and 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
4.0
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS The external dimensions of the enclosure shall not exceed: 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Width: Height: Depth: Weight: 350 mm; 300 mm; 350 mm; and 10 kg.
5.0
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The high security enclosure shall have: 5.1 1.27 cm. thick impact and abrasion-resistant clear lexan window.
5.2 5.3 5.4 5.4 5.5
an adjustable camera mount with diameter mounting holes. no exposed power or video cables. tamper-resistant screws where authorized access to the enclosure is required. steel construction, 10 gauge, and have a life expectancy of at least five years. a label permanently affixed to the interior of the unit which identifies the manufacturer, the model or assembly number, the serial number and the mains power requirements.
6.0
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS The high security enclosure shall: 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 be tamper proof and use secure screws to allow access to the enclosure for maintenance purposes. be properly filtered to prevent dust, water or insects from entering the enclosure. provide 10,000 hours or more Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and be built for high reliability. be accessible for ease of maintenance and camera position adjustment.
7.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the enclosure shall not be affected by the use of standard electronic equipment at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment are as follows: 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF and UHF transceivers at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; and Personal computer and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more.
8.0
SAFETY The high security enclosure shall be CSA approved. - END OF TEXT -
RECORD OF REVISIONS Revision 0 N/A Paragraph Original issue. Comment
ES/STD-0221 Revision 0 12 April 2004
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of Correctional Service Canada (CSC) for Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) colour network capable cameras at federal correctional institutions.
2.0
GENERAL The colour camera is used in indoor security surveillance and assessment applications and outdoor applications under controlled lighting conditions. In indoor applications, it is housed in tamper-proof secure enclosures mounted on walls or hanging from ceilings. In outdoor applications, the camera is housed in environmental tamper-proof enclosures mounted on building walls or roofs.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS The camera shall operate over the following environmental conditions: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: -10 C to +50 C; and 0 to 90% relative, non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS The camera shall use power within the following limits: 4.1 4.2 Voltage: Power: 24 VAC 10% @ 60 Hz 1.5%; or 24 VDC; and power consumption shall not exceed ten watts.
5.0
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS The mechanical requirements are as follows: 5.1 5.2 5.3 Weight: Height: Width: 1 kg; 75 mm; 75 mm;
5.4 5.5 6.0
Length: Mount:
200 mm; and "-20 UNC threaded mounting holes, bottom.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS The camera shall be colour with the following requirements: 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 interline transfer Charge-Coupled Device (CCD) pick up device; electronic circuits shall use solid state devices with Digital Signal Processing (DSP); built-in character generator for camera location identification; compact size and light weight; test points used during calibration, setup and testing shall be easily accessible and permanently labelled; modular with plug-in circuit cards and assemblies; high quality construction standard and have a designed MTBF (Mean Time Between Failure) of at least 5 years; and labels, permanently affixed to the exterior of the unit, which identifies the manufacturer, the model or assembly number, the serial number and the mains power requirement.
7.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The colour CCD camera shall meet all applicable EIA Standards and the following minimum specifications: 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 Image Sensor: Resolution : Frame Rate (Var): Bandwidth: Image Quality: 1/2 or 1/3 inch; minimum VGA (640 x 480 pixels) at 30 images/second; adjustable from 1 frame/second to 30 frames/second; Adjustable; Adjustable;
ES/STD-0221 Revision 0 12 April 2004 Intraframe coding;
7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 8.0
Compression:
Compression Options: Shall provide configuration of the video encoder to select compression features; Sensitivity: AGC: Lens output: Lens Mount: SNR: Distortion: Light Control: Interface: Protocol : Character Generator: 0.1 fc scene illumination at f1.4; >12 dB; 8-16 VDC, to 100 ma; standard C-mount or CS-mount; >45 dB (AGC off); <2% of picture height; Auto/manual back light compensation, electronic light control (ELC); 10Base-T/100Base-T; Internet Interface Protocol; and 8 characters.
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS The following external functions shall be available: 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 AGC on/off switch; Mechanical focus (Imager position); Network Interface connector (RJ45 type); and Auto Iris Lens connector.
9.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the camera and video quality shall not be affected by the use of standard electronic equipment used at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment are as follows: 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF and UHF transceivers at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; and Personal computer and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more.
10.0
SAFETY The camera must be CSA, UL, ULC or CE approved, as required by law.
- END OF TEXT -
ES/STD-0222 Revision 0 12 April, 2004
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of the Correctional Service of Canada (CSC) for an indoor colour dome network capable Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) camera with integral pan/tilt/zoom capability for use at federal correctional institutions.
2.0
GENERAL The dustproof, tamper proof indoor colour dome camera with integral pan/tilt/zoom is used in indoor security surveillance and assessment applications. The camera is normally flush mounted in the ceilings with only the dome being visible. A smoked dome is used to conceal the actual camera viewing position. With the camera being mounted in difficult to access locations, reliability and ease of maintenance are essential.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS The enclosure and subassemblies shall operate over the following conditions: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: 0 C to +40 C; and 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS The camera and pan/tilt/zoom mechanism shall use VAC power within the following limits: 4.1 4.2 Voltage: Power: 24 VAC 10% @ 60 Hz 1.5%; or 24 VDC; power consumption shall not exceed twenty watts.
5.0
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS The camera dome enclosure shall not exceed: 5.1 5.2 5.3 Dome Diameter: Height: Weight: 150 mm; 250 mm (including dome); 2.5 kg.;
ES/STD-0222 Revision 0 12 April, 2004 0-360 (continuous) at 0.1/sec. to 80/sec.; 0-180 at 0.1/sec to 40/sec.; continuous; and smoked, light attenuation factor of 1 f-stop.
5.4 5.5 5.6 5.7 6.0
Pan (Horizontal): Tilt (Vertical): Duty Cycle Dome Window:
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1 6.2 Dome shall be an acrylic hemisphere with distortion free viewing. Cables between the enclosure and the control unit shall be kept to a minimum. Camera low voltage power, lens and pan/tilt control signals and the camera video signal may be included in the same cable. The video signal must be transferred from the moving camera mount to the main equipment body via a non-contact system. Mechanical slip rings are not acceptable for video transfer. All equipment shall be designed to high quality standard and have a life expectancy of at least five years. Enclosure shall have a label permanently affixed to the interior of the unit which identifies the manufacturer, the model or assembly number, the serial number and the mains power requirement. The colour camera shall utilize and interline transfer Charge-Coupled Device (CCD) pick up device. The electronic circuits shall use solid state devices with Digital Signal Processing (DSP). The camera shall have a built-in character generator for camera location identification. The camera and dome shall be of compact size and lightweight. All the test points used during calibration, set-up and testing shall be easily accessible and permanently labelled. The unit shall be modular with plug-in circuit cards and assemblies. The unit shall be of high quality construction standard and have a designed MTBF (Mean Time Between Failure) of at least 5 years.
6.3
6.4 6.5
6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 6.11 6.12
6.13
Labels must be permanently affixed to the exterior of the unit which identifies the manufacturer, the model or assembly number, the serial number and the mains power requirement.
7.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The colour CCD camera shall meet all applicable EIA Standards and the following minimum specifications: 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 Image Sensor: Resolution : Frame Rate (Var): Bandwidth: Image Quality: Compression: Compression Options: Sensitivity: AGC: Lens Mount: Iris: Optical Zoom: Angular Field of View: Focus: SNR: Distortion: Interface: 1/4 inch; minimum VGA (640 x 480 pixels) at 30 images/second; adjustable from 1 frame/second to 30 frames/second; Adjustable; Adjustable; Intraframe coding; Shall provide configuration of the video encoder to select compression features; 0.1 fc scene illumination at f1.4; yes; integral to camera; F1.4 F20, automatic with manual override; 10X; minimum 5 to 45 (H); automatic with manual override; >45 dB (AGC off); <2% of picture height; 10Base-T/100Bse-T;
ES/STD-0222 Revision 0 12 April, 2004 Internet interface protocol; 8 characters; and image to be rotated by 180 at bottom of tilt travel.
7.18 7.19 7.20 8.0
Protocol : Character Generator: Image Flip:
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 The enclosure shall be tamper proof and use secure screws to allow access to the enclosure for maintenance purposes. Air intakes used for ventilation shall be properly filtered to prevent dust, water or insects from entering the enclosure. All assemblies shall provide 10,000 hours or more Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) and be built for high reliability. All assemblies within the enclosure must be accessible for ease of maintenance.
9.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the indoor dome enclosure and the video quality shall be not affected by the use of standard electronic equipment at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment are as follows: 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF and UHF transceivers at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; and Personal computer and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more.
10.0
SAFETY The dome enclosures must be CSA, UL, ULC or CE approved, as required by law. - END OF TEXT -
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of Correctional Service of Canada (CSC) for Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) computer monitors at federal correctional institutions.
2.0
GENERAL The LCD colour computer monitor is used in indoor and outdoor security surveillance and assessment systems. It is mounted in standard EIA 19 inch racks, attached to walls and ceilings by brackets, and/or is located on desks and shelves.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS The LCD colour computer monitor shall meet all operational requirements over the following operating ranges: 3.1 Temperature: 3.2 Humidity: 5 C to +40 C; and up to 95% non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS The monitor shall use standard single phase commercial VAC power within the following limits: 4.1 4.2 4.3 Voltage: Frequency: Transients: 120 VAC 10%; 60 Hz 1.5%; up to five times nominal voltage for up to 100 msec durations. Changes in the input power or any fluctuations within the above limits shall not cause damage to the unit; and power consumption up to 45 watts.
4.4 5.0
Power:
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 5.1 Free standing monitor cabinets shall be metal or metal with plastic front.
5.2 5.3
Rack mounted units shall be metal, and come complete with all hardware required to install in standard EIA 19 racks. External dimensions, weight, diagonal effective viewing area and mounting configuration of the monitors are application dependent. These requirements shall be specified in the functional specification for the specific application. All controls and test points used during calibration and testing shall be easily accessible and permanently labelled.
5.4
6.0
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 All controls for the operation of the monitor shall be on the front of the unit and shall be easy accessible to the operator. There must be clear permanent labelling of and easy access to all controls and test points used for calibration and testing by maintenance staff. Where applicable, the monitor must be modular with plug-in circuit cards and assembles. A standard extender board must be included with the equipment if applicable. The monitor must be designed and built to high quality standards and have a Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) of at least five years. Labels must be permanently affixed to the exterior of the monitor which identify the manufacturer, model number, serial number and the power requirements.
7.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The colour computer monitor shall meet the following minimum requirements: 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.3 7.4 Native Resolution: Brightness: Contrast Ratio: Aspect Ratio: Viewing Angle: 1024 x 768; 200 cd/m2; 300:1; 4 to 3; minimum 120 Horizontal; minimum 100 Vertical;
ES/STD-0227 Revision 0 12 April, 2004 Thin Film Transfer, active matrix, LCD; and VGA/SVGA/XGA;
7.5 7.6 8.0
Display : Video Input:
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 8.1 8.2 The monitor shall provide a visual indication of power on/off. Front panel controls shall be easy accessible to the operator and include the following functions: Power on/off; Contrast; Brightness; Tint; and Colour.
9.0
INTERFERENCE Performance of the monitor and video quality shall not be affected by the presence and use of standard electronic equipment used at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment are as follows: 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF and UHF transceivers at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; Personal computer and/or work stations at 5 metres or more.
10.0
SAFETY 10.1 The colour monitor must be CSA, UL, ULC or CE approved, as required by law.
- END OF TEXT -
ES/STD-0228 Revision 0 13 October, 2004
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of a Network Video User Station (NVUS) in Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) systems used by Correctional Service of Canada (CSC).
2.0
GENERAL NVUSs are used in security surveillance and assessment applications in institutions. The NVUS provides control and monitoring of CCTV equipment in a client-to-server configuration. The system shall use common off-the-shelf operating systems and computers. The system shall require user login and passwords to view recorded and live video. User video access and priorities are defined in the system configuration. The system shall be capable of having a minimum of 32 NVUS stations logged into the system.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS The system shall meet all operational requirements over the following operating range: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: 5 C to 40 C; and 20 to 80% relative, non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS The equipment shall use standard commercial VAC power within the following range: 4.1 4.2 4.3 Voltage: Frequency: Power: 120 VAC 10%; 60 Hz 1.5%; and power consumption shall not exceed 400 watts.
5.0
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS The dimensions and weight shall not exceed the following: 5.1 5.2 5.3 Width: Height: Depth: 450 mm; 200 mm; 450 mm; and
5.4 6.0
Weight:
30 kg.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 The unit must be self contained and the NVUS computer must fit in a standard 19" rack. The control functions must be usable with either a mouse or LCD touch screen. Memory Backup shall protect timer settings in the event of power failure. All test points on the NVMS computer shall be clearly labelled and easily accessible for calibration and maintenance. All equipment shall be modular with plug-in circuit cards and assemblies. The design Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) shall be at least 10,000 hours. Emergency repair or parts and labour for detective NVMSs shall be available within 24 hours after notification of equipment unserviceability to any authorized dealer service centres across Canada.
7.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The NVUS shall meet the following requirements: 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 Video Format: Video Frame Rate: Video Freeze: Video Output: Audio: Interface: Protocol: NTSC (colour and black/white); 30 frames/second/channel (max); yes SVGA; Synchronized with video input; 100Base-T/10Base-T (auto fallback); and Internet Interface Protocol.
8.0
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS The NVUS shall interface to the network and provide access and control of all CCTV surveillance and assessment systems as follows:
8.1
General a. b. User login shall be through password protection that limits the user to specific cameras, both live and recorded. The Graphic User Interface (GUI) shall provide mapping functions to display camera locations. Cameras can be selected by camera number, or by dragging and dropping to a display. Alarms shall be able to be displayed on the map or through a text message. The system shall log all user operations.
c. d. 8.2
Viewing a. b. c. d. e. f. Ability to have live and recorded viewing of a minimum of 16 cameras. Full control of all Pan/Tilt/Zoom (P/T/Z) cameras through user login of access rights to predefined cameras. Minimum of 16 priority levels to access cameras. Ability to set up guard tour and multiple camera sequences. Ability to display video in single, quad or step format. Full duplex audio capability. The GUI application provides the ability to control talk paths and listen to audio inputs at camera locations. Any live or recorded camera in the system shall be accessible through the single GUI interface without the need to change screens or applications.
8.3
Recording a. b. c. Ability to set record mode to automatically start recording on any appropriate alarm input, for example, a signal from the Fence Detection System. Ability to set record mode to stop when it receives any reset signal (one input per video input); Ability to manual initiate record mode.
d. e. f. g. 8.4
Ability to initiate record mode on motion. Ability to initiate record mode based on time. Ability to be configured to stop recording when the hard drive is full, or configured to overwrite the oldest files. Provide an open or closed contact when the NVUS stops recording for any reason.
Playback a. b. c. d. e. Ability to control playback speed. Ability to have multiple view playback. Ability to export single images and video sequences. Ability to search for motion in continuous recordings. Ability to search video sequences based on either date, time or motion.
8.5
System a. b. c. Capable of triplex operation: record, search and playback simultaneously. Placing the unit into either the Search or Playback mode shall not interrupt any recording in process. Searching and viewing of stored images, and reconfiguration of system parameters shall be available via a TCP/IP connection through a LAN. Any remote access software required shall be provided for installation on a standard Windows based computer; and Transfer viewing software automatically to the CD when downloading audio and video for archive purposes. It should be possible to review the archived audio and video from any CSC PC with Windows XP without additional software. Should indicate Power on/off; Hard Drive Full Alarm; Time/Date; and Recording; on the operator console; Should have controls for Power on/off; Record; Play/Stop; Forward/Reverse Field Advance; Time, Date and Recording Mode on the operator console; Control signals available on the back of the NVUS shall include Automatic Alarm Input; and Manual Alarm Input;
d.
e. f. g.
h. i.
System messages must be contained in a log file available for downloading or printing. Multiple users shall be able to share common resources, with individual users being assigned different system access capability with password protection.
9.0
INTERFERENCE The NVUS performance and video quality shall not be affected by the presence or use of standard CSC electronic equipment. The units shall work at the following distance limits: 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF or UHF transceivers (25W) at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; and Personal computers and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more.
The NVUS shall not interfere with any standard electronic equipment used at the institutions. 10.0 SAFETY 10.1 The NVUS must be CSA, UL, ULC or CE approved, as required by law.
- END OF TEXT -
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of a Network Video Recorder (NVR) in Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) systems used by Correctional Service of Canada (CSC).
2.0
GENERAL NVRs are used in security surveillance and assessment applications in institutions. The NVR records real time video and audio streams transmitted from network video cameras or NTSC-IP Video Converters.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS The system shall meet all operational requirements over the following operating range: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: 5 C to 40 C; and 20 80% non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS The equipment shall use standard commercial VAC power within the following range: 4.1 4.2 4.3 Voltage: Frequency: Power: 120 VAC 10%; 60 Hz 1.5%; and power consumption shall not exceed 400 watts.
5.0
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS The dimensions and weight shall not exceed the following: 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Width: Height: Depth: Weight: to fit standard 19 rack mount; maximum 6RU (Rack Units); 450 mm; and 30 kg.
6.0
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9 6.10 The unit must be self contained. The unit must fit in a standard 19" rack. The NVR shall be based on common off-the-shelf computers and operating systems. All function controls for NVR configuration and operation shall be available either via a local display, keyboard and mouse, or through remote access software. Power Failure Recovery shall enable the NVR to resume functioning in the same state that it was in at the time of the power failure. Memory Backup shall protect timer settings in the event of power failure. All test points on the NVR shall be clearly labelled and easily accessible for calibration and maintenance. All equipment shall be modular with plug-in circuit cards and assemblies. The design Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) shall be at least 10,000 hours. Emergency repair or parts and labour for defective NVRs shall be available within 24 hours after notification of equipment unserviceability to any authorized dealer service centres across Canada. The unit shall provided remote diagnostics to indicate recording failure or video loss from an IP camera or IP encoder. The recorder shall utilize user login, password and rights management such as to limit users access to specific cameras, both live and recorded. The recorder system shall provided user rights and priorities to control of P/T/Z cameras. Deleting of hard drive files, when the NVR is configured in the non-overwrite mode, shall only be possible from a computer attached directly to the NVR.
6.11 6.12 6.13 6.14
7.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The NVR shall meet the following requirements: 7.1 Video Format: NTSC (colour and black/white);
7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7
Audio:
Synchronized with video input (when equipped);
System Recording Rate: up to 100 Mbits/sec; Recording Frame Rate: Frame Storage Option: minimum 16 simultaneous inputs @ 640 x 480 pixels, 30 frames per second per input, minimum compression; Selectable levels;
Selectable Compression: Shall provide configuration of the IP camera or video encoder to select compression features; Recording Capacity: Shall have the ability to connect to external local RAID storage drives to a minimum of 4 external RAID chassis. Limited only by hard drive capacity; Hard Drive (capacity as per STR); Internal storage shall be RAID 5 as a minimum (depending on storage requirement); The video must contain some form of watermark or fingerprint so that any attempt to tamper with the recorded digital image may be detected. 100Base-T/10Base-T (auto fallback); Internet Interface Protocol; and HTML-based GUI. Open or closed contact when NVR stops recording for any reason Open or closed contact when hard drive is nearly full.
7.8 7.9 7.10
Primary Storage: RAID 5: Watermark:
7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15 8.0
Interface: Protocol: User Display: Failure Indication: Disk Full:
INTERFERENCE The NVR performance and video quality shall not be affected by the presence or use of standard CSC electronic equipment. The units shall work at the following distance limits: 8.1 8.2 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF or UHF transceivers (25W) at 1 metre or more;
8.3 8.4
Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; and Personal computers and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more.
The NVR shall not interfere with any standard electronic equipment used at the institutions. 9.0 SAFETY 9.1 The NVR must be CSA, UL, ULC or CE approved, as required by law. - END OF TEXT -
ES/STD-0230 Revision 0 13 October 2004
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of a NTSC-IP Video Converter (Video Converter) in Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) systems used by Correctional Service of Canada (CSC).
2.0
GENERAL Video Converters are used in security surveillance and assessment applications in institutions. The Video Converter converts standard video signals from an NTSC analogue camera into a digital data stream.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS The system shall meet all operational requirements over the following operating range: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: 5 C to 40 C; and 20 to 80%, non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS The equipment shall use standard commercial VAC power within the following range: 4.1 4.2 Voltage: Power: 24 VAC 10% @ 60 Hz 1.5%; or 24 VDC; power consumption shall not exceed twenty watts.
5.0
5.4 6.0
Weight:
5 kg.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 The unit must be self contained, excluding power supply. All test points on the Video Converter shall be clearly labelled and easily accessible for calibration and maintenance. All equipment shall be modular with plug-in circuit cards and assemblies. The design Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) shall be at least 10,000 hours. The unit must provide a configuration tool to et up all system parameters remotely. The unit must provide a full Automated Programmable Interface (API) or Software Development Kit (SDK) to access all video configuration, video streams, Video Motion Detection (VMD) triggers, alarm interfaces and P/T/Z controls.
7.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The Video Converter shall meet the following requirements: 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 Video Format: Resolution : Frame Rate (Max): Frame Rate (Var): Bandwidth: Image Quality: Compression: NTSC (colour and black/white); minimum VGA (640 x 480 pixels) at 30 images/second, for each input, 4 video inputs active; 30 frames/second/channel, 4 video inputs active; adjustable from 1 frame/second to 30 frames/second, adjustable on a per input basis, depending on the number of active inputs; Adjustable; Adjustable; Intraframe coding;
Compression Options: Shall provide configuration of the video encoder to select compression features;
7.9 7.10 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 7.15
Interface: Protocol : Camera Control: Alarm Input: Alarm Output: Video Input: VMD:
10Base-T/100Base-T; Internet Interface Protocol; Full control of P/T/Z cameras; 1 (minimum); 1 (minimum); 1 V p-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, BNC; and Built-in Video Motion Detection that can be set through API or user interface.
8.0
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS The following external functions shall be available: 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 Video input connector (BNC type); Network Interface connector (RJ45 type); Alarm Input connector; Alarm Output connector; Data Interface (RS-232/485); and Power Input.
9.0
INTERFERENCE The Video Converter performance and video quality shall not be affected by the presence or use of standard CSC electronic equipment. The units shall work at the following distance limits: 9.1 9.2 9.3 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF or UHF transceivers (25W) at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; and
9.4
Personal computers and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more.
The Video Converter shall not interfere with any standard electronic equipment used at the institutions. 10.0 SAFETY 10.1 The Video Converter must be CSA, UL, ULC or CE approved, as required by law.
- END OF TEXT -
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of a IP-NTSC Video Converter (Video Converter) in Closed Circuit Television (CCTV) systems used by Correctional Service of Canada (CSC).
2.0
GENERAL Video Converters are used in security surveillance and assessment applications in institutions. The Video Converter converts standard video signals from a digital data stream into a standard NTSC analogue signal.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS The system shall meet all operational requirements over the following operating range: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: 5 C to 40 C; and 20 to 80%, non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS The equipment shall use standard commercial VAC power within the following range: 4.1 4.2 Voltage: Power: 24 VAC 10% @ 60 Hz 1.5%; or 24 VDC; power consumption shall not exceed twenty watts.
5.0
5.4 6.0
Weight:
5 kg.
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 The unit must be self contained, excluding power supply. All test points on the Video Converter shall be clearly labelled and easily accessible for calibration and maintenance. All equipment shall be modular with plug-in circuit cards and assemblies. The design Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF) shall be at least 10,000 hours. The unit must provide a configuration tool to et up all system parameters remotely. The unit must provide a full Automated Programmable Interface (API) or Software Development Kit (SDK) to access all video configuration and video streams.
7.0
TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS The Video Converter shall meet the following requirements: 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 Video Format: Resolution : Frame Rate (Max): Frame Rate (Var): Bandwidth: Image Quality: NTSC (colour and black/white); minimum VGA (640 x 480 pixels) at 30 images/second, for each input, 4 video inputs active; 30 frames/second/channel, 4 video inputs active; adjustable from 1 frame/second to 30 frames/second, adjustable on a per input basis, depending on the number of active inputs; Adjustable; Adjustable;
Decompression Option: Shall provide configuration of the video decoder to select decompression features; Interface: Protocol : 10Base-T/100Base-T; Internet Interface Protocol; and
7.10 8.0
Video Output:
1 V p-p, 75 ohms, unbalanced, BNC.
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS The following external functions shall be available: 8.1 8.2 8.3 Video output connector (BNC type); Network Interface connector (RJ45 type); and Power Input.
9.0
INTERFERENCE The Video Converter performance and video quality shall not be affected by the presence or use of standard CSC electronic equipment. The units shall work at the following distance limits: 9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; VHF or UHF transceivers (25W) at 1 metre or more; Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; and Personal computers and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more.
The Video Converter shall not interfere with any standard electronic equipment used at the institutions. 10.0 SAFETY 10.1 The Video Converter must be CSA, UL, ULC or CE approved, as required by law.
- END OF TEXT -
ES/STD-0803 Revision 2 20 February 2002 ELECTRONICS ENGINEERING STANDARDS VIDEO DISPLAY UNIT ELECTRONIC SYSTEMS
ES/STD-0803 Revision 2 20 February 2002
1.0
SCOPE This standard defines the requirements of the Correctional Service of Canada (CSC) for the Video Display Unit (VDU) for use at federal correctional institutions.
2.0
GENERAL Video Display Units interface the various electronic security systems to the operator in the Control Posts. The VDU annunciates real time events, displays system status and allows the operator to fully supervise, manage and control the systems as required. These units are mounted in locations on consoles according to functional priority and ease of operators visual monitoring of the display and controls.
3.0
ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS The system shall meet all requirements over the following operating range: 3.1 3.2 Temperature: Humidity: 0 C to 50 C; and up to 95% non-condensing.
4.0
POWER REQUIREMENTS The equipment shall be powered from standard commercial VAC within the following range: 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Voltage: Frequency: Power: Transients: 120 VAC 10%; 60 Hz 1.5%; not to exceed 100 watts; and input power fluctuations up to five times nominal voltages for up to 100 msec durations shall not cause damage to the unit.
Following any power failure, the system shall return to the operating mode which was in use prior to the power failure.
5.0
MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS The maximum dimensions for the equipment shall be within the following limits: 5.1.1 5.1.2 5.1.3 Height: Width: Length: 400 mm; 480 mm; 500 mm.
6.0
DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 6.1 6.2 6.3 The VDU shall be rack mountable to EIA RS-310-C Rack Standards, designed to be mounted in a console. The display screen shall be touch-sensitive and shall not be <14 diagonally. The following screen colour shall indicate the associated functions: a. FLASHING RED shall be used only to denote alarm conditions which require operator action to be taken without undue delay to avert possible personnel injury, equipment damage, or both. RED shall be used to indicate an acknowledged alarm situation. YELLOW shall be used to alert the operator to conditions requiring attention, or to indicate that the system is in an unsafe state, such as unlocked cell doors or masked perimeter sectors, requiring caution. GREEN shall be used in contrast to red or yellow to indicate the system is in a safe state. WHITE shall be used to indicate system conditions which do not have safe or dangerous implications.
b. c.
d. e. 6.5
Various systems shall use audible signals to alert the operator as follows: a. b. c. Audible signals shall be clearly audible at any position the operator will occupy while on duty. Frequency of a signal shall be between 500 and 5000 Hz, and preferably between 500 and 3000 Hz. The operator shall be able to test each signal.
d.
Volume of the signal shall be adjustable, either by the operator or by an internal adjustment to the module. The operator shall not be able to disable the signal by making it inaudible.
6.6
The following classes of audible signals shall be used on the console. They must be easily distinguished. a. Confirmation' - a short tone, usually about 0.5 seconds, used to acknowledge an operator action. The same tone shall be used to confirm all console operations for which an audible confirmation is required. Warning' - a short tone, usually about 0.5 seconds, used to warn the operator that an action cannot be carried out because of conflict or error, or that a nonstandard action has been initiated. The same warning tone shall be used for all console operations for which a warning tone is specified. 'Annunciation' - continuous tone used to indicate a request for action by the operator. More than one such tone may be used for different console functions. 'Alarm' - continuous tone warning for a dangerous situation. More than one such tone may be used for different console functions.
b.
c. d. 6.7
The following requirements for screen touch sensitive buttons are as follows: a. b. A positive indication of button activation shall be provided. Dimensions and spacing shall be as defined in the individual panel standards.
6.8 6.9
Screen touch sensitive buttons shall be separated by >13 mm to prevent unintentional actuation. Grouped buttons designed for sequential operation, for example numeric keypads, require separation >6 mm.
7.0
SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS 7.1 Security system software shall be developed and proven Commercial-Off-The-Shelf (COTS) software unless otherwise specified and shall allow the upgrade of the CPUs without changes in the operation of the software. The software shall use Graphics Interface techniques and menu selections to interact with the user. The system shall be capable of running third party software concurrently with the security system software.
7.2 7.3
7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.10
Man/machine interfaces shall be in English or French language text depending on the specific institution. The system shall provide a method by which a historical report may be backed up on floppy disk for storage and later recall. The report archive method shall ensure that no events are lost in the transfer from hard disk to the archive media. The disk space for the historical report shall be reclaimed for use in an oldest-first order. The system shall have the ability to maintain a historical report of changes made to the databases and record the date and time of the change. The system shall provide a means of archiving databases to a floppy disk for long term storage. Any future software revisions shall be backward compatible with previous software releases.
8.0 8.1
FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS Cell Lights and Power The following VDU display design shall be used for the cell lights and power control: 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 One screen touch-sensitive button for each cell. Each button will be labelled with a cell identification. The button shall be illuminated by a white light. Two indicators for each cell push button, one labelled 'light', the second labelled 'power'. One screen touch-sensitive button for each group of cells. The group shall be defined by lines enclosing the individual cell push buttons. This button shall also have 'light' and 'power' indicators. Individual cells shall be selected by pushing the appropriate screen touch-sensitive buttons; the buttons of the selected cells will be illuminated as they are selected. If a selected cell button is pressed again, the cell will be deselected, and the button illumination turned off. If a group cell button is depressed, it shall be illuminated. Any cells previously selected will be deselected, then all cells in the group will be selected. The group cell button shall be illuminated but the individual cell buttons in the selected group will not be illuminated.
8.1.4 8.1.5 8.1.6
8.1.7 8.1.8
A group may be deselected by pressing the screen touch-sensitive group button again; individual cells cannot be removed from a selected group. When the cell light buttons are pressed, the following actions shall be taken for lights in all selected cells: a. b. 'ON' 'OFF' all lights will be turned on. all lights will be turned off.
8.1.9
When the cell power buttons are pressed, the following actions shall be taken for power to all selected cells: a. b. 'ON' 'OFF' power will be turned on to all selected cells. power will be turned off to all selected cells.
8.1.10 The light and power buttons shall have no effect on unselected cells, they will remain in their previous state. 8.1.11 The screen touch-sensitive buttons for each cell shall be illuminated if the power or lights for that cell are in the 'ON' state. 8.2 Other Lighting Each set of lights to be controlled shall have a separate section on the VDU with the following controls: 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.3 One white screen touch-sensitive button, labelled 'OFF', and 'ON'. If a light dimmer is required, The touch-sensitive button shall have at 10 levels of control and the intensity shall have an approximately linear relationship with scale positions. 'Touching the screen touch-sensitive button turns the lights off or turns the lights on. It shall be illuminated if the lights are on. The dimmer setting shall be retained when the lights are turned off or on.
Cell Door Control A cell door control VDU display shall be used to control the locks as follows: 8.3.1 The control screen shall be arranged to have four colour coded touch screen-sensitive buttons for each cell labelled 'OPEN, CLOSE, GROUP and 'STOP', as well as two buttons labelled GROUP OPEN' and GROUP CLOSED.
8.3.2 8.3.3
The touch screen-sensitive buttons shall be arranged in a mimic format. They will be separated sufficiently to prevent accidental keying. The 'OPEN' touch screen-sensitive button shall unlock and open the associated cell door. The touch screen-sensitive button shall illuminate red, and remain illuminated as long as the cell remains unlocked. The OPEN button shall flash red while the cell door is not in a fully open position. The 'CLOSE' touch screen-sensitive button shall close and lock the associated cell door. The button shall illuminate green and remain illuminated as long as the cell remains closed and locked. The CLOSE button shall flash green while the cell door is not in a locked position. The GROUP touch screen-sensitive button will act as a toggle switch to select and deselect the cell doors to be included or excluded from the group-type action. The GROUP touch screen-sensitive button shall illuminate amber when the door has been selected to be included in the GROUP function. The GROUP CLOSE touch screen-sensitive button shall close and lock all group selected cells with the appropriate indications as outlined above. The GROUP OPEN touch screen-sensitive button shall unlock and open all group selected cells with the appropriate indications as outlined above. The STOP touch screen-sensitive button shall interrupt the closing or opening of the doors. When selected, the STOP button shall illuminate red
8.3.4
8.3.5
8.3.6 8.3.7 8.3.8 8.4
Other Doors The system may have to control doors other than cell doors; for example fire doors or doors between sections of the institution. The screen touch-sensitive VDU display control shall be designed in the same way as the cell control doors. There shall be a separate display or region on the display for each type of door controlled.
8.5
Movement Control Barriers Controls for control barriers shall be placed on a single touch-sensitive screen as follows: 8.5.1 For each barrier controlled, the screen touch-sensitive buttons, shall be labelled 'OPEN', 'STOP', and 'CLOSE'. The 'OPEN' and 'CLOSE' buttons shall have white illumination. The 'STOP' button shall have red illumination. The layout of the controls shall reflect the physical location of the barriers.
8.5.2
8.5.3
Pushing 'OPEN' shall open the associated barrier. The screen touch-sensitive button shall flash as the barrier opens, when it is fully open the button shall light continuously, and remain lit as long as the barrier is open. There shall be audible confirmation of the action. Pushing 'CLOSE' shall close the barrier. The screen touch-sensitive button shall flash as the barrier closes, when it is fully closed, the button shall light continuously, and remain lit as long as it is closed. There shall be audible confirmation at the start of the action. If the barrier is moving, then pushing the 'STOP' button shall immediately stop the motion. There shall be audible confirmation of the action. The light on the open or close button shall turn off, and the stop button shall light up and remain lit until the 'OPEN' or 'CLOSE' buttons are pressed, and motion resumes. If the barrier is not moving when the screen touch-sensitive stop button is pressed, no action shall be taken, the barrier shall remain in its previous state, and the button lights shall not change. There shall be an audible warning. If an attempt is made to open a barrier which is interlocked and unable to open, then an audible warning shall sound and no action shall be taken. If the interlock disable button is pressed, all interlocks shall be disabled, and all barriers may be opened. When the button is pressed, an audible warning shall sound and the button shall be illuminated. The interlock can be reenabled by pressing the disable button again, with the barriers in a legal position. There shall be an audible confirmation of this action. If the barriers are not in a legal position, there shall be an audible warning and no action shall occur.
8.5.4
8.5.5
8.5.6
8.5.7 8.5.8
8.5.9
8.6
Fire Alarms The system may monitor a number of fire alarms and shall be displayed on a single screen display as follows: 8.6.1 8.6.2 8.6.3 8.6.4 The display shall have a red light for each alarm. Each light shall be labelled with the identification of location of the associated alarm. If possible, the lights shall mimic the alarm placement in the institution. There shall be a single 'ACKNOWLEDGE' screen touch-sensitive button on the display, clearly separated from the indicator lights. When a fire alarm is activated, the associated red panel light shall start flashing and an audible alarm shall sound.
8.6.5 8.6.6 8.6.7 8.7
The operator acknowledges the alarm by pressing the 'ACKNOWLEDGE' screen touch sensitive button, the red light stops flashing and remains on and the audible alarm stops. The alarm must be reset from the site of the alarm, it cannot be reset from the console. If more than one alarm has been triggered, the acknowledge button shall acknowledge all alarms.
Mechanical Systems A number of mechanical systems, such as fans shall be controlled from a single screen display as follows: 8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3 8.7.4 Each system shall have a white screen touch-sensitive button, labelled 'ON. Each button shall be labelled showing the function of the controlled device. The device is turned on and off using the appropriate screen touch-sensitive buttons. If the device is in the 'ON' state, then the button shall be illuminated.
8.8
Inmate Call System Primary Annunciation Panel The inmate call system shall be monitored from a single screen display as follows: 8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3 8.8.4 8.8.5 8.8.6 8.8.7 8.8.8 There shall be one screen touch-sensitive button per cell, the "Cell Call" button, with split yellow and white illumination areas. There shall be one white screen touch-sensitive "ACKNOWLEDGE" button and one yellow "DISABLE" button. There shall be a "Push to Talk" (PTT) button. When an inmate activates his call button, the associated cell button shall start to flash, and there shall be a continuous audible annunciation. The operator shall acknowledge the call by pressing the "ACKNOWLEDGE" button. The audible annunciation shall stop, but light shall continue flashing. The operator can then listen to the inmate by pressing the call button. The light shall stop flashing and illuminate continuously. The operator can talk to the inmate by pressing the PTT button. When the call is finished the operator can cancel the call by pressing the associated touch-sensitive "CALL" button again. The light shall go off.
8.8.9
If a call has been triggered and not yet cancelled then triggering it again shall have no effect.
8.8.10 The operator can disable the call system for an inmate by pressing the "DISABLE" button and the cell button simultaneously. The yellow portion of the cell button shall light up and any calls shall be ignored. 8.8.11 Pressing the cell button and the "DISABLE" button a second time shall restore the call system to normal operation. 8.8.12 If the "DISABLE" and cell buttons are pressed while a call is being processed it shall disable the system from further calls, but shall not cancel the current call. 8.8.13 If an intercom is included in the system the operator can listen to any cell at any time by pressing the associated cell button. The button shall illuminate. Listening is stopped by pressing the button again. 8.8.14 If more than one cell call is triggered all calls shall be acknowledged by the "ACKNOWLEDGE" button. 8.9 Inmate Call System Secondary Annunciation Panel Back up monitoring for the ICS is provided by a secondary panel at another location. This display shall monitor zones, where each zone is controlled by one or more primary panels at a single location. 8.9.1 8.9.2 8.9.3 There shall be one illumination light with yellow and white illumination areas for each zone. There shall be one white 'ACKNOWLEDGE' button and one white 'TEST' button arranged. If a cell call is not acknowledged at the primary panel for a zone, then after a preset length of time, the secondary panel yellow 'CALL' light for that zone shall flash and there shall be an audible annunciation. The secondary panel operator can acknowledge the call by pressing the 'ACKNOWLEDGE' button. The audible annunciation shall stop and light shall illuminate steadily. The light shall be extinguished when the call is cancelled from the primary panel. If any cell calls in a zone are disabled, the white 'disabled' light on the corresponding secondary panel zone shall be illuminated.
8.9.4
8.9.5 8.9.6
10
8.10
FIXED POINT SECURITY ALARMS A number of Fixed Point Security Alarms (FPSA) may be monitored from a single display as follows: 8.10.1 Each FPSA location shall have a screen touch-sensitive red push button on the display. 8.10.2 Each button shall be labelled to indicate its location. 8.10.3 There shall be a screen touch-sensitive 'ACKNOWLEDGE' push button in the lower right-hand corner of the display. 8.10.4 When an FPSA is activated, the associated button on the panel shall start flashing and an audible alarm shall sound. 8.10.5 The operator responds by pressing the 'ACKNOWLEDGE' button. The light shall stop flashing and burn continuously and the audible alarm shall stop. 8.10.6 The FPSA can be reset by pressing the illuminated button; this shall turn off the light.
8.11
Facility Alarms The MCCP may be required to monitor a large number of alarms of various types, such as mechanical, fixed point alarms, and portable personal alarms. These can all be monitored from one VDU display. 8.11.1 The alarms shall be grouped by type. 8.11.2 Each alarm shall have an illuminated red push button on the screen. 8.11.3 Each screen touch-sensitive button shall be labelled to indicate the location of the alarm. 8.11.4 There shall be a screen touch-sensitive 'ACKNOWLEDGE' button in the lower right-hand corner of the screen. 8.11.5 When an alarm is triggered, the associated button shall start flashing and an audible alarm shall sound. 8.11.6 The operator responds by pressing the 'ACKNOWLEDGE' button. The light shall stop flashing and burn continuously and the audible alarm shall stop. 8.11.7 The alarm can be reset by pressing the illuminated button; this shall turn off the light, provided the alarm has also been reset at its origin if required.
11
RECORD OF REVISIONS Revision 3 Paragraph 10.1 Manuals and Drawings 10.4 Documentation Format Comment Added equipment operating software Added equipment operating software
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work
ES/SOW-0101 Revision 3 15 April 2004
TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 3 ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 5 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................ 6 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 7 1.1 Commercial-Off-The-Shelf Equipment ................................................................................ 7 1.2 Technical Acceptability........................................................................................................ 7 1.3 Equipment Procurement...................................................................................................... 8 1.4 Quantity of Equipment......................................................................................................... 8 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................... 9 REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................................... 10 SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT ............................................................................................................ 11 4.1 Preliminary Design ............................................................................................................ 11 4.2 Preliminary Design Review ............................................................................................... 12 4.3 Final Design ...................................................................................................................... 12 4.4 Final Design Review ......................................................................................................... 12 4.5 Design Change Control ..................................................................................................... 12 4.5.1 Type I. .................................................................................................................. 12 4.5.2 Type II .................................................................................................................. 13 4.6 Design Change Request (DCR) ........................................................................................ 13 4.7 In-Plant Testing ................................................................................................................. 13 SYSTEM INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................. 14 5.1 Schedule ........................................................................................................................... 14 5.2 On-Site Inspections ........................................................................................................... 14 5.3 On-Site Coordination......................................................................................................... 14 5.4 Facility Criteria................................................................................................................... 14 5.5 Installation Design ............................................................................................................. 14 5.6 Subcontractor Supervision ................................................................................................ 15 5.7 System Checkout .............................................................................................................. 15 5.8 As-Built Drawings .............................................................................................................. 15 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE............................................................................................................... 16 6.1 Acceptance Test Plans (ATPs) ......................................................................................... 16 6.2 System Testing.................................................................................................................. 16 6.3 Deficiency Lists (DL) ......................................................................................................... 16 6.4 Technical Acceptance ....................................................................................................... 16
2.0 3.0 4.0
5.0
6.0
7.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE (QA ......................................................................................................... 17 7.1 Quality Control Program.................................................................................................... 17 7.2 System Test Program........................................................................................................ 17 7.2.1 System Test Plan ................................................................................................. 17 7.2.2 Test Procedures. .................................................................................................. 17 7.2.3 Contractor Testing................................................................................................ 18 7.2.4 Test Reports......................................................................................................... 18 TRAINING ...................................................................................................................................... 19 8.1 Classroom Training ........................................................................................................... 19 8.2 Training Documentation .................................................................................................... 19 MAINTENANCE and SPARES ...................................................................................................... 20 9.1 Maintenance Plan.............................................................................................................. 20 9.2 Spares Plan....................................................................................................................... 20 9.3 Spares List ........................................................................................................................ 20 9.4 Test Equipment ................................................................................................................. 20 DOCUMENTATION........................................................................................................................ 21 10.1 Manuals and Drawings...................................................................................................... 21 10.2 List of Equipment............................................................................................................... 21 10.3 Baseline Measurements.................................................................................................... 21 10.4 Documentation Format...................................................................................................... 21 10.5 Operator Manuals.............................................................................................................. 22 10.6 Maintenance Manuals ....................................................................................................... 23 PROJECT PROVISIONS ............................................................................................................... 24 11.1 Monthly Progress Reports................................................................................................. 24 11.2 Monthly Review Meetings ................................................................................................. 24 11.3 Maintenance Support ........................................................................................................ 24 11.4 Shipment and Delivery ...................................................................................................... 25 SYSTEM AVAILABILITY................................................................................................................ 26 12.1 Common Facilities............................................................................................................. 26 12.2 Single Point of Failure ....................................................................................................... 26 12.3 Availability Model............................................................................................................... 26 12.4 Availability ......................................................................................................................... 26 12.5 Expected Life Duration ...................................................................................................... 27 INTERFERENCE ........................................................................................................................... 28 13.1 Interference to the System ................................................................................................ 28 13.2 Interference by the System ............................................................................................... 28 LIGHTNING PROTECTION ........................................................................................................... 29
8.0
9.0
10.0
11.0
12.0
13.0
14.0
ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: ATP CM COTS CSC DA DCR DES DL FDR MRT MTBF MTTR PDR PM PW&GSC QA RFP SOW STR Acceptance Test Plan Corrective Maintenance Commercial-Off-The-Shelf Correctional Service Canada Design Authority Design Change Request Director, Engineering Services Deficiency List Final Design Report Mean Response Time Mean Time Between Failures Mean Time To Repair Preliminary Design Report Preventative Maintenance Public Works & Government Services Canada Quality Assurance Request For Proposal Statement of Work Statement of Technical Requirement
DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Contractor Project Officer Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment Director, Engineering Services (DES) - Correctional Service Canada (CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Services Canada (PW&GSC) is responsible for all contractual matters associated with the system design and implementation. The company selected as the successful bidder. A CSC employee or a contracted person designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. Equipment currently on the market with available field reliability data, manuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract.
1.0
INTRODUCTION This Statement of Work (SOW) defines the work and responsibilities for the design, procurement, installation, test and integration of all telecommunications and electronic security equipment in CSC Institutions. The SOW provides guidelines, procedures and responsibilities to the contractor and/or the project officer for the implementation of all telecommunications and electronic security systems in CSC facilities. All work performed shall adhere to this SOW, CSC Specifications, Standards and Statement of Technical Requirements (STRs).
1.1
Commercial-Off-The-Shelf Equipment The contractor shall use commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) equipment and proven designs to the maximum extent possible. All new equipment shall meet the specified lifespan requirements. New equipment designs shall be restricted to unique interfaces and common control console.
1.2
Technical Acceptability The Correctional Service Canada (CSC) operational environment is unique for its diversity of locations, climate exposures and the physical restrictive construction techniques of penal institutions. Maintaining national security, the safety of staff and offenders alike is CSC's commitment to the government and public. Electronic security systems operating in this unique environment shall maintain very high standards of dependability and reliability. The CSC Engineering Services Division has established technical specifications and equipment standards for specific electronic security systems which are based on very specific and restrictive operational performance criteria as detailed in its Electronic Engineering Standard. Technical acceptability of these systems means that the equipment complies with the pertinent CSC specifications and standards. The technical acceptance process shall involve system and subsystem evaluation in accordance with the applicable CSC specifications in one of CSC facilities or may be tested in a CSC facility to verify the effectiveness of the proposed technologies when subjected to the restrictive operational environment.
CSC shall also verify in depth any of the system technical specifications called up. CSC may when it deems necessary, request the supplier to arrange for a full site demonstration. CSC may rely on manufacturer's test results for specific areas of the specification where an independent test facility has conducted the test, and the facility is deemed acceptable to CSC. It is the supplier's responsibility to make new developments in products available to CSC for evaluation. Equipment qualification is an ongoing process and can be initiated at any time by a vendor. Any vendor can have access to the CSC specifications and standards. Any new development or products should be submitted to the CSC Engineering Services Division, Technical Authority in a suitable time frame prior to any tendering process to allow for an acceptable evaluation period. The evaluation period may take up to sixteen (16) months. 1.3 Equipment Procurement Any ordering of equipment/material before the approval of the final design report will be undertaken at the contractor's own risk. The Design Authority may authorize the procurement of certain long lead items at, or shortly after the preliminary design review. 1.4 Quantity of Equipment The quantity and location of the equipment required for CSC institutions will be contained in the specification identified in the STR.
2.0
APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS CSC Specifications, Standards and STRs are approved by the Director of Engineering Services (DES) for the procurement and installation of all telecommunications and electronic security systems in all CSC facilities. These documents promulgate DES policy and shall not be modified or changed without prior consultation and approval of the Director. The documents of the issue in effect will form part of the Request for Proposal (RFP) issued by the contract authority.
3.0 3.1
REQUIREMENTS The contractor shall: a. Design, procure or manufacture, install, test and document the installation of all electronic security and telecommunications systems in accordance with the CSC specifications, standards and STR; Provide the operator and maintenance training in accordance with the CSC requirements; Provide the maintenance support and spares in accordance with the CSC maintenance requirements; Provide quality assurance (QA) to ensure equipment performance and reliability are in accordance to CSC requirements; Provide warranty coverage to include spare parts provision and equipment repair; Provide a program schedule to show all major elements from a contact award to completion of the warranty period and shall include anticipated time of occurrence, interrelationships between events, and time scale; and Be responsible for the integration of the proposed system to any existing telecommunications and electronic security systems. Provide a lightning protection system for the installation of all electronic security systems/equipment in the CSC facilities. As a minimum, surge suppression type lightning arrestors shall be required for all power, communications and antenna cables/wires entering or leaving a building.
b. c. d. e. f.
g. h.
10
4.0
SYSTEM DEVELOPMENT The contractor shall design systems and equipment to meet all of the requirements stipulated in the applicable CSC specifications. The system design shall be modular and address the following criteria: a. b. c. d. ease of operation and maintenance; optimize and concentrate control functions and capabilities; enhance the security of the working environment, extend staff capabilities to observe and control; and minimize the number and types of display and control devices.
4.1
Preliminary Design The preliminary design baseline shall be established by the review and approval of the preliminary design report (PDR) by the Design Authority (DA) or his designate. Specifications, drawings and the approved PDR shall make up the preliminary design baseline. The contractor shall prepare and submit two (2) copies of the PDR to the Design Authority and one (1) copy to the Contract Authority at least ten (10) days prior to the PDR meeting. The PDR shall consist of: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. performance specifications with functional block diagrams of the proposed system. The technical analysis and equipment performance data shall verify system requirements; preliminary equipment layouts including control consoles and racks; list of off-the-shelf equipment with part number, model number, manufacturer and the quantity of each item; list of custom designed equipment with model number and the quantity of each item; functional schematics for all custom designed equipment; conceptual drawings for all custom designed equipment; a proposed product assurance plan; a proposed maintenance plan;
11
I. j. 4.2
proposed sparing plan; and proposed training plan.
Preliminary Design Review The PDR meeting shall be convened by the contractor to review the PDR contents. The contractor shall provide the venue and all of the necessary facilities. The Design Authority will identify any portions of the PDR that are not acceptable to CSC.
4.3
Final Design The final design baseline shall be established by the review and approval of the Design Authority of the final design report (FDR). It establishes the start of change control in equipment design and performance. The FDR shall consist of: a. b. c. d. e. all elements of the preliminary design baseline; control console mockups, ergonomics considerations, etc., as necessary; drawings and operational descriptions for the custom designed equipment including interface specifications; Installation drawings and instructions; and availability model and analysis updates to reflect the final system design and hardware selection.
The FDR shall be prepared to good commercial practice. Two (2) copies shall be submitted to the Design Authority at least ten (10) working days before the FDR meeting. 4.4 Final Design Review The final design review meeting shall be convened to review the contents of the FDR. The contractor shall provide the venue and all of the necessary facilities. All of the contractor's staff responsible for the system/equipment engineering shall be available. 4.5 Design Change Control Design changes shall be in accordance with the following procedure: 4.5.1 Type I. Changes that affect cost, schedule, reliability, maintainability, or availability shall be submitted as a design change request (DCR).
12
Changes shall not be actioned until specifically directed in writing by the Design Authority through the Contract Authority. 4.5.2 Type II. Changes to correct a design error without affecting cost, schedule, reliability, maintainability, or availability shall not require a DCR. Changes shall be reported to the Design Authority and the final design baseline shall be updated by the contractor. The Design Authority will review and acknowledge the change. 4.6 Design Change Request (DCR) Type I changes shall be forwarded to the Design Authority through the Contract Authority on DCRs initiated by either the contractor or the Design Authority. DCRs shall be reviewed and approved before implementation and shall include: a. b. c. d. e. f. 4.7 specification requirement being effected; final design baseline element being changed; description of the design change; reason for the change; impact on cost, schedule, reliability, maintainability and availability; and trade-off recommendations.
In-Plant Testing Details of in-plant tests are contained in the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work. In-plant tests shall be performed according to the Design Authority approved procedures. Equipment with deficiencies as the result of the in-plant tests shall be subject to retest. The Design Authority reserves the right to add or modify tests.
13
5.0
SYSTEM INSTALLATION The contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that sufficient site utilities are available. No work will be permitted at the site before the approval of the Design Authority. All installation activities shall be conducted in accordance with ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work.
5.1
Schedule The contractor shall provide a detailed work schedule for the installation activities. This schedule shall reflect the complete implementation plan by identifying the nature of the work to be performed and the area affected.
5.2
On-Site Inspections Design Authority or an appointed CSC representative shall perform ongoing inspections of the contractor's activities. These inspections shall verify compliance with the project requirements, the quality of work performed and assess the contractor's progress in relation to the approved schedule. Installation deficiencies requiring corrective action will be brought immediately to the contractor's attention in writing.
5.3
On-Site Coordination Design Authority shall be responsible for the appointment of an on-site CSC representative. This representative will handle all site related manners and will periodically inspect the installation. When electronic system installations are part of a construction program or a major redevelopment that involves Public Works & Government Services of Canada, the electronic system installation contractor shall coordinate all activities with the relevant site manager and shall comply with this SOW.
5.4
Facility Criteria The contractor shall provide the facility criteria data in the proposal. Details as to the power, cooling, space and/or other requirements relating to electronic security system installation at the site must be provided. Final facility criteria information must be provided as part of the FDR.
5.5
Installation Design The system installation design and planning shall make maximum use of existing ducts, conduits, and other cable routing facilities. Where this is not possible, the contractor shall design and install facilities in a manner acceptable to the Design Authority.
14
5.6
Subcontractor Supervision The contractor shall provide an on-site supervision of all subcontractors. The subcontractors shall abide by the regulations of this Statement of Work and the conditions in the contract.
5.7
System Checkout Before conducting the formal on-site testing for the CSC acceptance, the contractor shall conduct and document a system checkout to assure the system readiness for formal testing and on-line operations. The test sheets used for the system checkout shall be signed by a company representative and provided to the Design Authority at least seven (7) days prior to the scheduled date of the Acceptance testing. The Design Authority will verify readiness through review of the checkout report. The report may be used as reference during the formal witnessed testing for acceptance.
5.8
As-Built Drawings Thirty (30) days after the system installation acceptance, the contractor shall deliver a complete set of equipment and installation as-built drawings for Design Authority's review and approval. Within thirty (30) days after CSC approval, two (2) complete sets of revised drawings shall be delivered to the Design Authority. The contractor shall update these drawings throughout the warranty period by the design control procedures. Within thirty (30) days of completion of the warranty period, the contractor shall deliver one (1) set of final revised drawings reflecting all changes to the Design Authority. Upon final CSC approval, the contractor shall deliver two (2) sets of original prints of the final drawings.
15
6.0
SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE System acceptance shall occur when the acceptance testing has been completed according to the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work and when all of the other requirements of the contract have been completed to the satisfaction of the Design Authority. A final acceptance certificate signed by the Design Authority shall certify the system acceptance. On-site system acceptance testing shall not begin until all of the on-site iInstallation activities have been completed.
6.1
Acceptance Test Plans (ATPs) The contractor shall provide ATPs for all system, subsystem and equipment tests for Design Authority review and approval. The requirements for the ATP are detailed in the ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work.
6.2
System Testing The contractor shall conduct the approved ATP and record the results. The Design Authority or an appointed CSC representative shall witness the tests.
6.3
Deficiency Lists (DL) The contractor shall prepare and submit a list of deficiencies divided into three categories: a. b. c. Visual/Mechanical, Operational, and Technical/Functional.
6.4
Technical Acceptance Upon verifying that all of the deficiencies have been corrected, the Design Authority shall issue a letter of Technical Acceptance.
16
7.0
QUALITY ASSURANCE (QA) The QA program shall include quality control and system tests/verification programs to verify that new design and off-the-shelf equipment requirements have been met. System tests/verification will be conducted by the contractor in-plant and on-site, and may be witnessed by the CSC representatives where appropriate. The system shall pass all tests before approval will be given to commence the operator and maintenance training programs and warranty period.
7.1
Quality Control Program The contractor shall provide a description of their internal quality control programs for CSC review and approval. CSC reserves the right to audit and verify that all materials destined for use in CSC systems have been thoroughly inspected and that QA procedures are applied during production and testing.
7.2
System Test Program The contractor shall prepare and provide the documents describing: number, type and details of equipment, subsystem and system tests for CSC review and approval. These documents must be approved before any formal testing and will consist of the following:
7.2.1
System Test Plan. This plan shall contain the test philosophy, the tests to be conducted, the pass-fail criteria, the retest requirements, and the instructions for the validation and the sign-off of all final design baseline requirements. Before witnessing these tests, the CSC representative will perform a visual and mechanical inspection to ensure that the system installation meets the requirements of ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work.
7.2.2
Test Procedures. These procedures shall ensure that: a. b. c. d. all equipment supplied meets the performance specification; each subsystem meets the applicable performance requirements; and the overall system meets the performance requirements. test procedure contains the step sequence for each test to be conducted, and the expected results.
17
7.2.3
Contractor Testing. All tests are conducted by the contractor and may be witnessed by an appointed CSC representative. Tests are conducted as stipulated in the approved plan and procedures. The contractor shall inform CSC at least five (5) working days before the test start date.
7.2.4
Test Reports. The contractor shall submit final copies of the test results for CSC review and approval within ten (10) working days of the completion of the testing. Two copies of the report shall be submitted and shall include: a. b. c. d. a summary description of the tests; test results consisting of completed test procedures verified by a CSC representative; incident reports, including analysis and corrective action; and results of any retest.
18
8.0
TRAINING The contractor shall develop, document and conduct training for both the operational and the technical staff. The training shall be conducted on-site at the institution in the period designated by the schedule.
8.1
Classroom Training Classroom lectures and demonstrations will be conducted on-site to train operations staff in the use and technical personnel in the maintenance of the systems.
8.2
Training Documentation The contractor shall develop and deliver a complete training plan to the Design Authority for comments and approval. This plan must be submitted to CSC at least thirty (30) days in advance of the training date to allow for CSC review. As a minimum, the training material shall contain: a. b. c. d. training plans for CSC operations trainers and technical personnel; manuals for each student to add notes; training aids; and student materials.
Training material shall be provided in the language that is dominant at the site (French in Quebec). Sufficient copies of all student materials shall be provided by the contractor at the beginning of the training course to assure one copy for each student. CSC shall stipulate the number of staffs who are to be trained. Upon approval by the Design Authority, two (2) copies of all material shall be delivered to CSC.
19
9.0
MAINTENANCE and SPARES The contractor shall provide maintenance and spares support plans according to the ES/SOW0102, Statement of Work for the Design Authority approval. These plans shall be submitted according to the schedule.
9.1
Maintenance Plan The maintenance plan shall describe the philosophy, the Preventive Maintenance (PM) procedures and schedules, the Corrective Maintenance (CM) methods and response times, Mean-Time-To-Repair (MTTR) for all systems. The plan shall recommend tools, jigs and test equipment, and detail the recommended manning method for the system. Issue of the final maintenance support plan will be contingent on Design Authority approval.
9.2
Spares Plan The spares plan shall list the required spares and recommended quantities. The quantity recommendations shall be supported by system availability and reliability analysis and available experience data. The bidder shall identify spare parts and components by their original manufacturer's code, cross-referenced to the equipment vendor's part number.
9.3
Spares List The spares list shall identify the following: a. b. c. d. the spare parts and the subassemblies with the recommended quantities; the cross-reference listings between the vendors and the original manufacturer's codes; the unit and extended prices for stocking; and the expected life or the annual consumption of each part.
The contractor shall maintain the spares plan through to the end of the warranty period, and shall ensure that any changes because of approved design changes are incorporated in the spares list. 9.4 Test Equipment The contractor shall provide a list of test equipment required for the on-site maintenance of the system within thirty (30) days from Design Authority's acceptance of the final design.
20
10.0
DOCUMENTATION All final documentation in hard-copy format shall be in a 3-ring binder with all foldout pages having reinforced ring holes.
10.1
Manuals and Drawings The following items make up the final documentation requirements: a. b. c. d. e. Operator Manual, Maintenance Manual, Installation As-built Drawings, Equipment As-built Drawings, and Equipment Operating Software.
The contractor shall prepare and submit all manuals and drawings to the Design Authority for review and approval. The manuals and drawings will be approved when all changes have been satisfactorily incorporated. All drawings must be produced with AUTOCAD (latest available version) 10.2 List of Equipment The contractor shall provide a list of equipment itemizing the location, quantity, model number, serial number and revision level of all installed equipment. 10.3 Baseline Measurements The contractor shall provide a copy of the final test results. These results will be used as a reference baseline measurement for monitoring system degradation over time. 10.4 Documentation Format All manuals, documentation including as-built drawings, lists of equipment and baseline measurements shall be submitted as per the following schedule: One (1) hard-copy version of all documentation. One (1) electronic version of all documentation in a read-only format on a 3 inch diskette medium; suitable for duplication without any special requirements.
21
10.5
One (1) electronic version of all documentation in a full read-write format to serve as a master of the documents and drawings. all software requirements to access the electronic versions of the documentation. One (1) CD containing the equipment operating software.
Operator Manuals The contractor shall provide CSC approved manuals to support the operation of the system in the format as outlined in section 10.4 of this specification. These manuals shall be prepared to the best commercial standards. Photo copies shall not be accepted. All hard-copy versions shall be on paper stock 8 " x 11" and shall be presented in a 3-ring binder. The manuals shall comply with the following format and content requirements: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. title page; revision notice page, lined, with columns for revision numbers, dates and initials; table of contents; warnings and cautions; introduction - general information including a description of equipment or system and summary of capabilities; theory of operation including an explanation of all major system components; detailed description and use of all user accessible computer screens; and block diagrams.
A hard copy draft version of the manual(s) shall be submitted for CSC approval on or before the date given in the schedule. Upon acceptance and approval by the Design Authority, a total of two copies shall be provided for use during the warranty period. The contractor shall update these manuals through the warranty period and provide revision bulletins to record manufacturers' recommended modifications, etc. during the life of the equipment. Within thirty (30) days of the warranty expiry date the contractor shall submit one (1) set of final, updated manuals for CSC approval. Following the final CSC approval, the required number of sets of operator manuals shall be delivered to the Design Authority in the format as specified in section 10.4 of this Statement of Work.
22
10.6
Maintenance Manuals The contractor shall provide CSC approved manuals to support the maintenance of the system in the format as outlined in section 10.4 of this specification. These manuals shall be prepared to the best commercial standards. Photo copies shall not be accepted. All hard-copy versions shall be on paper stock 8 " x 11" and shall be presented in a 3-ring binder. The manuals shall comply with the following format and content requirements: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. I. j. k. l. m. title page; warranty page - explaining the warranty period and expiry dates; revision notice page, lined, with columns for revision numbers, dates and initials; table of contents; introduction - general information including a full description of equipment or system, technical summary, specifications and detailed block diagrams; theory of operation including a detailed explanation of all circuits and parts; alignment and test procedures; repair procedures including step by step fault finding or fault localizing; block diagrams; circuit schematics (clear, easy to read, foldout type); complete parts list; mechanical drawings, chassis layout illustrations and wiring data lists; and drawings including as-built and as-installed drawings.
A hard copy draft version of the manual(s) shall be submitted for CSC approval on or before the date given in the schedule. Upon acceptance and approval by the Design Authority, a total of two copies shall be provided for use during the warranty period. The contractor shall update these manuals through the warranty period and provide revision bulletins to record manufacturers' recommended modifications, etc. during the life of the equipment.
23
Within thirty (30) days of the warranty expiry date the contractor shall submit one (1) set of final, updated manuals for CSC approval. Following the final CSC approval, the required number of sets of maintenance manuals shall be delivered to the Design Authority in the format as specified in section 10.4 of this Statement of Work. 11.0 11.1 PROJECT PROVISIONS Monthly Progress Reports The contractor shall submit monthly progress reports. These reports shall report the activities for the previous period. One (1) copy shall be delivered to the Design Authority and one (1) copy to the Contract Authority by the fifth (5th) day of each month. A review meeting may be required. Monthly reports shall contain the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. 11.2 summary of the month's activities; scheduled shortfalls and rescheduled dates; problem areas and proposed solutions; review of next month's activities; summary of meetings held during the month; and cash flow forecast.
Monthly Review Meetings Review meetings shall be held at the contractor's premises, Design Authority's office, Contract Authority's office, or the site depending on the need. The contractor shall make the design staff members available upon request by the Design Authority.
11.3
Maintenance Support During the training period, the contractor shall provide maintenance support. This support is expected to be not less than on-site coverage during the normal working day.
24
11.4
Shipment and Delivery Contractor shall be responsible for the shipment and delivery of equipment and materials to the site. Packing, crating, and shipment of equipment shall be to good commercial practice, and any damage to, or loss of equipment shall be repaired or replaced to the satisfaction of CSC. The contractor must properly label all shipments to assure correct identification and disposition on arrival at the site, as specified in ES/SOW-0102, Statement of Work.
25
12.0
SYSTEM AVAILABILITY All elements of customed and off-the-shelf equipment shall be designed to operate in a highly reliable fashion, consistent with available technology, with a minimum of system downtime due to scheduled and unscheduled maintenance. System availability will be achieved when each of the included subsystems availabilities have been proved as required.
12.1
Common Facilities Where units or subsystems are integrated into common facilities no single failure of a component, assembly subassembly, or subsystem shall result in the failure of any other subsystem; nor result in reduced capacity or quality of performance of other subsystems or parts of it.
12.2
Single Point of Failure The system shall be designed such that no failure of a single component, unit, subassembly or subsystem will result in failure of the next higher hierarchical elements of that subsystem or the system.
12.3
Availability Model The bidder's technical proposal shall include a complete model and analysis of the availability of each subsystem and of the complete system being offered. This analysis shall include both MTBF and MTTR calculations and shall treat the Mean-Response-Time (MRT) as zero. This availability analysis may be based on either: a. b. summation of failure rates of the individual components; or the bidder's documented experience with the same equipment operating in a similar physical environment.
In either case, the source of all failure-rate shall be clearly shown. The contractor shall maintain the availability model and analysis up-to-date throughout the contract period. A statement of impact of the proposed change would have on the availability model and analysis shall be submitted with all Type I DCRs. 12.4 Availability Availability is the probability that the system, or subsystem will meet operational performance requirements at all time. Time includes the operating time, the active repair time and the administrative and logistic time. To calculate this availability, the contractor must include all of the pertinent factors such as:
26
12.4.1 Mean Time Between Failure (MTBF). The total operating time of the equipment divided by the total number of failures of that equipment. 12.4.2 Mean Time To Repair (MTTR). The repair time divided by the number of failures. 12.4.3 Mean Response Time (MRT). The time to respond to a call for service divided by the number of calls. 12.5 Expected Life Duration This is the time during which the equipment is expected to provide useful service, without an unusual amount of service and without becoming obsolete.
27
13.0 13.1
INTERFERENCE Interference to the System Performance of the system shall not be affected by the use of standard electronic equipment used at the institution. Distance limits of standard electronic equipment are as follows:
13.1.1 CB transceivers at 1 metre or more; 13.1.2 VHF and UHF transceivers at 1 metre or more; 13.1.3 Other radio frequency transmitting, receiving and re-distribution equipment at 5 metres or more; and 13.1.4 Personal computer and/or computer work stations at 5 metres or more. 13.2 Interference by the System The system shall not interfere with any standard electronic equipment used at the institution, any commercial TV or radio equipment at a minimum distance of 5 metres, or any other electronic security systems at a distance of 1 metre or more.
28
14.0
LIGHTNING PROTECTION Surge suppression-type lightning arrestors shall be installed to protect all power, communications and antenna cables or wires entering or leaving a building. These arrestors must be installed where the cable enters the building i.e. not in the CER or other equipment room.
29
RECORD OF REVISIONS Revision 3 4 Paragraph 5.1 - Design Considerations 3.1.1 - Wiring/Cabling Methods 3.2.1 - AC Wiring 3.2.2 - AC Power Connections 5 Abbreviations 1.4 Manufactured Equipment 1.5 Commonality of Equipment 3.1.1 Wiring and cabling 3.1.2 Cable/Wiring Labelling 3.2.1 AC Wiring 3.3.4 - Labelling 5.1 Design Considerations Comment Tabletop or wall mount power supplies/transformers Wiring/cable access Power outlet strip Separate circuit breakers connected to opposite phases of the AC feed Power connections via flexible armoured cable Additions Approval of custom equipment Add security screws Single conductor wire only on IDC connectors Identification of conductors Acceptable labelling Mounting of power strips Acceptable labelling of racks, boxes, etc. DIN rail power supplies preferred
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work TABLE OF CONTENTS
ES/SOW-0102 Revision 5 1 June, 2005
TABLE OF CONTENTS ................................................................................................................................ 3 ABBREVIATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 5 DEFINITIONS................................................................................................................................................ 6 APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS ........................................................................................................................ 7 1.0 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 8 1.1 General................................................................................................................................ 8 1.2 Scope .................................................................................................................................. 8 1.3 Off-The-Shelf Equipment..................................................................................................... 8 1.4 Manufactured Equipment .................................................................................................... 8 1.5 Commonality of Equipment ................................................................................................. 8 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................... 9 2.1 Environmental Conditions ................................................................................................... 9 2.2 Materials.............................................................................................................................. 9 2.2.1 Metals..................................................................................................................... 9 2.2.2 Plastic................................................................................................................... 10 2.2.3 Natural Rubber ..................................................................................................... 10 2.2.4 Wood .................................................................................................................... 10 2.3 Toxic Materials .................................................................................................................. 10 2.4 Flammable Materials ......................................................................................................... 10 2.5 Fungus and Insect Supporting Materials........................................................................... 10 2.6 Finish Application .............................................................................................................. 10 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................ 11 3.1 Wiring and Cabling ............................................................................................................ 11 3.1.1 Wiring/Cabling Methods ....................................................................................... 11 3.1.2 Cable/Wiring Labelling ......................................................................................... 12 3.1.3 Exterior Cabling.................................................................................................... 12 3.1.4 Slack .................................................................................................................... 13 3.1.5 Terminations ........................................................................................................ 13 3.1.6 Splicing and Joining ............................................................................................. 14 3.1.7 Shielding .............................................................................................................. 14 3.1.8 Protection ............................................................................................................. 15 3.1.9 Support................................................................................................................. 15 3.1.10 Clearance ............................................................................................................. 15 3.1.11 Inductive and Capacitive Effects .......................................................................... 15 3.2 Power Wiring ..................................................................................................................... 15 3.2.1 AC Wiring ............................................................................................................. 16 3.2.2 AC Power Connections ........................................................................................ 16
2.0
3.0
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 3.3
3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 4.0
Conduits, Enclosures, Cable Troughs and Raceways ...................................................... 16 3.3.1 Conduits ............................................................................................................... 16 3.3.2 Enclosures ........................................................................................................... 17 3.3.3 Cable Troughs and Raceways ............................................................................. 18 3.3.4 Labelling ............................................................................................................... 18 Soldering ........................................................................................................................... 19 Welding ............................................................................................................................. 19 Crimping ............................................................................................................................ 20 Cleaning ............................................................................................................................ 20
GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS................................................................................................... 21 4.1 General.............................................................................................................................. 21 4.2 Signal Ground ................................................................................................................... 21 4.3 Frame Ground ................................................................................................................... 22 4.4 Combined Signal and Frame Ground................................................................................ 22 4.5 Main Ground Connection Point ......................................................................................... 22 4.6 Ground to Chassis............................................................................................................. 22 4.7 Shielding............................................................................................................................ 23 4.8 Lightning Protection........................................................................................................... 23 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS............................................................ 24 5.1 Design Considerations ...................................................................................................... 24 5.2 Assemblies ........................................................................................................................ 24 5.3 Printed Circuit Board (PCB ............................................................................................... 25 5.4 Components ...................................................................................................................... 25 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS .................................................................................. 26 6.1 In-plant Inspection ............................................................................................................. 26 6.2 Test Equipment ................................................................................................................. 27 6.3 Calibration ......................................................................................................................... 27 6.4 Safety Design Aspects ...................................................................................................... 28 ON-SITE INSTALLATION .............................................................................................................. 29 7.1 Inspections ........................................................................................................................ 29 7.2 Damage to Government Property ..................................................................................... 29 7.3 Protection of Surfaces ....................................................................................................... 29 7.4 Cutting, Patching and Digging........................................................................................... 30 7.5 Visual-Mechanical Inspection............................................................................................ 30 7.6 Final System Acceptance.................................................................................................. 31 7.7 On-Site Maintenance......................................................................................................... 32 DELIVERY...................................................................................................................................... 33 8.1 Packaging.......................................................................................................................... 33
5.0
6.0
7.0
8.0
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work ABBREVIATIONS The following abbreviations are used in this specification: AC ATP BER CER COTS CSC CSA DC DA DES EIA EMT IDC ISO PCB PVC QA RFP STR Alternating Current Acceptance Test Procedure
Beyond economical repair (repair cost in excess of 60% of replacement cost) Common Equipment Room Commercial -of-the-Shelf Correctional Service Canada Canadian Standards Association Direct Current Design Authority Director, Engineering Services Electronic Industries Association Electrical Metallic Tubing Insulation Displacement Connector International Standards Organization Printed Circuit Board Polyvinyl Chloride Quality Assurance Request For Proposal Statement of Technical Requirements
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work DEFINITIONS The following definitions are used in this specification: Design Authority Contract Authority Project Manager Project Officer Contractor Off-the-shelf Custom Equipment
Director, Engineering Services (DES), Correctional Service Canada (CSC) is responsible for all technical aspects of the system design and implementation. Public Works and Government Service Canada (PWGSC). Public Works and Government Services Canada (PWGSC) designated by DES to be responsible for the implementation of the project. A CSC employee and/or a contracted person designated by DES to provide technical and/or engineering services in support of the project. The company selected as the successful bidder. Equipment which is commercially, complete with field reliability data, manuals, engineering drawings and parts price list. Equipment designed and/or manufactured specifically for a specific contract.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work APPLICABLE DOCUMENTS
The following documents of the issue in effect on the date of the Request For Proposal (RFP) shall form a part of the specification to the extent specified herein. CSA STANDARD C22.1-1986 EIA STANDARD EIA-310-D CSA STANDARD C22.2 EIA RS-406/IPC-C--405A Canadian Electrical Code - Part 1 Safety Standard for Electrical Installations Racks, Panels and Associated Equipment Canadian Electrical Code - Part II Connectors, Electric, Printed Wiring Boards
Any other applicable industrial safety and control standards governing specific aspects for equipment and/or installations.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 1.0 1.1 INTRODUCTION General
This document defines the quality control requirements for the design, installation, testing and acceptance of telecommunications and electronic security systems in all Correctional Service Canada (CSC) facilities. 1.2 Scope This specification has been developed to ensure high standards for the installation of electronic systems. It defines workmanship standards which may not be fully covered in subsidiary specifications. All contractor's documentation and installation procedures shall meet this specification for equipment reliability, maintainability, longevity, appearance and operational use. 1.3 Off-The-Shelf Equipment The contractor shall provide commercial off-the-shelf (COTS) equipment wherever possible. COTS equipment shall meet or exceed the manufacturing standards as listed in this specification. 1.4 Manufactured Equipment Where COTS equipment is unavailable or unsuitable for a specific application, the contractor may manufacture or arrange for the manufacturing of a particular item to suit the requirements. Manufactured equipment shall meet or exceed the best commercial equipment manufacturing standards. Approval of the final design, appearance and ergonomics of all custom manufactured equipment shall rest with the DES, Project Manager or CSC delegate. 1.5 Commonality of Equipment The contractor shall provide commonality of hardware components within the design parameters ie. switch locks, racks, panels, security screws, etc. All equipment, if appropriate shall be interchangeable.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 2.0 2.1 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS Environmental Conditions
All materials and equipment which is used in CSC installations shall be equal to, or better than the standards established in the original equipment and shall be chosen with due consideration being given to the intended use, safety, retention of appearance, maintainability and durability under rugged operating conditions. These materials shall be suitable to perform over the following environmental ranges: a. Indoor Equipment Temperature: Humidity: b. 0 C to 40 C; and 20% to 95% non-condensing.
Outdoor Equipment Temperature: Humidity: -40 C to +50 C; and 0 to 100%, condensing.
Outdoor equipment shall operate reliably and not be damaged by combinations of direct exposure to the sun, wind, rain, lightning, hail, snow and ice as may be expected to occur at each institution location. Complete assemblies of indoor equipment shall be resistant to liquid spills, airborne contaminants, shock and vibration. 2.2 2.2.1 Materials Metals Metals used shall be either corrosion resistant or be suitably treated to resist corrosion in all potential atmospheric conditions, including tear gas, to which the installation may be subjected. For the connection of copper to a cadmium or galvanized surface, effective "wiping" of the copper surface shall be considered satisfactory protection. No cut galvanized fitting shall be used without protection equal to or greater than the original galvanized surface. All parts shall be free from burrs and sharp edges. Metal which has been cut, scraped, or drilled shall be properly treated (primed and painted) to retain a uniform appearance.
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 2.2.2 Plastic
Plastic materials must be stable and shall retain their original shape and finish over the range of operating environmental conditions specified in 2.1 No material shall be used that softens or hardens within the storage environment in a way which is detrimental to its suitability as replacement parts for existing equipment. Metal screws shall not be threaded into plastic materials. Only plastic materials with good electrical and mechanical properties shall be used. 2.2.3 Natural Rubber The use of natural rubber is prohibited. 2.2.4 Wood The use of wood or wood products is not acceptable. 2.3 Toxic Materials Materials capable of producing harmful toxic effects under any operating condition, equipment malfunction, or accidental cause shall not be used. 2.4 Flammable Materials Materials, used either for electrical insulation or mechanical purposes which are combustible or capable of causing an explosion, shall not be used. 2.5 Fungus and Insect Supporting Materials Materials capable of providing a nutrient medium for fungus or insects shall not be used. 2.6 Finish Application Finish shall be applied to all surfaces where consideration of appearance and protection against corrosion, toxicity, and other deterioration exists. Application of finish shall not impair equipment performance, and will maintain uniformity in outward appearance. Finish materials must be durable and applied so as to last at least ten years.
10
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 3.0 3.1 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS Wiring and Cabling
Prior to the installation, all wires and cables shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall meet all performance parameters. Wire and cable harnesses shall be neatly formed and clamped in position. If brackets, forms or clamps are required, these shall be the responsibility of the contractor. All wires and cables shall be stranded. Single conductor type wires are not acceptable except when such cables are specified to terminate on an IDC type connector. This does not apply to coaxial cables with single centre conductors. Electrical tape, masking tape, or its equivalent shall not be used on wires, cables or any installed equipment. 3.1.1 Wiring/Cabling Methods Three (3) or more individual wires or cables which are located in one(1) cable run shall be formed into a cable harness, properly dressed, supported and securely tied with flat lacing twine or equivalent. Wires and cables which are installed by the contractor external to consoles, equipment racks, pull boxes and junction boxes shall be contained in securely mounted conduit or cable tray systems. Plastic PVC conduits may be used in underground installations unless otherwise specified at time of bidder's conference. A rigid steel conduit shall be used in indoor, security sensitive areas and outdoor above-ground applications. Signal and 120 VAC power wiring shall not be run in the same conduit, cable tray, or raceway; and shall be separated in accordance with the local Hydro codes. Wire splicing in cable runs shall not be permitted. All cable runs shall be continuous. If continuous cable runs are not possible, terminal block configurations are acceptable provided they are approved by the Design Authority. Cross-connects installed on BIX. or similar blocks, must not pass across the face of the block, but must be carried around the block, so as not to impede access to the connections. BIX, or similar, blocks are to be used for solid wire only. Stranded wires are not to be directly terminated on BIX, or other IDC terminations.
11
Wires in multi-conductor cables which terminate on connectors, and which are not being used, must be twisted around the cable in a neat fashion. They are not to be cut off. Wires in multi-conductor cables which terminate on BIX or similar IDC connector blocks, and which are not being used, must be punched down on the block. They are not to be cut off. All conductors on IDC and any other type of terminal block will be identified with a cable marker and cross referenced in the as-built drawings. Rectangular slots shall be cut in the computer floor, underneath any cabinets, racks, and consoles, for the running of cables. These slots must constitute at least 1/2 of the available floor area. Sharp edges on the computer floor shall be supplied with suitable protection to eliminate possible nicks, tears or wear in cable insulation sheaths. Individually drilled holes for the purpose of carrying cables from the under floor to the inside of the cabinet, rack or enclosure are not permitted. 3.1.2 Cable/Wiring Labelling The contractor shall label all cables and cable runs. The labelling method shall be logical and conform to industry standards. All cables shall be identified with commercially produced or machine printed alpha numeric labels protected by clear heat shrink tubing. Hand printed labels are not acceptable. All wiring shall be identified at both ends of the wire. The coding shall enable a technician to identify the wire or cable without referring to manual tracing methods, test equipment or as-built drawings. Cable identification labels shall be attached as follows: a. b. within 30 cm of the termination for both ends. in the middle of any access point, i.e. pull box, wall shaft opening, cable tray, etc.
All individual wires shall be labelled according to a cable numbering system or wire function plan, which is acceptable to the Design Authority. All terminal strips shall be identified with its own unique terminal number and function. 3.1.3 Exterior Cabling Where a cable enters or exits an exterior box, chassis, or conduit, the cable entrance shall be completely sealed to prevent an influx of water. A drip loop shall be formed in the cable to assist in maintaining this weather tight seal.
12
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work Conduit bushings shall be used on all conduit entrances/exits.
Sharp edges on metal boxes or chassis enclosures shall be supplied with suitable protection to eliminate possible nicks, tears or wear in cable insulation sheaths. 3.1.4 Slack Wires and cables shall be as short as practical, with sufficient slack to: a. b. c. d. e. allow a minimum of three (3) reconnects due to wire breakage; prevent undue stress on cable forms, wires, terminals and connections; enable parts to be removed and replaced during servicing without disconnecting adjoining wires or circuits; facilitate movement of equipment for maintenance purposes; and provide drip loops in exterior cabling.
Slack shall be provided in junction boxes where space permits. Slack shall not exceed one single loop of cable forming the circumference of the junction box. Slack shall be provided below equipment racks and shall be neatly coiled below the access flooring. The length of slack shall be equal to the height of the associated equipment rack. Units in drawers and slide out racks shall be provided with sufficient slack to permit removing the units without severing connections. All cross connection wiring shall be neat and tidy, properly bundled, and tied. This procedure shall allow sufficient slack for tracing of individual wires via manual methods. Parts mounted on a hinged door shall be wired by means of a single cable, and arranged to flex without being damaged by the opening and closing of a door. If physical separation between wires is essential so as to make a single cable impractical, more than one flexible cable may be utilized. 3.1.5 Terminations All terminations relying on friction for electrical and mechanical connection shall be tested in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and shall meet the performance requirements detailed therein. Terminal fanning strips shall be used where a number of wires are contained in a harness, shall be used unless a multi-pin connector is provided.
13
Spade terminal lugs shall be used on all wiring, connections to screw-thread terminals, except where solder or other type of terminal is specified. Where wires are connected to lugs, which are clamped under screw terminals in the form of a terminal connection strip, no more than one wire shall be attached to each lug, in order that each wire may be removed individually. This requirement will not apply in the case of common connections, daisy chain distribution circuits, or similar terminations where wires will not need to be disconnected for servicing. No more than two (2) lugs shall be attached to each terminal. Wire and cable insulation shall be stripped back to allow for proper connection to the lug. No bare wire shall be visible between the terminal lug and the insulator. Terminal strips must be fastened to a hard surface using a screw, or nut and bolt. Adhesive supports to secure the terminal strip, or floating terminal strips are not acceptable. 3.1.6 Splicing and Joining Splicing of wires on new installations is not permitted. Where connectors are used on cable assemblies, they shall be a locking type which will not disengage under tension. All joints or splices in underground cable runs shall be located inside accessible, secure, waterproof, and lockable steel enclosures. The enclosures shall be located at least one (1) metre above grade and be firmly secured to existing structures or to stub pole supports. Splices in underground cable runs, if required to repair Crown caused damage, shall be subject to approval from the Design Authority. Stranded conductor splices shall be held by wire binding terminals in order to prevent stray strands from causing either short circuits or grounds. Joints and splices shall be soldered and encased in waterproof shrink tubing for protection against leaching, oxidization, moisture damage, etc. Joints and splices shall be clearly and accurately identified on applicable as-built drawings. 3.1.7 Shielding Shielding shall be secured on wires and cables to prevent accidental contacting or shorting exposed current-carrying parts, grounded metal objects, or structures.
14
Shielding shall terminate at sufficient distance from the exposed conductors of the cable to prevent shorting or arcing between the cable conductor and the shielding. Ends of the shielding material shall be secured against fraying. 3.1.8 Protection Wires and cables shall be strategically located and protected to avoid contact with rough, irregular surfaces or sharp edges. Wires and cables shall be protected by suitable grommets or bushings when passing through openings in metal. Guards or other suitable protection shall be provided on insulated high voltage cables. 3.1.9 Support Wires and cables shall be properly supported with adequate strain relief to prevent excessive strain on the connections, devices, or joints of any electrical apparatus connected therein. Adhesive supports with ty-wrap products shall not be used unless they are secured by a nut and bolt device. 3.1.10 Clearance Physical clearance between wires/cables and associated heat emitting parts, i.e. amplifiers, shall be sufficient to prevent deterioration of the wires or cables. Refer to Table 19 of CSA Standard C22.1 Part 1. 3.1.11 Inductive and Capacitive Effects Wires and cables, including harness wire and cables, shall be located such that inductive and capacitive effects do not adversely affect system operation. The amount of twists in paired wires shall be increased over the length of wire not covered by the cable sheath. 3.2 Power Wiring The contractor shall not employ "Marette" (TM) type connectors regardless of CSA Standard C22.1 regulations. All wiring shall terminate on an insulated or protected barrier strip or terminal board, and be provided with spade terminal lugs where required.
15
Where control and signal wires which are run in conduit, cable-harness, or cable-trough systems, shall be run in separate wire ways. The separation shall be a physical barrier of suitable material and shall conform to applicable building codes and wiring methods. All high voltage and/or high current terminations shall be provided with protective guard devices by the contractor. The device shall be mounted to allow for maintenance access to the terminals. Terminal lugs shall be used on all power wiring, both VAC and VDC. Warning labels must be installed in accordance with the CSA guidelines to warn maintenance personnel of any hazardous voltages and currents. 3.2.1 AC Wiring AC wiring methods shall conform to all local and national wiring regulations. Outlet boxes shall be installed such that all outlets are clear of any obstructions including wiring and cabling, and shall be easily accessible. Power distribution within a cabinet or rack shall be via a power outlet strip, as provided by the original cabinet or rack manufacturer. A third party outlet strip is not acceptable. All power strips must be mounted into the equipment cabinet with rack mounting hardware. All power cable installations shall be completed in a neat and sturdy fashion and shall meet all requirements of the specifications detailed herein. Power cords within equipment cabinets and racks shall be maintained as short as practicable with due consideration for maintenance needs. Systems which use redundant equipment, such as dual microprocessors, shall power each unit from two separate breakers connected to opposite phases of the AC feed. 3.2.2 AC Power Connections All AC power connections from the cabinet or rack power outlet strip to the AC junction box shall be via flexible armoured cable. AC power connectors are not permitted. 3.3 3.3.1 Conduits, Enclosures, Cable Troughs and Raceways Conduits Conduits installed above ground, and accessible to the inmate population, shall be rigid steel. Metal conduits installed in secure and inmate accessible areas shall be fitted with double the normal quantity of support hangars.
16
In locations subject to extreme temperature changes, and/or where conduit lengths are of nonstandard size, the contractor shall make provisions for the inclusion of conduit expansion joints. Rigid PVC conduits shall be used only in buried applications. Rigid PVC conduits shall not be threaded, but may be used with approved adapters and couplings applied in a manner consistent with industry standards. EMT conduit may be used in administrative areas, and locations which are not normally assessable to the inmate population. Liquid-tight flexible metal conduits may be used where a flexible connection is required, i.e. cameras, microwave dishes, etc. In such applications, the length of "flex" conduit shall not exceed one (1) metre. PVC conduits which cross roadways shall be encased in poured concrete. The contractor shall provide a suitable means of protecting the buried conduit against damage caused by digging or excavating. The preferred method is installing a tape marker directly above the conduit path. In addition to these requirements, the applicable industrial standards apply, including: a. b. 3.3.2 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 45-M1981 - Rigid Metal Conduit CSA Standard C22.2 No. 56-1977 - Flexible Metal Conduit
Enclosures All electrical connections, terminations, and cross connections shall be made within lockable, covered steel enclosures, using good quality locks. At least two keys must be supplied to CSC. Outdoor enclosures shall be environmentally sealed and gasketed to provide a moisture/dust free and secure environment. Enclosures which contain electrical equipment such as circuit breakers, relays, switches, and transformers, or cable networks, connections and terminations, shall be weatherproof and dusttight. All enclosures such as junction boxes, racks and consoles shall be positioned for ease of maintenance, service, and connection/disconnection of cables and cable harnesses. The contractor shall provide a proper drain hole in all enclosures which are grouted in concrete.
17
All floor mounted cabinets, racks, and consoles shall be secured to prevent overturning when associated drawers, shelves and movable parts are extended, or when heavy objects are placed on pull out shelves or writing tables. In addition to the provisions stated herein, the applicable industrial standards shall apply, including: a. b. 3.3.3 CSA Standard C22.2 No. 29-M1983 for Industrial Products. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 94-1976 for Special Purpose Enclosures.
Cable Troughs and Raceways Cable troughs and raceways shall be continuous and shall be constructed of metal. The contractor shall provide adequate mounting devices which will permit the use of fastening devices that will not damage conductor insulation. Cable troughs, raceways, and fittings shall be free from burrs or other sharp edges which may cause damage to the cable or insulated conductors. Cable troughs and raceways shall be installed as a complete system before the conductors or cables are installed. Cable troughs may be either ventilated or solid and unless otherwise specified, shall be equipped with covers and steel guards to protect against damage. In addition to these provisions, the appropriate standards shall apply, including: a. b. c. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 126-M1980 - Cable Troughs and Fittings. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 79-1978 - Raceways and Fittings. CSA Standard C22.2 No. 62-1972 - Surface Raceways and Fittings.
3.3.4
Labelling The contractor shall label equipment racks, junction boxes etc. The labelling method shall be logical and conform to industry standards. All equipment racks and junction boxes shall be identified with commercially produced or machine printed alpha numeric labels. Hand printed labels are not acceptable. Identification of chassis equipment shall be located in a suitable location within the rack and affixed to the rack, not the chassis.
18
Approved materials used for labels include lamicoyd strip, etched metal, stamped labels, or indelible ink. 3.4 Soldering On solder connections, the insulation on individual wires shall not be stripped back more than 1.5 mm from the solder area. Soldering shall be executed so that positive electrical and strong mechanical connections are assured. Leads shall not be wrapped more than once around the terminal. Soldered connections on the back of connector plugs, i.e. cannon plugs, switches, relay sockets or any other device employing solder lugs, shall be insulated by means of a short length of insulating tubing placed over each wire in the connector. "Cold" solder joints, and excessive solder on connections shall not be acceptable. Each soldered connection shall be tested for mechanical and electrical strength to ensure that a strong connection is achieved. Use of acid based solder flux is not permitted. Where insulation material is subject to heating during soldering, the material shall be undamaged and the fastened parts shall not be loosened. 3.5 Welding All welds shall be free of harmful defects such as cracks, porosity, undercuts, voids and gaps. There shall be no burn through. Weld fillets shall be uniform, smooth, and shall cover a sufficient area of the welded surface to ensure that a solid bond is achieved. Surfaces to be welded shall be free of extraneous particles which may affect the mechanical elements of the welded area.
19
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 3.6 Crimping
Crimp connections shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Industry standards shall be observed at all times. Solid conductors may be used with crimp connections where the use of solid conductor wiring cannot be avoided. In all other cases only stranded wiring shall be used on crimp connections. Solid conductors which are connected to terminals by crimping shall be soldered as well. This provision only applies to terminal lugs. It does not apply where wires may be spliced by crimping except in the case of some LED's and indicator lights which employ pigtail leads which should be soldered or connected by screw terminals. 3.7 Cleaning Upon completion of the installation, the equipment shall be cleaned of smudges, loose or excess solder, weld beads, metal chips, burrs, mold release agents, or any other foreign material which might detract from the intended operation, function, or appearance of the equipment. All corrosive materials shall be removed. The cleaning processes employed shall leave no harmful residues and shall not have a negative effect on the equipment or its parts.
20
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 4.0 4.1 GROUNDING REQUIREMENTS General
Grounding source and distribution points shall be provided by the Crown unless otherwise specified at the bidder's conference, in the Statement of Technical Requirement (STR), or any applicable documents. The grounding shall be such that the signal ground, equipment ground, and electrical power ground shall be connected at one point and shall follow the shortest possible path. Where necessary, ground isolation techniques shall be employed. The path from the tie point to any ground shall be permanent, continuous, have sufficiently low impedance to limit the potential above ground, and facilitate the operation of the over current devices in the circuits. Ground conductors shall be made of copper, sized for a minimum of 200 circular mils for each 300 mm length of conductor. Inactive wires installed in long cable or conduit runs shall be grounded to prevent stray or static electrical discharges, with proper consideration given to prevent ground loops or other grounding problems. Installation must be such that ground loops are prevented. 4.2 Signal Ground Signal grounds shall be used to provide a ground potential reference which is independent of the frame ground and the power equipment ground. An insulated grounding conductor shall be connected from the equipment signal ground terminal to the main ground connection point for single units such as equipment racks. An insulated ground plate shall be used with insulated grounding conductors for multiple units, such as common equipment room (CER) equipment, from each equipment signal ground terminal connected to the plate. The plate shall be connected to the main ground connection point by means of a single insulated grounding conductor.
21
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 4.3 Frame Ground
The ground connection of the receptacle may be used for the frame ground as long as that ground connection is isolated and insulated from the power equipment ground system. Such receptacles shall be clearly identified so that they will not be used to supply equipment that does not require frame grounds. The receptacle ground connection conductor shall be insulated and isolated from the power equipment grounding system, and shall be connected from the receptacle ground connection to an isolated ground plate. The isolated ground plate may be an insulated buss bar for low power applications,. Size of grounding conductors shall be in accordance with the requirements of CSA Standard C22.1 Section 10 and Table 17. 4.4 Combined Signal and Frame Ground Connection between the signal ground terminal and the frame ground terminal shall be part of the equipment wiring. The connection to the main ground connection point shall be similar to that for a frame ground. 4.5 Main Ground Connection Point Main ground connection point shall be installed in accordance with CSA Standard C22.1 Section 10, and C22.2 No. 41. 4.6 Ground to Chassis Ground connections to an electrically conductive chassis or frame shall be made by: a. b. c. soldering to a spot-welded terminal lug. soldering to a portion of the chassis or frame that has been formed into a soldering lug. using a terminal on the ground wire and securing the terminal by a screw, nut and lockwasher.
When using a terminal on a ground wire which is secured by a screw, nut and lockwasher, the screw shall fit in a tapped hole in the chassis or frame, or it shall be held in a through hole by a nut. When the chassis or frame is painted, the metal around the screw hole shall be scraped clean and plated (or tinned) to provide a corrosion resistant connection.
22
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 4.7 Shielding
Shielding on wire and cable shall be grounded to the chassis or frame, in the manner specified in Section 2.5.5 4.8 Lightning Protection All equipment with external cabling including radiating cables or other forms of antennas which may be susceptible during lightning strikes or other static discharges shall be protected fully in accordance with the relevant safety rules and regulations. The ground rod used for lightning protection shall be copper or copper-plated steel, and shall be a minimum of 2.5 metres in length. Where the ground conditions preclude installation of a single ground rod, multiple rods of a shorter length may be used in parallel to provide the lightning protection. The copper ground conductor shall be fastened to the ground rod using a thermic welding technique. Clamps are not acceptable.
23
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 5.0 5.1 ELECTRICAL/MECHANICAL DESIGN REQUIREMENTS Design Considerations
All equipment shall be manufactured and finished with a degree of uniformity and grade of workmanship which shall comply with applicable industry standards, and the generally accepted principles of safe practice. Exposed and moving parts that might constitute a safety hazard shall be provided with protective guards and warning labels. All elements of the equipment shall be designed to operate in a highly reliable fashion, consistent with available technology, with a minimum of system downtime due to scheduled and unscheduled maintenance. Where units or subsystems are integrated into common facilities, no single failure of a component, sub- assembly, assembly, or sub-system shall result in the failure of any other sub-system or reduced capacity or performance of other sub-systems or parts thereof. The system shall be designed such that no failure of a single component, unit, subassembly, or subsystem will result in failure of the system or the next higher hierarchical elements. All equipment shall be designed and installed to provide useful service, with minimal maintenance for a period of no less than 10 years, unless otherwise specified. Tabletop or wall-mount power supplies or transformers shall not be used to power equipment installed within equipment racks and cabinets. Power supplies or transformers used within racks and cabinets shall be securely fastened to the rack equipment rails or side of the cabinet. DIN rail mounted power supplies are preferred. 5.2 Assemblies The contractor (or manufacturing agent) shall apply special considerations in the execution of assembling system component parts. Rack mounted equipment chassis; whose depth from the front face panel to the rear of the chassis exceeds 25 cm shall be equipped with rack slides. Each assembly shall have a permanently fixed label showing the model number, serial number, and power requirements. Materials used in assemblies shall be chosen with due consideration being given to the intended use, safety, durability, retention of appearance, and ability to resist corrosion from a variety of causes including tear gas.
24
In addition to applicable CSC/DES specifications, the appropriate industrial standards shall apply, including: a. b. c. 5.3 EIA-310-D CSA C22.2 No. 94-1976 CSA C22.2 No. 29-M1983 Racks, Panels, and Associated Equipment. Special Purpose Enclosures. Panel boards and Enclosures.
Printed Circuit Board (PCB) PCBs shall be constructed of non-flammable material, preferably a glass epoxy base. The contractor shall provide extractor devices at the front of each card assembly. All cards shall have keyed edges to prevent accidental replacement by another type of card. Each device shall be identified and properly labelled, showing card type, and revision number. All PCBs shall be etched. Wire wrap connections are not acceptable. In addition to the requirements set forth herein the appropriate industrial standards shall apply, including: a. b. c. CSA C22.2 No.154-M1983 Data Processing Equipment. CSA C22.2 No.0.7-M1985 Equipment Electrically Connected to a Telecommunications Network. EIA RS-406/IPC-C-405A General Document for Connectors, Electric, Printed Wiring Boards.
5.4
Components All electrical equipment, i.e. power supplies, amplifiers, etc. attached to the equipment structure shall be fastened securely and rigidly not using nuts and lockwashers. Electrical components used in manufacturing in-house products shall be of commercial quality and shall comply with the standards of the Canadian Electrical Code, Part II. Electronic circuit components, such as resistors, capacitors, inductors, or semiconductor devices which have no applicable standards in the Canadian Electrical Code, Part II shall comply with the test parameters as set forth in CSA C22.2 No. 154-M1983 Part 6.
25
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 6.0 QUALITY ASSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
The contractor shall provide objective evidence that the system and any major component therein have been designed, manufactured, inspected and tested under the umbrella of a quality assurance program capable of meeting the requirements of the applicable ISO Standard 9002 Series. More stringent requirements will be identified on a case by case basis, as needed. In addition, the contractor shall develop a site-acceptance test/inspection procedure to demonstrate that all parameters of the system are fully operational and conform to the Statement of Technical Requirements. 6.1 In-plant Inspection The equipment shall meet all functional, electrical, and visual/mechanical test parameters and shall have been fully tested and inspected by the contractor. Results shall be documented and reported to the Design Authority. Periodic inspections may be done by the Design Authority or his designated representative to verify that the equipment meets all requirements. Particular attention shall be given to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. i. j. k. Inventory of received equipment. Physical condition of equipment i.e.: scratches, dents, paint chips, etc . . . Construction techniques, board and components accessibility. Neatness, clamping and tying of wiring, cabling and harnesses. Strain relief of cables and wire connections. Legibility of nameplates, identification plates, and markings. Safety and protective covers, warning labels and grounding. Tightness of connectors, screw type fasteners, etc. Soldered and weld joints. Completeness. Operation of drawers, adjustable and sliding parts, controls etc.
26
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work l. m. n. o. p. Shielding. Cable and wire connections, ground clamps and terminal strips. Type and quality of paint finish.
Quality of printed circuitry, etching, the electronic components and other associated parts. Quality of locks, cabinets and other materials.
It must be noted that the in-plant tests are performed as a requirement of the financial arrangements and serve to guarantee that the design parameters of the FDR are followed and will meet the requirements of the applicable system specification. Sign-off of in-plant tests will not denote any form of final acceptance of the equipment and design. 6.2 Test Equipment All test equipment shall be supplied by the contractor. All instruments and test equipment shall be checked periodically by the QA Inspector in order to ensure accuracy of measurement. Records showing when the test equipment was last calibrated are to be provided as proof of accuracy. 6.3 Calibration All test equipment used by the contractor shall bear a calibration seal showing the date calibrated and the due date for the next calibration. The contractor shall ensure that the test equipment's calibration due date does not occur during the test period. All equipment performance measurements shall be made with instruments whose accuracy and calibration guarantee that the results comply with the terms of the contract. CSC reserves the right to furnish and/or require the use of any applicable instruments and standards in order to ascertain the accuracy of any measurements. Test equipment suspected of being damaged or out of calibration shall be rejected by the Design Authority.
27
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 6.4 Safety Design Aspects
Particular attention is to be given to the safety design aspects of CSC installations, so as to minimize any hazards while in gaining access to, operating and servicing equipment. Such design aspects shall include the proper grounding of equipment, the installation of protective covers and warning labels over high voltage areas, the installation of warning labels on x-ray equipment, etc. Radio and TV camera towers must receive careful attention in regards to make them accessible for servicing, especially during inclement weather.
28
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 7.0 7.1 ON-SITE INSTALLATION Inspections
Inspections will be performed by the Design Authority or their designated representative. A thorough visual and mechanical inspection of the installation shall be performed to ensure that all applicable requirements and safety precautions have been met. 7.2 Damage to Government Property Damage to Government property, including buildings, equipment, etc. during the course of the installation shall be made good by the contractor. The contractor shall replace all equipment which has suffered major damage, i.e. damage which renders the equipment BER, unserviceable, or subject to deterioration. If stocks of the applicable equipment are at such a level that replacement of the damaged items cannot be made, and the contractor cannot readily obtain new equipment in order to allow the installation to proceed without delay, the contractor shall: a. repair the damage immediately with available materials.
b. return to the site and replace the equipment as soon as new equipment is procured. Minor damage shall be repaired in a manner which leaves the government property in a condition equivalent to its original state and performing the original function, with no deterioration in appearance, performance, and/or reliability. Any equipment where the paint finish becomes scratched or marred during the installation shall be completely refinished and repainted consistent with the appearance of new equipment. Equipment shall neither be exposed to rain, nor be left out-of-doors during inclement weather. This stipulation does not apply to construction materials. 7.3 Protection of Surfaces The contractor shall obtain approval from the appropriate Institution authority before moving heavy loads or equipment on floors, roofs and other surfaces. The contractor shall adequately protect floors, finished surfaces and roofs from damage during the installation and shall implement special measures when moving heavy loads or equipment on them.
29
The contractor shall keep the floors free of oils, grease, or other materials likely to damage or discolour them. The contractor shall provide dust protection for the equipment during the installation period, as related construction activities may occur simultaneously. 7.4 Cutting, Patching and Digging The contractor shall perform all cutting, patching or digging necessary for the installation of the system. The contractor shall be responsible for changes or damage to any existing work, cables or equipment by cutting, welding, drilling, or digging without prior consent from the Design Authority. The contractor shall promptly repair any damage for which he is responsible in order to restore the facilities to their original condition. 7.5 Visual-Mechanical Inspection Inspection shall be performed by the Design Authority or his designated representative. Prior to the commencement of performance and operational testing, the installation shall be inspected to ensure that all applicable requirements and standards have been met. Particular attention shall be given to the following: a. b. c. d. e. f. g. h. Physical condition and positioning of equipment. Neatness, clamping and tying of wire and cable harnesses. Cable and wire connections, ground clamps, and terminal strips. Soldered and welded joints. Strain relief of cables, wire connections, and cable harnesses. Cleanliness of equipment boxes under computer flooring. Nameplates, identification methodology and markings. Operation of drawers, adjustable and sliding parts and controls.
30
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work i. j. k. l. m. n. o. p. q. r. s. 7.6 Equipment fit, fastening devices and accessibility of parts. Construction and finishes. Legibility of labels and tags.
Safety aspects, including secure provisions for climbing and working on towers. Shielding. Grounding. Equipment Cooling Provisions. Washers and lock-washers. Tightness of screw type fasteners & connectors. Screws, nuts and bolts shall show no evidence of cross-threading or mutilation. Bottom of equipment racks etc. shall be free of debris and loose parts.
Final System Acceptance The system shall be accepted when all of the following items have been completed to the satisfaction of the Design Authority and with the written certification of the project manager: a. b. c. d. performance and operational tests. all documentation. all training. all other terms and conditions.
The system warranty shall be deemed to begin at the completion of the Final System Acceptance or when the system is taken into service with accepted deficiencies, whichever comes first.
31
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 7.7 On-Site Maintenance
Building and site maintenance shall be interpreted to include all the areas in which the contractor is carrying out installation activities. All sites and buildings shall be maintained by the contractor in a clean and tidy condition. Upon completion of each day's work, all areas such as hallways, stairways, elevators and storage rooms used by the contractor in delivering or storing equipment shall be left in a clean and tidy condition. The contractor shall store all electronic components not yet installed in a lockable storage room/trailer at the end of each workday. This procedure will reduce the probability of damaged and/or stolen equipment prior to system acceptance. Prior to the commencement of performance and operational testing, the installation shall be inspected to ensure that all applicable requirements and standards have been met.
32
Electronics Systems Electronic Engineering Statement of Work 8.0 8.1 DELIVERY Packaging
All equipment shall be packaged to ensure that the equipment will not be damaged during shipment and/or delivery to the institution, as well as any associated handling on site. Fragile components must be clearly identified and labelled. All circuit cards, equipment modules, etc. shall be protected by the original packaging material until the equipment is placed into service.
- END OF TEXT -
33

MH Specs

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MH Specs

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

MILLHAVEN INSTITUTION MAXIMUM SECURITY CELL UNIT

Bid Set No.

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

SPECIFICATION TITLE SHEET

Section 00 00 00 Page 1 2011-06-10

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit

Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 1 2011-06-10

Division 02 - Existing Conditions 02 41 23 SELECTIVE SITE DEMOLITION

Division 04 - Masonry 04 20 00 UNIT MASONRY

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit

Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 2 2011-06-10

Division 06 - Wood, Plastics, and Composites CARPENTRY 06 10 12 ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK 06 40 01

Division 10 - Specialties 10 28 00 MANUFACTURED SPECIALTIES TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10 28 10

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit

Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 3 2011-06-10

Division 13 - Special Construction 13 26 01 PREFABRICATED SECURITY COMPONENTS 9

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit

Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 4 2011-06-10 5 5 5 7 3 2 4 6 4 2 2 4 3 3 5 2 3 3 4 3 6 3 10 7 5 3

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit

Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 5 2011-06-10

43.01 80 81 23.01 24 16.01 05 16.01 19 26 13.01 16.02 23 01 23 10 53 13 00 01 00

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit

Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 6 2011-06-10

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit

Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 11 Page 7 2011-06-10

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 15 Page 1 2011-06-10

PART 1 - LIST OF DRAWINGS

.7 .8 .9 .10 .11 .12 .13

.14 .15 .16

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 15 Page 2 2011-06-10

1.1 ARCHITECTURE (Cont'd)

.23 .24 .25

.29 .30 .31

.32 .33 .34 .35

.36 .37 .38 .39

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 15 Page 3 2011-06-10

.43 (Cont'd) .44

C1.1 - Site Grading Plan C1.2 - Site Servicing Plan

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 15 Page 4 2011-06-10

1.4 MECHANICAL (Cont'd)

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 00 01 15 Page 5 2011-06-10

1.6 BUILDING SECURITY & COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001

Section 01 11 00 Page 1 2011-06-10

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

1.3 RELATED SECTIONS

Section 01 33 00 - Submittal Procedures.

1.4 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Construct Work under a single, stipulated price contract.

96 Bed Maximum Living Unit Millhaven Institution Project No. R45116.001